<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<rss version="2.0" xmlns:itunes="http://www.itunes.com/dtds/podcast-1.0.dtd" xmlns:googleplay="http://www.google.com/schemas/play-podcasts/1.0" xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/" xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/">
  <channel>
    <atom:link href="https://feeds.megaphone.fm/thestrategyhour" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml"/>
    <title>Strategy Hour | Online Marketing for Business Growth</title>
    <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast</link>
    <language>en</language>
    <copyright>Think Creative Collective, LLC © 2025 - The Strategy Hour Podcast</copyright>
    <description>Listen to our show as host Abagail Pumphrey, CEO of Boss Project, shares proven business strategies, expert interviews, and no-fluff advice for growing an online business—your way.

With millions of downloads and recognition from INC &amp; Forbes as one of the best podcasts for entrepreneurs, this podcast is a must-listen for small business owners, service providers, course creators, and digital product sellers ready to take their business to the next level.

Discover how to:

✔ Launch digital products &amp; online courses that convert

✔ Build a profitable email list that drives daily sales

✔ Create simple, effective sales funnels &amp; automations that sell for you

✔ Design sustainable marketing systems that actually work—without burnout

No gimmicks. No outdated tactics. Just real strategies that help you create more income and impact.

📌 Grab free resources &amp; show notes at bossproject.com/podcast</description>
    <image>
      <url>https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2198cf6c-ae9a-11ec-82b5-7b6faa82e6b8/image/ecf6c0e0b36df1c19b43ca89e91841ab.jpg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress</url>
      <title>Strategy Hour | Online Marketing for Business Growth</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast</link>
    </image>
    <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
    <itunes:type>episodic</itunes:type>
    <itunes:subtitle>Proven business strategies, expert interviews, and no-fluff advice for growing an online business—your way</itunes:subtitle>
    <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
    <itunes:summary>Listen to our show as host Abagail Pumphrey, CEO of Boss Project, shares proven business strategies, expert interviews, and no-fluff advice for growing an online business—your way.

With millions of downloads and recognition from INC &amp; Forbes as one of the best podcasts for entrepreneurs, this podcast is a must-listen for small business owners, service providers, course creators, and digital product sellers ready to take their business to the next level.

Discover how to:

✔ Launch digital products &amp; online courses that convert

✔ Build a profitable email list that drives daily sales

✔ Create simple, effective sales funnels &amp; automations that sell for you

✔ Design sustainable marketing systems that actually work—without burnout

No gimmicks. No outdated tactics. Just real strategies that help you create more income and impact.

📌 Grab free resources &amp; show notes at bossproject.com/podcast</itunes:summary>
    <content:encoded>
      <![CDATA[<p>Listen to our show as host Abagail Pumphrey, CEO of Boss Project, shares proven business strategies, expert interviews, and no-fluff advice for growing an online business—your way.</p>
<p>With millions of downloads and recognition from INC &amp; Forbes as one of the best podcasts for entrepreneurs, this podcast is a must-listen for small business owners, service providers, course creators, and digital product sellers ready to take their business to the next level.</p>
<p>Discover how to:</p>
<p>✔ Launch digital products &amp; online courses that convert</p>
<p>✔ Build a profitable email list that drives daily sales</p>
<p>✔ Create simple, effective sales funnels &amp; automations that sell for you</p>
<p>✔ Design sustainable marketing systems that actually work—without burnout</p>
<p>No gimmicks. No outdated tactics. Just real strategies that help you create more income and impact.</p>
<p>📌 Grab free resources &amp; show notes at <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a></p>]]>
    </content:encoded>
    <itunes:owner>
      <itunes:name>Abagail Pumphrey</itunes:name>
      <itunes:email>hello@bossproject.com</itunes:email>
    </itunes:owner>
    <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2198cf6c-ae9a-11ec-82b5-7b6faa82e6b8/image/ecf6c0e0b36df1c19b43ca89e91841ab.jpg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
    <itunes:category text="Business">
      <itunes:category text="Marketing"/>
      <itunes:category text="Entrepreneurship"/>
      <itunes:category text="Management"/>
    </itunes:category>
    <itunes:new-feed-url>https://feeds.megaphone.fm/thestrategyhour</itunes:new-feed-url>
    <item>
      <title>1000: The End of a Chapter, Not the End of the Story</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-end-of-a-chapter</link>
      <description>Dear listener, we have hit 1000 episodes! I don’t think I ever imagined saying that out loud! But somewhere along the way, this little show became a thread that wove through nearly every season of my life and every version of my business. And before I step away, I want to write you a letter.  

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 

Episode Highlights 


  The 1000 Episode-Long Era. [0:00:35] 

  What’s Next? [0:3:27] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 20 Nov 2025 06:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The End of a Chapter, Not the End of the Story</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>1000</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3c39b712-c405-11f0-b02e-fbe27b70e739/image/5a9f745939a4f6ae00d107fd447b0fc5.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We have hit 1000 episodes! I don’t think I ever imagined saying that out loud! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Dear listener, we have hit 1000 episodes! I don’t think I ever imagined saying that out loud! But somewhere along the way, this little show became a thread that wove through nearly every season of my life and every version of my business. And before I step away, I want to write you a letter.  

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 

Episode Highlights 


  The 1000 Episode-Long Era. [0:00:35] 

  What’s Next? [0:3:27] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Dear listener, we have hit 1000 episodes! I don’t think I ever imagined saying that out loud! But somewhere along the way, this little show became a thread that wove through nearly every season of my life and every version of my business. And before I step away, I want to write you a letter.  </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>The 1000 Episode-Long Era. [0:00:35] </li>
  <li>What’s Next? [0:3:27] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong> ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a><strong> </strong></p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>646</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3c39b712-c405-11f0-b02e-fbe27b70e739]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6885817976.mp3?updated=1763419770" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>999: What’s Next for Me (And Maybe, for You Too)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/whats-next-for-me-and-maybe-you-too</link>
      <description>I’ve recorded nearly a thousand episodes of this show, and yet this one has been one of the hardest to sit down and share. Over the past few months, life has forced me to slow down through surgery, recovery, and a lot of unexpected stillness. And in that quiet, I’ve had to ask some uncomfortable questions about what really matters, where I want to spend my time, and what’s sustainable for me right now. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

This isn’t about the business. Profit is up, things are running smoothly, and I’m proud of what we’ve built. It’s about the podcast. And it’s about giving myself permission to pause. After eight years and nearly a thousand episodes, I know it’s time to take a break, even if I don’t know exactly what’s next. Things are going to look a little different for a while, and honestly, I’m okay with that. I don’t have to have it all figured out, and neither do you! So, let’s take a breath together and step into whatever’s next. 

Episode Highlights 


  Evolving After 1,000 Episodes [0:03:50]  

  Learning to Be Okay with Not Knowing [0:06:43] 

  Trusting What You’ve Built (and What’s Still to Come) [0:12:25] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 18 Nov 2025 06:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What’s Next for Me (And Maybe, for You Too)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>999</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/1af41548-c405-11f0-b02e-0f615653a83e/image/49e430c6efea18bf496a1fd191463304.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Over the past few months, life has forced me to slow down through surgery, recovery, and a lot of unexpected stillness. And in that quiet, I’ve had to ask some uncomfortable questions about what really matters.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’ve recorded nearly a thousand episodes of this show, and yet this one has been one of the hardest to sit down and share. Over the past few months, life has forced me to slow down through surgery, recovery, and a lot of unexpected stillness. And in that quiet, I’ve had to ask some uncomfortable questions about what really matters, where I want to spend my time, and what’s sustainable for me right now. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

This isn’t about the business. Profit is up, things are running smoothly, and I’m proud of what we’ve built. It’s about the podcast. And it’s about giving myself permission to pause. After eight years and nearly a thousand episodes, I know it’s time to take a break, even if I don’t know exactly what’s next. Things are going to look a little different for a while, and honestly, I’m okay with that. I don’t have to have it all figured out, and neither do you! So, let’s take a breath together and step into whatever’s next. 

Episode Highlights 


  Evolving After 1,000 Episodes [0:03:50]  

  Learning to Be Okay with Not Knowing [0:06:43] 

  Trusting What You’ve Built (and What’s Still to Come) [0:12:25] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’ve recorded nearly a thousand episodes of this show, and yet this one has been one of the hardest to sit down and share. Over the past few months, life has forced me to slow down through surgery, recovery, and a lot of unexpected stillness. And in that quiet, I’ve had to ask some uncomfortable questions about what really matters, where I want to spend my time, and what’s sustainable for me right now. </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p>This isn’t about the business. Profit is up, things are running smoothly, and I’m proud of what we’ve built. It’s about the podcast. And it’s about giving myself permission to pause. After eight years and nearly a thousand episodes, I know it’s time to take a break, even if I don’t know exactly what’s next. Things are going to look a little different for a while, and honestly, I’m okay with that. I don’t have to have it all figured out, and neither do you! So, let’s take a breath together and step into whatever’s next. </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Evolving After 1,000 Episodes [0:03:50]  </li>
  <li>Learning to Be Okay with Not Knowing [0:06:43] </li>
  <li>Trusting What You’ve Built (and What’s Still to Come) [0:12:25] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong> ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a><strong> </strong><br>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1284</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1af41548-c405-11f0-b02e-0f615653a83e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE2272144339.mp3?updated=1763419614" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>998: When What Used to Matter… Doesn’t Anymore</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/when-what-used-to-matter-does-not-anymore</link>
      <description>I used to think values were something you discovered once and then lived by forever, like a moral compass that stayed fixed. But I’m starting to wonder if they’re more like constellations. They shift a little as you move through different seasons of life. For a long time, I treated my values like a checklist: family, creativity, freedom. Those were the things that mattered. But when they stopped feeling aligned, I felt completely disoriented. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

It wasn’t that my morals changed. Rather, it was that my priorities matured. And while that process can feel confusing and uncomfortable, it can also make space for who you’re becoming. Sometimes the same value takes a new shape. For instance, freedom might look less like flexibility and more like emotional peace. Today, I’m sharing what it felt like to go through that shift, what helped me slow down and listen, and how I began to see my values in a new light.

Episode Highlights 


  The Trip That Changed Everything [0:04:22]  

  Learning to Live in the Liminal Space [0:06:23] 

  Finding Alignment [0:11:56] 

  Slowing Down to See What’s Next [0:16:25] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 11 Nov 2025 13:57:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>When What Used to Matter… Doesn’t Anymore</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>997</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/5cde89ec-bf06-11f0-91bf-f3f04ed8c78f/image/d8ee106c5f1bc86ceb8ab41e5899a39a.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>I used to think values were something you discovered once and then lived by forever, like a moral compass that stayed fixed. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I used to think values were something you discovered once and then lived by forever, like a moral compass that stayed fixed. But I’m starting to wonder if they’re more like constellations. They shift a little as you move through different seasons of life. For a long time, I treated my values like a checklist: family, creativity, freedom. Those were the things that mattered. But when they stopped feeling aligned, I felt completely disoriented. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

It wasn’t that my morals changed. Rather, it was that my priorities matured. And while that process can feel confusing and uncomfortable, it can also make space for who you’re becoming. Sometimes the same value takes a new shape. For instance, freedom might look less like flexibility and more like emotional peace. Today, I’m sharing what it felt like to go through that shift, what helped me slow down and listen, and how I began to see my values in a new light.

Episode Highlights 


  The Trip That Changed Everything [0:04:22]  

  Learning to Live in the Liminal Space [0:06:23] 

  Finding Alignment [0:11:56] 

  Slowing Down to See What’s Next [0:16:25] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I used to think values were something you discovered once and then lived by forever, like a moral compass that stayed fixed. But I’m starting to wonder if they’re more like constellations. They shift a little as you move through different seasons of life. For a long time, I treated my values like a checklist: family, creativity, freedom. Those were the things that mattered. But when they stopped feeling aligned, I felt completely disoriented. </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p>It wasn’t that my morals changed. Rather, it was that my priorities matured. And while that process can feel confusing and uncomfortable, it can also make space for who you’re becoming. Sometimes the same value takes a new shape. For instance, freedom might look less like flexibility and more like emotional peace. Today, I’m sharing what it felt like to go through that shift, what helped me slow down and listen, and how I began to see my values in a new light.</p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>The Trip That Changed Everything [0:04:22]  </li>
  <li>Learning to Live in the Liminal Space [0:06:23] </li>
  <li>Finding Alignment [0:11:56] </li>
  <li>Slowing Down to See What’s Next [0:16:25] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong> ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a><strong> </strong></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1500</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5cde89ec-bf06-11f0-91bf-f3f04ed8c78f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1417143895.mp3?updated=1762869896" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>997: How My Definition of “Enough” Has Changed</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-seasons-of-business-matter</link>
      <description>We all want to feel fulfilled, satisfied, and ‘enough!’ I think, ultimately, when we’re searching for ‘enough,’ we’re searching for satisfaction. I want you to know that your feeling enough will never just be satisfied by numbers on a page or by a certain amount of money. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

I used to think that satisfaction meant making a certain amount of money and being secure in my income. But then I realized that I wasn’t actually satisfied, and I didn’t feel whole. I had been focused on what everyone else needed for so long, and it wasn’t until this summer that I felt like I could focus on myself again. So how has my definition of ‘enough’ changed?  

Episode Highlights 


  What Does it Mean to Be Satisfied? [0:03:31]  

  The Importance of Love and Belonging [0:12:58] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 04 Nov 2025 13:32:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How My Definition of “Enough” Has Changed</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>997</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c7225dc6-b982-11f0-98cf-1ffb6d4bc9df/image/48a6dff53b81d7f5254f2140bef6c492.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We all want to feel fulfilled, satisfied, and ‘enough!’ When we’re searching for ‘enough,’ we’re searching for satisfaction. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We all want to feel fulfilled, satisfied, and ‘enough!’ I think, ultimately, when we’re searching for ‘enough,’ we’re searching for satisfaction. I want you to know that your feeling enough will never just be satisfied by numbers on a page or by a certain amount of money. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

I used to think that satisfaction meant making a certain amount of money and being secure in my income. But then I realized that I wasn’t actually satisfied, and I didn’t feel whole. I had been focused on what everyone else needed for so long, and it wasn’t until this summer that I felt like I could focus on myself again. So how has my definition of ‘enough’ changed?  

Episode Highlights 


  What Does it Mean to Be Satisfied? [0:03:31]  

  The Importance of Love and Belonging [0:12:58] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We all want to feel fulfilled, satisfied, and ‘enough!’ I think, ultimately, when we’re searching for ‘enough,’ we’re searching for satisfaction. I want you to know that your feeling enough will never just be satisfied by numbers on a page or by a certain amount of money. </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p>I used to think that satisfaction meant making a certain amount of money and being secure in my income. But then I realized that I wasn’t actually satisfied, and I didn’t feel whole. I had been focused on what everyone else needed for so long, and it wasn’t until this summer that I felt like I could focus on myself again. So how has my definition of ‘enough’ changed?  </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>What Does it Mean to Be Satisfied? [0:03:31]  </li>
  <li>The Importance of Love and Belonging [0:12:58] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong> ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a><strong> </strong></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1983</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c7225dc6-b982-11f0-98cf-1ffb6d4bc9df]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE7662603221.mp3?updated=1762264311" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>996: How to Know When It’s Time for Experimentation &amp; Reinvention </title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-know-when-its-time-for-experimentation-and-reinvention</link>
      <description>Sometimes the business that got you here can’t take you where you want to go! Today, we are talking about when it’s time for experimentation and reinvention. This is not so much about how much energy you have to give and more about when you know that change is vital. Yes, it’s scary to make changes, but sometimes leaning into that discomfort helps you reinvent yourself and your business.

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

It’s easy to get a false sense of security around what worked before, but that can quietly become a cage that prevents you from considering other options. I’m curious, what are you maintaining because it feels safer, not because it’s still working? 

Episode Highlights 


  Signs That It’s Time to Experiment [0:08:31]  

  Reinventing Strategically [0:12:27] 

  The Power of Debriefs [0:16:01] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 28 Oct 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Know When It’s Time for Experimentation &amp; Reinvention </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>996</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ffdbe4ea-b37c-11f0-a159-5f9cbdc2694b/image/7a7b790e6c1812cbb25a63b082a4a3b5.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Sometimes the business that got you here can’t take you where you want to go!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Sometimes the business that got you here can’t take you where you want to go! Today, we are talking about when it’s time for experimentation and reinvention. This is not so much about how much energy you have to give and more about when you know that change is vital. Yes, it’s scary to make changes, but sometimes leaning into that discomfort helps you reinvent yourself and your business.

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

It’s easy to get a false sense of security around what worked before, but that can quietly become a cage that prevents you from considering other options. I’m curious, what are you maintaining because it feels safer, not because it’s still working? 

Episode Highlights 


  Signs That It’s Time to Experiment [0:08:31]  

  Reinventing Strategically [0:12:27] 

  The Power of Debriefs [0:16:01] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Sometimes the business that got you here can’t take you where you want to go! Today, we are talking about when it’s time for experimentation and reinvention. This is not so much about how much energy you have to give and more about when you know that change is vital. Yes, it’s scary to make changes, but sometimes leaning into that discomfort helps you reinvent yourself and your business.</p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p>It’s easy to get a false sense of security around what worked before, but that can quietly become a cage that prevents you from considering other options. I’m curious, what are you maintaining because it feels safer, not because it’s still working? </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Signs That It’s Time to Experiment [0:08:31]  </li>
  <li>Reinventing Strategically [0:12:27] </li>
  <li>The Power of Debriefs [0:16:01] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong> ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a><strong> </strong></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1425</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ffdbe4ea-b37c-11f0-a159-5f9cbdc2694b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5639632773.mp3?updated=1761601681" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>995: Why Seasons of Business Matter (And How to Recognize Yours) </title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-seasons-of-business-matter</link>
      <description>Have you ever looked at someone else’s business and thought, ‘Why does everything seem to be working out for them?’ Well, you’re not alone. We need to normalize this: not everyone is going to be going through the same season of business at the same time. I’d love to tell you it was predictable, and we could all match our energy to the seasons of the year, but that’s just not necessarily how life works. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

We have to be mindful of where we’re at, where we’re going, and what we can give in each season. By the end of this episode, you’re going to be able to recognize the season that you’re in, and I’m going to give you permission to be in it instead of fighting against it! I’m going to help you make some smarter operational decisions because of it, so I hope you’re ready.  

Episode Highlights 


  Why It’s So Important to Understand That Your Business Has Seasons [0:01:46]  

  What Each of the Four Business Seasons Actually Involve [0:02:46] 

  How You Can Use Slowing Down as a Strategy [0:05:36] 

  The One Thing You Need to Be Mindful of Through Every Season [0:14:23] 

  What You Should Reflect on During This Season [0:14:23] 

  A Path Forward: What You Can Do Next [0:26:51] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 21 Oct 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why Seasons of Business Matter (And How to Recognize Yours) </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>995</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2ff4ce72-adf5-11f0-a618-eb63df67961b/image/eb2d87750c6681b43c679c9a532d64e5.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We need to normalize this: not everyone is going to be going through the same season of business at the same time.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you ever looked at someone else’s business and thought, ‘Why does everything seem to be working out for them?’ Well, you’re not alone. We need to normalize this: not everyone is going to be going through the same season of business at the same time. I’d love to tell you it was predictable, and we could all match our energy to the seasons of the year, but that’s just not necessarily how life works. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

We have to be mindful of where we’re at, where we’re going, and what we can give in each season. By the end of this episode, you’re going to be able to recognize the season that you’re in, and I’m going to give you permission to be in it instead of fighting against it! I’m going to help you make some smarter operational decisions because of it, so I hope you’re ready.  

Episode Highlights 


  Why It’s So Important to Understand That Your Business Has Seasons [0:01:46]  

  What Each of the Four Business Seasons Actually Involve [0:02:46] 

  How You Can Use Slowing Down as a Strategy [0:05:36] 

  The One Thing You Need to Be Mindful of Through Every Season [0:14:23] 

  What You Should Reflect on During This Season [0:14:23] 

  A Path Forward: What You Can Do Next [0:26:51] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you ever looked at someone else’s business and thought, ‘Why does everything seem to be working out for them?’ Well, you’re not alone. We need to normalize this: not everyone is going to be going through the same season of business at the same time. I’d love to tell you it was predictable, and we could all match our energy to the seasons of the year, but that’s just not necessarily how life works. </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p>We have to be mindful of where we’re at, where we’re going, and what we can give in each season. By the end of this episode, you’re going to be able to recognize the season that you’re in, and I’m going to give you permission to be in it instead of fighting against it! I’m going to help you make some smarter operational decisions because of it, so I hope you’re ready.  </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Why It’s So Important to Understand That Your Business Has Seasons [0:01:46]  </li>
  <li>What Each of the Four Business Seasons Actually Involve [0:02:46] </li>
  <li>How You Can Use Slowing Down as a Strategy [0:05:36] </li>
  <li>The One Thing You Need to Be Mindful of Through Every Season [0:14:23] </li>
  <li>What You Should Reflect on During This Season [0:14:23] </li>
  <li>A Path Forward: What You Can Do Next [0:26:51] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong> ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a><strong> </strong></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1928</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2ff4ce72-adf5-11f0-a618-eb63df67961b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1155483406.mp3?updated=1760994203" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>994: What Most People Get Wrong About Success</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-most-people-get-wrong-about-success </link>
      <description>Have you ever hit a milestone you worked your entire life for only to feel absolutely nothing? We often spend so much of our time and attention focused on our future selves that we forget how to live in the present. But it’s not your fault! We were handed this invisible checklist when we were all kids. We’re supposed to get a good education and a good job, buy that house, get married, have those kids, and live that dream life.

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

We all thought we would feel a certain way if we did what society said would make us successful. But none of these things actually change who we are. It doesn’t change the emotions we experience in the moment. It just makes us compare ourselves to this inconceivable, impossible representation of what success looks like.   

Episode Highlights 


  The One Thing I’m Learning About Success and Life Right Now [0:05:29]  

  What I Learned When I Finally Slowed Down [0:13:21] 

  How We Lose Ourselves Trying to Follow Someone Else’s Path [0:20:48] 

  Why Success Isn’t Going to Make You Feel Safe [0:22:41] What It Might Look 

  Like to Put Yourself Out There In New Ways [0:26:27]


We’ve created a culture in which we are rewarding the outcome, not the effort. You have to beat yourself at your own game and outdo yourself every time. But eventually, outdoing yourself becomes impossible. Even if you’re not playing the comparison game and you’re only focused on you, how can you continuously do better than yourself all the time? 

Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Oct 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Most People Get Wrong About Success</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>994</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/5bf6e092-aa2a-11f0-a986-1fea27da81c9/image/b1ade0ea4a7846a344752b7ecbbb3d5b.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We often spend so much of our time and attention focused on our future selves that we forget how to live in the present. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you ever hit a milestone you worked your entire life for only to feel absolutely nothing? We often spend so much of our time and attention focused on our future selves that we forget how to live in the present. But it’s not your fault! We were handed this invisible checklist when we were all kids. We’re supposed to get a good education and a good job, buy that house, get married, have those kids, and live that dream life.

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

We all thought we would feel a certain way if we did what society said would make us successful. But none of these things actually change who we are. It doesn’t change the emotions we experience in the moment. It just makes us compare ourselves to this inconceivable, impossible representation of what success looks like.   

Episode Highlights 


  The One Thing I’m Learning About Success and Life Right Now [0:05:29]  

  What I Learned When I Finally Slowed Down [0:13:21] 

  How We Lose Ourselves Trying to Follow Someone Else’s Path [0:20:48] 

  Why Success Isn’t Going to Make You Feel Safe [0:22:41] What It Might Look 

  Like to Put Yourself Out There In New Ways [0:26:27]


We’ve created a culture in which we are rewarding the outcome, not the effort. You have to beat yourself at your own game and outdo yourself every time. But eventually, outdoing yourself becomes impossible. Even if you’re not playing the comparison game and you’re only focused on you, how can you continuously do better than yourself all the time? 

Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you ever hit a milestone you worked your entire life for only to feel absolutely nothing? We often spend so much of our time and attention focused on our future selves that we forget how to live in the present. But it’s not your fault! We were handed this invisible checklist when we were all kids. We’re supposed to get a good education and a good job, buy that house, get married, have those kids, and live that dream life.</p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p>We all thought we would feel a certain way if we did what society said would make us successful. But none of these things actually change who we are. It doesn’t change the emotions we experience in the moment. It just makes us compare ourselves to this inconceivable, impossible representation of what success looks like.   </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>The One Thing I’m Learning About Success and Life Right Now [0:05:29]  </li>
  <li>What I Learned When I Finally Slowed Down [0:13:21] </li>
  <li>How We Lose Ourselves Trying to Follow Someone Else’s Path [0:20:48] </li>
  <li>Why Success Isn’t Going to Make You Feel Safe [0:22:41] What It Might Look </li>
  <li>Like to Put Yourself Out There In New Ways [0:26:27]</li>
</ul>
<p>We’ve created a culture in which we are rewarding the outcome, not the effort. You have to beat yourself at your own game and outdo yourself every time. But eventually, outdoing yourself becomes impossible. Even if you’re not playing the comparison game and you’re only focused on you, how can you continuously do better than yourself all the time? </p>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong> ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a><strong> </strong><br>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2287</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5bf6e092-aa2a-11f0-a986-1fea27da81c9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1021975713.mp3?updated=1760577080" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>993: Breaking Free From Your Addiction to Cortisol</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/breaking-free-from-your-addiction-to-cortisol</link>
      <description>You know you’re in danger when rest feels more dangerous than your to-do list. If you’ve ever bragged about being overwhelmed, lack of sleep, or saying yes to something you don’t want to do just to feel ‘needed’, you might be a stress junkie, and your body is paying the price! Cortisol addiction is a clinically observed pattern. When you’re stressed, your body pumps out cortisol and triggers a part of your fight, flight, freeze, or fawn response; your survival mechanism. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

Over time, these stress-related behaviors can become compulsive, and when stress becomes constant, your body keeps producing cortisol when there is no real danger, which has serious long-term effects on your health. Today, we’re going to unpack why you might be addicted to stress hormones and why you can’t quit. 

Episode Highlights 


  Signs That You’re Addicted to Cortisol [0:04:57]  

  Why You Get Addicted to Stress [0:07:20] 

  How to Break the Cycle [0:08:09] 

  The Power of CBT and DBT [0:17:00] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 07 Oct 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Breaking Free From Your Addiction to Cortisol</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>993</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2858ab7e-a2fc-11f0-83bc-277b2b9ee58b/image/6d5ce6268cbb346e00382c6f3b859f78.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>You know you’re in danger when rest feels more dangerous than your to-do list. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You know you’re in danger when rest feels more dangerous than your to-do list. If you’ve ever bragged about being overwhelmed, lack of sleep, or saying yes to something you don’t want to do just to feel ‘needed’, you might be a stress junkie, and your body is paying the price! Cortisol addiction is a clinically observed pattern. When you’re stressed, your body pumps out cortisol and triggers a part of your fight, flight, freeze, or fawn response; your survival mechanism. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

Over time, these stress-related behaviors can become compulsive, and when stress becomes constant, your body keeps producing cortisol when there is no real danger, which has serious long-term effects on your health. Today, we’re going to unpack why you might be addicted to stress hormones and why you can’t quit. 

Episode Highlights 


  Signs That You’re Addicted to Cortisol [0:04:57]  

  Why You Get Addicted to Stress [0:07:20] 

  How to Break the Cycle [0:08:09] 

  The Power of CBT and DBT [0:17:00] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You know you’re in danger when rest feels more dangerous than your to-do list. If you’ve ever bragged about being overwhelmed, lack of sleep, or saying yes to something you don’t want to do just to feel ‘needed’, you might be a stress junkie, and your body is paying the price! Cortisol addiction is a clinically observed pattern. When you’re stressed, your body pumps out cortisol and triggers a part of your fight, flight, freeze, or fawn response; your survival mechanism. </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p>Over time, these stress-related behaviors can become compulsive, and when stress becomes constant, your body keeps producing cortisol when there is no real danger, which has serious long-term effects on your health. Today, we’re going to unpack why you might be addicted to stress hormones and why you can’t quit. </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Signs That You’re Addicted to Cortisol [0:04:57]  </li>
  <li>Why You Get Addicted to Stress [0:07:20] </li>
  <li>How to Break the Cycle [0:08:09] </li>
  <li>The Power of CBT and DBT [0:17:00] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong> ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a><strong> </strong></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1647</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2858ab7e-a2fc-11f0-83bc-277b2b9ee58b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE9285727003.mp3?updated=1759787187" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>992: Prioritizing Your Life When Shit Hits the Fan [FAN FAVORITE]</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/fan-favorite-prioritizing-life-when-shit-hits-the-fan</link>
      <description>Life doesn’t wait for you to have it all figured out. When unexpected challenges hit, your business needs to be ready to withstand the storm. In this fan favorite episode, Abagail shares how to build a sustainable business that can function without you at the center, why learning to ask for help is key, and what shifts you need to make so your work supports your life—not the other way around.

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

Episode Highlights


  
Learning How to Ask for Help. [0:18:23]



  
Imagining a Business That Can Run Without You. [0:30:03]



  
The Very First Thing You Need to Do. [0:34:40]




Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 02 Oct 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Prioritizing Your Life When Shit Hits the Fan [FAN FAVORITE]</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>992</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/9ccc3a18-9ef9-11f0-95e9-13bcc550ccea/image/35d81d4a89a0b3c30f291595cd65d14b.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Building a Business That Survives Life’s Chaos</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Life doesn’t wait for you to have it all figured out. When unexpected challenges hit, your business needs to be ready to withstand the storm. In this fan favorite episode, Abagail shares how to build a sustainable business that can function without you at the center, why learning to ask for help is key, and what shifts you need to make so your work supports your life—not the other way around.

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

Episode Highlights


  
Learning How to Ask for Help. [0:18:23]



  
Imagining a Business That Can Run Without You. [0:30:03]



  
The Very First Thing You Need to Do. [0:34:40]




Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Life doesn’t wait for you to have it all figured out. When unexpected challenges hit, your business needs to be ready to withstand the storm. In this fan favorite episode, Abagail shares how to build a sustainable business that can function without you at the center, why learning to ask for help is key, and what shifts you need to make so your work supports your life—not the other way around.</p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u><strong>⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></u></a><strong></strong></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠</u></a><br></p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Learning How to Ask for Help. [0:18:23]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Imagining a Business That Can Run Without You. [0:30:03]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>The Very First Thing You Need to Do. [0:34:40]</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><u><strong> ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></u></a><strong> </strong></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2653</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9ccc3a18-9ef9-11f0-95e9-13bcc550ccea]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE2684246854.mp3?updated=1759346489" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>991: How to Leverage Where You Are to Get Where You Want to Go [FAN FAVORITE]</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/fan-favorite-how-to-leverage-where-youre-at</link>
      <description>Not sure where you’re headed in business or life? In this episode, we’re breaking down how your past experiences can guide your future direction. I’ll introduce you to the PACE method—a simple framework to help you understand your current position, define your aspirations, experiment with creativity, and take messy action toward your goals. Tune in to learn how to leverage your journey so far into clear, actionable steps for where you want to go next.

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 30 Sep 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Leverage Where You Are to Get Where You Want to Go [FAN FAVORITE]</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>991</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3847c7a8-9d7b-11f0-9b93-6b481f603736/image/0d9a736212cd2c0afd425808e507cb6d.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Take action like you already have what you want.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Not sure where you’re headed in business or life? In this episode, we’re breaking down how your past experiences can guide your future direction. I’ll introduce you to the PACE method—a simple framework to help you understand your current position, define your aspirations, experiment with creativity, and take messy action toward your goals. Tune in to learn how to leverage your journey so far into clear, actionable steps for where you want to go next.

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Not sure where you’re headed in business or life? In this episode, we’re breaking down how your past experiences can guide your future direction. I’ll introduce you to the PACE method—a simple framework to help you understand your current position, define your aspirations, experiment with creativity, and take messy action toward your goals. Tune in to learn how to leverage your journey so far into clear, actionable steps for where you want to go next.</p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u><strong>⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></u></a><strong></strong></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠</u></a><br><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><u><strong> ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></u></a><strong> </strong></p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2148</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3847c7a8-9d7b-11f0-9b93-6b481f603736]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE2889619375.mp3?updated=1759182024" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>990: Rewiring Your Brain’s Fear Response with Sabrina Shafer</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/rewiring-your-brains-fear-response-with-sabrina-shafer</link>
      <description>Whatever scares you most will change your life the most! Today, I’m joined by Sabrina Shafer to talk about fear, a topic that every entrepreneur wrestles with. The kind that holds you back from the opportunities you know you were meant for. Sabrina has always believed that it’s okay to change lanes in your career, and when she got fed up with fear dictating what she did and didn’t do, her keynote, Fear Forward, was born. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

We’re diving into the neuroscience of fear, how to spot limiting beliefs, and what it looks like to actually build a culture of courage. If you’ve ever wondered how to step into your full potential even though you feel afraid, this conversation is for you! 

Episode Highlights 


  Learning to Be More Fear Forward [0:02:55]  

  How to Rewire Your Fear Response [0:07:37] 

  Common Fears in Leaders and Entrepreneurs [0:15:45] 

  How to Challenge Limiting Beliefs [0:22:36] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 25 Sep 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Rewiring Your Brain’s Fear Response with Sabrina Shafer</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>990</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f7c40dd6-9983-11f0-9cc5-43cee9b93576/image/9219cbae6001fcf06418fa5d28cfa3f8.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Whatever scares you most will change your life the most! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Whatever scares you most will change your life the most! Today, I’m joined by Sabrina Shafer to talk about fear, a topic that every entrepreneur wrestles with. The kind that holds you back from the opportunities you know you were meant for. Sabrina has always believed that it’s okay to change lanes in your career, and when she got fed up with fear dictating what she did and didn’t do, her keynote, Fear Forward, was born. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

We’re diving into the neuroscience of fear, how to spot limiting beliefs, and what it looks like to actually build a culture of courage. If you’ve ever wondered how to step into your full potential even though you feel afraid, this conversation is for you! 

Episode Highlights 


  Learning to Be More Fear Forward [0:02:55]  

  How to Rewire Your Fear Response [0:07:37] 

  Common Fears in Leaders and Entrepreneurs [0:15:45] 

  How to Challenge Limiting Beliefs [0:22:36] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Whatever scares you most will change your life the most! Today, I’m joined by <a href="https://www.sabrinashafer.com/"><u>Sabrina Shafer</u></a> to talk about fear, a topic that every entrepreneur wrestles with. The kind that holds you back from the opportunities you know you were meant for. Sabrina has always believed that it’s okay to change lanes in your career, and when she got fed up with fear dictating what she did and didn’t do, her keynote, <em>Fear Forward,</em> was born. </p>
<p>Connect with Abagail<a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p>We’re diving into the neuroscience of fear, how to spot limiting beliefs, and what it looks like to actually build a culture of courage. If you’ve ever wondered how to step into your full potential even though you feel afraid, this conversation is for you! </p>
<p>Episode Highlights </p>
<ul>
  <li>Learning to Be More Fear Forward [0:02:55]  </li>
  <li>How to Rewire Your Fear Response [0:07:37] </li>
  <li>Common Fears in Leaders and Entrepreneurs [0:15:45] </li>
  <li>How to Challenge Limiting Beliefs [0:22:36] </li>
</ul>
<p>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser<a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><u> ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2258</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f7c40dd6-9983-11f0-9cc5-43cee9b93576]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5565190254.mp3?updated=1758746726" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>989: This Simple Strategy Could Double Your Leads with Eleanor Beaton</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/this-simple-strategy-could-double-your-leads-with-eleanor-beaton</link>
      <description>What if the fastest way to grow your business wasn’t figuring it out alone? What if you leaned into collaboration? Today on the Strategy Hour Podcast, I’m joined by Eleanor Beaton, Founder of Safi Media and Host of The Woman-Owned Podcast. She’s trained tens of thousands of entrepreneurs, advised at Yale, and built a business that’s changing the way women approach growth. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

In this conversation, we explore feminism, the pressure to be a provider, and why hyper-independence isn’t the solution many of us think it is. Then, in the second half, we’re going to break down her round table growth strategy, a simple but powerful approach that could double your leads organically. I hope you’re ready, because we’re about to go deep!  

 Episode Highlights


  The Fire Behind Eleanor’s Mission [0:01:10]  

  Why Eleanor Believes in a Bold Vision for 2030 [0:10:18]

  How to Leverage Corporate Deals for Financial Runway. [0:14:38] 

  What Deal Velocity and Deal Durability Can Do for You [0:18:25] 

  The Roundtable Growth Strategy You Need to Pay Attention To [0:26:29] 

  How to Continue Leveraging Your Audience After a Roundtable [0:40:03] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Sep 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>This Simple Strategy Could Double Your Leads with Eleanor Beaton</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>989</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/21894996-97f5-11f0-a454-8b54ac0e05af/image/2d3cb7b8f12b103b088e16cabcb74b89.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, we unpack feminism, the pressure to be a provider, and why hyper-independence may not be the answer. We also dive into a simple but powerful round-table growth strategy that could double your leads organically.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What if the fastest way to grow your business wasn’t figuring it out alone? What if you leaned into collaboration? Today on the Strategy Hour Podcast, I’m joined by Eleanor Beaton, Founder of Safi Media and Host of The Woman-Owned Podcast. She’s trained tens of thousands of entrepreneurs, advised at Yale, and built a business that’s changing the way women approach growth. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

In this conversation, we explore feminism, the pressure to be a provider, and why hyper-independence isn’t the solution many of us think it is. Then, in the second half, we’re going to break down her round table growth strategy, a simple but powerful approach that could double your leads organically. I hope you’re ready, because we’re about to go deep!  

 Episode Highlights


  The Fire Behind Eleanor’s Mission [0:01:10]  

  Why Eleanor Believes in a Bold Vision for 2030 [0:10:18]

  How to Leverage Corporate Deals for Financial Runway. [0:14:38] 

  What Deal Velocity and Deal Durability Can Do for You [0:18:25] 

  The Roundtable Growth Strategy You Need to Pay Attention To [0:26:29] 

  How to Continue Leveraging Your Audience After a Roundtable [0:40:03] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What if the fastest way to grow your business wasn’t figuring it out alone? What if you leaned into collaboration? Today on the Strategy Hour Podcast, I’m joined by <a href="http://www.safimedia.co"><u>Eleanor Beaton, Founder of Safi Media</u></a> and Host of The Woman-Owned Podcast. She’s trained tens of thousands of entrepreneurs, advised at Yale, and built a business that’s changing the way women approach growth. </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u><strong>⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></u></a><strong></strong></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p>In this conversation, we explore feminism, the pressure to be a provider, and why hyper-independence isn’t the solution many of us think it is. Then, in the second half, we’re going to break down her round table growth strategy, a simple but powerful approach that could double your leads organically. I hope you’re ready, because we’re about to go deep!  </p>
<p> <strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>The Fire Behind Eleanor’s Mission [0:01:10]  </li>
  <li>Why Eleanor Believes in a Bold Vision for 2030 [0:10:18]</li>
  <li>How to Leverage Corporate Deals for Financial Runway. [0:14:38] </li>
  <li>What Deal Velocity and Deal Durability Can Do for You [0:18:25] </li>
  <li>The Roundtable Growth Strategy You Need to Pay Attention To [0:26:29] </li>
  <li>How to Continue Leveraging Your Audience After a Roundtable [0:40:03] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong> </strong><u><strong>⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></u></a></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2945</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[21894996-97f5-11f0-a454-8b54ac0e05af]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6480958945.mp3?updated=1758574920" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>988: How to Know When Change Is Growth vs. Running Away </title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-know-when-change-is-growth-vs-running-away</link>
      <description>At some point, you are going to have a fork in the road and choices to make that may leave you wondering what is right for you. I have a lot on my plate at the moment, and it’s bringing up a lot of questions about where my business is going, the kind of products I want to sell, how I want to show up online, and what I want my life to look like. Obviously, I could just keep going as I have been, but I have had this inkling inside of me that something is supposed to change. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

While I don’t necessarily know what, I know that things are moving in a new direction. During my discovery process of trying to figure these things out, a question came up for me: Am I choosing this change because it’s the right next step, or am I trying to escape something? Is this for growth, or am I running away? Running away from something because it scares you often is the wrong decision, so I spoke to my therapist, who gave me some great advice about this topic, and I wanted to share it with you today.  

Episode Highlights


  Signs That You’re Running Away from Something. [0:03:05]  

  Indicators of Positive Change. [0:05:41] 

  How to Know When It’s Both. [0:06:56] 

  The Number One Thing to Get Clear On. [0:10:32] 

  When Escaping is Necessary. [0:16:03] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 11 Sep 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Know When Change Is Growth vs. Running Away </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>988</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4b5e69e2-8e8e-11f0-a0be-0f6fc456947d/image/3393e549e5a60441c38441649e7ce666.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>m I choosing this change because it’s the right next step, or am I trying to escape something? Is this for growth, or am I running away?</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>At some point, you are going to have a fork in the road and choices to make that may leave you wondering what is right for you. I have a lot on my plate at the moment, and it’s bringing up a lot of questions about where my business is going, the kind of products I want to sell, how I want to show up online, and what I want my life to look like. Obviously, I could just keep going as I have been, but I have had this inkling inside of me that something is supposed to change. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

While I don’t necessarily know what, I know that things are moving in a new direction. During my discovery process of trying to figure these things out, a question came up for me: Am I choosing this change because it’s the right next step, or am I trying to escape something? Is this for growth, or am I running away? Running away from something because it scares you often is the wrong decision, so I spoke to my therapist, who gave me some great advice about this topic, and I wanted to share it with you today.  

Episode Highlights


  Signs That You’re Running Away from Something. [0:03:05]  

  Indicators of Positive Change. [0:05:41] 

  How to Know When It’s Both. [0:06:56] 

  The Number One Thing to Get Clear On. [0:10:32] 

  When Escaping is Necessary. [0:16:03] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>At some point, you are going to have a fork in the road and choices to make that may leave you wondering what is right for you. I have a lot on my plate at the moment, and it’s bringing up a lot of questions about where my business is going, the kind of products I want to sell, how I want to show up online, and what I want my life to look like. Obviously, I could just keep going as I have been, but I have had this inkling inside of me that something is supposed to change. </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram</u></a></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p>While I don’t necessarily know what, I know that things are moving in a new direction. During my discovery process of trying to figure these things out, a question came up for me: Am I choosing this change because it’s the right next step, or am I trying to escape something? Is this for growth, or am I running away? Running away from something because it scares you often is the wrong decision, so I spoke to my therapist, who gave me some great advice about this topic, and I wanted to share it with you today.  </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Signs That You’re Running Away from Something. [0:03:05]  </li>
  <li>Indicators of Positive Change. [0:05:41] </li>
  <li>How to Know When It’s Both. [0:06:56] </li>
  <li>The Number One Thing to Get Clear On. [0:10:32] </li>
  <li>When Escaping is Necessary. [0:16:03] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser </strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1450</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4b5e69e2-8e8e-11f0-a0be-0f6fc456947d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE3089998765.mp3?updated=1757540821" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>987: Behind the Scenes: Writing a Non-Fiction Book Proposal</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/behind-the-scenes-writing-a-non-fiction-book-proposal</link>
      <description>When you listen to your innermost thoughts, your best work will come out. In today’s episode, I want to give you a behind-the-scenes look at what it’s like to write a book proposal and get your book purchased in the traditional publishing world. I want to share a preview of where I am in the process, what is required, and some “words of warning” for things that you may encounter along the way; things I didn’t anticipate and would have appreciated a heads up on! 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

I want to thank my loyal listeners for being part of this space where you can show up fully and share openly. I’d like the Strategy Hour to evolve, so if it’s helped you, please share it with someone else who can benefit from this community. 

Episode Highlights


  
Where I am In My Publishing Journey [0:03:00]  



  
What You Need to Know About Writing a Non-Fiction Book Proposal [0:05:46]



  
Writing on Demand and Finding Inspiration [0:16:38] 



  
Letting Your Work ‘Live’, Grow, and Evolve [0:26:10] 




Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 09 Sep 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Behind the Scenes: Writing a Non-Fiction Book Proposal</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>987</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/7bf06a2e-8cf4-11f0-af01-ebfb2b927d0b/image/d3c68f4fe0d731e7ca1ff49ef7ce03ce.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>I'm giving you a behind-the-scenes look at what it’s like to write a book proposal and get your book to auction in the traditional publishing world.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When you listen to your innermost thoughts, your best work will come out. In today’s episode, I want to give you a behind-the-scenes look at what it’s like to write a book proposal and get your book purchased in the traditional publishing world. I want to share a preview of where I am in the process, what is required, and some “words of warning” for things that you may encounter along the way; things I didn’t anticipate and would have appreciated a heads up on! 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

I want to thank my loyal listeners for being part of this space where you can show up fully and share openly. I’d like the Strategy Hour to evolve, so if it’s helped you, please share it with someone else who can benefit from this community. 

Episode Highlights


  
Where I am In My Publishing Journey [0:03:00]  



  
What You Need to Know About Writing a Non-Fiction Book Proposal [0:05:46]



  
Writing on Demand and Finding Inspiration [0:16:38] 



  
Letting Your Work ‘Live’, Grow, and Evolve [0:26:10] 




Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When you listen to your innermost thoughts, your best work will come out. In today’s episode, I want to give you a behind-the-scenes look at what it’s like to write a book proposal and get your book purchased in the traditional publishing world. I want to share a preview of where I am in the process, what is required, and some “words of warning” for things that you may encounter along the way; things I didn’t anticipate and would have appreciated a heads up on! </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram</u></a></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p>I want to thank my loyal listeners for being part of this space where you can show up fully and share openly. I’d like the Strategy Hour to evolve, so if it’s helped you, please share it with someone else who can benefit from this community. </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Where I am In My Publishing Journey [0:03:00]  </p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>What You Need to Know About Writing a Non-Fiction Book Proposal [0:05:46]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Writing on Demand and Finding Inspiration [0:16:38] </p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Letting Your Work ‘Live’, Grow, and Evolve [0:26:10] </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong> ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1974</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7bf06a2e-8cf4-11f0-af01-ebfb2b927d0b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5808701869.mp3?updated=1757364739" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>986: 10 Lessons from 10 Years in Business Every Entrepreneur Should Hear</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/10-lessons-from-10-years-in-business-every-entrepreneur-should-hear</link>
      <description>After a decade of running a business, I’ve learned that success isn’t about making the “perfect” decision—it’s about resilience, clarity, and leaning into what you do best. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

In this episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast, I break down the 10 most important lessons from 10 years in business ranging from mindset, leadership, and sustainable growth. You’ll learn why there’s no such thing as a right or wrong decision, how to filter out bad advice, why celebrating yourself is essential, and how to build real community so business doesn’t feel lonely.

If you’ve ever searched for entrepreneurship lessons, how to grow a small business, or mindset tips for entrepreneurs, this episode is packed with strategies and reflections to help you build a business—and a life—you truly love.

Episode Highlights


  
You’re Capable of More Than You Think. [0:02:10]  



  
There’s No Such Thing as a Right or Wrong Decision. [0:04:22] 



  
Not Everyone’s Advice Is Worth Taking. [0:10:27] 



  
Lean Into What Comes Naturally. [0:12:36] 



  
Sharpen Your Strengths, Not Your Weaknesses. [0:13:41] 



  
Hard Seasons Will Come, But You Can Get Through Them. [0:24:27] 



  
Feedback Isn’t a Personal Attack. [0:26:52] 



  
Two Things Can Be True at Once. [0:31:14] 



  
No One Will Celebrate You Unless You Celebrate Yourself. [0:38:14]



  
Building a Business Doesn’t Have to Be Lonely. [0:42:02] 




Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 04 Sep 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>10 Lessons from 10 Years in Business Every Entrepreneur Should Hear</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>986</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/7fc8aa8a-88e4-11f0-af01-5beea40cb86f/image/6ba5e77a50b07433d22f52fbf8aae2a1.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you’ve ever Googled how to grow my business, lessons from entrepreneurs, or how to avoid burnout as a small business owner, this episode is your roadmap.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>After a decade of running a business, I’ve learned that success isn’t about making the “perfect” decision—it’s about resilience, clarity, and leaning into what you do best. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

In this episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast, I break down the 10 most important lessons from 10 years in business ranging from mindset, leadership, and sustainable growth. You’ll learn why there’s no such thing as a right or wrong decision, how to filter out bad advice, why celebrating yourself is essential, and how to build real community so business doesn’t feel lonely.

If you’ve ever searched for entrepreneurship lessons, how to grow a small business, or mindset tips for entrepreneurs, this episode is packed with strategies and reflections to help you build a business—and a life—you truly love.

Episode Highlights


  
You’re Capable of More Than You Think. [0:02:10]  



  
There’s No Such Thing as a Right or Wrong Decision. [0:04:22] 



  
Not Everyone’s Advice Is Worth Taking. [0:10:27] 



  
Lean Into What Comes Naturally. [0:12:36] 



  
Sharpen Your Strengths, Not Your Weaknesses. [0:13:41] 



  
Hard Seasons Will Come, But You Can Get Through Them. [0:24:27] 



  
Feedback Isn’t a Personal Attack. [0:26:52] 



  
Two Things Can Be True at Once. [0:31:14] 



  
No One Will Celebrate You Unless You Celebrate Yourself. [0:38:14]



  
Building a Business Doesn’t Have to Be Lonely. [0:42:02] 




Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>After a decade of running a business, I’ve learned that success isn’t about making the “perfect” decision—it’s about resilience, clarity, and leaning into what you do best. </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram</u></a></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p>In this episode of <em>The Strategy Hour Podcast</em>, I break down the <strong>10 most important lessons from 10 years in business </strong>ranging from mindset, leadership, and sustainable growth. You’ll learn why there’s no such thing as a right or wrong decision, how to filter out bad advice, why celebrating yourself is essential, and how to build real community so business doesn’t feel lonely.</p>
<p>If you’ve ever searched for <em>entrepreneurship lessons, how to grow a small business, or mindset tips for entrepreneurs,</em> this episode is packed with strategies and reflections to help you build a business—and a life—you truly love.</p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ol>
  <li>
<p>You’re Capable of More Than You Think. <strong>[0:02:10] </strong> </p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>There’s No Such Thing as a Right or Wrong Decision.<strong> [0:04:22]</strong> </p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Not Everyone’s Advice Is Worth Taking.<strong> [0:10:27]</strong> </p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Lean Into What Comes Naturally.<strong> [0:12:36]</strong> </p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Sharpen Your Strengths, Not Your Weaknesses.<strong> [0:13:41]</strong> </p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Hard Seasons Will Come, But You Can Get Through Them.<strong> [0:24:27]</strong> </p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Feedback Isn’t a Personal Attack.<strong> [0:26:52]</strong> </p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Two Things Can Be True at Once.<strong> [0:31:14]</strong> </p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>No One Will Celebrate You Unless You Celebrate Yourself.<strong> [0:38:14]</strong></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Building a Business Doesn’t Have to Be Lonely.<strong> [0:42:02]</strong> </p>
</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong> ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2996</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7fc8aa8a-88e4-11f0-af01-5beea40cb86f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE9451371758.mp3?updated=1756924809" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>985: Stop Chasing &amp; Get More of the Life You Want Today with Ryann Gillen</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/stop-chasing-and-get-more-of-the-life-you-want-today-with-ryann-gillen</link>
      <description>So many of us think money is the ultimate benchmark for success, but what if we’ve been chasing the wrong thing all along? In today’s episode with Ryann Gillen, we’re pulling back the curtain on the subconscious beliefs that quietly shape the way we do business and often hold us back. Ryann is a transformational leader and mentor with decades of experience building multimillion-dollar sales teams. She now helps ambitious women break through limitations, reclaim their power, and actually enjoy the businesses and lives they’ve built.  

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

She did all the things “right,” hit the goals, and still felt something was missing. Sound familiar? Together, we talk about what it means to decouple your self-worth from dollar amounts, why chasing feelings instead of things is the key to freedom, and how nervous system regulation plays a bigger role in business than most people ever admit. Ryann’s energy is magnetic, and I know you’re going to walk away with so many ‘aha’ moments. Let’s dive in!  

Episode Highlights


  From Corporate Sales to Personal Development [0:02:28]  

  Redefining Success Benchmarks [0:06:25] 

  Focusing on People and Becoming the Product [0:08:54] 

  Chasing Feelings, Not Things [0:13:03] 

  Balancing Gratitude and Desire [0:17:04] 

  Helping Clients Clarify Their Desires [0:20:43] 

  Making the Work Feel Worth It [0:26:03] 

  How to Recentre When You Get Distracted [0:30:31] 

  The Role of Energetics in Business [0:38:41] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 02 Sep 2025 18:37:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Stop Chasing &amp; Get More of the Life You Want Today with Ryann Gillen</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>985</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d709e812-8809-11f0-9559-8bcbcfae46b0/image/4f56c48548202f1bb308c0cb6fa23619.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>What if success isn’t about money at all? In this conversation with Ryann Gillen, we explore redefining success, breaking subconscious patterns, and building a business that actually feels good.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>So many of us think money is the ultimate benchmark for success, but what if we’ve been chasing the wrong thing all along? In today’s episode with Ryann Gillen, we’re pulling back the curtain on the subconscious beliefs that quietly shape the way we do business and often hold us back. Ryann is a transformational leader and mentor with decades of experience building multimillion-dollar sales teams. She now helps ambitious women break through limitations, reclaim their power, and actually enjoy the businesses and lives they’ve built.  

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

She did all the things “right,” hit the goals, and still felt something was missing. Sound familiar? Together, we talk about what it means to decouple your self-worth from dollar amounts, why chasing feelings instead of things is the key to freedom, and how nervous system regulation plays a bigger role in business than most people ever admit. Ryann’s energy is magnetic, and I know you’re going to walk away with so many ‘aha’ moments. Let’s dive in!  

Episode Highlights


  From Corporate Sales to Personal Development [0:02:28]  

  Redefining Success Benchmarks [0:06:25] 

  Focusing on People and Becoming the Product [0:08:54] 

  Chasing Feelings, Not Things [0:13:03] 

  Balancing Gratitude and Desire [0:17:04] 

  Helping Clients Clarify Their Desires [0:20:43] 

  Making the Work Feel Worth It [0:26:03] 

  How to Recentre When You Get Distracted [0:30:31] 

  The Role of Energetics in Business [0:38:41] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>So many of us think money is the ultimate benchmark for success, but what if we’ve been chasing the wrong thing all along? In today’s episode with Ryann Gillen, we’re pulling back the curtain on the subconscious beliefs that quietly shape the way we do business and often hold us back. Ryann is a transformational leader and mentor with decades of experience building multimillion-dollar sales teams. She now helps ambitious women break through limitations, reclaim their power, and actually enjoy the businesses and lives they’ve built.  </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram</u></a></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p>She did all the things “right,” hit the goals, and still felt something was missing. Sound familiar? Together, we talk about what it means to decouple your self-worth from dollar amounts, why chasing feelings instead of things is the key to freedom, and how nervous system regulation plays a bigger role in business than most people ever admit. Ryann’s energy is magnetic, and I know you’re going to walk away with so many ‘aha’ moments. Let’s dive in!  </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>From Corporate Sales to Personal Development [0:02:28]  </li>
  <li>Redefining Success Benchmarks [0:06:25] </li>
  <li>Focusing on People and Becoming the Product [0:08:54] </li>
  <li>Chasing Feelings, Not Things [0:13:03] </li>
  <li>Balancing Gratitude and Desire [0:17:04] </li>
  <li>Helping Clients Clarify Their Desires [0:20:43] </li>
  <li>Making the Work Feel Worth It [0:26:03] </li>
  <li>How to Recentre When You Get Distracted [0:30:31] </li>
  <li>The Role of Energetics in Business [0:38:41] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong> ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3120</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d709e812-8809-11f0-9559-8bcbcfae46b0]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6124036781.mp3?updated=1756824627" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>984: Leads on Autopilot: How to Get Your First (or Next) 1,000 Subscribers Audio Workshop</title>
      <description>You don’t have to wait for referrals or cross your fingers for a viral post. There’s a simple, repeatable system to grow your list—one I’ve used to build 42,000+ subscribers and turn them into paying clients and students. In this solo workshop, I’m walking you through the exact roadmap, the lead magnets that actually convert, and how to set up steady lead flow (even when life gets busy). Are you at zero or scaling to your next thousand? 

Connect with Abagail on Instagram

Email List Jumpstart

We’ll talk about free versus paid entry points, how to stop the “nurture-only” habits that quietly dry up sales, and why mixing active and “set it and forget” strategies is the secret to sustainable growth. 

The whole goal here is to help you see your email list for what it really is: the most valuable asset in your business, one that can support you when life throws curveballs and still bring in sales while you’re away. 

Episode Highlights 


  Why Email Marketing Still Matters [0:04:27]  

  The Problem with Running Out of Leads [0:09:04] 

  The Roadmap to 1,000 Subscribers [0:16:07] 

  Creating Lead Magnets that Convert [0:21:12] 

  Lead Generation and Growth [0:30:12]  

  Email as the Foundation of Freedom [0:38:55] 

  From Inbox to Income [0:47:36] 

  Wrapping It All Up [0:59:00] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 02 Sep 2025 16:28:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Leads on Autopilot: How to Get Your First (or Next) 1,000 Subscribers Audio Workshop</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>984</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/62a9149c-8373-11f0-810f-231bb4244421/image/f8fbc49af992bae820013bd41dfb01c5.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Learn how to grow your audience, scale your impact, and put your leads on autopilot.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You don’t have to wait for referrals or cross your fingers for a viral post. There’s a simple, repeatable system to grow your list—one I’ve used to build 42,000+ subscribers and turn them into paying clients and students. In this solo workshop, I’m walking you through the exact roadmap, the lead magnets that actually convert, and how to set up steady lead flow (even when life gets busy). Are you at zero or scaling to your next thousand? 

Connect with Abagail on Instagram

Email List Jumpstart

We’ll talk about free versus paid entry points, how to stop the “nurture-only” habits that quietly dry up sales, and why mixing active and “set it and forget” strategies is the secret to sustainable growth. 

The whole goal here is to help you see your email list for what it really is: the most valuable asset in your business, one that can support you when life throws curveballs and still bring in sales while you’re away. 

Episode Highlights 


  Why Email Marketing Still Matters [0:04:27]  

  The Problem with Running Out of Leads [0:09:04] 

  The Roadmap to 1,000 Subscribers [0:16:07] 

  Creating Lead Magnets that Convert [0:21:12] 

  Lead Generation and Growth [0:30:12]  

  Email as the Foundation of Freedom [0:38:55] 

  From Inbox to Income [0:47:36] 

  Wrapping It All Up [0:59:00] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You don’t have to wait for referrals or cross your fingers for a viral post. There’s a simple, repeatable system to grow your list—one I’ve used to build 42,000+ subscribers and turn them into paying clients and students. In this solo workshop, I’m walking you through the exact roadmap, the lead magnets that actually convert, and how to set up steady lead flow (even when life gets busy). Are you at zero or scaling to your next thousand? </p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>Connect with Abagail on Instagram</u></a></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/email-training"><u>Email List Jumpstart</u></a></p>
<p>We’ll talk about free versus paid entry points, how to stop the “nurture-only” habits that quietly dry up sales, and why mixing active and “set it and forget” strategies is the secret to sustainable growth. </p>
<p>The whole goal here is to help you see your email list for what it really is: the most valuable asset in your business, one that can support you when life throws curveballs and still bring in sales while you’re away. </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong> </p>
<ul>
  <li>Why Email Marketing Still Matters [0:04:27]  </li>
  <li>The Problem with Running Out of Leads [0:09:04] </li>
  <li>The Roadmap to 1,000 Subscribers [0:16:07] </li>
  <li>Creating Lead Magnets that Convert [0:21:12] </li>
  <li>Lead Generation and Growth [0:30:12]  </li>
  <li>Email as the Foundation of Freedom [0:38:55] </li>
  <li>From Inbox to Income [0:47:36] </li>
  <li>Wrapping It All Up [0:59:00] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong> ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. <br></p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>5144</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[62a9149c-8373-11f0-810f-231bb4244421]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE7518349184.mp3?updated=1756825693" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>983: The Fastest Way to Build an Email List from the Ground Up </title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-fastest-way-to-build-an-email-list-from-the-ground-up</link>
      <description>So many people ask me the same question: “How do I build an email list from scratch?” In this episode, we’re diving into the basics of exactly that! I want to talk about why your email list is one of your most powerful business assets, how it’s the fastest, most direct way to reach your entire audience, how it consistently delivers higher engagement than social media, and how it helps you build genuine relationships that turn into sales. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

Your email list is yours, it’s not dependent on an algorithm, and it’s the perfect way to nurture leads until they’re ready to convert. And because I want you to see just how powerful this can be, I’ve put together a free resource showing exactly how I added nearly 10,000 new subscribers to my list in just six months. You can grab it at bossproject.com/leads. 

Episode Highlights 


  Selecting an Email Service Provider [0:08:22]  

  Attracting Leads to Your List [0:20:34] 

  You Have the Sign Ups, So What Now? [0:28:44] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 26 Aug 2025 15:59:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Fastest Way to Build an Email List from the Ground Up </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>983</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/af7157f0-8295-11f0-ab87-db71aa41e30d/image/e51a6a5f8223172980c32ba5799e9ab7.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Email list growth is one of your most powerful business assets. It's the fastest, most direct way to reach your entire audience, </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>So many people ask me the same question: “How do I build an email list from scratch?” In this episode, we’re diving into the basics of exactly that! I want to talk about why your email list is one of your most powerful business assets, how it’s the fastest, most direct way to reach your entire audience, how it consistently delivers higher engagement than social media, and how it helps you build genuine relationships that turn into sales. 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

Your email list is yours, it’s not dependent on an algorithm, and it’s the perfect way to nurture leads until they’re ready to convert. And because I want you to see just how powerful this can be, I’ve put together a free resource showing exactly how I added nearly 10,000 new subscribers to my list in just six months. You can grab it at bossproject.com/leads. 

Episode Highlights 


  Selecting an Email Service Provider [0:08:22]  

  Attracting Leads to Your List [0:20:34] 

  You Have the Sign Ups, So What Now? [0:28:44] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>So many people ask me the same question:<em> “How do I build an email list from scratch?”</em> In this episode, we’re diving into the basics of exactly that! I want to talk about why your email list is one of your most powerful business assets, how it’s the fastest, most direct way to reach your entire audience, how it consistently delivers higher engagement than social media, and how it helps you build genuine relationships that turn into sales. </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u><strong>⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></u></a><strong></strong></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram</u></a></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p>Your email list is yours, it’s not dependent on an algorithm, and it’s the perfect way to nurture leads until they’re ready to convert. And because I want you to see just how powerful this can be, I’ve put together a free resource showing exactly how I added nearly 10,000 new subscribers to my list in just six months. You can grab it at<a href="http://bossproject.com/leads"> <u>bossproject.com/leads</u></a>. </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Selecting an Email Service Provider [0:08:22]  </li>
  <li>Attracting Leads to Your List [0:20:34] </li>
  <li>You Have the Sign Ups, So What Now? [0:28:44] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><u><strong> ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></u></a></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2217</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[af7157f0-8295-11f0-ab87-db71aa41e30d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE2883316648.mp3?updated=1756225167" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>982: The Strategy Behind “Getting Lucky” on LinkedIn with Liam Darmody</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-strategy-behind-getting-lucky-on-linkedin-with-liam-darmody</link>
      <description>What if I told you that getting lucky on LinkedIn isn’t about luck at all, but rather about a strategy that’s amplified by your authenticity? Today, I’m joined by the founder of Liam’s Brand Stand, Liam Darmody, to discuss how he grew a thriving consultancy and a LinkedIn following of over 45,000 people by simply showing up as himself! 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

In this conversation, we break down his philosophy of ‘manifesting serendipity’, how to turn your LinkedIn profile into a lead-generating landing page, how to build an audience, and how to use tools to scale your presence without losing your personality. 

If you’ve been wondering how to market yourself without losing yourself or how to make LinkedIn work for you, then this episode is definitely for you!  

Episode Highlights 


  What It Means to ‘Manifest Serendipity’ [0:05:03]  

  The Four Pillars of Leveraging LinkedIn Effectively [0:16:30] 

  Mastering Your Sales Strategy [0:28:48] 

  Building Connections Using LinkedIn Sales Navigator [0:32:21] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 21 Aug 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Strategy Behind “Getting Lucky” on LinkedIn with Liam Darmody</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>982</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/dcc80e74-7c69-11f0-afd2-e3852f43374d/image/ffa6fe8951328b73e8dcadb97b87c0bb.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you’ve been wondering how to market yourself without losing yourself or how to make LinkedIn work for you, then this episode is definitely for you!  </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What if I told you that getting lucky on LinkedIn isn’t about luck at all, but rather about a strategy that’s amplified by your authenticity? Today, I’m joined by the founder of Liam’s Brand Stand, Liam Darmody, to discuss how he grew a thriving consultancy and a LinkedIn following of over 45,000 people by simply showing up as himself! 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

In this conversation, we break down his philosophy of ‘manifesting serendipity’, how to turn your LinkedIn profile into a lead-generating landing page, how to build an audience, and how to use tools to scale your presence without losing your personality. 

If you’ve been wondering how to market yourself without losing yourself or how to make LinkedIn work for you, then this episode is definitely for you!  

Episode Highlights 


  What It Means to ‘Manifest Serendipity’ [0:05:03]  

  The Four Pillars of Leveraging LinkedIn Effectively [0:16:30] 

  Mastering Your Sales Strategy [0:28:48] 

  Building Connections Using LinkedIn Sales Navigator [0:32:21] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What if I told you that getting lucky on LinkedIn isn’t about luck at all, but rather about a strategy that’s amplified by your authenticity? Today, I’m joined by the founder of <a href="https://liamsbrandstand.com/">Liam’s Brand Stand, Liam Darmody,</a> to discuss how he grew a thriving consultancy and a LinkedIn following of over 45,000 people by simply showing up as himself! </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u><strong>⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></u></a><strong></strong></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram</u></a></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p>In this conversation, we break down his philosophy of ‘manifesting serendipity’, how to turn your LinkedIn profile into a lead-generating landing page, how to build an audience, and how to use tools to scale your presence without losing your personality. </p>
<p>If you’ve been wondering how to market yourself without losing yourself or how to make LinkedIn work for you, then this episode is definitely for you!  </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>What It Means to ‘Manifest Serendipity’ [0:05:03]  </li>
  <li>The Four Pillars of Leveraging LinkedIn Effectively [0:16:30] </li>
  <li>Mastering Your Sales Strategy [0:28:48] </li>
  <li>Building Connections Using LinkedIn Sales Navigator [0:32:21] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong> </strong><u><strong>⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠</strong></u></a></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p>
<p><br></p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3152</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dcc80e74-7c69-11f0-afd2-e3852f43374d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE3724742833.mp3?updated=1755638121" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>981: Steal This Strategy: 4,587 New Subscribers in Under 120 Days</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/steal-this-strategy-4587-new-subscribers-in-under-120-days</link>
      <description>In this episode, I’m going to drop some knowledge that no other marketers are dropping! You’re going to want to listen, share this episode, and pop me a DM to tell me what you think about it. I have added more than double the number of new subscribers to my list in the past three and a half months than I did all of last year! 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

Nurturing an email list takes time, and while it will absolutely get you business, cold subscribers will take time to warm up and actually start purchasing from you. But this is a long-term strategy that adds to the stability of your business. 

Even though attracting subscribers is the topic of discussion for today, I’m going to tell you something controversial: it’s not where I would start when opening a small business! Instead, it’s something I would continue to invest in over time, but it won’t get you that initial attraction. 

Episode Highlights 


  Incorporating Evergreen Training and Trends [0:08:38]  

  Leveraging Low-Priced Digital Products and a Refresh [0:11:50] 

  The Power of Research and Generic Sign Ups [0:16:33] 

  Boosting Leads with an Activation [0:24:38] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 19 Aug 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Steal This Strategy: 4,587 New Subscribers in Under 120 Days</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>981</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/990df81c-7262-11f0-a4dc-d72e59f57531/image/621cfe0597016d313b788817a309855b.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Email marketing is a long-term strategy that adds to the stability of your business.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode, I’m going to drop some knowledge that no other marketers are dropping! You’re going to want to listen, share this episode, and pop me a DM to tell me what you think about it. I have added more than double the number of new subscribers to my list in the past three and a half months than I did all of last year! 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠

Nurturing an email list takes time, and while it will absolutely get you business, cold subscribers will take time to warm up and actually start purchasing from you. But this is a long-term strategy that adds to the stability of your business. 

Even though attracting subscribers is the topic of discussion for today, I’m going to tell you something controversial: it’s not where I would start when opening a small business! Instead, it’s something I would continue to invest in over time, but it won’t get you that initial attraction. 

Episode Highlights 


  Incorporating Evergreen Training and Trends [0:08:38]  

  Leveraging Low-Priced Digital Products and a Refresh [0:11:50] 

  The Power of Research and Generic Sign Ups [0:16:33] 

  Boosting Leads with an Activation [0:24:38] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode, I’m going to drop some knowledge that no other marketers are dropping! You’re going to want to listen, share this episode, and pop me a DM to tell me what you think about it. I have added more than double the number of new subscribers to my list in the past three and a half months than I did all of last year! </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠</u><strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong><u>⁠</u></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p>Nurturing an email list takes time, and while it will absolutely get you business, cold subscribers will take time to warm up and actually start purchasing from you. But this is a long-term strategy that adds to the stability of your business. </p>
<p>Even though attracting subscribers is the topic of discussion for today, I’m going to tell you something controversial: it’s not where I would start when opening a small business! Instead, it’s something I would continue to invest in over time, but it won’t get you that initial attraction. </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Incorporating Evergreen Training and Trends <strong>[0:08:38] </strong> </li>
  <li>Leveraging Low-Priced Digital Products and a Refresh<strong> [0:11:50]</strong> </li>
  <li>The Power of Research and Generic Sign Ups<strong> [0:16:33]</strong> </li>
  <li>Boosting Leads with an Activation<strong> [0:24:38]</strong> </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong> </strong><u>⁠⁠</u><strong>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</strong><u>⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2417</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[990df81c-7262-11f0-a4dc-d72e59f57531]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5617391149.mp3?updated=1754443443" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>980: Get Paid to Build Your Email List (Yes, Really)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/get-paid-to-build-your-email-list</link>
      <description>Get ready for the wildest ride! I am seeing massive change, growth, and opportunities for small businesses today, and incredible ways to get visible. In today’s episode, I’m going to dig into what it’s like to get paid to grow your email list and how I’ve been using this strategy for almost a decade. Get Digital Product Jumpstart

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 

I’m ready to reveal what I’ve been doing and how I’ve been doing it, and give you guys the roadmap so that you can follow it step by step. It has been revolutionary to my business, and an incredible way to see consistent growth. I definitely think it’s going to solve the leads problem so many businesses encounter! Let’s dive in. 

Episode Highlights 


  The One Thing Holding Businesses Back From Financial Freedom [0:09:11]  

  What To Do Instead of Having To Start All Over Again [0:13:18] 

  How I Went From Blissed Out to Burned Out and Back Again. [0:16:06]

  Why You Need to Join Digital Product Jumpstart Today [0:21:25] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 14 Aug 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Get Paid to Build Your Email List (Yes, Really)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>980</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c1ab9ab8-721c-11f0-bdaf-933aadb98fa3/image/a56294c0d6e64c59585628742a35bb76.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>I am seeing massive change, growth, and opportunities for small businesses today, and incredible ways to get visible. In today’s episode, I’m going to dig into what it’s like to get paid to grow your email list </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Get ready for the wildest ride! I am seeing massive change, growth, and opportunities for small businesses today, and incredible ways to get visible. In today’s episode, I’m going to dig into what it’s like to get paid to grow your email list and how I’ve been using this strategy for almost a decade. Get Digital Product Jumpstart

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 

I’m ready to reveal what I’ve been doing and how I’ve been doing it, and give you guys the roadmap so that you can follow it step by step. It has been revolutionary to my business, and an incredible way to see consistent growth. I definitely think it’s going to solve the leads problem so many businesses encounter! Let’s dive in. 

Episode Highlights 


  The One Thing Holding Businesses Back From Financial Freedom [0:09:11]  

  What To Do Instead of Having To Start All Over Again [0:13:18] 

  How I Went From Blissed Out to Burned Out and Back Again. [0:16:06]

  Why You Need to Join Digital Product Jumpstart Today [0:21:25] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Get ready for the wildest ride! I am seeing massive change, growth, and opportunities for small businesses today, and incredible ways to get visible. In today’s episode, I’m going to dig into what it’s like to get paid to grow your email list and how I’ve been using this strategy for almost a decade. <a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/digital-product-jumpstart"><u>Get Digital Product Jumpstart</u></a></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p>I’m ready to reveal what I’ve been doing and how I’ve been doing it, and give you guys the roadmap so that you can follow it step by step. It has been revolutionary to my business, and an incredible way to see consistent growth. I definitely think it’s going to solve the leads problem so many businesses encounter! Let’s dive in. </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>The One Thing Holding Businesses Back From Financial Freedom [0:09:11]  </li>
  <li>What To Do Instead of Having To Start All Over Again [0:13:18] </li>
  <li>How I Went From Blissed Out to Burned Out and Back Again. [0:16:06]</li>
  <li>Why You Need to Join Digital Product Jumpstart Today [0:21:25] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong> </strong><u>⁠⁠</u><strong>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</strong><u>⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1896</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c1ab9ab8-721c-11f0-bdaf-933aadb98fa3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1678247645.mp3?updated=1754414252" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>979: Starting a Business without a Single Follower</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/starting-a-business-without-a-single-follower</link>
      <description>Today, I want to dig into how I would start a business if there’s no existing audience — how I would get off the ground, how we would get momentum, how I would create a community of people who are actually listening to what I have to say and how I would make real tangible dollar bills as early as possible in the process. But before we get into the strategies, I just want to say that I have never met someone who actually has no audience.  

 ⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 

Perhaps you’ve never started a page with this focus, or this niche, but we have connections, and it’s our job to leverage the connections that already exist. I’m here to tell you that ultimately, the number of people in your audience has little to no relationship to the actual amount of sales that you can generate. The number of followers does not matter! It’s about creating the right community that is supportive of where you’re going. So, let’s dive in. 

 Episode Highlights 


  Where to Find the 1000 People You’re Already Connected To [0:08:28]

  How to Use a Digital Product to Attract and Convert Strangers Into Buyers [0:14:13] 

  Getting In Front of the Right People to Build the Visibility You Need [0:18:18] 

  Why You Need to Launch and Validate Your Offer Before Building a Low-Priced Digital Product [0:23:18] 

  One of My All-Time Favorite Content Strategies [0:29:40] 

  Where to Start (And Why it Doesn’t Have to Be So Overwhelming) [0:35:29] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 12 Aug 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Starting a Business without a Single Follower</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>979</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/830049da-721c-11f0-b7ff-3fdc45adeb6d/image/1db696d864fcaa69a4ae40b48334869f.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, I want to dig into how I would start a business if there’s no existing audience — how I would get off the ground, how we would get momentum, how I would create a community of people who are actually listening to what I have to say </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, I want to dig into how I would start a business if there’s no existing audience — how I would get off the ground, how we would get momentum, how I would create a community of people who are actually listening to what I have to say and how I would make real tangible dollar bills as early as possible in the process. But before we get into the strategies, I just want to say that I have never met someone who actually has no audience.  

 ⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 

Perhaps you’ve never started a page with this focus, or this niche, but we have connections, and it’s our job to leverage the connections that already exist. I’m here to tell you that ultimately, the number of people in your audience has little to no relationship to the actual amount of sales that you can generate. The number of followers does not matter! It’s about creating the right community that is supportive of where you’re going. So, let’s dive in. 

 Episode Highlights 


  Where to Find the 1000 People You’re Already Connected To [0:08:28]

  How to Use a Digital Product to Attract and Convert Strangers Into Buyers [0:14:13] 

  Getting In Front of the Right People to Build the Visibility You Need [0:18:18] 

  Why You Need to Launch and Validate Your Offer Before Building a Low-Priced Digital Product [0:23:18] 

  One of My All-Time Favorite Content Strategies [0:29:40] 

  Where to Start (And Why it Doesn’t Have to Be So Overwhelming) [0:35:29] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser ⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, I want to dig into how I would start a business if there’s no existing audience — how I would get off the ground, how we would get momentum, how I would create a community of people who are actually listening to what I have to say and how I would make real tangible dollar bills as early as possible in the process. But before we get into the strategies, I just want to say that I have never met someone who actually has no audience.  </p>
<p> <a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p>Perhaps you’ve never started a page with this focus, or this niche, but we have connections, and it’s our job to leverage the connections that already exist. I’m here to tell you that ultimately, the number of people in your audience has little to no relationship to the actual amount of sales that you can generate. The number of followers does not matter! It’s about creating the right community that is supportive of where you’re going. So, let’s dive in. </p>
<p> <strong>Episode Highlights </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Where to Find the 1000 People You’re Already Connected To [0:08:28]</li>
  <li>How to Use a Digital Product to Attract and Convert Strangers Into Buyers [0:14:13] </li>
  <li>Getting In Front of the Right People to Build the Visibility You Need [0:18:18] </li>
  <li>Why You Need to Launch and Validate Your Offer Before Building a Low-Priced Digital Product [0:23:18] </li>
  <li>One of My All-Time Favorite Content Strategies [0:29:40] </li>
  <li>Where to Start (And Why it Doesn’t Have to Be So Overwhelming) [0:35:29] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser </strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><u>⁠</u><strong>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</strong><u>⁠</u></a><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"><u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2709</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[830049da-721c-11f0-b7ff-3fdc45adeb6d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1979421845.mp3?updated=1754413660" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>978: How I’m Prepping My Business to Run Without Me (For 7 Days) </title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-im-prepping-my-business-to-run-without-me-for-7-days</link>
      <description>You’re not going to bring your entire wardrobe on a trip, you’re just going to bring what you need! I am leaving the country very soon and I thought I’d show you how I’m preparing my business to run without me while I’m gone. I am headed to the UK for seven days, and I am so excited because I haven’t left the USA in 13 years! 

⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 

Last August, I joined a leadership course, and now we’re all going to the UK together. I’ve known for almost a year now that I am going to be gone for a week, and while I wanted to spend a ton of time preparing my business, I’m 10 days out and realizing that I need to get it together! 

I think we all enter a time in our business where we are excited about stepping away but don’t want to drop the ball. So I’m going to share how I’m (realistically) making it happen for myself and how you can too.  

Episode Highlights 


  “Packing Up” Before I Leave [0:06:16] 

  What I’m “Putting Down” [0:13:04] 

  Packing My “Carry Ons” [0:17:20] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser

⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 07 Aug 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How I’m Prepping My Business to Run Without Me (For 7 Days) </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>978</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3ccca7da-721a-11f0-9f38-37a16481c13c/image/ce33121b688c80243450a66219de7f5d.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>I think we all enter a time in our business where we are excited about stepping away but don’t want to drop the ball. So I’m going to share how I’m (realistically) making it happen for myself and how you can too.  </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You’re not going to bring your entire wardrobe on a trip, you’re just going to bring what you need! I am leaving the country very soon and I thought I’d show you how I’m preparing my business to run without me while I’m gone. I am headed to the UK for seven days, and I am so excited because I haven’t left the USA in 13 years! 

⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 

Last August, I joined a leadership course, and now we’re all going to the UK together. I’ve known for almost a year now that I am going to be gone for a week, and while I wanted to spend a ton of time preparing my business, I’m 10 days out and realizing that I need to get it together! 

I think we all enter a time in our business where we are excited about stepping away but don’t want to drop the ball. So I’m going to share how I’m (realistically) making it happen for myself and how you can too.  

Episode Highlights 


  “Packing Up” Before I Leave [0:06:16] 

  What I’m “Putting Down” [0:13:04] 

  Packing My “Carry Ons” [0:17:20] 


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser

⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You’re not going to bring your entire wardrobe on a trip, you’re just going to bring what you need! I am leaving the country very soon and I thought I’d show you how I’m preparing my business to run without me while I’m gone. I am headed to the UK for seven days, and I am so excited because I haven’t left the USA in 13 years! </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p>Last August, I joined a leadership course, and now we’re all going to the UK together. I’ve known for almost a year now that I am going to be gone for a week, and while I wanted to spend a ton of time preparing my business, I’m 10 days out and realizing that I need to get it together! </p>
<p>I think we all enter a time in our business where we are excited about stepping away but don’t want to drop the ball. So I’m going to share how I’m (realistically) making it happen for myself and how you can too.  </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>“Packing Up” Before I Leave [0:06:16] </li>
  <li>What I’m “Putting Down” [0:13:04] </li>
  <li>Packing My “Carry Ons” [0:17:20] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><u>⁠</u><strong>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</strong><u>⁠</u></a></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1805</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3ccca7da-721a-11f0-9f38-37a16481c13c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5211052963.mp3?updated=1754413617" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>977: Showing Up Mid-Shift &amp; Getting Consistent with Your Content </title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcastshow-up-mid-shift-and-getting-consistent-with-your-content</link>
      <description>Are you evolving in your business but struggling to show up and bring your audience along for the ride? In this live coaching session, I sit down with Latoya Shanell, CEO and Principal Event Strategist of L’ Shanell + Co., to tackle the visibility challenges that come with shifting from corporate clients to serving small businesses. 



⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 

 

Latoya runs an events company producing both small- and large-scale events, primarily for corporate clients. Now, she’s looking to expand her reach and work with more small businesses. In our conversation, we dig into what it really means to show up and how to bring people with you as your business evolves. 



I definitely gave Latoya some tough love, but it’s a powerful reminder for anyone who feels stuck when it comes to showing up online. If you want to be more visible but don’t know where to begin, this episode is full of practical ideas to get you moving. I can’t wait to see what you do with them! 



Episode Highlights 


  Behind the Scenes: Latoya’s National Event Marketing Company &amp; Where She Wants to Go Next [0:01:14]

  Who Latoya Should Really Be Speaking To [0:11:00] 

  How She Can Show Up as the Expert People Need [0:18:18] 

  Homework for Latoya (&amp; You!) [0:28:18] 

  Talking to Different Audiences About the Same Offer [0:32:10] 

  Building an Online Strategy That Fits In With What You’re Already Doing [0:38:41] 

  Why It’s Less About the Platform &amp; All About Where You Spend Your Time [0:43:05] 

  How to Reach All Your Audiences [0:49:45]


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser

⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 05 Aug 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Showing Up Mid-Shift &amp; Getting Consistent with Your Content </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>977</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/787adf3e-7177-11f0-a5ae-4bd19b0afc57/image/7d316168c464ca18d39dba06d1ec1646.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this live coaching session, I sit down with Latoya Shanell, CEO and Principal Event Strategist of L ’ Shanell + Co., to tackle the visibility challenges that come with shifting from corporate clients to serving small businesses.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you evolving in your business but struggling to show up and bring your audience along for the ride? In this live coaching session, I sit down with Latoya Shanell, CEO and Principal Event Strategist of L’ Shanell + Co., to tackle the visibility challenges that come with shifting from corporate clients to serving small businesses. 



⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 

 

Latoya runs an events company producing both small- and large-scale events, primarily for corporate clients. Now, she’s looking to expand her reach and work with more small businesses. In our conversation, we dig into what it really means to show up and how to bring people with you as your business evolves. 



I definitely gave Latoya some tough love, but it’s a powerful reminder for anyone who feels stuck when it comes to showing up online. If you want to be more visible but don’t know where to begin, this episode is full of practical ideas to get you moving. I can’t wait to see what you do with them! 



Episode Highlights 


  Behind the Scenes: Latoya’s National Event Marketing Company &amp; Where She Wants to Go Next [0:01:14]

  Who Latoya Should Really Be Speaking To [0:11:00] 

  How She Can Show Up as the Expert People Need [0:18:18] 

  Homework for Latoya (&amp; You!) [0:28:18] 

  Talking to Different Audiences About the Same Offer [0:32:10] 

  Building an Online Strategy That Fits In With What You’re Already Doing [0:38:41] 

  Why It’s Less About the Platform &amp; All About Where You Spend Your Time [0:43:05] 

  How to Reach All Your Audiences [0:49:45]


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser

⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you evolving in your business but struggling to show up and bring your audience along for the ride? In this live coaching session, I sit down with Latoya Shanell, CEO and Principal Event Strategist of L’ Shanell + Co., to tackle the visibility challenges that come with shifting from corporate clients to serving small businesses. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p> </p>
<p>Latoya runs an events company producing both small- and large-scale events, primarily for corporate clients. Now, she’s looking to expand her reach and work with more small businesses. In our conversation, we dig into what it really means to show up and how to bring people with you as your business evolves. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>I definitely gave Latoya some tough love, but it’s a powerful reminder for anyone who feels stuck when it comes to showing up online. If you want to be more visible but don’t know where to begin, this episode is full of practical ideas to get you moving. I can’t wait to see what you do with them! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Behind the Scenes: Latoya’s National Event Marketing Company &amp; Where She Wants to Go Next [0:01:14]</li>
  <li>Who Latoya Should Really Be Speaking To [0:11:00] </li>
  <li>How She Can Show Up as the Expert People Need [0:18:18] </li>
  <li>Homework for Latoya (&amp; You!) [0:28:18] </li>
  <li>Talking to Different Audiences About the Same Offer [0:32:10] </li>
  <li>Building an Online Strategy That Fits In With What You’re Already Doing [0:38:41] </li>
  <li>Why It’s Less About the Platform &amp; All About Where You Spend Your Time [0:43:05] </li>
  <li>How to Reach All Your Audiences [0:49:45]</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks">⁠<strong>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</strong>⁠</a><strong> </strong></p>
<p> </p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> thestrategyhour.com</a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3495</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[787adf3e-7177-11f0-a5ae-4bd19b0afc57]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE9560082157.mp3?updated=1754342370" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>976: Doing Less Than You’re Capable Of – A Conversation with Jo Espejo on the Branded Impact Podcast</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/doing-less-than-you-are-capable-of-with-jo-espejo</link>
      <description>What is it that you’re ultimately trying to do? What is the legacy you’re trying to create? Considering these things is so important when building your personal brand. Today’s episode is a little bit different. We are flipping the tables as we rerun an interview I had on the Branded Impact Podcast, hosted by Jo Espejo. ⁠⁠⁠The conversation was so good, I want to have it on the Strategy Hour too!

Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 

In this discussion, I explore what it means to do less than you’re capable of, how to know when to quit, the power of personal branding, and how you can build a business that works for you! I really want to hear what you think about this conversation, so please pop me a DM over on Instagram!  

Episode Highlights 


  The Power of Branding Early [0:05:33]  

  What Designing Your Business Around Your Bandwidth Truly Means [0:08:51] 

  Doing Less Than You’re Capable Of [0:17:07] 

  How to Know When to Quit [0:24:07] 

  Pivoting Privately Versus Rebranding Publicly [0:31:42]


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 31 Jul 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Doing Less Than You’re Capable Of – A Conversation with Jo Espejo on the Branded Impact Podcast</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>976</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/850806f4-6d68-11f0-acba-3b958a6ad52e/image/70592433f2168778a6ccfbfb7cc0ac0f.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>What does it means to do less than you’re capable of? How do you  know when to quit? What's the power of personal branding and how you can build a business that works for you?</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What is it that you’re ultimately trying to do? What is the legacy you’re trying to create? Considering these things is so important when building your personal brand. Today’s episode is a little bit different. We are flipping the tables as we rerun an interview I had on the Branded Impact Podcast, hosted by Jo Espejo. ⁠⁠⁠The conversation was so good, I want to have it on the Strategy Hour too!

Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 

In this discussion, I explore what it means to do less than you’re capable of, how to know when to quit, the power of personal branding, and how you can build a business that works for you! I really want to hear what you think about this conversation, so please pop me a DM over on Instagram!  

Episode Highlights 


  The Power of Branding Early [0:05:33]  

  What Designing Your Business Around Your Bandwidth Truly Means [0:08:51] 

  Doing Less Than You’re Capable Of [0:17:07] 

  How to Know When to Quit [0:24:07] 

  Pivoting Privately Versus Rebranding Publicly [0:31:42]


Special Thanks to Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What is it that you’re ultimately trying to do? What is the legacy you’re trying to create? Considering these things is so important when building your personal brand. Today’s episode is a little bit different. We are flipping the tables as we rerun an interview I had on the <a href="https://brandingbyjo.com/thebrandedimpactpodcast"><u>Branded Impact Podcast,</u></a> hosted by Jo Espejo. <a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠⁠</u></a>The conversation was so good, I want to have it on the Strategy Hour too!</p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p>In this discussion, I explore what it means to do less than you’re capable of, how to know when to quit, the power of personal branding, and how you can build a business that works for you! I really want to hear what you think about this conversation, so please pop me a DM over on Instagram!  </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>The Power of Branding Early [0:05:33]  </li>
  <li>What Designing Your Business Around Your Bandwidth Truly Means [0:08:51] </li>
  <li>Doing Less Than You’re Capable Of [0:17:07] </li>
  <li>How to Know When to Quit [0:24:07] </li>
  <li>Pivoting Privately Versus Rebranding Publicly [0:31:42]</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Special Thanks to Our Advertiser</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</strong></a><strong> </strong></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3038</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[850806f4-6d68-11f0-acba-3b958a6ad52e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE2196867371.mp3?updated=1753932401" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>975: Behind the Build: Why I Started 100 Day Visibility School</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-i-started-100-day-visibility-school</link>
      <description>I am posting for 100 days in a row on social media, and I am putting out content that is meant to help people grow their visibility, their followers, their email subscribers, or their buyers. I specifically wanted to put this out into the world so that I could also grow my own list, with the goal of adding 10,000 subscribers in 100 days. Now, this episode is the full behind-the-scenes, why I decided to do it, how it’s different from my 100-Day LinkedIn experiment, and why I’m scared out of my mind. But I’m confident this is exactly what I’m supposed to be doing. 

Leads on Autopilot: How to Get Your First (or Next) 1,000 Subscribers

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



Episode Highlights


  Why I’m Really Doing This: The Ad That Started It All [0:01:35]

  The Intimidation Factor: Showing Up, Being Seen, and Respecting the Life that You Want [0:04:22]

  What Made Me Choose the Topic and Why It’s Going to Help You [0:12:35]

  The Not-So-Secret Formula I Landed On for My 100-Day Series [0:24:38] 

  How I’m Creating Accountability (And How You’re a Part of That!) [0:28:11] 

  Why I’m Not Just Trying to Grow 50000 Subscribers [0:30:56]


Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months

 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 29 Jul 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Behind the Build: Why I Started 100 Day Visibility School</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>975</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/33421a4c-6bf8-11f0-95d3-47b4a11d450e/image/8421730e310619cc3e7413ed1dbbbec5.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>I am posting for 100 days in a row on social media, and I am putting out content that is meant to help people grow their visibility, their followers, their email subscribers, or their buyers.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I am posting for 100 days in a row on social media, and I am putting out content that is meant to help people grow their visibility, their followers, their email subscribers, or their buyers. I specifically wanted to put this out into the world so that I could also grow my own list, with the goal of adding 10,000 subscribers in 100 days. Now, this episode is the full behind-the-scenes, why I decided to do it, how it’s different from my 100-Day LinkedIn experiment, and why I’m scared out of my mind. But I’m confident this is exactly what I’m supposed to be doing. 

Leads on Autopilot: How to Get Your First (or Next) 1,000 Subscribers

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



Episode Highlights


  Why I’m Really Doing This: The Ad That Started It All [0:01:35]

  The Intimidation Factor: Showing Up, Being Seen, and Respecting the Life that You Want [0:04:22]

  What Made Me Choose the Topic and Why It’s Going to Help You [0:12:35]

  The Not-So-Secret Formula I Landed On for My 100-Day Series [0:24:38] 

  How I’m Creating Accountability (And How You’re a Part of That!) [0:28:11] 

  Why I’m Not Just Trying to Grow 50000 Subscribers [0:30:56]


Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months

 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I am posting for 100 days in a row on social media, and I am putting out content that is meant to help people grow their visibility, their followers, their email subscribers, or their buyers. I specifically wanted to put this out into the world so that I could also grow my own list, with the goal of adding 10,000 subscribers in 100 days. Now, this episode is the full behind-the-scenes, why I decided to do it, how it’s different from my 100-Day LinkedIn experiment, and why I’m scared out of my mind. But I’m confident this is exactly what I’m supposed to be doing. </p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/1000"><u>Leads on Autopilot: How to Get Your First (or Next) 1,000 Subscribers</u></a></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Why I’m Really Doing This: The Ad That Started It All [0:01:35]</li>
  <li>The Intimidation Factor: Showing Up, Being Seen, and Respecting the Life that You Want [0:04:22]</li>
  <li>What Made Me Choose the Topic and Why It’s Going to Help You [0:12:35]</li>
  <li>The Not-So-Secret Formula I Landed On for My 100-Day Series [0:24:38] </li>
  <li>How I’m Creating Accountability (And How You’re a Part of That!) [0:28:11] </li>
  <li>Why I’m Not Just Trying to Grow 50000 Subscribers [0:30:56]</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</strong></a><strong> </strong>– Get 50% Off for 6 Months</p>
<p> </p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2331</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[33421a4c-6bf8-11f0-95d3-47b4a11d450e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE3707757918.mp3?updated=1753921041" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>974: Why Dreaming Small is the New Power Move</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/why-dreaming-small-is-the-new-power-move</link>
      <description>I’m sure you’ve heard “go big or go home” before. But what if the real flex was going small and staying home on purpose? I used to chase more because I thought that more was always better, and it almost completely broke me. Today, I’m going to help you reframe success and show you why dreaming smaller might actually lead to more money, more impact, and a life you can’t wait to wake up to!

⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 

Ever since I started my business, there has been a cultural obsession with hustling. I want you to ask yourself if always pursuing more is doing more harm than good. You are so capable of crushing so many dreams and doing more than a lot of people could ever even dream of. But just because you can, doesn’t mean you should. If you keep giving so much of yourself away, you will have nothing left. Let’s dive in!  

Episode Highlights


  The Dangers of Hustle Culture. [0:05:12]  

  Why Small Doesn’t Equal Insignificant. [0:09:33] 

  You Are Not the Product! [0:15:21] 

  Redefining YOUR American Dream. [0:19:23] 


Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 24 Jul 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why Dreaming Small is the New Power Move</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>975</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d96599ea-672e-11f0-9fc0-e3886356a13a/image/4aa8b92ec40295bd0746395cfec5fcce.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Ther is a cultural obsession with hustling. I want you to ask yourself if always pursuing more is doing more harm than good. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’m sure you’ve heard “go big or go home” before. But what if the real flex was going small and staying home on purpose? I used to chase more because I thought that more was always better, and it almost completely broke me. Today, I’m going to help you reframe success and show you why dreaming smaller might actually lead to more money, more impact, and a life you can’t wait to wake up to!

⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 

Ever since I started my business, there has been a cultural obsession with hustling. I want you to ask yourself if always pursuing more is doing more harm than good. You are so capable of crushing so many dreams and doing more than a lot of people could ever even dream of. But just because you can, doesn’t mean you should. If you keep giving so much of yourself away, you will have nothing left. Let’s dive in!  

Episode Highlights


  The Dangers of Hustle Culture. [0:05:12]  

  Why Small Doesn’t Equal Insignificant. [0:09:33] 

  You Are Not the Product! [0:15:21] 

  Redefining YOUR American Dream. [0:19:23] 


Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’m sure you’ve heard “go big or go home” before. But what if the real flex was going small and staying home on purpose? I used to chase more because I thought that more was always better, and it almost completely broke me. Today, I’m going to help you reframe success and show you why dreaming smaller might actually lead to more money, more impact, and a life you can’t wait to wake up to!</p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p>Ever since I started my business, there has been a cultural obsession with hustling. I want you to ask yourself if always pursuing more is doing more harm than good. You are so capable of crushing so many dreams and doing more than a lot of people could ever even dream of. But just because you can, doesn’t mean you should. If you keep giving so much of yourself away, you will have nothing left. Let’s dive in!  </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>The Dangers of Hustle Culture. [0:05:12]  </li>
  <li>Why Small <em>Doesn’t</em> Equal Insignificant. [0:09:33] </li>
  <li>You Are Not the Product! [0:15:21] </li>
  <li>Redefining <em>YOUR</em> American Dream. [0:19:23] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</strong></a><strong> – Get 50% Off for 6 Months</strong></p>
<p><br>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1947</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d96599ea-672e-11f0-9fc0-e3886356a13a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE9396849326.mp3?updated=1753968966" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>973: I’m Writing a Book—and It Might Be the Dumbest Smart Thing I’ve Ever Done </title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/i-am-writing-a-book</link>
      <description>For as long as I can remember, I have always wanted to write a book! It feels weird to say out loud, but I know that by sharing this with you, I will also hold myself accountable and publish this thing. I’ve had a few books stewing around in my brain for a few years now. But, after taking a swing at a partnered brand deal a few years ago and deciding it wasn’t the right fit for my first book, I’ve been a bit deflated. But people like Justin Moore, who wrote Sponsor Magnet, and Jay Clouse, whom I hosted for a super inspiring conversation and is in the throes of writing his own conversation, have helped me to reconsider. Let’s get into it! 

⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



Episode Highlights


  Why I’m Choosing Traditional Publishing (Even Though I Could Self-Publish Tomorrow) [0:09:04]  

  What I’ve Learned From Years of Online Business [0:18:20] 

  The One Thing All My Favorite Books Have in Common [0:28:49] 

  What’s Next for Me on My Book-Writing Journey [0:34:50] 

  Why a Proposal is so Much More Than a Description of Your Book [0:34:50] 


Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 22 Jul 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>I’m Writing a Book—and It Might Be the Dumbest Smart Thing I’ve Ever Done </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>973</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/16c8e7ae-6673-11f0-96d2-2f2503196a3a/image/0e8f5713f7a943af8e6c0d2df333865e.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>For as long as I can remember, I have always wanted to write a book! It feels weird to say out loud, but I know that by sharing this with you, I will also hold myself accountable and publish this thing. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>For as long as I can remember, I have always wanted to write a book! It feels weird to say out loud, but I know that by sharing this with you, I will also hold myself accountable and publish this thing. I’ve had a few books stewing around in my brain for a few years now. But, after taking a swing at a partnered brand deal a few years ago and deciding it wasn’t the right fit for my first book, I’ve been a bit deflated. But people like Justin Moore, who wrote Sponsor Magnet, and Jay Clouse, whom I hosted for a super inspiring conversation and is in the throes of writing his own conversation, have helped me to reconsider. Let’s get into it! 

⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



Episode Highlights


  Why I’m Choosing Traditional Publishing (Even Though I Could Self-Publish Tomorrow) [0:09:04]  

  What I’ve Learned From Years of Online Business [0:18:20] 

  The One Thing All My Favorite Books Have in Common [0:28:49] 

  What’s Next for Me on My Book-Writing Journey [0:34:50] 

  Why a Proposal is so Much More Than a Description of Your Book [0:34:50] 


Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For as long as I can remember, I have always wanted to write a book! It feels weird to say out loud, but I know that by sharing this with you, I will also hold myself accountable and publish this thing. I’ve had a few books stewing around in my brain for a few years now. But, after taking a swing at a partnered brand deal a few years ago and deciding it wasn’t the right fit for my first book, I’ve been a bit deflated. But people like Justin Moore, who wrote <em>Sponsor Magnet, </em>and Jay Clouse, whom I hosted for a super inspiring conversation and is in the throes of writing his own conversation, have helped me to reconsider. Let’s get into it! </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Why I’m Choosing Traditional Publishing (Even Though I Could Self-Publish Tomorrow) [0:09:04]  </li>
  <li>What I’ve Learned From Years of Online Business [0:18:20] </li>
  <li>The One Thing All My Favorite Books Have in Common [0:28:49] </li>
  <li>What’s Next for Me on My Book-Writing Journey [0:34:50] </li>
  <li>Why a Proposal is so Much More Than a Description of Your Book [0:34:50] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</strong></a><strong> – Get 50% Off for 6 Months</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p>
<p><br></p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2915</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[16c8e7ae-6673-11f0-96d2-2f2503196a3a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE8395467218.mp3?updated=1753916801" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>972: The Future of Search: SEO vs LLM Optimization with Sam Dunning </title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-future-of-search-seo-vs-llm-optimization-with-sam-dunning</link>
      <description>Is traditional SEO dead, or just evolving? If you’re wondering how the rise of large language models (LLMs) like ChatGPT and AI-powered search features is changing the rules, you’re not alone! That’s why I brought in Sam Dunning, founder of Breaking B2B and host of the Breaking B2B Podcast, to help us decode what’s happening and how you can adapt. 

⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 

Episode Highlights


  Why SEO Still Matters (But Not for Everyone). [0:05:52]  

  How to Stop Falling into the Traffic Trap. [0:09:40] 

  The “Money Keyword” Matrix. [0:13:05] 

  What AI Search Really Means for You. [0:16:30]

  Harnessing Speed as Your Superpower. [0:27:05] 

  Why Resonating with Your Dream Client is Still #1. [0:30:00] 


Sam breaks down why SEO isn’t always the right investment (yep, you heard that right), how to prioritize high-intent content, and why speed is your superpower as a small business. Want to demystify the new rules of search, break down how to build a future-proof SEO strategy, and reveal why speed and specificity might be your biggest competitive advantages? Stay tuned! 

Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 17 Jul 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Future of Search: SEO vs LLM Optimization with Sam Dunning</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>972</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f0164c56-627a-11f0-846c-fb362097f6f2/image/b1839f25c7b166f55bd8eaea51dcc088.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Is traditional SEO dead, or just evolving? If you’re wondering how the rise of large language models (LLMs) like ChatGPT and AI-powered search features is changing the rules, you’re not alone!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Is traditional SEO dead, or just evolving? If you’re wondering how the rise of large language models (LLMs) like ChatGPT and AI-powered search features is changing the rules, you’re not alone! That’s why I brought in Sam Dunning, founder of Breaking B2B and host of the Breaking B2B Podcast, to help us decode what’s happening and how you can adapt. 

⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 

Episode Highlights


  Why SEO Still Matters (But Not for Everyone). [0:05:52]  

  How to Stop Falling into the Traffic Trap. [0:09:40] 

  The “Money Keyword” Matrix. [0:13:05] 

  What AI Search Really Means for You. [0:16:30]

  Harnessing Speed as Your Superpower. [0:27:05] 

  Why Resonating with Your Dream Client is Still #1. [0:30:00] 


Sam breaks down why SEO isn’t always the right investment (yep, you heard that right), how to prioritize high-intent content, and why speed is your superpower as a small business. Want to demystify the new rules of search, break down how to build a future-proof SEO strategy, and reveal why speed and specificity might be your biggest competitive advantages? Stay tuned! 

Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Is traditional SEO dead, or just evolving? If you’re wondering how the rise of large language models (LLMs) like ChatGPT and AI-powered search features is changing the rules, you’re not alone! That’s why I brought in Sam Dunning, founder of <a href="https://www.breakingb2b.com/"><u>Breaking B2B</u></a> and host of the Breaking B2B Podcast, to help us decode what’s happening and how you can adapt. </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Why SEO Still Matters (But Not for Everyone). [0:05:52]  </li>
  <li>How to Stop Falling into the Traffic Trap. [0:09:40] </li>
  <li>The “Money Keyword” Matrix. [0:13:05] </li>
  <li>What AI Search Really Means for You. [0:16:30]</li>
  <li>Harnessing Speed as Your Superpower. [0:27:05] </li>
  <li>Why Resonating with Your Dream Client is Still #1. [0:30:00] </li>
</ul>
<p>Sam breaks down why SEO isn’t always the right investment (yep, you heard that right), how to prioritize high-intent content, and why speed is your superpower as a small business. Want to demystify the new rules of search, break down how to build a future-proof SEO strategy, and reveal why speed and specificity might be your biggest competitive advantages? Stay tuned! </p>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks">FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</a> – Get 50% Off for 6 Months</p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p>
<p><br></p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2421</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f0164c56-627a-11f0-846c-fb362097f6f2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE8004669182.mp3?updated=1771704435" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>971: My 100-Day LinkedIn Experiment: My Growth Strategy</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/my-100-day-linkedin-experiment</link>
      <description>I’m 28 days into a 100-working-day LinkedIn experiment, and I’ve already learned so much! In this episode, I break down exactly what I’ve done so far: how I updated my profile to attract the right audience, how I’m structuring my posts for engagement, what type of content is actually landing, and how I’m coming up with fresh ideas daily without burning out or overthinking. 

I also share the unexpected wins that came from simply showing up, from weekly podcast invites to new genuine relationships, a 16.8% bump in followers, and over 21,000 impressions. I haven’t gone viral, but that’s kind of the point. This is about building sustainable visibility, not chasing quick hits. 

⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

LinkedIn

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 

If you’re curious about what’s really working on LinkedIn right now and want some practical ideas to try for yourself, this one’s for you! 

Episode Highlights


  Starting a 100-Day LinkedIn Experiment Without Expectations [0:00:19]  

  The Unexpected Benefits of LinkedIn Consistency [0:04:49] 

  What Makes Content Perform on LinkedIn [0:08:12] 

  Optimizing My LinkedIn Profile for Real Growth [0:16:10]

  Building a Content Strategy That Works [0:23:41]

  How I Use ChatGPT to Brainstorm Infinite Content Ideas [0:34:11] 

  A Final Reminder About Bandwidth and Focus [0:39:40] 


Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠   

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 15 Jul 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>My 100-Day LinkedIn Experiment: My Growth Strategy</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>971</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/70195252-60e8-11f0-b6b4-0b7651942ac3/image/121cf40e7402f737b6ca8fe5fc4b1e73.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, I share the behind-the-scenes of my first 28 days in a 100-day LinkedIn experiment; what’s working, what I’ve learned, and how consistent, intentional posting is leading to real growth without burnout or virality.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’m 28 days into a 100-working-day LinkedIn experiment, and I’ve already learned so much! In this episode, I break down exactly what I’ve done so far: how I updated my profile to attract the right audience, how I’m structuring my posts for engagement, what type of content is actually landing, and how I’m coming up with fresh ideas daily without burning out or overthinking. 

I also share the unexpected wins that came from simply showing up, from weekly podcast invites to new genuine relationships, a 16.8% bump in followers, and over 21,000 impressions. I haven’t gone viral, but that’s kind of the point. This is about building sustainable visibility, not chasing quick hits. 

⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

LinkedIn

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 

If you’re curious about what’s really working on LinkedIn right now and want some practical ideas to try for yourself, this one’s for you! 

Episode Highlights


  Starting a 100-Day LinkedIn Experiment Without Expectations [0:00:19]  

  The Unexpected Benefits of LinkedIn Consistency [0:04:49] 

  What Makes Content Perform on LinkedIn [0:08:12] 

  Optimizing My LinkedIn Profile for Real Growth [0:16:10]

  Building a Content Strategy That Works [0:23:41]

  How I Use ChatGPT to Brainstorm Infinite Content Ideas [0:34:11] 

  A Final Reminder About Bandwidth and Focus [0:39:40] 


Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠   

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’m 28 days into a 100-working-day LinkedIn experiment, and I’ve already learned so much! In this episode, I break down exactly what I’ve done so far: how I updated my profile to attract the right audience, how I’m structuring my posts for engagement, what type of content is actually landing, and how I’m coming up with fresh ideas daily without burning out or overthinking. </p>
<p>I also share the unexpected wins that came from simply showing up, from weekly podcast invites to new genuine relationships, a 16.8% bump in followers, and over 21,000 impressions. I haven’t gone viral, but that’s kind of the point. This is about building sustainable visibility, not chasing quick hits. </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/abagailsays/"><u>LinkedIn</u></a></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p>If you’re curious about what’s <em>really</em> working on LinkedIn right now and want some practical ideas to try for yourself, this one’s for you! </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Starting a 100-Day LinkedIn Experiment Without Expectations [0:00:19]  </li>
  <li>The Unexpected Benefits of LinkedIn Consistency [0:04:49] </li>
  <li>What Makes Content Perform on LinkedIn [0:08:12] </li>
  <li>Optimizing My LinkedIn Profile for Real Growth [0:16:10]</li>
  <li>Building a Content Strategy That Works [0:23:41]</li>
  <li>How I Use ChatGPT to Brainstorm Infinite Content Ideas [0:34:11] </li>
  <li>A Final Reminder About Bandwidth and Focus [0:39:40] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><u>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</u></a>   </p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p>
<p><br></p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2804</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[70195252-60e8-11f0-b6b4-0b7651942ac3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE3205266141.mp3?updated=1753968497" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>970: Part 4 - The Exit Ramp to Your Scaleable Offer Suite™</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/part-4-the-exit-ramp-to-your-scaleable-offer-suite</link>
      <description>In the final installment of The Accelerator Series, we talk through the Sustainability Stack a practical, repeatable system for building a business that generates income without burning you out. If you’ve been craving structure, alignment, and breathing room in your business, this episode is your exit ramp from the hustle-fueled Cycle of Doom™. You’ll learn how to align your strategy, sales, and systems so your business can scale without sacrificing your peace, energy, or priorities.

⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠⁠  ⁠⁠⁠⁠

Episode Highlights 


  Learn how to grow without giving up your health or freedom

  Map out a scalable offer suite using our 3-stage model

  Discover how systems create time, margin, and repeatable results

  Get clear on what to tweak, automate, or toss entirely


Our Advertiser

⁠⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to⁠ ⁠⁠thestrategyhour.com⁠.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 10 Jul 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Part 4 - The Exit Ramp to Your Scaleable Offer Suite™</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>968</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/e3b4c8d0-5cf2-11f0-a596-1790ccc7fb04/image/72fce0a0b74aae0f576cfcf6d9adf195.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Build a business that grows with you—not at your expense.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In the final installment of The Accelerator Series, we talk through the Sustainability Stack a practical, repeatable system for building a business that generates income without burning you out. If you’ve been craving structure, alignment, and breathing room in your business, this episode is your exit ramp from the hustle-fueled Cycle of Doom™. You’ll learn how to align your strategy, sales, and systems so your business can scale without sacrificing your peace, energy, or priorities.

⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠⁠  ⁠⁠⁠⁠

Episode Highlights 


  Learn how to grow without giving up your health or freedom

  Map out a scalable offer suite using our 3-stage model

  Discover how systems create time, margin, and repeatable results

  Get clear on what to tweak, automate, or toss entirely


Our Advertiser

⁠⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to⁠ ⁠⁠thestrategyhour.com⁠.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In the final installment of <em>The Accelerator Series</em>, we talk through the Sustainability Stack<strong> </strong>a practical, repeatable system for building a business that generates income without burning you out. If you’ve been craving structure, alignment, and breathing room in your business, this episode is your exit ramp from the hustle-fueled Cycle of Doom™. You’ll learn how to align your strategy, sales, and systems so your business can scale without sacrificing your peace, energy, or priorities.</p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">⁠⁠⁠<u>Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u>⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠</a></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong>⁠⁠<strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong>⁠⁠</p>
<p><a href="instagram.com/abagailsays">⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠<u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u>⁠⁠⁠⁠<u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u>⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠</a></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠<u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u>⁠⁠  ⁠⁠⁠⁠</a></p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Learn how to grow <em>without</em> giving up your health or freedom</li>
  <li>Map out a scalable offer suite using our 3-stage model</li>
  <li>Discover how systems create time, margin, and repeatable results</li>
  <li>Get clear on what to tweak, automate, or toss entirely</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks">⁠⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</a></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to⁠ <a href="thestrategyhour.com%E2%81%A0.">⁠⁠thestrategyhour.com⁠.</a></p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>980</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e3b4c8d0-5cf2-11f0-a596-1790ccc7fb04]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6263105922.mp3?updated=1752183536" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>969: Part 3 - How I Stopped Being the Product</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/part-3-how-i-stopped-being-the-product</link>
      <description>In Part 3 of The Accelerator Series, we unpack the most powerful shift a business owner can make: detaching their identity from their work and finally stopping being the product. If your business relies on you to function, deliver, and earn then this episode will help you reclaim your time, redefine your value, and restructure your offers.

⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠⁠  

Learn the 3 critical mindset and operational shifts you must make to stop trading time for money and start building scalable systems that deliver transformation without burning you out.

Episode Highlights


  Shift from service provider to strategist

  Build a business that works without your constant presence

  Detach your self-worth from client results and revenue

  Learn the psychology-backed process to systematize your expertise


This is how real freedom starts.  Check out the Accelerator inside the Co-op!

Our Advertiser

FreshBooks

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to⁠ thestrategyhour.com⁠.






Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 09 Jul 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Part 3 - How I Stopped Being the Product</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>969</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/6e1dad20-5c7b-11f0-be39-e3769e4b91bd/image/39ce9cd04301410769f90c3357050305.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>You are not your business. You’re the visionary behind it.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In Part 3 of The Accelerator Series, we unpack the most powerful shift a business owner can make: detaching their identity from their work and finally stopping being the product. If your business relies on you to function, deliver, and earn then this episode will help you reclaim your time, redefine your value, and restructure your offers.

⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠⁠  

Learn the 3 critical mindset and operational shifts you must make to stop trading time for money and start building scalable systems that deliver transformation without burning you out.

Episode Highlights


  Shift from service provider to strategist

  Build a business that works without your constant presence

  Detach your self-worth from client results and revenue

  Learn the psychology-backed process to systematize your expertise


This is how real freedom starts.  Check out the Accelerator inside the Co-op!

Our Advertiser

FreshBooks

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to⁠ thestrategyhour.com⁠.






Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In Part 3 of <em>The Accelerator Series</em>, we unpack the most powerful shift a business owner can make: detaching their identity from their work and finally <em>stopping</em> being the product. If your business relies on you to function, deliver, and earn then this episode will help you reclaim your time, redefine your value, and restructure your offers.</p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">⁠<u>Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u>⁠⁠ </a></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong>⁠⁠<strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong>⁠⁠</p>
<p><a href="instagram.com/abagailsays">⁠⁠<u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u>⁠⁠⁠⁠<u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u>⁠⁠ </a></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">⁠⁠<u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u>⁠⁠  </a></p>
<p>Learn the 3 critical mindset and operational shifts you must make to stop trading time for money and start building scalable systems that deliver transformation without burning you out.</p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Shift from service provider to strategist</li>
  <li>Build a business that works <em>without</em> your constant presence</li>
  <li>Detach your self-worth from client results and revenue</li>
  <li>Learn the psychology-backed process to systematize your expertise</li>
</ul>
<p>This is how real freedom starts.  Check out the Accelerator inside <a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">the Co-op!</a></p>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks">FreshBooks</a></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to⁠ thestrategyhour.com⁠.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>880</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6e1dad20-5c7b-11f0-be39-e3769e4b91bd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6244750921.mp3?updated=1752074477" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>968: Part 2 - What If You’re Building the Wrong Business?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/part-2-what-if-you-are-building-the-wrong-business</link>
      <description>Part 2 of The Accelerator Series, we reveal the Clarity Filter™ as the exact method to help entrepreneurs make decisions from alignment, not pressure. If you’ve ever felt stuck, burnt out, or tempted to burn it all down, this episode is your lifeline. Learn how to evaluate your offers, set sustainable boundaries, and build a business that actually works for you. No more guessing. No more overcommitting. Just simple, aligned, strategic growth.



⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠⁠  



Episode Highlights


  Learn to protect your time, energy, and values

  Make confident business decisions without second-guessing

  Get unstuck and unlock momentum


Our Advertiser

⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠  



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to⁠ thestrategyhour.com⁠. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 08 Jul 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Part 2 - What If You’re Building the Wrong Business?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>968</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/6fee1ecc-5baa-11f0-b7d9-8be6de2374c9/image/6b20dc8de3b2f9a1d3aef39a96151ad9.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Stop spinning your wheels. Start making aligned decisions.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Part 2 of The Accelerator Series, we reveal the Clarity Filter™ as the exact method to help entrepreneurs make decisions from alignment, not pressure. If you’ve ever felt stuck, burnt out, or tempted to burn it all down, this episode is your lifeline. Learn how to evaluate your offers, set sustainable boundaries, and build a business that actually works for you. No more guessing. No more overcommitting. Just simple, aligned, strategic growth.



⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠⁠⁠  



Episode Highlights


  Learn to protect your time, energy, and values

  Make confident business decisions without second-guessing

  Get unstuck and unlock momentum


Our Advertiser

⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠⁠  



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to⁠ thestrategyhour.com⁠. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Part 2 of <em>The Accelerator Series</em>, we reveal the Clarity Filter™ as the exact method to help entrepreneurs make decisions from alignment, not pressure. If you’ve ever felt stuck, burnt out, or tempted to burn it all down, this episode is your lifeline. Learn how to evaluate your offers, set sustainable boundaries, and build a business that actually works <em>for you</em>. No more guessing. No more overcommitting. Just simple, aligned, strategic growth.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">⁠<u>Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u>⁠⁠</a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">⁠⁠<strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong>⁠⁠</a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">⁠⁠<u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u>⁠⁠</a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">⁠⁠<u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u>⁠⁠</a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">⁠⁠<u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u>⁠⁠</a>  </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Learn to protect your time, energy, and values</li>
  <li>Make confident business decisions without second-guessing</li>
  <li>Get unstuck and unlock momentum</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks">⁠<u>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</u>⁠</a>  </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">⁠ <u>thestrategyhour.com</u>⁠</a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1137</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6fee1ecc-5baa-11f0-b7d9-8be6de2374c9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE3857268378.mp3?updated=1751987085" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>967: Part 1-Why Working Harder Isn’t Working</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/part-1-why-working-harder-is-not-working</link>
      <description>Working harder isn’t working and deep down, you already know it.
In this raw and honest episode, Abagail Pumphrey pulls back the curtain on the hidden costs of hustle culture and why the “do more to earn more” mindset is breaking your business (and your body). If you’re stuck in the Cycle of Doom, constantly launching, grinding, and barely keeping up this is your wake-up call. Learn why burnout isn’t your fault, how the current business model wasn’t built for your life, and what sustainable success actually looks like. 



⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



This is part one of our powerful new series inside the Co-op Accelerator—designed to help you simplify your offers, increase your income, and finally breathe again.



Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠  



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 07 Jul 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Part 1-Why Working Harder Isn’t Working</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>941</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/40e55a3c-5aa6-11f0-a63c-a71f01b4200f/image/7e7bd23781e1419f99fdd76126420fcf.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>The real reason your business feels unsustainable and how to finally break free from the burnout loop.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Working harder isn’t working and deep down, you already know it.
In this raw and honest episode, Abagail Pumphrey pulls back the curtain on the hidden costs of hustle culture and why the “do more to earn more” mindset is breaking your business (and your body). If you’re stuck in the Cycle of Doom, constantly launching, grinding, and barely keeping up this is your wake-up call. Learn why burnout isn’t your fault, how the current business model wasn’t built for your life, and what sustainable success actually looks like. 



⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



This is part one of our powerful new series inside the Co-op Accelerator—designed to help you simplify your offers, increase your income, and finally breathe again.



Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠  



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>Working harder isn’t working and deep down, you already know it.</strong><br>
In this raw and honest episode, Abagail Pumphrey pulls back the curtain on the hidden costs of hustle culture and why the “do more to earn more” mindset is breaking your business (and your body). If you’re stuck in the Cycle of Doom, constantly launching, grinding, and barely keeping up this is your wake-up call. Learn why burnout isn’t your fault, how the current business model wasn’t built for your life, and what sustainable success <em>actually</em> looks like. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>This is part one of our powerful new series inside the <em>Co-op Accelerator</em>—designed to help you simplify your offers, increase your income, and finally breathe again.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><u>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</u></a>  </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. <br></p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1549</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[40e55a3c-5aa6-11f0-a63c-a71f01b4200f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE8702200422.mp3?updated=1751833751" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>966: Can I Really Replace My 1:1 Income with Courses or Digital Products?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/can-i-really-replace-my-1-on-1-income-with-courses-or-digital-products</link>
      <description>Can you really replace your one-on-one income with courses or digital products? It’s a question that many creators have been contending with for a while now, and if you ask the wrong people, they might just try to sell you on a false vision. So, today, I dig into this topic and separate fact from fiction! 



⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠  



Tuning in, you’ll learn what the transition to digital looked like for me. Spoiler alert: it wasn’t smooth or perfect! I break down the real numbers behind building sustainable digital income, how my business evolved over time, and what I wish more people understood about this journey. If you’ve been wondering whether digital products should be your next move or how to make them work without burning out, this conversation is for you. Let’s dive in! 



Episode Highlights


  My Transition to Digital Products [0:01:17] 

  Diversifying Your Income Beyond Digital Products [0:04:23] 

  The Real Work Behind Digital Products [0:06:26] 

  Why You Don’t Need a Huge Audience [0:10:11] 

  Three Approaches To Digital Products [0:13:10] 

  You Don’t Need The Perfect Business Plan [0:24:05] 


Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠  



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 03 Jul 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Can I Really Replace My 1:1 Income with Courses or Digital Products?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>966</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ce3e73ca-577a-11f0-a171-c312a210d3b0/image/d0a366a7fbcee028fc7c78c0e4c127b4.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Can you really replace your one-on-one income with courses or digital products? Many creators have been contending with this question for a while and they might have been sold a false vision.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Can you really replace your one-on-one income with courses or digital products? It’s a question that many creators have been contending with for a while now, and if you ask the wrong people, they might just try to sell you on a false vision. So, today, I dig into this topic and separate fact from fiction! 



⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠  



Tuning in, you’ll learn what the transition to digital looked like for me. Spoiler alert: it wasn’t smooth or perfect! I break down the real numbers behind building sustainable digital income, how my business evolved over time, and what I wish more people understood about this journey. If you’ve been wondering whether digital products should be your next move or how to make them work without burning out, this conversation is for you. Let’s dive in! 



Episode Highlights


  My Transition to Digital Products [0:01:17] 

  Diversifying Your Income Beyond Digital Products [0:04:23] 

  The Real Work Behind Digital Products [0:06:26] 

  Why You Don’t Need a Huge Audience [0:10:11] 

  Three Approaches To Digital Products [0:13:10] 

  You Don’t Need The Perfect Business Plan [0:24:05] 


Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠  



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Can you really replace your one-on-one income with courses or digital products? It’s a question that many creators have been contending with for a while now, and if you ask the wrong people, they might just try to sell you on a false vision. So, today, I dig into this topic and separate fact from fiction! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a>  </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Tuning in, you’ll learn what the transition to digital looked like for me. Spoiler alert: it wasn’t smooth or perfect! I break down the real numbers behind building sustainable digital income, how my business evolved over time, and what I wish more people understood about this journey. If you’ve been wondering whether digital products should be your next move or how to make them work without burning out, this conversation is for you. Let’s dive in! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>My Transition to Digital Products [0:01:17] </li>
  <li>Diversifying Your Income Beyond Digital Products [0:04:23] </li>
  <li>The Real Work Behind Digital Products [0:06:26] </li>
  <li>Why You Don’t Need a Huge Audience [0:10:11] </li>
  <li>Three Approaches To Digital Products [0:13:10] </li>
  <li>You Don’t Need The Perfect Business Plan [0:24:05] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><u>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</u></a>  </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2233</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ce3e73ca-577a-11f0-a171-c312a210d3b0]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5149255757.mp3?updated=1753968752" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>965: How to Build a Magnetic Personal Brand on LinkedIn (a.k.a. The Briefcase App) with Jayde I. Powell</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-build-a-magnetic-personal-brand-on-linedin-with-jayde-i-powell  </link>
      <description>Forget everything you thought you knew about LinkedIn. Jayde I. Powell is here to flip the script and blow your mind! A powerhouse creator and the brilliant mind behind standout campaigns for global brands like Netflix, Timberland, and Coca-Cola, you might know her as the vibrant voice behind Creator Tea Talk, or from her refreshingly real, fun, and magnetic presence on LinkedIn, the app she affectionately renamed The Briefcase App.  



⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠  



During this conversation, she gives us her absolute best insights on how to build a magnetic personal brand, attract dream opportunities, and transform your LinkedIn presence from boring to binge-worthy. Whether you’ve slept on LinkedIn or you’re ready to level up, Jayde’s energy, expertise, and no-BS approach to social media is going to leave you buzzing, inspired, and ready to post. Let’s dive in! 

Episode Highlights


  Jayde’s Journey to LinkedIn and the Choices Behind Her Success [0:01:13]  

  Secrets to Creating Thumb-Stopping Content [0:11:28] 

  The Ratio That’s Fueled Her LinkedIn Creator Career [0:19:40] 

  One Unnecessary Thing People Keep Doing Wrong on LinkedIn [0:24:52] 

  Where LinkedIn Has Surprised Jayde the Most [0:35:19] 


Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠   



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 Jul 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Build a Magnetic Personal Brand on LinkedIn (a.k.a. The Briefcase App) with Jayde I. Powell</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>965</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/8346fd2c-55ce-11f0-908a-7f2716dcddc6/image/b34fe9fbdb9c013303de66592c397a99.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Think LinkedIn is boring? Think again. Jayde I. Powell joins us to share her no-BS, high-energy take on building a personal brand that pops, creating thumb-stopping content, and turning LinkedIn into your most powerful platform.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Forget everything you thought you knew about LinkedIn. Jayde I. Powell is here to flip the script and blow your mind! A powerhouse creator and the brilliant mind behind standout campaigns for global brands like Netflix, Timberland, and Coca-Cola, you might know her as the vibrant voice behind Creator Tea Talk, or from her refreshingly real, fun, and magnetic presence on LinkedIn, the app she affectionately renamed The Briefcase App.  



⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠  



During this conversation, she gives us her absolute best insights on how to build a magnetic personal brand, attract dream opportunities, and transform your LinkedIn presence from boring to binge-worthy. Whether you’ve slept on LinkedIn or you’re ready to level up, Jayde’s energy, expertise, and no-BS approach to social media is going to leave you buzzing, inspired, and ready to post. Let’s dive in! 

Episode Highlights


  Jayde’s Journey to LinkedIn and the Choices Behind Her Success [0:01:13]  

  Secrets to Creating Thumb-Stopping Content [0:11:28] 

  The Ratio That’s Fueled Her LinkedIn Creator Career [0:19:40] 

  One Unnecessary Thing People Keep Doing Wrong on LinkedIn [0:24:52] 

  Where LinkedIn Has Surprised Jayde the Most [0:35:19] 


Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠   



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Forget everything you thought you knew about LinkedIn. <a href="https://www.jaydeipowell.com/%20">Jayde I. Powell</a> is here to flip the script and blow your mind! A powerhouse creator and the brilliant mind behind standout campaigns for global brands like Netflix, Timberland, and Coca-Cola, you might know her as the vibrant voice behind Creator Tea Talk, or from her refreshingly real, fun, and magnetic presence on LinkedIn, the app she affectionately renamed The Briefcase App.  </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a>  </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>During this conversation, she gives us her absolute best insights on how to build a magnetic personal brand, attract dream opportunities, and transform your LinkedIn presence from boring to binge-worthy. Whether you’ve slept on LinkedIn or you’re ready to level up, Jayde’s energy, expertise, and no-BS approach to social media is going to leave you buzzing, inspired, and ready to post. Let’s dive in! </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Jayde’s Journey to LinkedIn and the Choices Behind Her Success [0:01:13]  </li>
  <li>Secrets to Creating Thumb-Stopping Content [0:11:28] </li>
  <li>The Ratio That’s Fueled Her LinkedIn Creator Career [0:19:40] </li>
  <li>One Unnecessary Thing People Keep Doing Wrong on LinkedIn [0:24:52] </li>
  <li>Where LinkedIn Has Surprised Jayde the Most [0:35:19] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><u>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</u></a>   </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2822</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8346fd2c-55ce-11f0-908a-7f2716dcddc6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE4538062565.mp3?updated=1753968569" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>964: Create for Who You’re Becoming &amp; Tap into the Money That’s Everywhere with Gabby Beckford</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/create-for-who-youre-becoming-tap-into-the-money-thats-everywhere-with-gabby-beckford</link>
      <description>Imagine a world where money isn’t something you have to chase, but something you effortlessly attract. That’s exactly what today’s guest, Gabby Beckford, has created, and she’s here to show you how to do the same. With over 800,000 followers, multiple successful businesses, and a bold, unapologetic approach to money and opportunity, Gabby believes that money is everywhere. She doesn’t just create content that sells, she creates content for the future she’s stepping into. By stacking platforms strategically, she’s built an ecosystem that attracts abundance, visibility, and powerful opportunities. 

In this episode, Gabby breaks down how you can do it too. She shares how to create magnetic content for who you want to become, build a strategic platform ecosystem, and shift into a mindset where money is genuinely abundant and waiting for you. From the woo to the wildly practical, we get into it all, especially how to attract more brand partnerships and step into the future that’s already waiting for you. So grab a notebook, because this one is a game changer, and your future self will thank you! 



⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



Episode Highlights


  Learning that Money Can Come At Any Time [0:03:16] 

  Create for Who You’re Becoming [0:10:17] 

  Create Like No One’s Watching [0:15:09] 

  How Platform Code-Switching Helps Reach the Right Audience [0:21:54] 

  How Gabby Makes Money as a Full-Time Creator [0:28:43] 

  Building Strong Brand Partnerships That Last [0:31:33] 

  The One Mindset Shift You Need [0:38:11] 


Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠  



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Jun 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Create for Who You’re Becoming &amp; Tap into the Money That’s Everywhere with Gabby Beckford</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>964</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/43f7da6a-511e-11f0-9f7b-4fa9ed5bf0a9/image/36c62914bc4a294c4a12a359cf8c3d22.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Imagine if money wasn’t something you had to chase—but something you attracted. That’s the reality Gabby Beckford has built, and in this episode, she shows you how to do the same. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Imagine a world where money isn’t something you have to chase, but something you effortlessly attract. That’s exactly what today’s guest, Gabby Beckford, has created, and she’s here to show you how to do the same. With over 800,000 followers, multiple successful businesses, and a bold, unapologetic approach to money and opportunity, Gabby believes that money is everywhere. She doesn’t just create content that sells, she creates content for the future she’s stepping into. By stacking platforms strategically, she’s built an ecosystem that attracts abundance, visibility, and powerful opportunities. 

In this episode, Gabby breaks down how you can do it too. She shares how to create magnetic content for who you want to become, build a strategic platform ecosystem, and shift into a mindset where money is genuinely abundant and waiting for you. From the woo to the wildly practical, we get into it all, especially how to attract more brand partnerships and step into the future that’s already waiting for you. So grab a notebook, because this one is a game changer, and your future self will thank you! 



⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



Episode Highlights


  Learning that Money Can Come At Any Time [0:03:16] 

  Create for Who You’re Becoming [0:10:17] 

  Create Like No One’s Watching [0:15:09] 

  How Platform Code-Switching Helps Reach the Right Audience [0:21:54] 

  How Gabby Makes Money as a Full-Time Creator [0:28:43] 

  Building Strong Brand Partnerships That Last [0:31:33] 

  The One Mindset Shift You Need [0:38:11] 


Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠  



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Imagine a world where money isn’t something you have to chase, but something you effortlessly attract. That’s exactly what today’s guest, <a href="https://www.packslight.com/"><u>Gabby Beckford,</u></a> has created, and she’s here to show you how to do the same. With over 800,000 followers, multiple successful businesses, and a bold, unapologetic approach to money and opportunity, Gabby believes that money is everywhere. She doesn’t just create content that sells, she creates content for the future she’s stepping into. By stacking platforms strategically, she’s built an ecosystem that attracts abundance, visibility, and powerful opportunities. </p>
<p>In this episode, Gabby breaks down how you can do it too. She shares how to create magnetic content for who you want to become, build a strategic platform ecosystem, and shift into a mindset where money is genuinely abundant and waiting for you. From the woo to the wildly practical, we get into it all, especially how to attract more brand partnerships and step into the future that’s already waiting for you. So grab a notebook, because this one is a game changer, and your future self will thank you! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Learning that Money Can Come At Any Time [0:03:16] </li>
  <li>Create for Who You’re Becoming [0:10:17] </li>
  <li>Create Like No One’s Watching [0:15:09] </li>
  <li>How Platform Code-Switching Helps Reach the Right Audience [0:21:54] </li>
  <li>How Gabby Makes Money as a Full-Time Creator [0:28:43] </li>
  <li>Building Strong Brand Partnerships That Last [0:31:33] </li>
  <li>The One Mindset Shift You Need [0:38:11] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</strong></a><strong> </strong> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3078</itunes:duration>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[43f7da6a-511e-11f0-9f7b-4fa9ed5bf0a9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE9855221407.mp3?updated=1753923427" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>963: Behind Gymshark’s 1.5M to 20M Follower Explosion: A Masterclass in Community Growth with Marketing Mastermind Elfried Samba</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/behind-gymsharks-follwer-explosion-a-masterclass-in-community-growth-with-elfried-samba</link>
      <description>What if your brand could build the kind of fiercely loyal community that turned Gymshark into a billion-pound business? Today, I’m talking with Elfried Samba, the marketing mastermind behind Gymshark’s rise from 1.5 million to over 20 million followers. He is the CEO and Co-Founder of Butterfly Effect, the go-to agency behind powerhouse campaigns for Netflix, Bumble, McDonald’s, Square, and so many more. With a proven track record for turning passive audiences into highly engaged communities, Elfried knows exactly how to leverage community-driven marketing for explosive growth.  

In this episode, he’s sharing the exact strategies he used to scale Gymshark’s global community and breaks them down in a super actionable way so that you can apply them immediately to your brand, or even your personal brand, no matter your brand’s size or budget. Whether you’re just starting out or looking to deepen your audience relationships, Elfried’s advice is super pure gold. Buckle up, you’re about to get a front row seat to how a billion-pound companies build community from the inside out. I hope you’re paying attention! 



⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



Episode Highlights


  Building Gymshark: Online Social Community Then Versus Now [0:02:07]  

  The Secrets That Helped Gymshark Scale Without The Budget of a Bigger Brand. [0:10:56] 

  What’s Truly Behind Community-Led Growth in Every Industry. [0:18:43] 

  Why You Shouldn’t Always Give The People What They Want. [0:25:30] 

  A Totally Different Approach to Your Personal Brand’s Social Media. [0:38:21] 


Our Advertiser 

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ 

 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 24 Jun 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Behind Gymshark’s 1.5M to 20M Follower Explosion: A Masterclass in Community Growth with Marketing Mastermind Elfried Samba</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>963</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f205f8e6-5059-11f0-a88f-63c1eeed25b9/image/e9d48d8973bb752b4714c9ec06759881.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>The secret to explosive audience growth? Elfried Samba spills how Gymshark did it and how you can too!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What if your brand could build the kind of fiercely loyal community that turned Gymshark into a billion-pound business? Today, I’m talking with Elfried Samba, the marketing mastermind behind Gymshark’s rise from 1.5 million to over 20 million followers. He is the CEO and Co-Founder of Butterfly Effect, the go-to agency behind powerhouse campaigns for Netflix, Bumble, McDonald’s, Square, and so many more. With a proven track record for turning passive audiences into highly engaged communities, Elfried knows exactly how to leverage community-driven marketing for explosive growth.  

In this episode, he’s sharing the exact strategies he used to scale Gymshark’s global community and breaks them down in a super actionable way so that you can apply them immediately to your brand, or even your personal brand, no matter your brand’s size or budget. Whether you’re just starting out or looking to deepen your audience relationships, Elfried’s advice is super pure gold. Buckle up, you’re about to get a front row seat to how a billion-pound companies build community from the inside out. I hope you’re paying attention! 



⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



Episode Highlights


  Building Gymshark: Online Social Community Then Versus Now [0:02:07]  

  The Secrets That Helped Gymshark Scale Without The Budget of a Bigger Brand. [0:10:56] 

  What’s Truly Behind Community-Led Growth in Every Industry. [0:18:43] 

  Why You Shouldn’t Always Give The People What They Want. [0:25:30] 

  A Totally Different Approach to Your Personal Brand’s Social Media. [0:38:21] 


Our Advertiser 

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ 

 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What if your brand could build the kind of fiercely loyal community that turned Gymshark into a billion-pound business? Today, I’m talking with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/elfriedsamba/">Elfried Samba,</a> the marketing mastermind behind Gymshark’s rise from 1.5 million to over 20 million followers. He is the CEO and Co-Founder of Butterfly Effect, the go-to agency behind powerhouse campaigns for Netflix, Bumble, McDonald’s, Square, and so many more. With a proven track record for turning passive audiences into highly engaged communities, Elfried knows exactly how to leverage community-driven marketing for explosive growth.  </p>
<p>In this episode, he’s sharing the exact strategies he used to scale Gymshark’s global community and breaks them down in a super actionable way so that you can apply them immediately to your brand, or even your personal brand, no matter your brand’s size or budget. Whether you’re just starting out or looking to deepen your audience relationships, Elfried’s advice is super pure gold. Buckle up, you’re about to get a front row seat to how a billion-pound companies build community from the inside out. I hope you’re paying attention! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Building Gymshark: Online Social Community Then Versus Now [0:02:07]  </li>
  <li>The Secrets That Helped Gymshark Scale Without The Budget of a Bigger Brand. [0:10:56] </li>
  <li>What’s Truly Behind Community-Led Growth in Every Industry. [0:18:43] </li>
  <li>Why You Shouldn’t Always Give The People What They Want. [0:25:30] </li>
  <li>A Totally Different Approach to Your Personal Brand’s Social Media. [0:38:21] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser </strong></p>
<p><strong></strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks">FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</a> </p>
<p> </p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3149</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f205f8e6-5059-11f0-a88f-63c1eeed25b9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6855076898.mp3?updated=1753945189" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>962: Exactly How I’d Grow Your Podcast as a Host with 4.5M+ Downloads</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/exactly-how-i-would-grow-your-podcast-as-a-host-with-4M-downloads</link>
      <description>I’m trying a whole new format, and I cannot wait for you to listen to this one! It’s part life coaching, part podcast strategy, and I’m dishing the tea on pretty much everything I think about when it comes to having a successful podcast! 



Join me as I sit down with Azara Krovatin, who hosts The Mystical Business Coach Podcast, and I’m giving her a real-time coaching session on how she can grow her show, deepen her impact, and leverage her incredibly unique expertise. Whether you’re podcasting yourself, considering launching one, or just love seeing behind the scenes, this conversation is packed with so many actionable insights! Truly, if I were to do a course on how to run a successful podcast, we covered almost everything I would put in that course. Consider this your one-on-one! 



⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



Episode Highlights


  Getting to Know Azara: Her Motivation, Mission &amp; End Goal. [0:01:55]  

  The Big Dream Behind Azara’s Business &amp; the People She Wants to Reach. [0:05:49] 

  My Advice to Azara Based on My Own Journey into Podcasting and Business. [0:10:39] 

  Top Tips for Crafting Compelling Episodes. [0:19:37] 

  Building Visibility &amp; Audience Growth. [0:25:46] 

  How to Get the Most Out of Titles &amp; Descriptions. [0:33:56] 

  Doing the Process Out Loud: Why You Can Never Give Too Much Away [0:40:03] Repurposing Podcast Content for Other Platforms [0:44:36] 

  How to Use LinkedIn as a Podcast Marketing Platform [0:51:25] 




Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months

 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 19 Jun 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Exactly How I’d Grow Your Podcast as a Host with 4.5M+ Downloads</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>962</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/50d5908e-4c7c-11f0-bc67-67e01e6e2d81/image/c08a35edeaffed094e210dcc6810aac1.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Podcast strategy meets life coaching in this behind-the-scenes session on growing a successful show with guest Azara Krovatin.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’m trying a whole new format, and I cannot wait for you to listen to this one! It’s part life coaching, part podcast strategy, and I’m dishing the tea on pretty much everything I think about when it comes to having a successful podcast! 



Join me as I sit down with Azara Krovatin, who hosts The Mystical Business Coach Podcast, and I’m giving her a real-time coaching session on how she can grow her show, deepen her impact, and leverage her incredibly unique expertise. Whether you’re podcasting yourself, considering launching one, or just love seeing behind the scenes, this conversation is packed with so many actionable insights! Truly, if I were to do a course on how to run a successful podcast, we covered almost everything I would put in that course. Consider this your one-on-one! 



⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



Episode Highlights


  Getting to Know Azara: Her Motivation, Mission &amp; End Goal. [0:01:55]  

  The Big Dream Behind Azara’s Business &amp; the People She Wants to Reach. [0:05:49] 

  My Advice to Azara Based on My Own Journey into Podcasting and Business. [0:10:39] 

  Top Tips for Crafting Compelling Episodes. [0:19:37] 

  Building Visibility &amp; Audience Growth. [0:25:46] 

  How to Get the Most Out of Titles &amp; Descriptions. [0:33:56] 

  Doing the Process Out Loud: Why You Can Never Give Too Much Away [0:40:03] Repurposing Podcast Content for Other Platforms [0:44:36] 

  How to Use LinkedIn as a Podcast Marketing Platform [0:51:25] 




Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months

 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’m trying a whole new format, and I cannot wait for you to listen to this one! It’s part life coaching, part podcast strategy, and I’m dishing the tea on pretty much everything I think about when it comes to having a successful podcast! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me as I sit down with <a href="https://www.mysticalbusinesscoach.com/%20">Azara Krovatin,</a> who hosts The Mystical Business Coach Podcast, and I’m giving her a real-time coaching session on how she can grow her show, deepen her impact, and leverage her incredibly unique expertise. Whether you’re podcasting yourself, considering launching one, or just love seeing behind the scenes, this conversation is packed with so many actionable insights! Truly, if I were to do a course on how to run a successful podcast, we covered almost everything I would put in that course. Consider this your one-on-one! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Getting to Know Azara: Her Motivation, Mission &amp; End Goal. [0:01:55]  </li>
  <li>The Big Dream Behind Azara’s Business &amp; the People She Wants to Reach. [0:05:49] </li>
  <li>My Advice to Azara Based on My Own Journey into Podcasting and Business. [0:10:39] </li>
  <li>Top Tips for Crafting Compelling Episodes. [0:19:37] </li>
  <li>Building Visibility &amp; Audience Growth. [0:25:46] </li>
  <li>How to Get the Most Out of Titles &amp; Descriptions. [0:33:56] </li>
  <li>Doing the Process Out Loud: Why You Can Never Give Too Much Away [0:40:03] Repurposing Podcast Content for Other Platforms [0:44:36] </li>
  <li>How to Use LinkedIn as a Podcast Marketing Platform [0:51:25] </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</strong></a><strong> – Get 50% Off for 6 Months</strong></p>
<p> </p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> thestrategyhour.com</a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3494</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[50d5908e-4c7c-11f0-bc67-67e01e6e2d81]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE8326770124.mp3?updated=1753925211" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>961: How to Land Celebrity-Level Press Without Being Famous (Yet)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-land-celebrity-level-press-without-being-famous-yet</link>
      <description>You don’t have to be Oprah, the Beach Boys, or a big box brand to land major press, but you do have to know what you’re doing. During this episode, I talk to Lydia Bagarozza, the co-founder of Visibility on Purpose. With more than 4000 media placements in outlets like Forbes, Entrepreneur, and more, she’s making top-tier press accessible for small brands and founders without hiring a publicist. On this episode, she’s giving away all her best secrets, so let’s dive in. 

⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



Episode Highlights


  Visibility on Purpose: The Origin Story [0:00:53]  

  Why You Don’t Have to be Famous to Be Featured. [0:04:29] 

  How to Find Where You Want to be Featured. [0:07:38] 

  The One Thing Most People Get Wrong About Pitching. [0:11:16] 

  What You Need to Do Before You Even Start. [0:22:18] 

  Fighting Overwhelm and Imposter Syndrome. [0:28:17] 

  How to Know When It’s Time to Hire PR Help. [0:38:05] 

  The First and Simplest Step You Can Take Today. [0:44:24] 


Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 17 Jun 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Land Celebrity-Level Press Without Being Famous (Yet)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>961</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/1739cb2c-4aee-11f0-9ebb-8b305b143ddf/image/1701c9f110474bd7d1088ee634a987b3.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>You don’t have to be Oprah, the Beach Boys, or a big box brand to land major press, but you do have to know what you’re doing.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You don’t have to be Oprah, the Beach Boys, or a big box brand to land major press, but you do have to know what you’re doing. During this episode, I talk to Lydia Bagarozza, the co-founder of Visibility on Purpose. With more than 4000 media placements in outlets like Forbes, Entrepreneur, and more, she’s making top-tier press accessible for small brands and founders without hiring a publicist. On this episode, she’s giving away all her best secrets, so let’s dive in. 

⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



Episode Highlights


  Visibility on Purpose: The Origin Story [0:00:53]  

  Why You Don’t Have to be Famous to Be Featured. [0:04:29] 

  How to Find Where You Want to be Featured. [0:07:38] 

  The One Thing Most People Get Wrong About Pitching. [0:11:16] 

  What You Need to Do Before You Even Start. [0:22:18] 

  Fighting Overwhelm and Imposter Syndrome. [0:28:17] 

  How to Know When It’s Time to Hire PR Help. [0:38:05] 

  The First and Simplest Step You Can Take Today. [0:44:24] 


Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You don’t have to be Oprah, the Beach Boys, or a big box brand to land major press, but you do have to know what you’re doing. During this episode, I talk to Lydia Bagarozza, the co-founder of Visibility on Purpose. With more than 4000 media placements in outlets like Forbes, Entrepreneur, and more, she’s making top-tier press accessible for small brands and founders without hiring a publicist. On this episode, she’s giving away all her best secrets, so let’s dive in. </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>Visibility on Purpose: The Origin Story [0:00:53]  </li>
  <li>Why You Don’t Have to be Famous to Be Featured. [0:04:29] </li>
  <li>How to Find Where You Want to be Featured. [0:07:38] </li>
  <li>The One Thing Most People Get Wrong About Pitching. [0:11:16] </li>
  <li>What You Need to Do Before You Even Start. [0:22:18] </li>
  <li>Fighting Overwhelm and Imposter Syndrome. [0:28:17] </li>
  <li>How to Know When It’s Time to Hire PR Help. [0:38:05] </li>
  <li>The First and Simplest Step You Can Take Today. [0:44:24] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</strong></a><strong> – Get 50% Off for 6 Months</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p>
<p><br></p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3053</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1739cb2c-4aee-11f0-9ebb-8b305b143ddf]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE2379705295.mp3?updated=1753916608" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>960: What No One Told My Husband About Marrying an Ambitious Woman </title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-no-one-told-my-husband-about-marrying-an-ambitious-woman</link>
      <description>Today’s episode is a little bit different. It’s a vulnerable, intimate conversation that I just happen to be letting you in on. I’m having my husband Jared on the show today, to talk about something I see more people than you might imagine, navigating. 

We’re talking about what it really looks like to be married to a strong, ambitious woman, but more than that, I hope we can have an honest conversation about confronting cultural norms, redefining roles, and getting honest about the stuff we wish someone else told us sooner! 



⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



Episode Highlights

• How Vastly Different Our Lives Look Twelve Years Into Marriage. [0:01:11]

• The Ways Jared is Using His Skill Set Today. [0:17:52]

• ‘She Works and You Play’ and Other Reactions to How Our Lives are Structured [0:21:25]

• What the Biggest Challenge We Face at Work Actually Is [0:27:53]

• Breaking the Preconceived Notions of What it Means to Work with Your Spouse [0:34:55]

• The Real Hardest Part of Reversing Our Roles [0:39:38]

• Jared’s New Observations From Working With His Wife (Me) [0:45:05]



Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 12 Jun 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What No One Told My Husband About Marrying an Ambitious Woman </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>960</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/de87887e-46fa-11f0-b8a5-1b22d1c4e9ef/image/2b658956fc0c4d70cd9ff7a7a2807b86.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Marriage, business, and breaking the mold with my husband Jared.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today’s episode is a little bit different. It’s a vulnerable, intimate conversation that I just happen to be letting you in on. I’m having my husband Jared on the show today, to talk about something I see more people than you might imagine, navigating. 

We’re talking about what it really looks like to be married to a strong, ambitious woman, but more than that, I hope we can have an honest conversation about confronting cultural norms, redefining roles, and getting honest about the stuff we wish someone else told us sooner! 



⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠⁠

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



Episode Highlights

• How Vastly Different Our Lives Look Twelve Years Into Marriage. [0:01:11]

• The Ways Jared is Using His Skill Set Today. [0:17:52]

• ‘She Works and You Play’ and Other Reactions to How Our Lives are Structured [0:21:25]

• What the Biggest Challenge We Face at Work Actually Is [0:27:53]

• Breaking the Preconceived Notions of What it Means to Work with Your Spouse [0:34:55]

• The Real Hardest Part of Reversing Our Roles [0:39:38]

• Jared’s New Observations From Working With His Wife (Me) [0:45:05]



Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s episode is a little bit different. It’s a vulnerable, intimate conversation that I just happen to be letting you in on. I’m having my husband Jared on the show today, to talk about something I see more people than you might imagine, navigating. </p>
<p>We’re talking about what it really looks like to be married to a strong, ambitious woman, but more than that, I hope we can have an honest conversation about confronting cultural norms, redefining roles, and getting honest about the stuff we wish someone else told us sooner! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><strong>⁠⁠⁠</strong></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<p>• How Vastly Different Our Lives Look Twelve Years Into Marriage. [0:01:11]</p>
<p>• The Ways Jared is Using His Skill Set Today. [0:17:52]</p>
<p>• ‘She Works and You Play’ and Other Reactions to How Our Lives are Structured [0:21:25]</p>
<p>• What the Biggest Challenge We Face at Work Actually Is [0:27:53]</p>
<p>• Breaking the Preconceived Notions of What it Means to Work with Your Spouse [0:34:55]</p>
<p>• The Real Hardest Part of Reversing Our Roles [0:39:38]</p>
<p>• Jared’s New Observations From Working With His Wife (Me) [0:45:05]</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</strong></a><strong> – Get 50% Off for 6 Months</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.</p>
<p><br></p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3308</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[de87887e-46fa-11f0-b8a5-1b22d1c4e9ef]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE9964340966.mp3?updated=1749671262" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>959: Build for Your Bandwidth </title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/build-for-your-bandwidth</link>
      <description>Your business needs to be designed with your bandwidth in mind so that you’re capable of doing it in every season! You have other priorities outside of business, and I want to help you design a business with your capacity in mind. I want you to ignore society and other business gurus when they tell you how much bandwidth you need to have for your business, and instead, I want you to design it around you! I think there’s a misconception that designing a business around bandwidth limits your capacity for growth, but that’s not true – bandwidth can change! Capability doesn’t equal sustainability, and while there are always things you can handle doing for a short period of time, sustaining them is tricky. It’s so easy to want to say yes to more. I get the appeal, and I also know that you don’t have to do everything! Your business is not meant to be something you have to fight, it’s meant to be something that supports you and provides you with the flexibility that traditional jobs don’t. Throughout this episode, I want you to consider choosing sustainability over survival and say no to hustle culture! Let’s dive in. 



⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



 Episode Highlights 


  How to Intentionally Scale Down for the Season You’re In. [0:09:48]  

  Why More Is Not Always Better. [0:17:28] 

  Building a Business That Supports Your Greatest Desires. [0:25:27] 


Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 10 Jun 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Build for Your Bandwidth </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>959</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/a46673bc-4222-11f0-b9f2-8f952f653887/image/5354c156a6a96d0a4f239ad628906b88.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Your business needs to be designed with your bandwidth in mind so that you’re capable of doing it in every season!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Your business needs to be designed with your bandwidth in mind so that you’re capable of doing it in every season! You have other priorities outside of business, and I want to help you design a business with your capacity in mind. I want you to ignore society and other business gurus when they tell you how much bandwidth you need to have for your business, and instead, I want you to design it around you! I think there’s a misconception that designing a business around bandwidth limits your capacity for growth, but that’s not true – bandwidth can change! Capability doesn’t equal sustainability, and while there are always things you can handle doing for a short period of time, sustaining them is tricky. It’s so easy to want to say yes to more. I get the appeal, and I also know that you don’t have to do everything! Your business is not meant to be something you have to fight, it’s meant to be something that supports you and provides you with the flexibility that traditional jobs don’t. Throughout this episode, I want you to consider choosing sustainability over survival and say no to hustle culture! Let’s dive in. 



⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



 Episode Highlights 


  How to Intentionally Scale Down for the Season You’re In. [0:09:48]  

  Why More Is Not Always Better. [0:17:28] 

  Building a Business That Supports Your Greatest Desires. [0:25:27] 


Our Advertiser

FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Your business needs to be designed with your bandwidth in mind so that you’re capable of doing it in every season! You have other priorities outside of business, and I want to help you design a business with your capacity in mind. I want you to ignore society and other business gurus when they tell you how much bandwidth you need to have for your business, and instead, I want you to design it around <em>you</em>! I think there’s a misconception that designing a business around bandwidth limits your capacity for growth, but that’s not true – bandwidth can change! Capability doesn’t equal sustainability, and while there are always things you can handle doing for a short period of time, sustaining them is tricky. It’s so easy to want to say yes to more. I get the appeal, and I also know that you don’t have to do everything! Your business is not meant to be something you have to fight, it’s meant to be something that supports you and provides you with the flexibility that traditional jobs don’t. Throughout this episode, I want you to consider choosing sustainability over survival and say no to hustle culture! Let’s dive in. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p> <strong>Episode Highlights </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>How to Intentionally Scale Down for the Season You’re In. [0:09:48]  </li>
  <li>Why More Is Not Always Better. [0:17:28] </li>
  <li>Building a Business That Supports Your Greatest Desires. [0:25:27] </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong>FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</strong></a><strong> – Get 50% Off for 6 Months</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p>
<p><br></p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2254</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a46673bc-4222-11f0-b9f2-8f952f653887]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1090322083.mp3?updated=1753968715" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>958: Crop Top Confidence: How to Get Out of a Business Funk</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/crop-top-confidence-how-to-get-out-of-a-business-funk</link>
      <description>If you’re feeling stuck, stalled, or just tired of feeling like you’re going through the motions, this episode is for you. I’ve been in a funk for weeks, feeling lost, confused, and frustrated, and everyone was giving me really lame advice. I went on my own discovery journey to figure out what I needed to do to get out of my own funk. It was so much simpler than I realized and if I had this structure from the start, I would have gotten there a lot sooner and felt a lot less frustrated! I’m here for the practical, the tactical, and what you can actually do about it. This episode is part pep talk, part reset strategy, and it’s as much for me as it is for you! 



⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



Episode Highlights


  The Real Reason You Might Be Feeling Lost or Stuck [0:03:57]  

  How to Let Go of Self-Judgment and be a Strong Person in your Business [0:11:10] 

  What it Means to See the Opportunities Instead of Spiralling [0:21:30] 

  A Reset Ritual to Help You Get Re-Energized and Re-Inspired [0:27:55]

  Crop-Top Confidence and Where to Find It [0:31:46] 




Our Advertiser:⁠ ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months 

 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 05 Jun 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Crop Top Confidence: How to Get Out of a Business Funk</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>958</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/b07f66bc-4165-11f0-a7c3-fbfe289358d8/image/d39478784adf333b0bb2d3f46cf4b516.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you’re feeling stuck, stalled, or just tired of feeling like you’re going through the motions, this episode is for you. I went on my own discovery journey to figure out what I needed to do to get out of my own funk. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you’re feeling stuck, stalled, or just tired of feeling like you’re going through the motions, this episode is for you. I’ve been in a funk for weeks, feeling lost, confused, and frustrated, and everyone was giving me really lame advice. I went on my own discovery journey to figure out what I needed to do to get out of my own funk. It was so much simpler than I realized and if I had this structure from the start, I would have gotten there a lot sooner and felt a lot less frustrated! I’m here for the practical, the tactical, and what you can actually do about it. This episode is part pep talk, part reset strategy, and it’s as much for me as it is for you! 



⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠ 



Connect with Abagail

⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠ 

⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠ 



Episode Highlights


  The Real Reason You Might Be Feeling Lost or Stuck [0:03:57]  

  How to Let Go of Self-Judgment and be a Strong Person in your Business [0:11:10] 

  What it Means to See the Opportunities Instead of Spiralling [0:21:30] 

  A Reset Ritual to Help You Get Re-Energized and Re-Inspired [0:27:55]

  Crop-Top Confidence and Where to Find It [0:31:46] 




Our Advertiser:⁠ ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months 

 

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you’re feeling stuck, stalled, or just tired of feeling like you’re going through the motions, this episode is for you. I’ve been in a funk for weeks, feeling lost, confused, and frustrated, and everyone was giving me really lame advice. I went on my own discovery journey to figure out what I needed to do to get out of my own funk. It was so much simpler than I realized and if I had this structure from the start, I would have gotten there a lot sooner and felt a lot less frustrated! I’m here for the practical, the tactical, and what you can actually do about it. This episode is part pep talk, part reset strategy, and it’s as much for me as it is for you! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>The Real Reason You Might Be Feeling Lost or Stuck [0:03:57]  </li>
  <li>How to Let Go of Self-Judgment and be a Strong Person in your Business [0:11:10] </li>
  <li>What it Means to See the Opportunities Instead of Spiralling [0:21:30] </li>
  <li>A Reset Ritual to Help You Get Re-Energized and Re-Inspired [0:27:55]</li>
  <li>Crop-Top Confidence and Where to Find It [0:31:46] </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser:</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><u>⁠ ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠⁠</u></a> – Get 50% Off for 6 Months </p>
<p> </p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"><u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2362</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b07f66bc-4165-11f0-a7c3-fbfe289358d8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6523687071.mp3?updated=1753936882" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>957: Instagram Strategy That Actually Feels Good with Michelle Gifford</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/instagram-strategy-that-actually-feels-good-with-michelle-gifford </link>
      <description>When it comes to Instagram, it is so easy to get stuck in the cycle of chasing trends. Today’s guest, Michelle Gifford, is here to remind us that sustainable Instagram growth doesn’t come from constant performance! It comes from purpose. Michelle is an incredible Instagram strategist behind multiple six and seven-figure brands. She’s helped business owners grow their reach, amplify their voice, and drive real results without losing themselves in the algorithm. In this episode, we’re talking about what it really means to create content that converts, position you as the expert, and still feels good to make! We get into what’s working on Instagram right now, what you should stop doing, and how to reset your strategy if you feel stuck or discouraged! If you want to use Instagram as a true business growth tool, then this episode is for you! 



⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠ ⁠⁠

⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠

⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠






  How to Drive Sales on Instagram. [0:04:32]  

  Some of the Trends That Are Performing [0:13:14] 

  How to Test Out New Content. [0:16:15] 

  Overcoming Common ‘Visibility’ Fears. [0:26:17] 




Our Advertiser: ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 03 Jun 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Instagram Strategy That Actually Feels Good with Michelle Gifford</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>957</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/53a99c14-3bed-11f0-a18a-4f191df47d4b/image/e8ecb65910c00a22abb0b588daf35682.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This episode with strategist Michelle Gifford will help you reset your strategy and grow with purpose. We’re diving into content that converts, what’s working now, and how to build a presence that feels good and drives real results.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When it comes to Instagram, it is so easy to get stuck in the cycle of chasing trends. Today’s guest, Michelle Gifford, is here to remind us that sustainable Instagram growth doesn’t come from constant performance! It comes from purpose. Michelle is an incredible Instagram strategist behind multiple six and seven-figure brands. She’s helped business owners grow their reach, amplify their voice, and drive real results without losing themselves in the algorithm. In this episode, we’re talking about what it really means to create content that converts, position you as the expert, and still feels good to make! We get into what’s working on Instagram right now, what you should stop doing, and how to reset your strategy if you feel stuck or discouraged! If you want to use Instagram as a true business growth tool, then this episode is for you! 



⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠



Connect with Abagail⁠⁠ ⁠⁠

⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠

⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠






  How to Drive Sales on Instagram. [0:04:32]  

  Some of the Trends That Are Performing [0:13:14] 

  How to Test Out New Content. [0:16:15] 

  Overcoming Common ‘Visibility’ Fears. [0:26:17] 




Our Advertiser: ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When it comes to Instagram, it is so easy to get stuck in the cycle of chasing trends. Today’s guest, Michelle Gifford, is here to remind us that sustainable Instagram growth doesn’t come from constant performance! It comes from purpose. Michelle is an incredible Instagram strategist behind multiple six and seven-figure brands. She’s helped business owners grow their reach, amplify their voice, and drive real results without losing themselves in the algorithm. In this episode, we’re talking about what it really means to create content that converts, position you as the expert, and still feels good to make! We get into what’s working on Instagram right now, what you should stop doing, and how to reset your strategy if you feel stuck or discouraged! If you want to use Instagram as a true business growth tool, then this episode is for you! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠ ⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠ ⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<ul>
  <li>How to Drive Sales on Instagram. [0:04:32]  </li>
  <li>Some of the Trends That Are Performing [0:13:14] </li>
  <li>How to Test Out New Content. [0:16:15] </li>
  <li>Overcoming Common ‘Visibility’ Fears. [0:26:17] </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser:</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong> </strong><u>⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠</u></a> – Get 50% Off for 6 Months<br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"><u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2389</itunes:duration>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[53a99c14-3bed-11f0-a18a-4f191df47d4b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE2996032629.mp3?updated=1753925566" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>956: The Loneliness Epidemic with Community Builder Liz Forkin Bohannon </title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/loneliness-epidemic-with-community-builder-liz-forkin-bohannon</link>
      <description>Statistics show that 97% of small business owners would say that they have felt really alone and unsupported in their journey. Though we have the opportunity to be more connected than ever, we are also lonelier than ever. If you’ve built a business, you’ve probably felt that paradox deeply. Today’s guest, Liz Forkin Bohannon, knows that connection isn’t just a feel-good value – it’s a radical, transformative growth strategy. Liz is passionate about women and girls living in extreme poverty. She spent time connecting with underprivileged women in Uganda and realized how important community is. She’s built her business, community, and life around the idea that we’re better together, and in this episode, we talk about what it looks like to build something that not only grows but brings people closer.  ⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠ ⁠⁠

⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠

⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠



Episode Highlights 


  How to Create Genuine Connection in Business. [0:11:12]  

  The Power of Consistency and Commitment. [0:25:48] 

  Two Ways to Find a Like-Minded Community of Business Leaders. [0:40:41] 




Our Advertiser: ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 29 May 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Loneliness Epidemic with Community Builder Liz Forkin Bohannon </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>956</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4d3dae86-3b22-11f0-a309-3b6842765205/image/0d85819d0868ed9f0213762bb1e7a468.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you’ve built a business, you’ve probably felt loneliness at some point. Today’s guest, Liz Forkin Bohannon, knows that connection isn’t just a feel-good value – it’s a radical, transformative growth strategy.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Statistics show that 97% of small business owners would say that they have felt really alone and unsupported in their journey. Though we have the opportunity to be more connected than ever, we are also lonelier than ever. If you’ve built a business, you’ve probably felt that paradox deeply. Today’s guest, Liz Forkin Bohannon, knows that connection isn’t just a feel-good value – it’s a radical, transformative growth strategy. Liz is passionate about women and girls living in extreme poverty. She spent time connecting with underprivileged women in Uganda and realized how important community is. She’s built her business, community, and life around the idea that we’re better together, and in this episode, we talk about what it looks like to build something that not only grows but brings people closer.  ⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠

Connect with Abagail⁠⁠ ⁠⁠

⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠⁠⁠ ⁠⁠

⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠



Episode Highlights 


  How to Create Genuine Connection in Business. [0:11:12]  

  The Power of Consistency and Commitment. [0:25:48] 

  Two Ways to Find a Like-Minded Community of Business Leaders. [0:40:41] 




Our Advertiser: ⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Statistics show that 97% of small business owners would say that they have felt really alone and unsupported in their journey. Though we have the opportunity to be more connected than ever, we are also lonelier than ever. If you’ve built a business, you’ve probably felt that paradox deeply. Today’s guest, Liz Forkin Bohannon, knows that connection isn’t just a feel-good value – it’s a radical, transformative growth strategy. Liz is passionate about women and girls living in extreme poverty. She spent time connecting with underprivileged women in Uganda and realized how important community is. She’s built her business, community, and life around the idea that we’re better together, and in this episode, we talk about what it looks like to build something that not only grows but brings people closer.  <a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>⁠⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠ ⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠⁠Instagram⁠⁠</u></a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠ ⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠⁠All the Links!⁠⁠</u></a></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>How to Create Genuine Connection in Business. [0:11:12]  </li>
  <li>The Power of Consistency and Commitment. [0:25:48] </li>
  <li>Two Ways to Find a Like-Minded Community of Business Leaders. [0:40:41] </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser:</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks"><strong> </strong><u>⁠⁠FreshBooks⁠⁠</u></a> – Get 50% Off for 6 Months<br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> <u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3293</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4d3dae86-3b22-11f0-a309-3b6842765205]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE7802472049.mp3?updated=1753968426" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>955: How to Build a Creator-First Business (That Actually Lasts) with Jay Clouse</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-build-a-creator-first-business-that-lasts-with-jay-clouse</link>
      <description>Being a creator-first business sounds great in theory, but it can be slow to grow! Today, I’m talking with Jay Clouse, who has been there, built that, and now runs one of the most respected businesses in the creator economy. But, it didn’t happen overnight! In this episode, we talk about creating content, building an audience instead of attracting a crowd, and how to create sustainability in an evolving industry.  



⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠



Connect with Abagail⁠ ⁠

⁠Instagram⁠⁠ ⁠

⁠All the Links!⁠



Episode Highlights


  How Jay Started to Create About Creating [0:02:08]  

  Consistency: The Key to Creator Science’s Success [0:05:55] 

  Earning Influence Over an Audience Through Trust [0:09:15] 

  Where You Can Actually Create Real Value Online [0:12:41]

  The Steady Drumbeat That Will Bring the Right People to You [0:17:50] 

  Jay’s Funding Journey Before Monetizing His Newsletter [0:24:24] 

  Predictions for the Next Chapter [0:31:57] 

  Advice for Success in a Changing World [0:37:21] 




Our Advertiser: ⁠FreshBooks⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 27 May 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Build a Creator-First Business (That Actually Lasts) with Jay Clouse</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>955</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/040effc2-3752-11f0-b394-b37941c80f31/image/88f968c7ff2852fc1836e2169b9abae3.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, I ’ m talking with Jay Clouse, who has been there, built that, and now runs one of the most respected businesses in the creator economy.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Being a creator-first business sounds great in theory, but it can be slow to grow! Today, I’m talking with Jay Clouse, who has been there, built that, and now runs one of the most respected businesses in the creator economy. But, it didn’t happen overnight! In this episode, we talk about creating content, building an audience instead of attracting a crowd, and how to create sustainability in an evolving industry.  



⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠



Connect with Abagail⁠ ⁠

⁠Instagram⁠⁠ ⁠

⁠All the Links!⁠



Episode Highlights


  How Jay Started to Create About Creating [0:02:08]  

  Consistency: The Key to Creator Science’s Success [0:05:55] 

  Earning Influence Over an Audience Through Trust [0:09:15] 

  Where You Can Actually Create Real Value Online [0:12:41]

  The Steady Drumbeat That Will Bring the Right People to You [0:17:50] 

  Jay’s Funding Journey Before Monetizing His Newsletter [0:24:24] 

  Predictions for the Next Chapter [0:31:57] 

  Advice for Success in a Changing World [0:37:21] 




Our Advertiser: ⁠FreshBooks⁠ – Get 50% Off for 6 Months



Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Being a creator-first business sounds great in theory, but it can be slow to grow! Today, I’m talking with Jay Clouse, who has been there, built that, and now runs one of the most respected businesses in the creator economy. But, it didn’t happen overnight! In this episode, we talk about creating content, building an audience instead of attracting a crowd, and how to create sustainability in an evolving industry.  </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">⁠Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses⁠</a></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">⁠ ⁠</a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">⁠Instagram⁠</a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">⁠ ⁠</a></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">⁠All the Links!⁠</a></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>How Jay Started to Create About Creating [0:02:08]  </li>
  <li>Consistency: The Key to Creator Science’s Success [0:05:55] </li>
  <li>Earning Influence Over an Audience Through Trust [0:09:15] </li>
  <li>Where You Can Actually Create Real Value Online [0:12:41]</li>
  <li>The Steady Drumbeat That Will Bring the Right People to You [0:17:50] </li>
  <li>Jay’s Funding Journey Before Monetizing His Newsletter [0:24:24] </li>
  <li>Predictions for the Next Chapter [0:31:57] </li>
  <li>Advice for Success in a Changing World [0:37:21] </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser: </strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> – Get 50% Off for 6 Months</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"><u>thestrategyhour.com</u></a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2560</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[040effc2-3752-11f0-b394-b37941c80f31]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6101952244.mp3?updated=1753967808" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>954: How I’m Rewriting the Rules for a “Successful” Summer</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-im-rewriting-the-rules-for-a-successful-summer</link>
      <description>What would your summer look like if peace, ease, and cash flow could just exist together? This summer, I’m breaking up with the idea that success requires intensity and redefining what’s truly productive! I used to believe that the more I worked, the more successful I would be. But I know that I want to work less. Those things are in direct competition with each other! 

What if you didn’t need to work harder for the next level? What if less effort actually created more results, space, creativity, and more cash flow? I have spent so many summers working in my office and feeling jealous of the people who were outside. I always felt obligated to be ‘in the trenches’ because I convinced myself that more work equals more success. And that is so wrong! This summer, I am rewriting those rules and testing what happens when I work less, focus more, and trust that space might be the missing piece between where I am and where I want to be.  



Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses



Connect with Abagail 

Instagram 

All the Links!



You don’t need to hustle your way to the next level. If you’ve been stuck in the mindset that more effort equals more success, this episode will shift your perspective. It’s for the version of you craving sunshine, rest, and results—all at once. Let’s break the rules and do summer differently.



Episode Highlights

Why Hustle Isn’t Helping [0:02:15]
Creating Space for Bigger Results [0:06:42]
When Less Becomes More [0:11:03]
The Truth About Productivity and Peace [0:14:20]
Rewriting the Rules for Summer Success [0:20:18]



Our Advertiser:FreshBooks – Get 50% Off for 6 Months



Thanks for tuning in! Subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. For show notes, visit bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 22 May 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How I’m Rewriting the Rules for a “Successful” Summer</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>954</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/0b36d13a-3680-11f0-8e97-7fd7fb97637a/image/d4e9daa313de33e17dd5533e15b2cbbd.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>What would your summer look like if peace, ease, and cash flow could just exist together? </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What would your summer look like if peace, ease, and cash flow could just exist together? This summer, I’m breaking up with the idea that success requires intensity and redefining what’s truly productive! I used to believe that the more I worked, the more successful I would be. But I know that I want to work less. Those things are in direct competition with each other! 

What if you didn’t need to work harder for the next level? What if less effort actually created more results, space, creativity, and more cash flow? I have spent so many summers working in my office and feeling jealous of the people who were outside. I always felt obligated to be ‘in the trenches’ because I convinced myself that more work equals more success. And that is so wrong! This summer, I am rewriting those rules and testing what happens when I work less, focus more, and trust that space might be the missing piece between where I am and where I want to be.  



Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses



Connect with Abagail 

Instagram 

All the Links!



You don’t need to hustle your way to the next level. If you’ve been stuck in the mindset that more effort equals more success, this episode will shift your perspective. It’s for the version of you craving sunshine, rest, and results—all at once. Let’s break the rules and do summer differently.



Episode Highlights

Why Hustle Isn’t Helping [0:02:15]
Creating Space for Bigger Results [0:06:42]
When Less Becomes More [0:11:03]
The Truth About Productivity and Peace [0:14:20]
Rewriting the Rules for Summer Success [0:20:18]



Our Advertiser:FreshBooks – Get 50% Off for 6 Months



Thanks for tuning in! Subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. For show notes, visit bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What would your summer look like if peace, ease, and cash flow could just exist together? This summer, I’m breaking up with the idea that success requires intensity and redefining what’s truly productive! I used to believe that the more I worked, the more successful I would be. But I know that I want to work less. Those things are in direct competition with each other! </p>
<p>What if you didn’t need to work harder for the next level? What if less effort actually created more results, space, creativity, and more cash flow? I have spent so many summers working in my office and feeling jealous of the people who were outside. I always felt obligated to be ‘in the trenches’ because I convinced myself that more work equals more success. And that is so wrong! This summer, I am rewriting those rules and testing what happens when I work less, focus more, and trust that space might be the missing piece between where I am and where I want to be.  </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op – The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"> </a></p>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"> </a></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links!</a></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You don’t need to hustle your way to the next level. If you’ve been stuck in the mindset that more effort equals more success, this episode will shift your perspective. It’s for the version of you craving sunshine, rest, and results—all at once. Let’s break the rules and do summer differently.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<p>Why Hustle Isn’t Helping [0:02:15]<br>
Creating Space for Bigger Results [0:06:42]<br>
When Less Becomes More [0:11:03]<br>
The Truth About Productivity and Peace [0:14:20]<br>
Rewriting the Rules for Summer Success [0:20:18]</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Our Advertiser:</strong><a href="https://bossproject.com/freshbooks">FreshBooks</a> – Get 50% Off for 6 Months</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thanks for tuning in! Subscribe, rate, and review <em>The Strategy Hour Podcast</em> on iTunes. For show notes, visit <a href="https://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1752</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0b36d13a-3680-11f0-8e97-7fd7fb97637a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE3756451273.mp3?updated=1753915012" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>953: What Happens When You Don’t Want to Perform Anymore?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-happens-when-you-dont-want-to-perform-anymore</link>
      <description>There’s so much pressure online to stay relevant, to constantly provide value, to always be on. But what happens when you don’t want to perform anymore, when peace starts to feel more urgent than praise? I’m learning how to show up as myself, without the mask, without the metrics, without pretending to be someone I’m not. I’m not hiding, I’m in transition! And I know I’m not the only one feeling this way.

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  
Instagram



  
All the Links!




I believe in building a business that fits you, not one that’s been handed down like a rulebook written by someone else. If you’ve built any kind of online business in the past few years, you’ve probably been told, directly or indirectly, that visibility equals value. But lately, I’ve been asking: What if I don’t follow those rules? Who made them up in the first place? This episode is for the version of you that’s tired. The one that keeps wanting to slow down but feels like you’re supposed to keep up. I know you still want success, but on your own terms. So let’s talk about it!

Episode Highlights


  
How Performing Happens [0:03:32]



  
Untangling Your Personality From Your Business [0:07:41]



  
When Peace Becomes More Important Than Praise [0:11:36]



  
What Really Happens When You Stop Performing [0:15:45]



  
How to Stop Performing and Start Thriving [0:23:21]




Our Sponsor:


  
FreshBooks get 50% off for 6 months




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 20 May 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Happens When You Don’t Want to Perform Anymore?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>953</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>This episode is for the version of you that’s tired. The one that keeps wanting to slow down but feels like you’re supposed to keep up. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There’s so much pressure online to stay relevant, to constantly provide value, to always be on. But what happens when you don’t want to perform anymore, when peace starts to feel more urgent than praise? I’m learning how to show up as myself, without the mask, without the metrics, without pretending to be someone I’m not. I’m not hiding, I’m in transition! And I know I’m not the only one feeling this way.

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  
Instagram



  
All the Links!




I believe in building a business that fits you, not one that’s been handed down like a rulebook written by someone else. If you’ve built any kind of online business in the past few years, you’ve probably been told, directly or indirectly, that visibility equals value. But lately, I’ve been asking: What if I don’t follow those rules? Who made them up in the first place? This episode is for the version of you that’s tired. The one that keeps wanting to slow down but feels like you’re supposed to keep up. I know you still want success, but on your own terms. So let’s talk about it!

Episode Highlights


  
How Performing Happens [0:03:32]



  
Untangling Your Personality From Your Business [0:07:41]



  
When Peace Becomes More Important Than Praise [0:11:36]



  
What Really Happens When You Stop Performing [0:15:45]



  
How to Stop Performing and Start Thriving [0:23:21]




Our Sponsor:


  
FreshBooks get 50% off for 6 months




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There’s so much pressure online to stay relevant, to constantly provide value, to always be on. But what happens when you don’t want to perform anymore, when peace starts to feel more urgent than praise? I’m learning how to show up as myself, without the mask, without the metrics, without pretending to be someone I’m not. I’m not hiding, I’m in transition! And I know I’m not the only one feeling this way.</p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</u></a></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>I believe in building a business that fits you, not one that’s been handed down like a rulebook written by someone else. If you’ve built any kind of online business in the past few years, you’ve probably been told, directly or indirectly, that visibility equals value. But lately, I’ve been asking: What if I don’t follow those rules? Who made them up in the first place? This episode is for the version of you that’s tired. The one that keeps wanting to slow down but feels like you’re supposed to keep up. I know you still want success, but on your own terms. So let’s talk about it!</p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>How Performing Happens [0:03:32]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Untangling Your Personality From Your Business [0:07:41]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>When Peace Becomes More Important Than Praise [0:11:36]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>What Really Happens When You Stop Performing [0:15:45]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>How to Stop Performing and Start Thriving [0:23:21]</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Our Sponsor:</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb"><u>FreshBooks</u></a> get 50% off for 6 months</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast"><u>bossproject.com/podcast</u></a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1962</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cdec94f2-2add-11f0-b59a-833c5a2fa6d4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE4171431610.mp3?updated=1753968824" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>952: Stop Overworking and Underliving: How to Redefine Ambition and Create Lasting Success with Bri Seeley</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/stop-overworking-and-underliving-how-to-redefine-ambition-and-creator-lasting-success-with-bri-seeley</link>
      <description>Ever felt like you're chasing milestones that look great on paper but leave you feeling empty? This episode gives you permission to pause, reset, and redefine what success means to you. Bri Seeley is no stranger to ambition, but she's flipped the script on what it looks like to succeed. As a TEDx speaker, success coach, and award-winning businesswoman, she helps entrepreneurs achieve big, bold goals without burnout. Her signature “Defy” process invites you to ditch the hustle, tune into your truth, and take action from a place of alignment, not anxiety. 

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  
Instagram



  
All the Links!




In this episode, we dig into how childhood experiences shape our drive, why stillness is more powerful than hustle, and how to stop outsourcing your self-worth to external results. Bri also breaks down how to live like your future self today (no extra $50K or perfect plan required!), and why small, intentional steps can lead to radical transformation.If you feel stuck on the productivity hamster wheel, this is your nudge to slow down, zoom out, and build success on your terms without overworking or “underliving” in the process. Tune in to start defying the rules that never worked for you in the first place!

Episode Highlights


  
Redefining Success &amp; Ambition On Your Own Terms. [0:01:25] 



  
Why Slowing Down Gets You Further Than Striving. [0:06:10]



  
How to Defy Reality &amp; Feel the Future Now. [0:09:05]



  
Small Steps, Big Shifts, Sustainable Momentum. [0:16:35]



  
Breaking Free from the Addiction to Busywork. [0:25:50]



  
Finding Your 20% to Work Less &amp; Align More. [0:29:55]




Our Sponsor:


  
FreshBooks get 50% off for 6 months




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 15 May 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Stop Overworking and Underliving: How to Redefine Ambition and Create Lasting Success with Bri Seeley</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>952</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How childhood experiences shape our drive, why stillness is more powerful than hustle, how to stop outsourcing your self-worth to external results and so much more!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Ever felt like you're chasing milestones that look great on paper but leave you feeling empty? This episode gives you permission to pause, reset, and redefine what success means to you. Bri Seeley is no stranger to ambition, but she's flipped the script on what it looks like to succeed. As a TEDx speaker, success coach, and award-winning businesswoman, she helps entrepreneurs achieve big, bold goals without burnout. Her signature “Defy” process invites you to ditch the hustle, tune into your truth, and take action from a place of alignment, not anxiety. 

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  
Instagram



  
All the Links!




In this episode, we dig into how childhood experiences shape our drive, why stillness is more powerful than hustle, and how to stop outsourcing your self-worth to external results. Bri also breaks down how to live like your future self today (no extra $50K or perfect plan required!), and why small, intentional steps can lead to radical transformation.If you feel stuck on the productivity hamster wheel, this is your nudge to slow down, zoom out, and build success on your terms without overworking or “underliving” in the process. Tune in to start defying the rules that never worked for you in the first place!

Episode Highlights


  
Redefining Success &amp; Ambition On Your Own Terms. [0:01:25] 



  
Why Slowing Down Gets You Further Than Striving. [0:06:10]



  
How to Defy Reality &amp; Feel the Future Now. [0:09:05]



  
Small Steps, Big Shifts, Sustainable Momentum. [0:16:35]



  
Breaking Free from the Addiction to Busywork. [0:25:50]



  
Finding Your 20% to Work Less &amp; Align More. [0:29:55]




Our Sponsor:


  
FreshBooks get 50% off for 6 months




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ever felt like you're chasing milestones that look great on paper but leave you feeling empty? This episode gives you permission to pause, reset, and redefine what success means to you. Bri Seeley is no stranger to ambition, but she's flipped the script on what it looks like to succeed. As a TEDx speaker, success coach, and award-winning businesswoman, she helps entrepreneurs achieve big, bold goals without burnout. Her signature “Defy” process invites you to ditch the hustle, tune into your truth, and take action from a place of alignment, not anxiety. </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</u></a></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>In this episode, we dig into how childhood experiences shape our drive, why stillness is more powerful than hustle, and how to stop outsourcing your self-worth to external results. Bri also breaks down how to live like your future self today (no extra $50K or perfect plan required!), and why small, intentional steps can lead to radical transformation.If you feel stuck on the productivity hamster wheel, this is your nudge to slow down, zoom out, and build success on your terms without overworking or “underliving” in the process. Tune in to start defying the rules that never worked for you in the first place!</p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Redefining Success &amp; Ambition On Your Own Terms. [0:01:25] </p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Why Slowing Down Gets You Further Than Striving. [0:06:10]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>How to Defy Reality &amp; Feel the Future Now. [0:09:05]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Small Steps, Big Shifts, Sustainable Momentum. [0:16:35]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Breaking Free from the Addiction to Busywork. [0:25:50]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Finding Your 20% to Work Less &amp; Align More. [0:29:55]</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Our Sponsor:</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb"><u>FreshBooks</u></a> get 50% off for 6 months</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast"><u>bossproject.com/podcast</u></a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2913</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7a8a14c6-2adb-11f0-9805-2b6814dec477]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE2137320953.mp3?updated=1753931122" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>951: Friendships in Your 30s and 40s: Loving, Losing, and Letting Be</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/friendships-in-your-30s-and-40s-loving-losing-and-letting-be</link>
      <description>I don’t know a single person in their 30s and 40s who doesn’t want deeper and more meaningful friendships. The last place I expected to get friendship advice was from Mel Robbins’ new book, The Let Them Theory. Today, I want to share the unexpected ways this book shifted how I think about making, retaining, and even releasing friendships, especially in the complicated season of adulthood that is your 30s and 40s. 

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses⁠

Connect with Abagail


  
⁠Instagram⁠



  
⁠All the Links⁠!




There is an entire section in this book that talks about adult friendships. So, what is the ‘let them theory’ in relation to relationships? It’s all about relinquishing control instead of chasing, convincing, or over-managing relationships. It’s not about being cold or cutting people off, it’s about allowing people to be who they are without letting that affect your worth. 

Episode Highlights


  
The Great Scattering and How Friendships Naturally Change. [0:03:40] 



  
How ‘Letting Them’, ‘Lets You’. [0:12:35]



  
Fostering New Relationships. [0:18:53]




Our Sponsor:


  
FreshBooks get 50% off for 6 months




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 13 May 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Friendships in Your 30s and 40s: Loving, Losing, and Letting Be</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>951</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Unexpected ways Mel Robbins’ new book, The Let Them Theory, shifted how I think about making, retaining, and even releasing friendships.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I don’t know a single person in their 30s and 40s who doesn’t want deeper and more meaningful friendships. The last place I expected to get friendship advice was from Mel Robbins’ new book, The Let Them Theory. Today, I want to share the unexpected ways this book shifted how I think about making, retaining, and even releasing friendships, especially in the complicated season of adulthood that is your 30s and 40s. 

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses⁠

Connect with Abagail


  
⁠Instagram⁠



  
⁠All the Links⁠!




There is an entire section in this book that talks about adult friendships. So, what is the ‘let them theory’ in relation to relationships? It’s all about relinquishing control instead of chasing, convincing, or over-managing relationships. It’s not about being cold or cutting people off, it’s about allowing people to be who they are without letting that affect your worth. 

Episode Highlights


  
The Great Scattering and How Friendships Naturally Change. [0:03:40] 



  
How ‘Letting Them’, ‘Lets You’. [0:12:35]



  
Fostering New Relationships. [0:18:53]




Our Sponsor:


  
FreshBooks get 50% off for 6 months




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I don’t know a single person in their 30s and 40s who doesn’t want deeper and more meaningful friendships. The last place I expected to get friendship advice was from Mel Robbins’ new book, <em>The Let Them Theory</em>. Today, I want to share the unexpected ways this book shifted how I think about making, retaining, and even releasing friendships, especially in the complicated season of adulthood that is your 30s and 40s. </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses⁠</u></a></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays"><u>⁠Instagram⁠</u></a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links"><u>⁠All the Links⁠</u></a>!</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>There is an entire section in this book that talks about adult friendships. So, what is the ‘let them theory’ in relation to relationships? It’s all about relinquishing control instead of chasing, convincing, or over-managing relationships. It’s not about being cold or cutting people off, it’s about allowing people to be who they are without letting that affect your worth. </p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>The Great Scattering and How Friendships Naturally Change. [0:03:40] </p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>How ‘Letting Them’, ‘Lets You’. [0:12:35]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Fostering New Relationships. [0:18:53]</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Our Sponsor:</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb"><u>FreshBooks</u></a> get 50% off for 6 months</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast"><u>bossproject.com/podcast</u></a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1774</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[34601534-29d4-11f0-a89b-83ab1992dba7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1737717008.mp3?updated=1753921216" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>950: Your Audience Is Craving Dopamine, Not Information</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/your-audience-is-craving-dopamine-not-information</link>
      <description>Your audience isn’t addicted to your content. They’re addicted to dopamine. And if your marketing isn't delivering those micro hits of satisfaction, they're scrolling right past it. In this episode, I'm unpacking how I'm rethinking everything in content, from what I post to how I write. Not to teach better, but to create content that feels better to consume, because that's what people are responding to right now.

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  
Instagram



  
All the Links!




People aren’t just looking for educational content anymore; they’re looking for emotional connections that make them feel something in the moment. Whether it’s overcoming boredom, finding entertainment, or feeling a sense of belonging, social media is all about emotional satisfaction. It’s time to adapt to these shifts and create content that resonates on a deeper, emotional level.

Episode Highlights


  
What is Dopamine? [0:02:26]



  
Do Dopamine Dressing — But Make It Content [0:03:40]



  
Not Everyone Needs To Be Your Ideal Client [0:05:40]



  
Your Life Doesn’t Need To Be Interesting (Or Perfect) [0:06:39]



  
Decide Who Should Consume Your Content [0:12:48]



  
Build Your Dopamine Content Closet [0:14:23]




Our Sponsor:


  
FreshBooks get 50% off for 6 months




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 08 May 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Your Audience Is Craving Dopamine, Not Information</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>950</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>It’s time to adapt to these shifts and create content that resonates on a deeper, emotional level.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Your audience isn’t addicted to your content. They’re addicted to dopamine. And if your marketing isn't delivering those micro hits of satisfaction, they're scrolling right past it. In this episode, I'm unpacking how I'm rethinking everything in content, from what I post to how I write. Not to teach better, but to create content that feels better to consume, because that's what people are responding to right now.

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  
Instagram



  
All the Links!




People aren’t just looking for educational content anymore; they’re looking for emotional connections that make them feel something in the moment. Whether it’s overcoming boredom, finding entertainment, or feeling a sense of belonging, social media is all about emotional satisfaction. It’s time to adapt to these shifts and create content that resonates on a deeper, emotional level.

Episode Highlights


  
What is Dopamine? [0:02:26]



  
Do Dopamine Dressing — But Make It Content [0:03:40]



  
Not Everyone Needs To Be Your Ideal Client [0:05:40]



  
Your Life Doesn’t Need To Be Interesting (Or Perfect) [0:06:39]



  
Decide Who Should Consume Your Content [0:12:48]



  
Build Your Dopamine Content Closet [0:14:23]




Our Sponsor:


  
FreshBooks get 50% off for 6 months




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Your audience isn’t addicted to your content. They’re addicted to dopamine. And if your marketing isn't delivering those micro hits of satisfaction, they're scrolling right past it. In this episode, I'm unpacking how I'm rethinking everything in content, from what I post to how I write. Not to teach better, but to create content that feels better to consume, because that's what people are responding to right now.</p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</u></a></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>People aren’t just looking for educational content anymore; they’re looking for emotional connections that make them feel something in the moment. Whether it’s overcoming boredom, finding entertainment, or feeling a sense of belonging, social media is all about emotional satisfaction. It’s time to adapt to these shifts and create content that resonates on a deeper, emotional level.</p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>What is Dopamine? [0:02:26]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Do Dopamine Dressing — But Make It Content [0:03:40]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Not Everyone Needs To Be Your Ideal Client [0:05:40]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Your Life Doesn’t Need To Be Interesting (Or Perfect) [0:06:39]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Decide Who Should Consume Your Content [0:12:48]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Build Your Dopamine Content Closet [0:14:23]</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Our Sponsor:</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb"><u>FreshBooks</u></a> get 50% off for 6 months</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast"><u>bossproject.com/podcast</u></a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1320</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[017b41d6-29c3-11f0-8a56-4fffd46b0514]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE4495335344.mp3?updated=1746458485" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>949: How to Live Freely in a Goal-Obsessed World with Anne-Laure Le Cunff</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-live-freely-in-a-goal-obsessed-world-with-anne-laure-le-cunff</link>
      <description>If you’ve ever felt overwhelmed by traditional goal-setting, stuck chasing someone else’s version of success, or paralyzed by the fear of getting it wrong, this conversation will feel like a breath of fresh air. Joining me is Anne-Laure Le Cunff, an award-winning neuroscientist, entrepreneur, and the founder of Ness Labs, where her insights on lifelong learning, curiosity, and adaptability reach more than 100 000 curious minds every week.

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  
Instagram



  
All the Links!




Together, we dive into her new, incredible book, Tiny Experiments, a transformative guide to living a more experimental life, turning uncertainty into curiosity and forging a path of self-discovery one step at a time. Anne-Laure has beautifully captured what so many of us are feeling today about growth, achievement, and navigating a world that’s constantly changing. I’m so excited for you to read this one!

Episode Highlights


  
Golden Handcuffs: From Working at Google to Reframing Her Goals [0:01:49] 



  
Why Our Approach to Goal-Setting Makes No Sense in a Changing World [0:07:00]



  
What It Might Look Like to Approach Life with an Experimental Mindset [0:10:35]



  
How an Experimental Mindset Might Actually Support the Sustainability of Your Business [0:23:58]



  
Learning in Public: What’s Different About Experimenting Together [0:29:05]



  
Designing Your First Tiny Experiment [0:37:12]




Our Sponsor:


  
FreshBooks get 50% off for 6 months




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 06 May 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Live Freely in a Goal-Obsessed World with Anne-Laure Le Cunff</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>949</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle> A transformative guide to living a more experimental life, turning uncertainty into curiosity and forging a path of self-discovery one step at a time.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you’ve ever felt overwhelmed by traditional goal-setting, stuck chasing someone else’s version of success, or paralyzed by the fear of getting it wrong, this conversation will feel like a breath of fresh air. Joining me is Anne-Laure Le Cunff, an award-winning neuroscientist, entrepreneur, and the founder of Ness Labs, where her insights on lifelong learning, curiosity, and adaptability reach more than 100 000 curious minds every week.

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  
Instagram



  
All the Links!




Together, we dive into her new, incredible book, Tiny Experiments, a transformative guide to living a more experimental life, turning uncertainty into curiosity and forging a path of self-discovery one step at a time. Anne-Laure has beautifully captured what so many of us are feeling today about growth, achievement, and navigating a world that’s constantly changing. I’m so excited for you to read this one!

Episode Highlights


  
Golden Handcuffs: From Working at Google to Reframing Her Goals [0:01:49] 



  
Why Our Approach to Goal-Setting Makes No Sense in a Changing World [0:07:00]



  
What It Might Look Like to Approach Life with an Experimental Mindset [0:10:35]



  
How an Experimental Mindset Might Actually Support the Sustainability of Your Business [0:23:58]



  
Learning in Public: What’s Different About Experimenting Together [0:29:05]



  
Designing Your First Tiny Experiment [0:37:12]




Our Sponsor:


  
FreshBooks get 50% off for 6 months




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you’ve ever felt overwhelmed by traditional goal-setting, stuck chasing someone else’s version of success, or paralyzed by the fear of getting it wrong, this conversation will feel like a breath of fresh air. Joining me is Anne-Laure Le Cunff, an award-winning neuroscientist, entrepreneur, and the founder of Ness Labs, where her insights on lifelong learning, curiosity, and adaptability reach more than 100 000 curious minds every week.</p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</u></a></p>
<p><strong>Connect with Abagail</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Together, we dive into her new, incredible book, <em>Tiny Experiments, </em>a transformative guide to living a more experimental life, turning uncertainty into curiosity and forging a path of self-discovery one step at a time. Anne-Laure has beautifully captured what so many of us are feeling today about growth, achievement, and navigating a world that’s constantly changing. I’m so excited for you to read this one!</p>
<p><strong>Episode Highlights</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Golden Handcuffs: From Working at Google to Reframing Her Goals [0:01:49] </p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Why Our Approach to Goal-Setting Makes No Sense in a Changing World [0:07:00]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>What It Might Look Like to Approach Life with an Experimental Mindset [0:10:35]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>How an Experimental Mindset Might Actually Support the Sustainability of Your Business [0:23:58]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Learning in Public: What’s Different About Experimenting Together [0:29:05]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Designing Your First Tiny Experiment [0:37:12]</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Our Sponsor:</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb"><u>FreshBooks</u></a><strong> </strong>get 50% off for 6 months</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast"><u>bossproject.com/podcast</u></a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2544</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d3965aae-26bf-11f0-8eeb-8f04b3abfc70]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6674090150.mp3?updated=1746127122" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>948: The RealReal Truth About Power, Wealth &amp; $1B Exits with Julie Wainwright</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-realreal-truth-about-power-wealth-and-exits-with-julie-wainwright</link>
      <description>If you don’t believe in yourself, who else will? This episode is for everyone! Whether you’re a solopreneur, a startup founder, or growing a team of your own, this conversation is full of real-world advice from someone who’s lived it and started all over again. 


Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses


Connect with Abagail


  
Instagram



  
All the Links!





Today, we are joined by Julie Wainwright, founder and former CEO of The RealReal; a company that she scaled to over a billion dollars in revenue before taking it public. Now she is at it again as the co-founder and CEO of AHARA – a precision nutrition company redefining wellness through science. 

Julie has been featured on Forbes’ 50 Under 50 alongside names like Kamala Harris and Shonda Rhimes. Julie is a bold and strategic leader who is here to share the lessons no one teaches about running a business. Tune in to hear all about navigating power dynamics, building personal wealth, making strategic exits, and leading companies as a woman in tech. 


Episode Highlights


  
Fearlessness in Career Pivots. [0:03:41] 



  
Embracing Being 51% Right and Finding Confidence. [0:12:49]



  
Building Personal Wealth as a Woman. [0:25:31]





Our Sponsor:


  
FreshBooks get 50% off for 6 months





Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 01 May 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The RealReal Truth About Power, Wealth &amp; $1B Exits with Julie Wainwright</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>948</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Whether you’re a solopreneur, a startup founder, or growing a team of your own, this conversation is full of real-world advice from someone who’s lived it and started all over again. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you don’t believe in yourself, who else will? This episode is for everyone! Whether you’re a solopreneur, a startup founder, or growing a team of your own, this conversation is full of real-world advice from someone who’s lived it and started all over again. 


Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses


Connect with Abagail


  
Instagram



  
All the Links!





Today, we are joined by Julie Wainwright, founder and former CEO of The RealReal; a company that she scaled to over a billion dollars in revenue before taking it public. Now she is at it again as the co-founder and CEO of AHARA – a precision nutrition company redefining wellness through science. 

Julie has been featured on Forbes’ 50 Under 50 alongside names like Kamala Harris and Shonda Rhimes. Julie is a bold and strategic leader who is here to share the lessons no one teaches about running a business. Tune in to hear all about navigating power dynamics, building personal wealth, making strategic exits, and leading companies as a woman in tech. 


Episode Highlights


  
Fearlessness in Career Pivots. [0:03:41] 



  
Embracing Being 51% Right and Finding Confidence. [0:12:49]



  
Building Personal Wealth as a Woman. [0:25:31]





Our Sponsor:


  
FreshBooks get 50% off for 6 months





Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you don’t believe in yourself, who else will? This episode is for everyone! Whether you’re a solopreneur, a startup founder, or growing a team of your own, this conversation is full of real-world advice from someone who’s lived it and started all over again. </p>

<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</u></a></p>

<h3>Connect with Abagail</h3>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</p>
</li>
</ul>

<p>Today, we are joined by Julie Wainwright, founder and former CEO of The RealReal; a company that she scaled to over a billion dollars in revenue before taking it public. Now she is at it again as the co-founder and CEO of AHARA – a precision nutrition company redefining wellness through science. </p>
<p>Julie has been featured on Forbes’ 50 Under 50 alongside names like Kamala Harris and Shonda Rhimes. Julie is a bold and strategic leader who is here to share the lessons no one teaches about running a business. Tune in to hear all about navigating power dynamics, building personal wealth, making strategic exits, and leading companies as a woman in tech. </p>

<h3>Episode Highlights</h3>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Fearlessness in Career Pivots. [0:03:41] </p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Embracing Being 51% Right and Finding Confidence. [0:12:49]</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Building Personal Wealth as a Woman. [0:25:31]</p>
</li>
</ul>

<h3>Our Sponsor:</h3>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb"><u>FreshBooks</u></a> get 50% off for 6 months</p>
</li>
</ul>

<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast"><u>bossproject.com/podcast</u></a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2906</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[14f25aa2-25cb-11f0-953f-9f2f76621faa]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE9394843401.mp3?updated=1746022557" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>947:  Creator Story Toolkit: Part 2 - The Stories That Sell Your Offers + Expand Your Impact</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creator-story-toolkit-part-2-stories-that-sell-your-offers-and-expand-your-impact</link>
      <description>We’re talking about the kinds of stories that help you connect with your audience, build trust, and grow your business! In today’s episode, we’re focusing on stories that help you sell your offers and expand your impact. They’re the ones that move people to action, help you overcome objections, and grow your community by making your message land. These stories don’t just connect with your audience; they convert!

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!


Episode Highlights


  Show People That You Understand Their Challenges [0:01:22]


  Share Why You Created Your Offer [0:04:22]

  Connect Over Shared Values [0:08:34]

  Invite Others to Be Part of Your Vision for the Future [0:12:45]

  Haters Gonna Hate [0:15:50]

  Show What’s Possible When You Take a Chance [0:19:51]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 29 Apr 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creator Story Toolkit: Part 2 - The Stories That Sell Your Offers + Expand Your Impact</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>947</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’re focusing on stories that help you sell your offers and expand your impact.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’re talking about the kinds of stories that help you connect with your audience, build trust, and grow your business! In today’s episode, we’re focusing on stories that help you sell your offers and expand your impact. They’re the ones that move people to action, help you overcome objections, and grow your community by making your message land. These stories don’t just connect with your audience; they convert!

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!


Episode Highlights


  Show People That You Understand Their Challenges [0:01:22]


  Share Why You Created Your Offer [0:04:22]

  Connect Over Shared Values [0:08:34]

  Invite Others to Be Part of Your Vision for the Future [0:12:45]

  Haters Gonna Hate [0:15:50]

  Show What’s Possible When You Take a Chance [0:19:51]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’re talking about the kinds of stories that help you connect with your audience, build trust, and grow your business! In today’s episode, we’re focusing on stories that help you sell your offers and expand your impact. They’re the ones that move people to action, help you overcome objections, and grow your community by making your message land. These stories don’t just connect with your audience; they convert!</p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership"><u>Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</u></a></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>Show People That You Understand Their Challenges [0:01:22]
</li>
  <li>Share Why You Created Your Offer [0:04:22]</li>
  <li>Connect Over Shared Values [0:08:34]</li>
  <li>Invite Others to Be Part of Your Vision for the Future [0:12:45]</li>
  <li>Haters Gonna Hate [0:15:50]</li>
  <li>Show What’s Possible When You Take a Chance [0:19:51]</li>
</ul>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast"><u>bossproject.com/podcast</u></a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1630</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[89053298-2472-11f0-8734-f7a2a76c2fa8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6349096963.mp3?updated=1746117458" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>946: Creator Story Toolkit: Part 1 – The Stories That Build Your Brand + Make You Memorable</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creator-story-toolkit-part-1-stories-that-build-your-brand-and-make-you-memorable</link>
      <description>I believe storytelling is one of the most powerful tools you have as a marketer. In a recent podcast, I talked about pulling out the kinds of stories that you can use again and again. I want to teach you to write narratives that you can come back to and use in a bunch of different situations.



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses



Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




These are the stories that are going to help build your brand and make you memorable. We’re talking about creating trust and building an emotional connection with you and your business. This is how you build relationships without having a one-on-one conversation. It’s all about building a foundation: introducing yourself to a colder audience and reminding your warmer audience how you tick.



Episode Highlights


  What to Include in Your Origin Story [0:02:34] 

  How to Tell Your Founder Story [0:05:14]

  Where to Tell Your Why Story [0:09:10]

  Why Customer Transformation Stories are So Powerful [0:12:27]

  Learning to Tell Your Story of Failure [0:17:07]

  Telling Your Credibility Story [0:23:36]

  Personality-Driven Extras [0:27:32]

  What Happens When You Share an Idea That Didn’t Work [0:32:55] 


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 24 Apr 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creator Story Toolkit: Part 1 – The Stories That Build Your Brand + Make You Memorable</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>946</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>It’s all about building a foundation: introducing yourself to a colder audience and reminding your warmer audience how you tick.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I believe storytelling is one of the most powerful tools you have as a marketer. In a recent podcast, I talked about pulling out the kinds of stories that you can use again and again. I want to teach you to write narratives that you can come back to and use in a bunch of different situations.



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses



Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




These are the stories that are going to help build your brand and make you memorable. We’re talking about creating trust and building an emotional connection with you and your business. This is how you build relationships without having a one-on-one conversation. It’s all about building a foundation: introducing yourself to a colder audience and reminding your warmer audience how you tick.



Episode Highlights


  What to Include in Your Origin Story [0:02:34] 

  How to Tell Your Founder Story [0:05:14]

  Where to Tell Your Why Story [0:09:10]

  Why Customer Transformation Stories are So Powerful [0:12:27]

  Learning to Tell Your Story of Failure [0:17:07]

  Telling Your Credibility Story [0:23:36]

  Personality-Driven Extras [0:27:32]

  What Happens When You Share an Idea That Didn’t Work [0:32:55] 


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I believe storytelling is one of the most powerful tools you have as a marketer. In a recent podcast, I talked about pulling out the kinds of stories that you can use again and again. I want to teach you to write narratives that you can come back to and use in a bunch of different situations.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>These are the stories that are going to help build your brand and make you memorable. We’re talking about creating trust and building an emotional connection with you and your business. This is how you build relationships without having a one-on-one conversation. It’s all about building a foundation: introducing yourself to a colder audience and reminding your warmer audience how you tick.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>What to Include in Your Origin Story [0:02:34] </li>
  <li>How to Tell Your Founder Story [0:05:14]</li>
  <li>Where to Tell Your Why Story [0:09:10]</li>
  <li>Why Customer Transformation Stories are So Powerful [0:12:27]</li>
  <li>Learning to Tell Your Story of Failure [0:17:07]</li>
  <li>Telling Your Credibility Story [0:23:36]</li>
  <li>Personality-Driven Extras [0:27:32]</li>
  <li>What Happens When You Share an Idea That Didn’t Work [0:32:55] </li>
</ul>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2697</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2e6040ce-1f8d-11f0-989d-3fc1912b0e12]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6667979112.mp3?updated=1746117437" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>945: What AI Can’t Replace (And What You Should Automate Anyway)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-ai-cant-replace-and-what-you-should-automate-anyway</link>
      <description>AI is everywhere. It’s an undeniably powerful tool, it’s evolving fast, and it’s not going away. But even with all that momentum, there are still some things it can’t do and some things you should absolutely let it handle for you.



It also provokes a lot of different reactions. For some, fear is the first response. Others feel overwhelmed or confused. Maybe you’re just tired of the noise! All anyone has talked about for the last two years has been AI, and honestly? I get it. Every one of those reactions is valid.



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




But here’s what I want to do today: point out what makes you unique, your story, your lived experience, your creative spark, and show you how you can work with AI, not against it. Because it’s critically important that business owners learn how to use it, otherwise you're going to be left in the dust. My goal is for you to walk away feeling empowered and clear on how to use AI to save time, spark ideas, and support your business without ever losing what makes your voice special!



Episode Highlights


  What AI Can’t Replace: Your Story, Voice &amp; Lived Experience. [0:02:34] 

  The Power of Emotional Nuance &amp; Creative Intuition. [0:08:04]

  Using AI to Save Time &amp; Make Money in Your Business. [0:14:12]

  Collaborating with AI, Not Competing With It. [0:22:13]

  The Future of AI: From Productivity Partner to Task Execution Tool. [0:23:04]




Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 22 Apr 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What AI Can’t Replace (And What You Should Automate Anyway)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>945</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>You'll walk away feeling empowered and clear on how to use AI to save time, spark ideas, and support your business without ever losing what makes your voice special!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>AI is everywhere. It’s an undeniably powerful tool, it’s evolving fast, and it’s not going away. But even with all that momentum, there are still some things it can’t do and some things you should absolutely let it handle for you.



It also provokes a lot of different reactions. For some, fear is the first response. Others feel overwhelmed or confused. Maybe you’re just tired of the noise! All anyone has talked about for the last two years has been AI, and honestly? I get it. Every one of those reactions is valid.



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




But here’s what I want to do today: point out what makes you unique, your story, your lived experience, your creative spark, and show you how you can work with AI, not against it. Because it’s critically important that business owners learn how to use it, otherwise you're going to be left in the dust. My goal is for you to walk away feeling empowered and clear on how to use AI to save time, spark ideas, and support your business without ever losing what makes your voice special!



Episode Highlights


  What AI Can’t Replace: Your Story, Voice &amp; Lived Experience. [0:02:34] 

  The Power of Emotional Nuance &amp; Creative Intuition. [0:08:04]

  Using AI to Save Time &amp; Make Money in Your Business. [0:14:12]

  Collaborating with AI, Not Competing With It. [0:22:13]

  The Future of AI: From Productivity Partner to Task Execution Tool. [0:23:04]




Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>AI is everywhere. It’s an undeniably powerful tool, it’s evolving fast, and it’s not going away. But even with all that momentum, there are still some things it can’t do and some things you should absolutely let it handle for you.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>It also provokes a lot of different reactions. For some, fear is the first response. Others feel overwhelmed or confused. Maybe you’re just tired of the noise! All anyone has talked about for the last two years has been AI, and honestly? I get it. Every one of those reactions is valid.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>But here’s what I want to do today: point out what makes you unique, your story, your lived experience, your creative spark, and show you how you can work with AI, not against it. Because it’s critically important that business owners learn how to use it, otherwise you're going to be left in the dust. My goal is for you to walk away feeling empowered and clear on how to use AI to save time, spark ideas, and support your business without ever losing what makes your voice special!</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>What AI Can’t Replace: Your Story, Voice &amp; Lived Experience. [0:02:34] </li>
  <li>The Power of Emotional Nuance &amp; Creative Intuition. [0:08:04]</li>
  <li>Using AI to Save Time &amp; Make Money in Your Business. [0:14:12]</li>
  <li>Collaborating with AI, Not Competing With It. [0:22:13]</li>
  <li>The Future of AI: From Productivity Partner to Task Execution Tool. [0:23:04]</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2253</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8a45a056-1a2d-11f0-a7dd-dfa2663f68f7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1945232649.mp3?updated=1746117421" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>944: The Business Advice I’m Actively Ignoring Right Now</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/business-advice-i-am-actively-ignoring-right-now</link>
      <description>There’s no shortage of business advice out there, but let’s be real, some of it just doesn’t work for me. And I’m guessing it’s not all going to work for you either!



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




I’ve learned the hard way that not all advice is created equal. In today’s episode, I’m sharing where I’m intentionally being a rebel; where I’m choosing what actually aligns with my values and giving myself permission to evolve. I hope this episode gives you the spark to do the same. We’re going to tackle these, one piece of bad advice at a time, and I’ll break down exactly why I’m not following it. 

Episode Highlights


  Why You Shouldn’t Do Less to Make More [0:01:05] 

  You Don’t Need a Huge Audience to Make Real Money [0:03:10]

  What You Should Actually Focus On &amp; Why it Isn’t Growing Your Team [0:06:17]

  How to Stop Glorifying Burnout &amp; Making Ease Seem Like a Failure [0:14:54]

  Fight Me on This: You Don’t Need a Niche! [0:17:04]

  My Perspective on Where to Place Your Pricing [0:20:41]

  How to Win with Just One Offer &amp; One Thing You Shouldn't Fear Monetizing [0:25:26]

  The Permission You Might Not Know You Need [0:32:45]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 17 Apr 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Business Advice I’m Actively Ignoring Right Now</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>944</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>There’s no shortage of business advice out there, but let’s be real, some of it just doesn’t work for me. And I’m guessing it’s not all going to work for you either!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There’s no shortage of business advice out there, but let’s be real, some of it just doesn’t work for me. And I’m guessing it’s not all going to work for you either!



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




I’ve learned the hard way that not all advice is created equal. In today’s episode, I’m sharing where I’m intentionally being a rebel; where I’m choosing what actually aligns with my values and giving myself permission to evolve. I hope this episode gives you the spark to do the same. We’re going to tackle these, one piece of bad advice at a time, and I’ll break down exactly why I’m not following it. 

Episode Highlights


  Why You Shouldn’t Do Less to Make More [0:01:05] 

  You Don’t Need a Huge Audience to Make Real Money [0:03:10]

  What You Should Actually Focus On &amp; Why it Isn’t Growing Your Team [0:06:17]

  How to Stop Glorifying Burnout &amp; Making Ease Seem Like a Failure [0:14:54]

  Fight Me on This: You Don’t Need a Niche! [0:17:04]

  My Perspective on Where to Place Your Pricing [0:20:41]

  How to Win with Just One Offer &amp; One Thing You Shouldn't Fear Monetizing [0:25:26]

  The Permission You Might Not Know You Need [0:32:45]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There’s no shortage of business advice out there, but let’s be real, some of it just doesn’t work for me. And I’m guessing it’s not all going to work for you either!</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>I’ve learned the hard way that not all advice is created equal. In today’s episode, I’m sharing where I’m intentionally being a rebel; where I’m choosing what actually aligns with my values and giving myself permission to evolve. I hope this episode gives you the spark to do the same. We’re going to tackle these, one piece of bad advice at a time, and I’ll break down exactly why I’m not following it. </p>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>Why You Shouldn’t Do Less to Make More [0:01:05] </li>
  <li>You Don’t Need a Huge Audience to Make Real Money [0:03:10]</li>
  <li>What You Should Actually Focus On &amp; Why it Isn’t Growing Your Team [0:06:17]</li>
  <li>How to Stop Glorifying Burnout &amp; Making Ease Seem Like a Failure [0:14:54]</li>
  <li>Fight Me on This: You Don’t Need a Niche! [0:17:04]</li>
  <li>My Perspective on Where to Place Your Pricing [0:20:41]</li>
  <li>How to Win with Just One Offer &amp; One Thing You Shouldn't Fear Monetizing [0:25:26]</li>
  <li>The Permission You Might Not Know You Need [0:32:45]</li>
</ul>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2295</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[31a44f76-1a26-11f0-bac5-470c12317de8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5698986246.mp3?updated=1746117402" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>943: How to Build ADHD-Friendly Systems that Support How Your Brain Works with Latrice Prater</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-build-adhd-friendly-systems-that-support-how-your-brain-works</link>
      <description>If traditional business advice has ever felt like it was made for someone else’s brain, you’re not imagining it! This episode is all about building systems that truly support how you think, especially if you’re an entrepreneur with ADHD or leading a neurodiverse team.



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




Our guest, Latrice Prater, is a neurodivergent CEO and founder of The Digital Solutions Team. In just a few short years, she’s scaled her agency and redefined how women in business approach systems, structure, and success. She shares how her neurodivergence shaped her journey and how you can build a business that works with your brain, not against it. Tune in to discover how to create systems that actually fit the way you work!

Episode Highlights


  Systems for ADHD Needs to be a Thing [0:01:23]

  Building a System for Your Brain, Business, and Budget [0:04:33]

  Creating Structure for ADHD [0:08:28]

  Giving Your Team Autonomy [0:12:59]

  Find What Works For You [0:14:56]

  Managing Your Teams [0:25:41]

  Redefining Success [0:32:38]

  The ADHD Superpower [0:35:20]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 15 Apr 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Build ADHD-Friendly Systems that Support How Your Brain Works with Latrice Prater</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>943</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Learn how neurodivergence shaped her journey and how you can build a business that works with your brain, not against it.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If traditional business advice has ever felt like it was made for someone else’s brain, you’re not imagining it! This episode is all about building systems that truly support how you think, especially if you’re an entrepreneur with ADHD or leading a neurodiverse team.



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




Our guest, Latrice Prater, is a neurodivergent CEO and founder of The Digital Solutions Team. In just a few short years, she’s scaled her agency and redefined how women in business approach systems, structure, and success. She shares how her neurodivergence shaped her journey and how you can build a business that works with your brain, not against it. Tune in to discover how to create systems that actually fit the way you work!

Episode Highlights


  Systems for ADHD Needs to be a Thing [0:01:23]

  Building a System for Your Brain, Business, and Budget [0:04:33]

  Creating Structure for ADHD [0:08:28]

  Giving Your Team Autonomy [0:12:59]

  Find What Works For You [0:14:56]

  Managing Your Teams [0:25:41]

  Redefining Success [0:32:38]

  The ADHD Superpower [0:35:20]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If traditional business advice has ever felt like it was made for someone else’s brain, you’re not imagining it! This episode is all about building systems that truly support how you think, especially if you’re an entrepreneur with ADHD or leading a neurodiverse team.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Our guest, Latrice Prater, is a neurodivergent CEO and founder of The Digital Solutions Team. In just a few short years, she’s scaled her agency and redefined how women in business approach systems, structure, and success. She shares how her neurodivergence shaped her journey and how you can build a business that works with your brain, not against it. Tune in to discover how to create systems that actually fit the way you work!</p>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>Systems for ADHD Needs to be a Thing [0:01:23]</li>
  <li>Building a System for Your Brain, Business, and Budget [0:04:33]</li>
  <li>Creating Structure for ADHD [0:08:28]</li>
  <li>Giving Your Team Autonomy [0:12:59]</li>
  <li>Find What Works For You [0:14:56]</li>
  <li>Managing Your Teams [0:25:41]</li>
  <li>Redefining Success [0:32:38]</li>
  <li>The ADHD Superpower [0:35:20]</li>
</ul>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2699</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[48e4ebbc-1951-11f0-b440-77ed09d63b6d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE8867270300.mp3?updated=1746117383" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>942: Growing a Viral National Brand with a $0 Marketing Budget with Lindzi Shanks</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/growing-a-viral-national-brand-with-a-0-marketing-budget</link>
      <description>Most brands assume going viral takes a big ad budget. But what if you could build national recognition, a cult-like following, and a thriving e-commerce business without spending a single dollar on paid ads? Lindzi Shanks is the co-founder of XO Marshmallow and the world’s first gourmet marshmallow cafe. It’s a wildly fun online brand with flavors as nostalgic as they are delicious. She is an entrepreneur, strategist, and content genius who knows how to make people fall in love with a product, and she did it all with a $0 marketing budget. 



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!


Episode Highlights


  XO Marshmallow’s Rise from $200 in the Bank to a Multi 7-Figure Business [0:01:47] 

  Building a Viral Brand Without a Marketing Budget [0:05:27]

  Creating a Shareable Product and Building a Community [0:09:46]

  The Next Chapter: XO Marshmallow’s Plans for Growth [0:23:04]

  Leveraging the Power of Brand Partnerships Over Press [0:30:47]

  What’s Next for XO Marshmallow and How You Can Go Along for the Journey [0:41:44]




Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 10 Apr 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Growing a Viral National Brand with a $0 Marketing Budget with Lindzi Shanks</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>942</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>What if you could build national recognition, a cult-like following, and a thriving e-commerce business without spending a single dollar on paid ads?</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Most brands assume going viral takes a big ad budget. But what if you could build national recognition, a cult-like following, and a thriving e-commerce business without spending a single dollar on paid ads? Lindzi Shanks is the co-founder of XO Marshmallow and the world’s first gourmet marshmallow cafe. It’s a wildly fun online brand with flavors as nostalgic as they are delicious. She is an entrepreneur, strategist, and content genius who knows how to make people fall in love with a product, and she did it all with a $0 marketing budget. 



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!


Episode Highlights


  XO Marshmallow’s Rise from $200 in the Bank to a Multi 7-Figure Business [0:01:47] 

  Building a Viral Brand Without a Marketing Budget [0:05:27]

  Creating a Shareable Product and Building a Community [0:09:46]

  The Next Chapter: XO Marshmallow’s Plans for Growth [0:23:04]

  Leveraging the Power of Brand Partnerships Over Press [0:30:47]

  What’s Next for XO Marshmallow and How You Can Go Along for the Journey [0:41:44]




Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Most brands assume going viral takes a big ad budget. But what if you could build national recognition, a cult-like following, and a thriving e-commerce business without spending a single dollar on paid ads? Lindzi Shanks is the co-founder of XO Marshmallow and the world’s first gourmet marshmallow cafe. It’s a wildly fun online brand with flavors as nostalgic as they are delicious. She is an entrepreneur, strategist, and content genius who knows how to make people fall in love with a product, and she did it all with a $0 marketing budget. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>XO Marshmallow’s Rise from $200 in the Bank to a Multi 7-Figure Business [0:01:47] </li>
  <li>Building a Viral Brand Without a Marketing Budget [0:05:27]</li>
  <li>Creating a Shareable Product and Building a Community [0:09:46]</li>
  <li>The Next Chapter: XO Marshmallow’s Plans for Growth [0:23:04]</li>
  <li>Leveraging the Power of Brand Partnerships Over Press [0:30:47]</li>
  <li>What’s Next for XO Marshmallow and How You Can Go Along for the Journey [0:41:44]</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2849</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e599e230-1471-11f0-9468-87b76344c057]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE9590161140.mp3?updated=1746117364" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>941: Creating Without Guilt: The Middle Ground Between Hustle &amp; Balance</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-without-guilt-middle-ground-between-hustle-balance</link>
      <description>We've been conditioned to believe that work falls into one of two extremes: either you're grinding non-stop, pushing yourself to exhaustion, or you've mastered the elusive work-life balance. But what if that’s a false choice? As a creator, I’ve realized that some of my work doesn’t feel like work at all. It can be play, it can be art, and it can feel deeply satisfying. Yet, there’s pressure to justify how we spend our time, as if every choice determines our worth.

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




In today’s episode, I challenge these ideas. What if we stopped obsessing over whether we’re working “the right way” and embraced creativity for what it is? Something that brings us joy. How would we show up differently without judgment from others or ourselves? Let’s explore how letting go of these pressures can transform the way we work and live!

Episode Highlights


  What if Hustling isn’t Always Bad? [0:01:39]

  Reclaiming Joy in Your Work [0:05:16]

  Getting Intentional with Your Time [0:12:33]

  Stop Judging How You Spend Your Time [0:18:51]




Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 08 Apr 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating Without Guilt: The Middle Ground Between Hustle &amp; Balance</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>941</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>What if we stopped obsessing over whether we’re working “the right way” and embraced creativity for what it is?</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We've been conditioned to believe that work falls into one of two extremes: either you're grinding non-stop, pushing yourself to exhaustion, or you've mastered the elusive work-life balance. But what if that’s a false choice? As a creator, I’ve realized that some of my work doesn’t feel like work at all. It can be play, it can be art, and it can feel deeply satisfying. Yet, there’s pressure to justify how we spend our time, as if every choice determines our worth.

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




In today’s episode, I challenge these ideas. What if we stopped obsessing over whether we’re working “the right way” and embraced creativity for what it is? Something that brings us joy. How would we show up differently without judgment from others or ourselves? Let’s explore how letting go of these pressures can transform the way we work and live!

Episode Highlights


  What if Hustling isn’t Always Bad? [0:01:39]

  Reclaiming Joy in Your Work [0:05:16]

  Getting Intentional with Your Time [0:12:33]

  Stop Judging How You Spend Your Time [0:18:51]




Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We've been conditioned to believe that work falls into one of two extremes: either you're grinding non-stop, pushing yourself to exhaustion, or you've mastered the elusive work-life balance. But what if that’s a false choice? As a creator, I’ve realized that some of my work doesn’t feel like work at all. It can be play, it can be art, and it can feel deeply satisfying. Yet, there’s pressure to justify how we spend our time, as if every choice determines our worth.</p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>In today’s episode, I challenge these ideas. What if we stopped obsessing over whether we’re working “the right way” and embraced creativity for what it is? Something that brings us joy. How would we show up differently without judgment from others or ourselves? Let’s explore how letting go of these pressures can transform the way we work and live!</p>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>What if Hustling isn’t Always Bad? [0:01:39]</li>
  <li>Reclaiming Joy in Your Work [0:05:16]</li>
  <li>Getting Intentional with Your Time [0:12:33]</li>
  <li>Stop Judging How You Spend Your Time [0:18:51]</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1803</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[980d7b52-13c3-11f0-8beb-fffdecd3f94a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1373980602.mp3?updated=1746117345" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>940: Why I Was Hesitant to Build a SAAS Company (And Why That’s Changing)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-i-was-hesitant-to-build-a-saas-company</link>
      <description>I’ve always wanted to build a SaaS, but I never wanted to manage a full development team or take on the huge financial gamble of developing something; potentially before you even have users. But the game has changed — so much is different now! With the power of AI, much more is possible without the need to have a huge team to make it happen. For the very first time, I see a future where I can build the kinds of things I’ve always wanted to build, but without all of the friction that it used to take to make it happen!



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




SaaS has always matched my mission of wanting to help people in a very tangible way. Oftentimes, when you’re educating people or giving them direction, you don’t have a way to help them implement. That’s on them! For a lot of years, I’ve allowed that to be true. The appeal of software is that you get to give people a path to implement and make their lives easier. Not only are you giving them the tools and the strategies that are going to make things better, easier, and faster, you are giving them a tool! I’m finally taking the leap not only to educate but also to provide people with the tools they need to execute beautifully! 

Episode Highlights


  Why Now Is a Better Time than Ever to Start a SaaS Company [0:02:43] 

  What Has Changed in the World of AI and Why It’s Going to Produce Rapid Results [0:11:50]

  The One Thing I Want Small Business Owners to Know [0:17:36]

  How What I’m Building Could Work for You [0:20:44]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 03 Apr 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why I Was Hesitant to Build a SAAS Company (And Why That’s Changing)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>940</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>You can build the kinds of things you’ve always wanted to build, minus all the friction it used to take to make it happen!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’ve always wanted to build a SaaS, but I never wanted to manage a full development team or take on the huge financial gamble of developing something; potentially before you even have users. But the game has changed — so much is different now! With the power of AI, much more is possible without the need to have a huge team to make it happen. For the very first time, I see a future where I can build the kinds of things I’ve always wanted to build, but without all of the friction that it used to take to make it happen!



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




SaaS has always matched my mission of wanting to help people in a very tangible way. Oftentimes, when you’re educating people or giving them direction, you don’t have a way to help them implement. That’s on them! For a lot of years, I’ve allowed that to be true. The appeal of software is that you get to give people a path to implement and make their lives easier. Not only are you giving them the tools and the strategies that are going to make things better, easier, and faster, you are giving them a tool! I’m finally taking the leap not only to educate but also to provide people with the tools they need to execute beautifully! 

Episode Highlights


  Why Now Is a Better Time than Ever to Start a SaaS Company [0:02:43] 

  What Has Changed in the World of AI and Why It’s Going to Produce Rapid Results [0:11:50]

  The One Thing I Want Small Business Owners to Know [0:17:36]

  How What I’m Building Could Work for You [0:20:44]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’ve always wanted to build a SaaS, but I never wanted to manage a full development team or take on the huge financial gamble of developing something; potentially before you even have users. But the game has changed — so much is different now! With the power of AI, much more is possible without the need to have a huge team to make it happen. For the very first time, I see a future where I can build the kinds of things I’ve always wanted to build, but without all of the friction that it used to take to make it happen!</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>SaaS has always matched my mission of wanting to help people in a very tangible way. Oftentimes, when you’re educating people or giving them direction, you don’t have a way to help them implement. That’s on them! For a lot of years, I’ve allowed that to be true. The appeal of software is that you get to give people a path to implement and make their lives easier. Not only are you giving them the tools and the strategies that are going to make things better, easier, and faster, you are giving them a tool! I’m finally taking the leap not only to educate but also to provide people with the tools they need to execute beautifully! </p>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>Why Now Is a Better Time than Ever to Start a SaaS Company [0:02:43] </li>
  <li>What Has Changed in the World of AI and Why It’s Going to Produce Rapid Results [0:11:50]</li>
  <li>The One Thing I Want Small Business Owners to Know [0:17:36]</li>
  <li>How What I’m Building Could Work for You [0:20:44]</li>
</ul>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1562</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dcee7ba2-0f38-11f0-ba28-e7ba6286459f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6742151620.mp3?updated=1746117329" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>939: How to Write YOUR Non-Fiction Book in Just 60 Days with Stephanie Chandler</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-write-a-non-fiction-book-in-60-days</link>
      <description>Ever dreamed of writing your own book but felt overwhelmed by the process? What if I told you that you could have it done in just 60 days without sacrificing quality? Today, we’re sitting down with Stephanie Chandler, a leading expert in non-fiction book publishing, to break down exactly how you can make this happen. 



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses



Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




Episode Highlights


  Why Small Business Owners Should Consider Writing a Book [0:01:18] 

  How to Write a Non-Fiction Book in 60 Days [0:04:48]

  What You Need to Do to Make Sure Your Book is Different [0:10:24]

  Knowing Where to Start When You Have Too Many Ideas [0:14:55]

  Finding Your Own Unique Voice [0:19:48]

  How to Choose the Right Tools [0:24:59]

  Self-publishing Versus Traditional Publishing [0:29:04]

  Publishing in a Changing World [0:31:47]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 Apr 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Write YOUR Non-Fiction Book in Just 60 Days with Stephanie Chandler</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>939</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Stephanie Chandler, a leading expert in non-fiction book publishing, breaks down exactly how you can make this happen. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Ever dreamed of writing your own book but felt overwhelmed by the process? What if I told you that you could have it done in just 60 days without sacrificing quality? Today, we’re sitting down with Stephanie Chandler, a leading expert in non-fiction book publishing, to break down exactly how you can make this happen. 



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses



Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




Episode Highlights


  Why Small Business Owners Should Consider Writing a Book [0:01:18] 

  How to Write a Non-Fiction Book in 60 Days [0:04:48]

  What You Need to Do to Make Sure Your Book is Different [0:10:24]

  Knowing Where to Start When You Have Too Many Ideas [0:14:55]

  Finding Your Own Unique Voice [0:19:48]

  How to Choose the Right Tools [0:24:59]

  Self-publishing Versus Traditional Publishing [0:29:04]

  Publishing in a Changing World [0:31:47]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ever dreamed of writing your own book but felt overwhelmed by the process? What if I told you that you could have it done in just 60 days without sacrificing quality? Today, we’re sitting down with Stephanie Chandler, a leading expert in non-fiction book publishing, to break down exactly how you can make this happen. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>Why Small Business Owners Should Consider Writing a Book [0:01:18] </li>
  <li>How to Write a Non-Fiction Book in 60 Days [0:04:48]</li>
  <li>What You Need to Do to Make Sure Your Book is Different [0:10:24]</li>
  <li>Knowing Where to Start When You Have Too Many Ideas [0:14:55]</li>
  <li>Finding Your Own Unique Voice [0:19:48]</li>
  <li>How to Choose the Right Tools [0:24:59]</li>
  <li>Self-publishing Versus Traditional Publishing [0:29:04]</li>
  <li>Publishing in a Changing World [0:31:47]</li>
</ul>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2319</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6e4a2c86-0e49-11f0-99a0-1f065c2e91c9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE2179220026.mp3?updated=1746117307" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>938: Why I Avoided Evergreen Funnels for Years (And What Changed My Mind)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-i-avoided-evergreen-funnels-for-years-and-what-changed-my-mind</link>
      <description>Everyone has valuable knowledge that they can pass on to someone. For years, I avoided Evergreen funnels like the plague. But when I finally cracked the code on Evergreen funnels and figured out how to make them work without sacrificing engagement or live connection, it changed everything for me! I was able to get out of the live-launch cycle. And that’s exactly what I’m teaching you how to do in Next Level Funnels. 



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses



Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




I am helping you build an automated funnel that’s going to continue to work for you all the time and show you how to balance that with live marketing so that you can turn it into a sales system that actually converts on autopilot. Let’s get into why I avoided Evergreen Funnels for so long and what finally changed my mind! 



Episode Highlights


  The Danger of Focusing on Selling Just for Today. [0:04:54] 

  The Power of Repetition. [0:15:18]

  Why Evergreen Funnels Can Be Just as Personal as Live Launches. [0:17:45]

  The Versatility of Funnels. [0:24:14]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 27 Mar 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why I Avoided Evergreen Funnels for Years (And What Changed My Mind)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>938</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Learn why balancing evergreen funnels with  live marketing can create a sales system that converts on autopilot.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Everyone has valuable knowledge that they can pass on to someone. For years, I avoided Evergreen funnels like the plague. But when I finally cracked the code on Evergreen funnels and figured out how to make them work without sacrificing engagement or live connection, it changed everything for me! I was able to get out of the live-launch cycle. And that’s exactly what I’m teaching you how to do in Next Level Funnels. 



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses



Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




I am helping you build an automated funnel that’s going to continue to work for you all the time and show you how to balance that with live marketing so that you can turn it into a sales system that actually converts on autopilot. Let’s get into why I avoided Evergreen Funnels for so long and what finally changed my mind! 



Episode Highlights


  The Danger of Focusing on Selling Just for Today. [0:04:54] 

  The Power of Repetition. [0:15:18]

  Why Evergreen Funnels Can Be Just as Personal as Live Launches. [0:17:45]

  The Versatility of Funnels. [0:24:14]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Everyone has valuable knowledge that they can pass on to someone. For years, I avoided Evergreen funnels like the plague. But when I finally cracked the code on Evergreen funnels and figured out how to make them work without sacrificing engagement or live connection, it changed everything for me! I was able to get out of the live-launch cycle. And that’s exactly what I’m teaching you how to do in <a href="https://bosspnext">Next</a><a href="https://bossproject.com/funnels"> Level Funnels</a>. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>I am helping you build an automated funnel that’s going to continue to work for you all the time and show you how to balance that with live marketing so that you can turn it into a sales system that actually converts on autopilot. Let’s get into why I avoided Evergreen Funnels for so long and what finally changed my mind! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>The Danger of Focusing on Selling Just for Today. [0:04:54] </li>
  <li>The Power of Repetition. [0:15:18]</li>
  <li>Why Evergreen Funnels Can Be Just as Personal as Live Launches. [0:17:45]</li>
  <li>The Versatility of Funnels. [0:24:14]</li>
</ul>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1981</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b465fd02-0a4e-11f0-abf8-7b4038f796fb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE9174247605.mp3?updated=1746117289" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>937: Should You Launch Live or Build Automated Funnels? How to Sell Your Digital Product</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/should-you-launch-live-or-build-automated-funnels</link>
      <description>Have you ever set up a funnel and thought, “Great! I’m done here,” only to hear crickets? Or maybe you’re stuck in the never-ending cycle of live launching and wondering when you’ll finally get some breathing room. In this episode, I break down why real-time and automated funnels aren’t competitors—they’re actually the ultimate tag team!



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses



Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




This is exactly what I teach inside Next Level Funnels: how you can balance live launching with evergreen systems so you’re not stuck in a constant hustle. But first, I’m going to unpack it for you here.



Episode Highlights


  What Real-Time Marketing Actually Is [0:01:06] 

  How to Think About Real-Time Marketing Like a Stage Manager [0:08:32]

  Why It’s Essential That Live Marketing is Not the Only Way You Market Yourself [0:10:08]

  How Live Launching Can Fuel Your Evergreen Funnels [0:16:23]

  One Question I Need You to Ask Yourself Today [0:20:34]

  Finding the Balance Between Always On and Automation [0:27:31]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 25 Mar 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Should You Launch Live or Build Automated Funnels? How to Sell Your Digital Product</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>937</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, I break down why real-time and automated funnels aren’t competitors—they’re actually the ultimate tag team!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you ever set up a funnel and thought, “Great! I’m done here,” only to hear crickets? Or maybe you’re stuck in the never-ending cycle of live launching and wondering when you’ll finally get some breathing room. In this episode, I break down why real-time and automated funnels aren’t competitors—they’re actually the ultimate tag team!



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses



Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




This is exactly what I teach inside Next Level Funnels: how you can balance live launching with evergreen systems so you’re not stuck in a constant hustle. But first, I’m going to unpack it for you here.



Episode Highlights


  What Real-Time Marketing Actually Is [0:01:06] 

  How to Think About Real-Time Marketing Like a Stage Manager [0:08:32]

  Why It’s Essential That Live Marketing is Not the Only Way You Market Yourself [0:10:08]

  How Live Launching Can Fuel Your Evergreen Funnels [0:16:23]

  One Question I Need You to Ask Yourself Today [0:20:34]

  Finding the Balance Between Always On and Automation [0:27:31]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you ever set up a funnel and thought, “Great! I’m done here,” only to hear crickets? Or maybe you’re stuck in the never-ending cycle of live launching and wondering when you’ll finally get some breathing room. In this episode, I break down why real-time and automated funnels aren’t competitors—they’re actually the ultimate tag team!</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>This is exactly what I teach inside Next Level Funnels: how you can balance live launching with evergreen systems so you’re not stuck in a constant hustle. But first, I’m going to unpack it for you here.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>What Real-Time Marketing Actually Is [0:01:06] </li>
  <li>How to Think About Real-Time Marketing Like a Stage Manager [0:08:32]</li>
  <li>Why It’s Essential That Live Marketing is Not the Only Way You Market Yourself [0:10:08]</li>
  <li>How Live Launching Can Fuel Your Evergreen Funnels [0:16:23]</li>
  <li>One Question I Need You to Ask Yourself Today [0:20:34]</li>
  <li>Finding the Balance Between Always On and Automation [0:27:31]</li>
</ul>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1990</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4881af66-08df-11f0-a59e-fb2b94319ea9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5044327900.mp3?updated=1746117267" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>936: Your Math Teacher Lied: The Science of Business Growth (Test, Optimize, Repeat!) with Jess O’Connell</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/your-math-teacher-lied-the-science-of-business-growth</link>
      <description>Real success comes from experimentation, not perfection. If you’ve ever wondered why your business isn’t working even when you’ve done everything right, then this episode is for you! Hear why A plus B does not equal C in business and how learning to think like a scientist will help you stop overthinking, start testing, and finally scale with confidence! 

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




Today, I am joined by Jess O’Connell, otherwise known as the Launch Scientist, to discuss the science behind business growth. Jess is a course creation and launch strategist who helps experts package their brilliance with binge-worthy, revenue-generating courses. With a background in science, she approaches business as if it’s a science experiment. She’s here today to help you make data-driven decisions that will actually move the needle! 



Episode Highlights


  How the Education System Creates Overthinkers [0:07:03] 

  Detaching from the Outcome [0:22:50]

  Practical Tips for Experimenting in Business [0:34:53]

  How to Stay Focused on What’s Worthwhile [0:42:22]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 20 Mar 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Your Math Teacher Lied: The Science of Business Growth (Test, Optimize, Repeat!) with Jess O’Connell</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>936</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle></itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Real success comes from experimentation, not perfection. If you’ve ever wondered why your business isn’t working even when you’ve done everything right, then this episode is for you! Hear why A plus B does not equal C in business and how learning to think like a scientist will help you stop overthinking, start testing, and finally scale with confidence! 

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




Today, I am joined by Jess O’Connell, otherwise known as the Launch Scientist, to discuss the science behind business growth. Jess is a course creation and launch strategist who helps experts package their brilliance with binge-worthy, revenue-generating courses. With a background in science, she approaches business as if it’s a science experiment. She’s here today to help you make data-driven decisions that will actually move the needle! 



Episode Highlights


  How the Education System Creates Overthinkers [0:07:03] 

  Detaching from the Outcome [0:22:50]

  Practical Tips for Experimenting in Business [0:34:53]

  How to Stay Focused on What’s Worthwhile [0:42:22]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Real success comes from experimentation, not perfection. If you’ve ever wondered why your business isn’t working even when you’ve done everything right, then this episode is for you! Hear why A plus B does not equal C in business and how learning to think like a scientist will help you stop overthinking, start testing, and finally scale with confidence! </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Today, I am joined by Jess O’Connell, otherwise known as the Launch Scientist, to discuss the science behind business growth. Jess is a course creation and launch strategist who helps experts package their brilliance with binge-worthy, revenue-generating courses. With a background in science, she approaches business as if it’s a science experiment. She’s here today to help you make data-driven decisions that will actually move the needle! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>How the Education System Creates Overthinkers [0:07:03] </li>
  <li>Detaching from the Outcome [0:22:50]</li>
  <li>Practical Tips for Experimenting in Business [0:34:53]</li>
  <li>How to Stay Focused on What’s Worthwhile [0:42:22]</li>
</ul>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3168</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e86c4748-04ca-11f0-9e9a-a3797618af03]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6617643069.mp3?updated=1746117248" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>935: Trendspotter: What’s Working Right Now on Instagram with Taylor Loren</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/trendspotter-whats-working-right-now-on-instagram</link>
      <description>Keeping up with social media’s constant changes can feel overwhelming. Luckily, today’s guest is here to help! Taylor Loren, a seasoned content strategist and marketing expert, has spent 15 years leading teams at top brands like Girlboss and Later. Now, she helps small businesses and creators cut through the noise and build sustainable content strategies.

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




In this episode, we’re diving into what’s actually working on Instagram in 2025. Which metrics truly matter for engagement? What should creators and business owners focus on for growth and monetization? Taylor breaks it all down, plus she’s busting some of the biggest myths people still believe about Instagram strategy!

Episode Highlights


  The Key to Instagram Growth in 2025 [0:01:23]

  Leveraging Timely Events to Boost Engagement [0:07:35]

  What Platform Should You Be On? [0:14:04]

  Experimenting with Content: What Works Best for Your Audience? [0:23:10]

  What Brands Are Getting Wrong in 2025 [0:27:24]

  The Power of Brand Marketing [0:31:46]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 18 Mar 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Trendspotter: What’s Working Right Now on Instagram with Taylor Loren</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>935</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Which metrics truly matter for engagement? What should creators and business owners focus on for growth and monetization? </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Keeping up with social media’s constant changes can feel overwhelming. Luckily, today’s guest is here to help! Taylor Loren, a seasoned content strategist and marketing expert, has spent 15 years leading teams at top brands like Girlboss and Later. Now, she helps small businesses and creators cut through the noise and build sustainable content strategies.

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




In this episode, we’re diving into what’s actually working on Instagram in 2025. Which metrics truly matter for engagement? What should creators and business owners focus on for growth and monetization? Taylor breaks it all down, plus she’s busting some of the biggest myths people still believe about Instagram strategy!

Episode Highlights


  The Key to Instagram Growth in 2025 [0:01:23]

  Leveraging Timely Events to Boost Engagement [0:07:35]

  What Platform Should You Be On? [0:14:04]

  Experimenting with Content: What Works Best for Your Audience? [0:23:10]

  What Brands Are Getting Wrong in 2025 [0:27:24]

  The Power of Brand Marketing [0:31:46]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Keeping up with social media’s constant changes can feel overwhelming. Luckily, today’s guest is here to help! Taylor Loren, a seasoned content strategist and marketing expert, has spent 15 years leading teams at top brands like Girlboss and Later. Now, she helps small businesses and creators cut through the noise and build sustainable content strategies.</p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this episode, we’re diving into what’s actually working on Instagram in 2025. Which metrics truly matter for engagement? What should creators and business owners focus on for growth and monetization? Taylor breaks it all down, plus she’s busting some of the biggest myths people still believe about Instagram strategy!</p>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>The Key to Instagram Growth in 2025 [0:01:23]</li>
  <li>Leveraging Timely Events to Boost Engagement [0:07:35]</li>
  <li>What Platform Should You Be On? [0:14:04]</li>
  <li>Experimenting with Content: What Works Best for Your Audience? [0:23:10]</li>
  <li>What Brands Are Getting Wrong in 2025 [0:27:24]</li>
  <li>The Power of Brand Marketing [0:31:46]</li>
</ul>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2693</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5d02aa7a-0345-11f0-b151-5bc7cee7290f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE9851407037.mp3?updated=1746117228" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>934: How 66% of My Audience Paid to Join My Email List</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-66-percent-of-my-audience-paid-to-join-my-email-list</link>
      <description>Everyone says you need a lead magnet to grow your email list, but how many of those freebie seekers actually buy from you? In this episode, I’m breaking down why traditional freebies fall short, how to create low-ticket entry offers that actually convert, and why keeping your offers open year-round can lead to repeat buyers who move quickly up your value ladder.



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




If you’re tired of chasing passive subscribers who never take action, it’s time to rethink your strategy. I’ll show you how to structure lead magnets that build trust, price low-ticket offers that filter for the right customers, and implement a system that moves people from a $29 purchase to a $2,000 program, sometimes in just hours. Ready to attract buyers, not just browsers? Tune in now!



Episode Highlights


  Next Level Funnels [0:00:19]

  The Problem with Traditional Freebies – And What To Do Instead [0:01:55]

  Why Keeping Your Offers Open All Year Can Boost Sales [0:04:55]

  The Power of Paid Leads – For You AND Your Customer [0:06:00]

  How to Price and Structure a Low-Ticket Offer That Converts [0:07:33]

  Your Low-Ticket Offer Isn’t Meant to Be Your Biggest Moneymaker [0:10:05]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 13 Mar 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How 66% of My Audience Paid to Join My Email List</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>934</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’m breaking down why traditional freebies fall short, how to create low-ticket entry offers that actually convert and more!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Everyone says you need a lead magnet to grow your email list, but how many of those freebie seekers actually buy from you? In this episode, I’m breaking down why traditional freebies fall short, how to create low-ticket entry offers that actually convert, and why keeping your offers open year-round can lead to repeat buyers who move quickly up your value ladder.



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




If you’re tired of chasing passive subscribers who never take action, it’s time to rethink your strategy. I’ll show you how to structure lead magnets that build trust, price low-ticket offers that filter for the right customers, and implement a system that moves people from a $29 purchase to a $2,000 program, sometimes in just hours. Ready to attract buyers, not just browsers? Tune in now!



Episode Highlights


  Next Level Funnels [0:00:19]

  The Problem with Traditional Freebies – And What To Do Instead [0:01:55]

  Why Keeping Your Offers Open All Year Can Boost Sales [0:04:55]

  The Power of Paid Leads – For You AND Your Customer [0:06:00]

  How to Price and Structure a Low-Ticket Offer That Converts [0:07:33]

  Your Low-Ticket Offer Isn’t Meant to Be Your Biggest Moneymaker [0:10:05]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Everyone says you need a lead magnet to grow your email list, but how many of those freebie seekers actually buy from you? In this episode, I’m breaking down why traditional freebies fall short, how to create low-ticket entry offers that actually convert, and why keeping your offers open year-round can lead to repeat buyers who move quickly up your value ladder.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’re tired of chasing passive subscribers who never take action, it’s time to rethink your strategy. I’ll show you how to structure lead magnets that build trust, price low-ticket offers that filter for the right customers, and implement a system that moves people from a $29 purchase to a $2,000 program, sometimes in just hours. Ready to attract buyers, not just browsers? Tune in now!</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>Next Level Funnels [0:00:19]</li>
  <li>The Problem with Traditional Freebies – And What To Do Instead [0:01:55]</li>
  <li>Why Keeping Your Offers Open All Year Can Boost Sales [0:04:55]</li>
  <li>The Power of Paid Leads – For You AND Your Customer [0:06:00]</li>
  <li>How to Price and Structure a Low-Ticket Offer That Converts [0:07:33]</li>
  <li>Your Low-Ticket Offer Isn’t Meant to Be Your Biggest Moneymaker [0:10:05]</li>
</ul>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1110</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[101dca6c-ff4b-11ef-80e5-2f7a7f3c76f9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1862329233.mp3?updated=1746117209" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>933: Before You Build Your Next Funnel (Listen to THIS)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/before-you-build-your-next-funnel-listen-to-this</link>
      <description>So many people build funnels to bring in passive income and wonder why it doesn’t sell – that’s because they skipped a step! In this episode, I’m going to help you explore the step that so many people miss: the one that is going to guarantee you actual income and talk about the right way to build a funnel.



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




The reason most funnels fail has very little to do with the actual product or how well you teach! The truth is, if it hasn’t converted in a live launch and you haven’t seen that people are responding to your offer, then it’s not ready for evergreen.

Episode Highlights


  The Power of Live Launches [0:02:44] 

  Keeping it Simple [0:04:26]

  The Importance of Measuring Analytics [0:11:56]




While it is possible to have a product out there that makes you money while you sleep, most of the time you need mechanisms out there that help move people through the buying piece of that puzzle – and funnels are a great way to do that!

Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 11 Mar 2025 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Before You Build Your Next Funnel (Listen to THIS)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>933</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Learn the critical step that people miss and the right way to build a sales funnel that brings in income.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>So many people build funnels to bring in passive income and wonder why it doesn’t sell – that’s because they skipped a step! In this episode, I’m going to help you explore the step that so many people miss: the one that is going to guarantee you actual income and talk about the right way to build a funnel.



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




The reason most funnels fail has very little to do with the actual product or how well you teach! The truth is, if it hasn’t converted in a live launch and you haven’t seen that people are responding to your offer, then it’s not ready for evergreen.

Episode Highlights


  The Power of Live Launches [0:02:44] 

  Keeping it Simple [0:04:26]

  The Importance of Measuring Analytics [0:11:56]




While it is possible to have a product out there that makes you money while you sleep, most of the time you need mechanisms out there that help move people through the buying piece of that puzzle – and funnels are a great way to do that!

Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>So many people build funnels to bring in passive income and wonder why it doesn’t sell – that’s because they skipped a step! In this episode, I’m going to help you explore the step that so many people miss: the one that is going to guarantee you actual income and talk about the right way to build a funnel.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>The reason most funnels fail has very little to do with the actual product or how well you teach! The truth is, if it hasn’t converted in a live launch and you haven’t seen that people are responding to your offer, then it’s not ready for evergreen.</p>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>The Power of Live Launches [0:02:44] </li>
  <li>Keeping it Simple [0:04:26]</li>
  <li>The Importance of Measuring Analytics [0:11:56]</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>While it is possible to have a product out there that makes you money while you sleep, most of the time you need mechanisms out there that help move people through the buying piece of that puzzle – and funnels are a great way to do that!</p>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1027</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[52b92136-fdcb-11ef-bf3a-a3918ba3b7d9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1997876896.mp3?updated=1746117188" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>932: How I Accumulated 35,527+ Watch Time Hours Before Even Starting My YouTube Channel</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-i-accumulated-35k-watch-time-hours-before-starting-my-youtube-channel</link>
      <description>Most people start a YouTube channel from scratch with zero videos, zero audience, and zero watch time, but before I even started my YouTube channel, I had accumulated over 35,000 watch hours! I wouldn’t consider myself a YouTuber, and I wasn’t posting regularly, but I had an entirely different motivation that gave me a huge leg up. I never set out to grow on YouTube. Instead, my growth was a byproduct of trying to make a difference and support the community I was building.



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




Today, I break down exactly what went into those watch hours, how I accumulated so many, and how my story might change your approach to launching a YouTube channel. There are so many different ways you can go about doing this, so I’m going to be fully transparent about what worked for me and give you some practical ideas you can try!



Episode Highlights


  The One Thing You Need to Focus on When Creating Content. [0:03:16] 

  Why Offering Free Content Benefits You in the Long Run. [0:08:16]

  Leveraging Online Event Recordings on YouTube. [0:13:03]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 06 Mar 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How I Accumulated 35,527+ Watch Time Hours Before Even Starting My YouTube Channel</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>932</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I wouldn’t consider myself a YouTuber, and I wasn’t posting regularly, but I had an entirely different motivation that gave me a huge leg up.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Most people start a YouTube channel from scratch with zero videos, zero audience, and zero watch time, but before I even started my YouTube channel, I had accumulated over 35,000 watch hours! I wouldn’t consider myself a YouTuber, and I wasn’t posting regularly, but I had an entirely different motivation that gave me a huge leg up. I never set out to grow on YouTube. Instead, my growth was a byproduct of trying to make a difference and support the community I was building.



Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




Today, I break down exactly what went into those watch hours, how I accumulated so many, and how my story might change your approach to launching a YouTube channel. There are so many different ways you can go about doing this, so I’m going to be fully transparent about what worked for me and give you some practical ideas you can try!



Episode Highlights


  The One Thing You Need to Focus on When Creating Content. [0:03:16] 

  Why Offering Free Content Benefits You in the Long Run. [0:08:16]

  Leveraging Online Event Recordings on YouTube. [0:13:03]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Most people start a YouTube channel from scratch with zero videos, zero audience, and zero watch time, but before I even started my YouTube channel, I had accumulated over 35,000 watch hours! I wouldn’t consider myself a YouTuber, and I wasn’t posting regularly, but I had an entirely different motivation that gave me a huge leg up. I never set out to grow on YouTube. Instead, my growth was a byproduct of trying to make a difference and support the community I was building.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Today, I break down exactly what went into those watch hours, how I accumulated so many, and how my story might change your approach to launching a YouTube channel. There are so many different ways you can go about doing this, so I’m going to be fully transparent about what worked for me and give you some practical ideas you can try!</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>The One Thing You Need to Focus on When Creating Content. [0:03:16] </li>
  <li>Why Offering Free Content Benefits You in the Long Run. [0:08:16]</li>
  <li>Leveraging Online Event Recordings on YouTube. [0:13:03]</li>
</ul>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1610</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[32c91d76-f9d5-11ef-a6f2-67f4e17d4ffa]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE4648044124.mp3?updated=1746117167" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>931: What’s Next After a Decade in Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/whats-next-after-a-decade-in-business</link>
      <description>It has been a whole decade since I started Boss Project. I have built a business, employed many people and taught tens of thousands of entrepreneurs how to build their businesses online. While I’m definitely still exploring my creativity and using that everyday as a content creator, where I’m at today is not at all where I thought I would be! It’s not the life I imagined for myself, but it is so much better!

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




When I sat down to think about what’s next, I kept coming back to this concept of using excitement as a compass to guide us and help us follow our intuition. In this episode, I’m going to be exploring my future, and how I came to realize what I really want to do more of, which is writing. I hope that as I share my story, I hope it will inspire you to dream bigger for your own future!

Episode Highlights


  The Shower Thought That Sparked My Next Chapter. [0:04:06] 

  My Huge Vision and Mission for the Future. [0:12:10]

  New Challenges I’m Taking On in This New Season [0:16:00]

  What’s Really on the Other Side of Hard Work, Hustle and Grind [0:24:17]

  How You Have Made My Success Possible [0:31:20]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 04 Mar 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What’s Next After a Decade in Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>931</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>While I’m definitely still exploring my creativity and using that everyday as a content creator, where I’m at today is not at all where I thought I would be! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It has been a whole decade since I started Boss Project. I have built a business, employed many people and taught tens of thousands of entrepreneurs how to build their businesses online. While I’m definitely still exploring my creativity and using that everyday as a content creator, where I’m at today is not at all where I thought I would be! It’s not the life I imagined for myself, but it is so much better!

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




When I sat down to think about what’s next, I kept coming back to this concept of using excitement as a compass to guide us and help us follow our intuition. In this episode, I’m going to be exploring my future, and how I came to realize what I really want to do more of, which is writing. I hope that as I share my story, I hope it will inspire you to dream bigger for your own future!

Episode Highlights


  The Shower Thought That Sparked My Next Chapter. [0:04:06] 

  My Huge Vision and Mission for the Future. [0:12:10]

  New Challenges I’m Taking On in This New Season [0:16:00]

  What’s Really on the Other Side of Hard Work, Hustle and Grind [0:24:17]

  How You Have Made My Success Possible [0:31:20]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It has been a whole decade since I started Boss Project. I have built a business, employed many people and taught tens of thousands of entrepreneurs how to build their businesses online. While I’m definitely still exploring my creativity and using that everyday as a content creator, where I’m at today is not at all where I thought I would be! It’s not the life I imagined for myself, but it is so much better!</p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>When I sat down to think about what’s next, I kept coming back to this concept of using excitement as a compass to guide us and help us follow our intuition. In this episode, I’m going to be exploring my future, and how I came to realize what I really want to do more of, which is writing. I hope that as I share my story, I hope it will inspire you to dream bigger for your own future!</p>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>The Shower Thought That Sparked My Next Chapter. [0:04:06] </li>
  <li>My Huge Vision and Mission for the Future. [0:12:10]</li>
  <li>New Challenges I’m Taking On in This New Season [0:16:00]</li>
  <li>What’s Really on the Other Side of Hard Work, Hustle and Grind [0:24:17]</li>
  <li>How You Have Made My Success Possible [0:31:20]</li>
</ul>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2448</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7043f3dc-f553-11ef-9eda-232056beaf40]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE4575338037.mp3?updated=1746117147" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>930: Free Flights, 5-Star Hotels, &amp; First-Class Upgrades: How to Book Luxury Travel Using Credit Card Points with Megan Lanford</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-book-luxury-travel-using-credit-card-points</link>
      <description>If you have ever wished that you could afford to travel more, then today’s episode is for you! Today, we are joined by Megan Lanford, a woman who cracked the code for traveling for free (or close to free) to tell us exactly how she saves her family $20,000 a year! Megan has always been a huge travel junkie and eventually discovered travel points and she took six vacations that year because of them!

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




Everyone was asking how she did it so she decided to start a business out of it and help more people travel more affordably. I know my audience is filled with ambitious people who would love to travel more, especially without breaking the bank. The results Megan gets for her clients are absolutely phenomenal! Traveling shouldn’t feel impossible and clearly, Megan has found a way to make it possible for everyone. So let’s hear how!

Episode Highlights


  The Biggest Myth About Using Credit Cards to Go on Vacation [0:06:20] 

  How to Select the Right Credit Card(s) [0:09:00]

  Getting the Points [0:13:37]

  How You Go About Spending the Points [0:17:21]

  What to Keep in Mind When Traveling with a Family [0:21:25]

  The One Thing You Need to Know About the Travel Points World [0:25:45]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 27 Feb 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Free Flights, 5-Star Hotels, &amp; First-Class Upgrades: How to Book Luxury Travel Using Credit Card Points with Megan Lanford</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>930</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Traveling shouldn’t feel impossible and clearly, Megan has found a way to make it possible for everyone. So let’s hear how!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you have ever wished that you could afford to travel more, then today’s episode is for you! Today, we are joined by Megan Lanford, a woman who cracked the code for traveling for free (or close to free) to tell us exactly how she saves her family $20,000 a year! Megan has always been a huge travel junkie and eventually discovered travel points and she took six vacations that year because of them!

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




Everyone was asking how she did it so she decided to start a business out of it and help more people travel more affordably. I know my audience is filled with ambitious people who would love to travel more, especially without breaking the bank. The results Megan gets for her clients are absolutely phenomenal! Traveling shouldn’t feel impossible and clearly, Megan has found a way to make it possible for everyone. So let’s hear how!

Episode Highlights


  The Biggest Myth About Using Credit Cards to Go on Vacation [0:06:20] 

  How to Select the Right Credit Card(s) [0:09:00]

  Getting the Points [0:13:37]

  How You Go About Spending the Points [0:17:21]

  What to Keep in Mind When Traveling with a Family [0:21:25]

  The One Thing You Need to Know About the Travel Points World [0:25:45]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you have ever wished that you could afford to travel more, then today’s episode is for you! Today, we are joined by Megan Lanford, a woman who cracked the code for traveling for free (or close to free) to tell us exactly how she saves her family $20,000 a year! Megan has always been a huge travel junkie and eventually discovered travel points and she took six vacations that year because of them!</p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Everyone was asking how she did it so she decided to start a business out of it and help more people travel more affordably. I know my audience is filled with ambitious people who would love to travel more, especially without breaking the bank. The results Megan gets for her clients are absolutely phenomenal! Traveling shouldn’t feel impossible and clearly, Megan has found a way to make it possible for everyone. So let’s hear how!</p>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>The Biggest Myth About Using Credit Cards to Go on Vacation [0:06:20] </li>
  <li>How to Select the Right Credit Card(s) [0:09:00]</li>
  <li>Getting the Points [0:13:37]</li>
  <li>How You Go About Spending the Points [0:17:21]</li>
  <li>What to Keep in Mind When Traveling with a Family [0:21:25]</li>
  <li>The One Thing You Need to Know About the Travel Points World [0:25:45]</li>
</ul>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2108</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9731605a-f45f-11ef-9555-5f642d51420a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE8353536807.mp3?updated=1746117115" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>929: How to Create a Block Schedule You’ll Actually Stick To</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-create-a-block-schedule-youll-actually-stick-to</link>
      <description>Have you tried to make a block schedule work for you but it just hasn’t stuck in the past? I know it’s changed my life and I can’t wait to break it down for you! 

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




There’s a lot of research on how much more you’re capable of getting done when you’re doing similar tasks together. But how do you create a schedule that’s flexible enough? Block scheduling breaks up your day into dedicated blocks of time for specific types of tasks or activities. This reduces decision fatigue and stress and saves a ton of time! 

Episode Highlights


  How I Structure My Week with a Block Schedule. [0:03:26] 

  The Power of Flexibility. [0:23:38]

  How to Implement a Block Schedule. [0:26:00]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 25 Feb 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Create a Block Schedule You’ll Actually Stick To</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>929</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Block scheduling breaks up your day into dedicated blocks of time for specific types of tasks or activities. This reduces decision fatigue and stress and saves a ton of time! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you tried to make a block schedule work for you but it just hasn’t stuck in the past? I know it’s changed my life and I can’t wait to break it down for you! 

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




There’s a lot of research on how much more you’re capable of getting done when you’re doing similar tasks together. But how do you create a schedule that’s flexible enough? Block scheduling breaks up your day into dedicated blocks of time for specific types of tasks or activities. This reduces decision fatigue and stress and saves a ton of time! 

Episode Highlights


  How I Structure My Week with a Block Schedule. [0:03:26] 

  The Power of Flexibility. [0:23:38]

  How to Implement a Block Schedule. [0:26:00]


Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you tried to make a block schedule work for you but it just hasn’t stuck in the past? I know it’s changed my life and I can’t wait to break it down for you! </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>There’s a lot of research on how much more you’re capable of getting done when you’re doing similar tasks together. But how do you create a schedule that’s flexible enough? Block scheduling breaks up your day into dedicated blocks of time for specific types of tasks or activities. This reduces decision fatigue and stress and saves a ton of time! </p>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>How I Structure My Week with a Block Schedule. [0:03:26] </li>
  <li>The Power of Flexibility. [0:23:38]</li>
  <li>How to Implement a Block Schedule. [0:26:00]</li>
</ul>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2175</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0d5934f2-f2c0-11ef-a60e-3f3349e25282]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE4716065241.mp3?updated=1746117095" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>928: Million Dollar Advice: 10 Lessons That Took Me a Decade in Business to Learn</title>
      <description>There’s no such thing as a right or wrong decision, especially in business. Hitting 10 years in business feels so surreal, and I’ve learned SO much along the way! Today, I share the biggest lessons I’ve learned over the past decade, the ones I really wish someone had told me when I was starting out. From making tough calls to leaning into my strengths, I’ve picked up some game-changing insights that have shaped not just my business but my entire life.

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




If you’ve ever felt stuck, second-guessed yourself, or wondered if you’re cut out for this whole business thing, trust me, I’ve been there! I get real about the highs, the lows, and the moments that changed everything for me. I talk about how I stopped obsessing over making the “perfect” choice, why I stopped listening to people who didn’t get it, and why celebrating myself had to become a priority.

Episode Highlights


  You’re Capable of More Than You Think. [0:02:10] 

  There’s No Such Thing as a Right or Wrong Decision. [0:04:22]

  Not Everyone’s Advice Is Worth Taking. [0:10:27]

  Lean Into What Comes Naturally. [0:12:36]

  Sharpen Your Strengths, Not Your Weaknesses. [0:13:41]

  Hard Seasons Will Come, But You Can Get Through Them. [0:24:27]

  Feedback Isn’t a Personal Attack. [0:26:52]

  Two Things Can Be True at Once. [0:31:14]

  No One Will Celebrate You Unless You Celebrate Yourself. [0:38:14]

  Building a Business Doesn’t Have to Be Lonely. [0:42:02]




Whether you’re building a business, a creative project, or just a life you love, this episode is packed with real talk, honest reflections, and hard-earned lessons to help set you up for something way bigger than you ever imagined. Let’s dive in!

Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 20 Feb 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Million Dollar Advice: 10 Lessons That Took Me a Decade in Business to Learn</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>928</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>From making tough calls to leaning into my strengths, I’ve picked up some game-changing insights that have shaped not just my business but my entire life.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There’s no such thing as a right or wrong decision, especially in business. Hitting 10 years in business feels so surreal, and I’ve learned SO much along the way! Today, I share the biggest lessons I’ve learned over the past decade, the ones I really wish someone had told me when I was starting out. From making tough calls to leaning into my strengths, I’ve picked up some game-changing insights that have shaped not just my business but my entire life.

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




If you’ve ever felt stuck, second-guessed yourself, or wondered if you’re cut out for this whole business thing, trust me, I’ve been there! I get real about the highs, the lows, and the moments that changed everything for me. I talk about how I stopped obsessing over making the “perfect” choice, why I stopped listening to people who didn’t get it, and why celebrating myself had to become a priority.

Episode Highlights


  You’re Capable of More Than You Think. [0:02:10] 

  There’s No Such Thing as a Right or Wrong Decision. [0:04:22]

  Not Everyone’s Advice Is Worth Taking. [0:10:27]

  Lean Into What Comes Naturally. [0:12:36]

  Sharpen Your Strengths, Not Your Weaknesses. [0:13:41]

  Hard Seasons Will Come, But You Can Get Through Them. [0:24:27]

  Feedback Isn’t a Personal Attack. [0:26:52]

  Two Things Can Be True at Once. [0:31:14]

  No One Will Celebrate You Unless You Celebrate Yourself. [0:38:14]

  Building a Business Doesn’t Have to Be Lonely. [0:42:02]




Whether you’re building a business, a creative project, or just a life you love, this episode is packed with real talk, honest reflections, and hard-earned lessons to help set you up for something way bigger than you ever imagined. Let’s dive in!

Our Sponsor:


  
⁠FreshBooks⁠ - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There’s no such thing as a right or wrong decision, especially in business. Hitting 10 years in business feels so surreal, and I’ve learned SO much along the way! Today, I share the biggest lessons I’ve learned over the past decade, the ones I really wish someone had told me when I was starting out. From making tough calls to leaning into my strengths, I’ve picked up some game-changing insights that have shaped not just my business but my entire life.</p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’ve ever felt stuck, second-guessed yourself, or wondered if you’re cut out for this whole business thing, trust me, I’ve been there! I get real about the highs, the lows, and the moments that changed everything for me. I talk about how I stopped obsessing over making the “perfect” choice, why I stopped listening to people who didn’t get it, and why celebrating myself had to become a priority.</p>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>You’re Capable of More Than You Think. [0:02:10] </li>
  <li>There’s No Such Thing as a Right or Wrong Decision. [0:04:22]</li>
  <li>Not Everyone’s Advice Is Worth Taking. [0:10:27]</li>
  <li>Lean Into What Comes Naturally. [0:12:36]</li>
  <li>Sharpen Your Strengths, Not Your Weaknesses. [0:13:41]</li>
  <li>Hard Seasons Will Come, But You Can Get Through Them. [0:24:27]</li>
  <li>Feedback Isn’t a Personal Attack. [0:26:52]</li>
  <li>Two Things Can Be True at Once. [0:31:14]</li>
  <li>No One Will Celebrate You Unless You Celebrate Yourself. [0:38:14]</li>
  <li>Building a Business Doesn’t Have to Be Lonely. [0:42:02]</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Whether you’re building a business, a creative project, or just a life you love, this episode is packed with real talk, honest reflections, and hard-earned lessons to help set you up for something way bigger than you ever imagined. Let’s dive in!</p>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">⁠FreshBooks⁠</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2996</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0b7130e2-eed6-11ef-8a8b-bfa4fe868bbd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE7143312885.mp3?updated=1746117053" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>927: False Narratives: Those That Can’t Do, Teach</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/false-narratives-those-that-cant-do-teach</link>
      <description>Your knowledge is your currency! For years I feared that what I was doing wasn’t real business and I felt like I had to prove myself. I think we feel strange about this because it’s unfamiliar, not because it’s wrong. The world of traditional business is rapidly changing and you are building an online business at the beginning of the new digital frontier. Of course it’s hard to feel like an expert when everything is just beginning. 

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




When I started teaching online, the old saying, ‘those who can’t do, teach’ haunted me. It forced me to convince myself that what I was doing wasn’t making an impact and it couldn’t have been further from the truth! The internet has changed the way people teach and it will continue to change the way people learn. I need to remind you that you are a pioneer – online business is still in its infancy, you are literally shaping the future, and you have the opportunity to do it exactly how you want to. 

Episode Highlights


  The Power of Online Business [0:06:20] 

  The Philosophy That Will Make You Feel Valuable [0:11:40]

  The One Thing That’s Holding You Back [0:18:53]


Our Sponsor:


  
FreshBooks - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 18 Feb 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>False Narratives: Those That Can’t Do, Teach</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>927</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>The internet has changed the way people teach and it will continue to change the way people learn. I need to remind you that you are a pioneer – online business is still in its infancy &amp; you are literally shaping the future.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Your knowledge is your currency! For years I feared that what I was doing wasn’t real business and I felt like I had to prove myself. I think we feel strange about this because it’s unfamiliar, not because it’s wrong. The world of traditional business is rapidly changing and you are building an online business at the beginning of the new digital frontier. Of course it’s hard to feel like an expert when everything is just beginning. 

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail


  Instagram

  
All the Links!




When I started teaching online, the old saying, ‘those who can’t do, teach’ haunted me. It forced me to convince myself that what I was doing wasn’t making an impact and it couldn’t have been further from the truth! The internet has changed the way people teach and it will continue to change the way people learn. I need to remind you that you are a pioneer – online business is still in its infancy, you are literally shaping the future, and you have the opportunity to do it exactly how you want to. 

Episode Highlights


  The Power of Online Business [0:06:20] 

  The Philosophy That Will Make You Feel Valuable [0:11:40]

  The One Thing That’s Holding You Back [0:18:53]


Our Sponsor:


  
FreshBooks - special savings with this link




Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Your knowledge is your currency! For years I feared that what I was doing wasn’t real business and I felt like I had to prove myself. I think we feel strange about this because it’s unfamiliar, not because it’s wrong. The world of traditional business is rapidly changing and you are building an online business at the beginning of the new digital frontier. Of course it’s hard to feel like an expert when everything is just beginning. </p>
<p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p>
<p>Connect with Abagail</p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>When I started teaching online, the old saying, ‘those who can’t do, teach’ haunted me. It forced me to convince myself that what I was doing wasn’t making an impact and it couldn’t have been further from the truth! The internet has changed the way people teach and it will continue to change the way people learn. I need to remind you that you are a pioneer – online business is still in its infancy, you are literally shaping the future, and you have the opportunity to do it exactly how you want to. </p>
<p>Episode Highlights</p>
<ul>
  <li>The Power of Online Business [0:06:20] </li>
  <li>The Philosophy That Will Make You Feel Valuable [0:11:40]</li>
  <li>The One Thing That’s Holding You Back [0:18:53]</li>
</ul>
<p>Our Sponsor:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.freshbooks.com/pricing-offer?utm_campaign=bossproject&amp;utm_medium=sponsorship&amp;utm_source=podcast_feb">FreshBooks</a> - special savings with this link</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1981</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f921a90c-ed55-11ef-9ed8-3bd9b580c927]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1032520894.mp3?updated=1746117028" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>926: 24,000 Reasons I’m Bringing Blogging Back</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/24000-reasons-im-bringing-blogging-back</link>
      <description>Blogging is not dead! It’s been waiting for small businesses to pick up the torch again and I think now is the perfect time to do it. Pretty much the only people publishing articles today are either larger businesses, software companies, or the media. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


There are fewer and fewer creators writing long-form content on the internet than I have seen in my career. Now, when I started this business, I was writing all the time. I was publishing new articles on my blog five days a week.I had really gotten away from it in 2024, but something happened in my business recently that re-inspired me to take up this untapped opportunity again. Let’s get into why.
Episode Highlights

How 24 000 Website Visits Made Me Realize That Blogging is Alive and Well [0:01:52] 

The Main Difference Between Social Media and Blogging [0:06:50]

Embracing the Opportunity to Make Your Authenticity Shine [0:13:10]

What Blogging Ultimately Gives You the Chance to Do [0:24:55]

My Approach to Blogging In 2025 [0:37:23]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 13 Feb 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>24,000 Reasons I’m Bringing Blogging Back</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>926</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Something surprising happened in my business recently that re-inspired me to take up this untapped opportunity again. Tune in to hear why you should consider blogging, too!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Blogging is not dead! It’s been waiting for small businesses to pick up the torch again and I think now is the perfect time to do it. Pretty much the only people publishing articles today are either larger businesses, software companies, or the media. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


There are fewer and fewer creators writing long-form content on the internet than I have seen in my career. Now, when I started this business, I was writing all the time. I was publishing new articles on my blog five days a week.I had really gotten away from it in 2024, but something happened in my business recently that re-inspired me to take up this untapped opportunity again. Let’s get into why.
Episode Highlights

How 24 000 Website Visits Made Me Realize That Blogging is Alive and Well [0:01:52] 

The Main Difference Between Social Media and Blogging [0:06:50]

Embracing the Opportunity to Make Your Authenticity Shine [0:13:10]

What Blogging Ultimately Gives You the Chance to Do [0:24:55]

My Approach to Blogging In 2025 [0:37:23]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Blogging is not dead! It’s been waiting for small businesses to pick up the torch again and I think now is the perfect time to do it. Pretty much the only people publishing articles today are either larger businesses, software companies, or the media. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>There are fewer and fewer creators writing long-form content on the internet than I have seen in my career. Now, when I started this business, I was writing all the time. I was publishing new articles on my blog five days a week.I had really gotten away from it in 2024, but something happened in my business recently that re-inspired me to take up this untapped opportunity again. Let’s get into why.</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>How 24 000 Website Visits Made Me Realize That Blogging is Alive and Well [0:01:52] </li>
<li>The Main Difference Between Social Media and Blogging [0:06:50]</li>
<li>Embracing the Opportunity to Make Your Authenticity Shine [0:13:10]</li>
<li>What Blogging Ultimately Gives You the Chance to Do [0:24:55]</li>
<li>My Approach to Blogging In 2025 [0:37:23]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2815</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ae477382-e623-11ef-ba90-ef6410482dcb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE3111565999.mp3?updated=1739024018" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>925: I Quit Cold Turkey</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/i-quit-cold-turkey</link>
      <description>For years, I held myself back. I made excuses. I played small. But one day, I made a decision. I quit. Cold turkey. No warning, no second-guessing. And I’m not talking about a bad habit. I quit everything holding me back—100 things! Today, I’m going to tell you exactly what I walked away from. After you hear them, you might decide to quit a few too.
This is the first time I’ve done an episode like this– it’s much shorter than usual because I want you to simply listen, reflect, and then take action TODAY. Let’s get into it!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 11 Feb 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>I Quit Cold Turkey</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>925</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I quit everything holding me back—100 things! After you hear them, you might decide to quit a few too.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>For years, I held myself back. I made excuses. I played small. But one day, I made a decision. I quit. Cold turkey. No warning, no second-guessing. And I’m not talking about a bad habit. I quit everything holding me back—100 things! Today, I’m going to tell you exactly what I walked away from. After you hear them, you might decide to quit a few too.
This is the first time I’ve done an episode like this– it’s much shorter than usual because I want you to simply listen, reflect, and then take action TODAY. Let’s get into it!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For years, I held myself back. I made excuses. I played small. But one day, I made a decision. I quit. Cold turkey. No warning, no second-guessing. And I’m not talking about a bad habit. I quit everything holding me back—100 things! Today, I’m going to tell you exactly what I walked away from. After you hear them, you might decide to quit a few too.</p><p>This is the first time I’ve done an episode like this– it’s much shorter than usual because I want you to simply listen, reflect, and then take action TODAY. Let’s get into it!</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>614</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[964d8c94-e619-11ef-b13c-6fde64dfde79]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1480432341.mp3?updated=1739019914" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>924: Is It Really Possible to Make Money Online Without a Huge Following?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/make-money-online-without-a-huge-following</link>
      <description>It may seem counterintuitive, but you don't need 1000s of followers to make 1000s of dollars! Today, I’m breaking down exactly how to build a profitable online business without a massive online following. While a big audience might seem glamorous, it’s no guarantee of a reliable income. The real magic happens when you connect with the right people, build a community, and genuinely impact the lives of your followers.

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


As I’ve built my business, I’ve prioritized my actual offerings over cultivating vanity metrics. This has been an excellent system for building sales, but it’s also meant that some of my most visible platforms don’t necessarily look as successful compared to what you might expect from comparable social media accounts. Join me today as I walk you through my process and break down how you can create a profitable plan that converts and makes you a reliable income, no matter the size of your audience!
Episode Highlights

What is the Purpose of Social Media? [0:03:49] 

Small Following – Big Engagement [0:05:35]

How to Make Money from a Small Niche Following [0:11:30]

Relationships Mean Everything [0:16:45]

Don’t Wait – Start Today [0:23:55]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 06 Feb 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Is It Really Possible to Make Money Online Without a Huge Following?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>924</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle></itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It may seem counterintuitive, but you don't need 1000s of followers to make 1000s of dollars! Today, I’m breaking down exactly how to build a profitable online business without a massive online following. While a big audience might seem glamorous, it’s no guarantee of a reliable income. The real magic happens when you connect with the right people, build a community, and genuinely impact the lives of your followers.

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


As I’ve built my business, I’ve prioritized my actual offerings over cultivating vanity metrics. This has been an excellent system for building sales, but it’s also meant that some of my most visible platforms don’t necessarily look as successful compared to what you might expect from comparable social media accounts. Join me today as I walk you through my process and break down how you can create a profitable plan that converts and makes you a reliable income, no matter the size of your audience!
Episode Highlights

What is the Purpose of Social Media? [0:03:49] 

Small Following – Big Engagement [0:05:35]

How to Make Money from a Small Niche Following [0:11:30]

Relationships Mean Everything [0:16:45]

Don’t Wait – Start Today [0:23:55]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It may seem counterintuitive, but you don't need 1000s of followers to make 1000s of dollars! Today, I’m breaking down exactly how to build a profitable online business without a massive online following. While a big audience might seem glamorous, it’s no guarantee of a reliable income. The real magic happens when you connect with the right people, build a community, and genuinely impact the lives of your followers.</p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>As I’ve built my business, I’ve prioritized my actual offerings over cultivating vanity metrics. This has been an excellent system for building sales, but it’s also meant that some of my most visible platforms don’t necessarily look as successful compared to what you might expect from comparable social media accounts. Join me today as I walk you through my process and break down how you can create a profitable plan that converts and makes you a reliable income, no matter the size of your audience!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>What is the Purpose of Social Media? [0:03:49] </li>
<li>Small Following – Big Engagement [0:05:35]</li>
<li>How to Make Money from a Small Niche Following [0:11:30]</li>
<li>Relationships Mean Everything [0:16:45]</li>
<li>Don’t Wait – Start Today [0:23:55]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1826</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[161da232-e3d2-11ef-b646-97b3b6921559]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE3083911809.mp3?updated=1738768485" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>923: The Backwards Launch Playbook: Why Selling First Works</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/backwards-launch-playbook-why-selling-first-works</link>
      <description>What if I told you that you could sell a digital product before you’ve even created it? Not only is it possible, but it might just be the smartest way to launch! In this episode, I share why this strategy works, especially for first-time creators who are unsure if their idea will even sell. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I walk you through my personal experience with preselling, and how doing it this way not only validates your idea but also motivates you to get the product out there. You’ll learn how preselling can help you build alongside your audience, refine your offer, and ensure you’re truly serving their needs.If you’ve been hesitant to launch, I’ll show you why selling first is the way to go. 
Episode Highlights

What You Gain From Selling First and Building Out Later [0:02:27] 

Getting Ready to Launch Backwards [0:10:23]

Everything I Learned From Preselling Digital Products [0:21:48]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 04 Feb 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Backwards Launch Playbook: Why Selling First Works</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>923</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Learn how preselling can help you build alongside your audience, refine your offer, and ensure you’re truly serving their needs</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What if I told you that you could sell a digital product before you’ve even created it? Not only is it possible, but it might just be the smartest way to launch! In this episode, I share why this strategy works, especially for first-time creators who are unsure if their idea will even sell. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I walk you through my personal experience with preselling, and how doing it this way not only validates your idea but also motivates you to get the product out there. You’ll learn how preselling can help you build alongside your audience, refine your offer, and ensure you’re truly serving their needs.If you’ve been hesitant to launch, I’ll show you why selling first is the way to go. 
Episode Highlights

What You Gain From Selling First and Building Out Later [0:02:27] 

Getting Ready to Launch Backwards [0:10:23]

Everything I Learned From Preselling Digital Products [0:21:48]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What if I told you that you could sell a digital product before you’ve even created it? Not only is it possible, but it might just be the smartest way to launch! In this episode, I share why this strategy works, especially for first-time creators who are unsure if their idea will even sell. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>I walk you through my personal experience with preselling, and how doing it this way not only validates your idea but also motivates you to get the product out there. You’ll learn how preselling can help you build alongside your audience, refine your offer, and ensure you’re truly serving their needs.If you’ve been hesitant to launch, I’ll show you why selling first is the way to go. </p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>What You Gain From Selling First and Building Out Later [0:02:27] </li>
<li>Getting Ready to Launch Backwards [0:10:23]</li>
<li>Everything I Learned From Preselling Digital Products [0:21:48]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1920</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[db3473ca-e26f-11ef-af53-03586dfa0cd5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6804363210.mp3?updated=1738617555" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>922: I’m Growing by 1,000 Students a Month—Here’s What I Do That You Might Not</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/growing-by-1k-students-a-month-heres-what-i-do-that-you-might-not</link>
      <description>I recently passed the milestone of having 40,000 students which is just incredible! To have educated that many small business owners over the last decade has been such a gift and we are growing faster than we ever have before. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


At the end of 2024, I was averaging adding 1000 students a month and today I’m sharing what I’ve been doing that you may not be that I think is making all of the difference. This isn’t some magic formula that will give you the same results as me. Ultimately, this is a combination of mindset, strategy, and systems that I’ve refined over many years and these are the things I think are actually moving the needle.
Episode Highlights

The One Mindset Shift I Made to Be Hyper-Consistent. [0:01:53] 

How to Eradicate the Fear of Failure. [0:06:46]

The Biggest Opportunity to Accelerate Growth. [0:10:46]

Leveraging Support. [0:17:12]

The Power of Repetition. [0:22:44]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 30 Jan 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>I’m Growing by 1,000 Students a Month—Here’s What I Do That You Might Not</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>922</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Ultimately, this is a combination of mindset, strategy, and systems that I’ve refined over many years and these are the things I think are actually moving the needle.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I recently passed the milestone of having 40,000 students which is just incredible! To have educated that many small business owners over the last decade has been such a gift and we are growing faster than we ever have before. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


At the end of 2024, I was averaging adding 1000 students a month and today I’m sharing what I’ve been doing that you may not be that I think is making all of the difference. This isn’t some magic formula that will give you the same results as me. Ultimately, this is a combination of mindset, strategy, and systems that I’ve refined over many years and these are the things I think are actually moving the needle.
Episode Highlights

The One Mindset Shift I Made to Be Hyper-Consistent. [0:01:53] 

How to Eradicate the Fear of Failure. [0:06:46]

The Biggest Opportunity to Accelerate Growth. [0:10:46]

Leveraging Support. [0:17:12]

The Power of Repetition. [0:22:44]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I recently passed the milestone of having 40,000 students which is just incredible! To have educated that many small business owners over the last decade has been such a gift and we are growing faster than we ever have before. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>At the end of 2024, I was averaging adding 1000 students a month and today I’m sharing what I’ve been doing that you may not be that I think is making all of the difference. This isn’t some magic formula that will give you the same results as me. Ultimately, this is a combination of mindset, strategy, and systems that I’ve refined over many years and these are the things I think are actually moving the needle.</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>The One Mindset Shift I Made to Be Hyper-Consistent. [0:01:53] </li>
<li>How to Eradicate the Fear of Failure. [0:06:46]</li>
<li>The Biggest Opportunity to Accelerate Growth. [0:10:46]</li>
<li>Leveraging Support. [0:17:12]</li>
<li>The Power of Repetition. [0:22:44]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2260</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[166dd5d4-de5c-11ef-aef1-9b29ed2dc9f5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE4711961548.mp3?updated=1738167987" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>921: How to Get More Done in 12 Weeks Than Most Do All Year</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-get-more-done-in-12-weeks-than-most-do-all-year</link>
      <description>Imagine accomplishing a year’s worth of goals in just 12 weeks. That’s what I’m doing here at Boss Project and today I’m going to share my game plan with you! I want you to think of the concept of the 12-week year as a period of focused sprints rather than annual plans. This approach creates urgency and focus and allows you to see what’s coming in a tangible way. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


A little while ago, I felt demotivated when it came to goal setting because a lot of the time, I either overpromised and underdelivered or simply couldn’t control the outcome of the goals anyway. When I decided to stop setting goals and instead view things as experiments, focusing exclusively on the process, I found approaching business fun, exciting, and challenging without the pressure of wins and failures. After hearing how successful other businesses have been when implementing this technique, I wanted to try it out and document the process for you to see and I think January is the perfect time to start fresh!
Episode Highlights

The Power of the 12-Week Year. [0:08:30] 

How I Implemented the 12-Week Year in My Business. [0:16:29]

My Focus for the Upcoming 12-Week Sprint. [0:19:30]

How Am I Managing My Time? [0:28:24]

Starting Your 12-Week Year. [0:31:08]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 28 Jan 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Get More Done in 12 Weeks Than Most Do All Year</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>921</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Imagine accomplishing a year’s worth of goals in just 12 weeks. That’s what I’m doing here at Boss Project and today I’m going to share my game plan with you!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Imagine accomplishing a year’s worth of goals in just 12 weeks. That’s what I’m doing here at Boss Project and today I’m going to share my game plan with you! I want you to think of the concept of the 12-week year as a period of focused sprints rather than annual plans. This approach creates urgency and focus and allows you to see what’s coming in a tangible way. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


A little while ago, I felt demotivated when it came to goal setting because a lot of the time, I either overpromised and underdelivered or simply couldn’t control the outcome of the goals anyway. When I decided to stop setting goals and instead view things as experiments, focusing exclusively on the process, I found approaching business fun, exciting, and challenging without the pressure of wins and failures. After hearing how successful other businesses have been when implementing this technique, I wanted to try it out and document the process for you to see and I think January is the perfect time to start fresh!
Episode Highlights

The Power of the 12-Week Year. [0:08:30] 

How I Implemented the 12-Week Year in My Business. [0:16:29]

My Focus for the Upcoming 12-Week Sprint. [0:19:30]

How Am I Managing My Time? [0:28:24]

Starting Your 12-Week Year. [0:31:08]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Imagine accomplishing a year’s worth of goals in just 12 weeks. That’s what I’m doing here at Boss Project and today I’m going to share my game plan with you! I want you to think of the concept of the 12-week year as a period of focused sprints rather than annual plans. This approach creates urgency and focus and allows you to see what’s coming in a tangible way. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>A little while ago, I felt demotivated when it came to goal setting because a lot of the time, I either overpromised and underdelivered or simply couldn’t control the outcome of the goals anyway. When I decided to stop setting goals and instead view things as experiments, focusing exclusively on the process, I found approaching business fun, exciting, and challenging without the pressure of wins and failures. After hearing how successful other businesses have been when implementing this technique, I wanted to try it out and document the process for you to see and I think January is the perfect time to start fresh!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>The Power of the 12-Week Year. [0:08:30] </li>
<li>How I Implemented the 12-Week Year in My Business. [0:16:29]</li>
<li>My Focus for the Upcoming 12-Week Sprint. [0:19:30]</li>
<li>How Am I Managing My Time? [0:28:24]</li>
<li>Starting Your 12-Week Year. [0:31:08]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2694</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[de1db06e-dcf3-11ef-b8cd-9bdaebe1843c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5712264570.mp3?updated=1738013326" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>920: No-Brainer Pricing &amp; Proving the Value of Your Intangible Digital Products to Potential Customers</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/no-brainer-pricing-proving-value-of-digital-products-to-customers</link>
      <description>Have you ever seen a product and thought, “Shut up and take my money!”? This is what we call no-brainer pricing, and during this episode, I’m going to show you how to make offers so irresistible that customers won’t need convincing. Let’s get into it! 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights:

Why Perception Really Is Everything &amp; How to Use It to Your Advantage [0:00:54] 

Making the Value Obvious Every Time [0:07:14]

The Easiest Way to Make Your Offer Accessible [0:24:30]

Communicating Your Value Through ROI [0:32:23]

How to Get the Price Right [0:42:50]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 23 Jan 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>No-Brainer Pricing &amp; Proving the Value of Your Intangible Digital Products to Potential Customers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>920</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’m going to show you how to make offers so irresistible that customers won’t need convincing.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you ever seen a product and thought, “Shut up and take my money!”? This is what we call no-brainer pricing, and during this episode, I’m going to show you how to make offers so irresistible that customers won’t need convincing. Let’s get into it! 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights:

Why Perception Really Is Everything &amp; How to Use It to Your Advantage [0:00:54] 

Making the Value Obvious Every Time [0:07:14]

The Easiest Way to Make Your Offer Accessible [0:24:30]

Communicating Your Value Through ROI [0:32:23]

How to Get the Price Right [0:42:50]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you ever seen a product and thought, “Shut up and take my money!”? This is what we call no-brainer pricing, and during this episode, I’m going to show you how to make offers so irresistible that customers won’t need convincing. Let’s get into it! </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><h3><br></h3><h3>Episode Highlights:</h3><ul>
<li>Why Perception Really Is Everything &amp; How to Use It to Your Advantage [0:00:54] </li>
<li>Making the Value Obvious Every Time [0:07:14]</li>
<li>The Easiest Way to Make Your Offer Accessible [0:24:30]</li>
<li>Communicating Your Value Through ROI [0:32:23]</li>
<li>How to Get the Price Right [0:42:50]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2892</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ece73594-d806-11ef-86b6-8b348404ce25]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE2196758335.mp3?updated=1737474310" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>919: How a $29 Digital Product Made $288,405</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-a-29-digital-product-made-288k</link>
      <description>When I first launched my $29 digital product, I didn’t expect it to become one of my highest-earning digital offers. But here is how I made $288,405 dollars off of it and how you can do the same with your next entry point digital product. When I put this product out there, I had no expectations of how it would perform. I was just excited to make it and use it myself and then share it with the world. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


There was no reason why I decided it should be $29, it was just a number I was going to try and it has worked so well that I’ve never changed it! If you have ever felt that a low-priced product could never generate real income, I’m confident that this story is going to prove you wrong. Let’s dive in!
Episode Highlights

The Most Important Thing to Address When Creating a Digital Product [0:03:24] 

What Was Trello for Business? [0:14:13]

Why Selling an Entry-Point Digital Product Should Be Easy. [0:20:03]

The Best Way to Market Your Product. [0:25:54]

Consistency, As Always, is Key! [0:33:00]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 21 Jan 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How a $29 Digital Product Made $288,405</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>919</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>When I put this product out there, I had no expectations of how it would perform. I was just excited to make it and use it myself and then share it with the world.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When I first launched my $29 digital product, I didn’t expect it to become one of my highest-earning digital offers. But here is how I made $288,405 dollars off of it and how you can do the same with your next entry point digital product. When I put this product out there, I had no expectations of how it would perform. I was just excited to make it and use it myself and then share it with the world. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


There was no reason why I decided it should be $29, it was just a number I was going to try and it has worked so well that I’ve never changed it! If you have ever felt that a low-priced product could never generate real income, I’m confident that this story is going to prove you wrong. Let’s dive in!
Episode Highlights

The Most Important Thing to Address When Creating a Digital Product [0:03:24] 

What Was Trello for Business? [0:14:13]

Why Selling an Entry-Point Digital Product Should Be Easy. [0:20:03]

The Best Way to Market Your Product. [0:25:54]

Consistency, As Always, is Key! [0:33:00]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When I first launched my $29 digital product, I didn’t expect it to become one of my highest-earning digital offers. But here is how I made $288,405 dollars off of it and how you can do the same with your next entry point digital product. When I put this product out there, I had no expectations of how it would perform. I was just excited to make it and use it myself and then share it with the world. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>There was no reason why I decided it should be $29, it was just a number I was going to try and it has worked so well that I’ve never changed it! If you have ever felt that a low-priced product could never generate real income, I’m confident that this story is going to prove you wrong. Let’s dive in!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>The Most Important Thing to Address When Creating a Digital Product [0:03:24] </li>
<li>What Was Trello for Business? [0:14:13]</li>
<li>Why Selling an Entry-Point Digital Product Should Be Easy. [0:20:03]</li>
<li>The Best Way to Market Your Product. [0:25:54]</li>
<li>Consistency, As Always, is Key! [0:33:00]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2443</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ede0f738-d74c-11ef-b6d1-bf323409f5f9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1109061177.mp3?updated=1737391862" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>918: Grow Your Impact and Revenue by Adding Digital Products to Your Offer Lineup</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/grow-your-impact-and-revenue-by-adding-digital-products-to-your-offer-lineup</link>
      <description>During today’s episode, I’m digging into how you can use digital products to grow your impact and revenue. When I started on this road, I really didn’t understand what it could mean for my availability to work with more people and make a bigger difference in the lives of my clients. I loved running my design agency, but so much of my income was entirely dependent on my clients’ needs. It felt like I had switched from having one boss to having many bosses! 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I made a good living running an agency. I built that into a multi-six-figure business. But with THIS business, I have been able to bring home multiple millions of dollars in revenue. It has completely changed my life and my financial future. I’m super glad I started it so long ago! If you’re sitting here wondering if this is something you should be doing, the answer is probably yes. It allows you to take control and to grow in ways you never thought were possible.
Episode Highlights

How Digital Products Changed Everything for Me and My Team [0:06:58] 

Why The Digital Product Industry is Growing More Rapidly Than Ever Before [0:12:29]

The Offers I’ve Built Since I Started [0:15:59]

How to Avoid the Biggest Mistake People Are Making [0:18:18]

Launching Your Digital Product in Just One Day [0:20:38]

Where So Many People Go Wrong (And How to Make Sure You Don’t Follow Them) [0:27:41]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jan 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Grow Your Impact and Revenue by Adding Digital Products to Your Offer Lineup</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>918</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you’re sitting here wondering if this is something you should be doing, the answer is probably yes. It allows you to take control and to grow in ways you never thought were possible.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>During today’s episode, I’m digging into how you can use digital products to grow your impact and revenue. When I started on this road, I really didn’t understand what it could mean for my availability to work with more people and make a bigger difference in the lives of my clients. I loved running my design agency, but so much of my income was entirely dependent on my clients’ needs. It felt like I had switched from having one boss to having many bosses! 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I made a good living running an agency. I built that into a multi-six-figure business. But with THIS business, I have been able to bring home multiple millions of dollars in revenue. It has completely changed my life and my financial future. I’m super glad I started it so long ago! If you’re sitting here wondering if this is something you should be doing, the answer is probably yes. It allows you to take control and to grow in ways you never thought were possible.
Episode Highlights

How Digital Products Changed Everything for Me and My Team [0:06:58] 

Why The Digital Product Industry is Growing More Rapidly Than Ever Before [0:12:29]

The Offers I’ve Built Since I Started [0:15:59]

How to Avoid the Biggest Mistake People Are Making [0:18:18]

Launching Your Digital Product in Just One Day [0:20:38]

Where So Many People Go Wrong (And How to Make Sure You Don’t Follow Them) [0:27:41]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>During today’s episode, I’m digging into how you can use digital products to grow your impact and revenue. When I started on this road, I really didn’t understand what it could mean for my availability to work with more people and make a bigger difference in the lives of my clients. I loved running my design agency, but so much of my income was entirely dependent on my clients’ needs. It felt like I had switched from having one boss to having many bosses! </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>I made a good living running an agency. I built that into a multi-six-figure business. But with THIS business, I have been able to bring home multiple millions of dollars in revenue. It has completely changed my life and my financial future. I’m super glad I started it so long ago! If you’re sitting here wondering if this is something you should be doing, the answer is probably yes. It allows you to take control and to grow in ways you never thought were possible.</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>How Digital Products Changed Everything for Me and My Team [0:06:58] </li>
<li>Why The Digital Product Industry is Growing More Rapidly Than Ever Before [0:12:29]</li>
<li>The Offers I’ve Built Since I Started [0:15:59]</li>
<li>How to Avoid the Biggest Mistake People Are Making [0:18:18]</li>
<li>Launching Your Digital Product in Just One Day [0:20:38]</li>
<li>Where So Many People Go Wrong (And How to Make Sure You Don’t Follow Them) [0:27:41]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2395</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b5187ae4-d359-11ef-b76d-df07fd719bbd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE7342785750.mp3?updated=1736957487" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>917: Narrowing Down Your Digital Product Ideas to Find the Right Offer</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/narrowing-down-your-digital-product-ideas-to-find-the-right-offer</link>
      <description>Do you have too many ideas for digital products and you’re just not sure where to start? One of the biggest hurdles for creators is deciding which idea to focus on and too often I see people stuck in decision-making and never launch anything. I don’t want that to happen to you. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


One of two things happens when people have too many ideas. Either they go nowhere or they try pretty much everything and put it all out there which makes things look scattered and confusing. When people are passionate about their ideas, choosing can feel like abandoning other ideas. I want you to reframe it: when you choose an idea, you are simply prioritizing one now but that doesn’t mean that those other things won’t come in time. At the end of this episode, you’re going to have a framework to choose an idea and take it from concept to execution. 
Episode Highlights

Putting All Your Ideas Down on Paper [0:02:40] 

Narrowing Your List of Ideas Down [0:06:13]

Testing Your Idea with Presale [0:11:30]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jan 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Narrowing Down Your Digital Product Ideas to Find the Right Offer</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>917</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>One of the biggest hurdles for creators is deciding which idea to focus on and too often I see people stuck in decision-making and never launch anything. I don’t want that to happen to you. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Do you have too many ideas for digital products and you’re just not sure where to start? One of the biggest hurdles for creators is deciding which idea to focus on and too often I see people stuck in decision-making and never launch anything. I don’t want that to happen to you. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


One of two things happens when people have too many ideas. Either they go nowhere or they try pretty much everything and put it all out there which makes things look scattered and confusing. When people are passionate about their ideas, choosing can feel like abandoning other ideas. I want you to reframe it: when you choose an idea, you are simply prioritizing one now but that doesn’t mean that those other things won’t come in time. At the end of this episode, you’re going to have a framework to choose an idea and take it from concept to execution. 
Episode Highlights

Putting All Your Ideas Down on Paper [0:02:40] 

Narrowing Your List of Ideas Down [0:06:13]

Testing Your Idea with Presale [0:11:30]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Do you have too many ideas for digital products and you’re just not sure where to start? One of the biggest hurdles for creators is deciding which idea to focus on and too often I see people stuck in decision-making and never launch anything. I don’t want that to happen to you. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>One of two things happens when people have too many ideas. Either they go nowhere or they try pretty much everything and put it all out there which makes things look scattered and confusing. When people are passionate about their ideas, choosing can feel like abandoning other ideas. I want you to reframe it: when you choose an idea, you are simply prioritizing one now but that doesn’t mean that those other things won’t come in time. At the end of this episode, you’re going to have a framework to choose an idea and take it from concept to execution. </p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Putting All Your Ideas Down on Paper [0:02:40] </li>
<li>Narrowing Your List of Ideas Down [0:06:13]</li>
<li>Testing Your Idea with Presale [0:11:30]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1305</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5559b852-d1ce-11ef-8b0e-6f14d5eb8ba9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5767013751.mp3?updated=1736787516" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>916: What Most People Get Wrong About Their Digital Product Offers</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-most-people-get-wrong-about-their-digital-product-offers</link>
      <description>Are you solving real problems or just slapping on Band-Aids? In this episode, I dive into the ONE question you absolutely need to ask before creating or selling your digital product and the test I use to ensure that digital products deliver fast, tangible results, not just quick fixes that only address surface-level symptoms. I also offer a practical explanation for why quick wins are the key to building trust, driving sales, and setting up future success.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Whether you're reworking an existing offer or brainstorming a new one, I’ll help you simplify your solution, focus on small but impactful wins, and avoid the overwhelm-trap that most creators fall into! This episode is your guide to creating offers that sell and position your business for long-term growth. Remember, the goal is to make your solutions so simple and immediate that clients can’t help but say, “Oh my gosh, this works!”
Episode Highlights

The Quick Win Test: How Fast Does It Work? [0:02:14] 

How Instant Results Lead to Instant Trust. [0:05:51]

Why it’s the Simplest Tools that Deliver the Most Impact. [0:12:52]

Indoctrinating Someone into Your Way of Thinking. [0:16:15]

Brainstorming Without Judgment, Then Filtering Out the Band-Aids. [0:22:06]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 09 Jan 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Most People Get Wrong About Their Digital Product Offers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>916</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>This episode is your guide to creating offers that sell and position your business for long-term growth.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you solving real problems or just slapping on Band-Aids? In this episode, I dive into the ONE question you absolutely need to ask before creating or selling your digital product and the test I use to ensure that digital products deliver fast, tangible results, not just quick fixes that only address surface-level symptoms. I also offer a practical explanation for why quick wins are the key to building trust, driving sales, and setting up future success.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Whether you're reworking an existing offer or brainstorming a new one, I’ll help you simplify your solution, focus on small but impactful wins, and avoid the overwhelm-trap that most creators fall into! This episode is your guide to creating offers that sell and position your business for long-term growth. Remember, the goal is to make your solutions so simple and immediate that clients can’t help but say, “Oh my gosh, this works!”
Episode Highlights

The Quick Win Test: How Fast Does It Work? [0:02:14] 

How Instant Results Lead to Instant Trust. [0:05:51]

Why it’s the Simplest Tools that Deliver the Most Impact. [0:12:52]

Indoctrinating Someone into Your Way of Thinking. [0:16:15]

Brainstorming Without Judgment, Then Filtering Out the Band-Aids. [0:22:06]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you solving real problems or just slapping on Band-Aids? In this episode, I dive into the ONE question you absolutely need to ask before creating or selling your digital product and the test I use to ensure that digital products deliver fast, tangible results, not just quick fixes that only address surface-level symptoms. I also offer a practical explanation for why quick wins are the key to building trust, driving sales, and setting up future success.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Whether you're reworking an existing offer or brainstorming a new one, I’ll help you simplify your solution, focus on small but impactful wins, and avoid the overwhelm-trap that most creators fall into! This episode is your guide to creating offers that sell and position your business for long-term growth. Remember, the goal is to make your solutions so simple and immediate that clients can’t help but say, “Oh my gosh, this <em>works</em>!”</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>The Quick Win Test: How Fast Does It Work? [0:02:14] </li>
<li>How Instant Results Lead to Instant Trust. [0:05:51]</li>
<li>Why it’s the Simplest Tools that Deliver the Most Impact. [0:12:52]</li>
<li>Indoctrinating Someone into Your Way of Thinking. [0:16:15]</li>
<li>Brainstorming Without Judgment, Then Filtering Out the Band-Aids. [0:22:06]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2142</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[539b3930-cdd4-11ef-84d6-cfcbef1b6fb4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE4212197229.mp3?updated=1736350443" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>915: Using AI to Negotiate Brand Deals</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/using-ai-to-negotiate-brand-deals</link>
      <description>November 2024 was the very first time I used AI to negotiate a brand deal and it was absolutely game-changing! If you’re a coach or consultant, partnering with brands that offer something complimentary to what you do is such an incredible way to expand your reach and position you as an expert. Negotiating is so important because it helps you secure fair compensation for your work and gives you the opportunity to align expectations early. There’s something about self-advocating to increase your revenue that makes you feel so powerful! And you can leverage AI to help you do it!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

How to Leverage AI to Research a Brand Deal [0:05:24] 

How to Interact with AI to Optimize Your Results [0:12:32]

Getting Third-Party Perspective Through AI [0:20:45]

Mistakes to Avoid When Using AI to Communicate [0:25:37]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 07 Jan 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Using AI to Negotiate Brand Deals</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>915</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Leverage AI to advocate for yourself and increase your revenue with powerful negotiating suggestions and insights.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>November 2024 was the very first time I used AI to negotiate a brand deal and it was absolutely game-changing! If you’re a coach or consultant, partnering with brands that offer something complimentary to what you do is such an incredible way to expand your reach and position you as an expert. Negotiating is so important because it helps you secure fair compensation for your work and gives you the opportunity to align expectations early. There’s something about self-advocating to increase your revenue that makes you feel so powerful! And you can leverage AI to help you do it!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

How to Leverage AI to Research a Brand Deal [0:05:24] 

How to Interact with AI to Optimize Your Results [0:12:32]

Getting Third-Party Perspective Through AI [0:20:45]

Mistakes to Avoid When Using AI to Communicate [0:25:37]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>November 2024 was the very first time I used AI to negotiate a brand deal and it was absolutely game-changing! If you’re a coach or consultant, partnering with brands that offer something complimentary to what you do is such an incredible way to expand your reach and position you as an expert. Negotiating is so important because it helps you secure fair compensation for your work and gives you the opportunity to align expectations early. There’s something about self-advocating to increase your revenue that makes you feel so powerful! And you can leverage AI to help you do it!</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><h3><br></h3><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>How to Leverage AI to Research a Brand Deal [0:05:24] </li>
<li>How to Interact with AI to Optimize Your Results [0:12:32]</li>
<li>Getting Third-Party Perspective Through AI [0:20:45]</li>
<li>Mistakes to Avoid When Using AI to Communicate [0:25:37]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2098</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cdc1c098-bc9b-11ef-9d15-2761dd808ae5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE2285401122.mp3?updated=1734456907" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>914: Fan Favorite- Design a Business That Can Run Without You</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/fan-favorite-design-a-business-that-can-run-without-you</link>
      <description>Today we’re sharing one of our fan favorite episodes in case you missed it! This is such a valuable topic– I’m sharing why it’s important to build your business in a way that can weather the storms life may toss your way. Bad things are gonna happen, it's just a fact. Let’s talk about how to keep your business strong (and not dependent on you personally) even when things get tough. It IS possible to create a business model that empowers you to prioritize your goals and can endure your absence if necessary.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

Learning How to Seek Support [0:18:23]

Dreaming Up a Business That Runs on Its Own [0:30:03]

The Absolute First Step You've Got to Take [0:34:40]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 02 Jan 2025 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Fan Favorite- Design a Business That Can Run Without You</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>914</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>It IS possible to create a business model that empowers you to prioritize your goals and can endure your absence if necessary.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we’re sharing one of our fan favorite episodes in case you missed it! This is such a valuable topic– I’m sharing why it’s important to build your business in a way that can weather the storms life may toss your way. Bad things are gonna happen, it's just a fact. Let’s talk about how to keep your business strong (and not dependent on you personally) even when things get tough. It IS possible to create a business model that empowers you to prioritize your goals and can endure your absence if necessary.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

Learning How to Seek Support [0:18:23]

Dreaming Up a Business That Runs on Its Own [0:30:03]

The Absolute First Step You've Got to Take [0:34:40]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we’re sharing one of our fan favorite episodes in case you missed it! This is such a valuable topic– I’m sharing why it’s important to build your business in a way that can weather the storms life may toss your way. Bad things are gonna happen, it's just a fact. Let’s talk about how to keep your business strong (and not dependent on you personally) even when things get tough. It IS possible to create a business model that empowers you to prioritize your goals and can endure your absence if necessary.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><h3><br></h3><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Learning How to Seek Support [0:18:23]</li>
<li>Dreaming Up a Business That Runs on Its Own [0:30:03]</li>
<li>The Absolute First Step You've Got to Take [0:34:40]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2689</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[435c4ae6-b33f-11ef-bec3-dbd41909ce62]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1219236779.mp3?updated=1733428038" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>913: Fan Favorite- Generate $1k in the Next Two Weeks with my Pre-Sales Method</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/fan-favorite-generate-1k-in-the-next-two-weeks-with-pre-sales</link>
      <description>Today we’re sharing one of our fan favorite episodes in case you missed it! This is such a valuable topic– I’m sharing how you can strategically use pre-sales in your business to sell more digital products and courses. Tune in to find out what pre-sales are, how you can benefit from them, and learn some simple strategies to help you get started!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

You’re Likely Already Doing Pre-Sales [0:02:22] 

What is Pre-Sales and How Can it Benefit You? [0:03:45]

A Simple Strategy to Get You Started [0:16:16]

Where to Start On the Problem of Pricing [0:23:16]

Remove Commitment From Low-Priced Digital Products [0:27:53]

The Worst Case Scenario and Why You Should Act Now! [0:32:30]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 31 Dec 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Fan Favorite- Generate $1k in the Next Two Weeks with my Pre-Sales Method</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>913</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tune in to find out what pre-sales are, how you can benefit from them, and learn some simple strategies to help you get started!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we’re sharing one of our fan favorite episodes in case you missed it! This is such a valuable topic– I’m sharing how you can strategically use pre-sales in your business to sell more digital products and courses. Tune in to find out what pre-sales are, how you can benefit from them, and learn some simple strategies to help you get started!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

You’re Likely Already Doing Pre-Sales [0:02:22] 

What is Pre-Sales and How Can it Benefit You? [0:03:45]

A Simple Strategy to Get You Started [0:16:16]

Where to Start On the Problem of Pricing [0:23:16]

Remove Commitment From Low-Priced Digital Products [0:27:53]

The Worst Case Scenario and Why You Should Act Now! [0:32:30]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we’re sharing one of our fan favorite episodes in case you missed it! This is such a valuable topic– I’m sharing how you can strategically use pre-sales in your business to sell more digital products and courses. Tune in to find out what pre-sales are, how you can benefit from them, and learn some simple strategies to help you get started!</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><h2><br></h2><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>You’re Likely Already Doing Pre-Sales [0:02:22] </li>
<li>What is Pre-Sales and How Can it Benefit You? [0:03:45]</li>
<li>A Simple Strategy to Get You Started [0:16:16]</li>
<li>Where to Start On the Problem of Pricing [0:23:16]</li>
<li>Remove Commitment From Low-Priced Digital Products [0:27:53]</li>
<li>The Worst Case Scenario and Why You Should Act Now! [0:32:30]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2395</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f1dbd108-b33b-11ef-8a06-6fa88d4851ae]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6850295592.mp3?updated=1733426462" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>912: Fan Favorite- Leveraging Digital Products to Get More Qualified Leads</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/fan-favorite-leveraging-digital-products-to-get-more-qualified-leads</link>
      <description>Today we’re sharing one of our fan favorite episodes in case you missed it! This is such a valuable topic– I’m sharing how to leverage digital products to get more leads and sales. And we’re talking about how to do this while NOT getting caught in the weeds of flashy marketing strategies. Tuning in, you’ll find out how to attract leads AND get paid in the process.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

Why the Profit from Your First Sale Isn’t Everything [0:11:28] 

Using a Digital Product to Attract the Right People [0:15:01]

Paid Offers Versus Free Lead Magnets [0:21:20]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Dec 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Fan Favorite- Leveraging Digital Products to Get More Qualified Leads</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>912</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>And we’re talking about how to do this while NOT getting caught in the weeds of flashy marketing strategies.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we’re sharing one of our fan favorite episodes in case you missed it! This is such a valuable topic– I’m sharing how to leverage digital products to get more leads and sales. And we’re talking about how to do this while NOT getting caught in the weeds of flashy marketing strategies. Tuning in, you’ll find out how to attract leads AND get paid in the process.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

Why the Profit from Your First Sale Isn’t Everything [0:11:28] 

Using a Digital Product to Attract the Right People [0:15:01]

Paid Offers Versus Free Lead Magnets [0:21:20]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we’re sharing one of our fan favorite episodes in case you missed it! This is such a valuable topic– I’m sharing how to leverage digital products to get more leads and sales. And we’re talking about how to do this while NOT getting caught in the weeds of flashy marketing strategies. Tuning in, you’ll find out how to attract leads AND get paid in the process.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><h2><br></h2><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Why the Profit from Your First Sale Isn’t Everything [0:11:28] </li>
<li>Using a Digital Product to Attract the Right People [0:15:01]</li>
<li>Paid Offers Versus Free Lead Magnets [0:21:20]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1789</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7b45e448-a846-11ef-8933-f71b48257d5c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5107339900.mp3?updated=1732221979" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>911: Fan Favorite- Starting a Business with ZERO Audience</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/fan-favorite-starting-a-business-with-zero-audience</link>
      <description>Today we’re sharing one of our fan favorite episodes in case you missed it! This is such a valuable topic– I’m sharing how I’d start a business TODAY if I had absolutely no existing audience. It’s about showing up and making yourself visible. We’re talking about growing a community of real relationships and emphasizing community over chasing vanity numbers.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

How to Utilize a Digital Product to Convert Strangers to Buyers [0:14:11] 

How to Build an Audience You Can Sell to in 2024 [0:16:57]

Leveraging Digital Products to Build Your Audience [0:22:05]

The Best Way to Communicate with Your Followers Directly [0:29:41]

The Biggest Mistake that People Are Making [0:33:47]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 24 Dec 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Fan Favorite: Starting a Business with ZERO Audience</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>911</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’re talking about growing a community of real relationships and emphasizing community over chasing vanity numbers.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we’re sharing one of our fan favorite episodes in case you missed it! This is such a valuable topic– I’m sharing how I’d start a business TODAY if I had absolutely no existing audience. It’s about showing up and making yourself visible. We’re talking about growing a community of real relationships and emphasizing community over chasing vanity numbers.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

How to Utilize a Digital Product to Convert Strangers to Buyers [0:14:11] 

How to Build an Audience You Can Sell to in 2024 [0:16:57]

Leveraging Digital Products to Build Your Audience [0:22:05]

The Best Way to Communicate with Your Followers Directly [0:29:41]

The Biggest Mistake that People Are Making [0:33:47]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we’re sharing one of our fan favorite episodes in case you missed it! This is such a valuable topic– I’m sharing how I’d start a business TODAY if I had absolutely no existing audience. It’s about showing up and making yourself visible. We’re talking about growing a community of real relationships and emphasizing community over chasing vanity numbers.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><h2><br></h2><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>How to Utilize a Digital Product to Convert Strangers to Buyers [0:14:11] </li>
<li>How to Build an Audience You Can Sell to in 2024 [0:16:57]</li>
<li>Leveraging Digital Products to Build Your Audience [0:22:05]</li>
<li>The Best Way to Communicate with Your Followers Directly [0:29:41]</li>
<li>The Biggest Mistake that People Are Making [0:33:47]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2709</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2eaba0a2-a844-11ef-a4ad-832cefce82c8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE8621181640.mp3?updated=1732221907" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>910: My Plans and Predictions for 2025</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/my-plans-and-predictions-for-2025</link>
      <description>This is going to sound wild, but I have not planned the year ahead for multiple years in a row now. I felt a lot of pressure to make the right decisions to set me up for the year and I got tired of feeling like I was failing! So, I just stopped setting goals. Instead, I started to take things one step at a time. But this year feels different. I wanted to use this episode to share more of my plans and my predictions for 2025.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Originally, I wasn’t planning to share my plans for the coming year. Even though it can be tough to know what to share as someone who teaches other business owners to do what I do, I’m sharing this because I know this is going to work. I want to make sure that you have these reminders in front of you. You don’t need to make radical changes to your plans. But these ideas are truly what makes businesses in this industry scale. 
Episode Highlights

How I’ve Added Nearly 10,000 New Subscribers to My Email List in Just 6 Months [0:04:31] 

Press and Social Media Magic We Saw in 2024 [0:06:25]

The One Thing That Made Me Proudest This Year [0:08:34]

Why I’m Doubling Down on My Front-Of-Funnel [0:10:30]

Two Ways to Prioritize Growth in 2025 [0:11:25]

What I’m Going to Work Hardest on Improving [0:15:14]

My Top Predictions for the Industry’s Future [0:18:30]

What You Absolutely Have to Do to See Growth in 2025 [0:21:26]

The Thing That Your Success Actually Depends On [0:24:44]

Why You Can’t Possibly Predict Everything and That’s Okay! [0:26:16]

How Digital Product Jumpstart Builds Your Audience and Boosts Conversions [0:28:28]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 19 Dec 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>My Plans and Predictions for 2025</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>910</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I want to make sure that you have these reminders in front of you. You don’t need to make radical changes to your plans. But these ideas are truly what makes businesses in this industry scale. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This is going to sound wild, but I have not planned the year ahead for multiple years in a row now. I felt a lot of pressure to make the right decisions to set me up for the year and I got tired of feeling like I was failing! So, I just stopped setting goals. Instead, I started to take things one step at a time. But this year feels different. I wanted to use this episode to share more of my plans and my predictions for 2025.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Originally, I wasn’t planning to share my plans for the coming year. Even though it can be tough to know what to share as someone who teaches other business owners to do what I do, I’m sharing this because I know this is going to work. I want to make sure that you have these reminders in front of you. You don’t need to make radical changes to your plans. But these ideas are truly what makes businesses in this industry scale. 
Episode Highlights

How I’ve Added Nearly 10,000 New Subscribers to My Email List in Just 6 Months [0:04:31] 

Press and Social Media Magic We Saw in 2024 [0:06:25]

The One Thing That Made Me Proudest This Year [0:08:34]

Why I’m Doubling Down on My Front-Of-Funnel [0:10:30]

Two Ways to Prioritize Growth in 2025 [0:11:25]

What I’m Going to Work Hardest on Improving [0:15:14]

My Top Predictions for the Industry’s Future [0:18:30]

What You Absolutely Have to Do to See Growth in 2025 [0:21:26]

The Thing That Your Success Actually Depends On [0:24:44]

Why You Can’t Possibly Predict Everything and That’s Okay! [0:26:16]

How Digital Product Jumpstart Builds Your Audience and Boosts Conversions [0:28:28]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This is going to sound wild, but I have not planned the year ahead for multiple years in a row now. I felt a lot of pressure to make the right decisions to set me up for the year and I got tired of feeling like I was failing! So, I just stopped setting goals. Instead, I started to take things one step at a time. But this year feels different. I wanted to use this episode to share more of my plans and my predictions for 2025.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Originally, I wasn’t planning to share my plans for the coming year. Even though it can be tough to know what to share as someone who teaches other business owners to do what I do, I’m sharing this because I know this is going to work. I want to make sure that you have these reminders in front of you. You don’t need to make radical changes to your plans. But these ideas are truly what makes businesses in this industry scale. </p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>How I’ve Added Nearly 10,000 New Subscribers to My Email List in Just 6 Months [0:04:31] </li>
<li>Press and Social Media Magic We Saw in 2024 [0:06:25]</li>
<li>The One Thing That Made Me Proudest This Year [0:08:34]</li>
<li>Why I’m Doubling Down on My Front-Of-Funnel [0:10:30]</li>
<li>Two Ways to Prioritize Growth in 2025 [0:11:25]</li>
<li>What I’m Going to Work Hardest on Improving [0:15:14]</li>
<li>My Top Predictions for the Industry’s Future [0:18:30]</li>
<li>What You Absolutely Have to Do to See Growth in 2025 [0:21:26]</li>
<li>The Thing That Your Success Actually Depends On [0:24:44]</li>
<li>Why You Can’t Possibly Predict Everything and That’s Okay! [0:26:16]</li>
<li>How Digital Product Jumpstart Builds Your Audience and Boosts Conversions [0:28:28]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2026</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[77a37c88-bbdd-11ef-a7c3-cb053ae9f7f5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE2148230042.mp3?updated=1734375142" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>909: Things You Need to Remember About 2024</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/things-you-need-to-remember-about-2024</link>
      <description>As we get ready to close out the year, it’s natural to find ourselves at an inflection point. It’s the time of the year when we think about all the things we've done, all the things we would do differently, and maybe even some things we regretted along the way.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


When I sat down to reflect on the past year, I felt a deep need to remember. To revisit lessons I’d learned before but was reminded of in new, impactful ways this year. These are lessons that aren’t just for me – they’re for all of us. Today, I’m sharing these reminders with you because I believe they can help guide your own journey. They offer a little more ease, a little more grace, and a little more peace of mind. So, as we move forward together in this crazy world, know that you’re not alone. We’re all in it together, figuring it out, one step at a time!
Episode Highlights

Less is More [0:01:26]

The Power of Pre-Selling [0:05:06]

Building an Offer Ecosystem and Customer Journey [0:07:32]

Why Focusing on One Platform Can Transform Your Visibility [0:11:09]

Remember that Selling is Serving [0:13:49]

Why AI is Critical for Long-Term Growth [0:19:19]

What Giving 100% Really Means [0:22:21]

It’s Time To Change Your Mindset [0:25:18]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 17 Dec 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Things You Need to Remember About 2024</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>909</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle> I’m sharing these reminders with you because I believe they can help guide your own journey. They offer a little more ease, a little more grace, and a little more peace of mind. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>As we get ready to close out the year, it’s natural to find ourselves at an inflection point. It’s the time of the year when we think about all the things we've done, all the things we would do differently, and maybe even some things we regretted along the way.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


When I sat down to reflect on the past year, I felt a deep need to remember. To revisit lessons I’d learned before but was reminded of in new, impactful ways this year. These are lessons that aren’t just for me – they’re for all of us. Today, I’m sharing these reminders with you because I believe they can help guide your own journey. They offer a little more ease, a little more grace, and a little more peace of mind. So, as we move forward together in this crazy world, know that you’re not alone. We’re all in it together, figuring it out, one step at a time!
Episode Highlights

Less is More [0:01:26]

The Power of Pre-Selling [0:05:06]

Building an Offer Ecosystem and Customer Journey [0:07:32]

Why Focusing on One Platform Can Transform Your Visibility [0:11:09]

Remember that Selling is Serving [0:13:49]

Why AI is Critical for Long-Term Growth [0:19:19]

What Giving 100% Really Means [0:22:21]

It’s Time To Change Your Mindset [0:25:18]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>As we get ready to close out the year, it’s natural to find ourselves at an inflection point. It’s the time of the year when we think about all the things we've done, all the things we would do differently, and maybe even some things we regretted along the way.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>When I sat down to reflect on the past year, I felt a deep need to remember. To revisit lessons I’d learned before but was reminded of in new, impactful ways this year. These are lessons that aren’t just for me – they’re for all of us. Today, I’m sharing these reminders with you because I believe they can help guide your own journey. They offer a little more ease, a little more grace, and a little more peace of mind. So, as we move forward together in this crazy world, know that you’re not alone. We’re all in it together, figuring it out, one step at a time!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Less is More [0:01:26]</li>
<li>The Power of Pre-Selling [0:05:06]</li>
<li>Building an Offer Ecosystem and Customer Journey [0:07:32]</li>
<li>Why Focusing on One Platform Can Transform Your Visibility [0:11:09]</li>
<li>Remember that Selling is Serving [0:13:49]</li>
<li>Why AI is Critical for Long-Term Growth [0:19:19]</li>
<li>What Giving 100% Really Means [0:22:21]</li>
<li>It’s Time To Change Your Mindset [0:25:18]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1957</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3922ec82-bbd8-11ef-ad4f-47ae01eb414c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6026242154.mp3?updated=1734375114" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>908: The Make-or-Break Question to Know if You’ll Succeed with Digital Products</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-make-or-break-question-to-know-if-youll-succeed-with-digital-products</link>
      <description>What if I told you that success in business does not have to cost you absolutely everything you value? Too many people believe sacrifice is the only path to success, and that belief might be exactly what’s holding you back. Today, I unpack the one question that will determine whether you’ll successfully transition to a full-time living with digital products without sacrificing your life along the way. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

The One Non-Negotiable Question You Have to Sit With [0:00:50] 

What Truly Changes When You Realize What You Don’t Have to Sacrifice [0:07:32]

Aligning with Your Values by Identifying What is Truly Important [0:09:59]

Changing Your Limiting Beliefs to Make the Mindset Shift [0:15:40]

What it Looks Like to Find Balance [0:19:39]

Why You Absolutely Have to Build a Business in Alignment with Who You Are [0:24:05]

How I Made the Move to a Product-Based Business [0:26:15]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 12 Dec 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Make-or-Break Question to Know if You’ll Succeed with Digital Products</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>908</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>This question will determine whether you’ll successfully transition to a full-time living with digital products without sacrificing your life along the way</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What if I told you that success in business does not have to cost you absolutely everything you value? Too many people believe sacrifice is the only path to success, and that belief might be exactly what’s holding you back. Today, I unpack the one question that will determine whether you’ll successfully transition to a full-time living with digital products without sacrificing your life along the way. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

The One Non-Negotiable Question You Have to Sit With [0:00:50] 

What Truly Changes When You Realize What You Don’t Have to Sacrifice [0:07:32]

Aligning with Your Values by Identifying What is Truly Important [0:09:59]

Changing Your Limiting Beliefs to Make the Mindset Shift [0:15:40]

What it Looks Like to Find Balance [0:19:39]

Why You Absolutely Have to Build a Business in Alignment with Who You Are [0:24:05]

How I Made the Move to a Product-Based Business [0:26:15]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What if I told you that success in business does not have to cost you absolutely everything you value? Too many people believe sacrifice is the only path to success, and that belief might be exactly what’s holding you back. Today, I unpack the one question that will determine whether you’ll successfully transition to a full-time living with digital products without sacrificing your life along the way. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><h3><br></h3><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>The One Non-Negotiable Question You Have to Sit With [0:00:50] </li>
<li>What Truly Changes When You Realize What You Don’t Have to Sacrifice [0:07:32]</li>
<li>Aligning with Your Values by Identifying What is Truly Important [0:09:59]</li>
<li>Changing Your Limiting Beliefs to Make the Mindset Shift [0:15:40]</li>
<li>What it Looks Like to Find Balance [0:19:39]</li>
<li>Why You Absolutely Have to Build a Business in Alignment with Who You Are [0:24:05]</li>
<li>How I Made the Move to a Product-Based Business [0:26:15]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2052</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[627b9750-b7cd-11ef-be73-5ffdf6ef2523]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE4314751119.mp3?updated=1733928734" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>907: The Funnel Strategy That Ended My Live Launch Burnout</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-funnel-strategy-that-ended-my-live-launch-burnout</link>
      <description>If there’s one thing I’ve learned in 2024, it’s the game-changing power of focusing on one well-built funnel that works. In this episode, I break down why relying solely on live launches leaves money on the table and how pairing them with automated funnels creates the ultimate revenue-driving duo. I share why live launches are the perfect testing ground for building evergreen funnels that convert, plus the strategies that make this process seamless and effective!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


You’ll also get a sneak peek into my funnel plans for 2025, including my return to paid advertising and the surprising power of strategic downsells. Whether you’re just getting started or ready to refine your systems, this episode will help you leverage the best of live launching and automated funnels for a sustainable long-term growth strategy. Ready to transform your business? Tune in now to get the full scoop!
Episode Highlights

Why You Need Both Live Launches &amp; Automated Funnels [0:00:29]

Use Your Live Launch To Build Your Funnel [0:13:43]

How to Get Leads on Autopilot [0:23:48]

My Strategy for 2025 [0:28:10]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 10 Dec 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Funnel Strategy That Ended My Live Launch Burnout</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>907</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Focusing on one well-built funnel that works is a game changer! Learn how pairing live launches with automated funnels creates the ultimate revenue-driving duo.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If there’s one thing I’ve learned in 2024, it’s the game-changing power of focusing on one well-built funnel that works. In this episode, I break down why relying solely on live launches leaves money on the table and how pairing them with automated funnels creates the ultimate revenue-driving duo. I share why live launches are the perfect testing ground for building evergreen funnels that convert, plus the strategies that make this process seamless and effective!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


You’ll also get a sneak peek into my funnel plans for 2025, including my return to paid advertising and the surprising power of strategic downsells. Whether you’re just getting started or ready to refine your systems, this episode will help you leverage the best of live launching and automated funnels for a sustainable long-term growth strategy. Ready to transform your business? Tune in now to get the full scoop!
Episode Highlights

Why You Need Both Live Launches &amp; Automated Funnels [0:00:29]

Use Your Live Launch To Build Your Funnel [0:13:43]

How to Get Leads on Autopilot [0:23:48]

My Strategy for 2025 [0:28:10]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If there’s one thing I’ve learned in 2024, it’s the game-changing power of focusing on one well-built funnel that works. In this episode, I break down why relying solely on live launches leaves money on the table and how pairing them with automated funnels creates the ultimate revenue-driving duo. I share why live launches are the perfect testing ground for building evergreen funnels that convert, plus the strategies that make this process seamless and effective!</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>You’ll also get a sneak peek into my funnel plans for 2025, including my return to paid advertising and the surprising power of strategic downsells. Whether you’re just getting started or ready to refine your systems, this episode will help you leverage the best of live launching and automated funnels for a sustainable long-term growth strategy. Ready to transform your business? Tune in now to get the full scoop!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Why You Need Both Live Launches &amp; Automated Funnels [0:00:29]</li>
<li>Use Your Live Launch To Build Your Funnel [0:13:43]</li>
<li>How to Get Leads on Autopilot [0:23:48]</li>
<li>My Strategy for 2025 [0:28:10]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2424</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4574b1ac-b63b-11ef-a823-47f456d3b7c9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE9617722582.mp3?updated=1733759508" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>906: Went Dark on Social Media? Here’s How to Rebuild Momentum and Come Back with Confidence</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/went-dark-on-social-media-rebuild-momentum-and-come-back</link>
      <description>Have you ever gone completely dark on social? Whether it was because life got away from you, you felt uninspired, or you just needed a break, I want you to know that I get it! I have been there too. The past couple of months have been crazy for me as I’ve recovered from surgery, dealt with my dad’s stroke, and moved him to assisted living. I’ve barely been showing up online. But here’s the thing: coming back doesn’t have to feel impossible, and it doesn’t mean that you have to start from scratch. When you choose to walk away for a period of time, you don’t need to feel pressure to announce your departure or even announce that you’re coming back. Most people aren’t even aware that you’ve walked away at all! 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Today, I’m sharing exactly how I would return to social media after a hiatus and how I want to see you do it so that you can show up with confidence, consistency, and authenticity! Without guilt over thinking too! Instead of worrying about what other people think of your social media habits, I want this return to be entirely focused on you and how you’re building a new routine to help you show up consistently. My goal for this episode is to see you move forward, build momentum, and help you rediscover why you were online in the first place. 
Episode Highlights

How to Enjoy the Work You’re Doing on Social Media [0:06:15] 

Making Your Content Feel Authentic [0:12:58]

Caring Versus Self-Sacrificing [0:16:03]

How to Prioritize Your Life Over Your Work [0:20:11]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 05 Dec 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Went Dark on Social Media? Here’s How to Rebuild Momentum and Come Back with Confidence</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>906</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Here's how to build a routine to show up consistently, build momentum, and rediscover why you were online in the first place. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you ever gone completely dark on social? Whether it was because life got away from you, you felt uninspired, or you just needed a break, I want you to know that I get it! I have been there too. The past couple of months have been crazy for me as I’ve recovered from surgery, dealt with my dad’s stroke, and moved him to assisted living. I’ve barely been showing up online. But here’s the thing: coming back doesn’t have to feel impossible, and it doesn’t mean that you have to start from scratch. When you choose to walk away for a period of time, you don’t need to feel pressure to announce your departure or even announce that you’re coming back. Most people aren’t even aware that you’ve walked away at all! 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Today, I’m sharing exactly how I would return to social media after a hiatus and how I want to see you do it so that you can show up with confidence, consistency, and authenticity! Without guilt over thinking too! Instead of worrying about what other people think of your social media habits, I want this return to be entirely focused on you and how you’re building a new routine to help you show up consistently. My goal for this episode is to see you move forward, build momentum, and help you rediscover why you were online in the first place. 
Episode Highlights

How to Enjoy the Work You’re Doing on Social Media [0:06:15] 

Making Your Content Feel Authentic [0:12:58]

Caring Versus Self-Sacrificing [0:16:03]

How to Prioritize Your Life Over Your Work [0:20:11]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you ever gone completely dark on social? Whether it was because life got away from you, you felt uninspired, or you just needed a break, I want you to know that I get it! I have been there too. The past couple of months have been crazy for me as I’ve recovered from surgery, dealt with my dad’s stroke, and moved him to assisted living. I’ve barely been showing up online. But here’s the thing: coming back doesn’t have to feel impossible, and it doesn’t mean that you have to start from scratch. When you choose to walk away for a period of time, you don’t need to feel pressure to announce your departure or even announce that you’re coming back. Most people aren’t even aware that you’ve walked away at all! </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Today, I’m sharing exactly how I would return to social media after a hiatus and how I want to see you do it so that you can show up with confidence, consistency, and authenticity! Without guilt over thinking too! Instead of worrying about what other people think of your social media habits, I want this return to be entirely focused on you and how you’re building a new routine to help you show up consistently. My goal for this episode is to see you move forward, build momentum, and help you rediscover why you were online in the first place. </p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>How to Enjoy the Work You’re Doing on Social Media [0:06:15] </li>
<li>Making Your Content Feel Authentic [0:12:58]</li>
<li>Caring Versus Self-Sacrificing [0:16:03]</li>
<li>How to Prioritize Your Life Over Your Work [0:20:11]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1884</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[15e59b06-b1ac-11ef-89a3-a78cb8e7ac02]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE2182980665.mp3?updated=1733254637" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>905: Under the Confident Exterior: Uncovering Hidden Struggles of High Performers with Amira Alvarez</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/under-the-confident-exterior-uncovering-hidden-struggles-of-high-performers</link>
      <description>What if achieving unstoppable success meant facing the inner struggles you’ve been avoiding? Today, I’m joined by Amira Alvarez, Founder and CEO of The Unstoppable Woman and host of The Unstoppable Woman Podcast. Known for her extraordinary achievement of increasing her income fivefold in just one year and building a multi-million-dollar company, Amira is an inspiring entrepreneur and coach dedicated to helping high-achieving women unlock even greater financial success and fulfillment.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Together, we peel back the layers of high performance, uncovering the hidden struggles ambitious women often face despite their outward success. Amira shares powerful strategies to help you acknowledge these challenges and turn them into opportunities for radical transformation. Get ready to embrace your next breakthrough!
Episode Highlights

Amira’s Journey to Unstoppable [0:01:26]

Learning to Stop Running and Start Listening [0:06:10]

How to Get Leverage Over Yourself [0:14:29]

Building an Exquisite Life [0:35:15]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 03 Dec 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Under the Confident Exterior: Uncovering Hidden Struggles of High Performers with Amira Alvarez</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>905</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Amira shares powerful strategies to help you acknowledge challenges and turn them into opportunities for radical transformation. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What if achieving unstoppable success meant facing the inner struggles you’ve been avoiding? Today, I’m joined by Amira Alvarez, Founder and CEO of The Unstoppable Woman and host of The Unstoppable Woman Podcast. Known for her extraordinary achievement of increasing her income fivefold in just one year and building a multi-million-dollar company, Amira is an inspiring entrepreneur and coach dedicated to helping high-achieving women unlock even greater financial success and fulfillment.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Together, we peel back the layers of high performance, uncovering the hidden struggles ambitious women often face despite their outward success. Amira shares powerful strategies to help you acknowledge these challenges and turn them into opportunities for radical transformation. Get ready to embrace your next breakthrough!
Episode Highlights

Amira’s Journey to Unstoppable [0:01:26]

Learning to Stop Running and Start Listening [0:06:10]

How to Get Leverage Over Yourself [0:14:29]

Building an Exquisite Life [0:35:15]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What if achieving unstoppable success meant facing the inner struggles you’ve been avoiding? Today, I’m joined by Amira Alvarez, Founder and CEO of The Unstoppable Woman and host of The Unstoppable Woman Podcast. Known for her extraordinary achievement of increasing her income fivefold in just one year and building a multi-million-dollar company, Amira is an inspiring entrepreneur and coach dedicated to helping high-achieving women unlock even greater financial success and fulfillment.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Together, we peel back the layers of high performance, uncovering the hidden struggles ambitious women often face despite their outward success. Amira shares powerful strategies to help you acknowledge these challenges and turn them into opportunities for radical transformation. Get ready to embrace your next breakthrough!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Amira’s Journey to Unstoppable [0:01:26]</li>
<li>Learning to Stop Running and Start Listening [0:06:10]</li>
<li>How to Get Leverage Over Yourself [0:14:29]</li>
<li>Building an Exquisite Life [0:35:15]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2700</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d3d8c354-a838-11ef-923a-6f060352ee94]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE3500018231.mp3?updated=1732219020" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>904: ADHD &amp; Entrepreneurship with Skye Waterson</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/adhd-and-entrepreneurship-with-skye-waterson</link>
      <description>Could your neurodivergence be the key to unlocking your entrepreneurial superpower? Today I’m joined by Skye Waterson; a former academic-turned-coach, podcast host, and founder of Unconventional Organisation. Unconventional Organisation is an international ADHD support service that provides research-backed coaching programs for late-diagnosed professionals looking to go to the next level in their career without burnout.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Skye’s journey began when she received an unexpected ADHD diagnosis during her PhD. Since then, she has dedicated her career to helping adults with ADHD manage their day-to-day lives with focus and balance through research-based strategies. In this episode, Skye shares insights into working from home as a business owner with ADHD and gives listeners practical strategies for approaching focus and productivity. Let’s dive in! 
Episode Highlights

Addressing the Challenges ADHD Poses to Business Owners [0:03:57] 

The 5-Step Focus Routine [0:08:59]

Hacks for Business Owners Juggling Lots of Tasks [0:14:47]

Tips for Setting Up an Ideal Work-from-Home Environment [0:17:39]

Creating Balance for an ADHD Brain [0:21:46]

How (and What) ‘Wins’ Can Keep You Motivated [0:25:35]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 28 Nov 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>ADHD &amp; Entrepreneurship with Skye Waterson</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>904</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Skye shares insights into working from home as a business owner with ADHD and gives listeners practical strategies for approaching focus and productivity.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Could your neurodivergence be the key to unlocking your entrepreneurial superpower? Today I’m joined by Skye Waterson; a former academic-turned-coach, podcast host, and founder of Unconventional Organisation. Unconventional Organisation is an international ADHD support service that provides research-backed coaching programs for late-diagnosed professionals looking to go to the next level in their career without burnout.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Skye’s journey began when she received an unexpected ADHD diagnosis during her PhD. Since then, she has dedicated her career to helping adults with ADHD manage their day-to-day lives with focus and balance through research-based strategies. In this episode, Skye shares insights into working from home as a business owner with ADHD and gives listeners practical strategies for approaching focus and productivity. Let’s dive in! 
Episode Highlights

Addressing the Challenges ADHD Poses to Business Owners [0:03:57] 

The 5-Step Focus Routine [0:08:59]

Hacks for Business Owners Juggling Lots of Tasks [0:14:47]

Tips for Setting Up an Ideal Work-from-Home Environment [0:17:39]

Creating Balance for an ADHD Brain [0:21:46]

How (and What) ‘Wins’ Can Keep You Motivated [0:25:35]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Could your neurodivergence be the key to unlocking your entrepreneurial superpower? Today I’m joined by Skye Waterson; a former academic-turned-coach, podcast host, and founder of Unconventional Organisation. Unconventional Organisation is an international ADHD support service that provides research-backed coaching programs for late-diagnosed professionals looking to go to the next level in their career without burnout.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Skye’s journey began when she received an unexpected ADHD diagnosis during her PhD. Since then, she has dedicated her career to helping adults with ADHD manage their day-to-day lives with focus and balance through research-based strategies. In this episode, Skye shares insights into working from home as a business owner with ADHD and gives listeners practical strategies for approaching focus and productivity. Let’s dive in! </p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Addressing the Challenges ADHD Poses to Business Owners [0:03:57] </li>
<li>The 5-Step Focus Routine [0:08:59]</li>
<li>Hacks for Business Owners Juggling Lots of Tasks [0:14:47]</li>
<li>Tips for Setting Up an Ideal Work-from-Home Environment [0:17:39]</li>
<li>Creating Balance for an ADHD Brain [0:21:46]</li>
<li>How (and What) ‘Wins’ Can Keep You Motivated [0:25:35]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><h3>Sponsors:</h3><ul>
<li>Visit <a href="https://indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR">Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR</a> for a $75 sponsored job credit.</li>
<li>Use my link<a href="https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast"> https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast</a> and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.</li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2333</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3e5a2038-a6b8-11ef-a387-9799fe841285]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5551831508.mp3?updated=1732112590" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>903: Stop Wasting Time on the WRONG Digital Products</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/stop-wasting-time-on-the-wrong-digital-products</link>
      <description>I’ve been creating digital products for more than eight years now and I’ve learned so much along the way that I’m eager to share with the world. I want to help more people and cheer you on as you find success too. Your digital product should be a tool that magnetizes strangers who are your ideal customers. And you want to actually get paid to bring in qualified leads for your offers. In this episode, I’m diving into the digital products I’d avoid if I were starting fresh—and trust me, it’s not what you’d expect.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

Avoid This Common Beginner’s Mistake [0:02:32] 

The Best Structure for Your Digital Product [0:04:22]

What Makes a Mini-Course Popular [0:09:13]

Why Choose a Low Price Instead of Offering it Free [0:12:13]

Our Longstanding, Successful Base Product [0:16:53]

Lean on the Power of Integration [0:20:03]

How to Level-Up Your Own Business [0:23:42]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 26 Nov 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Stop Wasting Time on the WRONG Digital Products</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>903</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Your digital product should be a tool that magnetizes strangers who are your ideal customers. And you want to actually get paid to bring in qualified leads for your offers.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’ve been creating digital products for more than eight years now and I’ve learned so much along the way that I’m eager to share with the world. I want to help more people and cheer you on as you find success too. Your digital product should be a tool that magnetizes strangers who are your ideal customers. And you want to actually get paid to bring in qualified leads for your offers. In this episode, I’m diving into the digital products I’d avoid if I were starting fresh—and trust me, it’s not what you’d expect.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

Avoid This Common Beginner’s Mistake [0:02:32] 

The Best Structure for Your Digital Product [0:04:22]

What Makes a Mini-Course Popular [0:09:13]

Why Choose a Low Price Instead of Offering it Free [0:12:13]

Our Longstanding, Successful Base Product [0:16:53]

Lean on the Power of Integration [0:20:03]

How to Level-Up Your Own Business [0:23:42]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’ve been creating digital products for more than eight years now and I’ve learned so much along the way that I’m eager to share with the world. I want to help more people and cheer you on as you find success too. Your digital product should be a tool that magnetizes strangers who are your ideal customers. And you want to actually get paid to bring in qualified leads for your offers. In this episode, I’m diving into the digital products I’d avoid if I were starting fresh—and trust me, it’s not what you’d expect.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Avoid This Common Beginner’s Mistake [0:02:32] </li>
<li>The Best Structure for Your Digital Product [0:04:22]</li>
<li>What Makes a Mini-Course Popular [0:09:13]</li>
<li>Why Choose a Low Price Instead of Offering it Free [0:12:13]</li>
<li>Our Longstanding, Successful Base Product [0:16:53]</li>
<li>Lean on the Power of Integration [0:20:03]</li>
<li>How to Level-Up Your Own Business [0:23:42]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1776</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c2656788-a82b-11ef-a811-377980d474ac]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6520396498.mp3?updated=1732218778" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>902: How I've Sold $3.3 Million in Digital Products &amp; Courses</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-ive-sold-3-million-in-digital-products-courses</link>
      <description>Ever wondered what it really takes to build a multimillion-dollar digital product business? In this episode, I pull back the curtain to give you a transparent look at the strategies, hard-earned lessons, and yes, even mistakes that took me from running a small marketing agency to generating over $3.3 million in digital product sales. If you're ready to get paid to build a list full of qualified leads and create scalable offers that serve your audience, this episode is for you!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


We dive into everything from understanding your audience’s needs and structuring a product ecosystem to using low-cost products as lead generators and the best way to balance live launches with evergreen strategies. Along the way, I share the importance of building a strong community, maintaining client experience, and staying resilient when things don’t go as planned. Want to find out what it takes to either pivot your service-based company into a digital product and course business or scale your current one?
Episode Highlights

From Agency to Digital Education: The Role of Community &amp; Networking [0:01:40] 

How Digital Products Offer Freedom &amp; Growth Beyond 1:1 Services [0:12:30]

Building a Product Ecosystem that Works for YOU [0:20:37]

Why Visibility &amp; Messaging Are Key to Digital Product Success [0:29:38]

The Power of Resilience &amp; Long-Term Vision [0:48:40]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:
Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.
Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 21 Nov 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How I've Sold $3.3 Million in Digital Products &amp; Courses</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>902</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>A transparent look at the strategies, hard-earned lessons, and yes, even mistakes that took me from running a small marketing agency to generating over $3.3 million in digital product sales.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Ever wondered what it really takes to build a multimillion-dollar digital product business? In this episode, I pull back the curtain to give you a transparent look at the strategies, hard-earned lessons, and yes, even mistakes that took me from running a small marketing agency to generating over $3.3 million in digital product sales. If you're ready to get paid to build a list full of qualified leads and create scalable offers that serve your audience, this episode is for you!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


We dive into everything from understanding your audience’s needs and structuring a product ecosystem to using low-cost products as lead generators and the best way to balance live launches with evergreen strategies. Along the way, I share the importance of building a strong community, maintaining client experience, and staying resilient when things don’t go as planned. Want to find out what it takes to either pivot your service-based company into a digital product and course business or scale your current one?
Episode Highlights

From Agency to Digital Education: The Role of Community &amp; Networking [0:01:40] 

How Digital Products Offer Freedom &amp; Growth Beyond 1:1 Services [0:12:30]

Building a Product Ecosystem that Works for YOU [0:20:37]

Why Visibility &amp; Messaging Are Key to Digital Product Success [0:29:38]

The Power of Resilience &amp; Long-Term Vision [0:48:40]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:
Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.
Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ever wondered what it really takes to build a multimillion-dollar digital product business? In this episode, I pull back the curtain to give you a transparent look at the strategies, hard-earned lessons, and yes, even mistakes that took me from running a small marketing agency to generating over $3.3 million in digital product sales. If you're ready to get paid to build a list full of qualified leads and create scalable offers that serve your audience, this episode is for you!</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>We dive into everything from understanding your audience’s needs and structuring a product ecosystem to using low-cost products as lead generators and the best way to balance live launches with evergreen strategies. Along the way, I share the importance of building a strong community, maintaining client experience, and staying resilient when things don’t go as planned. Want to find out what it takes to either pivot your service-based company into a digital product and course business or scale your current one?</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>From Agency to Digital Education: The Role of Community &amp; Networking [0:01:40] </li>
<li>How Digital Products Offer Freedom &amp; Growth Beyond 1:1 Services [0:12:30]</li>
<li>Building a Product Ecosystem that Works for YOU [0:20:37]</li>
<li>Why Visibility &amp; Messaging Are Key to Digital Product Success [0:29:38]</li>
<li>The Power of Resilience &amp; Long-Term Vision [0:48:40]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><h3>Sponsors:</h3><ul><li>Visit <a href="https://indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR">Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR</a> for a $75 sponsored job credit.</li></ul><p>Use my link<a href="https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast"> https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast</a> and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3749</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7231ab9e-a6b1-11ef-b0b2-8f5d083be365]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE9076084421.mp3?updated=1732112544" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>901: How to Hook Your Ideal Customer with Humor with Shelby &amp; Kristina of Take2Content</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-hook-your-ideal-customer-with-humor</link>
      <description>What if I told you that introducing humor to your online presence can attract more customers to your brand? Today, I’m joined by the hilarious founders of Take2Content, Shelby Dash and Kristina Clifford. Their business began as a passion project for making funny videos, but things really took off when brands started noticing their comedic talent and requesting custom content. After both our guests lost their day jobs during the pandemic, they seized the opportunity to pitch their unique, funny videos to companies, and it worked!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Shelby and Kristina quickly discovered that comedy isn’t just entertaining. It can be a powerful marketing tool. In this episode, they share how humor can build brand awareness, create memorable connections with your audience, and inspire other people to create funny and light-hearted content. Tune in to learn about their brainstorming process, favorite comedy tropes, and much more!
Episode Highlights

Embracing Experimentation [0:06:12] 

Finding Relatable Moments for Marketing [0:19:23]

Why Authenticity is Essential [0:31:10]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 19 Nov 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Hook Your Ideal Customer with Humor with Shelby &amp; Kristina of Take2Content</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>901</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Learn about their brainstorming process and how you can use humor to build brand awareness &amp; create memorable connections with your audience.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What if I told you that introducing humor to your online presence can attract more customers to your brand? Today, I’m joined by the hilarious founders of Take2Content, Shelby Dash and Kristina Clifford. Their business began as a passion project for making funny videos, but things really took off when brands started noticing their comedic talent and requesting custom content. After both our guests lost their day jobs during the pandemic, they seized the opportunity to pitch their unique, funny videos to companies, and it worked!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Shelby and Kristina quickly discovered that comedy isn’t just entertaining. It can be a powerful marketing tool. In this episode, they share how humor can build brand awareness, create memorable connections with your audience, and inspire other people to create funny and light-hearted content. Tune in to learn about their brainstorming process, favorite comedy tropes, and much more!
Episode Highlights

Embracing Experimentation [0:06:12] 

Finding Relatable Moments for Marketing [0:19:23]

Why Authenticity is Essential [0:31:10]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What if I told you that introducing humor to your online presence can attract more customers to your brand? Today, I’m joined by the hilarious founders of Take2Content, Shelby Dash and Kristina Clifford. Their business began as a passion project for making funny videos, but things really took off when brands started noticing their comedic talent and requesting custom content. After both our guests lost their day jobs during the pandemic, they seized the opportunity to pitch their unique, funny videos to companies, and it worked!</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Shelby and Kristina quickly discovered that comedy isn’t just entertaining. It can be a powerful marketing tool. In this episode, they share how humor can build brand awareness, create memorable connections with your audience, and inspire other people to create funny and light-hearted content. Tune in to learn about their brainstorming process, favorite comedy tropes, and much more!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Embracing Experimentation [0:06:12] </li>
<li>Finding Relatable Moments for Marketing [0:19:23]</li>
<li>Why Authenticity is Essential [0:31:10]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><h3>Sponsors:</h3><ul>
<li>Visit <a href="https://indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR">Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR</a> for a $75 sponsored job credit.</li>
<li>Use my link<a href="https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast"> https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast</a> and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.</li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2356</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3d19253a-a5a9-11ef-acb9-43f42373b2a3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE9320669433.mp3?updated=1732046805" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>900: The Mindset Reboot: Three Shifts That Changed Absolutely Everything</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-mindset-reboot-three-shifts-that-changed-absolutely-everything</link>
      <description>We all have mind junk and I want to help you work through it! In today’s episode, I’m going to share snippets of some of my favorite trainings on mindset. It is absolutely imperative to shift your mindset and this episode is a preview of what that looks like! I believe that mindset is only the first step. You’re only going to move forward if you take action and pursue the things you say you want. I want to dive into some of the specific things I’m going to be teaching so you can make use of some actionable tools to declutter your mind today! 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

Shifting to an Experimental Mindset [0:02:45] 

Busting the ‘Perfectionism’ Myth [0:05:57]

Accepting Fundamental Truths [0:11:20]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 14 Nov 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Mindset Reboot: Three Shifts That Changed Absolutely Everything</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>900</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We all have mind junk and I want to help you work through it so you can move forward and pursue the things you want!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We all have mind junk and I want to help you work through it! In today’s episode, I’m going to share snippets of some of my favorite trainings on mindset. It is absolutely imperative to shift your mindset and this episode is a preview of what that looks like! I believe that mindset is only the first step. You’re only going to move forward if you take action and pursue the things you say you want. I want to dive into some of the specific things I’m going to be teaching so you can make use of some actionable tools to declutter your mind today! 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

Shifting to an Experimental Mindset [0:02:45] 

Busting the ‘Perfectionism’ Myth [0:05:57]

Accepting Fundamental Truths [0:11:20]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We all have mind junk and I want to help you work through it! In today’s episode, I’m going to share snippets of some of my favorite trainings on mindset. It is absolutely imperative to shift your mindset and this episode is a preview of what that looks like! I believe that mindset is only the first step. You’re only going to move forward if you take action and pursue the things you say you want. I want to dive into some of the specific things I’m going to be teaching so you can make use of some actionable tools to declutter your mind today! </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><h3><br></h3><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Shifting to an Experimental Mindset [0:02:45] </li>
<li>Busting the ‘Perfectionism’ Myth [0:05:57]</li>
<li>Accepting Fundamental Truths [0:11:20]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><h3>Sponsors:</h3><ul>
<li>Visit <a href="https://indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR">Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR</a> for a $75 sponsored job credit.</li>
<li>Use my link<a href="https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast"> https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast</a> and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.</li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1791</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[779e6c4a-a1cd-11ef-803a-bbf79f380691]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1984065027.mp3?updated=1731510913" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>899: Feel in Control: How 4 Minutes Can Transform Your Emotional Health with Tera Wages</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/feel-in-control-how-4-minutes-can-transform-your-emotional-health-with-tera-wages</link>
      <description>There is an emotion behind almost everything you do, and you experience emotion all day, every day. The more you experience them without recognizing and processing them, the more they flood your brain. When your emotions fire, your thoughts fire, and that is what leads to your behavior: what you’re presenting, how you’re showing up, your confidence, how you speak, and so much more.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Today, I am joined by an inspiring entrepreneur and CEO who has spent over a decade working alongside some of the digital marketing industry’s big names! Tera Wages’ work with Connection Codes has helped her master the art of emotional regulation, which has entirely changed her life, marriage, and business. In this discussion, we are diving deep into how to understand and regulate those emotions so that we can be empowered to show up stronger in our personal lives and business. This episode helped me identify some of the things I want to work on, and I am confident that it will give you some incredible tools to do the same.
Episode Highlights

The Four-Minute Tool to Help You Regulate Your Emotions [0:08:33] 

How These Tools Can Help Business Relationships and Communication [0:17:58]

Emotional Awareness Improving Leadership and Business Growth [0:23:28]

How Identifying Your Emotions Helps with Burnout [0:32:02]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 12 Nov 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Feel in Control: How 4 Minutes Can Transform Your Emotional Health with Tera Wages</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>899</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How to understand and regulate emotions so that you can be empowered to show up stronger in your personal lives and business. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There is an emotion behind almost everything you do, and you experience emotion all day, every day. The more you experience them without recognizing and processing them, the more they flood your brain. When your emotions fire, your thoughts fire, and that is what leads to your behavior: what you’re presenting, how you’re showing up, your confidence, how you speak, and so much more.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Today, I am joined by an inspiring entrepreneur and CEO who has spent over a decade working alongside some of the digital marketing industry’s big names! Tera Wages’ work with Connection Codes has helped her master the art of emotional regulation, which has entirely changed her life, marriage, and business. In this discussion, we are diving deep into how to understand and regulate those emotions so that we can be empowered to show up stronger in our personal lives and business. This episode helped me identify some of the things I want to work on, and I am confident that it will give you some incredible tools to do the same.
Episode Highlights

The Four-Minute Tool to Help You Regulate Your Emotions [0:08:33] 

How These Tools Can Help Business Relationships and Communication [0:17:58]

Emotional Awareness Improving Leadership and Business Growth [0:23:28]

How Identifying Your Emotions Helps with Burnout [0:32:02]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There is an emotion behind almost everything you do, and you experience emotion all day, every day. The more you experience them without recognizing and processing them, the more they flood your brain. When your emotions fire, your thoughts fire, and that is what leads to your behavior: what you’re presenting, how you’re showing up, your confidence, how you speak, and so much more.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Today, I am joined by an inspiring entrepreneur and CEO who has spent over a decade working alongside some of the digital marketing industry’s big names! Tera Wages’ work with Connection Codes has helped her master the art of emotional regulation, which has entirely changed her life, marriage, and business. In this discussion, we are diving deep into how to understand and regulate those emotions so that we can be empowered to show up stronger in our personal lives and business. This episode helped me identify some of the things I want to work on, and I am confident that it will give you some incredible tools to do the same.</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>The Four-Minute Tool to Help You Regulate Your Emotions [0:08:33] </li>
<li>How These Tools Can Help Business Relationships and Communication [0:17:58]</li>
<li>Emotional Awareness Improving Leadership and Business Growth [0:23:28]</li>
<li>How Identifying Your Emotions Helps with Burnout [0:32:02]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><h3>Sponsors:</h3><ul>
<li>Visit <a href="https://indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR">Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR</a> for a $75 sponsored job credit.</li>
<li>Use my link<a href="https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast"> https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast</a> and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.</li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2960</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[274126c2-a05e-11ef-a2f8-5351f6dc3575]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1795307913.mp3?updated=1731352338" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>898: I Went All In… Now I Can Retire at 45</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/i-went-all-in-now-i-can-retire-at-45</link>
      <description>Financial freedom might sound like a lofty goal, but I’m here to tell you that it’s way more achievable than you think! In this episode, I break down how I started with next to nothing and slowly built a life that not only allowed me to plan for retirement, but also helped me create a lifestyle I could actually enjoy along the way.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I’m not sharing this story because I want to brag about my financial accomplishments. Rather, I want to give you hope for what’s possible and show you just how far you can come in such a short period. By making small, consistent changes, building a business that doesn’t rely on you being glued to your desk, and planning with intention, you CAN turn your dreams of financial freedom into reality!
Episode Highlights

From Zero to Freedom: How I Got Started with Nothing [0:00:36] 

Investing in Stability to Build a Life That Won’t Crumble [0:04:33]

Building a Sustainable, Service-based Business [0:07:16]

Why True Freedom is Freedom of Choice [0:15:22]

How Hitting a Breaking Point Can Be a Good Thing [0:18:54]

Your Roadmap to Financial Security [0:22:21]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 07 Nov 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>I Went All In… Now I Can Retire at 45</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>898</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I want to give you hope for what’s possible and show you just how far you can come in such a short period. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Financial freedom might sound like a lofty goal, but I’m here to tell you that it’s way more achievable than you think! In this episode, I break down how I started with next to nothing and slowly built a life that not only allowed me to plan for retirement, but also helped me create a lifestyle I could actually enjoy along the way.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I’m not sharing this story because I want to brag about my financial accomplishments. Rather, I want to give you hope for what’s possible and show you just how far you can come in such a short period. By making small, consistent changes, building a business that doesn’t rely on you being glued to your desk, and planning with intention, you CAN turn your dreams of financial freedom into reality!
Episode Highlights

From Zero to Freedom: How I Got Started with Nothing [0:00:36] 

Investing in Stability to Build a Life That Won’t Crumble [0:04:33]

Building a Sustainable, Service-based Business [0:07:16]

Why True Freedom is Freedom of Choice [0:15:22]

How Hitting a Breaking Point Can Be a Good Thing [0:18:54]

Your Roadmap to Financial Security [0:22:21]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Financial freedom might sound like a lofty goal, but I’m here to tell you that it’s way more achievable than you think! In this episode, I break down how I started with next to nothing and slowly built a life that not only allowed me to plan for retirement, but also helped me create a lifestyle I could actually enjoy along the way.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>I’m not sharing this story because I want to brag about my financial accomplishments. Rather, I want to give you hope for what’s possible and show you just how far you can come in such a short period. By making small, consistent changes, building a business that doesn’t rely on you being glued to your desk, and planning with intention, you CAN turn your dreams of financial freedom into reality!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>From Zero to Freedom: How I Got Started with Nothing [0:00:36] </li>
<li>Investing in Stability to Build a Life That Won’t Crumble [0:04:33]</li>
<li>Building a Sustainable, Service-based Business [0:07:16]</li>
<li>Why True Freedom is Freedom of Choice [0:15:22]</li>
<li>How Hitting a Breaking Point Can Be a Good Thing [0:18:54]</li>
<li>Your Roadmap to Financial Security [0:22:21]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><h3>Sponsors:</h3><ul>
<li>Visit <a href="https://indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR">Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR</a> for a $75 sponsored job credit.</li>
<li>Use my link<a href="https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast"> https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast</a> and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.</li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2049</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ab3aacc0-9c65-11ef-a501-83de7057a8a4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5091824909.mp3?updated=1730923144" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>897: Making a Difference and a Profit: Inside Talitha Coffee’s Mission-Driven Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/making-a-difference-and-a-profit-inside-talitha-coffees-mission-driven-business</link>
      <description>I’m so thrilled to interview two guests who are not only making waves in the coffee industry but also making a profound difference in the fight against human trafficking. Jenny Barber is the co-founder of Talitha Coffee Roasters, and her vision is to use the coffee industry as a platform to provide survivors with jobs, training, housing, healthcare, and counseling. Joining her is Mark Becklund, Vice President of Product and Growth at Talitha Coffee Roasters, who plays a key role in ensuring that every cup of coffee tastes great and contributes to the company’s true mission and goal. 
Talitha Coffee - every purchase helps support survivors of human trafficking
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

Turning a Personal Experience into a Mission-Driven Business [0:02:59] 

How to be Highly Profitable and Hugely Impactful [0:07:31]

Participating in the Story and Scale of Talitha Coffee Roasters [0:15:02]

Creating ‘Talitha’ to Center the Story of Survivors [0:27:14]

Prioritizing Your Life to Make a Difference [0:38:50]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 05 Nov 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Making a Difference and a Profit: Inside Talitha Coffee’s Mission-Driven Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>897</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Jenny's vision is to use the coffee industry as a platform to provide survivors with jobs, training, housing, healthcare, and counseling.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’m so thrilled to interview two guests who are not only making waves in the coffee industry but also making a profound difference in the fight against human trafficking. Jenny Barber is the co-founder of Talitha Coffee Roasters, and her vision is to use the coffee industry as a platform to provide survivors with jobs, training, housing, healthcare, and counseling. Joining her is Mark Becklund, Vice President of Product and Growth at Talitha Coffee Roasters, who plays a key role in ensuring that every cup of coffee tastes great and contributes to the company’s true mission and goal. 
Talitha Coffee - every purchase helps support survivors of human trafficking
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

Turning a Personal Experience into a Mission-Driven Business [0:02:59] 

How to be Highly Profitable and Hugely Impactful [0:07:31]

Participating in the Story and Scale of Talitha Coffee Roasters [0:15:02]

Creating ‘Talitha’ to Center the Story of Survivors [0:27:14]

Prioritizing Your Life to Make a Difference [0:38:50]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’m so thrilled to interview two guests who are not only making waves in the coffee industry but also making a profound difference in the fight against human trafficking. Jenny Barber is the co-founder of Talitha Coffee Roasters, and her vision is to use the coffee industry as a platform to provide survivors with jobs, training, housing, healthcare, and counseling. Joining her is Mark Becklund, Vice President of Product and Growth at Talitha Coffee Roasters, who plays a key role in ensuring that every cup of coffee tastes great and contributes to the company’s true mission and goal. </p><p><a href="https://bossproject.com/coffee">Talitha Coffee</a> - every purchase helps support survivors of human trafficking</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Turning a Personal Experience into a Mission-Driven Business [0:02:59] </li>
<li>How to be Highly Profitable and Hugely Impactful [0:07:31]</li>
<li>Participating in the Story and Scale of Talitha Coffee Roasters [0:15:02]</li>
<li>Creating ‘Talitha’ to Center the Story of Survivors [0:27:14]</li>
<li>Prioritizing Your Life to Make a Difference [0:38:50]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><h3>Sponsors:</h3><ul>
<li>Visit <a href="https://indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR">Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR</a> for a $75 sponsored job credit.</li>
<li>Use my link<a href="https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast"> https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast</a> and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.</li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3118</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2e80a126-9adf-11ef-90be-cf36391f3bad]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5009947536.mp3?updated=1730747666" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>896: Everything You Need to Know About Our Biggest Sale of the Year</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/everything-you-need-to-know-about-our-biggest-sale-of-the-year</link>
      <description>Halloween, Thanksgiving, Christmas: We are getting into the holiday season! And while I am definitely making the most of this wild time, I also want to do everything I can to go into 2025 strong. Which brings us to the topic of today’s episode. Tomorrow marks the start of our biggest sale of the year, and I want to break down exactly what you can expect from it!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Tune in to learn about the massive discounts we’ll be having for the Co-Op and our Digital Jumpstart Program, all through November until the 2nd of December. Whether you’re a total newcomer or you’ve done these programs before, there is something for everyone. You’ll also reap greater rewards if you lock in these discounts early, so the sooner you commit to this deal, the more you’ll be saving. This is so much more than just a sale; it’s your opportunity to step in 2025 with momentum and commit to your business growth for the long haul.
Episode Highlights

The Best Co-Op Deal Ever [0:10:19]

Get In On Digital Product Jumpstart [0:12:25]

Why Joining The Co-Op Is a Total Game-Changer [0:13:19]

You Don’t Need to Do It Alone [0:21:00]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:
Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.
Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 31 Oct 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Everything You Need to Know About Our Biggest Sale of the Year</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>896</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tune in to learn about the massive discounts we’ll be having for the Co-Op and our Digital Jumpstart Program, all through November until the 2nd of December.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Halloween, Thanksgiving, Christmas: We are getting into the holiday season! And while I am definitely making the most of this wild time, I also want to do everything I can to go into 2025 strong. Which brings us to the topic of today’s episode. Tomorrow marks the start of our biggest sale of the year, and I want to break down exactly what you can expect from it!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Tune in to learn about the massive discounts we’ll be having for the Co-Op and our Digital Jumpstart Program, all through November until the 2nd of December. Whether you’re a total newcomer or you’ve done these programs before, there is something for everyone. You’ll also reap greater rewards if you lock in these discounts early, so the sooner you commit to this deal, the more you’ll be saving. This is so much more than just a sale; it’s your opportunity to step in 2025 with momentum and commit to your business growth for the long haul.
Episode Highlights

The Best Co-Op Deal Ever [0:10:19]

Get In On Digital Product Jumpstart [0:12:25]

Why Joining The Co-Op Is a Total Game-Changer [0:13:19]

You Don’t Need to Do It Alone [0:21:00]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:
Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.
Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Halloween, Thanksgiving, Christmas: We are getting into the holiday season! And while I am definitely making the most of this wild time, I also want to do everything I can to go into 2025 strong. Which brings us to the topic of today’s episode. Tomorrow marks the start of our biggest sale of the year, and I want to break down exactly what you can expect from it!</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Tune in to learn about the massive discounts we’ll be having for the Co-Op and our Digital Jumpstart Program, all through November until the 2nd of December. Whether you’re a total newcomer or you’ve done these programs before, there is something for everyone. You’ll also reap greater rewards if you lock in these discounts early, so the sooner you commit to this deal, the more you’ll be saving. This is so much more than just a sale; it’s your opportunity to step in 2025 with momentum and commit to your business growth for the long haul.</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>The Best Co-Op Deal Ever [0:10:19]</li>
<li>Get In On Digital Product Jumpstart [0:12:25]</li>
<li>Why Joining The Co-Op Is a Total Game-Changer [0:13:19]</li>
<li>You Don’t Need to Do It Alone [0:21:00]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><h3>Sponsors:</h3><ul><li>Visit <a href="https://indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR">Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR</a> for a $75 sponsored job credit.</li></ul><p>Use my link<a href="https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast"> https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast</a> and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1618</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6cec0f58-96da-11ef-a623-1bd8eeb22afb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6589046727.mp3?updated=1730305860" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>895: Behind the Scenes: How CEOs Make Decisions &amp; Build Momentum In Their Businesses</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-ceos-make-decisions-build-momentum-in-their-business</link>
      <description>One of the most common questions I get is how I make high-level decisions, like what to promote and when. Today, I’m breaking that down for you. I know you’re juggling countless decisions in your business, and it can feel overwhelming. That’s why I want to talk about how you can go about these decisions in a way that aligns with who you are, what kind of business you want to build, and is supported by real data to get you results.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


It’s easy to look at successful CEOs and assume big decisions come naturally to them. But the truth is, they were once where you are now. They’ve just built up the experience to make it easier over time! Today I want to help fast-track that process for you by sharing some key considerations for making big business decisions.
Episode Highlights

How to Brainstorm a Big Decision [0:04:31] 

Why There is No “Right Choice” [0:17:25]

Building Momentum in Your Business [0:19:44]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 29 Oct 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Behind the Scenes: How CEOs Make Decisions &amp; Build Momentum In Their Businesses</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>895</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How to make decisions in a way that aligns with who you are, what kind of business you want to build, and is supported by real data to get you results.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>One of the most common questions I get is how I make high-level decisions, like what to promote and when. Today, I’m breaking that down for you. I know you’re juggling countless decisions in your business, and it can feel overwhelming. That’s why I want to talk about how you can go about these decisions in a way that aligns with who you are, what kind of business you want to build, and is supported by real data to get you results.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


It’s easy to look at successful CEOs and assume big decisions come naturally to them. But the truth is, they were once where you are now. They’ve just built up the experience to make it easier over time! Today I want to help fast-track that process for you by sharing some key considerations for making big business decisions.
Episode Highlights

How to Brainstorm a Big Decision [0:04:31] 

Why There is No “Right Choice” [0:17:25]

Building Momentum in Your Business [0:19:44]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>One of the most common questions I get is how I make high-level decisions, like what to promote and when. Today, I’m breaking that down for you. I know you’re juggling countless decisions in your business, and it can feel overwhelming. That’s why I want to talk about how you can go about these decisions in a way that aligns with who you are, what kind of business you want to build, and is supported by real data to get you results.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>It’s easy to look at successful CEOs and assume big decisions come naturally to them. But the truth is, they were once where you are now. They’ve just built up the experience to make it easier over time! Today I want to help fast-track that process for you by sharing some key considerations for making big business decisions.</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>How to Brainstorm a Big Decision [0:04:31] </li>
<li>Why There is No “Right Choice” [0:17:25]</li>
<li>Building Momentum in Your Business [0:19:44]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><h3>Sponsors:</h3><ul>
<li>Visit <a href="https://indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR">Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR</a> for a $75 sponsored job credit.</li>
<li>Use my link<a href="https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast"> https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast</a> and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.</li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1652</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[06a415f2-9544-11ef-b430-e343507a8d08]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE8679830882.mp3?updated=1730131760" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>894: The Hidden Patterns of Self-Sabotage Keeping You Stuck (And How to Break Them) with David Neagle</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-hidden-patterns-of-self-sabotage-keeping-you-stuck-with-david-neagle</link>
      <description>What if the biggest obstacles to your success are all in your head? In this episode, I dive into the hidden patterns of self-sabotage that could be keeping you stuck with David Neagle; speaker, bestselling author, host of The Successful Mind Podcast, and founder of Life Is Now Inc. With over two decades of experience in personal and professional development (including working alongside Bob Proctor and Tony Robbins!) David shares his transformative journey from working dead-end jobs to becoming a successful entrepreneur, uncovering the mindset shifts that propelled him forward along the way.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


David’s insights into how our subconscious beliefs shape our reality and hold us back from reaching our potential are truly eye-opening. As someone who claims to be very self-aware, I was blown away by this conversation! If you want to learn how to recognize these patterns in your own life and break free from limiting beliefs, this is the episode for you. Whether you’re feeling stuck in your career, business, or personal life, stay tuned for practical tools to help you shift your mindset, take control, and start living the life YOU want!
Episode Highlights

The Role of Subconscious Programming in Self-Sabotage. [0:01:44] 

Breaking the Cycle of Limiting Beliefs. [0:06:35]

The Impact of Attitude on Personal Success. [0:09:50]

Confronting and Conquering Your Sabotage Pattern. [0:14:35]

Consciously Creating a Life of Desire and Purpose. [0:18:03]

Embracing the Vulnerability that Comes with Success. [0:32:18]


You Were Born To Be A Success
David has prepared a complimentary download for you where he breaks down the #1 truth that will help you eliminate doubt and self-sabotage. He even shares an exercise on page 8 that’s designed to help anyone get really clear on what they want and pinpoint and remove their blocks currently getting in the way. You can grab it right here. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.

Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 24 Oct 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Hidden Patterns of Self-Sabotage Keeping You Stuck (And How to Break Them) with David Neagle</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>894</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>David’s insights into how our subconscious beliefs shape our reality and hold us back from reaching our potential are truly eye-opening.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What if the biggest obstacles to your success are all in your head? In this episode, I dive into the hidden patterns of self-sabotage that could be keeping you stuck with David Neagle; speaker, bestselling author, host of The Successful Mind Podcast, and founder of Life Is Now Inc. With over two decades of experience in personal and professional development (including working alongside Bob Proctor and Tony Robbins!) David shares his transformative journey from working dead-end jobs to becoming a successful entrepreneur, uncovering the mindset shifts that propelled him forward along the way.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


David’s insights into how our subconscious beliefs shape our reality and hold us back from reaching our potential are truly eye-opening. As someone who claims to be very self-aware, I was blown away by this conversation! If you want to learn how to recognize these patterns in your own life and break free from limiting beliefs, this is the episode for you. Whether you’re feeling stuck in your career, business, or personal life, stay tuned for practical tools to help you shift your mindset, take control, and start living the life YOU want!
Episode Highlights

The Role of Subconscious Programming in Self-Sabotage. [0:01:44] 

Breaking the Cycle of Limiting Beliefs. [0:06:35]

The Impact of Attitude on Personal Success. [0:09:50]

Confronting and Conquering Your Sabotage Pattern. [0:14:35]

Consciously Creating a Life of Desire and Purpose. [0:18:03]

Embracing the Vulnerability that Comes with Success. [0:32:18]


You Were Born To Be A Success
David has prepared a complimentary download for you where he breaks down the #1 truth that will help you eliminate doubt and self-sabotage. He even shares an exercise on page 8 that’s designed to help anyone get really clear on what they want and pinpoint and remove their blocks currently getting in the way. You can grab it right here. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.

Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What if the biggest obstacles to your success are all in your head? In this episode, I dive into the hidden patterns of self-sabotage that could be keeping you stuck with David Neagle; speaker, bestselling author, host of The Successful Mind Podcast, and founder of Life Is Now Inc. With over two decades of experience in personal and professional development (including working alongside Bob Proctor and Tony Robbins!) David shares his transformative journey from working dead-end jobs to becoming a successful entrepreneur, uncovering the mindset shifts that propelled him forward along the way.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>David’s insights into how our subconscious beliefs shape our reality and hold us back from reaching our potential are truly eye-opening. As someone who claims to be very self-aware, I was blown away by this conversation! If you want to learn how to recognize these patterns in your own life and break free from limiting beliefs, this is the episode for you. Whether you’re feeling stuck in your career, business, or personal life, stay tuned for practical tools to help you shift your mindset, take control, and start living the life YOU want!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>The Role of Subconscious Programming in Self-Sabotage. [0:01:44] </li>
<li>Breaking the Cycle of Limiting Beliefs. [0:06:35]</li>
<li>The Impact of Attitude on Personal Success. [0:09:50]</li>
<li>Confronting and Conquering Your Sabotage Pattern. [0:14:35]</li>
<li>Consciously Creating a Life of Desire and Purpose. [0:18:03]</li>
<li>Embracing the Vulnerability that Comes with Success. [0:32:18]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><h3>You Were Born To Be A Success</h3><p>David has prepared a complimentary download for you where he breaks down the #1 truth that will help you eliminate doubt and self-sabotage. He even shares an exercise on page 8 that’s designed to help anyone get really clear on what they want and pinpoint and remove their blocks currently getting in the way. You can grab it right <a href="https://t.yesware.com/tt/ff82e063f02a3bd26ed11178505184ffbba22641/bf78cd19633b5531bb6716fe5cf3d502/bc577d7dd77ea7a27202bc5858227558/www.lifeisnowinc.com/pg-strategyhour">here</a>. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><h3><br></h3><h3>Sponsors:</h3><ul>
<li>Visit <a href="https://indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR">Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR</a> for a $75 sponsored job credit.</li>
<li>Use my link<a href="https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast"> https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast</a> and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.</li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2590</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d0a9fdbc-9157-11ef-907d-f7d7ca17ddcd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1703399455.mp3?updated=1729700366" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>893: Inside Scoop: My Holiday Promotions &amp; How You Can Get the Best Deals</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/inside-scoop-my-holiday-promotions</link>
      <description>There’s so much going on this time of year that it can slip by quickly, and I don’t want you to miss out on the BIG things I’ve planned for this holiday season. This has happened to me before. I had the best intentions to check in on some of my favorite creators to see what they had to offer during the holiday season., but then I got busy and missed out. There’s no going back in time, so I want you to know what’s coming this year and feel prepared to plan for it! I want to give you as much of a heads-up as possible. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

How the Co-Op Has Evolved and Why Boss Project is My Life’s Mission [0:01:48] 

The Thousand-Foot View of How I Look at Business [0:05:48]

Your Chance to Get the Best Deal Ever on the Co-Op [0:07:30]

Even More Tools You’ll Get When You Join the Co-Op [0:11:06]

The Tip of the Iceberg: Access to the Entire Template Shop [0:14:51]

Value-based Pricing and a Preview of What My Amazing Affiliate Partners Are Doing [0:20:17]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 22 Oct 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Inside Scoop: My Holiday Promotions &amp; How You Can Get the Best Deals</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>893</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>There’s so much going on this time of year that it can slip by quickly, and I don’t want you to miss out on the BIG things I’ve planned for this holiday season.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There’s so much going on this time of year that it can slip by quickly, and I don’t want you to miss out on the BIG things I’ve planned for this holiday season. This has happened to me before. I had the best intentions to check in on some of my favorite creators to see what they had to offer during the holiday season., but then I got busy and missed out. There’s no going back in time, so I want you to know what’s coming this year and feel prepared to plan for it! I want to give you as much of a heads-up as possible. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

How the Co-Op Has Evolved and Why Boss Project is My Life’s Mission [0:01:48] 

The Thousand-Foot View of How I Look at Business [0:05:48]

Your Chance to Get the Best Deal Ever on the Co-Op [0:07:30]

Even More Tools You’ll Get When You Join the Co-Op [0:11:06]

The Tip of the Iceberg: Access to the Entire Template Shop [0:14:51]

Value-based Pricing and a Preview of What My Amazing Affiliate Partners Are Doing [0:20:17]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There’s so much going on this time of year that it can slip by quickly, and I don’t want you to miss out on the BIG things I’ve planned for this holiday season. This has happened to me before. I had the best intentions to check in on some of my favorite creators to see what they had to offer during the holiday season., but then I got busy and missed out. There’s no going back in time, so I want you to know what’s coming this year and feel prepared to plan for it! I want to give you as much of a heads-up as possible. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><h3><br></h3><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>How the Co-Op Has Evolved and Why Boss Project is My Life’s Mission [0:01:48] </li>
<li>The Thousand-Foot View of How I Look at Business [0:05:48]</li>
<li>Your Chance to Get the Best Deal Ever on the Co-Op [0:07:30]</li>
<li>Even More Tools You’ll Get When You Join the Co-Op [0:11:06]</li>
<li>The Tip of the Iceberg: Access to the Entire Template Shop [0:14:51]</li>
<li>Value-based Pricing and a Preview of What My Amazing Affiliate Partners Are Doing [0:20:17]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><h3>Sponsors:</h3><ul>
<li>Visit <a href="https://indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR">Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR</a> for a $75 sponsored job credit.</li>
<li>Use my link<a href="https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast"> https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast</a> and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.</li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1711</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a145c03e-8fc1-11ef-a020-8321489c8798]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5185484401.mp3?updated=1729526960" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>892: Black Friday Success Blueprint: How to Plan Your Next Holiday Promotion</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/black-friday-success-blueprint</link>
      <description>Holiday season is fast approaching and if you aren’t ready to take advantage of the holiday push or Black Friday, you’re leaving money on the table! Stores are starting their holiday pushes sooner than ever before and sales that used to last a couple of days are now lasting weeks or even months. This can be incredibly overwhelming for small business owners because it makes you worry about how much you have to do holiday promotion-wise. I have seen what happens when you ignore the holiday sales and it’s not good. I truly think it’s possible to strike a balance between family time and taking advantage of a time when people are spending more money. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


There are so many things that you could do and I would like to give you actionable tips today to help you during this time! If you want more of a step-by-step solution, I’ve created an entire Black Friday Holiday Prep Mini-Course so be sure to check it out!

Episode Highlights

Why is Leveraging Holiday Promotions Important? [0:03:40] 

The Offer Versus the Promotion [0:08:05]

How to Structure Your Marketing Schedule [0:18:41]

The One Tip You Need to Maximize Your Visibility [0:26:09]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.

Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 17 Oct 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Black Friday Success Blueprint: How to Plan Your Next Holiday Promotion</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>892</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Holiday season is fast approaching and if you aren’t ready to take advantage of the holiday push or Black Friday, you’re leaving money on the table!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Holiday season is fast approaching and if you aren’t ready to take advantage of the holiday push or Black Friday, you’re leaving money on the table! Stores are starting their holiday pushes sooner than ever before and sales that used to last a couple of days are now lasting weeks or even months. This can be incredibly overwhelming for small business owners because it makes you worry about how much you have to do holiday promotion-wise. I have seen what happens when you ignore the holiday sales and it’s not good. I truly think it’s possible to strike a balance between family time and taking advantage of a time when people are spending more money. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


There are so many things that you could do and I would like to give you actionable tips today to help you during this time! If you want more of a step-by-step solution, I’ve created an entire Black Friday Holiday Prep Mini-Course so be sure to check it out!

Episode Highlights

Why is Leveraging Holiday Promotions Important? [0:03:40] 

The Offer Versus the Promotion [0:08:05]

How to Structure Your Marketing Schedule [0:18:41]

The One Tip You Need to Maximize Your Visibility [0:26:09]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.

Sponsors:

Visit Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR for a $75 sponsored job credit.

Use my link https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Holiday season is fast approaching and if you aren’t ready to take advantage of the holiday push or Black Friday, you’re leaving money on the table! Stores are starting their holiday pushes sooner than ever before and sales that used to last a couple of days are now lasting weeks or even months. This can be incredibly overwhelming for small business owners because it makes you worry about how much you have to do holiday promotion-wise. I have seen what happens when you ignore the holiday sales and it’s not good. I truly think it’s possible to strike a balance between family time and taking advantage of a time when people are spending more money. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>There are so many things that you could do and I would like to give you actionable tips today to help you during this time! If you want more of a step-by-step solution, I’ve created an entire <a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/shop/p/black-friday-holiday-prep-mini-course">Black Friday Holiday Prep Mini-Course</a> so be sure to check it out!</p><p><br></p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Why is Leveraging Holiday Promotions Important? [0:03:40] </li>
<li>The Offer Versus the Promotion [0:08:05]</li>
<li>How to Structure Your Marketing Schedule [0:18:41]</li>
<li>The One Tip You Need to Maximize Your Visibility [0:26:09]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><h3><br></h3><h3>Sponsors:</h3><ul>
<li>Visit <a href="https://indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR">Indeed.com/STRATEGYHOUR</a> for a $75 sponsored job credit.</li>
<li>Use my link<a href="https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast"> </a><a href="https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast">https://porkbun.com/StrategyHourPodcast</a> and code STARTACHAT to get a .chat domain for less than $2 for the first year at Porkbun.</li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2020</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[922dac48-8be7-11ef-8c2e-cb8c281a812e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6457464439.mp3?updated=1729517180" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>891: Going Back to Work After Chaos: Returning to Business as Usual</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/going-back-to-work-after-chaos-returning-to-business-as-usual</link>
      <description>If you are ever torn between life and business, you do not need permission to choose YOU! When you build your business with intention, it will work for you, even when life surprises you. It’s more than okay to prioritize yourself over your business with zero guilt. A few months ago, I got a call saying that my dad had a stroke. The following weeks unfolded so dramatically as his condition went from bad to worse. It became very clear that this wasn’t just a typical stroke. Eventually, we found out he has a very rare autoimmune disease that caused him to require around-the-clock care all of a sudden. I was simply not prepared for this. Keep in mind, during all of this, my business still had to keep running.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

Why September Was My Best Financial Month of 2024. [0:10:49] 

Building a Business That Works for You! [0:12:11]

How to “Go Back to Normal” After Life’s Chaos. [0:15:11]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 15 Oct 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Going Back to Work After Chaos: Returning to Business as Usual</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>891</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you are ever torn between life and business, you do not need permission to choose YOU! When you build your business with intention, it will work for you, even when life surprises you.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you are ever torn between life and business, you do not need permission to choose YOU! When you build your business with intention, it will work for you, even when life surprises you. It’s more than okay to prioritize yourself over your business with zero guilt. A few months ago, I got a call saying that my dad had a stroke. The following weeks unfolded so dramatically as his condition went from bad to worse. It became very clear that this wasn’t just a typical stroke. Eventually, we found out he has a very rare autoimmune disease that caused him to require around-the-clock care all of a sudden. I was simply not prepared for this. Keep in mind, during all of this, my business still had to keep running.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

Why September Was My Best Financial Month of 2024. [0:10:49] 

Building a Business That Works for You! [0:12:11]

How to “Go Back to Normal” After Life’s Chaos. [0:15:11]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you are ever torn between life and business, you do not need permission to choose YOU! When you build your business with intention, it will work for you, even when life surprises you. It’s more than okay to prioritize yourself over your business with zero guilt. A few months ago, I got a call saying that my dad had a stroke. The following weeks unfolded so dramatically as his condition went from bad to worse. It became very clear that this wasn’t just a typical stroke. Eventually, we found out he has a very rare autoimmune disease that caused him to require around-the-clock care all of a sudden. I was simply not prepared for this. Keep in mind, during all of this, my business still had to keep running.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><h3><br></h3><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Why September Was My Best Financial Month of 2024. [0:10:49] </li>
<li>Building a Business That Works for You! [0:12:11]</li>
<li>How to “Go Back to Normal” After Life’s Chaos. [0:15:11]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1595</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[bd6cfa26-8a4d-11ef-8bd4-3bc6b280f77e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5183574780.mp3?updated=1728926010" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>890: Leveraging Digital Products to Get PAID to Bring In Hot Leads</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/leveraging-digital-products-to-get-paid-to-bring-in-hot-leads</link>
      <description>Believe it or not, the profit from your first sale isn’t the key to your business’s long-term success. In fact, if you’re getting paid at all to bring in qualified leads, you’re already ahead of most people selling products and services online. If you’re looking for more leads or want to sell and leverage digital products without getting lost in flashy marketing tactics, this is the perfect episode for you! You’ll learn how to attract leads and get paid at the same time.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!

Episode Highlights

Why Your Initial Sale's Profit Isn’t Everything [0:11:28] 

Attract the Right Audience with Digital Products [0:15:01]

Build Your List Strategically Without Freebies [0:21:20]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 10 Oct 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Leveraging Digital Products to Get PAID to Bring In Hot Leads</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>890</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle> If you’re looking for more leads or want to sell and leverage digital products without getting lost in flashy marketing tactics, this is the perfect episode for you! You’ll learn how to attract leads and get paid at the same time.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Believe it or not, the profit from your first sale isn’t the key to your business’s long-term success. In fact, if you’re getting paid at all to bring in qualified leads, you’re already ahead of most people selling products and services online. If you’re looking for more leads or want to sell and leverage digital products without getting lost in flashy marketing tactics, this is the perfect episode for you! You’ll learn how to attract leads and get paid at the same time.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!

Episode Highlights

Why Your Initial Sale's Profit Isn’t Everything [0:11:28] 

Attract the Right Audience with Digital Products [0:15:01]

Build Your List Strategically Without Freebies [0:21:20]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Believe it or not, the profit from your first sale isn’t the key to your business’s long-term success. In fact, if you’re getting paid at all to bring in qualified leads, you’re already ahead of most people selling products and services online. If you’re looking for more leads or want to sell and leverage digital products without getting lost in flashy marketing tactics, this is the perfect episode for you! You’ll learn how to attract leads and get paid at the same time.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Why Your Initial Sale's Profit Isn’t Everything [0:11:28] </li>
<li>Attract the Right Audience with Digital Products [0:15:01]</li>
<li>Build Your List Strategically Without Freebies [0:21:20]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1176</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[64d11b6a-8654-11ef-ad5c-3facb5decf31]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE3434056822.mp3?updated=1728489244" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>889: How to Generate $1k in Sales BEFORE You Build Your Next Digital Product</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-generate-1k-in-sales-before-you-build-your-next-digital-product</link>
      <description>Running a pre-sale is the perfect tool if you want to sell more digital products and courses. On today’s podcast, we’re talking about what pre-sales are and how your business can benefit from them. Tune in to learn some simple strategies to help you get started generating sales before building your next digital product!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

A Win-Win for You and Your Customers [0:03:45]

Start With a Simple Strategy [0:16:16]

How to Plan Your Pricing [0:23:16]

Create Something That’s Easy to Implement [0:27:53]

Take Action Toward Your Plan Today [0:32:30]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 08 Oct 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Generate $1k in Sales BEFORE You Build Your Next Digital Product</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>889</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tune in to learn some simple strategies to help you get started generating sales before building your next digital product!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Running a pre-sale is the perfect tool if you want to sell more digital products and courses. On today’s podcast, we’re talking about what pre-sales are and how your business can benefit from them. Tune in to learn some simple strategies to help you get started generating sales before building your next digital product!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

A Win-Win for You and Your Customers [0:03:45]

Start With a Simple Strategy [0:16:16]

How to Plan Your Pricing [0:23:16]

Create Something That’s Easy to Implement [0:27:53]

Take Action Toward Your Plan Today [0:32:30]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Running a pre-sale is the perfect tool if you want to sell more digital products and courses. On today’s podcast, we’re talking about what pre-sales are and how your business can benefit from them. Tune in to learn some simple strategies to help you get started generating sales before building your next digital product!</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><h3><br></h3><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>A Win-Win for You and Your Customers [0:03:45]</li>
<li>Start With a Simple Strategy [0:16:16]</li>
<li>How to Plan Your Pricing [0:23:16]</li>
<li>Create Something That’s Easy to Implement [0:27:53]</li>
<li>Take Action Toward Your Plan Today [0:32:30]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2236</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[061f4b1e-84dd-11ef-8f74-fbc15882d8fb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE3965375833.mp3?updated=1728327834" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>888: The Best Thing You’ve Done For Your Online Business Maybe Ever</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/best-thing-youve-done-for-your-online-business-maybe-ever</link>
      <description>I taught a live workshop recently that was so packed with valuable info that I wanted to make sure more people had access to it. Today’s podcast is the audio version of The Market Shift workshop. I want you to become more successful, so I’m sharing the exact methods I used to build the foundations of my business! ​
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I'm about to walk you through the current landscape of online businesses, show you the quickest path to success, and how to strategically layer in multiple income streams to boost your revenue. I’m revealing the insider tips that lead to more predictable income and scalable growth, no matter where you're starting from.
Tune in to learn:

THE ecosystem that represents online businesses today

How to create more predictable income and sustainably scale—regardless of where you’re starting today

The AI secrets top entrepreneurs use to stay ahead, boost productivity, and secure their future

The equation that’s making wealthy people wealthier (so you can steal, copy &amp; paste it)


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 03 Oct 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Best Thing You’ve Done For Your Online Business Maybe Ever</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>888</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I'm about to walk you through the current landscape of online businesses, show you the quickest path to success, and how to strategically layer in multiple income streams to boost your revenue.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I taught a live workshop recently that was so packed with valuable info that I wanted to make sure more people had access to it. Today’s podcast is the audio version of The Market Shift workshop. I want you to become more successful, so I’m sharing the exact methods I used to build the foundations of my business! ​
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I'm about to walk you through the current landscape of online businesses, show you the quickest path to success, and how to strategically layer in multiple income streams to boost your revenue. I’m revealing the insider tips that lead to more predictable income and scalable growth, no matter where you're starting from.
Tune in to learn:

THE ecosystem that represents online businesses today

How to create more predictable income and sustainably scale—regardless of where you’re starting today

The AI secrets top entrepreneurs use to stay ahead, boost productivity, and secure their future

The equation that’s making wealthy people wealthier (so you can steal, copy &amp; paste it)


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I taught a live workshop recently that was so packed with valuable info that I wanted to make sure more people had access to it. Today’s podcast is the audio version of The Market Shift workshop. I want you to become more successful, so I’m sharing the exact methods I used to build the foundations of my business! ​</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>I'm about to walk you through the current landscape of online businesses, show you the quickest path to success, and how to strategically layer in multiple income streams to boost your revenue. I’m revealing the insider tips that lead to more predictable income and scalable growth, no matter where you're starting from.</p><h3>Tune in to learn:</h3><ul>
<li>THE ecosystem that represents online businesses today</li>
<li>How to create more predictable income and sustainably scale—regardless of where you’re starting today</li>
<li>The AI secrets top entrepreneurs use to stay ahead, boost productivity, and secure their future</li>
<li>The equation that’s making wealthy people wealthier (so you can steal, copy &amp; paste it)</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3329</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cf6d3684-8028-11ef-b855-db8cbd266d49]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6875704908.mp3?updated=1727810674" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>887: The 9-5 Exit Strategy: How I Left &amp; What I'd Do Differently</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-9-5-exit-strategy-how-i-left-what-id-do-differently</link>
      <description>Leaving corporate for good and starting your own business can be a daunting task. However, with strategic preparation, you can do it without feeling totally overwhelmed. In today’s episode, I’m sharing the story of my transition from corporate to starting my own business in 2015, and how I would go about doing it all over again today.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


In 2015, the online world was a completely different place, and launching your own business came with many more challenges than it does now. Over the years, technology has advanced, making it easier than ever to make money online and streamline your operations. While these tools have made entrepreneurship more accessible, they’ve also made it harder to stand out. Join me as I share my journey, the lessons I've picked up, and my advice for anyone ready to leave the corporate world and start their own business today!
Episode Highlights

My Career After College [0:00:42] 

Corporate Challenges and Frustrations [0:06:32]

The Benefits I Gained From Corporate [0:11:41] 

The Differences Between 2015 and Now [0:14:10] 

Here’s How it Went Down [0:17:05] 

How I’d Do it Again in Today’s World [0:28:59]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 Oct 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The 9-5 Exit Strategy: How I Left &amp; What I'd Do Differently</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>887</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me as I share my journey, the lessons I've picked up, and my advice for anyone ready to leave the corporate world and start their own business today!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Leaving corporate for good and starting your own business can be a daunting task. However, with strategic preparation, you can do it without feeling totally overwhelmed. In today’s episode, I’m sharing the story of my transition from corporate to starting my own business in 2015, and how I would go about doing it all over again today.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


In 2015, the online world was a completely different place, and launching your own business came with many more challenges than it does now. Over the years, technology has advanced, making it easier than ever to make money online and streamline your operations. While these tools have made entrepreneurship more accessible, they’ve also made it harder to stand out. Join me as I share my journey, the lessons I've picked up, and my advice for anyone ready to leave the corporate world and start their own business today!
Episode Highlights

My Career After College [0:00:42] 

Corporate Challenges and Frustrations [0:06:32]

The Benefits I Gained From Corporate [0:11:41] 

The Differences Between 2015 and Now [0:14:10] 

Here’s How it Went Down [0:17:05] 

How I’d Do it Again in Today’s World [0:28:59]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Leaving corporate for good and starting your own business can be a daunting task. However, with strategic preparation, you can do it without feeling totally overwhelmed. In today’s episode, I’m sharing the story of my transition from corporate to starting my own business in 2015, and how I would go about doing it all over again today.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>In 2015, the online world was a completely different place, and launching your own business came with many more challenges than it does now. Over the years, technology has advanced, making it easier than ever to make money online and streamline your operations. While these tools have made entrepreneurship more accessible, they’ve also made it harder to stand out. Join me as I share my journey, the lessons I've picked up, and my advice for anyone ready to leave the corporate world and start their own business today!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>My Career After College [0:00:42] </li>
<li>Corporate Challenges and Frustrations [0:06:32]</li>
<li>The Benefits I Gained From Corporate [0:11:41] </li>
<li>The Differences Between 2015 and Now [0:14:10] </li>
<li>Here’s How it Went Down [0:17:05] </li>
<li>How I’d Do it Again in Today’s World [0:28:59]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2511</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c678c8ac-7f58-11ef-92be-43b9187cf161]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE7568938821.mp3?updated=1727721368" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>886: Just Launched Your First Digital Product: What Next?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/just-launched-your-first-digital-product-what-next</link>
      <description>The feeling never gets old: it makes me so happy when our clients post in our community and tell me that they’ve launched their very first digital product! I want to make sure that you get the most out of all the time, work, and energy that you put into your offer. Ultimately, it’s only going to perform if you have access to the people who are going to be the most interested in what you have to offer. So, in today’s episode, I want to talk a little bit about what comes next.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

Your First Order of Business: Celebrate! [0:02:10] 

How to Actually Get Traffic to Your Offers [0:04:11]

Finding the Right Channels to Get Organic Reach [0:08:24]

Take a Break from the Content Hamster Wheel [0:11:32]

Two Things to Keep in Mind When You’re Building Awareness [0:15:42]

How to Make it All Easier Than Ever Before [0:20:10]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Sep 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Just Launched Your First Digital Product: What Next?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>886</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Here's how to get the most out of all the time, work, and energy that you put into your digital product offer. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>The feeling never gets old: it makes me so happy when our clients post in our community and tell me that they’ve launched their very first digital product! I want to make sure that you get the most out of all the time, work, and energy that you put into your offer. Ultimately, it’s only going to perform if you have access to the people who are going to be the most interested in what you have to offer. So, in today’s episode, I want to talk a little bit about what comes next.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

Your First Order of Business: Celebrate! [0:02:10] 

How to Actually Get Traffic to Your Offers [0:04:11]

Finding the Right Channels to Get Organic Reach [0:08:24]

Take a Break from the Content Hamster Wheel [0:11:32]

Two Things to Keep in Mind When You’re Building Awareness [0:15:42]

How to Make it All Easier Than Ever Before [0:20:10]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The feeling never gets old: it makes me so happy when our clients post in our community and tell me that they’ve launched their very first digital product! I want to make sure that you get the most out of all the time, work, and energy that you put into your offer. Ultimately, it’s only going to perform if you have access to the people who are going to be the most interested in what you have to offer. So, in today’s episode, I want to talk a little bit about what comes next.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><h3><br></h3><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Your First Order of Business: Celebrate! [0:02:10] </li>
<li>How to Actually Get Traffic to Your Offers [0:04:11]</li>
<li>Finding the Right Channels to Get Organic Reach [0:08:24]</li>
<li>Take a Break from the Content Hamster Wheel [0:11:32]</li>
<li>Two Things to Keep in Mind When You’re Building Awareness [0:15:42]</li>
<li>How to Make it All Easier Than Ever Before [0:20:10]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1610</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1e8b346e-7b65-11ef-95ad-c388c311def5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE8359270519.mp3?updated=1727287235" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>885: Why Starting with Services is the FASTEST Way to Leave Your 9-5 with Abbey Ashley</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-starting-with-services-is-the-fastest-way-to-leave-your-9-5-with-abbey-ashley</link>
      <description>Today on the Strategy Hour Podcast, Abbey Ashley joins me again to discuss how to leave your nine-to-five as quickly as possible. In this conversation, she is going to share how you can start selling services and grow your business fast so that you can replace the income from your job with it. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


In 2015, Abbey was pregnant with her second child and drowning in financial responsibility. After trying all sorts of businesses, she realized how many business owners need help and decided to try to make a business out of helping them. She started her own virtual assistant business, grew it quickly, and replaced her full-time income. Now she has trained thousands of people on how to do the same and she has a community of over 130 000 virtual assistants that she coaches and mentors along the way. 
Episode Highlights

How to Make the Transition from Working 9-5 to Selling Services [0:07:58] 

Just Get Yourself Out There [0:15:05]

How to Secure Your First Few Clients [0:22:16]

When to Start Building Your Audience [0:33:12]

Knowing When to Leave Your 9-5 and Prioritize Your Business Full-Time [0:38:57]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 24 Sep 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why Starting with Services is the FASTEST Way to Leave Your 9-5 with Abbey Ashley</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>885</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Learn how you can start selling services and grow your business fast so that you can replace the income from your job with it!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the Strategy Hour Podcast, Abbey Ashley joins me again to discuss how to leave your nine-to-five as quickly as possible. In this conversation, she is going to share how you can start selling services and grow your business fast so that you can replace the income from your job with it. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


In 2015, Abbey was pregnant with her second child and drowning in financial responsibility. After trying all sorts of businesses, she realized how many business owners need help and decided to try to make a business out of helping them. She started her own virtual assistant business, grew it quickly, and replaced her full-time income. Now she has trained thousands of people on how to do the same and she has a community of over 130 000 virtual assistants that she coaches and mentors along the way. 
Episode Highlights

How to Make the Transition from Working 9-5 to Selling Services [0:07:58] 

Just Get Yourself Out There [0:15:05]

How to Secure Your First Few Clients [0:22:16]

When to Start Building Your Audience [0:33:12]

Knowing When to Leave Your 9-5 and Prioritize Your Business Full-Time [0:38:57]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the Strategy Hour Podcast, Abbey Ashley joins me again to discuss how to leave your nine-to-five as quickly as possible. In this conversation, she is going to share how you can start selling services and grow your business fast so that you can replace the income from your job with it. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>In 2015, Abbey was pregnant with her second child and drowning in financial responsibility. After trying all sorts of businesses, she realized how many business owners need help and decided to try to make a business out of helping them. She started her own virtual assistant business, grew it quickly, and replaced her full-time income. Now she has trained thousands of people on how to do the same and she has a community of over 130 000 virtual assistants that she coaches and mentors along the way. </p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>How to Make the Transition from Working 9-5 to Selling Services [0:07:58] </li>
<li>Just Get Yourself Out There [0:15:05]</li>
<li>How to Secure Your First Few Clients [0:22:16]</li>
<li>When to Start Building Your Audience [0:33:12]</li>
<li>Knowing When to Leave Your 9-5 and Prioritize Your Business Full-Time [0:38:57]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2862</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[513d21d4-79cf-11ef-85f0-8bfee4a99474]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE7067432813.mp3?updated=1727112615" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>884: How I Made $288k from a $29 Digital Product</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-i-made-288k-from-a-29-digital-product</link>
      <description>I’m still amazed that a digital product I created resulted in $ 288,000 in sales and added 10,000 people to my email list– and they paid to join it! I’m going to share all about it in today’s show.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


One of the reasons I love recommending digital products is that they act as a starting point, and once you’ve built them, you can sell them over and over. Unlike many other offers in your business, you don’t have to start from scratch each time someone buys.
Episode Highlights

The Secret to Building a Thriving Offer Ecosystem [0:07:36] 

Why Digital Products Stand Out [0:10:07]

How Digital Products Saved My Business [0:12:44]

What You Can Achieve with the Right Strategy [0:20:10]

My Strategy for Digital Product Success [0:23:07]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 19 Sep 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How I Made $288k from a $29 Digital Product</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>884</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>One of the reasons I love recommending digital products is that they act as a starting point, and once you’ve built them, you can sell them over and over. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’m still amazed that a digital product I created resulted in $ 288,000 in sales and added 10,000 people to my email list– and they paid to join it! I’m going to share all about it in today’s show.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


One of the reasons I love recommending digital products is that they act as a starting point, and once you’ve built them, you can sell them over and over. Unlike many other offers in your business, you don’t have to start from scratch each time someone buys.
Episode Highlights

The Secret to Building a Thriving Offer Ecosystem [0:07:36] 

Why Digital Products Stand Out [0:10:07]

How Digital Products Saved My Business [0:12:44]

What You Can Achieve with the Right Strategy [0:20:10]

My Strategy for Digital Product Success [0:23:07]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’m still amazed that a digital product I created resulted in $ 288,000 in sales and added 10,000 people to my email list– and they paid to join it! I’m going to share all about it in today’s show.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>One of the reasons I love recommending digital products is that they act as a starting point, and once you’ve built them, you can sell them over and over. Unlike many other offers in your business, you don’t have to start from scratch each time someone buys.</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>The Secret to Building a Thriving Offer Ecosystem [0:07:36] </li>
<li>Why Digital Products Stand Out [0:10:07]</li>
<li>How Digital Products Saved My Business [0:12:44]</li>
<li>What You Can Achieve with the Right Strategy [0:20:10]</li>
<li>My Strategy for Digital Product Success [0:23:07]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1720</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[65ea7a5e-7516-11ef-b80c-8bc2c1814704]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5540411823.mp3?updated=1726593252" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>883: Launch Your Digital Product in Just One Day</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/launch-your-digital-product-in-just-one-day</link>
      <description>If there’s one thing I want you to take away from this pep talk, it’s this: the decisions you make today aren’t set in stone. Whatever you launch, it's an opportunity. Whether it succeeds or not, you’re going to learn something from it. The world will respond, and your job is to listen. As business owners, we often rush through things and don’t take the time to truly listen to what feedback is telling us.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Not everything I’ve done has been a success, and that’s completely fine! In fact, I’ve learned the most from what I would call my failures. Today, I want you to forget about creating the most shareable digital product or following the latest trends. Instead, focus on solving a real problem. Whether it’s a template, guide, or script, aim to make a meaningful impact. The more real results you deliver, the more your clients will see the value in what you offer.
Episode Highlights

A Story About One of My Early Failures [0:08:20] 

What Happens When You Think You’ve Got It All Figured Out [0:18:13]

Lessons From My First Digital Product Launch [0:23:05]

Taking Things One Step at a Time [0:26:14]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 17 Sep 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Launch Your Digital Product in Just One Day</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>883</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Forget about creating the most shareable digital product or following the latest trends. Instead, focus on solving a real problem. The more real results you deliver, the more your clients will see the value in what you offer.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If there’s one thing I want you to take away from this pep talk, it’s this: the decisions you make today aren’t set in stone. Whatever you launch, it's an opportunity. Whether it succeeds or not, you’re going to learn something from it. The world will respond, and your job is to listen. As business owners, we often rush through things and don’t take the time to truly listen to what feedback is telling us.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Not everything I’ve done has been a success, and that’s completely fine! In fact, I’ve learned the most from what I would call my failures. Today, I want you to forget about creating the most shareable digital product or following the latest trends. Instead, focus on solving a real problem. Whether it’s a template, guide, or script, aim to make a meaningful impact. The more real results you deliver, the more your clients will see the value in what you offer.
Episode Highlights

A Story About One of My Early Failures [0:08:20] 

What Happens When You Think You’ve Got It All Figured Out [0:18:13]

Lessons From My First Digital Product Launch [0:23:05]

Taking Things One Step at a Time [0:26:14]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If there’s one thing I want you to take away from this pep talk, it’s this: the decisions you make today aren’t set in stone. Whatever you launch, it's an opportunity. Whether it succeeds or not, you’re going to learn something from it. The world will respond, and your job is to listen. As business owners, we often rush through things and don’t take the time to truly listen to what feedback is telling us.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Not everything I’ve done has been a success, and that’s completely fine! In fact, I’ve learned the most from what I would call my failures. Today, I want you to forget about creating the most shareable digital product or following the latest trends. Instead, focus on solving a real problem. Whether it’s a template, guide, or script, aim to make a meaningful impact. The more real results you deliver, the more your clients will see the value in what you offer.</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>A Story About One of My Early Failures [0:08:20] </li>
<li>What Happens When You Think You’ve Got It All Figured Out [0:18:13]</li>
<li>Lessons From My First Digital Product Launch [0:23:05]</li>
<li>Taking Things One Step at a Time [0:26:14]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1780</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[99375952-744b-11ef-98c2-179c7852078e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE9864107556.mp3?updated=1726506300" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>882: Digital Products I Would AVOID When You're Just Getting Started</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/digital-products-i-would-avoid-when-youre-just-getting-started</link>
      <description>It’s hard to believe that I’ve been creating digital products for over eight years now! I’ve learned so much that I want to share with other creators, because I want to see more people be successful with their digital creations too. Today I’m sharing which kinds of digital products I definitely wouldn’t create if I was just getting started. I think you’ll be surprised– the ones I’d skip aren’t what you’d expect.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

Avoid these 2 Very Common Mistakes [0:02:32] 

Scratching an Itch is Most Effective [0:04:22]

Keep it Simple &amp; Deliver Transformation [0:09:13]

Highlight Your Affiliate Products Inside [0:12:13]

Our Main Bread &amp; Butter Digital Offers [0:16:53]

Maximizing Integrations for the Win [0:20:03]

Get Visible &amp; Bring People into Your World [0:23:42]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 12 Sep 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Digital Products I Would AVOID When You're Just Getting Started</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>882</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I think you’ll be surprised by which digital products I definitely wouldn't create if I was just getting started– the ones I’d skip aren’t what you’d expect.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It’s hard to believe that I’ve been creating digital products for over eight years now! I’ve learned so much that I want to share with other creators, because I want to see more people be successful with their digital creations too. Today I’m sharing which kinds of digital products I definitely wouldn’t create if I was just getting started. I think you’ll be surprised– the ones I’d skip aren’t what you’d expect.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

Avoid these 2 Very Common Mistakes [0:02:32] 

Scratching an Itch is Most Effective [0:04:22]

Keep it Simple &amp; Deliver Transformation [0:09:13]

Highlight Your Affiliate Products Inside [0:12:13]

Our Main Bread &amp; Butter Digital Offers [0:16:53]

Maximizing Integrations for the Win [0:20:03]

Get Visible &amp; Bring People into Your World [0:23:42]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It’s hard to believe that I’ve been creating digital products for over eight years now! I’ve learned so much that I want to share with other creators, because I want to see more people be successful with their digital creations too. Today I’m sharing which kinds of digital products I definitely wouldn’t create if I was just getting started. I think you’ll be surprised– the ones I’d skip aren’t what you’d expect.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Avoid these 2 Very Common Mistakes [0:02:32] </li>
<li>Scratching an Itch is Most Effective [0:04:22]</li>
<li>Keep it Simple &amp; Deliver Transformation [0:09:13]</li>
<li>Highlight Your Affiliate Products Inside [0:12:13]</li>
<li>Our Main Bread &amp; Butter Digital Offers [0:16:53]</li>
<li>Maximizing Integrations for the Win [0:20:03]</li>
<li>Get Visible &amp; Bring People into Your World [0:23:42]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1911</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c415e34e-7042-11ef-afd1-4fed1d4e1a62]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6454239603.mp3?updated=1726063514" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>881: How I Built a Million-Dollar Digital Product Empire</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-i-built-a-million-dollar-digital-product-empire</link>
      <description>The most important thing to me in my business is to help my clients achieve their goals. Today, I want to break down what it took to build my multi-million dollar product empire and give you a blueprint of how I did it so that you can get started and launch your very own digital product. In 2016, I got caught in a five-car pile-up and suffered a traumatic brain injury that drastically changed my life. It taught me that my business was solely dependent on me and this was a massive wake-up call!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I decided to find ways to make more money without the business relying on me directly. I did this in a variety of ways over the years, and if you’ve been listening for a while, you’ll know just how innovative I’ve become. Eventually, I took on creating digital products, and boy, was I in for a surprise! It impacted my life and business so much and it has helped so many of you. I sold digital products for almost a decade before I started teaching about it and I have been through so much that now I feel ready to share my experience and teach it to people.
Episode Highlights

How My First Digital Product Launch Created Daily Sales [0:06:39] 

Keeping Your Business Afloat Even When You’re Sinking [0:16:24]

Choosing a Product, Getting Leads and Launching [0:22:37]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 10 Sep 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How I Built a Million-Dollar Digital Product Empire</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>881</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I'm breaking down a blueprint of how I did it so that you can successfully get started and launch your very own digital product.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>The most important thing to me in my business is to help my clients achieve their goals. Today, I want to break down what it took to build my multi-million dollar product empire and give you a blueprint of how I did it so that you can get started and launch your very own digital product. In 2016, I got caught in a five-car pile-up and suffered a traumatic brain injury that drastically changed my life. It taught me that my business was solely dependent on me and this was a massive wake-up call!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I decided to find ways to make more money without the business relying on me directly. I did this in a variety of ways over the years, and if you’ve been listening for a while, you’ll know just how innovative I’ve become. Eventually, I took on creating digital products, and boy, was I in for a surprise! It impacted my life and business so much and it has helped so many of you. I sold digital products for almost a decade before I started teaching about it and I have been through so much that now I feel ready to share my experience and teach it to people.
Episode Highlights

How My First Digital Product Launch Created Daily Sales [0:06:39] 

Keeping Your Business Afloat Even When You’re Sinking [0:16:24]

Choosing a Product, Getting Leads and Launching [0:22:37]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The most important thing to me in my business is to help my clients achieve their goals. Today, I want to break down what it took to build my multi-million dollar product empire and give you a blueprint of how I did it so that you can get started and launch your very own digital product. In 2016, I got caught in a five-car pile-up and suffered a traumatic brain injury that drastically changed my life. It taught me that my business was solely dependent on me and this was a massive wake-up call!</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>I decided to find ways to make more money without the business relying on me directly. I did this in a variety of ways over the years, and if you’ve been listening for a while, you’ll know just how innovative I’ve become. Eventually, I took on creating digital products, and boy, was I in for a surprise! It impacted my life and business so much and it has helped so many of you. I sold digital products for almost a decade before I started teaching about it and I have been through so much that now I feel ready to share my experience and teach it to people.</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>How My First Digital Product Launch Created Daily Sales [0:06:39] </li>
<li>Keeping Your Business Afloat Even When You’re Sinking [0:16:24]</li>
<li>Choosing a Product, Getting Leads and Launching [0:22:37]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2051</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9ca74a3e-6eb5-11ef-83c3-a3d4f42b3b80]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE4101514780.mp3?updated=1725892241" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>880: When to DIY Meta Ads vs Hire an Ads Pro with Kwadwo Sampany-Kessie</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/when-to-diy-meta-ads-vs-hire-an-ads-pro</link>
      <description>There is definitely a trick to running Meta ads and it can take some time to figure out how to do it. Today, on the show, Kwadwo Sampany-Kessie discusses when to run Meta ads yourself and when it’s time to hire a pro. He’s a successful Facebook Ads Manager and Strategy Partner and host of The Art of Online Business Podcast.  
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Kwadwo started his career teaching expats in China and got a reputation as “the Facebook ad guy” for creating silly videos while living there. When he and his family got stuck in Mexico during COVID-19, his business teaching Chinese crumbled (as so many did during the pandemic), and Kwadwo got a job running Facebook ads at an ad agency. Now, he has turned that into a whole new business! While in China, Kwadwo believes that he was running Facebook ads “the wrong way" and it was only when he started running them at the ad agency during COVID that he learned the right way to do it. Today, he is here to tell us all about the strategy and mindset required to run ads like a pro, the benefits of using ads, when to go with organic reach, knowing when to outsource ad management, Meta ad mistakes, and more.
Free Guide:
The 7 Biggest FB Ad Mistakes Course Creators Make That Burn Through $$$ and Kill Results

Episode Highlights

How Strategy and Mindset Can Get You Started in Ads. [0:09:56] 

What Ads are Doing for Course Creators and Small Business Owners. [0:16:44]

Knowing When to Manage Ads Yourself and When to Use an Ads Manager. [0:22:17]

Common Mistakes People Are Making with Meta Ads. [0:30:37]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 05 Sep 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>When to DIY Meta Ads vs Hire an Ads Pro with Kwadwo Sampany-Kessie</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>880</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Learn about the strategy and mindset required to run ads like a pro, the benefits of using ads, when to go with organic reach, knowing when to outsource ad management, Meta ad mistakes, and more.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There is definitely a trick to running Meta ads and it can take some time to figure out how to do it. Today, on the show, Kwadwo Sampany-Kessie discusses when to run Meta ads yourself and when it’s time to hire a pro. He’s a successful Facebook Ads Manager and Strategy Partner and host of The Art of Online Business Podcast.  
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Kwadwo started his career teaching expats in China and got a reputation as “the Facebook ad guy” for creating silly videos while living there. When he and his family got stuck in Mexico during COVID-19, his business teaching Chinese crumbled (as so many did during the pandemic), and Kwadwo got a job running Facebook ads at an ad agency. Now, he has turned that into a whole new business! While in China, Kwadwo believes that he was running Facebook ads “the wrong way" and it was only when he started running them at the ad agency during COVID that he learned the right way to do it. Today, he is here to tell us all about the strategy and mindset required to run ads like a pro, the benefits of using ads, when to go with organic reach, knowing when to outsource ad management, Meta ad mistakes, and more.
Free Guide:
The 7 Biggest FB Ad Mistakes Course Creators Make That Burn Through $$$ and Kill Results

Episode Highlights

How Strategy and Mindset Can Get You Started in Ads. [0:09:56] 

What Ads are Doing for Course Creators and Small Business Owners. [0:16:44]

Knowing When to Manage Ads Yourself and When to Use an Ads Manager. [0:22:17]

Common Mistakes People Are Making with Meta Ads. [0:30:37]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There is definitely a trick to running Meta ads and it can take some time to figure out how to do it. Today, on the show, Kwadwo Sampany-Kessie discusses when to run Meta ads yourself and when it’s time to hire a pro. He’s a successful Facebook Ads Manager and Strategy Partner and host of The Art of Online Business Podcast.  </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Kwadwo started his career teaching expats in China and got a reputation as “the Facebook ad guy” for creating silly videos while living there. When he and his family got stuck in Mexico during COVID-19, his business teaching Chinese crumbled (as so many did during the pandemic), and Kwadwo got a job running Facebook ads at an ad agency. Now, he has turned that into a whole new business! While in China, Kwadwo believes that he was running Facebook ads “the wrong way" and it was only when he started running them at the ad agency during COVID that he learned the right way to do it. Today, he is here to tell us all about the strategy and mindset required to run ads like a pro, the benefits of using ads, when to go with organic reach, knowing when to outsource ad management, Meta ad mistakes, and more.</p><h3>Free Guide:</h3><p><a href="https://quayjo.mykajabi.com/7mistakes-gp"><em>The 7 Biggest FB Ad Mistakes Course Creators Make That Burn Through $$$ and Kill Results</em></a></p><p><br></p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>How Strategy and Mindset Can Get You Started in Ads. [0:09:56] </li>
<li>What Ads are Doing for Course Creators and Small Business Owners. [0:16:44]</li>
<li>Knowing When to Manage Ads Yourself and When to Use an Ads Manager. [0:22:17]</li>
<li>Common Mistakes People Are Making with Meta Ads. [0:30:37]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2591</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c60b1334-6ad6-11ef-b463-777f04bf58e2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE8704374527.mp3?updated=1725466842" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>879: Marketing Magic: Business Lessons from the Muppets and Goat-2-Meeting with Andrew Davis</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/marketing-magic-business-lessons-from-the-muppets-and-goat-2-meeting</link>
      <description>Today on the Podcast, we have Andrew Davis, a Best-Selling Author and Internationally Acclaimed Keynote Speaker. He has appeared in the New York Times, Forbes, the Wall Street Journal, and on NBC and BBC. Andrew has crafted documentary films and award-winning content for tiny startups and Fortune 500 brands.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


In this episode, we’re talking about marketing lessons we can learn from The Muppets, what the pandemic did for a goat farm, and if your digital doppelganger should be your own property or owned by the company you work for. This convo is going to spark your creativity and get you thinking in new ways. You’ll walk away excited about how you can leverage AI in your own business. 
Episode Highlights

The Wild Ride of Andrew’s Career and Learning from the Best in the Business 

A Path to Public Speaking and the Power of Partnerships

Thinking Big and Starting Small: a Four-Step Process to Embracing Constraints 

How Goat-2-Meeting Leveraged Limitations 

Understanding the True Superpower of AI

An Insider’s Perspective on the Future of AI in Marketing


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 03 Sep 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Marketing Magic: Business Lessons from the Muppets and Goat-2-Meeting with Andrew Davis</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>879</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>This convo is going to spark your creativity and get you thinking in new ways. You’ll walk away excited about how you can leverage AI in your own business. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the Podcast, we have Andrew Davis, a Best-Selling Author and Internationally Acclaimed Keynote Speaker. He has appeared in the New York Times, Forbes, the Wall Street Journal, and on NBC and BBC. Andrew has crafted documentary films and award-winning content for tiny startups and Fortune 500 brands.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


In this episode, we’re talking about marketing lessons we can learn from The Muppets, what the pandemic did for a goat farm, and if your digital doppelganger should be your own property or owned by the company you work for. This convo is going to spark your creativity and get you thinking in new ways. You’ll walk away excited about how you can leverage AI in your own business. 
Episode Highlights

The Wild Ride of Andrew’s Career and Learning from the Best in the Business 

A Path to Public Speaking and the Power of Partnerships

Thinking Big and Starting Small: a Four-Step Process to Embracing Constraints 

How Goat-2-Meeting Leveraged Limitations 

Understanding the True Superpower of AI

An Insider’s Perspective on the Future of AI in Marketing


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the Podcast, we have Andrew Davis, a Best-Selling Author and Internationally Acclaimed Keynote Speaker. He has appeared in the New York Times, Forbes, the Wall Street Journal, and on NBC and BBC. Andrew has crafted documentary films and award-winning content for tiny startups and Fortune 500 brands.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>In this episode, we’re talking about marketing lessons we can learn from The Muppets, what the pandemic did for a goat farm, and if your digital doppelganger should be your own property or owned by the company you work for. This convo is going to spark your creativity and get you thinking in new ways. You’ll walk away excited about how you can leverage AI in your own business. </p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>The Wild Ride of Andrew’s Career and Learning from the Best in the Business </li>
<li>A Path to Public Speaking and the Power of Partnerships</li>
<li>Thinking Big and Starting Small: a Four-Step Process to Embracing Constraints </li>
<li>How Goat-2-Meeting Leveraged Limitations </li>
<li>Understanding the True Superpower of AI</li>
<li>An Insider’s Perspective on the Future of AI in Marketing</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2550</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e5210070-661d-11ef-bf04-7fbbd85a0f07]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6668584525.mp3?updated=1724947609" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>878: Keeping SEO Relevant in the New Era of AI with Zach Boyette</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/keeping-seo-relevant-in-the-new-era-of-ai-with-zach-boyette</link>
      <description>AI is one of the things that is probably at the forefront of every business owner’s mind, and if you feel like you don’t quite know what’s going on, you are not alone! In this conversation, marketing entrepreneur and digital nomad Zach Boyette joins us to discuss how to stay SEO-relevant in the age of “robots.” 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


AI is changing so many parts of marketing right now. A great way to get on top of these new changes is to focus on the SEO side of things. Many of you might know how to get to the top of Google searches but may be clueless when it comes to doing the same on ChatGPT and Gemini, for example. Today, Zach walks us through what brands can do to improve SEO using AI. 
Episode Highlights

How to Leverage AI to Improve Search Engine Optimization. [0:04:54] 

How to Become a Top Search Result on Large-Language Models. [0:14:39]

The Future of Marketing in the World of AI. [0:32:24]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 29 Aug 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Keeping SEO Relevant in the New Era of AI with Zach Boyette</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>878</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How can you get to the top of searches with ChatGPT and Gemini? Here's what brands can do to improve SEO using AI.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>AI is one of the things that is probably at the forefront of every business owner’s mind, and if you feel like you don’t quite know what’s going on, you are not alone! In this conversation, marketing entrepreneur and digital nomad Zach Boyette joins us to discuss how to stay SEO-relevant in the age of “robots.” 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


AI is changing so many parts of marketing right now. A great way to get on top of these new changes is to focus on the SEO side of things. Many of you might know how to get to the top of Google searches but may be clueless when it comes to doing the same on ChatGPT and Gemini, for example. Today, Zach walks us through what brands can do to improve SEO using AI. 
Episode Highlights

How to Leverage AI to Improve Search Engine Optimization. [0:04:54] 

How to Become a Top Search Result on Large-Language Models. [0:14:39]

The Future of Marketing in the World of AI. [0:32:24]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>AI is one of the things that is probably at the forefront of every business owner’s mind, and if you feel like you don’t quite know what’s going on, you are not alone! In this conversation, marketing entrepreneur and digital nomad Zach Boyette joins us to discuss how to stay SEO-relevant in the age of “robots.” </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>AI is changing so many parts of marketing right now. A great way to get on top of these new changes is to focus on the SEO side of things. Many of you might know how to get to the top of Google searches but may be clueless when it comes to doing the same on ChatGPT and Gemini, for example. Today, Zach walks us through what brands can do to improve SEO using AI. </p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>How to Leverage AI to Improve Search Engine Optimization. [0:04:54] </li>
<li>How to Become a Top Search Result on Large-Language Models. [0:14:39]</li>
<li>The Future of Marketing in the World of AI. [0:32:24]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2472</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e163530e-648b-11ef-8a61-775d5f492054]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE8730034537.mp3?updated=1724775265" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>877: Sleep Smarter, Not Harder: Biohacks for High-Performing Entrepreneurs with Tanessa Shears</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/sleep-smarter-with-tanessa-shears</link>
      <description>When looking to make positive changes in your life, why not start with making sure you’re sleeping well? If you are having a hard time falling asleep, staying asleep, and battling with overall energy levels, then this episode is for you! Joining us is the incredible health consultant Tanessa Shears to discuss how you can sleep smarter and share bio-hacks to become a better-performing entrepreneur. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Tanessa started her business as a personal trainer and nutrition coach and she very quickly realized that so many of her clients were entrepreneurs who needed that extra push to optimize their health. Sleep is often a forgotten component of health and when Tanessa was pregnant, she became more aware of how little sleep entrepreneurs are getting and how that is affecting their businesses. That is why she incorporated a third pillar into her business, sleep! Tune into this conversation to hear a breakdown of the architecture of your sleep, how to sleep better, creating the right environment to help your brain and body wind down for sleep, wearable sleep tracking devices and so much more!
Episode Highlights

The Architecture of Your Sleep. [0:08:37] 

How Do We Sleep Better? [0:12:51]

The ‘Zone Out’ Period and How to Fall Asleep Easier. [0:16:43]

What Slowing Down Can Look Like. [0:25:33]

Tanessa’s Favorite Wearable Tech and How She Incorporates it Into Her Work. [0:30:47]

What to Do When Either Your Deep Sleep or REM Sleep is Suffering. [0:36:20]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 27 Aug 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Sleep Smarter, Not Harder: Biohacks for High-Performing Entrepreneurs with Tanessa Shears</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>877</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you are having a hard time falling asleep, staying asleep, and battling with overall energy levels, then this episode is for you!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When looking to make positive changes in your life, why not start with making sure you’re sleeping well? If you are having a hard time falling asleep, staying asleep, and battling with overall energy levels, then this episode is for you! Joining us is the incredible health consultant Tanessa Shears to discuss how you can sleep smarter and share bio-hacks to become a better-performing entrepreneur. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Tanessa started her business as a personal trainer and nutrition coach and she very quickly realized that so many of her clients were entrepreneurs who needed that extra push to optimize their health. Sleep is often a forgotten component of health and when Tanessa was pregnant, she became more aware of how little sleep entrepreneurs are getting and how that is affecting their businesses. That is why she incorporated a third pillar into her business, sleep! Tune into this conversation to hear a breakdown of the architecture of your sleep, how to sleep better, creating the right environment to help your brain and body wind down for sleep, wearable sleep tracking devices and so much more!
Episode Highlights

The Architecture of Your Sleep. [0:08:37] 

How Do We Sleep Better? [0:12:51]

The ‘Zone Out’ Period and How to Fall Asleep Easier. [0:16:43]

What Slowing Down Can Look Like. [0:25:33]

Tanessa’s Favorite Wearable Tech and How She Incorporates it Into Her Work. [0:30:47]

What to Do When Either Your Deep Sleep or REM Sleep is Suffering. [0:36:20]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When looking to make positive changes in your life, why not start with making sure you’re sleeping well? If you are having a hard time falling asleep, staying asleep, and battling with overall energy levels, then this episode is for you! Joining us is the incredible health consultant Tanessa Shears to discuss how you can sleep smarter and share bio-hacks to become a better-performing entrepreneur. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Tanessa started her business as a personal trainer and nutrition coach and she very quickly realized that so many of her clients were entrepreneurs who needed that extra push to optimize their health. Sleep is often a forgotten component of health and when Tanessa was pregnant, she became more aware of how little sleep entrepreneurs are getting and how that is affecting their businesses. That is why she incorporated a third pillar into her business, sleep! Tune into this conversation to hear a breakdown of the architecture of your sleep, how to sleep better, creating the right environment to help your brain and body wind down for sleep, wearable sleep tracking devices and so much more!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>The Architecture of Your Sleep. [0:08:37] </li>
<li>How Do We Sleep Better? [0:12:51]</li>
<li>The ‘Zone Out’ Period and How to Fall Asleep Easier. [0:16:43]</li>
<li>What Slowing Down Can Look Like. [0:25:33]</li>
<li>Tanessa’s Favorite Wearable Tech and How She Incorporates it Into Her Work. [0:30:47]</li>
<li>What to Do When Either Your Deep Sleep or REM Sleep is Suffering. [0:36:20]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2583</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[828761b4-63c2-11ef-b9a7-1bcba7866fbf]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE2202050565.mp3?updated=1724688442" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>876: Leads on Autopilot: How to Get Your First (or Next) 1,000 Subscribers</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/leads-on-autopilot-how-to-get-your-first-or-next-1000-subscribers</link>
      <description>Recently, I taught a live workshop that was so packed with valuable info that I wanted to make sure more people had access to it. Today’s podcast is the audio version of The Leads on Autopilot workshop. If you’d prefer to view the visual slides as well, you can register to watch the complete video replay at no cost— consider it my gift to you. I want to see you be successful, which is why I created this value-packed episode.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!

Tune in to learn more about:

THE roadmap to getting your first (or next) 1000 subscribers.

How to generate leads on autopilot, regardless of your current tech background

The exact strategies businesses with lists of 50k+ are using to rapidly build their email list


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 22 Aug 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Leads on Autopilot: How to Get Your First (or Next) 1,000 Subscribers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>876</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>THE roadmap to building your email list &amp; how to generate leads on autopilot, regardless of your current tech background</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Recently, I taught a live workshop that was so packed with valuable info that I wanted to make sure more people had access to it. Today’s podcast is the audio version of The Leads on Autopilot workshop. If you’d prefer to view the visual slides as well, you can register to watch the complete video replay at no cost— consider it my gift to you. I want to see you be successful, which is why I created this value-packed episode.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!

Tune in to learn more about:

THE roadmap to getting your first (or next) 1000 subscribers.

How to generate leads on autopilot, regardless of your current tech background

The exact strategies businesses with lists of 50k+ are using to rapidly build their email list


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Recently, I taught a live workshop that was so packed with valuable info that I wanted to make sure more people had access to it. Today’s podcast is the audio version of The Leads on Autopilot workshop. If you’d prefer to view the visual slides as well, you can register to <a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/email">watch the complete video replay</a> at no cost— consider it my gift to you. I want to see you be successful, which is why I created this value-packed episode.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><h3>Tune in to learn more about:</h3><ul>
<li>THE roadmap to getting your first (or next) 1000 subscribers.</li>
<li>How to generate leads on autopilot, regardless of your current tech background</li>
<li>The exact strategies businesses with lists of 50k+ are using to rapidly build their email list</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>4028</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d01e8026-5fec-11ef-a28d-eb0eefccf628]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6789186143.mp3?updated=1724267261" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>875: Everything You Need to Know About “Email List Jumpstart”</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/everything-you-need-to-know-about-email-list-jumpstart</link>
      <description>I am so excited to introduce you to my brand-new course, Email List Jumpstart! I know there can be a lot of moving pieces when it comes to growing and building an email list, but I want to show you how you can do this live, in real time, and in a way that is super easy for you to maintain. We’re talking an hour a week!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


This course isn’t just about theory; it’s packed with practical, actionable strategies that I’ve personally tested and refined. After realizing that so many of you are struggling to build or grow your email lists, I knew I had to create something that could meet you where you are and help you thrive. Whether you’re starting from scratch or looking to supercharge your existing list, Email List Jumpstart offers both foundational and advanced strategies to help you attract the right leads and turn them into loyal customers.
Episode Highlights

Why I Built Email List Jumpstart [0:01:20]

Building a Business That Honors Life First With Your Email List [0:08:55]

Why Email Works [0:14:23]

What to Expect From Email List Jumpstart [0:15:50]

The World’s Smallest Sales Funnel [0:21:09]

Automation That Works for You [0:22:17]

Jumpstart Your Email List Today [0:24:06]


In this episode, I’ll walk you through the backstory of how this course came to life, the unique approach I took to ensure its effectiveness, and what you can expect when you dive in. Plus, I’ll share some of the advanced techniques that can take your email marketing to the next level. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 20 Aug 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Everything You Need to Know About “Email List Jumpstart”</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>875</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>There can be a lot of moving pieces when it comes to growing and building an email list, but I want to show you how you can do this live, in real time, and in a way that is super easy for you to maintain. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I am so excited to introduce you to my brand-new course, Email List Jumpstart! I know there can be a lot of moving pieces when it comes to growing and building an email list, but I want to show you how you can do this live, in real time, and in a way that is super easy for you to maintain. We’re talking an hour a week!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


This course isn’t just about theory; it’s packed with practical, actionable strategies that I’ve personally tested and refined. After realizing that so many of you are struggling to build or grow your email lists, I knew I had to create something that could meet you where you are and help you thrive. Whether you’re starting from scratch or looking to supercharge your existing list, Email List Jumpstart offers both foundational and advanced strategies to help you attract the right leads and turn them into loyal customers.
Episode Highlights

Why I Built Email List Jumpstart [0:01:20]

Building a Business That Honors Life First With Your Email List [0:08:55]

Why Email Works [0:14:23]

What to Expect From Email List Jumpstart [0:15:50]

The World’s Smallest Sales Funnel [0:21:09]

Automation That Works for You [0:22:17]

Jumpstart Your Email List Today [0:24:06]


In this episode, I’ll walk you through the backstory of how this course came to life, the unique approach I took to ensure its effectiveness, and what you can expect when you dive in. Plus, I’ll share some of the advanced techniques that can take your email marketing to the next level. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I am so excited to introduce you to my brand-new course, Email List Jumpstart! I know there can be a lot of moving pieces when it comes to growing and building an email list, but I want to show you how you can do this live, in real time, and in a way that is super easy for you to maintain. We’re talking an hour a week!</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>This course isn’t just about theory; it’s packed with practical, actionable strategies that I’ve personally tested and refined. After realizing that so many of you are struggling to build or grow your email lists, I knew I had to create something that could meet you where you are and help you thrive. Whether you’re starting from scratch or looking to supercharge your existing list, Email List Jumpstart offers both foundational and advanced strategies to help you attract the right leads and turn them into loyal customers.</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Why I Built Email List Jumpstart [0:01:20]</li>
<li>Building a Business That Honors Life First With Your Email List [0:08:55]</li>
<li>Why Email Works [0:14:23]</li>
<li>What to Expect From Email List Jumpstart [0:15:50]</li>
<li>The World’s Smallest Sales Funnel [0:21:09]</li>
<li>Automation That Works for You [0:22:17]</li>
<li>Jumpstart Your Email List Today [0:24:06]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>In this episode, I’ll walk you through the backstory of how this course came to life, the unique approach I took to ensure its effectiveness, and what you can expect when you dive in. Plus, I’ll share some of the advanced techniques that can take your email marketing to the next level. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2082</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ca2e194e-5e3c-11ef-af37-dff2fafa22ae]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE7647824766.mp3?updated=1725477747" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>874: Building a Lucrative Newsletter Business Model with Jack Appleby</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/building-a-lucrative-newsletter-business-model-with-jack-appleby</link>
      <description>So many people have been telling me that I have to meet the creator of Future Social, Jack Appleby, and today, he is on the podcast so you can hear his story! He is monetizing and building a business in an incredibly unique way and I can’t wait for you to hear all about it.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Jack has had an extensive career with quite an intense growth trajectory going from zero to 60,000 subscribers almost instantaneously. But he is not making his money as a social media influencer. Instead, Jack’s main income in his half-million-dollar business comes from his newsletter! Something most people only use as a lead magnet. Today he delves into how he did it, the importance of creating value-based content, the art of selling creative ideas, and so much more! 
Episode Highlights

The Tangible Things Jack Does to Get People on His Newsletter [0:06:32] 

Why Jack Decided to Make His Newsletter the Main Monetization of His Business [0:10:43]

Developing the Skill of Selling Creative Ideas [0:16:04]

The Future of Future Social and Jack Appleby [0:26:48]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 15 Aug 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Building a Lucrative Newsletter Business Model with Jack Appleby</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>874</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today Jack delves into the importance of creating value-based content, the art of selling creative ideas, and so much more! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>So many people have been telling me that I have to meet the creator of Future Social, Jack Appleby, and today, he is on the podcast so you can hear his story! He is monetizing and building a business in an incredibly unique way and I can’t wait for you to hear all about it.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Jack has had an extensive career with quite an intense growth trajectory going from zero to 60,000 subscribers almost instantaneously. But he is not making his money as a social media influencer. Instead, Jack’s main income in his half-million-dollar business comes from his newsletter! Something most people only use as a lead magnet. Today he delves into how he did it, the importance of creating value-based content, the art of selling creative ideas, and so much more! 
Episode Highlights

The Tangible Things Jack Does to Get People on His Newsletter [0:06:32] 

Why Jack Decided to Make His Newsletter the Main Monetization of His Business [0:10:43]

Developing the Skill of Selling Creative Ideas [0:16:04]

The Future of Future Social and Jack Appleby [0:26:48]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>So many people have been telling me that I have to meet the creator of Future Social, Jack Appleby, and today, he is on the podcast so you can hear his story! He is monetizing and building a business in an incredibly unique way and I can’t wait for you to hear all about it.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Jack has had an extensive career with quite an intense growth trajectory going from zero to 60,000 subscribers almost instantaneously. But he is not making his money as a social media influencer. Instead, Jack’s main income in his half-million-dollar business comes from his newsletter! Something most people only use as a lead magnet. Today he delves into how he did it, the importance of creating value-based content, the art of selling creative ideas, and so much more! </p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>The Tangible Things Jack Does to Get People on His Newsletter [0:06:32] </li>
<li>Why Jack Decided to Make His Newsletter the Main Monetization of His Business [0:10:43]</li>
<li>Developing the Skill of Selling Creative Ideas [0:16:04]</li>
<li>The Future of Future Social and Jack Appleby [0:26:48]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2398</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7902872e-5a79-11ef-9087-631119f1af6c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE2479415438.mp3?updated=1723667342" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>873: 9 Ultimate Lead Magnets &amp; The Secret to Attracting Ideal Clients</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/9-ultimate-lead-magnets-the-secret-to-attracting-ideal-clients</link>
      <description>If you were to sit me down with a glass of wine and ask me what I think about lead magnets, I would give you a lot of detail about what I think is and isn’t working in the online business world today. Lead magnets have changed a lot in the past ten years and a huge part of that is because our entire creator economy has changed the online landscape. Ten years ago, knowledge databases for tech tools did not exist. YouTube was not this robust library and Google even left us with unanswered questions. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Today, it feels like you could Google anything, and if you can’t, you can just ask AI. So, why would someone want to give you their email address to hear what you have to say? I want to talk about it because lead magnets are still an incredibly powerful, critical tool in your ability to grow and build your email list. I have personally added tens of thousands of subscribers to my email list using a wide variety of strategies over the last six months. If you’re curious about how I’ve been building recently, I want to give you all of my strategies. But today, I want to talk about what’s effective for you!
Episode Highlights

What Lead Magnets Actually Do [0:02:19] 

One Thing Most People Forget When They’re Thinking About Lead Magnets [0:06:58]

Simple Lead Magnets You Could Be Delivering in Text Only [0:14:08]

Complex Options That Might Not Take as Long as You Think [0:23:31]

The Most Complex Way of All to Get Started [0:28:38]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 13 Aug 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>9 Ultimate Lead Magnets &amp; The Secret to Attracting Ideal Clients</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>873</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Lead magnets have changed a lot in the past ten years and a huge part of that is because our entire creator economy has changed the online landscape. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you were to sit me down with a glass of wine and ask me what I think about lead magnets, I would give you a lot of detail about what I think is and isn’t working in the online business world today. Lead magnets have changed a lot in the past ten years and a huge part of that is because our entire creator economy has changed the online landscape. Ten years ago, knowledge databases for tech tools did not exist. YouTube was not this robust library and Google even left us with unanswered questions. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Today, it feels like you could Google anything, and if you can’t, you can just ask AI. So, why would someone want to give you their email address to hear what you have to say? I want to talk about it because lead magnets are still an incredibly powerful, critical tool in your ability to grow and build your email list. I have personally added tens of thousands of subscribers to my email list using a wide variety of strategies over the last six months. If you’re curious about how I’ve been building recently, I want to give you all of my strategies. But today, I want to talk about what’s effective for you!
Episode Highlights

What Lead Magnets Actually Do [0:02:19] 

One Thing Most People Forget When They’re Thinking About Lead Magnets [0:06:58]

Simple Lead Magnets You Could Be Delivering in Text Only [0:14:08]

Complex Options That Might Not Take as Long as You Think [0:23:31]

The Most Complex Way of All to Get Started [0:28:38]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you were to sit me down with a glass of wine and ask me what I think about lead magnets, I would give you a lot of detail about what I think is and isn’t working in the online business world today. Lead magnets have changed a lot in the past ten years and a huge part of that is because our entire creator economy has changed the online landscape. Ten years ago, knowledge databases for tech tools did not exist. YouTube was not this robust library and Google even left us with unanswered questions. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Today, it feels like you could Google anything, and if you can’t, you can just ask AI. So, why would someone want to give you their email address to hear what you have to say? I want to talk about it because lead magnets are still an incredibly powerful, critical tool in your ability to grow and build your email list. I have personally added tens of thousands of subscribers to my email list using a wide variety of strategies over the last six months. If you’re curious about how I’ve been building recently, I want to give you <a href="http://bossproject.com/leads">all of my strategies</a>. But today, I want to talk about what’s effective for you!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>What Lead Magnets Actually Do [0:02:19] </li>
<li>One Thing Most People Forget When They’re Thinking About Lead Magnets [0:06:58]</li>
<li>Simple Lead Magnets You Could Be Delivering in Text Only [0:14:08]</li>
<li>Complex Options That Might Not Take as Long as You Think [0:23:31]</li>
<li>The Most Complex Way of All to Get Started [0:28:38]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2053</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[67159c1c-5908-11ef-8e81-0b61de510548]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE7578186431.mp3?updated=1723508861" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>872: Savings Strategies for Entrepreneurs: How Gina Knox’s Clients Saved $7.5 Million Dollars</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/savings-strategies-for-entreprenuers-with-gina-knox</link>
      <description>As the owner of a small business, every dollar counts, and strategic financial management can make all the difference. Today, we’re joined by self-proclaimed money nerd, Gina Knox, a money coach for entrepreneurs with variable income. Gina teaches business owners how to build their savings, pay themselves well, and create a wealth portfolio. In the last three years alone, she has helped her clients save over $7.5 million!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


In this episode, we break down tactical ways to approach cash flow, new ways to look at debt, and the money mindset beliefs you need to readdress to feel empowered to build the wealth you dream of! Gina also shares her unique perspective on some common industry strategies, offering you alternative paths to reach your financial goals. Whether you're a seasoned entrepreneur or just starting out, this conversation will provide you with new opportunities to reassess the thought patterns and money beliefs that have been holding you back!
Episode Highlights

An Unconventional Path to a Fulfilling, Finance-Focused Career. [0:01:45] 

How NOT to Manage Your Business and Personal Finances. [0:11:28]

The Cash Flow Waterfall Method. [0:17:50]

Why it’s Important to Reframe Your Perspective on Debt. [0:23:07]

Your Guide to Mastering Your Money Mindset. [0:29:14]

The Variable Income System for Paying Yourself Well. [0:38:48]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 08 Aug 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Savings Strategies for Entrepreneurs: How Gina Knox’s Clients Saved $7.5 Million Dollars</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>872</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tactical ways to approach cash flow, new ways to look at debt, and the money mindset beliefs you need to readdress to feel empowered to build the wealth you dream of! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>As the owner of a small business, every dollar counts, and strategic financial management can make all the difference. Today, we’re joined by self-proclaimed money nerd, Gina Knox, a money coach for entrepreneurs with variable income. Gina teaches business owners how to build their savings, pay themselves well, and create a wealth portfolio. In the last three years alone, she has helped her clients save over $7.5 million!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


In this episode, we break down tactical ways to approach cash flow, new ways to look at debt, and the money mindset beliefs you need to readdress to feel empowered to build the wealth you dream of! Gina also shares her unique perspective on some common industry strategies, offering you alternative paths to reach your financial goals. Whether you're a seasoned entrepreneur or just starting out, this conversation will provide you with new opportunities to reassess the thought patterns and money beliefs that have been holding you back!
Episode Highlights

An Unconventional Path to a Fulfilling, Finance-Focused Career. [0:01:45] 

How NOT to Manage Your Business and Personal Finances. [0:11:28]

The Cash Flow Waterfall Method. [0:17:50]

Why it’s Important to Reframe Your Perspective on Debt. [0:23:07]

Your Guide to Mastering Your Money Mindset. [0:29:14]

The Variable Income System for Paying Yourself Well. [0:38:48]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>As the owner of a small business, every dollar counts, and strategic financial management can make all the difference. Today, we’re joined by self-proclaimed money nerd, Gina Knox, a money coach for entrepreneurs with variable income. Gina teaches business owners how to build their savings, pay themselves well, and create a wealth portfolio. In the last three years alone, she has helped her clients save over $7.5 million!</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>In this episode, we break down tactical ways to approach cash flow, new ways to look at debt, and the money mindset beliefs you need to readdress to feel empowered to build the wealth you dream of! Gina also shares her unique perspective on some common industry strategies, offering you alternative paths to reach your financial goals. Whether you're a seasoned entrepreneur or just starting out, this conversation will provide you with new opportunities to reassess the thought patterns and money beliefs that have been holding you back!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>An Unconventional Path to a Fulfilling, Finance-Focused Career. [0:01:45] </li>
<li>How NOT to Manage Your Business and Personal Finances. [0:11:28]</li>
<li>The Cash Flow Waterfall Method. [0:17:50]</li>
<li>Why it’s Important to Reframe Your Perspective on Debt. [0:23:07]</li>
<li>Your Guide to Mastering Your Money Mindset. [0:29:14]</li>
<li>The Variable Income System for Paying Yourself Well. [0:38:48]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2971</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b2e5797e-54e3-11ef-bd0e-d760bd6537a6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1571088527.mp3?updated=1723053731" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>871: How I Make Sales Everyday Using Email</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-i-make-sales-everyday-using-email</link>
      <description>I want nothing more than for y’all to get real results in your business, create revenue, have real connections, and ultimately leverage email marketing to build your business. I’ve been on an email kick lately. It’s all I want to talk about. I have seen the results! Today, I want to talk to you about how I make sales every single day using email.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I also share a brand new case study I put together. I have been on a mission to get more visible. In the first six months of this year, I built nearly 10,000 new leads into my world via my email list. I wanted to provide a step-by-step roadmap of how I’ve done that. You can find it at bossproject.com/leads.
Episode Highlights

The Start of My Story (And Why it Might Look a Lot Like Yours) [0:02:48] 

Making It Sustainable with an Evergreen Approach [0:10:26]

Where to Start If You Dream of Making Sales Every Day [0:13:50]

Overcoming the Fears that Keep Your Business Small [0:16:01]

What We Can Learn from Big Businesses [0:18:35]

The Art of Being Consistent Without Leaning Into Overkill [0:22:48]

Using the Curiosity Factor to Create Consistency [0:26:08]

Some of the (Many) Ways You Can Communicate Using Email [0:30:15]

Your Ultimate Goal with Email Marketing [0:36:45]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 06 Aug 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How I Make Sales Everyday Using Email</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>871</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Create revenue, have real connections, and ultimately leverage email marketing to build your business.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I want nothing more than for y’all to get real results in your business, create revenue, have real connections, and ultimately leverage email marketing to build your business. I’ve been on an email kick lately. It’s all I want to talk about. I have seen the results! Today, I want to talk to you about how I make sales every single day using email.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I also share a brand new case study I put together. I have been on a mission to get more visible. In the first six months of this year, I built nearly 10,000 new leads into my world via my email list. I wanted to provide a step-by-step roadmap of how I’ve done that. You can find it at bossproject.com/leads.
Episode Highlights

The Start of My Story (And Why it Might Look a Lot Like Yours) [0:02:48] 

Making It Sustainable with an Evergreen Approach [0:10:26]

Where to Start If You Dream of Making Sales Every Day [0:13:50]

Overcoming the Fears that Keep Your Business Small [0:16:01]

What We Can Learn from Big Businesses [0:18:35]

The Art of Being Consistent Without Leaning Into Overkill [0:22:48]

Using the Curiosity Factor to Create Consistency [0:26:08]

Some of the (Many) Ways You Can Communicate Using Email [0:30:15]

Your Ultimate Goal with Email Marketing [0:36:45]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I want nothing more than for y’all to get real results in your business, create revenue, have real connections, and ultimately leverage email marketing to build your business. I’ve been on an email kick lately. It’s all I want to talk about. I have seen the results! Today, I want to talk to you about how I make sales every single day using email.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>I also share a brand new case study I put together. I have been on a mission to get more visible. In the first six months of this year, I built nearly 10,000 new leads into my world via my email list. I wanted to provide a step-by-step roadmap of how I’ve done that. You can find it at bossproject.com/leads.</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>The Start of My Story (And Why it Might Look a Lot Like Yours) [0:02:48] </li>
<li>Making It Sustainable with an Evergreen Approach [0:10:26]</li>
<li>Where to Start If You Dream of Making Sales Every Day [0:13:50]</li>
<li>Overcoming the Fears that Keep Your Business Small [0:16:01]</li>
<li>What We Can Learn from Big Businesses [0:18:35]</li>
<li>The Art of Being Consistent Without Leaning Into Overkill [0:22:48]</li>
<li>Using the Curiosity Factor to Create Consistency [0:26:08]</li>
<li>Some of the (Many) Ways You Can Communicate Using Email [0:30:15]</li>
<li>Your Ultimate Goal with Email Marketing [0:36:45]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2693</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a855229c-538b-11ef-8cd4-9357b596bbde]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1269772753.mp3?updated=1722905712" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>870: Industry Predictions: The Future of Email Marketing with Natalie Franke</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-future-of-email-marketing-with-natalie-franke</link>
      <description>Rarely do we open Instagram and go; what are you going to sell me today? But when you open email, especially your promotions tab, there is a different intent. You use email to communicate, but more than that, you open your promotions tab to see what deals are happening.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Today’s guest is Natalie Franke, a USA Today bestselling author, community builder, neuroscience nerd, and mama bear for small businesses. As Head of Marketing at Flodesk, she leads tens of thousands of small business owners while fostering a spirit of community over competition around the world.
Episode Highlights

Natalie’s Non-Linear Journey to Head of Marketing at Flodesk [0:03:21] 

Hot Takes on the Future of Email Marketing [0:09:14]

How Email Marketing Has Evolved Since It All Began [0:14:18]

The Main Difference between SMS and Email Marketing [0:21:41]

Why Natalie Believes that Email Marketing is Still the Bluest Ocean [0:26:35]

Using Personalization to Help You Scale [0:26:35]

How to Do More Than Just Adding to the Noise [0:39:15]

What the Future of Email Might Hold [0:45:15]

More Automation We Might See in the Years to Come [0:51:41]


In this episode, we talk about the future of email marketing and where we see this industry going. We dig into whether we think email marketing is saturated, how selling will evolve via email, whether SMS and bot funnels are posing any threat, and surprising fun facts along the way! I know you’re going to get a ton out of this episode and also a lot of ideas for the things you may need to be prepared for in the future.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 01 Aug 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Industry Predictions: The Future of Email Marketing with Natalie Franke</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>870</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We dig into whether we think email marketing is saturated, how selling will evolve via email, whether SMS and bot funnels are posing any threat, and surprising fun facts along the way!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Rarely do we open Instagram and go; what are you going to sell me today? But when you open email, especially your promotions tab, there is a different intent. You use email to communicate, but more than that, you open your promotions tab to see what deals are happening.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Today’s guest is Natalie Franke, a USA Today bestselling author, community builder, neuroscience nerd, and mama bear for small businesses. As Head of Marketing at Flodesk, she leads tens of thousands of small business owners while fostering a spirit of community over competition around the world.
Episode Highlights

Natalie’s Non-Linear Journey to Head of Marketing at Flodesk [0:03:21] 

Hot Takes on the Future of Email Marketing [0:09:14]

How Email Marketing Has Evolved Since It All Began [0:14:18]

The Main Difference between SMS and Email Marketing [0:21:41]

Why Natalie Believes that Email Marketing is Still the Bluest Ocean [0:26:35]

Using Personalization to Help You Scale [0:26:35]

How to Do More Than Just Adding to the Noise [0:39:15]

What the Future of Email Might Hold [0:45:15]

More Automation We Might See in the Years to Come [0:51:41]


In this episode, we talk about the future of email marketing and where we see this industry going. We dig into whether we think email marketing is saturated, how selling will evolve via email, whether SMS and bot funnels are posing any threat, and surprising fun facts along the way! I know you’re going to get a ton out of this episode and also a lot of ideas for the things you may need to be prepared for in the future.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Rarely do we open Instagram and go; what are you going to sell me today? But when you open email, especially your promotions tab, there is a different intent. You use email to communicate, but more than that, you open your promotions tab to see what deals are happening.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Today’s guest is Natalie Franke, a USA Today bestselling author, community builder, neuroscience nerd, and mama bear for small businesses. As Head of Marketing at Flodesk, she leads tens of thousands of small business owners while fostering a spirit of community over competition around the world.</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Natalie’s Non-Linear Journey to Head of Marketing at Flodesk [0:03:21] </li>
<li>Hot Takes on the Future of Email Marketing [0:09:14]</li>
<li>How Email Marketing Has Evolved Since It All Began [0:14:18]</li>
<li>The Main Difference between SMS and Email Marketing [0:21:41]</li>
<li>Why Natalie Believes that Email Marketing is Still the Bluest Ocean [0:26:35]</li>
<li>Using Personalization to Help You Scale [0:26:35]</li>
<li>How to Do More Than Just Adding to the Noise [0:39:15]</li>
<li>What the Future of Email Might Hold [0:45:15]</li>
<li>More Automation We Might See in the Years to Come [0:51:41]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>In this episode, we talk about the future of email marketing and where we see this industry going. We dig into whether we think email marketing is saturated, how selling will evolve via email, whether SMS and bot funnels are posing any threat, and surprising fun facts along the way! I know you’re going to get a ton out of this episode and also a lot of ideas for the things you may need to be prepared for in the future.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3725</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ac85553e-4f54-11ef-a56c-bf1e266d77cf]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6823814839.mp3?updated=1722442456" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>869: How to Build an Email List from Scratch</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-build-an-email-list-from-scratch</link>
      <description>With email marketing, you get to drive traffic way more directly than you can with social posts. So many of you have been asking how to build an email list from scratch and today I want to dive right into this discussion! 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Email is a powerful way to convert leads! An email sent to your list gives you direct access to 100% of your audience, unlike a social media post that will only be seen by 10% of your followers. You also own this list and you have control over how you engage with it. You also have the opportunity to segment your list and personalize your marketing, which helps build relationships with your audience. 
This year alone, I have added nearly 10,000 new subscribers to my email list and I want to give you all of the details in a free case study I created– head to bossproject.com/leads and get it now! 
Episode Highlights

The Most Important Thing to Consider When Choosing an Email Provider. [0:08:23] 

Figuring Out How to Get People onto Your List. [0:20:33]

The Two Main Things You Have to Set Up Next. [0:28:44]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 30 Jul 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Build an Email List from Scratch</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Email is a powerful way to convert leads! With email marketing, you get to drive traffic way more directly than you can with social posts. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>With email marketing, you get to drive traffic way more directly than you can with social posts. So many of you have been asking how to build an email list from scratch and today I want to dive right into this discussion! 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Email is a powerful way to convert leads! An email sent to your list gives you direct access to 100% of your audience, unlike a social media post that will only be seen by 10% of your followers. You also own this list and you have control over how you engage with it. You also have the opportunity to segment your list and personalize your marketing, which helps build relationships with your audience. 
This year alone, I have added nearly 10,000 new subscribers to my email list and I want to give you all of the details in a free case study I created– head to bossproject.com/leads and get it now! 
Episode Highlights

The Most Important Thing to Consider When Choosing an Email Provider. [0:08:23] 

Figuring Out How to Get People onto Your List. [0:20:33]

The Two Main Things You Have to Set Up Next. [0:28:44]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>With email marketing, you get to drive traffic way more directly than you can with social posts. So many of you have been asking how to build an email list from scratch and today I want to dive right into this discussion! </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Email is a powerful way to convert leads! An email sent to your list gives you direct access to 100% of your audience, unlike a social media post that will only be seen by 10% of your followers. You also own this list and you have control over how you engage with it. You also have the opportunity to segment your list and personalize your marketing, which helps build relationships with your audience. </p><p>This year alone, I have added nearly 10,000 new subscribers to my email list and I want to give you all of the details in a free case study I created– head to <a href="http://bossproject.com/leads">bossproject.com/leads</a> and get it now! </p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>The Most Important Thing to Consider When Choosing an Email Provider. [0:08:23] </li>
<li>Figuring Out How to Get People onto Your List. [0:20:33]</li>
<li>The Two Main Things You Have to Set Up Next. [0:28:44]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2217</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[eb7bb898-4dc7-11ef-88f8-3331f9084477]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE3131462187.mp3?updated=1722273094" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>868: You Ghosted Your Email List - Craft Your Comeback Strategy</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/you-ghosted-your-email-list-craft-your-comeback-strategy</link>
      <description>Have you ever ghosted your email list and wondered about how to make a comeback? Or if you even could! You're not alone, and I’m here to help. In this episode, I’m diving deep into the art of reengaging an inactive audience authentically and strategically. We’ll talk about why the gap happened, how to assess the situation, and, most importantly, how to craft a comeback plan that feels true to you. I’ll share actionable steps to get your email list going again, from providing genuine value to maintaining consistency.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I know it can be overwhelming, but you’re not in this alone. I’ve heard your stories, and I’m excited to share insights and strategies to help you move forward. Whether it's finding inspiration or knowing how to avoid the pitfalls, we’re covering it all. Ready to turn that ghosted list into a thriving community? Your comeback story starts here – let’s make it happen!
Episode Highlights

Evaluate Where You Are At [0:03:25]

The Risks of Reviving Your Email (And How to Address Them) [0:06:27]

Are You Ready to Commit to Email? [0:08:37]

How to Reengage Your Audience [0:10:54]

Crafting Your Comeback [0:13:00]

Finding What Works [0:15:35]

Templates and Resources [0:20:34]

How to Move Forward [0:21:33]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 25 Jul 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>You Ghosted Your Email List - Craft Your Comeback Strategy</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>868</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’ll share actionable steps to get your email list going again, from providing genuine value to maintaining consistency.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you ever ghosted your email list and wondered about how to make a comeback? Or if you even could! You're not alone, and I’m here to help. In this episode, I’m diving deep into the art of reengaging an inactive audience authentically and strategically. We’ll talk about why the gap happened, how to assess the situation, and, most importantly, how to craft a comeback plan that feels true to you. I’ll share actionable steps to get your email list going again, from providing genuine value to maintaining consistency.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I know it can be overwhelming, but you’re not in this alone. I’ve heard your stories, and I’m excited to share insights and strategies to help you move forward. Whether it's finding inspiration or knowing how to avoid the pitfalls, we’re covering it all. Ready to turn that ghosted list into a thriving community? Your comeback story starts here – let’s make it happen!
Episode Highlights

Evaluate Where You Are At [0:03:25]

The Risks of Reviving Your Email (And How to Address Them) [0:06:27]

Are You Ready to Commit to Email? [0:08:37]

How to Reengage Your Audience [0:10:54]

Crafting Your Comeback [0:13:00]

Finding What Works [0:15:35]

Templates and Resources [0:20:34]

How to Move Forward [0:21:33]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you ever ghosted your email list and wondered about how to make a comeback? Or if you even could! You're not alone, and I’m here to help. In this episode, I’m diving deep into the art of reengaging an inactive audience authentically and strategically. We’ll talk about why the gap happened, how to assess the situation, and, most importantly, how to craft a comeback plan that feels true to you. I’ll share actionable steps to get your email list going again, from providing genuine value to maintaining consistency.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>I know it can be overwhelming, but you’re not in this alone. I’ve heard your stories, and I’m excited to share insights and strategies to help you move forward. Whether it's finding inspiration or knowing how to avoid the pitfalls, we’re covering it all. Ready to turn that ghosted list into a thriving community? Your comeback story starts here – let’s make it happen!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Evaluate Where You Are At [0:03:25]</li>
<li>The Risks of Reviving Your Email (And How to Address Them) [0:06:27]</li>
<li>Are You Ready to Commit to Email? [0:08:37]</li>
<li>How to Reengage Your Audience [0:10:54]</li>
<li>Crafting Your Comeback [0:13:00]</li>
<li>Finding What Works [0:15:35]</li>
<li>Templates and Resources [0:20:34]</li>
<li>How to Move Forward [0:21:33]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1751</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8ad7eb32-49c7-11ef-9eab-4723ff9b4ec5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6140815556.mp3?updated=1721835849" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>867: The Latest Email Marketing Trends - Summer 2024</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-latest-email-marketing-trends-summer-2024</link>
      <description>From the incredible potential of generative AI to the allure of fully customized experiences, there are numerous innovative ways to elevate your email strategy. While I can’t predict the future, I can share what I’m seeing in the world of email marketing to help you stay ahead of the curve! By leveraging industry research, inbox analysis, and deep reflection on my own business, I’ve compiled some of the hottest trends for 2024. These insights will help you harness the power of email marketing and take your campaigns to the next level.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


If you haven’t yet considered email marketing as an opportunity for your business, this is your sign to start! Whether you're a seasoned pro or just getting started, these trends will guide you in creating engaging, relevant content for 2024 and beyond. Don't miss this opportunity to revolutionize your email marketing strategy and stand out in the ever-evolving digital landscape.
Episode Highlights:

Why Email Marketing Matters for Your Business, Even If It's Not Your Core Focus. [0:02:01] 

Unlocking the Power of Email Content. [0:08:58]

Harnessing AI Innovation while Maintaining Your Personal Touch. [0:11:58]

Trends in Mobile-First Email Design (and Why It’s So Important). [0:14:46]

Boosting List Growth Through Recommendations. [0:19:30]

How to Leverage Customization in Your Email Campaigns. [0:23:24]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Jul 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Latest Email Marketing Trends - Summer 2024</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>867</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>From the incredible potential of generative AI to the allure of fully customized experiences, there are numerous innovative ways to elevate your email strategy</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>From the incredible potential of generative AI to the allure of fully customized experiences, there are numerous innovative ways to elevate your email strategy. While I can’t predict the future, I can share what I’m seeing in the world of email marketing to help you stay ahead of the curve! By leveraging industry research, inbox analysis, and deep reflection on my own business, I’ve compiled some of the hottest trends for 2024. These insights will help you harness the power of email marketing and take your campaigns to the next level.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


If you haven’t yet considered email marketing as an opportunity for your business, this is your sign to start! Whether you're a seasoned pro or just getting started, these trends will guide you in creating engaging, relevant content for 2024 and beyond. Don't miss this opportunity to revolutionize your email marketing strategy and stand out in the ever-evolving digital landscape.
Episode Highlights:

Why Email Marketing Matters for Your Business, Even If It's Not Your Core Focus. [0:02:01] 

Unlocking the Power of Email Content. [0:08:58]

Harnessing AI Innovation while Maintaining Your Personal Touch. [0:11:58]

Trends in Mobile-First Email Design (and Why It’s So Important). [0:14:46]

Boosting List Growth Through Recommendations. [0:19:30]

How to Leverage Customization in Your Email Campaigns. [0:23:24]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>From the incredible potential of generative AI to the allure of fully customized experiences, there are numerous innovative ways to elevate your email strategy. While I can’t predict the future, I can share what I’m seeing in the world of email marketing to help you stay ahead of the curve! By leveraging industry research, inbox analysis, and deep reflection on my own business, I’ve compiled some of the hottest trends for 2024. These insights will help you harness the power of email marketing and take your campaigns to the next level.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>If you haven’t yet considered email marketing as an opportunity for your business, this is your sign to start! Whether you're a seasoned pro or just getting started, these trends will guide you in creating engaging, relevant content for 2024 and beyond. Don't miss this opportunity to revolutionize your email marketing strategy and stand out in the ever-evolving digital landscape.</p><h3>Episode Highlights:</h3><ul>
<li>Why Email Marketing Matters for Your Business, Even If It's Not Your Core Focus. [0:02:01] </li>
<li>Unlocking the Power of Email Content. [0:08:58]</li>
<li>Harnessing AI Innovation while Maintaining Your Personal Touch. [0:11:58]</li>
<li>Trends in Mobile-First Email Design (and Why It’s So Important). [0:14:46]</li>
<li>Boosting List Growth Through Recommendations. [0:19:30]</li>
<li>How to Leverage Customization in Your Email Campaigns. [0:23:24]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1931</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[187086a2-4851-11ef-bec4-b357eca081a0]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE3466991028.mp3?updated=1721670931" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>866: How to Be Funny (... even if you're not) with Lianna Patch</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-be-funny-even-if-youre-not-with-lianna-patch</link>
      <description>Writing funny copy is an excellent way to make your brand memorable and connect with customers, but it can feel pretty risky. What if it’s not actually funny? Or worse, could you end up inadvertently offending someone?
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Joining us today to set our minds at ease is Lianna Patch, a conversion copywriter and comedian whose greatest dream is to make your customers pause, smile, and click – in that order. She’s written copy for Fresh Books, Igloo, and Manly Bands, among many other delightful clients, and regularly speaks at E-commerce and software conferences around the world.
Today, we dig into how to write funny, memorable copy that sells, for your online business. In our conversation, Lianna shares practical tips and strategies she uses with her one-on-one clients for creating engaging and authentic content. Tune in to hear all her actionable advice on how to start using humor (even if it scares you), and create content that brings joy to your readers!
Episode Highlights:

The Power of Funny Copy [0:03:35]

How to Start Adding Humor to Your Copy [0:04:30]

Where to Avoid Being Funny [0:08:30]

How Manly Bands went from Matter-of-Fact to Hilarious [0:10:05]

Using Humor to Accomplish Goals [0:15:09]

How to Create Irresistible CTAs [0:16:45]

Don’t Be Afraid to Play with Language [0:20:05]

Finding Humor in Unexpected Places [0:28:19]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 18 Jul 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Be Funny (... even if you're not) with Lianna Patch</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>866</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Writing funny copy is an excellent way to make your brand memorable and connect with customers, but it can feel pretty risky. What if it’s not actually funny? Or worse, could you end up inadvertently offending someone?</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Writing funny copy is an excellent way to make your brand memorable and connect with customers, but it can feel pretty risky. What if it’s not actually funny? Or worse, could you end up inadvertently offending someone?
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Joining us today to set our minds at ease is Lianna Patch, a conversion copywriter and comedian whose greatest dream is to make your customers pause, smile, and click – in that order. She’s written copy for Fresh Books, Igloo, and Manly Bands, among many other delightful clients, and regularly speaks at E-commerce and software conferences around the world.
Today, we dig into how to write funny, memorable copy that sells, for your online business. In our conversation, Lianna shares practical tips and strategies she uses with her one-on-one clients for creating engaging and authentic content. Tune in to hear all her actionable advice on how to start using humor (even if it scares you), and create content that brings joy to your readers!
Episode Highlights:

The Power of Funny Copy [0:03:35]

How to Start Adding Humor to Your Copy [0:04:30]

Where to Avoid Being Funny [0:08:30]

How Manly Bands went from Matter-of-Fact to Hilarious [0:10:05]

Using Humor to Accomplish Goals [0:15:09]

How to Create Irresistible CTAs [0:16:45]

Don’t Be Afraid to Play with Language [0:20:05]

Finding Humor in Unexpected Places [0:28:19]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Writing funny copy is an excellent way to make your brand memorable and connect with customers, but it can feel pretty risky. What if it’s not actually funny? Or worse, could you end up inadvertently offending someone?</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Joining us today to set our minds at ease is Lianna Patch, a conversion copywriter and comedian whose greatest dream is to make your customers pause, smile, and click – in that order. She’s written copy for Fresh Books, Igloo, and Manly Bands, among many other delightful clients, and regularly speaks at E-commerce and software conferences around the world.</p><p>Today, we dig into how to write funny, memorable copy that sells, for your online business. In our conversation, Lianna shares practical tips and strategies she uses with her one-on-one clients for creating engaging and authentic content. Tune in to hear all her actionable advice on how to start using humor (even if it scares you), and create content that brings joy to your readers!</p><h3>Episode Highlights:</h3><ul>
<li>The Power of Funny Copy [0:03:35]</li>
<li>How to Start Adding Humor to Your Copy [0:04:30]</li>
<li>Where to Avoid Being Funny [0:08:30]</li>
<li>How Manly Bands went from Matter-of-Fact to Hilarious [0:10:05]</li>
<li>Using Humor to Accomplish Goals [0:15:09]</li>
<li>How to Create Irresistible CTAs [0:16:45]</li>
<li>Don’t Be Afraid to Play with Language [0:20:05]</li>
<li>Finding Humor in Unexpected Places [0:28:19]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2210</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[658793fe-4437-11ef-ad18-3f1ec61cbb46]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5644388204.mp3?updated=1721220291" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>865: The Real Reason You're Not Achieving Your Goals</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-real-reason-youre-not-achieving-your-goals</link>
      <description>Many entrepreneurs set ambitious targets but often find themselves falling short. In this episode, we explore the REAL reason why you’re not achieving your goals, unpack the underlying beliefs that might be holding you back, and provide actionable insights to help you break through these barriers.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Join me as I delve into how you might be standing in your own way and offer strategies to move your business forward in alignment with your life goals. I share key mindset shifts to help reduce the pressure and constant stress that many entrepreneurs experience as their businesses scale and the goalposts keep shifting.
Unfortunately, there is no one-size-fits-all roadmap for success, and self-doubt is often the biggest limitation. Luckily, by cultivating self-compassion, acting like the person you want to become, and focusing on small but consistent actions, you can overcome these hurdles! Tune in for some real-life examples and practical steps to help you transform your business, embrace the journey as an experiment, and start showing up as your best self today!

Episode Highlights

Reasons I’m No Longer Setting Goals for My Business. [0:02:41] 

Why There’s No Road Map for Success. [0:09:35]

Breaking Free from the Self-Sabotage Cycle. [0:15:41]

The Power of Acting like You're Already the Person You Want to Be. [0:25:10]

How Worrying about Future Potential is Slowing Your Present Momentum. [0:36:39]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 16 Jul 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Real Reason You're Not Achieving Your Goals</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>865</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Unpack the underlying beliefs that might be holding you back and get actionable insights to help you break through these barriers.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Many entrepreneurs set ambitious targets but often find themselves falling short. In this episode, we explore the REAL reason why you’re not achieving your goals, unpack the underlying beliefs that might be holding you back, and provide actionable insights to help you break through these barriers.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Join me as I delve into how you might be standing in your own way and offer strategies to move your business forward in alignment with your life goals. I share key mindset shifts to help reduce the pressure and constant stress that many entrepreneurs experience as their businesses scale and the goalposts keep shifting.
Unfortunately, there is no one-size-fits-all roadmap for success, and self-doubt is often the biggest limitation. Luckily, by cultivating self-compassion, acting like the person you want to become, and focusing on small but consistent actions, you can overcome these hurdles! Tune in for some real-life examples and practical steps to help you transform your business, embrace the journey as an experiment, and start showing up as your best self today!

Episode Highlights

Reasons I’m No Longer Setting Goals for My Business. [0:02:41] 

Why There’s No Road Map for Success. [0:09:35]

Breaking Free from the Self-Sabotage Cycle. [0:15:41]

The Power of Acting like You're Already the Person You Want to Be. [0:25:10]

How Worrying about Future Potential is Slowing Your Present Momentum. [0:36:39]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Many entrepreneurs set ambitious targets but often find themselves falling short. In this episode, we explore the REAL reason why you’re not achieving your goals, unpack the underlying beliefs that might be holding you back, and provide actionable insights to help you break through these barriers.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me as I delve into how you might be standing in your own way and offer strategies to move your business forward in alignment with your life goals. I share key mindset shifts to help reduce the pressure and constant stress that many entrepreneurs experience as their businesses scale and the goalposts keep shifting.</p><p>Unfortunately, there is no one-size-fits-all roadmap for success, and self-doubt is often the biggest limitation. Luckily, by cultivating self-compassion, acting like the person you want to become, and focusing on small but consistent actions, you can overcome these hurdles! Tune in for some real-life examples and practical steps to help you transform your business, embrace the journey as an experiment, and start showing up as your best self today!</p><h3><br></h3><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Reasons I’m No Longer Setting Goals for My Business. [0:02:41] </li>
<li>Why There’s No Road Map for Success. [0:09:35]</li>
<li>Breaking Free from the Self-Sabotage Cycle. [0:15:41]</li>
<li>The Power of Acting like You're Already the Person You Want to Be. [0:25:10]</li>
<li>How Worrying about Future Potential is Slowing Your Present Momentum. [0:36:39]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2518</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d8d9b908-42d0-11ef-a63b-a7e7c4b66fd9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5298386639.mp3?updated=1721066109" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>864: What Women Really Think about Sales with Lisa Smith</title>
      <description>Do you know what your customers really want? Or are you mostly relying on assumptions to drive your sales? In today’s episode, we are joined by Lisa Smith, Founder, CEO, and Business Growth Partner at Smith Co., where she works with female and BIPOC business owners to help them remove sales roadblocks.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


What stands out most about Lisa and how she serves her clients is her powerful, data-driven approach to figuring out what they truly need. In one of her latest studies, Lisa did more than just survey her audience; she dug deep into the mindset and potential obstacles that people encounter in sales. Lisa has also generously made this work publicly available. She is committed to seeing others benefit from this information and will continue to grow the study in years to come!
There’s a lot to unpack in today’s episode, from the fascinating results of Lisa’s study to the opportunities this represents for other business owners. Be sure to tune in as we explore what women really think about sales and discover what this means for your business!
Episode Highlights

Why 46% of Women Feel Negatively About the Word “Sales” [0:05:29]

Sales as a Service [0:07:00]

Debunking Myths About Women in Sales [0:11:11]

Carving Out Time for Sales Success [0:12:57]

How to Modernize Your Follow-Up Processes [0:20:44]

What We Know About Optimism in 2024 [0:29:31]

Lisa’s Future Surveys [0:33:03]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 11 Jul 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Women Really Think about Sales with Lisa Smith</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>864</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>The fascinating results of Lisa’s recent research study &amp; the opportunities this represents for other business owners.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Do you know what your customers really want? Or are you mostly relying on assumptions to drive your sales? In today’s episode, we are joined by Lisa Smith, Founder, CEO, and Business Growth Partner at Smith Co., where she works with female and BIPOC business owners to help them remove sales roadblocks.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


What stands out most about Lisa and how she serves her clients is her powerful, data-driven approach to figuring out what they truly need. In one of her latest studies, Lisa did more than just survey her audience; she dug deep into the mindset and potential obstacles that people encounter in sales. Lisa has also generously made this work publicly available. She is committed to seeing others benefit from this information and will continue to grow the study in years to come!
There’s a lot to unpack in today’s episode, from the fascinating results of Lisa’s study to the opportunities this represents for other business owners. Be sure to tune in as we explore what women really think about sales and discover what this means for your business!
Episode Highlights

Why 46% of Women Feel Negatively About the Word “Sales” [0:05:29]

Sales as a Service [0:07:00]

Debunking Myths About Women in Sales [0:11:11]

Carving Out Time for Sales Success [0:12:57]

How to Modernize Your Follow-Up Processes [0:20:44]

What We Know About Optimism in 2024 [0:29:31]

Lisa’s Future Surveys [0:33:03]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Do you know what your customers really want? Or are you mostly relying on assumptions to drive your sales? In today’s episode, we are joined by Lisa Smith, Founder, CEO, and Business Growth Partner at Smith Co., where she works with female and BIPOC business owners to help them remove sales roadblocks.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>What stands out most about Lisa and how she serves her clients is her powerful, data-driven approach to figuring out what they truly need. In one of her latest studies, Lisa did more than just survey her audience; she dug deep into the mindset and potential obstacles that people encounter in sales. Lisa has also generously made this work publicly available. She is committed to seeing others benefit from this information and will continue to grow the study in years to come!</p><p>There’s a lot to unpack in today’s episode, from the fascinating results of Lisa’s study to the opportunities this represents for other business owners. Be sure to tune in as we explore what women really think about sales and discover what this means for your business!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Why 46% of Women Feel Negatively About the Word “Sales” [0:05:29]</li>
<li>Sales as a Service [0:07:00]</li>
<li>Debunking Myths About Women in Sales [0:11:11]</li>
<li>Carving Out Time for Sales Success [0:12:57]</li>
<li>How to Modernize Your Follow-Up Processes [0:20:44]</li>
<li>What We Know About Optimism in 2024 [0:29:31]</li>
<li>Lisa’s Future Surveys [0:33:03]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2449</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cd403262-3e56-11ef-90c5-83a1301b1b41]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE4085049677.mp3?updated=1720573736" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>863: The Power of Pause &amp; How to Leverage it to Accelerate Your Online Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-power-of-pause-how-to-leverage-it-to-accelerate-your-online-business</link>
      <description>Today we are digging into what it really takes to reinvigorate yourself. When I am feeling creative resistance, I have a tendency to try and push through – creating an unnecessary environment of stress. When you really slow down, you have the opportunity to gain a new perspective. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I like to teach you through my own experiences so I wanted to put myself in my client's shoes. At the end of last year and the beginning of this year, I found that my clients were really resistant to showing up online and I started questioning why. I realized that the resistance largely stemmed from the fear that my clients once understood social media and now no longer do!
Episode Highlights

How Slowing Down Will Ultimately Help You Speed Up [0:10:56] 

Remember to Find Joy in Your Business [0:17:22]

How Balance Will Make Your Business Sustainable [0:26:33]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 09 Jul 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Power of Pause &amp; How to Leverage it to Accelerate Your Online Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>863</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Feeling creative resistance? Instead of pushing through it &amp; creating more stress, try slowing down and looking at things with a new perspective.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are digging into what it really takes to reinvigorate yourself. When I am feeling creative resistance, I have a tendency to try and push through – creating an unnecessary environment of stress. When you really slow down, you have the opportunity to gain a new perspective. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I like to teach you through my own experiences so I wanted to put myself in my client's shoes. At the end of last year and the beginning of this year, I found that my clients were really resistant to showing up online and I started questioning why. I realized that the resistance largely stemmed from the fear that my clients once understood social media and now no longer do!
Episode Highlights

How Slowing Down Will Ultimately Help You Speed Up [0:10:56] 

Remember to Find Joy in Your Business [0:17:22]

How Balance Will Make Your Business Sustainable [0:26:33]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are digging into what it really takes to reinvigorate yourself. When I am feeling creative resistance, I have a tendency to try and push through – creating an unnecessary environment of stress. When you really slow down, you have the opportunity to gain a new perspective. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>I like to teach you through my own experiences so I wanted to put myself in my client's shoes. At the end of last year and the beginning of this year, I found that my clients were really resistant to showing up online and I started questioning why. I realized that the resistance largely stemmed from the fear that my clients once understood social media and now no longer do!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>How Slowing Down Will Ultimately Help You Speed Up [0:10:56] </li>
<li>Remember to Find Joy in Your Business [0:17:22]</li>
<li>How Balance Will Make Your Business Sustainable [0:26:33]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2300</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b7470778-3d67-11ef-a7aa-474b97901475]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE9394890434.mp3?updated=1720471194" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>862: Get Sponsored: How to Land Iconic Brand Deals with Justin Moore</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/get-sponsored-how-to-land-iconic-brand-deals-with-justin-moore</link>
      <description>Today I’m chatting with Justin Moore, Sponsorship Coach and the Founder of Creator Wizard. It’s a school and community that teaches you how to find and negotiate your dream brand deals so that you can stop leaving thousands of dollars on the table.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


We dive into strategies to land unique brand deals that not only benefit you with sponsorship dollars, but also help you grow your business and get more clients. With these strategies you’ll ultimately impact the brands you build with as well as your company. We also talk about Justin’s origin story and how he built his brand, a strong YouTube following and even an Influencer Agency. 

Episode Highlights

Secrets to Building a Business and Growing an Audience [0:01:47] 

Justin’s Journey to Helping Others Reach Their Goals [0:05:50]

Breaking Out of the Traditional Sponsorship Model [0:08:30]

Where to Get Started If You’ve Never Been Sponsored Before [0:12:53]

How to Get Ahead by Predicting the Future [0:17:19]

The Number One Reason a Brand Will Choose You [0:17:19]

Starting Out with an Untapped Market [0:26:16]

What You Can Learn From Justin’s Story [0:31:25]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 04 Jul 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Get Sponsored: How to Land Iconic Brand Deals with Justin Moore</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>862</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Strategies to land unique brand deals that not only benefit you with sponsorship dollars, but also help you grow your business and get more clients.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today I’m chatting with Justin Moore, Sponsorship Coach and the Founder of Creator Wizard. It’s a school and community that teaches you how to find and negotiate your dream brand deals so that you can stop leaving thousands of dollars on the table.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


We dive into strategies to land unique brand deals that not only benefit you with sponsorship dollars, but also help you grow your business and get more clients. With these strategies you’ll ultimately impact the brands you build with as well as your company. We also talk about Justin’s origin story and how he built his brand, a strong YouTube following and even an Influencer Agency. 

Episode Highlights

Secrets to Building a Business and Growing an Audience [0:01:47] 

Justin’s Journey to Helping Others Reach Their Goals [0:05:50]

Breaking Out of the Traditional Sponsorship Model [0:08:30]

Where to Get Started If You’ve Never Been Sponsored Before [0:12:53]

How to Get Ahead by Predicting the Future [0:17:19]

The Number One Reason a Brand Will Choose You [0:17:19]

Starting Out with an Untapped Market [0:26:16]

What You Can Learn From Justin’s Story [0:31:25]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m chatting with Justin Moore, Sponsorship Coach and the Founder of Creator Wizard. It’s a school and community that teaches you how to find and negotiate your dream brand deals so that you can stop leaving thousands of dollars on the table.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>We dive into strategies to land unique brand deals that not only benefit you with sponsorship dollars, but also help you grow your business and get more clients. With these strategies you’ll ultimately impact the brands you build with as well as your company. We also talk about Justin’s origin story and how he built his brand, a strong YouTube following and even an Influencer Agency. </p><p><br></p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Secrets to Building a Business and Growing an Audience [0:01:47] </li>
<li>Justin’s Journey to Helping Others Reach Their Goals [0:05:50]</li>
<li>Breaking Out of the Traditional Sponsorship Model [0:08:30]</li>
<li>Where to Get Started If You’ve Never Been Sponsored Before [0:12:53]</li>
<li>How to Get Ahead by Predicting the Future [0:17:19]</li>
<li>The Number One Reason a Brand Will Choose You [0:17:19]</li>
<li>Starting Out with an Untapped Market [0:26:16]</li>
<li>What You Can Learn From Justin’s Story [0:31:25]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2453</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d2024288-33c8-11ef-a851-c79d02b80ba9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE8846617345.mp3?updated=1719414318" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>861: Will the 4-Day Work Week Become Law? Plus, Our Pilot &amp; Company Update</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/will-the-4-day-work-week-become-law-plus-our-pilot-company-update</link>
      <description>Have you been considering implementing a four-day workweek into your business but are just a little hesitant? Well, then this episode is for you! I was just as resistant to the idea of shortening the week but when I did it, I realized that you can do less and achieve more while creating an environment that honors people and their lives. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


In 1940, the 40-hour workweek law was established and has been the standard for almost all full-time employees. But it’s not necessarily the most productive method because employees don’t really need to work for that long to get things done. When I worked for someone else, I found myself finishing my work far earlier than five o’clock and I wanted to create an environment for my employees that felt more flexible and free! Today I’m telling you all about my company’s working hours, how we’ve adopted the four-hour workweek, and what research says about this new trend!
Episode Highlights

Gradually Incorporating the Four-Day Workweek into My Business. [0:02:19] 

What You Need to Know About the Research on the Four-Day Workweek. [0:17:04]

How the Four-Day Workweek is Changing Laws Around the World. [0:23:39]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 02 Jul 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Will the 4-Day Work Week Become Law? Plus, Our Pilot &amp; Company Update</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>861</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Hear about my company’s working hours, how we’ve adopted the four-hour workweek &amp; what research says about this new trend!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you been considering implementing a four-day workweek into your business but are just a little hesitant? Well, then this episode is for you! I was just as resistant to the idea of shortening the week but when I did it, I realized that you can do less and achieve more while creating an environment that honors people and their lives. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


In 1940, the 40-hour workweek law was established and has been the standard for almost all full-time employees. But it’s not necessarily the most productive method because employees don’t really need to work for that long to get things done. When I worked for someone else, I found myself finishing my work far earlier than five o’clock and I wanted to create an environment for my employees that felt more flexible and free! Today I’m telling you all about my company’s working hours, how we’ve adopted the four-hour workweek, and what research says about this new trend!
Episode Highlights

Gradually Incorporating the Four-Day Workweek into My Business. [0:02:19] 

What You Need to Know About the Research on the Four-Day Workweek. [0:17:04]

How the Four-Day Workweek is Changing Laws Around the World. [0:23:39]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you been considering implementing a four-day workweek into your business but are just a little hesitant? Well, then this episode is for you! I was just as resistant to the idea of shortening the week but when I did it, I realized that you can do less and achieve more while creating an environment that honors people and their lives. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>In 1940, the 40-hour workweek law was established and has been the standard for almost all full-time employees. But it’s not necessarily the most productive method because employees don’t really need to work for that long to get things done. When I worked for someone else, I found myself finishing my work far earlier than five o’clock and I wanted to create an environment for my employees that felt more flexible and free! Today I’m telling you all about my company’s working hours, how we’ve adopted the four-hour workweek, and what research says about this new trend!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Gradually Incorporating the Four-Day Workweek into My Business. [0:02:19] </li>
<li>What You Need to Know About the Research on the Four-Day Workweek. [0:17:04]</li>
<li>How the Four-Day Workweek is Changing Laws Around the World. [0:23:39]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2203</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d94eef10-33c2-11ef-b8a1-377059b7b00f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE9618373124.mp3?updated=1719410714" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>860: The Formula for Low-Lift Video Content with Natasha Pierre</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-formula-for-low-lift-video-content-with-natasha-pierre</link>
      <description>Video is working! It’s helping people market their business, grow their audience, and get their name out there. And by the looks of things, it’s not going anywhere anytime soon. So, how do you make video content that not only stands out but also feels effortless to create? Today, I dive into the world of low-lift video marketing – namely, how to get started, keep things simple, and draw on your repertoire – with Natasha Pierre, host of the Shine Online Podcast and a video marketing coach for small businesses.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Natasha shares her expert insights on how to start creating video content, from the power of storytelling to practical tips for staying motivated. We explore the nuances of creating engaging video content, the importance of hooks, strategies for incorporating personal touches into your brand, and much more! Natasha’s practical advice will help you build a confident video marketing strategy that grows your business and connects with your audience on a deeper level. Tune in to learn how you can incorporate video into your marketing repertoire and see long-term success!
Episode Highlights

Starting with Video: Tips for Beginners. [0:05:10]

Why You Should Create a Video Series [13:43]

How to Start Filming and Using B-Roll [18:44]

The Importance of Hooks in Video Content [0:31:28]

Engaging Your Audience: Tips and Strategies [0:35:58]

Integrating Personal Life into Your Brand [0:40:34]

Staying Motivated and Consistent in Content Creation [0:44:31]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.

Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 27 Jun 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Formula for Low-Lift Video Content with Natasha Pierre</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>860</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Build a confident video marketing strategy that grows your business and connects with your audience on a deeper level.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Video is working! It’s helping people market their business, grow their audience, and get their name out there. And by the looks of things, it’s not going anywhere anytime soon. So, how do you make video content that not only stands out but also feels effortless to create? Today, I dive into the world of low-lift video marketing – namely, how to get started, keep things simple, and draw on your repertoire – with Natasha Pierre, host of the Shine Online Podcast and a video marketing coach for small businesses.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Natasha shares her expert insights on how to start creating video content, from the power of storytelling to practical tips for staying motivated. We explore the nuances of creating engaging video content, the importance of hooks, strategies for incorporating personal touches into your brand, and much more! Natasha’s practical advice will help you build a confident video marketing strategy that grows your business and connects with your audience on a deeper level. Tune in to learn how you can incorporate video into your marketing repertoire and see long-term success!
Episode Highlights

Starting with Video: Tips for Beginners. [0:05:10]

Why You Should Create a Video Series [13:43]

How to Start Filming and Using B-Roll [18:44]

The Importance of Hooks in Video Content [0:31:28]

Engaging Your Audience: Tips and Strategies [0:35:58]

Integrating Personal Life into Your Brand [0:40:34]

Staying Motivated and Consistent in Content Creation [0:44:31]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.

Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Video is working! It’s helping people market their business, grow their audience, and get their name out there. And by the looks of things, it’s not going anywhere anytime soon. So, how do you make video content that not only stands out but also feels effortless to create? Today, I dive into the world of low-lift video marketing – namely, how to get started, keep things simple, and draw on your repertoire – with Natasha Pierre, host of the Shine Online Podcast and a video marketing coach for small businesses.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Natasha shares her expert insights on how to start creating video content, from the power of storytelling to practical tips for staying motivated. We explore the nuances of creating engaging video content, the importance of hooks, strategies for incorporating personal touches into your brand, and much more! Natasha’s practical advice will help you build a confident video marketing strategy that grows your business and connects with your audience on a deeper level. Tune in to learn how you can incorporate video into your marketing repertoire and see long-term success!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Starting with Video: Tips for Beginners. [0:05:10]</li>
<li>Why You Should Create a Video Series [13:43]</li>
<li>How to Start Filming and Using B-Roll [18:44]</li>
<li>The Importance of Hooks in Video Content [0:31:28]</li>
<li>Engaging Your Audience: Tips and Strategies [0:35:58]</li>
<li>Integrating Personal Life into Your Brand [0:40:34]</li>
<li>Staying Motivated and Consistent in Content Creation [0:44:31]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p><br></p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3126</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[04539824-330e-11ef-b6e5-93e1017e0d5a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE9866517237.mp3?updated=1719349910" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>859: Building Irresistible Offers and Why They Don’t Buy</title>
      <description>This episode is truly all about you– how you get feedback from the people you ultimately want to sell to, and how to move forward. Many of my takeaways are coming off the back of a really big launch in my business. I did an event in May that allowed me to connect with over 7,000 small business owners, serve them high value, and go through a launch process on the back end.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I’m going to talk about all the things I learned during this launch, not just what I did well or what I didn’t do well. In this episode, I want to help you identify what your next offer is going to be or potentially how to tweak an offer that already exists and make it sell even better.
Episode Highlights

What It Really Means To Make an Offer Irresistible [0:02:00] 

How to Create a Deal Without Losing Money in the Process [0:06:44]

Why I Chose To Create a Challenge (And Why You Maybe Shouldn’t) [0:09:43]

What’s Really Happening When People Choose Not to Buy From You [0:14:51]

One Way to Take Qualitative Data and Turn it Into Quantitative Data [0:21:26]

How a Survey Question Took Me By Surprise (And What I Plan to Do About It) [0:32:48]

Why It’s Simply Not Enough To Only Ask The Questions [0:38:58]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 25 Jun 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Building Irresistible Offers and Why They Don’t Buy</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>859</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Identify what your next offer is going to be or learn how to tweak an offer that already exists and make it sell even better</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This episode is truly all about you– how you get feedback from the people you ultimately want to sell to, and how to move forward. Many of my takeaways are coming off the back of a really big launch in my business. I did an event in May that allowed me to connect with over 7,000 small business owners, serve them high value, and go through a launch process on the back end.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I’m going to talk about all the things I learned during this launch, not just what I did well or what I didn’t do well. In this episode, I want to help you identify what your next offer is going to be or potentially how to tweak an offer that already exists and make it sell even better.
Episode Highlights

What It Really Means To Make an Offer Irresistible [0:02:00] 

How to Create a Deal Without Losing Money in the Process [0:06:44]

Why I Chose To Create a Challenge (And Why You Maybe Shouldn’t) [0:09:43]

What’s Really Happening When People Choose Not to Buy From You [0:14:51]

One Way to Take Qualitative Data and Turn it Into Quantitative Data [0:21:26]

How a Survey Question Took Me By Surprise (And What I Plan to Do About It) [0:32:48]

Why It’s Simply Not Enough To Only Ask The Questions [0:38:58]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This episode is truly all about you– how you get feedback from the people you ultimately want to sell to, and how to move forward. Many of my takeaways are coming off the back of a really big launch in my business. I did an event in May that allowed me to connect with over 7,000 small business owners, serve them high value, and go through a launch process on the back end.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>I’m going to talk about all the things I learned during this launch, not just what I did well or what I didn’t do well. In this episode, I want to help you identify what your next offer is going to be or potentially how to tweak an offer that already exists and make it sell even better.</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>What It Really Means To Make an Offer Irresistible [0:02:00] </li>
<li>How to Create a Deal Without Losing Money in the Process [0:06:44]</li>
<li>Why I Chose To Create a Challenge (And Why You Maybe Shouldn’t) [0:09:43]</li>
<li>What’s Really Happening When People Choose Not to Buy From You [0:14:51]</li>
<li>One Way to Take Qualitative Data and Turn it Into Quantitative Data [0:21:26]</li>
<li>How a Survey Question Took Me By Surprise (And What I Plan to Do About It) [0:32:48]</li>
<li>Why It’s Simply Not Enough To Only Ask The Questions [0:38:58]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> </a><a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2654</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0127f0b6-3249-11ef-87bf-cbe6a8afa920]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE7392139464.mp3?updated=1719248728" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>858: The Market Shift: How to Create More Predictable Income and Sustainably Scale</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-market-shift-how-to-create-more-predictable-income-and-sustainably-scale</link>
      <description>Today’s podcast is the audio version of The Market Shift workshop, which I taught live yesterday! If you’d rather also see the visual slides, register to watch the full video replay instead, and it’s my gift to you– absolutely free. I want to see you be successful, which is why I shared the exact methods I used to build the foundations of my business in this value-packed episode.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Tune in to learn more about:

THE ecosystem that represents online businesses today

How to create more predictable income and sustainably scale—regardless of where you’re starting today

The AI secrets top entrepreneurs use to stay ahead, boost productivity, and secure their future

The exact equation that’s making wealthy people wealthier so you can to steal, copy &amp; paste it before it widens the wealth gap any further


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 20 Jun 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Market Shift: How to Create More Predictable Income and Sustainably Scale</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>858</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>The exact methods I used to build the foundations of my business &amp; how you can apply these strategies to grow a business that fits your goals &amp; life</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today’s podcast is the audio version of The Market Shift workshop, which I taught live yesterday! If you’d rather also see the visual slides, register to watch the full video replay instead, and it’s my gift to you– absolutely free. I want to see you be successful, which is why I shared the exact methods I used to build the foundations of my business in this value-packed episode.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Tune in to learn more about:

THE ecosystem that represents online businesses today

How to create more predictable income and sustainably scale—regardless of where you’re starting today

The AI secrets top entrepreneurs use to stay ahead, boost productivity, and secure their future

The exact equation that’s making wealthy people wealthier so you can to steal, copy &amp; paste it before it widens the wealth gap any further


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s podcast is the audio version of The Market Shift workshop, which I taught live yesterday! If you’d rather also see the visual slides, register to <a href="https://www.creativetemplateshop.com/shift">watch the full video replay</a> instead, and it’s my gift to you– absolutely free. I want to see you be successful, which is why I shared the exact methods I used to build the foundations of my business in this value-packed episode.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><h3>Tune in to learn more about:</h3><ul>
<li>THE ecosystem that represents online businesses today</li>
<li>How to create more predictable income and sustainably scale—regardless of where you’re starting today</li>
<li>The AI secrets top entrepreneurs use to stay ahead, boost productivity, and secure their future</li>
<li>The exact equation that’s making wealthy people wealthier so you can to steal, copy &amp; paste it before it widens the wealth gap any further</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3347</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[59a519c0-2e6c-11ef-bb18-2be016c9cbb3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE4450354561.mp3?updated=1718825529" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>857: How to Get 10k Followers in Under 30 Days on TikTok in 2024</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-get-10k-followers-in-under-30-days-on-tiktok-in-2024</link>
      <description>Today I'm sharing my journey of TikTok growth. I am less than two weeks into a personal challenge I put on myself to hit 10,000 followers on TikTok in less than 30 days. I’m currently at 7,400 followers! There’s no doubt in my mind that I’ll reach 10k.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


You might be surprised to know that this account has nothing to do with business. Honestly, that’s the reason I was so resistant to doing TikTok in the first place. Sometimes, people go viral for all the wrong reasons, and that really sucks. I’ve experienced it myself. But there’s an opportunity here. I’ll talk about some of the mindset shifts I had to go through. Tune in to learn how this applies to you and your business!
Episode Highlights

TikTok Is a Way to Say Hello

How to Really Start Getting Traction on TikTok

One Thing That Really Works on TikTok (If You’re Ethically Okay With It)

How To Kill Your Ego and Reach The People Who Need You Most

Preparing Yourself For The Opinions Of Others And Moving Away From a Teacher’s Mindset

An Unexpected Strategy For Growth

Walking the Walk Instead Of Talking the Talk

The Ultimate Principle Behind Finding What Works For You


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 18 Jun 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Get 10k Followers in Under 30 Days on TikTok in 2024</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>857</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How to shift your mindset and start getting traction on TikTok so you can reach the people who need you</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today I'm sharing my journey of TikTok growth. I am less than two weeks into a personal challenge I put on myself to hit 10,000 followers on TikTok in less than 30 days. I’m currently at 7,400 followers! There’s no doubt in my mind that I’ll reach 10k.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


You might be surprised to know that this account has nothing to do with business. Honestly, that’s the reason I was so resistant to doing TikTok in the first place. Sometimes, people go viral for all the wrong reasons, and that really sucks. I’ve experienced it myself. But there’s an opportunity here. I’ll talk about some of the mindset shifts I had to go through. Tune in to learn how this applies to you and your business!
Episode Highlights

TikTok Is a Way to Say Hello

How to Really Start Getting Traction on TikTok

One Thing That Really Works on TikTok (If You’re Ethically Okay With It)

How To Kill Your Ego and Reach The People Who Need You Most

Preparing Yourself For The Opinions Of Others And Moving Away From a Teacher’s Mindset

An Unexpected Strategy For Growth

Walking the Walk Instead Of Talking the Talk

The Ultimate Principle Behind Finding What Works For You


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I'm sharing my journey of TikTok growth. I am less than two weeks into a personal challenge I put on myself to hit 10,000 followers on TikTok in less than 30 days. I’m currently at 7,400 followers! There’s no doubt in my mind that I’ll reach 10k.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>You might be surprised to know that this account has nothing to do with business. Honestly, that’s the reason I was so resistant to doing TikTok in the first place. Sometimes, people go viral for all the wrong reasons, and that really sucks. I’ve experienced it myself. But there’s an opportunity here. I’ll talk about some of the mindset shifts I had to go through. Tune in to learn how this applies to you and your business!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>TikTok Is a Way to Say Hello</li>
<li>How to Really Start Getting Traction on TikTok</li>
<li>One Thing That Really Works on TikTok (If You’re Ethically Okay With It)</li>
<li>How To Kill Your Ego and Reach The People Who Need You Most</li>
<li>Preparing Yourself For The Opinions Of Others And Moving Away From a Teacher’s Mindset</li>
<li>An Unexpected Strategy For Growth</li>
<li>Walking the Walk Instead Of Talking the Talk</li>
<li>The Ultimate Principle Behind Finding What Works For You</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> </a><a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3007</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3dca86f2-2cd4-11ef-8ff3-f3a75d59cbfb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE8398986306.mp3?updated=1718715659" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>856: From the ICU to Building a Business that is Less Reliant on You with Priya Nalli</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/from-icu-to-building-a-business-less-reliant-on-you</link>
      <description>Priya Nalli is an Entrepreneur, Business Coach, and Real Estate Team Owner. She is also a wife, mom to two kiddos, and lover of food and travel. She wears many hats, and she’s been through a lot. But she is a strong believer in creating a life that aligns with your core values. During this episode, she joins us to share her personal story of triumph and bravery.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


For any listeners going through something hard, today’s message is going to touch and inspire you. But it also might open up some wounds that aren’t yet healed. So when you listen, make sure you are in a place where you feel safe and you can express whatever it is that comes up for you.
Episode Highlights

From First-Time Struggles to Finally Finding Success

The Moment That Changed The Way Priya Operates Forever

Finding Flow Through Systems and Support

Short-Term Sacrifices For Long-Term Goals

Future-Focus and Wisdom For The Journey


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 13 Jun 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From the ICU to Building a Business that is Less Reliant on You with Priya Nalli</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>856</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Priya shares her story of triumph and bravery that will touch &amp; inspire you to create a life that aligns with your core values.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Priya Nalli is an Entrepreneur, Business Coach, and Real Estate Team Owner. She is also a wife, mom to two kiddos, and lover of food and travel. She wears many hats, and she’s been through a lot. But she is a strong believer in creating a life that aligns with your core values. During this episode, she joins us to share her personal story of triumph and bravery.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


For any listeners going through something hard, today’s message is going to touch and inspire you. But it also might open up some wounds that aren’t yet healed. So when you listen, make sure you are in a place where you feel safe and you can express whatever it is that comes up for you.
Episode Highlights

From First-Time Struggles to Finally Finding Success

The Moment That Changed The Way Priya Operates Forever

Finding Flow Through Systems and Support

Short-Term Sacrifices For Long-Term Goals

Future-Focus and Wisdom For The Journey


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Priya Nalli is an Entrepreneur, Business Coach, and Real Estate Team Owner. She is also a wife, mom to two kiddos, and lover of food and travel. She wears many hats, and she’s been through a lot. But she is a strong believer in creating a life that aligns with your core values. During this episode, she joins us to share her personal story of triumph and bravery.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>For any listeners going through something hard, today’s message is going to touch and inspire you. But it also might open up some wounds that aren’t yet healed. So when you listen, make sure you are in a place where you feel safe and you can express whatever it is that comes up for you.</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>From First-Time Struggles to Finally Finding Success</li>
<li>The Moment That Changed The Way Priya Operates Forever</li>
<li>Finding Flow Through Systems and Support</li>
<li>Short-Term Sacrifices For Long-Term Goals</li>
<li>Future-Focus and Wisdom For The Journey</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2555</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[75bf0394-28c4-11ef-a138-c786e6b8ecb6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5276959603.mp3?updated=1719249590" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>855: 7 Leadership Lessons From My Best Bosses and the Story Behind Boss Project</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/7-leadership-lessons-from-my-best-bosses-and-the-story-behind-boss-project</link>
      <description>Today, we’re talking about seven important lessons I learned from incredible bosses before I started my business. What inspired this episode is that tomorrow, I am meeting my old boss for lunch! This isn’t just any old boss, it’s my boss from my very first job right out of college. I interned with him and then ultimately became a full-time employee inside his agency which he still runs today. I’m so appreciative of the lessons I learned, not only from him, but all of the incredible bosses I had before I got here. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I totally believe corporate was not ultimately right for me and the way I want to show up and see my career morph over time. But I also know that I had incredible opportunities to learn from amazing mentors who had gone before me and done amazing things. These people have made me the strong leader that I am today because I was able to witness them being thoughtful in their position and how they stood by me and helped me to grow. I don’t think that everybody has this positive experience. 
Today, I want to focus on the lessons I learned while working for other people, and how that’s helping me to be a better leader now. When I say leader, I don’t just mean running a staff, I mean thought leader, someone who’s in charge of fostering community, and someone who is trying to put her ideas out into the world and have them be valuable to other people - tangible, actionable things that people can hold onto.
Episode Highlights

What it Means to Move Fast Towards Your MVP [0:07:08] 

The Single Most Important Thing About How You Do Business [0:10:12]

A Lesson I Didn’t Want to Learn And Why You Should Learn It Too [0:13:03]

How To Give Your People The Freedom To Get Creative [0:16:43]

Why You Should Only Present Options That You Want to Pursue [0:21:51]

Relying On Those Who Know More Than You Do [0:23:41]

What It Looks Like To Learn From The Experts [0:27:48]

The Story of Boss Project And How You Can Be A Part Of It [0:31:13]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 11 Jun 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>7 Leadership Lessons From My Best Bosses and the Story Behind Boss Project</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>855</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>lessons I learned while working for other people, and how that’s helping me to be a better leader now.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we’re talking about seven important lessons I learned from incredible bosses before I started my business. What inspired this episode is that tomorrow, I am meeting my old boss for lunch! This isn’t just any old boss, it’s my boss from my very first job right out of college. I interned with him and then ultimately became a full-time employee inside his agency which he still runs today. I’m so appreciative of the lessons I learned, not only from him, but all of the incredible bosses I had before I got here. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I totally believe corporate was not ultimately right for me and the way I want to show up and see my career morph over time. But I also know that I had incredible opportunities to learn from amazing mentors who had gone before me and done amazing things. These people have made me the strong leader that I am today because I was able to witness them being thoughtful in their position and how they stood by me and helped me to grow. I don’t think that everybody has this positive experience. 
Today, I want to focus on the lessons I learned while working for other people, and how that’s helping me to be a better leader now. When I say leader, I don’t just mean running a staff, I mean thought leader, someone who’s in charge of fostering community, and someone who is trying to put her ideas out into the world and have them be valuable to other people - tangible, actionable things that people can hold onto.
Episode Highlights

What it Means to Move Fast Towards Your MVP [0:07:08] 

The Single Most Important Thing About How You Do Business [0:10:12]

A Lesson I Didn’t Want to Learn And Why You Should Learn It Too [0:13:03]

How To Give Your People The Freedom To Get Creative [0:16:43]

Why You Should Only Present Options That You Want to Pursue [0:21:51]

Relying On Those Who Know More Than You Do [0:23:41]

What It Looks Like To Learn From The Experts [0:27:48]

The Story of Boss Project And How You Can Be A Part Of It [0:31:13]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we’re talking about seven important lessons I learned from incredible bosses before I started my business. What inspired this episode is that tomorrow, I am meeting my old boss for lunch! This isn’t just any old boss, it’s my boss from my very first job right out of college. I interned with him and then ultimately became a full-time employee inside his agency which he still runs today. I’m so appreciative of the lessons I learned, not only from him, but all of the incredible bosses I had before I got here. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>I totally believe corporate was not ultimately right for me and the way I want to show up and see my career morph over time. But I also know that I had incredible opportunities to learn from amazing mentors who had gone before me and done amazing things. These people have made me the strong leader that I am today because I was able to witness them being thoughtful in their position and how they stood by me and helped me to grow. I don’t think that everybody has this positive experience. </p><p>Today, I want to focus on the lessons I learned while working for other people, and how that’s helping me to be a better leader now. When I say leader, I don’t just mean running a staff, I mean thought leader, someone who’s in charge of fostering community, and someone who is trying to put her ideas out into the world and have them be valuable to other people - tangible, actionable things that people can hold onto.</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>What it Means to Move Fast Towards Your MVP [0:07:08] </li>
<li>The Single Most Important Thing About How You Do Business [0:10:12]</li>
<li>A Lesson I Didn’t Want to Learn And Why You Should Learn It Too [0:13:03]</li>
<li>How To Give Your People The Freedom To Get Creative [0:16:43]</li>
<li>Why You Should Only Present Options That You Want to Pursue [0:21:51]</li>
<li>Relying On Those Who Know More Than You Do [0:23:41]</li>
<li>What It Looks Like To Learn From The Experts [0:27:48]</li>
<li>The Story of Boss Project And How You Can Be A Part Of It [0:31:13]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> </a><a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2567</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[92913648-275e-11ef-a63e-53ec598bc78c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE2647058709.mp3?updated=1721234823" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>854: Testing What Sticks to Grow Your List to Millions with Rachel Miller</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/testing-what-sticks-to-grow-your-list-to-millions</link>
      <description>Rachel Miller joins Abagail today to discuss how to grow your email list to millions! Rachel is a marketing strategist who supports small businesses in growing their audiences organically. We’re digging into some simple strategies Rachel has used that have hugely impacted the overall growth of her business. Tune into this episode to be inspired to take action and be willing to make mistakes! 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!

Episode Highlights

What it Really Means to Give People a Reason to Follow You [0:04:42]

How to Optimize the Time You Take to Build Lead Magnets and Market Them [0:20:00]

Leveraging the Algorithm and the Role of AI in the Future of Online Business [0:28:27]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 06 Jun 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Testing What Sticks to Grow Your List to Millions with Rachel Miller</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>854</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’re digging into some simple strategies Rachel has used that have hugely impacted the overall growth of her business.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Rachel Miller joins Abagail today to discuss how to grow your email list to millions! Rachel is a marketing strategist who supports small businesses in growing their audiences organically. We’re digging into some simple strategies Rachel has used that have hugely impacted the overall growth of her business. Tune into this episode to be inspired to take action and be willing to make mistakes! 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!

Episode Highlights

What it Really Means to Give People a Reason to Follow You [0:04:42]

How to Optimize the Time You Take to Build Lead Magnets and Market Them [0:20:00]

Leveraging the Algorithm and the Role of AI in the Future of Online Business [0:28:27]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to bossproject.com/podcast.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Rachel Miller joins Abagail today to discuss how to grow your email list to millions! Rachel is a marketing strategist who supports small businesses in growing their audiences organically. We’re digging into some simple strategies Rachel has used that have hugely impacted the overall growth of her business. Tune into this episode to be inspired to take action and be willing to make mistakes! </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>What it Really Means to Give People a Reason to Follow You [0:04:42]</li>
<li>How to Optimize the Time You Take to Build Lead Magnets and Market Them [0:20:00]</li>
<li>Leveraging the Algorithm and the Role of AI in the Future of Online Business [0:28:27]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> </a><a href="http://bossproject.com/podcast">bossproject.com/podcast</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2642</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[555fc8ae-2351-11ef-9e7d-b36967faac56]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE2570429475.mp3?updated=1717603189" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>853: How I’d Transition from 1:1 to 1:Many if I Were Doing It Today</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-i-would-transition-from-1to1-to-1to-many-if-i-were-doing-it-today</link>
      <description>Recently, I hosted a challenge where over 6,500 participants embarked on a journey to develop their digital products in just 24 hours, from conception to launch! If you missed out, don't worry, the challenge is still open for you to join at bossproject.com/launch. After the challenge, I reached out with a survey question about what you want to hear more of on the podcast. One concern that really stood out was about breaking into the digital product world when most of your income still comes from one-to-one services.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


In response to this feedback, today’s episode is all about transitioning from one-to-one to one-to-many while still keeping that one-to-one income flowing. You’ll hear all about the ups and downs of my digital product journey, why it was worth it, and how I would make the transition if I were doing it again today. Join me as I get into all the key facets of this process, from building a community to creating effective marketing strategies for transitioning to one-to-many. 
Episode Highlights

Why You Need to Build an Audience [0:08:57] 

How to Run Your Business on the Inside Vs. the Outside [0:11:37]

How to Split Your Time When You Transition [0:14:30]

Understanding the Value of Your Work [0:24:14]

Start Now, Even If You Don’t Have It All Figured Out [0:30:30]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 04 Jun 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How I’d Transition from 1:1 to 1:Many if I Were Doing It Today</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>853</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How to break into the digital product world when most of your business income still comes from one-to-one services.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Recently, I hosted a challenge where over 6,500 participants embarked on a journey to develop their digital products in just 24 hours, from conception to launch! If you missed out, don't worry, the challenge is still open for you to join at bossproject.com/launch. After the challenge, I reached out with a survey question about what you want to hear more of on the podcast. One concern that really stood out was about breaking into the digital product world when most of your income still comes from one-to-one services.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


In response to this feedback, today’s episode is all about transitioning from one-to-one to one-to-many while still keeping that one-to-one income flowing. You’ll hear all about the ups and downs of my digital product journey, why it was worth it, and how I would make the transition if I were doing it again today. Join me as I get into all the key facets of this process, from building a community to creating effective marketing strategies for transitioning to one-to-many. 
Episode Highlights

Why You Need to Build an Audience [0:08:57] 

How to Run Your Business on the Inside Vs. the Outside [0:11:37]

How to Split Your Time When You Transition [0:14:30]

Understanding the Value of Your Work [0:24:14]

Start Now, Even If You Don’t Have It All Figured Out [0:30:30]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Recently, I hosted a challenge where over 6,500 participants embarked on a journey to develop their digital products in just 24 hours, from conception to launch! If you missed out, don't worry, the challenge is still open for you to join at<a href="http://bossproject.com/launch"> bossproject.com/launch</a>. After the challenge, I reached out with a survey question about what you want to hear more of on the podcast. One concern that really stood out was about breaking into the digital product world when most of your income still comes from one-to-one services.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>In response to this feedback, today’s episode is all about transitioning from one-to-one to one-to-many while still keeping that one-to-one income flowing. You’ll hear all about the ups and downs of my digital product journey, why it was worth it, and how I would make the transition if I were doing it again today. Join me as I get into all the key facets of this process, from building a community to creating effective marketing strategies for transitioning to one-to-many. </p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Why You Need to Build an Audience [0:08:57] </li>
<li>How to Run Your Business on the Inside Vs. the Outside [0:11:37]</li>
<li>How to Split Your Time When You Transition [0:14:30]</li>
<li>Understanding the Value of Your Work [0:24:14]</li>
<li>Start Now, Even If You Don’t Have It All Figured Out [0:30:30]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2269</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6f8b8926-21d9-11ef-903b-53cb04d76b5a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5368198970.mp3?updated=1717445476" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>852: Trusting Your Intuition, Taking Brave Action &amp; Showing Up Authentically with Khanyisa Mnyaka</title>
      <description>Today we are joined by self-love coach, TEDx speaker, author, and entrepreneur, Khanyisa Mnyaka. Khanyisa is passionate about helping individuals own their lives through her impressive understanding of the human experience. With a multitude of degrees and certifications, she is skilled at helping people overcome their limiting beliefs and people-pleasing in order to live their most authentic lives. And today she is here to help you with just that!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Khanyisa and I connected when I was inspired by a TikTok video of her discussing why her life is not a community project. I know that our community needs to hear from her because I know that so many of you struggle with imposter syndrome and feel as if you need constant validation for the work that you’re doing. But that is only the tip of the iceberg! This conversation is going to impress you so much and help you work through some things that will ultimately have a massive impact on your life and your business.
Episode Highlights

Making Decisions Scared and Distinguishing Between Indecision and Lack of Ideas

Choose Your Hard: Authenticity and Radical Love vs. the Comfort of Conforming

Your Superpower in Life is Showing Up as Yourself

Disrupt a Pattern by Changing How You Behave


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 30 May 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Trusting Your Intuition, Taking Brave Action &amp; Showing Up Authentically with Khanyisa Mnyaka</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>852</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Overcome limiting beliefs and people-pleasing in order to live your most authentic life!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are joined by self-love coach, TEDx speaker, author, and entrepreneur, Khanyisa Mnyaka. Khanyisa is passionate about helping individuals own their lives through her impressive understanding of the human experience. With a multitude of degrees and certifications, she is skilled at helping people overcome their limiting beliefs and people-pleasing in order to live their most authentic lives. And today she is here to help you with just that!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Khanyisa and I connected when I was inspired by a TikTok video of her discussing why her life is not a community project. I know that our community needs to hear from her because I know that so many of you struggle with imposter syndrome and feel as if you need constant validation for the work that you’re doing. But that is only the tip of the iceberg! This conversation is going to impress you so much and help you work through some things that will ultimately have a massive impact on your life and your business.
Episode Highlights

Making Decisions Scared and Distinguishing Between Indecision and Lack of Ideas

Choose Your Hard: Authenticity and Radical Love vs. the Comfort of Conforming

Your Superpower in Life is Showing Up as Yourself

Disrupt a Pattern by Changing How You Behave


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are joined by self-love coach, TEDx speaker, author, and entrepreneur, Khanyisa Mnyaka. Khanyisa is passionate about helping individuals own their lives through her impressive understanding of the human experience. With a multitude of degrees and certifications, she is skilled at helping people overcome their limiting beliefs and people-pleasing in order to live their most authentic lives. And today she is here to help you with just that!</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Khanyisa and I connected when I was inspired by a TikTok video of her discussing why her life is not a community project. I know that our community needs to hear from her because I know that so many of you struggle with imposter syndrome and feel as if you need constant validation for the work that you’re doing. But that is only the tip of the iceberg! This conversation is going to impress you so much and help you work through some things that will ultimately have a massive impact on your life and your business.</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Making Decisions Scared and Distinguishing Between Indecision and Lack of Ideas</li>
<li>Choose Your Hard: Authenticity and Radical Love vs. the Comfort of Conforming</li>
<li>Your Superpower in Life is Showing Up as Yourself</li>
<li>Disrupt a Pattern by Changing How You Behave</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2532</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2eb537a6-1dc6-11ef-9f8e-a71277bcef4d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE5910399655.mp3?updated=1716999990" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>851: Diversify Your Income - Part 4: Transitioning from 1:1 to 1:Many with Lauren Kay</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/diversify-your-income-part-4-transitioning-from-11-to-1many-with-lauren-kay</link>
      <description>Welcome to the fourth and final installment of our series on diversifying your income! Today we are joined by author-turned-publishing coach, Lauren Kay to talk about how she grew her business rapidly and transitioned from one-to-one offers to one-to-many. A key thing that has helped Lauren grow her business so quickly is her exceptional marketing talent. However, it’s her ability to listen to the needs of her audience and provide them with the solution they’ve been searching for that has really set her apart. Tune in today to discover the benefits of transitioning from one-to-one to one-to-many, and how you can set this process in motion!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

From Author to Educator

The Transition from One-to-One to One-to-Many

What Lauren Has Learned About Social Media

How You Can Make This Your Full-Time Career


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 28 May 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Diversify Your Income - Part 4: Transitioning from 1:1 to 1:Many with Lauren Kay</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>851</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tune in today to discover the benefits of transitioning from one-to-one to one-to-many, and how you can set this process in motion!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to the fourth and final installment of our series on diversifying your income! Today we are joined by author-turned-publishing coach, Lauren Kay to talk about how she grew her business rapidly and transitioned from one-to-one offers to one-to-many. A key thing that has helped Lauren grow her business so quickly is her exceptional marketing talent. However, it’s her ability to listen to the needs of her audience and provide them with the solution they’ve been searching for that has really set her apart. Tune in today to discover the benefits of transitioning from one-to-one to one-to-many, and how you can set this process in motion!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

From Author to Educator

The Transition from One-to-One to One-to-Many

What Lauren Has Learned About Social Media

How You Can Make This Your Full-Time Career


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to the fourth and final installment of our series on diversifying your income! Today we are joined by author-turned-publishing coach, Lauren Kay to talk about how she grew her business rapidly and transitioned from one-to-one offers to one-to-many. A key thing that has helped Lauren grow her business so quickly is her exceptional marketing talent. However, it’s her ability to listen to the needs of her audience and provide them with the solution they’ve been searching for that has really set her apart. Tune in today to discover the benefits of transitioning from one-to-one to one-to-many, and how you can set this process in motion!</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>From Author to Educator</li>
<li>The Transition from One-to-One to One-to-Many</li>
<li>What Lauren Has Learned About Social Media</li>
<li>How You Can Make This Your Full-Time Career</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2742</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f15c67e8-190c-11ef-8ae3-7bd2606a2b14]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE6023979373.mp3?updated=1716474745" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>850: How to Start a Business With ZERO Audience</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-start-a-business-with-zero-audience</link>
      <description>In today's episode, I’m sharing what you need to know about the strategy of kickstarting your business from scratch, even if you think you have no existing audience. I’ve found that we tend to underestimate our existing network. From family and friends to colleagues and acquaintances, you likely have a web of up to 1,000 connections waiting to be tapped into. You’re probably not actually starting from zero— it's just a matter of harnessing those connections to build the life and business you’re wanting.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


In reality, the size of your audience doesn't actually dictate your revenue potential. I encourage you to put yourself out there and show up authentically, despite feeling vulnerable. Fear of judgment often holds us back, but stepping into the spotlight isn't just about gaining followers— it's about creating genuine connections and building a supportive community. Shifting my focus from numbers to nurturing meaningful relationships has not only been eye-opening but also empowering, and I'm eager to share this transformative journey with you on the podcast today!

Tune in to learn how to:

Convert Strangers to Buyers With a Digital Product 

Build Your Perfect Audience

Leverage Digital Products &amp; Increase Your Audience

Use DMs to Communicate Directly With Your Followers

Balance Attracting New Followers With Nurturing Your Audience


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 23 May 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Start a Business With ZERO Audience</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>850</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>’m sharing what you need to know about the strategy of kickstarting your business from scratch, even if you think you have no existing audience. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today's episode, I’m sharing what you need to know about the strategy of kickstarting your business from scratch, even if you think you have no existing audience. I’ve found that we tend to underestimate our existing network. From family and friends to colleagues and acquaintances, you likely have a web of up to 1,000 connections waiting to be tapped into. You’re probably not actually starting from zero— it's just a matter of harnessing those connections to build the life and business you’re wanting.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses

Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


In reality, the size of your audience doesn't actually dictate your revenue potential. I encourage you to put yourself out there and show up authentically, despite feeling vulnerable. Fear of judgment often holds us back, but stepping into the spotlight isn't just about gaining followers— it's about creating genuine connections and building a supportive community. Shifting my focus from numbers to nurturing meaningful relationships has not only been eye-opening but also empowering, and I'm eager to share this transformative journey with you on the podcast today!

Tune in to learn how to:

Convert Strangers to Buyers With a Digital Product 

Build Your Perfect Audience

Leverage Digital Products &amp; Increase Your Audience

Use DMs to Communicate Directly With Your Followers

Balance Attracting New Followers With Nurturing Your Audience


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today's episode, I’m sharing what you need to know about the strategy of kickstarting your business from scratch, even if you think you have no existing audience. I’ve found that we tend to underestimate our existing network. From family and friends to colleagues and acquaintances, you likely have a web of up to 1,000 connections waiting to be tapped into. You’re probably not actually starting from zero— it's just a matter of harnessing those connections to build the life and business you’re wanting.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3><br></h3><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>In reality, the size of your audience doesn't actually dictate your revenue potential. I encourage you to put yourself out there and show up authentically, despite feeling vulnerable. Fear of judgment often holds us back, but stepping into the spotlight isn't just about gaining followers— it's about creating genuine connections and building a supportive community. Shifting my focus from numbers to nurturing meaningful relationships has not only been eye-opening but also empowering, and I'm eager to share this transformative journey with you on the podcast today!</p><h3><br></h3><h3>Tune in to learn how to:</h3><ul>
<li>Convert Strangers to Buyers With a Digital Product </li>
<li>Build Your Perfect Audience</li>
<li>Leverage Digital Products &amp; Increase Your Audience</li>
<li>Use DMs to Communicate Directly With Your Followers</li>
<li>Balance Attracting New Followers With Nurturing Your Audience</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2712</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a763662a-1789-11ef-8cea-b7ad8f185003]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE2592681779.mp3?updated=1716307071" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>849: Diversify Your Income - Part 3: Adding a Digital Product or Course to Your Offer Lineup with Melodee Fiske</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/diversify-your-income-part-3-adding-a-digital-product-or-course-to-your-offer-lineup</link>
      <description>Welcome to part three of our four-part series on diversifying your income! If you haven’t checked out the past two episodes, go back and give them a listen. In part one, we dove into what you need to know before you add new income streams, and in part two, we learned how to leverage where you are to get to where you want to go. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


In today’s episode I’m sitting down with Melodee Fiske, a second-grade teacher turned food photographer, who went on to use her experience to educate others on how to build their own successful food photography company! Like other creators I‘ve interviewed, Melodee started by answering questions that were coming from the people around her. During that time, she balanced building her photography client base and sharing knowledge one-on-one before finally turning that knowledge into a course.
Tune in to hear about Melodee’s journey managing this transition, and find out where the tipping point lies between maintaining that balance and going all in on teaching. This episode was sponsored by Teachable.
Episode Highlights

From Teaching Second Grade to Food Photography [0:03:51]

How Sharing Her Knowledge Snowballed Melodee’s Career [0:10:29]

Finding Her ‘Why’ by Changing Careers [0:16:47]

What it’s Really Like to Balance Your Business with Teaching [0:20:11]

The Most Challenging Part of Launching a Course [0:24:59]

What Melodee Wishes She Had Known From the Start [0:32:17]

Key Advice For Anyone Who Wants To Create a Course or Start Teaching [0:37:31]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 21 May 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Diversify Your Income - Part 3: Adding a Digital Product or Course to Your Offer Lineup with Melodee Fiske</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>849</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Melodee Fiske, a second-grade teacher turned food photographer, used her experience to educate others on how to build their own successful food photography company!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to part three of our four-part series on diversifying your income! If you haven’t checked out the past two episodes, go back and give them a listen. In part one, we dove into what you need to know before you add new income streams, and in part two, we learned how to leverage where you are to get to where you want to go. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


In today’s episode I’m sitting down with Melodee Fiske, a second-grade teacher turned food photographer, who went on to use her experience to educate others on how to build their own successful food photography company! Like other creators I‘ve interviewed, Melodee started by answering questions that were coming from the people around her. During that time, she balanced building her photography client base and sharing knowledge one-on-one before finally turning that knowledge into a course.
Tune in to hear about Melodee’s journey managing this transition, and find out where the tipping point lies between maintaining that balance and going all in on teaching. This episode was sponsored by Teachable.
Episode Highlights

From Teaching Second Grade to Food Photography [0:03:51]

How Sharing Her Knowledge Snowballed Melodee’s Career [0:10:29]

Finding Her ‘Why’ by Changing Careers [0:16:47]

What it’s Really Like to Balance Your Business with Teaching [0:20:11]

The Most Challenging Part of Launching a Course [0:24:59]

What Melodee Wishes She Had Known From the Start [0:32:17]

Key Advice For Anyone Who Wants To Create a Course or Start Teaching [0:37:31]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to part three of our four-part series on diversifying your income! If you haven’t checked out the past two episodes, go back and give them a listen. In part one, we dove into what you need to know before you add new income streams, and in part two, we learned how to leverage where you are to get to where you want to go. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>In today’s episode I’m sitting down with Melodee Fiske, a second-grade teacher turned food photographer, who went on to use her experience to educate others on how to build their own successful food photography company! Like other creators I‘ve interviewed, Melodee started by answering questions that were coming from the people around her. During that time, she balanced building her photography client base and sharing knowledge one-on-one before finally turning that knowledge into a course.</p><p>Tune in to hear about Melodee’s journey managing this transition, and find out where the tipping point lies between maintaining that balance and going all in on teaching. This episode was sponsored by Teachable.</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>From Teaching Second Grade to Food Photography [0:03:51]</li>
<li>How Sharing Her Knowledge Snowballed Melodee’s Career [0:10:29]</li>
<li>Finding Her ‘Why’ by Changing Careers [0:16:47]</li>
<li>What it’s Really Like to Balance Your Business with Teaching [0:20:11]</li>
<li>The Most Challenging Part of Launching a Course [0:24:59]</li>
<li>What Melodee Wishes She Had Known From the Start [0:32:17]</li>
<li>Key Advice For Anyone Who Wants To Create a Course or Start Teaching [0:37:31]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2720</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[bc111104-16d9-11ef-a777-4f8cfbb5dd3c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/OOANE1670527585.mp3?updated=1716231715" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>848: Unstuck - Part 2: The Marketing &amp; Tech Preventing You From Launching Your Digital Product</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/unstuck-part-2-the-marketing-tech-preventing-you-from-launching-your-digital-product</link>
      <description>This episode forms part two of a series on obstacles that are preventing you from launching your first or next digital product. Listen to them in either order. It’s totally up to you. Part one was mostly about the fear, worry, and time involved in launching your product. This time, we’re mostly talking about marketing and tech. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

Where to Begin When You Don’t Know How to Build What You Need [0:01:34] 

What to Do When You Don’t Have an Existing Audience to Sell To [0:02:42]

How to Make Your Digital Product Look Professional and Polished [0:07:35]

One Way to Choose Which Idea to Actually Move Forward With [0:10:29]

When You Shouldn’t Move Ahead With Your Digital Product (Yet) [0:14:10]

So You’re Not a Tech Person, What Now? [0:18:20]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 May 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Unstuck - Part 2: The Marketing &amp; Tech Preventing You From Launching Your Digital Product</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>848</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Where to begin when you don't know how to build what you need, how to make your digital product look professional and so much more!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This episode forms part two of a series on obstacles that are preventing you from launching your first or next digital product. Listen to them in either order. It’s totally up to you. Part one was mostly about the fear, worry, and time involved in launching your product. This time, we’re mostly talking about marketing and tech. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Episode Highlights

Where to Begin When You Don’t Know How to Build What You Need [0:01:34] 

What to Do When You Don’t Have an Existing Audience to Sell To [0:02:42]

How to Make Your Digital Product Look Professional and Polished [0:07:35]

One Way to Choose Which Idea to Actually Move Forward With [0:10:29]

When You Shouldn’t Move Ahead With Your Digital Product (Yet) [0:14:10]

So You’re Not a Tech Person, What Now? [0:18:20]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This episode forms part two of a series on obstacles that are preventing you from launching your first or next digital product. Listen to them in either order. It’s totally up to you. Part one was mostly about the fear, worry, and time involved in launching your product. This time, we’re mostly talking about marketing and tech. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Where to Begin When You Don’t Know How to Build What You Need [0:01:34] </li>
<li>What to Do When You Don’t Have an Existing Audience to Sell To [0:02:42]</li>
<li>How to Make Your Digital Product Look Professional and Polished [0:07:35]</li>
<li>One Way to Choose Which Idea to Actually Move Forward With [0:10:29]</li>
<li>When You Shouldn’t Move Ahead With Your Digital Product (Yet) [0:14:10]</li>
<li>So You’re Not a Tech Person, What Now? [0:18:20]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1412</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a768657e-12c7-11ef-8c32-eb4e1f25be94]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1237921721.mp3?updated=1715784171" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>847: Diversify Your Income - Part 2: How to Leverage Where You’re At Instead of Starting Over with Shakeemah Smith</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/diversify-your-income-part-2-how-to-leverage-where-youre-at-instead-of-starting-over</link>
      <description>Today we get into part two of our four-part series on diversifying your income! Joining us today is solo traveler turned travel expert, Shakeemah Smith. In 2015, she created her course, Travel Like a Bawse, and since then, she has taught over 2000 women in eleven countries how to master the art of solo travel. Even though her professional background wasn’t in the travel industry, she was able to pull from personal experiences to give people the knowledge they were craving. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Each and every one of us has a huge opportunity to take the experiences we've had in our lives, be it personal or professional, and transform that knowledge into something teachable that people are eager to learn. Creating digital products may feel like starting over, but it’s important to remember that we all carry with us the wisdom and experiences that brought us to this point. I want you to take a step back and think about what got you to where you are today. What lessons have you learned? What would you do differently if starting anew? What would you skip? Chances are, you’ll find you have a lot more knowledge than you think.
Join me today as I talk with Shakeemah about how she took her knowledge and built a thriving business from it. Discover how Shakeemah approached the shift in her career, not as a total overhaul, but as a starting point to build on all the knowledge and experience she already had!
Episode Highlights

From Investigator to Traveler, to Course Creator [0:03:55]

Evolving Your Digital Products [0:07:02]

What Happened When The Pandemic Hit [0:11:52]

Unpredictability and The Challenges of Entrepreneurship [0:16:34]

Why You Have What It Takes To Succeed [0:19:37]

How to Leverage Where You Are At Instead of Starting Over [0:24:23]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 May 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Diversify Your Income - Part 2: How to Leverage Where You’re At Instead of Starting Over with Shakeemah Smith</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>847</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Even though her professional background wasn’t in the travel industry, she was able to pull from personal experiences to give people the knowledge they were craving. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we get into part two of our four-part series on diversifying your income! Joining us today is solo traveler turned travel expert, Shakeemah Smith. In 2015, she created her course, Travel Like a Bawse, and since then, she has taught over 2000 women in eleven countries how to master the art of solo travel. Even though her professional background wasn’t in the travel industry, she was able to pull from personal experiences to give people the knowledge they were craving. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Each and every one of us has a huge opportunity to take the experiences we've had in our lives, be it personal or professional, and transform that knowledge into something teachable that people are eager to learn. Creating digital products may feel like starting over, but it’s important to remember that we all carry with us the wisdom and experiences that brought us to this point. I want you to take a step back and think about what got you to where you are today. What lessons have you learned? What would you do differently if starting anew? What would you skip? Chances are, you’ll find you have a lot more knowledge than you think.
Join me today as I talk with Shakeemah about how she took her knowledge and built a thriving business from it. Discover how Shakeemah approached the shift in her career, not as a total overhaul, but as a starting point to build on all the knowledge and experience she already had!
Episode Highlights

From Investigator to Traveler, to Course Creator [0:03:55]

Evolving Your Digital Products [0:07:02]

What Happened When The Pandemic Hit [0:11:52]

Unpredictability and The Challenges of Entrepreneurship [0:16:34]

Why You Have What It Takes To Succeed [0:19:37]

How to Leverage Where You Are At Instead of Starting Over [0:24:23]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we get into part two of our four-part series on diversifying your income! Joining us today is solo traveler turned travel expert, Shakeemah Smith. In 2015, she created her course, Travel Like a Bawse, and since then, she has taught over 2000 women in eleven countries how to master the art of solo travel. Even though her professional background wasn’t in the travel industry, she was able to pull from personal experiences to give people the knowledge they were craving. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Each and every one of us has a huge opportunity to take the experiences we've had in our lives, be it personal or professional, and transform that knowledge into something teachable that people are eager to learn. Creating digital products may feel like starting over, but it’s important to remember that we all carry with us the wisdom and experiences that brought us to this point. I want you to take a step back and think about what got you to where you are today. What lessons have you learned? What would you do differently if starting anew? What would you skip? Chances are, you’ll find you have a lot more knowledge than you think.</p><p>Join me today as I talk with Shakeemah about how she took her knowledge and built a thriving business from it. Discover how Shakeemah approached the shift in her career, not as a total overhaul, but as a starting point to build on all the knowledge and experience she already had!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>From Investigator to Traveler, to Course Creator [0:03:55]</li>
<li>Evolving Your Digital Products [0:07:02]</li>
<li>What Happened When The Pandemic Hit [0:11:52]</li>
<li>Unpredictability and The Challenges of Entrepreneurship [0:16:34]</li>
<li>Why You Have What It Takes To Succeed [0:19:37]</li>
<li>How to Leverage Where You Are At Instead of Starting Over [0:24:23]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2352</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9d7d3f88-1157-11ef-8504-2f51dc80c91b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1287280883.mp3?updated=1715626324" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>846: Unstuck - Part 1: The Fear, Worry &amp; Time Preventing You From Launching Your Digital Product</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/unstuck-part-1-the-fear-worry-time-preventing-you-from-launching-your-digital-product</link>
      <description>Right now, you have free opportunities to be seen by an organic audience and get free traffic to your offers from people all over the globe. What a time to be alive! What an incredible chance to grow your business! Today's episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast is part one of a two-part miniseries that covers the obstacles that might be preventing you from launching your next (or even your first) digital product. 

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


This miniseries was developed in conjunction with Digital Product Fast Track, a free challenge to take you from idea to launch in just one day! Sign up at bossproject.com/launch and tune in today to learn about the fear and the worry that often creep in and the time it takes to get your product launched. 

Episode Highlights

How to Overcome the Overwhelm that Comes with Launching 

Why Visibility is So Scary (and Why You Should Do it Anyway!) 

One Way to Take All the Pressure Off Your Product

What it Really Means to Serve a Past Version of You

The Unexpected Way You Can Create the Time You Need


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 09 May 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Unstuck - Part 1: The Fear, Worry &amp; Time Preventing You From Launching Your Digital Product</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>846</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tune in today to learn about the fear and the worry that often creep in and the time it takes to get your product launched. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Right now, you have free opportunities to be seen by an organic audience and get free traffic to your offers from people all over the globe. What a time to be alive! What an incredible chance to grow your business! Today's episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast is part one of a two-part miniseries that covers the obstacles that might be preventing you from launching your next (or even your first) digital product. 

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


This miniseries was developed in conjunction with Digital Product Fast Track, a free challenge to take you from idea to launch in just one day! Sign up at bossproject.com/launch and tune in today to learn about the fear and the worry that often creep in and the time it takes to get your product launched. 

Episode Highlights

How to Overcome the Overwhelm that Comes with Launching 

Why Visibility is So Scary (and Why You Should Do it Anyway!) 

One Way to Take All the Pressure Off Your Product

What it Really Means to Serve a Past Version of You

The Unexpected Way You Can Create the Time You Need


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Right now, you have free opportunities to be seen by an organic audience and get free traffic to your offers from people all over the globe. What a time to be alive! What an incredible chance to grow your business! Today's episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast is part one of a two-part miniseries that covers the obstacles that might be preventing you from launching your next (or even your first) digital product. </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>This miniseries was developed in conjunction with Digital Product Fast Track, a free challenge to take you from idea to launch in just one day! Sign up at<a href="http://bossproject.com/launch"> bossproject.com/launch</a> and tune in today to learn about the fear and the worry that often creep in and the time it takes to get your product launched. </p><p><br></p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>How to Overcome the Overwhelm that Comes with Launching </li>
<li>Why Visibility is So Scary (and Why You Should Do it Anyway!) </li>
<li>One Way to Take All the Pressure Off Your Product</li>
<li>What it Really Means to Serve a Past Version of You</li>
<li>The Unexpected Way You Can Create the Time You Need</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2157</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b37ddb9c-0d44-11ef-a631-77445daf56a1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6848786392.mp3?updated=1715178163" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>845: Diversify Your Income - Part 1: What to Consider Before You Add New Income Streams with Dara Denney</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/diversify-your-income-part-1-consider-before-you-add-new-income-streams</link>
      <description>Welcome to the first chapter in our four-part series on diversifying your income, sponsored by Teachable! In these episodes, I’ll be speaking with a range of creators, each of whom has successfully built their own businesses by sharing their expertise with the world.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


For today’s conversation, I am joined by the wonderful Dara Denney, a performance creative expert who works with direct-to-consumer (DTC) eCommerce brands on their paid social advertising. More specifically, she creates video ads for some of your favorite brands! She is also a content creator and every week she launches an episode on her YouTube channel where she shares her insights on paid social advertising. She is currently the Director of Performance Creative at Thesis, a conversion rate optimization company. 
Over the past year, Dara transitioned from agency work to consulting and launched her very first course. That initial launch earned over 50,000 dollars! Her journey is remarkable and inspiring, but that doesn’t mean she didn’t make her fair share of mistakes. Dara tells us about the many instances where she made the process more complicated than it needed to be, and what she would do differently the next time round. Tune in to learn how Dara created a business built on sharing her expertise and why she wishes she had started sooner! 
To support your journey, I’ve built a one-day challenge to take you from idea concept to launch in just one day, so that you can confidently create your next (or first!) digital product. You can learn more and sign up for free at boss bossproject.com/launch to grab that spot!

Episode Highlights

Why You Should Diversify Your Income [0:01:49]

Why Dara Started Her Business [0:22:53] 

How Dara Overcame Her Reservations About Selling Courses [0:30:31]

Dara’s First Launch [0:36:41]

You Don’t Need to Create Your Course on Hard Mode [0:46:29]

How Teachable Can Support You [0:53:39]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 07 May 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Diversify Your Income - Part 1: What to Consider Before You Add New Income Streams with Dara Denney</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>845</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Dara tells us about the many instances where she made the process more complicated than it needed to be, and what she would do differently the next time round.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to the first chapter in our four-part series on diversifying your income, sponsored by Teachable! In these episodes, I’ll be speaking with a range of creators, each of whom has successfully built their own businesses by sharing their expertise with the world.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


For today’s conversation, I am joined by the wonderful Dara Denney, a performance creative expert who works with direct-to-consumer (DTC) eCommerce brands on their paid social advertising. More specifically, she creates video ads for some of your favorite brands! She is also a content creator and every week she launches an episode on her YouTube channel where she shares her insights on paid social advertising. She is currently the Director of Performance Creative at Thesis, a conversion rate optimization company. 
Over the past year, Dara transitioned from agency work to consulting and launched her very first course. That initial launch earned over 50,000 dollars! Her journey is remarkable and inspiring, but that doesn’t mean she didn’t make her fair share of mistakes. Dara tells us about the many instances where she made the process more complicated than it needed to be, and what she would do differently the next time round. Tune in to learn how Dara created a business built on sharing her expertise and why she wishes she had started sooner! 
To support your journey, I’ve built a one-day challenge to take you from idea concept to launch in just one day, so that you can confidently create your next (or first!) digital product. You can learn more and sign up for free at boss bossproject.com/launch to grab that spot!

Episode Highlights

Why You Should Diversify Your Income [0:01:49]

Why Dara Started Her Business [0:22:53] 

How Dara Overcame Her Reservations About Selling Courses [0:30:31]

Dara’s First Launch [0:36:41]

You Don’t Need to Create Your Course on Hard Mode [0:46:29]

How Teachable Can Support You [0:53:39]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to the first chapter in our four-part series on diversifying your income, sponsored by Teachable! In these episodes, I’ll be speaking with a range of creators, each of whom has successfully built their own businesses by sharing their expertise with the world.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>For today’s conversation, I am joined by the wonderful Dara Denney, a performance creative expert who works with direct-to-consumer (DTC) eCommerce brands on their paid social advertising. More specifically, she creates video ads for some of your favorite brands! She is also a content creator and every week she launches an episode on her YouTube channel where she shares her insights on paid social advertising. She is currently the Director of Performance Creative at Thesis, a conversion rate optimization company. </p><p>Over the past year, Dara transitioned from agency work to consulting and launched her very first course. That initial launch earned over 50,000 dollars! Her journey is remarkable and inspiring, but that doesn’t mean she didn’t make her fair share of mistakes. Dara tells us about the many instances where she made the process more complicated than it needed to be, and what she would do differently the next time round. Tune in to learn how Dara created a business built on sharing her expertise and why she wishes she had started sooner! </p><p>To support your journey, I’ve built a one-day challenge to take you from idea concept to launch in just one day, so that you can confidently create your next (or first!) digital product. You can learn more and sign up for free at boss<a href="http://bossproject.com/launch"> bossproject.com/launch</a> to grab that spot!</p><p><br></p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Why You Should Diversify Your Income [0:01:49]</li>
<li>Why Dara Started Her Business [0:22:53] </li>
<li>How Dara Overcame Her Reservations About Selling Courses [0:30:31]</li>
<li>Dara’s First Launch [0:36:41]</li>
<li>You Don’t Need to Create Your Course on Hard Mode [0:46:29]</li>
<li>How Teachable Can Support You [0:53:39]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3804</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dc4507a8-0bdc-11ef-bfd6-bfd90dd3b3fd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8881991594.mp3?updated=1715024965" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>844: How I got 4587 New Email Subscribers in Less than 4 Months</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-i-got-4587-new-email-subscribers-in-less-than-4-months</link>
      <description>Today I’m sharing the strategy of how I got those people on the list, what’s working, what you should be paying attention to, and what it means for you and your business. An email list is incredibly important to your business because it will allow you to reach your audience more consistently and it’s something that you actually own, unlike your social media followers. Email lists are a long-term strategy that adds to the stability of your business. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


In the past, I have avoided talking about email lists because I worry that they can become too much of a distraction. Utilizing a list will get you sales but if you are so focused on marketing to bring people onto the list instead of focusing on actual, tangible sales. I’m pretty confident that the majority of these new email subscribers came from seven different kinds of activities that I was doing in my business to attract those leads. I’m having a significant increase this year – way more so than in 2023 because of my focus on visibility. So, let’s dig into how I managed to do it! 
Episode Highlights

Utilizing Old Training Programs to Attract Quality Leads [0:08:40] 

Keeping Up with Trends (When You Feel Inspired to!) [0:10:02]

The Number One Way I Want You to Start Building Your Email List [0:11:50]

How Refreshing Old Content Can Bring You Leads Today [0:13:38]

Working Backwards to Gain Better Insight into Your Clients [0:16:37]

The One Thing that Surprised Me the Most When I Started My Program [0:18:34]

The Power of a Generic Sign-Up [0:23:13]

Using Activation to Add to Your Email List [0:24:35]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 02 May 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How I got 4587 New Email Subscribers in Less than 4 Months</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>844</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Email lists are a long-term strategy that adds to the stability of your business. Hear the strategy of how I got those people on the list, what’s working &amp; what you should be paying attention to.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today I’m sharing the strategy of how I got those people on the list, what’s working, what you should be paying attention to, and what it means for you and your business. An email list is incredibly important to your business because it will allow you to reach your audience more consistently and it’s something that you actually own, unlike your social media followers. Email lists are a long-term strategy that adds to the stability of your business. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


In the past, I have avoided talking about email lists because I worry that they can become too much of a distraction. Utilizing a list will get you sales but if you are so focused on marketing to bring people onto the list instead of focusing on actual, tangible sales. I’m pretty confident that the majority of these new email subscribers came from seven different kinds of activities that I was doing in my business to attract those leads. I’m having a significant increase this year – way more so than in 2023 because of my focus on visibility. So, let’s dig into how I managed to do it! 
Episode Highlights

Utilizing Old Training Programs to Attract Quality Leads [0:08:40] 

Keeping Up with Trends (When You Feel Inspired to!) [0:10:02]

The Number One Way I Want You to Start Building Your Email List [0:11:50]

How Refreshing Old Content Can Bring You Leads Today [0:13:38]

Working Backwards to Gain Better Insight into Your Clients [0:16:37]

The One Thing that Surprised Me the Most When I Started My Program [0:18:34]

The Power of a Generic Sign-Up [0:23:13]

Using Activation to Add to Your Email List [0:24:35]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m sharing the strategy of how I got those people on the list, what’s working, what you should be paying attention to, and what it means for you and your business. An email list is incredibly important to your business because it will allow you to reach your audience more consistently and it’s something that you actually own, unlike your social media followers. Email lists are a long-term strategy that adds to the stability of your business. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>In the past, I have avoided talking about email lists because I worry that they can become too much of a distraction. Utilizing a list will get you sales but if you are so focused on marketing to bring people onto the list instead of focusing on actual, tangible sales. I’m pretty confident that the majority of these new email subscribers came from seven different kinds of activities that I was doing in my business to attract those leads. I’m having a significant increase this year – way more so than in 2023 because of my focus on visibility. So, let’s dig into how I managed to do it! </p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Utilizing Old Training Programs to Attract Quality Leads [0:08:40] </li>
<li>Keeping Up with Trends (When You Feel Inspired to!) [0:10:02]</li>
<li>The Number One Way I Want You to Start Building Your Email List [0:11:50]</li>
<li>How Refreshing Old Content Can Bring You Leads Today [0:13:38]</li>
<li>Working Backwards to Gain Better Insight into Your Clients [0:16:37]</li>
<li>The One Thing that Surprised Me the Most When I Started My Program [0:18:34]</li>
<li>The Power of a Generic Sign-Up [0:23:13]</li>
<li>Using Activation to Add to Your Email List [0:24:35]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2417</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[837ffc80-07f0-11ef-8c6d-bf6ce83bee57]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4123864534.mp3?updated=1714592512" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>843: [PEP TALK] One-Day Launch: Digital Product Fast Track</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/pep-talk-one-day-launch-digital-product-fast-track</link>
      <description>If you get one thing out of the pep talk I’m about to give you, it’s this. The decisions that you make today are not ones that you are marrying forever. Regardless of what you launch, you have an opportunity. Whatever you put out into the world, whether it works or it doesn’t, is an opportunity to learn. The world is going to tell you something! And you get to listen. As business owners, we often don’t slow down and listen to this nearly as often as we should. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Not everything I have done so far has worked, and I am okay with that! I often learn more from the moments that I would deem as a failure. Today, I don’t want you to focus on what could be the most shareable digital product or what would be the most trendy thing; instead, focus on how to solve a whole problem. A template, a script, a guide, or anything designed to make a real difference. The more concrete results you can get for a client, the more they will assign value to you and your business.
Episode Highlights

The Story of An Early Failure That You Can Learn From

How I Came Back From One of the Biggest Flops Ever

What You Can Learn From My First Ever Launch

A One-Step-At-A-Time Approach To Doing All the Things Your Heart Desires 


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 30 Apr 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>[PEP TALK] One-Day Launch: Digital Product Fast Track</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>843</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>The decisions that you make today are not ones that you are marrying forever. Regardless of what you launch, you have an opportunity. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you get one thing out of the pep talk I’m about to give you, it’s this. The decisions that you make today are not ones that you are marrying forever. Regardless of what you launch, you have an opportunity. Whatever you put out into the world, whether it works or it doesn’t, is an opportunity to learn. The world is going to tell you something! And you get to listen. As business owners, we often don’t slow down and listen to this nearly as often as we should. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Not everything I have done so far has worked, and I am okay with that! I often learn more from the moments that I would deem as a failure. Today, I don’t want you to focus on what could be the most shareable digital product or what would be the most trendy thing; instead, focus on how to solve a whole problem. A template, a script, a guide, or anything designed to make a real difference. The more concrete results you can get for a client, the more they will assign value to you and your business.
Episode Highlights

The Story of An Early Failure That You Can Learn From

How I Came Back From One of the Biggest Flops Ever

What You Can Learn From My First Ever Launch

A One-Step-At-A-Time Approach To Doing All the Things Your Heart Desires 


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you get one thing out of the pep talk I’m about to give you, it’s this. The decisions that you make today are not ones that you are marrying forever. Regardless of what you launch, you have an opportunity. Whatever you put out into the world, whether it works or it doesn’t, is an opportunity to learn. The world is going to tell you something! And you get to listen. As business owners, we often don’t slow down and listen to this nearly as often as we should. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Not everything I have done so far has worked, and I am okay with that! I often learn more from the moments that I would deem as a failure. Today, I don’t want you to focus on what could be the most shareable digital product or what would be the most trendy thing; instead, focus on how to solve a whole problem. A template, a script, a guide, or anything designed to make a real difference. The more concrete results you can get for a client, the more they will assign value to you and your business.</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>The Story of An Early Failure That You Can Learn From</li>
<li>How I Came Back From One of the Biggest Flops Ever</li>
<li>What You Can Learn From My First Ever Launch</li>
<li>A One-Step-At-A-Time Approach To Doing All the Things Your Heart Desires </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1885</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[09afe66e-0641-11ef-9fb9-cf0edc4c31be]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7116918191.mp3?updated=1714406817" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>842: How I Got 364 FREE Leads From One Instagram Reel in Less Than 24 Hours</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-i-got-364-free-leads-from-one-instagram-reel-in-less-than-24-hours</link>
      <description>Today, I want to tell you about the process that helped me create an Instagram Reel that got me 364 free leads in under 24 hours. A Reel that has since gone on to generate more than 771 leads, and counting. Even I’m still struggling to grasp how this happened!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I'm not here to claim that I've cracked some universal marketing code or boast about one simple trick that will get you unbelievable results. Yes, what I did was incredibly simple and yielded exceptional results, but it wasn’t where I started and it’s not what made this work. It took several months of strategic planning, brainstorming, and taking action before things took off the way that they did. That’s why I’m using today’s episode to tell the full story of how I got here, and how you can take the next step in building your list of dream clients. Let’s get into it!
Episode Highlights

Helping Small Business Owners Become Financially Free [0:05:21]

How I Discovered What My Clients Needed [0:08:21]

Where The Majority of My Leads and Growth Came From [0:10:59]

The Biggest Sticking Point For My Clients [0:13:23]

How I Helped My Clients Get Over Their Biggest Hurdle [0:14:40]

Staying Focused [0:18:23]

Why My Post Generated So Much Engagement [0:19:51]

One Day Launch: Digital Product Fast Track [0:27:01]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 25 Apr 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How I Got 364 FREE Leads From One Instagram Reel in Less Than 24 Hours</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>842</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle> It took several months of strategic planning, brainstorming, and taking action before things took off the way that they did. Learn how you can take the next step in building your list of dream clients!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, I want to tell you about the process that helped me create an Instagram Reel that got me 364 free leads in under 24 hours. A Reel that has since gone on to generate more than 771 leads, and counting. Even I’m still struggling to grasp how this happened!
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


I'm not here to claim that I've cracked some universal marketing code or boast about one simple trick that will get you unbelievable results. Yes, what I did was incredibly simple and yielded exceptional results, but it wasn’t where I started and it’s not what made this work. It took several months of strategic planning, brainstorming, and taking action before things took off the way that they did. That’s why I’m using today’s episode to tell the full story of how I got here, and how you can take the next step in building your list of dream clients. Let’s get into it!
Episode Highlights

Helping Small Business Owners Become Financially Free [0:05:21]

How I Discovered What My Clients Needed [0:08:21]

Where The Majority of My Leads and Growth Came From [0:10:59]

The Biggest Sticking Point For My Clients [0:13:23]

How I Helped My Clients Get Over Their Biggest Hurdle [0:14:40]

Staying Focused [0:18:23]

Why My Post Generated So Much Engagement [0:19:51]

One Day Launch: Digital Product Fast Track [0:27:01]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, I want to tell you about the process that helped me create an Instagram Reel that got me 364 free leads in under 24 hours. A Reel that has since gone on to generate more than 771 leads, and counting. Even I’m still struggling to grasp how this happened!</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>I'm not here to claim that I've cracked some universal marketing code or boast about one simple trick that will get you unbelievable results. Yes, what I did was incredibly simple and yielded exceptional results, but it wasn’t where I started and it’s not what made this work. It took several months of strategic planning, brainstorming, and taking action before things took off the way that they did. That’s why I’m using today’s episode to tell the full story of how I got here, and how you can take the next step in building your list of dream clients. Let’s get into it!</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>Helping Small Business Owners Become Financially Free [0:05:21]</li>
<li>How I Discovered What My Clients Needed [0:08:21]</li>
<li>Where The Majority of My Leads and Growth Came From [0:10:59]</li>
<li>The Biggest Sticking Point For My Clients [0:13:23]</li>
<li>How I Helped My Clients Get Over Their Biggest Hurdle [0:14:40]</li>
<li>Staying Focused [0:18:23]</li>
<li>Why My Post Generated So Much Engagement [0:19:51]</li>
<li>One Day Launch: Digital Product Fast Track [0:27:01]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1998</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[80e7a4f2-01a9-11ef-a7ac-5ff6a383d842]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1181933233.mp3?updated=1713902308" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>841: You're Right On Time: The Grounding, Mindset Shift and Action Plan to Get You to Where You Want to Go with Amber McCue</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/grounding-mindset-shift-and-action-plan-to-get-you-to-where-you-want-to-go</link>
      <description>What if, instead of worrying that you are running out of time in your business or that your plans are delayed, you accepted that you are right on time for your own destiny? Today I am joined by Amber McCue, a woman who went from being an 18-year-old single mom to owning three companies that allow her to work from anywhere in the world. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Amber grew her first business to a multi-million-dollar company from just a side hustle! She knew her business was going to be a success when she encountered what she calls ‘right on time’ moments that nudged her in the right direction and she still looks out for them 14 years later! In this episode, she and I talk about the concept of being ‘right on time.’ This conversation is so life-changing, I can’t wait for you to hear it. 
Episode Highlights

You Cannot Be Late for Your Destiny

Detaching from Outcomes in Your Business

The ‘Try it on’ Visualization

Gifting the Idea of ‘Right on Time’ to Other People

How Being ‘Right on Time’ Ties into Resilience


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Apr 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>You're Right On Time: The Grounding, Mindset Shift and Action Plan to Get You to Where You Want to Go with Amber McCue</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>841</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>What if, instead of worrying that you are running out of time in your business or that your plans are delayed, you accepted that you are right on time for your own destiny?</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What if, instead of worrying that you are running out of time in your business or that your plans are delayed, you accepted that you are right on time for your own destiny? Today I am joined by Amber McCue, a woman who went from being an 18-year-old single mom to owning three companies that allow her to work from anywhere in the world. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Amber grew her first business to a multi-million-dollar company from just a side hustle! She knew her business was going to be a success when she encountered what she calls ‘right on time’ moments that nudged her in the right direction and she still looks out for them 14 years later! In this episode, she and I talk about the concept of being ‘right on time.’ This conversation is so life-changing, I can’t wait for you to hear it. 
Episode Highlights

You Cannot Be Late for Your Destiny

Detaching from Outcomes in Your Business

The ‘Try it on’ Visualization

Gifting the Idea of ‘Right on Time’ to Other People

How Being ‘Right on Time’ Ties into Resilience


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What if, instead of worrying that you are running out of time in your business or that your plans are delayed, you accepted that you are right on time for your own destiny? Today I am joined by Amber McCue, a woman who went from being an 18-year-old single mom to owning three companies that allow her to work from anywhere in the world. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Amber grew her first business to a multi-million-dollar company from just a side hustle! She knew her business was going to be a success when she encountered what she calls ‘right on time’ moments that nudged her in the right direction and she still looks out for them 14 years later! In this episode, she and I talk about the concept of being ‘right on time.’ This conversation is so life-changing, I can’t wait for you to hear it. </p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>You Cannot Be Late for Your Destiny</li>
<li>Detaching from Outcomes in Your Business</li>
<li>The ‘Try it on’ Visualization</li>
<li>Gifting the Idea of ‘Right on Time’ to Other People</li>
<li>How Being ‘Right on Time’ Ties into Resilience</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2499</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[35b5eee0-fe7e-11ee-af36-87167536830a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8934505043.mp3?updated=1713553660" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>840: From a Harvard-trained Neuroscientist: This Counterintuitive Strategy Can Help You Succeed in Your Career</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/from-a-harvard-trained-neuroscientist-this-counterintuitive-strategy-can-help-you-succeed-in-your-career</link>
      <description>People often believe that in order to succeed at their work, they have to be absolutely excellent at everything that they do. But what if following that path would only lead you to burnout? Today’s episode was inspired by an article I read by Morgan Smith for CNBC. She interviewed Harvard-trained Neuroscientist and Adjunct Professor Juliet Han. Han suggests a totally different approach to growth. Rather than self-examining your strengths and weaknesses, what if you focused predominantly on your job responsibilities? 

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Here’s the thing, though: you’re a business owner. So, as the CEO and head of your company, what is most important for you to do? What do you need to be excellent at? What tasks do you need to be good at? What tasks can be low-effort or delegated? There are a couple of things you need to focus on to make your business thrive: cash flow, sales, and messaging. In the digital product world, it’s all about driving continuous traffic to your product rather than constantly improving the offer. Every company is different! Let’s get into it.
Episode Highlights

What Changes When You Figure Out What Really Drives Your Company

Why Asking For a Second Opinion Could Highlight What You Really Need to Change 

How to Get Out of Autopilot and Put Yourself Back in the Driver’s Seat of Your Career

Getting Hyper-specific About the Types of Skills You Need Most


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 18 Apr 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From a Harvard-trained Neuroscientist: This Counterintuitive Strategy Can Help You Succeed in Your Career</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>840</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Rather than self-examining your strengths and weaknesses, what if you focused predominantly on your job responsibilities? </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>People often believe that in order to succeed at their work, they have to be absolutely excellent at everything that they do. But what if following that path would only lead you to burnout? Today’s episode was inspired by an article I read by Morgan Smith for CNBC. She interviewed Harvard-trained Neuroscientist and Adjunct Professor Juliet Han. Han suggests a totally different approach to growth. Rather than self-examining your strengths and weaknesses, what if you focused predominantly on your job responsibilities? 

Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Here’s the thing, though: you’re a business owner. So, as the CEO and head of your company, what is most important for you to do? What do you need to be excellent at? What tasks do you need to be good at? What tasks can be low-effort or delegated? There are a couple of things you need to focus on to make your business thrive: cash flow, sales, and messaging. In the digital product world, it’s all about driving continuous traffic to your product rather than constantly improving the offer. Every company is different! Let’s get into it.
Episode Highlights

What Changes When You Figure Out What Really Drives Your Company

Why Asking For a Second Opinion Could Highlight What You Really Need to Change 

How to Get Out of Autopilot and Put Yourself Back in the Driver’s Seat of Your Career

Getting Hyper-specific About the Types of Skills You Need Most


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>People often believe that in order to succeed at their work, they have to be absolutely excellent at everything that they do. But what if following that path would only lead you to burnout? Today’s episode was inspired by an article I read by Morgan Smith for CNBC. She interviewed Harvard-trained Neuroscientist and Adjunct Professor Juliet Han. Han suggests a totally different approach to growth. Rather than self-examining your strengths and weaknesses, what if you focused predominantly on your job responsibilities? </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Here’s the thing, though: you’re a business owner. So, as the CEO and head of your company, what is most important for you to do? What do you need to be excellent at? What tasks do you need to be good at? What tasks can be low-effort or delegated? There are a couple of things you need to focus on to make your business thrive: cash flow, sales, and messaging. In the digital product world, it’s all about driving continuous traffic to your product rather than constantly improving the offer. Every company is different! Let’s get into it.</p><h3>Episode Highlights</h3><ul>
<li>What Changes When You Figure Out What Really Drives Your Company</li>
<li>Why Asking For a Second Opinion Could Highlight What You Really Need to Change </li>
<li>How to Get Out of Autopilot and Put Yourself Back in the Driver’s Seat of Your Career</li>
<li>Getting Hyper-specific About the Types of Skills You Need Most</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1352</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2cd34fd8-fcef-11ee-8b3d-cfe4c43a453d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2389184484.mp3?updated=1713381963" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>839: Get Unstuck: How to Tackle Your Mindset for People Who Prefer to Talk Strategy</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/get-unstuck-how-to-tackle-your-mindset-for-people-who-prefer-to-talk-strategy</link>
      <description>I don't know about you, but when I’m feeling stuck, my default is to jump straight into strategy. What's the tactical plan? What steps should I take? How do I break free from this rut? Is there a book, a podcast, a process, a checklist – anything that can guide me out? Just hand me the instruction manual, and let's get moving! But if you suspect that what's holding you back is more about mindset than your previous blocks have been, then this can be a tough place to be in, especially for those of us who thrive on logic and clear steps forward.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


How do we get to the root of why we are feeling so stuck? And more importantly, how do we start feeling positive about charting a new course? But I want to take it a step further. I've compiled a list of questions that I truly believe can help us dig deep and uncover what's going on beneath the surface. I don't think the questions by themselves are as helpful as seeing the process in action. So, we're going to tackle this together. I haven't prepped my answers to these questions. Instead, I'll open up about my own struggles, my mindset obstacles, and where I'm aiming to go next. Let's dive deep into these questions together!

Episode Highlights:

What Do You Really Want?

What Is Making You Feel Stuck?

What Are You Willing To Do About It?

What Are You Not Willing To Do?

What’s Your First Step?

What Are You Willing To Commit To?

How Will You Stay Focused?

How Do You Need to Feel To Be The Most Effective At Showing Up?

How Can You Create More of That Feeling?

Is There Anything You Need To Address In Your Body In Order To Make This Happen?


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 16 Apr 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Get Unstuck: How to Tackle Your Mindset for People Who Prefer to Talk Strategy</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>839</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Get to the root of why you're feeling stuck! I've compiled a list of questions that I truly believe can help us dig deep and uncover what's going on beneath the surface. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I don't know about you, but when I’m feeling stuck, my default is to jump straight into strategy. What's the tactical plan? What steps should I take? How do I break free from this rut? Is there a book, a podcast, a process, a checklist – anything that can guide me out? Just hand me the instruction manual, and let's get moving! But if you suspect that what's holding you back is more about mindset than your previous blocks have been, then this can be a tough place to be in, especially for those of us who thrive on logic and clear steps forward.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


How do we get to the root of why we are feeling so stuck? And more importantly, how do we start feeling positive about charting a new course? But I want to take it a step further. I've compiled a list of questions that I truly believe can help us dig deep and uncover what's going on beneath the surface. I don't think the questions by themselves are as helpful as seeing the process in action. So, we're going to tackle this together. I haven't prepped my answers to these questions. Instead, I'll open up about my own struggles, my mindset obstacles, and where I'm aiming to go next. Let's dive deep into these questions together!

Episode Highlights:

What Do You Really Want?

What Is Making You Feel Stuck?

What Are You Willing To Do About It?

What Are You Not Willing To Do?

What’s Your First Step?

What Are You Willing To Commit To?

How Will You Stay Focused?

How Do You Need to Feel To Be The Most Effective At Showing Up?

How Can You Create More of That Feeling?

Is There Anything You Need To Address In Your Body In Order To Make This Happen?


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I don't know about you, but when I’m feeling stuck, my default is to jump straight into strategy. What's the tactical plan? What steps should I take? How do I break free from this rut? Is there a book, a podcast, a process, a checklist – anything that can guide me out? Just hand me the instruction manual, and let's get moving! But if you suspect that what's holding you back is more about mindset than your previous blocks have been, then this can be a tough place to be in, especially for those of us who thrive on logic and clear steps forward.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>How do we get to the root of why we are feeling so stuck? And more importantly, how do we start feeling positive about charting a new course? But I want to take it a step further. I've compiled a list of questions that I truly believe can help us dig deep and uncover what's going on beneath the surface. I don't think the questions by themselves are as helpful as seeing the process in action. So, we're going to tackle this together. I haven't prepped my answers to these questions. Instead, I'll open up about my own struggles, my mindset obstacles, and where I'm aiming to go next. Let's dive deep into these questions together!</p><h3><br></h3><h3>Episode Highlights:</h3><ul>
<li>What Do You Really Want?</li>
<li>What Is Making You Feel Stuck?</li>
<li>What Are You Willing To Do About It?</li>
<li>What Are You Not Willing To Do?</li>
<li>What’s Your First Step?</li>
<li>What Are You Willing To Commit To?</li>
<li>How Will You Stay Focused?</li>
<li>How Do You Need to Feel To Be The Most Effective At Showing Up?</li>
<li>How Can You Create More of That Feeling?</li>
<li>Is There Anything You Need To Address In Your Body In Order To Make This Happen?</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2637</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[21bd7f9a-fb48-11ee-8015-17994dc8bbb0]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1047598109.mp3?updated=1713201125" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>838: Why Talking to Strangers May Be The Key to Revenue Growth &amp; Your Happiness (Plus, The 7 Stories That Create Deep Connection)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-talking-to-strangers-may-be-the-key-to-revenue-growth-happiness</link>
      <description>Are you creating a diverse social experience for yourself and your business or are you playing it safe? I’m going to argue why talking to strangers might be the key to more revenue growth and your happiness! During this episode, I’m going to tell you how talking to strangers has contributed to my overall happiness and helped me to grow my revenue and how you can make the same thing happen in your own life and business.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!

Episode Highlights:

The Two Elements That Make Up the Magic of Relational Diversity [0:02:37] 

So, You’re Talking to Strangers. What Now? [0:08:50]

Seven Ways to Tell Strangers Your Story [0:14:30]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go t  thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 11 Apr 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why Talking to Strangers May Be The Key to Revenue Growth &amp; Your Happiness (Plus, The 7 Stories That Create Deep Connection)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>838</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Let's talk about how talking to strangers can contribute to your overall happiness &amp; help you grow your revenue</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you creating a diverse social experience for yourself and your business or are you playing it safe? I’m going to argue why talking to strangers might be the key to more revenue growth and your happiness! During this episode, I’m going to tell you how talking to strangers has contributed to my overall happiness and helped me to grow my revenue and how you can make the same thing happen in your own life and business.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!

Episode Highlights:

The Two Elements That Make Up the Magic of Relational Diversity [0:02:37] 

So, You’re Talking to Strangers. What Now? [0:08:50]

Seven Ways to Tell Strangers Your Story [0:14:30]


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go t  thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you creating a diverse social experience for yourself and your business or are you playing it safe? I’m going to argue why talking to strangers might be the key to more revenue growth and your happiness! During this episode, I’m going to tell you how talking to strangers has contributed to my overall happiness and helped me to grow my revenue and how you can make the same thing happen in your own life and business.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><h3>Episode Highlights:</h3><ul>
<li>The Two Elements That Make Up the Magic of Relational Diversity [0:02:37] </li>
<li>So, You’re Talking to Strangers. What Now? [0:08:50]</li>
<li>Seven Ways to Tell Strangers Your Story [0:14:30]</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go t <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1586</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[49799cc0-f67b-11ee-b9f3-ab99088ef2c9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1151936757.mp3?updated=1712672542" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>837: The Ultimate Collaboration Guide: 120 Partnerships &amp; The Mindset That Made Them Possible with Angela Henderson</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-ultimate-collaboration-guide-120-partnerships-the-mindset-that-made-them-possible-with-angela-henderson</link>
      <description>Strong partnerships and collaborations can be the keys to success. By joining forces with like-minded people, you can not only unlock new opportunities and expand your network but also achieve remarkable growth! In this episode, Angela shares how she built 120 partnerships in one year, the positive impact those relationships had on her business, and the seven steps you can take to overcome common mindset blocks and build mutually beneficial collaborations.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


This conversation offers you so much more than just a guide to incredible collaborations and partnerships that move your business forward. Angela and Abagail also get into some powerful (and actionable) mindset stuff that is going to rock your world! 
Episode Highlights:

How Angela Became a Powerhouse Business Coach

The Mindset That Made 120 Partnerships in a Year Possible

Goals Aren’t Everything: How Business Can Be Playful and Fun

Tips for Overcoming the Mindset Blocks That Can Stand in Your Way

Types of Collaborations That Could Work for You

Reasons You Might be Holding Yourself (and Your Business) Back


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 09 Apr 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Ultimate Collaboration Guide: 120 Partnerships &amp; The Mindset That Made Them Possible with Angela Henderson</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>837</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Strong partnerships and collaborations can be the keys to success. By joining forces with like-minded people, you can not only unlock new opportunities and expand your network but also achieve remarkable growth!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Strong partnerships and collaborations can be the keys to success. By joining forces with like-minded people, you can not only unlock new opportunities and expand your network but also achieve remarkable growth! In this episode, Angela shares how she built 120 partnerships in one year, the positive impact those relationships had on her business, and the seven steps you can take to overcome common mindset blocks and build mutually beneficial collaborations.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


This conversation offers you so much more than just a guide to incredible collaborations and partnerships that move your business forward. Angela and Abagail also get into some powerful (and actionable) mindset stuff that is going to rock your world! 
Episode Highlights:

How Angela Became a Powerhouse Business Coach

The Mindset That Made 120 Partnerships in a Year Possible

Goals Aren’t Everything: How Business Can Be Playful and Fun

Tips for Overcoming the Mindset Blocks That Can Stand in Your Way

Types of Collaborations That Could Work for You

Reasons You Might be Holding Yourself (and Your Business) Back


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Strong partnerships and collaborations can be the keys to success. By joining forces with like-minded people, you can not only unlock new opportunities and expand your network but also achieve remarkable growth! In this episode, Angela shares how she built 120 partnerships in one year, the positive impact those relationships had on her business, and the seven steps you can take to overcome common mindset blocks and build mutually beneficial collaborations.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>This conversation offers you so much more than just a guide to incredible collaborations and partnerships that move your business forward. Angela and Abagail also get into some powerful (and actionable) mindset stuff that is going to rock your world! </p><h3>Episode Highlights:</h3><ul>
<li>How Angela Became a Powerhouse Business Coach</li>
<li>The Mindset That Made 120 Partnerships in a Year Possible</li>
<li>Goals Aren’t Everything: How Business Can Be Playful and Fun</li>
<li>Tips for Overcoming the Mindset Blocks That Can Stand in Your Way</li>
<li>Types of Collaborations That Could Work for You</li>
<li>Reasons You Might be Holding Yourself (and Your Business) Back</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2683</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7418afae-f28c-11ee-be58-676dae023f2f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1920676598.mp3?updated=1712240106" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>836: The ONLY Real Passive Income</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-only-real-passive-income</link>
      <description>Passive income posts frustrate me so much – especially the ones promising you that digital products will make you money in your sleep. Don’t get me wrong, digital products have made me millions and they are great to have in your business. But they do not generate sales without maintenance and certainly do not work all on their own! They are far from passive. Today I want to talk about what is actually passive because passive income definitely is available to you and it’s not talked about often enough. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


When I came into this business, I had a world of knowledge at my fingertips. I worked in the financial industry prior to building this company and that definitely gave me an advantage. I got to witness what really goes on in the financial world and I got to learn about my financial future rapidly. I know that this job set me up for success regardless of how much I disliked working there! I don’t sell financial products and am not tied to any financial firm, I simply want to see you wealthy and deeply care about your future! 
Episode Highlights:

The Easiest Way to Retire Early

The One Thing You Need to Know About Saving

How I Make Truly Passive Income

My Number One Goal in Life and Business


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 04 Apr 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The ONLY Real Passive Income</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>836</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Digital sales are great for your business, but they do require maintenance to generate sales. Let's talk about what passive income actually is.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Passive income posts frustrate me so much – especially the ones promising you that digital products will make you money in your sleep. Don’t get me wrong, digital products have made me millions and they are great to have in your business. But they do not generate sales without maintenance and certainly do not work all on their own! They are far from passive. Today I want to talk about what is actually passive because passive income definitely is available to you and it’s not talked about often enough. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


When I came into this business, I had a world of knowledge at my fingertips. I worked in the financial industry prior to building this company and that definitely gave me an advantage. I got to witness what really goes on in the financial world and I got to learn about my financial future rapidly. I know that this job set me up for success regardless of how much I disliked working there! I don’t sell financial products and am not tied to any financial firm, I simply want to see you wealthy and deeply care about your future! 
Episode Highlights:

The Easiest Way to Retire Early

The One Thing You Need to Know About Saving

How I Make Truly Passive Income

My Number One Goal in Life and Business


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Passive income posts frustrate me so much – especially the ones promising you that digital products will make you money in your sleep. Don’t get me wrong, digital products have made me millions and they are great to have in your business. But they do not generate sales without maintenance and certainly do not work all on their own! They are far from passive. Today I want to talk about what is <em>actually</em> passive because passive income definitely is available to you and it’s not talked about often enough. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>When I came into this business, I had a world of knowledge at my fingertips. I worked in the financial industry prior to building this company and that definitely gave me an advantage. I got to witness what really goes on in the financial world and I got to learn about my financial future rapidly. I know that this job set me up for success regardless of how much I disliked working there! I don’t sell financial products and am not tied to any financial firm, I simply want to see you wealthy and deeply care about your future! </p><h3>Episode Highlights:</h3><ul>
<li>The Easiest Way to Retire Early</li>
<li>The One Thing You Need to Know About Saving</li>
<li>How I Make <em>Truly</em> Passive Income</li>
<li>My Number One Goal in Life and Business</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2466</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5bd64d0a-f1d0-11ee-8c9f-7ffb3c7396f2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2529023111.mp3?updated=1712159447" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>835: What’s Possible: From Solopreneur to Scalable Enterprise with Ryan Deiss</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/from-solopreneur-to-scalable-enterprise-with-ryan-deiss</link>
      <description>In today's episode, Ryan and I delve into his entrepreneurial journey, starting from his very first company which kickstarted his career. We explore the invaluable lessons he's learned and what he recommends for businesses in their infancy. As for those businesses that don't quite make it? Ryan breaks down the biggest reasons and shares insights on what it takes to scale a business from half a million to millions more. Whether you're a budding entrepreneur or a seasoned business owner, there's something for everyone in today's discussion. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Have you ever wondered what it takes to leverage your business into a scalable enterprise? Well, today we're going to explore just that with a very special guest, Ryan Deiss. Ryan is a serial entrepreneur, author, and investor, with a proven track record of building successful companies. He is the founder and CEO of The Scalable Company and DigitalMarketer, and a founding partner at Scalable Equity, an equity accelerator that builds, acquires, and invests in b2b media services and software brands. He's also the brains behind the Traffic and Conversion Summit, the largest digital marketing conference in North America, and the author of the book Digital Marketing for Dummies. 

Podcast Highlights:

How Ryan Started His First Business

Monetizing Your Knowledge

Setting Yourself Up to be Scalable

How to go from Primary Operator to Scalable Business

How to Grow your Sales as you Scale Your Team

Scaling Fast and Staying in Business

Why Businesses Fail

When It’s Okay to Stay Small and When You Should Scale


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 02 Apr 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What’s Possible: From Solopreneur to Scalable Enterprise with Ryan Deiss</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>835</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We explore the invaluable lessons he's learned and insights on what it takes to scale a business from half a million to millions more.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today's episode, Ryan and I delve into his entrepreneurial journey, starting from his very first company which kickstarted his career. We explore the invaluable lessons he's learned and what he recommends for businesses in their infancy. As for those businesses that don't quite make it? Ryan breaks down the biggest reasons and shares insights on what it takes to scale a business from half a million to millions more. Whether you're a budding entrepreneur or a seasoned business owner, there's something for everyone in today's discussion. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Have you ever wondered what it takes to leverage your business into a scalable enterprise? Well, today we're going to explore just that with a very special guest, Ryan Deiss. Ryan is a serial entrepreneur, author, and investor, with a proven track record of building successful companies. He is the founder and CEO of The Scalable Company and DigitalMarketer, and a founding partner at Scalable Equity, an equity accelerator that builds, acquires, and invests in b2b media services and software brands. He's also the brains behind the Traffic and Conversion Summit, the largest digital marketing conference in North America, and the author of the book Digital Marketing for Dummies. 

Podcast Highlights:

How Ryan Started His First Business

Monetizing Your Knowledge

Setting Yourself Up to be Scalable

How to go from Primary Operator to Scalable Business

How to Grow your Sales as you Scale Your Team

Scaling Fast and Staying in Business

Why Businesses Fail

When It’s Okay to Stay Small and When You Should Scale


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today's episode, Ryan and I delve into his entrepreneurial journey, starting from his very first company which kickstarted his career. We explore the invaluable lessons he's learned and what he recommends for businesses in their infancy. As for those businesses that don't quite make it? Ryan breaks down the biggest reasons and shares insights on what it takes to scale a business from half a million to millions more. Whether you're a budding entrepreneur or a seasoned business owner, there's something for everyone in today's discussion. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Have you ever wondered what it takes to leverage your business into a scalable enterprise? Well, today we're going to explore just that with a very special guest, Ryan Deiss. Ryan is a serial entrepreneur, author, and investor, with a proven track record of building successful companies. He is the founder and CEO of The Scalable Company and DigitalMarketer, and a founding partner at Scalable Equity, an equity accelerator that builds, acquires, and invests in b2b media services and software brands. He's also the brains behind the Traffic and Conversion Summit, the largest digital marketing conference in North America, and the author of the book <em>Digital Marketing for Dummies</em>. </p><h3><br></h3><h3>Podcast Highlights:</h3><ul>
<li>How Ryan Started His First Business</li>
<li>Monetizing Your Knowledge</li>
<li>Setting Yourself Up to be Scalable</li>
<li>How to go from Primary Operator to Scalable Business</li>
<li>How to Grow your Sales as you Scale Your Team</li>
<li>Scaling Fast and Staying in Business</li>
<li>Why Businesses Fail</li>
<li>When It’s Okay to Stay Small and When You Should Scale</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2492</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[58c396e4-eb91-11ee-8bcd-43f27297c686]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7313329332.mp3?updated=1711472523" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>834: How to Maintain Your Marketing in Under an Hour a Day</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-maintain-your-marketing-in-under-an-hour-a-day</link>
      <description>In today's fast-paced digital world, the pressure to keep up with marketing trends and strategies can be overwhelming. However, I've found that by streamlining my approach and focusing on efficiency, I can effectively balance marketing efforts with other essential aspects of my business. 
By dedicating just one hour a day, five days a week, to strategic marketing tasks, I've been able to achieve significant results while still having ample time to devote to serving my clients and growing my business in meaningful ways. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Let's dive into these strategies together and discover how you can maximize your marketing impact without sacrificing precious time and energy! We’re talking about:

Why You Need an Awareness Platform and a Nurture Platform

Choosing Your Platforms

Instagram Marketing Strategies and Analytics

Balancing Experimentation with Repetition

Instagram Stories and Building Awareness

Don’t be Afraid to Sell 

How to Use Email


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 28 Mar 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Maintain Your Marketing in Under an Hour a Day</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>834</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>By dedicating just one hour a day, five days a week, to strategic marketing tasks, I've been able to achieve significant results while still having ample time to devote to serving my clients and growing my business in meaningful ways. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today's fast-paced digital world, the pressure to keep up with marketing trends and strategies can be overwhelming. However, I've found that by streamlining my approach and focusing on efficiency, I can effectively balance marketing efforts with other essential aspects of my business. 
By dedicating just one hour a day, five days a week, to strategic marketing tasks, I've been able to achieve significant results while still having ample time to devote to serving my clients and growing my business in meaningful ways. 
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Let's dive into these strategies together and discover how you can maximize your marketing impact without sacrificing precious time and energy! We’re talking about:

Why You Need an Awareness Platform and a Nurture Platform

Choosing Your Platforms

Instagram Marketing Strategies and Analytics

Balancing Experimentation with Repetition

Instagram Stories and Building Awareness

Don’t be Afraid to Sell 

How to Use Email


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today's fast-paced digital world, the pressure to keep up with marketing trends and strategies can be overwhelming. However, I've found that by streamlining my approach and focusing on efficiency, I can effectively balance marketing efforts with other essential aspects of my business. </p><p>By dedicating just one hour a day, five days a week, to strategic marketing tasks, I've been able to achieve significant results while still having ample time to devote to serving my clients and growing my business in meaningful ways. </p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Let's dive into these strategies together and discover how you can maximize your marketing impact without sacrificing precious time and energy! We’re talking about:</p><ul>
<li>Why You Need an Awareness Platform and a Nurture Platform</li>
<li>Choosing Your Platforms</li>
<li>Instagram Marketing Strategies and Analytics</li>
<li>Balancing Experimentation with Repetition</li>
<li>Instagram Stories and Building Awareness</li>
<li>Don’t be Afraid to Sell </li>
<li>How to Use Email</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2077</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[970328b8-eae0-11ee-91cd-eb4c5794ea3a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2488610787.mp3?updated=1711396650" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>833:  Social Media Doesn’t Always Feel Transparent: Here are 6 Things I Deeply Struggle With</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/social-media-doesnt-always-feel-transparent-here-are-6-things-i-deeply-struggle-with</link>
      <description>There’s a new trend popping up on social media where people are sharing the real struggles they face in life and in business. Even after nine years of business, there are things I still struggle with, and today I want to let you in on what some of them are. These are things that deeply bother me, things I talk to my therapist about, and that hold me back from doing what I really want to accomplish.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Highlights from today’s show:

One Surprising Fear Despite What I Have Built

What It Really Feels Like to Be On the Outside

The Real Reason Women Don’t Talk About Money

How I Trick Myself Into Talking to Strangers

One Way I May Never Be Able to Relate to My Audience

Why It Can Be So Hard to Meet People Where They’re At


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 26 Mar 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Social Media Doesn’t Always Feel Transparent: Here are 6 Things I Deeply Struggle With</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>833</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Even after nine years of business, there are things I still struggle with, and today I want to let you in on what some of them are.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There’s a new trend popping up on social media where people are sharing the real struggles they face in life and in business. Even after nine years of business, there are things I still struggle with, and today I want to let you in on what some of them are. These are things that deeply bother me, things I talk to my therapist about, and that hold me back from doing what I really want to accomplish.
Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses
Connect with Abagail

Instagram


All the Links!


Highlights from today’s show:

One Surprising Fear Despite What I Have Built

What It Really Feels Like to Be On the Outside

The Real Reason Women Don’t Talk About Money

How I Trick Myself Into Talking to Strangers

One Way I May Never Be Able to Relate to My Audience

Why It Can Be So Hard to Meet People Where They’re At


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There’s a new trend popping up on social media where people are sharing the real struggles they face in life and in business. Even after nine years of business, there are things I still struggle with, and today I want to let you in on what some of them are. These are things that deeply bother me, things I talk to my therapist about, and that hold me back from doing what I really want to accomplish.</p><p><a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/membership">Join The Co-op - The Membership for Online Businesses</a></p><h3>Connect with Abagail</h3><ul>
<li><a href="https://instagram.com/abagailsays">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/links">All the Links</a>!</li>
</ul><h3><br></h3><h3>Highlights from today’s show:</h3><ul>
<li>One Surprising Fear Despite What I Have Built</li>
<li>What It Really Feels Like to Be On the Outside</li>
<li>The Real Reason Women Don’t Talk About Money</li>
<li>How I Trick Myself Into Talking to Strangers</li>
<li>One Way I May Never Be Able to Relate to My Audience</li>
<li>Why It Can Be So Hard to Meet People Where They’re At</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2714</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[007dabcc-ead4-11ee-87c2-c36622d3b57d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2983875136.mp3?updated=1711391297" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>832: Digital Marketing Trends: The Rise of Faceless Marketing</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/digital-marketing-trends-the-rise-of-faceless-marketing</link>
      <description>Faceless marketing is developing its own niche and I’ve recently started exploring what would happen if I utilized faceless marketing to appeal to a wider audience. I think this gives people an opportunity to show up online without having to worry about what they look like while still making marketing personal. This is for those of you who want to sell a digital product, not necessarily for someone looking to build a local-based business. 
People are leveraging this trend, specifically on Instagram, to build a brand without showing their faces and with the use of stock imaging. I feel like this trend is just a natural continuation of things like faceless blogs for example. People can utilize stock and place a focus on their words without worrying about what they look like. And it really does work if it’s done correctly! Faceless marketing still keeps the human element without associating an identity therefore making it more relatable. 
In this episode, you’ll learn:

Why Faceless Marketing Works (and Has Always Worked)

The Number One Thing That Builds a Brand Long-Term

The Best Way to Utilize Faceless Marketing


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 21 Mar 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Digital Marketing Trends: The Rise of Faceless Marketing</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>832</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>People are leveraging this trend, specifically on Instagram, to build a brand without showing their faces and with the use of stock imaging. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Faceless marketing is developing its own niche and I’ve recently started exploring what would happen if I utilized faceless marketing to appeal to a wider audience. I think this gives people an opportunity to show up online without having to worry about what they look like while still making marketing personal. This is for those of you who want to sell a digital product, not necessarily for someone looking to build a local-based business. 
People are leveraging this trend, specifically on Instagram, to build a brand without showing their faces and with the use of stock imaging. I feel like this trend is just a natural continuation of things like faceless blogs for example. People can utilize stock and place a focus on their words without worrying about what they look like. And it really does work if it’s done correctly! Faceless marketing still keeps the human element without associating an identity therefore making it more relatable. 
In this episode, you’ll learn:

Why Faceless Marketing Works (and Has Always Worked)

The Number One Thing That Builds a Brand Long-Term

The Best Way to Utilize Faceless Marketing


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Faceless marketing is developing its own niche and I’ve recently started exploring what would happen if I utilized faceless marketing to appeal to a wider audience. I think this gives people an opportunity to show up online without having to worry about what they look like while still making marketing personal. This is for those of you who want to sell a digital product, not necessarily for someone looking to build a local-based business. </p><p>People are leveraging this trend, specifically on Instagram, to build a brand without showing their faces and with the use of stock imaging. I feel like this trend is just a natural continuation of things like faceless blogs for example. People can utilize stock and place a focus on their words without worrying about what they look like. And it really does work if it’s done correctly! Faceless marketing still keeps the human element without associating an identity therefore making it more relatable. </p><h3>In this episode, you’ll learn:</h3><ul>
<li>Why Faceless Marketing Works (and Has Always Worked)</li>
<li>The Number One Thing That Builds a Brand Long-Term</li>
<li>The Best Way to Utilize Faceless Marketing</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2098</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f62b9ac6-e6c3-11ee-ba94-5f297e90a8c8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1493148252.mp3?updated=1710945050" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title> 831: How I Diversified from 1:1 Clients to Digital Products &amp; Courses</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-i-diversified-from-one-on-one-clients-to-digital-products-and-courses</link>
      <description>Today on the show, I want to talk about what it was like to diversify from one-on-one client work services to adding digital products and courses. We’re going to cover:

The Story Of The Late Lunch That Changed Everything

How I Went Out On A Limb To Solve a Simple Problem

Three Situations You Might Find Yourself In And How I Could Help

Other Areas You Will Inevitably Grow In As You Grow An Audience

The One Marketing Activity You Should Be Doing To Build Your Business


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 19 Mar 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How I Diversified from 1:1 Clients to Digital Products &amp; Courses</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>831</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show, I want to talk about what it was like to diversify from one-on-one client work services to adding digital products and courses.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show, I want to talk about what it was like to diversify from one-on-one client work services to adding digital products and courses. We’re going to cover:

The Story Of The Late Lunch That Changed Everything

How I Went Out On A Limb To Solve a Simple Problem

Three Situations You Might Find Yourself In And How I Could Help

Other Areas You Will Inevitably Grow In As You Grow An Audience

The One Marketing Activity You Should Be Doing To Build Your Business


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show, I want to talk about what it was like to diversify from one-on-one client work services to adding digital products and courses. We’re going to cover:</p><ul>
<li>The Story Of The Late Lunch That Changed Everything</li>
<li>How I Went Out On A Limb To Solve a Simple Problem</li>
<li>Three Situations You Might Find Yourself In And How I Could Help</li>
<li>Other Areas You Will Inevitably Grow In As You Grow An Audience</li>
<li>The One Marketing Activity You Should Be Doing To Build Your Business</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2177</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6ad2ed4a-e55a-11ee-a2f4-87b4a7f7d9bc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9611644555.mp3?updated=1710789370" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>830: Generate $1k in the Next Two Weeks with my Pre-Sales Method</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/generate-1k-in-the-next-two-weeks-with-my-pre-sales-method</link>
      <description>Pre-sales are the perfect tool for anyone wanting to sell more digital products and courses. As you’re listening to this, I am in the middle of my own pre-sale pitch. Being in the thick of the process, this is the perfect time to talk about it on the podcast.
Tune in to find out what pre-sales are, how you can benefit from them, and learn some simple strategies to help you get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 14 Mar 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Generate $1k in the Next Two Weeks with my Pre-Sales Method</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>830</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tune in to find out what pre-sales are, how you can benefit from them, and learn some simple strategies to help you get started!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Pre-sales are the perfect tool for anyone wanting to sell more digital products and courses. As you’re listening to this, I am in the middle of my own pre-sale pitch. Being in the thick of the process, this is the perfect time to talk about it on the podcast.
Tune in to find out what pre-sales are, how you can benefit from them, and learn some simple strategies to help you get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Pre-sales are the perfect tool for anyone wanting to sell more digital products and courses. As you’re listening to this, I am in the middle of my own pre-sale pitch. Being in the thick of the process, this is the perfect time to talk about it on the podcast.</p><p>Tune in to find out what pre-sales are, how you can benefit from them, and learn some simple strategies to help you get started!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2395</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[fcf92c7a-dfe2-11ee-b4e6-5b8b0de9c64a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9337432340.mp3?updated=1710188153" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>829: Behind-The-Scenes: Shooting a TV Show for a Major Streaming Network</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/behind-the-scenes-shooting-a-tv-show-for-a-major-streaming-network</link>
      <description>Today I’m going to take you behind the scenes and share what it was like to shoot a TV show for a major streaming network. For now, I’m not allowed to tell you anything about the show so bear with me while I try to share my experiences in a somewhat cryptic manner! 
I was approached as someone who built a business and asked to appear on the TV show. All I had seen was a sizzle reel for the show and I basically went in blind. I really think that this is going to have a good impact. Starting out, I had no idea what this experience was going to be like– but I said yes anyway! 
Key topics from this episode:

Shoot dates changing at the last moment

Styling myself and finding a last-minute makeup artist

Dealing with self-doubt and imposter syndrome

My free day in Los Angeles

What this means for the second half of my career 


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 12 Mar 2024 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Behind-The-Scenes: Shooting a TV Show for a Major Streaming Network</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>829</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I'm sharing the excitement, fun and challenges of this experience and my recent trip to Los Angeles. The show details are top-secret for now-- but you're going to LOVE it!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today I’m going to take you behind the scenes and share what it was like to shoot a TV show for a major streaming network. For now, I’m not allowed to tell you anything about the show so bear with me while I try to share my experiences in a somewhat cryptic manner! 
I was approached as someone who built a business and asked to appear on the TV show. All I had seen was a sizzle reel for the show and I basically went in blind. I really think that this is going to have a good impact. Starting out, I had no idea what this experience was going to be like– but I said yes anyway! 
Key topics from this episode:

Shoot dates changing at the last moment

Styling myself and finding a last-minute makeup artist

Dealing with self-doubt and imposter syndrome

My free day in Los Angeles

What this means for the second half of my career 


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m going to take you behind the scenes and share what it was like to shoot a TV show for a major streaming network. For now, I’m not allowed to tell you anything about the show so bear with me while I try to share my experiences in a somewhat cryptic manner! </p><p>I was approached as someone who built a business and asked to appear on the TV show. All I had seen was a sizzle reel for the show and I basically went in blind. I really think that this is going to have a good impact. Starting out, I had no idea what this experience was going to be like– but I said yes anyway! </p><h3>Key topics from this episode:</h3><ul>
<li>Shoot dates changing at the last moment</li>
<li>Styling myself and finding a last-minute makeup artist</li>
<li>Dealing with self-doubt and imposter syndrome</li>
<li>My free day in Los Angeles</li>
<li>What this means for the second half of my career </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3674</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c6990e02-dd85-11ee-b43d-13864017d917]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7337825983.mp3?updated=1709928649" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>828: 9 Critically Important Lessons I’ve Learned from 9 Years in Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/9-critically-important-lessons-ive-learned-from-9-years-in-business</link>
      <description>It’s difficult to believe that I have been in business for nine whole years! For those unfamiliar with the story, nine years ago, in March, I was laid off from a startup — I had only been working there for three months. This startup had recruited me for a position I had held for years at a financial firm, where I worked as a graphic designer in strategic marketing. Then, three months later, the entire marketing department was axed in one fell swoop, leaving me with 30 days' notice. What I didn't know at the time was that they were attempting to avoid paying me unemployment.
So there I was, paid to occupy space at my desk while I ostensibly hunted for new work. Instead, I seized those 30 days, predominantly throughout March of 2015, to kick-start my own business. Jump forward in time – it’s nine years later – and I am still loving this wild ride! I’ve learned a LOT over the past nine years, and today I get into key lessons I’d like to share with you. Join me today for a trip down memory lane and a breakdown of 9 critically important lessons I’ve learned from 9 years in business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 07 Mar 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>9 Critically Important Lessons I’ve Learned from 9 Years in Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>828</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me today for a trip down memory lane and a breakdown of 9 critically important lessons I’ve learned from 9 years in business!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It’s difficult to believe that I have been in business for nine whole years! For those unfamiliar with the story, nine years ago, in March, I was laid off from a startup — I had only been working there for three months. This startup had recruited me for a position I had held for years at a financial firm, where I worked as a graphic designer in strategic marketing. Then, three months later, the entire marketing department was axed in one fell swoop, leaving me with 30 days' notice. What I didn't know at the time was that they were attempting to avoid paying me unemployment.
So there I was, paid to occupy space at my desk while I ostensibly hunted for new work. Instead, I seized those 30 days, predominantly throughout March of 2015, to kick-start my own business. Jump forward in time – it’s nine years later – and I am still loving this wild ride! I’ve learned a LOT over the past nine years, and today I get into key lessons I’d like to share with you. Join me today for a trip down memory lane and a breakdown of 9 critically important lessons I’ve learned from 9 years in business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It’s difficult to believe that I have been in business for nine whole years! For those unfamiliar with the story, nine years ago, in March, I was laid off from a startup — I had only been working there for three months. This startup had recruited me for a position I had held for years at a financial firm, where I worked as a graphic designer in strategic marketing. Then, three months later, the entire marketing department was axed in one fell swoop, leaving me with 30 days' notice. What I didn't know at the time was that they were attempting to avoid paying me unemployment.</p><p>So there I was, paid to occupy space at my desk while I ostensibly hunted for new work. Instead, I seized those 30 days, predominantly throughout March of 2015, to kick-start my own business. Jump forward in time – it’s nine years later – and I am still loving this wild ride! I’ve learned a LOT over the past nine years, and today I get into key lessons I’d like to share with you. Join me today for a trip down memory lane and a breakdown of 9 critically important lessons I’ve learned from 9 years in business!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3188</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[bdb54c9c-dbc8-11ee-9dbd-77dd1d5e6e9c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4258082252.mp3?updated=1709737648" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>827: 4 Types of Content to Generate Consistent Leads who PAY to Join Your List</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/4-types-of-content-to-generate-consistent-leads-who-pay-to-join-your-list</link>
      <description>What if you could generate consistent paid leads? This episode is dedicated to the specific things you can focus on to do this naturally, seamlessly, and consistently. So often, when we get frustrated by a lack of leads or a lack of sales, it’s rooted in a lack of belief that we can do it. Confidence attracts people like nothing else I can possibly describe. 
Tune in to hear about:

What It Really Means to Have Enough Confidence

Breaking Down the Small Business Infinity Loop

Two Ways to Capitalize on Magnetic Marketing

The Dual Purpose of Nurture Content

How to Leverage the Power of Activation Content


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 05 Mar 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>4 Types of Content to Generate Consistent Leads who PAY to Join Your List</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>827</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>What if you could generate consistent paid leads? This episode is dedicated to the specific things you can focus on to do this naturally, seamlessly, and consistently. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What if you could generate consistent paid leads? This episode is dedicated to the specific things you can focus on to do this naturally, seamlessly, and consistently. So often, when we get frustrated by a lack of leads or a lack of sales, it’s rooted in a lack of belief that we can do it. Confidence attracts people like nothing else I can possibly describe. 
Tune in to hear about:

What It Really Means to Have Enough Confidence

Breaking Down the Small Business Infinity Loop

Two Ways to Capitalize on Magnetic Marketing

The Dual Purpose of Nurture Content

How to Leverage the Power of Activation Content


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What if you could generate consistent paid leads? This episode is dedicated to the specific things you can focus on to do this naturally, seamlessly, and consistently. So often, when we get frustrated by a lack of leads or a lack of sales, it’s rooted in a lack of belief that we can do it. Confidence attracts people like nothing else I can possibly describe. </p><h3>Tune in to hear about:</h3><ul>
<li>What It <em>Really</em> Means to Have Enough Confidence</li>
<li>Breaking Down the Small Business Infinity Loop</li>
<li>Two Ways to Capitalize on Magnetic Marketing</li>
<li>The Dual Purpose of Nurture Content</li>
<li>How to Leverage the Power of Activation Content</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2783</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[10bbb112-d80c-11ee-824b-53f7ca0301ac]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3197934277.mp3?updated=1709326775" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>826: Answering Your Questions: Monetizing on Instagram</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/answering-your-questions-monetizing-on-instagram</link>
      <description>In today’s episode, I want to talk about the intimidating parts of getting visible because it can be so vulnerable! My focus is specifically on Instagram but that doesn’t mean that it’s the only platform for you. From my perspective, Instagram has the lowest barrier to entry and is the best place to drive free and organic traffic to monetize the work you’re doing there. So, let’s answer some of your questions about how I monetize on Instagram! 
You’ll learn:

How to Overcome Intimidation of Being the ‘Face’ of Your Brand and Posting Reels 

How to Captivate Attention Span on Instagram 

How to Deal with Most of Your Followers Not Being Your Target Audience 

How to Get Your Existing Followers to Engage More 

How to Make Sure That Your New Followers Are Your Target Audience


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 29 Feb 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Answering Your Questions: Monetizing on Instagram</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>826</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Instagram has the lowest barrier to entry and is the best place to drive free and organic traffic to monetize the work you’re doing there. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today’s episode, I want to talk about the intimidating parts of getting visible because it can be so vulnerable! My focus is specifically on Instagram but that doesn’t mean that it’s the only platform for you. From my perspective, Instagram has the lowest barrier to entry and is the best place to drive free and organic traffic to monetize the work you’re doing there. So, let’s answer some of your questions about how I monetize on Instagram! 
You’ll learn:

How to Overcome Intimidation of Being the ‘Face’ of Your Brand and Posting Reels 

How to Captivate Attention Span on Instagram 

How to Deal with Most of Your Followers Not Being Your Target Audience 

How to Get Your Existing Followers to Engage More 

How to Make Sure That Your New Followers Are Your Target Audience


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today’s episode, I want to talk about the intimidating parts of getting visible because it can be so vulnerable! My focus is specifically on Instagram but that doesn’t mean that it’s the only platform for you. From my perspective, Instagram has the lowest barrier to entry and is the best place to drive free and organic traffic to monetize the work you’re doing there. So, let’s answer some of your questions about how I monetize on Instagram! </p><h2>You’ll learn:</h2><ul>
<li>How to Overcome Intimidation of Being the ‘Face’ of Your Brand and Posting Reels </li>
<li>How to Captivate Attention Span on Instagram </li>
<li>How to Deal with Most of Your Followers Not Being Your Target Audience </li>
<li>How to Get Your Existing Followers to Engage More </li>
<li>How to Make Sure That Your New Followers Are Your Target Audience</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2160</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1c0612ca-d653-11ee-92ec-87ef4e953d04]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2842636660.mp3?updated=1709216639" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>825: How I got 222 New Students &amp; $19,698 Cash on Instagram in 6-Weeks</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-i-got-222-new-students-19698-cash-on-instagram-in-6-weeks</link>
      <description>Today we are talking about using Instagram strategically in your business to actually lead to sales. This is a digital marketing tactic you need to pay attention to! Every business needs visibility in order to drive new people to discover who you are, earn their trust, and start them down a sales pipeline. If you’re always in nurture mode, then you will run out of leads to nurture because your business will shrink. 
I did something incredible with Instagram recently and had fantastic results! Today I’m sharing that specific strategy with you.
You’ll learn about:

Evolving Your Social Media Marketing Strategies

How Instagram Visibility Helps Other Areas of Your Business Grow

The Importance of Mindset 


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 27 Feb 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How I got 222 New Students &amp; $19,698 Cash on Instagram in 6-Weeks</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>825</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are talking about using Instagram strategically in your business to actually lead to sales. This is a digital marketing tactic you need to pay attention to! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are talking about using Instagram strategically in your business to actually lead to sales. This is a digital marketing tactic you need to pay attention to! Every business needs visibility in order to drive new people to discover who you are, earn their trust, and start them down a sales pipeline. If you’re always in nurture mode, then you will run out of leads to nurture because your business will shrink. 
I did something incredible with Instagram recently and had fantastic results! Today I’m sharing that specific strategy with you.
You’ll learn about:

Evolving Your Social Media Marketing Strategies

How Instagram Visibility Helps Other Areas of Your Business Grow

The Importance of Mindset 


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are talking about using Instagram strategically in your business to actually lead to sales. This is a digital marketing tactic you need to pay attention to! Every business needs visibility in order to drive new people to discover who you are, earn their trust, and start them down a sales pipeline. If you’re always in nurture mode, then you will run out of leads to nurture because your business will shrink. </p><p>I did something incredible with Instagram recently and had fantastic results! Today I’m sharing that specific strategy with you.</p><h2>You’ll learn about:</h2><ul>
<li>Evolving Your Social Media Marketing Strategies</li>
<li>How Instagram Visibility Helps Other Areas of Your Business Grow</li>
<li>The Importance of Mindset </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2421</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e0b2f5a0-d4ca-11ee-9b44-531a6d19cf63]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8500913726.mp3?updated=1708968579" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>824: Messy Sex, Finding Alignment &amp; Doing IT Scared</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/messy-sex-finding-alignment-doing-it-scared</link>
      <description>There are unspoken expectations thrust upon every area of your life. People complain about how others choose to show up, respond, or not respond to what’s happening in the world. There is so much anger about the state of our world and our economy, what people are saying or not saying, and even how you might choose to run your business.
I get it! These are important things to have thoughts and feelings about. But what would it look like to show up in alignment with your truth? At the end of the day, it’s about you, the weight that you carry from these societal expectations, and how that bleeds into your business and career. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 22 Feb 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Messy Sex, Finding Alignment &amp; Doing IT Scared</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>824</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>At the end of the day, it’s about you, the weight that you carry from these societal expectations, and how that bleeds into your business and career. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There are unspoken expectations thrust upon every area of your life. People complain about how others choose to show up, respond, or not respond to what’s happening in the world. There is so much anger about the state of our world and our economy, what people are saying or not saying, and even how you might choose to run your business.
I get it! These are important things to have thoughts and feelings about. But what would it look like to show up in alignment with your truth? At the end of the day, it’s about you, the weight that you carry from these societal expectations, and how that bleeds into your business and career. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There are unspoken expectations thrust upon every area of your life. People complain about how others choose to show up, respond, or not respond to what’s happening in the world. There is so much anger about the state of our world and our economy, what people are saying or not saying, and even how you might choose to run your business.</p><p>I get it! These are important things to have thoughts and feelings about. But what would it look like to show up in alignment with your truth? At the end of the day, it’s about you, the weight that you carry from these societal expectations, and how that bleeds into your business and career. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1344</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[685edc3e-d0d5-11ee-8ba6-27ec1eebaa17]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4749839306.mp3?updated=1708533016" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>823: Starting a Business with ZERO Audience</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/starting-a-business-with-zero-audience</link>
      <description>Today, I dig into how I would start a business with zero existing audience. First of all, I have to admit that I’ve never met anyone who actually has no audience. Everyone has up to 1,000 connections that they can leverage from day one. Whether you believe it or not, you already have an audience and it’s your job to leverage existing connections to build momentum for the life and the business you want. Ultimately, the number of people in your audience and the number of followers you have has little to no influence on how much revenue you can generate.
Getting visible isn’t just about growing an audience. It’s about growing a community of real relationships. Emphasizing growing my community rather than chasing the numbers has been empowering, and today I’m sharing that experience. 
Tune in to learn:

How to Utilize a Digital Product to Convert Strangers to Buyers

How to Build an Audience You Can Sell to

How to Leverage Digital Products to Build Your Audience

The Best Way to Communicate with Your Followers Directly

The Biggest Mistake that People Are Making


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 17 Feb 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Starting a Business with ZERO Audience</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>823</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Leverage existing connections to build momentum for the life and the business you want. Ultimately, the number of people in your audience and the number of followers you have has little to no influence on how much revenue you can generate.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, I dig into how I would start a business with zero existing audience. First of all, I have to admit that I’ve never met anyone who actually has no audience. Everyone has up to 1,000 connections that they can leverage from day one. Whether you believe it or not, you already have an audience and it’s your job to leverage existing connections to build momentum for the life and the business you want. Ultimately, the number of people in your audience and the number of followers you have has little to no influence on how much revenue you can generate.
Getting visible isn’t just about growing an audience. It’s about growing a community of real relationships. Emphasizing growing my community rather than chasing the numbers has been empowering, and today I’m sharing that experience. 
Tune in to learn:

How to Utilize a Digital Product to Convert Strangers to Buyers

How to Build an Audience You Can Sell to

How to Leverage Digital Products to Build Your Audience

The Best Way to Communicate with Your Followers Directly

The Biggest Mistake that People Are Making


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, I dig into how I would start a business with zero existing audience. First of all, I have to admit that I’ve never met anyone who <em>actually</em> has no audience. Everyone has up to 1,000 connections that they can leverage from day one. Whether you believe it or not, you already have an audience and it’s your job to leverage existing connections to build momentum for the life and the business you want. Ultimately, the number of people in your audience and the number of followers you have has little to no influence on how much revenue you can generate.</p><p>Getting visible isn’t just about growing an audience. It’s about growing a community of real relationships. Emphasizing growing my community rather than chasing the numbers has been empowering, and today I’m sharing that experience. </p><h2>Tune in to learn:</h2><ul>
<li>How to Utilize a Digital Product to Convert Strangers to Buyers</li>
<li>How to Build an Audience You Can Sell to</li>
<li>How to Leverage Digital Products to Build Your Audience</li>
<li>The Best Way to Communicate with Your Followers Directly</li>
<li>The Biggest Mistake that People Are Making</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2709</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[018e7acc-cce4-11ee-93b8-87e1273208af]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1521673876.mp3?updated=1708106893" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>822: Design a Business That Can Run Without You</title>
      <description>Today, I want to talk about why it's super important to strengthen your business so it can handle the unexpected stuff that happens in life. Bad things are gonna happen, it's just a fact. But you don't want your business to rely too much on you to handle all the problems. Personally, I don't want to have to depend on someone else for money, and I bet a lot of you feel the same way. You want your business to stay strong even when life gets challenging. It's not about fixing every problem perfectly; it's about keeping things going smoothly even when things get tough.
The reality is that being a business owner often entails heightened stress levels. The smallest hiccup can throw off your entire day or even jeopardize your long-term plans. These unforeseen events are a part of life, whether you're an entrepreneur or not. So, how do we confront these challenges head-on and safeguard our future success? 
In this episode we cover:

How to Seek Support &amp; Who to ask for help

Dreaming Up a Business That Runs on Its Own

The Absolute First Step You've Got to Take


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Feb 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Design a Business That Can Run Without You</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>822</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, I want to talk about why it's super important to strengthen your business so it can handle the unexpected stuff that happens in life. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, I want to talk about why it's super important to strengthen your business so it can handle the unexpected stuff that happens in life. Bad things are gonna happen, it's just a fact. But you don't want your business to rely too much on you to handle all the problems. Personally, I don't want to have to depend on someone else for money, and I bet a lot of you feel the same way. You want your business to stay strong even when life gets challenging. It's not about fixing every problem perfectly; it's about keeping things going smoothly even when things get tough.
The reality is that being a business owner often entails heightened stress levels. The smallest hiccup can throw off your entire day or even jeopardize your long-term plans. These unforeseen events are a part of life, whether you're an entrepreneur or not. So, how do we confront these challenges head-on and safeguard our future success? 
In this episode we cover:

How to Seek Support &amp; Who to ask for help

Dreaming Up a Business That Runs on Its Own

The Absolute First Step You've Got to Take


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, I want to talk about why it's super important to strengthen your business so it can handle the unexpected stuff that happens in life. Bad things are gonna happen, it's just a fact. But you don't want your business to rely too much on you to handle all the problems. Personally, I don't want to have to depend on someone else for money, and I bet a lot of you feel the same way. You want your business to stay strong even when life gets challenging. It's not about fixing every problem perfectly; it's about keeping things going smoothly even when things get tough.</p><p>The reality is that being a business owner often entails heightened stress levels. The smallest hiccup can throw off your entire day or even jeopardize your long-term plans. These unforeseen events are a part of life, whether you're an entrepreneur or not. So, how do we confront these challenges head-on and safeguard our future success? </p><h2>In this episode we cover:</h2><ul>
<li>How to Seek Support &amp; Who to ask for help</li>
<li>Dreaming Up a Business That Runs on Its Own</li>
<li>The Absolute First Step You've Got to Take</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2687</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e457dafa-caab-11ee-81c5-0b4cf0499313]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5012738601.mp3?updated=1707860197" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>821: The Surprising Ways Being a “High-Achieving Woman” Impacts Our Friendships with Danielle Bayard Jackson</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/surprising-ways-being-a-high-achieving-woman-impacts-our-friendships</link>
      <description>Danielle Bayard Jackson joins us to discuss how being a high-achieving woman impacts our platonic relationships and the art and science of conflict versus connection. Danielle has dedicated the last six years of her career to studying the latest research about the science of these kinds of platonic female relationships. 
There’s a massive blurring of lines between colleagues, friends from work, and friends outside of work; especially for high-achieving women who spend most of their time at work and therefore, naturally meet most of their friends in the workplace. So much of your identity rests in achievements and while that is praised by many people, often it’s detrimental to friendships. Many of you don’t know who you are outside of your professional goals and achievements and it’s imperative to figure out what more you have to offer in order to build meaningful friendships. 
We’re chatting about:

Having Different Friends for Different Purposes

Making a Change to Your Friendships and Where Conflict Fits in

How to Handle Healthy Conflict and Stay Connected in Friendship


Tune in to hear about navigating platonic relationships and handling conflict!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 13 Feb 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Surprising Ways Being a “High-Achieving Woman” Impacts Our Friendships with Danielle Bayard Jackson</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>821</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>There’s a massive blurring of lines between colleagues, friends from work, and friends outside of work; especially for high-achieving women who spend most of their time at work and therefore, naturally meet most of their friends in the workplace. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Danielle Bayard Jackson joins us to discuss how being a high-achieving woman impacts our platonic relationships and the art and science of conflict versus connection. Danielle has dedicated the last six years of her career to studying the latest research about the science of these kinds of platonic female relationships. 
There’s a massive blurring of lines between colleagues, friends from work, and friends outside of work; especially for high-achieving women who spend most of their time at work and therefore, naturally meet most of their friends in the workplace. So much of your identity rests in achievements and while that is praised by many people, often it’s detrimental to friendships. Many of you don’t know who you are outside of your professional goals and achievements and it’s imperative to figure out what more you have to offer in order to build meaningful friendships. 
We’re chatting about:

Having Different Friends for Different Purposes

Making a Change to Your Friendships and Where Conflict Fits in

How to Handle Healthy Conflict and Stay Connected in Friendship


Tune in to hear about navigating platonic relationships and handling conflict!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Danielle Bayard Jackson joins us to discuss how being a high-achieving woman impacts our platonic relationships and the art and science of conflict versus connection. Danielle has dedicated the last six years of her career to studying the latest research about the science of these kinds of platonic female relationships. </p><p>There’s a massive blurring of lines between colleagues, friends from work, and friends outside of work; especially for high-achieving women who spend most of their time at work and therefore, naturally meet most of their friends in the workplace. So much of your identity rests in achievements and while that is praised by many people, often it’s detrimental to friendships. Many of you don’t know who you are outside of your professional goals and achievements and it’s imperative to figure out what more you have to offer in order to build meaningful friendships. </p><h2>We’re chatting about:</h2><ul>
<li>Having Different Friends for Different Purposes</li>
<li>Making a Change to Your Friendships and Where Conflict Fits in</li>
<li>How to Handle Healthy Conflict and Stay Connected in Friendship</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Tune in to hear about navigating platonic relationships and handling conflict!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2820</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7497abb2-c76a-11ee-8c5f-d78c3a77a147]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1603908122.mp3?updated=1707500330" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>820: Streamlined &amp; Stress-Free Launches with Dolly Delong</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/streamlined-stress-free-launches-with-dolly-delong</link>
      <description>The launch process doesn’t have to be complicated! On this episode, Lifestyle and Brand photographer, Dolly DeLong, joins us to talk about how to make launching more stress-free and streamlined, lean into facts over feelings, and create an awesome launch. 
Tune in to hear:

Why Dolly Gives Herself Plenty of Time For Each Launch

The One Thing You Really Need to Consider During Launch-Planning

How to Leverage Technology to Communicate Your Thoughts

How to Stay Focused on Facts over Feelings

How to Get Your Priorities in Order Leading Up to a Launch

The Systems and Workflow Bundle


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 08 Feb 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Streamlined &amp; Stress-Free Launches with Dolly Delong</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>820</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Learn how to make launching more stress-free and streamlined, lean into facts over feelings, and create an awesome launch.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>The launch process doesn’t have to be complicated! On this episode, Lifestyle and Brand photographer, Dolly DeLong, joins us to talk about how to make launching more stress-free and streamlined, lean into facts over feelings, and create an awesome launch. 
Tune in to hear:

Why Dolly Gives Herself Plenty of Time For Each Launch

The One Thing You Really Need to Consider During Launch-Planning

How to Leverage Technology to Communicate Your Thoughts

How to Stay Focused on Facts over Feelings

How to Get Your Priorities in Order Leading Up to a Launch

The Systems and Workflow Bundle


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The launch process doesn’t have to be complicated! On this episode, Lifestyle and Brand photographer, Dolly DeLong, joins us to talk about how to make launching more stress-free and streamlined, lean into facts over feelings, and create an awesome launch. </p><h2>Tune in to hear:</h2><ul>
<li>Why Dolly Gives Herself Plenty of Time For Each Launch</li>
<li>The One Thing You Really Need to Consider During Launch-Planning</li>
<li>How to Leverage Technology to Communicate Your Thoughts</li>
<li>How to Stay Focused on Facts over Feelings</li>
<li>How to Get Your Priorities in Order Leading Up to a Launch</li>
<li>The Systems and Workflow Bundle</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2996</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[67dcd3a6-c5d6-11ee-91d8-2fc0bb141b34]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3243324434.mp3?updated=1707324444" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>819: My “I’m Done” Moment</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/my-i-am-done-moment</link>
      <description>I’ve been avoiding telling you a really important story. It’s one I was scared to tell, but I know you need to know this so that you don’t feel so alone. Somewhere along the way, I lost myself in my business, before I re-focused and got back in the “feel-good” zone. 
In this episode, I want to remind you that business can be fun, exciting, empowering, and encouraging! Following your intuition to make your business feel good is going to inspire you in so many ways. It’s going to give you the kind of contagious energy to pursue things in a way that will not only improve your mood but also attract people who want what you’re offering.
Since the clock struck midnight on January 1st, I have been in that “feel-good” zone. This year has felt amazing because I’ve allowed myself to focus on things that I genuinely care about, feel good about, and want to see people benefit from! My energy has been the most contagious it has been in years. I’d almost forgotten what it felt like! 
Tune into the podcast to learn:

The Turning Point That Changed Everything

What I Needed to Hear When I Wanted to Give Up

Why it Doesn’t Have to Feel Like Climbing a Mountain

How My Business Began to Make Money While I Put My Life First

What it Looks Like For Me to Make it Easy

How I Can Help You to Live a Life You’ve Only Dreamed Of


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 06 Feb 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>My “I’m Done” Moment</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>819</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I want to remind you that business can be fun, exciting, empowering, and encouraging! Following your intuition to make your business feel good is going to inspire you in so many ways.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’ve been avoiding telling you a really important story. It’s one I was scared to tell, but I know you need to know this so that you don’t feel so alone. Somewhere along the way, I lost myself in my business, before I re-focused and got back in the “feel-good” zone. 
In this episode, I want to remind you that business can be fun, exciting, empowering, and encouraging! Following your intuition to make your business feel good is going to inspire you in so many ways. It’s going to give you the kind of contagious energy to pursue things in a way that will not only improve your mood but also attract people who want what you’re offering.
Since the clock struck midnight on January 1st, I have been in that “feel-good” zone. This year has felt amazing because I’ve allowed myself to focus on things that I genuinely care about, feel good about, and want to see people benefit from! My energy has been the most contagious it has been in years. I’d almost forgotten what it felt like! 
Tune into the podcast to learn:

The Turning Point That Changed Everything

What I Needed to Hear When I Wanted to Give Up

Why it Doesn’t Have to Feel Like Climbing a Mountain

How My Business Began to Make Money While I Put My Life First

What it Looks Like For Me to Make it Easy

How I Can Help You to Live a Life You’ve Only Dreamed Of


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’ve been avoiding telling you a really important story. It’s one I was scared to tell, but I know you need to know this so that you don’t feel so alone. Somewhere along the way, I lost myself in my business, before I re-focused and got back in the “feel-good” zone. </p><p>In this episode, I want to remind you that business can be fun, exciting, empowering, and encouraging! Following your intuition to make your business feel good is going to inspire you in so many ways. It’s going to give you the kind of contagious energy to pursue things in a way that will not only improve your mood but also attract people who want what you’re offering.</p><p>Since the clock struck midnight on January 1st, I have been in that “feel-good” zone. This year has felt amazing because I’ve allowed myself to focus on things that I genuinely care about, feel good about, and want to see people benefit from! My energy has been the most contagious it has been in years. I’d almost forgotten what it felt like! </p><h2>Tune into the podcast to learn:</h2><ul>
<li>The Turning Point That Changed Everything</li>
<li>What I Needed to Hear When I Wanted to Give Up</li>
<li>Why it Doesn’t Have to Feel Like Climbing a Mountain</li>
<li>How My Business Began to Make Money While I Put My Life First</li>
<li>What it Looks Like For Me to Make it Easy</li>
<li>How I Can Help You to Live a Life You’ve Only Dreamed Of</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2096</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a2679082-c447-11ee-b286-f7081d168319]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1604520345.mp3?updated=1707152791" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>818: The Future of Online Communities with Andy Guttormsen of Circle.so</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-future-of-online-communities-with-andy-guttormsen-of-circle</link>
      <description>There has been a massive shift from the popularity of one-to-many courses to the desire for community-driven courses. People want to connect with others while trying to improve themselves. They crave connection more than ever and this shift has been incredibly interesting to witness. In this episode, Andy Guttormsen, co-founder and CMO of Circle, joins me to discuss what the future holds for online communities.
We’ll cover:

The Main Difference Between a Following and a Community

How to Start Attracting People to Build a Community

Why You Just Need to Be Yourself

The Most Effective Way to Onboard People into Your Community

The Benefits of Showing Up Consistently

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 01 Feb 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Future of Online Communities with Andy Guttormsen of Circle.so</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>818</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>People are craving community-driven courses to connect with others while trying to improve themselves. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There has been a massive shift from the popularity of one-to-many courses to the desire for community-driven courses. People want to connect with others while trying to improve themselves. They crave connection more than ever and this shift has been incredibly interesting to witness. In this episode, Andy Guttormsen, co-founder and CMO of Circle, joins me to discuss what the future holds for online communities.
We’ll cover:

The Main Difference Between a Following and a Community

How to Start Attracting People to Build a Community

Why You Just Need to Be Yourself

The Most Effective Way to Onboard People into Your Community

The Benefits of Showing Up Consistently

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There has been a massive shift from the popularity of one-to-many courses to the desire for <em>community-driven </em>courses. People want to connect with others while trying to improve themselves. They crave connection more than ever and this shift has been incredibly interesting to witness. In this episode, Andy Guttormsen, co-founder and CMO of Circle, joins me to discuss what the future holds for online communities.</p><p>We’ll cover:</p><ul>
<li>The Main Difference Between a Following and a Community</li>
<li>How to Start Attracting People to Build a Community</li>
<li>Why You Just Need to Be Yourself</li>
<li>The Most Effective Way to Onboard People into Your Community</li>
<li>The Benefits of Showing Up Consistently</li>
</ul><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2625</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0a754220-bfaa-11ee-911a-ab6692e5726c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4166384449.mp3?updated=1706645414" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>817: Walking Away from 45k Followers: Lessons I’ve Learned from Starting Over on Instagram</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/walking-away-from-45k-followers-lessons-ive-learned-from-starting-over-on-instagram</link>
      <description>Smart businesses continuously review and revise their social media marketing strategy based on what’s currently working. Have you ever thought about starting your Instagram page from scratch? Maybe you want to separate your brand and your personal life, or you’re curious if taking a more niche approach can help you reach your core audience. Either way, it’s difficult to know what the results will be without actually taking action and running an experiment.
In today’s episode, I’ll walk you through my decision to start a new Instagram page and why I was willing to walk away from 45,000 followers. Tuning in you’ll hear about my Instagram journey, follower growth, and what my findings were from this wild experiment. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 30 Jan 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Walking Away from 45k Followers: Lessons I’ve Learned from Starting Over on Instagram</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>817</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tuning in you’ll hear about my Instagram journey, follower growth, and what my findings were from this wild experiment. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Smart businesses continuously review and revise their social media marketing strategy based on what’s currently working. Have you ever thought about starting your Instagram page from scratch? Maybe you want to separate your brand and your personal life, or you’re curious if taking a more niche approach can help you reach your core audience. Either way, it’s difficult to know what the results will be without actually taking action and running an experiment.
In today’s episode, I’ll walk you through my decision to start a new Instagram page and why I was willing to walk away from 45,000 followers. Tuning in you’ll hear about my Instagram journey, follower growth, and what my findings were from this wild experiment. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Smart businesses continuously review and revise their social media marketing strategy based on what’s currently working. Have you ever thought about starting your Instagram page from scratch? Maybe you want to separate your brand and your personal life, or you’re curious if taking a more niche approach can help you reach your core audience. Either way, it’s difficult to know what the results will be without actually taking action and running an experiment.</p><p>In today’s episode, I’ll walk you through my decision to start a new Instagram page and why I was willing to walk away from 45,000 followers. Tuning in you’ll hear about my Instagram journey, follower growth, and what my findings were from this wild experiment. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3370</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4e363d00-bec6-11ee-89c9-97bb287b1027]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5363171717.mp3?updated=1706547799" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>816: Leveraging Digital Products to Get More Qualified Leads</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/leveraging-digital-products-to-get-more-qualified-leads</link>
      <description>Believe it or not, the profit that you make from your first sale to a customer isn’t critical to the success of your business in the long term. Getting paid at all to bring in qualified leads means that you’re doing better than 99% of the people who are marketing their products and services on the internet.
Growing an Instagram account or creating content for Reels isn’t necessarily the key to leveraging digital products and getting more qualified leads. If you want more leads or you’re interested in selling and leveraging digital products without getting caught in the weeds of flashy marketing strategies, this is the episode for you! Tuning in, you’ll find out how to attract leads AND get paid in the process. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 25 Jan 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Leveraging Digital Products to Get More Qualified Leads</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>816</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How to attract leads AND get paid in the process, by strategically selling digital products. Learn how to do this without getting caught in the weeds of flashy marketing tactics.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Believe it or not, the profit that you make from your first sale to a customer isn’t critical to the success of your business in the long term. Getting paid at all to bring in qualified leads means that you’re doing better than 99% of the people who are marketing their products and services on the internet.
Growing an Instagram account or creating content for Reels isn’t necessarily the key to leveraging digital products and getting more qualified leads. If you want more leads or you’re interested in selling and leveraging digital products without getting caught in the weeds of flashy marketing strategies, this is the episode for you! Tuning in, you’ll find out how to attract leads AND get paid in the process. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Believe it or not, the profit that you make from your first sale to a customer isn’t critical to the success of your business in the long term. Getting paid <em>at all</em> to bring in qualified leads means that you’re doing better than 99% of the people who are marketing their products and services on the internet.</p><p>Growing an Instagram account or creating content for Reels isn’t necessarily the key to leveraging digital products and getting more qualified leads. If you want more leads or you’re interested in selling and leveraging digital products without getting caught in the weeds of flashy marketing strategies, this is the episode for you! Tuning in, you’ll find out how to attract leads AND get paid in the process. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1789</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b72287be-bac6-11ee-9bcf-63a3f3e69aa3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1823868612.mp3?updated=1706108177" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>815: How I Made 6-Figures From a Digital Product I Created Once</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-i-made-6-figures-from-a-digital-product-i-created-once</link>
      <description>Today I’m sharing the marketing strategy behind how I made $ 287,000 and had over 10,000 people pay to join my email list from a digital product I created just once.
Many entrepreneurs only focus on nurture marketing, taking warm leads and trying to convert them into a signature offer. But that can quickly turn into a situation that has you saying “I need more leads!” 
But brand new businesses as well as established businesses need a visibility plan in order to retain customers and keep growing their businesses. And this shouldn’t involve feeling stressed or working over your capacity. The goal of this kind of marketing is to get to know more people, allow them into your world, and earn their trust. That’s how to find your ideal clients and customers! Social media marketing and creating digital products are some of the best ways to do this in 2024. 
I’m here to help you grow your business in a way that allows you to still have a life. Tune into today’s podcast to learn more!
For show notes of this episode, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 20 Jan 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How I Made 6-Figures From a Digital Product I Created Once</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>815</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>The goal of this kind of marketing is to get to know more people, allow them into your world, and earn their trust. That’s how to find your ideal clients and customers! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today I’m sharing the marketing strategy behind how I made $ 287,000 and had over 10,000 people pay to join my email list from a digital product I created just once.
Many entrepreneurs only focus on nurture marketing, taking warm leads and trying to convert them into a signature offer. But that can quickly turn into a situation that has you saying “I need more leads!” 
But brand new businesses as well as established businesses need a visibility plan in order to retain customers and keep growing their businesses. And this shouldn’t involve feeling stressed or working over your capacity. The goal of this kind of marketing is to get to know more people, allow them into your world, and earn their trust. That’s how to find your ideal clients and customers! Social media marketing and creating digital products are some of the best ways to do this in 2024. 
I’m here to help you grow your business in a way that allows you to still have a life. Tune into today’s podcast to learn more!
For show notes of this episode, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m sharing the marketing strategy behind how I made $ 287,000 and had over 10,000 people pay to join my email list from a digital product I created just once.</p><p>Many entrepreneurs only focus on nurture marketing, taking warm leads and trying to convert them into a signature offer. But that can quickly turn into a situation that has you saying “I need more leads!” </p><p>But brand new businesses as well as established businesses need a visibility plan in order to retain customers and keep growing their businesses. And this shouldn’t involve feeling stressed or working over your capacity. The goal of this kind of marketing is to get to know more people, allow them into your world, and earn their trust. That’s how to find your ideal clients and customers! Social media marketing and <a href="https://bossproject.com/jumpstart">creating digital products</a> are some of the best ways to do this in 2024. </p><p>I’m here to help you grow your business in a way that allows you to still have a life. Tune into today’s podcast to learn more!</p><p>For show notes of this episode, go to <a href="https://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1752</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5d4e43ae-b70b-11ee-9ecf-0f18bafa0984]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7558971770.mp3?updated=1705697931" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>814: Digital Products I Would NOT Create If I Were Just Getting Started</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/digital-products-i-would-not-create-if-i-were-just-getting-started</link>
      <description>I’ve been making digital products for over eight years, and I want to see you succeed with your digital products, too! In this episode, we dig into the digital products I would not create if I were just getting started (and it’s not what you think, so be sure to listen in!)
I'll cover:

One Thing Almost Everyone Starting Out Does Wrong

What the Most Effective Digital Products Are Actually About

The Secret Behind My Most Popular Mini-Course

Why We Didn’t Give Away Your Business on Autopilot for Free

What We’ve Done The Most and Why We’ll Keep Doing It

How Integration Became Our Superpower

Two Goals to Take You to the Next Level


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 18 Jan 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Digital Products I Would NOT Create If I Were Just Getting Started</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>814</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Strategic marketing tips about how to get the best return-on-investment and qualified leads when you create digital products for your business.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’ve been making digital products for over eight years, and I want to see you succeed with your digital products, too! In this episode, we dig into the digital products I would not create if I were just getting started (and it’s not what you think, so be sure to listen in!)
I'll cover:

One Thing Almost Everyone Starting Out Does Wrong

What the Most Effective Digital Products Are Actually About

The Secret Behind My Most Popular Mini-Course

Why We Didn’t Give Away Your Business on Autopilot for Free

What We’ve Done The Most and Why We’ll Keep Doing It

How Integration Became Our Superpower

Two Goals to Take You to the Next Level


Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’ve been making digital products for over eight years, and I want to see you succeed with your digital products, too! In this episode, we dig into the digital products I would not create if I were just getting started (and it’s not what you think, so be sure to listen in!)</p><p>I'll cover:</p><ul>
<li>One Thing Almost Everyone Starting Out Does Wrong</li>
<li>What the Most Effective Digital Products Are Actually About</li>
<li>The Secret Behind My Most Popular Mini-Course</li>
<li>Why We Didn’t Give Away <em>Your Business on Autopilot</em> for Free</li>
<li>What We’ve Done The Most and Why We’ll Keep Doing It</li>
<li>How Integration Became Our Superpower</li>
<li>Two Goals to Take You to the Next Level</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1920</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3a6ba098-b54e-11ee-8ce3-9bd2655758a0]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9005334327.mp3?updated=1705506664" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>813: Get Paid to Grow Your Email List in 2024</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/get-paid-to-grow-your-email-list-in-2024</link>
      <description>I have observed a need for small business owners to find more leads and I want to talk about why that’s happening and how you can solve this problem. Scaling a business is a numbers game but the problem is, a lot of you have business goals that are confined to what you can do in a limited amount of time – therefore giving your business a growth ceiling. And so many of you want to run a small business, not manage bigger processes! 
A lot of people then think that they want to bring in passive income, and that is possible. I am so excited to help you build more hybrid-based businesses where you can attract real clients through a digital offer and then those people will be more primed and ready for the other existing offers that you have. 
Today I’m going to share the steps I have taken to revolutionize my business and create consistent growth. I think this will solve ‘the lead problem’ for so many small businesses this year!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 16 Jan 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Get Paid to Grow Your Email List in 2024</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>813</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How to build a hybrid-based business to attract clients through a digital offer and prime them for the other existing offers that you have. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I have observed a need for small business owners to find more leads and I want to talk about why that’s happening and how you can solve this problem. Scaling a business is a numbers game but the problem is, a lot of you have business goals that are confined to what you can do in a limited amount of time – therefore giving your business a growth ceiling. And so many of you want to run a small business, not manage bigger processes! 
A lot of people then think that they want to bring in passive income, and that is possible. I am so excited to help you build more hybrid-based businesses where you can attract real clients through a digital offer and then those people will be more primed and ready for the other existing offers that you have. 
Today I’m going to share the steps I have taken to revolutionize my business and create consistent growth. I think this will solve ‘the lead problem’ for so many small businesses this year!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I have observed a need for small business owners to find more leads and I want to talk about why that’s happening and how you can solve this problem. Scaling a business is a numbers game but the problem is, a lot of you have business goals that are confined to what you can do in a limited amount of time – therefore giving your business a growth ceiling. And so many of you <em>want</em> to run a small business, not manage bigger processes! </p><p>A lot of people then think that they want to bring in passive income, and that is possible. I am so excited to help you build more hybrid-based businesses where you can attract real clients through a digital offer and then those people will be more primed and ready for the other existing offers that you have. </p><p>Today I’m going to share the steps I have taken to revolutionize my business and create consistent growth. I think this will solve ‘the lead problem’ for so many small businesses this year!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1896</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[02a8be60-b15d-11ee-b446-9f7de555e515]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2220408041.mp3?updated=1705072939" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>812: How To Budget When My Income is Unpredictable</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-budget-when-my-income-is-unpredictable</link>
      <description>In today's episode, I'm diving into the world of budgeting when your income likes to play hide and seek. Maybe your business revenue and pay are doing the unpredictable tango, and you're itching for more stability in the paycheck department. The economy's a bit wild right now, so what I'm sharing is my playbook for a more conservative approach in these uncertain times. Trust me, this is the game-changer for tweaking your business finances, setting up a cozy personal financial vibe, and securing the long-term health of your hustle. Think of it as the secret sauce to keeping your business doors wide open for the long haul!
Oh, and let's kick that idea out of your noggin that businesses grow all neat and tidy, either linear or exponential. Nope, it's more like a rollercoaster ride. Don't stress if things seem a bit wonky—that's just the nature of the business beast. I've been there, done that, and I'm here to help you ride those waves of inconsistency like a pro. Now, I'm not promising to smooth out every bump; bumps happen! But what we're aiming for is to sprinkle a bit of predictability into your personal financial future. So buckle up, and let's get ready to surf the unpredictability that's bound to show up!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 11 Jan 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How To Budget When My Income is Unpredictable</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>812</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>This is the game-changer for tweaking your business finances, setting up a cozy personal financial vibe, and securing the long-term health of your hustle. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today's episode, I'm diving into the world of budgeting when your income likes to play hide and seek. Maybe your business revenue and pay are doing the unpredictable tango, and you're itching for more stability in the paycheck department. The economy's a bit wild right now, so what I'm sharing is my playbook for a more conservative approach in these uncertain times. Trust me, this is the game-changer for tweaking your business finances, setting up a cozy personal financial vibe, and securing the long-term health of your hustle. Think of it as the secret sauce to keeping your business doors wide open for the long haul!
Oh, and let's kick that idea out of your noggin that businesses grow all neat and tidy, either linear or exponential. Nope, it's more like a rollercoaster ride. Don't stress if things seem a bit wonky—that's just the nature of the business beast. I've been there, done that, and I'm here to help you ride those waves of inconsistency like a pro. Now, I'm not promising to smooth out every bump; bumps happen! But what we're aiming for is to sprinkle a bit of predictability into your personal financial future. So buckle up, and let's get ready to surf the unpredictability that's bound to show up!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today's episode, I'm diving into the world of budgeting when your income likes to play hide and seek. Maybe your business revenue and pay are doing the unpredictable tango, and you're itching for more stability in the paycheck department. The economy's a bit wild right now, so what I'm sharing is my playbook for a more conservative approach in these uncertain times. Trust me, this is the game-changer for tweaking your business finances, setting up a cozy personal financial vibe, and securing the long-term health of your hustle. Think of it as the secret sauce to keeping your business doors wide open for the long haul!</p><p>Oh, and let's kick that idea out of your noggin that businesses grow all neat and tidy, either linear or exponential. Nope, it's more like a rollercoaster ride. Don't stress if things seem a bit wonky—that's just the nature of the business beast. I've been there, done that, and I'm here to help you ride those waves of inconsistency like a pro. Now, I'm not promising to smooth out every bump; bumps happen! But what we're aiming for is to sprinkle a bit of predictability into your personal financial future. So buckle up, and let's get ready to surf the unpredictability that's bound to show up!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2684</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[57cc34bc-afc8-11ee-83ba-ab0c24eb241a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2773003693.mp3?updated=1704899216" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>811: From Freelance to Booking Celebrity Clients with Makeup Artist to the Stars, Harriet Hadfield</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/from-freelance-to-booking-celebrity-clients-with-makeup-artist-to-the-stars-harriet-hadfield</link>
      <description>If you are looking for inspiration for how you can go from small-town to the big leagues, this is the episode for you! Today we are joined by celebrity makeup artist, Harriet Hadfield. While working with celebrities such as Doja Cat, Naomi Watts, and Olivia Rodrigo, Harry has made it her mission to empower creative freelancers to step into the role of CEO. Today we are digging into how she got all of her clients as a freelancer while showing up in the world the way she wants to, as a neurodivergent creative.
Harry always wanted to be the kid who did everything and knew that she wanted to be a makeup artist at a very young age when she went ‘all in’ on honing her craft. In this episode, we hear all about how she started training in makeup and handled being the black sheep of the family as so many creatives are. We dive into Harry’s advice for creatives starting a personal brand, how to find your niche, use social media to your advantage, and so much more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 09 Jan 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From Freelance to Booking Celebrity Clients with Makeup Artist to the Stars, Harriet Hadfield</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>811</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We dive into Harry’s advice for creatives starting a personal brand, how to find your niche, use social media to your advantage, and so much more!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you are looking for inspiration for how you can go from small-town to the big leagues, this is the episode for you! Today we are joined by celebrity makeup artist, Harriet Hadfield. While working with celebrities such as Doja Cat, Naomi Watts, and Olivia Rodrigo, Harry has made it her mission to empower creative freelancers to step into the role of CEO. Today we are digging into how she got all of her clients as a freelancer while showing up in the world the way she wants to, as a neurodivergent creative.
Harry always wanted to be the kid who did everything and knew that she wanted to be a makeup artist at a very young age when she went ‘all in’ on honing her craft. In this episode, we hear all about how she started training in makeup and handled being the black sheep of the family as so many creatives are. We dive into Harry’s advice for creatives starting a personal brand, how to find your niche, use social media to your advantage, and so much more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you are looking for inspiration for how you can go from small-town to the big leagues, this is the episode for you! Today we are joined by celebrity makeup artist, Harriet Hadfield. While working with celebrities such as Doja Cat, Naomi Watts, and Olivia Rodrigo, Harry has made it her mission to empower creative freelancers to step into the role of CEO. Today we are digging into how she got all of her clients as a freelancer while showing up in the world the way she wants to, as a neurodivergent creative.</p><p>Harry always wanted to be the kid who did everything and knew that she wanted to be a makeup artist at a very young age when she went ‘all in’ on honing her craft. In this episode, we hear all about how she started training in makeup and handled being the black sheep of the family as so many creatives are. We dive into Harry’s advice for creatives starting a personal brand, how to find your niche, use social media to your advantage, and so much more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2694</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e9272726-9b84-11ee-a027-43f5a6e47b1b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8310113774.mp3?updated=1702672649" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>810: Childhood Trauma &amp; Finding What You Really Want</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/childhood-trauma-and-finding-what-you-really-want</link>
      <description>I've got a pretty personal tale to spill today—a deep dive into the crisis I faced back in 2022 and how it flipped my world. So, picture this: I'm cruising through life, and bam! I hit a moment where I realize I'm the same age my mom was during her brain surgery three decades ago. Cue the existential crisis! In today’s podcast, I'm laying it all out, sharing my self-reflection journey, and tossing in some cool insights and exercises I picked up along the way. I hope these tools help you move through your own self-reflection and transformation and help you pinpoint what's important to you so you can prioritize those things going forward. Treat this episode like your trusty compass for navigating the sometimes choppy seas of self-discovery! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 04 Jan 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Childhood Trauma &amp; Finding What You Really Want</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>810</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I'm sharing my self-reflection journey and tossing in some cool insights and exercises I picked up along the way. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I've got a pretty personal tale to spill today—a deep dive into the crisis I faced back in 2022 and how it flipped my world. So, picture this: I'm cruising through life, and bam! I hit a moment where I realize I'm the same age my mom was during her brain surgery three decades ago. Cue the existential crisis! In today’s podcast, I'm laying it all out, sharing my self-reflection journey, and tossing in some cool insights and exercises I picked up along the way. I hope these tools help you move through your own self-reflection and transformation and help you pinpoint what's important to you so you can prioritize those things going forward. Treat this episode like your trusty compass for navigating the sometimes choppy seas of self-discovery! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I've got a pretty personal tale to spill today—a deep dive into the crisis I faced back in 2022 and how it flipped my world. So, picture this: I'm cruising through life, and bam! I hit a moment where I realize I'm the same age my mom was during her brain surgery three decades ago. Cue the existential crisis! In today’s podcast, I'm laying it all out, sharing my self-reflection journey, and tossing in some cool insights and exercises I picked up along the way. I hope these tools help you move through your own self-reflection and transformation and help you pinpoint what's important to you so you can prioritize those things going forward. Treat this episode like your trusty compass for navigating the sometimes choppy seas of self-discovery! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2465</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1591da22-9b80-11ee-bc07-376d55401904]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9830857449.mp3?updated=1702672880" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>809: Leverage Where You're At To Get to Where You Want to Go</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/leverage-where-youre-at-to-get-to-where-you-want-to-go</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we’re chatting about your journey ahead—whether you've got a clear vision or you're still figuring it out. I get it, some of you might be like, "Where am I even headed?" And you know what? That's totally cool! It's super easy to breeze past the gold mine of your past experiences, but guess what? They've shaped you into the awesome person you are, and they're like breadcrumbs leading you to your destination. So, if you're not sure about the destination, no worries! It's not about having all the answers; it's about springboarding off from here. Even those random jobs you had? They're like building blocks for the business you're rocking today!
Now, the big question is, how does your past play into your future plans? Whether it's those epic moments or the tiny ones, they can be a game-changer for what comes next. So, how do we make the most of it? Let me tell you, it's not about zooming through things; it's about finding your pace! That's why I cooked up the PACE method, and today, I'm spilling the beans on how these nuggets can help you turn your discoveries into real, actionable stuff by breaking down PACE! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 02 Jan 2024 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Leverage Where You're At To Get to Where You Want to Go</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>809</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>It's super easy to breeze past the gold mine of your past experiences, but guess what? They've shaped you into the awesome person you are, and they're like breadcrumbs leading you to your destination. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we’re chatting about your journey ahead—whether you've got a clear vision or you're still figuring it out. I get it, some of you might be like, "Where am I even headed?" And you know what? That's totally cool! It's super easy to breeze past the gold mine of your past experiences, but guess what? They've shaped you into the awesome person you are, and they're like breadcrumbs leading you to your destination. So, if you're not sure about the destination, no worries! It's not about having all the answers; it's about springboarding off from here. Even those random jobs you had? They're like building blocks for the business you're rocking today!
Now, the big question is, how does your past play into your future plans? Whether it's those epic moments or the tiny ones, they can be a game-changer for what comes next. So, how do we make the most of it? Let me tell you, it's not about zooming through things; it's about finding your pace! That's why I cooked up the PACE method, and today, I'm spilling the beans on how these nuggets can help you turn your discoveries into real, actionable stuff by breaking down PACE! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we’re chatting about your journey ahead—whether you've got a clear vision or you're still figuring it out. I get it, some of you might be like, "Where am I even headed?" And you know what? That's totally cool! It's super easy to breeze past the gold mine of your past experiences, but guess what? They've shaped you into the awesome person you are, and they're like breadcrumbs leading you to your destination. So, if you're not sure about the destination, no worries! It's not about having all the answers; it's about springboarding off from here. Even those random jobs you had? They're like building blocks for the business you're rocking today!</p><p>Now, the big question is, how does your past play into your future plans? Whether it's those epic moments or the tiny ones, they can be a game-changer for what comes next. So, how do we make the most of it? Let me tell you, it's not about zooming through things; it's about finding your pace! That's why I cooked up the PACE method, and today, I'm spilling the beans on how these nuggets can help you turn your discoveries into real, actionable stuff by breaking down PACE! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2026</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[10267234-9b7e-11ee-8700-571f0cf09aa9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1181615636.mp3?updated=1704906487" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>808: The Future of Marketing for Online Business in 2024</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-future-of-marketing-for-online-business-in-2024</link>
      <description>On today’s podcast I’m sharing best practices for tailoring your marketing strategy based on your business model. It doesn’t matter if your business serves customers in a one-to-one, one-to-many, or even a hybrid model. There isn’t a one-size-fits-all marketing plan, and at the end of the day, you have to market your business in a way that works best for YOU.
We’ll also talk about finding the proper niche, and Identifying exactly what types of customers you’re trying to attract. Online audiences have changed quite a bit, and we’ll talk about how and why. Staying visible and nurturing leads is dependent on your audience, and I’m sharing advice on what next steps you should take to stay visible and relevant. Tune in to learn what you need to know today about the future of marketing for your online business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 28 Dec 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Future of Marketing for Online Business in 2024</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>808</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Online audiences have changed quite a bit, and we’ll talk about how and why. We’ll also talk about finding the proper niche, and Identifying exactly what types of customers you’re trying to attract. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s podcast I’m sharing best practices for tailoring your marketing strategy based on your business model. It doesn’t matter if your business serves customers in a one-to-one, one-to-many, or even a hybrid model. There isn’t a one-size-fits-all marketing plan, and at the end of the day, you have to market your business in a way that works best for YOU.
We’ll also talk about finding the proper niche, and Identifying exactly what types of customers you’re trying to attract. Online audiences have changed quite a bit, and we’ll talk about how and why. Staying visible and nurturing leads is dependent on your audience, and I’m sharing advice on what next steps you should take to stay visible and relevant. Tune in to learn what you need to know today about the future of marketing for your online business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s podcast I’m sharing best practices for tailoring your marketing strategy based on your business model. It doesn’t matter if your business serves customers in a one-to-one, one-to-many, or even a hybrid model. There isn’t a one-size-fits-all marketing plan, and at the end of the day, you have to market your business in a way that works best for YOU.</p><p>We’ll also talk about finding the proper niche, and Identifying exactly what types of customers you’re trying to attract. Online audiences have changed quite a bit, and we’ll talk about how and why. Staying visible and nurturing leads is dependent on your audience, and I’m sharing advice on what next steps you should take to stay visible and relevant. Tune in to learn what you need to know today about the future of marketing for your online business!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2858</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f199bf1c-9b7b-11ee-8f1b-47743dd699dc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1376813788.mp3?updated=1704906552" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>807: Not Everyone Has An Internal Monologue Including My Husband</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/not-everyone-has-an-internal-monologue-including-my-husband</link>
      <description>Inevitably, you’re going to encounter people who simply don’t think the same way you do. Personally, it took me a long time to understand this. I always assumed that everyone problem-solved the same way, thought the same way, and came up with ideas in the same way. Like me, you might be surprised to learn that not everyone experiences inner dialogue in the same way or even at all! In fact, it’s estimated that 30 to 50% of people don’t have an “inner voice.”
Those without verbal thoughts may think abstractly or use visual imagery instead. It's important to note that there is no right or wrong way to think, and both styles have their pros and cons. Today, I’m joined by my husband Jared, who doesn’t have an inner monologue, to find out how he processes his thoughts and emotions without all the self-talk. We also explore how you can grow your relationship by learning about someone else’s communication methods, find opportunities for creativity with different thinking styles, and more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 26 Dec 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Not Everyone Has An Internal Monologue Including My Husband</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>807</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Those without verbal thoughts may think abstractly or use visual imagery instead. It's important to note that there is no right or wrong way to think, and both styles have their pros and cons.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Inevitably, you’re going to encounter people who simply don’t think the same way you do. Personally, it took me a long time to understand this. I always assumed that everyone problem-solved the same way, thought the same way, and came up with ideas in the same way. Like me, you might be surprised to learn that not everyone experiences inner dialogue in the same way or even at all! In fact, it’s estimated that 30 to 50% of people don’t have an “inner voice.”
Those without verbal thoughts may think abstractly or use visual imagery instead. It's important to note that there is no right or wrong way to think, and both styles have their pros and cons. Today, I’m joined by my husband Jared, who doesn’t have an inner monologue, to find out how he processes his thoughts and emotions without all the self-talk. We also explore how you can grow your relationship by learning about someone else’s communication methods, find opportunities for creativity with different thinking styles, and more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Inevitably, you’re going to encounter people who simply don’t think the same way you do. Personally, it took me a long time to understand this. I always assumed that everyone problem-solved the same way, thought the same way, and came up with ideas in the same way. Like me, you might be surprised to learn that not everyone experiences inner dialogue in the same way or even at all! In fact, it’s estimated that 30 to 50% of people don’t have an “inner voice.”</p><p>Those without verbal thoughts may think abstractly or use visual imagery instead. It's important to note that there is no right or wrong way to think, and both styles have their pros and cons. Today, I’m joined by my husband Jared, who doesn’t have an inner monologue, to find out how he processes his thoughts and emotions without all the self-talk. We also explore how you can grow your relationship by learning about someone else’s communication methods, find opportunities for creativity with different thinking styles, and more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2470</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5b2dcd82-99e3-11ee-9dcc-d7b97c7eb168]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8575495268.mp3?updated=1702673433" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>806: What Business Should You Start? And How I’d Do It Now</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-business-should-you-start-and-how-i-would-do-it-now</link>
      <description>Some of you are mulling over the question of what business to start. Others are just nosy and want to know how I would do it if I had the chance to start again. Which of your million-and-one ideas should you pursue? Where do you focus your time and energy? How niche do you go? Should you sell your offer as a service, a digital product, a course, or a membership? We answer all of these questions and more in today’s episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 21 Dec 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Business Should You Start? And How I’d Do It Now</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>806</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Which of your million-and-one ideas should you pursue? Where do you focus your time and energy?</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Some of you are mulling over the question of what business to start. Others are just nosy and want to know how I would do it if I had the chance to start again. Which of your million-and-one ideas should you pursue? Where do you focus your time and energy? How niche do you go? Should you sell your offer as a service, a digital product, a course, or a membership? We answer all of these questions and more in today’s episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Some of you are mulling over the question of what business to start. Others are just nosy and want to know how I would do it if I had the chance to start again. Which of your million-and-one ideas should you pursue? Where do you focus your time and energy? How niche do you go? Should you sell your offer as a service, a digital product, a course, or a membership? We answer all of these questions and more in today’s episode!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2379</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d1a82bd4-99e2-11ee-9103-cfe947bab0e4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1776367088.mp3?updated=1703004483" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>805: Going Viral for Good: From $0 to a $100M+ Brand with Jess Cervellon</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/going-viral-for-good-with-jess-cervellon</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, I have Jess Cervellon, former VP of Customer Experience at 100 million dollar chocolate venture, Feastables, where she has been laser-focused on crafting an unforgettable experience. She is also a fractional CMO for creators with millions of followers.
We are talking about everything along the way, creating incredible customer experiences, cultivating engagement, creating community, and even how you can leverage opportunities that do good in the world and really have it be an opportunity to create incredible content (with the potential of even going viral). 
You are going to love today’s episode! There are a lot of notes. If you are someone who is transitioning out of a corporate role and into your own business, Jess is really going to inspire you with her story. I’m excited for you to dig into today’s episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 14 Dec 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Going Viral for Good: From $0 to a $100M+ Brand with Jess Cervellon</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>805</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Creating incredible customer experiences, cultivating engagement, creating community, and even how you can leverage opportunities that do good in the world and really have it be an opportunity to create incredible content</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, I have Jess Cervellon, former VP of Customer Experience at 100 million dollar chocolate venture, Feastables, where she has been laser-focused on crafting an unforgettable experience. She is also a fractional CMO for creators with millions of followers.
We are talking about everything along the way, creating incredible customer experiences, cultivating engagement, creating community, and even how you can leverage opportunities that do good in the world and really have it be an opportunity to create incredible content (with the potential of even going viral). 
You are going to love today’s episode! There are a lot of notes. If you are someone who is transitioning out of a corporate role and into your own business, Jess is really going to inspire you with her story. I’m excited for you to dig into today’s episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, I have Jess Cervellon, former VP of Customer Experience at 100 million dollar chocolate venture, Feastables, where she has been laser-focused on crafting an unforgettable experience. She is also a fractional CMO for creators with millions of followers.</p><p>We are talking about everything along the way, creating incredible customer experiences, cultivating engagement, creating community, and even how you can leverage opportunities that do good in the world and really have it be an opportunity to create incredible content (with the potential of even going viral). </p><p>You are going to love today’s episode! There are a lot of notes. If you are someone who is transitioning out of a corporate role and into your own business, Jess is really going to inspire you with her story. I’m excited for you to dig into today’s episode!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2523</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0b154bf6-99d2-11ee-a5f2-eb6f96e1388e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8760546464.mp3?updated=1702484694" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>804: Investing in Your Dream</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/investing-in-your-dream</link>
      <description>As we approach the end of the year, it’s natural to reflect on what we truly want and where we would like to go next; to figure out what our plans and aspirations could potentially look like.
In that spirit, I want to use today’s conversation to dig into what it looks like to invest in your dream and the things you truly want to pursue. How do you make that happen when there's still so much on your plate, so many areas of your life pulling at you, not to mention the finances required to keep things running? Join me today as I explore what it means to strike that balance and invest in your passion. Because I truly believe your dreams are more available to you than you realize. It’s just about taking the necessary steps to get on the right path!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 14 Dec 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Investing in Your Dream</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>804</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>As we approach the end of the year, let's reflect on what we truly want and where we would like to go next; to figure out what our plans and aspirations could potentially look like.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>As we approach the end of the year, it’s natural to reflect on what we truly want and where we would like to go next; to figure out what our plans and aspirations could potentially look like.
In that spirit, I want to use today’s conversation to dig into what it looks like to invest in your dream and the things you truly want to pursue. How do you make that happen when there's still so much on your plate, so many areas of your life pulling at you, not to mention the finances required to keep things running? Join me today as I explore what it means to strike that balance and invest in your passion. Because I truly believe your dreams are more available to you than you realize. It’s just about taking the necessary steps to get on the right path!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>As we approach the end of the year, it’s natural to reflect on what we truly want and where we would like to go next; to figure out what our plans and aspirations could potentially look like.</p><p>In that spirit, I want to use today’s conversation to dig into what it looks like to invest in your dream and the things you truly want to pursue. How do you make that happen when there's still so much on your plate, so many areas of your life pulling at you, not to mention the finances required to keep things running? Join me today as I explore what it means to strike that balance and invest in your passion. Because I truly believe your dreams are more available to you than you realize. It’s just about taking the necessary steps to get on the right path!  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2249</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d44a4c96-99c4-11ee-92f7-5f7dd1ff9236]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4009777836.mp3?updated=1702481019" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>803: Why Strangers Support You More Than The People You Actually Know</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-strangers-support-you-more-than-people-you-actually-know</link>
      <description>I’ve been doing business for long enough to know that the people you love the most aren’t always your biggest supporters. Today, I discuss this slightly unsettling topic and share some advice that will make you feel empowered! I want to provide some insight into why strangers sometimes support you more than the people you actually know and help you see it as an opportunity instead of a source of frustration. 
I’m sure you have people in your life who love, support, and cheer you on and others who only “sort of" support you too. Maybe you feel held back, let down, or frustrated by the way they talk about you, your career, or your business. Tuning in, you’ll hear my take on why people aren’t always supportive and how you can manage your expectations, seek support elsewhere, and learn to self-validate!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 12 Dec 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why Strangers Support You More Than The People You Actually Know</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>803</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle></itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’ve been doing business for long enough to know that the people you love the most aren’t always your biggest supporters. Today, I discuss this slightly unsettling topic and share some advice that will make you feel empowered! I want to provide some insight into why strangers sometimes support you more than the people you actually know and help you see it as an opportunity instead of a source of frustration. 
I’m sure you have people in your life who love, support, and cheer you on and others who only “sort of" support you too. Maybe you feel held back, let down, or frustrated by the way they talk about you, your career, or your business. Tuning in, you’ll hear my take on why people aren’t always supportive and how you can manage your expectations, seek support elsewhere, and learn to self-validate!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’ve been doing business for long enough to know that the people you love the most aren’t always your biggest supporters. Today, I discuss this slightly unsettling topic and share some advice that will make you feel empowered! I want to provide some insight into why strangers sometimes support you more than the people you actually know and help you see it as an opportunity instead of a source of frustration. </p><p>I’m sure you have people in your life who love, support, and cheer you on and others who only “sort of" support you too. Maybe you feel held back, let down, or frustrated by the way they talk about you, your career, or your business. Tuning in, you’ll hear my take on why people aren’t always supportive and how you can manage your expectations, seek support elsewhere, and learn to self-validate!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2203</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c52a1640-983b-11ee-b7ab-5f5c48717c09]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9518877480.mp3?updated=1702309828" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>802: 23 Things I Learned in 2023 and Two I’ll Never Do Again</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/23-things-i-learned-in-2023-and-two-ill-never-do-again</link>
      <description>2023 has been a whirlwind! This episode is dedicated to the lessons I’ve learned and how I am going to apply them in the future. I want to give you all an opportunity to reflect on your own journey. How did this year go for you? What does next year look like? 
Today, I’m going to talk about 23 things I learned this year, two of which I will never do again! I’m usually a never-say-never person, but I’m pretty confident I won’t be doing these again. The 23 lessons I am sharing today are things that come from my personal experience inside Boss Project, things I’ve observed with clients, things I’ve gone through and challenges I’ve been through, exciting things I’m leaning into this year, and things that will get you thinking about your own take on all these things! Let’s dive in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 07 Dec 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>23 Things I Learned in 2023 and Two I’ll Never Do Again</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>802</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>These 23 lessons I'm sharing today will get you thinking about your own journey. How did this year go for you? What does next year look like? </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>2023 has been a whirlwind! This episode is dedicated to the lessons I’ve learned and how I am going to apply them in the future. I want to give you all an opportunity to reflect on your own journey. How did this year go for you? What does next year look like? 
Today, I’m going to talk about 23 things I learned this year, two of which I will never do again! I’m usually a never-say-never person, but I’m pretty confident I won’t be doing these again. The 23 lessons I am sharing today are things that come from my personal experience inside Boss Project, things I’ve observed with clients, things I’ve gone through and challenges I’ve been through, exciting things I’m leaning into this year, and things that will get you thinking about your own take on all these things! Let’s dive in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>2023 has been a whirlwind! This episode is dedicated to the lessons I’ve learned and how I am going to apply them in the future. I want to give you all an opportunity to reflect on your own journey. How did this year go for you? What does next year look like? </p><p>Today, I’m going to talk about 23 things I learned this year, two of which I will never do again! I’m usually a never-say-never person, but I’m pretty confident I won’t be doing these again. The 23 lessons I am sharing today are things that come from my personal experience inside Boss Project, things I’ve observed with clients, things I’ve gone through and challenges I’ve been through, exciting things I’m leaning into this year, and things that will get you thinking about your own take on all these things! Let’s dive in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3371</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f3e565b6-9467-11ee-89ad-df92ae62c6d9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3619476620.mp3?updated=1701889386" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>801: How to Deal with Stress and Anxiety - And Still Stay Productive</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-deal-with-stress-and-anxiety-and-still-stay-productive</link>
      <description>During this episode, I want to dive into what it’s really like to deal with stress and anxiety while you are building a business. How do you continue to be productive? How do you build a support team and a structure that will allow you to move forward even when you are struggling with your mental health? It is okay to not be okay all the time! You can still be an incredibly successful person who figures out to manage and cope, and still has bad days. 
This episode comes with a disclaimer that I am not a medical professional. If you are in crisis, there is a suicide and crisis hotline in the United States. You can dial 988 on your phone and get someone on the line to help.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 05 Dec 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Deal with Stress and Anxiety - And Still Stay Productive</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>801</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How do you continue to be productive? How do you build a support team and a structure that will allow you to move forward even when you are struggling with your mental health? </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>During this episode, I want to dive into what it’s really like to deal with stress and anxiety while you are building a business. How do you continue to be productive? How do you build a support team and a structure that will allow you to move forward even when you are struggling with your mental health? It is okay to not be okay all the time! You can still be an incredibly successful person who figures out to manage and cope, and still has bad days. 
This episode comes with a disclaimer that I am not a medical professional. If you are in crisis, there is a suicide and crisis hotline in the United States. You can dial 988 on your phone and get someone on the line to help.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>During this episode, I want to dive into what it’s really like to deal with stress and anxiety while you are building a business. How do you continue to be productive? How do you build a support team and a structure that will allow you to move forward even when you are struggling with your mental health? It is okay to not be okay all the time! You can still be an incredibly successful person who figures out to manage and cope, and still has bad days. </p><p>This episode comes with a disclaimer that I am not a medical professional. If you are in crisis, there is a suicide and crisis hotline in the United States. You can dial 988 on your phone and get someone on the line to help.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3746</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5d09628a-92de-11ee-a190-b74c7d9249e4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9380071098.mp3?updated=1701720444" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>800: HUGE Announcement! NEW CreativeTemplateShop.com Site &amp; Co-op Upgrades</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/huge-announcement-new-creativetemplateshopcom-site-co-op-upgrades</link>
      <description>I have been so emotional thinking about recording this episode because it is such a massive milestone! This is episode 800 of the Strategy Hour Podcast and it has had so much success. I just want to thank all of you for your continued support because it means the world. I am so grateful for the community that we have created that can come together and create powerful things. It only makes sense that on such a huge episode, I share something that is so monumental! This is the day I’m supposed to make this announcement. 
From the ground up, my team and I have completely rebuilt the Creative Template Shop. I mean literally all of it was changed in some way or another and it was such a massive project for our team! There are some aspects of the site that have changed and you may not even notice those things which is just so incredible to me because that is what truly good design is about! These things are going to make so much sense to you without me even needing to explain them. So much thought went into making this possible. I am so proud of the work that went into this. There have been so many changes and we did it with only five people. I am so excited for you to experience it! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 30 Nov 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>HUGE Announcement! NEW CreativeTemplateShop.com Site &amp; Co-op Upgrades</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>800</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>From the ground up, my team and I have completely rebuilt the Creative Template Shop. I mean literally all of it was changed in some way or another.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I have been so emotional thinking about recording this episode because it is such a massive milestone! This is episode 800 of the Strategy Hour Podcast and it has had so much success. I just want to thank all of you for your continued support because it means the world. I am so grateful for the community that we have created that can come together and create powerful things. It only makes sense that on such a huge episode, I share something that is so monumental! This is the day I’m supposed to make this announcement. 
From the ground up, my team and I have completely rebuilt the Creative Template Shop. I mean literally all of it was changed in some way or another and it was such a massive project for our team! There are some aspects of the site that have changed and you may not even notice those things which is just so incredible to me because that is what truly good design is about! These things are going to make so much sense to you without me even needing to explain them. So much thought went into making this possible. I am so proud of the work that went into this. There have been so many changes and we did it with only five people. I am so excited for you to experience it! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I have been so emotional thinking about recording this episode because it is such a massive milestone! This is episode 800 of the Strategy Hour Podcast and it has had so much success. I just want to thank all of you for your continued support because it means the world. I am so grateful for the community that we have created that can come together and create powerful things. It only makes sense that on such a huge episode, I share something that is so monumental! This is the day I’m supposed to make this announcement. </p><p>From the ground up, my team and I have completely rebuilt the Creative Template Shop. I mean literally <em>all of it</em> was changed in some way or another and it was such a massive project for our team! There are some aspects of the site that have changed and you may not even notice those things which is just so incredible to me because that is what truly good design is about! These things are going to make so much sense to you without me even needing to explain them. So much thought went into making this possible. I am so proud of the work that went into this. There have been so many changes and we did it with only five people. I am so excited for you to experience it! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2534</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[29e0b846-8e05-11ee-8732-8b625d55382b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7648552468.mp3?updated=1701186934" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>799: Inside a Million Dollar Membership</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/inside-a-million-dollar-membership</link>
      <description>I’ve spent years sharing what it’s like to build a business online, but I haven’t shared much about what it’s like to build a million-dollar membership. Today, I’m answering all your burning questions from logistics to evolution, plus some of my biggest tips and tricks, the things I could never have predicted, and more. We’re diving into all of it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 28 Nov 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Inside a Million Dollar Membership</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>799</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, I’m answering all your burning questions from logistics to evolution, plus some of my biggest tips and tricks, the things I could never have predicted, and more. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’ve spent years sharing what it’s like to build a business online, but I haven’t shared much about what it’s like to build a million-dollar membership. Today, I’m answering all your burning questions from logistics to evolution, plus some of my biggest tips and tricks, the things I could never have predicted, and more. We’re diving into all of it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’ve spent years sharing what it’s like to build a business online, but I haven’t shared much about what it’s like to build a million-dollar membership. Today, I’m answering all your burning questions from logistics to evolution, plus some of my biggest tips and tricks, the things I could never have predicted, and more. We’re diving into all of it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3588</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[07e11128-8d51-11ee-b74f-db46be5c0605]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6283603947.mp3?updated=1701109787" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>798: 13 Critical Questions to Ask Yourself Before the End of 2023</title>
      <description>Believe it or not, we are rapidly approaching the end of 2023. You’re probably thinking, how the heck did we get here?! You’re probably considering how you can wrap up the old year and start the new year fresh. You’re also probably wondering: what should I be doing right now to put myself in a good place for 2024?
Personally, I don’t believe that it’s about what you do. It’s more about how you think. It’s about reflection and documentation. That is why, in today’s episode, I share a little bit about the past 12 months at Boss Project and highlight some of our major successes and challenges. I also offer you some critical questions to ask yourself to prepare you for 2024 and help you frame what you want for your future.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Nov 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>13 Critical Questions to Ask Yourself Before the End of 2023</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>798</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Prepping for next year isn't just about what you do, it's about how you think. Here are some critical questions to ask yourself to help you frame what you want for your future.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Believe it or not, we are rapidly approaching the end of 2023. You’re probably thinking, how the heck did we get here?! You’re probably considering how you can wrap up the old year and start the new year fresh. You’re also probably wondering: what should I be doing right now to put myself in a good place for 2024?
Personally, I don’t believe that it’s about what you do. It’s more about how you think. It’s about reflection and documentation. That is why, in today’s episode, I share a little bit about the past 12 months at Boss Project and highlight some of our major successes and challenges. I also offer you some critical questions to ask yourself to prepare you for 2024 and help you frame what you want for your future.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Believe it or not, we are rapidly approaching the end of 2023. You’re probably thinking, how the heck did we get here?! You’re probably considering how you can wrap up the old year and start the new year fresh. You’re also probably wondering: what should I be doing right now to put myself in a good place for 2024?</p><p>Personally, I don’t believe that it’s about what you <em>do</em>. It’s more about how you think. It’s about reflection and documentation. That is why, in today’s episode, I share a little bit about the past 12 months at Boss Project and highlight some of our major successes and challenges. I also offer you some critical questions to ask yourself to prepare you for 2024 and help you frame what you want for your future.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2456</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5d1bdd9e-8892-11ee-bc5a-9fd9445bb957]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7197766503.mp3?updated=1700587966" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>797: Massively Simplifying My Offers &amp; BIG Changes for 2024</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/massively-simplifying-my-offers-and-big-changes-for-2024</link>
      <description>Over the last eight years, Boss Project has had so many offers and today I’m announcing the major simplifications to my offers that I am so excited about. I have been hesitating to do this episode for so long because I wasn’t sure if this was the direction that I wanted to go in and I have always been so ‘married’ to the direction I was committed to and steadfast about how I was going to get there. While that’s great, things change so often and it’s more beneficial to be able to act according to what’s happening in real-time and make pivots to your plan along the way. 
I’m finally ready to share this because I’ve realized that it’s far more important to head in a direction without being so worried about how you’re going to get there. As long as your vision is at the forefront of your mind and you’re committed to taking small steps to get there, you’re on the right path! I have sold way more offers than the majority of the people in my industry have, probably because of how creative I am! I wondered what it would look like to give myself the freedom to be creative and the clarity of knowing what my offer is to make it easy for people to know what they are buying from me. So, I am going to simplify all of my offers into one! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 21 Nov 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Massively Simplifying My Offers &amp; BIG Changes for 2024</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>797</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I’m announcing the major simplifications to my offers that I am so excited about. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Over the last eight years, Boss Project has had so many offers and today I’m announcing the major simplifications to my offers that I am so excited about. I have been hesitating to do this episode for so long because I wasn’t sure if this was the direction that I wanted to go in and I have always been so ‘married’ to the direction I was committed to and steadfast about how I was going to get there. While that’s great, things change so often and it’s more beneficial to be able to act according to what’s happening in real-time and make pivots to your plan along the way. 
I’m finally ready to share this because I’ve realized that it’s far more important to head in a direction without being so worried about how you’re going to get there. As long as your vision is at the forefront of your mind and you’re committed to taking small steps to get there, you’re on the right path! I have sold way more offers than the majority of the people in my industry have, probably because of how creative I am! I wondered what it would look like to give myself the freedom to be creative and the clarity of knowing what my offer is to make it easy for people to know what they are buying from me. So, I am going to simplify all of my offers into one! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Over the last eight years, Boss Project has had so many offers and today I’m announcing the major simplifications to my offers that I am so excited about. I have been hesitating to do this episode for so long because I wasn’t sure if this was the direction that I wanted to go in and I have always been so ‘married’ to the direction I was committed to and steadfast about how I was going to get there. While that’s great, things change so often and it’s more beneficial to be able to act according to what’s happening in real-time and make pivots to your plan along the way. </p><p>I’m finally ready to share this because I’ve realized that it’s far more important to head in a direction without being so worried about how you’re going to get there. As long as your vision is at the forefront of your mind and you’re committed to taking small steps to get there, you’re on the right path! I have sold way more offers than the majority of the people in my industry have, probably because of how creative I am! I wondered what it would look like to give myself the freedom to be creative and the clarity of knowing what my offer is to make it easy for people to know what they are buying from me. So, I am going to simplify all of my offers into one! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2377</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e859e5be-87ce-11ee-ab55-f30f284ceafe]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7651809314.mp3?updated=1700507641" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>796: Slow on Purpose: Removing Urgency &amp; Allowing Rest</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/slow-on-purpose-removing-urgency-allowing-rest</link>
      <description>If you were to ask me how I feel about the rest of the year, I would probably tell you something about wanting to pack it up and see you guys in January! But I’m not going to do that. Instead, I want to talk about slowing down on purpose. 
A few members of the co-op community have mentioned feeling as though they are always in a rush. What would it look like if you didn’t put so much of a timeline on so much of what you were doing? How much additional space, excitement, and desire would that give you creatively? How much fuel would that give to your life? Let’s talk about it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Nov 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Slow on Purpose: Removing Urgency &amp; Allowing Rest</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>796</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How much additional space, excitement, and desire would that give you creatively? How much fuel would that give to your life?</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you were to ask me how I feel about the rest of the year, I would probably tell you something about wanting to pack it up and see you guys in January! But I’m not going to do that. Instead, I want to talk about slowing down on purpose. 
A few members of the co-op community have mentioned feeling as though they are always in a rush. What would it look like if you didn’t put so much of a timeline on so much of what you were doing? How much additional space, excitement, and desire would that give you creatively? How much fuel would that give to your life? Let’s talk about it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you were to ask me how I feel about the rest of the year, I would probably tell you something about wanting to pack it up and see you guys in January! But I’m not going to do that. Instead, I want to talk about slowing down <em>on purpose</em>. </p><p>A few members of the co-op community have mentioned feeling as though they are always in a rush. What would it look like if you didn’t put so much of a timeline on so much of what you were doing? How much additional space, excitement, and desire would that give you creatively? How much fuel would that give to your life? Let’s talk about it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2286</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0c14b332-83d1-11ee-ba47-4f18ac74d972]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2921242506.mp3?updated=1700071998" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>795: Feeling Invisible: Building a Business Through Life’s Most Challenging Moments</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/feeling-invisible-building-a-business-through-lifes-most-challenging-moments</link>
      <description>Today, on the seventh anniversary of the most traumatic event I have ever experienced, I want to open up about the five-car pile-up that changed the trajectory of my life and gave me pause to figure out how I can be successful despite all of the seemingly limiting and impossible things going on in my life. I am going to share my experience of what it’s like to build a business, provide for my family, and deal with chronic health conditions all at the same time. Less than a mile from my home, a trailer cut off upcoming traffic on a very busy street and the person behind me didn’t stop. In a split second, I was slammed into the vehicle in front of me. I was tachycardic and terrified. 
I was in so much pain and as time passed, I was getting progressively worse and worse. I thought if people knew that I had a traumatic brain injury, my business would close. While I have come so far, there are still a ton of health risks for me in the future. The migraine that started on the day of my accident didn’t go away for years. Learning to live with chronic pain while attempting to run a business felt like the most impossible task. My face even changed and for the first time in my life, all I wanted to do was hide. Now I know that there was nothing to be embarrassed about and I am here to share my story so you can be successful through life’s curve balls.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Nov 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Feeling Invisible: Building a Business Through Life’s Most Challenging Moments</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>795</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I am going to share my experience of what it’s like to build a business, provide for my family, and deal with chronic health conditions all at the same time. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, on the seventh anniversary of the most traumatic event I have ever experienced, I want to open up about the five-car pile-up that changed the trajectory of my life and gave me pause to figure out how I can be successful despite all of the seemingly limiting and impossible things going on in my life. I am going to share my experience of what it’s like to build a business, provide for my family, and deal with chronic health conditions all at the same time. Less than a mile from my home, a trailer cut off upcoming traffic on a very busy street and the person behind me didn’t stop. In a split second, I was slammed into the vehicle in front of me. I was tachycardic and terrified. 
I was in so much pain and as time passed, I was getting progressively worse and worse. I thought if people knew that I had a traumatic brain injury, my business would close. While I have come so far, there are still a ton of health risks for me in the future. The migraine that started on the day of my accident didn’t go away for years. Learning to live with chronic pain while attempting to run a business felt like the most impossible task. My face even changed and for the first time in my life, all I wanted to do was hide. Now I know that there was nothing to be embarrassed about and I am here to share my story so you can be successful through life’s curve balls.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, on the seventh anniversary of the most traumatic event I have ever experienced, I want to open up about the five-car pile-up that changed the trajectory of my life and gave me pause to figure out how I can be successful despite all of the seemingly limiting and impossible things going on in my life. I am going to share my experience of what it’s like to build a business, provide for my family, and deal with chronic health conditions all at the same time. Less than a mile from my home, a trailer cut off upcoming traffic on a very busy street and the person behind me didn’t stop. In a split second, I was slammed into the vehicle in front of me. I was tachycardic and terrified. </p><p>I was in so much pain and as time passed, I was getting progressively worse and worse. I thought if people knew that I had a traumatic brain injury, my business would close. While I have come so far, there are still a ton of health risks for me in the future. The migraine that started on the day of my accident didn’t go away for years. Learning to live with chronic pain while attempting to run a business felt like the most impossible task. My face even changed and for the first time in my life, all I wanted to do was hide. Now I know that there was nothing to be embarrassed about and I am here to share my story so you can be successful through life’s curve balls.  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2634</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e295c362-824e-11ee-8e4b-0b535f8f26e3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1993040603.mp3?updated=1699899297" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>794: How to See a 70% Increase in ROI with Top of Funnel Content</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-see-a-70-percent-increase-in-ROI-with-top-of-funnel-content</link>
      <description>Have you ever felt like your marketing efforts are stuck in a loop, missing out on untapped potential? Join me in this episode as we unlock the secrets of top-of-funnel marketing, a paradigm shift that could supercharge your small business's success. In today's digital age, we often find ourselves focusing on the mid-funnel, trying to convert those who are already aware of us into loyal customers. But what about those who've never heard of our business? How can we connect with them? This is where top-of-funnel marketing steps in, helping us create brand awareness, spark conversations, and engage with a whole new audience.
Discover the strategies to stay ahead during economic challenges, as we delve into how innovation during tough times can lead to remarkable growth. I'll show you the power of "they get me" moments and the art of creating authentic connections with your audience. So, if you're ready to unlock untapped potential and drive your small business toward success, join me today as I unpack the game-changing world of top-of-funnel marketing! It's time to make a meaningful shift in your marketing strategy and connect with a broader audience, bringing fresh energy and opportunities to your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 09 Nov 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to See a 70% Increase in ROI with Top of Funnel Content</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>794</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Connect with people ho've never heard of your business, create brand awareness, spark conversations, and engage with a whole new audience.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you ever felt like your marketing efforts are stuck in a loop, missing out on untapped potential? Join me in this episode as we unlock the secrets of top-of-funnel marketing, a paradigm shift that could supercharge your small business's success. In today's digital age, we often find ourselves focusing on the mid-funnel, trying to convert those who are already aware of us into loyal customers. But what about those who've never heard of our business? How can we connect with them? This is where top-of-funnel marketing steps in, helping us create brand awareness, spark conversations, and engage with a whole new audience.
Discover the strategies to stay ahead during economic challenges, as we delve into how innovation during tough times can lead to remarkable growth. I'll show you the power of "they get me" moments and the art of creating authentic connections with your audience. So, if you're ready to unlock untapped potential and drive your small business toward success, join me today as I unpack the game-changing world of top-of-funnel marketing! It's time to make a meaningful shift in your marketing strategy and connect with a broader audience, bringing fresh energy and opportunities to your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you ever felt like your marketing efforts are stuck in a loop, missing out on untapped potential? Join me in this episode as we unlock the secrets of top-of-funnel marketing, a paradigm shift that could supercharge your small business's success. In today's digital age, we often find ourselves focusing on the mid-funnel, trying to convert those who are already aware of us into loyal customers. But what about those who've never heard of our business? How can we connect with them? This is where top-of-funnel marketing steps in, helping us create brand awareness, spark conversations, and engage with a whole new audience.</p><p>Discover the strategies to stay ahead during economic challenges, as we delve into how innovation during tough times can lead to remarkable growth. I'll show you the power of "they get me" moments and the art of creating authentic connections with your audience. So, if you're ready to unlock untapped potential and drive your small business toward success, join me today as I unpack the game-changing world of top-of-funnel marketing! It's time to make a meaningful shift in your marketing strategy and connect with a broader audience, bringing fresh energy and opportunities to your business.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2259</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[46de17e4-7e52-11ee-9fb3-13a5c1823a1f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8543506384.mp3?updated=1699460873" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>793: Getting Visible - Part 2: Instagram Hacks &amp; Increasing Reach by 185% in 7-Days</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/getting-visible-part-2-instagram-hacks-and-increasing-reach-185-percent-in-7-days</link>
      <description>To drive more buyers to your offer, you have to get in front of more of your ideal clients. During this episode, we’re talking about getting visible! I’ve also got something super tactical to help you get there. I will even take back something I said before and share what it can open up for you.
I have my eyes on Instagram and I have been in an effort for almost four months to re-figure it out! Today, I’m sharing more of what I have unlocked and started to understand about Instagram.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 07 Nov 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Getting Visible - Part 2: Instagram Hacks &amp; Increasing Reach by 185% in 7-Days</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>793</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, I’m sharing more of what I have unlocked and started to understand about Instagram.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>To drive more buyers to your offer, you have to get in front of more of your ideal clients. During this episode, we’re talking about getting visible! I’ve also got something super tactical to help you get there. I will even take back something I said before and share what it can open up for you.
I have my eyes on Instagram and I have been in an effort for almost four months to re-figure it out! Today, I’m sharing more of what I have unlocked and started to understand about Instagram.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>To drive more buyers to your offer, you have to get in front of more of your ideal clients. During this episode, we’re talking about getting visible! I’ve also got something super tactical to help you get there. I will even take back something I said before and share what it can open up for you.</p><p>I have my eyes on Instagram and I have been in an effort for almost four months to re-figure it out! Today, I’m sharing more of what I have unlocked and started to understand about Instagram.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2176</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7769fc5c-7ccc-11ee-8cbc-4f6592b03362]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1004672123.mp3?updated=1699293352" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>792: Getting Visible - Part 1: The Required Mindset</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/getting-visible-part-1-the-required-mindset</link>
      <description>One of the biggest things that contributes to your success is your visibility. Does your ideal audience know who you are, what you offer, and how you can uniquely solve their problem? If not, they are likely to choose someone with more visibility who provides a similar service. I recently had a coaching call with a client who is easily one of the most dynamic people I know. In this call, she told me that gaining visibility feels intimidating and asked me for some strategies to help her get past the discomfort of putting herself out there.
Honestly, I was shocked that this was even an issue for her! If getting visible feels uncomfortable for someone who is already so engaging and confident, I realized that it must also be a concern for many of you listening. That’s why, in today’s episode, I’m taking a deep dive into getting visible, specifically how you can cultivate a mindset that will get you in front of more of your ideal clients and, ultimately, drive more buyers to your offer.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 02 Nov 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Getting Visible - Part 1: The Required Mindset</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>792</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Learn how you can cultivate a mindset that will get you in front of more of your ideal clients and, ultimately, drive more buyers to your offer.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>One of the biggest things that contributes to your success is your visibility. Does your ideal audience know who you are, what you offer, and how you can uniquely solve their problem? If not, they are likely to choose someone with more visibility who provides a similar service. I recently had a coaching call with a client who is easily one of the most dynamic people I know. In this call, she told me that gaining visibility feels intimidating and asked me for some strategies to help her get past the discomfort of putting herself out there.
Honestly, I was shocked that this was even an issue for her! If getting visible feels uncomfortable for someone who is already so engaging and confident, I realized that it must also be a concern for many of you listening. That’s why, in today’s episode, I’m taking a deep dive into getting visible, specifically how you can cultivate a mindset that will get you in front of more of your ideal clients and, ultimately, drive more buyers to your offer.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>One of the biggest things that contributes to your success is your visibility. Does your ideal audience know who you are, what you offer, and how you can uniquely solve their problem? If not, they are likely to choose someone with more visibility who provides a similar service. I recently had a coaching call with a client who is easily one of the most dynamic people I know. In this call, she told me that gaining visibility feels intimidating and asked me for some strategies to help her get past the discomfort of putting herself out there.</p><p>Honestly, I was shocked that this was even an issue for her! If getting visible feels uncomfortable for someone who is already so engaging and confident, I realized that it must also be a concern for many of you listening. That’s why, in today’s episode, I’m taking a deep dive into getting visible, specifically how you can cultivate a mindset that will get you in front of more of your ideal clients and, ultimately, drive more buyers to your offer.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2449</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b7fcc9c0-78d0-11ee-ab59-db0939622d78]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1543142328.mp3?updated=1698864948" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>791: The ‘Traylor’ Effect: How Taylor Swift’s and Travis Kelce’s Relationship Is Driving Sales</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-traylor-effect-how-taylor-swifts-and-travis-kelces-relationship-is-driving-sales</link>
      <description>Today we are going to delve into one of the most talked about topics on the internet right now, Taylor Swift and Travis Kelce. A huge part of the reason I have avoided commentary until now is because I didn’t want to sound like a fan girl but you have all spoken and asked me to talk about this. You all know that I am a huge Taylor Swift fan so today I’m going to talk about something that is making a huge economic impact on not just my city, but cities around the world. 
It feels like someone who is destined to be the queen of England (Taylor) is dating Prince Charming (Travis). Both of these people were already a big deal individually but now that they’re together, they have blown up even more! I want to talk about specific aspects of this relationship and the economic impact it’s created in Kansas City, how it’s affected sales, and what I anticipate it will do for our city moving forward. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 31 Oct 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The ‘Traylor’ Effect: How Taylor Swift’s and Travis Kelce’s Relationship Is Driving Sales</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>791</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>You all know that I am a huge Taylor Swift fan so today I’m going to talk about something that is making a huge economic impact on not just my city, but cities around the world. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are going to delve into one of the most talked about topics on the internet right now, Taylor Swift and Travis Kelce. A huge part of the reason I have avoided commentary until now is because I didn’t want to sound like a fan girl but you have all spoken and asked me to talk about this. You all know that I am a huge Taylor Swift fan so today I’m going to talk about something that is making a huge economic impact on not just my city, but cities around the world. 
It feels like someone who is destined to be the queen of England (Taylor) is dating Prince Charming (Travis). Both of these people were already a big deal individually but now that they’re together, they have blown up even more! I want to talk about specific aspects of this relationship and the economic impact it’s created in Kansas City, how it’s affected sales, and what I anticipate it will do for our city moving forward. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are going to delve into one of the most talked about topics on the internet right now, Taylor Swift and Travis Kelce. A huge part of the reason I have avoided commentary until now is because I didn’t want to sound like a fan girl but you have all spoken and asked me to talk about this. You all know that I am a huge Taylor Swift fan so today I’m going to talk about something that is making a huge economic impact on not just my city, but cities around the world. </p><p>It feels like someone who is destined to be the queen of England (Taylor) is dating Prince Charming (Travis). Both of these people were already a big deal individually but now that they’re together, they have blown up even more! I want to talk about specific aspects of this relationship and the economic impact it’s created in Kansas City, how it’s affected sales, and what I anticipate it will do for our city moving forward. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1851</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[32007d0c-74da-11ee-955a-e73665f7f16d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6220237719.mp3?updated=1698420301" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>790: Breaking Money Ceilings: Owning Your Relationship to Wealth &amp; Moving Past Your Income Blocks</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/breaking-money-ceilings-owning-your-relationship-to-wealth-moving-past-your-income-blocks</link>
      <description>My relationship with money has completely evolved since I started this business, and in today’s episode, I want to talk about money! We all have our own beliefs about money and without a good relationship with it we are going to create a ceiling that is impossible to break through. I want to see you be wealthy, and I have literally made it my mission in life and business to help you become financially free! I absolutely believe that there are things that hold you back from your own success, and the beliefs you hold about money are a huge part of that when it comes to building a business that is going to support you financially. 
Growing up, my family barely made it by and even struggled to put food on the table. I got my first job at 15 and set a standard for myself that was very basic and simple: to be able to afford a house and live comfortably. That was totally fine at the time, but I didn’t realize that it completely limited me. When I reached the point in my business where I had reached that final goal and things were looking up, I stagnated and did not know where to go. I desired more, but my underlying beliefs about money limited me. I had to learn how to dream bigger and make money neutral. I am so glad that I dedicated myself to this journey, and now I want to explore how your beliefs around money impact you and your business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Oct 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Breaking Money Ceilings: Owning Your Relationship to Wealth &amp; Moving Past Your Income Blocks</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>790</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle></itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>My relationship with money has completely evolved since I started this business, and in today’s episode, I want to talk about money! We all have our own beliefs about money and without a good relationship with it we are going to create a ceiling that is impossible to break through. I want to see you be wealthy, and I have literally made it my mission in life and business to help you become financially free! I absolutely believe that there are things that hold you back from your own success, and the beliefs you hold about money are a huge part of that when it comes to building a business that is going to support you financially. 
Growing up, my family barely made it by and even struggled to put food on the table. I got my first job at 15 and set a standard for myself that was very basic and simple: to be able to afford a house and live comfortably. That was totally fine at the time, but I didn’t realize that it completely limited me. When I reached the point in my business where I had reached that final goal and things were looking up, I stagnated and did not know where to go. I desired more, but my underlying beliefs about money limited me. I had to learn how to dream bigger and make money neutral. I am so glad that I dedicated myself to this journey, and now I want to explore how your beliefs around money impact you and your business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>My relationship with money has completely evolved since I started this business, and in today’s episode, I want to talk about money! We all have our own beliefs about money and without a good relationship with it we are going to create a ceiling that is impossible to break through. I want to see you be wealthy, and I have literally made it my mission in life and business to help you become financially free! I absolutely believe that there are things that hold you back from your own success, and the beliefs you hold about money are a huge part of that when it comes to building a business that is going to support you financially. </p><p>Growing up, my family barely made it by and even struggled to put food on the table. I got my first job at 15 and set a standard for myself that was very basic and simple: to be able to afford a house and live comfortably. That was totally fine at the time, but I didn’t realize that it completely limited me. When I reached the point in my business where I had reached that final goal and things were looking up, I stagnated and did not know where to go. I desired more, but my underlying beliefs about money limited me. I had to learn how to dream bigger and make money neutral. I am so glad that I dedicated myself to this journey, and now I want to explore how your beliefs around money impact you and your business!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2416</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6c5e1ac8-7349-11ee-a8b6-b782c32b8faa]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8615637954.mp3?updated=1698248010" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>789: Developing Your Offer Ecosystem</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/developing-your-offer-ecosystem</link>
      <description>Your offer ecosystem will encompass all of your offers whether they exist now or in the future. I want you to imagine that your ideal client exists in this ecosystem. What tends to help business owners the most is to think of their ideal client as on a journey encountering problems that you’re there to help them solve. Your audience only knows what they know and you can help them on this journey in a way that’s really impactful. Your offers solve a variety of problems suitable to clients across the spectrum. Today we are going to focus on solving linear problems with clear solutions. 
These linear paths offer an opportunity for you to have a wide variety of offers that all fit into a singular ecosystem. A primary offer that fits into this ecosystem is a bridge from one phase to the next on a particular client’s spectrum. In order to go from one stage to the next, the client needs the mechanics of how to get there and that is your deliverables. Any offer can deliver on the mechanics and sometimes it will completely remove the clients from having to do it themselves. Instead, you are going to take them there. Not just showing them how but rather moving them through it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 24 Oct 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Developing Your Offer Ecosystem</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>789</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Your offer ecosystem will encompass all of your offers whether they exist now or in the future. I want you to imagine that your ideal client exists in this ecosystem. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Your offer ecosystem will encompass all of your offers whether they exist now or in the future. I want you to imagine that your ideal client exists in this ecosystem. What tends to help business owners the most is to think of their ideal client as on a journey encountering problems that you’re there to help them solve. Your audience only knows what they know and you can help them on this journey in a way that’s really impactful. Your offers solve a variety of problems suitable to clients across the spectrum. Today we are going to focus on solving linear problems with clear solutions. 
These linear paths offer an opportunity for you to have a wide variety of offers that all fit into a singular ecosystem. A primary offer that fits into this ecosystem is a bridge from one phase to the next on a particular client’s spectrum. In order to go from one stage to the next, the client needs the mechanics of how to get there and that is your deliverables. Any offer can deliver on the mechanics and sometimes it will completely remove the clients from having to do it themselves. Instead, you are going to take them there. Not just showing them how but rather moving them through it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Your offer ecosystem will encompass all of your offers whether they exist now or in the future. I want you to imagine that your ideal client exists in this ecosystem. What tends to help business owners the most is to think of their ideal client as on a journey encountering problems that you’re there to help them solve. Your audience only knows what they know and you can help them on this journey in a way that’s really impactful. Your offers solve a variety of problems suitable to clients across the spectrum. Today we are going to focus on solving linear problems with clear solutions. </p><p>These linear paths offer an opportunity for you to have a wide variety of offers that all fit into a singular ecosystem. A primary offer that fits into this ecosystem is a bridge from one phase to the next on a particular client’s spectrum. In order to go from one stage to the next, the client needs the mechanics of how to get there and that is your deliverables. Any offer can deliver on the mechanics and sometimes it will completely remove the clients from having to do it themselves. Instead, you are going to take them there. Not just showing them how but rather moving them through it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1950</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e8d6603c-71c9-11ee-ac15-5f1a77f70538]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7164547374.mp3?updated=1698082944" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>788: Behind-The-Scenes: Our Latest Experiments, Favorite Tech &amp; Tools for Online Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/behind-the-scenes-our-latest-experiments-favorite-tech-tools-for-online-business</link>
      <description>It’s been a little over 90 days since I took over as managing partner at Boss Project. Since then, I’ve been deep in experimentation! I’ve changed our email schedule, rolled out regular workshops and tried a ton of new tech and tools. I even planned out the next 16 months of promotions, product releases, and exciting new projects we are pursuing. On today’s episode, I’m giving you all a look behind the scenes: what’s working, what’s been fun, what I wouldn’t bother with, and what’s been the most effective.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 19 Oct 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Behind-The-Scenes: Our Latest Experiments, Favorite Tech &amp; Tools for Online Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>788</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I'm sharing what’s working, what’s been fun, what I wouldn’t bother with, and what’s been the most effective. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It’s been a little over 90 days since I took over as managing partner at Boss Project. Since then, I’ve been deep in experimentation! I’ve changed our email schedule, rolled out regular workshops and tried a ton of new tech and tools. I even planned out the next 16 months of promotions, product releases, and exciting new projects we are pursuing. On today’s episode, I’m giving you all a look behind the scenes: what’s working, what’s been fun, what I wouldn’t bother with, and what’s been the most effective.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It’s been a little over 90 days since I took over as managing partner at Boss Project. Since then, I’ve been deep in experimentation! I’ve changed our email schedule, rolled out regular workshops and tried a ton of new tech and tools. I even planned out the next 16 months of promotions, product releases, and exciting new projects we are pursuing. On today’s episode, I’m giving you all a look behind the scenes: what’s working, what’s been fun, what I wouldn’t bother with, and what’s been the most effective.  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3208</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3d10598e-6dc7-11ee-805d-43ddedd2062d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1901234114.mp3?updated=1697642314" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>787:  Organic Marketing Workshop: Tools to Scale Sustainably &amp; Grow Your Business With Little to No Budget</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/organic-workshop-audio-version</link>
      <description>In today’s episode, we're going to uncover the secret strategies other marketers are using to sustainably scale. I’m going to give you the tools to leverage them inside of your own business and turn strangers into buyers. I'm here to pull back the curtain, revealing nine indispensable strategies to transform strangers into dedicated buyers and drive organic traffic, with little to no budget.
Tuning in, you’ll hear me share exactly how to drive free organic traffic to create more predictable income in your business. These tools aren't just for a select few. They're universal for online entrepreneurs, be it creatives, consultants, content creators, or coaches. They've served me, bringing in millions, and they can serve you too. So let's get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 17 Oct 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Organic Marketing Workshop: Tools to Scale Sustainably &amp; Grow Your Business With Little to No Budget</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>787</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Learn the secret strategies other marketers are using to sustainably scale &amp; 9 ways to transform strangers into dedicated buyers</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today’s episode, we're going to uncover the secret strategies other marketers are using to sustainably scale. I’m going to give you the tools to leverage them inside of your own business and turn strangers into buyers. I'm here to pull back the curtain, revealing nine indispensable strategies to transform strangers into dedicated buyers and drive organic traffic, with little to no budget.
Tuning in, you’ll hear me share exactly how to drive free organic traffic to create more predictable income in your business. These tools aren't just for a select few. They're universal for online entrepreneurs, be it creatives, consultants, content creators, or coaches. They've served me, bringing in millions, and they can serve you too. So let's get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today’s episode, we're going to uncover the secret strategies other marketers are using to sustainably scale. I’m going to give you the tools to leverage them inside of your own business and turn strangers into buyers. I'm here to pull back the curtain, revealing nine indispensable strategies to transform strangers into dedicated buyers and drive organic traffic, with little to no budget.</p><p>Tuning in, you’ll hear me share exactly how to drive free organic traffic to create more predictable income in your business. These tools aren't just for a select few. They're universal for online entrepreneurs, be it creatives, consultants, content creators, or coaches. They've served me, bringing in millions, and they can serve you too. So let's get started!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>4440</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[85b59238-6c66-11ee-a41f-8bf095c57041]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3948465518.mp3?updated=1697491034" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>786: Real Results: From $0 to HALF A MILLION Using Only Organic Marketing</title>
      <description>When Boss Project first started, it was very different from what it is today. And, whether I realized it or not, I was growing two business models simultaneously, while using entirely different marketing strategies for each one. Since then, I’ve seen an increasing number of entrepreneurs looking to diversify their revenue streams or even pivot their business models entirely.
In today’s episode, I unpack how you can keep nurturing what you've built and let your business evolve by investigating the countless ways you can leverage organic marketing to grow your brand and fulfill the potential of your business. Tune in to learn how you can evolve your existing business while embracing the one you’re dreaming about!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 12 Oct 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Real Results: From $0 to HALF A MILLION Using Only Organic Marketing</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>786</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tune in to learn how you can evolve your existing business while embracing the one you’re dreaming about!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When Boss Project first started, it was very different from what it is today. And, whether I realized it or not, I was growing two business models simultaneously, while using entirely different marketing strategies for each one. Since then, I’ve seen an increasing number of entrepreneurs looking to diversify their revenue streams or even pivot their business models entirely.
In today’s episode, I unpack how you can keep nurturing what you've built and let your business evolve by investigating the countless ways you can leverage organic marketing to grow your brand and fulfill the potential of your business. Tune in to learn how you can evolve your existing business while embracing the one you’re dreaming about!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When Boss Project first started, it was very different from what it is today. And, whether I realized it or not, I was growing two business models simultaneously, while using entirely different marketing strategies for each one. Since then, I’ve seen an increasing number of entrepreneurs looking to diversify their revenue streams or even pivot their business models entirely.</p><p>In today’s episode, I unpack how you can keep nurturing what you've built and let your business evolve by investigating the countless ways you can leverage organic marketing to grow your brand and fulfill the potential of your business. Tune in to learn how you can evolve your existing business while embracing the one you’re dreaming about!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2076</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cbafc66a-6788-11ee-b975-b3f67306cbf8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1777906331.mp3?updated=1696961400" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>785: Balancing Marriage &amp; Business: How I Work Full-Time with My Spouse, Jared Pumphrey</title>
      <description>During today’s episode, I’m speaking with my partner in life and employee in business. Jared and I have been together for 15 years, married for 10, and working together since 2018. He’s been full-time at Boss Project for two years now, and under my management for about 90 days. Today, I’m answering all your questions about what it’s like to work and run a business with a spouse, and nothing is off the table! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 10 Oct 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Balancing Marriage &amp; Business: How I Work Full-Time with My Spouse, Jared Pumphrey</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>785</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, I’m answering all your questions about what it’s like to work and run a business with a spouse, and nothing is off the table! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>During today’s episode, I’m speaking with my partner in life and employee in business. Jared and I have been together for 15 years, married for 10, and working together since 2018. He’s been full-time at Boss Project for two years now, and under my management for about 90 days. Today, I’m answering all your questions about what it’s like to work and run a business with a spouse, and nothing is off the table! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>During today’s episode, I’m speaking with my partner in life and employee in business. Jared and I have been together for 15 years, married for 10, and working together since 2018. He’s been full-time at Boss Project for two years now, and under my management for about 90 days. Today, I’m answering all your questions about what it’s like to work and run a business with a spouse, and nothing is off the table! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2551</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[fb651618-66dd-11ee-ae30-3777f6b2030a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7850590301.mp3?updated=1696882222" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>784: Behind The Scenes: Our Product &amp; Offer Development Loop with Program Manager, Caitlin O’Bryant</title>
      <description>Joining us in this episode is Boss Project’s Program Manager and Creative Director, Caitlin O’Bryant. She is an integral part of the team and contributes to a broad mix of things, but she’s here today to discuss our development cycle, how we go from idea to launch to product, and offer improvement!
After attending design school in Seattle, Caitlin took the leap and started her own business as a wedding stationery designer. Five years later, 2020 happened. By the time things had stabilized, she realized she had lost her spark for stationery. That’s when she applied for the role of Graphic Designer at Boss Project. The rest is history! 
We’re in a brand new phase. So often we’re just sharing the end project, but today we want to give you some insight into how things start out as just an idea and what it looks like to make those edits. Let’s dive in.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 05 Oct 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Behind The Scenes: Our Product &amp; Offer Development Loop with Program Manager, Caitlin O’Bryant</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>784</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>https://bossproject.com/podcast/behind-the-scenes-our-product-offer-development-loop-with-program-manager-caitlin-obryant</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Joining us in this episode is Boss Project’s Program Manager and Creative Director, Caitlin O’Bryant. She is an integral part of the team and contributes to a broad mix of things, but she’s here today to discuss our development cycle, how we go from idea to launch to product, and offer improvement!
After attending design school in Seattle, Caitlin took the leap and started her own business as a wedding stationery designer. Five years later, 2020 happened. By the time things had stabilized, she realized she had lost her spark for stationery. That’s when she applied for the role of Graphic Designer at Boss Project. The rest is history! 
We’re in a brand new phase. So often we’re just sharing the end project, but today we want to give you some insight into how things start out as just an idea and what it looks like to make those edits. Let’s dive in.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Joining us in this episode is Boss Project’s Program Manager and Creative Director, Caitlin O’Bryant. She is an integral part of the team and contributes to a broad mix of things, but she’s here today to discuss our development cycle, how we go from idea to launch to product, and offer improvement!</p><p>After attending design school in Seattle, Caitlin took the leap and started her own business as a wedding stationery designer. Five years later, 2020 happened. By the time things had stabilized, she realized she had lost her spark for stationery. That’s when she applied for the role of Graphic Designer at Boss Project. The rest is history! </p><p>We’re in a brand new phase. So often we’re just sharing the end project, but today we want to give you some insight into how things start out as just an idea and what it looks like to make those edits. Let’s dive in.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2865</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[20986cd8-62d7-11ee-a0e8-a74b7b91b6ac]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5508469483.mp3?updated=1696627082" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>783: Leads on Autopilot</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/leads-on-autopilot</link>
      <description>One of the number one things I see business owners wrestling with is leads: how to get them, how to secure more of them, and how to pull them in with less effort. I want to assure you that it's fully possible to amass all the leads you could ever want and have your business entirely booked without doing all the legwork yourself!
When I first fully booked my agency-style services, I went from being laid off to completely booked in a mere 30 days, matching my plush corporate salary in the process. Fast forward eight months, and I had hit my first $100,000! Just four months beyond that, I doubled it. I've unearthed nine methods to snag leads 100% on autopilot, and today, I'll share just the first two that overwhelmed me with more business than I could have ever imagined.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 03 Oct 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Leads on Autopilot</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>783</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>It's fully possible to amass all the leads you could ever want and have your business entirely booked without doing all the legwork yourself!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>One of the number one things I see business owners wrestling with is leads: how to get them, how to secure more of them, and how to pull them in with less effort. I want to assure you that it's fully possible to amass all the leads you could ever want and have your business entirely booked without doing all the legwork yourself!
When I first fully booked my agency-style services, I went from being laid off to completely booked in a mere 30 days, matching my plush corporate salary in the process. Fast forward eight months, and I had hit my first $100,000! Just four months beyond that, I doubled it. I've unearthed nine methods to snag leads 100% on autopilot, and today, I'll share just the first two that overwhelmed me with more business than I could have ever imagined.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>One of the number one things I see business owners wrestling with is leads: how to get them, how to secure more of them, and how to pull them in with less effort. I want to assure you that it's fully possible to amass all the leads you could ever want and have your business entirely booked without doing all the legwork yourself!</p><p>When I first fully booked my agency-style services, I went from being laid off to completely booked in a mere 30 days, matching my plush corporate salary in the process. Fast forward eight months, and I had hit my first $100,000! Just four months beyond that, I doubled it. I've unearthed nine methods to snag leads 100% on autopilot, and today, I'll share just the first two that overwhelmed me with more business than I could have ever imagined.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1845</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[00665d06-6153-11ee-a25a-0b1bdcd384ca]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6134740906.mp3?updated=1696362104" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>782: The Pivot: From Sellable Biz to Game Changing Offer</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-pivot-from-sellable-biz-to-game-changing-offer</link>
      <description>Lately, I’ve shared a lot of the behind-the-scenes of my marketing and messaging pivot that has happened within my business but what I haven’t shared are the changes to my actual offer. This was not a small decision because I undid three and a half years of work to make my business more sellable and focused on what would give my clients better results. Today, I am going to share all of the changes I made in my business over the last three years. In order to give you the full behind-the-scenes, I need to back up quite a bit. I desperately wanted a product shop from 2016 and it was so far removed from the kind of business I was running. As time has passed, I have become more and more aware of the challenges associated with running one so I began to think about a digital shop. I saw a hole in the market for tools that help business owners enhance their client experience, present themselves more professionally, and speed up their sales process. 
In January 2020, I launched the Creative Template Shop. I wanted to have everything available up front but I didn’t necessarily only want to sell these things once off. I wanted recurring revenue and that was only possible with some sort of membership option. This worked so well and was so focused on the product itself which allowed it to be removed from Boss Project. To make this viable we really had to lock in on the process and we managed to! We used the audience we already had to create warm traffic and present the Creative Template Shop to them. We also used paid advertising early on to focus on cold leads. We presented the products as individual things that could be purchased but as soon as the website was clicked on, it was very clear that becoming a member would be so much more worthwhile and as a result, very few people bought one-off templates. And then everything changed. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 28 Sep 2023 12:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Pivot: From Sellable Biz to Game Changing Offer</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>782</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I undid three and a half years of work to make my business more sellable and focused on what would give my clients better results. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Lately, I’ve shared a lot of the behind-the-scenes of my marketing and messaging pivot that has happened within my business but what I haven’t shared are the changes to my actual offer. This was not a small decision because I undid three and a half years of work to make my business more sellable and focused on what would give my clients better results. Today, I am going to share all of the changes I made in my business over the last three years. In order to give you the full behind-the-scenes, I need to back up quite a bit. I desperately wanted a product shop from 2016 and it was so far removed from the kind of business I was running. As time has passed, I have become more and more aware of the challenges associated with running one so I began to think about a digital shop. I saw a hole in the market for tools that help business owners enhance their client experience, present themselves more professionally, and speed up their sales process. 
In January 2020, I launched the Creative Template Shop. I wanted to have everything available up front but I didn’t necessarily only want to sell these things once off. I wanted recurring revenue and that was only possible with some sort of membership option. This worked so well and was so focused on the product itself which allowed it to be removed from Boss Project. To make this viable we really had to lock in on the process and we managed to! We used the audience we already had to create warm traffic and present the Creative Template Shop to them. We also used paid advertising early on to focus on cold leads. We presented the products as individual things that could be purchased but as soon as the website was clicked on, it was very clear that becoming a member would be so much more worthwhile and as a result, very few people bought one-off templates. And then everything changed. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Lately, I’ve shared a lot of the behind-the-scenes of my marketing and messaging pivot that has happened within my business but what I haven’t shared are the changes to my actual offer. This was not a small decision because I undid three and a half years of work to make my business more sellable and focused on what would give my clients better results. Today, I am going to share all of the changes I made in my business over the last three years. In order to give you the full behind-the-scenes, I need to back up quite a bit. I desperately wanted a product shop from 2016 and it was so far removed from the kind of business I was running. As time has passed, I have become more and more aware of the challenges associated with running one so I began to think about a digital shop. I saw a hole in the market for tools that help business owners enhance their client experience, present themselves more professionally, and speed up their sales process. </p><p>In January 2020, I launched the Creative Template Shop. I wanted to have everything available up front but I didn’t necessarily only want to sell these things once off. I wanted recurring revenue and that was only possible with some sort of membership option. This worked so well and was so focused on the product itself which allowed it to be removed from Boss Project. To make this viable we really had to lock in on the process and we managed to! We used the audience we already had to create warm traffic and present the Creative Template Shop to them. We also used paid advertising early on to focus on cold leads. We presented the products as individual things that could be purchased but as soon as the website was clicked on, it was very clear that becoming a member would be so much more worthwhile and as a result, very few people bought one-off templates. And then everything changed. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3598</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3ec52662-5dfd-11ee-bc20-c38dc010b560]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2759260553.mp3?updated=1696362145" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>781: Pioneering Innovation, Why You Don’t Need to Be First To Market &amp; The Bell-Curve Effect</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/pioneering-innovation-why-you-dont-need-to-be-first-to-market-and-the-bell-curve-effect</link>
      <description>In order to become a successful entrepreneur, you need to make sure you’re on the cutting edge of your industry or else you run the risk of becoming obsolete. There is no such thing as having ‘arrived’ as a business owner, and thinking so will only stifle your growth. Exploring ideas makes me think specifically about pioneering innovation which is about discovering what’s never been achieved before and succeeding at making it happen. Pioneering innovation occurs when a brand-new product, service, or way of doing something is introduced into the market and I think that’s where people get stuck. Being successful does not require you to be a pioneer, inventor, or innovator! 
I’m sure you have all heard of the adoption bell curve and the truth is that there are people at all different stages of that wave. This is usually discussed with reference buyers but it doesn’t just apply to consumers, it applies to business too! You can be a pioneering innovator at the forefront of your industry or you can ride the curve. You do not have to be first at something to be the best! Industry giants are built by observation and I would argue that your ability to observe is far more important than your ability to innovate. Now, this doesn’t mean that you should copy someone else's work, because copying is not what will make you successful. But learning from others and adapting can be such an incredible way to grow and make an existing idea even better! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 26 Sep 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Pioneering Innovation, Why You Don’t Need to Be First To Market &amp; The Bell-Curve Effect</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>781</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle> Industry giants are built by observation and I would argue that your ability to observe is far more important than your ability to innovate.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In order to become a successful entrepreneur, you need to make sure you’re on the cutting edge of your industry or else you run the risk of becoming obsolete. There is no such thing as having ‘arrived’ as a business owner, and thinking so will only stifle your growth. Exploring ideas makes me think specifically about pioneering innovation which is about discovering what’s never been achieved before and succeeding at making it happen. Pioneering innovation occurs when a brand-new product, service, or way of doing something is introduced into the market and I think that’s where people get stuck. Being successful does not require you to be a pioneer, inventor, or innovator! 
I’m sure you have all heard of the adoption bell curve and the truth is that there are people at all different stages of that wave. This is usually discussed with reference buyers but it doesn’t just apply to consumers, it applies to business too! You can be a pioneering innovator at the forefront of your industry or you can ride the curve. You do not have to be first at something to be the best! Industry giants are built by observation and I would argue that your ability to observe is far more important than your ability to innovate. Now, this doesn’t mean that you should copy someone else's work, because copying is not what will make you successful. But learning from others and adapting can be such an incredible way to grow and make an existing idea even better! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In order to become a successful entrepreneur, you need to make sure you’re on the cutting edge of your industry or else you run the risk of becoming obsolete. There is no such thing as having ‘arrived’ as a business owner, and thinking so will only stifle your growth. Exploring ideas makes me think specifically about pioneering innovation which is about discovering what’s never been achieved before and succeeding at making it happen. Pioneering innovation occurs when a brand-new product, service, or way of doing something is introduced into the market and I think that’s where people get stuck. Being successful does not require you to be a pioneer, inventor, or innovator! </p><p>I’m sure you have all heard of the adoption bell curve and the truth is that there are people at all different stages of that wave. This is usually discussed with reference buyers but it doesn’t just apply to consumers, it applies to business too! You can be a pioneering innovator at the forefront of your industry or you can ride the curve. You do not have to be first at something to be the best! Industry giants are built by observation and I would argue that your ability to observe is far more important than your ability to innovate. Now, this doesn’t mean that you should copy someone else's work, because copying is not what will make you successful. But learning from others and adapting can be such an incredible way to grow and make an existing idea even better! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1956</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[eebac0fa-5bc7-11ee-b97c-93b2ff5e447e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4907932362.mp3?updated=1696362148" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>780: From $0 to $264k in 12-months with High-End Services</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/from-0-to-264k-in-12-months-with-high-end-services</link>
      <description>Over the last 12 months, I've been doing an experiment. I wanted to prove that even after nearly a decade, the same principles still apply, still work, and still let you build a business that earns a reasonable salary and can support the life you want to live. When I first started my own business, I replaced my corporate salary in 30 days after being laid off. And in eight months, I made $100,000. Four months after that, I doubled it.
A lot has changed in the intervening years — IRS technology is different, social media is constantly evolving — but do the same principles hold up? Last August, I quietly reopened the agency side of my business, calling it BP Studio. In 12 months, I pulled in $264,000 in revenue from high-end services. No paid ads, no social, no trendy marketing strategies. This growth? It's been 100% organic, all from warm leads that were already in my network. So if I did it once and then did it all over again eight years later, how did I pull it off? What changed and why? I can't wait to get into all of this with you in today's episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 21 Sep 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From $0 to $264k in 12-months with High-End Services</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>780</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Even after nearly a decade, the same principles still apply, still work, and still let you build a business that earns a reasonable salary and can support the life you want to live. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Over the last 12 months, I've been doing an experiment. I wanted to prove that even after nearly a decade, the same principles still apply, still work, and still let you build a business that earns a reasonable salary and can support the life you want to live. When I first started my own business, I replaced my corporate salary in 30 days after being laid off. And in eight months, I made $100,000. Four months after that, I doubled it.
A lot has changed in the intervening years — IRS technology is different, social media is constantly evolving — but do the same principles hold up? Last August, I quietly reopened the agency side of my business, calling it BP Studio. In 12 months, I pulled in $264,000 in revenue from high-end services. No paid ads, no social, no trendy marketing strategies. This growth? It's been 100% organic, all from warm leads that were already in my network. So if I did it once and then did it all over again eight years later, how did I pull it off? What changed and why? I can't wait to get into all of this with you in today's episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Over the last 12 months, I've been doing an experiment. I wanted to prove that even after nearly a decade, the same principles still apply, still work, and still let you build a business that earns a reasonable salary and can support the life you want to live. When I first started my own business, I replaced my corporate salary in 30 days after being laid off. And in eight months, I made $100,000. Four months after that, I doubled it.</p><p>A lot has changed in the intervening years — IRS technology is different, social media is constantly evolving — but do the same principles hold up? Last August, I quietly reopened the agency side of my business, calling it BP Studio. In 12 months, I pulled in $264,000 in revenue from high-end services. No paid ads, no social, no trendy marketing strategies. This growth? It's been 100% organic, all from warm leads that were already in my network. So if I did it once and then did it all over again eight years later, how did I pull it off? What changed and why? I can't wait to get into all of this with you in today's episode!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2886</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dfd5d4c8-572e-11ee-8000-5fd23ce0c4a3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3818787228.mp3?updated=1695662473" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>779: Leaving a Legacy &amp; the 5 Psychological Reasons We Want to Be Remembered</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/leaving-a-legacy-and-5-psychological-reasons-we-want-to-be-remembered</link>
      <description>There are many psychological reasons that you may want to be remembered when you’re gone, but before we start delving into these, I want to give a disclaimer that leaving a legacy is not a requirement to live a good life. It does not define the quality of your impact during your lifetime and is not part of your responsibility while you are alive. According to the Oxford Dictionary, a legacy is the amount of money or property left to someone in a will, but I believe that a legacy can be so much more than that! It’s an imprint. As if you left a piece of yourself behind. 
A legacy can be the impact you have within the four walls of your own home and how you’ve affected family and friends or it can even stretch far beyond that. It’s not just a sum of money but rather the accomplishments that last a lifetime, your values, your ongoing influence, the good deeds you do, and so much more. If it’s not required to leave a legacy, then why is it so important to so many people? Well, because it gives you the opportunity to live for a purpose that’s bigger than yourself! According to Psychology Today, there are five reasons that people want to be remembered. So, let’s talk about them! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 19 Sep 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Leaving a Legacy &amp; the 5 Psychological Reasons We Want to Be Remembered</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>779</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>A legacy is not just a sum of money but rather the accomplishments that last a lifetime, your values, your ongoing influence, the good deeds you do, and so much more. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There are many psychological reasons that you may want to be remembered when you’re gone, but before we start delving into these, I want to give a disclaimer that leaving a legacy is not a requirement to live a good life. It does not define the quality of your impact during your lifetime and is not part of your responsibility while you are alive. According to the Oxford Dictionary, a legacy is the amount of money or property left to someone in a will, but I believe that a legacy can be so much more than that! It’s an imprint. As if you left a piece of yourself behind. 
A legacy can be the impact you have within the four walls of your own home and how you’ve affected family and friends or it can even stretch far beyond that. It’s not just a sum of money but rather the accomplishments that last a lifetime, your values, your ongoing influence, the good deeds you do, and so much more. If it’s not required to leave a legacy, then why is it so important to so many people? Well, because it gives you the opportunity to live for a purpose that’s bigger than yourself! According to Psychology Today, there are five reasons that people want to be remembered. So, let’s talk about them! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There are many psychological reasons that you may want to be remembered when you’re gone, but before we start delving into these, I want to give a disclaimer that leaving a legacy is not a requirement to live a good life. It does not define the quality of your impact during your lifetime and is not part of your responsibility while you are alive. According to the Oxford Dictionary, a legacy is the amount of money or property left to someone in a will, but I believe that a legacy can be so much more than that! It’s an imprint. As if you left a piece of yourself behind. </p><p>A legacy can be the impact you have within the four walls of your own home and how you’ve affected family and friends or it can even stretch far beyond that. It’s not just a sum of money but rather the accomplishments that last a lifetime, your values, your ongoing influence, the good deeds you do, and so much more. If it’s not required to leave a legacy, then why is it so important to so many people? Well, because it gives you the opportunity to live for a purpose that’s bigger than yourself! According to Psychology Today, there are five reasons that people want to be remembered. So, let’s talk about them! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2080</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c684102e-5405-11ee-9b51-43008e410eab]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8392165255.mp3?updated=1696362203" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>778: Explosive Growth: Exactly How I Increased Podcast Downloads by 43% and 12x NEW Subscribers in 30-Days</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/explosive-growth-exactly-how-i-increased-podcast-downloads-by-43-and-12x-new-subscribers-in-30-days</link>
      <description>I’ve dedicated today’s episode to telling you how I increased my downloads by a whopping 43% in just 30 days while multiplying my new subscribers by 12! These are crazy numbers at this scale. This is usually the kind of growth you would see over a year when you already have millions of subscribers. Today I’m sharing what I did differently and how I was able to drive so much more traffic and so many more sign-ups in real-time.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 14 Sep 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Explosive Growth: Exactly How I Increased Podcast Downloads by 43% and 12x NEW Subscribers in 30-Days</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>778</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I’m sharing what I did differently and how I was able to drive so much more traffic and so many more sign-ups in real-time.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’ve dedicated today’s episode to telling you how I increased my downloads by a whopping 43% in just 30 days while multiplying my new subscribers by 12! These are crazy numbers at this scale. This is usually the kind of growth you would see over a year when you already have millions of subscribers. Today I’m sharing what I did differently and how I was able to drive so much more traffic and so many more sign-ups in real-time.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’ve dedicated today’s episode to telling you how I increased my downloads by a whopping 43% in just 30 days while multiplying my new subscribers by 12! These are crazy numbers at this scale. This is usually the kind of growth you would see over a year when you already have millions of subscribers. Today I’m sharing what I did differently and how I was able to drive so much more traffic and so many more sign-ups in real-time.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3493</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4b13ddc4-5181-11ee-b31b-47f8bbd4651e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6164938010.mp3?updated=1696362238" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>777: Industry Predictions: The Future of Marketing for Online Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/industry-predictions-the-future-of-marketing-for-online-business</link>
      <description>In our last episode, Mariah Coz joined me to discuss our predictions for what the future of online business could look like. Today’s episode continues where we left off and gets into how these predictions will impact marketing in the online business world.
Tuning in, you’ll learn why there’s no one-size-fits-all approach to marketing, and how you should tailor your marketing strategy depending on your business model, whether that’s one-to-one, hybrid, or one-to-many. I unpack the answers to some commonly asked questions, including how niche you should go and how to identify who you’re talking to, before taking a look at how audiences have changed over the past few years. You’ll also find out how your audience impacts your efforts to be more visible and nurture leads, plus advice on what you can do to take your next steps!
I want you to market your business in a way that works for YOU, not just now, but also in the future. So, join me as I break down everything you need to know about the future of marketing for online businesses!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 12 Sep 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Industry Predictions: The Future of Marketing for Online Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>777</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Why there’s no one-size-fits-all approach to marketing and how you should tailor your marketing strategy depending on your business model, whether that’s one-to-one, hybrid, or one-to-many. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In our last episode, Mariah Coz joined me to discuss our predictions for what the future of online business could look like. Today’s episode continues where we left off and gets into how these predictions will impact marketing in the online business world.
Tuning in, you’ll learn why there’s no one-size-fits-all approach to marketing, and how you should tailor your marketing strategy depending on your business model, whether that’s one-to-one, hybrid, or one-to-many. I unpack the answers to some commonly asked questions, including how niche you should go and how to identify who you’re talking to, before taking a look at how audiences have changed over the past few years. You’ll also find out how your audience impacts your efforts to be more visible and nurture leads, plus advice on what you can do to take your next steps!
I want you to market your business in a way that works for YOU, not just now, but also in the future. So, join me as I break down everything you need to know about the future of marketing for online businesses!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In our <a href="https://bit.ly/TSH-776">last episode</a>, Mariah Coz joined me to discuss our predictions for what the future of online business could look like. Today’s episode continues where we left off and gets into how these predictions will impact marketing in the online business world.</p><p>Tuning in, you’ll learn why there’s no one-size-fits-all approach to marketing, and how you should tailor your marketing strategy depending on your business model, whether that’s one-to-one, hybrid, or one-to-many. I unpack the answers to some commonly asked questions, including how niche you should go and how to identify who you’re talking to, before taking a look at how audiences have changed over the past few years. You’ll also find out how your audience impacts your efforts to be more visible and nurture leads, plus advice on what you can do to take your next steps!</p><p>I want you to market your business in a way that works for YOU, not just now, but also in the future. So, join me as I break down everything you need to know about the future of marketing for online businesses!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2914</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5e53ccba-50e5-11ee-8609-3751e674b303]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9671409933.mp3?updated=1696362262" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>776: Industry Predictions: The Future of Online Business with Mariah Coz</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/industry-predictions-the-future-of-online-business-with-mariah-coz</link>
      <description>There have been so many upheavals in the past few years, from COVID to the rise of AI, that making any predictions about the future can seem like an exercise in futility. But when you’ve spent enough years in an industry you become attuned to customer needs in new and surprising ways, allowing you to gain a deeper sense of where things may be heading next. Today on the podcast I’m thrilled to be talking with the wonderful Mariah Coz, Founder of Fearless CEO, where she helps creators monetize their business, through community content courses, and other creative digital products.
Mariah is someone I’ve known in this online industry since the early days of my business. And over the last couple of years, I've had the great honor and pleasure of getting to know her as a personal friend. For today’s episode, Mariah and I get into a topic we are both extremely excited to discuss, namely, the future of online business and what this looks like. We get into how online business has changed since we first started in the industry, what to consider when choosing the path that makes the most sense to you, how we expect selling to evolve in the online space, and much more.
Whether you’re a newbie unsure of where to start, or a seasoned professional taking stock of where to go next, this conversation covers all of it. And while we can’t predict the future with unerring accuracy, we can share what we expect based on everything we’ve learned over the past few years. So, for an expansive conversation on industry predictions and our advice on how to adapt from myself and the wonderful Mariah Coz, be sure to tune in today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 07 Sep 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Industry Predictions: The Future of Online Business with Mariah Coz</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>776</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We get into how online business has changed since we first started in the industry, what to consider when choosing the path that makes the most sense to you, how we expect selling to evolve in the online space, and much more.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There have been so many upheavals in the past few years, from COVID to the rise of AI, that making any predictions about the future can seem like an exercise in futility. But when you’ve spent enough years in an industry you become attuned to customer needs in new and surprising ways, allowing you to gain a deeper sense of where things may be heading next. Today on the podcast I’m thrilled to be talking with the wonderful Mariah Coz, Founder of Fearless CEO, where she helps creators monetize their business, through community content courses, and other creative digital products.
Mariah is someone I’ve known in this online industry since the early days of my business. And over the last couple of years, I've had the great honor and pleasure of getting to know her as a personal friend. For today’s episode, Mariah and I get into a topic we are both extremely excited to discuss, namely, the future of online business and what this looks like. We get into how online business has changed since we first started in the industry, what to consider when choosing the path that makes the most sense to you, how we expect selling to evolve in the online space, and much more.
Whether you’re a newbie unsure of where to start, or a seasoned professional taking stock of where to go next, this conversation covers all of it. And while we can’t predict the future with unerring accuracy, we can share what we expect based on everything we’ve learned over the past few years. So, for an expansive conversation on industry predictions and our advice on how to adapt from myself and the wonderful Mariah Coz, be sure to tune in today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There have been so many upheavals in the past few years, from COVID to the rise of AI, that making any predictions about the future can seem like an exercise in futility. But when you’ve spent enough years in an industry you become attuned to customer needs in new and surprising ways, allowing you to gain a deeper sense of where things may be heading next. Today on the podcast I’m thrilled to be talking with the wonderful Mariah Coz, Founder of Fearless CEO, where she helps creators monetize their business, through community content courses, and other creative digital products.</p><p>Mariah is someone I’ve known in this online industry since the early days of my business. And over the last couple of years, I've had the great honor and pleasure of getting to know her as a personal friend. For today’s episode, Mariah and I get into a topic we are both extremely excited to discuss, namely, the future of online business and what this looks like. We get into how online business has changed since we first started in the industry, what to consider when choosing the path that makes the most sense to you, how we expect selling to evolve in the online space, and much more.</p><p>Whether you’re a newbie unsure of where to start, or a seasoned professional taking stock of where to go next, this conversation covers all of it. And while we can’t predict the future with unerring accuracy, we can share what we expect based on everything we’ve learned over the past few years. So, for an expansive conversation on industry predictions and our advice on how to adapt from myself and the wonderful Mariah Coz, be sure to tune in today!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3113</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[936c7308-4ce3-11ee-95f8-e37e055e9a4c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1784735334.mp3?updated=1696362324" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>775: From Crisis to Clarity: Discovering What’s Next For My Life &amp; Career</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/from-crisis-to-clarity-discovering-whats-next-for-my-life-career</link>
      <description>During today’s episode, I tell the story of how I went from a full-on crisis to the most clarity I have had in years! I want to invite you to join me in this movement. When I was able to take a deep breath for the first time, I knew that other people needed to experience this. I believe that everyone deserves the financial freedom that lets you go from social security to true financial freedom and lasting wealth that creates a secure future. I want you to have that gift! It’s not just about me. It’s not just about helping people to become stable. This is for every person running a business. I want you to be a part of it, so tune in today to learn how I went from crisis to clarity, discovered what’s next for my life and career, and how you can too!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 05 Sep 2023 17:20:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From Crisis to Clarity: Discovering What’s Next For My Life &amp; Career</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>775</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I believe that everyone deserves the financial freedom that lets you go from social security to true financial freedom and lasting wealth that creates a secure future.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>During today’s episode, I tell the story of how I went from a full-on crisis to the most clarity I have had in years! I want to invite you to join me in this movement. When I was able to take a deep breath for the first time, I knew that other people needed to experience this. I believe that everyone deserves the financial freedom that lets you go from social security to true financial freedom and lasting wealth that creates a secure future. I want you to have that gift! It’s not just about me. It’s not just about helping people to become stable. This is for every person running a business. I want you to be a part of it, so tune in today to learn how I went from crisis to clarity, discovered what’s next for my life and career, and how you can too!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>During today’s episode, I tell the story of how I went from a full-on crisis to the most clarity I have had in years! I want to invite you to join me in this movement. When I was able to take a deep breath for the first time, I knew that other people needed to experience this. I believe that everyone deserves the financial freedom that lets you go from social security to true financial freedom and lasting wealth that creates a secure future. I want you to have that gift! It’s not just about me. It’s not just about helping people to become stable. This is for every person running a business. I want you to be a part of it, so tune in today to learn how I went from crisis to clarity, discovered what’s next for my life and career, and how you can too!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3266</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b9bd59a8-4c0e-11ee-a3bb-97de93acbce3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2112024111.mp3?updated=1696362358" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>774: “Untitled” Workshop: The Single Most Important Thing You’ve Done for Your Online Business Maybe Ever</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/untitled-workshop-the-single-most-important-thing-youve-done-for-your-online-business-maybe-ever</link>
      <description>Listen in on the phenomenal live webinar we offered this week. This information will change countless lives and give more women opportunities. I'm sharing clear strategies for scaling a business that most people don’t know about. We aren't messing with trendy marketing tactics that don’t work the same way for everyone. Every business is different and one person’s success does not define your own.
That’s why I'm sharing the exact strategies and facts that will bring you success (and not just the shiny, sexy ones). You need this information. I will redefine what transparency looks like in this industry because it was not easy to get to where I am today. This is my genuine desire to see you succeed! If you'd like to see the slides that went along with this, you can watch the full video replay at bossproject.com/untitled-training.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 31 Aug 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>“Untitled” Workshop: The Single Most Important Thing You’ve Done for Your Online Business Maybe Ever</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>774</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I'm sharing the exact strategies and facts that will bring you success (and not just the shiny, sexy ones). This is my genuine desire to see you succeed! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Listen in on the phenomenal live webinar we offered this week. This information will change countless lives and give more women opportunities. I'm sharing clear strategies for scaling a business that most people don’t know about. We aren't messing with trendy marketing tactics that don’t work the same way for everyone. Every business is different and one person’s success does not define your own.
That’s why I'm sharing the exact strategies and facts that will bring you success (and not just the shiny, sexy ones). You need this information. I will redefine what transparency looks like in this industry because it was not easy to get to where I am today. This is my genuine desire to see you succeed! If you'd like to see the slides that went along with this, you can watch the full video replay at bossproject.com/untitled-training.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Listen in on the phenomenal live webinar we offered this week. This information will change countless lives and give more women opportunities. I'm sharing clear strategies for scaling a business that most people don’t know about. We aren't messing with trendy marketing tactics that don’t work the same way for everyone. Every business is different and one person’s success does not define your own.</p><p>That’s why I'm sharing the exact strategies and facts that will bring you success (and not just the shiny, sexy ones). You <em>need</em> this information. I will redefine what transparency looks like in this industry because it was not easy to get to where I am today. This is my genuine desire to see you succeed! If you'd like to see the slides that went along with this, you can watch the full video replay at <a href="https://bossproject.com/untitled-training">bossproject.com/untitled-training</a>.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>4355</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[613b96b8-4755-11ee-b7b5-ef371129acd9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3298818317.mp3?updated=1696362428" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>773: 1-Sale to 439 Leads in 48-Hours</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/1-sale-to-439-leads-in-48-hours</link>
      <description>I went from one sale to 439 leads in just 48 hours and I’m going to tell you exactly how I did it! I recently took the biggest gamble I have ever taken in my business. I refunded tickets to my upcoming Sales Flow workshop and scrapped everything my team and I had spent weeks preparing for. I did this because only one ticket was bought in 24 hours when I announced my workshop. This mission is far too important to me to let one dry season put me under. You only have one life and I want women everywhere to have choices, opportunities, and freedom! I can only make the kind of impact I want to make if more women in business know what I know. 
So, I came up with a plan to save this workshop, this business, and a plan that will change countless lives and give more women opportunities. In nearly a decade of business, I have never seen numbers rise this fast! There are clear strategies for scaling a business that most people don’t know about. Instead, they have to rely on trendy marketing tactics that don’t work the same way for everyone. Every business is different and one person’s success does not define your own.
That’s why I want to share the exact strategies and facts that will bring you success (and not just the shiny, sexy ones). You need this information. I will redefine what transparency looks like in this industry because it was not easy to get to where I am today. Sign up for my Untitled Workshop now at bossproject.com/untitled. This is my genuine desire to see you succeed and you have nothing to lose! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 29 Aug 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>1-Sale to 439 Leads in 48-Hours</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>773</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I came up with a plan to save this workshop, this business, and a plan that will change countless lives and give more women opportunities. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I went from one sale to 439 leads in just 48 hours and I’m going to tell you exactly how I did it! I recently took the biggest gamble I have ever taken in my business. I refunded tickets to my upcoming Sales Flow workshop and scrapped everything my team and I had spent weeks preparing for. I did this because only one ticket was bought in 24 hours when I announced my workshop. This mission is far too important to me to let one dry season put me under. You only have one life and I want women everywhere to have choices, opportunities, and freedom! I can only make the kind of impact I want to make if more women in business know what I know. 
So, I came up with a plan to save this workshop, this business, and a plan that will change countless lives and give more women opportunities. In nearly a decade of business, I have never seen numbers rise this fast! There are clear strategies for scaling a business that most people don’t know about. Instead, they have to rely on trendy marketing tactics that don’t work the same way for everyone. Every business is different and one person’s success does not define your own.
That’s why I want to share the exact strategies and facts that will bring you success (and not just the shiny, sexy ones). You need this information. I will redefine what transparency looks like in this industry because it was not easy to get to where I am today. Sign up for my Untitled Workshop now at bossproject.com/untitled. This is my genuine desire to see you succeed and you have nothing to lose! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I went from one sale to 439 leads in just 48 hours and I’m going to tell you exactly how I did it! I recently took the biggest gamble I have ever taken in my business. I refunded tickets to my upcoming Sales Flow workshop and scrapped everything my team and I had spent weeks preparing for. I did this because only one ticket was bought in 24 hours when I announced my workshop. This mission is far too important to me to let one dry season put me under. You only have one life and I want women everywhere to have choices, opportunities, and freedom! I can only make the kind of impact I want to make if more women in business know what I know. </p><p>So, I came up with a plan to save this workshop, this business, and a plan that will change countless lives and give more women opportunities. In nearly a decade of business, I have never seen numbers rise this fast! There are clear strategies for scaling a business that most people don’t know about. Instead, they have to rely on trendy marketing tactics that don’t work the same way for everyone. Every business is different and one person’s success does not define your own.</p><p>That’s why I want to share the exact strategies and facts that will bring you success (and not just the shiny, sexy ones). You <em>need</em> this information. I will redefine what transparency looks like in this industry because it was not easy to get to where I am today. Sign up for my Untitled Workshop now at <a href="https://bossproject.com/untitled">bossproject.com/untitled</a>. This is my genuine desire to see you succeed and you have nothing to lose! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1723</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c9f9f9b2-45dc-11ee-a28c-7bda5b18cfd4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9377792483.mp3?updated=1696362471" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>772: Prioritizing Your Life When Shit Hits the Fan</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/prioritizing-your-life-when-shit-hits-the-fan</link>
      <description>I like to see this time of year as the opportunity to dive back in and come up with a fresh approach to plan for the future! This season can be about refining what you have built so that your business can continue to support you for a long time. I know that many of you use this time to make new goals and create new opportunities, but today I want to talk about what it looks like to prepare your business so that you’re ready when life comes at you again. Shit is going to hit the fan whether you want it to or not and I want you to build a business that can survive that without being so dependent on you. Personally, I never want to be financially dependent on anyone else and I know that many of you feel the same way! You want your business to work even when life gets thrown your way. You aren’t trying to fix the ‘shit,’ you’re trying to live and work while it’s happening!
I do not think enough people understand the reality of the added stress being a business owner brings. The tiniest thing can happen that will completely derail your day or even your life. These things are part of life and will happen whether you have a business or not. So how do we deal with these challenges as they come up and prevent them from completely altering our future success? I know so many of you wish you could wave a magic wand and be at the point in your business where you could rely on it consistently in challenging seasons. And not being there yet is fine! What I want you to do is create a business that allows you to prioritize what you want and that is built to survive if you have to walk away for a while. If you want a business that can handle these things, you’re going to have to make some changes.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 24 Aug 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Prioritizing Your Life When Shit Hits the Fan</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>772</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Let's talk about creating a business that allows you to prioritize what you want and that is built to survive if you have to walk away for a while.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I like to see this time of year as the opportunity to dive back in and come up with a fresh approach to plan for the future! This season can be about refining what you have built so that your business can continue to support you for a long time. I know that many of you use this time to make new goals and create new opportunities, but today I want to talk about what it looks like to prepare your business so that you’re ready when life comes at you again. Shit is going to hit the fan whether you want it to or not and I want you to build a business that can survive that without being so dependent on you. Personally, I never want to be financially dependent on anyone else and I know that many of you feel the same way! You want your business to work even when life gets thrown your way. You aren’t trying to fix the ‘shit,’ you’re trying to live and work while it’s happening!
I do not think enough people understand the reality of the added stress being a business owner brings. The tiniest thing can happen that will completely derail your day or even your life. These things are part of life and will happen whether you have a business or not. So how do we deal with these challenges as they come up and prevent them from completely altering our future success? I know so many of you wish you could wave a magic wand and be at the point in your business where you could rely on it consistently in challenging seasons. And not being there yet is fine! What I want you to do is create a business that allows you to prioritize what you want and that is built to survive if you have to walk away for a while. If you want a business that can handle these things, you’re going to have to make some changes.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I like to see this time of year as the opportunity to dive back in and come up with a fresh approach to plan for the future! This season can be about refining what you have built so that your business can continue to support you for a long time. I know that many of you use this time to make new goals and create new opportunities, but today I want to talk about what it looks like to prepare your business so that you’re ready when life comes at you again. Shit is going to hit the fan whether you want it to or not and I want you to build a business that can survive that without being so dependent on you. Personally, I never want to be financially dependent on anyone else and I know that many of you feel the same way! You want your business to work even when life gets thrown your way. You aren’t trying to fix the ‘shit,’ you’re trying to live and work while it’s happening!</p><p>I do not think enough people understand the reality of the added stress being a business owner brings. The tiniest thing can happen that will completely derail your day or even your life. These things are part of life and will happen whether you have a business or not. So how do we deal with these challenges as they come up and prevent them from completely altering our future success? I know so many of you wish you could wave a magic wand and be at the point in your business where you could rely on it consistently in challenging seasons. And not being there yet is fine! What I want you to do is create a business that allows you to prioritize what you want and that is built to survive if you have to walk away for a while. If you want a business that can handle these things, you’re going to have to make some changes.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2623</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[80af9b2a-410b-11ee-a071-b765aa778ee2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4930044271.mp3?updated=1696362501" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>771: Booked Out Burnout: The Truth Around Scaling Your Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/booked-out-burnout-the-truth-around-scaling-your-business</link>
      <description>Chances are, you started your business because you want to make a real impact. Like the badass you are, you wanted to do this independently and quickly took on clients and catered to their needs, often at your own expense. This, unfortunately, can only lead to burnout. There comes a point where you need to fix the situation or you’ll seriously consider quitting. I know, because I’ve been there, and I’m here to assure you that there are some very tangible ways to get out of this dreaded cycle that keeps people feeling trapped in the business they built that is supposed to be this opportunity for freedom.
It’s time to address the underpricing epidemic plaguing the industry and in this episode, that’s precisely what we’re doing. So, buckle up and prepare to discover the power of proper pricing and building a strong financial foundation. Find out about the pricing calculator that takes all aspects of your business into account, helping you find the appropriate price points for your services.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 22 Aug 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Booked Out Burnout: The Truth Around Scaling Your Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>771</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>There are some very tangible ways to get out of this dreaded cycle that keeps people feeling trapped in the business they built that is supposed to be this opportunity for freedom.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Chances are, you started your business because you want to make a real impact. Like the badass you are, you wanted to do this independently and quickly took on clients and catered to their needs, often at your own expense. This, unfortunately, can only lead to burnout. There comes a point where you need to fix the situation or you’ll seriously consider quitting. I know, because I’ve been there, and I’m here to assure you that there are some very tangible ways to get out of this dreaded cycle that keeps people feeling trapped in the business they built that is supposed to be this opportunity for freedom.
It’s time to address the underpricing epidemic plaguing the industry and in this episode, that’s precisely what we’re doing. So, buckle up and prepare to discover the power of proper pricing and building a strong financial foundation. Find out about the pricing calculator that takes all aspects of your business into account, helping you find the appropriate price points for your services.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Chances are, you started your business because you want to make a real impact. Like the badass you are, you wanted to do this independently and quickly took on clients and catered to their needs, often at your own expense. This, unfortunately, can only lead to burnout. There comes a point where you need to fix the situation or you’ll seriously consider quitting. I know, because I’ve been there, and I’m here to assure you that there are some very tangible ways to get out of this dreaded cycle that keeps people feeling trapped in the business they built that is supposed to be this opportunity for freedom.</p><p>It’s time to address the underpricing epidemic plaguing the industry and in this episode, that’s precisely what we’re doing. So, buckle up and prepare to discover the power of proper pricing and building a strong financial foundation. Find out about the pricing calculator that takes all aspects of your business into account, helping you find the appropriate price points for your services.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2576</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a722b20c-4060-11ee-ba0d-5757f420e2ce]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9576608886.mp3?updated=1696362537" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>770:  How to Leverage Where You Are to Get to Where You Want to Go</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-leverage-where-you-are-to-get-to-where-you-want-to-go</link>
      <description>Today I want to talk about where you’re going; whether you know what that looks like or not. I know that for many of you, you may not even be sure where you want to go and that’s okay! It’s really easy to overlook the value of your past experiences but you are, in essence, a cumulation of them and they can be so valuable in shaping where you want to go. I know a lot of you may not know the answer and that is okay! It’s not about knowing the answer, it’s about using this as a jumping-off point. Even all the previous jobs you’ve ever had shape the business you have today! 
The real question now is how does your past inform where you’re going? These moments and experiences, big or small, can have a huge impact on what you want to do next. So how do we leverage it? It’s important to point out that this is not about speed but rather about pace! That’s why I came up with the PACE method and today, I’m sharing how these facts ultimately help you apply your findings to something that is actually actionable by breaking down PACE.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 17 Aug 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Leverage Where You Are to Get to Where You Want to Go</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>770</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>You are, in essence, a cumulation of your past experiences and they can be so valuable in shaping where you want to go. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today I want to talk about where you’re going; whether you know what that looks like or not. I know that for many of you, you may not even be sure where you want to go and that’s okay! It’s really easy to overlook the value of your past experiences but you are, in essence, a cumulation of them and they can be so valuable in shaping where you want to go. I know a lot of you may not know the answer and that is okay! It’s not about knowing the answer, it’s about using this as a jumping-off point. Even all the previous jobs you’ve ever had shape the business you have today! 
The real question now is how does your past inform where you’re going? These moments and experiences, big or small, can have a huge impact on what you want to do next. So how do we leverage it? It’s important to point out that this is not about speed but rather about pace! That’s why I came up with the PACE method and today, I’m sharing how these facts ultimately help you apply your findings to something that is actually actionable by breaking down PACE.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I want to talk about where you’re going; whether you know what that looks like or not. I know that for many of you, you may not even be sure where you want to go and that’s okay! It’s really easy to overlook the value of your past experiences but you are, in essence, a cumulation of them and they can be so valuable in shaping where you want to go. I know a lot of you may not know the answer and that is okay! It’s not about knowing the answer, it’s about using this as a jumping-off point. Even all the previous jobs you’ve ever had shape the business you have today! </p><p>The real question now is how does your past inform where you’re going? These moments and experiences, big or small, can have a huge impact on what you want to do next. So how do we leverage it? It’s important to point out that this is not about speed but rather about pace! That’s why I came up with the PACE method and today, I’m sharing how these facts ultimately help you apply your findings to something that is actually actionable by breaking down PACE.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2118</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a4614296-3b7d-11ee-8dfa-870cdf8be5cd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2762557609.mp3?updated=1696362554" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>769: The Secret to Building REAL Wealth &amp; Retiring Early</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-secret-to-building-real-wealth-retiring-early</link>
      <description>Today, we’re delving into the world of passive income and how to truly build substantial wealth – the kind that leaves a legacy and transforms not only your life but also the lives of your family and future generations. Discover the reality behind passive income and how to create genuine financial security! In this episode, you’ll learn how the magic is in the mix with insights into the best active/passive combinations. I'll also be sharing details about an upcoming workshop that's all about building a real asset – your business – that will fuel your wealth journey. If you're ready to make your business a sustainable income source and gain control over your financial future, this workshop is a must-attend! So tune in for insight into finding the right mix for you, giving you the freedom to live life on your terms.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 15 Aug 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Secret to Building REAL Wealth &amp; Retiring Early</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>769</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, you’ll learn how the magic is in the mix with insights into the best active/passive combinations.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we’re delving into the world of passive income and how to truly build substantial wealth – the kind that leaves a legacy and transforms not only your life but also the lives of your family and future generations. Discover the reality behind passive income and how to create genuine financial security! In this episode, you’ll learn how the magic is in the mix with insights into the best active/passive combinations. I'll also be sharing details about an upcoming workshop that's all about building a real asset – your business – that will fuel your wealth journey. If you're ready to make your business a sustainable income source and gain control over your financial future, this workshop is a must-attend! So tune in for insight into finding the right mix for you, giving you the freedom to live life on your terms.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we’re delving into the world of passive income and how to truly build substantial wealth – the kind that leaves a legacy and transforms not only your life but also the lives of your family and future generations. Discover the reality behind passive income and how to create genuine financial security! In this episode, you’ll learn how the magic is in the mix with insights into the best active/passive combinations. I'll also be sharing details about an upcoming workshop that's all about building a real asset – your business – that will fuel your wealth journey. If you're ready to make your business a sustainable income source and gain control over your financial future, this workshop is a must-attend! So tune in for insight into finding the right mix for you, giving you the freedom to live life on your terms.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2845</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a30c1240-3ac4-11ee-8587-efae28fe35e5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7596148755.mp3?updated=1696362632" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>768: How Can I Budget When My Income is Inconsistent?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-can-i-budget-when-my-income-is-inconsistent</link>
      <description>In today’s episode, I am going to be talking about what it looks like to budget when your income is inconsistent. Perhaps your business’ revenue and your pay is inconsistent and you want to create more sustainability across the board so that you can get paid more often and more predictably. I know the economy is insane at the moment and there is a lot happening right now so everything I am going to share with you today is what I would do when I want to have a more conservative approach in a time of uncertainty. I know that this will have an instrumental impact on how you change your business’ finances, create more personal financial stability, and solidify the future health of your business. 
I need you to get the idea out of your head that businesses grow linearly or exponentially. They just don’t and you need to embrace these waves of inconsistency. I don’t want you to think that this sort of change means you’re doing something wrong because that isn’t true and running a business is simply too unpredictable. I want to help you find ways to manage these waves of inconsistency. I have been through periods of making huge amounts of money and periods of not even making enough to cover my family’s groceries for the month. In the first few years of running my business, I would take every dollar that would come into the business and use a percentage of it in a certain way, so I got paid when the business got paid. The problem with this is that it is very inconsistent and while it may work early on in the business as the most stable way to handle finances, it won’t work in the long run. 
In your developmental years, you need a place to start because those dollars don’t always fall linearly even when you’re doing fantastically! While there are definitely things that you can be doing to create consistency in revenue, that’s not actually what I am going to be talking about today. I am going to be talking about creating consistency in your income and your pay; the money that goes into your personal bank account. Don’t get me wrong, this isn’t about taking every bump out of your business because bumps will happen! This is about creating predictability in your personal financial future and helping you save appropriately so that you can manage the unpredictability that will inevitably come.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 10 Aug 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How Can I Budget When My Income is Inconsistent?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>768</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How to create predictability in your personal financial future and prepare to manage the unpredictability that will inevitably come. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today’s episode, I am going to be talking about what it looks like to budget when your income is inconsistent. Perhaps your business’ revenue and your pay is inconsistent and you want to create more sustainability across the board so that you can get paid more often and more predictably. I know the economy is insane at the moment and there is a lot happening right now so everything I am going to share with you today is what I would do when I want to have a more conservative approach in a time of uncertainty. I know that this will have an instrumental impact on how you change your business’ finances, create more personal financial stability, and solidify the future health of your business. 
I need you to get the idea out of your head that businesses grow linearly or exponentially. They just don’t and you need to embrace these waves of inconsistency. I don’t want you to think that this sort of change means you’re doing something wrong because that isn’t true and running a business is simply too unpredictable. I want to help you find ways to manage these waves of inconsistency. I have been through periods of making huge amounts of money and periods of not even making enough to cover my family’s groceries for the month. In the first few years of running my business, I would take every dollar that would come into the business and use a percentage of it in a certain way, so I got paid when the business got paid. The problem with this is that it is very inconsistent and while it may work early on in the business as the most stable way to handle finances, it won’t work in the long run. 
In your developmental years, you need a place to start because those dollars don’t always fall linearly even when you’re doing fantastically! While there are definitely things that you can be doing to create consistency in revenue, that’s not actually what I am going to be talking about today. I am going to be talking about creating consistency in your income and your pay; the money that goes into your personal bank account. Don’t get me wrong, this isn’t about taking every bump out of your business because bumps will happen! This is about creating predictability in your personal financial future and helping you save appropriately so that you can manage the unpredictability that will inevitably come.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today’s episode, I am going to be talking about what it looks like to budget when your income is inconsistent. Perhaps your business’ revenue and your pay is inconsistent and you want to create more sustainability across the board so that you can get paid more often and more predictably. I know the economy is insane at the moment and there is a lot happening right now so everything I am going to share with you today is what I would do when I want to have a more conservative approach in a time of uncertainty. I know that this will have an instrumental impact on how you change your business’ finances, create more personal financial stability, and solidify the future health of your business. </p><p>I need you to get the idea out of your head that businesses grow linearly or exponentially. They just don’t and you need to embrace these waves of inconsistency. I don’t want you to think that this sort of change means you’re doing something wrong because that isn’t true and running a business is simply too unpredictable. I want to help you find ways to manage these waves of inconsistency. I have been through periods of making huge amounts of money and periods of not even making enough to cover my family’s groceries for the month. In the first few years of running my business, I would take every dollar that would come into the business and use a percentage of it in a certain way, so I got paid when the business got paid. The problem with this is that it is very inconsistent and while it may work early on in the business as the most stable way to handle finances, it won’t work in the long run. </p><p>In your developmental years, you need a place to start because those dollars don’t always fall linearly even when you’re doing fantastically! While there are definitely things that you can be doing to create consistency in revenue, that’s not actually what I am going to be talking about today. I am going to be talking about creating consistency in <em>your</em> income and <em>your</em> pay; the money that goes into <em>your</em> personal bank account. Don’t get me wrong, this isn’t about taking every bump out of your business because bumps will happen! This is about creating predictability in your personal financial future and helping you save appropriately so that you can manage the unpredictability that will inevitably come.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2712</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[40d23e82-36d3-11ee-a692-1f2710a541bf]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8703245845.mp3?updated=1696362655" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>767: My Existential Crisis &amp; Discovering What I Really Want</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/my-existential-crisis-discovering-what-i-really-want</link>
      <description>Today, I’m sharing an incredibly personal story about a crisis I faced in 2022 and the profoundly transformative impact it’s had on my life. Clocking that I was the same age as my mother when he had her brain surgery 30 years ago triggered a deep existential crisis in me and in this episode, I open up about my personal journey of self-reflection. With the insights and exercises I learned along the way, I’m eager to provide you with the tools to move through your own transformation. Out of necessity, I’ve become well-acquainted with what it looks like to truly reflect deeply, and I want to share my process so that you, too, can understand what's important to you and learn how to prioritize it going forward. Feel free to treat this episode as your compass to navigate the uncertain waters of self-discovery!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 08 Aug 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>My Existential Crisis &amp; Discovering What I Really Want</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>767</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I want to share my process so that you, too, can understand what's important to you and learn how to prioritize it going forward.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, I’m sharing an incredibly personal story about a crisis I faced in 2022 and the profoundly transformative impact it’s had on my life. Clocking that I was the same age as my mother when he had her brain surgery 30 years ago triggered a deep existential crisis in me and in this episode, I open up about my personal journey of self-reflection. With the insights and exercises I learned along the way, I’m eager to provide you with the tools to move through your own transformation. Out of necessity, I’ve become well-acquainted with what it looks like to truly reflect deeply, and I want to share my process so that you, too, can understand what's important to you and learn how to prioritize it going forward. Feel free to treat this episode as your compass to navigate the uncertain waters of self-discovery!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, I’m sharing an incredibly personal story about a crisis I faced in 2022 and the profoundly transformative impact it’s had on my life. Clocking that I was the same age as my mother when he had her brain surgery 30 years ago triggered a deep existential crisis in me and in this episode, I open up about my personal journey of self-reflection. With the insights and exercises I learned along the way, I’m eager to provide you with the tools to move through your own transformation. Out of necessity, I’ve become well-acquainted with what it looks like to truly reflect deeply, and I want to share my process so that you, too, can understand what's important to you and learn how to prioritize it going forward. Feel free to treat this episode as your compass to navigate the uncertain waters of self-discovery!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2695</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[030315f0-3218-11ee-b4ab-636ba5b7deb3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7140710670.mp3?updated=1696362672" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>766: Barbie's $150 Million Marketing Budget </title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/barbies-150-million-marketing-budget</link>
      <description>Today we are talking all things Barbie; specifically, the marketing budget which is the biggest marketing budget we have seen for a movie in a long time! This company has taken a brand we all know and love and made it more relevant decades later. So what will this massive budget mean for entertainment moving forward and what can we learn from it as small businesses? 
The Barbie movie team spent $150 million on marketing on top of the $145 million they spent on the actual production, and the ROI is there, as the production already made the entire amount back in the first weekend alone! There are hundreds of collaborations, and this is absolutely incredible! There have recently been loads of discussions about the profitability of femininity, and any nay-sayers have been proven wrong time and time again. Amazing things happen when women are supported; this movie is more proof!
There has been a very interesting shift in toys recently, and Barbie has seen some controversy for not being diverse and inclusive enough, representing enough of a variety of jobs, and being body positive. This movie helps us remember what Barbie felt like when we were children, before all of this stuff mattered to us! This age-old brand has the heart of many women, and the movie, which was produced for millennial women and not children, reawakens this nostalgia. The movie is even fairly satirical and makes fun of the Barbie world in many ways. There is a lot of power in looking at totally different industries from your own to find things you can learn from!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 03 Aug 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Barbie's $150 Million Marketing Budget </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>766</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>What will this massive budget mean for entertainment moving forward and what can we learn from it as small businesses? </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are talking all things Barbie; specifically, the marketing budget which is the biggest marketing budget we have seen for a movie in a long time! This company has taken a brand we all know and love and made it more relevant decades later. So what will this massive budget mean for entertainment moving forward and what can we learn from it as small businesses? 
The Barbie movie team spent $150 million on marketing on top of the $145 million they spent on the actual production, and the ROI is there, as the production already made the entire amount back in the first weekend alone! There are hundreds of collaborations, and this is absolutely incredible! There have recently been loads of discussions about the profitability of femininity, and any nay-sayers have been proven wrong time and time again. Amazing things happen when women are supported; this movie is more proof!
There has been a very interesting shift in toys recently, and Barbie has seen some controversy for not being diverse and inclusive enough, representing enough of a variety of jobs, and being body positive. This movie helps us remember what Barbie felt like when we were children, before all of this stuff mattered to us! This age-old brand has the heart of many women, and the movie, which was produced for millennial women and not children, reawakens this nostalgia. The movie is even fairly satirical and makes fun of the Barbie world in many ways. There is a lot of power in looking at totally different industries from your own to find things you can learn from!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are talking all things Barbie; specifically, the marketing budget which is the biggest marketing budget we have seen for a movie in a long time! This company has taken a brand we all know and love and made it more relevant decades later. So what will this massive budget mean for entertainment moving forward and what can we learn from it as small businesses? </p><p>The Barbie movie team spent $150 million on marketing on top of the $145 million they spent on the actual production, and the ROI is there, as the production already made the entire amount back in the first weekend alone! There are hundreds of collaborations, and this is absolutely incredible! There have recently been loads of discussions about the profitability of femininity, and any nay-sayers have been proven wrong time and time again. Amazing things happen when women are supported; this movie is more proof!</p><p>There has been a very interesting shift in toys recently, and Barbie has seen some controversy for not being diverse and inclusive enough, representing enough of a variety of jobs, and being body positive. This movie helps us remember what Barbie felt like when we were children, before all of this stuff mattered to us! This age-old brand has the heart of many women, and the movie, which was produced for millennial women and not children, reawakens this nostalgia. The movie is even fairly satirical and makes fun of the Barbie world in many ways. There is a lot of power in looking at totally different industries from your own to find things you can learn from!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1810</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c64ac09a-306e-11ee-8fb9-93a9c42677e9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3265813760.mp3?updated=1696362695" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>765: Social Media Wars &amp; What it Means For Your Business in 2023</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/social-media-wars-what-it-means-for-your-business-in-2023</link>
      <description>Is it just us, or have you also noticed the major shake-ups that have been taking place in the social media space recently? From Threads to TikTok Shop to the Twitter rebrand, we’re taking a deep dive into some of the wild stuff that’s been going on in this episode!
We’ve been following things very closely and, from our perspective, more has happened in the month of July 2023 than in the last three years! So, we decided that now is the time to catch you up on all the developments on social and the impact that these changes are likely to have on your small business. We know change can be challenging, but trust us. If you embrace it, it can do wonders for your business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 Aug 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Social Media Wars &amp; What it Means For Your Business in 2023</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>765</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>From Threads to TikTok Shop to the Twitter rebrand, we’re taking a deep dive into some of the wild stuff that’s been going on in this episode!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Is it just us, or have you also noticed the major shake-ups that have been taking place in the social media space recently? From Threads to TikTok Shop to the Twitter rebrand, we’re taking a deep dive into some of the wild stuff that’s been going on in this episode!
We’ve been following things very closely and, from our perspective, more has happened in the month of July 2023 than in the last three years! So, we decided that now is the time to catch you up on all the developments on social and the impact that these changes are likely to have on your small business. We know change can be challenging, but trust us. If you embrace it, it can do wonders for your business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Is it just us, or have you also noticed the major shake-ups that have been taking place in the social media space recently? From Threads to TikTok Shop to the Twitter rebrand, we’re taking a deep dive into some of the wild stuff that’s been going on in this episode!</p><p>We’ve been following things very closely and, from our perspective, more has happened in the month of July 2023 than in the last three years! So, we decided that now is the time to catch you up on all the developments on social and the impact that these changes are likely to have on your small business. We know change can be challenging, but trust us. If you embrace it, it can do wonders for your business!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2528</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cbbaf830-2fd6-11ee-b5a2-17a3eed83f4f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4632432758.mp3?updated=1696362730" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>764: Quitting Corporate: How I Left &amp; How I’d do it Again in 2023</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/quitting-corporate-how-i-left-how-id-do-it-again-in-2023</link>
      <description>Quitting corporate and striking out on your own can be a daunting task. But with the right preparation and strategies, you can build the business you’ve always wanted without feeling totally overwhelmed. Today on the show, I share the story of how I quit corporate and started my own business in 2015 and how I would go about doing it again in 2023.
Back in 2015, the online landscape was totally different, and starting your own company had far more barriers to entry than it does today. In the intervening years, technological advances have made it easier than ever to earn money online and organize your systems. While it’s wonderful that these tools have made starting a business more accessible, it also means that it can be more difficult to get your name out there. Tune in for a breakdown of my journey, the lessons I’ve learned along the way, and a rundown of my advice for anyone looking to quit corporate and set out on their own in 2023!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 27 Jul 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Quitting Corporate: How I Left &amp; How I’d do it Again in 2023</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>764</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tune in for a breakdown of my journey, the lessons I’ve learned along the way, and a rundown of my advice for anyone looking to quit corporate and set out on their own in 2023!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Quitting corporate and striking out on your own can be a daunting task. But with the right preparation and strategies, you can build the business you’ve always wanted without feeling totally overwhelmed. Today on the show, I share the story of how I quit corporate and started my own business in 2015 and how I would go about doing it again in 2023.
Back in 2015, the online landscape was totally different, and starting your own company had far more barriers to entry than it does today. In the intervening years, technological advances have made it easier than ever to earn money online and organize your systems. While it’s wonderful that these tools have made starting a business more accessible, it also means that it can be more difficult to get your name out there. Tune in for a breakdown of my journey, the lessons I’ve learned along the way, and a rundown of my advice for anyone looking to quit corporate and set out on their own in 2023!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Quitting corporate and striking out on your own can be a daunting task. But with the right preparation and strategies, you can build the business you’ve always wanted without feeling totally overwhelmed. Today on the show, I share the story of how I quit corporate and started my own business in 2015 and how I would go about doing it again in 2023.</p><p>Back in 2015, the online landscape was totally different, and starting your own company had far more barriers to entry than it does today. In the intervening years, technological advances have made it easier than ever to earn money online and organize your systems. While it’s wonderful that these tools have made starting a business more accessible, it also means that it can be more difficult to get your name out there. Tune in for a breakdown of my journey, the lessons I’ve learned along the way, and a rundown of my advice for anyone looking to quit corporate and set out on their own in 2023!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2560</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0d34e888-2b19-11ee-a9bb-e792b5feba5a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2993699737.mp3?updated=1696362761" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>763: Grief and Grit: Balancing Life with Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/grief-and-grit-balancing-life-with-business</link>
      <description>What do grief and grit mean for women who are balancing life and business? Sometimes, experiencing enormous hurt and pain turns you into the most authentic version of yourself. The topic of grief is incredibly personal and important to me because it is one of the primary reasons for my growth and success. Grief is equally as frustrating and painful as it is beautiful, hopeful, and inspirational. In simple terms, grief is the ultimate shapeshifter! There is no right or wrong way to grieve as it impacts everyone differently. Today, I want to share some of my own experiences with grief before diving into how you can turn your grief into grit in both your personal life and your business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 25 Jul 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Grief and Grit: Balancing Life with Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>763</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Grief is equally as frustrating and painful as it is beautiful, hopeful, and inspirational. Here's how to turn your grief into grit in both your personal life and your business!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What do grief and grit mean for women who are balancing life and business? Sometimes, experiencing enormous hurt and pain turns you into the most authentic version of yourself. The topic of grief is incredibly personal and important to me because it is one of the primary reasons for my growth and success. Grief is equally as frustrating and painful as it is beautiful, hopeful, and inspirational. In simple terms, grief is the ultimate shapeshifter! There is no right or wrong way to grieve as it impacts everyone differently. Today, I want to share some of my own experiences with grief before diving into how you can turn your grief into grit in both your personal life and your business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What do grief and grit mean for women who are balancing life and business? Sometimes, experiencing enormous hurt and pain turns you into the most authentic version of yourself. The topic of grief is incredibly personal and important to me because it is one of the primary reasons for my growth and success. Grief is equally as frustrating and painful as it is beautiful, hopeful, and inspirational. In simple terms, grief is the ultimate shapeshifter! There is no right or wrong way to grieve as it impacts everyone differently. Today, I want to share some of my own experiences with grief before diving into how you can turn your grief into grit in both your personal life and your business!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2657</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2778191a-2a45-11ee-88a6-7bfc7af3c56f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2661733771.mp3?updated=1696362803" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>762: Part 4- Our New Era: The Future Vision of Boss Project</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/our-new-era-the-future-vision-of-boss-project</link>
      <description>Boss Project is going through its biggest transition yet! For the last 24 months, Abagail has been almost exclusively in the finance and sales side of the company. She’s been creating spreadsheets, thinking about company benefits, sales processes, hiring, HR, and more. That has meant she’s been out of the marketing game. She simply hasn’t been thinking about social media and sales funnels for two years and she’s excited to dive back in! You can expect experimentation as she gets her feet wet; trying and testing different things. It’s going to be focused, it’s going to be intentional, and it’s definitely going to be fun!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 20 Jul 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Part 4- Our New Era: The Future Vision of Boss Project</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>762</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>You can expect experimentation as we try &amp; test different things. It’s going to be focused, it’s going to be intentional, and it’s definitely going to be fun!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Boss Project is going through its biggest transition yet! For the last 24 months, Abagail has been almost exclusively in the finance and sales side of the company. She’s been creating spreadsheets, thinking about company benefits, sales processes, hiring, HR, and more. That has meant she’s been out of the marketing game. She simply hasn’t been thinking about social media and sales funnels for two years and she’s excited to dive back in! You can expect experimentation as she gets her feet wet; trying and testing different things. It’s going to be focused, it’s going to be intentional, and it’s definitely going to be fun!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Boss Project is going through its biggest transition yet! For the last 24 months, Abagail has been almost exclusively in the finance and sales side of the company. She’s been creating spreadsheets, thinking about company benefits, sales processes, hiring, HR, and more. That has meant she’s been out of the marketing game. She simply hasn’t been thinking about social media and sales funnels for two years and she’s excited to dive back in! You can expect experimentation as she gets her feet wet; trying and testing different things. It’s going to be focused, it’s going to be intentional, and it’s definitely going to be fun!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2573</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[15fa0212-2585-11ee-8bb4-df13e3a5354a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4461188941.mp3?updated=1696362852" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>761: Part 3- The Art of Transition, Embracing Change, and Pursuing Passions</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/art-of-transition-embracing-change-and-pursuing-passions</link>
      <description>In this episode, Abagail interviews our very own Emylee to talk about her shift into full-time authorship, what she has learned thus far from her rapid transition into this new field, and the leap of faith it took to pursue her passion! If you missed out on parts one and two of this series, we encourage you to go back and give those a listen so that you’re all caught up for this latest conversation.
While we are sad to see Emylee leave her role as Co-CEO of Boss Project, we are so excited to see her embarking on this next chapter as she pursues her passions. Tune in as we talk about Emylee’s journey as an author, how she’s been navigating the writing process, and what it’s been like going from a partnership to working solo!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 18 Jul 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Part 3: The Art of Transition, Embracing Change, and Pursuing Passions</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>761</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tune in as we talk about Emylee’s journey as an author, how she’s been navigating the writing process, and what it’s been like going from a partnership to working solo!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode, Abagail interviews our very own Emylee to talk about her shift into full-time authorship, what she has learned thus far from her rapid transition into this new field, and the leap of faith it took to pursue her passion! If you missed out on parts one and two of this series, we encourage you to go back and give those a listen so that you’re all caught up for this latest conversation.
While we are sad to see Emylee leave her role as Co-CEO of Boss Project, we are so excited to see her embarking on this next chapter as she pursues her passions. Tune in as we talk about Emylee’s journey as an author, how she’s been navigating the writing process, and what it’s been like going from a partnership to working solo!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode, Abagail interviews our very own Emylee to talk about her shift into full-time authorship, what she has learned thus far from her rapid transition into this new field, and the leap of faith it took to pursue her passion! If you missed out on parts one and two of this series, we encourage you to go back and give those a listen so that you’re all caught up for this latest conversation.</p><p>While we are sad to see Emylee leave her role as Co-CEO of Boss Project, we are so excited to see her embarking on this next chapter as she pursues her passions. Tune in as we talk about Emylee’s journey as an author, how she’s been navigating the writing process, and what it’s been like going from a partnership to working solo!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2189</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c1d9b26a-227b-11ee-bed9-4f927d56f702]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4632129001.mp3?updated=1696362875" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>760: Part 2: Celebrating All Things Boss Project</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/part-2-celebrating-all-things-boss-project</link>
      <description>In this episode, we look back at the last eight years and celebrate all that Boss Project has accomplished! We’re sharing our journey as business partners, what it’s been like to work together, and some pearls of wisdom we’ve picked up along the way. Let’s dive into how we got here! 
If you missed Part One of our four-part series, then you must go back and listen immediately! There are details and nuances that are going to be noticeably absent if you don’t go back and listen to that first episode first.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 13 Jul 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Part 2: Celebrating All Things Boss Project</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>760</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’re sharing our journey as business partners, what it’s been like to work together, and some pearls of wisdom we’ve picked up along the way.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode, we look back at the last eight years and celebrate all that Boss Project has accomplished! We’re sharing our journey as business partners, what it’s been like to work together, and some pearls of wisdom we’ve picked up along the way. Let’s dive into how we got here! 
If you missed Part One of our four-part series, then you must go back and listen immediately! There are details and nuances that are going to be noticeably absent if you don’t go back and listen to that first episode first.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode, we look back at the last eight years and celebrate all that Boss Project has accomplished! We’re sharing our journey as business partners, what it’s been like to work together, and some pearls of wisdom we’ve picked up along the way. Let’s dive into how we got here! </p><p>If you missed Part One of our four-part series, then you must go back and listen immediately! There are details and nuances that are going to be noticeably absent if you don’t go back and listen to that first episode first.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2259</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c3148200-1ffa-11ee-b1ce-d79a7a2975d3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4666555641.mp3?updated=1696362917" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>759: Part 1: Big Announcement - The Next Chapter for Boss Project</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/time-of-transition-and-new-opportunities</link>
      <description>Here at Boss Project, we’ve had some pretty big changes happening offstage in a surprisingly short amount of time! Today, we’ll be chatting about these changes, how we’re navigating them, and what you can expect from Boss Project going forward.
Tuning in, you’ll hear some pretty big news along with our thoughts on what we’ve learned from adjusting to these new developments and an overview of our upcoming four-part series. While periods of transition can be intimidating, they can also be incredibly exciting. This may all be happening a lot faster than we expected, but we have full confidence in our plans going forward and we invite you all to be a part of it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 11 Jul 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Part 1: Big Announcement - The Next Chapter for Boss Project</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>759</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We're sharing some pretty big news along with our thoughts on what we’ve learned from adjusting to these new developments.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Here at Boss Project, we’ve had some pretty big changes happening offstage in a surprisingly short amount of time! Today, we’ll be chatting about these changes, how we’re navigating them, and what you can expect from Boss Project going forward.
Tuning in, you’ll hear some pretty big news along with our thoughts on what we’ve learned from adjusting to these new developments and an overview of our upcoming four-part series. While periods of transition can be intimidating, they can also be incredibly exciting. This may all be happening a lot faster than we expected, but we have full confidence in our plans going forward and we invite you all to be a part of it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Here at Boss Project, we’ve had some pretty big changes happening offstage in a surprisingly short amount of time! Today, we’ll be chatting about these changes, how we’re navigating them, and what you can expect from Boss Project going forward.</p><p>Tuning in, you’ll hear some pretty big news along with our thoughts on what we’ve learned from adjusting to these new developments and an overview of our upcoming four-part series. While periods of transition can be intimidating, they can also be incredibly exciting. This may all be happening a lot faster than we expected, but we have full confidence in our plans going forward and we invite you all to be a part of it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1226</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4cd97d86-1c3d-11ee-88d0-5388c2e85b89]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7190707938.mp3?updated=1688741562" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>758: Experimental Mindset Part 2: Strategies for Building a Culture of Curiosity With Your Team</title>
      <link>https://www.dropbox.com/scl/fo/103ak3kvmqagixpwm8kdd/h?dl=0&amp;rlkey=g4mb77i0bb19jjllcrb0rklxu</link>
      <description>In this episode, we’re talking about what it means to have a culture of curiosity and how you can deliberately cultivate it within your organization. This can be one of your biggest assets and can help your team members take ownership of projects, tasks, ideas, and even strategies! It takes intentional building blocks to get there and we want to help you put those blocks together.
In our previous episode, Experimental Mindset Part 1, we talked about what it means to develop an experimental mindset, questions you need to ask yourself, things you need to let go of, and some of the different headspaces that we have been in throughout our business journey. Following on from that episode, this one delves into the strategic side of how you can actually go about fostering a culture of curiosity! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 06 Jul 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Experimental Mindset Part 2: Strategies for Building a Culture of Curiosity With Your Team</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>758</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>This can help your team members take ownership of projects, tasks, ideas, and even strategies!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode, we’re talking about what it means to have a culture of curiosity and how you can deliberately cultivate it within your organization. This can be one of your biggest assets and can help your team members take ownership of projects, tasks, ideas, and even strategies! It takes intentional building blocks to get there and we want to help you put those blocks together.
In our previous episode, Experimental Mindset Part 1, we talked about what it means to develop an experimental mindset, questions you need to ask yourself, things you need to let go of, and some of the different headspaces that we have been in throughout our business journey. Following on from that episode, this one delves into the strategic side of how you can actually go about fostering a culture of curiosity! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode, we’re talking about what it means to have a culture of curiosity and how you can deliberately cultivate it within your organization. This can be one of your biggest assets and can help your team members take ownership of projects, tasks, ideas, and even strategies! It takes intentional building blocks to get there and we want to help you put those blocks together.</p><p>In our previous episode, Experimental Mindset Part 1, we talked about what it means to develop an experimental mindset, questions you need to ask yourself, things you need to let go of, and some of the different headspaces that we have been in throughout our business journey. Following on from that episode, this one delves into the strategic side of how you can actually go about fostering a culture of curiosity! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2376</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[716e8e36-169b-11ee-9421-a74b7c58cab5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6088026164.mp3?updated=1696362990" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>757: Experimental Mindset Part 1: How to Unlock the Power of Curiosity</title>
      <description>What does an experimental mindset mean? How can you foster one in yourself and your team? That’s what we’re talking about today. Both Emylee and Abagail experience a constant push and pull that comes with mixing intuition with analysis. We see so many business owners that stay in the planning and research phase for so long that they never take action in one direction or the other. That’s so frustrating to see! That’s what sparked this training.
Everything in your business is evolving. That includes your goals, what it takes to get there, and the headspace you need to be in to get there. We can say all day that business isn’t linear, but you’re not going to understand that until you’ve lived it! When businesses meet a challenge, they usually fail and give up entirely or succeed and seek a new challenge because they believe the journey should be harder. That’s really hard to watch. We want to arm you with some thoughts and ideas that equip you to live in that experimental space that sees failure as information. We want to equip you to take the steps that allow you to incrementally move towards your goals.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 04 Jul 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Experimental Mindset Part 1: How to Unlock the Power of Curiosity</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>757</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>What does an experimental mindset mean? How can you foster one in yourself and your team? That’s what we’re talking about today. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What does an experimental mindset mean? How can you foster one in yourself and your team? That’s what we’re talking about today. Both Emylee and Abagail experience a constant push and pull that comes with mixing intuition with analysis. We see so many business owners that stay in the planning and research phase for so long that they never take action in one direction or the other. That’s so frustrating to see! That’s what sparked this training.
Everything in your business is evolving. That includes your goals, what it takes to get there, and the headspace you need to be in to get there. We can say all day that business isn’t linear, but you’re not going to understand that until you’ve lived it! When businesses meet a challenge, they usually fail and give up entirely or succeed and seek a new challenge because they believe the journey should be harder. That’s really hard to watch. We want to arm you with some thoughts and ideas that equip you to live in that experimental space that sees failure as information. We want to equip you to take the steps that allow you to incrementally move towards your goals.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What does an experimental mindset mean? How can you foster one in yourself and your team? That’s what we’re talking about today. Both Emylee and Abagail experience a constant push and pull that comes with mixing intuition with analysis. We see so many business owners that stay in the planning and research phase for so long that they never take action in one direction or the other. That’s so frustrating to see! That’s what sparked this training.</p><p>Everything in your business is evolving. That includes your goals, what it takes to get there, and the headspace you need to be in to get there. We can say all day that business isn’t linear, but you’re not going to understand that until you’ve lived it! When businesses meet a challenge, they usually fail and give up entirely or succeed and seek a new challenge because they believe the journey should be harder. That’s really hard to watch. We want to arm you with some thoughts and ideas that equip you to live in that experimental space that sees failure as information. We want to equip you to take the steps that allow you to incrementally move towards your goals.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2379</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2a6e980e-1520-11ee-9dc2-376f4263aabc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6465847859.mp3?updated=1696363024" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>756: Using Core Values to Guide Your Business Decisions</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/using-core-values-to-guide-your-business-decisions</link>
      <description>We didn't realize how much we would come to rely on our business values. They are central to how we operate our team, answer questions, and so much more. Initially, your company operations are typically a reflection of you personally, but as you grow, that doesn’t always make sense. As you work with more and more clients, we recommend identifying one to three values to shape how you serve clients, what your boundaries will be, how you prefer to communicate, your work style or ethic, and beyond.
Especially as you engage with employees and contractors, having an internal value that is very specific to how your team runs is critical to your team culture and getting everyone on the same page. It helps settle conversations about what to do next by providing a lens through which to view things. When you need to have a redirecting conversation with a client, your business values are the strongest tool you have at your disposal to explain what you do and do not offer. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 29 Jun 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Using Core Values to Guide Your Business Decisions</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>756</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We recommend identifying one to three values to shape how you serve clients, what your boundaries will be, how you prefer to communicate, your work style or ethic, and beyond.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We didn't realize how much we would come to rely on our business values. They are central to how we operate our team, answer questions, and so much more. Initially, your company operations are typically a reflection of you personally, but as you grow, that doesn’t always make sense. As you work with more and more clients, we recommend identifying one to three values to shape how you serve clients, what your boundaries will be, how you prefer to communicate, your work style or ethic, and beyond.
Especially as you engage with employees and contractors, having an internal value that is very specific to how your team runs is critical to your team culture and getting everyone on the same page. It helps settle conversations about what to do next by providing a lens through which to view things. When you need to have a redirecting conversation with a client, your business values are the strongest tool you have at your disposal to explain what you do and do not offer. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We didn't realize how much we would come to rely on our business values. They are central to how we operate our team, answer questions, and so much more. Initially, your company operations are typically a reflection of you personally, but as you grow, that doesn’t always make sense. As you work with more and more clients, we recommend identifying one to three values to shape how you serve clients, what your boundaries will be, how you prefer to communicate, your work style or ethic, and beyond.</p><p>Especially as you engage with employees and contractors, having an internal value that is very specific to how your team runs is critical to your team culture and getting everyone on the same page. It helps settle conversations about what to do next by providing a lens through which to view things. When you need to have a redirecting conversation with a client, your business values are the strongest tool you have at your disposal to explain what you do and do not offer. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2623</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3a2e999e-14f6-11ee-8d33-cf3558865c8b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2627994995.mp3?updated=1687876795" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>755: Mastering the Client Experience: The Power of Tweaking and Repeating</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/mastering-the-client-experience-the-power-of-tweaking-and-repeating</link>
      <description>By now, you should all know that we are the queens of tweaking and repeating. In this episode, we spill the beans on how to revolutionize your client experience by (you guessed it) tweaking and repeating! After a quick debrief of our thoughts on outsourcing and AI, we uncover the often-overlooked aspects of client delivery and discuss the significance of investing time in developing consistent processes.
From creating efficient systems and templates to ensuring clarity and alignment in contracts and proposals, we explore the strategies you can implement to create a streamlined client experience and bring in the referrals and testimonials you deserve. Join us as we reveal the benefits of continuous improvement and offer practical insights to help you enhance your client interactions and boost your business to new heights!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 27 Jun 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Mastering the Client Experience: The Power of Tweaking and Repeating</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>755</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>From creating efficient systems and templates to ensuring clarity and alignment in contracts and proposals, we explore the strategies you can implement to create a streamlined client experience and bring in the referrals and testimonials you deserve. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>By now, you should all know that we are the queens of tweaking and repeating. In this episode, we spill the beans on how to revolutionize your client experience by (you guessed it) tweaking and repeating! After a quick debrief of our thoughts on outsourcing and AI, we uncover the often-overlooked aspects of client delivery and discuss the significance of investing time in developing consistent processes.
From creating efficient systems and templates to ensuring clarity and alignment in contracts and proposals, we explore the strategies you can implement to create a streamlined client experience and bring in the referrals and testimonials you deserve. Join us as we reveal the benefits of continuous improvement and offer practical insights to help you enhance your client interactions and boost your business to new heights!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>By now, you should all know that we are the queens of tweaking and repeating. In this episode, we spill the beans on how to revolutionize your client experience by (you guessed it) tweaking and repeating! After a quick debrief of our thoughts on outsourcing and AI, we uncover the often-overlooked aspects of client delivery and discuss the significance of investing time in developing consistent processes.</p><p>From creating efficient systems and templates to ensuring clarity and alignment in contracts and proposals, we explore the strategies you can implement to create a streamlined client experience and bring in the referrals and testimonials you deserve. Join us as we reveal the benefits of continuous improvement and offer practical insights to help you enhance your client interactions and boost your business to new heights!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2095</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0bb38c44-112e-11ee-a724-8fa8dce6aee3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2273825497.mp3?updated=1687875993" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>754: Overcoming Sales Obstacles: How to Handle Prospects Who Disappear</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/overcoming-sales-obstacles-how-to-handle-prospects-who-disappear</link>
      <description>Today we are talking about the art of the follow-up. You’ve pitched your service and the potential client is either ghosting you, being passive-aggressive, or fighting against the process you want to put them through. This can be a very strange experience and sometimes prospects convert with quite a lot of resistance. Closing a prospective client happens in the follow-up process, and a lot of us struggle with that phase. Today’s episode gives you some examples of what you can say and do to confidently and effectively follow up with your leads. We’re tackling what a proper follow-up is and how to handle hearing ‘no’.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 22 Jun 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Overcoming Sales Obstacles: How to Handle Prospects Who Disappear</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>754</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle></itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are talking about the art of the follow-up. You’ve pitched your service and the potential client is either ghosting you, being passive-aggressive, or fighting against the process you want to put them through. This can be a very strange experience and sometimes prospects convert with quite a lot of resistance. Closing a prospective client happens in the follow-up process, and a lot of us struggle with that phase. Today’s episode gives you some examples of what you can say and do to confidently and effectively follow up with your leads. We’re tackling what a proper follow-up is and how to handle hearing ‘no’.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are talking about the art of the follow-up. You’ve pitched your service and the potential client is either ghosting you, being passive-aggressive, or fighting against the process you want to put them through. This can be a very strange experience and sometimes prospects convert with quite a lot of resistance. Closing a prospective client happens in the follow-up process, and a lot of us struggle with that phase. Today’s episode gives you some examples of what you can say and do to confidently and effectively follow up with your leads. We’re tackling what a proper follow-up is and how to handle hearing ‘no’.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2323</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3be45d80-105c-11ee-b3d3-dba6aa7e9092]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7165880288.mp3?updated=1687371488" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>753: Success Story: How Our Client Improved Their Close Rate by 40%</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/success-story-how-our-client-improved-their-close-rate-by-40-percent</link>
      <description>Today we are unearthing an episode that we recorded at the end of 2022 because it’s important that you hear this. The strategy this client used is still extremely relevant and effective in the current sales climate where leads are a little bit wonky. This is the perfect time to seek improvement opportunities within your sales cycle and work on increasing your close rate. 
We walk you through how our client was able to increase her close rate by a whopping 40%, and how you can be just as successful in your own sales process. In this season, focus and refine how things are looking in your business. Evaluate what’s working, what’s not, and use that critical information to make strategic, educated plans as you move forward with your business. Start gathering this data and figure out where you want to place your focus and where your biggest opportunities are right now. Today we’re using particular examples from a previously aired episode to help you learn how to improve your close rate. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 20 Jun 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Success Story: How Our Client Improved Their Close Rate by 40%</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>753</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>This strategy is extremely relevant and effective in the current sales climate where leads are a little bit wonky. It's a perfect time to seek improvement opportunities within your sales cycle and work on increasing your close rate. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are unearthing an episode that we recorded at the end of 2022 because it’s important that you hear this. The strategy this client used is still extremely relevant and effective in the current sales climate where leads are a little bit wonky. This is the perfect time to seek improvement opportunities within your sales cycle and work on increasing your close rate. 
We walk you through how our client was able to increase her close rate by a whopping 40%, and how you can be just as successful in your own sales process. In this season, focus and refine how things are looking in your business. Evaluate what’s working, what’s not, and use that critical information to make strategic, educated plans as you move forward with your business. Start gathering this data and figure out where you want to place your focus and where your biggest opportunities are right now. Today we’re using particular examples from a previously aired episode to help you learn how to improve your close rate. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are unearthing an episode that we recorded at the end of 2022 because it’s important that you hear this. The strategy this client used is still extremely relevant and effective in the current sales climate where leads are a little bit wonky. This is the perfect time to seek improvement opportunities within your sales cycle and work on increasing your close rate. </p><p>We walk you through how our client was able to increase her close rate by a whopping 40%, and how you can be just as successful in your own sales process. In this season, focus and refine how things are looking in your business. Evaluate what’s working, what’s not, and use that critical information to make strategic, educated plans as you move forward with your business. Start gathering this data and figure out where you want to place your focus and where your biggest opportunities are right now. Today we’re using particular examples from a previously aired episode to help you learn how to improve your close rate. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2645</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0ef0e696-0ebc-11ee-9aed-33beba41cbba]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4457798796.mp3?updated=1687192934" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>752: Stop Trying to do it All: Don't Believe These Lies About Marketing That Some Business "Experts" are Pushing</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/stop-trying-to-do-it-all-dont-believe-these-lies-about-marketing-that-some-business-experts-are-pushing</link>
      <description>In today's episode, we address a major issue in the business education industry that is causing our clients to waste time and money. While marketing is important, we believe that many marketing pros are teaching people to become marketing minions instead of teaching foundational business concepts. Unfortunately, this often results in a misconception of what marketing entails. 
Let’s update our perspective on marketing from a "necessary evil" to a vital component of your business' success that can be tailored to suit your own strengths and needs.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 15 Jun 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Stop Trying to do it All: Don't Believe These Lies About Marketing That Some Business "Experts" are Pushing</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>752</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>While marketing is important, we believe that many marketing pros are teaching people to become marketing minions instead of teaching foundational business concepts.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today's episode, we address a major issue in the business education industry that is causing our clients to waste time and money. While marketing is important, we believe that many marketing pros are teaching people to become marketing minions instead of teaching foundational business concepts. Unfortunately, this often results in a misconception of what marketing entails. 
Let’s update our perspective on marketing from a "necessary evil" to a vital component of your business' success that can be tailored to suit your own strengths and needs.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today's episode, we address a major issue in the business education industry that is causing our clients to waste time and money. While marketing is important, we believe that many marketing pros are teaching people to become marketing minions instead of teaching foundational business concepts. Unfortunately, this often results in a misconception of what marketing entails. </p><p>Let’s update our perspective on marketing from a "necessary evil" to a vital component of your business' success that can be tailored to suit your own strengths and needs.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1941</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[853180cc-09f3-11ee-b29d-ef2552bcdd28]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5333268614.mp3?updated=1686666139" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>751: From Burnout to Balance with Amber Romaniuk</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/from-burnout-to-balance-with-amber-romaniuk</link>
      <description>We’re talking about food stuff today! Emotional eating, disordered eating, cycle syncing, and all things diet, mindset, and health. Consider this a non-judgmental space packed with practical techniques you can employ in your own life today. That said, if this isn’t your jam right now, you have our full permission to skip this episode, listen to an old one, or go hang out on Instagram and wait for our next one.
So many women struggle with binge eating, emotional eating, cycle issues, hormone imbalances, and weight loss or body image blocks. Amber Romaniuk has been through it all! Through healing herself and working alongside her clients for over ten years, she has helped many women overcome these issues and find freedom. In this episode, she offers the insight that there is a close relationship between people-pleasing and weight gain and offers self-priority as an alternative.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 13 Jun 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From Burnout to Balance with Amber Romaniuk</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>751</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’re talking about food stuff today! Emotional eating, disordered eating, cycle syncing, and all things diet, mindset, and health.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’re talking about food stuff today! Emotional eating, disordered eating, cycle syncing, and all things diet, mindset, and health. Consider this a non-judgmental space packed with practical techniques you can employ in your own life today. That said, if this isn’t your jam right now, you have our full permission to skip this episode, listen to an old one, or go hang out on Instagram and wait for our next one.
So many women struggle with binge eating, emotional eating, cycle issues, hormone imbalances, and weight loss or body image blocks. Amber Romaniuk has been through it all! Through healing herself and working alongside her clients for over ten years, she has helped many women overcome these issues and find freedom. In this episode, she offers the insight that there is a close relationship between people-pleasing and weight gain and offers self-priority as an alternative.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’re talking about food stuff today! Emotional eating, disordered eating, cycle syncing, and all things diet, mindset, and health. Consider this a non-judgmental space packed with practical techniques you can employ in your own life today. That said, if this isn’t your jam right now, you have our full permission to skip this episode, listen to an old one, or go hang out on Instagram and wait for our next one.</p><p>So many women struggle with binge eating, emotional eating, cycle issues, hormone imbalances, and weight loss or body image blocks. Amber Romaniuk has been through it all! Through healing herself and working alongside her clients for over ten years, she has helped many women overcome these issues and find freedom. In this episode, she offers the insight that there is a close relationship between people-pleasing and weight gain and offers self-priority as an alternative.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2748</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[185a7c06-0935-11ee-b37d-373ff73c6acc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5003162365.mp3?updated=1686583982" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>750: Why We Stopped Using This Selling Technique (Even Though it Was Working)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-we-stopped-using-this-selling-technique-even-though-it-was-working</link>
      <description>There are more ways than ever to get in touch with customers and sell your services. But how do you know which methods are right for you and your business? And how do you ensure that you’re implementing them to the best of your abilities? One method that has gained a tremendous amount of traction over the past decade, is social selling. Not only do the stakes of a DM feel lower than getting on a high-pressure sales call, but it’s also more accessible to people with unusual schedules or chronic illnesses. But what are some of the drawbacks of social selling, and are they worth the payoff?
In today’s episode, we talk about why we stopped using social selling and how you can determine whether it’s the right choice for you and your business. We unpack how using social selling affected our boundaries outside of work, our values as a life-first business, and why the downsides of social selling ended up outweighing the benefits. While we believe that social selling can be a great sales tool, we want businesses to consider their options and make informed decisions based on the facts, and what will work best for them. Tune in to hear what our experience with social selling was like, why we stopped, and how to find out whether it’s right for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 08 Jun 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why We Stopped Using This Selling Technique (Even Though it Was Working)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>750</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In today’s episode, we talk about why we stopped using social selling and how you can determine whether it’s the right choice for you and your business.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There are more ways than ever to get in touch with customers and sell your services. But how do you know which methods are right for you and your business? And how do you ensure that you’re implementing them to the best of your abilities? One method that has gained a tremendous amount of traction over the past decade, is social selling. Not only do the stakes of a DM feel lower than getting on a high-pressure sales call, but it’s also more accessible to people with unusual schedules or chronic illnesses. But what are some of the drawbacks of social selling, and are they worth the payoff?
In today’s episode, we talk about why we stopped using social selling and how you can determine whether it’s the right choice for you and your business. We unpack how using social selling affected our boundaries outside of work, our values as a life-first business, and why the downsides of social selling ended up outweighing the benefits. While we believe that social selling can be a great sales tool, we want businesses to consider their options and make informed decisions based on the facts, and what will work best for them. Tune in to hear what our experience with social selling was like, why we stopped, and how to find out whether it’s right for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There are more ways than ever to get in touch with customers and sell your services. But how do you know which methods are right for you and your business? And how do you ensure that you’re implementing them to the best of your abilities? One method that has gained a tremendous amount of traction over the past decade, is social selling. Not only do the stakes of a DM feel lower than getting on a high-pressure sales call, but it’s also more accessible to people with unusual schedules or chronic illnesses. But what are some of the drawbacks of social selling, and are they worth the payoff?</p><p>In today’s episode, we talk about why we stopped using social selling and how you can determine whether it’s the right choice for you and your business. We unpack how using social selling affected our boundaries outside of work, our values as a life-first business, and why the downsides of social selling ended up outweighing the benefits. While we believe that social selling can be a great sales tool, we want businesses to consider their options and make informed decisions based on the facts, and what will work best for them. Tune in to hear what our experience with social selling was like, why we stopped, and how to find out whether it’s right for you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2176</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d030cf52-0493-11ee-92d3-d77e0435771c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3706433071.mp3?updated=1686075348" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>749: Are You Addicted to Work? These 10 Red Flags Might Surprise You</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/are-you-addicted-to-work-these-10-red-flags-might-surprise-you</link>
      <description>In this episode, we’re talking about one of our favorite things: how to work less and enjoy your life more! A lot of us like the idea of slowing down in the summer and taking some more life-first days, but sometimes it gets really hard to do that! We recently read an article called Ten Red Flags That Show You’re Addicted to Work According to a Psychotherapist. It’s a neat perspective from a mental health professional, and today’s episode is dedicated to sharing their insights with you.
We hope that afterwards, you’ll be able to look at your schedule and see exactly where you could be a little bit more self-aware about the areas where your relationship with work is teetering on toxic. You don’t have to tick all these boxes to be a workaholic. If even one of them feels true for you, it’s time to reflect! Consider them as useful guides to help you identify workaholism.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 06 Jun 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Are You Addicted to Work? These 10 Red Flags Might Surprise You</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>749</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How to look at your schedule and see exactly where you could be a little bit more self-aware about the areas where your relationship with work is teetering on toxic.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode, we’re talking about one of our favorite things: how to work less and enjoy your life more! A lot of us like the idea of slowing down in the summer and taking some more life-first days, but sometimes it gets really hard to do that! We recently read an article called Ten Red Flags That Show You’re Addicted to Work According to a Psychotherapist. It’s a neat perspective from a mental health professional, and today’s episode is dedicated to sharing their insights with you.
We hope that afterwards, you’ll be able to look at your schedule and see exactly where you could be a little bit more self-aware about the areas where your relationship with work is teetering on toxic. You don’t have to tick all these boxes to be a workaholic. If even one of them feels true for you, it’s time to reflect! Consider them as useful guides to help you identify workaholism.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode, we’re talking about one of our favorite things: how to work less and enjoy your life more! A lot of us like the idea of slowing down in the summer and taking some more life-first days, but sometimes it gets really hard to do that! We recently read an article called Ten Red Flags That Show You’re Addicted to Work According to a Psychotherapist. It’s a neat perspective from a mental health professional, and today’s episode is dedicated to sharing their insights with you.</p><p>We hope that afterwards, you’ll be able to look at your schedule and see exactly where you could be a little bit more self-aware about the areas where your relationship with work is teetering on toxic. You don’t have to tick all these boxes to be a workaholic. If even one of them feels true for you, it’s time to reflect! Consider them as useful guides to help you identify workaholism.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2932</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8dff936a-00a2-11ee-a358-9b4fcfa13a6a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3248766674.mp3?updated=1685722423" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>748: How to Realign a Frustrating Client</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-realign-a-frustrating-client</link>
      <description>Not every client relationship runs as smoothly as we’d like and, generally speaking, it comes down to communication gaps and unspoken expectations. In this episode, we break down a scenario that one of our clients experienced and share our advice for dealing with the situation. In this particular scenario, our client found that her client was treating her like an employee, despite the fact that she's technically a contractor.
Because this problem is more common than you might think, we’ve decided to share our perspective and insights into how one might navigate a situation like this. It’s easy to get frustrated, but there are ways to address communication gaps with clients and continue to nurture long-term relationships. Join us as we shed light on how to enhance the client experience while maintaining healthy boundaries for your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 01 Jun 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Realign a Frustrating Client</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>748</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Not every client relationship runs as smoothly as we’d like and, generally speaking, it comes down to communication gaps and unspoken expectations.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Not every client relationship runs as smoothly as we’d like and, generally speaking, it comes down to communication gaps and unspoken expectations. In this episode, we break down a scenario that one of our clients experienced and share our advice for dealing with the situation. In this particular scenario, our client found that her client was treating her like an employee, despite the fact that she's technically a contractor.
Because this problem is more common than you might think, we’ve decided to share our perspective and insights into how one might navigate a situation like this. It’s easy to get frustrated, but there are ways to address communication gaps with clients and continue to nurture long-term relationships. Join us as we shed light on how to enhance the client experience while maintaining healthy boundaries for your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Not every client relationship runs as smoothly as we’d like and, generally speaking, it comes down to communication gaps and unspoken expectations. In this episode, we break down a scenario that one of our clients experienced and share our advice for dealing with the situation. In this particular scenario, our client found that her client was treating her like an employee, despite the fact that she's technically a contractor.</p><p>Because this problem is more common than you might think, we’ve decided to share our perspective and insights into how one might navigate a situation like this. It’s easy to get frustrated, but there are ways to address communication gaps with clients and continue to nurture long-term relationships. Join us as we shed light on how to enhance the client experience while maintaining healthy boundaries for your business.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2230</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[58a93928-ffc6-11ed-9bd1-1f0f388fd2a6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4001767602.mp3?updated=1685565031" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>747: 10 Ways to Future-Proof Your Career in the Age of AI</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/10-ways-to-future-proof-your-career-in-the-age-of-ai</link>
      <description>Today we want to chat with you about how to future-proof your industry, expertise, and career in the AI age. Recently, we’ve been having the conversation about AI a lot and sharing some perspectives as well as talking about some software companies we’ve enjoyed using; including a conversation with the CEO of ChatGPT. This is a conversation that needs to be addressed often so we can understand how it can best support us. 
The Harvard Business Review has come up with five ways to future-proof your career in the age of AI and we have also come up with five ways so today, we are sharing 10 actionable steps you can take to do this. Tune in today for a jam-packed episode and make sure to grab a pen and paper to write these tips down!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 30 May 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>10 Ways to Future-Proof Your Career in the Age of AI</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>747</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>The Harvard Business Review has come up with five ways to future-proof your career in the age of AI and we have also come up with five ways so today, we are sharing 10 actionable steps you can take to do this. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we want to chat with you about how to future-proof your industry, expertise, and career in the AI age. Recently, we’ve been having the conversation about AI a lot and sharing some perspectives as well as talking about some software companies we’ve enjoyed using; including a conversation with the CEO of ChatGPT. This is a conversation that needs to be addressed often so we can understand how it can best support us. 
The Harvard Business Review has come up with five ways to future-proof your career in the age of AI and we have also come up with five ways so today, we are sharing 10 actionable steps you can take to do this. Tune in today for a jam-packed episode and make sure to grab a pen and paper to write these tips down!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we want to chat with you about how to future-proof your industry, expertise, and career in the AI age. Recently, we’ve been having the conversation about AI a lot and sharing some perspectives as well as talking about some software companies we’ve enjoyed using; including a conversation with the CEO of ChatGPT. This is a conversation that needs to be addressed often so we can understand how it can best support us. </p><p>The Harvard Business Review has come up with five ways to future-proof your career in the age of AI and we have also come up with five ways so today, we are sharing 10 actionable steps you can take to do this. Tune in today for a jam-packed episode and make sure to grab a pen and paper to write these tips down!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2610</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[29322ad8-fa49-11ed-8d60-4faae214802c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6792964965.mp3?updated=1684943286" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>746: CFO Insights from Stripe Sessions: Navigating Change in 2023</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/cfo-insights-from-stripe-sessions-navigating-change-in-2023</link>
      <description>Today’s episode is an overview of a recent conversation we sat in on, which discussed navigating change in 2023. The panel included a list of industry leaders, the CFOs of AirBnb Midjourney, Masterclass, Step, and Aon PLC. Although these businesses are all incredibly well-funded and resourced, we have found that what happens in larger businesses tends to have a trickle-down effect, and smaller businesses will mirror their patterns. That’s why we’ve dedicated this episode to sharing some key insights from the discussion with our audience at Boss Project.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 25 May 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>CFO Insights from Stripe Sessions: Navigating Change in 2023</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>746</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>What happens in larger businesses tends to have a trickle-down effect, and smaller businesses mirror their patterns.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today’s episode is an overview of a recent conversation we sat in on, which discussed navigating change in 2023. The panel included a list of industry leaders, the CFOs of AirBnb Midjourney, Masterclass, Step, and Aon PLC. Although these businesses are all incredibly well-funded and resourced, we have found that what happens in larger businesses tends to have a trickle-down effect, and smaller businesses will mirror their patterns. That’s why we’ve dedicated this episode to sharing some key insights from the discussion with our audience at Boss Project.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s episode is an overview of a recent conversation we sat in on, which discussed navigating change in 2023. The panel included a list of industry leaders, the CFOs of AirBnb Midjourney, Masterclass, Step, and Aon PLC. Although these businesses are all incredibly well-funded and resourced, we have found that what happens in larger businesses tends to have a trickle-down effect, and smaller businesses will mirror their patterns. That’s why we’ve dedicated this episode to sharing some key insights from the discussion with our audience at Boss Project.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2364</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9be7526a-fa3a-11ed-aa9b-ebc7f937f647]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7956817393.mp3?updated=1684937468" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>745: Fireside Chat with Sam Altman, Founder of OpenAi &amp; ChatGPT: The Future of Ai</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/fireside-chat-with-sam-altman-founder-of-openai-chatgpt-the-future-of-ai</link>
      <description>What can we expect from the future of AI? How quickly will we be asked to evolve and adapt alongside these changes? Abagail recently had the opportunity to sit in on a fireside chat with Sam Altman, the founder and CEO of OpenAI and ChatGPT. This episode is dedicated to sharing the highlights of what she heard.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 May 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Fireside Chat with Sam Altman, Founder of OpenAi &amp; ChatGPT: The Future of Ai</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>745</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>What can we expect from the future of AI? How quickly will we be asked to evolve and adapt alongside these changes?</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What can we expect from the future of AI? How quickly will we be asked to evolve and adapt alongside these changes? Abagail recently had the opportunity to sit in on a fireside chat with Sam Altman, the founder and CEO of OpenAI and ChatGPT. This episode is dedicated to sharing the highlights of what she heard.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What can we expect from the future of AI? How quickly will we be asked to evolve and adapt alongside these changes? Abagail recently had the opportunity to sit in on a fireside chat with Sam Altman, the founder and CEO of OpenAI and ChatGPT. This episode is dedicated to sharing the highlights of what she heard.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2456</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[01a6097a-f833-11ed-96e8-afee04490c62]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1439722716.mp3?updated=1684714074" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>744: Research: Men Get More Actionable Feedback Than Women - What to Do About It</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/research-men-get-more-actionable-feedback-than-women-what-to-do-about-it</link>
      <description>Here at Boss Project, our mission starts with wanting to see more women become financially free. We want them to be able to take care of their household financially and, ultimately, build and scale a business from the ground up. Our goal is to help create a stable foundation that will give them confidence as leaders and support them in pursuing continued growth. Unfortunately, the differences in how men and women are treated in the workplace can harm women's ability to grow and flourish as leaders.
A recent study of 146 mid-career leaders explores the gender differences in how men and women are given feedback in the workplace. Their findings identified four key problem areas: vision, political skills, asserting leadership, and confidence. In this episode, we break down these four categories and take a closer look at how men and women are treated differently when it comes to guidance and feedback and what can be done to begin to adjust for these discrepancies. Tune in as we discuss the four key ways in which men are getting more actionable feedback than women and what to do about it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated, for show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 18 May 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Research: Men Get More Actionable Feedback Than Women - What to Do About It</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>744</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Unfortunately, the differences in how men and women are treated in the workplace can harm women's ability to grow and flourish as leaders.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Here at Boss Project, our mission starts with wanting to see more women become financially free. We want them to be able to take care of their household financially and, ultimately, build and scale a business from the ground up. Our goal is to help create a stable foundation that will give them confidence as leaders and support them in pursuing continued growth. Unfortunately, the differences in how men and women are treated in the workplace can harm women's ability to grow and flourish as leaders.
A recent study of 146 mid-career leaders explores the gender differences in how men and women are given feedback in the workplace. Their findings identified four key problem areas: vision, political skills, asserting leadership, and confidence. In this episode, we break down these four categories and take a closer look at how men and women are treated differently when it comes to guidance and feedback and what can be done to begin to adjust for these discrepancies. Tune in as we discuss the four key ways in which men are getting more actionable feedback than women and what to do about it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated, for show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Here at Boss Project, our mission starts with wanting to see more women become financially free. We want them to be able to take care of their household financially and, ultimately, build and scale a business from the ground up. Our goal is to help create a stable foundation that will give them confidence as leaders and support them in pursuing continued growth. Unfortunately, the differences in how men and women are treated in the workplace can harm women's ability to grow and flourish as leaders.</p><p>A recent study of 146 mid-career leaders explores the gender differences in how men and women are given feedback in the workplace. Their findings identified four key problem areas: vision, political skills, asserting leadership, and confidence. In this episode, we break down these four categories and take a closer look at how men and women are treated differently when it comes to guidance and feedback and what can be done to begin to adjust for these discrepancies. Tune in as we discuss the four key ways in which men are getting more actionable feedback than women and what to do about it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated, for show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2407</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[03d405fa-f4c6-11ed-8eff-3b578cf5ce86]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4213219146.mp3?updated=1684337483" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>743: Sales Isn't Your Problem, Here's What Is</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/sales-isnt-your-problem-heres-what-is</link>
      <description>We see so many business owners who think that the answer to scaling is more about cash than relationships. Yes, cash is a component but it is not the primary problem! First of all, we want to talk about growth versus scaling. They are used interchangeably in this industry but they simply are not the same. Growth is primarily centered around financial and revenue changes in your business and scaling is more about the actual behind-the-scenes operations of how your business is pieced together. 
Often, when people try to scale their business they are so focused on growing their revenue that they forget about all the foundational pieces that are required in order for the revenue to grow. When you put the time and energy into these architectural pieces, you will be surprised at how quickly the revenue growth follows. You can kind of think of these things as the SOP for how you’re doing business; how the business as a whole is being operated and you need to define what that looks like. We find that people get to a certain point where they hit a type of sales cycle and our goal is to help you scale past this point by productizing literally everything!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 16 May 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Sales Isn't Your Problem, Here's What Is</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>743</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Often, when people try to scale their business they are so focused on growing their revenue that they forget about all the foundational pieces that are required in order for the revenue to grow.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We see so many business owners who think that the answer to scaling is more about cash than relationships. Yes, cash is a component but it is not the primary problem! First of all, we want to talk about growth versus scaling. They are used interchangeably in this industry but they simply are not the same. Growth is primarily centered around financial and revenue changes in your business and scaling is more about the actual behind-the-scenes operations of how your business is pieced together. 
Often, when people try to scale their business they are so focused on growing their revenue that they forget about all the foundational pieces that are required in order for the revenue to grow. When you put the time and energy into these architectural pieces, you will be surprised at how quickly the revenue growth follows. You can kind of think of these things as the SOP for how you’re doing business; how the business as a whole is being operated and you need to define what that looks like. We find that people get to a certain point where they hit a type of sales cycle and our goal is to help you scale past this point by productizing literally everything!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We see so many business owners who think that the answer to scaling is more about cash than relationships. Yes, cash is a component but it is not the primary problem! First of all, we want to talk about growth versus scaling. They are used interchangeably in this industry but they simply are not the same. Growth is primarily centered around financial and revenue changes in your business and scaling is more about the actual behind-the-scenes operations of how your business is pieced together. </p><p>Often, when people try to scale their business they are so focused on growing their revenue that they forget about all the foundational pieces that are required in order for the revenue to grow. When you put the time and energy into these architectural pieces, you will be surprised at how quickly the revenue growth follows. You can kind of think of these things as the SOP for how you’re doing business; how the business as a whole is being operated and you need to define what that looks like. We find that people get to a certain point where they hit a type of sales cycle and our goal is to help you scale past this point by productizing literally everything!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> t</a>hestrategyhour.com.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1868</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9f43055e-f0fc-11ed-bac0-63d55287cc31]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7574393936.mp3?updated=1683921130" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>742: The New Filter for Making Good Decisions</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-new-filter-for-making-good-decisions</link>
      <description>Every decision we make takes us down a different path, each with its own set of consequences. Decisions aren’t categorically good or bad, right or wrong, but today, we discuss how you can learn to make the best business decisions for YOU! This conversation was sparked by an interesting article that we came across in Forbes that highlighted some of the key points that we have been expressing on the show about goals, outcomes, and living in alignment with our values. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 11 May 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The New Filter for Making Good Decisions</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>742</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Decisions aren’t categorically good or bad, right or wrong, but today, we discuss how you can learn to make the best business decisions for YOU! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Every decision we make takes us down a different path, each with its own set of consequences. Decisions aren’t categorically good or bad, right or wrong, but today, we discuss how you can learn to make the best business decisions for YOU! This conversation was sparked by an interesting article that we came across in Forbes that highlighted some of the key points that we have been expressing on the show about goals, outcomes, and living in alignment with our values. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Every decision we make takes us down a different path, each with its own set of consequences. Decisions aren’t categorically good or bad, right or wrong, but today, we discuss how you can learn to make the best business decisions for YOU! This conversation was sparked by an interesting article that we came across in Forbes that highlighted some of the key points that we have been expressing on the show about goals, outcomes, and living in alignment with our values. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2140</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[22690d7e-ea87-11ed-b05c-d72ad76919b1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2415240525.mp3?updated=1683212124" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>741: How to Actually Delegate a Task to a Team Member</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-actually-delegate-a-task-to-a-team-member</link>
      <description>Today we’re sharing a bit of our progress when it comes to delegating. We started out being bad at getting things off our plates, but now we are getting better and better and we want you to learn from our mistakes. Delegation is truly the stepping stone to get the right people on your team! Ultimately, you’re going to need to hire extra team members to take on some tasks in your business.
Most of what we’re talking about today is how to delegate to an employee properly and while there are overlaps when it comes to delegating to a contractor, there are definitely nuanced differences. Today we are specifically looking at delegating to existing team members who have been through the full onboarding process and understand you and your business very well. To us, proper delegation comes down to communication! Listen carefully because we want you to document all of these things we are discussing today and explain them to the person you want to delegate to. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 09 May 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Actually Delegate a Task to a Team Member</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>741</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Most of what we’re talking about today is how to delegate to an employee properly and while there are overlaps when it comes to delegating to a contractor, there are definitely nuanced differences. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we’re sharing a bit of our progress when it comes to delegating. We started out being bad at getting things off our plates, but now we are getting better and better and we want you to learn from our mistakes. Delegation is truly the stepping stone to get the right people on your team! Ultimately, you’re going to need to hire extra team members to take on some tasks in your business.
Most of what we’re talking about today is how to delegate to an employee properly and while there are overlaps when it comes to delegating to a contractor, there are definitely nuanced differences. Today we are specifically looking at delegating to existing team members who have been through the full onboarding process and understand you and your business very well. To us, proper delegation comes down to communication! Listen carefully because we want you to document all of these things we are discussing today and explain them to the person you want to delegate to. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we’re sharing a bit of our progress when it comes to delegating. We started out being bad at getting things off our plates, but now we are getting better and better and we want you to learn from our mistakes. Delegation is truly the stepping stone to get the right people on your team! Ultimately, you’re going to need to hire extra team members to take on some tasks in your business.</p><p>Most of what we’re talking about today is how to delegate to an employee properly and while there are overlaps when it comes to delegating to a contractor, there are definitely nuanced differences. Today we are specifically looking at delegating to existing team members who have been through the full onboarding process and understand you and your business very well. To us, proper delegation comes down to communication! Listen carefully because we want you to document all of these things we are discussing today and explain them to the person you want to delegate to. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2596</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4d524cea-ea81-11ed-9c3e-6f5a0f5ca938]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3397708786.mp3?updated=1683212051" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>740: 8 New AI Websites We're Trying</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/8-new-ai-websites-were-trying</link>
      <description>In the past 30 days, more than 2,000 new AI tools have been released. There is no doubt about it; AI is going to have a major impact on how we work, how we ask questions, and how we search for information. No industry will go untouched by this technology and significant changes have already begun to take place. This causes fear in some people, excitement in others, and often a combination of both!
A few months ago, we had a conversation on the podcast about AI, but because of how much everything has progressed, we decided to have another one. While we don’t know what the future will look like, we know it will look very different from the present! Join us today as we discuss eight new AI websites that can help you optimize your business processes and add value to your life.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 04 May 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>8 New AI Websites We're Trying</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>740</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join us today as we discuss eight new AI websites that can help you optimize your business processes and add value to your life.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In the past 30 days, more than 2,000 new AI tools have been released. There is no doubt about it; AI is going to have a major impact on how we work, how we ask questions, and how we search for information. No industry will go untouched by this technology and significant changes have already begun to take place. This causes fear in some people, excitement in others, and often a combination of both!
A few months ago, we had a conversation on the podcast about AI, but because of how much everything has progressed, we decided to have another one. While we don’t know what the future will look like, we know it will look very different from the present! Join us today as we discuss eight new AI websites that can help you optimize your business processes and add value to your life.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In the past 30 days, more than 2,000 new AI tools have been released. There is no doubt about it; AI is going to have a major impact on how we work, how we ask questions, and how we search for information. No industry will go untouched by this technology and significant changes have already begun to take place. This causes fear in some people, excitement in others, and often a combination of both!</p><p>A few months ago, we had a conversation on the podcast about AI, but because of how much everything has progressed, we decided to have another one. While we don’t know what the future will look like, we know it will look very different from the present! Join us today as we discuss eight new AI websites that can help you optimize your business processes and add value to your life.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2101</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[219e0f2a-e910-11ed-8b74-1fa120f53809]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4517920635.mp3?updated=1683049752" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>739: Re-envison Your Role Within Your Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/re-envision-your-role-within-your-business</link>
      <description>An overwhelming majority of female-owned businesses (88%, to be exact) are run by women who do not have a single employee. That means they are essentially doing everything on their own. And if you are pursuing growth, then running your company without any support is not a sustainable business model!
We are seeing many seasoned entrepreneurs reach a breaking point where they can’t decide whether they should give up their business or commit to becoming a leader and bringing on a team to support them. If this sounds like you, and you want to create a change, then it may well be time to re-envision your role within your business.
Our goal is to see more and more women occupy a true CEO seat. Our C-Suite on Demand program is designed to help more women take the step from being a solo CEO to becoming a leader that has the team she needs to support her vision. Tune in as we take a closer look at the options available to CEOs who want to re-envision their role and enter the next phase of leadership, all with the support of our team at Boss Project! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 02 May 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Re-envison Your Role Within Your Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>739</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>An overwhelming majority of female-owned businesses (88%, to be exact) are run by women who do not have a single employee. That means they are essentially doing everything on their own. And if you are pursuing growth, then running your company without any support is not a sustainable business model!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>An overwhelming majority of female-owned businesses (88%, to be exact) are run by women who do not have a single employee. That means they are essentially doing everything on their own. And if you are pursuing growth, then running your company without any support is not a sustainable business model!
We are seeing many seasoned entrepreneurs reach a breaking point where they can’t decide whether they should give up their business or commit to becoming a leader and bringing on a team to support them. If this sounds like you, and you want to create a change, then it may well be time to re-envision your role within your business.
Our goal is to see more and more women occupy a true CEO seat. Our C-Suite on Demand program is designed to help more women take the step from being a solo CEO to becoming a leader that has the team she needs to support her vision. Tune in as we take a closer look at the options available to CEOs who want to re-envision their role and enter the next phase of leadership, all with the support of our team at Boss Project! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>An overwhelming majority of female-owned businesses (88%, to be exact) are run by women who do not have a single employee. That means they are essentially doing everything on their own. And if you are pursuing growth, then running your company without any support is not a sustainable business model!</p><p>We are seeing many seasoned entrepreneurs reach a breaking point where they can’t decide whether they should give up their business or commit to becoming a leader and bringing on a team to support them. If this sounds like you, and you want to create a change, then it may well be time to re-envision your role within your business.</p><p>Our goal is to see more and more women occupy a true CEO seat. Our C-Suite on Demand program is designed to help more women take the step from being a solo CEO to becoming a leader that has the team she needs to support her vision. Tune in as we take a closer look at the options available to CEOs who want to re-envision their role and enter the next phase of leadership, all with the support of our team at Boss Project! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1904</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[86486246-e5ef-11ed-9523-d7bf6894c1a8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7536662023.mp3?updated=1682718490" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>738: Introducing C-Suite On Demand</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/introducing-c-suite-on-demand</link>
      <description>As a business owner, you will unlock different tiers of problems that you need to solve. While working with folks inside the Incubator, we’ve encountered many questions that we would categorize as ‘next level.’ We realized we have a lot we can help those people with. That’s what’s led us to introduce a brand new offer. We are so excited to talk about our new opportunity for people!
These are people who entered the Incubator, thinking that the next step for them was to start hiring more people. Spoiler alert: it wasn’t that! Instead, we worked with them on refining their offer so that they could start getting paid appropriately. Once they start getting those achievable results, they’re in the position to start looking for more people to hire.
How much do you save for hires? How much should you plan to pay them? What can you expect the return to be once you’ve brought someone on? How do you ensure you’re creating an incredible, ethical culture? We realized there’s a lot we can help you with. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 27 Apr 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Introducing C-Suite On Demand</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>738</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>A resource for "next level" questions, like: How much do you save for hires? How much should you plan to pay them? What can you expect the return to be once you’ve brought someone on? How do you ensure you’re creating an incredible, ethical culture?</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>As a business owner, you will unlock different tiers of problems that you need to solve. While working with folks inside the Incubator, we’ve encountered many questions that we would categorize as ‘next level.’ We realized we have a lot we can help those people with. That’s what’s led us to introduce a brand new offer. We are so excited to talk about our new opportunity for people!
These are people who entered the Incubator, thinking that the next step for them was to start hiring more people. Spoiler alert: it wasn’t that! Instead, we worked with them on refining their offer so that they could start getting paid appropriately. Once they start getting those achievable results, they’re in the position to start looking for more people to hire.
How much do you save for hires? How much should you plan to pay them? What can you expect the return to be once you’ve brought someone on? How do you ensure you’re creating an incredible, ethical culture? We realized there’s a lot we can help you with. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>As a business owner, you will unlock different tiers of problems that you need to solve. While working with folks inside the Incubator, we’ve encountered many questions that we would categorize as ‘next level.’ We realized we have a lot we can help those people with. That’s what’s led us to introduce a brand new offer. We are so excited to talk about our new opportunity for people!</p><p>These are people who entered the Incubator, thinking that the next step for them was to start hiring more people. Spoiler alert: it wasn’t that! Instead, we worked with them on refining their offer so that they could start getting paid appropriately. Once they start getting those achievable results, they’re in the position to start looking for more people to hire.</p><p>How much do you save for hires? How much should you plan to pay them? What can you expect the return to be once you’ve brought someone on? How do you ensure you’re creating an incredible, ethical culture? We realized there’s a lot we can help you with. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2098</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7496d406-e43c-11ed-b671-f736d57561c3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6088987371.mp3?updated=1682519723" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>737: Listen to This Before You Hire</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/listen-to-this-before-you-hire</link>
      <description>You may have been tuning in to our podcast alongside the Incubator and looking for something better suited to where you are in your journey. We love that for you! Today’s episode is dedicated to you. We’re here to discuss some of the challenges you may face and how you can approach them.
Many of our Incubator graduates reach a point where they slowly want to remove themselves from some of the deliverables of their service. They want to be involved with strategy and direction, but they’re ready for everything else to fall to their team. They’re ready for the next phase, and this can be intimidating! This is not less work for them. In fact, at first, it’s more work. After that, it’s different work.
This isn’t about removing your job from the business. It’s shifting your focus to different aspects of the business. It will require you to grow and evolve as a manager, leader, and CEO. You’re going to go from just being the person who founded the business to sitting in a true CEO or leader’s seat. It’s such an exciting thing for us to see!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 25 Apr 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Listen to This Before You Hire</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>737</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>You’re going to go from just being the person who founded the business to sitting in a true CEO or leader’s seat. We’re here to discuss some of the challenges you may face and how you can approach them.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You may have been tuning in to our podcast alongside the Incubator and looking for something better suited to where you are in your journey. We love that for you! Today’s episode is dedicated to you. We’re here to discuss some of the challenges you may face and how you can approach them.
Many of our Incubator graduates reach a point where they slowly want to remove themselves from some of the deliverables of their service. They want to be involved with strategy and direction, but they’re ready for everything else to fall to their team. They’re ready for the next phase, and this can be intimidating! This is not less work for them. In fact, at first, it’s more work. After that, it’s different work.
This isn’t about removing your job from the business. It’s shifting your focus to different aspects of the business. It will require you to grow and evolve as a manager, leader, and CEO. You’re going to go from just being the person who founded the business to sitting in a true CEO or leader’s seat. It’s such an exciting thing for us to see!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You may have been tuning in to our podcast alongside the Incubator and looking for something better suited to where you are in your journey. We love that for you! Today’s episode is dedicated to you. We’re here to discuss some of the challenges you may face and how you can approach them.</p><p>Many of our Incubator graduates reach a point where they slowly want to remove themselves from some of the deliverables of their service. They want to be involved with strategy and direction, but they’re ready for everything else to fall to their team. They’re ready for the next phase, and this can be intimidating! This is not less work for them. In fact, at first, it’s more work. After that, it’s different work.</p><p>This isn’t about removing your job from the business. It’s shifting your focus to different aspects of the business. It will require you to grow and evolve as a manager, leader, and CEO. You’re going to go from just being the person who founded the business to sitting in a true CEO or leader’s seat. It’s such an exciting thing for us to see!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1685</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[89acd6c8-de02-11ed-9f7c-17fdcfb7c340]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4611901065.mp3?updated=1681912940" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>736: The Pros and Cons of Hourly Billing: Is it Time to Switch to Value-Based Pricing?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-pros-and-cons-of-hourly-billing-is-it-time-to-switch-to-value-based-pricing</link>
      <description>Does your input feel aligned with your output? If you are billing hourly, chances are things are beginning to feel unbalanced. In this episode, we fill you in on how we can help you make the transition from hourly billing to value-based pricing, creating a more predictable business and recurring income. Today, we want to introduce you to new pricing models and provide insight into how to prepare your clients for the changes. 
If you don’t want to be trading each of your hours for a dollar, it’s time to consider value-based pricing. If you continue to only get paid for the time you’re physically working on clients’ projects, you’re never going to be able to scale beyond a personal income. You need to be paid for every aspect of your job! There is a way to transition without dismantling your current business and our Incubator program will walk you through the steps. Stay tuned as we break down how, exactly, our Incubator program is structured and how we can help you calculate the ideal pricing for your unique business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 20 Apr 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Pros and Cons of Hourly Billing: Is it Time to Switch to Value-Based Pricing?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>736</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Does your input feel aligned with your output? If you are billing hourly, chances are things are beginning to feel unbalanced. In this episode, we fill you in on how we can help you make the transition from hourly billing to value-based pricing, creating a more predictable business and recurring income. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Does your input feel aligned with your output? If you are billing hourly, chances are things are beginning to feel unbalanced. In this episode, we fill you in on how we can help you make the transition from hourly billing to value-based pricing, creating a more predictable business and recurring income. Today, we want to introduce you to new pricing models and provide insight into how to prepare your clients for the changes. 
If you don’t want to be trading each of your hours for a dollar, it’s time to consider value-based pricing. If you continue to only get paid for the time you’re physically working on clients’ projects, you’re never going to be able to scale beyond a personal income. You need to be paid for every aspect of your job! There is a way to transition without dismantling your current business and our Incubator program will walk you through the steps. Stay tuned as we break down how, exactly, our Incubator program is structured and how we can help you calculate the ideal pricing for your unique business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Does your input feel aligned with your output? If you are billing hourly, chances are things are beginning to feel unbalanced. In this episode, we fill you in on how we can help you make the transition from hourly billing to value-based pricing, creating a more predictable business and recurring income. Today, we want to introduce you to new pricing models and provide insight into how to prepare your clients for the changes. </p><p>If you don’t want to be trading each of your hours for a dollar, it’s time to consider value-based pricing. If you continue to only get paid for the time you’re physically working on clients’ projects, you’re never going to be able to scale beyond a personal income. You need to be paid for every aspect of your job! There is a way to transition without dismantling your current business and our Incubator program will walk you through the steps. Stay tuned as we break down how, exactly, our Incubator program is structured and how we can help you calculate the ideal pricing for your unique business.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2314</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0e49e410-deb8-11ed-962f-2b906cf9b499]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2480656372.mp3?updated=1681912774" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>735: These Give Us the Ick: It's Time to Do Business Your Way</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/these-give-us-the-ick-its-time-to-do-business-your-way</link>
      <description>We have been seeing a lot of frustrating things in the business world lately, so today, we are going to be talking about marketing ploys and business strategies that we don’t align ourselves with. We strongly believe that if you work with a coach, you should ensure that that person lives their life and runs their business in a way that aligns with your belief system, so that you can create a life and a business that you really, truly want. 
Tune in today to hear about the things that give us “the ick” in the industry and how we are doing things differently. We want you to know that there is an easier way to go about things than what you may have been experiencing up until now. The process is going to be different for everyone, and we want to help you find the most optimal approach for YOU! We hope that you walk away knowing exactly what kind of space this is and what you can expect from us going forward.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 18 Apr 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>These Give Us the Ick: It's Time to Do Business Your Way</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>735</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We don't align ourselves with the icky marketing ploys and business strategies of our industry. Learn how we're doing things differently.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We have been seeing a lot of frustrating things in the business world lately, so today, we are going to be talking about marketing ploys and business strategies that we don’t align ourselves with. We strongly believe that if you work with a coach, you should ensure that that person lives their life and runs their business in a way that aligns with your belief system, so that you can create a life and a business that you really, truly want. 
Tune in today to hear about the things that give us “the ick” in the industry and how we are doing things differently. We want you to know that there is an easier way to go about things than what you may have been experiencing up until now. The process is going to be different for everyone, and we want to help you find the most optimal approach for YOU! We hope that you walk away knowing exactly what kind of space this is and what you can expect from us going forward.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We have been seeing a lot of frustrating things in the business world lately, so today, we are going to be talking about marketing ploys and business strategies that we don’t align ourselves with. We strongly believe that if you work with a coach, you should ensure that that person lives their life and runs their business in a way that aligns with your belief system, so that you can create a life and a business that you really, truly want. </p><p>Tune in today to hear about the things that give us “the ick” in the industry and how we are doing things differently. We want you to know that there is an easier way to go about things than what you may have been experiencing up until now. The process is going to be different for everyone, and we want to help you find the most optimal approach for YOU! We hope that you walk away knowing exactly what kind of space this is and what you can expect from us going forward.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2603</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f720c8bc-da02-11ed-9add-67df7b42d9c4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4241274108.mp3?updated=1681395409" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>734: The New Incubator is Here! </title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-new-incubator-is-here</link>
      <description>Our new Incubator is finally here! It’s always exciting taking on a new cohort, and in this episode, we break down what you can expect from our newly refined Incubator program and how to determine whether it’s right for you. Tuning in you’ll learn about the type of issues we address (like how to price correctly) and how we help business owners step into their role as CEO by gaining a deeper understanding of the different aspects of their business and how they impact one another.
We want to help you find ease and joy in your business again, whatever stage you’re at. And even if you’re not a good fit for our Incubator program, we’d love for you to get in touch so that we can help you get to the next level. Join us as we unpack what it means to take your business to the next level and how to build ease into your life through our new Incubator program!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 13 Apr 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The New Incubator is Here! </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>734</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We break down what you can expect from our newly refined Incubator program and how to determine whether it’s right for you.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Our new Incubator is finally here! It’s always exciting taking on a new cohort, and in this episode, we break down what you can expect from our newly refined Incubator program and how to determine whether it’s right for you. Tuning in you’ll learn about the type of issues we address (like how to price correctly) and how we help business owners step into their role as CEO by gaining a deeper understanding of the different aspects of their business and how they impact one another.
We want to help you find ease and joy in your business again, whatever stage you’re at. And even if you’re not a good fit for our Incubator program, we’d love for you to get in touch so that we can help you get to the next level. Join us as we unpack what it means to take your business to the next level and how to build ease into your life through our new Incubator program!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Our new Incubator is finally here! It’s always exciting taking on a new cohort, and in this episode, we break down what you can expect from our newly refined Incubator program and how to determine whether it’s right for you. Tuning in you’ll learn about the type of issues we address (like how to price correctly) and how we help business owners step into their role as CEO by gaining a deeper understanding of the different aspects of their business and how they impact one another.</p><p>We want to help you find ease and joy in your business again, whatever stage you’re at. And even if you’re not a good fit for our Incubator program, we’d love for you to get in touch so that we can help you get to the next level. Join us as we unpack what it means to take your business to the next level and how to build ease into your life through our new Incubator program!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1988</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4681293c-d897-11ed-a811-9fd286c72db2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6914578131.mp3?updated=1681394089" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>733: What Moved the Needle the Most in Our Service-Based Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-moved-the-needle-the-most-in-our-service-based-business</link>
      <description>Today we have a list of goodies to share with you of things we have learned over the last 18 months. We aren’t digging into the archives from years ago. These are definitely things we have learned and implemented more recently and they are things we know you can benefit from. If you’ve been listening to the podcast for a while, these are tips that you should pay attention to for yourself and figure out how they can work for you! 
We know that the last couple of years have been very strange and we started noticing things that we used to do consistently and used to get predictable results from not working at all anymore and we even got negative results. This is not uncommon for service-based business owners to experience at all! We wanted to gather up the best things that moved the needle the most for our business especially when things are confusing. You may be surprised at how foundational these steps actually are and we came up with these ideas as a sort of experiment. 
In the last 18 months, our business has more than doubled, we went from a team of two to a team of seven full-time, we reduced our contractor load while still having subject matter experts, and our revenue is on a completely different playing field than it ever has been before. We have focused more on our values and taken these steps to move the needle substantially for our business. We want you to develop an experimental mindset and actually live in it and here is how! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 11 Apr 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>733: What Moved the Needle the Most in Our Service-Based Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>733</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>You may be surprised at how foundational these steps actually are and we came up with these ideas as a sort of experiment. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we have a list of goodies to share with you of things we have learned over the last 18 months. We aren’t digging into the archives from years ago. These are definitely things we have learned and implemented more recently and they are things we know you can benefit from. If you’ve been listening to the podcast for a while, these are tips that you should pay attention to for yourself and figure out how they can work for you! 
We know that the last couple of years have been very strange and we started noticing things that we used to do consistently and used to get predictable results from not working at all anymore and we even got negative results. This is not uncommon for service-based business owners to experience at all! We wanted to gather up the best things that moved the needle the most for our business especially when things are confusing. You may be surprised at how foundational these steps actually are and we came up with these ideas as a sort of experiment. 
In the last 18 months, our business has more than doubled, we went from a team of two to a team of seven full-time, we reduced our contractor load while still having subject matter experts, and our revenue is on a completely different playing field than it ever has been before. We have focused more on our values and taken these steps to move the needle substantially for our business. We want you to develop an experimental mindset and actually live in it and here is how! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we have a list of goodies to share with you of things we have learned over the last 18 months. We aren’t digging into the archives from years ago. These are definitely things we have learned and implemented more recently and they are things we know you can benefit from. If you’ve been listening to the podcast for a while, these are tips that you should pay attention to for yourself and figure out how they can work for you! </p><p>We know that the last couple of years have been very strange and we started noticing things that we used to do consistently and used to get predictable results from not working at all anymore and we even got negative results. This is not uncommon for service-based business owners to experience at all! We wanted to gather up the best things that moved the needle the most for our business especially when things are confusing. You may be surprised at how foundational these steps actually are and we came up with these ideas as a sort of experiment. </p><p>In the last 18 months, our business has more than doubled, we went from a team of two to a team of seven full-time, we reduced our contractor load while still having subject matter experts, and our revenue is on a completely different playing field than it ever has been before. We have focused more on our values and taken these steps to move the needle substantially for our business. We want you to develop an experimental mindset and actually live in it and here is how! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3364</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[925a036e-d555-11ed-8070-3f3ab0c0807b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7488927427.mp3?updated=1680880822" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>732: The Only Time Hack That Works</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-only-time-hack-that-works</link>
      <description>How are you spending your time as a business owner, and what are you choosing to prioritize? As the CEO of your company, it’s crucial that you allocate your time in the best way possible. This, however, is much easier said than done. While the internet is populated with countless examples of how to increase your productivity and get more done during your working hours, few of them take into account the myriad of distractions and obligations that you and your clients need to contend with on a daily basis.
In this episode, we break down a time hack that actually works for small businesses (and it doesn’t involve waking up at 5 AM every day!). Our goal is to walk you through what you need to be prioritizing as a CEO and what percentage of your time you should be spending on each category. The lessons we share today will provide you with a fantastic foundation that you can continue to build on. Tune in to learn how you should be spending your time as CEO and how to become confident in the knowledge that your attention is exactly where it should be!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 06 Apr 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Only Time Hack That Works</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>732</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>As the CEO of your company, it’s crucial that you allocate your time in the best way possible. This, however, is much easier said than done.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>How are you spending your time as a business owner, and what are you choosing to prioritize? As the CEO of your company, it’s crucial that you allocate your time in the best way possible. This, however, is much easier said than done. While the internet is populated with countless examples of how to increase your productivity and get more done during your working hours, few of them take into account the myriad of distractions and obligations that you and your clients need to contend with on a daily basis.
In this episode, we break down a time hack that actually works for small businesses (and it doesn’t involve waking up at 5 AM every day!). Our goal is to walk you through what you need to be prioritizing as a CEO and what percentage of your time you should be spending on each category. The lessons we share today will provide you with a fantastic foundation that you can continue to build on. Tune in to learn how you should be spending your time as CEO and how to become confident in the knowledge that your attention is exactly where it should be!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>How are you spending your time as a business owner, and what are you choosing to prioritize? As the CEO of your company, it’s crucial that you allocate your time in the best way possible. This, however, is much easier said than done. While the internet is populated with countless examples of how to increase your productivity and get more done during your working hours, few of them take into account the myriad of distractions and obligations that you and your clients need to contend with on a daily basis.</p><p>In this episode, we break down a time hack that actually works for small businesses (and it doesn’t involve waking up at 5 AM every day!). Our goal is to walk you through what you need to be prioritizing as a CEO and what percentage of your time you should be spending on each category. The lessons we share today will provide you with a fantastic foundation that you can continue to build on. Tune in to learn how you should be spending your time as CEO and how to become confident in the knowledge that your attention is exactly where it should be!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2270</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[97a97b60-d31b-11ed-b02f-93cb57f593aa]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5263722529.mp3?updated=1680636093" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>731: Here’s Our New Program</title>
      <description>We are so excited to walk you through some of what we’ve been working on behind the scenes. Today we are going to let you guys filter through our brains about how we got to this point, what is new, and how you can be a part of it. One of the incredible things about running an online business is that we have been able to be part of a lot of the shifts that have happened for the entire industry. We have had to act and react based on many changes and our business has gone through loads of pivots. 
But not to worry, Boss Project isn’t going in a totally new direction. Our mission has always been very much the same and we are still focused on helping more women create profitable and sustainable online businesses so they can become financially free! Using that as our focus, we have always been on a journey to improve constantly, and now, we are finally at the point we have always wanted to be at.
When we launched our Incubator, we wanted to be able to measure as many things as possible. Our incredible program manager was very intentional about implementing surveys, measuring the people joining the program and their growth, critiques, attendance, milestone calls, and our clients’ revenue. We dove deep into this data so that we could see things across the board. It’s all about creating an environment where more people can be successful, generate more revenue, and improve their lifestyles. We are so excited about this new version of the Incubator that is going to support the whole you in the most incredible way!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 04 Apr 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Here’s Our New Program</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>731</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are going to let you guys filter through our brains about how we got to this point, what is new, and how you can be a part of it.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are so excited to walk you through some of what we’ve been working on behind the scenes. Today we are going to let you guys filter through our brains about how we got to this point, what is new, and how you can be a part of it. One of the incredible things about running an online business is that we have been able to be part of a lot of the shifts that have happened for the entire industry. We have had to act and react based on many changes and our business has gone through loads of pivots. 
But not to worry, Boss Project isn’t going in a totally new direction. Our mission has always been very much the same and we are still focused on helping more women create profitable and sustainable online businesses so they can become financially free! Using that as our focus, we have always been on a journey to improve constantly, and now, we are finally at the point we have always wanted to be at.
When we launched our Incubator, we wanted to be able to measure as many things as possible. Our incredible program manager was very intentional about implementing surveys, measuring the people joining the program and their growth, critiques, attendance, milestone calls, and our clients’ revenue. We dove deep into this data so that we could see things across the board. It’s all about creating an environment where more people can be successful, generate more revenue, and improve their lifestyles. We are so excited about this new version of the Incubator that is going to support the whole you in the most incredible way!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are so excited to walk you through some of what we’ve been working on behind the scenes. Today we are going to let you guys filter through our brains about how we got to this point, what is new, and how you can be a part of it. One of the incredible things about running an online business is that we have been able to be part of a lot of the shifts that have happened for the entire industry. We have had to act and react based on many changes and our business has gone through loads of pivots. </p><p>But not to worry, Boss Project isn’t going in a totally new direction. Our mission has always been very much the same and we are still focused on helping more women create profitable and sustainable online businesses so they can become financially free! Using that as our focus, we have always been on a journey to improve constantly, and now, we are finally at the point we have always wanted to be at.</p><p>When we launched our Incubator, we wanted to be able to measure as many things as possible. Our incredible program manager was very intentional about implementing surveys, measuring the people joining the program and their growth, critiques, attendance, milestone calls, and our clients’ revenue. We dove deep into this data so that we could see things across the board. It’s all about creating an environment where more people can be successful, generate more revenue, and improve their lifestyles. We are so excited about this new version of the Incubator that is going to support the whole you in the most incredible way!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2634</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9c561994-cfd7-11ed-8eac-9795b5c66d9a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8241130990.mp3?updated=1680279955" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>730: There is No “Done” in Business </title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/there-is-no-done-in-business</link>
      <description>In today’s episode, we share what we’ve learned about the business journey, and break down some of the phases, checkpoints, and milestones you’ll experience along the way. Throughout our careers, we’ve had the honor and privilege of working with some pretty phenomenal service-based organizations. And due to the nature of our work, we’ve had the opportunity to observe the inner workings of countless small businesses. In that time, we’ve seen key patterns emerge that we believe anyone can learn from!
We want to help you identify where you are in your journey and figure out why you might be feeling stuck. Once you can locate yourself in the overall journey, you'll learn to visualize the next steps and how to prepare for them. That can mean putting key foundations in place so that you are able to move forward, or coming to the realization that you are actually really happy in the phase you are currently in.
The key lesson that we want to leave you with today is that this journey never really ends. There is no end game when it comes to business! When you acknowledge this, you can begin to enjoy the journey so much more and appreciate where you’re at; whatever that phase may be! Join us today for an expansive conversation where we break down the ten phases we’ve observed across business journeys and unpack our belief that there is no “done” in business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 30 Mar 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>There is No “Done” in Business </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>730</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We share what we’ve learned about the business journey, and break down some of the phases, checkpoints, and milestones you’ll experience along the way. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today’s episode, we share what we’ve learned about the business journey, and break down some of the phases, checkpoints, and milestones you’ll experience along the way. Throughout our careers, we’ve had the honor and privilege of working with some pretty phenomenal service-based organizations. And due to the nature of our work, we’ve had the opportunity to observe the inner workings of countless small businesses. In that time, we’ve seen key patterns emerge that we believe anyone can learn from!
We want to help you identify where you are in your journey and figure out why you might be feeling stuck. Once you can locate yourself in the overall journey, you'll learn to visualize the next steps and how to prepare for them. That can mean putting key foundations in place so that you are able to move forward, or coming to the realization that you are actually really happy in the phase you are currently in.
The key lesson that we want to leave you with today is that this journey never really ends. There is no end game when it comes to business! When you acknowledge this, you can begin to enjoy the journey so much more and appreciate where you’re at; whatever that phase may be! Join us today for an expansive conversation where we break down the ten phases we’ve observed across business journeys and unpack our belief that there is no “done” in business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today’s episode, we share what we’ve learned about the business journey, and break down some of the phases, checkpoints, and milestones you’ll experience along the way. Throughout our careers, we’ve had the honor and privilege of working with some pretty phenomenal service-based organizations. And due to the nature of our work, we’ve had the opportunity to observe the inner workings of countless small businesses. In that time, we’ve seen key patterns emerge that we believe anyone can learn from!</p><p>We want to help you identify where you are in your journey and figure out why you might be feeling stuck. Once you can locate yourself in the overall journey, you'll learn to visualize the next steps and how to prepare for them. That can mean putting key foundations in place so that you are able to move forward, or coming to the realization that you are actually really happy in the phase you are currently in.</p><p>The key lesson that we want to leave you with today is that this journey never really ends. There is no end game when it comes to business! When you acknowledge this, you can begin to enjoy the journey so much more and appreciate where you’re at; whatever that phase may be! Join us today for an expansive conversation where we break down the ten phases we’ve observed across business journeys and unpack our belief that there is no “done” in business!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3708</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5ea379f6-ca6f-11ed-9987-d33ff7abb969]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2714858473.mp3?updated=1679933037" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>729: Are One-Time Projects or Retainers Right For You?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/are-one-time-projects-or-retainers-right-for-you</link>
      <description>Today, we discuss the difference between one-time projects and retainer projects for clients and how you can determine which is right for you. There are many filters through which to run your decision-making process when deciding whether to explore one over the other or have a hybrid between the two. In this episode, we share insight into the questions you should be asking yourself in order to make that call.

We break down the financial benefits and challenges of one-time projects and retainers, respectively, and explain how to gauge which model is right for you! You’ll find out when it makes sense to consider the hybrid model, and why it’s essential to hold the future in mind when settling on your service structure. Tune in to find out which model makes the most sense for your business, both financially and systematically.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 28 Mar 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Are One-Time Projects or Retainers Right For You?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>729</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>There are many filters through which to run your decision-making process when deciding whether to explore one over the other or have a hybrid between the two. In this episode, we share insight into the questions you should be asking yourself in order to make that call.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we discuss the difference between one-time projects and retainer projects for clients and how you can determine which is right for you. There are many filters through which to run your decision-making process when deciding whether to explore one over the other or have a hybrid between the two. In this episode, we share insight into the questions you should be asking yourself in order to make that call.

We break down the financial benefits and challenges of one-time projects and retainers, respectively, and explain how to gauge which model is right for you! You’ll find out when it makes sense to consider the hybrid model, and why it’s essential to hold the future in mind when settling on your service structure. Tune in to find out which model makes the most sense for your business, both financially and systematically.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we discuss the difference between one-time projects and retainer projects for clients and how you can determine which is right for you. There are many filters through which to run your decision-making process when deciding whether to explore one over the other or have a hybrid between the two. In this episode, we share insight into the questions you should be asking yourself in order to make that call.</p><p><br></p><p>We break down the financial benefits and challenges of one-time projects and retainers, respectively, and explain how to gauge which model is right for you! You’ll find out when it makes sense to consider the hybrid model, and why it’s essential to hold the future in mind when settling on your service structure. Tune in to find out which model makes the most sense for your business, both financially and systematically.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2322</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[006a2d18-c762-11ed-89e2-7f9c9636d818]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1889824352.mp3?updated=1679409596" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>728: How to Sell at a Range of Price Points and Close Different Kinds of Clients</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-sell-at-a-range-of-price-points-and-close-different-kinds-of-clients</link>
      <description>Today we’re talking about pricing! We have been discussing pricing for creative small business owners since the beginning. This is our happy place! We have a new version of this conversation today and are excited to share it with you. Let’s face it, the market is just totally weird right now. Business owners approach us often, asking for advice about whether to pivot or start over. And 90% of the time, we’re Team Pivot, as long as you ensure that your pivot aligns with what the market sees as essential. You’ve got to meet your clients or prospective clients where they’re at. So what does it take to close different kinds of clients at different price points?
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 23 Mar 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Sell at a Range of Price Points and Close Different Kinds of Clients</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>728</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>The market is totally weird right now. You’ve got to meet your clients or prospective clients where they’re at. So what does it take to close different kinds of clients at different price points?</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we’re talking about pricing! We have been discussing pricing for creative small business owners since the beginning. This is our happy place! We have a new version of this conversation today and are excited to share it with you. Let’s face it, the market is just totally weird right now. Business owners approach us often, asking for advice about whether to pivot or start over. And 90% of the time, we’re Team Pivot, as long as you ensure that your pivot aligns with what the market sees as essential. You’ve got to meet your clients or prospective clients where they’re at. So what does it take to close different kinds of clients at different price points?
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we’re talking about pricing! We have been discussing pricing for creative small business owners since the beginning. This is our happy place! We have a new version of this conversation today and are excited to share it with you. Let’s face it, the market is just totally weird right now. Business owners approach us often, asking for advice about whether to pivot or start over. And 90% of the time, we’re Team Pivot, as long as you ensure that your pivot aligns with what the market sees as essential. You’ve got to meet your clients or prospective clients where they’re at. So what does it take to close different kinds of clients at different price points?</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2389</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[41dc2072-c8bf-11ed-9b43-eb8adb5f2cf4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2230241145.mp3?updated=1679496827" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>727: Low Priced vs. Premium Offers - What’s Working Now?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/low-priced-vs-premium-offers-whats-working-now</link>
      <description>As you probably know by now, we’re obsessed with talking about pricing, so this episode is one of our new favorites! This conversation is more important than ever right now because of the current economic climate. There is no such thing as a one-size-fits all pricing model so today, we’re going to walk you through a couple of different scenarios that we have seen are working well for people.
We’ve sold everything from $29 products to $450,000 services and everything in between. So, rest assured, we know what we’re talking about when it comes to pricing. One of the consequences of the economic environment is that people start leaning away from education and towards done-for-you offers. Focusing on perfecting your pricing is your opportunity to continue to make everything make sense again! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 21 Mar 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Low Priced vs. Premium Offers - What’s Working Now?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>727</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>There is no such thing as a one-size-fits all pricing model so today, we’re going to walk you through a couple of different scenarios that we have seen are working well for people.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>As you probably know by now, we’re obsessed with talking about pricing, so this episode is one of our new favorites! This conversation is more important than ever right now because of the current economic climate. There is no such thing as a one-size-fits all pricing model so today, we’re going to walk you through a couple of different scenarios that we have seen are working well for people.
We’ve sold everything from $29 products to $450,000 services and everything in between. So, rest assured, we know what we’re talking about when it comes to pricing. One of the consequences of the economic environment is that people start leaning away from education and towards done-for-you offers. Focusing on perfecting your pricing is your opportunity to continue to make everything make sense again! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>As you probably know by now, we’re obsessed with talking about pricing, so this episode is one of our new favorites! This conversation is more important than ever right now because of the current economic climate. There is no such thing as a one-size-fits all pricing model so today, we’re going to walk you through a couple of different scenarios that we have seen are working well for people.</p><p>We’ve sold everything from $29 products to $450,000 services and everything in between. So, rest assured, we know what we’re talking about when it comes to pricing. One of the consequences of the economic environment is that people start leaning away from education and towards done-for-you offers. Focusing on perfecting your pricing is your opportunity to continue to make everything make sense again! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2045</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c98f22de-c500-11ed-9d86-3fc2dcd40c53]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4065891647.mp3?updated=1679085852" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>726: No One Actually Understands Capacity: Here's Why</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/no-one-actually-understands-capacity-heres-why</link>
      <description>Today we are diving into what you need to get right in your service-based business. This has a dramatic effect across the board and will either make your business very successful or lead to its failure! The people getting this wrong are often the ones who are on the road to burnout, are overworked and underpaid, they feel like everything is working against them and all systems are broken, they’re not reaching their financial goals and don’t understand why, and they don’t know where all their time is going. 
This may seem like a complicated issue but before you fear that all hope is lost, we are going to touch on a bunch of little things that are interconnected and all impact each other to help you. Believe it or not, all of what this comes down to is two things that have a major impact on everything else. We are addressing these things in this episode and finally having the much needed conversation to take these things deeper than surface level and ensure your businesses success! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Mar 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>No One Actually Understands Capacity: Here's Why</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>726</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are diving into what you need to get right in your service-based business. This has a dramatic effect across the board and will either make your business very successful or lead to its failure! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are diving into what you need to get right in your service-based business. This has a dramatic effect across the board and will either make your business very successful or lead to its failure! The people getting this wrong are often the ones who are on the road to burnout, are overworked and underpaid, they feel like everything is working against them and all systems are broken, they’re not reaching their financial goals and don’t understand why, and they don’t know where all their time is going. 
This may seem like a complicated issue but before you fear that all hope is lost, we are going to touch on a bunch of little things that are interconnected and all impact each other to help you. Believe it or not, all of what this comes down to is two things that have a major impact on everything else. We are addressing these things in this episode and finally having the much needed conversation to take these things deeper than surface level and ensure your businesses success! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are diving into what you need to get right in your service-based business. This has a dramatic effect across the board and will either make your business very successful or lead to its failure! The people getting this wrong are often the ones who are on the road to burnout, are overworked and underpaid, they feel like everything is working against them and all systems are broken, they’re not reaching their financial goals and don’t understand why, and they don’t know where all their time is going. </p><p>This may seem like a complicated issue but before you fear that all hope is lost, we are going to touch on a bunch of little things that are interconnected and all impact each other to help you. Believe it or not, all of what this comes down to is two things that have a major impact on everything else. We are addressing these things in this episode and finally having the much needed conversation to take these things deeper than surface level and ensure your businesses success! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2346</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1c8e0900-be8f-11ed-add4-47bd8a57243c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5635498270.mp3?updated=1678376694" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>725: How to Become Financially Healthy with Financial Gym CEO Shannon McLay</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-become-financially-healthy-with-financial-gym-ceo-shannon-mclay</link>
      <description>Our mission at Boss Project is to empower creative business owners to build a life and business that excels financially and supports them soulfully. Since we started this business, we have been truly dedicated to helping build a community of fiercely supportive people that are also ridiculously profitable. So much of that comes with financial literacy.
We want to see more women and femmes in business be not only financially safe but financially thriving. That’s a huge reason we brought on today’s guest who is dedicated to empowering people through financial literacy. Shannon McLay is the CEO and Founder of Financial Gym, a revolutionary financial services company, and she is an expert in helping others to build both personal and business finance.
Shannon offers a membership package, consults with clients and connects them to trainers on her team. There’s a missing piece of financial literacy, especially for women and femmes in the creative small business space. Figuring out where to start to build better financial health can feel like a minefield, but through Financial Gym, Shannon makes it possible to reach those business goals. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Mar 2023 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Become Financially Healthy with Financial Gym CEO Shannon McLay</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>725</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We want to see more women and femmes in business be not only financially safe but financially thriving. That’s a huge reason we brought on today’s guest who is dedicated to empowering people through financial literacy. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Our mission at Boss Project is to empower creative business owners to build a life and business that excels financially and supports them soulfully. Since we started this business, we have been truly dedicated to helping build a community of fiercely supportive people that are also ridiculously profitable. So much of that comes with financial literacy.
We want to see more women and femmes in business be not only financially safe but financially thriving. That’s a huge reason we brought on today’s guest who is dedicated to empowering people through financial literacy. Shannon McLay is the CEO and Founder of Financial Gym, a revolutionary financial services company, and she is an expert in helping others to build both personal and business finance.
Shannon offers a membership package, consults with clients and connects them to trainers on her team. There’s a missing piece of financial literacy, especially for women and femmes in the creative small business space. Figuring out where to start to build better financial health can feel like a minefield, but through Financial Gym, Shannon makes it possible to reach those business goals. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Our mission at Boss Project is to empower creative business owners to build a life and business that excels financially and supports them soulfully. Since we started this business, we have been truly dedicated to helping build a community of fiercely supportive people that are also ridiculously profitable. So much of that comes with financial literacy.</p><p>We want to see more women and femmes in business be not only financially safe but financially thriving. That’s a huge reason we brought on today’s guest who is dedicated to empowering people through financial literacy. Shannon McLay is the CEO and Founder of Financial Gym, a revolutionary financial services company, and she is an expert in helping others to build both personal and business finance.</p><p>Shannon offers a membership package, consults with clients and connects them to trainers on her team. There’s a missing piece of financial literacy, especially for women and femmes in the creative small business space. Figuring out where to start to build better financial health can feel like a minefield, but through Financial Gym, Shannon makes it possible to reach those business goals. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2648</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2057e144-bde2-11ed-a958-3b39758da0d7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2402111434.mp3?updated=1678302440" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>724: Understanding How Profit Changes As Your Business Ages</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/understanding-how-profit-changes-as-your-business-ages</link>
      <description>Maybe you’re a one-woman show. Maybe you’ve hired a part-time employee or a contractor or two. You have probably seen significantly high profits in your first few years. Now, you’re entering years three, four, five, and beyond, and you want to pay yourself more, hire more, or have other expenses you want to reallocate funds to. You’re so married to your high profits, that you will create goals for yourself to do anything you can to maintain those profits while being able to spend more money. We really want you to give yourself a bit of a break here! And that’s exactly what we hope to empower you to do through this episode. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 09 Mar 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Understanding How Profit Changes As Your Business Ages</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>724</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Entering years three+ in your business, you likely want to pay yourself more, hire more, invest in resources, etc. You’re so married to your high profits, that you will create goals for yourself to do anything you can to maintain those profits while being able to spend more money. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Maybe you’re a one-woman show. Maybe you’ve hired a part-time employee or a contractor or two. You have probably seen significantly high profits in your first few years. Now, you’re entering years three, four, five, and beyond, and you want to pay yourself more, hire more, or have other expenses you want to reallocate funds to. You’re so married to your high profits, that you will create goals for yourself to do anything you can to maintain those profits while being able to spend more money. We really want you to give yourself a bit of a break here! And that’s exactly what we hope to empower you to do through this episode. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Maybe you’re a one-woman show. Maybe you’ve hired a part-time employee or a contractor or two. You have probably seen significantly high profits in your first few years. Now, you’re entering years three, four, five, and beyond, and you want to pay yourself more, hire more, or have other expenses you want to reallocate funds to. You’re so married to your high profits, that you will create goals for yourself to do anything you can to maintain those profits while being able to spend more money. We really want you to give yourself a bit of a break here! And that’s exactly what we hope to empower you to do through this episode. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2565</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[fe027e62-b786-11ed-ae4f-ff323e7fe08e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8062269013.mp3?updated=1677612556" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>723: Creating a "Garage" For Your Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-a-garage-for-your-business</link>
      <description>Today we're talking about creating an intranet (which we also refer to as a “garage”) for your company. This is separate from the project management of your day-to-day operations. This is more about setting the precedent for your company culture, creating SOPs, and focusing on other high level elements that are essential to the running of a successful business. You can think of it as Union Station for your team, your clients, and you! 
Until we had an intranet in our business, we wouldn’t have known it was missing. Now, we can’t imagine ever living without it! It has been so useful in so many ways. At first we used it only internally, but then we decided to branch out and use it to enhance our clients’ experience, and the results have been incredible. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 07 Mar 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating a "Garage" For Your Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>723</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we're talking about creating an intranet (which we also refer to as a “garage”) for your company. This is separate from the project management of your day-to-day operations.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we're talking about creating an intranet (which we also refer to as a “garage”) for your company. This is separate from the project management of your day-to-day operations. This is more about setting the precedent for your company culture, creating SOPs, and focusing on other high level elements that are essential to the running of a successful business. You can think of it as Union Station for your team, your clients, and you! 
Until we had an intranet in our business, we wouldn’t have known it was missing. Now, we can’t imagine ever living without it! It has been so useful in so many ways. At first we used it only internally, but then we decided to branch out and use it to enhance our clients’ experience, and the results have been incredible. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we're talking about creating an intranet (which we also refer to as a “garage”) for your company. This is separate from the project management of your day-to-day operations. This is more about setting the precedent for your company culture, creating SOPs, and focusing on other high level elements that are essential to the running of a successful business. You can think of it as Union Station for your team, your clients, and you! </p><p>Until we had an intranet in our business, we wouldn’t have known it was missing. Now, we can’t imagine ever living without it! It has been so useful in so many ways. At first we used it only internally, but then we decided to branch out and use it to enhance our clients’ experience, and the results have been incredible. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2784</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[edd07830-b3a0-11ed-b0ac-b7105d4e8263]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5481847483.mp3?updated=1677249957" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>722: All the Reasons We Love Our Partnership &amp; You Shouldn’t Do It Anyways</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-a-garage-for-your-business</link>
      <description>Most people who go into business are usually technicians who are really skilled at one area of the business. Learning to be a leader in your business is the most challenging part of running a business. Here’s the hierarchy we see: you’re a technician, and then hopefully you begin to love sales too. Then, hopefully, you begin to learn and love how to be a leader. If you don’t like sales, then we would say, don’t start a business. That doesn’t mean it’s impossible to find a way to sell that is in alignment with you, but you do absolutely have to find a way to like it.
During our last episode, we talked about all the reasons getting into a partnership is a terrible idea. If you ever want someone to talk you out of getting into a partnership, we’re here for you. That said, we’re dedicating today’s episode to sharing with you why it absolutely works for us. All of these points can make you into a better boss, a better partner, and a better friend. They’ll come in handy for a variety of settings. Honestly, seeking someone to fulfill some of these for you instead of seeking a partner will serve you really well. At the end of the day, you’re just trying to scratch the itch we’re talking about, and we’re here to tell you, it doesn’t have to be scratched by a partner! You might need a handful of people, instead of just one, but it’s worth it!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 02 Mar 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>All the Reasons We Love Our Partnership &amp; You Shouldn’t Do It Anyways</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>722</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you ever want someone to talk you out of getting into a partnership, we’re here for you. That said, we’re dedicating today’s episode to sharing with you why it absolutely works for us. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Most people who go into business are usually technicians who are really skilled at one area of the business. Learning to be a leader in your business is the most challenging part of running a business. Here’s the hierarchy we see: you’re a technician, and then hopefully you begin to love sales too. Then, hopefully, you begin to learn and love how to be a leader. If you don’t like sales, then we would say, don’t start a business. That doesn’t mean it’s impossible to find a way to sell that is in alignment with you, but you do absolutely have to find a way to like it.
During our last episode, we talked about all the reasons getting into a partnership is a terrible idea. If you ever want someone to talk you out of getting into a partnership, we’re here for you. That said, we’re dedicating today’s episode to sharing with you why it absolutely works for us. All of these points can make you into a better boss, a better partner, and a better friend. They’ll come in handy for a variety of settings. Honestly, seeking someone to fulfill some of these for you instead of seeking a partner will serve you really well. At the end of the day, you’re just trying to scratch the itch we’re talking about, and we’re here to tell you, it doesn’t have to be scratched by a partner! You might need a handful of people, instead of just one, but it’s worth it!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Most people who go into business are usually technicians who are really skilled at one area of the business. Learning to be a leader in your business is the most challenging part of running a business. Here’s the hierarchy we see: you’re a technician, and then hopefully you begin to love sales too. Then, hopefully, you begin to learn and love how to be a leader. If you don’t like sales, then we would say, don’t start a business. That doesn’t mean it’s impossible to find a way to sell that is in alignment with you, but you do absolutely have to find a way to like it.</p><p>During our last episode, we talked about all the reasons getting into a partnership is a terrible idea. If you ever want someone to talk you out of getting into a partnership, we’re here for you. That said, we’re dedicating today’s episode to sharing with you why it absolutely works for us. All of these points can make you into a better boss, a better partner, and a better friend. They’ll come in handy for a variety of settings. Honestly, seeking someone to fulfill some of these for you instead of seeking a partner will serve you really well. At the end of the day, you’re just trying to scratch the itch we’re talking about, and we’re here to tell you, it doesn’t have to be scratched by a partner! You might need a handful of people, instead of just one, but it’s worth it!  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2699</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[bdfd1a30-b3a7-11ed-b305-2b3f01e288cd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9084836647.mp3?updated=1677183698" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>721: How a Partnership Can Make Your Business Go Down in Flames</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-a-partnership-can-make-your-business-go-down-in-flames</link>
      <description>We’ve been asked countless times about our business partnership and our take on whether we feel that partnership is a good route. We’ve been in a partnership from the get-go, and clients are often curious as to how we manage communication and generally maintain a healthy working relationship. In this episode, we tackle the cons of partnership: why you should never get into one and why, and the next episode will explore the pros. Naturally, there are potential issues that can arise and cause tension in a partnership, and today we identify what to look out for if you’re considering partnering up with someone. You’ll discover a few of the, dare we say, many drawbacks of partnership, the requirements for maintaining a successful partnership, and the principal cause of partnerships (and subsequently, businesses) going down in flames!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 28 Feb 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How a Partnership Can Make Your Business Go Down in Flames</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>721</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, we tackle the cons of partnership: why you should never get into one and why, and the next episode will explore the pros. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’ve been asked countless times about our business partnership and our take on whether we feel that partnership is a good route. We’ve been in a partnership from the get-go, and clients are often curious as to how we manage communication and generally maintain a healthy working relationship. In this episode, we tackle the cons of partnership: why you should never get into one and why, and the next episode will explore the pros. Naturally, there are potential issues that can arise and cause tension in a partnership, and today we identify what to look out for if you’re considering partnering up with someone. You’ll discover a few of the, dare we say, many drawbacks of partnership, the requirements for maintaining a successful partnership, and the principal cause of partnerships (and subsequently, businesses) going down in flames!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’ve been asked countless times about our business partnership and our take on whether we feel that partnership is a good route. We’ve been in a partnership from the get-go, and clients are often curious as to how we manage communication and generally maintain a healthy working relationship. In this episode, we tackle the cons of partnership: why you should <em>never</em> get into one and why, and the next episode will explore the pros. Naturally, there are potential issues that can arise and cause tension in a partnership, and today we identify what to look out for if you’re considering partnering up with someone. You’ll discover a few of the, dare we say, many drawbacks of partnership, the requirements for maintaining a successful partnership, and the principal cause of partnerships (and subsequently, businesses) going down in flames!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2919</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d947a72c-b205-11ed-96f4-53d7887dc8b4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3505863527.mp3?updated=1677084191" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>720: Inspired to Do Less: A Lesson in Showing Up in Alignment</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/inspired-to-do-less-a-lesson-in-showing-up-in-alignment</link>
      <description>How to live more and do less is one of our favorite topics of conversation. If you’re a natural people pleaser, it can be really hard to consider taking some things off of your to-do list. But people-pleasing can be rooted in a manipulative reflex. It can also be a trauma response. During the conference that Abagail recently attended, she heard from three speakers with one underlying message - do less!
While this sounds counterintuitive, it's something we truly believe, and we want to share some of the nuggets of wisdom that helped us to prioritize this in our own lives, within a productivity-obsessed culture. Three inspiring speakers shared very different insights from their own personal journeys and the research they have done to understand the lives of others. Today, we’re sharing them with you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 23 Feb 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Inspired to Do Less: A Lesson in Showing Up in Alignment</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>720</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you’re a natural people pleaser, it can be really hard to consider taking some things off of your to-do list. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>How to live more and do less is one of our favorite topics of conversation. If you’re a natural people pleaser, it can be really hard to consider taking some things off of your to-do list. But people-pleasing can be rooted in a manipulative reflex. It can also be a trauma response. During the conference that Abagail recently attended, she heard from three speakers with one underlying message - do less!
While this sounds counterintuitive, it's something we truly believe, and we want to share some of the nuggets of wisdom that helped us to prioritize this in our own lives, within a productivity-obsessed culture. Three inspiring speakers shared very different insights from their own personal journeys and the research they have done to understand the lives of others. Today, we’re sharing them with you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>How to live more and do less is one of our favorite topics of conversation. If you’re a natural people pleaser, it can be really hard to consider taking some things off of your to-do list. But people-pleasing can be rooted in a manipulative reflex. It can also be a trauma response. During the conference that Abagail recently attended, she heard from three speakers with one underlying message - do less!</p><p>While this sounds counterintuitive, it's something we truly believe, and we want to share some of the nuggets of wisdom that helped us to prioritize this in our own lives, within a productivity-obsessed culture. Three inspiring speakers shared very different insights from their own personal journeys and the research they have done to understand the lives of others. Today, we’re sharing them with you.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3175</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5ef09688-af02-11ed-bde6-2fdf1464dd52]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4554887604.mp3?updated=1676668045" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>719: The Difference Between Growing and Scaling</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-difference-between-growing-and-scaling</link>
      <description>If you follow us on social media, you might have seen that we have been on quite the podcast roadshow! One theme that kept coming out of our conversations is the things that service providers need to think about before scaling. We realized we need to take a step back and talk about it: what is scaling actually?
A lot of business owners misconstrue scaling and growth. Today, we want to talk about the actual definitions of these two processes, and how you can apply them in your business. You can have one without the other. You can have both. You can have neither. What does that really look like, intentionally, in your business? Tune in to find out!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 21 Feb 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Difference Between Growing and Scaling</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>719</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>You can have one without the other. You can have both. You can have neither. What does that really look like, intentionally, in your business? </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you follow us on social media, you might have seen that we have been on quite the podcast roadshow! One theme that kept coming out of our conversations is the things that service providers need to think about before scaling. We realized we need to take a step back and talk about it: what is scaling actually?
A lot of business owners misconstrue scaling and growth. Today, we want to talk about the actual definitions of these two processes, and how you can apply them in your business. You can have one without the other. You can have both. You can have neither. What does that really look like, intentionally, in your business? Tune in to find out!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you follow us on social media, you might have seen that we have been on quite the podcast roadshow! One theme that kept coming out of our conversations is the things that service providers need to think about before scaling. We realized we need to take a step back and talk about it: what is scaling actually?</p><p>A lot of business owners misconstrue scaling and growth. Today, we want to talk about the actual definitions of these two processes, and how you can apply them in your business. You can have one without the other. You can have both. You can have neither. What does that really look like, intentionally, in your business? Tune in to find out!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2057</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cb54aace-ac93-11ed-8efa-ebced5473d5b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6587647222.mp3?updated=1676409348" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>718: 5 Signs You Might Need a New Website in 2023</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/5-signs-you-might-need-a-new-website-in-2023</link>
      <description>We’ve been building websites for over a decade and have really honed in on what’s working (and what isn’t) in the service world. Your website might look impressive, but if it’s not representative of who you are today, it’s not serving you. In this episode, we outline five signs it’s time to consider a new website design. And we’re not merely talking about branding! In many cases, major reconfigurations are in order, taking into account everything from your site architecture and user interface to your messaging; what you’re saying, how you’re saying it, and who you’re connecting it to. Tune in to find out which pitfalls to avoid and how best to make your website work for you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Feb 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Signs You Might Need a New Website in 2023</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>718</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Your website might look impressive, but if it’s not representative of who you are today, it’s not serving you.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’ve been building websites for over a decade and have really honed in on what’s working (and what isn’t) in the service world. Your website might look impressive, but if it’s not representative of who you are today, it’s not serving you. In this episode, we outline five signs it’s time to consider a new website design. And we’re not merely talking about branding! In many cases, major reconfigurations are in order, taking into account everything from your site architecture and user interface to your messaging; what you’re saying, how you’re saying it, and who you’re connecting it to. Tune in to find out which pitfalls to avoid and how best to make your website work for you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’ve been building websites for over a decade and have really honed in on what’s working (and what isn’t) in the service world. Your website might look impressive, but if it’s not representative of who you are today, it’s not serving you. In this episode, we outline five signs it’s time to consider a new website design. And we’re not merely talking about branding! In many cases, major reconfigurations are in order, taking into account everything from your site architecture and user interface to your messaging; what you’re saying, how you’re saying it, and who you’re connecting it to. Tune in to find out which pitfalls to avoid and how best to make your website work for you.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1877</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f6e120d8-a963-11ed-af8c-b7a12307934c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6400203895.mp3?updated=1676049498" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>717: The Hiring Strategy We Suggest for the 2023 Climate</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-hiring-strategy-we-suggest-for-the-2023-climate</link>
      <description>Today we are talking about hiring in the current economic climate. The biggest layoffs since 2008 are taking place at the moment, and layoffs in the technology industry have actually surpassed those that took place during the Great Recession.
The common trend that we are seeing amongst business owners who have been operating for more than four years is a collective desire to move away from being the “doers” in their business and shift towards a leadership position where they can focus more on strategy and creative direction. This means needing to hire people who can take up the “implementer” type of work. A lot of the work we are doing with our clients is around how to make this pivot as smooth and successful as possible! It’s a challenge, but it’s such an important move to make if you are going to take your business to the next level. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Feb 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Hiring Strategy We Suggest for the 2023 Climate</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>717</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>The biggest layoffs since 2008 are taking place at the moment, and layoffs in the technology industry have actually surpassed those that took place during the Great Recession.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are talking about hiring in the current economic climate. The biggest layoffs since 2008 are taking place at the moment, and layoffs in the technology industry have actually surpassed those that took place during the Great Recession.
The common trend that we are seeing amongst business owners who have been operating for more than four years is a collective desire to move away from being the “doers” in their business and shift towards a leadership position where they can focus more on strategy and creative direction. This means needing to hire people who can take up the “implementer” type of work. A lot of the work we are doing with our clients is around how to make this pivot as smooth and successful as possible! It’s a challenge, but it’s such an important move to make if you are going to take your business to the next level. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are talking about hiring in the current economic climate. The biggest layoffs since 2008 are taking place at the moment, and layoffs in the technology industry have actually surpassed those that took place during the Great Recession.</p><p>The common trend that we are seeing amongst business owners who have been operating for more than four years is a collective desire to move away from being the “doers” in their business and shift towards a leadership position where they can focus more on strategy and creative direction. This means needing to hire people who can take up the “implementer” type of work. A lot of the work we are doing with our clients is around how to make this pivot as smooth and successful as possible! It’s a challenge, but it’s such an important move to make if you are going to take your business to the next level. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2031</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9da79ed6-a89e-11ed-8fe5-97358491272b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7898395503.mp3?updated=1676048423" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>716: How to Identify and Prioritize Your Third Place</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-identify-and-prioritize-your-third-place</link>
      <description>Today’s discussion is about an idea that has had a resurgence recently for a number of reasons. The concept of finding a Third Place is nothing new! It’s actually been around for a long time; it is just popular at the moment. No matter how trendy it is, it is worthwhile to discuss and integrate into your life. The ‘Third Place’ was coined by a US sociologist who wrote a book called The Great Good Place describing a place outside of your home or work where you can relax.
The concept is simple. Your first place is your home; a private and domestic space. Your second space is your work. However, a lot of us share a first and second place, with workplaces increasingly choosing to be remote/hybrid over the last few years. We spend most of our lives at work or home so what do you do when you need a Third Place? Somewhere to feel comfortable and safe, and have fun with no judgment? With loneliness and isolation levels rising, we have to be mindful of this! 
In our opinion, a strong requirement is that your Third Place needs to be a public setting that hosts informal gatherings of people. Most people are loyal to their Third Place and often go there to socialize and unwind. It is also preferable that your Third Place is close to your home and workplace. This spot may be a coffee house, pub, bar, beauty salon, local library, dog park, or so much more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 09 Feb 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Identify and Prioritize Your Third Place</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>716</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle></itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today’s discussion is about an idea that has had a resurgence recently for a number of reasons. The concept of finding a Third Place is nothing new! It’s actually been around for a long time; it is just popular at the moment. No matter how trendy it is, it is worthwhile to discuss and integrate into your life. The ‘Third Place’ was coined by a US sociologist who wrote a book called The Great Good Place describing a place outside of your home or work where you can relax.
The concept is simple. Your first place is your home; a private and domestic space. Your second space is your work. However, a lot of us share a first and second place, with workplaces increasingly choosing to be remote/hybrid over the last few years. We spend most of our lives at work or home so what do you do when you need a Third Place? Somewhere to feel comfortable and safe, and have fun with no judgment? With loneliness and isolation levels rising, we have to be mindful of this! 
In our opinion, a strong requirement is that your Third Place needs to be a public setting that hosts informal gatherings of people. Most people are loyal to their Third Place and often go there to socialize and unwind. It is also preferable that your Third Place is close to your home and workplace. This spot may be a coffee house, pub, bar, beauty salon, local library, dog park, or so much more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s discussion is about an idea that has had a resurgence recently for a number of reasons. The concept of finding a Third Place is nothing new! It’s actually been around for a long time; it is just popular at the moment. No matter how trendy it is, it is worthwhile to discuss and integrate into your life. The ‘Third Place’ was coined by a US sociologist who wrote a book called <em>The Great Good Place </em>describing a place outside of your home or work where you can relax.</p><p>The concept is simple. Your first place is your home; a private and domestic space. Your second space is your work. However, a lot of us share a first and second place, with workplaces increasingly choosing to be remote/hybrid over the last few years. We spend most of our lives at work or home so what do you do when you need a Third Place? Somewhere to feel comfortable and safe, and have fun with no judgment? With loneliness and isolation levels rising, we have to be mindful of this! </p><p>In our opinion, a strong requirement is that your Third Place needs to be a public setting that hosts informal gatherings of people. Most people are loyal to their Third Place and often go there to socialize and unwind. It is also preferable that your Third Place is close to your home and workplace. This spot may be a coffee house, pub, bar, beauty salon, local library, dog park, or so much more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1947</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[27136458-a407-11ed-94f3-83454125176f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5038117058.mp3?updated=1675520497" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>715: 5 Ways to Build Trust in Your Growing Team</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/5-ways-to-build-trust-in-your-growing-team</link>
      <description>A lot of our clients are currently in a space where they are wanting to add to their team but have concerns over how to make the right choices while maintaining the character and values of their company. We’ve recently expanded our team, and while it has come with some lessons, it has been an incredibly rewarding experience for our company and our team! In today’s episode, we unpack the five biggest barriers to trust, as outlined in an article by Fast Company called 5 Barriers To Break in Order To Build Trust Between Coworkers. We discuss the rules that all high-trust companies follow to ensure employees feel secure and confident in their work environment. 
Growing your team can be intimidating, but with the right tools, you can do so in a way that is manageable and engenders a sense of trust amongst your team members. Tune in as we discuss how to foster an environment that is psychologically safe for employees, what you can do to ensure effective communication, how to make sure you hire and promote the right people, and much more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 07 Feb 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Ways to Build Trust in Your Growing Team</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>715</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We discuss the rules that all high-trust companies follow to ensure employees feel secure and confident in their work environment. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>A lot of our clients are currently in a space where they are wanting to add to their team but have concerns over how to make the right choices while maintaining the character and values of their company. We’ve recently expanded our team, and while it has come with some lessons, it has been an incredibly rewarding experience for our company and our team! In today’s episode, we unpack the five biggest barriers to trust, as outlined in an article by Fast Company called 5 Barriers To Break in Order To Build Trust Between Coworkers. We discuss the rules that all high-trust companies follow to ensure employees feel secure and confident in their work environment. 
Growing your team can be intimidating, but with the right tools, you can do so in a way that is manageable and engenders a sense of trust amongst your team members. Tune in as we discuss how to foster an environment that is psychologically safe for employees, what you can do to ensure effective communication, how to make sure you hire and promote the right people, and much more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A lot of our clients are currently in a space where they are wanting to add to their team but have concerns over how to make the right choices while maintaining the character and values of their company. We’ve recently expanded our team, and while it has come with some lessons, it has been an incredibly rewarding experience for our company and our team! In today’s episode, we unpack the five biggest barriers to trust, as outlined in an article by Fast Company called <em>5 Barriers To Break in Order To Build Trust Between Coworkers. </em>We<em> </em>discuss the rules that all high-trust companies follow to ensure employees feel secure and confident in their work environment. </p><p>Growing your team can be intimidating, but with the right tools, you can do so in a way that is manageable and engenders a sense of trust amongst your team members. Tune in as we discuss how to foster an environment that is psychologically safe for employees, what you can do to ensure effective communication, how to make sure you hire and promote the right people, and much more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2692</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[94bc3698-a19f-11ed-970a-032e9c02d736]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3855395954.mp3?updated=1675280083" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>714: 12 Questions to Ask Your Current or Future Bookkeeper to Make Sure You're a Good Fit</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/12-questions-to-ask-your-current-or-future-bookkeeper-to-make-sure-youre-a-good-fit</link>
      <description>We talk so often about financial literacy and creating sustainable businesses online that we’ve had a handful of clients ask us questions about bookkeeping. Based on all of the questions that come in, there are some things we want to share with our listeners about how to make sure that you have a bookkeeper that’s really well suited to you. Whether you’re interviewing someone for the first time or looking to get the most out of your existing relationship, this episode is for you.
So many of us really lean into trusting the experts in this industry, which is great! But over the last few years, there has been a new level of service that’s been expected and desired from clients. Now we want our financial professionals to go a little bit above and beyond just reconciling the books, to really help us understand and learn from our numbers. That is the biggest gap that we see happening for most business owners. That’s why we want to equip you with the best questions to ask to make sure that you find the right person to work alongside you; not just someone to “do it for you.”
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 02 Feb 2023 00:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>12 Questions to Ask Your Current or Future Bookkeeper to Make Sure You're a Good Fit</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>714</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We want our financial professionals to go a little bit above and beyond just reconciling the books, to really help us understand and learn from our numbers. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We talk so often about financial literacy and creating sustainable businesses online that we’ve had a handful of clients ask us questions about bookkeeping. Based on all of the questions that come in, there are some things we want to share with our listeners about how to make sure that you have a bookkeeper that’s really well suited to you. Whether you’re interviewing someone for the first time or looking to get the most out of your existing relationship, this episode is for you.
So many of us really lean into trusting the experts in this industry, which is great! But over the last few years, there has been a new level of service that’s been expected and desired from clients. Now we want our financial professionals to go a little bit above and beyond just reconciling the books, to really help us understand and learn from our numbers. That is the biggest gap that we see happening for most business owners. That’s why we want to equip you with the best questions to ask to make sure that you find the right person to work alongside you; not just someone to “do it for you.”
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We talk so often about financial literacy and creating sustainable businesses online that we’ve had a handful of clients ask us questions about bookkeeping. Based on all of the questions that come in, there are some things we want to share with our listeners about how to make sure that you have a bookkeeper that’s really well suited to you. Whether you’re interviewing someone for the first time or looking to get the most out of your existing relationship, this episode is for you.</p><p>So many of us really lean into trusting the experts in this industry, which is great! But over the last few years, there has been a new level of service that’s been expected and desired from clients. Now we want our financial professionals to go a little bit above and beyond just reconciling the books, to really help us understand and learn from our numbers. That is the biggest gap that we see happening for most business owners. That’s why we want to equip you with the best questions to ask to make sure that you find the right person to work alongside you; not just someone to “do it for you.”</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1917</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[780cb4a8-a17e-11ed-b22b-93169b8354f2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8863752598.mp3?updated=1675280183" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>713: What's the Difference Between Payroll, Accounting and Bookkeeping Softwares?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/whats-the-difference-between-payroll-accounting-and-bookkeeping-softwares</link>
      <description>Our mission in business is to help more women build profitable, sustainable businesses online. So much of that success is rooted in proper financial literacy. It’s so important to understand how to manage your finances so that you can take out enough money to live the life you want while at the same time ensuring that you leave enough money in the business so that it remains profitable in the long run. As you scale, money management becomes more complicated, but thankfully there are several different software for payroll, accounting, and bookkeeping that can help! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 31 Jan 2023 00:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What's the Difference Between Payroll, Accounting and Bookkeeping Softwares?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>713</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>As you scale, money management becomes more complicated, but thankfully there are several different software for payroll, accounting, and bookkeeping that can help!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Our mission in business is to help more women build profitable, sustainable businesses online. So much of that success is rooted in proper financial literacy. It’s so important to understand how to manage your finances so that you can take out enough money to live the life you want while at the same time ensuring that you leave enough money in the business so that it remains profitable in the long run. As you scale, money management becomes more complicated, but thankfully there are several different software for payroll, accounting, and bookkeeping that can help! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Our mission in business is to help more women build profitable, sustainable businesses online. So much of that success is rooted in proper financial literacy. It’s so important to understand how to manage your finances so that you can take out enough money to live the life you want while at the same time ensuring that you leave enough money in the business so that it remains profitable in the long run. As you scale, money management becomes more complicated, but thankfully there are several different software for payroll, accounting, and bookkeeping that can help! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1922</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[068c416a-9c09-11ed-86cb-0f3f1dbbdb52]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4777600365.mp3?updated=1674580594" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>712: Creating Habits that Stick</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-habits-that-stick</link>
      <description>The onset of a New Year is often accompanied by an inordinate amount of pressure. From the onslaught of 30-day health and wellness challenges to the call to “be more productive,” it seems like we are constantly being asked to do more and be better. But what does “better” mean exactly? And who are we doing it for? 
In today’s episode, we unpack how to create better habits that actually stick and discuss ways to bring positivity and intentionality to both our personal and professional lives. We discovered long ago that New Year's resolutions just aren’t designed for us and that everyone has a preference when it comes to building healthier habits. Tune in as we discuss everything from starting your morning with positive intentions to crafting a mission statement for your business, and much more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Jan 2023 00:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating Habits that Stick</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>712</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tune in as we discuss everything from starting your morning with positive intentions to crafting a mission statement for your business, and much more!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>The onset of a New Year is often accompanied by an inordinate amount of pressure. From the onslaught of 30-day health and wellness challenges to the call to “be more productive,” it seems like we are constantly being asked to do more and be better. But what does “better” mean exactly? And who are we doing it for? 
In today’s episode, we unpack how to create better habits that actually stick and discuss ways to bring positivity and intentionality to both our personal and professional lives. We discovered long ago that New Year's resolutions just aren’t designed for us and that everyone has a preference when it comes to building healthier habits. Tune in as we discuss everything from starting your morning with positive intentions to crafting a mission statement for your business, and much more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The onset of a New Year is often accompanied by an inordinate amount of pressure. From the onslaught of 30-day health and wellness challenges to the call to “be more productive,” it seems like we are constantly being asked to do more and be better. But what does “better” mean exactly? And who are we doing it for? </p><p>In today’s episode, we unpack how to create better habits that actually stick and discuss ways to bring positivity and intentionality to both our personal and professional lives. We discovered long ago that New Year's resolutions just aren’t designed for us and that everyone has a preference when it comes to building healthier habits. Tune in as we discuss everything from starting your morning with positive intentions to crafting a mission statement for your business, and much more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3125</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5a82d222-9905-11ed-8a02-6380ea9a8d8f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6590793094.mp3?updated=1674249362" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>711: What Does a Year of Maintenance Actually Mean?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-does-a-year-of-maintenance-actually-mean</link>
      <description>Anytime we have a big growth year, the year to follow is one to watch. It’s a lot of working on the business and less working in the business. We put systems back in place, bring operations up to date, and tackle all the things we were too busy to attend to the year before. We had to work some of this out while hiring seven employees. We find that identifying and communicating your focus for the year can make all the difference.
One recommendation we have is to figure out whether you’re in a red, yellow, or green year. Do you need to stop and do the bare minimum, maintain what you have, or go big or go home? Whichever method you choose, it feels better to remind yourself that you intentionally chose this as you are making decisions throughout the year. 
We mindfully decided that 2023 was going to be a yellow year for us. A year of maintenance; not to restructure, but to solidify existing structures and to solidify our team. We’re building a really strong foundation and creating a sustainable business. But what does it mean to focus on creating stability and maintaining what we have?
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 24 Jan 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Does a Year of Maintenance Actually Mean?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>711</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>It’s a lot of working on the business and less working in the business. We put systems back in place, bring operations up to date, and tackle all the things we were too busy to attend to the year before. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Anytime we have a big growth year, the year to follow is one to watch. It’s a lot of working on the business and less working in the business. We put systems back in place, bring operations up to date, and tackle all the things we were too busy to attend to the year before. We had to work some of this out while hiring seven employees. We find that identifying and communicating your focus for the year can make all the difference.
One recommendation we have is to figure out whether you’re in a red, yellow, or green year. Do you need to stop and do the bare minimum, maintain what you have, or go big or go home? Whichever method you choose, it feels better to remind yourself that you intentionally chose this as you are making decisions throughout the year. 
We mindfully decided that 2023 was going to be a yellow year for us. A year of maintenance; not to restructure, but to solidify existing structures and to solidify our team. We’re building a really strong foundation and creating a sustainable business. But what does it mean to focus on creating stability and maintaining what we have?
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Anytime we have a big growth year, the year to follow is one to watch. It’s a lot of working on the business and less working in the business. We put systems back in place, bring operations up to date, and tackle all the things we were too busy to attend to the year before. We had to work some of this out while hiring seven employees. We find that identifying and communicating your focus for the year can make all the difference.</p><p>One recommendation we have is to figure out whether you’re in a red, yellow, or green year. Do you need to stop and do the bare minimum, maintain what you have, or go big or go home? Whichever method you choose, it feels better to remind yourself that you intentionally chose this as you are making decisions throughout the year. </p><p>We mindfully decided that 2023 was going to be a yellow year for us. A year of maintenance; not to restructure, but to solidify existing structures and to solidify our team. We’re building a really strong foundation and creating a sustainable business. But what does it mean to focus on creating stability and maintaining what we have?</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1698</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f9f29a36-95b8-11ed-9ce1-ebf93f1e7e02]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3415359680.mp3?updated=1673886393" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>710: Lessons Learned + Successes of 2022</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/lessons-learned-and-successes-of-2022</link>
      <description>In the process of reflecting on our mistakes and successes for 2022, we realized that all of the “mistakes” (except one) that we’ve made, we would actually classify as lessons-learned instead. So, in this episode, we go over the key lessons that we’ve learned this past year and some of our most memorable success stories. Overall, this year was very challenging but we are feeling so good about what we’re creating, who is along for the ride with us, and what 2023 holds!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 19 Jan 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Lessons Learned + Successes of 2022</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>710</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In the process of reflecting on our mistakes and successes for 2022, we realized that all of the “mistakes” (except one) that we’ve made, we would actually classify as lessons-learned instead.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In the process of reflecting on our mistakes and successes for 2022, we realized that all of the “mistakes” (except one) that we’ve made, we would actually classify as lessons-learned instead. So, in this episode, we go over the key lessons that we’ve learned this past year and some of our most memorable success stories. Overall, this year was very challenging but we are feeling so good about what we’re creating, who is along for the ride with us, and what 2023 holds!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In the process of reflecting on our mistakes and successes for 2022, we realized that all of the “mistakes” (except one) that we’ve made, we would actually classify as lessons-learned instead. So, in this episode, we go over the key lessons that we’ve learned this past year and some of our most memorable success stories. Overall, this year was very challenging but we are feeling so good about what we’re creating, who is along for the ride with us, and what 2023 holds!  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2876</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c5f536a0-92aa-11ed-af6e-4395d0795887]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3031728219.mp3?updated=1673552169" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>709: How We Think AI Will Impact Our Industry in The Coming Years</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-we-think-ai-will-impact-our-industry-in-the-coming-years</link>
      <description>Recent developments in the AI space are undoubtedly going to change our world. The most significant shift is the launch of OpenAI’s ChatGPT which can create any content according to refined prompts. OpenAI has multiple other bots that utilize different databases, but ChatGPT is the one that got the most press and is publicly setting the precedent for what’s to come. We don’t believe that AI will take jobs immediately, but that it absolutely will in the long term. In this episode, we look at the impact of AI in the near future versus the long-term future, its implications and benefits, and the evolution of job creation in the new world!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 17 Jan 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How We Think AI Will Impact Our Industry in The Coming Years</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>709</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>The impact of AI in the near future versus the long-term future, its implications and benefits, and the evolution of job creation in the new world!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Recent developments in the AI space are undoubtedly going to change our world. The most significant shift is the launch of OpenAI’s ChatGPT which can create any content according to refined prompts. OpenAI has multiple other bots that utilize different databases, but ChatGPT is the one that got the most press and is publicly setting the precedent for what’s to come. We don’t believe that AI will take jobs immediately, but that it absolutely will in the long term. In this episode, we look at the impact of AI in the near future versus the long-term future, its implications and benefits, and the evolution of job creation in the new world!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Recent developments in the AI space are undoubtedly going to change our world. The most significant shift is the launch of OpenAI’s ChatGPT which can create any content according to refined prompts. OpenAI has multiple other bots that utilize different databases, but ChatGPT is the one that got the most press and is publicly setting the precedent for what’s to come. We don’t believe that AI will take jobs immediately, but that it absolutely will in the long term. In this episode, we look at the impact of AI in the near future versus the long-term future, its implications and benefits, and the evolution of job creation in the new world!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2068</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d894afee-929f-11ed-ab0d-4779315731ea]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5086050310.mp3?updated=1673551735" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>708: How to Identify Your Bottom Line and Other Ways to Be a Concise Leader</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-identify-your-bottom-line-and-other-ways-to-be-a-concise-leader</link>
      <description>Due largely to the media we’ve been consuming, attention spans are waning. Now, more than ever, we need to focus on concise communication at work so as not to waste time or lose focus, and to cater to neurodivergence. We recently had a conversation with our team about innovation, problem-solving, and presenting the root of those problems with solutions in a clear, concise way. The importance of utilizing meeting minutes as efficiently as possible is becoming more and more evident to us, and we want to promote the concise communication of new launch game plans, offers, marketing strategies, etc. This is a skill we could all use some practice in, and today’s episode is all about how to be more concise as a leader and how to train your team to identify and communicate the bottom line of their presentation and client communication.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 12 Jan 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Identify Your Bottom Line and Other Ways to Be a Concise Leader</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>708</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Due largely to the media we’ve been consuming, attention spans are waning. Now, more than ever, we need to focus on concise communication at work so as not to waste time or lose focus, and to cater to neurodivergence. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Due largely to the media we’ve been consuming, attention spans are waning. Now, more than ever, we need to focus on concise communication at work so as not to waste time or lose focus, and to cater to neurodivergence. We recently had a conversation with our team about innovation, problem-solving, and presenting the root of those problems with solutions in a clear, concise way. The importance of utilizing meeting minutes as efficiently as possible is becoming more and more evident to us, and we want to promote the concise communication of new launch game plans, offers, marketing strategies, etc. This is a skill we could all use some practice in, and today’s episode is all about how to be more concise as a leader and how to train your team to identify and communicate the bottom line of their presentation and client communication.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Due largely to the media we’ve been consuming, attention spans are waning. Now, more than ever, we need to focus on concise communication at work so as not to waste time or lose focus, and to cater to neurodivergence. We recently had a conversation with our team about innovation, problem-solving, and presenting the root of those problems with solutions in a clear, concise way. The importance of utilizing meeting minutes as efficiently as possible is becoming more and more evident to us, and we want to promote the concise communication of new launch game plans, offers, marketing strategies, etc. This is a skill we could all use some practice in, and today’s episode is all about how to be more concise as a leader and how to train your team to identify and communicate the bottom line of their presentation and client communication.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2257</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d43a3a04-808e-11ed-897c-73e5a5ad6b15]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5881719979.mp3?updated=1671559651" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>707: The Missing Element When It Comes to Fin Lit for Femme Business Owners</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-missing-element-when-it-comes-to-fin-lit-for-femme-business-owners</link>
      <description>We know that so many business owners at all stages of their growth do not understand their finances and we can see how much it affects their businesses! We want to talk about what understanding your numbers will do for you and why it’s such an important thing to prioritize. Often, the anxiety that discussing finances causes is rooted in a lack of financial literacy and the attachment we have to money that results in avoidance. 
Sometimes these kinds of conversations will be uncomfortable, but that doesn’t necessarily mean that they are bad. We want to remind you that our mission at Boss Project is to equip more women and femmes with the financial knowledge that they need to build a sustainable business that supports them financially and soulfully. These things are only possible with a level of financial literacy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 10 Jan 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Missing Element When It Comes to Fin Lit for Femme Business Owners</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>707</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We want to talk about what understanding your numbers will do for you and why it’s such an important thing to prioritize.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We know that so many business owners at all stages of their growth do not understand their finances and we can see how much it affects their businesses! We want to talk about what understanding your numbers will do for you and why it’s such an important thing to prioritize. Often, the anxiety that discussing finances causes is rooted in a lack of financial literacy and the attachment we have to money that results in avoidance. 
Sometimes these kinds of conversations will be uncomfortable, but that doesn’t necessarily mean that they are bad. We want to remind you that our mission at Boss Project is to equip more women and femmes with the financial knowledge that they need to build a sustainable business that supports them financially and soulfully. These things are only possible with a level of financial literacy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We know that so many business owners at all stages of their growth do not understand their finances and we can see how much it affects their businesses! We want to talk about what understanding your numbers will do for you and why it’s such an important thing to prioritize. Often, the anxiety that discussing finances causes is rooted in a lack of financial literacy and the attachment we have to money that results in avoidance. </p><p>Sometimes these kinds of conversations will be uncomfortable, but that doesn’t necessarily mean that they are bad. We want to remind you that our mission at Boss Project is to equip more women and femmes with the financial knowledge that they need to build a sustainable business that supports them financially and soulfully. These things are only possible with a level of financial literacy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2152</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[46b7f3f0-808a-11ed-8dd0-c7a2ea78560c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8901046745.mp3?updated=1671559231" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>706: If We Were Starting Our Business Over Today, Here's What We'd Do Differently</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/if-we-were-starting-our-business-over-today-heres-what-wed-do-differently</link>
      <description>What would you do if your business disappeared overnight but your skills and experiences remained? How would you choose your product or service? Would you want to play a similar role? Should you even remain in the same industry? Today on the show we share our answers to all these complicated questions, and more, as we reflect on what we’ve learned from building a business and running it for almost ten years! 
In our conversation, we reflect on the current economic climate, what we learned from starting a business during a recession, and what we would want from a second business after building a company based on passion from the ground up. Tune in as we indulge in a conceptual exercise examining what we’ve learned over the past few years and what we would do differently for our next business, and why! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 05 Jan 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>If We Were Starting Our Business Over Today, Here's What We'd Do Differently</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>706</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>What would you do if your business disappeared overnight but your skills and experiences remained? How would you choose your product or service? Would you want to play a similar role? Should you even remain in the same industry? </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What would you do if your business disappeared overnight but your skills and experiences remained? How would you choose your product or service? Would you want to play a similar role? Should you even remain in the same industry? Today on the show we share our answers to all these complicated questions, and more, as we reflect on what we’ve learned from building a business and running it for almost ten years! 
In our conversation, we reflect on the current economic climate, what we learned from starting a business during a recession, and what we would want from a second business after building a company based on passion from the ground up. Tune in as we indulge in a conceptual exercise examining what we’ve learned over the past few years and what we would do differently for our next business, and why! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What would you do if your business disappeared overnight but your skills and experiences remained? How would you choose your product or service? Would you want to play a similar role? Should you even remain in the same industry? Today on the show we share our answers to all these complicated questions, and more, as we reflect on what we’ve learned from building a business and running it for almost ten years! </p><p>In our conversation, we reflect on the current economic climate, what we learned from starting a business during a recession, and what we would want from a second business after building a company based on passion from the ground up. Tune in as we indulge in a conceptual exercise examining what we’ve learned over the past few years and what we would do differently for our next business, and why! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2115</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[97cc2528-807a-11ed-a4ed-6b8a5ef5de53]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9393280888.mp3?updated=1671550846" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>705: Our Company Motto and What it Means for You</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/our-company-motto-and-what-it-means-for-you</link>
      <description>Today, we’re using you guys for practice. We have a workshop meeting coming up with the team at Boss Project to go over some updates we are doing to our team Wiki page, practices for problem-solving and other aspects, and we wanted to share some of that information with our listeners. Consider these the highlights of what we’ve learned about innovation, problem-solving and creative thinking.
This episode is best suited if you also listen to our recent episode on the four types of problem solvers that you need in your team. You don’t necessarily need to listen to it first, but it will help you. In the last year, we’ve been able to put definition to the culture behind the scenes at Boss Project, making our mission and vision a more prominent part of the work that we do. We talked about creating a motto to highlight the areas we really want to enhance. How can you share your philosophy with your team in a meaningful way?
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 03 Jan 2023 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our Company Motto and What it Means for You</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>705</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Highlights of what we’ve learned about innovation, problem-solving, and creative thinking.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we’re using you guys for practice. We have a workshop meeting coming up with the team at Boss Project to go over some updates we are doing to our team Wiki page, practices for problem-solving and other aspects, and we wanted to share some of that information with our listeners. Consider these the highlights of what we’ve learned about innovation, problem-solving and creative thinking.
This episode is best suited if you also listen to our recent episode on the four types of problem solvers that you need in your team. You don’t necessarily need to listen to it first, but it will help you. In the last year, we’ve been able to put definition to the culture behind the scenes at Boss Project, making our mission and vision a more prominent part of the work that we do. We talked about creating a motto to highlight the areas we really want to enhance. How can you share your philosophy with your team in a meaningful way?
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we’re using you guys for practice. We have a workshop meeting coming up with the team at Boss Project to go over some updates we are doing to our team Wiki page, practices for problem-solving and other aspects, and we wanted to share some of that information with our listeners. Consider these the highlights of what we’ve learned about innovation, problem-solving and creative thinking.</p><p>This episode is best suited if you also listen to our recent episode on the four types of problem solvers that you need in your team. You don’t necessarily need to listen to it first, but it will help you. In the last year, we’ve been able to put definition to the culture behind the scenes at Boss Project, making our mission and vision a more prominent part of the work that we do. We talked about creating a motto to highlight the areas we really want to enhance. How can you share your philosophy with your team in a meaningful way?</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2660</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1ba28494-7fec-11ed-90ae-63e3582fc90e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1748566213.mp3?updated=1671550700" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>704: Two Big Announcements for 2023</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/two-big-announcements-for-2023</link>
      <description>We usually share a free-balling, brain-storming episode around this time of year about what we want the next year to look like. We are so ecstatic (and intimidated) about some of our ideas and we want to document them for you all to hear! This year, we dove into having a hybrid company really heavily but going into 2023, we have to ask ourselves what the right mix is for our team. 
We know how stressful it can be to figure out how projects are going to happen and we encourage you to plan for the new year with flexibility. Find the balance between having a plan and being flexible to allow for inevitable changes that you can’t predict. Be prepared that your plan may not happen exactly the way you want it to. Spend your planning time looking at where your leads are coming from and what makes sense for your business based on the leads that you have. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 29 Dec 2022 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Two Big Announcements for 2023</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>704</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are so ecstatic (and intimidated) about some of our ideas and we want to document them for you all to hear! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We usually share a free-balling, brain-storming episode around this time of year about what we want the next year to look like. We are so ecstatic (and intimidated) about some of our ideas and we want to document them for you all to hear! This year, we dove into having a hybrid company really heavily but going into 2023, we have to ask ourselves what the right mix is for our team. 
We know how stressful it can be to figure out how projects are going to happen and we encourage you to plan for the new year with flexibility. Find the balance between having a plan and being flexible to allow for inevitable changes that you can’t predict. Be prepared that your plan may not happen exactly the way you want it to. Spend your planning time looking at where your leads are coming from and what makes sense for your business based on the leads that you have. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We usually share a free-balling, brain-storming episode around this time of year about what we want the next year to look like. We are so ecstatic (and intimidated) about some of our ideas and we want to document them for you all to hear! This year, we dove into having a hybrid company really heavily but going into 2023, we have to ask ourselves what the right mix is for our team. </p><p>We know how stressful it can be to figure out how projects are going to happen and we encourage you to plan for the new year with flexibility. Find the balance between having a plan and being flexible to allow for inevitable changes that you can’t predict. Be prepared that your plan may not happen exactly the way you want it to. Spend your planning time looking at where your leads are coming from and what makes sense for your business based on the leads that you have. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2088</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5eed80a6-7fe1-11ed-abf9-17431ce06525]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8158687070.mp3?updated=1671550557" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>703: Before You Create a New Offer, Listen to This</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/before-you-create-a-new-offer-listen-to-this</link>
      <description>Podcast Description
There have been a lot of conversations in our incubator coaching lately about what to do when leads are lower. But that’s only part of the conversation. Today, we want to focus on how to know what’s right when you’re considering different ideas to pursue. When we’re in a rut, we tend to think that it’s time to think far outside of the box. Innovation is amazing when you’re in a season to be able to create something new and it makes sense, but when you need a cash injection, or you want to start the year off with a bang, it’s not necessarily the best time to start with something brand new!
What if, instead, you looked for ways to do the same thing, but in a different room? Could you do the same thing through a different lens? At the end of the day, if you already have systems and processes around the thing that you have been delivering, selling, and pricing, it’s so much easier to stay in that lane. Don't reinvent the wheel! While it might sound counterintuitive, we encourage you not to think outside the box, but to spin it in a different direction. It’s the same thing, just from a different viewpoint!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 27 Dec 2022 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Before You Create a New Offer, Listen to This</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>703</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How to know what’s right when you’re considering different ideas to pursue; if you need a cash injection fast, it's not necessarily the best time to start with something brand new!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Podcast Description
There have been a lot of conversations in our incubator coaching lately about what to do when leads are lower. But that’s only part of the conversation. Today, we want to focus on how to know what’s right when you’re considering different ideas to pursue. When we’re in a rut, we tend to think that it’s time to think far outside of the box. Innovation is amazing when you’re in a season to be able to create something new and it makes sense, but when you need a cash injection, or you want to start the year off with a bang, it’s not necessarily the best time to start with something brand new!
What if, instead, you looked for ways to do the same thing, but in a different room? Could you do the same thing through a different lens? At the end of the day, if you already have systems and processes around the thing that you have been delivering, selling, and pricing, it’s so much easier to stay in that lane. Don't reinvent the wheel! While it might sound counterintuitive, we encourage you not to think outside the box, but to spin it in a different direction. It’s the same thing, just from a different viewpoint!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<h1>Podcast Description</h1><p>There have been a lot of conversations in our incubator coaching lately about what to do when leads are lower. But that’s only part of the conversation. Today, we want to focus on how to know what’s right when you’re considering different ideas to pursue. When we’re in a rut, we tend to think that it’s time to think far outside of the box. Innovation is amazing when you’re in a season to be able to create something new and it makes sense, but when you need a cash injection, or you want to start the year off with a bang, it’s not necessarily the best time to start with something brand new!</p><p>What if, instead, you looked for ways to do the same thing, but in a different room? Could you do the same thing through a different lens? At the end of the day, if you already have systems and processes around the thing that you have been delivering, selling, and pricing, it’s so much easier to stay in that lane. Don't reinvent the wheel! While it might sound counterintuitive, we encourage you not to think outside the box, but to spin it in a different direction. It’s the same thing, just from a different viewpoint!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2041</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[030ffeac-7d71-11ed-a034-47bf7d005169]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9786428530.mp3?updated=1671216893" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>702: The Importance of Clearly Defining Your Role as The Founder of Your Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/importance-of-clearly-defining-your-role-as-the-founder-of-your-business</link>
      <description>Today’s episode is all about how to define your role in your company. As we look towards the start of a new year, we always like to comb through the job descriptions of the people on our team, as well as ourselves. What we’ve noticed is that defining the role of founders and CEOs is something that is often overlooked. So, we are intentional about taking the time to get really clear on the things that we need to do versus the things that we want to do so that we can find a healthy balance between the two! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 22 Dec 2022 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Importance of Clearly Defining Your Role as The Founder of Your Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>702</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We share how we get clear about the things we need to do versus the things we want to do so we can find a healthy balance between the two.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today’s episode is all about how to define your role in your company. As we look towards the start of a new year, we always like to comb through the job descriptions of the people on our team, as well as ourselves. What we’ve noticed is that defining the role of founders and CEOs is something that is often overlooked. So, we are intentional about taking the time to get really clear on the things that we need to do versus the things that we want to do so that we can find a healthy balance between the two! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s episode is all about how to define your role in your company. As we look towards the start of a new year, we always like to comb through the job descriptions of the people on our team, as well as ourselves. What we’ve noticed is that defining the role of founders and CEOs is something that is often overlooked. So, we are intentional about taking the time to get really clear on the things that we need to do versus the things that we want to do so that we can find a healthy balance between the two! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2121</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cafec8a6-7bca-11ed-8fe2-63b5aa80b3bd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8699933839.mp3?updated=1671035389" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>701: 9 Operational Changes, Tweaks and Eliminations Team Boss Project Will See in 2023</title>
      <description>There are three things we’re eager to look into for 2023. The first being some version of the four-day workweek. For three years, we had Mondays off, but we reverted to five days a week as our business grew. Now we’re tentatively thinking about reintroducing the four-day work week, but a hybrid version of it, as we don’t want to put pressure on our team to have to hustle to get everything done over a shorter time frame. We’d like to tease a four-day workweek with the fifth day dedicated to creative work.
The next is our team retreat. We are adamant about making it happen as in-person connections are irreplaceable. We want to give our team opportunities to bond without putting pressure on getting too much done. 
Finally, we want to look at restructuring our department meetings (and meetings in general). Meetings impact the energy and productivity level of people differently and we want to make sure we’re using our time effectively. We have impactful, actionable meetings, yet they are still draining for a lot of our team. We want to honor everyone’s energy and find the balance of what supports both us and our team.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 20 Dec 2022 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>9 Operational Changes, Tweaks and Eliminations Team Boss Project Will See in 2023</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>701</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>A four-day workweek, team retreat, restructured meetings and more! Find out how we plan to support both our business and team!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There are three things we’re eager to look into for 2023. The first being some version of the four-day workweek. For three years, we had Mondays off, but we reverted to five days a week as our business grew. Now we’re tentatively thinking about reintroducing the four-day work week, but a hybrid version of it, as we don’t want to put pressure on our team to have to hustle to get everything done over a shorter time frame. We’d like to tease a four-day workweek with the fifth day dedicated to creative work.
The next is our team retreat. We are adamant about making it happen as in-person connections are irreplaceable. We want to give our team opportunities to bond without putting pressure on getting too much done. 
Finally, we want to look at restructuring our department meetings (and meetings in general). Meetings impact the energy and productivity level of people differently and we want to make sure we’re using our time effectively. We have impactful, actionable meetings, yet they are still draining for a lot of our team. We want to honor everyone’s energy and find the balance of what supports both us and our team.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There are three things we’re eager to look into for 2023. The first being some version of the four-day workweek. For three years, we had Mondays off, but we reverted to five days a week as our business grew. Now we’re tentatively thinking about reintroducing the four-day work week, but a hybrid version of it, as we don’t want to put pressure on our team to have to hustle to get everything done over a shorter time frame. We’d like to tease a four-day workweek with the fifth day dedicated to creative work.</p><p>The next is our team retreat. We are adamant about making it happen as in-person connections are irreplaceable. We want to give our team opportunities to bond without putting pressure on getting too much done. </p><p>Finally, we want to look at restructuring our department meetings (and meetings in general). Meetings impact the energy and productivity level of people differently and we want to make sure we’re using our time effectively. We have impactful, actionable meetings, yet they are still draining for a lot of our team. We want to honor everyone’s energy and find the balance of what supports both us and our team.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2455</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5508fc7a-69e1-11ed-920b-339cb204944d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6980762150.mp3?updated=1669068900" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>700: How to Encourage Your Team to Be Problem Solvers</title>
      <description>If you dream of having a team full of problem solvers, you’ve come to the right place. In the previous episode, we talked about the four types of problem solvers that your team needs. In this episode, we investigate how to encourage your employees to be problem solvers in the first place. Efficiency is championed in the workplace, and the number one thing to get in the way of it is the brake of identifying and solving problems. For this reason, there is often a lot of resistance to turning the focus onto innovation. Yes, it takes time, but it’s worth it! Tune in to hear our advice on creating space for innovation and incentivizing problem-solving. We leave you with seven practical ways to promote a culture of creativity and innovation within your team!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 15 Dec 2022 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Encourage Your Team to Be Problem Solvers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>700</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tune in to hear our advice on creating space for innovation and incentivizing problem-solving. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you dream of having a team full of problem solvers, you’ve come to the right place. In the previous episode, we talked about the four types of problem solvers that your team needs. In this episode, we investigate how to encourage your employees to be problem solvers in the first place. Efficiency is championed in the workplace, and the number one thing to get in the way of it is the brake of identifying and solving problems. For this reason, there is often a lot of resistance to turning the focus onto innovation. Yes, it takes time, but it’s worth it! Tune in to hear our advice on creating space for innovation and incentivizing problem-solving. We leave you with seven practical ways to promote a culture of creativity and innovation within your team!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you dream of having a team full of problem solvers, you’ve come to the right place. In the previous episode, we talked about the four types of problem solvers that your team needs. In this episode, we investigate how to encourage your employees to <em>be </em>problem solvers in the first place. Efficiency is championed in the workplace, and the number one thing to get in the way of it is the brake of identifying and solving problems. For this reason, there is often a lot of resistance to turning the focus onto innovation. Yes, it takes time, but it’s worth it! Tune in to hear our advice on creating space for innovation and incentivizing problem-solving. We leave you with seven practical ways to promote a culture of creativity and innovation within your team!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2280</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7430227a-69de-11ed-8d20-6f178aceda21]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8248475928.mp3?updated=1669068641" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>699: The 4 Types of Problem Solvers Your Team Needs</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-4-types-of-problem-solvers-your-team-needs</link>
      <description>We recently came across an article about the types of problem solvers (or innovators) that exist within a business. In this episode, we are going to be sharing a breakdown of this article. The idea is to encourage you, as a leader, to look at your team and determine whether it is diverse enough in terms of the perspectives and roles as well as whether it is cognitively diverse enough. This is such an important conversation because there are certain things that will be innately easy for some people and much harder for others and when you understand the dynamics of your team, everyone can help each other out. For anyone looking to grow their team in the coming year, this episode is for you! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 13 Dec 2022 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The 4 Types of Problem Solvers Your Team Needs</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>699</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Look at your team and determine whether it is diverse enough in terms of the perspectives and roles as well as whether it is cognitively diverse enough. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We recently came across an article about the types of problem solvers (or innovators) that exist within a business. In this episode, we are going to be sharing a breakdown of this article. The idea is to encourage you, as a leader, to look at your team and determine whether it is diverse enough in terms of the perspectives and roles as well as whether it is cognitively diverse enough. This is such an important conversation because there are certain things that will be innately easy for some people and much harder for others and when you understand the dynamics of your team, everyone can help each other out. For anyone looking to grow their team in the coming year, this episode is for you! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We recently came across an article about the types of problem solvers (or innovators) that exist within a business. In this episode, we are going to be sharing a breakdown of this article. The idea is to encourage you, as a leader, to look at your team and determine whether it is diverse enough in terms of the perspectives and roles as well as whether it is cognitively diverse enough. This is such an important conversation because there are certain things that will be innately easy for some people and much harder for others and when you understand the dynamics of your team, everyone can help each other out. For anyone looking to grow their team in the coming year, this episode is for you! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2652</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2e4545e2-69d9-11ed-842c-1b08eb8f90b6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7348007557.mp3?updated=1670343704" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>698: How to Grow Your Business Through Hiring Well with The Founder of Hello Savvy Abbey Ashley</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-grow-your-business-through-hiring-well-with-abbey-ashley</link>
      <description>Do you find hiring daunting? Do you want to find the right people that will grow your business but don't know how? Then this episode is for you! It’s been a minute since we’ve had a guest on the Strategy HourPodcast, but we absolutely had to bring our friend Abbey Ashley on so that you can hear more of what she's got going on with hiring, and get some tips from a multi million dollar CEO on how she has navigated hiring in her business, along with a few personal anecdotes from our experience over at BossProject.
Abbey Ashley is founder and CEO of Hello Savvy, a new hiring platform that focuses on culture and community. She’s been named one of Forbes Next 1000 Up and Coming Entrepreneurs and Inc.Magazine’s Top 100 Female Entrepreneurs, and Hello Savvy’s sister company, the Virtual Savvy has been placed on Inc.’s 5000 List in 2021 and 2022, along with being named one of Inc.’s best places to work. With a focus on team culture and a ‘serve first’ motto among her team, her team went from 6 to 14 team members and over 3 million in annual revenue.
Her passion is to help other entrepreneurs creatively carve out their own path forward via online business, and today we are talking about hiring well so that you can grow your business. We are sharing a lot of mistakes and some of the ways we needed to grow in order to fully step into our roles as leaders and co-founders. We touch on how to navigate some of the tough decisions that come with hiring, and how to truly understand your role as a co-founder and how that shifts as you hire, and how to do all of that while you focus on facts and feelings, which is something we love to do around here!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 08 Dec 2022 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Grow Your Business Through Hiring Well with The Founder of Hello Savvy Abbey Ashley</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>698</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Do you find hiring daunting? Do you want to find the right people that will grow your business but don't know how? Then this episode is for you! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Do you find hiring daunting? Do you want to find the right people that will grow your business but don't know how? Then this episode is for you! It’s been a minute since we’ve had a guest on the Strategy HourPodcast, but we absolutely had to bring our friend Abbey Ashley on so that you can hear more of what she's got going on with hiring, and get some tips from a multi million dollar CEO on how she has navigated hiring in her business, along with a few personal anecdotes from our experience over at BossProject.
Abbey Ashley is founder and CEO of Hello Savvy, a new hiring platform that focuses on culture and community. She’s been named one of Forbes Next 1000 Up and Coming Entrepreneurs and Inc.Magazine’s Top 100 Female Entrepreneurs, and Hello Savvy’s sister company, the Virtual Savvy has been placed on Inc.’s 5000 List in 2021 and 2022, along with being named one of Inc.’s best places to work. With a focus on team culture and a ‘serve first’ motto among her team, her team went from 6 to 14 team members and over 3 million in annual revenue.
Her passion is to help other entrepreneurs creatively carve out their own path forward via online business, and today we are talking about hiring well so that you can grow your business. We are sharing a lot of mistakes and some of the ways we needed to grow in order to fully step into our roles as leaders and co-founders. We touch on how to navigate some of the tough decisions that come with hiring, and how to truly understand your role as a co-founder and how that shifts as you hire, and how to do all of that while you focus on facts and feelings, which is something we love to do around here!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Do you find hiring daunting? Do you want to find the right people that will grow your business but don't know how? Then this episode is for you! It’s been a minute since we’ve had a guest on the Strategy HourPodcast, but we absolutely had to bring our friend Abbey Ashley on so that you can hear more of what she's got going on with hiring, and get some tips from a multi million dollar CEO on how she has navigated hiring in her business, along with a few personal anecdotes from our experience over at BossProject.</p><p>Abbey Ashley is founder and CEO of Hello Savvy, a new hiring platform that focuses on culture and community. She’s been named one of Forbes Next 1000 Up and Coming Entrepreneurs and Inc.Magazine’s Top 100 Female Entrepreneurs, and Hello Savvy’s sister company, the Virtual Savvy has been placed on Inc.’s 5000 List in 2021 and 2022, along with being named one of Inc.’s best places to work. With a focus on team culture and a ‘serve first’ motto among her team, her team went from 6 to 14 team members and over 3 million in annual revenue.</p><p>Her passion is to help other entrepreneurs creatively carve out their own path forward via online business, and today we are talking about hiring well so that you can grow your business. We are sharing a lot of mistakes and some of the ways we needed to grow in order to fully step into our roles as leaders and co-founders. We touch on how to navigate some of the tough decisions that come with hiring, and how to truly understand your role as a co-founder and how that shifts as you hire, and how to do all of that while you focus on facts and feelings, which is something we love to do around here!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2692</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6ac9eabe-65f5-11ed-91bd-ffd46cc61be2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1599930444.mp3?updated=1669061612" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>697: The New Phases of Adulthood: how to Figure Out What You Actually Want</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-new-phases-of-adulthood-how-to-figure-out-what-you-actually-want</link>
      <description>Have you ever felt that you’ve run out of boxes to check? It can feel unsettling not to be clear on what you should be pursuing, especially as you get older. We were pretty surprised to find out that most of the things we strive for as we age are actually developmental milestones. We learned that, with the passing of each decade, there needs to be a realignment to work toward a new set of goals. There’s a progression from building your career in your twenties, to finding life alignment in your thirties, connecting to passion and purpose in your forties, and building a legacy in your fifties and beyond. Striving to make these things a priority is a natural part of the life cycle. 
We were also surprised to learn that one-third of Americans say that they would rather give up sex than their cell phones. What this tells us is that we are all pretty accustomed to hooking ourselves to other things. If we’re not busy, we’re on our phones. If we’re not on our phones, we’re watching TV. What would we want to do if we put down our phones a little bit more? That’s the part that so many women struggle with. We all want to have a life, but how many of us know what that would look like for us? We have conditioned ourselves to not be okay with being bored. But only in boredom, does creativity strike. What do you want your life to look like? Do you know what it looks like to slow down?
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 06 Dec 2022 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The New Phases of Adulthood: how to Figure Out What You Actually Want</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>697</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>It can feel unsettling not to be clear on what you should be pursuing, especially as you get older. With the passing of each decade, there needs to be a realignment to work toward a new set of goals. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you ever felt that you’ve run out of boxes to check? It can feel unsettling not to be clear on what you should be pursuing, especially as you get older. We were pretty surprised to find out that most of the things we strive for as we age are actually developmental milestones. We learned that, with the passing of each decade, there needs to be a realignment to work toward a new set of goals. There’s a progression from building your career in your twenties, to finding life alignment in your thirties, connecting to passion and purpose in your forties, and building a legacy in your fifties and beyond. Striving to make these things a priority is a natural part of the life cycle. 
We were also surprised to learn that one-third of Americans say that they would rather give up sex than their cell phones. What this tells us is that we are all pretty accustomed to hooking ourselves to other things. If we’re not busy, we’re on our phones. If we’re not on our phones, we’re watching TV. What would we want to do if we put down our phones a little bit more? That’s the part that so many women struggle with. We all want to have a life, but how many of us know what that would look like for us? We have conditioned ourselves to not be okay with being bored. But only in boredom, does creativity strike. What do you want your life to look like? Do you know what it looks like to slow down?
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you ever felt that you’ve run out of boxes to check? It can feel unsettling not to be clear on what you should be pursuing, especially as you get older. We were pretty surprised to find out that most of the things we strive for as we age are actually developmental milestones. We learned that, with the passing of each decade, there needs to be a realignment to work toward a new set of goals. There’s a progression from building your career in your twenties, to finding life alignment in your thirties, connecting to passion and purpose in your forties, and building a legacy in your fifties and beyond. Striving to make these things a priority is a natural part of the life cycle. </p><p>We were also surprised to learn that one-third of Americans say that they would rather give up sex than their cell phones. What this tells us is that we are all pretty accustomed to hooking ourselves to other things. If we’re not busy, we’re on our phones. If we’re not on our phones, we’re watching TV. What would we want to do if we put down our phones a little bit more? That’s the part that so many women struggle with. We all want to have a life, but how many of us know what that would look like for us? We have conditioned ourselves to not be okay with being bored. But only in boredom, does creativity strike. What do you want your life to look like? Do you know what it looks like to slow down?</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2413</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8323aea8-65ee-11ed-a6d8-0ff3b897e14e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4468928956.mp3?updated=1669061473" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>696: Use These Conversation Strategies We Learned From Love is Blind Before Your Next Networking Event</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/use-these-conversation-strategies-we-learned-from-love-is-blind</link>
      <description>We’re sure everyone is familiar with the popular Netflix reality TV show, Love is Blind, but did you know that you can actually learn some tools for having successful conversations at your next networking event from the show? No, these conversations won’t end in a terrifying wedding whereby all your guests anxiously await the ‘I do’ or the ‘I don’t.’ However, you could stand to create incredibly meaningful professional relationships and even friendships. You will also develop your social skills and self-esteem which will have a positive impact on your business! 
We know that networking events can be awkward, daunting, and straight-up terrifying and we want to help you find a way to strike up effective conversations with the right people. Although you may be tempted to word-vomit your elevator pitch, we have some better ideas that will lead to more authentic connections. In this episode, we break down how we can learn to have conversations again and conserve energy by interacting with the right people in the right roles. Tune in to find out how to know your type, know your limits, and know what you’re going into networking events for!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 01 Dec 2022 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Use These Conversation Strategies We Learned From Love is Blind Before Your Next Networking Event</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>696</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Create incredibly meaningful professional relationships, friendships and develop your social skills and self-esteem which will have a positive impact on your business! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’re sure everyone is familiar with the popular Netflix reality TV show, Love is Blind, but did you know that you can actually learn some tools for having successful conversations at your next networking event from the show? No, these conversations won’t end in a terrifying wedding whereby all your guests anxiously await the ‘I do’ or the ‘I don’t.’ However, you could stand to create incredibly meaningful professional relationships and even friendships. You will also develop your social skills and self-esteem which will have a positive impact on your business! 
We know that networking events can be awkward, daunting, and straight-up terrifying and we want to help you find a way to strike up effective conversations with the right people. Although you may be tempted to word-vomit your elevator pitch, we have some better ideas that will lead to more authentic connections. In this episode, we break down how we can learn to have conversations again and conserve energy by interacting with the right people in the right roles. Tune in to find out how to know your type, know your limits, and know what you’re going into networking events for!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’re sure everyone is familiar with the popular Netflix reality TV show, <em>Love is Blind</em>, but did you know that you can actually learn some tools for having successful conversations at your next networking event from the show? No, these conversations won’t end in a terrifying wedding whereby all your guests anxiously await the ‘I do’ or the ‘I don’t.’ However, you could stand to create incredibly meaningful professional relationships and even friendships. You will also develop your social skills and self-esteem which will have a positive impact on your business! </p><p>We know that networking events can be awkward, daunting, and straight-up terrifying and we want to help you find a way to strike up effective conversations with the right people. Although you may be tempted to word-vomit your elevator pitch, we have some better ideas that will lead to more authentic connections. In this episode, we break down how we can learn to have conversations again and conserve energy by interacting with the right people in the right roles. Tune in to find out how to know your type, know your limits, and know what you’re going into networking events for!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2407</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f364ed5c-65e5-11ed-881e-13d99ded6d4d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1820845661.mp3?updated=1669061417" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>695: The New Way to Look at Boundaries So They Actually Stick</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-new-way-to-look-at-boundaries-so-they-actually-stick</link>
      <description>This is not the first time we’re speaking about boundaries, and it won’t be the last. We love boundaries! They’re our favorite ‘B word.’ We like setting them, we like holding them, and we like helping other people set them. One thing we find interesting is that when we start the conversation about boundaries and we lovingly push our clients or our team to create, set, and hold a boundary, it can be triggering for a lot of people. That’s because it makes us reflect on toxic behaviors we have allowed or done or negative stories we have told ourselves about why we might need boundaries. 
It typically falls into two camps: you’re either a people pleaser who feels like setting a boundary lets people down, or you’re a workaholic and boundaries lead you to question your work ethic. We recently discovered an article in the Harvard Business Review that made us think about boundaries in a new way. It gave us two categories for thinking about boundaries, and we want to walk you through each of them today. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 29 Nov 2022 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The New Way to Look at Boundaries So They Actually Stick</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>695</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>For people pleasers who feels like setting a boundary lets people down, workaholics and everyone in between-- boundaries are our favorite "B word!". </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This is not the first time we’re speaking about boundaries, and it won’t be the last. We love boundaries! They’re our favorite ‘B word.’ We like setting them, we like holding them, and we like helping other people set them. One thing we find interesting is that when we start the conversation about boundaries and we lovingly push our clients or our team to create, set, and hold a boundary, it can be triggering for a lot of people. That’s because it makes us reflect on toxic behaviors we have allowed or done or negative stories we have told ourselves about why we might need boundaries. 
It typically falls into two camps: you’re either a people pleaser who feels like setting a boundary lets people down, or you’re a workaholic and boundaries lead you to question your work ethic. We recently discovered an article in the Harvard Business Review that made us think about boundaries in a new way. It gave us two categories for thinking about boundaries, and we want to walk you through each of them today. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This is not the first time we’re speaking about boundaries, and it won’t be the last. We love boundaries! They’re our favorite ‘B word.’ We like setting them, we like holding them, and we like helping other people set them. One thing we find interesting is that when we start the conversation about boundaries and we lovingly push our clients or our team to create, set, and hold a boundary, it can be triggering for a lot of people. That’s because it makes us reflect on toxic behaviors we have allowed or done or negative stories we have told ourselves about why we might need boundaries. </p><p>It typically falls into two camps: you’re either a people pleaser who feels like setting a boundary lets people down, or you’re a workaholic and boundaries lead you to question your work ethic. We recently discovered an article in the Harvard Business Review that made us think about boundaries in a new way. It gave us two categories for thinking about boundaries, and we want to walk you through each of them today. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2117</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ee71d19e-65e4-11ed-be06-37eb543f440c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3396273502.mp3?updated=1669060809" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>694: The Key to Sustainable Client Delivery</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-key-to-sustainable-client-delivery</link>
      <description>We have worked with many different service providers over the years. And in that time we’ve learned a great deal from their wide-ranging responses to any number of situations and scenarios that inevitably pop up with clients — be they totally bizarre or bordering on the mundane. In today’s episode, we take a closer look at how to deliver a sustainable client experience. One that is consistent from client to client and can be maintained and altered as your business grows and scales.
When you’re in the thick of the behind-the-scenes work of running your business, it’s easy to lose sight of the client experience. This is why it’s so important to have systems in place that allow you to not only receive client feedback but to come up with solutions that are then seamlessly integrated into your business. We break down the most common issues we’ve seen service providers get stuck on and offer insights on how to fine-tune your internal systems for a unique client experience with staying power!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 24 Nov 2022 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Key to Sustainable Client Delivery</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>694</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Learn how to create a client experience that is consistent from client to client and can be maintained and altered as your business grows and scales.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We have worked with many different service providers over the years. And in that time we’ve learned a great deal from their wide-ranging responses to any number of situations and scenarios that inevitably pop up with clients — be they totally bizarre or bordering on the mundane. In today’s episode, we take a closer look at how to deliver a sustainable client experience. One that is consistent from client to client and can be maintained and altered as your business grows and scales.
When you’re in the thick of the behind-the-scenes work of running your business, it’s easy to lose sight of the client experience. This is why it’s so important to have systems in place that allow you to not only receive client feedback but to come up with solutions that are then seamlessly integrated into your business. We break down the most common issues we’ve seen service providers get stuck on and offer insights on how to fine-tune your internal systems for a unique client experience with staying power!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We have worked with <em>many</em> different service providers over the years. And in that time we’ve learned a great deal from their wide-ranging responses to any number of situations and scenarios that inevitably pop up with clients — be they totally bizarre or bordering on the mundane. In today’s episode, we take a closer look at how to deliver a sustainable client experience. One that is consistent from client to client and can be maintained and altered as your business grows and scales.</p><p>When you’re in the thick of the behind-the-scenes work of running your business, it’s easy to lose sight of the client experience. This is why it’s so important to have systems in place that allow you to not only receive client feedback but to come up with solutions that are then seamlessly integrated into your business. We break down the most common issues we’ve seen service providers get stuck on and offer insights on how to fine-tune your internal systems for a unique client experience with staying power!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2185</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[91b21d86-646a-11ed-98aa-c7d52c41ed3f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1862515284.mp3?updated=1668467368" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>693: How to Be More Creative (It's Not How You Think!)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-be-more-creative-its-not-how-you-think</link>
      <description>Creativity is generally associated with art, yet it encompasses so much more than that! Because of the narrow definition of creativity, the majority of adults feel out of touch with their creativity or devoid of it altogether! Studies show that it’s in our DNA to be creative. Yet, as we get older and are influenced by society’s limitations of what constitutes creativity, we fail to flex our creative muscle in a way that resonates with us as individuals. All of us are intrinsically creative, whether we’re artistic or not, and in this episode, we break down what creativity means to us and share tips for getting in touch with your creativity and helping others to do the same. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 22 Nov 2022 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Be More Creative (It's Not How You Think!)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>693</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>All of us are intrinsically creative, whether we’re artistic or not, and in this episode, we break down what creativity means to us and share tips for getting in touch with your creativity and helping others to do the same. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Creativity is generally associated with art, yet it encompasses so much more than that! Because of the narrow definition of creativity, the majority of adults feel out of touch with their creativity or devoid of it altogether! Studies show that it’s in our DNA to be creative. Yet, as we get older and are influenced by society’s limitations of what constitutes creativity, we fail to flex our creative muscle in a way that resonates with us as individuals. All of us are intrinsically creative, whether we’re artistic or not, and in this episode, we break down what creativity means to us and share tips for getting in touch with your creativity and helping others to do the same. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Creativity is generally associated with art, yet it encompasses so much more than that! Because of the narrow definition of creativity, the majority of adults feel out of touch with their creativity or devoid of it altogether! Studies show that it’s in our DNA to be creative. Yet, as we get older and are influenced by society’s limitations of what constitutes creativity, we fail to flex our creative muscle in a way that resonates with us as individuals. All of us are intrinsically creative, whether we’re artistic or not, and in this episode, we break down what creativity means to us and share tips for getting in touch with your creativity and helping others to do the same. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2536</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d5fa4436-6466-11ed-82d0-cb67168d8bde]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3858296444.mp3?updated=1668467141" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>692: The Goal &amp; The Gap: How to Actually Plan for 2023</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-goal-and-the-gap-how-to-actually-plan-for-2023</link>
      <description>We’re nearing the end of 2022 and auditing season is upon us! The time is ripe to start looking at how you want 2023 to pan out personally and operationally within your business. We want you to conquer the world, so today, we’re going to share some tips for setting yourself up for success in the new year. Although auditing might not sound sexy, it’s one of our favorite things to do. In this episode, we share some of the strategies we’ve used over the years to carry out an effective audit. You’ll learn how best to take stock of which areas need tweaking in order for you to reach your goals in 2023! Bear in mind that this doesn’t have to be your final iteration but making decisions in advance and working backwards from your goal is essential. Tune in to find out how to identify your financial goal and gap, find a plausible method to fill that gap, and reach your goals!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 17 Nov 2022 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Goal &amp; The Gap: How to Actually Plan for 2023</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>692</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Strategies to carry out an effective audit, identify your financial goal &amp; gap, find a plausible method to fill that gap, and reach your goals!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’re nearing the end of 2022 and auditing season is upon us! The time is ripe to start looking at how you want 2023 to pan out personally and operationally within your business. We want you to conquer the world, so today, we’re going to share some tips for setting yourself up for success in the new year. Although auditing might not sound sexy, it’s one of our favorite things to do. In this episode, we share some of the strategies we’ve used over the years to carry out an effective audit. You’ll learn how best to take stock of which areas need tweaking in order for you to reach your goals in 2023! Bear in mind that this doesn’t have to be your final iteration but making decisions in advance and working backwards from your goal is essential. Tune in to find out how to identify your financial goal and gap, find a plausible method to fill that gap, and reach your goals!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’re nearing the end of 2022 and auditing season is upon us! The time is ripe to start looking at how you want 2023 to pan out personally and operationally within your business. We want you to conquer the world, so today, we’re going to share some tips for setting yourself up for success in the new year. Although auditing might not sound sexy, it’s one of our favorite things to do. In this episode, we share some of the strategies we’ve used over the years to carry out an effective audit. You’ll learn how best to take stock of which areas need tweaking in order for you to reach your goals in 2023! Bear in mind that this doesn’t have to be your final iteration but making decisions in advance and working backwards from your goal is essential. Tune in to find out how to identify your financial goal and gap, find a plausible method to fill that gap, and reach your goals!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2379</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e07e75ba-6459-11ed-a888-d3aedd906f62]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9159545926.mp3?updated=1668462951" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>691: How to Handle Discounts and Free Collaborations as a Service Provider</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-handle-discounts-and-free-collaborations-as-a-service-provider</link>
      <description>The festive season is upon us! And for service providers that means navigating the immense pressure to take part in retail-centric holidays like Black Friday Sales. In today’s episode, we answer some of the most common listener questions that come up over the holiday season. Like how to handle pressures around Black Friday Sales, when to allow discounts, when free collaborations are worth it, and whether you should work with friends and family. 
It may seem like the benefits of some of those things are worth it, but they also come with plenty of hidden costs. Tuning in you’ll hear us share some of the key things we’ve learned from working with relatives, taking part in Black Friday sales, and offering our services for free. These things are a lot more complicated than they seem at first glance! Today’s episode is all about uncovering the true cost of these kinds of discounts, optimizing your price plans, and learning how to give your time the value it deserves. Because if you’re going to spend time away from work, we want it to be spent regenerating and being present with your family, not chasing false leads!
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 15 Nov 2022 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Handle Discounts and Free Collaborations as a Service Provider</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>691</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We answer some of the most common listener questions that come up over the holiday season. Like how to handle pressures around Black Friday Sales, when to allow discounts, when free collaborations are worth it, and whether you should work with friends and family. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>The festive season is upon us! And for service providers that means navigating the immense pressure to take part in retail-centric holidays like Black Friday Sales. In today’s episode, we answer some of the most common listener questions that come up over the holiday season. Like how to handle pressures around Black Friday Sales, when to allow discounts, when free collaborations are worth it, and whether you should work with friends and family. 
It may seem like the benefits of some of those things are worth it, but they also come with plenty of hidden costs. Tuning in you’ll hear us share some of the key things we’ve learned from working with relatives, taking part in Black Friday sales, and offering our services for free. These things are a lot more complicated than they seem at first glance! Today’s episode is all about uncovering the true cost of these kinds of discounts, optimizing your price plans, and learning how to give your time the value it deserves. Because if you’re going to spend time away from work, we want it to be spent regenerating and being present with your family, not chasing false leads!
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The festive season is upon us! And for service providers that means navigating the immense pressure to take part in retail-centric holidays like Black Friday Sales. In today’s episode, we answer some of the most common listener questions that come up over the holiday season. Like how to handle pressures around Black Friday Sales, when to allow discounts, when free collaborations are worth it, and whether you should work with friends and family. </p><p>It may seem like the benefits of some of those things are worth it, but they also come with plenty of hidden costs. Tuning in you’ll hear us share some of the key things we’ve learned from working with relatives, taking part in Black Friday sales, and offering our services for free. These things are a lot more complicated than they seem at first glance! Today’s episode is all about uncovering the true cost of these kinds of discounts, optimizing your price plans, and learning how to give your time the value it deserves. Because if you’re going to spend time away from work, we want it to be spent regenerating and being present with your family, not chasing false leads!</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2094</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[36227960-615a-11ed-84e7-e3ed762515d7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4745985286.mp3?updated=1668128457" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>690: How to Actually Build a Regret-Free Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-actually-build-a-regret-free-business</link>
      <description>We’ve been working with our clients behind the scenes and noticing some commitment issues when it comes to setting goals and deciding on how to reach them. On some level, the hesitation stems from perfectionism and feelings of Imposter Syndrome. But there’s more to it than that. Today we want to talk about an article that we read recently which delves into the things that we’ve been talking about for years, but from a different angle. Ultimately, perfectionism, Imposter Syndrome and all the related feelings come from a place of worrying about making the wrong decisions. So, we’re going to unpack the principles of creating a regret-free business and life! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 10 Nov 2022 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Actually Build a Regret-Free Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>690</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Perfectionism, Imposter Syndrome and all the related feelings come from a place of worrying about making the wrong decisions-- let's dish on that!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’ve been working with our clients behind the scenes and noticing some commitment issues when it comes to setting goals and deciding on how to reach them. On some level, the hesitation stems from perfectionism and feelings of Imposter Syndrome. But there’s more to it than that. Today we want to talk about an article that we read recently which delves into the things that we’ve been talking about for years, but from a different angle. Ultimately, perfectionism, Imposter Syndrome and all the related feelings come from a place of worrying about making the wrong decisions. So, we’re going to unpack the principles of creating a regret-free business and life! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’ve been working with our clients behind the scenes and noticing some commitment issues when it comes to setting goals and deciding on how to reach them. On some level, the hesitation stems from perfectionism and feelings of Imposter Syndrome. But there’s more to it than that. Today we want to talk about an article that we read recently which delves into the things that we’ve been talking about for years, but from a different angle. Ultimately, perfectionism, Imposter Syndrome and all the related feelings come from a place of worrying about making the wrong decisions. So, we’re going to unpack the principles of creating a regret-free business and life! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2256</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[26892dda-5fae-11ed-ba82-eb7e7ec12344]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1240323486.mp3?updated=1667944516" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>689: How to Use Your Business Values to Make Decisions</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-use-your-business-values-to-make-decisions</link>
      <description>It has been really interesting for us to see how centric defining our values has been in ultimately operating our team. We didn’t realize how much we relied on them until some things came to light with our clients. So, what are values to a company? We all understand what our values are in our personal lives, but when we start talking about business values, these things are often assumed. As you grow, you have to be incredibly strategic about identifying your values.
We want to encourage you to identify three values that can help you get focused around how you are going to serve your clients. Asking questions about your boundaries and communication preferences, your work style and ethic, can lead to clarity around your business values. Having an internal value that is very specific around how your team runs is also critical to your culture. These values make it possible to get everyone on the same page and settle a lot of conversations around what should happen! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 08 Nov 2022 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Use Your Business Values to Make Decisions</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>689</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>These values make it possible to get everyone on the same page and settle a lot of conversations around what should happen!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It has been really interesting for us to see how centric defining our values has been in ultimately operating our team. We didn’t realize how much we relied on them until some things came to light with our clients. So, what are values to a company? We all understand what our values are in our personal lives, but when we start talking about business values, these things are often assumed. As you grow, you have to be incredibly strategic about identifying your values.
We want to encourage you to identify three values that can help you get focused around how you are going to serve your clients. Asking questions about your boundaries and communication preferences, your work style and ethic, can lead to clarity around your business values. Having an internal value that is very specific around how your team runs is also critical to your culture. These values make it possible to get everyone on the same page and settle a lot of conversations around what should happen! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It has been really interesting for us to see how centric defining our values has been in ultimately operating our team. We didn’t realize how much we relied on them until some things came to light with our clients. So, what are values to a company? We all understand what our values are in our personal lives, but when we start talking about business values, these things are often assumed. As you grow, you have to be incredibly strategic about identifying your values.</p><p>We want to encourage you to identify three values that can help you get focused around how you are going to serve your clients. Asking questions about your boundaries and communication preferences, your work style and ethic, can lead to clarity around your business values. Having an internal value that is very specific around how your team runs is also critical to your culture. These values make it possible to get everyone on the same page and settle a lot of conversations around what should happen! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2556</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[bc6bba1c-5a0d-11ed-9c50-df9981246d6e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9291123684.mp3?updated=1667332155" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>688: The Importance of a Website Audit - Our New Website is Live!</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-importance-of-a-website-audit-our-new-website-is-live</link>
      <description>Let’s talk about your website! The one place you can present the version of yourself and your business that is accurate, helpful, and actually effective for you and your business. Have you looked at it lately? We’re guessing that many of you have put your website on the backburner for the past few years; especially if you’ve been in business for a while. We’re also guessing that the reason you’ve done this is because you’ve been treating social media as your main marketing platform. 
An important factor to consider is that when social media platforms change their algorithms (and your business doesn’t get as much traction as a result), people will go back and look at your website. If you haven’t been paying attention to your website, it’s not going to go down too well! We’re also guilty of not always paying attention to everything on our website, but there are certain things that we have never (and will never) stop doing. So, regardless of the last time you touched your website, we’re going to talk about how to get it back to the point where it best serves you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 03 Nov 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Importance of a Website Audit - Our New Website is Live!</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>688</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Regardless of the last time you touched your website, we’re going to talk about how to get it back to the point where it best serves you.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Let’s talk about your website! The one place you can present the version of yourself and your business that is accurate, helpful, and actually effective for you and your business. Have you looked at it lately? We’re guessing that many of you have put your website on the backburner for the past few years; especially if you’ve been in business for a while. We’re also guessing that the reason you’ve done this is because you’ve been treating social media as your main marketing platform. 
An important factor to consider is that when social media platforms change their algorithms (and your business doesn’t get as much traction as a result), people will go back and look at your website. If you haven’t been paying attention to your website, it’s not going to go down too well! We’re also guilty of not always paying attention to everything on our website, but there are certain things that we have never (and will never) stop doing. So, regardless of the last time you touched your website, we’re going to talk about how to get it back to the point where it best serves you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Let’s talk about your website! The one place you can present the version of yourself and your business that is accurate, helpful, and actually effective for you and your business. Have you looked at it lately? We’re guessing that many of you have put your website on the backburner for the past few years; especially if you’ve been in business for a while. We’re also guessing that the reason you’ve done this is because you’ve been treating social media as your main marketing platform. </p><p>An important factor to consider is that when social media platforms change their algorithms (and your business doesn’t get as much traction as a result), people will go back and look at your website. If you haven’t been paying attention to your website, it’s not going to go down too well! We’re also guilty of not always paying attention to everything on our website, but there are certain things that we have never (and will never) stop doing. So, regardless of the last time you touched your website, we’re going to talk about how to get it back to the point where it best serves you.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1914</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[79132186-5a05-11ed-ac1e-cbaa78268f41]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1730460899.mp3?updated=1667322730" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>687: The Art of Tweaking &amp; Repeating Your Client Experience</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-art-of-tweaking-repeating-your-client-experience</link>
      <description>Developing consistent client delivery is a surefire way to set your business up for success and today, we break down how best to do so. There are stages to this, especially if you’re a solopreneur offering a broad variety of services. The most important phase, for the purposes of today’s episode, is phase one. It’s important to spend time improving your processes and developing efficiencies from the get-go, as tedious as it may feel. The question we get asked the most in our trainings is about efficiency. The answer is uncomfortably obvious and it’s merely a matter of prioritization! Tune in to learn the simple art of tweaking and repeating and discover how best to create efficiencies for yourself while simultaneously optimizing the client experience!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 Nov 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Art of Tweaking &amp; Repeating Your Client Experience</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>687</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>It’s important to spend time improving your processes and developing efficiencies from the get-go, as tedious as it may feel. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Developing consistent client delivery is a surefire way to set your business up for success and today, we break down how best to do so. There are stages to this, especially if you’re a solopreneur offering a broad variety of services. The most important phase, for the purposes of today’s episode, is phase one. It’s important to spend time improving your processes and developing efficiencies from the get-go, as tedious as it may feel. The question we get asked the most in our trainings is about efficiency. The answer is uncomfortably obvious and it’s merely a matter of prioritization! Tune in to learn the simple art of tweaking and repeating and discover how best to create efficiencies for yourself while simultaneously optimizing the client experience!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Developing consistent client delivery is a surefire way to set your business up for success and today, we break down how best to do so. There are stages to this, especially if you’re a solopreneur offering a broad variety of services. The most important phase, for the purposes of today’s episode, is phase one. It’s important to spend time improving your processes and developing efficiencies from the get-go, as tedious as it may feel. The question we get asked the most in our trainings is about efficiency. The answer is uncomfortably obvious and it’s merely a matter of prioritization! Tune in to learn the simple art of tweaking and repeating and discover how best to create efficiencies for yourself while simultaneously optimizing the client experience!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1798</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d4afdfa4-5643-11ed-9f14-834f3deb2a73]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4013385173.mp3?updated=1666911113" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>686: Meetings Don't Have to Suck: Develop These Team Communication Tips</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/meetings-dont-have-to-suck-develop-these-team-communication-tips</link>
      <description>Let’s talk about communication! In the past, we’ve talked about how to plan for expected leave (like holidays and maternity leave), or how to deal with situations where you unexpectedly need to leave work (when you are sick or your child needs you, for example). Today, we’re discussing this topic, but from a different perspective. We want to talk about the internal structure of our team and how we set up meetings, communications, and different tools to help our team function optimally when we can’t be there. So much of it comes down to the fact that we don’t do anything in secret and always maintain consistency in the way that we show up at work.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 27 Oct 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Meetings Don't Have to Suck: Develop These Team Communication Tips</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>686</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How we set up meetings, communications, and different tools to help our team function optimally when we can’t be there.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Let’s talk about communication! In the past, we’ve talked about how to plan for expected leave (like holidays and maternity leave), or how to deal with situations where you unexpectedly need to leave work (when you are sick or your child needs you, for example). Today, we’re discussing this topic, but from a different perspective. We want to talk about the internal structure of our team and how we set up meetings, communications, and different tools to help our team function optimally when we can’t be there. So much of it comes down to the fact that we don’t do anything in secret and always maintain consistency in the way that we show up at work.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Let’s talk about communication! In the past, we’ve talked about how to plan for expected leave (like holidays and maternity leave), or how to deal with situations where you unexpectedly need to leave work (when you are sick or your child needs you, for example). Today, we’re discussing this topic, but from a different perspective. We want to talk about the internal structure of our team and how we set up meetings, communications, and different tools to help our team function optimally when we can’t be there. So much of it comes down to the fact that we don’t do anything in secret and always maintain consistency in the way that we show up at work.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1860</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3b4d9972-50a4-11ed-94e4-37febc5bc682]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6268572693.mp3?updated=1666291789" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>685: How to Combat Productivity Paranoia with your Team</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-combat-productivity-paranoia-with-your-team</link>
      <description>There’s a toxic culture rearing its head in the small business world– monitoring productivity. What’s the buzzword? Productivity Paranoia! That’s the fixation that leaders have with their employee’s work, which leaves them thinking way too much about how their staff is spending their time, and what the resulting output is.
Today, we’re here to share how we monitor our teams without micromanaging them. We’ll talk about the effective systems we use to keep our team connected and all moving toward the same direction without any creepy stalking.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 25 Oct 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Combat Productivity Paranoia with your Team</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>685</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Learn how to stop fixating on how your staff spends their time and instead create better systems for team communication and transparency.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There’s a toxic culture rearing its head in the small business world– monitoring productivity. What’s the buzzword? Productivity Paranoia! That’s the fixation that leaders have with their employee’s work, which leaves them thinking way too much about how their staff is spending their time, and what the resulting output is.
Today, we’re here to share how we monitor our teams without micromanaging them. We’ll talk about the effective systems we use to keep our team connected and all moving toward the same direction without any creepy stalking.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There’s a toxic culture rearing its head in the small business world– monitoring productivity. What’s the buzzword? Productivity Paranoia! That’s the fixation that leaders have with their employee’s work, which leaves them thinking way too much about how their staff is spending their time, and what the resulting output is.</p><p>Today, we’re here to share how we monitor our teams without micromanaging them. We’ll talk about the effective systems we use to keep our team connected and all moving toward the same direction without any creepy stalking.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2679</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b8178b76-508a-11ed-9dc5-d3d62862fcd2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2836546004.mp3?updated=1666281438" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>684: How to Plan for Unplanned Time Off </title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-plan-for-unplanned-time-off</link>
      <description>Today we’re talking about unanticipated leave! We’ve spent a good amount of episodes talking about how to prepare for maternity leave or a longer vacation or break, both of which are amazing! But for the most part, these are eventualities that you can anticipate and plan around. So what do you do to prepare for things that you can’t anticipate like family emergencies or medical leave? 
This year we have both had major health challenges as well as family emergencies that left us unable to work for days and weeks at a time. These events were stressful in themselves. But had we not taken the necessary steps to prepare for unanticipated leave, things could have been a lot more dire and overwhelming, especially for our team. To find out whether you’ve prepared your business for unplanned time off, make sure you tune in for our breakdown on how to elevate your systems, build better communication, and plan for unplanned time off!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 20 Oct 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Plan for Unplanned Time Off </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>684</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Learn what to do to prepare your business for things that you can’t anticipate like family emergencies or unexpected medical leave.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we’re talking about unanticipated leave! We’ve spent a good amount of episodes talking about how to prepare for maternity leave or a longer vacation or break, both of which are amazing! But for the most part, these are eventualities that you can anticipate and plan around. So what do you do to prepare for things that you can’t anticipate like family emergencies or medical leave? 
This year we have both had major health challenges as well as family emergencies that left us unable to work for days and weeks at a time. These events were stressful in themselves. But had we not taken the necessary steps to prepare for unanticipated leave, things could have been a lot more dire and overwhelming, especially for our team. To find out whether you’ve prepared your business for unplanned time off, make sure you tune in for our breakdown on how to elevate your systems, build better communication, and plan for unplanned time off!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we’re talking about unanticipated leave! We’ve spent a good amount of episodes talking about how to prepare for maternity leave or a longer vacation or break, both of which are amazing! But for the most part, these are eventualities that you can anticipate and plan around. So what do you do to prepare for things that you can’t anticipate like family emergencies or medical leave? </p><p>This year we have both had major health challenges as well as family emergencies that left us unable to work for days and weeks at a time. These events were stressful in themselves. But had we not taken the necessary steps to prepare for unanticipated leave, things could have been a lot more dire and overwhelming, especially for our team. To find out whether you’ve prepared your business for unplanned time off, make sure you tune in for our breakdown on how to elevate your systems, build better communication, and plan for unplanned time off!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1842</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6c91b906-4bda-11ed-8ba1-dff86c70ba9f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5304243497.mp3?updated=1665767073" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>683: The Exact Scripts We Use for Prospect Follow-Up</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-exact-scripts-we-use-for-prospect-follow-up</link>
      <description>When prospective clients are on the fence or delaying commitment to a particular project, it can be wildly frustrating. Not just that, but the follow-ups use up a whole lot of unnecessary time and energy. In this episode, we share the exact scripts we use to nudge people off the fence and reduce communication delays. You are responsible for closing the loop, and it is especially critical when you start documenting your sales process and really tracking conversion rates. Reviewing your sales information is only helpful once you’ve closed the loop and are certain as to which leads are going to convert to sales and which aren’t. 
Today, we are specifically addressing those waiting for their prospective clients to sign off on a project but are left without a clear answer. So many service providers struggle with non-committal potential clients who seem eager but never quite get around to closing the deal. If you’re holding a spot for someone and they haven’t committed, you need to solidify that space or move on. Our prospect follow-up scripts will help you close the loop and mentally move on. Tune in to find out how to restructure your process to reduce cumbersome delays, and kindly and effectively communicate your parameters! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 18 Oct 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Exact Scripts We Use for Prospect Follow-Up</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>683</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Here's exactly how we nudge prospects off the fence, reduce communication delays, and sign off on projects</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When prospective clients are on the fence or delaying commitment to a particular project, it can be wildly frustrating. Not just that, but the follow-ups use up a whole lot of unnecessary time and energy. In this episode, we share the exact scripts we use to nudge people off the fence and reduce communication delays. You are responsible for closing the loop, and it is especially critical when you start documenting your sales process and really tracking conversion rates. Reviewing your sales information is only helpful once you’ve closed the loop and are certain as to which leads are going to convert to sales and which aren’t. 
Today, we are specifically addressing those waiting for their prospective clients to sign off on a project but are left without a clear answer. So many service providers struggle with non-committal potential clients who seem eager but never quite get around to closing the deal. If you’re holding a spot for someone and they haven’t committed, you need to solidify that space or move on. Our prospect follow-up scripts will help you close the loop and mentally move on. Tune in to find out how to restructure your process to reduce cumbersome delays, and kindly and effectively communicate your parameters! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When prospective clients are on the fence or delaying commitment to a particular project, it can be wildly frustrating. Not just that, but the follow-ups use up a whole lot of unnecessary time and energy. In this episode, we share the exact scripts we use to nudge people off the fence and reduce communication delays. You are responsible for closing the loop, and it is especially critical when you start documenting your sales process and really tracking conversion rates. Reviewing your sales information is only helpful once you’ve closed the loop and are certain as to which leads are going to convert to sales and which aren’t. </p><p>Today, we are specifically addressing those waiting for their prospective clients to <a href="https://creativetemplateshop.com/templates/dubsado-full-width-client-approval-subcontract-template-soft-collection">sign off on a project</a> but are left without a clear answer. So many service providers struggle with non-committal potential clients who seem eager but never quite get around to closing the deal. If you’re holding a spot for someone and they haven’t committed, you need to solidify that space or move on. Our prospect follow-up scripts will help you close the loop and mentally move on. Tune in to find out how to restructure your process to reduce cumbersome delays, and kindly and effectively communicate your parameters! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1520</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0ea03926-4bcb-11ed-976d-8b59756278ad]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3504295584.mp3?updated=1665766893" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>682: Knowing THIS Will Keep You in Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/knowing-this-will-keep-you-in-business</link>
      <description>As a company, our mission is to help women create more financial freedom for themselves, which is why financial literacy is a foundational part of what we teach. And while we know it may be intimidating, taking action will give you fresh insight into your company, while also allowing you to make better decisions, and ultimately, save you money!
From knowing your books to mastering your cash flow, it all starts with information. Understanding your numbers is the foundation. And the only way to be free to run your business effectively is by understanding how these all work together. Tune in today to learn how to get your company’s finances under control and empower yourself with the information that's going to help you build a truly sustainable business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 13 Oct 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Knowing THIS Will Keep You in Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>682</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>From knowing your books to mastering your cash flow, it all starts with information. Understanding your numbers is the foundation.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>As a company, our mission is to help women create more financial freedom for themselves, which is why financial literacy is a foundational part of what we teach. And while we know it may be intimidating, taking action will give you fresh insight into your company, while also allowing you to make better decisions, and ultimately, save you money!
From knowing your books to mastering your cash flow, it all starts with information. Understanding your numbers is the foundation. And the only way to be free to run your business effectively is by understanding how these all work together. Tune in today to learn how to get your company’s finances under control and empower yourself with the information that's going to help you build a truly sustainable business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>As a company, our mission is to help women create more financial freedom for themselves, which is why financial literacy is a foundational part of what we teach. And while we know it may be intimidating, taking action will give you fresh insight into your company, while also allowing you to make better decisions, and ultimately, save you money!</p><p>From knowing your books to mastering your cash flow, it all starts with information. Understanding your numbers is the foundation. And the only way to be free to run your business effectively is by understanding how these all work together. Tune in today to learn how to get your company’s finances under control and empower yourself with the information that's going to help you build a truly sustainable business!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2597</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4a2d4c42-4971-11ed-86f5-6bed6ea96eaa]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5606234629.mp3?updated=1665499707" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>681: What to Do When Clients Push Back on Your Process</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-to-do-when-clients-push-back-on-your-process</link>
      <description>Today, we’re cutting the small talk and diving right into part 2 of our conversation. That’s how important we deem this topic to be.
If you own a service-based business, there’s a high chance you’ve encountered a client who wants to change some aspect of your delivery. Usually, this comes up during the sales process, but occasionally it arises immediately after they’ve booked. Today, we’re talking about how to navigate this based on when and where they are wanting to customize the product, and how to handle it at each stage. 
When clients feel that they can negotiate price, tinker with the scope, and haggle with you on the deliverables, what do you do? We’re here to help you navigate these complexities.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 11 Oct 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What to Do When Clients Push Back on Your Process</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>681</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>When clients feel that they can negotiate price, tinker with the scope, and haggle with you on the deliverables, what do you do? We’re here to help you navigate these complexities.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we’re cutting the small talk and diving right into part 2 of our conversation. That’s how important we deem this topic to be.
If you own a service-based business, there’s a high chance you’ve encountered a client who wants to change some aspect of your delivery. Usually, this comes up during the sales process, but occasionally it arises immediately after they’ve booked. Today, we’re talking about how to navigate this based on when and where they are wanting to customize the product, and how to handle it at each stage. 
When clients feel that they can negotiate price, tinker with the scope, and haggle with you on the deliverables, what do you do? We’re here to help you navigate these complexities.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we’re cutting the small talk and diving right into part 2 of our conversation. That’s how important we deem this topic to be.</p><p>If you own a service-based business, there’s a high chance you’ve encountered a client who wants to change some aspect of your delivery. Usually, this comes up during the sales process, but occasionally it arises immediately after they’ve booked. Today, we’re talking about how to navigate this based on when and where they are wanting to customize the product, and how to handle it at each stage. </p><p>When clients feel that they can negotiate price, tinker with the scope, and haggle with you on the deliverables, what do you do? We’re here to help you navigate these complexities.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2058</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[66bfa200-44c2-11ed-992e-4f547a3e92c7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6699771203.mp3?updated=1665151259" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>680: What to Do When Prospects Ghost You</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-to-do-when-prospects-ghost-you</link>
      <description>Today we’re going to talk about the art of the follow-up! Once you’ve pitched your service, it’s possible that you’ll experience potential clients ghosting you, being passive-aggressive towards you, or fighting against the process that you’re trying to put them through. All three of those things have happened to us in the last seven days so we know all about those weird experiences. In an ideal world, people will seamlessly move through your sales process, discovery call, and pitch meeting, and then they’ll pay you. This happens almost half of the time but the other half of the time, you’ll be faced with resistance and objections that you’ll have to work through. Today, we’re going to talk you through how to deal with them!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 06 Oct 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What to Do When Prospects Ghost You</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>680</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we’re going to talk about the art of the follow-up! Once you’ve pitched your service, it’s possible that you’ll experience potential clients ghosting you, being passive-aggressive towards you, or fighting against the process that you’re trying to put them through. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we’re going to talk about the art of the follow-up! Once you’ve pitched your service, it’s possible that you’ll experience potential clients ghosting you, being passive-aggressive towards you, or fighting against the process that you’re trying to put them through. All three of those things have happened to us in the last seven days so we know all about those weird experiences. In an ideal world, people will seamlessly move through your sales process, discovery call, and pitch meeting, and then they’ll pay you. This happens almost half of the time but the other half of the time, you’ll be faced with resistance and objections that you’ll have to work through. Today, we’re going to talk you through how to deal with them!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we’re going to talk about the art of the follow-up! Once you’ve pitched your service, it’s possible that you’ll experience potential clients ghosting you, being passive-aggressive towards you, or fighting against the process that you’re trying to put them through. All three of those things have happened to us in the last seven days so we know all about those weird experiences. In an ideal world, people will seamlessly move through your sales process, discovery call, and pitch meeting, and then they’ll pay you. This happens almost half of the time but the other half of the time, you’ll be faced with resistance and objections that you’ll have to work through. Today, we’re going to talk you through how to deal with them!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2287</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[64657bdc-44b4-11ed-b2c8-6f5f98ea3288]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9848620480.mp3?updated=1664978710" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>679: The #1 Skill Your Team &amp; Clients Need You to Have</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-1-skill-your-team-and-clients-need-you-to-have</link>
      <description>Being a human being these days is undeniably stressful. We are constantly expected to function at our best while being endlessly bombarded with a million different things that are competing for our attention. Add social media into the mix and now you also have to deal with an onslaught of content about anything and everything, from how you too can achieve impossible standards of beauty to live feeds of devastating world events. 
All of these rapid changes have had a tangible impact and are evident in the rising rates of depression, anxiety, and a host of other mental health issues. So how do you, as a leader, support your team in this climate of information overload and unprecedented global events? Tune in for a deep dive as we discuss the single most important skill for leadership, the research underpinning it, and why it will not only make you a better leader but also, a better person! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 04 Oct 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The #1 Skill Your Team &amp; Clients Need You to Have</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>679</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How do you, as a leader, support your team in this climate of information overload and unprecedented global events? </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Being a human being these days is undeniably stressful. We are constantly expected to function at our best while being endlessly bombarded with a million different things that are competing for our attention. Add social media into the mix and now you also have to deal with an onslaught of content about anything and everything, from how you too can achieve impossible standards of beauty to live feeds of devastating world events. 
All of these rapid changes have had a tangible impact and are evident in the rising rates of depression, anxiety, and a host of other mental health issues. So how do you, as a leader, support your team in this climate of information overload and unprecedented global events? Tune in for a deep dive as we discuss the single most important skill for leadership, the research underpinning it, and why it will not only make you a better leader but also, a better person! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Being a human being these days is undeniably stressful. We are constantly expected to function at our best while being endlessly bombarded with a million different things that are competing for our attention. Add social media into the mix and now you also have to deal with an onslaught of content about anything and everything, from how you too can achieve impossible standards of beauty to live feeds of devastating world events. </p><p>All of these rapid changes have had a tangible impact and are evident in the rising rates of depression, anxiety, and a host of other mental health issues. So how do you, as a leader, support your team in this climate of information overload and unprecedented global events? Tune in for a deep dive as we discuss the single most important skill for leadership, the research underpinning it, and why it will not only make you a better leader but also, a better person! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2318</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8a592de4-40df-11ed-a8e1-47f469bff315]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1614754954.mp3?updated=1664557951" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>678: How Our Client Increased Her Close Rate by 40%</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-our-client-increased-her-close-rate-by-40-percent</link>
      <description>We’re in the final quarter of the year and it’s the perfect time to hunker down, focus, and refine. This is the season to investigate what’s working in your business and what’s not so you can make strategic and educated improvements going into the next year. In preparation, you’re going to need to start collecting data in order to identify your greatest areas of opportunity and gauge where to place your focus.
This past week we walked through a quarterly optimization training with our clients, and today, we want to share some of the conversations we had there so you can learn from them and apply the takeaways to your own business. In this episode, you’ll find out how one of our clients increased her close rate by 40% and where she discovered she needed to place her focus once her sales process was in order.
Tune in to find out which metrics are worth analyzing, how to pitch up to a planning session, and much more, including some tangible tips for improving your sales strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 29 Sep 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How Our Client Increased Her Close Rate by 40%</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>678</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tune in to find out which metrics are worth analyzing, how to pitch up to a planning session, and much more, including some tangible tips for improving your sales strategy!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’re in the final quarter of the year and it’s the perfect time to hunker down, focus, and refine. This is the season to investigate what’s working in your business and what’s not so you can make strategic and educated improvements going into the next year. In preparation, you’re going to need to start collecting data in order to identify your greatest areas of opportunity and gauge where to place your focus.
This past week we walked through a quarterly optimization training with our clients, and today, we want to share some of the conversations we had there so you can learn from them and apply the takeaways to your own business. In this episode, you’ll find out how one of our clients increased her close rate by 40% and where she discovered she needed to place her focus once her sales process was in order.
Tune in to find out which metrics are worth analyzing, how to pitch up to a planning session, and much more, including some tangible tips for improving your sales strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’re in the final quarter of the year and it’s the perfect time to hunker down, focus, and refine. This is the season to investigate what’s working in your business and what’s not so you can make strategic and educated improvements going into the next year. In preparation, you’re going to need to start collecting data in order to identify your greatest areas of opportunity and gauge where to place your focus.</p><p>This past week we walked through a quarterly optimization training with our <a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/incubator-application/">clients</a>, and today, we want to share some of the conversations we had there so you can learn from them and apply the takeaways to your own business. In this episode, you’ll find out how one of our clients increased her close rate by 40% and where she discovered she needed to place her focus once her sales process was in order.</p><p>Tune in to find out which metrics are worth analyzing, how to pitch up to a planning session, and much more, including some tangible tips for improving your sales strategy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2248</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[721f3884-3f38-11ed-859d-d321eada2a45]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8912197781.mp3?updated=1664385773" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>677:  We Booked $118k In Contracts in 30 Days - Here's How</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/we-booked-118k-in-contracts-in-30-days-heres-how</link>
      <description>Today, we want to share with you some behind-the-scenes live action of the “tweaking and repeating” that we do whenever we implement something new in our business. If you’ve been listening to the show for a while, you’ve probably heard us talk about this concept before. As a refresher, “tweaking and repeating” means to take a particular action in your business for a set amount of time (at least 30 days) and then go back and reflect. Think about how it went, how it made you feel, and if there are any opportunities for you to pivot and improve what you’ve tried.
Listen in as we discuss a rundown of our “tweak and repeat” process on something that we started exactly 30 days ago. We’re going to go through the results, the things we want to keep doing, and the things we want to change. We’re showing you an example, so that you can go through the same assessment process in your own business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 27 Sep 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>We Booked $118k In Contracts in 30 Days - Here's How</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>677</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, we want to share with you some behind-the-scenes live action of the “tweaking and repeating” that we do whenever we implement something new in our business.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we want to share with you some behind-the-scenes live action of the “tweaking and repeating” that we do whenever we implement something new in our business. If you’ve been listening to the show for a while, you’ve probably heard us talk about this concept before. As a refresher, “tweaking and repeating” means to take a particular action in your business for a set amount of time (at least 30 days) and then go back and reflect. Think about how it went, how it made you feel, and if there are any opportunities for you to pivot and improve what you’ve tried.
Listen in as we discuss a rundown of our “tweak and repeat” process on something that we started exactly 30 days ago. We’re going to go through the results, the things we want to keep doing, and the things we want to change. We’re showing you an example, so that you can go through the same assessment process in your own business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we want to share with you some behind-the-scenes live action of the “tweaking and repeating” that we do whenever we implement something new in our business. If you’ve been listening to the show for a while, you’ve probably heard us talk about this concept before. As a refresher, “tweaking and repeating” means to take a particular action in your business for a set amount of time (at least 30 days) and then go back and reflect. Think about how it went, how it made you feel, and if there are any opportunities for you to pivot and improve what you’ve tried.</p><p>Listen in as we discuss a rundown of our “tweak and repeat” process on something that we started exactly 30 days ago. We’re going to go through the results, the things we want to keep doing, and the things we want to change. We’re showing you an example, so that you can go through the same assessment process in your own business.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2312</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[54573034-3b4d-11ed-bb97-9f91f6ce9b3b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3451295253.mp3?updated=1663946040" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>676: Pitch Deck Vs. Proposal: The Pros and Cons of Both Part Two</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/pitch-deck-vs-proposal-the-pros-and-cons-of-both-part-two</link>
      <description>A pitch deck and a proposal serve the same purpose, but they’re certainly not interchangeable. Simply put, a proposal takes everything mentioned in a long form pitch deck and distills it into a streamlined piece of communication to back up everything you have already mentioned and sold to your client. The response you’re seeking when you send this along is “Oh yes, this is what we discussed.” That’s why, when we hear that you’re sending off proposals without any previous communication, we get worried! People are skipping the communication altogether and putting together proposals without any setup.
Could you still convert people by simply sending them an email? Yes, totally. Especially if you’ve done a lot of education on your website. But if there’s any confusion at all about what you do, without a presentation, you’re going to lose someone. This is a part of your process we really want you to start caring about. It’s an opportunity to stand out by going above and beyond what other service providers are doing. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 22 Sep 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Pitch Deck Vs. Proposal: The Pros and Cons of Both Part Two</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>676</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>A pitch deck and a proposal serve the same purpose, but they’re certainly not interchangeable.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>A pitch deck and a proposal serve the same purpose, but they’re certainly not interchangeable. Simply put, a proposal takes everything mentioned in a long form pitch deck and distills it into a streamlined piece of communication to back up everything you have already mentioned and sold to your client. The response you’re seeking when you send this along is “Oh yes, this is what we discussed.” That’s why, when we hear that you’re sending off proposals without any previous communication, we get worried! People are skipping the communication altogether and putting together proposals without any setup.
Could you still convert people by simply sending them an email? Yes, totally. Especially if you’ve done a lot of education on your website. But if there’s any confusion at all about what you do, without a presentation, you’re going to lose someone. This is a part of your process we really want you to start caring about. It’s an opportunity to stand out by going above and beyond what other service providers are doing. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A pitch deck and a proposal serve the same purpose, but they’re certainly not interchangeable. Simply put, a proposal takes everything mentioned in a long form pitch deck and distills it into a streamlined piece of communication to back up everything you have already mentioned and sold to your client. The response you’re seeking when you send this along is “Oh yes, this is what we discussed.” That’s why, when we hear that you’re sending off proposals without any previous communication, we get worried! People are skipping the communication altogether and putting together proposals without any setup.</p><p>Could you still convert people by simply sending them an email? Yes, totally. Especially if you’ve done a lot of education on your website. But if there’s any confusion at all about what you do, without a presentation, you’re going to lose someone. This is a part of your process we really want you to start caring about. It’s an opportunity to stand out by going above and beyond what other service providers are doing. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1831</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0caaec44-38f5-11ed-ae44-f3b8b2ea2971]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8801180224.mp3?updated=1663687556" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>675:  Pitch Deck Vs. Proposal: The Pros and Cons of Both Part One</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/pitch-deck-vs-proposal-the-pros-and-cons-of-both-part-one</link>
      <description>The number one thing we are encouraging business owners to do right now is to be flexible. If you can adapt to the needs of the people you’re talking to, then you’re putting yourself in a great position to make sales and optimally serve your clients so that you can both succeed! But how do you reach those clients? And how do you demonstrate that you are the right person for the job?
In today’s episode, we break down how to put together a fantastic pitch deck that will showcase your skills and leave your future clients feeling both inspired and excited. Putting together all the information you need for a pitch deck may seem overwhelming, but once you automate things it will make the process so much easier. We’re here to demonstrate how you can take a structured, predictable, templated approach, while also providing the space to customize your pitch for every client. So if you've been feeling like your process could use a little sprucing up, today’s episode is for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 20 Sep 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Pitch Deck Vs. Proposal: The Pros and Cons of Both Part One</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>675</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How to put together a fantastic pitch deck that will showcase your skills and leave your future clients feeling both inspired and excited.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>The number one thing we are encouraging business owners to do right now is to be flexible. If you can adapt to the needs of the people you’re talking to, then you’re putting yourself in a great position to make sales and optimally serve your clients so that you can both succeed! But how do you reach those clients? And how do you demonstrate that you are the right person for the job?
In today’s episode, we break down how to put together a fantastic pitch deck that will showcase your skills and leave your future clients feeling both inspired and excited. Putting together all the information you need for a pitch deck may seem overwhelming, but once you automate things it will make the process so much easier. We’re here to demonstrate how you can take a structured, predictable, templated approach, while also providing the space to customize your pitch for every client. So if you've been feeling like your process could use a little sprucing up, today’s episode is for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The number one thing we are encouraging business owners to do right now is to <em>be flexible</em>. If you can adapt to the needs of the people you’re talking to, then you’re putting yourself in a great position to make sales and optimally serve your clients so that you can both succeed! But how do you reach those clients? And how do you demonstrate that you are the right person for the job?</p><p>In today’s episode, we break down how to put together a fantastic pitch deck that will showcase your skills and leave your future clients feeling both inspired and excited. Putting together all the information you need for a pitch deck may seem overwhelming, but once you automate things it will make the process so much easier. We’re here to demonstrate how you can take a structured, predictable, templated approach, while also providing the space to customize your pitch for every client. So if you've been feeling like your process could use a little sprucing up, today’s episode is for you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2573</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[add24e16-3826-11ed-a43e-6349985bcc98]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1317720100.mp3?updated=1663598154" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>674: Can Perfectionism Actually Serve You?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/can-perfectionism-actually-serve-you</link>
      <description>We’ve all known that kid at school. The one who completely takes over group projects and feels the need to micromanage every, single, little detail. If this sounds just a little too familiar, then you’re in good company! Being a perfectionist is tough, and it can come with a host of insidious bedfellows, like procrastination, self-doubt, and debilitating indecisiveness. But what if you could befriend your perfectionism, and make it your superpower? 
While it’s undoubtedly challenging dealing with perfectionism, we want to propose imagining a new way forward that doesn’t rely on your self-doubt. What if, instead of beating ourselves up over our tendency towards perfectionism, we instead embrace the strengths we have to offer? After interfacing with countless clients who struggle with perfectionism we decided to come up with the Bust the Perfectionism Toolkit. This innovative toolkit is made up of easy-to-implement strategies that allow high-achieving business owners to tackle perfectionism once and for all. Tune in as we discuss the powers and pitfalls of perfectionism, and find out what you can expect from the Bust the Perfectionism Toolkit!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 15 Sep 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Can Perfectionism Actually Serve You?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>674</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>What if you could befriend your perfectionism, and make it your superpower? </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’ve all known that kid at school. The one who completely takes over group projects and feels the need to micromanage every, single, little detail. If this sounds just a little too familiar, then you’re in good company! Being a perfectionist is tough, and it can come with a host of insidious bedfellows, like procrastination, self-doubt, and debilitating indecisiveness. But what if you could befriend your perfectionism, and make it your superpower? 
While it’s undoubtedly challenging dealing with perfectionism, we want to propose imagining a new way forward that doesn’t rely on your self-doubt. What if, instead of beating ourselves up over our tendency towards perfectionism, we instead embrace the strengths we have to offer? After interfacing with countless clients who struggle with perfectionism we decided to come up with the Bust the Perfectionism Toolkit. This innovative toolkit is made up of easy-to-implement strategies that allow high-achieving business owners to tackle perfectionism once and for all. Tune in as we discuss the powers and pitfalls of perfectionism, and find out what you can expect from the Bust the Perfectionism Toolkit!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’ve all known that kid at school. The one who completely takes over group projects and feels the need to micromanage every, single, little detail. If this sounds just a little too familiar, then you’re in good company! Being a perfectionist is tough, and it can come with a host of insidious bedfellows, like procrastination, self-doubt, and debilitating indecisiveness. But what if you could befriend your perfectionism, and make it your superpower? </p><p>While it’s undoubtedly challenging dealing with perfectionism, we want to propose imagining a new way forward that doesn’t rely on your self-doubt. What if, instead of beating ourselves up over our tendency towards perfectionism, we instead embrace the strengths we have to offer? After interfacing with countless clients who struggle with perfectionism we decided to come up with the <a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/bust-the-perfectionism-toolkit/?utm_source=on_air_ad&amp;utm_medium=podcast&amp;utm_campaign=workshop">Bust the Perfectionism Toolkit</a>. This innovative toolkit is made up of easy-to-implement strategies that allow high-achieving business owners to tackle perfectionism once and for all. Tune in as we discuss the powers and pitfalls of perfectionism, and find out what you can expect from the Bust the Perfectionism Toolkit!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1945</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2fbeb2da-3443-11ed-ad83-5761e0a133fd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4857569836.mp3?updated=1663181682" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>673: The New Way to Work With Boss Project</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-new-way-to-work-with-boss-project</link>
      <description>We’ve been alluding to all of our secret projects in the works for months now but haven’t yet spilled. We are simply dying to talk about the behind-the-scenes projects we’ve been working on, and you can expect an official announcement before this month’s end! Because we’re so close to announcing it, we thought we’d go ahead and let you in on a few of our secrets. 
We’ve been working with clients for seven years now, and the past year has seen a bit of a shift. As you know, we’ve been banging on about refocusing on working with fewer clients and dipping our toes back into the service side of things, and now that we have an accountable team comprised of individuals with their own niche set of superpowers, we can! For the first time ever, we have a team that is not just there to support us in project management or client communication, but on deliverables, and it’s truly expanded the scope of what we can offer. 
In this episode, you’ll hear about our evolution over the past seven years and get some insights into what we finally have the bandwidth to offer. If you’re looking to build a stable foundation for years to come and 10x your investment, you’ve come to the right place. We’re here to help you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 13 Sep 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The New Way to Work With Boss Project</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>673</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Because we’re so close to announcing it, we thought we’d go ahead and let you in on a few of our secrets. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’ve been alluding to all of our secret projects in the works for months now but haven’t yet spilled. We are simply dying to talk about the behind-the-scenes projects we’ve been working on, and you can expect an official announcement before this month’s end! Because we’re so close to announcing it, we thought we’d go ahead and let you in on a few of our secrets. 
We’ve been working with clients for seven years now, and the past year has seen a bit of a shift. As you know, we’ve been banging on about refocusing on working with fewer clients and dipping our toes back into the service side of things, and now that we have an accountable team comprised of individuals with their own niche set of superpowers, we can! For the first time ever, we have a team that is not just there to support us in project management or client communication, but on deliverables, and it’s truly expanded the scope of what we can offer. 
In this episode, you’ll hear about our evolution over the past seven years and get some insights into what we finally have the bandwidth to offer. If you’re looking to build a stable foundation for years to come and 10x your investment, you’ve come to the right place. We’re here to help you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’ve been alluding to all of our secret projects in the works for <em>months</em> now but haven’t yet spilled. We are simply dying to talk about the behind-the-scenes projects we’ve been working on, and you can expect an official announcement before this month’s end! Because we’re <em>so </em>close to announcing it, we thought we’d go ahead and let you in on a few of our secrets. </p><p>We’ve been working with clients for seven years now, and the past year has seen a bit of a shift. As you know, we’ve been banging on about refocusing on working with fewer clients and dipping our toes back into the service side of things, and now that we have an accountable team comprised of individuals with their own niche set of superpowers, we can! For the first time ever, we have a team that is not just there to support us in project management or client communication, but on deliverables, and it’s truly expanded the scope of what we can offer. </p><p>In this episode, you’ll hear about our evolution over the past seven years and get some insights into what we finally have the bandwidth to offer. If you’re looking to build a stable foundation for years to come and 10x your investment, you’ve come to the right place. We’re here to help you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2062</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[55f5e788-2e1d-11ed-b878-a7471134308f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5994811698.mp3?updated=1662495184" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>672: The Market Shift: How to Grow Your Service Business in an Unpredictable Climate</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-market-shift-how-to-grow-your-service-business-in-an-unpredictable-climate</link>
      <description>The truth of the matter is that the market is shifting. As small business owners, we absolutely have to be paying attention because how this impacts us in the next few years is going to be really important. We all knew things would change after the pandemic, but two years later, we’re seeing the results in unexpected ways.
There just isn’t a recipe anymore. Instead of following predetermined steps to success, we’re all having to figure it out as we go. The strategies that we all once relied on are no longer effective, and we can’t keep doing the same things and expecting to have more reach. Specifically, in the social media space, the strategies that used to bring success are far less effective on the organic side. It’s a gamble.
As a result, businesses across the board are having a much harder time predicting where their attention needs to be, where it makes sense to allocate resources and time, and planning for the future of their business. The conversations we have been having with our clients and peers have confirmed that everyone is having a hard time figuring out where to put their focus, where to commit, and where to go all in. What is it going to take to ride the wave and see growth through this unpredictable time? 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 08 Sep 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Market Shift: How to Grow Your Service Business in an Unpredictable Climate</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>672</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We all knew things would change after the pandemic, but two years later, we’re seeing the results in unexpected ways.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>The truth of the matter is that the market is shifting. As small business owners, we absolutely have to be paying attention because how this impacts us in the next few years is going to be really important. We all knew things would change after the pandemic, but two years later, we’re seeing the results in unexpected ways.
There just isn’t a recipe anymore. Instead of following predetermined steps to success, we’re all having to figure it out as we go. The strategies that we all once relied on are no longer effective, and we can’t keep doing the same things and expecting to have more reach. Specifically, in the social media space, the strategies that used to bring success are far less effective on the organic side. It’s a gamble.
As a result, businesses across the board are having a much harder time predicting where their attention needs to be, where it makes sense to allocate resources and time, and planning for the future of their business. The conversations we have been having with our clients and peers have confirmed that everyone is having a hard time figuring out where to put their focus, where to commit, and where to go all in. What is it going to take to ride the wave and see growth through this unpredictable time? 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The truth of the matter is that the market is shifting. As small business owners, we absolutely have to be paying attention because how this impacts us in the next few years is going to be really important. We all knew things would change after the pandemic, but two years later, we’re seeing the results in unexpected ways.</p><p>There just isn’t a recipe anymore. Instead of following predetermined steps to success, we’re all having to figure it out as we go. The strategies that we all once relied on are no longer effective, and we can’t keep doing the same things and expecting to have more reach. Specifically, in the social media space, the strategies that used to bring success are far less effective on the organic side. It’s a gamble.</p><p>As a result, businesses across the board are having a much harder time predicting where their attention needs to be, where it makes sense to allocate resources and time, and planning for the future of their business. The conversations we have been having with our clients and peers have confirmed that everyone is having a hard time figuring out where to put their focus, where to commit, and where to go all in. What is it going to take to ride the wave and see growth through this unpredictable time? </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2740</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[449f0d38-2a09-11ed-b052-877ca526fbf5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2636224254.mp3?updated=1662492631" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>671: Does Your Service Based Business Have a Sounding Board?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/does-your-service-based-business-have-a-sounding-board</link>
      <description>Believe it or not, change and growth are possible without you being in a perpetual state of despair. Crisis can’t be the only impetus for scaling your business; we strongly believe that you can seek expansion when things are going well!
In this episode, we break down the “Cycle of Despair” and the traps many service-based business owners fall into when they’re seeking to grow their businesses. If you are caught in the cycle of not having enough cash to bring in the support you need to land more clients and not enough clients to bring in the cash you need, we’re here to offer you a new approach.
Join us today as we actively aim to reduce your despair, and put the scarcity mindset to rest. There are ebbs and flows to everything that we do; we can’t bypass the dips but we can reframe the way we think about them! To all you kickass business owners out there, tune in to find out how you can set the stress aside and enjoy the fruits of your labor!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 06 Sep 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Does Your Service Based Business Have a Sounding Board?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>671</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join us today as we actively aim to reduce your despair, and put the scarcity mindset to rest. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Believe it or not, change and growth are possible without you being in a perpetual state of despair. Crisis can’t be the only impetus for scaling your business; we strongly believe that you can seek expansion when things are going well!
In this episode, we break down the “Cycle of Despair” and the traps many service-based business owners fall into when they’re seeking to grow their businesses. If you are caught in the cycle of not having enough cash to bring in the support you need to land more clients and not enough clients to bring in the cash you need, we’re here to offer you a new approach.
Join us today as we actively aim to reduce your despair, and put the scarcity mindset to rest. There are ebbs and flows to everything that we do; we can’t bypass the dips but we can reframe the way we think about them! To all you kickass business owners out there, tune in to find out how you can set the stress aside and enjoy the fruits of your labor!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Believe it or not, change and growth are possible without you being in a perpetual state of despair. Crisis can’t be the only impetus for scaling your business; we strongly believe that you can seek expansion when things are going well!</p><p>In this episode, we break down the “Cycle of Despair” and the traps many service-based business owners fall into when they’re seeking to grow their businesses. If you are caught in the cycle of not having enough cash to bring in the support you need to land more clients and not enough clients to bring in the cash you need, we’re here to offer you a new approach.</p><p>Join us today as we actively aim to reduce your despair, and put the scarcity mindset to rest. There are ebbs and flows to everything that we do; we can’t bypass the dips but we can reframe the way we think about them! To all you kickass business owners out there, tune in to find out how you can set the stress aside and enjoy the fruits of your labor!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1926</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[daccc16e-2a05-11ed-808e-cf02530ced70]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8796038150.mp3?updated=1662045059" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>670: How to Thrive in Maintenance Mode So You Can Be Set Up for Growth</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-thrive-in-maintenance-mode-so-you-can-be-set-up-for-growth</link>
      <description>All too often, business owners will be trucking along just fine, reaching their goals and generating profits, but that inner feeling of urgency never quite goes away. This is a little easier to justify early on in business. We think of this as the honeymoon phase, but for business. You see all this potential, and your vision is strong. 
Growing something is way more exciting than maintaining something. We don’t give enough credit to the outside validation that you get when you first take the leap and start something new. Oftentimes, if you’re fueled by that, you end up staying significantly smaller than your potential because you keep starting over instead of adding or growing. Is there a better way to approach that feeling of wanting to start all over again? 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 01 Sep 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Thrive in Maintenance Mode So You Can Be Set Up for Growth</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>670</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Growing something is way more exciting than maintaining something. Is there a better way to approach that feeling of wanting to start all over again? </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>All too often, business owners will be trucking along just fine, reaching their goals and generating profits, but that inner feeling of urgency never quite goes away. This is a little easier to justify early on in business. We think of this as the honeymoon phase, but for business. You see all this potential, and your vision is strong. 
Growing something is way more exciting than maintaining something. We don’t give enough credit to the outside validation that you get when you first take the leap and start something new. Oftentimes, if you’re fueled by that, you end up staying significantly smaller than your potential because you keep starting over instead of adding or growing. Is there a better way to approach that feeling of wanting to start all over again? 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>All too often, business owners will be trucking along just fine, reaching their goals and generating profits, but that inner feeling of urgency never quite goes away. This is a little easier to justify early on in business. We think of this as the honeymoon phase, but for business. You see all this potential, and your vision is strong. </p><p>Growing something is way more exciting than maintaining something. We don’t give enough credit to the outside validation that you get when you first take the leap and start something new. Oftentimes, if you’re fueled by that, you end up staying significantly smaller than your potential because you keep starting over instead of adding or growing. Is there a better way to approach that feeling of wanting to start all over again? </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2087</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[25bd3de6-2954-11ed-befd-4bd69aac6836]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4646877375.mp3?updated=1661969197" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>669: How to Recession Proof Your Service Based Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-recession-proof-your-service-based-business</link>
      <description>We’re collectively going through what is likely to be the next recession. Nobody has officially called it yet, but it seems to us like that’s the direction we’re heading, or that we’re already in it. Because many other people feel the same way, they are changing their behaviors. So, today we are going to be talking about what it looks like to recession proof your business! 
Maybe you weren’t in business during the last recession, so you don’t know what to expect, or you’re used to consistent success, so the slower market has come as a bit of a shock; whatever situation you’re in currently, we’re going to make you feel more at ease and give you some practical advice for how to approach the coming months and years. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.

We mentioned:  https://www.indeed.com/strategyhour
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 30 Aug 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Recession Proof Your Service Based Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>669</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Whatever situation you’re in currently, we’re going to make you feel more at ease and give you some practical advice for how to approach the coming months and years</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’re collectively going through what is likely to be the next recession. Nobody has officially called it yet, but it seems to us like that’s the direction we’re heading, or that we’re already in it. Because many other people feel the same way, they are changing their behaviors. So, today we are going to be talking about what it looks like to recession proof your business! 
Maybe you weren’t in business during the last recession, so you don’t know what to expect, or you’re used to consistent success, so the slower market has come as a bit of a shock; whatever situation you’re in currently, we’re going to make you feel more at ease and give you some practical advice for how to approach the coming months and years. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.

We mentioned:  https://www.indeed.com/strategyhour
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’re collectively going through what is likely to be the next recession. Nobody has officially called it yet, but it seems to us like that’s the direction we’re heading, or that we’re already in it. Because many other people feel the same way, they are changing their behaviors. So, today we are going to be talking about what it looks like to recession proof your business! </p><p>Maybe you weren’t in business during the last recession, so you don’t know what to expect, or you’re used to consistent success, so the slower market has come as a bit of a shock; whatever situation you’re in currently, we’re going to make you feel more at ease and give you some practical advice for how to approach the coming months and years. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p><br></p><p>We mentioned:  https://www.indeed.com/strategyhour</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2056</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[246057ae-23c2-11ed-a81b-0fb5be634749]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2983061261.mp3?updated=1661544977" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>668: The Consequences of Finding Joy in Your Work</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-consequences-of-finding-joy-in-your-work</link>
      <description>Finding joy in your work is a wonderful thing. It can energize you, further your drive, and help you push through challenging tasks and deadlines. But it can also have a detrimental effect. Many of us have fallen into the trap of trying to get all our meaning and joy from one source, whether it’s your partner or your company. The problem with that is that it puts untenable pressure on the people we love the most. It can also cause us to neglect other parts of ourselves, leaving us devastated and adrift when we no longer have the partner, or job, that defined our identity.
Today on the show we delve into the consequences of finding joy in your work. We discuss some of the common traps people fall into when their actions aren’t in alignment with what they want, and how to do the difficult, introspective work of uncovering our true needs and aspirations. Tuning in you’ll learn about the biggest obstacles we’ve seen clients face, and how we can help you overcome them. We also discuss how to find more time in your life and identify exactly what you want for your future self!
Join us today for key insights into these important topics. Discover the consequences of finding joy in your work and learn how you can achieve balance and meaning in all areas of your life!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.

We mentioned: https://www.indeed.com/strategyhour
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 25 Aug 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Consequences of Finding Joy in Your Work</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>668</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We discuss some of the common traps people fall into when their actions aren’t in alignment with what they want, and how to do the difficult, introspective work of uncovering our true needs and aspirations. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Finding joy in your work is a wonderful thing. It can energize you, further your drive, and help you push through challenging tasks and deadlines. But it can also have a detrimental effect. Many of us have fallen into the trap of trying to get all our meaning and joy from one source, whether it’s your partner or your company. The problem with that is that it puts untenable pressure on the people we love the most. It can also cause us to neglect other parts of ourselves, leaving us devastated and adrift when we no longer have the partner, or job, that defined our identity.
Today on the show we delve into the consequences of finding joy in your work. We discuss some of the common traps people fall into when their actions aren’t in alignment with what they want, and how to do the difficult, introspective work of uncovering our true needs and aspirations. Tuning in you’ll learn about the biggest obstacles we’ve seen clients face, and how we can help you overcome them. We also discuss how to find more time in your life and identify exactly what you want for your future self!
Join us today for key insights into these important topics. Discover the consequences of finding joy in your work and learn how you can achieve balance and meaning in all areas of your life!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.

We mentioned: https://www.indeed.com/strategyhour
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Finding joy in your work is a wonderful thing. It can energize you, further your drive, and help you push through challenging tasks and deadlines. But it can also have a detrimental effect. Many of us have fallen into the trap of trying to get all our meaning and joy from one source, whether it’s your partner or your company. The problem with that is that it puts untenable pressure on the people we love the most. It can also cause us to neglect other parts of ourselves, leaving us devastated and adrift when we no longer have the partner, or job, that defined our identity.</p><p>Today on the show we delve into the consequences of finding joy in your work. We discuss some of the common traps people fall into when their actions aren’t in alignment with what they want, and how to do the difficult, introspective work of uncovering our true needs and aspirations. Tuning in you’ll learn about the biggest obstacles we’ve seen clients face, and how we can help you overcome them. We also discuss how to find more time in your life and identify exactly what you want for your future self!</p><p>Join us today for key insights into these important topics. Discover the consequences of finding joy in your work and learn how you can achieve balance and meaning in all areas of your life!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p><br></p><p>We mentioned: https://www.indeed.com/strategyhour</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2107</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9cb7827e-2320-11ed-9c8d-ab29febf6f94]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4587057913.mp3?updated=1661781450" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>667: Why You Need to Look at Time as an Asset &amp; an Investment</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-you-need-to-look-at-time-as-an-asset-and-investment</link>
      <description>There is only one resource that you can’t get back and we’re willing to hazard a guess that you already know what it is. The good news is, it is renewable in the sense that you can plan to save more of it in the future! You guessed it, we’re talking about time.
Usually, when you start a business, you have way more time than money. As a result, you tend to be more generous with the former, committing every spare moment to building. Often, your business grows, and your approach doesn’t change. You’re still working nights and weekends to make up for the deficit that no longer exists. There have been various moments in our own journey where we’ve taken stock of what the business is and isn’t doing for us, and where we can free up some time.
The mistake we often see people making is that they tend to forget that investing their own time is worth way more than the cost of outsourcing certain tasks to someone else and paying for it. We’re here to tell you it’s okay if you don’t know how to invest your time wisely! There are actual steps that you can put in place to learn how to do that more efficiently to literally save you money and time in the future.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Aug 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why You Need to Look at Time as an Asset &amp; an Investment</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>667</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>It is the only resource that you can’t get back, but the good news is, it is renewable in the sense that you can plan to save more of it in the future! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There is only one resource that you can’t get back and we’re willing to hazard a guess that you already know what it is. The good news is, it is renewable in the sense that you can plan to save more of it in the future! You guessed it, we’re talking about time.
Usually, when you start a business, you have way more time than money. As a result, you tend to be more generous with the former, committing every spare moment to building. Often, your business grows, and your approach doesn’t change. You’re still working nights and weekends to make up for the deficit that no longer exists. There have been various moments in our own journey where we’ve taken stock of what the business is and isn’t doing for us, and where we can free up some time.
The mistake we often see people making is that they tend to forget that investing their own time is worth way more than the cost of outsourcing certain tasks to someone else and paying for it. We’re here to tell you it’s okay if you don’t know how to invest your time wisely! There are actual steps that you can put in place to learn how to do that more efficiently to literally save you money and time in the future.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There is only one resource that you can’t get back and we’re willing to hazard a guess that you already know what it is. The good news is, it is renewable in the sense that you can plan to save more of it in the future! You guessed it, we’re talking about time.</p><p>Usually, when you start a business, you have way more time than money. As a result, you tend to be more generous with the former, committing every spare moment to building. Often, your business grows, and your approach doesn’t change. You’re still working nights and weekends to make up for the deficit that no longer exists. There have been various moments in our own journey where we’ve taken stock of what the business is and isn’t doing for us, and where we can free up some time.</p><p>The mistake we often see people making is that they tend to forget that investing their own time is worth way more than the cost of outsourcing certain tasks to someone else and paying for it. We’re here to tell you it’s okay if you don’t know how to invest your time wisely! There are actual steps that you can put in place to learn how to do that more efficiently to literally save you money and time in the future.  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2215</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4dbf267c-1e57-11ed-aa71-738de714e079]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5533565673.mp3?updated=1660761430" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>666: Client Acquisition Has Changed: Here's What You Need to Lean Into</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/client-acquisition-has-changed-heres-what-you-need-to-lean-into</link>
      <description>Over the last three to six months we’ve been hearing a common complaint from business owners that they need more leads. Guys, quit panicking. There are a few market shifts that we need to be aware of, but they’re not necessarily changing how you’re going to acquire clients. Everything with clients may feel like it’s changing but in fact, everything is the same! We’re serious; everything is the same.  
Marketing is cyclical. You’re going to have something that works now that may not work in 6 months, and then in 2 years, that thing could come right back around again! There are also things that are a common thread forever and always; spoiler alert: it’s relationships. Then there’s going to be hotspots, and what you really shouldn’t do is build a business that relies on these “blips.” Marketing is coming back to its root a bit, shedding things that don’t work, and bringing things back that have been buried for a while. If you’re interested in everything we have to say on this topic, tune in today!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 18 Aug 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Client Acquisition Has Changed: Here's What You Need to Lean Into</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>666</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>There are things that are a common thread forever and always; spoiler alert: it's relationships!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Over the last three to six months we’ve been hearing a common complaint from business owners that they need more leads. Guys, quit panicking. There are a few market shifts that we need to be aware of, but they’re not necessarily changing how you’re going to acquire clients. Everything with clients may feel like it’s changing but in fact, everything is the same! We’re serious; everything is the same.  
Marketing is cyclical. You’re going to have something that works now that may not work in 6 months, and then in 2 years, that thing could come right back around again! There are also things that are a common thread forever and always; spoiler alert: it’s relationships. Then there’s going to be hotspots, and what you really shouldn’t do is build a business that relies on these “blips.” Marketing is coming back to its root a bit, shedding things that don’t work, and bringing things back that have been buried for a while. If you’re interested in everything we have to say on this topic, tune in today!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Over the last three to six months we’ve been hearing a common complaint from business owners that they need more leads. Guys, quit panicking. There are a few market shifts that we need to be aware of, but they’re not necessarily changing how you’re going to acquire clients. Everything with clients may feel like it’s changing but in fact, everything is the same! We’re serious; everything is the same.  </p><p>Marketing is cyclical. You’re going to have something that works now that may not work in 6 months, and then in 2 years, that thing could come right back around again! There are also things that are a common thread forever and always; spoiler alert: it’s relationships. Then there’s going to be hotspots, and what you really shouldn’t do is build a business that relies on these “blips.” Marketing is coming back to its root a bit, shedding things that don’t work, and bringing things back that have been buried for a while. If you’re interested in everything we have to say on this topic, tune in today!  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2218</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[00184c7a-1e50-11ed-b3e2-3b450c4402de]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9190391786.mp3?updated=1660757298" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>665: Expectations Vs. Realities of Owning a 7-Figure Business </title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/expectations-vs-realities-of-owning-a-7-figure-business</link>
      <description>Not everything we do at Boss Project is something we recommend to our clients, even though it may have worked for us. For example, we don’t encourage a lot of folks to replicate our partnership model. Oftentimes, you can actually get what you want by following an entirely different path to the one we took to get there. Another example of this is reaching seven figures. Is there a way for you to achieve the life and lifestyle you’re looking for without the challenges that come with adding a zero to your revenue? We’ve been there, and we have the insight to tell you what the journey looks like.
What we’ve found is that people’s desires are often much closer to their current reality than to a reality that they don’t yet have. What’s hard to manage is that as your reality changes, so do your desires. If one of your biggest motivators to achieve seven figures is just to be able to say you did, that’s totally okay! We’re here to validate that. But we’re also here to talk to you about what you can realistically expect from that experience. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 16 Aug 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Expectations Vs. Realities of Owning a 7-Figure Business </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>665</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Is there a way for you to achieve the life and lifestyle you’re looking for without the challenges that come with adding a zero to your revenue?</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Not everything we do at Boss Project is something we recommend to our clients, even though it may have worked for us. For example, we don’t encourage a lot of folks to replicate our partnership model. Oftentimes, you can actually get what you want by following an entirely different path to the one we took to get there. Another example of this is reaching seven figures. Is there a way for you to achieve the life and lifestyle you’re looking for without the challenges that come with adding a zero to your revenue? We’ve been there, and we have the insight to tell you what the journey looks like.
What we’ve found is that people’s desires are often much closer to their current reality than to a reality that they don’t yet have. What’s hard to manage is that as your reality changes, so do your desires. If one of your biggest motivators to achieve seven figures is just to be able to say you did, that’s totally okay! We’re here to validate that. But we’re also here to talk to you about what you can realistically expect from that experience. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Not everything we do at Boss Project is something we recommend to our clients, even though it may have worked for us. For example, we don’t encourage a lot of folks to replicate our partnership model. Oftentimes, you can actually get what you want by following an entirely different path to the one we took to get there. Another example of this is reaching seven figures. Is there a way for you to achieve the life and lifestyle you’re looking for without the challenges that come with adding a zero to your revenue? We’ve been there, and we have the insight to tell you what the journey looks like.</p><p>What we’ve found is that people’s desires are often much closer to their current reality than to a reality that they don’t yet have. What’s hard to manage is that as your reality changes, so do your desires. If one of your biggest motivators to achieve seven figures is just to be able to say you did, that’s totally okay! We’re here to validate that. But we’re also here to talk to you about what you can realistically expect from that experience. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2136</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a41ed3de-198c-11ed-9571-139fdbab0239]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8390191044.mp3?updated=1660234113" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>664: The 4 Things a Service Provider Must Get Right: Part Four Build the Team to Help You Scale</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/4-things-a-service-provider-must-get-right-p4-build-the-team-to-help-you-scale</link>
      <description>Let’s dive into our fourth and final part of the epic series that is absolutely going to transform your life and your business! Today, we fill you in on a few critical insights into building the perfect team to help you scale. We’ve saved this one for last because, without creating structure, you can’t start building a team, but once you’re ready, you’ll find it to be an incredibly powerful tool to take you to the next level (if you get it right!). If you’ve skipped a few steps and already have a team of employees, never fear, it’s never too late to improve upon your current systems. Not every piece has to be perfect but when it comes to hiring, the more you know, the more equipped you’ll be to face whatever comes your way. And that’s what we’re here for! In this episode, you'll learn all about hiring for attitude, designing a well-integrated employee system, defining your priorities and hiring accordingly, refining your team, productizing your offer, and so much more! You won’t want to miss this one.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 11 Aug 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The 4 Things a Service Provider Must Get Right: Part Four Build the Team to Help You Scale</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>664</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Hiring for attitude, designing a well-integrated employee system, defining your priorities and hiring accordingly, refining your team, productizing your offer, and so much more!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Let’s dive into our fourth and final part of the epic series that is absolutely going to transform your life and your business! Today, we fill you in on a few critical insights into building the perfect team to help you scale. We’ve saved this one for last because, without creating structure, you can’t start building a team, but once you’re ready, you’ll find it to be an incredibly powerful tool to take you to the next level (if you get it right!). If you’ve skipped a few steps and already have a team of employees, never fear, it’s never too late to improve upon your current systems. Not every piece has to be perfect but when it comes to hiring, the more you know, the more equipped you’ll be to face whatever comes your way. And that’s what we’re here for! In this episode, you'll learn all about hiring for attitude, designing a well-integrated employee system, defining your priorities and hiring accordingly, refining your team, productizing your offer, and so much more! You won’t want to miss this one.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Let’s dive into our fourth and final part of the epic series that is absolutely going to transform your life and your business! Today, we fill you in on a few critical insights into building the perfect team to help you scale. We’ve saved this one for last because, without creating structure, you can’t start building a team, but once you’re ready, you’ll find it to be an incredibly powerful tool to take you to the next level (if you get it right!). If you’ve skipped a few steps and already have a team of employees, never fear, it’s never too late to improve upon your current systems. Not every piece has to be perfect but when it comes to hiring, the more you know, the more equipped you’ll be to face whatever comes your way. And that’s what we’re here for! In this episode, you'll learn all about hiring for attitude, designing a well-integrated employee system, defining your priorities and hiring accordingly, refining your team, productizing your offer, and so much more! You won’t want to miss this one.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2508</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[828f4bc8-1814-11ed-aabe-5f633db3c1d5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2589266602.mp3?updated=1660072017" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>663: The 4 Things a Service Provider Must Get Right: Part Three Design Your Systems for Structure</title>
      <description>Welcome back to part three of our series on the four things every service provider must get right. In today’s installment, we’ll be delving into one of our favorite topics here at Boss Project: designing your systems for structure. 
Most of our clients deliver a service that requires their clients' contribution. This means they usually need input from clients before they can take the next step in their process. Unfortunately, they often aren’t able to systematize a process, because they’re spending most of their time and energy chasing people down all the time! In today’s episode we delve into how to create systems that support you, the impact it will have on your operations, and why it’s all about spending more time with your clients, not less!
We want to help you align the goals and values of your business with the systems you put in place. Our approach is all about how to create structure while taking into account the messiness of life, clients, and running a service-based business. Tune in today as we break down how to design your systems for structure and serve your clients to the best of your ability!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 09 Aug 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The 4 Things a Service Provider Must Get Right: Part Three Design Your Systems for Structure</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>663</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How to create systems that support you, the impact it will have on your operations, and why it’s all about spending more time with your clients, not less!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to part three of our series on the four things every service provider must get right. In today’s installment, we’ll be delving into one of our favorite topics here at Boss Project: designing your systems for structure. 
Most of our clients deliver a service that requires their clients' contribution. This means they usually need input from clients before they can take the next step in their process. Unfortunately, they often aren’t able to systematize a process, because they’re spending most of their time and energy chasing people down all the time! In today’s episode we delve into how to create systems that support you, the impact it will have on your operations, and why it’s all about spending more time with your clients, not less!
We want to help you align the goals and values of your business with the systems you put in place. Our approach is all about how to create structure while taking into account the messiness of life, clients, and running a service-based business. Tune in today as we break down how to design your systems for structure and serve your clients to the best of your ability!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to part three of our series on the four things every service provider must get right. In today’s installment, we’ll be delving into one of our favorite topics here at Boss Project: designing your systems for structure. </p><p>Most of our clients deliver a service that requires their clients' contribution. This means they usually need input from clients before they can take the next step in their process. Unfortunately, they often aren’t able to systematize a process, because they’re spending most of their time and energy chasing people down all the time! In today’s episode we delve into how to create systems that support you, the impact it will have on your operations, and why it’s all about spending more time with your clients, not less!</p><p>We want to help you align the goals and values of your business with the systems you put in place. Our approach is all about how to create structure while taking into account the messiness of life, clients, and running a service-based business. Tune in today as we break down how to design your systems for structure and serve your clients to the best of your ability!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2277</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[17296f74-172b-11ed-91b6-eba1fd141163]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1472724284.mp3?updated=1659972904" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>662: The 4 Things a Service Provider Must Get Right: Part Two Making Sure the Deliverables are Profitable</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/4-things-a-service-provider-must-get-right-part-two-making-sure-the-deliverables-are-profitable</link>
      <description>In part two of our series on the four things every service provider must get right, we’re talking about money! Particularly, we are talking about profitability. If you want a business that allows you to sleep and see your friends, and maybe even take a vacation, you need to be paying attention to the piece of your business that determines if your deliverables are profitable.
What does it take to really run your service fully? Can you identify what projects are bringing in the most profit for your business? Do you operationally know where you might have some of those ‘cherry on top’ niceties that you might be able to fund in a different or unique way?
At the end of the day, if you don’t have money to fund the business that you are running, you are not going to have a business to run. We want you to not only have a business to run, but we want your business to fund the life that you want to have, and that’s literally our whole mission over at Boss Project! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 04 Aug 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The 4 Things a Service Provider Must Get Right: Part Two Making Sure the Deliverables are Profitable</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>662</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you want a business that allows you to sleep and see your friends, and maybe even take a vacation, you need to be paying attention to the piece of your business that determines if your deliverables are profitable.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In part two of our series on the four things every service provider must get right, we’re talking about money! Particularly, we are talking about profitability. If you want a business that allows you to sleep and see your friends, and maybe even take a vacation, you need to be paying attention to the piece of your business that determines if your deliverables are profitable.
What does it take to really run your service fully? Can you identify what projects are bringing in the most profit for your business? Do you operationally know where you might have some of those ‘cherry on top’ niceties that you might be able to fund in a different or unique way?
At the end of the day, if you don’t have money to fund the business that you are running, you are not going to have a business to run. We want you to not only have a business to run, but we want your business to fund the life that you want to have, and that’s literally our whole mission over at Boss Project! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In part two of our series on the four things every service provider must get right, we’re talking about money! Particularly, we are talking about profitability. If you want a business that allows you to sleep and see your friends, and maybe even take a vacation, you need to be paying attention to the piece of your business that determines if your deliverables are profitable.</p><p>What does it take to really run your service fully? Can you identify what projects are bringing in the most profit for your business? Do you operationally know where you might have some of those ‘cherry on top’ niceties that you might be able to fund in a different or unique way?</p><p>At the end of the day, if you don’t have money to fund the business that you are running, you are not going to have a business to run. We want you to not only have a business to run, but we want your business to fund the life that you want to have, and that’s literally our whole mission over at Boss Project! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2454</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1accc68e-0f61-11ed-9be3-834bb0c1e6f6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2529026914.mp3?updated=1659115947" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>661: The 4 Things a Service Provider Must Get Right: Part One Identify Your Result</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/4-things-a-service-provider-must-get-right-part-one-identify-your-result</link>
      <description>We are bringing you a series! It’s going to be a four-part series dropping on Tuesdays and Thursdays for the next two weeks. In it, we’re going to be covering the four things that a service provider must get right. The reason why we’re launching this particular series is because we’re surprised year after year about the lack of higher-level resources geared towards the tens of thousands of people who listen to this show, namely established business owners who are looking to figure out their next move for their business so that they can level up. So, we’re creating those foundational resources for you in the form of a podcast series. We’re so excited to dig in, come join us! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 02 Aug 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The 4 Things a Service Provider Must Get Right: Part One Identify Your Result</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>661</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Business is cyclical. When you first start your business, you will probably have a naive way of thinking and you’ll try out lots of different things to see what sticks. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are bringing you a series! It’s going to be a four-part series dropping on Tuesdays and Thursdays for the next two weeks. In it, we’re going to be covering the four things that a service provider must get right. The reason why we’re launching this particular series is because we’re surprised year after year about the lack of higher-level resources geared towards the tens of thousands of people who listen to this show, namely established business owners who are looking to figure out their next move for their business so that they can level up. So, we’re creating those foundational resources for you in the form of a podcast series. We’re so excited to dig in, come join us! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are bringing you a series! It’s going to be a four-part series dropping on Tuesdays and Thursdays for the next two weeks. In it, we’re going to be covering the four things that a service provider must get right. The reason why we’re launching this particular series is because we’re surprised year after year about the lack of higher-level resources geared towards the tens of thousands of people who listen to this show, namely established business owners who are looking to figure out their next move for their business so that they can level up. So, we’re creating those foundational resources for you in the form of a podcast series. We’re so excited to dig in, come join us! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2133</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e0048542-0f55-11ed-b1da-5b80a697dff3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2508074049.mp3?updated=1659111080" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>660: What to Do When Your Client Won't Listen to You (And Other Imposter Syndrome Feels)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-to-do-when-your-client-wont-listen-to-you</link>
      <description>All of us, as service providers, need to be reminded of the importance of gauging whether we are, perhaps subconsciously, tying our personal identity and self-worth to what we bring to the table for our clients. There have been some conversations popping up recently in which very successful service providers have been wondering why certain clients are not listening to their every word or taking their professional advice. They are made to feel both frustrated and insecure, as they recognize the clients aren’t going to see the results they’re able to procure for them because they refuse to adhere to the strategy. We, personally, are not immune to these thoughts, and today, we want to share our personal experience and some exercises to help you dispel imposter syndrome and communicate clearly and calmly with clients who won’t hear you out. It’s time to actively separate your self-worth from your work and quit taking on your clients’ “emergencies!”
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 28 Jul 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What to Do When Your Client Won't Listen to You (And Other Imposter Syndrome Feels)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>660</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We share our personal experience and some exercises to help you dispel imposter syndrome and communicate clearly and calmly with clients who won’t hear you out.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>All of us, as service providers, need to be reminded of the importance of gauging whether we are, perhaps subconsciously, tying our personal identity and self-worth to what we bring to the table for our clients. There have been some conversations popping up recently in which very successful service providers have been wondering why certain clients are not listening to their every word or taking their professional advice. They are made to feel both frustrated and insecure, as they recognize the clients aren’t going to see the results they’re able to procure for them because they refuse to adhere to the strategy. We, personally, are not immune to these thoughts, and today, we want to share our personal experience and some exercises to help you dispel imposter syndrome and communicate clearly and calmly with clients who won’t hear you out. It’s time to actively separate your self-worth from your work and quit taking on your clients’ “emergencies!”
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>All of us, as service providers, need to be reminded of the importance of gauging whether we are, perhaps subconsciously, tying our personal identity and self-worth to what we bring to the table for our clients. There have been some conversations popping up recently in which very successful service providers have been wondering why certain clients are not listening to their every word or taking their professional advice. They are made to feel both frustrated and insecure, as they recognize the clients aren’t going to see the results they’re able to procure for them because they refuse to adhere to the strategy. We, personally, are not immune to these thoughts, and today, we want to share our personal experience and some exercises to help you dispel imposter syndrome and communicate clearly and calmly with clients who won’t hear you out. It’s time to actively separate your self-worth from your work and quit taking on your clients’ “emergencies!”</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2231</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[00f88390-0d15-11ed-9c63-e792893a979f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3597162154.mp3?updated=1658863710" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>659: How Team Boss Project Lives in Our Life-First Value</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-team-boss-project-lives-in-our-life-first-value</link>
      <description>Our very first absolute priority when it comes to our business values, is building a business that is life first. To us, that means that our business structure reflects the season we are in. Seasons can be short or long, but they are intentional choices. You can choose to work full time, build a business, and still respect life first. 
What this looks like for us, is allowing ourselves plenty of flexibility even while working full-time hours. When we chose to do business this way, we structured our days in a way where we could still prioritize family and life over work. How it looks is not the point, how it is communicated, and how it is honored, are! Life first looks completely different in every different context - what our team looks like when we’re working, what our team looks like when we are not working. Open and early communication is the essential building block for a life-first business to thrive. 
We’ve made it a rule that every single employee has to take both their birthday and their anniversary off from work. That’s just one example of how we’ve built the life-first value into our business, and we’re proud of it! Building a life-first business can look any way you want it to, and it can be the little things, and ultimately our goal is that you have the freedom to choose what you want to prioritize and how that works. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 26 Jul 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How Team Boss Project Lives in Our Life-First Value</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>659</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Our very first absolute priority when it comes to our business values, is building a business that is life first. To us, that means that our business structure reflects the season we are in.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Our very first absolute priority when it comes to our business values, is building a business that is life first. To us, that means that our business structure reflects the season we are in. Seasons can be short or long, but they are intentional choices. You can choose to work full time, build a business, and still respect life first. 
What this looks like for us, is allowing ourselves plenty of flexibility even while working full-time hours. When we chose to do business this way, we structured our days in a way where we could still prioritize family and life over work. How it looks is not the point, how it is communicated, and how it is honored, are! Life first looks completely different in every different context - what our team looks like when we’re working, what our team looks like when we are not working. Open and early communication is the essential building block for a life-first business to thrive. 
We’ve made it a rule that every single employee has to take both their birthday and their anniversary off from work. That’s just one example of how we’ve built the life-first value into our business, and we’re proud of it! Building a life-first business can look any way you want it to, and it can be the little things, and ultimately our goal is that you have the freedom to choose what you want to prioritize and how that works. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Our very first absolute priority when it comes to our business values, is building a business that is life first. To us, that means that our business structure reflects the season we are in. Seasons can be short or long, but they are intentional choices. You can choose to work full time, build a business, and still respect life first. </p><p>What this looks like for us, is allowing ourselves plenty of flexibility even while working full-time hours. When we chose to do business this way, we structured our days in a way where we could still prioritize family and life over work. How it looks is not the point, how it is communicated, and how it is honored, are! Life first looks completely different in every different context - what our team looks like when we’re working, what our team looks like when we are not working. Open and early communication is the essential building block for a life-first business to thrive. </p><p>We’ve made it a rule that every single employee has to take both their birthday and their anniversary off from work. That’s just one example of how we’ve built the life-first value into our business, and we’re proud of it! Building a life-first business can look any way you want it to, and it can be the little things, and ultimately our goal is that you have the freedom to choose what you want to prioritize and how that works. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2430</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[331005ce-0c2f-11ed-b9ac-4ff350f17d4f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6741202504.mp3?updated=1658764859" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>658: How Your Service Pricing Changes When You Choose to Have a Team</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-your-service-pricing-changes-when-you-choose-to-have-a-team</link>
      <description>For those of you who have reached the point of hitting your first or second six figures and are beginning to tap out of what you personally do within your business, there’s a conversation that needs to be had. A lot of people decide to ditch their current offers for an entirely different set of offers because they think that’s the only way to move up, however, we think pricing is a great opportunity to expand. Oftentimes, the clients that work with us in the Incubator are able to work with fewer people and make more money, if they’re priced appropriately. But something we don’t see happening as much as it should, is people moving to a premium pricing model to set them up to grow their team. Tune in to discover how to grow your team ethically, calculate appropriate service pricing, and why you might be pricing inappropriately, to begin with!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show, notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 21 Jul 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How Your Service Pricing Changes When You Choose to Have a Team</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>658</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How to grow your team ethically, calculate appropriate service pricing, and why you might be pricing inappropriately, to begin with!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>For those of you who have reached the point of hitting your first or second six figures and are beginning to tap out of what you personally do within your business, there’s a conversation that needs to be had. A lot of people decide to ditch their current offers for an entirely different set of offers because they think that’s the only way to move up, however, we think pricing is a great opportunity to expand. Oftentimes, the clients that work with us in the Incubator are able to work with fewer people and make more money, if they’re priced appropriately. But something we don’t see happening as much as it should, is people moving to a premium pricing model to set them up to grow their team. Tune in to discover how to grow your team ethically, calculate appropriate service pricing, and why you might be pricing inappropriately, to begin with!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show, notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For those of you who have reached the point of hitting your first or second six figures and are beginning to tap out of what you personally do within your business, there’s a conversation that needs to be had. A lot of people decide to ditch their current offers for an entirely different set of offers because they think that’s the only way to move up, however, we think pricing is a great opportunity to expand. Oftentimes, the clients that work with us in the Incubator are able to work with fewer people and make more money, if they’re priced appropriately. But something we don’t see happening as much as it should, is people moving to a premium pricing model to set them up to grow their team. Tune in to discover how to grow your team ethically, calculate appropriate service pricing, and why you might be pricing inappropriately, to begin with!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show, notes go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1687</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dafdb34e-0847-11ed-8173-135ba43fcb8e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9371867521.mp3?updated=1658339298" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>657: Lessons in Goal Setting From a Former FBI Hostage Negotiator</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/lessons-in-goal-setting-from-a-former-fbi-hostage-negotiator</link>
      <description>Goal setting forms an integral part of any business. It serves as a guide for your overall vision and can help you persevere, especially when things get tough. But how do we choose our goals? And how do we fully recognize when we’ve obtained them? Too often, we’ve seen clients achieve incredible things only to find themselves unable to appreciate their accomplishments, simply because the reality doesn’t exactly match what they envisioned. This is why, today on the show, we are revisiting our conversation on goal setting and how to appreciate our accomplishments!
We dig into the forces that influence what we envision for ourselves, and how holding onto a particular resolution can undermine our current achievements. Learn how practicing gratitude with intention can help you appreciate your current circumstances and how shifting your perspective to your past self can make you thankful for all that you have! We also share what we learned from a recent interview with a Former FBI Hostage Negotiator about why humans are hardwired to focus on the negative and how to gain perspective. Uncovering what we truly want takes time and work and appreciating what we have takes gratitude and intention. Tune in as we delve into these important topics and the role they play in your life and business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 19 Jul 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Lessons in Goal Setting From a Former FBI Hostage Negotiator</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>657</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How do we choose our goals? And how do we fully recognize when we’ve obtained them? </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Goal setting forms an integral part of any business. It serves as a guide for your overall vision and can help you persevere, especially when things get tough. But how do we choose our goals? And how do we fully recognize when we’ve obtained them? Too often, we’ve seen clients achieve incredible things only to find themselves unable to appreciate their accomplishments, simply because the reality doesn’t exactly match what they envisioned. This is why, today on the show, we are revisiting our conversation on goal setting and how to appreciate our accomplishments!
We dig into the forces that influence what we envision for ourselves, and how holding onto a particular resolution can undermine our current achievements. Learn how practicing gratitude with intention can help you appreciate your current circumstances and how shifting your perspective to your past self can make you thankful for all that you have! We also share what we learned from a recent interview with a Former FBI Hostage Negotiator about why humans are hardwired to focus on the negative and how to gain perspective. Uncovering what we truly want takes time and work and appreciating what we have takes gratitude and intention. Tune in as we delve into these important topics and the role they play in your life and business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Goal setting forms an integral part of any business. It serves as a guide for your overall vision and can help you persevere, especially when things get tough. But how do we choose our goals? And how do we fully recognize when we’ve obtained them? Too often, we’ve seen clients achieve incredible things only to find themselves unable to appreciate their accomplishments, simply because the reality doesn’t exactly match what they envisioned. This is why, today on the show, we are revisiting our conversation on goal setting and how to appreciate our accomplishments!</p><p>We dig into the forces that influence what we envision for ourselves, and how holding onto a particular resolution can undermine our current achievements. Learn how practicing gratitude with intention can help you appreciate your current circumstances and how shifting your perspective to your past self can make you thankful for all that you have! We also share what we learned from a recent interview with a Former FBI Hostage Negotiator about why humans are hardwired to focus on the negative and how to gain perspective. Uncovering what we truly want takes time and work and appreciating what we have takes gratitude and intention. Tune in as we delve into these important topics and the role they play in your life and business!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2012</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8a237a74-f71e-11ec-8044-f35cb3d4ced1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8816348786.mp3?updated=1656451541" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>656: The 2 Ingredients Needed for a Successful Service Based Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-2-ingredients-needed-for-a-successful-service-based-business</link>
      <description>Coming your way today is a mix of math and anticipatory mindset work! It’s all through the lens of, “This is what you actually want.” We’re going to lay out the future a little bit for you so that you can start to understand what’s coming and that you can stop stressing about it! We’re seeing hundreds (if not thousands) of people who are constantly apologizing for doing things they don’t want to do. After today, we want you to understand why you shouldn’t be feeling bad about things like not posting consistently on social media, and what you should be putting energy into instead!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 14 Jul 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The 2 Ingredients Needed for a Successful Service Based Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>656</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Coming your way today is a mix of math and anticipatory mindset work! It’s all through the lens of, “This is what you actually want.” </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Coming your way today is a mix of math and anticipatory mindset work! It’s all through the lens of, “This is what you actually want.” We’re going to lay out the future a little bit for you so that you can start to understand what’s coming and that you can stop stressing about it! We’re seeing hundreds (if not thousands) of people who are constantly apologizing for doing things they don’t want to do. After today, we want you to understand why you shouldn’t be feeling bad about things like not posting consistently on social media, and what you should be putting energy into instead!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Coming your way today is a mix of math and anticipatory mindset work! It’s all through the lens of, “This is what you actually want.” We’re going to lay out the future a little bit for you so that you can start to understand what’s coming and that you can stop stressing about it! We’re seeing hundreds (if not thousands) of people who are constantly apologizing for doing things they don’t want to do. After today, we want you to understand why you shouldn’t be feeling bad about things like not posting consistently on social media, and what you should be putting energy into instead!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2406</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[fd3dc5b0-f71d-11ec-a5ea-c7887a443e9d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5947894884.mp3?updated=1656451757" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>655: Designing Your CEO + Creative Director Role</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/designing-your-ceo-and-creative-director-role</link>
      <description>What would it look like to remove yourself from the parts of the business that you should remove yourself from? And which parts should you never remove yourself from? Are there opportunities you’re ignoring because of this?
When you give up these things, we can only imagine that, in your heart of hearts, you want to lean more into the CEO role - you just don’t know yet exactly what you’re supposed to be doing with that time. But once you know more about what’s required of you within that role, you might find the motivation to let go of these other parts of the business, and by doing so, gain some very precious time back!
The number one thing that will help you and your business to take on more clients, is to have doers who can take on more client delivery. The parts of the business that you are resenting most at the moment might only be that way because you are feeling strapped for time. Ask yourself: Where would you shine best if you had the time? If you could design a CEO or creative director role for yourself, what would that look like?
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 12 Jul 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Designing Your CEO + Creative Director Role</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>655</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>What would it look like to remove yourself from the parts of the business that you should remove yourself from? And which parts should you never remove yourself from? Are there opportunities you’re ignoring because of this?</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What would it look like to remove yourself from the parts of the business that you should remove yourself from? And which parts should you never remove yourself from? Are there opportunities you’re ignoring because of this?
When you give up these things, we can only imagine that, in your heart of hearts, you want to lean more into the CEO role - you just don’t know yet exactly what you’re supposed to be doing with that time. But once you know more about what’s required of you within that role, you might find the motivation to let go of these other parts of the business, and by doing so, gain some very precious time back!
The number one thing that will help you and your business to take on more clients, is to have doers who can take on more client delivery. The parts of the business that you are resenting most at the moment might only be that way because you are feeling strapped for time. Ask yourself: Where would you shine best if you had the time? If you could design a CEO or creative director role for yourself, what would that look like?
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What would it look like to remove yourself from the parts of the business that you should remove yourself from? And which parts should you never remove yourself from? Are there opportunities you’re ignoring because of this?</p><p>When you give up these things, we can only imagine that, in your heart of hearts, you want to lean more into the CEO role - you just don’t know yet exactly what you’re supposed to be doing with that time. But once you know more about what’s required of you within that role, you might find the motivation to let go of these other parts of the business, and by doing so, gain some very precious time back!</p><p>The number one thing that will help you and your business to take on more clients, is to have doers who can take on more client delivery. The parts of the business that you are resenting most at the moment might only be that way because you are feeling strapped for time. Ask yourself: Where would you shine best if you had the time? If you could design a CEO or creative director role for yourself, what would that look like?</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1945</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8562de2c-f71d-11ec-b809-772d73c40da6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7016949203.mp3?updated=1656451864" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>654: We Don't Set Goals Anymore, Here's Why</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/we-dont-set-goals-anymore-heres-why</link>
      <description>Today, we’re going to fill you in on our hot take on setting goals! We are now seven years into our business and have hit tremendous milestones. That being said, our feelings towards goals have evolved over time, and we’re about to give you some insight into our retrospective thoughts on setting them, not setting them, and whether we feel worthiness is connected to them. For six-figure earners who want to continue to scale their business, there’s a mindset shift that needs to happen in terms of your relationship with goals, and we’re here to tell you what that is! Tune in to hear our current take on goal setting, and find out about the TikTok that inspired this conversation.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 07 Jul 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>We Don't Set Goals Anymore, Here's Why</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>654</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>For six-figure earners who want to continue to scale their business, there’s a mindset shift that needs to happen in terms of your relationship with goals, and we’re here to tell you what that is!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we’re going to fill you in on our hot take on setting goals! We are now seven years into our business and have hit tremendous milestones. That being said, our feelings towards goals have evolved over time, and we’re about to give you some insight into our retrospective thoughts on setting them, not setting them, and whether we feel worthiness is connected to them. For six-figure earners who want to continue to scale their business, there’s a mindset shift that needs to happen in terms of your relationship with goals, and we’re here to tell you what that is! Tune in to hear our current take on goal setting, and find out about the TikTok that inspired this conversation.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we’re going to fill you in on our hot take on setting goals! We are now seven years into our business and have hit tremendous milestones. That being said, our feelings towards goals have evolved over time, and we’re about to give you some insight into our retrospective thoughts on setting them, not setting them, and whether we feel worthiness is connected to them. For six-figure earners who want to continue to scale their business, there’s a mindset shift that needs to happen in terms of your relationship with goals, and we’re here to tell you what that is! Tune in to hear our current take on goal setting, and find out about the TikTok that inspired this conversation.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2192</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1928481e-f71d-11ec-8597-6721d00f3907]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8111489846.mp3?updated=1656452073" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>653: What Does a CEO Actually Do?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-does-a-ceo-actually-do</link>
      <description>It’s taken us over a year to understand how our roles as co-CEOs of our company are different from the other aspects of our jobs and what exactly a CEO actually does. We’re still in the process of figuring out how to balance being CEOs, managers, and “doers” but we’re getting there! In this episode, we will be talking about what being a CEO entails, the tasks you should always be in control of, and those which you can delegate to other team members at a certain point along your journey.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 05 Jul 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Does a CEO Actually Do?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>653</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>What being a CEO entails, the tasks you should always be in control of, and those which you can delegate to other team members at a certain point along your journey.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It’s taken us over a year to understand how our roles as co-CEOs of our company are different from the other aspects of our jobs and what exactly a CEO actually does. We’re still in the process of figuring out how to balance being CEOs, managers, and “doers” but we’re getting there! In this episode, we will be talking about what being a CEO entails, the tasks you should always be in control of, and those which you can delegate to other team members at a certain point along your journey.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It’s taken us over a year to understand how our roles as co-CEOs of our company are different from the other aspects of our jobs and what exactly a CEO actually does. We’re still in the process of figuring out how to balance being CEOs, managers, and “doers” but we’re getting there! In this episode, we will be talking about what being a CEO entails, the tasks you should always be in control of, and those which you can delegate to other team members at a certain point along your journey.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2692</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2303eefc-f71c-11ec-ad36-f726a307efc6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5165598051.mp3?updated=1656452224" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>652: How Premium Services Function Differently For B2B vs. B2C Businesses</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-premium-services-function-differently-for-b2b-vs-b2c-businesses</link>
      <description>Speaking to hundreds of people on a regular basis about their business has given us so much insight into which structures work for which industries. It’s what positions us to advise clients entering the incubator who find themselves at a fork in the road of how to move forward. We want to give you some guidance, and let you know what we would do if we were in your shoes. 
None of these options are wrong, it’s all centered around what works best for you, what feels fun, and what facilitates you playing to your strengths. There are plenty of scenarios that work amazingly for some people and don’t work at all for others. The question to focus on is not what is right, and what gets the greatest return, but what feels attainable for you. If something is not in step with who you are as a person, it’s not going to work!
More often than not, it comes down to the question of whether you have set yourself up to be successful within the options that you have available, and the limitations that they present. Maybe you need to pivot, maybe you need to reassess your offer, maybe you need to reach a new audience, or maybe, you need to re-adjust your expectations. These are the conversations we are having a lot with our audience, and we never get tired of them! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 30 Jun 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How Premium Services Function Differently For B2B vs. B2C Businesses</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>652</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>There are plenty of scenarios that work amazingly for some people and don’t work at all for others. The question to focus on is not what is right, and what gets the greatest return, but what feels attainable for you. If something is not in step with who you are as a person, it’s not going to work!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Speaking to hundreds of people on a regular basis about their business has given us so much insight into which structures work for which industries. It’s what positions us to advise clients entering the incubator who find themselves at a fork in the road of how to move forward. We want to give you some guidance, and let you know what we would do if we were in your shoes. 
None of these options are wrong, it’s all centered around what works best for you, what feels fun, and what facilitates you playing to your strengths. There are plenty of scenarios that work amazingly for some people and don’t work at all for others. The question to focus on is not what is right, and what gets the greatest return, but what feels attainable for you. If something is not in step with who you are as a person, it’s not going to work!
More often than not, it comes down to the question of whether you have set yourself up to be successful within the options that you have available, and the limitations that they present. Maybe you need to pivot, maybe you need to reassess your offer, maybe you need to reach a new audience, or maybe, you need to re-adjust your expectations. These are the conversations we are having a lot with our audience, and we never get tired of them! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Speaking to hundreds of people on a regular basis about their business has given us so much insight into which structures work for which industries. It’s what positions us to advise clients entering the incubator who find themselves at a fork in the road of how to move forward. We want to give you some guidance, and let you know what we would do if we were in your shoes. </p><p>None of these options are wrong, it’s all centered around what works best for you, what feels fun, and what facilitates you playing to your strengths. There are plenty of scenarios that work amazingly for some people and don’t work at all for others. The question to focus on is not what is right, and what gets the greatest return, but what feels attainable for you. If something is not in step with who you are as a person, it’s not going to work!</p><p>More often than not, it comes down to the question of whether you have set yourself up to be successful within the options that you have available, and the limitations that they present. Maybe you need to pivot, maybe you need to reassess your offer, maybe you need to reach a new audience, or maybe, you need to re-adjust your expectations. These are the conversations we are having a lot with our audience, and we never get tired of them! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2325</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b4618348-f0bc-11ec-a406-c70bc3e1e628]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3463107232.mp3?updated=1656449627" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>651: Boss Project is Closing...For Our 1st Summer Break - Here's How We Made it Happen</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/closing-for-our-1st-summer-break-heres-how-we-made-it-happen</link>
      <description>This year, for the first time ever, Boss Project is taking a summer break! We’ve taken vacations in the past, and while we’ve navigated time off before, this time is different. This year we have a full staff of nine employees, who will all be taking time off, and the company will be closed for two entire weeks! In today’s episode, we walk you through the steps we’ve taken to prepare for our time off and show you how any business can prepare for a substantial and regenerative summer break. 
Tuning in you’ll hear us break down how we’ve structured our work and our launches around designated time off, why we chose to do it this way, and what we’re planning to do for our break. We unpack some of the logistical steps we’re taking to maintain communication while we’re off, and why we wanted to prioritize our staff and give everyone a chance to rest and get away from it all. Thank you for joining us as we prepare for our summer break and discuss what it means to be a life-first business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 28 Jun 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Boss Project is Closing...For Our 1st Summer Break - Here's How We Made it Happen</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>651</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We walk you through the steps we’ve taken to prepare for our time off and show you how any business can prepare for a substantial and regenerative summer break. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This year, for the first time ever, Boss Project is taking a summer break! We’ve taken vacations in the past, and while we’ve navigated time off before, this time is different. This year we have a full staff of nine employees, who will all be taking time off, and the company will be closed for two entire weeks! In today’s episode, we walk you through the steps we’ve taken to prepare for our time off and show you how any business can prepare for a substantial and regenerative summer break. 
Tuning in you’ll hear us break down how we’ve structured our work and our launches around designated time off, why we chose to do it this way, and what we’re planning to do for our break. We unpack some of the logistical steps we’re taking to maintain communication while we’re off, and why we wanted to prioritize our staff and give everyone a chance to rest and get away from it all. Thank you for joining us as we prepare for our summer break and discuss what it means to be a life-first business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This year, for the first time ever, Boss Project is taking a summer break! We’ve taken vacations in the past, and while we’ve navigated time off before, this time is different. This year we have a full staff of nine employees, who will all be taking time off, and the company will be closed for two entire weeks! In today’s episode, we walk you through the steps we’ve taken to prepare for our time off and show you how any business can prepare for a substantial and regenerative summer break. </p><p>Tuning in you’ll hear us break down how we’ve structured our work and our launches around designated time off, why we chose to do it this way, and what we’re planning to do for our break. We unpack some of the logistical steps we’re taking to maintain communication while we’re off, and why we wanted to prioritize our staff and give everyone a chance to rest and get away from it all. Thank you for joining us as we prepare for our summer break and discuss what it means to be a life-first business!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2052</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8e45b65c-f0bc-11ec-895a-eb1c1cd3bd1a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2880476840.mp3?updated=1656342732" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>650: Part 2- How to Teach Your Team to Develop a Culture of Curiosity (Strategies We Use With Our Own Team) </title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-teach-your-team-to-develop-a-culture-of-curiosity-strategies-we-use</link>
      <description>What does it mean to cultivate a culture of curiosity? That’s what we’re going to be discussing today! “Culture of curiosity” isn’t just a fun phrase. It starts with the way you talk about your work with all the people who are in your support system. It should be all-encompassing because if you use different language with different people it can derail you (in our opinion). One of the very first switches that we made when we were first growing our team was to speak openly with our team members about the things that we used to only speak about during our private conversations. As soon as we started thinking out loud, and sharing our fears and excitement with the people around us, they could see the evolution in our thought patterns which is such a valuable and inclusive tool! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 23 Jun 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Part 2- How to Teach Your Team to Develop a Culture of Curiosity (Strategies We Use With Our Own Team) </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>650</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>What does it mean to cultivate a culture of curiosity? That’s what we’re going to be discussing today!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What does it mean to cultivate a culture of curiosity? That’s what we’re going to be discussing today! “Culture of curiosity” isn’t just a fun phrase. It starts with the way you talk about your work with all the people who are in your support system. It should be all-encompassing because if you use different language with different people it can derail you (in our opinion). One of the very first switches that we made when we were first growing our team was to speak openly with our team members about the things that we used to only speak about during our private conversations. As soon as we started thinking out loud, and sharing our fears and excitement with the people around us, they could see the evolution in our thought patterns which is such a valuable and inclusive tool! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What does it mean to cultivate a culture of curiosity? That’s what we’re going to be discussing today! “Culture of curiosity” isn’t just a fun phrase. It starts with the way you talk about your work with all the people who are in your support system. It should be all-encompassing because if you use different language with different people it can derail you (in our opinion). One of the very first switches that we made when we were first growing our team was to speak openly with our team members about the things that we used to only speak about during our private conversations. As soon as we started thinking out loud, and sharing our fears and excitement with the people around us, they could see the evolution in our thought patterns which is such a valuable and inclusive tool! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> </a><a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2295</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[639c7760-f0bc-11ec-aab5-a38d1cd9d553]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6454385124.mp3?updated=1655913315" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>649: Part 1 - How to Develop an Experimental Mindset (The Mind Work it *Actually* Takes)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-develop-an-experimental-mindset-the-mind-work-it-actually-takes</link>
      <description>How many times have you struggled to make a decision in business out of fear that you’d make the wrong decision? What if instead you viewed every decision as an opportunity to learn rather than succeed or fail? Today on the show we unpack what it means to have an experimental mindset, how to foster that for yourself and within your team, and how it can free you from regret and help you make decisions that will help you learn and grow.
Tuning in you’ll get a taste of what we've been chatting about with our clients inside the Incubator; from how unrealistic expectations can warp your mindset, to how to figure out what you really want. We’ve seen so many of our clients struggle to react to both success and failure and as a result, we wanted to discuss examples of actionable strategies. Learn what you can implement within your company and your team so that if you're in a similar situation, you have strategies to help you adapt to any situation! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 21 Jun 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Part 1 - How to Develop an Experimental Mindset (The Mind Work it *Actually* Takes)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>649</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How many times have you struggled to make a decision in business out of fear that you’d make the wrong decision? What if instead you viewed every decision as an opportunity to learn rather than succeed or fail?</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>How many times have you struggled to make a decision in business out of fear that you’d make the wrong decision? What if instead you viewed every decision as an opportunity to learn rather than succeed or fail? Today on the show we unpack what it means to have an experimental mindset, how to foster that for yourself and within your team, and how it can free you from regret and help you make decisions that will help you learn and grow.
Tuning in you’ll get a taste of what we've been chatting about with our clients inside the Incubator; from how unrealistic expectations can warp your mindset, to how to figure out what you really want. We’ve seen so many of our clients struggle to react to both success and failure and as a result, we wanted to discuss examples of actionable strategies. Learn what you can implement within your company and your team so that if you're in a similar situation, you have strategies to help you adapt to any situation! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>How many times have you struggled to make a decision in business out of fear that you’d make the wrong decision? What if instead you viewed every decision as an opportunity to learn rather than succeed or fail? Today on the show we unpack what it means to have an experimental mindset, how to foster that for yourself and within your team, and how it can free you from regret and help you make decisions that will help you learn and grow.</p><p>Tuning in you’ll get a taste of what we've been chatting about with our clients inside the <a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/incubator-application/?utm_source=podcast&amp;utm_medium=blogtext">Incubator</a>; from how unrealistic expectations can warp your mindset, to how to figure out what you really want. We’ve seen so many of our clients struggle to react to both success and failure and as a result, we wanted to discuss examples of actionable strategies. Learn what you can implement within your company and your team so that if you're in a similar situation, you have strategies to help you adapt to any situation! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2507</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[27d7a916-f0bc-11ec-ba5c-a33cf09af95f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2421715670.mp3?updated=1655767169" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>648:  What Does Scaling Mean to You? Here's What You Need to Do Before Going Into a Growth Phase</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-does-scaling-mean-to-you-heres-what-you-need-to-do-before-going-into-a-growth-phase</link>
      <description>Today we are going to have a fabulous conversation! When working with our current clients inside The Incubator we always talk about levers. What lever do you need to pull in order to get the result that you want? There aren’t actually that many levers that you have the option of pulling but people like to complicate things. We are here to simplify them for you! Sometimes the things that people think they need to do to scale and grow are actually just the opposite of what they should be doing. 
This conversation is all about what you should be thinking about before you start scaling. We want to give you insights into what scaling looks like in reality, so that you can decide if scaling your business really is something you want to do at this current stage of your journey. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jun 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Does Scaling Mean to You? Here's What You Need to Do Before Going Into a Growth Phase</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>648</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>What lever do you need to pull in order to get the result that you want? There aren’t actually that many levers that you have the option of pulling but people like to complicate things. We are here to simplify them for you! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are going to have a fabulous conversation! When working with our current clients inside The Incubator we always talk about levers. What lever do you need to pull in order to get the result that you want? There aren’t actually that many levers that you have the option of pulling but people like to complicate things. We are here to simplify them for you! Sometimes the things that people think they need to do to scale and grow are actually just the opposite of what they should be doing. 
This conversation is all about what you should be thinking about before you start scaling. We want to give you insights into what scaling looks like in reality, so that you can decide if scaling your business really is something you want to do at this current stage of your journey. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are going to have a fabulous conversation! When working with our current clients inside The Incubator we always talk about levers. What lever do you need to pull in order to get the result that you want? There aren’t actually that many levers that you have the option of pulling but people like to complicate things. We are here to simplify them for you! Sometimes the things that people think they need to do to scale and grow are actually just the opposite of what they should be doing. </p><p>This conversation is all about what you should be thinking about before you start scaling. We want to give you insights into what scaling looks like in reality, so that you can decide if scaling your business really is something you want to do at this current stage of your journey. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1846</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d03c6854-ecd8-11ec-b14a-63b8f7ccda96]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5132167752.mp3?updated=1655318504" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>647: The Audacity (Taylor's Version)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-audacity-taylors-version</link>
      <description>As much as we’d love to wave a magic wand and bestow confidence upon others, unfortunately, confidence isn’t something you can gift to other people. It’s often so much easier said than done, but we’ve whittled down a list of things you can do to create your own confidence if you weren’t naturally born with it or nurtured in that area! Confidence can be created, it can be learned. In this episode, we look at how our respective upbringings allowed us to forge confidence and create the lifestyles of our choosing, and how you, too, can nurture your confidence and change your beliefs!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jun 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Audacity (Taylor's Version)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>647</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’ve whittled down a list of things you can do to create your own confidence if you weren’t naturally born with it or nurtured in that area! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>As much as we’d love to wave a magic wand and bestow confidence upon others, unfortunately, confidence isn’t something you can gift to other people. It’s often so much easier said than done, but we’ve whittled down a list of things you can do to create your own confidence if you weren’t naturally born with it or nurtured in that area! Confidence can be created, it can be learned. In this episode, we look at how our respective upbringings allowed us to forge confidence and create the lifestyles of our choosing, and how you, too, can nurture your confidence and change your beliefs!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>As much as we’d love to wave a magic wand and bestow confidence upon others, unfortunately, confidence isn’t something you can gift to other people. It’s often so much easier said than done, but we’ve whittled down a list of things you can do to create your own confidence if you weren’t naturally born with it or nurtured in that area! Confidence can be created, it can be learned. In this episode, we look at how our respective upbringings allowed us to forge confidence and create the lifestyles of our choosing, and how you, too, can nurture your confidence and change your beliefs!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2350</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[23c73dc6-e6c8-11ec-b2f9-8f5468485e30]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7111171263.mp3?updated=1654884228" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>646: Do You Have a Cognitive Bias Towards Action or Thinking?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/do-you-have-a-cognitive-bias-towards-action-or-thinking</link>
      <description>When you’re trying to express a complex psychological feeling or event, but you aren’t familiar with the agreed-upon terms that experts use to describe it, the experience can be incredibly isolating. Today on the show we discuss a recent conversation we encountered that unpacks the differences between having a cognitive bias towards either action or thinking, and the consequences of that bias. 
Anyone who has spent some time listening to our show will likely be familiar with the terms being a ‘doer’ or a ‘be-er’. Tuning in, you’ll hear us discuss how being a doer correlates with a cognitive bias towards action while being a be-er strongly resembles having a cognitive bias towards thinking. We also cover some of the traps that action takers can fall into, including hasty decision making, and why you need to be able to take action while also making time to process and strategize. Tune in for a breakdown of these fascinating topics, as well as insights into some of the steps you can take to shape your cognitive bias!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 09 Jun 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Do You Have a Cognitive Bias Towards Action or Thinking?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>646</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we discuss a recent conversation we encountered that unpacks the differences between having a cognitive bias towards either action or thinking, and the consequences of that bias. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When you’re trying to express a complex psychological feeling or event, but you aren’t familiar with the agreed-upon terms that experts use to describe it, the experience can be incredibly isolating. Today on the show we discuss a recent conversation we encountered that unpacks the differences between having a cognitive bias towards either action or thinking, and the consequences of that bias. 
Anyone who has spent some time listening to our show will likely be familiar with the terms being a ‘doer’ or a ‘be-er’. Tuning in, you’ll hear us discuss how being a doer correlates with a cognitive bias towards action while being a be-er strongly resembles having a cognitive bias towards thinking. We also cover some of the traps that action takers can fall into, including hasty decision making, and why you need to be able to take action while also making time to process and strategize. Tune in for a breakdown of these fascinating topics, as well as insights into some of the steps you can take to shape your cognitive bias!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When you’re trying to express a complex psychological feeling or event, but you aren’t familiar with the agreed-upon terms that experts use to describe it, the experience can be incredibly isolating. Today on the show we discuss a recent conversation we encountered that unpacks the differences between having a cognitive bias towards either action or thinking, and the consequences of that bias. </p><p>Anyone who has spent some time listening to our show will likely be familiar with the terms being a ‘doer’ or a ‘be-er’. Tuning in, you’ll hear us discuss how being a doer correlates with a cognitive bias towards action while being a be-er strongly resembles having a cognitive bias towards thinking. We also cover some of the traps that action takers can fall into, including hasty decision making, and why you need to be able to take action while also making time to process and strategize. Tune in for a breakdown of these fascinating topics, as well as insights into some of the steps you can take to shape your cognitive bias!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2753</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[076f29da-e6bf-11ec-926b-332acaec9456]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7050920917.mp3?updated=1654649081" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>645: What to Do When You Hit a Brick Wall of Indecision When Scaling Your Service Based Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-to-do-when-you-hit-a-brick-wall-of-indecision-when-scaling-your-service-based-business</link>
      <description>A common thread that we’ve been noticing is that so many business owners we deal with have excelled in most facets of their life for a long time, but then all of a sudden they’ve hit a wall which has made them start to second guess everything they’ve done in the past, including their ability to be a business owner going forward. 
When you get to the point where you realize you are working hard and not reaping the rewards that would make it worth it and you’re feeling stuck about how to change that, we have the solution: The Incubator! When you’re deeply involved in something, it can be really difficult to understand how you can tweak it to make it work better for you. We can provide you with that perspective. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 07 Jun 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What to Do When You Hit a Brick Wall of Indecision When Scaling Your Service Based Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>645</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>A common thread that we’ve been noticing is that so many business owners we deal with have excelled in most facets of their life for a long time, but then all of a sudden they’ve hit a wall which has made them start to second guess everything they’ve done in the past, including their ability to be a business owner going forward. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>A common thread that we’ve been noticing is that so many business owners we deal with have excelled in most facets of their life for a long time, but then all of a sudden they’ve hit a wall which has made them start to second guess everything they’ve done in the past, including their ability to be a business owner going forward. 
When you get to the point where you realize you are working hard and not reaping the rewards that would make it worth it and you’re feeling stuck about how to change that, we have the solution: The Incubator! When you’re deeply involved in something, it can be really difficult to understand how you can tweak it to make it work better for you. We can provide you with that perspective. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A common thread that we’ve been noticing is that so many business owners we deal with have excelled in most facets of their life for a long time, but then all of a sudden they’ve hit a wall which has made them start to second guess everything they’ve done in the past, including their ability to be a business owner going forward. </p><p>When you get to the point where you realize you are working hard and not reaping the rewards that would make it worth it and you’re feeling stuck about how to change that, we have the solution: The Incubator! When you’re deeply involved in something, it can be really difficult to understand how you can tweak it to make it work better for you. We can provide you with that perspective. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2793</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d249cdb8-e5c0-11ec-90a8-f756c137d8f8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4449248117.mp3?updated=1654542118" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>644: You Can Earn a Full Time Income Without Working Full Time Hours</title>
      <description>The theme of needing more time is a common one that we are seeing amongst our clients, which is why we started off today’s conversation with a discussion about gardening and candle making! Our thoughts on this topic have changed a lot over the last 6 months because of the unexpected outcomes that we’ve witnessed, and we want to share them with you. Our advanced training is called “How to Double Your Income by Working 20 Hours a Week or Less.” Service providers, we see you, we know you’re burnt out, and our goal is to help you make more money and get your time back! Our strategy works, we have proof through the lives that have been changed as a result, so come and see how it can change your life too!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 02 Jun 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>You Can Earn a Full Time Income Without Working Full Time Hours</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>644</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>The theme of needing more time is a common one that we are seeing amongst our clients, which is why we started off today’s conversation with a discussion about gardening and candle making!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>The theme of needing more time is a common one that we are seeing amongst our clients, which is why we started off today’s conversation with a discussion about gardening and candle making! Our thoughts on this topic have changed a lot over the last 6 months because of the unexpected outcomes that we’ve witnessed, and we want to share them with you. Our advanced training is called “How to Double Your Income by Working 20 Hours a Week or Less.” Service providers, we see you, we know you’re burnt out, and our goal is to help you make more money and get your time back! Our strategy works, we have proof through the lives that have been changed as a result, so come and see how it can change your life too!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The theme of needing more time is a common one that we are seeing amongst our clients, which is why we started off today’s conversation with a discussion about gardening and candle making! Our thoughts on this topic have changed a lot over the last 6 months because of the unexpected outcomes that we’ve witnessed, and we want to share them with you. Our advanced training is called “How to Double Your Income by Working 20 Hours a Week or Less.” Service providers, we see you, we know you’re burnt out, and our goal is to help you make more money and get your time back! Our strategy works, we have proof through the lives that have been changed as a result, so come and see how it can change your life too!  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to:<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2513</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[133e3ade-e1d4-11ec-893f-57b9e1d7fe46]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6384400791.mp3?updated=1654108146" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>643: We Hate Marketing: Here's Why</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/we-hate-marketing-heres-why</link>
      <description>The current market is shifting. There’s no doubt about it. What do you think the future of marketing looks like online? Maybe we’re at the next stage of marketing, and the next iteration hasn’t revealed itself yet. A lot of the things that people consider ‘marketing’ may not even be helpful for the majority of service-based business owners. For the majority of you, marketing is a huge distraction! It’s also an ego-killer. 
Watching other businesses on social media can lead us to feel despondent about our skills and what we have to offer. It can lead us to set unrealistic expectations for ourselves. Vanity metrics aren’t helpful, but is traditional marketing even helpful? Can it help to an extent? Sure. But is it even necessary? For a lot of people, the answer is no. If you’re passionate about marketing, go for it! But what we suggest is to disconnect the line between social media, and sales. The role of Instagram and Facebook is totally changing, and fading out for small businesses, in the sense that we know it. 
If you’re a service-based business provider, if you’re going to do anything, post a few times a month so that clients can see that your business is active. It’s not that we’re against marketing, we both come from a marketing background. It’s just that we believe that there is an easier way! There is a way to be mentally healthier by investing in relationships, beyond marketing. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 31 May 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>We Hate Marketing: Here's Why</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>643</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>The current market is shifting. There’s no doubt about it. What do you think the future of marketing looks like online? Maybe we’re at the next stage of marketing, and the next iteration hasn’t revealed itself yet. A lot of the things that people consider ‘marketing’ may not even be helpful for the majority of service-based business owners. For the majority of you, marketing is a huge distraction! It’s also an ego-killer.   Watching other businesses on social media can lead us to feel despondent about our skills and what we have to offer. It can lead us to set unrealistic expectations for ourselves. Vanity metrics aren’t helpful, but is traditional marketing even helpful? Can it help to an extent? Sure. But is it even necessary? For a lot of people, the answer is no. If you’re passionate about marketing, go for it! But what we suggest is to disconnect the line between social media, and sales. The role of Instagram and Facebook is totally changing, and fading out for small businesses, in the sense that we know it.   If you’re a service-based business provider, if you’re going to do anything, post a few times a month so that clients can see that your business is active. It’s not that we’re against marketing, we both come from a marketing background. It’s just that we believe that there is an easier way! There is a way to be mentally healthier by investing in relationships, beyond marketing.   Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to: thestrategyhour.com.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>The current market is shifting. There’s no doubt about it. What do you think the future of marketing looks like online? Maybe we’re at the next stage of marketing, and the next iteration hasn’t revealed itself yet. A lot of the things that people consider ‘marketing’ may not even be helpful for the majority of service-based business owners. For the majority of you, marketing is a huge distraction! It’s also an ego-killer. 
Watching other businesses on social media can lead us to feel despondent about our skills and what we have to offer. It can lead us to set unrealistic expectations for ourselves. Vanity metrics aren’t helpful, but is traditional marketing even helpful? Can it help to an extent? Sure. But is it even necessary? For a lot of people, the answer is no. If you’re passionate about marketing, go for it! But what we suggest is to disconnect the line between social media, and sales. The role of Instagram and Facebook is totally changing, and fading out for small businesses, in the sense that we know it. 
If you’re a service-based business provider, if you’re going to do anything, post a few times a month so that clients can see that your business is active. It’s not that we’re against marketing, we both come from a marketing background. It’s just that we believe that there is an easier way! There is a way to be mentally healthier by investing in relationships, beyond marketing. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The current market is shifting. There’s no doubt about it. What do you think the future of marketing looks like online? Maybe we’re at the next stage of marketing, and the next iteration hasn’t revealed itself yet. A lot of the things that people consider ‘marketing’ may not even be helpful for the majority of service-based business owners. For the majority of you, marketing is a huge distraction! It’s also an ego-killer. </p><p>Watching other businesses on social media can lead us to feel despondent about our skills and what we have to offer. It can lead us to set unrealistic expectations for ourselves. Vanity metrics aren’t helpful, but is traditional marketing even helpful? Can it help to an extent? Sure. But is it even necessary? For a lot of people, the answer is no. If you’re passionate about marketing, go for it! But what we suggest is to disconnect the line between social media, and sales. The role of Instagram and Facebook is totally changing, and fading out for small businesses, in the sense that we know it. </p><p>If you’re a service-based business provider, if you’re going to do anything, post a few times a month so that clients can see that your business is active. It’s not that we’re against marketing, we both come from a marketing background. It’s just that we believe that there is an easier way! There is a way to be mentally healthier by investing in relationships, beyond marketing. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to:<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2696</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[883468a0-d79c-11ec-83e0-ebdc1da4be18]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5767625546.mp3?updated=1652992167" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>642: This is The Sign of What's Next For Your Service Based Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/this-is-the-sign-of-whats-next-for-your-service-based-business</link>
      <description>The ‘work smarter not harder club’ tells you that the only way to work smarter, not harder, is to have a low-priced digital offering, and all of a sudden all your dreams of riches will come true. Fact: the reality is you will actually end up working harder, not smarter! We believe in customizing your approach to your business in order to scale. This is something we talk about in the Incubator, and the amount of compliments we get out of the gate is nothing short of impressive. If you’re accepted, you’ll get access to some of our best tradings, to help you to double your income by working twenty hours or less per week.
Our goal is to never make anything ‘one size fits all.' Making these decisions by yourself can be so scary. And if you don’t feel comfortable, and the people in your current circle can’t serve you in that way, it’s time to outsource! When you put too much emphasis on other people’s opinions, you are going to get answers guised with keeping you safe. The Incubator’s goal is to show you the options, and the consequences, and then you get to choose what’s right for you.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 May 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>This is The Sign of What's Next For Your Service Based Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>642</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>The ‘work smarter not harder club’ tells you that the only way to work smarter, not harder, is to have a low-priced digital offering, and all of a sudden all your dreams of riches will come true. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>The ‘work smarter not harder club’ tells you that the only way to work smarter, not harder, is to have a low-priced digital offering, and all of a sudden all your dreams of riches will come true. Fact: the reality is you will actually end up working harder, not smarter! We believe in customizing your approach to your business in order to scale. This is something we talk about in the Incubator, and the amount of compliments we get out of the gate is nothing short of impressive. If you’re accepted, you’ll get access to some of our best tradings, to help you to double your income by working twenty hours or less per week.
Our goal is to never make anything ‘one size fits all.' Making these decisions by yourself can be so scary. And if you don’t feel comfortable, and the people in your current circle can’t serve you in that way, it’s time to outsource! When you put too much emphasis on other people’s opinions, you are going to get answers guised with keeping you safe. The Incubator’s goal is to show you the options, and the consequences, and then you get to choose what’s right for you.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The ‘work smarter not harder club’ tells you that the only way to work smarter, not harder, is to have a low-priced digital offering, and all of a sudden all your dreams of riches will come true. Fact: the reality is you will actually end up working harder, not smarter! We believe in customizing your approach to your business in order to scale. This is something we talk about in the Incubator, and the amount of compliments we get out of the gate is nothing short of impressive. If you’re accepted, you’ll get access to some of our best tradings, to help you to double your income by working twenty hours or less per week.</p><p>Our goal is to never make anything ‘one size fits all.' Making these decisions by yourself can be so scary. And if you don’t feel comfortable, and the people in your current circle can’t serve you in that way, it’s time to outsource! When you put too much emphasis on other people’s opinions, you are going to get answers guised with keeping you safe. The Incubator’s goal is to show you the options, and the consequences, and then you get to choose what’s right for you.  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2070</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[60d0a8b4-d79c-11ec-a4f0-636f6bf6753a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2540833729.mp3?updated=1652992437" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>641: Incubator Client Strategy Breakdown: Bonnie Hit $30k Months &amp; Took a 10 Day Vacay 5 Months Into the Incubator Program</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/incubator-client-strategy-breakdown-bonnie-hit-30k-months-and-took-a-10-day-vacay</link>
      <description>Most of us have a set of preconceived notions about what it takes to grow and scale our businesses. We’re often convinced that in order to make more money we need more clients, which means we need to grow our team. But we can’t grow our team until we have more money. The situation can feel impossible and even send you on a doom-spiral of dread. But it doesn’t need to be this way! Sometimes all you need is a new perspective and a gentle nudge in the right direction. In today’s episode, we share the incredible story of our wonderful client, Bonnie. 
We unpack how the Incubator Program helped her understand her business, readjust her pricing structure, and transform her life and her company in the process. We take a deep dive into the preconceived notions around growing and scaling your business, and how small shifts can bring about dramatic changes. Discover how Bonnie managed to double her revenue in five months, find ease within her business, and take a 10-day vacation in Costa Rica, without a laptop! We’ve loved seeing the Incubator community grow, and it’s so rewarding to see members flourish, share, and support one another. Tune in to learn more about the program and how it helped Bonnie transform her business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 24 May 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Incubator Client Strategy Breakdown: Bonnie Hit $30k Months &amp; Took a 10 Day Vacay 5 Months Into the Incubator Program</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>641</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Most of us have a set of preconceived notions about what it takes to grow and scale our businesses. We’re often convinced that in order to make more money we need more clients, which means we need to grow our team. But we can’t grow our team until we have more money. The situation can feel impossible and even send you on a doom-spiral of dread. But it doesn’t need to be this way! Sometimes all you need is a new perspective and a gentle nudge in the right direction. In today’s episode, we share the incredible story of our wonderful client, Bonnie.   We unpack how the Incubator Program helped her understand her business, readjust her pricing structure, and transform her life and her company in the process. We take a deep dive into the preconceived notions around growing and scaling your business, and how small shifts can bring about dramatic changes. Discover how Bonnie managed to double her revenue in five months, find ease within her business, and take a 10-day vacation in Costa Rica, without a laptop! We’ve loved seeing the Incubator community grow, and it’s so rewarding to see members flourish, share, and support one another. Tune in to learn more about the program and how it helped Bonnie transform her business!  Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Most of us have a set of preconceived notions about what it takes to grow and scale our businesses. We’re often convinced that in order to make more money we need more clients, which means we need to grow our team. But we can’t grow our team until we have more money. The situation can feel impossible and even send you on a doom-spiral of dread. But it doesn’t need to be this way! Sometimes all you need is a new perspective and a gentle nudge in the right direction. In today’s episode, we share the incredible story of our wonderful client, Bonnie. 
We unpack how the Incubator Program helped her understand her business, readjust her pricing structure, and transform her life and her company in the process. We take a deep dive into the preconceived notions around growing and scaling your business, and how small shifts can bring about dramatic changes. Discover how Bonnie managed to double her revenue in five months, find ease within her business, and take a 10-day vacation in Costa Rica, without a laptop! We’ve loved seeing the Incubator community grow, and it’s so rewarding to see members flourish, share, and support one another. Tune in to learn more about the program and how it helped Bonnie transform her business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Most of us have a set of preconceived notions about what it takes to grow and scale our businesses. We’re often convinced that in order to make more money we need more clients, which means we need to grow our team. But we can’t grow our team until we have more money. The situation can feel impossible and even send you on a doom-spiral of dread. But it doesn’t need to be this way! Sometimes all you need is a new perspective and a gentle nudge in the right direction. In today’s episode, we share the incredible story of our wonderful client, Bonnie. </p><p>We unpack how the Incubator Program helped her understand her business, readjust her pricing structure, and transform her life and her company in the process. We take a deep dive into the preconceived notions around growing and scaling your business, and how small shifts can bring about dramatic changes. Discover how Bonnie managed to double her revenue in five months, find ease within her business, and take a 10-day vacation in Costa Rica, without a laptop! We’ve loved seeing the Incubator community grow, and it’s so rewarding to see members flourish, share, and support one another. Tune in to learn more about the program and how it helped Bonnie transform her business!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2027</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3899d44c-d79c-11ec-94c5-8f105e1eec39]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5368347685.mp3?updated=1652992579" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>640: The Difference Between a Coffee Date, a Discovery Call and a Pitch Meeting</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-difference-between-a-coffee-date-a-discovery-call-and-a-pitch-meeting</link>
      <description>Having discovery calls, going for coffee dates, and holding pitching meetings with potential clients is something that we’ve noticed that many service-based business owners struggle with in the early years. They feel like they either don’t say enough or they say too much, and this causes a lot of stress and anxiety. In this episode, we want to equip you with the confidence to go into these scenarios feeling like you know exactly what you’re doing!

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 19 May 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Difference Between a Coffee Date, a Discovery Call and a Pitch Meeting</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>640</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Having discovery calls, going for coffee dates, and holding pitching meetings with potential clients is something that we’ve noticed that many service-based business owners struggle with in the early years. They feel like they either don’t say enough or they say too much, and this causes a lot of stress and anxiety. In this episode, we want to equip you with the confidence to go into these scenarios feeling like you know exactly what you’re doing!  Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Having discovery calls, going for coffee dates, and holding pitching meetings with potential clients is something that we’ve noticed that many service-based business owners struggle with in the early years. They feel like they either don’t say enough or they say too much, and this causes a lot of stress and anxiety. In this episode, we want to equip you with the confidence to go into these scenarios feeling like you know exactly what you’re doing!

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Having discovery calls, going for coffee dates, and holding pitching meetings with potential clients is something that we’ve noticed that many service-based business owners struggle with in the early years. They feel like they either don’t say enough or they say too much, and this causes a lot of stress and anxiety. In this episode, we want to equip you with the confidence to go into these scenarios feeling like you know exactly what you’re doing!</p><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1991</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[428f57ba-d6de-11ec-95cc-57fa8738019c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6615982335.mp3?updated=1652904561" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>639: The Secrets Multiple 6-Figure Earners Aren't Telling You</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-secrets-multiple-6-figure-earners-arent-telling-you</link>
      <description>After serving clients one-on-one, we ultimately changed the entire landscape of our business, yet we didn’t even realize that’s what we were doing! If we could go back in time, there are so many things we would do differently, and today, we’re going to share them with you. When we got to a certain stage of business, we froze up and felt like we were on an island. We had no idea what the next step should be and it felt like everyone else had all of the answers. So many of our clients reach the same phase where they hit a milestone marker and feel like there's something that they’re missing, like a missing piece of information; a formula, or a blueprint. 
If you feel like million-dollar businesses are gatekeeping this information, the truth is, some of them are! If you’re at the stage of hitting a quarter of a million dollars and don’t know where to go from here, we’re here to tell you. Consider us your Fairy Godmothers of Business Past, telling you your future so you can really decipher what you want to focus on in this phase! Tune in to find out which things you’re tying to success that need to be let go.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 17 May 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Secrets Multiple 6-Figure Earners Aren't Telling You</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>639</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>After serving clients one-on-one, we ultimately changed the entire landscape of our business, yet we didn’t even realize that’s what we were doing! If we could go back in time, there are so many things we would do differently, and today, we’re going to share them with you. When we got to a certain stage of business, we froze up and felt like we were on an island. We had no idea what the next step should be and it felt like everyone else had all of the answers. So many of our clients reach the same phase where they hit a milestone marker and feel like there's something that they’re missing, like a missing piece of information; a formula, or a blueprint.   If you feel like million-dollar businesses are gatekeeping this information, the truth is, some of them are! If you’re at the stage of hitting a quarter of a million dollars and don’t know where to go from here, we’re here to tell you. Consider us your Fairy Godmothers of Business Past, telling you your future so you can really decipher what you want to focus on in this phase! Tune in to find out which things you’re tying to success that need to be let go.  Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>After serving clients one-on-one, we ultimately changed the entire landscape of our business, yet we didn’t even realize that’s what we were doing! If we could go back in time, there are so many things we would do differently, and today, we’re going to share them with you. When we got to a certain stage of business, we froze up and felt like we were on an island. We had no idea what the next step should be and it felt like everyone else had all of the answers. So many of our clients reach the same phase where they hit a milestone marker and feel like there's something that they’re missing, like a missing piece of information; a formula, or a blueprint. 
If you feel like million-dollar businesses are gatekeeping this information, the truth is, some of them are! If you’re at the stage of hitting a quarter of a million dollars and don’t know where to go from here, we’re here to tell you. Consider us your Fairy Godmothers of Business Past, telling you your future so you can really decipher what you want to focus on in this phase! Tune in to find out which things you’re tying to success that need to be let go.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>After serving clients one-on-one, we ultimately changed the entire landscape of our business, yet we didn’t even realize that’s what we were doing! If we could go back in time, there are so many things we would do differently, and today, we’re going to share them with you. When we got to a certain stage of business, we froze up and felt like we were on an island. We had no idea what the next step should be and it felt like everyone else had all of the answers. So many of our clients reach the same phase where they hit a milestone marker and feel like there's something that they’re missing, like a missing piece of information; a formula, or a blueprint. </p><p>If you feel like million-dollar businesses are gatekeeping this information, the truth is, some of them are! If you’re at the stage of hitting a quarter of a million dollars and don’t know where to go from here, we’re here to tell you. Consider us your Fairy Godmothers of Business Past, telling you your future so you can really decipher what you want to focus on in this phase! Tune in to find out which things you’re tying to success that need to be let go.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2327</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1df2e036-d565-11ec-a13c-9b2138861353]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8479133087.mp3?updated=1652739857" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>638: Everything You Need to Know About Hiring</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/everything-you-need-to-know-about-hiring</link>
      <description>As most of our listeners at Boss Project know, Abagail is our CFO and sits in HR as well. She has worked hand in hand with plenty of amazing people in HR to learn about the hiring process for a company. She has single-handedly shifted her team from just Emylee and Abagail to exploring contractors, part-time employees, full-time employees, and pretty much everything in between! Inside the incubator, she has started to have conversations about hiring, and she has plenty of wisdom to share from all of this experience. 
Most business owners struggle with follow-through. The reason why Boss Project has been successful is that where Abagail struggles to see things through, Emylee excels! This formula, along with having the team to support it, has been a winning recipe for us. If you’re a solo business owner, you could be leaving money on the table for this reason. That’s where the magic of having help, even for ten to fifteen hours a month, comes in. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 12 May 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Everything You Need to Know About Hiring</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>638</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>As most of our listeners at Boss Project know, Abagail is our CFO and sits in HR as well. She has worked hand in hand with plenty of amazing people in HR to learn about the hiring process for a company. She has single-handedly shifted her team from just Emylee and Abagail to exploring contractors, part-time employees, full-time employees, and pretty much everything in between! Inside the incubator, she has started to have conversations about hiring, and she has plenty of wisdom to share from all of this experience.   Most business owners struggle with follow-through. The reason why Boss Project has been successful is that where Abagail struggles to see things through, Emylee excels! This formula, along with having the team to support it, has been a winning recipe for us. If you’re a solo business owner, you could be leaving money on the table for this reason. That’s where the magic of having help, even for ten to fifteen hours a month, comes in.   Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>As most of our listeners at Boss Project know, Abagail is our CFO and sits in HR as well. She has worked hand in hand with plenty of amazing people in HR to learn about the hiring process for a company. She has single-handedly shifted her team from just Emylee and Abagail to exploring contractors, part-time employees, full-time employees, and pretty much everything in between! Inside the incubator, she has started to have conversations about hiring, and she has plenty of wisdom to share from all of this experience. 
Most business owners struggle with follow-through. The reason why Boss Project has been successful is that where Abagail struggles to see things through, Emylee excels! This formula, along with having the team to support it, has been a winning recipe for us. If you’re a solo business owner, you could be leaving money on the table for this reason. That’s where the magic of having help, even for ten to fifteen hours a month, comes in. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>As most of our listeners at Boss Project know, Abagail is our CFO and sits in HR as well. She has worked hand in hand with plenty of amazing people in HR to learn about the hiring process for a company. She has single-handedly shifted her team from just Emylee and Abagail to exploring contractors, part-time employees, full-time employees, and pretty much everything in between! Inside the incubator, she has started to have conversations about hiring, and she has plenty of wisdom to share from all of this experience. </p><p>Most business owners struggle with follow-through. The reason why Boss Project has been successful is that where Abagail struggles to see things through, Emylee excels! This formula, along with having the team to support it, has been a winning recipe for us. If you’re a solo business owner, you could be leaving money on the table for this reason. That’s where the magic of having help, even for ten to fifteen hours a month, comes in. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2426</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0de1efe6-d19d-11ec-902f-6f6d9b2f1ded]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8526361781.mp3?updated=1652355538" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>637: We're Reclaiming The "C" Word (No, Not That One)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/we-are-reclaiming-the-c-word-no-not-that-one</link>
      <description>You don't have to be good at everything you try. And you don't have to only do things that you’re good at. As kids, we’re often far more comfortable with experimentation and trying new things, than we are as adults. When we get older we increasingly feel pressured to stick with what we’re good at and not ‘waste our time’ on things that aren’t directly related to productivity. For perfectionists, it can be particularly difficult to try new things, which can have an adverse effect on decision making abilities. 
The term consequences might be rife with negative connotations, but we’re determined to take it back and make it a neutral word! Examining the potential consequences of our decisions is hugely valuable. It can help us determine what we want and fully understand what each choice can offer us. There is no one-size-fits-all solution that will work for everyone, nor should there be. Many of us think we should be pursuing relentless growth because that’s what the world tells us we should want, but when you consider the consequences of constantly scaling it becomes apparent how unrealistic (and unpleasant!) that is. Tune in today as we discuss how to unpack the consequences of our decisions, how to make choices based on the season of your business, and much more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 10 May 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>We're Reclaiming The "C" Word (No, Not That One)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>637</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>You don't have to be good at everything you try. And you don't have to only do things that you’re good at. As kids, we’re often far more comfortable with experimentation and trying new things, than we are as adults. When we get older we increasingly feel pressured to stick with what we’re good at and not ‘waste our time’ on things that aren’t directly related to productivity. For perfectionists, it can be particularly difficult to try new things, which can have an adverse effect on decision making abilities.   The term consequences might be rife with negative connotations, but we’re determined to take it back and make it a neutral word! Examining the potential consequences of our decisions is hugely valuable. It can help us determine what we want and fully understand what each choice can offer us. There is no one-size-fits-all solution that will work for everyone, nor should there be. Many of us think we should be pursuing relentless growth because that’s what the world tells us we should want, but when you consider the consequences of constantly scaling it becomes apparent how unrealistic (and unpleasant!) that is. Tune in today as we discuss how to unpack the consequences of our decisions, how to make choices based on the season of your business, and much more!  Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You don't have to be good at everything you try. And you don't have to only do things that you’re good at. As kids, we’re often far more comfortable with experimentation and trying new things, than we are as adults. When we get older we increasingly feel pressured to stick with what we’re good at and not ‘waste our time’ on things that aren’t directly related to productivity. For perfectionists, it can be particularly difficult to try new things, which can have an adverse effect on decision making abilities. 
The term consequences might be rife with negative connotations, but we’re determined to take it back and make it a neutral word! Examining the potential consequences of our decisions is hugely valuable. It can help us determine what we want and fully understand what each choice can offer us. There is no one-size-fits-all solution that will work for everyone, nor should there be. Many of us think we should be pursuing relentless growth because that’s what the world tells us we should want, but when you consider the consequences of constantly scaling it becomes apparent how unrealistic (and unpleasant!) that is. Tune in today as we discuss how to unpack the consequences of our decisions, how to make choices based on the season of your business, and much more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You don't have to be good at everything you try. And you don't have to only do things that you’re good at. As kids, we’re often far more comfortable with experimentation and trying new things, than we are as adults. When we get older we increasingly feel pressured to stick with what we’re good at and not ‘waste our time’ on things that aren’t directly related to productivity. For perfectionists, it can be particularly difficult to try new things, which can have an adverse effect on decision making abilities. </p><p>The term consequences might be rife with negative connotations, but we’re determined to take it back and make it a neutral word! Examining the potential consequences of our decisions is hugely valuable. It can help us determine what we want and fully understand what each choice can offer us. There is no one-size-fits-all solution that will work for everyone, nor should there be. Many of us think we should be pursuing relentless growth because that’s what the world tells us we should want, but when you consider the consequences of constantly scaling it becomes apparent how unrealistic (and unpleasant!) that is. Tune in today as we discuss how to unpack the consequences of our decisions, how to make choices based on the season of your business, and much more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2465</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cc07c386-d073-11ec-a9f9-5f813e196b76]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1429320822.mp3?updated=1652211163" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>636: Why Narrowing Your Services Will be The Best Thing You Do For Your Business This Year</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-narrowing-your-services-will-be-the-best-thing-you-do-for-your-business-this-year</link>
      <description>Today we’re going to talk about offering too many services and how to transition out of your Cheesecake Factory phase, namely, having way too many items on your menu. In a recent episode, we discussed narrowing down your services, and what it would look like to have conversations with your existing clientele about changing their service or potentially even eliminating their service altogether. Today’s episode is for those of you who are too scared to even consider this option!
Tuning in you’ll hear us tackle how to make this transition and why it doesn’t need to entail massive sacrifices. We realize that everyone has different needs and limitations. So whether you want to make your transition in twelve days or twelve months is completely up to you! In our conversation, we break down how to streamline your packages by asking yourself the right questions and what you should know about clients when creating your offers. We also talk about the immense possibilities that open up from living in your expertise, and what it means to make your life your career. If you can't even imagine reducing the number of options you have available to your clients and want to discover how to overcome your fear, then this episode is for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 05 May 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why Narrowing Your Services Will be The Best Thing You Do For Your Business This Year</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>636</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we’re going to talk about offering too many services and how to transition out of your Cheesecake Factory phase, namely, having way too many items on your menu. In a recent episode, we discussed narrowing down your services, and what it would look like to have conversations with your existing clientele about changing their service or potentially even eliminating their service altogether. Today’s episode is for those of you who are too scared to even consider this option!  Tuning in you’ll hear us tackle how to make this transition and why it doesn’t need to entail massive sacrifices. We realize that everyone has different needs and limitations. So whether you want to make your transition in twelve days or twelve months is completely up to you! In our conversation, we break down how to streamline your packages by asking yourself the right questions and what you should know about clients when creating your offers. We also talk about the immense possibilities that open up from living in your expertise, and what it means to make your life your career. If you can't even imagine reducing the number of options you have available to your clients and want to discover how to overcome your fear, then this episode is for you!  Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we’re going to talk about offering too many services and how to transition out of your Cheesecake Factory phase, namely, having way too many items on your menu. In a recent episode, we discussed narrowing down your services, and what it would look like to have conversations with your existing clientele about changing their service or potentially even eliminating their service altogether. Today’s episode is for those of you who are too scared to even consider this option!
Tuning in you’ll hear us tackle how to make this transition and why it doesn’t need to entail massive sacrifices. We realize that everyone has different needs and limitations. So whether you want to make your transition in twelve days or twelve months is completely up to you! In our conversation, we break down how to streamline your packages by asking yourself the right questions and what you should know about clients when creating your offers. We also talk about the immense possibilities that open up from living in your expertise, and what it means to make your life your career. If you can't even imagine reducing the number of options you have available to your clients and want to discover how to overcome your fear, then this episode is for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we’re going to talk about offering too many services and how to transition out of your Cheesecake Factory phase, namely, having <em>way</em> too many items on your menu. In a recent episode, we discussed narrowing down your services, and what it would look like to have conversations with your existing clientele about changing their service or potentially even eliminating their service altogether. Today’s episode is for those of you who are too scared to even consider this option!</p><p>Tuning in you’ll hear us tackle how to make this transition and why it doesn’t need to entail massive sacrifices. We realize that everyone has different needs and limitations. So whether you want to make your transition in twelve days or twelve months is completely up to you! In our conversation, we break down how to streamline your packages by asking yourself the right questions and what you should know about clients when creating your offers. We also talk about the immense possibilities that open up from living in your expertise, and what it means to make your life your career. If you can't even imagine reducing the number of options you have available to your clients and want to discover how to overcome your fear, then this episode is for you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2617</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[290892f4-cfcf-11ec-8f17-57c92820d378]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9282016667.mp3?updated=1652134331" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>635: What to Do With Existing Clients When You Eliminate Part of Their Service</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-to-do-with-existing-clients-when-you-eliminate-part-of-their-service</link>
      <description>Aside from our wonderful clients in the incubator, our DMs have been popping and we have so many great insights into the hurdles that service-based businesses are facing! One particular issue that continues to pop up, especially as we help people define a high-touch signature service or ultimately focus on a more primary offering (instead of having what we’ve lovingly called the Cheesecake Factory menu of offers), is the need to eliminate other services. Many people we’ve run into are open to the idea but have active clients utilizing those very services and don’t know how to make that transition. The question arises of how to pivot and how to communicate the changes, but the main risk factor that people dwell on is losing the income from those active clients. Well, in this episode, you’ll find out how to gently ease out of specific services with a transition plan, as well as how to inform your clients that you’re eliminating part of their service and raising their price. Tune in to hear why there is no question that you shouldn’t only offer the services you want to and how to get to a point where you’re billing ethically and creating space for rest and creativity!

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 03 May 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What to Do With Existing Clients When You Eliminate Part of Their Service</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>635</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Aside from our wonderful clients in the incubator, our DMs have been popping and we have so many great insights into the hurdles that service-based businesses are facing! One particular issue that continues to pop up, especially as we help people define a high-touch signature service or ultimately focus on a more primary offering (instead of having what we’ve lovingly called the Cheesecake Factory menu of offers), is the need to eliminate other services. Many people we’ve run into are open to the idea but have active clients utilizing those very services and don’t know how to make that transition. The question arises of how to pivot and how to communicate the changes, but the main risk factor that people dwell on is losing the income from those active clients. Well, in this episode, you’ll find out how to gently ease out of specific services with a transition plan, as well as how to inform your clients that you’re eliminating part of their service and raising their price. Tune in to hear why there is no question that you shouldn’t only offer the services you want to and how to get to a point where you’re billing ethically and creating space for rest and creativity!  Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Aside from our wonderful clients in the incubator, our DMs have been popping and we have so many great insights into the hurdles that service-based businesses are facing! One particular issue that continues to pop up, especially as we help people define a high-touch signature service or ultimately focus on a more primary offering (instead of having what we’ve lovingly called the Cheesecake Factory menu of offers), is the need to eliminate other services. Many people we’ve run into are open to the idea but have active clients utilizing those very services and don’t know how to make that transition. The question arises of how to pivot and how to communicate the changes, but the main risk factor that people dwell on is losing the income from those active clients. Well, in this episode, you’ll find out how to gently ease out of specific services with a transition plan, as well as how to inform your clients that you’re eliminating part of their service and raising their price. Tune in to hear why there is no question that you shouldn’t only offer the services you want to and how to get to a point where you’re billing ethically and creating space for rest and creativity!

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Aside from our wonderful clients in the incubator, our DMs have been popping and we have so many great insights into the hurdles that service-based businesses are facing! One particular issue that continues to pop up, especially as we help people define a high-touch signature service or ultimately focus on a more primary offering (instead of having what we’ve lovingly called the Cheesecake Factory menu of offers), is the need to eliminate other services. Many people we’ve run into are open to the idea but have active clients utilizing those very services and don’t know how to make that transition. The question arises of how to pivot and how to communicate the changes, but the main risk factor that people dwell on is losing the income from those active clients. Well, in this episode, you’ll find out how to gently ease out of specific services with a transition plan, as well as how to inform your clients that you’re eliminating part of their service and raising their price. Tune in to hear why there is no question that you shouldn’t only offer the services you want to and how to get to a point where you’re billing ethically and creating space for rest and creativity!</p><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to<a href="http://thestrategyhour.com"> thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2188</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5cf558ac-ccb1-11ec-8b3c-dff6e49a6eba]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3665173046.mp3?updated=1651864320" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>634: Incubator Client Strategy Breakdown: How Krystina Eliminated 9 Weeks of Work with 1 New Client</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/incubator-client-strategy-breakdown-how-krystina-eliminated-9-weeks-of-work-with-1-new-client</link>
      <description>Today, we are so pumped to tell you the story of Krystina, a member of our community who has managed to get back nine full-time weeks of work at a mind-blowingly minimal cost! To set the stage, our advanced training promise is to help you make more money and work less. We’re helping you to design a life-first business and be more intentional about your hours. How you spend that time is ultimately up to you. The way we work and hustle with intention, launch, serve, grow, or reset is all based on the life-first bubble. This means that there are dedicated times for work and free times to either introduce more growth or introduce rest and, if there’s one thing we want our clients to walk away with, it’s the empowerment to choose what to use that time for. In this episode, we not only share Krystina’s result but the full circle moment she had around how she gained that time, so make sure to tune in today!
The Cost-Benefit Analysis Required To Make Informed Decisions
It is super important to price appropriately, based on your goals and the unique amount of time you have. At first, Krystina was resistant to making adjustments to her price point, but when she decided to set a minimum event cost, it totally changed the game. She’s now in her second year of working with us and in her first year, she increased her business by over 1,200 percent. Keeping the opportunity cost in mind is crucial; everything has risk and reward. If you have a product priced at a specific price point, you know what it could bring in for a certain amount of clients. But there’s also time associated! You need to gauge how much time is your time worth, doing one activity over another. Time can trick you though, and it’s not always apples for apples. What feels quicker and easier might not be the best use of your time. Krystina had inquiries sitting on her desk with an average order of only $200 but, by setting a minimum rate, Krystina realized that she could replace over 20 of her current clients and save nine full-time weeks of work!
What You CAN Choose To Spend Your Time On As Soon as You Unlock More of It
We all have the same amount of time in a day but we all have different constraints. In Krystina’s case, there are so many things she could use her time for now that it’s been opened up! She has a whole 360 hours to either land more high-touch signature service clients, focus on scaling systems, or take some time off! If important aspects of running your business are being sidelined, it’s because your time isn’t being used appropriately. Krystina was instantly able to reprioritize with her assistant, email past clients, reset priorities and goals, write content, and so much more!
The Assembly Line Mentality We Need To Shift
We were brought up in a working-class economy with a focus on production and service. We’re the byproduct of the assembly line culture of the 50s, but we are not machines; we are humans! We need time, rest, and different types of work. The trick is finding a balance between check-the-box activities and strategy. The power is in the numbers! The data will empower you to make the right decisions and assign your time appropriately.
How To Get Your Time Back
If you’re looking into getting some of your time back, the solution is as simple as applying for the Incubator! Our superpower is helping you to figure out what your actual goals are, what you’re working with now, and bridging the gap!

See the full show notes here!
 
KEY TOPICS:

 Time management

Cost-benefit analysis

Opportunity cost

Saving time

Reprioritizing

Life-first business


WE MENTIONED:

Co-op


Boss Project Incubator  

The Nugget Podcast 


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 28 Apr 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Incubator Client Strategy Breakdown: How Krystina Eliminated 9 Weeks of Work with 1 New Client</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>634</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, we are so pumped to tell you the story of Krystina, a member of our community who has managed to get back nine full-time weeks of work at a mind-blowingly minimal cost! To set the stage, our advanced training promise is to help you make more money and work less. We’re helping you to design a life-first business and be more intentional about your hours. How you spend that time is ultimately up to you. The way we work and hustle with intention, launch, serve, grow, or reset is all based on the life-first bubble. This means that there are dedicated times for work and free times to either introduce more growth or introduce rest and, if there’s one thing we want our clients to walk away with, it’s the empowerment to choose what to use that time for. In this episode, we not only share Krystina’s result but the full circle moment she had around how she gained that time, so make sure to tune in today!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we are so pumped to tell you the story of Krystina, a member of our community who has managed to get back nine full-time weeks of work at a mind-blowingly minimal cost! To set the stage, our advanced training promise is to help you make more money and work less. We’re helping you to design a life-first business and be more intentional about your hours. How you spend that time is ultimately up to you. The way we work and hustle with intention, launch, serve, grow, or reset is all based on the life-first bubble. This means that there are dedicated times for work and free times to either introduce more growth or introduce rest and, if there’s one thing we want our clients to walk away with, it’s the empowerment to choose what to use that time for. In this episode, we not only share Krystina’s result but the full circle moment she had around how she gained that time, so make sure to tune in today!
The Cost-Benefit Analysis Required To Make Informed Decisions
It is super important to price appropriately, based on your goals and the unique amount of time you have. At first, Krystina was resistant to making adjustments to her price point, but when she decided to set a minimum event cost, it totally changed the game. She’s now in her second year of working with us and in her first year, she increased her business by over 1,200 percent. Keeping the opportunity cost in mind is crucial; everything has risk and reward. If you have a product priced at a specific price point, you know what it could bring in for a certain amount of clients. But there’s also time associated! You need to gauge how much time is your time worth, doing one activity over another. Time can trick you though, and it’s not always apples for apples. What feels quicker and easier might not be the best use of your time. Krystina had inquiries sitting on her desk with an average order of only $200 but, by setting a minimum rate, Krystina realized that she could replace over 20 of her current clients and save nine full-time weeks of work!
What You CAN Choose To Spend Your Time On As Soon as You Unlock More of It
We all have the same amount of time in a day but we all have different constraints. In Krystina’s case, there are so many things she could use her time for now that it’s been opened up! She has a whole 360 hours to either land more high-touch signature service clients, focus on scaling systems, or take some time off! If important aspects of running your business are being sidelined, it’s because your time isn’t being used appropriately. Krystina was instantly able to reprioritize with her assistant, email past clients, reset priorities and goals, write content, and so much more!
The Assembly Line Mentality We Need To Shift
We were brought up in a working-class economy with a focus on production and service. We’re the byproduct of the assembly line culture of the 50s, but we are not machines; we are humans! We need time, rest, and different types of work. The trick is finding a balance between check-the-box activities and strategy. The power is in the numbers! The data will empower you to make the right decisions and assign your time appropriately.
How To Get Your Time Back
If you’re looking into getting some of your time back, the solution is as simple as applying for the Incubator! Our superpower is helping you to figure out what your actual goals are, what you’re working with now, and bridging the gap!

See the full show notes here!
 
KEY TOPICS:

 Time management

Cost-benefit analysis

Opportunity cost

Saving time

Reprioritizing

Life-first business


WE MENTIONED:

Co-op


Boss Project Incubator  

The Nugget Podcast 


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we are so pumped to tell you the story of Krystina, a member of our community who has managed to get back nine full-time weeks of work at a mind-blowingly minimal cost! To set the stage, our advanced training promise is to help you make more money and work less. We’re helping you to design a life-first business and be more intentional about your hours. How you spend that time is ultimately up to you. The way we work and hustle with intention, launch, serve, grow, or reset is all based on the life-first bubble. This means that there are dedicated times for work and free times to either introduce more growth or introduce rest and, if there’s one thing we want our clients to walk away with, it’s the empowerment to choose what to use that time for. In this episode, we not only share Krystina’s result but the full circle moment she had around how she gained that time, so make sure to tune in today!</p><h2>The Cost-Benefit Analysis Required To Make Informed Decisions</h2><p>It is super important to price appropriately, based on your goals and the unique amount of time you have. At first, Krystina was resistant to making adjustments to her price point, but when she decided to set a minimum event cost, it totally changed the game. She’s now in her second year of working with us and in her first year, she increased her business by over 1,200 percent. Keeping the opportunity cost in mind is crucial; everything has risk and reward. If you have a product priced at a specific price point, you know what it could bring in for a certain amount of clients. But there’s also time associated! You need to gauge how much time is your time worth, doing one activity over another. Time can trick you though, and it’s not always apples for apples. What feels quicker and easier might not be the best use of your time. Krystina had inquiries sitting on her desk with an average order of only $200 but, by setting a minimum rate, Krystina realized that she could replace over 20 of her current clients and save nine full-time weeks of work!</p><h2>What You CAN Choose To Spend Your Time On As Soon as You Unlock More of It</h2><p>We all have the same amount of time in a day but we all have different constraints. In Krystina’s case, there are so many things she could use her time for now that it’s been opened up! She has a whole 360 hours to either land more high-touch signature service clients, focus on scaling systems, or take some time off! If important aspects of running your business are being sidelined, it’s because your time isn’t being used appropriately. Krystina was instantly able to reprioritize with her assistant, email past clients, reset priorities and goals, write content, and so much more!</p><h2>The Assembly Line Mentality We Need To Shift</h2><p>We were brought up in a working-class economy with a focus on production and service. We’re the byproduct of the assembly line culture of the 50s, but we are not machines; we are humans! We need time, rest, and different types of work. The trick is finding a balance between check-the-box activities and strategy. The power is in the numbers! The data will empower you to make the right decisions and assign your time appropriately.</p><h2>How To Get Your Time Back</h2><p>If you’re looking into getting some of your time back, the solution is as simple as <a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/incubator-application/?utm_medium=footer&amp;utm_source=podcast"><strong>applying for the Incubator</strong></a>! Our superpower is helping you to figure out what your actual goals are, what you’re working with now, and bridging the gap!</p><h2><br></h2><h2><a href="https://bossproject.com/podcast/incubator-client-strategy-breakdown-how-krystina-eliminated-9-weeks-of-work-with-1-new-client">See the full show notes here!</a></h2><p> </p><p>KEY TOPICS:</p><ul>
<li> Time management</li>
<li>Cost-benefit analysis</li>
<li>Opportunity cost</li>
<li>Saving time</li>
<li>Reprioritizing</li>
<li>Life-first business</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>WE MENTIONED:</p><ul>
<li><a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/creative-shop-coop/?utm_source=podcast&amp;utm_medium=sidebar&amp;utm_campaign=co-op">Co-op</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/incubator-application/?utm_source=on_air_ad&amp;utm_medium=podcast&amp;utm_campaign=incubator_application">Boss Project Incubator</a>  </li>
<li><a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/creative-shop-coop/?utm_source=podcast&amp;utm_medium=sidebar&amp;utm_campaign=nugget">The Nugget Podcast </a></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1680</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[bff200dc-cb34-11ec-afc0-bbdb2a4c34a1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9306884278.mp3?updated=1651624891" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>633: The #1 Thing Holding Service Providers Back From Raising Their Prices (and What to Do About it)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-1-thing-holding-service-providers-back-from-raising-their-prices-and-what-to-do-about-it</link>
      <description>We have now done multiple callouts, promotions and launches of the Incubator. We've had hundreds of applications and we’re working with incredible clients inside the program. And if you’re not one of them, you should be! If you’re scared to start a conversation with us, you need to get rid of that feeling right now because we are really not scary at all. You can literally ask us anything, we have no boundaries when it comes to helping our clients. We’re here to help you change your business for the better, so don’t waste any more time stuck where you are!
Inspirational Client Stories
We had a client who was doing a variety of copywriting tasks and charging a flat rate. When she did an audit on how much time she was spending on the tasks, she realized how little money she was actually making per hour. After raising her prices for just one of her recurring clients, and letting go of the ones who were paying pennies, she completely replaced her previous salary! Another client of ours took on a major 6-month job in the safety and emergency management space, and although she was terrified of raising her price for an additional piece of work they needed, her client didn’t even bat an eyelid! You shouldn’t be measuring your success on the number of clients you work with; quality is far more important than quantity.
The Danger of Making Assumptions
We’ve all done it; we make assumptions about what our clients are willing to pay, we think conversations about raising prices are going to be awkward and uncomfortable and we’ll lose clients as a result. Why do we do this? Because of fear and anxiety. Anticipatory stress is paralyzing and we have to be able to look at it and understand where the response is coming from, and then address it head-on, even though we may be tempted to avoid it. You’re going to continually be facing so many different choices in your business, and as we have learned from experience, the best discoveries will usually be found on the other side of fear! Regardless of where you’re at on your journey of making a decision about pricing, we encourage you to just take the next step and sign up for the Incubator! 
See the full show notes here!
 
KEY TOPICS:

Business Books

Pricing

Change

Overcoming Fear


WE MENTIONED:

Co-op


Boss Project Incubator  

The Nugget Podcast 

Dubsado

REWORK

 Good to Great 


The Last House on Needless Street

The Droupout

The Ultimatum


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 26 Apr 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The #1 Thing Holding Service Providers Back From Raising Their Prices (and What to Do About it)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>633</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We have now done multiple callouts, promotions and launches of the Incubator. We've had hundreds of applications and we’re working with incredible clients inside the program. And if you’re not one of them, you should be! If you’re scared to start a conversation with us, you need to get rid of that feeling right now because we are really not scary at all. You can literally ask us anything, we have no boundaries when it comes to helping our clients. We’re here to help you change your business for the better, so don’t waste any more time stuck where you are! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We have now done multiple callouts, promotions and launches of the Incubator. We've had hundreds of applications and we’re working with incredible clients inside the program. And if you’re not one of them, you should be! If you’re scared to start a conversation with us, you need to get rid of that feeling right now because we are really not scary at all. You can literally ask us anything, we have no boundaries when it comes to helping our clients. We’re here to help you change your business for the better, so don’t waste any more time stuck where you are!
Inspirational Client Stories
We had a client who was doing a variety of copywriting tasks and charging a flat rate. When she did an audit on how much time she was spending on the tasks, she realized how little money she was actually making per hour. After raising her prices for just one of her recurring clients, and letting go of the ones who were paying pennies, she completely replaced her previous salary! Another client of ours took on a major 6-month job in the safety and emergency management space, and although she was terrified of raising her price for an additional piece of work they needed, her client didn’t even bat an eyelid! You shouldn’t be measuring your success on the number of clients you work with; quality is far more important than quantity.
The Danger of Making Assumptions
We’ve all done it; we make assumptions about what our clients are willing to pay, we think conversations about raising prices are going to be awkward and uncomfortable and we’ll lose clients as a result. Why do we do this? Because of fear and anxiety. Anticipatory stress is paralyzing and we have to be able to look at it and understand where the response is coming from, and then address it head-on, even though we may be tempted to avoid it. You’re going to continually be facing so many different choices in your business, and as we have learned from experience, the best discoveries will usually be found on the other side of fear! Regardless of where you’re at on your journey of making a decision about pricing, we encourage you to just take the next step and sign up for the Incubator! 
See the full show notes here!
 
KEY TOPICS:

Business Books

Pricing

Change

Overcoming Fear


WE MENTIONED:

Co-op


Boss Project Incubator  

The Nugget Podcast 

Dubsado

REWORK

 Good to Great 


The Last House on Needless Street

The Droupout

The Ultimatum


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We have now done multiple callouts, promotions and launches of the Incubator. We've had hundreds of applications and we’re working with incredible clients inside the program. And if you’re not one of them, you should be! If you’re scared to start a conversation with us, you need to get rid of that feeling right now because we are really not scary at all. You can literally ask us anything, we have no boundaries when it comes to helping our clients. We’re here to help you <a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/incubator-application/?utm_medium=textinshownotes&amp;utm_source=podcast"><strong>change your business for the better</strong></a>, so don’t waste any more time stuck where you are!</p><h2>Inspirational Client Stories</h2><p>We had a client who was doing a variety of copywriting tasks and charging a flat rate. When she did an audit on how much time she was spending on the tasks, she realized how little money she was actually making per hour. After raising her prices for just one of her recurring clients, and letting go of the ones who were paying pennies, she completely replaced her previous salary! Another client of ours took on a major 6-month job in the safety and emergency management space, and although she was terrified of raising her price for an additional piece of work they needed, her client didn’t even bat an eyelid! You shouldn’t be measuring your success on the number of clients you work with; quality is far more important than quantity.</p><h2>The Danger of Making Assumptions</h2><p>We’ve all done it; we make assumptions about what our clients are willing to pay, we think conversations about raising prices are going to be awkward and uncomfortable and we’ll lose clients as a result. Why do we do this? Because of fear and anxiety. Anticipatory stress is paralyzing and we have to be able to look at it and understand where the response is coming from, and then address it head-on, even though we may be tempted to avoid it. You’re going to continually be facing so many different choices in your business, and as we have learned from experience, the best discoveries will usually be found on the other side of fear! Regardless of where you’re at on your journey of making a decision about pricing, we encourage you to just take the next step and <a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/incubator-application/?utm_medium=footer&amp;utm_source=podcast"><strong>sign up for the Incubator</strong></a>! </p><p>See the full show notes here!</p><p> </p><p>KEY TOPICS:</p><ul>
<li>Business Books</li>
<li>Pricing</li>
<li>Change</li>
<li>Overcoming Fear</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>WE MENTIONED:</p><ul>
<li><a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/creative-shop-coop/?utm_source=podcast&amp;utm_medium=sidebar&amp;utm_campaign=co-op">Co-op</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/incubator-application/?utm_source=on_air_ad&amp;utm_medium=podcast&amp;utm_campaign=incubator_application">Boss Project Incubator</a>  </li>
<li><a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/creative-shop-coop/?utm_source=podcast&amp;utm_medium=sidebar&amp;utm_campaign=nugget">The Nugget Podcast </a></li>
<li><a href="https://bossproject.com/dubsado_coupon?utm_source=podcast&amp;utm_medium=sidebar">Dubsado</a></li>
<li><a href="https://basecamp.com/books/rework"><em>REWORK</em></a></li>
<li> <a href="https://www.amazon.com/Good-Great-Some-Companies-Others/dp/0066620996"><em>Good to Great</em></a><em> </em>
</li>
<li><a href="https://www.amazon.com/Last-House-Needless-Street/dp/1250812623"><em>The Last House on Needless Street</em></a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.imdb.com/title/tt10166622/">The Droupout</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.imdb.com/title/tt18396952/">The Ultimatum</a></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2072</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4b748626-cb34-11ec-af91-338595b3b43e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1450104304.mp3?updated=1651780284" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>632: 10 Strategies to Get More Referrals in 2022</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/10-strategies-to-get-more-referrals-in-2022</link>
      <description>Referrals are, without a doubt, one of the hottest topics that we have going on inside our world. We are so intentional about you doing business the easiest way possible without having to invest in huge ad spends, or allocate loads of money to marketing budgets, or focus on growing an absurdly huge social media presence. We really want you to focus on connections instead. The vast majority of our clients get booked out with almost exclusively referrals, and as they grow they start experimenting with different strategies.
Today, we want to talk about ten ways to get more referrals in your world. A referral lead is just as real a lead as a stranger! Quit downplaying the quality and impact that referrals can have on your business, just because they felt easier to get. Referrals, by and far, are better quality, will pay better, will be easier to work with, will finish their projects faster, and they also know other dreamy clients which they may end up connecting you to. It literally only takes one dreamy client to connect you to a network of other dreamy clients, and the clients that we see who use that route, reach their goals way more easily, and are happy in their day-to-day business.

See the full show notes here!
 
KEY TOPICS:

Referrals

Budget

Social Media

Networking

Relationships

Industry Standard

 
WE MENTIONED:

Co-op


Boss Project Incubator  

The Nugget Podcast 


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 21 Apr 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>10 Strategies to Get More Referrals in 2022</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>632</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Referrals are, without a doubt, one of the hottest topics that we have going on inside our world. We are so intentional about you doing business the easiest way possible without having to invest in huge ad spends, or allocate loads of money to marketing budgets, or focus on growing an absurdly huge social media presence. We really want you to focus on connections instead. The vast majority of our clients get booked out with almost exclusively referrals, and as they grow they start experimenting with different strategies.  Today, we want to talk about ten ways to get more referrals in your world. A referral lead is just as real a lead as a stranger! Quit downplaying the quality and impact that referrals can have on your business, just because they felt easier to get. Referrals, by and far, are better quality, will pay better, will be easier to work with, will finish their projects faster, and they also know other dreamy clients which they may end up connecting you to. It literally only takes one dreamy client to connect you to a network of other dreamy clients, and the clients that we see who use that route, reach their goals way more easily, and are happy in their day-to-day business.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Referrals are, without a doubt, one of the hottest topics that we have going on inside our world. We are so intentional about you doing business the easiest way possible without having to invest in huge ad spends, or allocate loads of money to marketing budgets, or focus on growing an absurdly huge social media presence. We really want you to focus on connections instead. The vast majority of our clients get booked out with almost exclusively referrals, and as they grow they start experimenting with different strategies.
Today, we want to talk about ten ways to get more referrals in your world. A referral lead is just as real a lead as a stranger! Quit downplaying the quality and impact that referrals can have on your business, just because they felt easier to get. Referrals, by and far, are better quality, will pay better, will be easier to work with, will finish their projects faster, and they also know other dreamy clients which they may end up connecting you to. It literally only takes one dreamy client to connect you to a network of other dreamy clients, and the clients that we see who use that route, reach their goals way more easily, and are happy in their day-to-day business.

See the full show notes here!
 
KEY TOPICS:

Referrals

Budget

Social Media

Networking

Relationships

Industry Standard

 
WE MENTIONED:

Co-op


Boss Project Incubator  

The Nugget Podcast 


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Referrals are, without a doubt, one of the hottest topics that we have going on inside our world. We are so intentional about you doing business the easiest way possible without having to invest in huge ad spends, or allocate loads of money to marketing budgets, or focus on growing an absurdly huge social media presence. We really want you to focus on connections instead. The vast majority of our clients get booked out with almost exclusively referrals, and as they grow they start experimenting with different strategies.</p><p>Today, we want to talk about ten ways to get more referrals in your world. A referral lead is just as real a lead as a stranger! Quit downplaying the quality and impact that referrals can have on your business, just because they felt easier to get. Referrals, by and far, are better quality, will pay better, will be easier to work with, will finish their projects faster, and they also know other dreamy clients which they may end up connecting you to. It literally only takes one dreamy client to connect you to a network of other dreamy clients, and the clients that we see who use that route, reach their goals way more easily, and are happy in their day-to-day business.</p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://bossproject.com/podcast/10-strategies-to-get-more-referrals-in-2022">See the full show notes here!</a></p><p> </p><p>KEY TOPICS:</p><ul>
<li>Referrals</li>
<li>Budget</li>
<li>Social Media</li>
<li>Networking</li>
<li>Relationships</li>
<li>Industry Standard</li>
</ul><p> </p><p>WE MENTIONED:</p><ul>
<li><a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/creative-shop-coop/?utm_source=podcast&amp;utm_medium=sidebar&amp;utm_campaign=co-op">Co-op</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/incubator-application/?utm_source=on_air_ad&amp;utm_medium=podcast&amp;utm_campaign=incubator_application">Boss Project Incubator</a>  </li>
<li><a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/creative-shop-coop/?utm_source=podcast&amp;utm_medium=sidebar&amp;utm_campaign=nugget">The Nugget Podcast </a></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2419</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d21fcdb2-cb33-11ec-a613-a7bcf1cd38a6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4993765400.mp3?updated=1651780093" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>631: Are You Creating a Business or a Job? Here's How to Realign Your Service</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/are-you-creating-a-business-or-a-job-heres-how-to-realign-your-service</link>
      <description>Spring has indeed sprung and apart from our gardening rituals, we have so many new things happening in the Boss Project world! The most pressing news on the street for the month of April 2022 is we have completely exploded the Creative Template Shop and it is officially available as its own entity on all platforms! As you guys have noticed, the conversations here at Boss Project have up-leveled as our business and our clients’ businesses have up-leveled, yet our educational spirit lives on and we want to keep providing actionable, bite-sized, tutorial content for growing business owners. 
Our goal is to help you see quick wins with our incredible templates, marketing, and strategy. Join now on creativetemplateshop.com with discount code SAVE20 to save on our annual membership, and stay tuned for tips on how to realign expectations of scope with existing clients and how to get clear on creating a business for yourself rather than a job! In this episode, you’ll also discover the most common admin or general VA issue that arises when it comes to providing results for clients.

See the full show notes here!

KEY TOPICS:

Up-leveling

Setting Boundaries

Realigning Expectations

Service Provider

Service-Based Business

Hiring Contractors


WE MENTIONED:

Co-op


Boss Project Incubator  

The Nugget Podcast 


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 19 Apr 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Are You Creating a Business or a Job? Here's How to Realign Your Service</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>631</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Spring has indeed sprung and apart from our gardening rituals, we have so many new things happening in the Boss Project world! The most pressing news on the street for the month of April 2022 is we have completely exploded the Creative Template Shop and it is officially available as its own entity on all platforms! As you guys have noticed, the conversations here at Boss Project have up-leveled as our business and our clients’ businesses have up-leveled, yet our educational spirit lives on and we want to keep providing actionable, bite-sized, tutorial content for growing business owners.   Our goal is to help you see quick wins with our incredible templates, marketing, and strategy. Join now on creativetemplateshop.com with discount code SAVE20 to save on our annual membership, and stay tuned for tips on how to realign expectations of scope with existing clients and how to get clear on creating a business for yourself rather than a job! In this episode, you’ll also discover the most common admin or general VA issue that arises when it comes to providing results for clients.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Spring has indeed sprung and apart from our gardening rituals, we have so many new things happening in the Boss Project world! The most pressing news on the street for the month of April 2022 is we have completely exploded the Creative Template Shop and it is officially available as its own entity on all platforms! As you guys have noticed, the conversations here at Boss Project have up-leveled as our business and our clients’ businesses have up-leveled, yet our educational spirit lives on and we want to keep providing actionable, bite-sized, tutorial content for growing business owners. 
Our goal is to help you see quick wins with our incredible templates, marketing, and strategy. Join now on creativetemplateshop.com with discount code SAVE20 to save on our annual membership, and stay tuned for tips on how to realign expectations of scope with existing clients and how to get clear on creating a business for yourself rather than a job! In this episode, you’ll also discover the most common admin or general VA issue that arises when it comes to providing results for clients.

See the full show notes here!

KEY TOPICS:

Up-leveling

Setting Boundaries

Realigning Expectations

Service Provider

Service-Based Business

Hiring Contractors


WE MENTIONED:

Co-op


Boss Project Incubator  

The Nugget Podcast 


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Spring has indeed sprung and apart from our gardening rituals, we have so many new things happening in the Boss Project world! The most pressing news on the street for the month of April 2022 is we have completely exploded the Creative Template Shop and it is officially available as its own entity on all platforms! As you guys have noticed, the conversations here at Boss Project have up-leveled as our business and our clients’ businesses have up-leveled, yet our educational spirit lives on and we want to keep providing actionable, bite-sized, tutorial content for growing business owners. </p><p>Our goal is to help you see quick wins with our incredible templates, marketing, and strategy. Join now on <a href="http://creativetemplateshop.com/"><strong>creativetemplateshop.com</strong></a> with discount code SAVE20 to save on our annual membership, and stay tuned for tips on how to realign expectations of scope with existing clients and how to get clear on creating a business for yourself rather than a job! In this episode, you’ll also discover the most common admin or general VA issue that arises when it comes to providing results for clients.</p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://bossproject.com/podcast/are-you-creating-a-business-or-a-job-heres-how-to-realign-your-service">See the full show notes here!</a></p><p><br></p><p>KEY TOPICS:</p><ul>
<li>Up-leveling</li>
<li>Setting Boundaries</li>
<li>Realigning Expectations</li>
<li>Service Provider</li>
<li>Service-Based Business</li>
<li>Hiring Contractors</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>WE MENTIONED:</p><ul>
<li><a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/creative-shop-coop/?utm_source=podcast&amp;utm_medium=sidebar&amp;utm_campaign=co-op">Co-op</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/incubator-application/?utm_source=on_air_ad&amp;utm_medium=podcast&amp;utm_campaign=incubator_application">Boss Project Incubator</a>  </li>
<li><a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/creative-shop-coop/?utm_source=podcast&amp;utm_medium=sidebar&amp;utm_campaign=nugget">The Nugget Podcast </a></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2458</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c2c8248c-cb28-11ec-91c9-730edf78d732]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8895563883.mp3?updated=1651778305" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>630: What's Your Business Retirement Plan?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/whats-your-business-retirement-plan</link>
      <description>If you’re a true crime fan and you enjoy a scandalous story about fraud, you’ve definitely spent some time thinking about people who are bigger visioning. These are people who started by looking at the end result, instead of asking themselves what they can do today. While we’re definitely not advocating for crime, we totally believe that there’s great benefit to be had when you consider the big picture of your business! Legacy planning doesn’t mean you’re not invested in your business today; it just means you’re building with the future in mind, and that can only benefit you, both today AND in the long term.
We’ve seen people invest so much into their business only to realize that the success of their business rests solely on their ability to keep it afloat. Creating systems, training staff, and starting with the end in mind are all powerful tools to help your business to thrive even once you have made your exit. We’re in the business of helping you to make the changes you need to make to create a sustainable business plan that will enable you to thrive today, and to continue to flourish after you eventually leave! So, tune in today to find out more about creating a retirement plan for your business!
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 14 Apr 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What's Your Business Retirement Plan?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>630</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you’re a true crime fan and you enjoy a scandalous story about fraud, you’ve definitely spent some time thinking about people who are bigger visioning. These are people who started by looking at the end result, instead of asking themselves what they can do today. While we’re definitely not advocating for crime, we totally believe that there’s great benefit to be had when you consider the big picture of your business! Legacy planning doesn’t mean you’re not invested in your business today; it just means you’re building with the future in mind, and that can only benefit you, both today AND in the long term.  We’ve seen people invest so much into their business only to realize that the success of their business rests solely on their ability to keep it afloat. Creating systems, training staff, and starting with the end in mind are all powerful tools to help your business to thrive even once you have made your exit. We’re in the business of helping you to make the changes you need to make to create a sustainable business plan that will enable you to thrive today, and to continue to flourish after you eventually leave! So, tune in today to find out more about creating a retirement plan for your business! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you’re a true crime fan and you enjoy a scandalous story about fraud, you’ve definitely spent some time thinking about people who are bigger visioning. These are people who started by looking at the end result, instead of asking themselves what they can do today. While we’re definitely not advocating for crime, we totally believe that there’s great benefit to be had when you consider the big picture of your business! Legacy planning doesn’t mean you’re not invested in your business today; it just means you’re building with the future in mind, and that can only benefit you, both today AND in the long term.
We’ve seen people invest so much into their business only to realize that the success of their business rests solely on their ability to keep it afloat. Creating systems, training staff, and starting with the end in mind are all powerful tools to help your business to thrive even once you have made your exit. We’re in the business of helping you to make the changes you need to make to create a sustainable business plan that will enable you to thrive today, and to continue to flourish after you eventually leave! So, tune in today to find out more about creating a retirement plan for your business!
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you’re a true crime fan and you enjoy a scandalous story about fraud, you’ve definitely spent some time thinking about people who are bigger visioning. These are people who started by looking at the end result, instead of asking themselves what they can do today. While we’re definitely not advocating for crime, we totally believe that there’s great benefit to be had when you consider the big picture of your business! Legacy planning doesn’t mean you’re not invested in your business today; it just means you’re building with the future in mind, and that can only benefit you, both today AND in the long term.</p><p>We’ve seen people invest so much into their business only to realize that the success of their business rests solely on their ability to keep it afloat. Creating systems, training staff, and starting with the end in mind are all powerful tools to help your business to thrive even once you have made your exit. We’re in the business of helping you to make the changes you need to make to create a sustainable business plan that will enable you to thrive today, and to continue to flourish after you eventually leave! So, tune in today to find out more about creating a retirement plan for your business!</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2024</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c18023f8-c66f-11ec-9e2a-4383d961df4c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7264688530.mp3?updated=1651776768" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>629: The 7 Red Flags and Toxic Behaviors Happening In Your Business + How to Correct Them</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-7-red-flags-and-toxic-behaviors-happening-in-your-business-and-how-to-correct-them</link>
      <description>As owners and CEOs, we’ve made plenty of mistakes, but we’ve also learned a lot from them. In today’s episode, we discuss some of the mistakes we’ve made, as well as the errors we’ve seen TONS of CEOs make over the years. So, if you recognize any of these in yourself, don’t worry, you’re in good company! Tuning in, you’ll hear us break down the 7 most prominent red flags and toxic behaviors that continue to happen in business. Learn how to recognize them, why they happen, and the tiny course corrections you can make to solve them.
The things that we are pointing out today are based on specific lessons we’ve observed throughout our careers. We’ve seen these errors play out in various ways, from friends who have needed to course-correct, to mistakes that we have inadvertently made in our own business. We’re taking this as an opportunity to share our knowledge so that you can become aware of these potential pitfalls and hopefully skip them altogether! 
Stepping Into Your CEO Seat 
In our opinion, the general conversation around stepping into your CEO seat has come with some flaws. Not only has it predominantly been discussed through a very gendered lens, but it has also been structured as a false dichotomy where there’s a wrong and a right way to do something when in truth there are many nuanced approaches one can take. We’ve learned repeatedly in business, even at the CEO level, that you have to find what works for you, and what’s in alignment with your goals. There are universal traits that we’ve recognized that hold people back from really thriving in their CEO seat in a way that is good for them. 
How Much Time Do You Really Have? 
You are, to some extent, lying to yourself about your time. This one is super common, but don’t worry, if you ask the right questions, you can start getting back your time and working in your zone of genius! First ask yourself, where is your time actually the most beneficial, and by that we mean, where exactly is your zone of genius? What is the number one thing that is delivering client results? Ask yourself what is truly resulting in sales in your business. Think about the environment and perspective that helps you live in your zone of genius most effectively. Maybe you need to carve out quiet time for yourself every morning that’s conducive to operating in your zone of genius. Perhaps you’re already spread way too thin and you need to accept that there are some things you won’t have time for, or that you need to give yourself permission to get something done at a much slower pace.

We also talk about:

You Can’t Just Wear Your Owner Hat

Are You Delegating Poorly? 

Why You Need To Design The Solution Before You Hire 

Why Contractors Are NOT Employees

How to Avoid Creating Unethical Circumstances 

Allowing Perfectionism to Prevent Improvements


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 12 Apr 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The 7 Red Flags and Toxic Behaviors Happening In Your Business + How to Correct Them</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>629</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>As owners and CEOs, we’ve made plenty of mistakes, but we’ve also learned a lot from them. In today’s episode, we discuss some of the mistakes we’ve made, as well as the errors we’ve seen TONS of CEOs make over the years. So, if you recognize any of these in yourself, don’t worry, you’re in good company! Tuning in, you’ll hear us break down the 7 most prominent red flags and toxic behaviors that continue to happen in business. Learn how to recognize them, why they happen, and the tiny course corrections you can make to solve them.  The things that we are pointing out today are based on specific lessons we’ve observed throughout our careers. We’ve seen these errors play out in various ways, from friends who have needed to course-correct, to mistakes that we have inadvertently made in our own business. We’re taking this as an opportunity to share our knowledge so that you can become aware of these potential pitfalls and hopefully skip them altogether! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>As owners and CEOs, we’ve made plenty of mistakes, but we’ve also learned a lot from them. In today’s episode, we discuss some of the mistakes we’ve made, as well as the errors we’ve seen TONS of CEOs make over the years. So, if you recognize any of these in yourself, don’t worry, you’re in good company! Tuning in, you’ll hear us break down the 7 most prominent red flags and toxic behaviors that continue to happen in business. Learn how to recognize them, why they happen, and the tiny course corrections you can make to solve them.
The things that we are pointing out today are based on specific lessons we’ve observed throughout our careers. We’ve seen these errors play out in various ways, from friends who have needed to course-correct, to mistakes that we have inadvertently made in our own business. We’re taking this as an opportunity to share our knowledge so that you can become aware of these potential pitfalls and hopefully skip them altogether! 
Stepping Into Your CEO Seat 
In our opinion, the general conversation around stepping into your CEO seat has come with some flaws. Not only has it predominantly been discussed through a very gendered lens, but it has also been structured as a false dichotomy where there’s a wrong and a right way to do something when in truth there are many nuanced approaches one can take. We’ve learned repeatedly in business, even at the CEO level, that you have to find what works for you, and what’s in alignment with your goals. There are universal traits that we’ve recognized that hold people back from really thriving in their CEO seat in a way that is good for them. 
How Much Time Do You Really Have? 
You are, to some extent, lying to yourself about your time. This one is super common, but don’t worry, if you ask the right questions, you can start getting back your time and working in your zone of genius! First ask yourself, where is your time actually the most beneficial, and by that we mean, where exactly is your zone of genius? What is the number one thing that is delivering client results? Ask yourself what is truly resulting in sales in your business. Think about the environment and perspective that helps you live in your zone of genius most effectively. Maybe you need to carve out quiet time for yourself every morning that’s conducive to operating in your zone of genius. Perhaps you’re already spread way too thin and you need to accept that there are some things you won’t have time for, or that you need to give yourself permission to get something done at a much slower pace.

We also talk about:

You Can’t Just Wear Your Owner Hat

Are You Delegating Poorly? 

Why You Need To Design The Solution Before You Hire 

Why Contractors Are NOT Employees

How to Avoid Creating Unethical Circumstances 

Allowing Perfectionism to Prevent Improvements


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>As owners and CEOs, we’ve made plenty of mistakes, but we’ve also learned a lot from them. In today’s episode, we discuss some of the mistakes we’ve made, as well as the errors we’ve seen TONS of CEOs make over the years. So, if you recognize any of these in yourself, don’t worry, you’re in good company! Tuning in, you’ll hear us break down the 7 most prominent red flags and toxic behaviors that continue to happen in business. Learn how to recognize them, why they happen, and the tiny course corrections you can make to solve them.</p><p>The things that we are pointing out today are based on specific lessons we’ve observed throughout our careers. We’ve seen these errors play out in various ways, from friends who have needed to course-correct, to mistakes that we have inadvertently made in our own business. We’re taking this as an opportunity to share our knowledge so that you can become aware of these potential pitfalls and hopefully skip them altogether! </p><h2>Stepping Into Your CEO Seat </h2><p>In our opinion, the general conversation around stepping into your CEO seat has come with some flaws. Not only has it predominantly been discussed through a very gendered lens, but it has also been structured as a false dichotomy where there’s a wrong and a right way to do something when in truth there are many nuanced approaches one can take. We’ve learned repeatedly in business, even at the CEO level, that you have to find what works for you, and what’s in alignment with your goals. There are universal traits that we’ve recognized that hold people back from really thriving in their CEO seat in a way that is good for them. </p><h2>How Much Time Do You Really Have? </h2><p>You are, to some extent, lying to yourself about your time. This one is super common, but don’t worry, if you ask the right questions, you can start getting back your time and working in your zone of genius! First ask yourself, where is your time actually the most beneficial, and by that we mean, where exactly is your zone of genius? What is the number one thing that is delivering client results? Ask yourself what is truly resulting in sales in your business. Think about the environment and perspective that helps you live in your zone of genius most effectively. Maybe you need to carve out quiet time for yourself every morning that’s conducive to operating in your zone of genius. Perhaps you’re already spread way too thin and you need to accept that there are some things you won’t have time for, or that you need to give yourself permission to get something done at a much slower pace.</p><p><br></p><h2><strong>We also talk about:</strong></h2><ul>
<li>You Can’t Just Wear Your Owner Hat</li>
<li>Are You Delegating Poorly? </li>
<li>Why You Need To Design The Solution Before You Hire </li>
<li>Why Contractors Are NOT Employees</li>
<li>How to Avoid Creating Unethical Circumstances </li>
<li>Allowing Perfectionism to Prevent Improvements</li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2845</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[647d49d8-c66f-11ec-9410-0f4c35e078b5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4717092403.mp3?updated=1651780859" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>628: The Difference Between Working IN Your Business Vs. ON Your Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-difference-between-working-in-your-business-vs-on-your-business</link>
      <description>Are you ready for even more content? Bite sized videos, lessons, tutorials? We can’t believe it’s taken us this long, but we finally have a TikTok account! If you are a business owner looking for marketing tips, Canva tips, Dubsado tips, client-based tips, and everything in between, we are sharing everything there. That’s just a side note, our episode today is all about the difference between working in your business and working on your business. We’ve gone through many different seasons together, in life and in business, and in our usual style, we’re going to be spilling all the beans for you today! 
Cycles of Introspection Versus Invitation
We went from a season of introspection into a season of inviting new things in. These seasons are so radically different that it almost feels like we have become different versions of ourselves. Change can be scary, but we’re super excited about it. Introspection is a season that’s about learning to relisten to yourself, becoming reengaged with your thoughts and your intuition and asking yourself questions about how you feel and where you are going. On the other side of this introspective cycle, for us there was a deep desire to add to our lives and fill them with new things. At the moment we’re inviting things in, but we probably wouldn’t have the capacity to do this if we hadn’t gone through our introspection stage; both stages are super important and wherever you are at, we’ll meet you there! 
Our Top Reading Tips to Get the Most Out of Books
We both went through a phase where we couldn’t get enough of podcasts and we were reading hardly anything at all, but then we decided we wanted to read more this year, and we’ve been knee-deep in books ever since! If you’re struggling to get back into reading, getting a Kindle Unlimited Membership gives you access to so many books, and you can just start off with the easy ones like we did to flex those reading muscles again. Once you’ve passed the early stages, you may want to learn tips to read faster so that you can take in more information. If you’re at that stage, we have a top speed reading tip to share with you today; read diagonally! Don’t worry, this sounded crazy to us at first too, but it really works! We’ve built up a pretty extensive library of business books. 
Value in Different Perspectives
Reading books has rubbed off on so many other areas of our lives; we’re finding new people to follow and making new connections. What we’re really trying to focus on now is not only reading books and making connections with people that validate the opinions that we already hold. We’re intentionally trying to absorb information that doesn’t quite align with what we’ve always believed to be true. For example, Emylee recently bought a book called REWORK which was written by the co-founders of BaseCamp, and even though she really doesn’t like using BaseCamp, she bought it so that she can expand her mind by reading about a new business perspective. 

HIGHLIGHTS

Cycles of Introspection Versus Invitation. [0:09:00] 

Our Top Reading Tips to Get the Most Out of Books. [0:12:03] 

Value in Different Perspectives. [0:22:12] 


KEY TOPICS

Introspection

Learning vs. Doing

Phases

Books

Speed Reading


WE MENTIONED

Co-op


Boss Project Incubator  

The Nugget Podcast 


Rework 


The Creative Template Shop on TikTok

Boss Project on Amazon

Emylee on Instagram

Abagail on Instagram


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 07 Apr 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Difference Between Working IN Your Business Vs. ON Your Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>628</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Are you ready for even more content? Bite sized videos, lessons, tutorials? We can’t believe it’s taken us this long, but we finally have a TikTok account! If you are a business owner looking for marketing tips, Canva tips, Dubsado tips, client-based tips, and everything in between, we are sharing everything there. That’s just a side note, our episode today is all about the difference between working in your business and working on your business. We’ve gone through many different seasons together, in life and in business, and in our usual style, we’re going to be spilling all the beans for you today! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you ready for even more content? Bite sized videos, lessons, tutorials? We can’t believe it’s taken us this long, but we finally have a TikTok account! If you are a business owner looking for marketing tips, Canva tips, Dubsado tips, client-based tips, and everything in between, we are sharing everything there. That’s just a side note, our episode today is all about the difference between working in your business and working on your business. We’ve gone through many different seasons together, in life and in business, and in our usual style, we’re going to be spilling all the beans for you today! 
Cycles of Introspection Versus Invitation
We went from a season of introspection into a season of inviting new things in. These seasons are so radically different that it almost feels like we have become different versions of ourselves. Change can be scary, but we’re super excited about it. Introspection is a season that’s about learning to relisten to yourself, becoming reengaged with your thoughts and your intuition and asking yourself questions about how you feel and where you are going. On the other side of this introspective cycle, for us there was a deep desire to add to our lives and fill them with new things. At the moment we’re inviting things in, but we probably wouldn’t have the capacity to do this if we hadn’t gone through our introspection stage; both stages are super important and wherever you are at, we’ll meet you there! 
Our Top Reading Tips to Get the Most Out of Books
We both went through a phase where we couldn’t get enough of podcasts and we were reading hardly anything at all, but then we decided we wanted to read more this year, and we’ve been knee-deep in books ever since! If you’re struggling to get back into reading, getting a Kindle Unlimited Membership gives you access to so many books, and you can just start off with the easy ones like we did to flex those reading muscles again. Once you’ve passed the early stages, you may want to learn tips to read faster so that you can take in more information. If you’re at that stage, we have a top speed reading tip to share with you today; read diagonally! Don’t worry, this sounded crazy to us at first too, but it really works! We’ve built up a pretty extensive library of business books. 
Value in Different Perspectives
Reading books has rubbed off on so many other areas of our lives; we’re finding new people to follow and making new connections. What we’re really trying to focus on now is not only reading books and making connections with people that validate the opinions that we already hold. We’re intentionally trying to absorb information that doesn’t quite align with what we’ve always believed to be true. For example, Emylee recently bought a book called REWORK which was written by the co-founders of BaseCamp, and even though she really doesn’t like using BaseCamp, she bought it so that she can expand her mind by reading about a new business perspective. 

HIGHLIGHTS

Cycles of Introspection Versus Invitation. [0:09:00] 

Our Top Reading Tips to Get the Most Out of Books. [0:12:03] 

Value in Different Perspectives. [0:22:12] 


KEY TOPICS

Introspection

Learning vs. Doing

Phases

Books

Speed Reading


WE MENTIONED

Co-op


Boss Project Incubator  

The Nugget Podcast 


Rework 


The Creative Template Shop on TikTok

Boss Project on Amazon

Emylee on Instagram

Abagail on Instagram


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you ready for even more content? Bite sized videos, lessons, tutorials? We can’t believe it’s taken us this long, but we finally have a TikTok account! If you are a business owner looking for marketing tips, Canva tips, Dubsado tips, client-based tips, and everything in between, we are sharing everything there. That’s just a side note, our episode today is all about the difference between working in your business and working on your business. We’ve gone through many different seasons together, in life and in business, and in our usual style, we’re going to be spilling all the beans for you today! </p><h2><strong>Cycles of Introspection Versus Invitation</strong></h2><p>We went from a season of introspection into a season of inviting new things in. These seasons are so radically different that it almost feels like we have become different versions of ourselves. Change can be scary, but we’re super excited about it. Introspection is a season that’s about learning to relisten to yourself, becoming reengaged with your thoughts and your intuition and asking yourself questions about how you feel and where you are going. On the other side of this introspective cycle, for us there was a deep desire to add to our lives and fill them with new things. At the moment we’re inviting things in, but we probably wouldn’t have the capacity to do this if we hadn’t gone through our introspection stage; both stages are super important and wherever you are at, we’ll meet you there! </p><h2><strong>Our Top Reading Tips to Get the Most Out of Books</strong></h2><p>We both went through a phase where we couldn’t get enough of podcasts and we were reading hardly anything at all, but then we decided we wanted to read more this year, and we’ve been knee-deep in books ever since! If you’re struggling to get back into reading, getting a Kindle Unlimited Membership gives you access to so many books, and you can just start off with the easy ones like we did to flex those reading muscles again. Once you’ve passed the early stages, you may want to learn tips to read faster so that you can take in more information. If you’re at that stage, we have a top speed reading tip to share with you today; read diagonally! Don’t worry, this sounded crazy to us at first too, but it really works! We’ve built up a pretty extensive library of business books. </p><h2><strong>Value in Different Perspectives</strong></h2><p>Reading books has rubbed off on so many other areas of our lives; we’re finding new people to follow and making new connections. What we’re really trying to focus on now is not only reading books and making connections with people that validate the opinions that we already hold. We’re intentionally trying to absorb information that doesn’t quite align with what we’ve always believed to be true. For example, Emylee recently bought a book called <em>REWORK </em>which was written by the co-founders of BaseCamp, and even though she really doesn’t like using BaseCamp, she bought it so that she can expand her mind by reading about a new business perspective. </p><h3><br></h3><h3>HIGHLIGHTS</h3><ul>
<li>Cycles of Introspection Versus Invitation. [0:09:00] </li>
<li>Our Top Reading Tips to Get the Most Out of Books. [0:12:03] </li>
<li>Value in Different Perspectives. [0:22:12] </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>KEY TOPICS</p><ul>
<li>Introspection</li>
<li>Learning vs. Doing</li>
<li>Phases</li>
<li>Books</li>
<li>Speed Reading</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>WE MENTIONED</p><ul>
<li><a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/creative-shop-coop/?utm_source=podcast&amp;utm_medium=sidebar&amp;utm_campaign=co-op">Co-op</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/incubator-application/?utm_source=on_air_ad&amp;utm_medium=podcast&amp;utm_campaign=incubator_application">Boss Project Incubator</a>  </li>
<li><a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/creative-shop-coop/?utm_source=podcast&amp;utm_medium=sidebar&amp;utm_campaign=nugget">The Nugget Podcast </a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://basecamp.com/books/rework"><em>Rework</em></a><em> </em>
</li>
<li><a href="https://www.tiktok.com/@creativetemplateshop?utm_source=on_air_ad&amp;utm_medium=podcast&amp;utm_campaign=incubator">The Creative Template Shop on TikTok</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.amazon.com/shop/thinkcreativecollective?utm_source=on_air_ad&amp;utm_medium=podcast&amp;utm_campaign=incubator">Boss Project on Amazon</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/emyleesays/?utm_source=on_air_ad&amp;utm_medium=podcast&amp;utm_campaign=incubator">Emylee on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/abagailsays/?utm_source=on_air_ad&amp;utm_medium=podcast&amp;utm_campaign=incubator">Abagail on Instagram</a></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1926</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c3f94d78-c66d-11ec-9bf4-bfc1af3dbb11]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7681647532.mp3?updated=1651781531" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>627: Why You Should Encourage Conflict Within Your Team</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-you-should-encourage-conflict-within-your-team</link>
      <description>If you’ve listened to this podcast before, you might be under the impression that the hosts get along just fine. You’re right! When there are just two people, conflict is a lot less complicated, and a lot easier to resolve. Around two weeks into having a bigger team, we noticed that everyone would look to us for the answers, never contesting our conclusions. Different perspectives, backgrounds and insights all help us to make better decisions as a company. Abagail and Emylee want to make it really clear that not only do they not want to make all the decisions, but they actually believe that would be a really bad idea! That’s where conflict is necessary for the business to grow and thrive.
Our new policies regarding encouraging conflict here at Team Boss Project
Ever heard of artificial harmony? That’s what happens when the owner throws out a bunch of ideas, and the employees act as an agreeable audience. The motivations are good, but the effect is that you never end up saying what you really want to say unless you are the owner. Emylee and Abigail are no longer looking for consensus, they don’t need everyone to agree and back their ideas, but rather to disagree and commit! So, how do you, as a leader, create an environment where there can be healthy conflict? Ask the question, and then shut up! This leaves the necessary room to hear everyone else’s thoughts and opinions on the matter.
The most crucial rule to follow for healthy conflict.
A decision is better than no decision! An action is better than perfect action. It’s getting the ball rolling that teaches you what you need to do next. Generally speaking, this way of doing things helps us to stop things before they develop in the wrong direction. Critiques Abagail and Emylee experienced in art school helped us to manage feedback in our work. Don’t get 90% into a project before you send it through for feedback! It’s not personal, it’s a way to help everyone not to waste time. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 05 Apr 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why You Should Encourage Conflict Within Your Team</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>627</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Different perspectives, backgrounds and insights all help us to make better decisions as a company.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you’ve listened to this podcast before, you might be under the impression that the hosts get along just fine. You’re right! When there are just two people, conflict is a lot less complicated, and a lot easier to resolve. Around two weeks into having a bigger team, we noticed that everyone would look to us for the answers, never contesting our conclusions. Different perspectives, backgrounds and insights all help us to make better decisions as a company. Abagail and Emylee want to make it really clear that not only do they not want to make all the decisions, but they actually believe that would be a really bad idea! That’s where conflict is necessary for the business to grow and thrive.
Our new policies regarding encouraging conflict here at Team Boss Project
Ever heard of artificial harmony? That’s what happens when the owner throws out a bunch of ideas, and the employees act as an agreeable audience. The motivations are good, but the effect is that you never end up saying what you really want to say unless you are the owner. Emylee and Abigail are no longer looking for consensus, they don’t need everyone to agree and back their ideas, but rather to disagree and commit! So, how do you, as a leader, create an environment where there can be healthy conflict? Ask the question, and then shut up! This leaves the necessary room to hear everyone else’s thoughts and opinions on the matter.
The most crucial rule to follow for healthy conflict.
A decision is better than no decision! An action is better than perfect action. It’s getting the ball rolling that teaches you what you need to do next. Generally speaking, this way of doing things helps us to stop things before they develop in the wrong direction. Critiques Abagail and Emylee experienced in art school helped us to manage feedback in our work. Don’t get 90% into a project before you send it through for feedback! It’s not personal, it’s a way to help everyone not to waste time. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you’ve listened to this podcast before, you might be under the impression that the hosts get along just fine. You’re right! When there are just two people, conflict is a lot less complicated, and a lot easier to resolve. Around two weeks into having a bigger team, we noticed that everyone would look to us for the answers, never contesting our conclusions. Different perspectives, backgrounds and insights all help us to make better decisions as a company. Abagail and Emylee want to make it really clear that not only do they not want to make all the decisions, but they actually believe that would be a really bad idea! That’s where conflict is necessary for the business to grow and thrive.</p><h2>Our new policies regarding encouraging conflict here at Team Boss Project</h2><p>Ever heard of artificial harmony? That’s what happens when the owner throws out a bunch of ideas, and the employees act as an agreeable audience. The motivations are good, but the effect is that you never end up saying what you really want to say unless you are the owner. Emylee and Abigail are no longer looking for consensus, they don’t need everyone to agree and back their ideas, but rather to disagree and commit! So, how do you, as a leader, create an environment where there can be healthy conflict? Ask the question, and then shut up! This leaves the necessary room to hear everyone else’s thoughts and opinions on the matter.</p><h2>The most crucial rule to follow for healthy conflict.</h2><p>A decision is better than no decision! An action is better than perfect action. It’s getting the ball rolling that teaches you what you need to do next. Generally speaking, this way of doing things helps us to stop things before they develop in the wrong direction. Critiques Abagail and Emylee experienced in art school helped us to manage feedback in our work. Don’t get 90% into a project before you send it through for feedback! It’s not personal, it’s a way to help everyone not to waste time. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1989</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8e57e2d4-c66c-11ec-a5e5-135492901e77]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5745124834.mp3?updated=1651864520" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>626: There's Never a "Good" Time to Make Radical Changes: Here's What to Do About It</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/theres-never-a-good-time-to-make-radical-changes-heres-what-to-do-about-it</link>
      <description>There’s never a good time to make radical changes and you can always find a reason not to do something. But we’ve learned from experience that there is so much to be gained from pursuing opportunities, even under adverse circumstances. One of the things that inhibit us from pursuing growth and opportunities is the feeling that we wouldn’t be able to cope with these new changes in a healthy and sustainable way. We often feel this because we compare ourselves to others. But the truth is that you can never know the full story of someone’s success. You have no idea what’s going on behind the scenes or how their life really looks.
One of the biggest things we’ve learned from building our business is the importance of a supportive team and designing a business that is flexible enough to accommodate you during the different seasons of your life. We discuss some of the difficult circumstances we’ve been in while building our business and how it motivated us to build a business that could adapt to our needs. We also share our advice and insights on how to change your mindset and start pursuing radical change. So make sure you tune in to hear how we’ve adapted to our circumstances and how we’re helping others do the same!
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 31 Mar 2022 04:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>There's Never a "Good" Time to Make Radical Changes: Here's What to Do About It</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>626</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>There’s never a good time to make radical changes and you can always find a reason not to do something. But we’ve learned from experience that there is so much to be gained from pursuing opportunities, even under adverse circumstances. One of the things that inhibit us from pursuing growth and opportunities is the feeling that we wouldn’t be able to cope with these new changes in a healthy and sustainable way. We often feel this because we compare ourselves to others. But the truth is that you can never know the full story of someone’s success. You have no idea what’s going on behind the scenes or how their life really looks.  One of the biggest things we’ve learned from building our business is the importance of a supportive team and designing a business that is flexible enough to accommodate you during the different seasons of your life. We discuss some of the difficult circumstances we’ve been in while building our business and how it motivated us to build a business that could adapt to our needs. We also share our advice and insights on how to change your mindset and start pursuing radical change. So make sure you tune in to hear how we’ve adapted to our circumstances and how we’re helping others do the same!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There’s never a good time to make radical changes and you can always find a reason not to do something. But we’ve learned from experience that there is so much to be gained from pursuing opportunities, even under adverse circumstances. One of the things that inhibit us from pursuing growth and opportunities is the feeling that we wouldn’t be able to cope with these new changes in a healthy and sustainable way. We often feel this because we compare ourselves to others. But the truth is that you can never know the full story of someone’s success. You have no idea what’s going on behind the scenes or how their life really looks.
One of the biggest things we’ve learned from building our business is the importance of a supportive team and designing a business that is flexible enough to accommodate you during the different seasons of your life. We discuss some of the difficult circumstances we’ve been in while building our business and how it motivated us to build a business that could adapt to our needs. We also share our advice and insights on how to change your mindset and start pursuing radical change. So make sure you tune in to hear how we’ve adapted to our circumstances and how we’re helping others do the same!
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There’s never a good time to make radical changes and you can always find a reason not to do something. But we’ve learned from experience that there is so much to be gained from pursuing opportunities, even under adverse circumstances. One of the things that inhibit us from pursuing growth and opportunities is the feeling that we wouldn’t be able to cope with these new changes in a healthy and sustainable way. We often feel this because we compare ourselves to others. But the truth is that you can never know the full story of someone’s success. You have no idea what’s going on behind the scenes or how their life really looks.</p><p>One of the biggest things we’ve learned from building our business is the importance of a supportive team and designing a business that is flexible enough to accommodate you during the different seasons of your life. We discuss some of the difficult circumstances we’ve been in while building our business and how it motivated us to build a business that could adapt to our needs. We also share our advice and insights on how to change your mindset and start pursuing radical change. So make sure you tune in to hear how we’ve adapted to our circumstances and how we’re helping others do the same!</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2492</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[157a5a86-c66c-11ec-994b-cbb6baa03afa]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7149296036.mp3?updated=1651864740" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>625: Bootstrap, Burnout and Beyond: The 3 Phases of Your Service Based Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/bootstrap-burnout-and-beyond-the-3-phases-of-your-service-based-business</link>
      <description>The things we hear all the time are either, “I’m doing all the right things but I don’t necessarily know what to focus on next. I don’t know which lever to pull next and I don’t know why I’m feeling so overwhelmed.” Or, “This is so fun and easy! How do I set up myself for success in the future? How do I maintain this and keep growing?” We find that everyone’s always trying to look ahead, yet what’s truly beneficial is understanding the phase that you’re currently in order to clock why things are going well, where they’re going wrong, and what you need to do to move into the next phase. What we forget is that pitfalls are inevitable and that, as things grow, there are going to be roadblocks, hesitations, and frustrations. We are all bound to feel stuck at some point or another. We want to assure you that this feeling is normal (and necessary) and that we can help you to get out of it! In this episode, we tackle the three phases we see every service-based business owner move through, fill you in on how we really feel about burnout, and share our greatest wish for every single service-based business owner out there.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 29 Mar 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Bootstrap, Burnout and Beyond: The 3 Phases of Your Service Based Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>625</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We tackle the three phases we see every service-based business owner move through, fill you in on how we really feel about burnout, and share our greatest wish for every single service-based business owner out there.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>The things we hear all the time are either, “I’m doing all the right things but I don’t necessarily know what to focus on next. I don’t know which lever to pull next and I don’t know why I’m feeling so overwhelmed.” Or, “This is so fun and easy! How do I set up myself for success in the future? How do I maintain this and keep growing?” We find that everyone’s always trying to look ahead, yet what’s truly beneficial is understanding the phase that you’re currently in order to clock why things are going well, where they’re going wrong, and what you need to do to move into the next phase. What we forget is that pitfalls are inevitable and that, as things grow, there are going to be roadblocks, hesitations, and frustrations. We are all bound to feel stuck at some point or another. We want to assure you that this feeling is normal (and necessary) and that we can help you to get out of it! In this episode, we tackle the three phases we see every service-based business owner move through, fill you in on how we really feel about burnout, and share our greatest wish for every single service-based business owner out there.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The things we hear all the time are either, “I’m doing all the right things but I don’t necessarily know what to focus on next. I don’t know which lever to pull next and I don’t know why I’m feeling so overwhelmed.” Or, “This is so fun and easy! How do I set up myself for success in the future? How do I maintain this and keep growing?” We find that everyone’s always trying to look ahead, yet what’s truly beneficial is understanding the phase that you’re currently in order to clock why things are going well, where they’re going wrong, and what you need to do to move into the next phase. What we forget is that pitfalls are inevitable and that, as things grow, there are going to be roadblocks, hesitations, and frustrations. We are all bound to feel stuck at some point or another. We want to assure you that this feeling is normal (and necessary) and that we can help you to get out of it! In this episode, we tackle the three phases we see every service-based business owner move through, fill you in on how we really feel about burnout, and share our greatest wish for every single service-based business owner out there.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2725</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[442efc24-c667-11ec-9349-6349083c0293]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6444495384.mp3?updated=1656692414" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>624: What Does Building a Life-First Business Truly Mean?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-does-building-a-life-first-business-truly-mean</link>
      <description>What kind of business are you dreaming of? Whatever that looks like, it is your choice! And you get to make that everyday. We’ve had a lot of people approach us asking for permission to pursue a life-first business, but the call is yours to make. Our lives are all so different and unique that we can’t prescribe the details of what a life-first business looks like for you, but we can offer you some hard-earned wisdom to guide you in creating a framework that works for you! We all have boundaries we need to put in place to fulfill the life-first structure to support you as you create the life that you want. It’s fully within your power to implement and enact a plan to achieve it, but you’ve got to make the call. While there’s never going to be a magic bell that tells you what to do, we’re here to help show you the way.

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.

To download the transcript of this episode head to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 24 Mar 2022 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Does Building a Life-First Business Truly Mean?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>624</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/23c283c8-ae9a-11ec-91b1-3bc31d1d30ee/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>What kind of business are you dreaming of? Whatever that looks like, it is your choice! And you get to make that everyday. We’ve had a lot of people approach us asking for permission to pursue a life-first business, but the call is yours to make....</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What kind of business are you dreaming of? Whatever that looks like, it is your choice! And you get to make that everyday. We’ve had a lot of people approach us asking for permission to pursue a life-first business, but the call is yours to make. Our lives are all so different and unique that we can’t prescribe the details of what a life-first business looks like for you, but we can offer you some hard-earned wisdom to guide you in creating a framework that works for you! We all have boundaries we need to put in place to fulfill the life-first structure to support you as you create the life that you want. It’s fully within your power to implement and enact a plan to achieve it, but you’ve got to make the call. While there’s never going to be a magic bell that tells you what to do, we’re here to help show you the way.

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.

To download the transcript of this episode head to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What kind of business are you dreaming of? Whatever that looks like, it is your choice! And you get to make that everyday. We’ve had a lot of people approach us asking for permission to pursue a life-first business, but the call is yours to make. Our lives are all so different and unique that we can’t prescribe the details of what a life-first business looks like for you, but we can offer you some hard-earned wisdom to guide you in creating a framework that works for you! We all have boundaries we need to put in place to fulfill the life-first structure to support you as you create the life that you want. It’s fully within your power to implement and enact a plan to achieve it, but you’ve got to make the call. While there’s never going to be a magic bell that tells you what to do, we’re here to help show you the way.</p><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p><br></p><p>To download the transcript of this episode head to: <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2843</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b120abc6-8024-463b-9aee-8d857ae51379]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4578589551.mp3?updated=1651785890" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>623: If We Were Starting Over</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/if-we-were-starting-over</link>
      <description>Starting a business is a huge undertaking. And sometimes when we’re in the midst of building a company and struggling with a particular problem, it can be tempting to simply give up and start over with a new business. But the amount of work it takes to get a business off the ground is far more overwhelming than making changes to your current business. It’s just that it usually doesn’t feel that way because you’re not in the thick of things.  
In today’s episode, we’ll be tackling the topic ‘What would we do differently if we were starting over?’. Tuning in you’ll hear about some of the mistakes we’ve made, what precipitated them, and how we’ve helped clients avoid the same pitfalls. It may seem like the things that worked seven years ago would no longer be relevant today, but we’ve found that’s totally not the case. Many of the most important lessons we’ve learned are ones we often need to be reminded of to help us solve current problems. So this episode has been really helpful for us too! Tune in to hear our lessons on scaling up, honing in on your talents, why we love collaboration, and so much more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 22 Mar 2022 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>If We Were Starting Over</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>623</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/244dbd58-ae9a-11ec-91b1-efd113fab0e4/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Starting a business is a huge undertaking. And sometimes when we’re in the midst of building a company and struggling with a particular problem, it can be tempting to simply give up and start over with a new business. But the amount of work it takes...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Starting a business is a huge undertaking. And sometimes when we’re in the midst of building a company and struggling with a particular problem, it can be tempting to simply give up and start over with a new business. But the amount of work it takes to get a business off the ground is far more overwhelming than making changes to your current business. It’s just that it usually doesn’t feel that way because you’re not in the thick of things.  
In today’s episode, we’ll be tackling the topic ‘What would we do differently if we were starting over?’. Tuning in you’ll hear about some of the mistakes we’ve made, what precipitated them, and how we’ve helped clients avoid the same pitfalls. It may seem like the things that worked seven years ago would no longer be relevant today, but we’ve found that’s totally not the case. Many of the most important lessons we’ve learned are ones we often need to be reminded of to help us solve current problems. So this episode has been really helpful for us too! Tune in to hear our lessons on scaling up, honing in on your talents, why we love collaboration, and so much more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Starting a business is a huge undertaking. And sometimes when we’re in the midst of building a company and struggling with a particular problem, it can be tempting to simply give up and start over with a new business. But the amount of work it takes to get a business off the ground is far more overwhelming than making changes to your current business. It’s just that it usually doesn’t feel that way because you’re not in the thick of things.  </p><p>In today’s episode, we’ll be tackling the topic ‘What would we do differently if we were starting over?’. Tuning in you’ll hear about some of the mistakes we’ve made, what precipitated them, and how we’ve helped clients avoid the same pitfalls. It may seem like the things that worked seven years ago would no longer be relevant today, but we’ve found that’s totally not the case. Many of the most important lessons we’ve learned are ones we often need to be reminded of to help us solve current problems. So this episode has been really helpful for us too! Tune in to hear our lessons on scaling up, honing in on your talents, why we love collaboration, and so much more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3613</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[76983c09-61ea-4fb9-81df-693aedf818f3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1454517929.mp3?updated=1651785983" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>622: 7 Positioning Mistakes to Avoid in Your Service-Based Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/7-positioning-mistakes-to-avoid-in-your-service-based-business</link>
      <description>We may be divided in how aware we currently feel in terms of how we’re spending our time, but one thing we can agree on is that we need to be mindful of it! So many mentors over the years have questioned how we’re utilizing our time and, for as many years, it wasn’t being used as effectively as it could be! As service-based business owners, many of us tend to wear too many hats, which prevents us from focusing on what we do best. We’ve personally been through a really unique season where we've been hiring a lot and we have more help than we’ve ever had! This has allowed for more time to rethink how we’re spending the time we do have, instead of simply filling it with the necessary tasks to keep charging on. Does that mean we’re working any less? Absolutely not. This is not a slow season by any means, but we have been able to dig into a time where we can be really intentional. In this episode, we discuss the importance of protecting your hours and being intentional with your time, the value of visioning, and the seven most common mistakes we see service-based business owners making. Tune in to find out what needs to shift in order for you to unlock future growth and move towards a life-first business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 17 Mar 2022 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>7 Positioning Mistakes to Avoid in Your Service-Based Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>622</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/24f081aa-ae9a-11ec-91b1-1713406d7a77/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We may be divided in how aware we currently feel in terms of how we’re spending our time, but one thing we can agree on is that we need to be mindful of it! So many mentors over the years have questioned how we’re utilizing our time and, for as...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We may be divided in how aware we currently feel in terms of how we’re spending our time, but one thing we can agree on is that we need to be mindful of it! So many mentors over the years have questioned how we’re utilizing our time and, for as many years, it wasn’t being used as effectively as it could be! As service-based business owners, many of us tend to wear too many hats, which prevents us from focusing on what we do best. We’ve personally been through a really unique season where we've been hiring a lot and we have more help than we’ve ever had! This has allowed for more time to rethink how we’re spending the time we do have, instead of simply filling it with the necessary tasks to keep charging on. Does that mean we’re working any less? Absolutely not. This is not a slow season by any means, but we have been able to dig into a time where we can be really intentional. In this episode, we discuss the importance of protecting your hours and being intentional with your time, the value of visioning, and the seven most common mistakes we see service-based business owners making. Tune in to find out what needs to shift in order for you to unlock future growth and move towards a life-first business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We may be divided in how aware we currently feel in terms of how we’re spending our time, but one thing we can agree on is that we need to be mindful of it! So many mentors over the years have questioned how we’re utilizing our time and, for as many years, it wasn’t being used as effectively as it could be! As service-based business owners, many of us tend to wear too many hats, which prevents us from focusing on what we do best. We’ve personally been through a really unique season where we've been hiring a lot and we have more help than we’ve ever had! This has allowed for more time to rethink how we’re spending the time we do have, instead of simply filling it with the necessary tasks to keep charging on. Does that mean we’re working any less? Absolutely not. This is not a slow season by any means, but we have been able to dig into a time where we can be really intentional. In this episode, we discuss the importance of protecting your hours and being intentional with your time, the value of visioning, and the seven most common mistakes we see service-based business owners making. Tune in to find out what needs to shift in order for you to unlock future growth and move towards a life-first business!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2827</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8fcda39a-e58e-4085-952c-5f6ba248b5fc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1587104671.mp3?updated=1651786077" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>621: Are Done-For-You Services Going Extinct?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/are-done-for-you-services-going-extinct</link>
      <description>There’s something in the air at the moment; so many people are questioning themselves and their businesses, and there’s a whole lot of very valid reasons for this (we are in the midst of a pandemic and heading towards a potential World War, after all). A lot of service providers have, as a result of these feelings of uncertainty and overwhelm, considered pivoting their business by adding different streams of revenue, changing their offerings, and so on. For anyone who is entertaining alternative ideas, we understand the allure, but we want to bring you back to reality and share with you what you should be doing during these challenging times instead! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 15 Mar 2022 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Are Done-For-You Services Going Extinct?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>621</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2586b7b0-ae9a-11ec-91b1-73d7f917c327/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>There’s something in the air at the moment; so many people are questioning themselves and their businesses, and there’s a whole lot of very valid reasons for this (we are in the midst of a pandemic and heading towards a potential World War, after...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There’s something in the air at the moment; so many people are questioning themselves and their businesses, and there’s a whole lot of very valid reasons for this (we are in the midst of a pandemic and heading towards a potential World War, after all). A lot of service providers have, as a result of these feelings of uncertainty and overwhelm, considered pivoting their business by adding different streams of revenue, changing their offerings, and so on. For anyone who is entertaining alternative ideas, we understand the allure, but we want to bring you back to reality and share with you what you should be doing during these challenging times instead! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There’s something in the air at the moment; so many people are questioning themselves and their businesses, and there’s a whole lot of very valid reasons for this (we are in the midst of a pandemic and heading towards a potential World War, after all). A lot of service providers have, as a result of these feelings of uncertainty and overwhelm, considered pivoting their business by adding different streams of revenue, changing their offerings, and so on. For anyone who is entertaining alternative ideas, we understand the allure, but we want to bring you back to reality and share with you what you should be doing during these challenging times instead! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2425</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e4ea2cb1-6dc1-473a-bcd8-2a595b89f8be]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7381470314.mp3?updated=1651786174" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>620: Myth Busting: Here's a Reframe for Beliefs That Might Be Holding You Back</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/myth-busting-heres-a-reframe-for-beliefs-that-might-be-holding-you-back</link>
      <description>If you are a service provider finding yourself in need of a little bit of a serotonin boost and you’re looking for a pep talk from your Biz Fairy Godmothers, this is the episode for you! We have some really valuable reframes for you; some shifts in thinking. We see you in ways that you perhaps don’t see yourself, and we want to share those insights with you. We’re going to share some really cool, kind, impactful things with you today, so prepare to be showered in words of support. It might make you feel uncomfortable and you may have a hard time accepting the compliments, but here’s the thing: it’s because we genuinely care! No one else is saying these things to you and it’s important to us that we pour back into you in the same way that you’ve poured into us over the years. We are ready for you to believe in yourself in the way that we believe in you. That means listening to the things we’re saying, truly taking them to heart, and allowing them to sink in and make an impact. Tune in to learn about the reframes that service providers need to hear right now and to find out what we see in you (it’s a lot!) so you can believe in yourself in new ways. Never fear, your Biz Fairy Godmothers are here!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 10 Mar 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Myth Busting: Here's a Reframe for Beliefs That Might Be Holding You Back</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>620</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/261b9498-ae9a-11ec-91b1-3b44594a9624/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you are a service provider finding yourself in need of a little bit of a serotonin boost and you’re looking for a pep talk from your Biz Fairy Godmothers, this is the episode for you! We have some really valuable reframes for you; some shifts in...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you are a service provider finding yourself in need of a little bit of a serotonin boost and you’re looking for a pep talk from your Biz Fairy Godmothers, this is the episode for you! We have some really valuable reframes for you; some shifts in thinking. We see you in ways that you perhaps don’t see yourself, and we want to share those insights with you. We’re going to share some really cool, kind, impactful things with you today, so prepare to be showered in words of support. It might make you feel uncomfortable and you may have a hard time accepting the compliments, but here’s the thing: it’s because we genuinely care! No one else is saying these things to you and it’s important to us that we pour back into you in the same way that you’ve poured into us over the years. We are ready for you to believe in yourself in the way that we believe in you. That means listening to the things we’re saying, truly taking them to heart, and allowing them to sink in and make an impact. Tune in to learn about the reframes that service providers need to hear right now and to find out what we see in you (it’s a lot!) so you can believe in yourself in new ways. Never fear, your Biz Fairy Godmothers are here!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you are a service provider finding yourself in need of a little bit of a serotonin boost and you’re looking for a pep talk from your Biz Fairy Godmothers, this is the episode for you! We have some really valuable reframes for you; some shifts in thinking. We see you in ways that you perhaps don’t see yourself, and we want to share those insights with you. We’re going to share some really cool, kind, impactful things with you today, so prepare to be showered in words of support. It might make you feel uncomfortable and you may have a hard time accepting the compliments, but here’s the thing: it’s because we genuinely care! No one else is saying these things to you and it’s important to us that we pour back into you in the same way that you’ve poured into us over the years. We are ready for you to believe in yourself in the way that we believe in you. That means listening to the things we’re saying, truly taking them to heart, and allowing them to sink in and make an impact. Tune in to learn about the reframes that service providers need to hear right now and to find out what we see in you (it’s a lot!) so you can believe in yourself in new ways. Never fear, your Biz Fairy Godmothers are here!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2324</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d5330487-bc4f-4a0b-8c70-dae5947d8818]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8802420203.mp3?updated=1651786326" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>619: The Only Two Levers That Impact Your Profits and Time Spent in Your B2B Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-only-two-levers-that-impact-your-profits-and-time-spent-in-your-b2b-business</link>
      <description>Many people ignore the things that can really move the needle in their businesses because they often seem deceptively simple. We want to help you understand these simple ‘levers’ and use them correctly, because we can guarantee that they will improve your business in more ways than one! In this episode, we let you guys in on the not-so-secret levers that will allow you to continue to prosper and create more profit in your business. Hitting ceilings of time and money are an inevitable part of running a business, but your ability to adjust the levers that talk about today is a superpower that you will always have. 
Tuning in today, you’ll find out how to decide which of the two levers you need to pull next in order to increase profits or get more of your time back, how to start with a life-first mentality when shaping your offers and price, and the self-reflection questions you can ask yourself when you've hit an income and capacity ceiling, plus so much more!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 08 Mar 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Only Two Levers That Impact Your Profits and Time Spent in Your B2B Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>619</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/26eb859a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-07c3fff746cf/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Many people ignore the things that can really move the needle in their businesses because they often seem deceptively simple. We want to help you understand these simple ‘levers’ and use them correctly, because we can guarantee that they will...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Many people ignore the things that can really move the needle in their businesses because they often seem deceptively simple. We want to help you understand these simple ‘levers’ and use them correctly, because we can guarantee that they will improve your business in more ways than one! In this episode, we let you guys in on the not-so-secret levers that will allow you to continue to prosper and create more profit in your business. Hitting ceilings of time and money are an inevitable part of running a business, but your ability to adjust the levers that talk about today is a superpower that you will always have. 
Tuning in today, you’ll find out how to decide which of the two levers you need to pull next in order to increase profits or get more of your time back, how to start with a life-first mentality when shaping your offers and price, and the self-reflection questions you can ask yourself when you've hit an income and capacity ceiling, plus so much more!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Many people ignore the things that can really move the needle in their businesses because they often seem deceptively simple. We want to help you understand these simple ‘levers’ and use them correctly, because we can guarantee that they will improve your business in more ways than one! In this episode, we let you guys in on the not-so-secret levers that will allow you to continue to prosper and create more profit in your business. Hitting ceilings of time and money are an inevitable part of running a business, but your ability to adjust the levers that talk about today is a superpower that you will always have. </p><p>Tuning in today, you’ll find out how to decide which of the two levers you need to pull next in order to increase profits or get more of your time back, how to start with a life-first mentality when shaping your offers and price, and the self-reflection questions you can ask yourself when you've hit an income and capacity ceiling, plus so much more!  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1728</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9062c219-5b3b-439a-b3ab-c86d20d1f863]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8618981932.mp3?updated=1651786425" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>618: What You Need to Be Ready to Admit if You've Hit a Ceiling In Your Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-you-need-to-be-ready-to-admit-if-youve-hit-a-ceiling-in-your-business</link>
      <description>Today, we want to talk about what happens when you grow your own business only to wake up one day and realize that, although you’ve grown out of the ‘wearing all the hats’ phase and you’ve got all the right people and systems in place, everything still seems to be falling apart. You might still feel like you’re doing 75 million things and you have no idea how you got here or what you’re doing and you feel deeply ashamed that you don’t know how to fix it.
We’ve met so many self-proclaimed entrepreneurs who are the CEOs of their businesses, yet they don’t really know what it means to fully sit in that seat, and part of the confusion lies in the fact that they are incredibly talented. We’re talking about people who have typically excelled in everything they’ve ever done! They’re so used to being the star and, suddenly, they feel like they’ve hit a ceiling. This moment of reckoning is inevitable, and it hits everyone at a different point. For some, it'll feel like an income ceiling and, for others, it might feel entirely time-related. For some of you, it might be a recognition that you need more help but you can’t afford it, or that you’re mismanaging the help you do have, have the wrong help, or you don’t know how to identify the help you need. 
Essentially, at the root of all of this is, because you’re so smart, you’ve been able to effectively communicate enough of what you do to the outside world so that you can sell your service and expertise, package and deliver it, but you’re lacking the foundational business knowledge that it takes to ultimately scale your business! In this episode, we fill you in on the most important skillset for a CEO, the roadblocks that every industry expert consultant faces as their business grows, and what to do when you've hit a ceiling in your income or capacity, so make sure to tune in today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 03 Mar 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What You Need to Be Ready to Admit if You've Hit a Ceiling In Your Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>618</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/27a45552-ae9a-11ec-91b1-531fb27c1e05/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, we want to talk about what happens when you grow your own business only to wake up one day and realize that, although you’ve grown out of the ‘wearing all the hats’ phase and you’ve got all the right people and systems in place,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we want to talk about what happens when you grow your own business only to wake up one day and realize that, although you’ve grown out of the ‘wearing all the hats’ phase and you’ve got all the right people and systems in place, everything still seems to be falling apart. You might still feel like you’re doing 75 million things and you have no idea how you got here or what you’re doing and you feel deeply ashamed that you don’t know how to fix it.
We’ve met so many self-proclaimed entrepreneurs who are the CEOs of their businesses, yet they don’t really know what it means to fully sit in that seat, and part of the confusion lies in the fact that they are incredibly talented. We’re talking about people who have typically excelled in everything they’ve ever done! They’re so used to being the star and, suddenly, they feel like they’ve hit a ceiling. This moment of reckoning is inevitable, and it hits everyone at a different point. For some, it'll feel like an income ceiling and, for others, it might feel entirely time-related. For some of you, it might be a recognition that you need more help but you can’t afford it, or that you’re mismanaging the help you do have, have the wrong help, or you don’t know how to identify the help you need. 
Essentially, at the root of all of this is, because you’re so smart, you’ve been able to effectively communicate enough of what you do to the outside world so that you can sell your service and expertise, package and deliver it, but you’re lacking the foundational business knowledge that it takes to ultimately scale your business! In this episode, we fill you in on the most important skillset for a CEO, the roadblocks that every industry expert consultant faces as their business grows, and what to do when you've hit a ceiling in your income or capacity, so make sure to tune in today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we want to talk about what happens when you grow your own business only to wake up one day and realize that, although you’ve grown out of the ‘wearing all the hats’ phase and you’ve got all the right people and systems in place, everything still seems to be falling apart. You might still feel like you’re doing 75 million things and you have no idea how you got here or what you’re doing and you feel deeply ashamed that you don’t know how to fix it.</p><p>We’ve met so many self-proclaimed entrepreneurs who are the CEOs of their businesses, yet they don’t really know what it means to fully sit in that seat, and part of the confusion lies in the fact that they are incredibly talented. We’re talking about people who have typically excelled in everything they’ve ever done! They’re so used to being the star and, suddenly, they feel like they’ve hit a ceiling. This moment of reckoning is inevitable, and it hits everyone at a different point. For some, it'll feel like an income ceiling and, for others, it might feel entirely time-related. For some of you, it might be a recognition that you need more help but you can’t afford it, or that you’re mismanaging the help you do have, have the wrong help, or you don’t know how to identify the help you need. </p><p>Essentially, at the root of all of this is, because you’re so smart, you’ve been able to effectively communicate enough of what you do to the outside world so that you can sell your service and expertise, package and deliver it, but you’re lacking the foundational business knowledge that it takes to ultimately scale your business! In this episode, we fill you in on the most important skillset for a CEO, the roadblocks that every industry expert consultant faces as their business grows, and what to do when you've hit a ceiling in your income or capacity, so make sure to tune in today!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2486</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[82e1e34f-0031-417c-a575-297f5452c1ee]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3724395775.mp3?updated=1651867027" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>617: The #1 Shift We Implemented with Our Team in Order to Transfer Ownership and Delegate</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-number-one-shift-we-implemented-with-our-team-in-order-to-transfer-ownership-and-delegate</link>
      <description>The interesting thing about any mistake is that it’s not always detrimental when you do it at the beginning, but holding onto it can sometimes prevent you from future success! At a recent conference we spoke at, we were asked about some of the biggest mistakes we have made in our business; and one of the things we highlighted was structuring our business according to task-based activities, rather than bringing in a team of permanent employees with outcome-based deliverables. 

It can be frustrating to hire a whole team of contractors and you still feel like you’re bearing the brunt of everything that keeps your business moving forward but, unfortunately, it’s also unavoidable! Until you make the move toward bringing employees on to share in your vision, this has to be the case. Sharing too much of that burden with your contractors can lead to burnout and inefficiency, especially as a woman-led business and, while we totally get that there are major problems with the ‘Rise and Grind’ culture, we believe it’s equally problematic not to do anything in your business. Unless you’re willing to drop some major capital at the risk of never seeing a return, you absolutely have to get involved. Stop comparing yourself to Jeff Bezos! You can’t compare your small business with the big guns in Silicon Valley because you just don’t have the same resources that they do. We encourage you to keep that in mind when you’re structuring your team and mapping out your own role.

Creating outcomes for your employees is one of the most efficient ways to start this process. Not all metrics are quantifiable, which is why you have to be as clear about your expectations as you can. In today’s episode, we outline some of the small changes that can make all the difference and share some of the shifts we implemented in our own team in order to transfer ownership and delegate, so make sure not to miss it!

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 Mar 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The #1 Shift We Implemented with Our Team in Order to Transfer Ownership and Delegate</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>617</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/28447244-ae9a-11ec-91b1-939971fcdd61/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>The interesting thing about any mistake is that it’s not always detrimental when you do it at the beginning, but holding onto it can sometimes prevent you from future success! At a recent conference we spoke at, we were asked about some of the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>The interesting thing about any mistake is that it’s not always detrimental when you do it at the beginning, but holding onto it can sometimes prevent you from future success! At a recent conference we spoke at, we were asked about some of the biggest mistakes we have made in our business; and one of the things we highlighted was structuring our business according to task-based activities, rather than bringing in a team of permanent employees with outcome-based deliverables. 

It can be frustrating to hire a whole team of contractors and you still feel like you’re bearing the brunt of everything that keeps your business moving forward but, unfortunately, it’s also unavoidable! Until you make the move toward bringing employees on to share in your vision, this has to be the case. Sharing too much of that burden with your contractors can lead to burnout and inefficiency, especially as a woman-led business and, while we totally get that there are major problems with the ‘Rise and Grind’ culture, we believe it’s equally problematic not to do anything in your business. Unless you’re willing to drop some major capital at the risk of never seeing a return, you absolutely have to get involved. Stop comparing yourself to Jeff Bezos! You can’t compare your small business with the big guns in Silicon Valley because you just don’t have the same resources that they do. We encourage you to keep that in mind when you’re structuring your team and mapping out your own role.

Creating outcomes for your employees is one of the most efficient ways to start this process. Not all metrics are quantifiable, which is why you have to be as clear about your expectations as you can. In today’s episode, we outline some of the small changes that can make all the difference and share some of the shifts we implemented in our own team in order to transfer ownership and delegate, so make sure not to miss it!

Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The interesting thing about any mistake is that it’s not always detrimental when you do it at the beginning, but holding onto it can sometimes prevent you from future success! At a recent conference we spoke at, we were asked about some of the biggest mistakes we have made in our business; and one of the things we highlighted was structuring our business according to task-based activities, rather than bringing in a team of permanent employees with outcome-based deliverables. </p><p><br></p><p>It can be frustrating to hire a whole team of contractors and you still feel like you’re bearing the brunt of everything that keeps your business moving forward but, unfortunately, it’s also unavoidable! Until you make the move toward bringing employees on to share in your vision, this has to be the case. Sharing too much of that burden with your contractors can lead to burnout and inefficiency, especially as a woman-led business and, while we totally get that there are major problems with the ‘Rise and Grind’ culture, we believe it’s equally problematic not to do anything in your business. Unless you’re willing to drop some major capital at the risk of never seeing a return, you absolutely have to get involved. Stop comparing yourself to Jeff Bezos! You can’t compare your small business with the big guns in Silicon Valley because you just don’t have the same resources that they do. We encourage you to keep that in mind when you’re structuring your team and mapping out your own role.</p><p><br></p><p>Creating outcomes for your employees is one of the most efficient ways to start this process. Not all metrics are quantifiable, which is why you have to be as clear about your expectations as you can. In today’s episode, we outline some of the small changes that can make all the difference and share some of the shifts we implemented in our own team in order to transfer ownership and delegate, so make sure not to miss it!</p><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2689</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8c83a236-7468-404e-9f1f-5977c68d9eb1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8259017138.mp3?updated=1651867146" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>616: Group Coaching vs. 1:1 Coaching vs. Done-For-Your Service: Which is Right for Your Business?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/group-coaching-vs-1-to-1-coaching-vs-done-for-you-service-which-is-right-for-your-business</link>
      <description>Something we feel is getting a little bit confused in the realm of being a service provider consultant, learning from other people, hiring contractors, having employees, and serving clients, is the question of how we serve said clients, how we learn, and how we get work done in our own business. The conversation around working one-on-one with people, using done-for-you services, and learning in different aspects by buying books, hiring a coach, or being in a group coaching program, all start to get a little muddy when we’re also service providers in that very business. 
We want to clear this up and provide some perspectives and clarification on the buckets we see us providing, our clients providing, our clients hiring for, and really how things can be structured to have purpose within these different containers. Today, specifically, we’re talking about what the heck group coaching is and when it’s actually beneficial, versus one-on-one coaching and done-for-you services, both as a provider and the consumer.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 24 Feb 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Group Coaching vs. 1:1 Coaching vs. Done-For-Your Service: Which is Right for Your Business?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>616</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/28d4ebe4-ae9a-11ec-91b1-5360f49a698c/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Something we feel is getting a little bit confused in the realm of being a service provider consultant, learning from other people, hiring contractors, having employees, and serving clients, is the question of how we serve said clients, how we learn,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Something we feel is getting a little bit confused in the realm of being a service provider consultant, learning from other people, hiring contractors, having employees, and serving clients, is the question of how we serve said clients, how we learn, and how we get work done in our own business. The conversation around working one-on-one with people, using done-for-you services, and learning in different aspects by buying books, hiring a coach, or being in a group coaching program, all start to get a little muddy when we’re also service providers in that very business. 
We want to clear this up and provide some perspectives and clarification on the buckets we see us providing, our clients providing, our clients hiring for, and really how things can be structured to have purpose within these different containers. Today, specifically, we’re talking about what the heck group coaching is and when it’s actually beneficial, versus one-on-one coaching and done-for-you services, both as a provider and the consumer.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Something we feel is getting a little bit confused in the realm of being a service provider consultant, learning from other people, hiring contractors, having employees, and serving clients, is the question of how we serve said clients, how we learn, and how we get work done in our own business. The conversation around working one-on-one with people, using done-for-you services, and learning in different aspects by buying books, hiring a coach, or being in a group coaching program, all start to get a little muddy when we’re also service providers in that very business. </p><p>We want to clear this up and provide some perspectives and clarification on the buckets we see us providing, our clients providing, our clients hiring for, and really how things can be structured to have purpose within these different containers. Today, specifically, we’re talking about what the heck group coaching is and when it’s actually beneficial, versus one-on-one coaching and done-for-you services, both as a provider and the consumer.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2325</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6da32094-0266-4571-9739-da09284b15af]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7010807498.mp3?updated=1651867383" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>615: Introducing the Freedom Era: The Must-Attend Event for Industry Experts and Consultants</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/introducing-the-freedom-era-the-must-attend-event-for-industry-experts-and-consultants</link>
      <description>If you follow us on social media you may be aware that we have just announced our first virtual conference! While the conference will no doubt share some similarities with our online summits, we anticipate that previous attendees will be shocked by how incredibly different this experience truly is. One of the developments that we are most excited about is the fact the entire event will be live, giving us the scope to connect with attendees in real-time! We are also deeply aware that our participants are incredibly busy which is why we’re so proud that the entire conference will take place over the course of one day within four sessions! 
We’re tremendously excited about the impact of this live event and the opportunity to foster a sense of community amongst industry experts, consultants, and CEOs! Head over to bossproject.com/conference to sign up! There will also be a special bonus day on March 30 for those who want even more. It comes at no extra cost, but you do need to apply! So once you’ve booked your conference ticket head over to bossproject.com/vip to apply for our special bonus day event!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 22 Feb 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Introducing the Freedom Era: The Must-Attend Event for Industry Experts and Consultants</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>615</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2965fe0e-ae9a-11ec-91b1-affc78c501c4/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you follow us on social media you may be aware that we have just announced our first virtual conference! While the conference will no doubt share some similarities with our online summits, we anticipate that previous attendees will be shocked by...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you follow us on social media you may be aware that we have just announced our first virtual conference! While the conference will no doubt share some similarities with our online summits, we anticipate that previous attendees will be shocked by how incredibly different this experience truly is. One of the developments that we are most excited about is the fact the entire event will be live, giving us the scope to connect with attendees in real-time! We are also deeply aware that our participants are incredibly busy which is why we’re so proud that the entire conference will take place over the course of one day within four sessions! 
We’re tremendously excited about the impact of this live event and the opportunity to foster a sense of community amongst industry experts, consultants, and CEOs! Head over to bossproject.com/conference to sign up! There will also be a special bonus day on March 30 for those who want even more. It comes at no extra cost, but you do need to apply! So once you’ve booked your conference ticket head over to bossproject.com/vip to apply for our special bonus day event!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you follow us on social media you may be aware that we have just announced our first virtual conference! While the conference will no doubt share some similarities with our online summits, we anticipate that previous attendees will be shocked by how incredibly different this experience truly is. One of the developments that we are most excited about is the fact the entire event will be live, giving us the scope to connect with attendees in real-time! We are also deeply aware that our participants are incredibly busy which is why we’re so proud that the entire conference will take place over the course of one day within four sessions! </p><p>We’re tremendously excited about the impact of this live event and the opportunity to foster a sense of community amongst industry experts, consultants, and CEOs! Head over to <a href="https://bossproject.com/conference">bossproject.com/conference</a> to sign up! There will also be a special bonus day on March 30 for those who want even more. It comes at no extra cost, but you do need to apply! So once you’ve booked your conference ticket head over to <a href="https://bossproject.com/vip">bossproject.com/vip</a> to apply for our special bonus day event!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1666</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ce667648-f551-4607-bc83-e0fd99add4d8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6135872941.mp3?updated=1651867449" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>614: You’re Overpaying Your Staff: Here Are The Consequences</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/you-are-overpaying-your-staff-here-are-the-consequences</link>
      <description>This is the second hottest take of a conversation we’ve ever had publicly! We are so passionate about this topic, and we really want to pass on this valuable information to you because we deeply care about you and your team! When the mistakes that we are going to talk about today are made, we know that it’s coming from the best of places, but because the future of your company is at stake, and because we care about that, we really hope you’re going to listen to this episode! 
The fact of the matter is that you are most likely drastically overpaying your staff. We so often see owners hardly taking a salary for themselves, but then paying their staff six figure salaries. We also see people hiring super cheap labor. There is so much wrong with both of these phenomenons, but the good news is that there is another option! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 17 Feb 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>You’re Overpaying Your Staff: Here Are The Consequences</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>614</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2a129ac4-ae9a-11ec-91b1-4b565c25df7b/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This is the second hottest take of a conversation we’ve ever had publicly! We are so passionate about this topic, and we really want to pass on this valuable information to you because we deeply care about you and your team! When the mistakes that...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This is the second hottest take of a conversation we’ve ever had publicly! We are so passionate about this topic, and we really want to pass on this valuable information to you because we deeply care about you and your team! When the mistakes that we are going to talk about today are made, we know that it’s coming from the best of places, but because the future of your company is at stake, and because we care about that, we really hope you’re going to listen to this episode! 
The fact of the matter is that you are most likely drastically overpaying your staff. We so often see owners hardly taking a salary for themselves, but then paying their staff six figure salaries. We also see people hiring super cheap labor. There is so much wrong with both of these phenomenons, but the good news is that there is another option! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This is the second hottest take of a conversation we’ve ever had publicly! We are so passionate about this topic, and we really want to pass on this valuable information to you because we deeply care about you and your team! When the mistakes that we are going to talk about today are made, we know that it’s coming from the best of places, but because the future of your company is at stake, and because we care about that, we really hope you’re going to listen to this episode! </p><p>The fact of the matter is that you are most likely drastically overpaying your staff. We so often see owners hardly taking a salary for themselves, but then paying their staff six figure salaries. We also see people hiring super cheap labor. There is so much wrong with both of these phenomenons, but the good news is that there is another option! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2726</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ef0b1b53-6705-491c-abf1-70489d9755a1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6896980015.mp3?updated=1651867619" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>613: Why You Should Never Hire You 2.0</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-you-should-never-hire-you-2-point-0</link>
      <description>Today we are going to be sharing some thoughts and some hot takes about hiring! There are so many people out there saying all sorts of things that make our insides squirm, and we don’t want you to waste your time and effort on strategies that definitely do not work. We also got sucked into the sexiness of the idea of hiring duplicates of ourselves, so we speak from firsthand experience when we tell you that this is a BIG mistake! 
When people get to the point where they know they need to bring on someone else, it’s usually because of one of two main reasons; either that they need to hire for a very specific role for their company, or they’re burning the candle at both ends and therefore if they hire “another me” they’ll be able to get twice as much work done, but if you keep listening you’ll understand why you should never hire another you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 15 Feb 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why You Should Never Hire You 2.0</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>613</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2aa2e822-ae9a-11ec-91b1-ab0ec2814164/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are going to be sharing some thoughts and some hot takes about hiring! There are so many people out there saying all sorts of things that make our insides squirm, and we don’t want you to waste your time and effort on strategies that...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are going to be sharing some thoughts and some hot takes about hiring! There are so many people out there saying all sorts of things that make our insides squirm, and we don’t want you to waste your time and effort on strategies that definitely do not work. We also got sucked into the sexiness of the idea of hiring duplicates of ourselves, so we speak from firsthand experience when we tell you that this is a BIG mistake! 
When people get to the point where they know they need to bring on someone else, it’s usually because of one of two main reasons; either that they need to hire for a very specific role for their company, or they’re burning the candle at both ends and therefore if they hire “another me” they’ll be able to get twice as much work done, but if you keep listening you’ll understand why you should never hire another you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are going to be sharing some thoughts and some hot takes about hiring! There are so many people out there saying all sorts of things that make our insides squirm, and we don’t want you to waste your time and effort on strategies that definitely do not work. We also got sucked into the sexiness of the idea of hiring duplicates of ourselves, so we speak from firsthand experience when we tell you that this is a BIG mistake! </p><p>When people get to the point where they know they need to bring on someone else, it’s usually because of one of two main reasons; either that they need to hire for a very specific role for their company, or they’re burning the candle at both ends and therefore if they hire “another me” they’ll be able to get twice as much work done, but if you keep listening you’ll understand why you should never hire another you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2482</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[61b51e31-b2be-469a-b12d-7da8309393f3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7542228818.mp3?updated=1651868122" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>612: What You Call Yourself Matters: If You're a Creative Small Business Serving B2B You're Missing This Shift</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-you-call-yourself-matters-if-youre-a-creative-small-business-serving-b2b-youre-missing-this-shift</link>
      <description>There’s a problem that we’re seeing in this space and it’s causing people to miss massive opportunities! You’re losing out on revenue and you’re losing out on tapping into familiar industry terms, and so much of this can be solved by simply re-labeling who you are to become well-known to the rest of the world. For years, small business owners, especially those in the creative space, have continued to label themselves as such. “I’m a small business owner”, “I run a small creative business”, “I’m a creative entrepreneur”, we’ve seen these terms run rampant. 
But the thing that is missing right now in this space is that you are not utilizing terms that the rest of the world recognizes and already uses and, because of that, you’re missing out on business. If you have previously identified as a creative small business owner, especially those of you who are running a B2B service-based business helping other small businesses, we have an uplevel for you. We can change the game!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 10 Feb 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What You Call Yourself Matters: If You're a Creative Small Business Serving B2B You're Missing This Shift</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>612</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2b312902-ae9a-11ec-91b1-03732e736eaf/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>There’s a problem that we’re seeing in this space and it’s causing people to miss massive opportunities! You’re losing out on revenue and you’re losing out on tapping into familiar industry terms, and so much of this can be solved by simply...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There’s a problem that we’re seeing in this space and it’s causing people to miss massive opportunities! You’re losing out on revenue and you’re losing out on tapping into familiar industry terms, and so much of this can be solved by simply re-labeling who you are to become well-known to the rest of the world. For years, small business owners, especially those in the creative space, have continued to label themselves as such. “I’m a small business owner”, “I run a small creative business”, “I’m a creative entrepreneur”, we’ve seen these terms run rampant. 
But the thing that is missing right now in this space is that you are not utilizing terms that the rest of the world recognizes and already uses and, because of that, you’re missing out on business. If you have previously identified as a creative small business owner, especially those of you who are running a B2B service-based business helping other small businesses, we have an uplevel for you. We can change the game!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There’s a problem that we’re seeing in this space and it’s causing people to miss massive opportunities! You’re losing out on revenue and you’re losing out on tapping into familiar industry terms, and so much of this can be solved by simply re-labeling who you are to become well-known to the rest of the world. For years, small business owners, especially those in the creative space, have continued to label themselves as such. “I’m a small business owner”, “I run a small creative business”, “I’m a creative entrepreneur”, we’ve seen these terms run rampant. </p><p>But the thing that is missing right now in this space is that you are not utilizing terms that the rest of the world recognizes and already uses and, because of that, you’re missing out on business. If you have previously identified as a creative small business owner, especially those of you who are running a B2B service-based business helping other small businesses, we have an uplevel for you. We can change the game!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1975</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8d59cf0e-4ee8-48cd-aeaa-c8e7fe0f9516]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8446914660.mp3?updated=1651868325" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>611: Driving Your Team Forward with a CEO Workcation</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/driving-your-team-forward-with-a-ceo-workcation</link>
      <description>When we first decided to take a workcation, there was no way of knowing just how beneficial it would be. We have always added in times to do planning sessions and pin down what we want, but what we have learned is that creating a dedicated time to make sure it happens is so, so important. The only way for our business to move forward in the past was for us to hop on the phone with one another, and brainstorm ideas. But as our roles have shifted, this hasn’t happened as often. That’s why we’ve carved out CEO time on our to-do list, to help us have the correct focus. 
We’ve all spent so many years working for businesses that are not structured well, not managed well, and that took all the lessons we didn’t like and implemented them in the workplace. This is the extreme opposite of many of our efforts to create flexible environments that take into account all of our humanity. But what we’ve found is that the answer lies somewhere in the middle. Not having boundaries or expectations doesn’t help anyone either!
To us, knowing that we had the time to think and brainstorm without boundaries, but also adding boundaries to make the follow-through inevitable, was everything! It’s so important to add enough momentum to make sure that you achieve what you’re hoping to achieve. When you take incremental steps, it doesn’t feel like you’re eating the whole pie at once! Our main takeaways from the experience were that there’s a difference between the conversations that are had within leadership and team meetings, and within the room where it’s just you and your business partner. It’s so important that this happens periodically for the good of the business. That’s the high-level stuff that moves everything forward. If you’re not ahead of your people, they’re not going to know where to go. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 08 Feb 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Driving Your Team Forward with a CEO Workcation</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>611</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2bc57184-ae9a-11ec-91b1-ab5a14af1037/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>When we first decided to take a workcation, there was no way of knowing just how beneficial it would be. We have always added in times to do planning sessions and pin down what we want, but what we have learned is that creating a dedicated time to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When we first decided to take a workcation, there was no way of knowing just how beneficial it would be. We have always added in times to do planning sessions and pin down what we want, but what we have learned is that creating a dedicated time to make sure it happens is so, so important. The only way for our business to move forward in the past was for us to hop on the phone with one another, and brainstorm ideas. But as our roles have shifted, this hasn’t happened as often. That’s why we’ve carved out CEO time on our to-do list, to help us have the correct focus. 
We’ve all spent so many years working for businesses that are not structured well, not managed well, and that took all the lessons we didn’t like and implemented them in the workplace. This is the extreme opposite of many of our efforts to create flexible environments that take into account all of our humanity. But what we’ve found is that the answer lies somewhere in the middle. Not having boundaries or expectations doesn’t help anyone either!
To us, knowing that we had the time to think and brainstorm without boundaries, but also adding boundaries to make the follow-through inevitable, was everything! It’s so important to add enough momentum to make sure that you achieve what you’re hoping to achieve. When you take incremental steps, it doesn’t feel like you’re eating the whole pie at once! Our main takeaways from the experience were that there’s a difference between the conversations that are had within leadership and team meetings, and within the room where it’s just you and your business partner. It’s so important that this happens periodically for the good of the business. That’s the high-level stuff that moves everything forward. If you’re not ahead of your people, they’re not going to know where to go. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When we first decided to take a workcation, there was no way of knowing just how beneficial it would be. We have always added in times to do planning sessions and pin down what we want, but what we have learned is that creating a dedicated time to make sure it happens is so, so important. The only way for our business to move forward in the past was for us to hop on the phone with one another, and brainstorm ideas. But as our roles have shifted, this hasn’t happened as often. That’s why we’ve carved out CEO time on our to-do list, to help us have the correct focus. </p><p>We’ve all spent so many years working for businesses that are not structured well, not managed well, and that took all the lessons we didn’t like and implemented them in the workplace. This is the extreme opposite of many of our efforts to create flexible environments that take into account all of our humanity. But what we’ve found is that the answer lies somewhere in the middle. Not having boundaries or expectations doesn’t help anyone either!</p><p>To us, knowing that we had the time to think and brainstorm without boundaries, but also adding boundaries to make the follow-through inevitable, was everything! It’s so important to add enough momentum to make sure that you achieve what you’re hoping to achieve. When you take incremental steps, it doesn’t feel like you’re eating the whole pie at once! Our main takeaways from the experience were that there’s a difference between the conversations that are had within leadership and team meetings, and within the room where it’s just you and your business partner. It’s so important that this happens periodically for the good of the business. That’s the high-level stuff that moves everything forward. If you’re not ahead of your people, they’re not going to know where to go. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2538</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[840ee0ff-6e85-4540-ba39-b670c142b91a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3912490493.mp3?updated=1651868487" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>610: January 2022 Recap: The BIG Shift, Our Team of Ten &amp; What's About to Disrupt the Service Industry</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/january-2022-recap-the-big-shift-our-team-of-ten-whats-about-to-disrupt-the-service-industry</link>
      <description>We’ve had a very special kick-off to 2022. Not only is our company expanding, but we are also making big shifts in our business and how we lead our teams. While hiring new team members has its challenges, it’s still been an incredibly exciting time. With our shift from contractors to full and part-time employees, we have had an unprecedented opportunity to intentionally build our team culture and empower our employees with a transfer of leadership to various departments! 
Our growth as a company has also brought about a change in business needs, particularly when it comes to productivity and organizational systems. Tuning in you’ll learn about the new organizational system we’ve been working on and how it will elevate your offerings. If you’re a fan of what our previous offering Trello for Business brought to the industry, you’ll love what we have in store for you! To learn more about how we’ve been leveling up our leadership skills, as well as exclusive insights into our new offering, make sure you tune in today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 03 Feb 2022 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>January 2022 Recap: The BIG Shift, Our Team of Ten &amp; What's About to Disrupt the Service Industry</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>610</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2c4a9328-ae9a-11ec-91b1-cb464b079ca3/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’ve had a very special kick-off to 2022. Not only is our company expanding, but we are also making big shifts in our business and how we lead our teams. While hiring new team members has its challenges, it’s still been an incredibly exciting...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’ve had a very special kick-off to 2022. Not only is our company expanding, but we are also making big shifts in our business and how we lead our teams. While hiring new team members has its challenges, it’s still been an incredibly exciting time. With our shift from contractors to full and part-time employees, we have had an unprecedented opportunity to intentionally build our team culture and empower our employees with a transfer of leadership to various departments! 
Our growth as a company has also brought about a change in business needs, particularly when it comes to productivity and organizational systems. Tuning in you’ll learn about the new organizational system we’ve been working on and how it will elevate your offerings. If you’re a fan of what our previous offering Trello for Business brought to the industry, you’ll love what we have in store for you! To learn more about how we’ve been leveling up our leadership skills, as well as exclusive insights into our new offering, make sure you tune in today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’ve had a very special kick-off to 2022. Not only is our company expanding, but we are also making big shifts in our business and how we lead our teams. While hiring new team members has its challenges, it’s still been an incredibly exciting time. With our shift from contractors to full and part-time employees, we have had an unprecedented opportunity to intentionally build our team culture and empower our employees with a transfer of leadership to various departments! </p><p>Our growth as a company has also brought about a change in business needs, particularly when it comes to productivity and organizational systems. Tuning in you’ll learn about the new organizational system we’ve been working on and how it will elevate your offerings. If you’re a fan of what our previous offering Trello for Business brought to the industry, you’ll love what we have in store for you! To learn more about how we’ve been leveling up our leadership skills, as well as exclusive insights into our new offering, make sure you tune in today!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2726</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0e1d913c-cecb-4f46-ae40-3716a7a803b7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6711999554.mp3?updated=1651865196" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>609: Slowing Down to Speed Up: The Mindset &amp; Boundaries Required for Growth, Plus Your Opportunity to Work with Us</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/slowing-down-to-speed-up-the-mindset-boundaries-required-for-growth-plus-your-opportunity-to-work-with-us</link>
      <description>With all the conversations we’ve been having about learning, scaling, and unlocking new strategies for your business, people have started to worry about how they are going to find the time to add something else to their plate. You may really feel that learning something new will be beneficial to your business, but the thought of doing that when you’re already overwhelmed can be extremely daunting. 
But the thing is, it’s mentally taxing to be a human in the world right now, and learning strategies that will help you better manage the hustle and grind that you’re on is one of the best ways to grow! If you’re feeling overwhelmed, this episode is for you, because we’re going to provide you with some mindset and business benchmarks to help you gain some clarity on what you should be focusing on right now!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 Feb 2022 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Slowing Down to Speed Up: The Mindset &amp; Boundaries Required for Growth, Plus Your Opportunity to Work with Us</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>609</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2cf272e6-ae9a-11ec-91b1-23703455c3c8/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>With all the conversations we’ve been having about learning, scaling, and unlocking new strategies for your business, people have started to worry about how they are going to find the time to add something else to their plate. You may really feel...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>With all the conversations we’ve been having about learning, scaling, and unlocking new strategies for your business, people have started to worry about how they are going to find the time to add something else to their plate. You may really feel that learning something new will be beneficial to your business, but the thought of doing that when you’re already overwhelmed can be extremely daunting. 
But the thing is, it’s mentally taxing to be a human in the world right now, and learning strategies that will help you better manage the hustle and grind that you’re on is one of the best ways to grow! If you’re feeling overwhelmed, this episode is for you, because we’re going to provide you with some mindset and business benchmarks to help you gain some clarity on what you should be focusing on right now!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>With all the conversations we’ve been having about learning, scaling, and unlocking new strategies for your business, people have started to worry about how they are going to find the time to add something else to their plate. You may really feel that learning something new will be beneficial to your business, but the thought of doing that when you’re already overwhelmed can be extremely daunting. </p><p>But the thing is, it’s mentally taxing to be a human in the world right now, and learning strategies that will help you better manage the hustle and grind that you’re on is one of the best ways to grow! If you’re feeling overwhelmed, this episode is for you, because we’re going to provide you with some mindset and business benchmarks to help you gain some clarity on what you should be focusing on right now!  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1980</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e00ef18f-9592-4a93-b82b-51e5310c46f4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6689421382.mp3?updated=1651866584" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>608: The End of The Girlboss Era and What That Means for the Service-Based Industry in 2022</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-end-of-the-girlboss-era-and-what-that-means-for-the-service-based-industry-in-2022</link>
      <description>This episode is inspired by a 45-second TikTok we stumbled upon about what’s going on in the online business world. We specifically loved the phrase, “We’re at the end of the Girlboss era” because, honestly, we couldn’t agree more! Today, we talk about what the landscape of online business looked like five or six years ago, what it’s looking like in 2022, and why we think there is so much more access and opportunity than ever before. However, it is going to take a shift! We are in a new season, we are in a new world, and people have different expectations. Let's take it back in time and investigate what the Girlboss Era is, what started it, and why we think it’s on its way out! We take a look at the radical shift required to move forward in business and as a society, the realization required to shift your mindset, and where we really and truly hope the online business world isn’t heading!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 27 Jan 2022 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The End of The Girlboss Era and What That Means for the Service-Based Industry in 2022</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>608</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2d7f73e4-ae9a-11ec-91b1-970b5963b8ae/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This episode is inspired by a 45-second TikTok we stumbled upon about what’s going on in the online business world. We specifically loved the phrase, “We’re at the end of the Girlboss era” because, honestly, we couldn’t agree more! Today, we...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This episode is inspired by a 45-second TikTok we stumbled upon about what’s going on in the online business world. We specifically loved the phrase, “We’re at the end of the Girlboss era” because, honestly, we couldn’t agree more! Today, we talk about what the landscape of online business looked like five or six years ago, what it’s looking like in 2022, and why we think there is so much more access and opportunity than ever before. However, it is going to take a shift! We are in a new season, we are in a new world, and people have different expectations. Let's take it back in time and investigate what the Girlboss Era is, what started it, and why we think it’s on its way out! We take a look at the radical shift required to move forward in business and as a society, the realization required to shift your mindset, and where we really and truly hope the online business world isn’t heading!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This episode is inspired by a 45-second TikTok we stumbled upon about what’s going on in the online business world. We specifically loved the phrase, “We’re at the end of the Girlboss era” because, honestly, we couldn’t agree more! Today, we talk about what the landscape of online business looked like five or six years ago, what it’s looking like in 2022, and why we think there is so much more access and opportunity than ever before. However, it is going to take a shift! We are in a new season, we are in a new world, and people have different expectations. Let's take it back in time and investigate what the Girlboss Era is, what started it, and why we think it’s on its way out! We take a look at the radical shift required to move forward in business and as a society, the realization required to shift your mindset, and where we really and truly hope the online business world isn’t heading!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2196</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e413a59d-fcfc-4ff8-917c-666e8eed608e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7540778114.mp3?updated=1651866708" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>607: December 2021 Recap: Hiring, Choosing the Right Mentor and How to Build Intentional Time Off</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/december-2021-recap-hiring-choosing-the-right-mentor-and-how-to-build-intentional-time-off</link>
      <description>December 2021 may have been the busiest and most strategic December we’ve ever had on record! Although we only took three days off this month, which is a huge deviation from how we normally run things, we’re extremely excited about how all our planning and purpose in December has set us up for a great Q1 in 2022! While it was tough having such a busy December, it was all with very particular goals and intentions in mind. 
So much of our decision-making came back to growing our organization and looking at new employees and the positions that need to be filled as we continue to grow and scale. We had a lot of hiring decisions in the works, which formed a big part of our top priorities in December, but they were all 100% worth it. Luckily, because of the way we set things up in December, Q1 of 2022 is set to be the most intentional Q1 we've ever had!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 25 Jan 2022 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>December 2021 Recap: Hiring, Choosing the Right Mentor and How to Build Intentional Time Off</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>607</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2e1cd8fa-ae9a-11ec-91b1-733bf4979515/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>December 2021 may have been the busiest and most strategic December we’ve ever had on record! Although we only took three days off this month, which is a huge deviation from how we normally run things, we’re extremely excited about how all our...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>December 2021 may have been the busiest and most strategic December we’ve ever had on record! Although we only took three days off this month, which is a huge deviation from how we normally run things, we’re extremely excited about how all our planning and purpose in December has set us up for a great Q1 in 2022! While it was tough having such a busy December, it was all with very particular goals and intentions in mind. 
So much of our decision-making came back to growing our organization and looking at new employees and the positions that need to be filled as we continue to grow and scale. We had a lot of hiring decisions in the works, which formed a big part of our top priorities in December, but they were all 100% worth it. Luckily, because of the way we set things up in December, Q1 of 2022 is set to be the most intentional Q1 we've ever had!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>December 2021 may have been the busiest and most strategic December we’ve ever had on record! Although we only took three days off this month, which is a huge deviation from how we normally run things, we’re extremely excited about how all our planning and purpose in December has set us up for a great Q1 in 2022! While it was tough having such a busy December, it was all with very particular goals and intentions in mind. </p><p>So much of our decision-making came back to growing our organization and looking at new employees and the positions that need to be filled as we continue to grow and scale. We had a lot of hiring decisions in the works, which formed a big part of our top priorities in December, but they were all 100% worth it. Luckily, because of the way we set things up in December, Q1 of 2022 is set to be the most intentional Q1 we've ever had!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3201</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[272dcd8b-7558-4ec8-9bd2-dcc4a1d5177e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6578737090.mp3?updated=1651866801" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>606: Work Less Hours In Your Service-Based Business by Eliminating These 3 Huge Time Wasters</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/work-less-hours-in-your-service-based-business-by-eliminating-these-3-huge-time-wasters</link>
      <description>One of our biggest pet peeves is watching people let their time escape from them. Time is our most valuable resource, yet it is the thing that we see people giving away freely all the time. In today’s episode, we are going to talk about the three biggest time wasters that really hold service providers back. It is possible to work less while earning more at the same time! 
There’s a mindset amongst many business owners that if they’re not busy, they’re doing something wrong, but that couldn’t be further from the truth. There are always going to be moments where you’re feeling frazzled and overwhelmed, but that doesn’t have to be your reality all the time. If you listen to this episode and resonate with what we’re saying, go to  bossproject.com/incubator to sign up for our How to Double Your Income Working Less than 20 Hours Per Week workshop; you won’t regret it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 20 Jan 2022 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Work Less Hours In Your Service-Based Business by Eliminating These 3 Huge Time Wasters</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>606</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2ecb92c8-ae9a-11ec-91b1-53a37801f73c/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>One of our biggest pet peeves is watching people let their time escape from them. Time is our most valuable resource, yet it is the thing that we see people giving away freely all the time. In today’s episode, we are going to talk about the three...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>One of our biggest pet peeves is watching people let their time escape from them. Time is our most valuable resource, yet it is the thing that we see people giving away freely all the time. In today’s episode, we are going to talk about the three biggest time wasters that really hold service providers back. It is possible to work less while earning more at the same time! 
There’s a mindset amongst many business owners that if they’re not busy, they’re doing something wrong, but that couldn’t be further from the truth. There are always going to be moments where you’re feeling frazzled and overwhelmed, but that doesn’t have to be your reality all the time. If you listen to this episode and resonate with what we’re saying, go to  bossproject.com/incubator to sign up for our How to Double Your Income Working Less than 20 Hours Per Week workshop; you won’t regret it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>One of our biggest pet peeves is watching people let their time escape from them. Time is our most valuable resource, yet it is the thing that we see people giving away freely all the time. In today’s episode, we are going to talk about the three biggest time wasters that really hold service providers back. It is possible to work less while earning more at the same time! </p><p>There’s a mindset amongst many business owners that if they’re not busy, they’re doing something wrong, but that couldn’t be further from the truth. There are always going to be moments where you’re feeling frazzled and overwhelmed, but that doesn’t have to be your reality all the time. If you listen to this episode and resonate with what we’re saying, go to <a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/incubator-application/?utm_source=on_air_ad&amp;utm_medium=podcast&amp;utm_campaign=incubator_application"> bossproject.com/incubator</a> to sign up for our <em>How to Double Your Income Working Less than 20 Hours Per Week</em> workshop; you won’t regret it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2644</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[afcdefa3-abbb-46e1-8473-47673de4f29b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1603867650.mp3?updated=1651866856" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>605: If You Want to Grow Your Service-Based Business Don’t Make This Huge Mistake</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/work-less-hours-in-your-service-based-business-by-eliminating-these-3-huge-time-wasters</link>
      <description>The opinions we share in this conversation might make you uncomfortable, and that’s okay! Today’s show addresses one of the patterns we’ve seen emerge among our clients: their goals are amazing, but the path they intend to take to get there keeps them playing small. We’ll brainstorm with you, regardless of how you intend to move forward, but we do have some hard-earned insights that suggest that staying focused on the skillset you have and knowing your value can lead you to a place where growth becomes potential. You CAN find the time and money freedom you’ve been dreaming of; it’s never too late to get back to your zone of genius, or to change, transition, and pivot to work on what you should be working on!
We’re here to give you the tough-love talk you may need as a one-to-many model business owner. It’s so important to continually ask yourself what it is that you want out of what you’re doing. Once you’ve done that, you need to do the math! We can’t tell you what to believe, but your audit of what you’re already doing certainly can. We’ve made mistakes along the way, and we want to help you avoid the same ones we made, which is totally possible. You can carve out a way forward that leads to your growth rather than inhibiting it! Here’s how.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 18 Jan 2022 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>If Your Want to Grow Your Service-Based Business Don’t Make This Huge Mistake</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>605</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2f6dce8a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-c7a90ed15519/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>The opinions we share in this conversation might make you uncomfortable, and that’s okay! Today’s show addresses one of the patterns we’ve seen emerge among our clients: their goals are amazing, but the path they intend to take to get there...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>The opinions we share in this conversation might make you uncomfortable, and that’s okay! Today’s show addresses one of the patterns we’ve seen emerge among our clients: their goals are amazing, but the path they intend to take to get there keeps them playing small. We’ll brainstorm with you, regardless of how you intend to move forward, but we do have some hard-earned insights that suggest that staying focused on the skillset you have and knowing your value can lead you to a place where growth becomes potential. You CAN find the time and money freedom you’ve been dreaming of; it’s never too late to get back to your zone of genius, or to change, transition, and pivot to work on what you should be working on!
We’re here to give you the tough-love talk you may need as a one-to-many model business owner. It’s so important to continually ask yourself what it is that you want out of what you’re doing. Once you’ve done that, you need to do the math! We can’t tell you what to believe, but your audit of what you’re already doing certainly can. We’ve made mistakes along the way, and we want to help you avoid the same ones we made, which is totally possible. You can carve out a way forward that leads to your growth rather than inhibiting it! Here’s how.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The opinions we share in this conversation might make you uncomfortable, and that’s okay! Today’s show addresses one of the patterns we’ve seen emerge among our clients: their goals are amazing, but the path they intend to take to get there keeps them playing small. We’ll brainstorm with you, regardless of how you intend to move forward, but we do have some hard-earned insights that suggest that staying focused on the skillset you have and knowing your value can lead you to a place where growth becomes potential. You CAN find the time and money freedom you’ve been dreaming of; it’s never too late to get back to your zone of genius, or to change, transition, and pivot to work on what you should be working on!</p><p>We’re here to give you the tough-love talk you may need as a one-to-many model business owner. It’s so important to continually ask yourself what it is that you want out of what you’re doing. Once you’ve done that, you need to do the math! We can’t tell you what to believe, but your audit of what you’re already doing certainly can. We’ve made mistakes along the way, and we want to help you avoid the same ones we made, which is totally possible. You can carve out a way forward that leads to your growth rather than inhibiting it! Here’s how.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1805</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[03464cc6-2127-444a-8513-ef5e6ffc52a8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8212546599.mp3?updated=1651866917" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>604: Strategically Choosing to Build a Business with Less Profits in Pursuit of Financial Freedom</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/strategically-choosing-to-build-a-business-with-less-profits-in-pursuit-of-financial-freedom</link>
      <description>Let’s start by saying it’s okay to be wherever you find yourself in your financial journey! This one’s for those of us who are working our faces off on the back end, and not seeing this translate to profits. Maybe you’ve already identified your first baby step to start working towards your goal. Today’s episode is about identifying your goals, and putting them into action. We’re here to equip you with the tools you need to put those steps into action with a long term goal in mind, from identifying what you want out of it, to learning what you need to learn to grow a healthy business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 13 Jan 2022 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Strategically Choosing to Build a Business with Less Profits in Pursuit of Financial Freedom</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>604</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2ffe3e98-ae9a-11ec-91b1-9bc555d0b39a/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Let’s start by saying it’s okay to be wherever you find yourself in your financial journey! This one’s for those of us who are working our faces off on the back end, and not seeing this translate to profits. Maybe you’ve already identified...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Let’s start by saying it’s okay to be wherever you find yourself in your financial journey! This one’s for those of us who are working our faces off on the back end, and not seeing this translate to profits. Maybe you’ve already identified your first baby step to start working towards your goal. Today’s episode is about identifying your goals, and putting them into action. We’re here to equip you with the tools you need to put those steps into action with a long term goal in mind, from identifying what you want out of it, to learning what you need to learn to grow a healthy business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Let’s start by saying it’s okay to be wherever you find yourself in your financial journey! This one’s for those of us who are working our faces off on the back end, and not seeing this translate to profits. Maybe you’ve already identified your first baby step to start working towards your goal. Today’s episode is about identifying your goals, and putting them into action. We’re here to equip you with the tools you need to put those steps into action with a long term goal in mind, from identifying what you want out of it, to learning what you need to learn to grow a healthy business.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2450</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0d57e423-eff0-4d25-9c94-b62ee5cea427]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7315001508.mp3?updated=1651868573" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>603: Uncovering Your Relationship with Money and Identifying what Financial Freedom Looks Like</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/uncovering-your-relationship-with-money-and-identifying-what-financial-freedom-looks-like</link>
      <description>We've been hearing the term 'financial freedom’ a lot within our community within the past year. But what does that mean and how do we achieve it? Too many people are looking at financial freedom in the wrong way; it’s not something that you suddenly wake up with one morning, there are various milestones along the journey. In today’s episode we’re going to break down what these milestones could look like for you, and what you should avoid while seeking financial freedom.
Boss Project is here to serve you, and a major part of our personal mission is to help you achieve financial freedom so that you can reach your big goals and thrive! We’re not here just to teach you how to make more money, we want to give you the financial education necessary to build the life you truly want!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 11 Jan 2022 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Uncovering Your Relationship with Money and Identifying what Financial Freedom Looks Like</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>603</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/309fc600-ae9a-11ec-91b1-5b014c7d990c/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We've been hearing the term 'financial freedom’ a lot within our community within the past year. But what does that mean and how do we achieve it? Too many people are looking at financial freedom in the wrong way; it’s not something that you...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We've been hearing the term 'financial freedom’ a lot within our community within the past year. But what does that mean and how do we achieve it? Too many people are looking at financial freedom in the wrong way; it’s not something that you suddenly wake up with one morning, there are various milestones along the journey. In today’s episode we’re going to break down what these milestones could look like for you, and what you should avoid while seeking financial freedom.
Boss Project is here to serve you, and a major part of our personal mission is to help you achieve financial freedom so that you can reach your big goals and thrive! We’re not here just to teach you how to make more money, we want to give you the financial education necessary to build the life you truly want!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We've been hearing the term 'financial freedom’ a lot within our community within the past year. But what does that mean and how do we achieve it? Too many people are looking at financial freedom in the wrong way; it’s not something that you suddenly wake up with one morning, there are various milestones along the journey. In today’s episode we’re going to break down what these milestones could look like for you, and what you should avoid while seeking financial freedom.</p><p>Boss Project is here to serve you, and a major part of our personal mission is to help you achieve financial freedom so that you can reach your big goals and thrive! We’re not here just to teach you how to make more money, we want to give you the financial education necessary to build the life you truly want!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2532</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f1b62667-1d30-4a50-a2ca-558711196d82]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3620262307.mp3?updated=1651868674" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>602: Where Boss Project is Headed in 2022</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/where-boss-project-is-headed-in-2022</link>
      <description>The new year is fast approaching, and with it comes excitement, planning, and a whole of strategizing! We want to take all the things that worked so well in 2021, and carry it over into 2022. One of the biggest changes we’ve experienced in the last 12 months, is taking on a host of new full-time employees and growing our team! Soon, our full-time employees will even outnumber our regular contractors! It’s been really exciting expanding our business family, and we’ve learned a lot in the process.
To prepare for 2022 we’ve brain dumped all our anxieties and aspirations for the coming year onto paper, and blocked out our calendar accordingly. This is the biggest team we’ve ever worked with and we’re excited to take a far more structured approach to scheduling time-off, holidays, and blackout days. We’re taking everything we’ve integrated into our lives about how we run our business and are passing it on to the team. To learn more about our trajectory for 2022 and how we’ll be growing our business, tune in today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 06 Jan 2022 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Where Boss Project is Headed in 2022</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>602</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/313d58c0-ae9a-11ec-91b1-27fcc0d0bfde/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>The new year is fast approaching, and with it comes excitement, planning, and a whole of strategizing! We want to take all the things that worked so well in 2021, and carry it over into 2022. One of the biggest changes we’ve experienced in the last...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>The new year is fast approaching, and with it comes excitement, planning, and a whole of strategizing! We want to take all the things that worked so well in 2021, and carry it over into 2022. One of the biggest changes we’ve experienced in the last 12 months, is taking on a host of new full-time employees and growing our team! Soon, our full-time employees will even outnumber our regular contractors! It’s been really exciting expanding our business family, and we’ve learned a lot in the process.
To prepare for 2022 we’ve brain dumped all our anxieties and aspirations for the coming year onto paper, and blocked out our calendar accordingly. This is the biggest team we’ve ever worked with and we’re excited to take a far more structured approach to scheduling time-off, holidays, and blackout days. We’re taking everything we’ve integrated into our lives about how we run our business and are passing it on to the team. To learn more about our trajectory for 2022 and how we’ll be growing our business, tune in today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The new year is fast approaching, and with it comes excitement, planning, and a whole of strategizing! We want to take all the things that worked so well in 2021, and carry it over into 2022. One of the biggest changes we’ve experienced in the last 12 months, is taking on a host of new full-time employees and growing our team! Soon, our full-time employees will even outnumber our regular contractors! It’s been really exciting expanding our business family, and we’ve learned a lot in the process.</p><p>To prepare for 2022 we’ve brain dumped all our anxieties and aspirations for the coming year onto paper, and blocked out our calendar accordingly. This is the biggest team we’ve ever worked with and we’re excited to take a far more structured approach to scheduling time-off, holidays, and blackout days. We’re taking everything we’ve integrated into our lives about how we run our business and are passing it on to the team. To learn more about our trajectory for 2022 and how we’ll be growing our business, tune in today!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1753</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4c6f9409-77c3-4a46-9c51-83bc9dbcffa7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6636735618.mp3?updated=1651868731" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>601: The Results After a Year of Rest - 2021 Recap</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-results-after-a-year-of-rest-2021-recap</link>
      <description>A year is a long time, and you forget some things that happened throughout the year. We consistently overestimate what we can accomplish in a short period of time, and dramatically underestimate what we can achieve in a long period of time. A lot can happen in a year! We’re taking a walk down memory lane to discuss the things that have happened throughout the year!

While we feel mostly like the same people, we’re coming from a different starting point at the end of 2021 than at the beginning. There’s some irony to the decisions we made this year. This year, we decided not to grow, but to maintain the business that we had. We needed a breather. Despite that being true, we grew topline revenue by nearly 20%. The lesson? We don’t give rest the credit it deserves! That period of rest was a lot more significant than we give it credit for and it’s prepared us for easily the busiest year we’ve ever had.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 04 Jan 2022 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Results After a Year of Rest - 2021 Recap</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>601</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/31c815b4-ae9a-11ec-91b1-cfb3d863c4f3/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>A year is a long time, and you forget some things that happened throughout the year. We consistently overestimate what we can accomplish in a short period of time, and dramatically underestimate what we can achieve in a long period of time. A lot can...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>A year is a long time, and you forget some things that happened throughout the year. We consistently overestimate what we can accomplish in a short period of time, and dramatically underestimate what we can achieve in a long period of time. A lot can happen in a year! We’re taking a walk down memory lane to discuss the things that have happened throughout the year!

While we feel mostly like the same people, we’re coming from a different starting point at the end of 2021 than at the beginning. There’s some irony to the decisions we made this year. This year, we decided not to grow, but to maintain the business that we had. We needed a breather. Despite that being true, we grew topline revenue by nearly 20%. The lesson? We don’t give rest the credit it deserves! That period of rest was a lot more significant than we give it credit for and it’s prepared us for easily the busiest year we’ve ever had.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A year is a long time, and you forget some things that happened throughout the year. We consistently overestimate what we can accomplish in a short period of time, and dramatically underestimate what we can achieve in a long period of time. A lot can happen in a year! We’re taking a walk down memory lane to discuss the things that have happened throughout the year!</p><p><br></p><p>While we feel mostly like the same people, we’re coming from a different starting point at the end of 2021 than at the beginning. There’s some irony to the decisions we made this year. This year, we decided not to grow, but to maintain the business that we had. We needed a breather. Despite that being true, we grew topline revenue by nearly 20%. The lesson? We don’t give rest the credit it deserves! That period of rest was a lot more significant than we give it credit for and it’s prepared us for easily the busiest year we’ve ever had.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3824</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ca347282-4f32-4e92-9684-aad62f856dcf]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1731371246.mp3?updated=1651930292" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>600: November 2021 Profit Report: Creating Real Sustainable Income and Dissecting Our New Growth Trajectory</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/november-2021-profit-report-creating-real-sustainable-income</link>
      <description>Welcome back to another profit report! We’re going back in time to talk about November 2021. We’ve been doing these profit reports for over two years, and we can’t believe how time has flown by! For those who are new to the profit report, in these episodes, we offer a breakdown of our strategies and decisions, as well as insights into how money moves around within a company like ours. It allows you to gain an informed perspective on what it looks like to grow a company of our size, and hear insider conversations about things like healthy profit margins and expenses.
Today, we talk about our launch in October and how it has affected our November profits, including recurring revenue from people who made purchases in October. We unpack some of the exciting changes we’ve made, particularly when it comes to budgeting and reimagining how we’re going to continue to grow and scale. You’ll also hear about why a lot of this comes down to hiring and how we make decisions around that based on projections of client needs and outcomes. Tune in for a detailed breakdown of our profit report, insights into our goals for next year, and why we are so excited to grow!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 23 Dec 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>November 2021 Profit Report: Creating Real Sustainable Income and Dissecting Our New Growth Trajectory</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>600</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/326a6896-ae9a-11ec-91b1-5b8d8ec0ee41/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome back to another profit report! We’re going back in time to talk about November 2021. We’ve been doing these profit reports for over two years, and we can’t believe how time has flown by! For those who are new to the profit report, in...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to another profit report! We’re going back in time to talk about November 2021. We’ve been doing these profit reports for over two years, and we can’t believe how time has flown by! For those who are new to the profit report, in these episodes, we offer a breakdown of our strategies and decisions, as well as insights into how money moves around within a company like ours. It allows you to gain an informed perspective on what it looks like to grow a company of our size, and hear insider conversations about things like healthy profit margins and expenses.
Today, we talk about our launch in October and how it has affected our November profits, including recurring revenue from people who made purchases in October. We unpack some of the exciting changes we’ve made, particularly when it comes to budgeting and reimagining how we’re going to continue to grow and scale. You’ll also hear about why a lot of this comes down to hiring and how we make decisions around that based on projections of client needs and outcomes. Tune in for a detailed breakdown of our profit report, insights into our goals for next year, and why we are so excited to grow!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to another profit report! We’re going back in time to talk about November 2021. We’ve been doing these profit reports for over two years, and we can’t believe how time has flown by! For those who are new to the profit report, in these episodes, we offer a breakdown of our strategies and decisions, as well as insights into how money moves around within a company like ours. It allows you to gain an informed perspective on what it looks like to grow a company of our size, and hear insider conversations about things like healthy profit margins and expenses.</p><p>Today, we talk about our launch in October and how it has affected our November profits, including recurring revenue from people who made purchases in October. We unpack some of the exciting changes we’ve made, particularly when it comes to budgeting and reimagining how we’re going to continue to grow and scale. You’ll also hear about why a lot of this comes down to hiring and how we make decisions around that based on projections of client needs and outcomes. Tune in for a detailed breakdown of our profit report, insights into our goals for next year, and why we are so excited to grow!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2710</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b8d7130d-70a8-42e7-9747-317ccd677b24]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2983817394.mp3?updated=1651869017" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>599: Creating Benefits to Attract Top Talent</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-benefits-to-attract-top-talent</link>
      <description>This week on the Strategy Hour podcast, we discuss how to create benefits that will attract top talent while also allowing your company to thrive. Running your business can often put you in situations where you have to compromise, but that doesn’t mean those compromises have to be permanent. Once you reach the point where you can take on new staff, you can begin to ask yourself what benefits you can offer versus what you want to offer. It won’t happen overnight, but setting out goals that build towards your vision for your company can be incredibly motivating!
Hiring new staff can come with a series of unanticipated costs outside of their salaries, like taxes and opening new 401K plans. While it may seem overwhelming at first, a little planning goes a long way. We’ve benefited greatly from having expert consultants advise us on how to take on new hires, from accountants to help us with cash flow, to HR’s advice on how to structure maternity leave and healthcare benefits. It’s been incredibly exciting entering this stage of our business, where we can grow our work community and set goals for how we can support our employees in every aspect of their lives! We fully believe that you are so much more than your job and your career, and we want to support all those elements from family, to friends, to health and alternative medicine. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 21 Dec 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating Benefits to Attract Top Talent</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>599</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3308e9d0-ae9a-11ec-91b1-0f2bb2979113/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week on the Strategy Hour podcast, we discuss how to create benefits that will attract top talent while also allowing your company to thrive. Running your business can often put you in situations where you have to compromise, but that doesn’t...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This week on the Strategy Hour podcast, we discuss how to create benefits that will attract top talent while also allowing your company to thrive. Running your business can often put you in situations where you have to compromise, but that doesn’t mean those compromises have to be permanent. Once you reach the point where you can take on new staff, you can begin to ask yourself what benefits you can offer versus what you want to offer. It won’t happen overnight, but setting out goals that build towards your vision for your company can be incredibly motivating!
Hiring new staff can come with a series of unanticipated costs outside of their salaries, like taxes and opening new 401K plans. While it may seem overwhelming at first, a little planning goes a long way. We’ve benefited greatly from having expert consultants advise us on how to take on new hires, from accountants to help us with cash flow, to HR’s advice on how to structure maternity leave and healthcare benefits. It’s been incredibly exciting entering this stage of our business, where we can grow our work community and set goals for how we can support our employees in every aspect of their lives! We fully believe that you are so much more than your job and your career, and we want to support all those elements from family, to friends, to health and alternative medicine. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on the Strategy Hour podcast, we discuss how to create benefits that will attract top talent while also allowing your company to thrive. Running your business can often put you in situations where you have to compromise, but that doesn’t mean those compromises have to be permanent. Once you reach the point where you can take on new staff, you can begin to ask yourself what benefits you can offer versus what you <em>want</em> to offer. It won’t happen overnight, but setting out goals that build towards your vision for your company can be incredibly motivating!</p><p>Hiring new staff can come with a series of unanticipated costs outside of their salaries, like taxes and opening new 401K plans. While it may seem overwhelming at first, a little planning goes a long way. We’ve benefited greatly from having expert consultants advise us on how to take on new hires, from accountants to help us with cash flow, to HR’s advice on how to structure maternity leave and healthcare benefits. It’s been incredibly exciting entering this stage of our business, where we can grow our work community and set goals for how we can support our employees in every aspect of their lives! We fully believe that you are so much more than your job and your career, and we want to support all those elements from family, to friends, to health and alternative medicine. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2449</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ed65c495-2980-4d36-a525-79f6cef4a028]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4338306521.mp3?updated=1651869076" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>598: The Shift that Doubled Our Business in 4 Months</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-shift-that-doubled-our-business-in-4-months</link>
      <description>We have to get creative about how we manage human resources within a completely digital team that is just growing and growing! It’s been the wildest 6 months. You will go through seasons of your business where you are very sure about what you want and what you don’t want, but remember that you have the right to change your mind. What we wanted two years ago is not at all what we want right now, but we’re not mad about it. When you change your mind about something, it’s probably because you have learned more, have more confidence and more skills, and that is nothing to feel bad about! This episode is all about the mindset shift which led us to change something in our business that caused an unprecedented level of growth! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Dec 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Shift that Doubled Our Business in 4 Months</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>598</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/33ae29cc-ae9a-11ec-91b1-8b1b3c3c6a9f/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We have to get creative about how we manage human resources within a completely digital team that is just growing and growing! It’s been the wildest 6 months. You will go through seasons of your business where you are very sure about what you want...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We have to get creative about how we manage human resources within a completely digital team that is just growing and growing! It’s been the wildest 6 months. You will go through seasons of your business where you are very sure about what you want and what you don’t want, but remember that you have the right to change your mind. What we wanted two years ago is not at all what we want right now, but we’re not mad about it. When you change your mind about something, it’s probably because you have learned more, have more confidence and more skills, and that is nothing to feel bad about! This episode is all about the mindset shift which led us to change something in our business that caused an unprecedented level of growth! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We have to get creative about how we manage human resources within a completely digital team that is just growing and growing! It’s been the wildest 6 months. You will go through seasons of your business where you are very sure about what you want and what you don’t want, but remember that you have the right to change your mind. What we wanted two years ago is not at all what we want right now, but we’re not mad about it. When you change your mind about something, it’s probably because you have learned more, have more confidence and more skills, and that is nothing to feel bad about! This episode is all about the mindset shift which led us to change something in our business that caused an unprecedented level of growth! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2007</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a98cb6a3-939d-4dd0-9a27-66eacd6a775b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8258565379.mp3?updated=1651930551" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>597: The Importance of Quality Control and Playing to Strengths with Jared Pumphrey</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-importance-of-quality-control-and-playing-to-your-strengths-with-jared-pumphrey</link>
      <description>This week, we have a very exciting episode with Emylee, Abagail, and Abagail’s partner, Jared Pumphrey, who joined the team earlier this year as Boss Project’s Marketing Manager! Join us as we dive into what Jared’s role entails, how it has impacted our business, and how he has no idea how we managed before we had someone dedicated to running the day-to-day operations. Tuning in, you’ll also find out how to set boundaries for a healthy marriage when going into business with your spouse, as well as what Jared and Abagail love about working together.
Jared unpacks the importance of having an internal system for quality control and why, if you're the last person who did something to a document, you can't verify that it's perfect. Later, we reflect on how a team can thrive when they are allowed to play to their strengths, what that entails, and how you can go about helping them operate in their zone of genius.
We cover a lot in this episode, from why we decided not to outsource our marketing to finding your strengths and the importance of customer experience, plus SO much more, so make sure to miss this insightful and informative discussion! Feel free to reach out to us on Instagram @bossproject if you have any questions. We would love to hear from you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Dec 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Importance of Quality Control and Playing to Strengths with Jared Pumphrey</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>597</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/344e8fca-ae9a-11ec-91b1-47a3234c886d/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week, we have a very exciting episode with Emylee, Abagail, and Abagail’s partner, Jared Pumphrey, who joined the team earlier this year as Boss Project’s Marketing Manager! Join us as we dive into what Jared’s role entails, how it has...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This week, we have a very exciting episode with Emylee, Abagail, and Abagail’s partner, Jared Pumphrey, who joined the team earlier this year as Boss Project’s Marketing Manager! Join us as we dive into what Jared’s role entails, how it has impacted our business, and how he has no idea how we managed before we had someone dedicated to running the day-to-day operations. Tuning in, you’ll also find out how to set boundaries for a healthy marriage when going into business with your spouse, as well as what Jared and Abagail love about working together.
Jared unpacks the importance of having an internal system for quality control and why, if you're the last person who did something to a document, you can't verify that it's perfect. Later, we reflect on how a team can thrive when they are allowed to play to their strengths, what that entails, and how you can go about helping them operate in their zone of genius.
We cover a lot in this episode, from why we decided not to outsource our marketing to finding your strengths and the importance of customer experience, plus SO much more, so make sure to miss this insightful and informative discussion! Feel free to reach out to us on Instagram @bossproject if you have any questions. We would love to hear from you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week, we have a very exciting episode with Emylee, Abagail, and Abagail’s partner, Jared Pumphrey, who joined the team earlier this year as Boss Project’s Marketing Manager! Join us as we dive into what Jared’s role entails, how it has impacted our business, and how he has no idea how we managed before we had someone dedicated to running the day-to-day operations. Tuning in, you’ll also find out how to set boundaries for a healthy marriage when going into business with your spouse, as well as what Jared and Abagail love about working together.</p><p>Jared unpacks the importance of having an internal system for quality control and why, if you're the last person who did something to a document, you can't verify that it's perfect. Later, we reflect on how a team can thrive when they are allowed to play to their strengths, what that entails, and how you can go about helping them operate in their zone of genius.</p><p>We cover a lot in this episode, from why we decided not to outsource our marketing to finding your strengths and the importance of customer experience, plus SO much more, so make sure to miss this insightful and informative discussion! Feel free to reach out to us on Instagram <a href="https://www.instagram.com/bossproject/">@bossproject</a> if you have any questions. We would love to hear from you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2171</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2b126a9c-1562-47b5-9952-383d2ea4606a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6549799804.mp3?updated=1651930596" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>596: How Our Team Prepares for Holiday Time Off (Steal These Strategies)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-our-team-prepares-for-holiday-time-off-steal-these-strategies</link>
      <description>In this episode we’re talking all things holiday and work and productivity and delegation and organizing and all of that good stuff! If you haven’t listened to any of our previous episodes about taking the full month of December off, we highly recommend that you go do that. But today’s episode is going to be a little bit different, because our business looks a little bit different now. We’re going through a different season in our business, so we aren’t taking the full month off like we have done in the past, we’re still going to make sure that we enjoy our holiday season! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 09 Dec 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How Our Team Prepares for Holiday Time Off (Steal These Strategies)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>596</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/34f18e28-ae9a-11ec-91b1-e3834203ae17/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode we’re talking all things holiday and work and productivity and delegation and organizing and all of that good stuff! If you haven’t listened to any of our previous episodes about taking the full month of December off, we highly...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode we’re talking all things holiday and work and productivity and delegation and organizing and all of that good stuff! If you haven’t listened to any of our previous episodes about taking the full month of December off, we highly recommend that you go do that. But today’s episode is going to be a little bit different, because our business looks a little bit different now. We’re going through a different season in our business, so we aren’t taking the full month off like we have done in the past, we’re still going to make sure that we enjoy our holiday season! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode we’re talking all things holiday and work and productivity and delegation and organizing and all of that good stuff! If you haven’t listened to any of our previous episodes about taking the full month of December off, we highly recommend that you go do that. But today’s episode is going to be a little bit different, because our business looks a little bit different now. We’re going through a different season in our business, so we aren’t taking the full month off like we have done in the past, we’re still going to make sure that we enjoy our holiday season! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1814</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b1cba58e-d495-4e4c-8719-b41a51332929]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9926825310.mp3?updated=1651930656" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>595: Setting Boundaries and Growing Confidence with Megan Reed Part 2</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/setting-boundaries-and-growing-confidence-with-megan-reed-part-2</link>
      <description>Part 1 of our conversation with Megan involved a discussion around the difference between self-care and treating yourself (and what this means for you as a business owner) and how to really step into your identity as a person and figure out what fills you up. We ended the last episode by touching on the confidence realm; confidence allows us to do so many things in life and business. 
Today, for part two of our conversation with Megan, we’re going to continue on this confidence theme and also get stuck into our very favorite ‘B’ word of all time; boundaries! Boundaries look different for everyone, and can be continuously redefined as you grow and change as a person. Nobody knows what’s going on in your head, and setting boundaries is a way of protecting your energy, your wellbeing, your personal safety, and so much more. Join us today as we spill all the beans on boundaries! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 07 Dec 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Setting Boundaries and Growing Confidence with Megan Reed Part 2</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>595</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/35b7d68c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-d3d9b720c0bb/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Part 1 of our conversation with Megan involved a discussion around the difference between self-care and treating yourself (and what this means for you as a business owner) and how to really step into your identity as a person and figure out what fills...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Part 1 of our conversation with Megan involved a discussion around the difference between self-care and treating yourself (and what this means for you as a business owner) and how to really step into your identity as a person and figure out what fills you up. We ended the last episode by touching on the confidence realm; confidence allows us to do so many things in life and business. 
Today, for part two of our conversation with Megan, we’re going to continue on this confidence theme and also get stuck into our very favorite ‘B’ word of all time; boundaries! Boundaries look different for everyone, and can be continuously redefined as you grow and change as a person. Nobody knows what’s going on in your head, and setting boundaries is a way of protecting your energy, your wellbeing, your personal safety, and so much more. Join us today as we spill all the beans on boundaries! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Part 1 of our conversation with Megan involved a discussion around the difference between self-care and treating yourself (and what this means for you as a business owner) and how to really step into your identity as a person and figure out what fills you up. We ended the last episode by touching on the confidence realm; confidence allows us to do so many things in life and business. </p><p>Today, for part two of our conversation with Megan, we’re going to continue on this confidence theme and also get stuck into our very favorite ‘B’ word of all time; boundaries! Boundaries look different for everyone, and can be continuously redefined as you grow and change as a person. Nobody knows what’s going on in your head, and setting boundaries is a way of protecting your energy, your wellbeing, your personal safety, and so much more. Join us today as we spill all the beans on boundaries! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2091</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[844cafdc-dfef-4c07-bf52-e5e1d2f90efd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2729810078.mp3?updated=1651930710" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>594: The Difference Between Health-Care and Self-Care as a Business Owner with Megan Reed Part 1</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-difference-between-health-care-and-self-care-as-a-business-owner-with-megan-reed-part-1</link>
      <description>Our guest today, Megan Reed, is one of our new client success coaches inside the Incubator. She works alongside our clients to really uncover some of the mindset work that's necessary to take you to the next level. Her background in design makes her a really valuable player. Today we’re going to be talking about the beliefs that you have about yourselves, and some things you need to be working through. 
We don’t often tackle the topic of mindset on this show, or with our clients, because that isn’t our field of expertise. So we decided to bring someone on who really knows what she’s talking about. The reason why we wanted to cover this topic is because of the responses that we received to a question we asked on our Incubator intake forms. “How do you like to treat yourselves?” was the question, and the answers basically ranged from, “I don’t know,” to “I don’t treat myself.” 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 02 Dec 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Difference Between Health-Care and Self-Care as a Business Owner with Megan Reed Part 1</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>594</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/36566f68-ae9a-11ec-91b1-7fe58bc47dea/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Our guest today, Megan Reed, is one of our new client success coaches inside the Incubator. She works alongside our clients to really uncover some of the mindset work that's necessary to take you to the next level. Her background in design makes her a...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Our guest today, Megan Reed, is one of our new client success coaches inside the Incubator. She works alongside our clients to really uncover some of the mindset work that's necessary to take you to the next level. Her background in design makes her a really valuable player. Today we’re going to be talking about the beliefs that you have about yourselves, and some things you need to be working through. 
We don’t often tackle the topic of mindset on this show, or with our clients, because that isn’t our field of expertise. So we decided to bring someone on who really knows what she’s talking about. The reason why we wanted to cover this topic is because of the responses that we received to a question we asked on our Incubator intake forms. “How do you like to treat yourselves?” was the question, and the answers basically ranged from, “I don’t know,” to “I don’t treat myself.” 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Our guest today, Megan Reed, is one of our new client success coaches inside the Incubator. She works alongside our clients to really uncover some of the mindset work that's necessary to take you to the next level. Her background in design makes her a really valuable player. Today we’re going to be talking about the beliefs that you have about yourselves, and some things you need to be working through. </p><p>We don’t often tackle the topic of mindset on this show, or with our clients, because that isn’t our field of expertise. So we decided to bring someone on who really knows what she’s talking about. The reason why we wanted to cover this topic is because of the responses that we received to a question we asked on our Incubator intake forms. “How do you like to treat yourselves?” was the question, and the answers basically ranged from, “I don’t know,” to “I don’t treat myself.” </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2454</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[315a08c4-31e5-4322-93dc-59c83afb8a48]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8963892372.mp3?updated=1651930760" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>593: October 2021 Profit Report: Increasing our MRR by 77% in Less than 7 Days</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/october-2021-profit-report-increasing-our-mrr-by-77-percent-in-less-than-7-days</link>
      <description>We’ve been working on something exciting for a really long time and today’s episode exists to introduce you to our newest offering, which includes taking on clients for our business incubator! Our business was working. We could have successfully continued with our existing plan. Instead, we made an intentional move, looked at what we wanted to do, saw that the mission was the same as when we started, and then asked ourselves how we could achieve even more of that!
If you can focus less on what you want and more on the problem you are actively solving for your audience, the doors will open. Your business should take care of you, NOT drain you! We want you to know that where we are today is the result of having a full staff of people, an audience in the millions, and six whole years of hard work, which is why we are sharing some insight into our hiring process, the art of simmering, our desire to take on clients again, and so much more in our October profit report for 2021! Join us today! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 30 Nov 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>October 2021 Profit Report: Increasing our MRR by 77% in Less than 7 Days</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>593</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/36dc1938-ae9a-11ec-91b1-e7b692845636/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’ve been working on something exciting for a really long time and today’s episode exists to introduce you to our newest offering, which includes taking on clients for our business incubator! Our business was working. We could have successfully...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’ve been working on something exciting for a really long time and today’s episode exists to introduce you to our newest offering, which includes taking on clients for our business incubator! Our business was working. We could have successfully continued with our existing plan. Instead, we made an intentional move, looked at what we wanted to do, saw that the mission was the same as when we started, and then asked ourselves how we could achieve even more of that!
If you can focus less on what you want and more on the problem you are actively solving for your audience, the doors will open. Your business should take care of you, NOT drain you! We want you to know that where we are today is the result of having a full staff of people, an audience in the millions, and six whole years of hard work, which is why we are sharing some insight into our hiring process, the art of simmering, our desire to take on clients again, and so much more in our October profit report for 2021! Join us today! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’ve been working on something exciting for a really long time and today’s episode exists to introduce you to our newest offering, which includes taking on clients for our business incubator! Our business was working. We could have successfully continued with our existing plan. Instead, we made an intentional move, looked at what we wanted to do, saw that the mission was the same as when we started, and then asked ourselves how we could achieve even more of that!</p><p>If you can focus less on what you want and more on the problem you are actively solving for your audience, the doors will open. Your business should take care of you, NOT drain you! We want you to know that where we are today is the result of having a full staff of people, an audience in the millions, and six whole years of hard work, which is why we are sharing some insight into our hiring process, the art of simmering, our desire to take on clients again, and so much more in our October profit report for 2021! Join us today! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3176</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d3c73e7e-6487-4545-ad26-3463da1da4c6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4236464289.mp3?updated=1651930818" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>592: Exiting Corporate and Stepping Into Building YOUR Brand and Business with Shaunda Head of SHH Creative</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/exiting-corporate-and-stepping-into-building-your-brand-and-business-with-shaunda-head-of-shh-creative</link>
      <description>In today’s episode, we gain a really interesting perspective on the topic of branding from Shaunda Head, an Atlanta-based brand strategist and digital marketer who helps women align ALL THE THINGS in their brand so that their brand message can impact more powerfully! We chat about Shaunda’s experience of building her expertise in corporate institutions and the challenges of the transition between that world and going out on her own. Shaunda also shares the process she went through to uncover who she really is, rather than who she was when she was working for someone else.
A lot of our clients are in the same position; you guys are highly skilled, you know your shit, and you can serve people in incredible ways, but figuring out how to do that outside of someone else’s umbrella can be what is holding you back. This episode will give you some amazing ideas on how to rebrand yourself so you can step into who you truly are, so make sure to join us today to learn more from the amazing Shaunda Head!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Nov 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Exiting Corporate and Stepping Into Building YOUR Brand and Business with Shaunda Head of SHH Creative</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>592</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/376bace2-ae9a-11ec-91b1-938e3405a6ad/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>In today’s episode, we gain a really interesting perspective on the topic of branding from Shaunda Head, an Atlanta-based brand strategist and digital marketer who helps women align ALL THE THINGS in their brand so that their brand message can...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today’s episode, we gain a really interesting perspective on the topic of branding from Shaunda Head, an Atlanta-based brand strategist and digital marketer who helps women align ALL THE THINGS in their brand so that their brand message can impact more powerfully! We chat about Shaunda’s experience of building her expertise in corporate institutions and the challenges of the transition between that world and going out on her own. Shaunda also shares the process she went through to uncover who she really is, rather than who she was when she was working for someone else.
A lot of our clients are in the same position; you guys are highly skilled, you know your shit, and you can serve people in incredible ways, but figuring out how to do that outside of someone else’s umbrella can be what is holding you back. This episode will give you some amazing ideas on how to rebrand yourself so you can step into who you truly are, so make sure to join us today to learn more from the amazing Shaunda Head!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today’s episode, we gain a really interesting perspective on the topic of branding from Shaunda Head, an Atlanta-based brand strategist and digital marketer who helps women align ALL THE THINGS in their brand so that their brand message can impact more powerfully! We chat about Shaunda’s experience of building her expertise in corporate institutions and the challenges of the transition between that world and going out on her own. Shaunda also shares the process she went through to uncover who she really is, rather than who she was when she was working for someone else.</p><p>A lot of our clients are in the same position; you guys are highly skilled, you know your shit, and you can serve people in incredible ways, but figuring out how to do that outside of someone else’s umbrella can be what is holding you back. This episode will give you some amazing ideas on how to rebrand yourself so you can step into who you truly are, so make sure to join us today to learn more from the amazing Shaunda Head!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2352</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a1c1857d-79da-46a8-969a-14174111979b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7940550927.mp3?updated=1651930859" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>591: Getting Clear on the Service You Offer: Why Niching isn't Always the Answer</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/getting-clear-on-the-service-you-offer-why-niching-isnt-always-the-answer</link>
      <description>To niche or not to niche? That is the question. This week we’re diving into the hot topic of whether or not to niche, so get your pros and cons lists ready because we’re about to dive into all the details of this tricky decision! Whether you’re a service-based business owner or multi-passionate with a wide variety of offerings, this question can be very difficult to answer, especially since there are benefits and drawbacks to both choices. 
We’ve seen plenty of businesses overcomplicate their offerings out of a desire to help the client. Typically folks get into business armed with an expert skill set that serves both them and their customers. But once they’ve spent some time working with their clients, they begin to increase their offerings because they recognize a growing number of services that their clients need to have addressed. The problem that usually arises from this is that it becomes difficult to create consistent processes because you’re constantly jumping from one thing to another, which creates mismanagement in the back end of your business. We’ve given this issue a lot of thought so tune in for our thoughts on how you can simplify your offerings while also ensuring that your business continues to flourish!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 18 Nov 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Getting Clear on the Service You Offer: Why Niching isn't Always the Answer</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>591</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/38075390-ae9a-11ec-91b1-3fa8f0e8ffb6/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>To niche or not to niche? That is the question. This week we’re diving into the hot topic of whether or not to niche, so get your pros and cons lists ready because we’re about to dive into all the details of this tricky decision! Whether you’re...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>To niche or not to niche? That is the question. This week we’re diving into the hot topic of whether or not to niche, so get your pros and cons lists ready because we’re about to dive into all the details of this tricky decision! Whether you’re a service-based business owner or multi-passionate with a wide variety of offerings, this question can be very difficult to answer, especially since there are benefits and drawbacks to both choices. 
We’ve seen plenty of businesses overcomplicate their offerings out of a desire to help the client. Typically folks get into business armed with an expert skill set that serves both them and their customers. But once they’ve spent some time working with their clients, they begin to increase their offerings because they recognize a growing number of services that their clients need to have addressed. The problem that usually arises from this is that it becomes difficult to create consistent processes because you’re constantly jumping from one thing to another, which creates mismanagement in the back end of your business. We’ve given this issue a lot of thought so tune in for our thoughts on how you can simplify your offerings while also ensuring that your business continues to flourish!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>To niche or not to niche? That is the question. This week we’re diving into the hot topic of whether or not to niche, so get your pros and cons lists ready because we’re about to dive into all the details of this tricky decision! Whether you’re a service-based business owner or multi-passionate with a wide variety of offerings, this question can be very difficult to answer, especially since there are benefits and drawbacks to both choices. </p><p>We’ve seen plenty of businesses overcomplicate their offerings out of a desire to help the client. Typically folks get into business armed with an expert skill set that serves both them and their customers. But once they’ve spent some time working with their clients, they begin to increase their offerings because they recognize a growing number of services that their clients need to have addressed. The problem that usually arises from this is that it becomes difficult to create consistent processes because you’re constantly jumping from one thing to another, which creates mismanagement in the back end of your business. We’ve given this issue a lot of thought so tune in for our thoughts on how you can simplify your offerings while also ensuring that your business continues to flourish!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1923</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e8cb2547-9192-4f0d-955e-20d5d41cfb6a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2795059689.mp3?updated=1651930943" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>590: Passive Income Doesn't Exist (Here's What to Do Instead)</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/passive-income-does-not-exist-here-is-what-to-do-instead</link>
      <description>We recently brought in an amazing cohort of clients inside of the incubator. Throughout that process we’ve read hundreds of applications, and there are two sentences that we found as a recurring theme and desire within these applications which we really want to respond to. We’ve got a lot to say on this topic, and we feel very passionately about it, so get ready for the rant! People have this elusive idea that they want to earn a passive income. In other words, they want to earn money in their sleep. 
There is a version of this that does exist, and we’ll happily share that with you, but passive income isn’t what you think it is. If you believe that if you’re not chasing passive income then you’re doing business wrong, you need to listen to this. The way passive income is framed in the online industry is toxic, and can cause you to miss out on so many great opportunities. We know that passive income sounds like a perfect scenario, but today you’ll hear why it’s really not all that cracked up to be!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 16 Nov 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Passive Income Doesn't Exist (Here's What to Do Instead)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>590</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/388d8780-ae9a-11ec-91b1-37cbeead446e/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We recently brought in an amazing cohort of clients inside of the incubator. Throughout that process we’ve read hundreds of applications, and there are two sentences that we found as a recurring theme and desire within these applications which we...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We recently brought in an amazing cohort of clients inside of the incubator. Throughout that process we’ve read hundreds of applications, and there are two sentences that we found as a recurring theme and desire within these applications which we really want to respond to. We’ve got a lot to say on this topic, and we feel very passionately about it, so get ready for the rant! People have this elusive idea that they want to earn a passive income. In other words, they want to earn money in their sleep. 
There is a version of this that does exist, and we’ll happily share that with you, but passive income isn’t what you think it is. If you believe that if you’re not chasing passive income then you’re doing business wrong, you need to listen to this. The way passive income is framed in the online industry is toxic, and can cause you to miss out on so many great opportunities. We know that passive income sounds like a perfect scenario, but today you’ll hear why it’s really not all that cracked up to be!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We recently brought in an amazing cohort of clients inside of the incubator. Throughout that process we’ve read hundreds of applications, and there are two sentences that we found as a recurring theme and desire within these applications which we really want to respond to. We’ve got a lot to say on this topic, and we feel very passionately about it, so get ready for the rant! People have this elusive idea that they want to earn a passive income. In other words, they want to earn money in their sleep. </p><p>There is a version of this that does exist, and we’ll happily share that with you, but passive income isn’t what you think it is. If you believe that if you’re not chasing passive income then you’re doing business wrong, you need to listen to this. The way passive income is framed in the online industry is toxic, and can cause you to miss out on so many great opportunities. We know that passive income sounds like a perfect scenario, but today you’ll hear why it’s really not all that cracked up to be!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2149</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f09cdef1-dfe0-4e08-a5e9-6b5eb9c455cc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1532208473.mp3?updated=1651930977" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>589: Unpopular Opinion: The Toxic Behavior That is Rampant Inside the Business "Education" Industry</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/the-toxic-behavior-that-is-rampant-inside-the-business-education-industry</link>
      <description>There’s a massive problem that’s affecting our entire audience right now, and we have some seriously strong feelings about it, which you’re going to hear all about in today’s episode. Do you guys remember that show called Celebrity Deathmatch? That’s what we’re doing today, but we’ve got “serving” and “marketing” in the ring. We are furious on behalf of our clients because of how they have been manipulated into wasting so much of their time and money. 
Today, we’re going on record to say that the business education industry is rampant with marketing pros trying to teach other people to be marketing minions instead of actually teaching foundational business concepts that don’t change. Marketing is in our blood, so we get the desire to do this, but marketing is not the key to success. Hear us out. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 11 Nov 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Unpopular Opinion: The Toxic Behavior That is Rampant Inside the Business "Education" Industry</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>589</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/391bdada-ae9a-11ec-91b1-3bcb16d94257/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>There’s a massive problem that’s affecting our entire audience right now, and we have some seriously strong feelings about it, which you’re going to hear all about in today’s episode. Do you guys remember that show called Celebrity Deathmatch?...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There’s a massive problem that’s affecting our entire audience right now, and we have some seriously strong feelings about it, which you’re going to hear all about in today’s episode. Do you guys remember that show called Celebrity Deathmatch? That’s what we’re doing today, but we’ve got “serving” and “marketing” in the ring. We are furious on behalf of our clients because of how they have been manipulated into wasting so much of their time and money. 
Today, we’re going on record to say that the business education industry is rampant with marketing pros trying to teach other people to be marketing minions instead of actually teaching foundational business concepts that don’t change. Marketing is in our blood, so we get the desire to do this, but marketing is not the key to success. Hear us out. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There’s a massive problem that’s affecting our entire audience right now, and we have some seriously strong feelings about it, which you’re going to hear all about in today’s episode. Do you guys remember that show called Celebrity Deathmatch? That’s what we’re doing today, but we’ve got “serving” and “marketing” in the ring. We are furious on behalf of our clients because of how they have been manipulated into wasting so much of their time and money. </p><p>Today, we’re going on record to say that the business education industry is rampant with marketing pros trying to teach other people to be marketing minions instead of actually teaching foundational business concepts that don’t change. Marketing is in our blood, so we get the desire to do this, but marketing is not the key to success. Hear us out. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1941</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9a45aea9-f684-46ed-8f24-255946f3ebac]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5767103566.mp3?updated=1661560189" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>588: How to Hire a Personal Assistant and Delegate Tasks Strategically</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-hire-a-personal-assistant-and-delegate-tasks-strategically</link>
      <description>When we first began to consider that we may need personal assistants, we discovered that we had some unexpected, and somewhat complicated, reservations. While the extra help would certainly have been welcome, we had a tough time justifying the hire in our minds. Hiring an assistant brought up an unexpected amount of mind junk, from outdated notions around a woman’s role in the house to Emylee’s very personal experience of her mom and nana owning a cleaning business, and it just seemed impossible to align the hire with our values. Add to that the terrible depictions of personal assistants that you saw in movies like The Devil Wears Prada, where PAs were always repeatedly degraded by their bosses, and the idea of hiring a personal assistant could easily make you feel like a monster. 
It took us months and years to finally process and overcome these limiting beliefs and ultimately make one of the best decisions of our careers! Not only was hiring a personal assistant much more affordable and manageable than we expected, but we hadn’t anticipated the amount of freedom, peace of mind, and brain space it would give us! No matter where you are in your career, hiring a personal assistant is likely a much more achievable goal than you realize. In this episode, we break down how we chose to get a personal assistant, the process we used to prioritize our needs and reflect on how our personal assistants impacted our lives. So let’s dive in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 09 Nov 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Hire a Personal Assistant and Delegate Tasks Strategically</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>588</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/39d631f0-ae9a-11ec-91b1-ef5198a71e8a/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>When we first began to consider that we may need personal assistants, we discovered that we had some unexpected, and somewhat complicated, reservations. While the extra help would certainly have been welcome, we had a tough time justifying the hire in...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When we first began to consider that we may need personal assistants, we discovered that we had some unexpected, and somewhat complicated, reservations. While the extra help would certainly have been welcome, we had a tough time justifying the hire in our minds. Hiring an assistant brought up an unexpected amount of mind junk, from outdated notions around a woman’s role in the house to Emylee’s very personal experience of her mom and nana owning a cleaning business, and it just seemed impossible to align the hire with our values. Add to that the terrible depictions of personal assistants that you saw in movies like The Devil Wears Prada, where PAs were always repeatedly degraded by their bosses, and the idea of hiring a personal assistant could easily make you feel like a monster. 
It took us months and years to finally process and overcome these limiting beliefs and ultimately make one of the best decisions of our careers! Not only was hiring a personal assistant much more affordable and manageable than we expected, but we hadn’t anticipated the amount of freedom, peace of mind, and brain space it would give us! No matter where you are in your career, hiring a personal assistant is likely a much more achievable goal than you realize. In this episode, we break down how we chose to get a personal assistant, the process we used to prioritize our needs and reflect on how our personal assistants impacted our lives. So let’s dive in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When we first began to consider that we may need personal assistants, we discovered that we had some unexpected, and somewhat complicated, reservations. While the extra help would certainly have been welcome, we had a tough time justifying the hire in our minds. Hiring an assistant brought up an unexpected amount of mind junk, from outdated notions around a woman’s role in the house to Emylee’s very personal experience of her mom and nana owning a cleaning business, and it just seemed impossible to align the hire with our values. Add to that the terrible depictions of personal assistants that you saw in movies like <em>The Devil Wears Prada</em>, where PAs were always repeatedly degraded by their bosses, and the idea of hiring a personal assistant could easily make you feel like a monster. </p><p>It took us months and years to finally process and overcome these limiting beliefs and ultimately make one of the best decisions of our careers! Not only was hiring a personal assistant much more affordable and manageable than we expected, but we hadn’t anticipated the amount of freedom, peace of mind, and brain space it would give us! No matter where you are in your career, hiring a personal assistant is likely a much more achievable goal than you realize. In this episode, we break down how we chose to get a personal assistant, the process we used to prioritize our needs and reflect on how our personal assistants impacted our lives. So let’s dive in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1951</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b3a242ac-5b76-4350-b05f-ad009e58360c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5906695836.mp3?updated=1661560120" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>587: A Bookkeeper's Perspective on the 1:1 Vs. 1:Many Business Model with Parker Stevenson</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/a-bookkeepers-perspective-on-the-1-to-1-versus-1-to-many-business-model-with-parker-stevenson</link>
      <description>Put your socks on, pour a fresh cup of coffee and tune into this conversation with Parker Stevenson. If you’re a service provider who wants to make more and work less, today’s episode is for you! It’s not that we’re comparing one business model against the other, but rather, we’re considering an informed perspective on the 1:1 and 1:many approaches to business.
Scaling as fast as you can is always preferable. But delivering the best service you can, rather than offering absolutely everything, is far more achievable within a 1:1 model than a 1:many. Producing a great experience is more important than having a marketing strategy, because there’s no more powerful tool than word of mouth and referral! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 04 Nov 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>A Bookkeeper's Perspective on the 1:1 Vs. 1:Many Business Model with Parker Stevenson</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>587</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3acec680-ae9a-11ec-91b1-a3cc25ef41e6/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Put your socks on, pour a fresh cup of coffee and tune into this conversation with Parker Stevenson. If you’re a service provider who wants to make more and work less, today’s episode is for you! It’s not that we’re comparing one business...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Put your socks on, pour a fresh cup of coffee and tune into this conversation with Parker Stevenson. If you’re a service provider who wants to make more and work less, today’s episode is for you! It’s not that we’re comparing one business model against the other, but rather, we’re considering an informed perspective on the 1:1 and 1:many approaches to business.
Scaling as fast as you can is always preferable. But delivering the best service you can, rather than offering absolutely everything, is far more achievable within a 1:1 model than a 1:many. Producing a great experience is more important than having a marketing strategy, because there’s no more powerful tool than word of mouth and referral! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Put your socks on, pour a fresh cup of coffee and tune into this conversation with Parker Stevenson. If you’re a service provider who wants to make more and work less, today’s episode is for you! It’s not that we’re comparing one business model against the other, but rather, we’re considering an informed perspective on the 1:1 and 1:many approaches to business.</p><p>Scaling as fast as you can is always preferable. But delivering the best service you can, rather than offering absolutely everything, is far more achievable within a 1:1 model than a 1:many. Producing a great experience is more important than having a marketing strategy, because there’s no more powerful tool than word of mouth and referral! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2696</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cfdda88c-f99d-4786-86b2-56f84a51977b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1509857580.mp3?updated=1661560355" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>586: How High Earning Service Providers Manage Their Clients</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/how-high-earning-service-providers-manage-their-clients</link>
      <description>It has come to our attention that there seems to be a widely held belief that high-earning service providers already know exactly what they’re doing. The perception is that everything is running super smoothly and that they are acutely aware of exactly what they need to be doing at all times. That they are solely focused on their zone of genius and that they've made no changes to the backend of how they run things. This is most definitely not the case. 
If you’re feeling a sense of inadequacy or frustration, you are not alone. We’ve noticed plenty of instances where service providers are landing great quality clients, and are providing stellar services, while also dealing with a tremendous amount of haphazardness behind the scenes. There’s also the added pressure of feeling like you need to protect your clients from the messy middle of your business because you want to seem polished and professional at all times. And while these service providers are doing a really good job of faking it, this way of doing things is not at all sustainable, especially when it comes to your health and mental health.
As service providers, we often don’t fully comprehend what will happen as our businesses grow. There's an ever-growing pile of admin and clerical work, as well as marketing and content production, not to mention everything else your business relies on. But what if you could eliminate this problem by creating a system and eviscerating unnecessary work? That’s where we come in. Throughout our careers, we’ve gained tons of experience and insight into creating a system that works! So let’s get straight to it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 02 Nov 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How High Earning Service Providers Manage Their Clients</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>586</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3b77750a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-cf30a53151a7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>It has come to our attention that there seems to be a widely held belief that high-earning service providers already know exactly what they’re doing. The perception is that everything is running super smoothly and that they are acutely aware of...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It has come to our attention that there seems to be a widely held belief that high-earning service providers already know exactly what they’re doing. The perception is that everything is running super smoothly and that they are acutely aware of exactly what they need to be doing at all times. That they are solely focused on their zone of genius and that they've made no changes to the backend of how they run things. This is most definitely not the case. 
If you’re feeling a sense of inadequacy or frustration, you are not alone. We’ve noticed plenty of instances where service providers are landing great quality clients, and are providing stellar services, while also dealing with a tremendous amount of haphazardness behind the scenes. There’s also the added pressure of feeling like you need to protect your clients from the messy middle of your business because you want to seem polished and professional at all times. And while these service providers are doing a really good job of faking it, this way of doing things is not at all sustainable, especially when it comes to your health and mental health.
As service providers, we often don’t fully comprehend what will happen as our businesses grow. There's an ever-growing pile of admin and clerical work, as well as marketing and content production, not to mention everything else your business relies on. But what if you could eliminate this problem by creating a system and eviscerating unnecessary work? That’s where we come in. Throughout our careers, we’ve gained tons of experience and insight into creating a system that works! So let’s get straight to it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It has come to our attention that there seems to be a widely held belief that high-earning service providers already know exactly what they’re doing. The perception is that everything is running super smoothly and that they are acutely aware of exactly what they need to be doing at all times. That they are solely focused on their zone of genius and that they've made no changes to the backend of how they run things. This is most definitely not the case. </p><p>If you’re feeling a sense of inadequacy or frustration, you are not alone. We’ve noticed plenty of instances where service providers are landing great quality clients, and are providing stellar services, while also dealing with a tremendous amount of haphazardness behind the scenes. There’s also the added pressure of feeling like you need to protect your clients from the messy middle of your business because you want to seem polished and professional at all times. And while these service providers are doing a really good job of faking it, this way of doing things is not at all sustainable, especially when it comes to your health and mental health.</p><p>As service providers, we often don’t fully comprehend what will happen as our businesses grow. There's an ever-growing pile of admin and clerical work, as well as marketing and content production, not to mention everything else your business relies on. But what if you could eliminate this problem by creating a system and eviscerating unnecessary work? That’s where we come in. Throughout our careers, we’ve gained tons of experience and insight into creating a system that works! So let’s get straight to it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2170</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c8e39fcd-640c-46aa-830d-954b1b208e37]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5854619883.mp3?updated=1661560456" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>585: September 2021 Profit Report: Growing Our Membership 26% in Revenue in 30 Days</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/september-2021-profit-report-growing-our-membership-26-percent-in-revenue-in-30-days</link>
      <description>We’re taking it back to September! It feels weird, but we’re going to recap all of the amazing, incredible things that we did in the month of September so that you guys can get a little peek behind the curtains and get to understand what goes on in our brains and why we do the things we do. September was only last month, but it feels like a lifetime ago because we have been moving fast and furiously at team Boss Project.
We’re excited to dig into not just the numbers, but everything that has been going on behind the scenes. It doesn’t make sense to only talk about what happened, and not about how it affected revenue and profit, or to just talk about revenue and profit and not about what actually made it happen. We think it’s really important to talk about both, and there aren’t enough conversations going on about truly how much it costs to run a service-based business, so today we’re going to lift the veil! We’re going to try and answer every nosey question you’ve ever had about costs, and if we don’t cover what you want to hear, you can always DM us, we’re totally transparent about our business! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com!
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 28 Oct 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>September 2021 Profit Report: Growing Our Membership 26% in Revenue in 30 Days</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>585</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3c034c6a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-bbff78d3d128/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’re taking it back to September! It feels weird, but we’re going to recap all of the amazing, incredible things that we did in the month of September so that you guys can get a little peek behind the curtains and get to understand what goes on...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’re taking it back to September! It feels weird, but we’re going to recap all of the amazing, incredible things that we did in the month of September so that you guys can get a little peek behind the curtains and get to understand what goes on in our brains and why we do the things we do. September was only last month, but it feels like a lifetime ago because we have been moving fast and furiously at team Boss Project.
We’re excited to dig into not just the numbers, but everything that has been going on behind the scenes. It doesn’t make sense to only talk about what happened, and not about how it affected revenue and profit, or to just talk about revenue and profit and not about what actually made it happen. We think it’s really important to talk about both, and there aren’t enough conversations going on about truly how much it costs to run a service-based business, so today we’re going to lift the veil! We’re going to try and answer every nosey question you’ve ever had about costs, and if we don’t cover what you want to hear, you can always DM us, we’re totally transparent about our business! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com!
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’re taking it back to September! It feels weird, but we’re going to recap all of the amazing, incredible things that we did in the month of September so that you guys can get a little peek behind the curtains and get to understand what goes on in our brains and why we do the things we do. September was only last month, but it feels like a lifetime ago because we have been moving fast and furiously at team Boss Project.</p><p>We’re excited to dig into not just the numbers, but everything that has been going on behind the scenes. It doesn’t make sense to only talk about what happened, and not about how it affected revenue and profit, or to just talk about revenue and profit and not about what actually made it happen. We think it’s really important to talk about both, and there aren’t enough conversations going on about truly how much it costs to run a service-based business, so today we’re going to lift the veil! We’re going to try and answer every nosey question you’ve ever had about costs, and if we don’t cover what you want to hear, you can always DM us, we’re totally transparent about our business! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>!</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2259</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[221236bc-61f4-41e2-b4df-96e02b5f3c4c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7846887583.mp3?updated=1661560740" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>584: Unpopular Opinion: Courses &amp; Digital Products are NOT the Fastest Way to Double Your Income</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/unpopular-opinion-courses-digital-products-are-not-the-fastest-way-to-double-your-income</link>
      <description>This episode comes with a bit of a trigger warning. We're both feeling a bit nervous about this one, which has never happened before. It's based on the conversations that we have privately with each other when we see peers, clients, and students making the wrong assumptions about the topic that we're going to talk about today. We decided that we're doing a disservice by only having those conversations privately. What lights us up is to impact others and to change their lives and to have small business owners be financially and soulfully fulfilled, and to do that we feel that we have to share our take on this.
If this conversation doesn't apply to you, you can skip it. If you are already crushing it and your business is made up primarily of courses and digital products and you're thriving and meeting your financial goals, then this conversation isn't for you. However, if you started as a service-based business owner and have added on courses and digital products and you have struggled financially and stressed yourself out because of it, then this episode is most definitely for you! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 26 Oct 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Unpopular Opinion: Courses &amp; Digital Products are NOT the Fastest Way to Double Your Income</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>584</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3ca107d4-ae9a-11ec-91b1-1fc1751ce86b/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This episode comes with a bit of a trigger warning. We're both feeling a bit nervous about this one, which has never happened before. It's based on the conversations that we have privately with each other when we see peers, clients, and students...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This episode comes with a bit of a trigger warning. We're both feeling a bit nervous about this one, which has never happened before. It's based on the conversations that we have privately with each other when we see peers, clients, and students making the wrong assumptions about the topic that we're going to talk about today. We decided that we're doing a disservice by only having those conversations privately. What lights us up is to impact others and to change their lives and to have small business owners be financially and soulfully fulfilled, and to do that we feel that we have to share our take on this.
If this conversation doesn't apply to you, you can skip it. If you are already crushing it and your business is made up primarily of courses and digital products and you're thriving and meeting your financial goals, then this conversation isn't for you. However, if you started as a service-based business owner and have added on courses and digital products and you have struggled financially and stressed yourself out because of it, then this episode is most definitely for you! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This episode comes with a bit of a trigger warning. We're both feeling a bit nervous about this one, which has never happened before. It's based on the conversations that we have privately with each other when we see peers, clients, and students making the wrong assumptions about the topic that we're going to talk about today. We decided that we're doing a disservice by only having those conversations privately. What lights us up is to impact others and to change their lives and to have small business owners be financially and soulfully fulfilled, and to do that we feel that we have to share our take on this.</p><p>If this conversation doesn't apply to you, you can skip it. If you are already crushing it and your business is made up primarily of courses and digital products and you're thriving and meeting your financial goals, then this conversation isn't for you. However, if you started as a service-based business owner and have added on courses and digital products and you have struggled financially and stressed yourself out because of it, then this episode is most definitely for you! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2007</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[22fdc223-d992-4132-bab6-c36b5e3a754c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9188883761.mp3?updated=1661560884" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>583: The 3 Biggest Time Wasters Holding Service Providers Back From Working Less Hours in Their Business</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/the-3-biggest-time-wasters-holding-service-providers-back-from-working-less-hours-in-their-business</link>
      <description>Time is our most valuable resource, because it is so limited, and yet is the thing that we see people giving away freely all the time. In today’s episode we’re going to talk about three giant time wasters that are really holding service providers back from working less in their business. It is possible to work less, and it is possible to make more by working less! Feeling frazzled and disconnected are such common experiences that people have started to think this is normal, so they keep doing it. We want you to know that this doesn’t have to be your reality. When we accepted that there are going to be different seasons and phases and iterations of our business, we were able to let go of the pressure of finding perfect solutions to our problems, and find peace in the fact that things are constantly evolving and that’s okay! 
If you feel like you don’t have enough time, we’ve got a training course that is just for you. We’re going to teach you how to double your income by working less than 20 hours a week. This is something we’ve perfected, so we are speaking from experience, and trust us when we say this is something you don’t want to miss! Go to  bossproject.com/incubator to sign up. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 21 Oct 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The 3 Biggest Time Wasters Holding Service Providers Back From Working Less Hours in Their Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>583</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3d3320ba-ae9a-11ec-91b1-0ba11ca1ca13/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Time is our most valuable resource, because it is so limited, and yet is the thing that we see people giving away freely all the time. In today’s episode we’re going to talk about three giant time wasters that are really holding service providers...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Time is our most valuable resource, because it is so limited, and yet is the thing that we see people giving away freely all the time. In today’s episode we’re going to talk about three giant time wasters that are really holding service providers back from working less in their business. It is possible to work less, and it is possible to make more by working less! Feeling frazzled and disconnected are such common experiences that people have started to think this is normal, so they keep doing it. We want you to know that this doesn’t have to be your reality. When we accepted that there are going to be different seasons and phases and iterations of our business, we were able to let go of the pressure of finding perfect solutions to our problems, and find peace in the fact that things are constantly evolving and that’s okay! 
If you feel like you don’t have enough time, we’ve got a training course that is just for you. We’re going to teach you how to double your income by working less than 20 hours a week. This is something we’ve perfected, so we are speaking from experience, and trust us when we say this is something you don’t want to miss! Go to  bossproject.com/incubator to sign up. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Time is our most valuable resource, because it is so limited, and yet is the thing that we see people giving away freely all the time. In today’s episode we’re going to talk about three giant time wasters that are really holding service providers back from working less in their business. It is possible to work less, and it is possible to make more by working less! Feeling frazzled and disconnected are such common experiences that people have started to think this is normal, so they keep doing it. We want you to know that this doesn’t have to be your reality. When we accepted that there are going to be different seasons and phases and iterations of our business, we were able to let go of the pressure of finding perfect solutions to our problems, and find peace in the fact that things are constantly evolving and that’s okay! </p><p>If you feel like you don’t have enough time, we’ve got a training course that is just for you. We’re going to teach you how to double your income by working less than 20 hours a week. This is something we’ve perfected, so we are speaking from experience, and trust us when we say this is something you don’t want to miss! Go to <a href="https://pages.bossproject.com/incubator-application/?utm_source=on_air_ad&amp;utm_medium=podcast&amp;utm_campaign=incubator_application"> bossproject.com/incubato</a>r to sign up. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2637</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[223186d3-0c79-4a81-9121-ea854f8b0282]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8346616242.mp3?updated=1661561028" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>582: The Single Mindset Shift You Need to Double Your Income in the Next 12 Months</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/the-single-mindset-shift-you-need-to-double-your-income-in-the-next-12-months</link>
      <description>Whenever we hit a big milestone in business it can make us nostalgic for the earlier days of our career when we were just starting out. It can make us reflect on the type of advice we would give a younger version of ourselves, even if it’s just little nudges about how to shift your mindset or attention. This summer Emylee celebrated the 10th anniversary of owning her own LLC! This type of milestone has made Emylee look back at her younger self and consider the type of advice she would give to a young, baby Emylee, especially when it comes to mindset shifts. Another major milestone this year is the sixth birthday of Boss Project being in business! All of this has caused us to reflect on the major mindset shifts that we have experienced in business and how they have helped us. 
The cool thing about mindset shifts is that it’s not just for folks who are starting out. It can have a drastic impact on anyone at any stage of business. We often think that these changes matter more if you’re just starting out, but we’ve seen it make a huge difference to a range of folks who were feeling stuck in their business at one point or another. Whether they had the clients but were utterly short on time, and couldn’t imagine how they would manage to double their income, or they were making good money, but were also so miserable that they were on the brink of giving it all up. That is why today, we’re taking a look at the top mindset shifts that are necessary for you to double your income in the next 12 months. Because we believe explosive growth is possible for anyone willing to adapt and institute these changes. And so often it starts with a mindset shift that centers on self-belief because you have to believe in yourself first before you're willing to convince anyone else of what you're doing.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 19 Oct 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Single Mindset Shift You Need to Double Your Income in the Next 12 Months</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>582</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3dbb5bc4-ae9a-11ec-91b1-5f88d9f71359/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Whenever we hit a big milestone in business it can make us nostalgic for the earlier days of our career when we were just starting out. It can make us reflect on the type of advice we would give a younger version of ourselves, even if it’s just...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Whenever we hit a big milestone in business it can make us nostalgic for the earlier days of our career when we were just starting out. It can make us reflect on the type of advice we would give a younger version of ourselves, even if it’s just little nudges about how to shift your mindset or attention. This summer Emylee celebrated the 10th anniversary of owning her own LLC! This type of milestone has made Emylee look back at her younger self and consider the type of advice she would give to a young, baby Emylee, especially when it comes to mindset shifts. Another major milestone this year is the sixth birthday of Boss Project being in business! All of this has caused us to reflect on the major mindset shifts that we have experienced in business and how they have helped us. 
The cool thing about mindset shifts is that it’s not just for folks who are starting out. It can have a drastic impact on anyone at any stage of business. We often think that these changes matter more if you’re just starting out, but we’ve seen it make a huge difference to a range of folks who were feeling stuck in their business at one point or another. Whether they had the clients but were utterly short on time, and couldn’t imagine how they would manage to double their income, or they were making good money, but were also so miserable that they were on the brink of giving it all up. That is why today, we’re taking a look at the top mindset shifts that are necessary for you to double your income in the next 12 months. Because we believe explosive growth is possible for anyone willing to adapt and institute these changes. And so often it starts with a mindset shift that centers on self-belief because you have to believe in yourself first before you're willing to convince anyone else of what you're doing.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Whenever we hit a big milestone in business it can make us nostalgic for the earlier days of our career when we were just starting out. It can make us reflect on the type of advice we would give a younger version of ourselves, even if it’s just little nudges about how to shift your mindset or attention. This summer Emylee celebrated the 10th anniversary of owning her own LLC! This type of milestone has made Emylee look back at her younger self and consider the type of advice she would give to a young, baby Emylee, especially when it comes to mindset shifts. Another major milestone this year is the sixth birthday of Boss Project being in business! All of this has caused us to reflect on the major mindset shifts that we have experienced in business and how they have helped us. </p><p>The cool thing about mindset shifts is that it’s not just for folks who are starting out. It can have a drastic impact on anyone at any stage of business. We often think that these changes matter more if you’re just starting out, but we’ve seen it make a huge difference to a range of folks who were feeling stuck in their business at one point or another. Whether they had the clients but were utterly short on time, and couldn’t imagine how they would manage to double their income, or they were making good money, but were also so miserable that they were on the brink of giving it all up. That is why today, we’re taking a look at the top mindset shifts that are necessary for you to double your income in the next 12 months. Because we believe explosive growth is possible for anyone willing to adapt and institute these changes. And so often it starts with a mindset shift that centers on self-belief because you have to believe in yourself first before you're willing to convince anyone else of what you're doing.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1770</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b5792681-9350-4513-b564-0d41399d29a2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3912352460.mp3?updated=1661561091" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>581: There are Opportunities Even in the "NOs" with Rachel Dorsey</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/there-are-opportunities-even-in-the-nos-with-rachel-dorsey</link>
      <description>We want to help you all to make room in your life for great connections and perfect alignment! If you need to be empowered and equipped to say no more frequently both professionally and personally, today’s episode is for you! We can’t wait to give you some actionable strategies and real life tips on how to create more opportunities to say yes to better things.
Today’s guest, Rachel Dorsey, owner of RAD Virtual Support, works in management and support roles for small business owners all the way up to multi million dollar digital enterprises to help working professionals to maintain work life balance that actually works. 
During today’s episode, we discuss how people pleasers are often hesitant to say no because they actually want to say yes, but are often physically incapable of adding a yes to the list. You’ll hear why Rachel considers agreeing to too much to be a mindset issue, and why she urges listeners not to take ‘no’ personally, but to understand that it points to a misalignment that the other person has identified before you. We touch on how childhood and human design impacts your relationship with opportunity and rejection, and Emylee and Abagail share a real life example of how a ‘no’ that was disappointing and awkward in the moment, turned out to be just the right thing. Be encouraged that your next better opportunity is just around the corner, and receive some epic tools on how to establish boundaries to make way for your best fit in life today. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 14 Oct 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>There are Opportunities Even in the "NOs" with Rachel Dorsey</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>581</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3e4a220a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-13dd53b9e6c5/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We want to help you all to make room in your life for great connections and perfect alignment! If you need to be empowered and equipped to say no more frequently both professionally and personally, today’s episode is for you! We can’t wait to give...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We want to help you all to make room in your life for great connections and perfect alignment! If you need to be empowered and equipped to say no more frequently both professionally and personally, today’s episode is for you! We can’t wait to give you some actionable strategies and real life tips on how to create more opportunities to say yes to better things.
Today’s guest, Rachel Dorsey, owner of RAD Virtual Support, works in management and support roles for small business owners all the way up to multi million dollar digital enterprises to help working professionals to maintain work life balance that actually works. 
During today’s episode, we discuss how people pleasers are often hesitant to say no because they actually want to say yes, but are often physically incapable of adding a yes to the list. You’ll hear why Rachel considers agreeing to too much to be a mindset issue, and why she urges listeners not to take ‘no’ personally, but to understand that it points to a misalignment that the other person has identified before you. We touch on how childhood and human design impacts your relationship with opportunity and rejection, and Emylee and Abagail share a real life example of how a ‘no’ that was disappointing and awkward in the moment, turned out to be just the right thing. Be encouraged that your next better opportunity is just around the corner, and receive some epic tools on how to establish boundaries to make way for your best fit in life today. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We want to help you all to make room in your life for great connections and perfect alignment! If you need to be empowered and equipped to say no more frequently both professionally and personally, today’s episode is for you! We can’t wait to give you some actionable strategies and real life tips on how to create more opportunities to say yes to better things.</p><p>Today’s guest, Rachel Dorsey, owner of RAD Virtual Support, works in management and support roles for small business owners all the way up to multi million dollar digital enterprises to help working professionals to maintain work life balance that actually works. </p><p>During today’s episode, we discuss how people pleasers are often hesitant to say no because they actually want to say yes, but are often physically incapable of adding a yes to the list. You’ll hear why Rachel considers agreeing to too much to be a mindset issue, and why she urges listeners not to take ‘no’ personally, but to understand that it points to a misalignment that the other person has identified before you. We touch on how childhood and human design impacts your relationship with opportunity and rejection, and Emylee and Abagail share a real life example of how a ‘no’ that was disappointing and awkward in the moment, turned out to be just the right thing. Be encouraged that your next better opportunity is just around the corner, and receive some epic tools on how to establish boundaries to make way for your best fit in life today. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2618</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dc6771b0-b5b0-49c1-91f2-4a90ab02bada]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5178179330.mp3?updated=1661561170" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>580: The #1 Thing Service Providers Shouldn't Do If They Want to Grow</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/the-1-thing-service-providers-should-not-do-if-they-want-to-grow</link>
      <description>This week we dive into the top missteps we see businesses making when they want to grow. Side effects may include: burnout, overwhelm, stress, shutting down your business, getting a full-time job that you hate, or not reaching the income goals that you say that you want to achieve. We’re here to interrupt that vicious cycle and get a fresh perspective on exactly what’s causing these troublesome symptoms in your business! 
The difficult truth and the number one problem for so many business owners is that they have diverged from an alignment with their business and the skills they’ve spent years crafting and honing in on. And if they didn't stray so far from where they began, then they would reach their goals so much faster! If this sounds like you, don’t worry, you are not alone! Almost all the prospective business owners we’ve spoken to have a misguided notion of what it means to leave their jobs and start a business. More specifically, what pursuing a digital-based offering with a low ticket item and a membership structure truly entails. In our conversation, we get into the popularity of this approach, how online education doesn’t paint the full picture and how you should be changing your mindset to achieve the growth you want for your business. Make sure you tune in to hear it all and see the full picture!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 12 Oct 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The #1 Thing Service Providers Shouldn't Do If They Want to Grow</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>580</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3eed6686-ae9a-11ec-91b1-73616ca05760/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week we dive into the top missteps we see businesses making when they want to grow. Side effects may include: burnout, overwhelm, stress, shutting down your business, getting a full-time job that you hate, or not reaching the income goals that...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This week we dive into the top missteps we see businesses making when they want to grow. Side effects may include: burnout, overwhelm, stress, shutting down your business, getting a full-time job that you hate, or not reaching the income goals that you say that you want to achieve. We’re here to interrupt that vicious cycle and get a fresh perspective on exactly what’s causing these troublesome symptoms in your business! 
The difficult truth and the number one problem for so many business owners is that they have diverged from an alignment with their business and the skills they’ve spent years crafting and honing in on. And if they didn't stray so far from where they began, then they would reach their goals so much faster! If this sounds like you, don’t worry, you are not alone! Almost all the prospective business owners we’ve spoken to have a misguided notion of what it means to leave their jobs and start a business. More specifically, what pursuing a digital-based offering with a low ticket item and a membership structure truly entails. In our conversation, we get into the popularity of this approach, how online education doesn’t paint the full picture and how you should be changing your mindset to achieve the growth you want for your business. Make sure you tune in to hear it all and see the full picture!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week we dive into the top missteps we see businesses making when they want to grow. Side effects may include: burnout, overwhelm, stress, shutting down your business, getting a full-time job that you hate, or not reaching the income goals that you say that you want to achieve. We’re here to interrupt that vicious cycle and get a fresh perspective on exactly what’s causing these troublesome symptoms in your business! </p><p>The difficult truth and the number one problem for so many business owners is that they have diverged from an alignment with their business and the skills they’ve spent years crafting and honing in on. And if they didn't stray so far from where they began, then they would reach their goals so much faster! If this sounds like you, don’t worry, you are not alone! Almost all the prospective business owners we’ve spoken to have a misguided notion of what it means to leave their jobs and start a business. More specifically, what pursuing a digital-based offering with a low ticket item and a membership structure truly entails. In our conversation, we get into the popularity of this approach, how online education doesn’t paint the full picture and how you should be changing your mindset to achieve the growth you want for your business. Make sure you tune in to hear it all and see the full picture!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1794</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e69056fa-b3ff-4136-b670-8aac759adb69]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7759158766.mp3?updated=1661561209" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>579: How to Make REAL Friends as a Business Owner with Danielle Jackson</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-make-real-friends-as-a-business-owner-with-danielle-jackson</link>
      <description>This episode is about friendships; how you make them, how you keep them, how you maintain them, how you can be a better friend, how you let go of old friendships. Every question that you have felt uncomfortable asking about how to make friends in the online space or in the real world space is going to be answered on today’s show. Today’s guest, Danielle Bayard Jackson, from BetterFemaleFriendships.com and host of the Friend Forward Podcast. She is on a mission to help women business owners create and maintain better friendships as adults.
You’re going to want to listen to this episode multiple times because you’re going to get so many actionable steps to take. We’re excited for you, as well as ourselves because we’ve experienced the loneliness that comes from knowing a lot of people but not having deep connections with them. We hope that so many friendships are made because of this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 07 Oct 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Make REAL Friends as a Business Owner with Danielle Jackson</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>579</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3f770968-ae9a-11ec-91b1-8ba463401364/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This episode is about friendships; how you make them, how you keep them, how you maintain them, how you can be a better friend, how you let go of old friendships. Every question that you have felt uncomfortable asking about how to make friends in the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This episode is about friendships; how you make them, how you keep them, how you maintain them, how you can be a better friend, how you let go of old friendships. Every question that you have felt uncomfortable asking about how to make friends in the online space or in the real world space is going to be answered on today’s show. Today’s guest, Danielle Bayard Jackson, from BetterFemaleFriendships.com and host of the Friend Forward Podcast. She is on a mission to help women business owners create and maintain better friendships as adults.
You’re going to want to listen to this episode multiple times because you’re going to get so many actionable steps to take. We’re excited for you, as well as ourselves because we’ve experienced the loneliness that comes from knowing a lot of people but not having deep connections with them. We hope that so many friendships are made because of this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This episode is about friendships; how you make them, how you keep them, how you maintain them, how you can be a better friend, how you let go of old friendships. Every question that you have felt uncomfortable asking about how to make friends in the online space or in the real world space is going to be answered on today’s show. Today’s guest, Danielle Bayard Jackson, from BetterFemaleFriendships.com and host of the Friend Forward Podcast. She is on a mission to help women business owners create and maintain better friendships as adults.</p><p>You’re going to want to listen to this episode multiple times because you’re going to get so many actionable steps to take. We’re excited for you, as well as ourselves because we’ve experienced the loneliness that comes from knowing a lot of people but not having deep connections with them. We hope that so many friendships are made because of this episode!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2846</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[75e3c6b6-8517-48be-ae9d-53937199da88]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9514025647.mp3?updated=1651931409" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>578: How to Become the Creative Director of Your Service Based Business</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-become-the-creative-director-of-your-service-based-business</link>
      <description>Today we want to talk to all of you amazingly talented, creative people, who miss doing the thing they actually started their business for. We know that so many of you are crushing it, you have no problem landing clients, you are super busy, yet you feel like you’ve moved away from the thing that you really love doing. We want to let you know that you can step out of that, you have so much potential to grow into that creative director seat. Often, CEO status feels not totally in alignment for a lot of service-based businesses. Not that you don’t want to run a company of high calibre, but you still want to be delivering on the service, and oftentimes being in the CEO seat means that you don’t get to do that anymore. 
We’ve been there, we know how it feels to not feel connected to what you’re creating anymore, but what we’ve realized is that that is the most sacred space for a creative service provider to protect so we’re on a mission to make sure that you all know how to protect it!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 05 Oct 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Become the Creative Director of Your Service Based Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>578</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/40259e38-ae9a-11ec-91b1-9ff32ce1a8a9/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we want to talk to all of you amazingly talented, creative people, who miss doing the thing they actually started their business for. We know that so many of you are crushing it, you have no problem landing clients, you are super busy, yet you...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we want to talk to all of you amazingly talented, creative people, who miss doing the thing they actually started their business for. We know that so many of you are crushing it, you have no problem landing clients, you are super busy, yet you feel like you’ve moved away from the thing that you really love doing. We want to let you know that you can step out of that, you have so much potential to grow into that creative director seat. Often, CEO status feels not totally in alignment for a lot of service-based businesses. Not that you don’t want to run a company of high calibre, but you still want to be delivering on the service, and oftentimes being in the CEO seat means that you don’t get to do that anymore. 
We’ve been there, we know how it feels to not feel connected to what you’re creating anymore, but what we’ve realized is that that is the most sacred space for a creative service provider to protect so we’re on a mission to make sure that you all know how to protect it!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we want to talk to all of you amazingly talented, creative people, who miss doing the thing they actually started their business for. We know that so many of you are crushing it, you have no problem landing clients, you are super busy, yet you feel like you’ve moved away from the thing that you really love doing. We want to let you know that you can step out of that, you have so much potential to grow into that creative director seat. Often, CEO status feels not totally in alignment for a lot of service-based businesses. Not that you don’t want to run a company of high calibre, but you still want to be delivering on the service, and oftentimes being in the CEO seat means that you don’t get to do that anymore. </p><p>We’ve been there, we know how it feels to not feel connected to what you’re creating anymore, but what we’ve realized is that that is the most sacred space for a creative service provider to protect so we’re on a mission to make sure that you all know how to protect it!  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2357</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[44190df0-23f1-43ad-838a-230959697278]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5926351390.mp3?updated=1651931484" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>577: Using Your Thoughts to Transform Your State with Tracy Litt </title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/using-your-thoughts-to-transform-your-state-with-tracy-litt</link>
      <description>Welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast! This week we get together with the multi-talented Tracy Litt: a mindset coach, spiritual advisor, rapid transformational hypnotherapist, best-selling author, and TEDx speaker. She is the founder of The Litt Factor, a company that supports high-achieving female leaders and entrepreneurs to understand and leverage their personal power. In our conversation, we delve into the life-changing effects of leaning into ease and finding calm. We unpack how the spiritual elements of your humanity impact not only our thoughts but also your potential business growth. While the format may be a little different from our typical show, we encourage listeners to take it as an opportunity to relax and lean in! Tuning in, you’ll be exposed to tangible takeaways for you to focus on getting more in touch with who you are and making life just a little bit calmer. We also discuss the transformational power of painful events in life, what it means to allow yourself to connect to your higher self, and how it can transform your life and your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 30 Sep 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Using Your Thoughts to Transform Your State with Tracy Litt </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>577</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/40b96834-ae9a-11ec-91b1-9fde2a70dda7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast! This week we get together with the multi-talented Tracy Litt: a mindset coach, spiritual advisor, rapid transformational hypnotherapist, best-selling author, and TEDx speaker. She is the founder of The Litt...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast! This week we get together with the multi-talented Tracy Litt: a mindset coach, spiritual advisor, rapid transformational hypnotherapist, best-selling author, and TEDx speaker. She is the founder of The Litt Factor, a company that supports high-achieving female leaders and entrepreneurs to understand and leverage their personal power. In our conversation, we delve into the life-changing effects of leaning into ease and finding calm. We unpack how the spiritual elements of your humanity impact not only our thoughts but also your potential business growth. While the format may be a little different from our typical show, we encourage listeners to take it as an opportunity to relax and lean in! Tuning in, you’ll be exposed to tangible takeaways for you to focus on getting more in touch with who you are and making life just a little bit calmer. We also discuss the transformational power of painful events in life, what it means to allow yourself to connect to your higher self, and how it can transform your life and your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast! This week we get together with the multi-talented Tracy Litt: a mindset coach, spiritual advisor, rapid transformational hypnotherapist, best-selling author, and TEDx speaker. She is the founder of The Litt Factor, a company that supports high-achieving female leaders and entrepreneurs to understand and leverage their personal power. In our conversation, we delve into the life-changing effects of leaning into ease and finding calm. We unpack how the spiritual elements of your humanity impact not only our thoughts but also your potential business growth. While the format may be a little different from our typical show, we encourage listeners to take it as an opportunity to relax and lean in! Tuning in, you’ll be exposed to tangible takeaways for you to focus on getting more in touch with who you are and making life just a little bit calmer. We also discuss the transformational power of painful events in life, what it means to allow yourself to connect to your higher self, and how it can transform your life and your business.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2506</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[894eba73-2dda-4465-b774-1c3f4c91325b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7734906807.mp3?updated=1656692271" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>576: August 2021 Profit Report: Here's How We Increased Our LTV by 33%</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/august-2021-profit-report-heres-how-we-increased-our-ltv-by-33</link>
      <description>Are you ready to join us on a journey back in time? We’re taking you back about 40 days to talk about our August numbers. We did so many things in August. It was a whirlwind of a summer! In today’s episode, we’re going to give you the scoop of what’s happening in our business in a way that doesn’t make you feel like you get “comparisonitis,” because there’s nothing worse than that. We approach these profit reports from a strategy perspective and what works for us, and we share achievable percentages which will allow you to look at your own business and decide what does and doesn’t make sense for you. 
We started doing profit reports almost two years ago, and these involve us talking about profits and percentages and our goal of achieving a certain profit for our business. If you go do a binge listen of all of the profit reports we’ve done so far you’ll get some great insights into our business and our brains.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 28 Sep 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>August 2021 Profit Report: Here's How We Increased Our LTV by 33%</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>576</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4144c898-ae9a-11ec-91b1-0f07e5e90ba4/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Are you ready to join us on a journey back in time? We’re taking you back about 40 days to talk about our August numbers. We did so many things in August. It was a whirlwind of a summer! In today’s episode, we’re going to give you the scoop of...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you ready to join us on a journey back in time? We’re taking you back about 40 days to talk about our August numbers. We did so many things in August. It was a whirlwind of a summer! In today’s episode, we’re going to give you the scoop of what’s happening in our business in a way that doesn’t make you feel like you get “comparisonitis,” because there’s nothing worse than that. We approach these profit reports from a strategy perspective and what works for us, and we share achievable percentages which will allow you to look at your own business and decide what does and doesn’t make sense for you. 
We started doing profit reports almost two years ago, and these involve us talking about profits and percentages and our goal of achieving a certain profit for our business. If you go do a binge listen of all of the profit reports we’ve done so far you’ll get some great insights into our business and our brains.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you ready to join us on a journey back in time? We’re taking you back about 40 days to talk about our August numbers. We did so many things in August. It was a whirlwind of a summer! In today’s episode, we’re going to give you the scoop of what’s happening in our business in a way that doesn’t make you feel like you get “comparisonitis,” because there’s nothing worse than that. We approach these profit reports from a strategy perspective and what works for us, and we share achievable percentages which will allow you to look at your own business and decide what does and doesn’t make sense for you. </p><p>We started doing profit reports almost two years ago, and these involve us talking about profits and percentages and our goal of achieving a certain profit for our business. If you go do a binge listen of all of the profit reports we’ve done so far you’ll get some great insights into our business and our brains.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2353</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[09490d2c-a275-4743-8118-16baaed0b8ef]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9110198422.mp3?updated=1656692227" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>575: How to Prepare Your Business to Sell (Even If You Don't Want to Sell It) with Gwen Lane</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-prepare-your-business-to-sell-even-if-you-dont-want-to-sell-it-with-gwen-lane</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we have Gwen Lane, who has been through quite the evolution. She was a digital marketer turned lifestyle blogger and is now the founder of a Seven-Figure Influencer Program. She helps content creators and influences monetize through premium partnerships and digital offers. She has worked with crazy brands over the years, and she's also sold her business. Gwen breaks down two strategies: one where she sold her business that she started as a side hustle blog and what it means to be an influencer, what it requires to be in that space, and more. You're going to learn so much from Gwen.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 23 Sep 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Prepare Your Business to Sell (Even If You Don't Want to Sell It) with Gwen Lane</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>575</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/41d7558c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-efdc3d724211/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we have Gwen Lane, who has been through quite the evolution. She was a digital marketer turned lifestyle blogger and is now the founder of a Seven-Figure Influencer Program. She helps content creators and influences monetize...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we have Gwen Lane, who has been through quite the evolution. She was a digital marketer turned lifestyle blogger and is now the founder of a Seven-Figure Influencer Program. She helps content creators and influences monetize through premium partnerships and digital offers. She has worked with crazy brands over the years, and she's also sold her business. Gwen breaks down two strategies: one where she sold her business that she started as a side hustle blog and what it means to be an influencer, what it requires to be in that space, and more. You're going to learn so much from Gwen.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we have Gwen Lane, who has been through quite the evolution. She was a digital marketer turned lifestyle blogger and is now the founder of a Seven-Figure Influencer Program. She helps content creators and influences monetize through premium partnerships and digital offers. She has worked with crazy brands over the years, and she's also sold her business. Gwen breaks down two strategies: one where she sold her business that she started as a side hustle blog and what it means to be an influencer, what it requires to be in that space, and more. You're going to learn so much from Gwen.  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2350</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[74353c36-cfb6-49bb-b65d-eaae5e70e097]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7076257854.mp3?updated=1656692193" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>574: Building a Hybrid Modeled Business</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/building-a-hybrid-modeled-business</link>
      <description>Today we’re talking about what it is like to start to view your business through a new lens, specifically the new lens that we’ve been looking at our business through; the hybrid. What is a hybrid business model and how does it infiltrate into all the areas of our business that we’re running? Our hybrid thought process is something that has shifted how we view our business, from looking at each piece separately to understanding it as a coherent whole. A lot of this new thinking centers around our approach to hiring people and managing their roles, as well as our own roles, in our business.
As you guys know, when we learn or uncover something we like to immediately turn around and workshop it here on the podcast because it helps us wrap our brains around it. We are by no means at the point where we have a complete understanding of what our hybrid business model means, we’re still at the early stages of discovery. It’s important for you to have context so you need to hear a bit of the background and how a late-night moment allowed us to open our eyes to the value of a hybrid model. So, join us on the journey! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 21 Sep 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Building a Hybrid Modeled Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>574</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/42639236-ae9a-11ec-91b1-bf51ac9281ad/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we’re talking about what it is like to start to view your business through a new lens, specifically the new lens that we’ve been looking at our business through; the hybrid. What is a hybrid business model and how does it infiltrate into all...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we’re talking about what it is like to start to view your business through a new lens, specifically the new lens that we’ve been looking at our business through; the hybrid. What is a hybrid business model and how does it infiltrate into all the areas of our business that we’re running? Our hybrid thought process is something that has shifted how we view our business, from looking at each piece separately to understanding it as a coherent whole. A lot of this new thinking centers around our approach to hiring people and managing their roles, as well as our own roles, in our business.
As you guys know, when we learn or uncover something we like to immediately turn around and workshop it here on the podcast because it helps us wrap our brains around it. We are by no means at the point where we have a complete understanding of what our hybrid business model means, we’re still at the early stages of discovery. It’s important for you to have context so you need to hear a bit of the background and how a late-night moment allowed us to open our eyes to the value of a hybrid model. So, join us on the journey! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we’re talking about what it is like to start to view your business through a new lens, specifically the new lens that we’ve been looking at our business through; the hybrid. What is a hybrid business model and how does it infiltrate into all the areas of our business that we’re running? Our hybrid thought process is something that has shifted how we view our business, from looking at each piece separately to understanding it as a coherent whole. A lot of this new thinking centers around our approach to hiring people and managing their roles, as well as our own roles, in our business.</p><p>As you guys know, when we learn or uncover something we like to immediately turn around and workshop it here on the podcast because it helps us wrap our brains around it. We are by no means at the point where we have a complete understanding of what our hybrid business model means, we’re still at the early stages of discovery. It’s important for you to have context so you need to hear a bit of the background and how a late-night moment allowed us to open our eyes to the value of a hybrid model. So, join us on the journey! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2011</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4aa1801f-ef42-40a0-947c-17d24b25c7ef]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1725272405.mp3?updated=1651931539" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>573: 5x Our Affiliate Income Using SEO Strategies with Meg Clark of Clapping Dog Media</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/5x-our-affiliate-income-using-seo-strategies-with-meg-clark-of-clapping-dog-media</link>
      <description>Welcome to another action-packed episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast! Our guest today is Meg Clark, the owner and founder of Clapping Dog Media, where she is the master of growing organic traffic. Using a combination of data, proven techniques, and years of experience, she attracts web visitors that not only stick around, but turn into paying customers. Simply put, she connects the dots of data to get your business found!

During this conversation, we pick her brain about structuring your content to work for YOU and actually make you money! Get your notebook out because, today, Meg shares plenty of actionable strategies to help you do just that. Listeners will learn powerful SEO hacks to make your content worthwhile and convert to actual dollar bills, the secret to making Google happy even after changing your niche or what your business offers, and the most surprising thing we learned about traffic and what we're doing about it. We can’t wait to see how her strategies help to transform your business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Sep 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5x Our Affiliate Income Using SEO Strategies with Meg Clark of Clapping Dog Media</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>573</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/42f7d25c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-ebb4734edaba/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome to another action-packed episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast! Our guest today is Meg Clark, the owner and founder of Clapping Dog Media, where she is the master of growing organic traffic. Using a combination of data, proven techniques, and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to another action-packed episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast! Our guest today is Meg Clark, the owner and founder of Clapping Dog Media, where she is the master of growing organic traffic. Using a combination of data, proven techniques, and years of experience, she attracts web visitors that not only stick around, but turn into paying customers. Simply put, she connects the dots of data to get your business found!

During this conversation, we pick her brain about structuring your content to work for YOU and actually make you money! Get your notebook out because, today, Meg shares plenty of actionable strategies to help you do just that. Listeners will learn powerful SEO hacks to make your content worthwhile and convert to actual dollar bills, the secret to making Google happy even after changing your niche or what your business offers, and the most surprising thing we learned about traffic and what we're doing about it. We can’t wait to see how her strategies help to transform your business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to another action-packed episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast! Our guest today is Meg Clark, the owner and founder of Clapping Dog Media, where she is the master of growing organic traffic. Using a combination of data, proven techniques, and years of experience, she attracts web visitors that not only stick around, but turn into paying customers. Simply put, she connects the dots of data to get your business found!</p><p><br></p><p>During this conversation, we pick her brain about structuring your content to work for YOU and actually make you money! Get your notebook out because, today, Meg shares plenty of actionable strategies to help you do just that. Listeners will learn powerful SEO hacks to make your content worthwhile and convert to actual dollar bills, the secret to making Google happy even after changing your niche or what your business offers, and the most surprising thing we learned about traffic and what we're doing about it. We can’t wait to see how her strategies help to transform your business!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2743</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5af96f47-050f-49ab-99de-c9c01b83f48a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2349095377.mp3?updated=1651931638" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>572: Death to The Integrator: The Role that could Kill Your Business</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/death-to-the-integrator-the-role-that-could-kill-your-business</link>
      <description>In this week’s episode, we take a look at the role of the integrator in online businesses. We discuss how the role has come about, what exactly it entails, and how hiring the wrong integrator places your business in jeopardy. While the role has gained significant traction in the last few years as a necessary step for any expanding online business, there are also some serious pitfalls that need to be considered! 
When considering whether you should hire an integrator it’s important to ask yourself two key questions: First, identify what you are hoping to gain from your new hire. Do you perhaps feel like it will free up your time? Second, ask yourself whether there are other, more effective ways to get those benefits. Perhaps you could free up your time by delegating more work and automating systems that you are doing from scratch unnecessarily? Instead of hiring an integrator, this could be an opportunity to optimize your operations and give your staff the opportunity to take a more active role in your business! If you've been considering getting an integrator and are looking to maximize your time while also scaling your business then this episode is for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Sep 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Death to The Integrator: The Role that could Kill Your Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>572</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/439f5c5c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-77f498b63272/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this week’s episode, we take a look at the role of the integrator in online businesses. We discuss how the role has come about, what exactly it entails, and how hiring the wrong integrator places your business in jeopardy. While the role has...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this week’s episode, we take a look at the role of the integrator in online businesses. We discuss how the role has come about, what exactly it entails, and how hiring the wrong integrator places your business in jeopardy. While the role has gained significant traction in the last few years as a necessary step for any expanding online business, there are also some serious pitfalls that need to be considered! 
When considering whether you should hire an integrator it’s important to ask yourself two key questions: First, identify what you are hoping to gain from your new hire. Do you perhaps feel like it will free up your time? Second, ask yourself whether there are other, more effective ways to get those benefits. Perhaps you could free up your time by delegating more work and automating systems that you are doing from scratch unnecessarily? Instead of hiring an integrator, this could be an opportunity to optimize your operations and give your staff the opportunity to take a more active role in your business! If you've been considering getting an integrator and are looking to maximize your time while also scaling your business then this episode is for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this week’s episode, we take a look at the role of the integrator in online businesses. We discuss how the role has come about, what exactly it entails, and how hiring the wrong integrator places your business in jeopardy. While the role has gained significant traction in the last few years as a necessary step for any expanding online business, there are also some serious pitfalls that need to be considered! </p><p>When considering whether you should hire an integrator it’s important to ask yourself two key questions: First, identify what you are hoping to gain from your new hire. Do you perhaps feel like it will free up your time? Second, ask yourself whether there are other, more effective ways to get those benefits. Perhaps you could free up your time by delegating more work and automating systems that you are doing from scratch unnecessarily? Instead of hiring an integrator, this could be an opportunity to optimize your operations and give your staff the opportunity to take a more active role in your business! If you've been considering getting an integrator and are looking to maximize your time while also scaling your business then this episode is for you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1746</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e5807a3e-2048-4d55-95b7-15cedc1534dd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2785600569.mp3?updated=1656692151" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>571: What's Working in Paid Ads and Our Hot Take on Reality TV with Tony Rulli of Intentional Spark</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/whats-working-in-paid-ads-and-our-hot-take-on-reality-tv-with-tony-rulli-of-intentional-spark</link>
      <description>If you’ve been dipping your toe into the ad space lately, you would have been hearing that a lot has changed. Although people say that every year and the changes are usually not so significant, this year is different; because of some really big Apple changes, the game kind of did change, and we now have to think about a whole lot of new things when it comes to paid advertising. In this episode, we are joined by Tony Rulli, co-founder of the digital marketing agency, Intentional Spark. We had Tony on the show once before, during the peak of the pandemic (Episode 414 for anyone who wants to go back and listen)! 
Today, Tony is going to be going over what those changes actually mean for marketers and advertisers and he’s going to share his best recommendations for how to not necessarily combat those changes (because you can’t really) but how to still get the information that you need to sell your product or service. We also have a TV segment near the end of this episode, where we’re going to be discussing some reality TV shows, and our hot takes! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 09 Sep 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What's Working in Paid Ads and Our Hot Take on Reality TV with Tony Rulli of Intentional Spark</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>571</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4436a47c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-6348240fd9fe/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you’ve been dipping your toe into the ad space lately, you would have been hearing that a lot has changed. Although people say that every year and the changes are usually not so significant, this year is different; because of some really big...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you’ve been dipping your toe into the ad space lately, you would have been hearing that a lot has changed. Although people say that every year and the changes are usually not so significant, this year is different; because of some really big Apple changes, the game kind of did change, and we now have to think about a whole lot of new things when it comes to paid advertising. In this episode, we are joined by Tony Rulli, co-founder of the digital marketing agency, Intentional Spark. We had Tony on the show once before, during the peak of the pandemic (Episode 414 for anyone who wants to go back and listen)! 
Today, Tony is going to be going over what those changes actually mean for marketers and advertisers and he’s going to share his best recommendations for how to not necessarily combat those changes (because you can’t really) but how to still get the information that you need to sell your product or service. We also have a TV segment near the end of this episode, where we’re going to be discussing some reality TV shows, and our hot takes! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you’ve been dipping your toe into the ad space lately, you would have been hearing that a lot has changed. Although people say that every year and the changes are usually not so significant, this year is different; because of some really big Apple changes, the game kind of did change, and we now have to think about a whole lot of new things when it comes to paid advertising. In this episode, we are joined by Tony Rulli, co-founder of the digital marketing agency, Intentional Spark. We had Tony on the show once before, during the peak of the pandemic (Episode 414 for anyone who wants to go back and listen)! </p><p>Today, Tony is going to be going over what those changes actually mean for marketers and advertisers and he’s going to share his best recommendations for how to not necessarily combat those changes (because you can’t really) but how to still get the information that you need to sell your product or service. We also have a TV segment near the end of this episode, where we’re going to be discussing some reality TV shows, and our hot takes! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2678</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a473423f-159f-4d4c-96a5-a385c049ae36]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7569434455.mp3?updated=1651931730" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>570: Our Strategy For Creating Content That Converts</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/our-strategy-for-creating-content-that-converts</link>
      <description>Today, we want to talk about what it takes to build a sustainable business. One that is focused on making income for the long term, and some of the projects that we are focused on internally that we think are just a little bit different to what we see other online business owners spending their time and energy on. To continue with our analogy from last time where we talked about your “Tinder date", we’re now going to segue into "How to make the relationship a bit more official. 
But keep in mind, it doesn’t have to be forever. You’re not necessarily married to everything you put out into the world, but there is some commitment required when you start to think about how you build a business that creates sustainable, consistent cash flow. So if you want to hear about our helpful hints and top tips for creating that amazing content your business needs, let's get into it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 07 Sep 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our Strategy For Creating Content That Converts</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>570</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/44d69086-ae9a-11ec-91b1-f7142dbe7cfc/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, we want to talk about what it takes to build a sustainable business. One that is focused on making income for the long term, and some of the projects that we are focused on internally that we think are just a little bit different to what we see...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we want to talk about what it takes to build a sustainable business. One that is focused on making income for the long term, and some of the projects that we are focused on internally that we think are just a little bit different to what we see other online business owners spending their time and energy on. To continue with our analogy from last time where we talked about your “Tinder date", we’re now going to segue into "How to make the relationship a bit more official. 
But keep in mind, it doesn’t have to be forever. You’re not necessarily married to everything you put out into the world, but there is some commitment required when you start to think about how you build a business that creates sustainable, consistent cash flow. So if you want to hear about our helpful hints and top tips for creating that amazing content your business needs, let's get into it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we want to talk about what it takes to build a sustainable business. One that is focused on making income for the long term, and some of the projects that we are focused on internally that we think are just a little bit different to what we see other online business owners spending their time and energy on. To continue with our analogy from last time where we talked about your “Tinder date", we’re now going to segue into "How to make the relationship a bit more official. </p><p>But keep in mind, it doesn’t have to be forever. You’re not necessarily married to everything you put out into the world, but there is some commitment required when you start to think about how you build a business that creates sustainable, consistent cash flow. So if you want to hear about our helpful hints and top tips for creating that amazing content your business needs, let's get into it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2064</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[944f7951-0dc8-469c-a63a-a7b669ad823a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2133450562.mp3?updated=1651932142" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>569: Strategies to Help You Develop and Iterate on Your Product or Offer with Biz &amp; Sam of Dubsado</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/strategies-to-help-you-develop-and-iterate-on-your-product-or-offer-with-becca-berg-and-sam-gioia-of-dubsado</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we are joined by our good friends from Dubsado, co-founder Becca Berg, and Sam Gioia from their product department. Most of our listeners are well aware that we are big fans of Dubsado and how they help businesses thrive by taking away the busywork. Dubsado is a fantastic platform, especially for small businesses! They have created an all-in-one system that helps you stay in motion, build relationships, schedule appointments, and create workflows to streamline your projects from start to finish.
In this episode, we chat with Becca and Sam about the many new features that Dubsado has in store for its users. We hear about how they’re finding innovative ways to interrogate and test the usability of their platform, and the pressure and sense of overwhelm that comes with a desire to make your software, service, and product perfect before releasing it to the public. As a response to this challenge, we examine how you can break that intimidating perfection down into tangible goals and steps, allowing you to accurately view the progress you’re making on the elements you want to improve for your clients, students, or anyone else you may be working with. 
We cover a host of concepts in this episode that are relevant to anyone, not just software companies, making this an excellent listen for anyone interested in improving products and services for their clients! Dubsado has an ethos of service, which resonates strongly with Abagail and Emylee as ex-service-based owners. At our core, we are both driven by how to best serve our clients and customers, but this episode offers some excellent ideas that can be implemented in any business and is also an exciting behind-the-scenes look at Dubsado’s new features that they’ll be rolling out soon. Be sure to tune in to this information-packed episode on all things development, customer service, and so much more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show, notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 02 Sep 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Strategies to Help You Develop and Iterate on Your Product or Offer with Biz &amp; Sam of Dubsado</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>569</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4577d568-ae9a-11ec-91b1-471d4af188db/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we are joined by our good friends from Dubsado, co-founder Becca Berg, and Sam Gioia from their product department. Most of our listeners are well aware that we are big fans of Dubsado and how they help businesses thrive by...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we are joined by our good friends from Dubsado, co-founder Becca Berg, and Sam Gioia from their product department. Most of our listeners are well aware that we are big fans of Dubsado and how they help businesses thrive by taking away the busywork. Dubsado is a fantastic platform, especially for small businesses! They have created an all-in-one system that helps you stay in motion, build relationships, schedule appointments, and create workflows to streamline your projects from start to finish.
In this episode, we chat with Becca and Sam about the many new features that Dubsado has in store for its users. We hear about how they’re finding innovative ways to interrogate and test the usability of their platform, and the pressure and sense of overwhelm that comes with a desire to make your software, service, and product perfect before releasing it to the public. As a response to this challenge, we examine how you can break that intimidating perfection down into tangible goals and steps, allowing you to accurately view the progress you’re making on the elements you want to improve for your clients, students, or anyone else you may be working with. 
We cover a host of concepts in this episode that are relevant to anyone, not just software companies, making this an excellent listen for anyone interested in improving products and services for their clients! Dubsado has an ethos of service, which resonates strongly with Abagail and Emylee as ex-service-based owners. At our core, we are both driven by how to best serve our clients and customers, but this episode offers some excellent ideas that can be implemented in any business and is also an exciting behind-the-scenes look at Dubsado’s new features that they’ll be rolling out soon. Be sure to tune in to this information-packed episode on all things development, customer service, and so much more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show, notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we are joined by our good friends from Dubsado, co-founder Becca Berg, and Sam Gioia from their product department. Most of our listeners are well aware that we are big fans of Dubsado and how they help businesses thrive by taking away the busywork. Dubsado is a fantastic platform, especially for small businesses! They have created an all-in-one system that helps you stay in motion, build relationships, schedule appointments, and create workflows to streamline your projects from start to finish.</p><p>In this episode, we chat with Becca and Sam about the many new features that Dubsado has in store for its users. We hear about how they’re finding innovative ways to interrogate and test the usability of their platform, and the pressure and sense of overwhelm that comes with a desire to make your software, service, and product perfect before releasing it to the public. As a response to this challenge, we examine how you can break that intimidating perfection down into tangible goals and steps, allowing you to accurately view the progress you’re making on the elements you want to improve for your clients, students, or anyone else you may be working with. </p><p>We cover a host of concepts in this episode that are relevant to anyone, not just software companies, making this an excellent listen for anyone interested in improving products and services for their clients! Dubsado has an ethos of service, which resonates strongly with Abagail and Emylee as ex-service-based owners. At our core, we are both driven by how to best serve our clients and customers, but this episode offers some excellent ideas that can be implemented in any business and is also an exciting behind-the-scenes look at Dubsado’s new features that they’ll be rolling out soon. Be sure to tune in to this information-packed episode on all things development, customer service, and so much more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show, notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2289</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[521b7ede-38f1-4a5f-8e83-3c2e9c0120b7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4985170922.mp3?updated=1651932257" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>568: We Have a New Podcast: Here's How to Listen</title>
      <link>https://www.bossproject.com/podcast/we-have-a-new-podcast-heres-how-to-listen</link>
      <description>Are you tired of hearing our voices yet? We hope not because guess what just launched? Another freaking podcast! More words for your ear boxes in our voices. It's been so exciting to watch people’s reactions when they hear this is a thing. They'll say that they’ve been listening to the show for years, but then the questions start rolling in about the new show, “Where is it?” or, “I can’t find it,” or “How do I get access?” So, we are here, on our current podcast, to tell you about our new podcast that’s just launched, and we want to talk to you about how you can get access and what’s all involved because this is big news folks. We will talk about some high-level deets and what you can do to get inside.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 31 Aug 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>We Have a New Podcast: Here's How to Listen</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>568</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/46271d2a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-bbd6cb03a1e7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Are you tired of hearing our voices yet? We hope not because guess what just launched? Another freaking podcast! More words for your ear boxes in our voices. It's been so exciting to watch people’s reactions when they hear this is a thing. They'll...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you tired of hearing our voices yet? We hope not because guess what just launched? Another freaking podcast! More words for your ear boxes in our voices. It's been so exciting to watch people’s reactions when they hear this is a thing. They'll say that they’ve been listening to the show for years, but then the questions start rolling in about the new show, “Where is it?” or, “I can’t find it,” or “How do I get access?” So, we are here, on our current podcast, to tell you about our new podcast that’s just launched, and we want to talk to you about how you can get access and what’s all involved because this is big news folks. We will talk about some high-level deets and what you can do to get inside.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you tired of hearing our voices yet? We hope not because guess what just launched? Another freaking podcast! More words for your ear boxes in our voices. It's been so exciting to watch people’s reactions when they hear this is a thing. They'll say that they’ve been listening to the show for years, but then the questions start rolling in about the new show, “Where is it?” or, “I can’t find it,” or “How do I get access?” So, we are here, on our current podcast, to tell you about our new podcast that’s just launched, and we want to talk to you about how you can get access and what’s all involved because this is big news folks. We will talk about some high-level deets and what you can do to get inside.  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a></p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1264</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c5cfc001-454b-4c22-9847-3658af2454d7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9067776259.mp3?updated=1656689506" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>567: Hiring Tips for Growing Small Businesses with Kira La Forgia</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/hiring-tips-for-growing-small-businesses-with-kira-la-forgia</link>
      <description>Today’s guest is Kira La Forgia, someone who actually enjoys 1099s, W2s, FMLA, and FLSA; you know, all that human resources stuff that usually goes right over your head! Her operations consulting company, Paradigm Consulting, provides resources to online-based business owners that put people operations at the center of the organizational structure. Kira knows how to project, streamline, and scale businesses, working with leaders in their fields to blend their strengths, passions, and experiences into their unique company culture and develop a robust hiring and growth strategy, as well as providing you with the people you need to move your business forward!
In this episode, we talk about what that looks like at different stages and Kira shares her top hiring tips for growing small businesses. Abagail and Emylee actually hired Kira as a consultant for their own company as they were phasing into growth and hiring employees, which is why we invited her on the show to share her take on small businesses, or businesses who are hiring contractors or virtual assistants, even for the first time. Kira shares some of the things you can set up to better your experience with contractors, the do’s and don’ts when it comes to contractors versus employees, everything you need to know about your employee handbook, and how you can make the onboarding process and the associated learning curves and mindset shifts around hiring a whole lot easier!
We also touch on HR basics for small teams looking to hire contractors and employees, some of the mindset shifts you need to make when it comes to your team members, plus a new way of looking at org charts and what you need to do differently. We all want a scalable business model with no limit on revenue, which is why Kira’s insights are so valuable. Make sure not to miss this incredible and informative conversation, packed full of practical advice that you can implement today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Aug 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Hiring Tips for Growing Small Businesses with Kira La Forgia</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>567</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/46c0c11e-ae9a-11ec-91b1-8b453ee1eb74/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today’s guest is Kira La Forgia, someone who actually enjoys 1099s, W2s, FMLA, and FLSA; you know, all that human resources stuff that usually goes right over your head! Her operations consulting company, Paradigm Consulting, provides resources to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today’s guest is Kira La Forgia, someone who actually enjoys 1099s, W2s, FMLA, and FLSA; you know, all that human resources stuff that usually goes right over your head! Her operations consulting company, Paradigm Consulting, provides resources to online-based business owners that put people operations at the center of the organizational structure. Kira knows how to project, streamline, and scale businesses, working with leaders in their fields to blend their strengths, passions, and experiences into their unique company culture and develop a robust hiring and growth strategy, as well as providing you with the people you need to move your business forward!
In this episode, we talk about what that looks like at different stages and Kira shares her top hiring tips for growing small businesses. Abagail and Emylee actually hired Kira as a consultant for their own company as they were phasing into growth and hiring employees, which is why we invited her on the show to share her take on small businesses, or businesses who are hiring contractors or virtual assistants, even for the first time. Kira shares some of the things you can set up to better your experience with contractors, the do’s and don’ts when it comes to contractors versus employees, everything you need to know about your employee handbook, and how you can make the onboarding process and the associated learning curves and mindset shifts around hiring a whole lot easier!
We also touch on HR basics for small teams looking to hire contractors and employees, some of the mindset shifts you need to make when it comes to your team members, plus a new way of looking at org charts and what you need to do differently. We all want a scalable business model with no limit on revenue, which is why Kira’s insights are so valuable. Make sure not to miss this incredible and informative conversation, packed full of practical advice that you can implement today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s guest is Kira La Forgia, someone who actually enjoys 1099s, W2s, FMLA, and FLSA; you know, all that human resources stuff that usually goes right over your head! Her operations consulting company, Paradigm Consulting, provides resources to online-based business owners that put people operations at the center of the organizational structure. Kira knows how to project, streamline, and scale businesses, working with leaders in their fields to blend their strengths, passions, and experiences into their unique company culture and develop a robust hiring and growth strategy, as well as providing you with the people you need to move your business forward!</p><p>In this episode, we talk about what that looks like at different stages and Kira shares her top hiring tips for growing small businesses. Abagail and Emylee actually hired Kira as a consultant for their own company as they were phasing into growth and hiring employees, which is why we invited her on the show to share her take on small businesses, or businesses who are hiring contractors or virtual assistants, even for the first time. Kira shares some of the things you can set up to better your experience with contractors, the do’s and don’ts when it comes to contractors versus employees, everything you need to know about your employee handbook, and how you can make the onboarding process and the associated learning curves and mindset shifts around hiring a whole lot easier!</p><p>We also touch on HR basics for small teams looking to hire contractors and employees, some of the mindset shifts you need to make when it comes to your team members, plus a new way of looking at org charts and what you need to do differently. We all want a scalable business model with no limit on revenue, which is why Kira’s insights are so valuable. Make sure not to miss this incredible and informative conversation, packed full of practical advice that you can implement today!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3177</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d8baf7fa-16f5-43a1-bdc8-0ff38e6d7fdc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1722005112.mp3?updated=1651932399" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>566: July 2021 Profit Report: Our Business Model is a MaaS &amp; Why Yours Might Be Too</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/july-2021-profit-report-our-business-model-is-a-maas-why-yours-might-be-too</link>
      <description>We are back here with another fan favorite: profit reports! Let's talk about all the things we did in July and how much money our products made. We love the profit reports because they are such a great opportunity to break down what’s been successful in our business. They also give us a chance to reflect on the things we did, the things we worked on, what we would do differently, and how it would ultimately affect the bottom line because that’s what this is all about. It's not revenue or how much income we generated; it’s about the profit we make in our business.
For a while now, Abagail has been talking about using percentages to divide up your profits, and recently, she had a question about a line item. So, she asked our bookkeeping company what some of their recommendations are. They work with hundreds of online businesses in the space we are in, and they have an understanding of the breakdown of things. What made her so happy is that the things we have been working so hard on are the top amounts we should be searching for. This isn’t arbitrary and doesn’t just apply to our business; it’s applicable across the board! And we take a lot of pride in setting our business up in this way.
That is also why we share these as percentages because the amount can throw people off if their businesses are not in the same arena or do not have the same goals. But there are percentages that literal professionals recommend businesses are at in terms of profit, or team, or education, or advertising. So, knowing when you’re in that ballpark is really, really reassuring as you continue to make a decision.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 24 Aug 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>July 2021 Profit Report: Our Business Model is a MaaS &amp; Why Yours Might Be Too</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>566</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4770665a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-8bc1a1d09dc9/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are back here with another fan favorite: profit reports! Let's talk about all the things we did in July and how much money our products made. We love the profit reports because they are such a great opportunity to break down what’s been...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are back here with another fan favorite: profit reports! Let's talk about all the things we did in July and how much money our products made. We love the profit reports because they are such a great opportunity to break down what’s been successful in our business. They also give us a chance to reflect on the things we did, the things we worked on, what we would do differently, and how it would ultimately affect the bottom line because that’s what this is all about. It's not revenue or how much income we generated; it’s about the profit we make in our business.
For a while now, Abagail has been talking about using percentages to divide up your profits, and recently, she had a question about a line item. So, she asked our bookkeeping company what some of their recommendations are. They work with hundreds of online businesses in the space we are in, and they have an understanding of the breakdown of things. What made her so happy is that the things we have been working so hard on are the top amounts we should be searching for. This isn’t arbitrary and doesn’t just apply to our business; it’s applicable across the board! And we take a lot of pride in setting our business up in this way.
That is also why we share these as percentages because the amount can throw people off if their businesses are not in the same arena or do not have the same goals. But there are percentages that literal professionals recommend businesses are at in terms of profit, or team, or education, or advertising. So, knowing when you’re in that ballpark is really, really reassuring as you continue to make a decision.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are back here with another fan favorite: profit reports! Let's talk about all the things we did in July and how much money our products made. We love the profit reports because they are such a great opportunity to break down what’s been successful in our business. They also give us a chance to reflect on the things we did, the things we worked on, what we would do differently, and how it would ultimately affect the bottom line because that’s what this is all about. It's not revenue or how much income we generated; it’s about the profit we make in our business.</p><p>For a while now, Abagail has been talking about using percentages to divide up your profits, and recently, she had a question about a line item. So, she asked our bookkeeping company what some of their recommendations are. They work with hundreds of online businesses in the space we are in, and they have an understanding of the breakdown of things. What made her so happy is that the things we have been working so hard on are the top amounts we should be searching for. This isn’t arbitrary and doesn’t just apply to our business; it’s applicable across the board! And we take a lot of pride in setting our business up in this way.</p><p>That is also why we share these as percentages because the amount can throw people off if their businesses are not in the same arena or do not have the same goals. But there are percentages that literal professionals recommend businesses are at in terms of profit, or team, or education, or advertising. So, knowing when you’re in that ballpark is really, really reassuring as you continue to make a decision.  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2810</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[63ef21e5-dd26-4f8a-b9b4-314cf2937f5e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7256026652.mp3?updated=1651932470" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>565: Creating Pocket Products®️ for Service Based Business Owners with Courtney Foster-Donahue</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-pocket-products-for-service-based-business-owners-with-courtney-foster-donahue</link>
      <description>Ready to grow your audience and grow your revenue at the same time, but don't know how? Well, this is the episode for you! Today on the show, we welcome Courtney Foster-Donahue, an Atlanta-based four-time entrepreneur and business strategist. Courtney founded and runs a multimillion-dollar company where she has worked with tens of thousands of entrepreneurs across the world. Through her acclaimed programs, Pocket Products™, The Course Course, and Launchpad, she helps entrepreneurs grow their businesses through digital courses, digital products, and digital marketing; which is exactly what we are chatting about today!
We pick Courtney’s awesome marketing brain as she shares her tips for innovating while simultaneously keeping things simple and provides a peek behind the curtain of what is working for her right now. In this episode, we talk Pocket Products™, the revolutionary and inexpensive lead generation method that is perfect for service-based business owners like yourself to incorporate into your income revenue stream so that you can have another way of making money, add value to your audience, grow your list, get paid to grow that list, and serve up intense, amazing value!
We discuss the number one way to grow your list through low-priced, high-value digital products, how to get paid and grow a list of customers rather than subscribers, and how to use the W.A.N.D. Method to figure out exactly what your Pocket Products™ should be. If you haven’t met Courtney yet, you’re in for a real treat! So, tune in, get out your notebook, and grab a fresh cup of coffee, because we’re pretty sure you’ll be ready to hit the ground running after this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 19 Aug 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating Pocket Products®️ for Service Based Business Owners with Courtney Foster-Donahue</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>565</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/480abc82-ae9a-11ec-91b1-b3091d581ba5/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Ready to grow your audience and grow your revenue at the same time, but don't know how? Well, this is the episode for you! Today on the show, we welcome Courtney Foster-Donahue, an Atlanta-based four-time entrepreneur and business...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Ready to grow your audience and grow your revenue at the same time, but don't know how? Well, this is the episode for you! Today on the show, we welcome Courtney Foster-Donahue, an Atlanta-based four-time entrepreneur and business strategist. Courtney founded and runs a multimillion-dollar company where she has worked with tens of thousands of entrepreneurs across the world. Through her acclaimed programs, Pocket Products™, The Course Course, and Launchpad, she helps entrepreneurs grow their businesses through digital courses, digital products, and digital marketing; which is exactly what we are chatting about today!
We pick Courtney’s awesome marketing brain as she shares her tips for innovating while simultaneously keeping things simple and provides a peek behind the curtain of what is working for her right now. In this episode, we talk Pocket Products™, the revolutionary and inexpensive lead generation method that is perfect for service-based business owners like yourself to incorporate into your income revenue stream so that you can have another way of making money, add value to your audience, grow your list, get paid to grow that list, and serve up intense, amazing value!
We discuss the number one way to grow your list through low-priced, high-value digital products, how to get paid and grow a list of customers rather than subscribers, and how to use the W.A.N.D. Method to figure out exactly what your Pocket Products™ should be. If you haven’t met Courtney yet, you’re in for a real treat! So, tune in, get out your notebook, and grab a fresh cup of coffee, because we’re pretty sure you’ll be ready to hit the ground running after this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ready to grow your audience <em>and</em> grow your revenue at the same time, but don't know how? Well, this is the episode for you! Today on the show, we welcome Courtney Foster-Donahue, an Atlanta-based four-time entrepreneur and business strategist. Courtney founded and runs a multimillion-dollar company where she has worked with tens of thousands of entrepreneurs across the world. Through her acclaimed programs, Pocket Products™, The Course Course, and Launchpad, she helps entrepreneurs grow their businesses through digital courses, digital products, and digital marketing; which is exactly what we are chatting about today!</p><p>We pick Courtney’s awesome marketing brain as she shares her tips for innovating while simultaneously keeping things simple and provides a peek behind the curtain of what is working for her right now. In this episode, we talk Pocket Products™, the revolutionary and inexpensive lead generation method that is perfect for service-based business owners like yourself to incorporate into your income revenue stream so that you can have another way of making money, add value to your audience, grow your list, get paid to grow that list, and serve up intense, amazing value!</p><p>We discuss the number one way to grow your list through low-priced, high-value digital products, how to get paid and grow a list of customers rather than subscribers, and how to use the W.A.N.D. Method to figure out exactly what your Pocket Products™ should be. If you haven’t met Courtney yet, you’re in for a real treat! So, tune in, get out your notebook, and grab a fresh cup of coffee, because we’re pretty sure you’ll be ready to hit the ground running after this episode!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2647</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[92840e46-f4dd-462f-887b-7f02111fbac3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5007764035.mp3?updated=1651932565" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>564: Boss Project's Story - Part 2: The Year That Changed Everything for Us</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/boss-projects-story-part-2-the-year-that-changed-everything-for-us</link>
      <description>We are here for part 2 of our story. First of all, if you haven’t listened to part 1, it’s literally the episode before this one. We did back–to–back with our voices and no guests. This is a two-parter, so if you haven’t listened to the first one, we highly recommend that you pause and go back to that one before carrying on with this episode. So, you are here and ready for part 2. We want to start this episode with a little preface, some boundaries, and we want to share the weirdness of being vulnerable online and in the internet space. These are deeply personal parts of our stories, and we are going to dive in and share a lot with you today. There is a good chunk of you who have been around for a really long time, and you will have heard bits and pieces of our story. But there is an even bigger chunk of you who have no idea what happened for us in 2016, a really big year for us in terms of pivoting personally and within our business. It literally changed every aspect of our lives and shaped the way we do business, and that’s what we will talk about today.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 17 Aug 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Boss Project's Story - Part 2: The Year That Changed Everything for Us</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>564</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4896293e-ae9a-11ec-91b1-1f423d4c7436/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are here for part 2 of our story. First of all, if you haven’t listened to part 1, it’s literally the episode before this one. We did back–to–back with our voices and no guests. This is a two-parter, so if you haven’t listened to the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are here for part 2 of our story. First of all, if you haven’t listened to part 1, it’s literally the episode before this one. We did back–to–back with our voices and no guests. This is a two-parter, so if you haven’t listened to the first one, we highly recommend that you pause and go back to that one before carrying on with this episode. So, you are here and ready for part 2. We want to start this episode with a little preface, some boundaries, and we want to share the weirdness of being vulnerable online and in the internet space. These are deeply personal parts of our stories, and we are going to dive in and share a lot with you today. There is a good chunk of you who have been around for a really long time, and you will have heard bits and pieces of our story. But there is an even bigger chunk of you who have no idea what happened for us in 2016, a really big year for us in terms of pivoting personally and within our business. It literally changed every aspect of our lives and shaped the way we do business, and that’s what we will talk about today.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are here for part 2 of our story. First of all, if you haven’t listened to part 1, it’s literally the episode before this one. We did back–to–back with our voices and no guests. This is a two-parter, so if you haven’t listened to the first one, we highly recommend that you pause and go back to that one before carrying on with this episode. So, you are here and ready for part 2. We want to start this episode with a little preface, some boundaries, and we want to share the weirdness of being vulnerable online and in the internet space. These are deeply personal parts of our stories, and we are going to dive in and share a lot with you today. There is a good chunk of you who have been around for a really long time, and you will have heard bits and pieces of our story. But there is an even bigger chunk of you who have no idea what happened for us in 2016, a really big year for us in terms of pivoting personally and within our business. It literally changed every aspect of our lives and shaped the way we do business, and that’s what we will talk about today.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2928</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[af17dee2-ab65-4847-b04e-603869aa072a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7268436649.mp3?updated=1651932748" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>563: Boss Project's Story - Part 1: The One Thing We Actually Think All Small Business Owners *Should* Have</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-one-thing-we-actually-think-all-small-business-owners-should-have</link>
      <description>On today’s show, we wanted to take you back in time a little bit and talk about the beginning stages of our business. We so often get asked, ‘How did this all start and why does it exist in the way it does today?” We think there are some incredible takeaways from the early part of our journey that we don’t often talk about but which have shaped the mission and vision of our business as we have continued to grow and make an impact in the world of online business. It has been interesting uncovering some of our story through the work that we have been doing with Rachel’s coaching program in which we are currently enrolled. 
We have struggled to frame our story because it breaks the mold of how origin stories are usually told, in the sense that there are two of us, not one. Often we have felt that sharing our feelings and thinking out loud on this podcast has helped us find clarity, so we wanted to use this episode to tell our story! We hope that if you had some things holding you back from telling your own story that this episode might help you step outside your comfort zone and share a little more about yourself.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 12 Aug 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Boss Project's Story - Part 1: The One Thing We Actually Think All Small Business Owners *Should* Have</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>563</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4937ac46-ae9a-11ec-91b1-9f8a85e82046/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>On today’s show, we wanted to take you back in time a little bit and talk about the beginning stages of our business. We so often get asked, ‘How did this all start and why does it exist in the way it does today?” We think there are some...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s show, we wanted to take you back in time a little bit and talk about the beginning stages of our business. We so often get asked, ‘How did this all start and why does it exist in the way it does today?” We think there are some incredible takeaways from the early part of our journey that we don’t often talk about but which have shaped the mission and vision of our business as we have continued to grow and make an impact in the world of online business. It has been interesting uncovering some of our story through the work that we have been doing with Rachel’s coaching program in which we are currently enrolled. 
We have struggled to frame our story because it breaks the mold of how origin stories are usually told, in the sense that there are two of us, not one. Often we have felt that sharing our feelings and thinking out loud on this podcast has helped us find clarity, so we wanted to use this episode to tell our story! We hope that if you had some things holding you back from telling your own story that this episode might help you step outside your comfort zone and share a little more about yourself.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s show, we wanted to take you back in time a little bit and talk about the beginning stages of our business. We so often get asked, ‘How did this all start and why does it exist in the way it does today?” We think there are some incredible takeaways from the early part of our journey that we don’t often talk about but which have shaped the mission and vision of our business as we have continued to grow and make an impact in the world of online business. It has been interesting uncovering some of our story through the work that we have been doing with Rachel’s coaching program in which we are currently enrolled. </p><p>We have struggled to frame our story because it breaks the mold of how origin stories are usually told, in the sense that there are two of us, not one. Often we have felt that sharing our feelings and thinking out loud on this podcast has helped us find clarity, so we wanted to use this episode to tell our story! We hope that if you had some things holding you back from telling your own story that this episode might help you step outside your comfort zone and share a little more about yourself.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2232</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8d993b3d-b6e6-40df-9833-e499bdcca130]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9588714238.mp3?updated=1651932827" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>562: Introducing The Creative Shop Co-op: The Missing Piece Your Business Needs</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/introducing-the-creative-shop-co-op-the-missing-piece-your-business-needs</link>
      <description>We have the best thing since sliced bread to share with you. Big, big, big news. We are beyond excited. For the first time ever (note the sarcasm), we are giving more value to our members and our students because we love you and are obsessed with your success. It should come as no surprise to anyone that we just want to continue to see you improve your results. We are constantly looking at our programs and our offers to identify how we can help you be more successful, how we can arm you with the tools, strategies, and systems to be the most effective you can be. And we have been taking a good, long, hard look at everything we have done inside The Creative Template Shop, and we love it. It's not changing. All of that is staying AND it's growing and becoming even better!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 10 Aug 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Introducing The Creative Shop Co-op: The Missing Piece Your Business Needs</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>562</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/49be6b3c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-9ba90b496aac/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We have the best thing since sliced bread to share with you. Big, big, big news. We are beyond excited. For the first time ever (note the sarcasm), we are giving more value to our members and our students because we love you and are obsessed with your...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We have the best thing since sliced bread to share with you. Big, big, big news. We are beyond excited. For the first time ever (note the sarcasm), we are giving more value to our members and our students because we love you and are obsessed with your success. It should come as no surprise to anyone that we just want to continue to see you improve your results. We are constantly looking at our programs and our offers to identify how we can help you be more successful, how we can arm you with the tools, strategies, and systems to be the most effective you can be. And we have been taking a good, long, hard look at everything we have done inside The Creative Template Shop, and we love it. It's not changing. All of that is staying AND it's growing and becoming even better!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We have the best thing since sliced bread to share with you. Big, big, big news. We are beyond excited. For the first time ever (note the sarcasm), we are giving more value to our members and our students because we love you and are obsessed with your success. It should come as no surprise to anyone that we just want to continue to see you improve your results. We are constantly looking at our programs and our offers to identify how we can help you be more successful, how we can arm you with the tools, strategies, and systems to be the most effective you can be. And we have been taking a good, long, hard look at everything we have done inside The Creative Template Shop, and we love it. It's not changing. All of that is staying AND it's growing and becoming even better!  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1606</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dd78d456-44ab-476b-acfc-5cac616707ca]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2753354391.mp3?updated=1651932897" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>561: Creating Systems &amp; Project Management Tools that Work for How YOU Work with Braden Drake</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-systems-and-project-management-tools-that-work-for-the-way-you-work-with-braden-drake</link>
      <description>While it doesn't take much talent to have a creative hobby, it takes skill, practice, and, most importantly, systems to monetize your creative passion and turn it into a career. By working with creatives, today’s guest is able to use his skill in law and tax while also vicariously working in the creative industry through all of you amazing ‘creativepreneurs’. Braden Drake is your gay best friend who also happens to be an attorney and tax pro, but aren't talking about the boring (but necessary) legal stuff today! For that, you need to head over to Braden’s podcast, Unf*ck Your Biz. Today, we are talking creating systems, standard operating procedures, and processes that work for the way YOU want to work in your business!
This is a roundtable-style discussion about how our individual personalities impact the way we organize our to-dos and develop our SOPs, as well as how you can create systems that will actually benefit your business rather than wasting your valuable time as CEO. We also touch on the Profit First methodology and how it ties into getting “your legal and tax shit legit,” as Braden says. Tuning in, you’ll learn about the three things you need to consider when creating standard operating procedures for your business, how to create processes that work for your personality type, and the system Braden suggests to stay legal and compliant, plus a whole lot more!
Make sure not to miss this informal and informative conversation full of practical tips with your new best friend, Braden Drake.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 05 Aug 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating Systems &amp; Project Management Tools that Work for How YOU Work with Braden Drake</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>561</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4a4e30fa-ae9a-11ec-91b1-2f76b3a4e0aa/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>While it doesn't take much talent to have a creative hobby, it takes skill, practice, and, most importantly, systems to monetize your creative passion and turn it into a career. By working with creatives, today’s guest is able to use his skill in...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>While it doesn't take much talent to have a creative hobby, it takes skill, practice, and, most importantly, systems to monetize your creative passion and turn it into a career. By working with creatives, today’s guest is able to use his skill in law and tax while also vicariously working in the creative industry through all of you amazing ‘creativepreneurs’. Braden Drake is your gay best friend who also happens to be an attorney and tax pro, but aren't talking about the boring (but necessary) legal stuff today! For that, you need to head over to Braden’s podcast, Unf*ck Your Biz. Today, we are talking creating systems, standard operating procedures, and processes that work for the way YOU want to work in your business!
This is a roundtable-style discussion about how our individual personalities impact the way we organize our to-dos and develop our SOPs, as well as how you can create systems that will actually benefit your business rather than wasting your valuable time as CEO. We also touch on the Profit First methodology and how it ties into getting “your legal and tax shit legit,” as Braden says. Tuning in, you’ll learn about the three things you need to consider when creating standard operating procedures for your business, how to create processes that work for your personality type, and the system Braden suggests to stay legal and compliant, plus a whole lot more!
Make sure not to miss this informal and informative conversation full of practical tips with your new best friend, Braden Drake.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>While it doesn't take much talent to have a creative hobby, it takes skill, practice, and, most importantly, systems to monetize your creative passion and turn it into a career. By working with creatives, today’s guest is able to use his skill in law and tax while also vicariously working in the creative industry through all of you amazing ‘creativepreneurs’. Braden Drake is your gay best friend who also happens to be an attorney and tax pro, but aren't talking about the boring (but necessary) legal stuff today! For that, you need to head over to Braden’s podcast, Unf*ck Your Biz. Today, we are talking creating systems, standard operating procedures, and processes that work for the way YOU want to work in your business!</p><p>This is a roundtable-style discussion about how our individual personalities impact the way we organize our to-dos and develop our SOPs, as well as how you can create systems that will actually benefit your business rather than wasting your valuable time as CEO. We also touch on the Profit First methodology and how it ties into getting “your legal and tax shit legit,” as Braden says. Tuning in, you’ll learn about the three things you need to consider when creating standard operating procedures for your business, how to create processes that work for your personality type, and the system Braden suggests to stay legal and compliant, plus a whole lot more!</p><p>Make sure not to miss this informal and informative conversation full of practical tips with your new best friend, Braden Drake.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3130</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b256d372-1a30-4936-a115-50c2c3c71ded]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5764644634.mp3?updated=1651933025" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>560: Avoiding Burnout &amp; Becoming a New You</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/avoiding-burnout-becoming-a-new-you</link>
      <description>While we can’t tell you what this episode is going to look like, we can tell you where we are at. Being an entrepreneur is hard. It presents challenges that you don’t anticipate. Things pop up that you never imagined dealing with and you are pushed to grow as a person as you continue to grow your business. We wish we could say that it was always easy or that we always know what to do, but we don’t. The idea for this episode started when Emylee inboxed Jessica Eley and their conversation led to a lot of tears. 
We want to preface this conversation by saying there are a handful of conversations that we have had like this where we are truly in the weeds and workshopping things as we go. We will probably get clarity just by talking it out with you guys and we love that we have the space to do that. It is not going to be an episode that ends with a resounding conclusion or strategy. We want to talk about the challenges that come with growth and clear out some of the junk in our brains in the hope that you won’t feel as alone if you were thinking some of the same things.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 03 Aug 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Avoiding Burnout &amp; Becoming a New You</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>560</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4adaa17a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-ff65970d00fc/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>While we can’t tell you what this episode is going to look like, we can tell you where we are at. Being an entrepreneur is hard. It presents challenges that you don’t anticipate. Things pop up that you never imagined dealing with and you are...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>While we can’t tell you what this episode is going to look like, we can tell you where we are at. Being an entrepreneur is hard. It presents challenges that you don’t anticipate. Things pop up that you never imagined dealing with and you are pushed to grow as a person as you continue to grow your business. We wish we could say that it was always easy or that we always know what to do, but we don’t. The idea for this episode started when Emylee inboxed Jessica Eley and their conversation led to a lot of tears. 
We want to preface this conversation by saying there are a handful of conversations that we have had like this where we are truly in the weeds and workshopping things as we go. We will probably get clarity just by talking it out with you guys and we love that we have the space to do that. It is not going to be an episode that ends with a resounding conclusion or strategy. We want to talk about the challenges that come with growth and clear out some of the junk in our brains in the hope that you won’t feel as alone if you were thinking some of the same things.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>While we can’t tell you what this episode is going to look like, we can tell you where we are at. Being an entrepreneur is hard. It presents challenges that you don’t anticipate. Things pop up that you never imagined dealing with and you are pushed to grow as a person as you continue to grow your business. We wish we could say that it was always easy or that we always know what to do, but we don’t. The idea for this episode started when Emylee inboxed Jessica Eley and their conversation led to a lot of tears. </p><p>We want to preface this conversation by saying there are a handful of conversations that we have had like this where we are truly in the weeds and workshopping things as we go. We will probably get clarity just by talking it out with you guys and we love that we have the space to do that. It is not going to be an episode that ends with a resounding conclusion or strategy. We want to talk about the challenges that come with growth and clear out some of the junk in our brains in the hope that you won’t feel as alone if you were thinking some of the same things.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2633</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3b64112f-3635-46e8-a991-53f9cd90703a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3926042552.mp3?updated=1651933405" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>559: Data, Analytics and Making Decisions With Alignment in Mind with Pri Kruijen of Brilliantly Visible</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/data-analytics-and-making-decisions-with-alignment-in-mind-with-pri-kruijen-of-brilliantly-visible</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we have Pri. She’s an award-winning SEO strategist, Google Analytics expert, and Founder of Brilliantly Visible. Pri is based in London, and her work is frequently shared as an example of best practices in action at industry events in the UK. With her signature PROPS method, Pri helps people to build out datasets and create simple, automated metric dashboards that help them answer some of the most important questions they have in their business: what are my results, and how am I getting them? Those are two really helpful things to be mindful of in your business when you are growing from a data place, an analytically-driven place, but also in a place that’s in alignment with how you want to run your business and the decisions that you want to be making. If you have been avoiding looking at your data to see if you are actually getting the results you want, or if you are feeling overwhelmed about how to make decisions based on the results you are getting, this is the show for you! You will walk away with so many tips on how to make smart, intentional decisions in your business.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 29 Jul 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Data, Analytics and Making Decisions With Alignment in Mind with Pri Kruijen of Brilliantly Visible</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>559</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4b63e5d4-ae9a-11ec-91b1-af743d369492/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we have Pri. She’s an award-winning SEO strategist, Google Analytics expert, and Founder of Brilliantly Visible. Pri is based in London, and her work is frequently shared as an example of best practices in action at industry...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we have Pri. She’s an award-winning SEO strategist, Google Analytics expert, and Founder of Brilliantly Visible. Pri is based in London, and her work is frequently shared as an example of best practices in action at industry events in the UK. With her signature PROPS method, Pri helps people to build out datasets and create simple, automated metric dashboards that help them answer some of the most important questions they have in their business: what are my results, and how am I getting them? Those are two really helpful things to be mindful of in your business when you are growing from a data place, an analytically-driven place, but also in a place that’s in alignment with how you want to run your business and the decisions that you want to be making. If you have been avoiding looking at your data to see if you are actually getting the results you want, or if you are feeling overwhelmed about how to make decisions based on the results you are getting, this is the show for you! You will walk away with so many tips on how to make smart, intentional decisions in your business.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we have Pri. She’s an award-winning SEO strategist, Google Analytics expert, and Founder of Brilliantly Visible. Pri is based in London, and her work is frequently shared as an example of best practices in action at industry events in the UK. With her signature PROPS method, Pri helps people to build out datasets and create simple, automated metric dashboards that help them answer some of the most important questions they have in their business: what are my results, and how am I getting them? Those are two really helpful things to be mindful of in your business when you are growing from a data place, an analytically-driven place, but also in a place that’s in alignment with how you want to run your business and the decisions that you want to be making. If you have been avoiding looking at your data to see if you are actually getting the results you want, or if you are feeling overwhelmed about how to make decisions based on the results you are getting, this is the show for you! You will walk away with so many tips on how to make smart, intentional decisions in your business.  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2685</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[121c00af-8a86-40fc-bb4e-262a7519a105]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1182923923.mp3?updated=1652134145" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>558: June 2021 Profit Report: Coaching, Tax Strategy and a New Podcast</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/coaching-tax-strategy-and-a-new-podcast-june-profit-report</link>
      <description>It’s official, we’re here for another profit report and it is June 2021! Well, technically it is no longer June but we are just backing up and talking about June, okay? Give us a second to get our accounting together so we can properly tell you about the month! We share these profit reports to give you an inside peek behind the curtain at the thinking, the processes, the strategies, and the decisions made in our business.
We know you guys are nosey. We are nosey. We would love to hear more episodes like this from even more people but this is an opportunity for us to share with you the reasoning behind some of the choices that were made in our company, some strategies that you can implement in yours, based on what we learned and what we did, and it is just honestly a place for us to recap June with you guys!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 27 Jul 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>June 2021 Profit Report: Coaching, Tax Strategy and a New Podcast</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>558</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4c082a22-ae9a-11ec-91b1-87b3901f3024/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>It’s official, we’re here for another profit report and it is June 2021! Well, technically it is no longer June but we are just backing up and talking about June, okay? Give us a second to get our accounting together so we can properly tell you...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It’s official, we’re here for another profit report and it is June 2021! Well, technically it is no longer June but we are just backing up and talking about June, okay? Give us a second to get our accounting together so we can properly tell you about the month! We share these profit reports to give you an inside peek behind the curtain at the thinking, the processes, the strategies, and the decisions made in our business.
We know you guys are nosey. We are nosey. We would love to hear more episodes like this from even more people but this is an opportunity for us to share with you the reasoning behind some of the choices that were made in our company, some strategies that you can implement in yours, based on what we learned and what we did, and it is just honestly a place for us to recap June with you guys!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It’s official, we’re here for another profit report and it is June 2021! Well, technically it is no longer June but we are just backing up and talking about June, okay? Give us a second to get our accounting together so we can properly tell you about the month! We share these profit reports to give you an inside peek behind the curtain at the thinking, the processes, the strategies, and the decisions made in our business.</p><p>We know you guys are nosey. We are nosey. We would love to hear more episodes like this from even more people but this is an opportunity for us to share with you the reasoning behind some of the choices that were made in our company, some strategies that you can implement in yours, based on what we learned and what we did, and it is just honestly a place for us to recap June with you guys!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1876</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3c505127-c05e-46d5-bf32-9ba3686eec0c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1803360753.mp3?updated=1654030388" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>557: Automating and Simplifying Your Business Using Dubsado Workflows with Krystal Clark</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/automating-and-simplifying-your-business-using-dubsado-workflows-with-krystal-clark</link>
      <description>When we say that today’s episode is going to rock your world, we’re not even joking! If you have a client-based business and use Dusado, maybe you have wanted to set up workflows, but been so overwhelmed that you haven’t started, then stop what you're doing and listen to this show with a notebook because Krystal Clark literally breaks every step down! From lead capture to onboarding to delivering to offboarding, she leaves no stone unturned. Krystal even goes so far as to give us five hacks on how she’s using Dubsado differently than what we have heard before! 
Krystal's creative brain takes something that already exists in Dusado and then reworks it to be custom for her clients and you guys. If you do not have Dubsado yet, you can get 50% off for the first year by going to the link at the end of the page. It will rock your world when it comes to infusing beautiful brand and designing the workflow process. A lot of what Krystal talks about, we either have a template that will make it simpler or she gave us new ideas for templates that you best believe are coming out. Please share the workflow that you’re going to get set up because you were inspired by this episode, tag us, and then be sure to also tag Krystal on Instagram.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 22 Jul 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Automating and Simplifying Your Business Using Dubsado Workflows with Krystal Clark</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>557</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4c995d6c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-33b48fce9d48/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>When we say that today’s episode is going to rock your world, we’re not even joking! If you have a client-based business and use Dusado, maybe you have wanted to set up workflows, but been so overwhelmed that you haven’t started, then stop what...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When we say that today’s episode is going to rock your world, we’re not even joking! If you have a client-based business and use Dusado, maybe you have wanted to set up workflows, but been so overwhelmed that you haven’t started, then stop what you're doing and listen to this show with a notebook because Krystal Clark literally breaks every step down! From lead capture to onboarding to delivering to offboarding, she leaves no stone unturned. Krystal even goes so far as to give us five hacks on how she’s using Dubsado differently than what we have heard before! 
Krystal's creative brain takes something that already exists in Dusado and then reworks it to be custom for her clients and you guys. If you do not have Dubsado yet, you can get 50% off for the first year by going to the link at the end of the page. It will rock your world when it comes to infusing beautiful brand and designing the workflow process. A lot of what Krystal talks about, we either have a template that will make it simpler or she gave us new ideas for templates that you best believe are coming out. Please share the workflow that you’re going to get set up because you were inspired by this episode, tag us, and then be sure to also tag Krystal on Instagram.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When we say that today’s episode is going to rock your world, we’re not even joking! If you have a client-based business and use Dusado, maybe you have wanted to set up workflows, but been so overwhelmed that you haven’t started, then stop what you're doing and listen to this show with a notebook because Krystal Clark literally breaks every step down! From lead capture to onboarding to delivering to offboarding, she leaves no stone unturned. Krystal even goes so far as to give us five hacks on how she’s using Dubsado differently than what we have heard before! </p><p>Krystal's creative brain takes something that already exists in Dusado and then reworks it to be custom for her clients and you guys. If you do not have Dubsado yet, you can get 50% off for the first year by going to the link at the end of the page. It will rock your world when it comes to infusing beautiful brand and designing the workflow process. A lot of what Krystal talks about, we either have a template that will make it simpler or she gave us new ideas for templates that you best believe are coming out. Please share the workflow that you’re going to get set up because you were inspired by this episode, tag us, and then be sure to also tag Krystal on Instagram.  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2007</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[bc1d1ffd-aae4-45de-badf-98d85ff127f2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9016439765.mp3?updated=1653427129" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>556: 7 Things You Need to Know to Make the Most of the 5 Days to Launch Challenge</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/7-things-you-need-to-know-to-make-the-most-of-the-5-days-to-launch-challenge</link>
      <description>It is officially Christmas in July here at Boss Project! In case you haven’t heard, we are in the midst of our wildly popular 5 Days to Launch Challenge, which has helped over 10,000 business owners get their products, offers, and big dream ideas out into the world. If you are listening to this and you haven’t signed up yet, head on over to 5daystolaunchchallenge.com to sign up for this completely free program RIGHT NOW! Diving into today’s episode, we share the seven things that you need to know and think about in order to take full advantage of this challenge. We know that any time and energy you give us this week is precious, which is why we want to help you make the most of it.
This program is specifically designed to move you and your business forward by identifying your most viable offer, packaging and selling it, and creating a wow experience for your customers, as well as walking you through your marketing game plan and, of course, the launch itself. In this episode, we cover how selfishness is the thing that will keep you motivated, why you need a Tinder level offer right now, and the best way to use people in order to land more dreamy clients, plus a whole lot more! Tune in to find out everything you need to know to fully benefit from this powerful opportunity to get yourself out there and get started today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 20 Jul 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>7 Things You Need to Know to Make the Most of the 5 Days to Launch Challenge</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>556</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4d3109aa-ae9a-11ec-91b1-0b95bccab74d/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>It is officially Christmas in July here at Boss Project! In case you haven’t heard, we are in the midst of our wildly popular 5 Days to Launch Challenge, which has helped over 10,000 business owners get their products, offers, and big dream ideas...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It is officially Christmas in July here at Boss Project! In case you haven’t heard, we are in the midst of our wildly popular 5 Days to Launch Challenge, which has helped over 10,000 business owners get their products, offers, and big dream ideas out into the world. If you are listening to this and you haven’t signed up yet, head on over to 5daystolaunchchallenge.com to sign up for this completely free program RIGHT NOW! Diving into today’s episode, we share the seven things that you need to know and think about in order to take full advantage of this challenge. We know that any time and energy you give us this week is precious, which is why we want to help you make the most of it.
This program is specifically designed to move you and your business forward by identifying your most viable offer, packaging and selling it, and creating a wow experience for your customers, as well as walking you through your marketing game plan and, of course, the launch itself. In this episode, we cover how selfishness is the thing that will keep you motivated, why you need a Tinder level offer right now, and the best way to use people in order to land more dreamy clients, plus a whole lot more! Tune in to find out everything you need to know to fully benefit from this powerful opportunity to get yourself out there and get started today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It is officially Christmas in July here at Boss Project! In case you haven’t heard, we are in the midst of our wildly popular 5 Days to Launch Challenge, which has helped over 10,000 business owners get their products, offers, and big dream ideas out into the world. If you are listening to this and you haven’t signed up yet, head on over to <a href="http://5daystolaunchchallenge.com/">5daystolaunchchallenge.com</a> to sign up for this completely free program RIGHT NOW! Diving into today’s episode, we share the seven things that you need to know and think about in order to take full advantage of this challenge. We know that any time and energy you give us this week is precious, which is why we want to help you make the most of it.</p><p>This program is specifically designed to move you and your business forward by identifying your most viable offer, packaging and selling it, and creating a wow experience for your customers, as well as walking you through your marketing game plan and, of course, the launch itself. In this episode, we cover how selfishness is the thing that will keep you motivated, why you need a Tinder level offer right now, and the best way to use people in order to land more dreamy clients, plus a whole lot more! Tune in to find out everything you need to know to fully benefit from this powerful opportunity to get yourself out there and get started today!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2121</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[20c7989d-2977-4b0d-994f-0b6185886cf5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1240479160.mp3?updated=1653427012" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>555: Getting Ready to Launch with Parker Stevenson of Evolved Finance</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/getting-ready-to-launch-with-parker-stevenson-of-evolved-finance</link>
      <description>Parker Stevenson is a great friend of ours and someone we love and respect a lot! He has done so much for us and our business in the years that we have been working together with Parker handling all of our bookkeeping. He has already been on the podcast a bunch of times and today he is back to talk about the all-important topic of launching! We get into cash-flowing a launch, how to know when you are ready or not ready, questions and preparation and how to pay yourself when it's all done. So basically we cover all the things you might be thinking about and what better person to ask than a bookkeeper.
Parker is all about helping his clients remain profitable and this conversation will get you into a great headspace for possible launches in the future. We offer tons of free resources in the second half of the show so be sure to stick around for those and Parker gives the inside scoop on many business and how he has seen launches evolve. In his work, he has helped countless small businesses that apply to so much of our audience. So for all that and a whole more on getting your next launch off the ground and into the air, join us as we talk strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 15 Jul 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Getting Ready to Launch with Parker Stevenson of Evolved Finance</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>555</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4dce63da-ae9a-11ec-91b1-3fe02c7b5855/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Parker Stevenson is a great friend of ours and someone we love and respect a lot! He has done so much for us and our business in the years that we have been working together with Parker handling all of our bookkeeping. He has already been on the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Parker Stevenson is a great friend of ours and someone we love and respect a lot! He has done so much for us and our business in the years that we have been working together with Parker handling all of our bookkeeping. He has already been on the podcast a bunch of times and today he is back to talk about the all-important topic of launching! We get into cash-flowing a launch, how to know when you are ready or not ready, questions and preparation and how to pay yourself when it's all done. So basically we cover all the things you might be thinking about and what better person to ask than a bookkeeper.
Parker is all about helping his clients remain profitable and this conversation will get you into a great headspace for possible launches in the future. We offer tons of free resources in the second half of the show so be sure to stick around for those and Parker gives the inside scoop on many business and how he has seen launches evolve. In his work, he has helped countless small businesses that apply to so much of our audience. So for all that and a whole more on getting your next launch off the ground and into the air, join us as we talk strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Parker Stevenson is a great friend of ours and someone we love and respect a lot! He has done so much for us and our business in the years that we have been working together with Parker handling all of our bookkeeping. He has already been on the podcast a bunch of times and today he is back to talk about the all-important topic of launching! We get into cash-flowing a launch, how to know when you are ready or not ready, questions and preparation and how to pay yourself when it's all done. So basically we cover all the things you might be thinking about and what better person to ask than a bookkeeper.</p><p>Parker is all about helping his clients remain profitable and this conversation will get you into a great headspace for possible launches in the future. We offer tons of free resources in the second half of the show so be sure to stick around for those and Parker gives the inside scoop on many business and how he has seen launches evolve. In his work, he has helped countless small businesses that apply to so much of our audience. So for all that and a whole more on getting your next launch off the ground and into the air, join us as we talk strategy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2931</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1ca0b79f-84b8-491c-86a3-0b5c2559c358]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4139163747.mp3?updated=1653426947" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>554: Boss Talk: How Finite Thinking is Boxing You In</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-finite-thinking-might-be-boxing-you-in</link>
      <description>It’s been a while since we’ve done a Boss Talk Strategy Hour Edition of the podcast. Usually, we bring on a guest but, today, it’s just us, and we’re discussing how finite thinking might be boxing you in. Simon Sinek famously tells the story of when Blockbuster’s board of directors viewed Netflix’s subscription model in the early 2000s. The CEO of Blockbuster said, “We must change our subscription model to compete, as streaming services are guaranteed to increase.” He was rejected by the board because Blockbuster earned 12 percent of its annual revenue from late fees and, well, you know the rest of the story. Blockbuster is no more and Netflix is the dominant force in the market.
Why did Blockbuster turn down explosive growth and the chance to remain relevant for just 12 percent of their revenue? Well, by focusing on short-term, fixed goals, they inhibited their growth because they were blind to their long-term vision. Making decisions based on what is working for you right now isn’t the best strategy if you want to continue to innovate and scale your business. While it may seem scary, embracing an infinite mindset and basing your decisions on where you want to be is the key to success in an ever-changing world.
In this episode, we share some of the surprising influencers in your business that could be distracting you from making CEO decisions, how to execute based on where you want to be versus where you are today, and when to shift from finite thinking to future-focused thinking. We also highlight the importance of trusting your intuition, not letting your goals hold you back, and taking your future into your own hands, so make sure to tune in today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 13 Jul 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Boss Talk: How Finite Thinking is Boxing You In</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>554</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4e5d133c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-1b97d3091b50/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>It’s been a while since we’ve done a Boss Talk Strategy Hour Edition of the podcast. Usually, we bring on a guest but, today, it’s just us, and we’re discussing how finite thinking might be boxing you in. Simon Sinek famously tells the story...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It’s been a while since we’ve done a Boss Talk Strategy Hour Edition of the podcast. Usually, we bring on a guest but, today, it’s just us, and we’re discussing how finite thinking might be boxing you in. Simon Sinek famously tells the story of when Blockbuster’s board of directors viewed Netflix’s subscription model in the early 2000s. The CEO of Blockbuster said, “We must change our subscription model to compete, as streaming services are guaranteed to increase.” He was rejected by the board because Blockbuster earned 12 percent of its annual revenue from late fees and, well, you know the rest of the story. Blockbuster is no more and Netflix is the dominant force in the market.
Why did Blockbuster turn down explosive growth and the chance to remain relevant for just 12 percent of their revenue? Well, by focusing on short-term, fixed goals, they inhibited their growth because they were blind to their long-term vision. Making decisions based on what is working for you right now isn’t the best strategy if you want to continue to innovate and scale your business. While it may seem scary, embracing an infinite mindset and basing your decisions on where you want to be is the key to success in an ever-changing world.
In this episode, we share some of the surprising influencers in your business that could be distracting you from making CEO decisions, how to execute based on where you want to be versus where you are today, and when to shift from finite thinking to future-focused thinking. We also highlight the importance of trusting your intuition, not letting your goals hold you back, and taking your future into your own hands, so make sure to tune in today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It’s been a while since we’ve done a Boss Talk Strategy Hour Edition of the podcast. Usually, we bring on a guest but, today, it’s just us, and we’re discussing how finite thinking might be boxing you in. Simon Sinek famously tells the story of when Blockbuster’s board of directors viewed Netflix’s subscription model in the early 2000s. The CEO of Blockbuster said, “We must change our subscription model to compete, as streaming services are guaranteed to increase.” He was rejected by the board because Blockbuster earned 12 percent of its annual revenue from late fees and, well, you know the rest of the story. Blockbuster is no more and Netflix is the dominant force in the market.</p><p>Why did Blockbuster turn down explosive growth and the chance to remain relevant for just 12 percent of their revenue? Well, by focusing on short-term, fixed goals, they inhibited their growth because they were blind to their long-term vision. Making decisions based on what is working for you right now isn’t the best strategy if you want to continue to innovate and scale your business. While it may seem scary, embracing an infinite mindset and basing your decisions on where you want to be is the key to success in an ever-changing world.</p><p>In this episode, we share some of the surprising influencers in your business that could be distracting you from making CEO decisions, how to execute based on where you want to be versus where you are today, and when to shift from finite thinking to future-focused thinking. We also highlight the importance of trusting your intuition, not letting your goals hold you back, and taking your future into your own hands, so make sure to tune in today!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2128</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[92ae3a04-608d-452b-916e-f07f0a881c60]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1940559187.mp3?updated=1652134035" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>553: Identifying Your Value Proposition and Starting Your Service Based Business with Courtney Chaal</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/identifying-your-value-proposition-and-starting-your-service-based-business-with-courtney-chaal</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we have Courtney Chaal. She is a copywriter turned business coach obsessed with making complex concepts (like business models and sales copy) simple and tangible to help regular people achieve big results. She is a big believer in the power of offering a signature service as the best way to start making a full-time income online. And services are the theme for today’s episode. If you have ever thought about offering something you kind of, sort of, maybe know how to do to some people you kind of, maybe, sort of like, then this episode is going to be a really good framework for how to get started. We get into Courtney’s first clients, how she niched down to identify her value proposition, and how you can do the same thing. Courtney shares tips she would give new service providers after they have just landed their first client, and advice on what to do next. We also talk about something we’ve never mentioned on the podcast before: the dad bod level of business, so if you want to find out what that’s all about, make sure you stay tuned. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 08 Jul 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Identifying Your Value Proposition and Starting Your Service Based Business with Courtney Chaal</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>553</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4f04622c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-1755eb7a6d0d/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we have Courtney Chaal. She is a copywriter turned business coach obsessed with making complex concepts (like business models and sales copy) simple and tangible to help regular people achieve big results. She is a big believer...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we have Courtney Chaal. She is a copywriter turned business coach obsessed with making complex concepts (like business models and sales copy) simple and tangible to help regular people achieve big results. She is a big believer in the power of offering a signature service as the best way to start making a full-time income online. And services are the theme for today’s episode. If you have ever thought about offering something you kind of, sort of, maybe know how to do to some people you kind of, maybe, sort of like, then this episode is going to be a really good framework for how to get started. We get into Courtney’s first clients, how she niched down to identify her value proposition, and how you can do the same thing. Courtney shares tips she would give new service providers after they have just landed their first client, and advice on what to do next. We also talk about something we’ve never mentioned on the podcast before: the dad bod level of business, so if you want to find out what that’s all about, make sure you stay tuned. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we have Courtney Chaal. She is a copywriter turned business coach obsessed with making complex concepts (like business models and sales copy) simple and tangible to help regular people achieve big results. She is a big believer in the power of offering a signature service as the best way to start making a full-time income online. And services are the theme for today’s episode. If you have ever thought about offering something you kind of, sort of, maybe know how to do to some people you kind of, maybe, sort of like, then this episode is going to be a really good framework for how to get started. We get into Courtney’s first clients, how she niched down to identify her value proposition, and how you can do the same thing. Courtney shares tips she would give new service providers after they have just landed their first client, and advice on what to do next. We also talk about something we’ve never mentioned on the podcast before: the dad bod level of business, so if you want to find out what that’s all about, make sure you stay tuned. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2559</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[458f434e-31a9-4595-b4b9-f1aa3f3a1ed9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9277999669.mp3?updated=1652133813" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>552: Pricing, Packaging and the Ultimate Value You're Providing</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/pricing-packaging-and-the-ultimate-value-youre-providing</link>
      <description>One of the things that we see creative entrepreneurs doing consistently is assuming that they know what their potential client or customer thinks about the value of what they offer. These kinds of assumptions ultimately leave you with a very messy blueprint for overcoming your own limiting beliefs and appropriately pricing your digital products and services. Today on the Strategy Hour Podcast, we want to address what really makes up the value of what you offer and how your potential clients or customers see what you offer because, believe it or not, they are not one and the same thing!
How can we provide the utmost value, but also, who is deciding what that value is? Whose responsibility it is to see X results or receive X benefit? As creators, we put so much pressure on ourselves and tie our identity and self-worth into the results that our clients and customers are getting. We also equate our feelings of validation with whether or not we believe that an offering is any good. This is certainly a big unlearning that both Abagail and Emylee have had to undertake over the past few years!
Tune in as we break down what really goes into pricing and packaging, how pricing correlates with value, and where your clients actually find the most value. We also uncover the main thing you are missing when packaging your offers, specifically when it comes to digital goods and services as opposed to tangible products, and the unexpected way that your clients get exactly what they want. If you struggle with deciding on your big-ticket items, then this is the episode for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 06 Jul 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Pricing, Packaging and the Ultimate Value You're Providing</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>552</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4fc92c24-ae9a-11ec-91b1-e731380b9919/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>One of the things that we see creative entrepreneurs doing consistently is assuming that they know what their potential client or customer thinks about the value of what they offer. These kinds of assumptions ultimately leave you with a very messy...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>One of the things that we see creative entrepreneurs doing consistently is assuming that they know what their potential client or customer thinks about the value of what they offer. These kinds of assumptions ultimately leave you with a very messy blueprint for overcoming your own limiting beliefs and appropriately pricing your digital products and services. Today on the Strategy Hour Podcast, we want to address what really makes up the value of what you offer and how your potential clients or customers see what you offer because, believe it or not, they are not one and the same thing!
How can we provide the utmost value, but also, who is deciding what that value is? Whose responsibility it is to see X results or receive X benefit? As creators, we put so much pressure on ourselves and tie our identity and self-worth into the results that our clients and customers are getting. We also equate our feelings of validation with whether or not we believe that an offering is any good. This is certainly a big unlearning that both Abagail and Emylee have had to undertake over the past few years!
Tune in as we break down what really goes into pricing and packaging, how pricing correlates with value, and where your clients actually find the most value. We also uncover the main thing you are missing when packaging your offers, specifically when it comes to digital goods and services as opposed to tangible products, and the unexpected way that your clients get exactly what they want. If you struggle with deciding on your big-ticket items, then this is the episode for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>One of the things that we see creative entrepreneurs doing consistently is assuming that they know what their potential client or customer thinks about the value of what they offer. These kinds of assumptions ultimately leave you with a very messy blueprint for overcoming your own limiting beliefs and appropriately pricing your digital products and services. Today on the Strategy Hour Podcast, we want to address what really makes up the value of what you offer and how your potential clients or customers see what you offer because, believe it or not, they are not one and the same thing!</p><p>How can we provide the utmost value, but also, who is deciding what that value is? Whose responsibility it is to see X results or receive X benefit? As creators, we put so much pressure on ourselves and tie our identity and self-worth into the results that our clients and customers are getting. We also equate our feelings of validation with whether or not we believe that an offering is any good. This is certainly a big unlearning that both Abagail and Emylee have had to undertake over the past few years!</p><p>Tune in as we break down what really goes into pricing and packaging, how pricing correlates with value, and where your clients actually find the most value. We also uncover the main thing you are missing when packaging your offers, specifically when it comes to digital goods and services as opposed to tangible products, and the unexpected way that your clients get exactly what they want. If you struggle with deciding on your big-ticket items, then this is the episode for you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2232</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7553cb7f-05ba-4461-a0fe-1e85f48e36a9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8913362453.mp3?updated=1652133668" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>551: Nearly 500k Followers &amp; $100k Generated from TikTok in 6 months with Alisha Cohen</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/nearly-500k-followers-100k-generated-from-tiktok-in-6-months-with-alisha-cohen-of-lish-creative</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we are joined by Alisha Cohen, Founder and Creative Director of LISH Creative. For the last five years, the company has produced photo and video content for some of the world’s largest brands, including Dunkin’, Nickelodeon, Burt’s Bees, Nestlé, Microsoft, and Cannon, among others. In 2020, Alisha launched her signature photography course, Slay the Flatlay, and currently shares photo tips and tricks with her Instagram and her TikTok audience, which has grown to nearly 500,000 followers!
That is what we are talking about today; we are making this episode all about TikTok! It’s one of those totally mysterious social media platforms to us, and we love to hear the perspectives of other creatives. In today’s episode, Alisha shares so many amazing tips on how she thinks about TikTok, what made her sign up, even though she was a year “late” to the fad, how she has made it work for her business and, most importantly, how much money it has made her in this year alone.
If you have ever considered using TikTok or Instagram Reels in your marketing strategy, this is the episode for you! Tuning in, you’ll learn some actionable and tangible ways that you can start thinking about these platforms and how to use them in order to actually make money, so make sure not to miss this informative and practical guide to help you make TikTok work for your business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 01 Jul 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Nearly 500k Followers &amp; $100k Generated from TikTok in 6 months with Alisha Cohen</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>551</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/50521c96-ae9a-11ec-91b1-03fdbf4c43c1/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we are joined by Alisha Cohen, Founder and Creative Director of LISH Creative. For the last five years, the company has produced photo and video content for some of the world’s largest brands, including Dunkin’, Nickelodeon,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we are joined by Alisha Cohen, Founder and Creative Director of LISH Creative. For the last five years, the company has produced photo and video content for some of the world’s largest brands, including Dunkin’, Nickelodeon, Burt’s Bees, Nestlé, Microsoft, and Cannon, among others. In 2020, Alisha launched her signature photography course, Slay the Flatlay, and currently shares photo tips and tricks with her Instagram and her TikTok audience, which has grown to nearly 500,000 followers!
That is what we are talking about today; we are making this episode all about TikTok! It’s one of those totally mysterious social media platforms to us, and we love to hear the perspectives of other creatives. In today’s episode, Alisha shares so many amazing tips on how she thinks about TikTok, what made her sign up, even though she was a year “late” to the fad, how she has made it work for her business and, most importantly, how much money it has made her in this year alone.
If you have ever considered using TikTok or Instagram Reels in your marketing strategy, this is the episode for you! Tuning in, you’ll learn some actionable and tangible ways that you can start thinking about these platforms and how to use them in order to actually make money, so make sure not to miss this informative and practical guide to help you make TikTok work for your business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we are joined by Alisha Cohen, Founder and Creative Director of LISH Creative. For the last five years, the company has produced photo and video content for some of the world’s largest brands, including Dunkin’, Nickelodeon, Burt’s Bees, Nestlé, Microsoft, and Cannon, among others. In 2020, Alisha launched her signature photography course, Slay the Flatlay, and currently shares photo tips and tricks with her Instagram and her TikTok audience, which has grown to nearly 500,000 followers!</p><p>That is what we are talking about today; we are making this episode all about TikTok! It’s one of those totally mysterious social media platforms to us, and we love to hear the perspectives of other creatives. In today’s episode, Alisha shares so many amazing tips on how she thinks about TikTok, what made her sign up, even though she was a year “late” to the fad, how she has made it work for her business and, most importantly, how much money it has made her in this year alone.</p><p>If you have ever considered using TikTok or Instagram Reels in your marketing strategy, this is the episode for you! Tuning in, you’ll learn some actionable and tangible ways that you can start thinking about these platforms and how to use them in order to actually make money, so make sure not to miss this informative and practical guide to help you make TikTok work for your business!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2420</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[33c8d4a4-a195-4251-a8c9-77b555ba6902]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4525360759.mp3?updated=1652212254" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>550: May 2021 Profit Report: Hiring for 5 New Roles &amp; Heading Into a Season of Growth</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/may-2021-profit-report-hiring-for-5-new-roles-heading-into-a-season-of-growth</link>
      <description>Welcome to our 550th episode! We are moving into a season of growth and, with that, there are some big things that we have had to start doing and thinking about, both when it comes to staffing, projects, and programs and how we want to set our business up for success in the long term. May was a month of new faces as we brought our social media in-house, which necessitated hiring for a number of new and important roles. This has been an interesting lesson for Abagail and Emylee in finding a happy balance between delegating and ensuring their vision is communicated, resulting in new routines, rhythms, and collaborative efforts. 
In today’s episode, we share not only the five new hires we made and how we're growing, but also our product performance and how our expenses impacted our profit, plus SO many sneak peeks that it's going to ABSOLUTELY BLOW YOUR MIND! Make sure not to miss this jam-packed Profit Report for May 2021!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 29 Jun 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>May 2021 Profit Report: Hiring for 5 New Roles &amp; Heading Into a Season of Growth</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>550</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/5116291a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-4f22deec4c95/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome to our 550th episode! We are moving into a season of growth and, with that, there are some big things that we have had to start doing and thinking about, both when it comes to staffing, projects, and programs and how we want to set our...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to our 550th episode! We are moving into a season of growth and, with that, there are some big things that we have had to start doing and thinking about, both when it comes to staffing, projects, and programs and how we want to set our business up for success in the long term. May was a month of new faces as we brought our social media in-house, which necessitated hiring for a number of new and important roles. This has been an interesting lesson for Abagail and Emylee in finding a happy balance between delegating and ensuring their vision is communicated, resulting in new routines, rhythms, and collaborative efforts. 
In today’s episode, we share not only the five new hires we made and how we're growing, but also our product performance and how our expenses impacted our profit, plus SO many sneak peeks that it's going to ABSOLUTELY BLOW YOUR MIND! Make sure not to miss this jam-packed Profit Report for May 2021!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to our 550th episode! We are moving into a season of growth and, with that, there are some big things that we have had to start doing and thinking about, both when it comes to staffing, projects, and programs and how we want to set our business up for success in the long term. May was a month of new faces as we brought our social media in-house, which necessitated hiring for a number of new and important roles. This has been an interesting lesson for Abagail and Emylee in finding a happy balance between delegating and ensuring their vision is communicated, resulting in new routines, rhythms, and collaborative efforts. </p><p>In today’s episode, we share not only the five new hires we made and how we're growing, but also our product performance and how our expenses impacted our profit, plus SO many sneak peeks that it's going to ABSOLUTELY BLOW YOUR MIND! Make sure not to miss this jam-packed Profit Report for May 2021!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2055</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[076b8d10-8f74-4548-b1cf-220fc6c3a001]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5229027647.mp3?updated=1656689453" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>549: Creating a Give Back Program in Your Business That's Sustainable with Megan Hale</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-a-sustainable-give-back-program-for-your-business-with-megan-hale</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, please join us in welcoming Megan Hale. Megan is a business strategist and money mentor for freedom-driven entrepreneurs who are ready to step into #feelgoodmoney and create sustainable, aligned business growth. With a special emphasis on empowering women-identifying entrepreneurs into their next level of growth, she regularly podcasts on the intersections of business, money, psychology, and leadership with a focus on leveraging entrepreneurship to build a more equitable world.
And speaking of making the world a better place, this episode is all about giving back! Listen in as Megan outlines how to build giving into your future, and not only how you can integrate it into your business but how to do it sustainably too. During the course of this conversation, you’ll find out how you can grow your business through giving back, if that is in alignment with your business goals, of course. Megan breaks down what a sustainable percentage is, how you can logistically set that up within your finances, and how to find causes to give to, as well as her suggestions for some important questions to ask yourself along the way.
For everything you’ve ever wanted to know about having an even bigger impact within your business and giving back, make sure not to miss this thoughtful and inspiring episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 24 Jun 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating a Give Back Program in Your Business That's Sustainable with Megan Hale</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>549</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/51a06d78-ae9a-11ec-91b1-ff4b1137d97e/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, please join us in welcoming Megan Hale. Megan is a business strategist and money mentor for freedom-driven entrepreneurs who are ready to step into #feelgoodmoney and create sustainable, aligned business growth. With a special...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, please join us in welcoming Megan Hale. Megan is a business strategist and money mentor for freedom-driven entrepreneurs who are ready to step into #feelgoodmoney and create sustainable, aligned business growth. With a special emphasis on empowering women-identifying entrepreneurs into their next level of growth, she regularly podcasts on the intersections of business, money, psychology, and leadership with a focus on leveraging entrepreneurship to build a more equitable world.
And speaking of making the world a better place, this episode is all about giving back! Listen in as Megan outlines how to build giving into your future, and not only how you can integrate it into your business but how to do it sustainably too. During the course of this conversation, you’ll find out how you can grow your business through giving back, if that is in alignment with your business goals, of course. Megan breaks down what a sustainable percentage is, how you can logistically set that up within your finances, and how to find causes to give to, as well as her suggestions for some important questions to ask yourself along the way.
For everything you’ve ever wanted to know about having an even bigger impact within your business and giving back, make sure not to miss this thoughtful and inspiring episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, please join us in welcoming Megan Hale. Megan is a business strategist and money mentor for freedom-driven entrepreneurs who are ready to step into #feelgoodmoney and create sustainable, aligned business growth. With a special emphasis on empowering women-identifying entrepreneurs into their next level of growth, she regularly podcasts on the intersections of business, money, psychology, and leadership with a focus on leveraging entrepreneurship to build a more equitable world.</p><p>And speaking of making the world a better place, this episode is all about giving back! Listen in as Megan outlines how to build giving into your future, and not only how you can integrate it into your business but how to do it sustainably too. During the course of this conversation, you’ll find out how you can grow your business through giving back, if that is in alignment with your business goals, of course. Megan breaks down what a sustainable percentage is, how you can logistically set that up within your finances, and how to find causes to give to, as well as her suggestions for some important questions to ask yourself along the way.</p><p>For everything you’ve ever wanted to know about having an even bigger impact within your business <em>and</em> giving back, make sure not to miss this thoughtful and inspiring episode!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2487</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3d6850b7-2ee2-4420-913c-b459f33cd440]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5912718518.mp3?updated=1652212100" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>548: Your Partner Wants to Quit Their Job: Here's What Your Business Needs to Know</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/your-partner-wants-to-quit-their-job-heres-what-your-business-needs-to-know</link>
      <description>We are really excited to chat today because we are sure some of you have had this situation pop up in your lives, you maybe have already dealt with this pre-pandemic, and we have a handful of small business owner friends in the same situation too. Emylee has had a few people ask if they can pick her brain about the fact that their partner realized last year that their work environments were more toxic than they were willing to put up with or the benefits aren’t worth it, and that their partners’ small business is where it is at. So, people are wondering what they need to do to step up their business so their partner can leave their job. We love this question because it feels like a big scary goal for a lot of people, but if it is not voiced by both people in the relationship, it does not get worked on as much. So, Emylee said to Abby that she wants to talk about how Abby’s husband managed to leave his job two years before COVID. So, what kinds of things did they do leading up to that, and now that they are in phase two of having him home, how does it look different? If you are a business owner and this suggestion has been brought to you by your partner, what guidance can we give you, in your business?  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 22 Jun 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Your Partner Wants to Quit Their Job: Here's What Your Business Needs to Know</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>548</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/52269006-ae9a-11ec-91b1-dfae1aab7ea7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are really excited to chat today because we are sure some of you have had this situation pop up in your lives, you maybe have already dealt with this pre-pandemic, and we have a handful of small business owner friends in the same situation too....</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are really excited to chat today because we are sure some of you have had this situation pop up in your lives, you maybe have already dealt with this pre-pandemic, and we have a handful of small business owner friends in the same situation too. Emylee has had a few people ask if they can pick her brain about the fact that their partner realized last year that their work environments were more toxic than they were willing to put up with or the benefits aren’t worth it, and that their partners’ small business is where it is at. So, people are wondering what they need to do to step up their business so their partner can leave their job. We love this question because it feels like a big scary goal for a lot of people, but if it is not voiced by both people in the relationship, it does not get worked on as much. So, Emylee said to Abby that she wants to talk about how Abby’s husband managed to leave his job two years before COVID. So, what kinds of things did they do leading up to that, and now that they are in phase two of having him home, how does it look different? If you are a business owner and this suggestion has been brought to you by your partner, what guidance can we give you, in your business?  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are really excited to chat today because we are sure some of you have had this situation pop up in your lives, you maybe have already dealt with this pre-pandemic, and we have a handful of small business owner friends in the same situation too. Emylee has had a few people ask if they can pick her brain about the fact that their partner realized last year that their work environments were more toxic than they were willing to put up with or the benefits aren’t worth it, and that their partners’ small business is where it is at. So, people are wondering what they need to do to step up their business so their partner can leave their job. We love this question because it feels like a big scary goal for a lot of people, but if it is not voiced by both people in the relationship, it does not get worked on as much. So, Emylee said to Abby that she wants to talk about how Abby’s husband managed to leave his job two years before COVID. So, what kinds of things did they do leading up to that, and now that they are in phase two of having him home, how does it look different? If you are a business owner and this suggestion has been brought to you by your partner, what guidance can we give you, in your business?  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2461</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ae7e61d3-c582-4d31-8e2d-61ce75602d8b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4676613039.mp3?updated=1656689397" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>547: Creating a Right Now Routine for Creatives, Neurodivergents and Avoidants with Shunta Grant</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-a-right-now-routine-for-creatives-neurodivergents-and-avoidants-with-shunta-grant</link>
      <description>Today on the show we welcome Shunta Gray, an incredible soul who helps women live lives with intention. Through her company, Best Today, Shunta equips women with resources to be both proactive and intentional with their time. Shunta begins with time because it is the container that holds our days in our lives. She also offers a Best Today Guide, which is a 14-week undated guide that helps women plan their days with intention through her signature process, The Right Now Routine, which is what we are talking about today — how to create realistic routines that last.We are super excited to break down this conversation for you today, while Abby shares her journey of going through the program and how it deeply impacted her life, and the examples of how she has used it. Then Emylee shares about the program and why she has avoided going through it because of her misconceptions about routine and what it might mean for her in her day. Shunta does a really amazing job breaking down those hesitations and how routines can still work for creatives, for neurodivergents, and for people who don’t want a lot of structure in their day. We know you will get a lot of great ideas from this episode, so stick to the very end to find out more about all of Shunta’s amazing resources that you can dive into today to learn how to create a routine that’s perfect for you!
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 17 Jun 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating a Right Now Routine for Creatives, Neurodivergents and Avoidants with Shunta Grant</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>547</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/52cded92-ae9a-11ec-91b1-3339277c0290/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we welcome Shunta Gray, an incredible soul who helps women live lives with intention. Through her company, Best Today, Shunta equips women with resources to be both proactive and intentional with their time. Shunta begins with time...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we welcome Shunta Gray, an incredible soul who helps women live lives with intention. Through her company, Best Today, Shunta equips women with resources to be both proactive and intentional with their time. Shunta begins with time because it is the container that holds our days in our lives. She also offers a Best Today Guide, which is a 14-week undated guide that helps women plan their days with intention through her signature process, The Right Now Routine, which is what we are talking about today — how to create realistic routines that last.We are super excited to break down this conversation for you today, while Abby shares her journey of going through the program and how it deeply impacted her life, and the examples of how she has used it. Then Emylee shares about the program and why she has avoided going through it because of her misconceptions about routine and what it might mean for her in her day. Shunta does a really amazing job breaking down those hesitations and how routines can still work for creatives, for neurodivergents, and for people who don’t want a lot of structure in their day. We know you will get a lot of great ideas from this episode, so stick to the very end to find out more about all of Shunta’s amazing resources that you can dive into today to learn how to create a routine that’s perfect for you!
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we welcome Shunta Gray, an incredible soul who helps women live lives with intention. Through her company, Best Today, Shunta equips women with resources to be both proactive and intentional with their time. Shunta begins with time because it is the container that holds our days in our lives. She also offers a Best Today Guide, which is a 14-week undated guide that helps women plan their days with intention through her signature process, The Right Now Routine, which is what we are talking about today — how to create realistic routines that last.We are super excited to break down this conversation for you today, while Abby shares her journey of going through the program and how it deeply impacted her life, and the examples of how she has used it. Then Emylee shares about the program and why she has avoided going through it because of her misconceptions about routine and what it might mean for her in her day. Shunta does a really amazing job breaking down those hesitations and how routines can still work for creatives, for neurodivergents, and for people who don’t want a lot of structure in their day. We know you will get a lot of great ideas from this episode, so stick to the very end to find out more about all of Shunta’s amazing resources that you can dive into today to learn how to create a routine that’s perfect for you!</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2741</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ebd59cd5-609b-4f2b-9ad3-2640836cbe5e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7022279343.mp3?updated=1652211987" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>546: What Does It Mean to Earn a Full-Time Income without Putting in Full-Time Hours</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-you-can-have-time-and-space-freedom-right-now</link>
      <description>So, we just wrapped up the recording for our most popular webinar ever, Day Job to Dream Job. The discussion sparked some further conversations between us and some of our students about the whole ‘you can earn a full-time income without putting in full-time hours.’ We have the belief that you can do this from day one, and that it doesn't have to just be a financial milestone you reward yourself with. But the time and space freedom you get when you work for yourself looks different when you're just getting started versus when you are two years in, six years in, and even further in than that. So, today, we want to break down what we mean by that and dive into what we truly think is needed for the brain to rewire that thought process. We also give a sneak peek of what it looks like when you chase after free time, and how you choose to fill that free time. Because there are some of us who simply fill the free time we work so hard for with just more work!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 15 Jun 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Does It Mean to Earn a Full-Time Income without Putting in Full-Time Hours</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>546</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/53763b96-ae9a-11ec-91b1-57bd76d1a005/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>So, we just wrapped up the recording for our most popular webinar ever, Day Job to Dream Job. The discussion sparked some further conversations between us and some of our students about the whole ‘you can earn a full-time income without putting in...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>So, we just wrapped up the recording for our most popular webinar ever, Day Job to Dream Job. The discussion sparked some further conversations between us and some of our students about the whole ‘you can earn a full-time income without putting in full-time hours.’ We have the belief that you can do this from day one, and that it doesn't have to just be a financial milestone you reward yourself with. But the time and space freedom you get when you work for yourself looks different when you're just getting started versus when you are two years in, six years in, and even further in than that. So, today, we want to break down what we mean by that and dive into what we truly think is needed for the brain to rewire that thought process. We also give a sneak peek of what it looks like when you chase after free time, and how you choose to fill that free time. Because there are some of us who simply fill the free time we work so hard for with just more work!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>So, we just wrapped up the recording for our most popular webinar ever, Day Job to Dream Job. The discussion sparked some further conversations between us and some of our students about the whole ‘you can earn a full-time income without putting in full-time hours.’ We have the belief that you can do this from day one, and that it doesn't have to just be a financial milestone you reward yourself with. But the time and space freedom you get when you work for yourself looks different when you're just getting started versus when you are two years in, six years in, and even further in than that. So, today, we want to break down what we mean by that and dive into what we truly think is needed for the brain to rewire that thought process. We also give a sneak peek of what it looks like when you chase after free time, and how you choose to fill that free time. Because there are some of us who simply fill the free time we work so hard for with just more work!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2528</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[384f858a-c1e8-40dd-8697-d6c440d9899e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6022675519.mp3?updated=1652211802" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>545: What's Working for Pinterest in 2021 with Melanie Fountain</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/whats-working-for-pinterest-in-2021-with-melanie-fountain</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Melanie Fountain. She is a Pinterest coach and strategist. She started her business in January 2019 as a virtual assistant and quickly found a passion and talent in growing her clients’ businesses through Pinterest marketing. We are going to help you learn how to do that today! If you are creating content in any shape or form then you need to know what is working for Pinterest in 2021. 
We are doing an update for all the best Pinterest strategies that you can manage in your content, so you can create new routines while you are creating that amazing content. We talk about all the new stuff including video pins and story pins, how to grow your followers on Pinterest, and why that might start to matter now when it hasn't over the last couple of years. Our conversation also covers everything else that you can do to make sure that you are taking advantage of the amazing platform that is Pinterest!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 10 Jun 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What's Working for Pinterest in 2021 with Melanie Fountain</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>545</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/541a85b6-ae9a-11ec-91b1-47163ab718bd/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Melanie Fountain. She is a Pinterest coach and strategist. She started her business in January 2019 as a virtual assistant and quickly found a passion and talent in growing her clients’ businesses through Pinterest...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Melanie Fountain. She is a Pinterest coach and strategist. She started her business in January 2019 as a virtual assistant and quickly found a passion and talent in growing her clients’ businesses through Pinterest marketing. We are going to help you learn how to do that today! If you are creating content in any shape or form then you need to know what is working for Pinterest in 2021. 
We are doing an update for all the best Pinterest strategies that you can manage in your content, so you can create new routines while you are creating that amazing content. We talk about all the new stuff including video pins and story pins, how to grow your followers on Pinterest, and why that might start to matter now when it hasn't over the last couple of years. Our conversation also covers everything else that you can do to make sure that you are taking advantage of the amazing platform that is Pinterest!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Melanie Fountain. She is a Pinterest coach and strategist. She started her business in January 2019 as a virtual assistant and quickly found a passion and talent in growing her clients’ businesses through Pinterest marketing. We are going to help you learn how to do that today! If you are creating content in any shape or form then you need to know what is working for Pinterest in 2021. </p><p>We are doing an update for all the best Pinterest strategies that you can manage in your content, so you can create new routines while you are creating that amazing content. We talk about all the new stuff including video pins and story pins, how to grow your followers on Pinterest, and why that might start to matter now when it hasn't over the last couple of years. Our conversation also covers everything else that you can do to make sure that you are taking advantage of the amazing platform that is Pinterest!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2518</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[087daccf-c303-4c8a-b44c-a2fb7e42f00e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4808640606.mp3?updated=1656689328" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>544: Mindset Shifts Required to Move into Growth</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/mindset-shifts-required-to-move-into-growth</link>
      <description>If you have been listening to us for a minute, you will have heard us alluding to the fact that we are headed toward a growth phase of our business and our lives. All of the things! We were having a conversation the other day about why we are ready for this now versus when we weren't, what's different, and what we think we need to shift in order to do it. One of the things that came up is that we realized that we had perfected delegating tasks in our business that stabilize it, make it do the thing that it's meant to be doing, and not let it slip back and fall. On the flip side, what we haven't done and what we don't know how to do yet is delegate, hire for, plan and help other people grow the business. So, we talked about this the other day, when just a couple of years ago, if one of us was out of the office, there would be a direct impact on our sales because there would be less posting on social and less content creation, which means we would have to plan and account for that. We grew out of that phase, so now one of us can head off for a week, and it does not impact our sales at all! This is fantastic, but the next phase for us is about more than just being able to go on vacation and see the business grow; it's about not having to be one of the two brains that contribute to the growth.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 08 Jun 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Mindset Shifts Required to Move into Growth</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>544</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/54d11024-ae9a-11ec-91b1-530a68b3daf8/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you have been listening to us for a minute, you will have heard us alluding to the fact that we are headed toward a growth phase of our business and our lives. All of the things! We were having a conversation the other day about why we are ready...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you have been listening to us for a minute, you will have heard us alluding to the fact that we are headed toward a growth phase of our business and our lives. All of the things! We were having a conversation the other day about why we are ready for this now versus when we weren't, what's different, and what we think we need to shift in order to do it. One of the things that came up is that we realized that we had perfected delegating tasks in our business that stabilize it, make it do the thing that it's meant to be doing, and not let it slip back and fall. On the flip side, what we haven't done and what we don't know how to do yet is delegate, hire for, plan and help other people grow the business. So, we talked about this the other day, when just a couple of years ago, if one of us was out of the office, there would be a direct impact on our sales because there would be less posting on social and less content creation, which means we would have to plan and account for that. We grew out of that phase, so now one of us can head off for a week, and it does not impact our sales at all! This is fantastic, but the next phase for us is about more than just being able to go on vacation and see the business grow; it's about not having to be one of the two brains that contribute to the growth.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you have been listening to us for a minute, you will have heard us alluding to the fact that we are headed toward a growth phase of our business and our lives. All of the things! We were having a conversation the other day about why we are ready for this now versus when we weren't, what's different, and what we think we need to shift in order to do it. One of the things that came up is that we realized that we had perfected delegating tasks in our business that stabilize it, make it do the thing that it's meant to be doing, and not let it slip back and fall. On the flip side, what we haven't done and what we don't know how to do yet is delegate, hire for, plan and help other people grow the business. So, we talked about this the other day, when just a couple of years ago, if one of us was out of the office, there would be a direct impact on our sales because there would be less posting on social and less content creation, which means we would have to plan and account for that. We grew out of that phase, so now one of us can head off for a week, and it does not impact our sales at all! This is fantastic, but the next phase for us is about more than just being able to go on vacation and see the business grow; it's about not having to be one of the two brains that contribute to the growth.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2260</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9063de84-805e-49b7-81b0-7c0c74323643]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3361151903.mp3?updated=1656689271" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>543: You Can Have a More Profitable Business Using These Three Golden Rules With Kathleen Cutler</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/you-can-have-a-more-profitable-business-using-these-three-golden-rules-with-kathleen-cutler</link>
      <description>Today on the show we are joined by the wonderful and inspiring Kathleen Cutler! Kathleen has worked behind the scenes on multiple million-dollar online stores with her main area of focus being jewelers. She has coached over a hundred different jewelers to help them achieve their business goals and get their products selling online, but Kathleen’s expertise extends so much further than just jewelry! She wants to help everyone selling products or even services online to extend the experience of the customer and drive sales through the type of connections that you would usually associate with a physical retail space. 
Along with all her incredible business skills, Kathleen is also an awesome speaker who will be joining us at our upcoming Product Powerhouse Summit! Make sure to go get your free ticket immediately! She will be one of many great speakers talking about the world of online product sales and marketing and getting your store busy and making that money! So without further ado, let’s get into today’s strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 03 Jun 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>You Can Have a More Profitable Business Using These Three Golden Rules With Kathleen Cutler</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>543</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/555c8c8a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-c3bc313b0fc1/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Kathleen wants to help everyone selling products or even services online to extend the experience of the customer...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we are joined by the wonderful and inspiring Kathleen Cutler! Kathleen has worked behind the scenes on multiple million-dollar online stores with her main area of focus being jewelers. She has coached over a hundred different jewelers to help them achieve their business goals and get their products selling online, but Kathleen’s expertise extends so much further than just jewelry! She wants to help everyone selling products or even services online to extend the experience of the customer and drive sales through the type of connections that you would usually associate with a physical retail space. 
Along with all her incredible business skills, Kathleen is also an awesome speaker who will be joining us at our upcoming Product Powerhouse Summit! Make sure to go get your free ticket immediately! She will be one of many great speakers talking about the world of online product sales and marketing and getting your store busy and making that money! So without further ado, let’s get into today’s strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we are joined by the wonderful and inspiring Kathleen Cutler! Kathleen has worked behind the scenes on multiple million-dollar online stores with her main area of focus being jewelers. She has coached over a hundred different jewelers to help them achieve their business goals and get their products selling online, but Kathleen’s expertise extends so much further than just jewelry! She wants to help everyone selling products or even services online to extend the experience of the customer and drive sales through the type of connections that you would usually associate with a physical retail space. </p><p>Along with all her incredible business skills, Kathleen is also an awesome speaker who will be joining us at our upcoming Product Powerhouse Summit! Make sure to go get your free ticket immediately! She will be one of many great speakers talking about the world of online product sales and marketing and getting your store busy and making that money! So without further ado, let’s get into today’s strategy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1899</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[de1cc7d9-e65c-4cb6-9a80-5c73192e309a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4448397695.mp3?updated=1659455758" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>542: April 2021 Profit Report: Hiring for Niche Projects and One Lesson We've Learned for Why NOT to Invest</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/april-2021-profit-report-hiring-for-niche-projects-and-one-lesson-weve-learned-for-why-not-to-invest</link>
      <description>Welcome to another Profit Report episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast! Today, we’re talking about April 2021, and, needless to say, some money got spent, some money got made. We didn’t launch anything new in April, so this report makes a direct correlation with the fact that we have tried to build a profitable and sustainable business that brings in income, regardless of whether or not we are launching something new every month. We were still, however, working on some big projects, so we were certainly knee-deep behind the scenes! Sometimes, when that happens, we will see a dip in profitability, not necessarily in revenue, and that was the case for us in April. In this episode, we share some of the projects we have been working on, such as some exciting shop website updates and a very niche copywriting assignment, and we also discuss the benefits of choosing when not to invest, especially when it comes at the cost of truly trusting yourself!
Tuning in, you’ll hear about some of the lessons we have learned over the past month, the past year, and the past 18 to 24 months, including the value of exposing yourself to other cultures, perspectives, ideas, and even industries. We also reflect on some of the mistakes we have made in order to help you avoid making the same mistakes in the future, so make sure not to miss this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 Jun 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>April 2021 Profit Report: Hiring for Niche Projects and One Lesson We've Learned for Why NOT to Invest</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>542</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/55ea37e2-ae9a-11ec-91b1-137270a231e7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome to another Profit Report episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast! Today, we’re talking about April 2021, and, needless to say, some money got spent, some money got made. We didn’t launch anything new in April, so this report makes a direct...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to another Profit Report episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast! Today, we’re talking about April 2021, and, needless to say, some money got spent, some money got made. We didn’t launch anything new in April, so this report makes a direct correlation with the fact that we have tried to build a profitable and sustainable business that brings in income, regardless of whether or not we are launching something new every month. We were still, however, working on some big projects, so we were certainly knee-deep behind the scenes! Sometimes, when that happens, we will see a dip in profitability, not necessarily in revenue, and that was the case for us in April. In this episode, we share some of the projects we have been working on, such as some exciting shop website updates and a very niche copywriting assignment, and we also discuss the benefits of choosing when not to invest, especially when it comes at the cost of truly trusting yourself!
Tuning in, you’ll hear about some of the lessons we have learned over the past month, the past year, and the past 18 to 24 months, including the value of exposing yourself to other cultures, perspectives, ideas, and even industries. We also reflect on some of the mistakes we have made in order to help you avoid making the same mistakes in the future, so make sure not to miss this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to another Profit Report episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast! Today, we’re talking about April 2021, and, needless to say, some money got spent, some money got made. We didn’t launch anything new in April, so this report makes a direct correlation with the fact that we have tried to build a profitable and sustainable business that brings in income, regardless of whether or not we are launching something new every month. We were still, however, working on some big projects, so we were certainly knee-deep behind the scenes! Sometimes, when that happens, we will see a dip in profitability, not necessarily in revenue, and that was the case for us in April. In this episode, we share some of the projects we have been working on, such as some exciting shop website updates and a very niche copywriting assignment, and we also discuss the benefits of choosing when <em>not</em> to invest, especially when it comes at the cost of truly trusting yourself!</p><p>Tuning in, you’ll hear about some of the lessons we have learned over the past month, the past year, and the past 18 to 24 months, including the value of exposing yourself to other cultures, perspectives, ideas, and even industries. We also reflect on some of the mistakes we have made in order to help you avoid making the same mistakes in the future, so make sure not to miss this episode!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2427</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9965e5ee-d425-4cf5-b3c3-c2c0b6960158]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3858539101.mp3?updated=1659455717" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>541: Designing Powerful + Profitable Online Programs that Work for You and Your Audience with Emily Walker</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/designing-powerful-and-profitable-online-programs-that-work-for-you-and-your-audience-with-emily-walker</link>
      <description>Today, on the podcast, we welcome Emily Walker. She helps brilliant entrepreneurs turn their big ideas into powerful and profitable courses so they can improve thousands of other people’s lives while building more spaciousness into their own. Having worked with a diverse range of clientele all over the globe, from groundbreaking courses and bestselling authors to seven-figure mindset queens, Emily knows that, sure, you can just dive in and start teaching online, but taking that knowledge and tweaking it into something actionable is not always easy.
If you have ever wanted to create a course, a program, a workshop, a masterclass, a tiny offer, a big offer, it doesn’t matter; this episode is going to give you a lot of great things to think about before you get started! Emily shares her perspective on creating content by doing equal parts what feels fun and good to you while also serving your audience, your clients, or your future students. It’s a blend of both worlds, and Abigail and Emylee certainly walked away from this conversation with a lot of ideas and questions to ask themselves as they refresh some of their own programs, and we know you will too!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 27 May 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Designing Powerful + Profitable Online Programs that Work for You and Your Audience with Emily Walker</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>541</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/569e996c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-171a2ea197cf/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, on the podcast, we welcome Emily Walker. She helps brilliant entrepreneurs turn their big ideas into powerful and profitable courses so they can improve thousands of other people’s lives while building more spaciousness into their own. Having...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, on the podcast, we welcome Emily Walker. She helps brilliant entrepreneurs turn their big ideas into powerful and profitable courses so they can improve thousands of other people’s lives while building more spaciousness into their own. Having worked with a diverse range of clientele all over the globe, from groundbreaking courses and bestselling authors to seven-figure mindset queens, Emily knows that, sure, you can just dive in and start teaching online, but taking that knowledge and tweaking it into something actionable is not always easy.
If you have ever wanted to create a course, a program, a workshop, a masterclass, a tiny offer, a big offer, it doesn’t matter; this episode is going to give you a lot of great things to think about before you get started! Emily shares her perspective on creating content by doing equal parts what feels fun and good to you while also serving your audience, your clients, or your future students. It’s a blend of both worlds, and Abigail and Emylee certainly walked away from this conversation with a lot of ideas and questions to ask themselves as they refresh some of their own programs, and we know you will too!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, on the podcast, we welcome Emily Walker. She helps brilliant entrepreneurs turn their big ideas into powerful and profitable courses so they can improve thousands of other people’s lives while building more spaciousness into their own. Having worked with a diverse range of clientele all over the globe, from groundbreaking courses and bestselling authors to seven-figure mindset queens, Emily knows that, sure, you can just dive in and start teaching online, but taking that knowledge and tweaking it into something actionable is not always easy.</p><p>If you have ever wanted to create a course, a program, a workshop, a masterclass, a tiny offer, a big offer, it doesn’t matter; this episode is going to give you a lot of great things to think about before you get started! Emily shares her perspective on creating content by doing equal parts what feels fun and good to you while also serving your audience, your clients, or your future students. It’s a blend of both worlds, and Abigail and Emylee certainly walked away from this conversation with a lot of ideas and questions to ask themselves as they refresh some of their own programs, and we know you will too!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2428</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[805a0840-352c-4c1a-8d85-270af3adfbad]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5480748746.mp3?updated=1659455691" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>540: What is Marketing *Really*?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-is-marketing-really</link>
      <description>We run ads for everything under the sun, and we have for a long time. Something we did very early on was making a conscious decision to not look at the comments on ads because sometimes there are just troll-type comments, and we don’t need to leave our headspace there. Funnily enough, Abagail’s husband is our ad comment moderator, so it is very rare for us to see a negative comment. But, for some reason, the other day, Emylee was scrolling one of our new Creative Template Shop ads, which is so beautiful and cute. The ad contains our slogan which we have been using for over a year. Emylee was compelled to look at the comment, which was along the lines of, “Oh, so that’s all that marketing is, is beautiful graphics? That's not all that marketing is, so it’s weird that you say that.” The specifics of the comment aren’t that important, but we do want to have a conversation not only about what marketing is, but what marketing means to two visual artists, and why we have our Creative Template Shop slogan, which was very intentional. We believe that it’s something that really makes our business stand out from anything else that we see out there.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 25 May 2021 11:38:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What is Marketing *Really*?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>540</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/572dbb9c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-3f5c3cee5ec1/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We run ads for everything under the sun, and we have for a long time. Something we did very early on was making a conscious decision to not look at the comments on ads because sometimes there are just troll-type comments, and we don’t need to leave...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We run ads for everything under the sun, and we have for a long time. Something we did very early on was making a conscious decision to not look at the comments on ads because sometimes there are just troll-type comments, and we don’t need to leave our headspace there. Funnily enough, Abagail’s husband is our ad comment moderator, so it is very rare for us to see a negative comment. But, for some reason, the other day, Emylee was scrolling one of our new Creative Template Shop ads, which is so beautiful and cute. The ad contains our slogan which we have been using for over a year. Emylee was compelled to look at the comment, which was along the lines of, “Oh, so that’s all that marketing is, is beautiful graphics? That's not all that marketing is, so it’s weird that you say that.” The specifics of the comment aren’t that important, but we do want to have a conversation not only about what marketing is, but what marketing means to two visual artists, and why we have our Creative Template Shop slogan, which was very intentional. We believe that it’s something that really makes our business stand out from anything else that we see out there.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We run ads for everything under the sun, and we have for a long time. Something we did very early on was making a conscious decision to not look at the comments on ads because sometimes there are just troll-type comments, and we don’t need to leave our headspace there. Funnily enough, Abagail’s husband is our ad comment moderator, so it is very rare for us to see a negative comment. But, for some reason, the other day, Emylee was scrolling one of our new Creative Template Shop ads, which is so beautiful and cute. The ad contains our slogan which we have been using for over a year. Emylee was compelled to look at the comment, which was along the lines of, “Oh, so that’s all that marketing is, is beautiful graphics? That's not all that marketing is, so it’s weird that you say that.” The specifics of the comment aren’t that important, but we do want to have a conversation not only about what marketing is, but what marketing means to two visual artists, and why we have our Creative Template Shop slogan, which was very intentional. We believe that it’s something that really makes our business stand out from anything else that we see out there.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2120</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d28873b9-3799-4b66-ba65-26cad8783f8f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5065867781.mp3?updated=1659455692" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>539: Marketing &amp; Selling for Introverted Folx with Monica Schrock of Unsocially Inclined</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-is-marketing-really</link>
      <description>Today on the show, we have Monica Schrock, who is cautiously optimistic and is an introverted copywriter who works as a marketing consultant. She has a mean coffee habit and a serious nerd streak. She revels at the intersection between intention and strategy, hoping to make the world a better place one word at a time. Monica has spent the last 14 years navigating the extroverted field of marketing, helping 200 clients craft their brand message and increase their sales from double to over ten times. We are talking about all the tips and tricks she has learned on that journey on the show today. 
So, if you resonate as a fellow introverted entrepreneur, who started their business to maybe escape ever having to talk to anyone again, and then realizing that you have to do that in order to make sales, put your offer out there, and grow your business, this episode is for you. We are talking about how to set boundaries, how to schedule (or not schedule) your week in a way that fits your personality so that you can actually get stuff done without feeling guilty and feel like you’re putting marketing and sales messaging out there that doesn’t make you feel icky.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 20 May 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Marketing &amp; Selling for Introverted Folx with Monica Schrock of Unsocially Inclined</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>539</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/57ba3cfc-ae9a-11ec-91b1-7bc26b601707/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show, we have Monica Schrock, who is cautiously optimistic and is an introverted copywriter who works as a marketing consultant. She has a mean coffee habit and a serious nerd streak. She revels at the intersection between intention and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show, we have Monica Schrock, who is cautiously optimistic and is an introverted copywriter who works as a marketing consultant. She has a mean coffee habit and a serious nerd streak. She revels at the intersection between intention and strategy, hoping to make the world a better place one word at a time. Monica has spent the last 14 years navigating the extroverted field of marketing, helping 200 clients craft their brand message and increase their sales from double to over ten times. We are talking about all the tips and tricks she has learned on that journey on the show today. 
So, if you resonate as a fellow introverted entrepreneur, who started their business to maybe escape ever having to talk to anyone again, and then realizing that you have to do that in order to make sales, put your offer out there, and grow your business, this episode is for you. We are talking about how to set boundaries, how to schedule (or not schedule) your week in a way that fits your personality so that you can actually get stuff done without feeling guilty and feel like you’re putting marketing and sales messaging out there that doesn’t make you feel icky.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show, we have Monica Schrock, who is cautiously optimistic and is an introverted copywriter who works as a marketing consultant. She has a mean coffee habit and a serious nerd streak. She revels at the intersection between intention and strategy, hoping to make the world a better place one word at a time. Monica has spent the last 14 years navigating the extroverted field of marketing, helping 200 clients craft their brand message and increase their sales from double to over ten times. We are talking about all the tips and tricks she has learned on that journey on the show today. </p><p>So, if you resonate as a fellow introverted entrepreneur, who started their business to maybe escape ever having to talk to anyone again, and then realizing that you have to do that in order to make sales, put your offer out there, and grow your business, this episode is for you. We are talking about how to set boundaries, how to schedule (or not schedule) your week in a way that fits your personality so that you can actually get stuff done without feeling guilty and feel like you’re putting marketing and sales messaging out there that doesn’t make you feel icky.  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2956</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e18d4001-9ff7-4c8a-9e96-3c14e4212d55]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6344485952.mp3?updated=1659455697" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>538: Letting Go of Your Creative Identity in Order to Grow</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/letting-go-of-your-creative-identity-in-order-to-grow</link>
      <description>Today we are going to talk about doing #allthethings, or rather, not doing them. We know a lot of you have so many things on your plate and are really struggling with what to let go of. You are feeling married to every department that you are the head of, and not really seeing or understanding how you could give up any of those things. So with that in mind, we want to holler at you in the way that we do best and permit you and help you let go of some stuff if you have been trudging along in your workspace, your day, and your business.
We used to be the people who didn’t only not want to pay to give up things but also were super intimidated and concerned with delegation. It has been something we have had to work hard to do because we used to be aware of everything that happens in our business and we were at the point where if we didn’t let go of some of it, we were going to slow down the business. So we have had some life experience in this department and hope you can take away some of the lessons we have learned and apply them in your own life and business after this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 18 May 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Letting Go of Your Creative Identity in Order to Grow</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>538</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/58ff9b7a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-1f06e97c997c/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are going to talk about doing #allthethings, or rather, not doing them. We know a lot of you have so many things on your plate and are really struggling with what to let go of. You are feeling married to every department that you are the head...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are going to talk about doing #allthethings, or rather, not doing them. We know a lot of you have so many things on your plate and are really struggling with what to let go of. You are feeling married to every department that you are the head of, and not really seeing or understanding how you could give up any of those things. So with that in mind, we want to holler at you in the way that we do best and permit you and help you let go of some stuff if you have been trudging along in your workspace, your day, and your business.
We used to be the people who didn’t only not want to pay to give up things but also were super intimidated and concerned with delegation. It has been something we have had to work hard to do because we used to be aware of everything that happens in our business and we were at the point where if we didn’t let go of some of it, we were going to slow down the business. So we have had some life experience in this department and hope you can take away some of the lessons we have learned and apply them in your own life and business after this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are going to talk about doing #allthethings, or rather, not doing them. We know a lot of you have so many things on your plate and are really struggling with what to let go of. You are feeling married to every department that you are the head of, and not really seeing or understanding how you could give up any of those things. So with that in mind, we want to holler at you in the way that we do best and permit you and help you let go of some stuff if you have been trudging along in your workspace, your day, and your business.</p><p>We used to be the people who didn’t only not want to pay to give up things but also were super intimidated and concerned with delegation. It has been something we have had to work hard to do because we used to be aware of everything that happens in our business and we were at the point where if we didn’t let go of some of it, we were going to slow down the business. So we have had some life experience in this department and hope you can take away some of the lessons we have learned and apply them in your own life and business after this episode!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1869</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8cdfd2fb-ed19-4b22-8d8d-e5703974144f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3066177596.mp3?updated=1659455517" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>537: Hiring for Culture Fit to Scale Your Online Business with Abbey Ashley</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/hiring-for-culture-fit-to-scale-your-online-business-with-abbey-ashley-of-the-virtual-savvy</link>
      <description>Today on the show, we are excited to welcome Abbey Ashley, Founder of The Virtual Savvy. Abbey has helped aspiring virtual assistants launch and grow their own at-home businesses from scratch. She started her own virtual assistant business as a new mom and was able to double her salary from her full-time corporate job in just 30 days! She has since gone on to grow a seven-figure business with 19 employees and certainly has some key insights to share about how to hire to scale. It's now her passion to help others start their own VA businesses so they too can taste the freedom and flexibility of entrepreneurship.
She is currently building a brand new platform, which you will hear about towards the end of the interview, that is going to make hiring so much easier, especially for creative entrepreneurs, connecting you with virtual assistants that are going to stick around and be the right fit for you and your company. In today’s episode, we’re talking about the hiring process, particularly how to hire for a culture fit over a skill fit. We think that that is one of the most remarkable things that Abbey has unlocked within her own business, and it has definitely been one of the key elements that has factored into her incredible success.
We discuss how to identify your brand culture, how to speak that into existence within your team, and how to support your team through that journey, as well as how to hire for the perfect fit, of course. Whether you are ready to hire your first VA or dip your toes into hiring employees, this episode is full of practical tips that will be beneficial to you, no matter where you are on that journey. Make sure to tune into this insightful interview with The Virtual Savvy Founder and powerhouse entrepreneur, Abbey Ashley!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 13 May 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Hiring for Culture Fit to Scale Your Online Business with Abbey Ashley</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>537</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/59d2d6c0-ae9a-11ec-91b1-5be186cb5b13/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show, we are excited to welcome Abbey Ashley, Founder of The Virtual Savvy. Abbey has helped aspiring virtual assistants launch and grow their own at-home businesses from scratch. She started her own virtual assistant business as a new...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show, we are excited to welcome Abbey Ashley, Founder of The Virtual Savvy. Abbey has helped aspiring virtual assistants launch and grow their own at-home businesses from scratch. She started her own virtual assistant business as a new mom and was able to double her salary from her full-time corporate job in just 30 days! She has since gone on to grow a seven-figure business with 19 employees and certainly has some key insights to share about how to hire to scale. It's now her passion to help others start their own VA businesses so they too can taste the freedom and flexibility of entrepreneurship.
She is currently building a brand new platform, which you will hear about towards the end of the interview, that is going to make hiring so much easier, especially for creative entrepreneurs, connecting you with virtual assistants that are going to stick around and be the right fit for you and your company. In today’s episode, we’re talking about the hiring process, particularly how to hire for a culture fit over a skill fit. We think that that is one of the most remarkable things that Abbey has unlocked within her own business, and it has definitely been one of the key elements that has factored into her incredible success.
We discuss how to identify your brand culture, how to speak that into existence within your team, and how to support your team through that journey, as well as how to hire for the perfect fit, of course. Whether you are ready to hire your first VA or dip your toes into hiring employees, this episode is full of practical tips that will be beneficial to you, no matter where you are on that journey. Make sure to tune into this insightful interview with The Virtual Savvy Founder and powerhouse entrepreneur, Abbey Ashley!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show, we are excited to welcome Abbey Ashley, Founder of The Virtual Savvy. Abbey has helped aspiring virtual assistants launch and grow their own at-home businesses from scratch. She started her own virtual assistant business as a new mom and was able to double her salary from her full-time corporate job in just 30 days! She has since gone on to grow a seven-figure business with 19 employees and certainly has some key insights to share about how to hire to scale. It's now her passion to help others start their own VA businesses so they too can taste the freedom and flexibility of entrepreneurship.</p><p>She is currently building a brand new platform, which you will hear about towards the end of the interview, that is going to make hiring so much easier, especially for creative entrepreneurs, connecting you with virtual assistants that are going to stick around and be the right fit for you and your company. In today’s episode, we’re talking about the hiring process, particularly how to hire for a culture fit over a skill fit. We think that that is one of the most remarkable things that Abbey has unlocked within her own business, and it has definitely been one of the key elements that has factored into her incredible success.</p><p>We discuss how to identify your brand culture, how to speak that into existence within your team, and how to support your team through that journey, as well as how to hire for the perfect fit, of course. Whether you are ready to hire your first VA or dip your toes into hiring employees, this episode is full of practical tips that will be beneficial to you, no matter where you are on that journey. Make sure to tune into this insightful interview with The Virtual Savvy Founder and powerhouse entrepreneur, Abbey Ashley!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2945</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[276848ce-6623-4b24-af0d-972132a37bf2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5567212816.mp3?updated=1659455427" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>536: Creating a Positive Customer Service Experience Amongst Uncontrollable Delays</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-a-positive-customer-service-experience-amidst-uncontrollable-delays</link>
      <description>If you are in the small business space as a buyer or a seller, you might have noticed a wave of disgruntled online shoppers that don’t necessarily fit the stereotype that wants to speak to the manager! In today’s episode, we want to talk about what we are dubbing the Digital Karen. Since the start of the pandemic, Emylee and Abigail have noticed more and more conversations between makers, shoppers, and sellers who are having a difficult time dealing with the increase in customer service issues that have been popping up in their inboxes and DMs, from unrealistic custom order requests to one-star reviews for reasons that are beyond their control. 
There has been a growing need for customer education regarding what is and what isn’t within the control of shop owners and business owners. For a long time, buyers have convoluted the experience of buying from big companies like Amazon or Nordstrom and tied that same level of expectation to shops on Etsy and Shopify, for example. In today’s episode, Emylee and Abagail talk about how sellers can emotionally and mentally deal with the age of the Digital Karen and create a positive customer service experience amidst uncontrollable delays, as well as what buyers and shoppers can do to make the experience better for business owners!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 11 May 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating a Positive Customer Service Experience Amongst Uncontrollable Delays</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>536</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/5aea038a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-af20427bfe94/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you are in the small business space as a buyer or a seller, you might have noticed a wave of disgruntled online shoppers that don’t necessarily fit the stereotype that wants to speak to the manager! In today’s episode, we want to talk about...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you are in the small business space as a buyer or a seller, you might have noticed a wave of disgruntled online shoppers that don’t necessarily fit the stereotype that wants to speak to the manager! In today’s episode, we want to talk about what we are dubbing the Digital Karen. Since the start of the pandemic, Emylee and Abigail have noticed more and more conversations between makers, shoppers, and sellers who are having a difficult time dealing with the increase in customer service issues that have been popping up in their inboxes and DMs, from unrealistic custom order requests to one-star reviews for reasons that are beyond their control. 
There has been a growing need for customer education regarding what is and what isn’t within the control of shop owners and business owners. For a long time, buyers have convoluted the experience of buying from big companies like Amazon or Nordstrom and tied that same level of expectation to shops on Etsy and Shopify, for example. In today’s episode, Emylee and Abagail talk about how sellers can emotionally and mentally deal with the age of the Digital Karen and create a positive customer service experience amidst uncontrollable delays, as well as what buyers and shoppers can do to make the experience better for business owners!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you are in the small business space as a buyer or a seller, you might have noticed a wave of disgruntled online shoppers that don’t necessarily fit the stereotype that wants to speak to the manager! In today’s episode, we want to talk about what we are dubbing the Digital Karen. Since the start of the pandemic, Emylee and Abigail have noticed more and more conversations between makers, shoppers, and sellers who are having a difficult time dealing with the increase in customer service issues that have been popping up in their inboxes and DMs, from unrealistic custom order requests to one-star reviews for reasons that are beyond their control. </p><p>There has been a growing need for customer education regarding what is and what isn’t within the control of shop owners and business owners. For a long time, buyers have convoluted the experience of buying from big companies like Amazon or Nordstrom and tied that same level of expectation to shops on Etsy and Shopify, for example. In today’s episode, Emylee and Abagail talk about how sellers can emotionally and mentally deal with the age of the Digital Karen and create a positive customer service experience amidst uncontrollable delays, as well as what buyers and shoppers can do to make the experience better for business owners!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2629</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[caca575c-cf19-4087-9f87-7c17fdadc1e4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7458771842.mp3?updated=1659454160" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>535: We Should All Be Millionaires with Rachel Rogers</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/we-should-all-be-millionaires-with-rachel-rodgers-of-hello-seven</link>
      <description>In today’s episode, we welcome Rachel Rodgers, woman of color, mother of four, and seven-figure business owner – in that order. Rachel started her career working on The Hill with nonprofits, federal judges, and Hillary Clinton. When she realized that changing the world is easier when you have some cash in your bank account, she decided to build a million-dollar business and then teach other women how to do the same. Her forthcoming book, We Should All Be Millionaires, from Harper’s Leadership is due to publish in Spring 2021.
For this show, we break down our favorite parts of Rachel’s book, which not only addresses our ingrained mindsets around money issues but also provides activities you can do, from homework assignments to different mindset reframes to help you better your headspace, grow, and move forward, whether you have a business or you just want to be a literal millionaire!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 06 May 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>We Should All Be Millionaires with Rachel Rogers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>535</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/5ba2d950-ae9a-11ec-91b1-7b6044605dc4/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>In today’s episode, we welcome Rachel Rodgers, woman of color, mother of four, and seven-figure business owner – in that order. Rachel started her career working on The Hill with nonprofits, federal judges, and Hillary Clinton. When she realized...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today’s episode, we welcome Rachel Rodgers, woman of color, mother of four, and seven-figure business owner – in that order. Rachel started her career working on The Hill with nonprofits, federal judges, and Hillary Clinton. When she realized that changing the world is easier when you have some cash in your bank account, she decided to build a million-dollar business and then teach other women how to do the same. Her forthcoming book, We Should All Be Millionaires, from Harper’s Leadership is due to publish in Spring 2021.
For this show, we break down our favorite parts of Rachel’s book, which not only addresses our ingrained mindsets around money issues but also provides activities you can do, from homework assignments to different mindset reframes to help you better your headspace, grow, and move forward, whether you have a business or you just want to be a literal millionaire!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today’s episode, we welcome Rachel Rodgers, woman of color, mother of four, and seven-figure business owner – in that order. Rachel started her career working on The Hill with nonprofits, federal judges, and Hillary Clinton. When she realized that changing the world is easier when you have some cash in your bank account, she decided to build a million-dollar business and then teach other women how to do the same. Her forthcoming book, <em>We Should All Be Millionaires</em>, from Harper’s Leadership is due to publish in Spring 2021.</p><p>For this show, we break down our favorite parts of Rachel’s book, which not only addresses our ingrained mindsets around money issues but also provides activities you can do, from homework assignments to different mindset reframes to help you better your headspace, grow, and move forward, whether you have a business or you just want to be a literal millionaire!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2712</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[619ac96e-1479-4332-a709-fbe6646672c7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2613838949.mp3?updated=1659454114" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>534: The One Surprising Change We Made to Our Signature Program That Dramatically Changed Student's Results</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-one-surprising-change-we-made-to-our-signature-program-that-dramatically-changed-students-results</link>
      <description>Quarantine gave Abagail every excuse to drop any kind of consistency around movement, and now, a full year later, she is trying to get back at it. She has walked three days in a row, and just yesterday Emylee did her first Peloton bike ride in months. After eight minutes in, she felt like she couldn’t do it, but she kept going. But this isn’t what we are going to be talking about today. We are super excited because it’s been a while since we have done an episode like this, where we share a small tweak we made inside our business program that was uber effective. 
It actually kind of blew us away just how much of a difference it made. It's been almost a year since we made this two-phased change. We want to talk to you about it today because if you are offering services or packages and there are deliverables inside those packages that don’t cost you any money but do cost you time, those are sometimes the easiest things to add into a package to add value. There are also instances where you need to re-evaluate what those deliverables are and whether that thing is actually effective, not only for you but your clients as well.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 04 May 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The One Surprising Change We Made to Our Signature Program That Dramatically Changed Student's Results</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>534</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/5cd8b86c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-17cc8b851817/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Quarantine gave Abagail every excuse to drop any kind of consistency around movement, and now, a full year later, she is trying to get back at it. She has walked three days in a row, and just yesterday Emylee did her first Peloton bike ride in months....</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Quarantine gave Abagail every excuse to drop any kind of consistency around movement, and now, a full year later, she is trying to get back at it. She has walked three days in a row, and just yesterday Emylee did her first Peloton bike ride in months. After eight minutes in, she felt like she couldn’t do it, but she kept going. But this isn’t what we are going to be talking about today. We are super excited because it’s been a while since we have done an episode like this, where we share a small tweak we made inside our business program that was uber effective. 
It actually kind of blew us away just how much of a difference it made. It's been almost a year since we made this two-phased change. We want to talk to you about it today because if you are offering services or packages and there are deliverables inside those packages that don’t cost you any money but do cost you time, those are sometimes the easiest things to add into a package to add value. There are also instances where you need to re-evaluate what those deliverables are and whether that thing is actually effective, not only for you but your clients as well.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Quarantine gave Abagail every excuse to drop any kind of consistency around movement, and now, a full year later, she is trying to get back at it. She has walked three days in a row, and just yesterday Emylee did her first Peloton bike ride in months. After eight minutes in, she felt like she couldn’t do it, but she kept going. But this isn’t what we are going to be talking about today. We are super excited because it’s been a while since we have done an episode like this, where we share a small tweak we made inside our business program that was uber effective. </p><p>It actually kind of blew us away just how much of a difference it made. It's been almost a year since we made this two-phased change. We want to talk to you about it today because if you are offering services or packages and there are deliverables inside those packages that don’t cost you any money but do cost you time, those are sometimes the easiest things to add into a package to add value. There are also instances where you need to re-evaluate what those deliverables are and whether that thing is actually effective, not only for you but your clients as well.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2709</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9db8c471-108b-4b5b-a35f-a0178d419167]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4562576581.mp3?updated=1659454075" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>533: A Behind the Scenes Look at Building Hello Audio with Linsday Padilla</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/a-behind-the-scenes-look-at-building-hello-audio-with-lindsay-padilla-of-hello-audio</link>
      <description>Today on the show we have Dr. Lindsay Padilla, Founder of Hello Audio, a SaaS product that lets users easily create private audio feeds their customers can listen to anywhere, anytime! She has been building this SaaS product from the ground up. It has been fascinating to watch from the sidelines and we are excited for you guys to dive in.
For the first half of this episode, Lindsay gives us a true, honest, behind-the-scenes look at everything it takes both mentally and logistically to build software. Everything that she wanted to create from the hole she saw in the market of audio and how course creators can deliver amazing content to their students and how Lindsay could make that happen. She talks about breaking down barriers in a male-dominated space, learning things in the tech space, raising money, deciding to bootstrap or not, and everything in between. And then at the end of the episode, we talk about what is actually Hello Audio and how could you as a service-based business owner, online course creator, educator, use this platform to better your customer experience and to add more value. You get a peek into the stuff that Abagail and Emylee have been thinking about doing in their business and ideas for what you can use in your own one to help you grow and create an amazing experience for the people you already have.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 29 Apr 2021 14:09:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>A Behind the Scenes Look at Building Hello Audio with Linsday Padilla</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>533</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/5db0b492-ae9a-11ec-91b1-076613320630/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we have Dr. Lindsay Padilla, Founder of Hello Audio, a SaaS product that lets users easily create private audio feeds their customers can listen to anywhere, anytime! She has been building this SaaS product from the ground up. It has...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we have Dr. Lindsay Padilla, Founder of Hello Audio, a SaaS product that lets users easily create private audio feeds their customers can listen to anywhere, anytime! She has been building this SaaS product from the ground up. It has been fascinating to watch from the sidelines and we are excited for you guys to dive in.
For the first half of this episode, Lindsay gives us a true, honest, behind-the-scenes look at everything it takes both mentally and logistically to build software. Everything that she wanted to create from the hole she saw in the market of audio and how course creators can deliver amazing content to their students and how Lindsay could make that happen. She talks about breaking down barriers in a male-dominated space, learning things in the tech space, raising money, deciding to bootstrap or not, and everything in between. And then at the end of the episode, we talk about what is actually Hello Audio and how could you as a service-based business owner, online course creator, educator, use this platform to better your customer experience and to add more value. You get a peek into the stuff that Abagail and Emylee have been thinking about doing in their business and ideas for what you can use in your own one to help you grow and create an amazing experience for the people you already have.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we have Dr. Lindsay Padilla, Founder of Hello Audio, a SaaS product that lets users easily create private audio feeds their customers can listen to anywhere, anytime! She has been building this SaaS product from the ground up. It has been fascinating to watch from the sidelines and we are excited for you guys to dive in.</p><p>For the first half of this episode, Lindsay gives us a true, honest, behind-the-scenes look at everything it takes both mentally and logistically to build software. Everything that she wanted to create from the hole she saw in the market of audio and how course creators can deliver amazing content to their students and how Lindsay could make that happen. She talks about breaking down barriers in a male-dominated space, learning things in the tech space, raising money, deciding to bootstrap or not, and everything in between. And then at the end of the episode, we talk about what is actually Hello Audio and how could you as a service-based business owner, online course creator, educator, use this platform to better your customer experience and to add more value. You get a peek into the stuff that Abagail and Emylee have been thinking about doing in their business and ideas for what you can use in your own one to help you grow and create an amazing experience for the people you already have.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3267</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[07e439f2-1e40-4f4b-942b-126fc74d04b1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3547038577.mp3?updated=1659454040" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>532: March 2021 Profit Report: Why We Now No Longer Want to Hit Our Profit Goal</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/march-2021-profit-report-why-we-now-no-longer-want-to-hit-our-profit-goal</link>
      <description>We always knew there would be this moment where, after doing these profit reports, we would eventually hit our goal, and then we would have to have the conversation about what’s next for us. We alluded to it a bit last month, where we had our first loss in over a year, but no part of Abagail was concerned. It sounds bizarre, but we really stuck things out, made some subtle shifts, and March went fantastically. What a concept! We had a loss and didn’t let it linger in our brains for months on end, which, in turn, would have impacted our business for months on end. Instead, we did a turnaround and saw some amazing stuff happen for us in March. It's funny because it’s not like we did this massive launch or any other big things. We just checked the calendar right before we recorded this to remind ourselves of what happened last month. We planned some stuff; we talked about some stuff; we did a mini-thing, well, someone else did a mini-thing; we invested in some stuff. That's about it! It was lowkey in terms of what was happening behind the scenes. But so much of what we have been doing over the last year has been about building our monthly recurring revenue (MRR).
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 27 Apr 2021 16:08:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>March 2021 Profit Report: Why We Now No Longer Want to Hit Our Profit Goal</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>532</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/5e458130-ae9a-11ec-91b1-ef4e8ee475f8/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We always knew there would be this moment where, after doing these profit reports, we would eventually hit our goal, and then we would have to have the conversation about what’s next for us. We alluded to it a bit last month, where we had our first...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We always knew there would be this moment where, after doing these profit reports, we would eventually hit our goal, and then we would have to have the conversation about what’s next for us. We alluded to it a bit last month, where we had our first loss in over a year, but no part of Abagail was concerned. It sounds bizarre, but we really stuck things out, made some subtle shifts, and March went fantastically. What a concept! We had a loss and didn’t let it linger in our brains for months on end, which, in turn, would have impacted our business for months on end. Instead, we did a turnaround and saw some amazing stuff happen for us in March. It's funny because it’s not like we did this massive launch or any other big things. We just checked the calendar right before we recorded this to remind ourselves of what happened last month. We planned some stuff; we talked about some stuff; we did a mini-thing, well, someone else did a mini-thing; we invested in some stuff. That's about it! It was lowkey in terms of what was happening behind the scenes. But so much of what we have been doing over the last year has been about building our monthly recurring revenue (MRR).
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We always knew there would be this moment where, after doing these profit reports, we would eventually hit our goal, and then we would have to have the conversation about what’s next for us. We alluded to it a bit last month, where we had our first loss in over a year, but no part of Abagail was concerned. It sounds bizarre, but we really stuck things out, made some subtle shifts, and March went fantastically. What a concept! We had a loss and didn’t let it linger in our brains for months on end, which, in turn, would have impacted our business for months on end. Instead, we did a turnaround and saw some amazing stuff happen for us in March. It's funny because it’s not like we did this massive launch or any other big things. We just checked the calendar right before we recorded this to remind ourselves of what happened last month. We planned some stuff; we talked about some stuff; we did a mini-thing, well, someone else did a mini-thing; we invested in some stuff. That's about it! It was lowkey in terms of what was happening behind the scenes. But so much of what we have been doing over the last year has been about building our monthly recurring revenue (MRR).</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2560</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3fdc1327-3fd6-497e-8acb-458db768e8ab]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8837118366.mp3?updated=1659453986" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>531: How to Release the Guilt of "Too Many Ideas" and Investing in Your Business with Ariel Kuhn</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-release-the-guilt-of-too-many-ideas-and-investing-in-your-business-with-ariel-kuhn</link>
      <description>Today on our show, we have Ariel Kuhn, who started out as a photographer and has since grown her business to focus more on brand strategy, working with small business owners as they figure out how to grow online. She helps these businesses with everything from brand strategy to photography, copywriting, web design, and mentorship so they can take their business to the next level. Ariel has been around the Boss Project TCC block for a while, and she is actually a current Strategy Academy student. She shares the evolution of her business, why she decided to invest in the program, the art of her pivot, what it means to her to feel good about what you’re doing in your business, and what to do with all the extra ideas you might have. We also discuss various things she has learned in the program that could help other small business owners who are in a similar position. So, if you have an existing business and have been stressing out about all of the brilliant ideas you have in your brain and what to do next, this episode will give you clarity.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 22 Apr 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Release the Guilt of "Too Many Ideas" and Investing in Your Business with Ariel Kuhn</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>531</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/5ef43fae-ae9a-11ec-91b1-5fb2ceffe6d7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on our show, we have Ariel Kuhn, who started out as a photographer and has since grown her business to focus more on brand strategy, working with small business owners as they figure out how to grow online. She helps these businesses with...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on our show, we have Ariel Kuhn, who started out as a photographer and has since grown her business to focus more on brand strategy, working with small business owners as they figure out how to grow online. She helps these businesses with everything from brand strategy to photography, copywriting, web design, and mentorship so they can take their business to the next level. Ariel has been around the Boss Project TCC block for a while, and she is actually a current Strategy Academy student. She shares the evolution of her business, why she decided to invest in the program, the art of her pivot, what it means to her to feel good about what you’re doing in your business, and what to do with all the extra ideas you might have. We also discuss various things she has learned in the program that could help other small business owners who are in a similar position. So, if you have an existing business and have been stressing out about all of the brilliant ideas you have in your brain and what to do next, this episode will give you clarity.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on our show, we have Ariel Kuhn, who started out as a photographer and has since grown her business to focus more on brand strategy, working with small business owners as they figure out how to grow online. She helps these businesses with everything from brand strategy to photography, copywriting, web design, and mentorship so they can take their business to the next level. Ariel has been around the Boss Project TCC block for a while, and she is actually a current Strategy Academy student. She shares the evolution of her business, why she decided to invest in the program, the art of her pivot, what it means to her to feel good about what you’re doing in your business, and what to do with all the extra ideas you might have. We also discuss various things she has learned in the program that could help other small business owners who are in a similar position. So, if you have an existing business and have been stressing out about all of the brilliant ideas you have in your brain and what to do next, this episode will give you clarity.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2710</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1b6185d0-f63a-4277-9d3c-d1a40fcbdd8d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5721054767.mp3?updated=1659453965" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>530: Creating ROI When Hiring Contractors</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-roi-when-hiring-contractors</link>
      <description>When you start the hiring process it can be a challenging time with a lot to think about. There are a lot of decisions to be made about how or why you hire someone at a certain point in your business. We have talked about it in the past but today we want to talk about why it is important that you think first about how and where you will get a return on your hire rather than hiring to save time. This is because we know what hiring to save time looks like and we are in a different space to be able to talk about it. So many people only hire to save time and they should be thinking about it in a bigger way.
We want to have this conversation coming from the space of how we think about it now with Boss Project and lessons we have learned, but also there are one-off hires that Emylee has done for her earring business. She hired for stuff she knew she would save a ton of time on. She also wasn’t the best one to do these tasks and if they were done, she would make money faster. So it is interesting how this question of hiring can be viewed in different scopes based on where you are at in your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 20 Apr 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating ROI When Hiring Contractors</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>530</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/5faf1180-ae9a-11ec-91b1-23fb9da6cca2/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>When you start the hiring process it can be a challenging time with a lot to think about. There are a lot of decisions to be made about how or why you hire someone at a certain point in your business. We have talked about it in the past but today we...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When you start the hiring process it can be a challenging time with a lot to think about. There are a lot of decisions to be made about how or why you hire someone at a certain point in your business. We have talked about it in the past but today we want to talk about why it is important that you think first about how and where you will get a return on your hire rather than hiring to save time. This is because we know what hiring to save time looks like and we are in a different space to be able to talk about it. So many people only hire to save time and they should be thinking about it in a bigger way.
We want to have this conversation coming from the space of how we think about it now with Boss Project and lessons we have learned, but also there are one-off hires that Emylee has done for her earring business. She hired for stuff she knew she would save a ton of time on. She also wasn’t the best one to do these tasks and if they were done, she would make money faster. So it is interesting how this question of hiring can be viewed in different scopes based on where you are at in your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When you start the hiring process it can be a challenging time with a lot to think about. There are a lot of decisions to be made about how or why you hire someone at a certain point in your business. We have talked about it in the past but today we want to talk about why it is important that you think first about how and where you will get a return on your hire rather than hiring to save time. This is because we know what hiring to save time looks like and we are in a different space to be able to talk about it. So many people only hire to save time and they should be thinking about it in a bigger way.</p><p>We want to have this conversation coming from the space of how we think about it now with Boss Project and lessons we have learned, but also there are one-off hires that Emylee has done for her earring business. She hired for stuff she knew she would save a ton of time on. She also wasn’t the best one to do these tasks and if they were done, she would make money faster. So it is interesting how this question of hiring can be viewed in different scopes based on where you are at in your business.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2350</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7a7562d3-2602-4ae3-b7f5-571fb82a12dd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7410877729.mp3?updated=1659381487" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>529: Use this Four-Step Formula to create Higher-Converting Copy with Jennifer Turner</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/use-this-four-step-formula-to-create-higher-converting-copy-with-jennifer-turner</link>
      <description>Today our guest is Jennifer Turner, the founder of Gemini where she helps online business owners improve their copywriting and design to create higher conversion rates. Gemini is an online branding and education platform and Jennifer is the rare combination of a trained copywriter and designer! Their MO is unifying a business' voice in the copy and design to tell a stronger story. We love it! Today we will be focussing solely on the copy side of things and how to get your up to scratch! 
We are super excited for Jennifer to dive into her four-step formula for high converting copy and it is honestly one of the best formulas we have found in a long time! These kinds of frameworks can sometimes put you in a box or make you sound a bit robotic and this one is a really cool way to insert your story and your audience's story while coming up with something that gets your conversion rate all the way up! This can be used for freebies, opt-ins or paid services and programs, it can be applied in those areas just as effectively, that's how versatile it is, so get your notes ready and let's get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 15 Apr 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Use this Four-Step Formula to create Higher-Converting Copy with Jennifer Turner</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>529</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/60379456-ae9a-11ec-91b1-fb5fff7e3252/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today our guest is Jennifer Turner, the founder of Gemini where she helps online business owners improve their copywriting and design to create higher conversion rates. Gemini is an online branding and education platform and Jennifer is the rare...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today our guest is Jennifer Turner, the founder of Gemini where she helps online business owners improve their copywriting and design to create higher conversion rates. Gemini is an online branding and education platform and Jennifer is the rare combination of a trained copywriter and designer! Their MO is unifying a business' voice in the copy and design to tell a stronger story. We love it! Today we will be focussing solely on the copy side of things and how to get your up to scratch! 
We are super excited for Jennifer to dive into her four-step formula for high converting copy and it is honestly one of the best formulas we have found in a long time! These kinds of frameworks can sometimes put you in a box or make you sound a bit robotic and this one is a really cool way to insert your story and your audience's story while coming up with something that gets your conversion rate all the way up! This can be used for freebies, opt-ins or paid services and programs, it can be applied in those areas just as effectively, that's how versatile it is, so get your notes ready and let's get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today our guest is Jennifer Turner, the founder of Gemini where she helps online business owners improve their copywriting and design to create higher conversion rates. Gemini is an online branding and education platform and Jennifer is the rare combination of a trained copywriter <em>and </em>designer! Their MO is unifying a business' voice in the copy and design to tell a stronger story. We love it! Today we will be focussing solely on the copy side of things and how to get your up to scratch! </p><p>We are super excited for Jennifer to dive into her four-step formula for high converting copy and it is honestly one of the best formulas we have found in a long time! These kinds of frameworks can sometimes put you in a box or make you sound a bit robotic and this one is a really cool way to insert your story and your audience's story while coming up with something that gets your conversion rate all the way up! This can be used for freebies, opt-ins or paid services and programs, it can be applied in those areas just as effectively, that's how versatile it is, so get your notes ready and let's get into some strategy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2689</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a68b0e02-5884-48a1-b42e-8e0793e7a580]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3314271838.mp3?updated=1659381446" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>528: Assessing Product Margins, Growing Shop Sales &amp; Brainstorming Launch Strategies</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/assessing-product-margins-growing-shop-sales-brainstorming-launch-strategies</link>
      <description>Hello friends! It has been a minute since we have talked about the other businesses that we run. We thought it was high time for a little update because Abagail has something new and exciting that she has launched (by the time you hear this it will have been out for a minute). We are going to talk about that but we also think there have been some decisions that we have made very intentionally in our side businesses that we want to break down the logistics behind.
We share these things with you, first of all, because it is fun to chat about, but it is also fair for you guys to hear this part of the process because it gives you a look behind the curtain of something new and growing. It also shows you the reality of how a lot of entrepreneurs and small business owners are, which is multi-passionate!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 13 Apr 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Assessing Product Margins, Growing Shop Sales &amp; Brainstorming Launch Strategies</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>528</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/60c0ce56-ae9a-11ec-91b1-7ff5080dd028/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Hello friends! It has been a minute since we have talked about the other businesses that we run. We thought it was high time for a little update because Abagail has something new and exciting that she has launched (by the time you hear this it will...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hello friends! It has been a minute since we have talked about the other businesses that we run. We thought it was high time for a little update because Abagail has something new and exciting that she has launched (by the time you hear this it will have been out for a minute). We are going to talk about that but we also think there have been some decisions that we have made very intentionally in our side businesses that we want to break down the logistics behind.
We share these things with you, first of all, because it is fun to chat about, but it is also fair for you guys to hear this part of the process because it gives you a look behind the curtain of something new and growing. It also shows you the reality of how a lot of entrepreneurs and small business owners are, which is multi-passionate!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hello friends! It has been a minute since we have talked about the other businesses that we run. We thought it was high time for a little update because Abagail has something new and exciting that she has launched (by the time you hear this it will have been out for a minute). We are going to talk about that but we also think there have been some decisions that we have made very intentionally in our side businesses that we want to break down the logistics behind.</p><p>We share these things with you, first of all, because it is fun to chat about, but it is also fair for you guys to hear this part of the process because it gives you a look behind the curtain of something new and growing. It also shows you the reality of how a lot of entrepreneurs and small business owners are, which is multi-passionate!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2808</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[faf55fcb-5efa-4d31-a385-27deeaaead2e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2812021074.mp3?updated=1659381358" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>527: Creating Authority and Authentic Relationships You Can Leverage with Jaclyn Mellone</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-authority-and-authentic-relationships-you-can-leverage-with-jaclyn-mellone</link>
      <description>Relationships can make all the difference in your business and as many of us have learned, focussing on connections and networking in the right way can take your biz from quiet to booming! Our guest today is Jaclyn Mellon and she helps experts exponentially grow their businesses by becoming an authority in their space. One of the ways that she helps them do this is through authentic relationships. Jaclyn is a coach, strategist, keynote speaker, momma, guac lover and host of the Go-to Gal Podcast! In this episode, she shares how to create strategic relationships and how to utilize them as more than friendships without being weird about it!
For Jaclyn, it all starts with an authentic connection and she breaks down exactly what that looks like. We also talk about how this translates into creating more friends in your own space and work environment and how to utilize these to continue to grow your business in the long term. We cover leveraging relationships, creating intimate connections that fill your cup and how to jumpstart your biz in a big way!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 08 Apr 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating Authority and Authentic Relationships You Can Leverage with Jaclyn Mellone</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>527</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/61b29ab0-ae9a-11ec-91b1-c701a2eee61f/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Relationships can make all the difference in your business and as many of us have learned, focussing on connections and networking in the right way can take your biz from quiet to booming! Our guest today is Jaclyn Mellon and she helps experts...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Relationships can make all the difference in your business and as many of us have learned, focussing on connections and networking in the right way can take your biz from quiet to booming! Our guest today is Jaclyn Mellon and she helps experts exponentially grow their businesses by becoming an authority in their space. One of the ways that she helps them do this is through authentic relationships. Jaclyn is a coach, strategist, keynote speaker, momma, guac lover and host of the Go-to Gal Podcast! In this episode, she shares how to create strategic relationships and how to utilize them as more than friendships without being weird about it!
For Jaclyn, it all starts with an authentic connection and she breaks down exactly what that looks like. We also talk about how this translates into creating more friends in your own space and work environment and how to utilize these to continue to grow your business in the long term. We cover leveraging relationships, creating intimate connections that fill your cup and how to jumpstart your biz in a big way!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Relationships can make all the difference in your business and as many of us have learned, focussing on connections and networking in the right way can take your biz from quiet to booming! Our guest today is Jaclyn Mellon and she helps experts exponentially grow their businesses by becoming an authority in their space. One of the ways that she helps them do this is through authentic relationships. Jaclyn is a coach, strategist, keynote speaker, momma, guac lover and host of the Go-to Gal Podcast! In this episode, she shares how to create strategic relationships and how to utilize them as more than friendships without being weird about it!</p><p>For Jaclyn, it all starts with an authentic connection and she breaks down exactly what that looks like. We also talk about how this translates into creating more friends in your own space and work environment and how to utilize these to continue to grow your business in the long term. We cover leveraging relationships, creating intimate connections that fill your cup and how to jumpstart your biz in a big way!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3200</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1426d5c0-771d-440c-ae43-afc1b3c9e32f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9612325028.mp3?updated=1659381299" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>526: Negotiating Brand Deals, Dangerous Contract Terms and Changes to Social Media that Effect Your Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/negotiating-brand-deals-dangerous-contract-terms-and-changes-to-social-media-that-affect-your-business</link>
      <description>This is another one of those episodes where Abagail puts Emylee on the spot in front of the audience. She knows nothing and is expected to come up with something on air. For context, we started our business as creative entrepreneurs and designers and all that. What we did not realize we were doing at the time was influencing people. We started this blog, we were putting out content, and ultimately, a large portion of our business has become what we would call affiliate marketing. It makes up a big percentage of what we are doing. So, Abagail has all this background knowledge of what it takes to be influencers in an affiliate capacity and has made all of these pivots with her second brand to broaden the ways she is bringing in money for this brand. Emylee is admittedly the laziest influencer out there. It is not that she doesn’t influence people; she definitely does, and there are many examples to prove it. In technical terms, Abagail, based on the size of her audience, would be seen as a micro-influencer. There are so many people out there that want to be influencers that they don’t necessarily know what they need to be looking out for. There are some alarming things that brands are starting to include in their contracts, and micro-influencers are agreeing to these things, most probably without any idea of what they actually mean. And they could not only negatively impact your business, but they could destroy your online reputation if you do not pay attention to what is going on.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 06 Apr 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Negotiating Brand Deals, Dangerous Contract Terms and Changes to Social Media that Effect Your Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>526</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/62442e44-ae9a-11ec-91b1-eb0d5d33c9cb/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This is another one of those episodes where Abagail puts Emylee on the spot in front of the audience. She knows nothing and is expected to come up with something on air. For context, we started our business as creative entrepreneurs and designers and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This is another one of those episodes where Abagail puts Emylee on the spot in front of the audience. She knows nothing and is expected to come up with something on air. For context, we started our business as creative entrepreneurs and designers and all that. What we did not realize we were doing at the time was influencing people. We started this blog, we were putting out content, and ultimately, a large portion of our business has become what we would call affiliate marketing. It makes up a big percentage of what we are doing. So, Abagail has all this background knowledge of what it takes to be influencers in an affiliate capacity and has made all of these pivots with her second brand to broaden the ways she is bringing in money for this brand. Emylee is admittedly the laziest influencer out there. It is not that she doesn’t influence people; she definitely does, and there are many examples to prove it. In technical terms, Abagail, based on the size of her audience, would be seen as a micro-influencer. There are so many people out there that want to be influencers that they don’t necessarily know what they need to be looking out for. There are some alarming things that brands are starting to include in their contracts, and micro-influencers are agreeing to these things, most probably without any idea of what they actually mean. And they could not only negatively impact your business, but they could destroy your online reputation if you do not pay attention to what is going on.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This is another one of those episodes where Abagail puts Emylee on the spot in front of the audience. She knows nothing and is expected to come up with something on air. For context, we started our business as creative entrepreneurs and designers and all that. What we did not realize we were doing at the time was influencing people. We started this blog, we were putting out content, and ultimately, a large portion of our business has become what we would call affiliate marketing. It makes up a big percentage of what we are doing. So, Abagail has all this background knowledge of what it takes to be influencers in an affiliate capacity and has made all of these pivots with her second brand to broaden the ways she is bringing in money for this brand. Emylee is admittedly the laziest influencer out there. It is not that she doesn’t influence people; she definitely does, and there are many examples to prove it. In technical terms, Abagail, based on the size of her audience, would be seen as a micro-influencer. There are so many people out there that want to be influencers that they don’t necessarily know what they need to be looking out for. There are some alarming things that brands are starting to include in their contracts, and micro-influencers are agreeing to these things, most probably without any idea of what they actually mean. And they could not only negatively impact your business, but they could destroy your online reputation if you do not pay attention to what is going on.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2613</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[48eca27c-b346-4bdd-8c0f-5eb35f1714d2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6986288378.mp3?updated=1659381264" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>525: Selling Wholesale Bundles on Amazon with Kristin Ostrander</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/selling-wholesale-bundles-on-amazon-with-kristin-ostrander-from-mommy-income</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Kristin Ostrander from Mommy Income. She is an e-commerce expert who got her start 17 years ago on eBay. She has since transitioned to Amazon where she has been a serial entrepreneur who has learned all the ins and outs of how to run a successful wholesale business selling on the platform. Today she touches on her wholesale bundle system and how she’s helped thousands of students through her online course and podcast.
In this episode, we talk about a product offering, revenue stream, and selling platform that we’ve never talked about on the podcast before: Amazon, and more specifically, selling wholesale bundles on Amazon. Honestly, there was so much information that we did not know. So we really think you guys will get a lot of good ideas from this episode if you’re interested in selling a new product, getting a second stream of revenue up and running or just testing your toes in running a business that might be a little different to what everyone else is doing. Kristin breaks down her strategies in the order that she did stuff really, really well, and has some incredible resources for you guys to keep learning if you want to find out how to sell on Amazon. We’re sure this show will give you a lot of great ideas!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 01 Apr 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Selling Wholesale Bundles on Amazon with Kristin Ostrander</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>525</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/62e71e42-ae9a-11ec-91b1-9b52fab43ca1/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Kristin Ostrander from Mommy Income. She is an e-commerce expert who got her start 17 years ago on eBay. She has since transitioned to Amazon where she has been a serial entrepreneur who has learned all the ins and outs of...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Kristin Ostrander from Mommy Income. She is an e-commerce expert who got her start 17 years ago on eBay. She has since transitioned to Amazon where she has been a serial entrepreneur who has learned all the ins and outs of how to run a successful wholesale business selling on the platform. Today she touches on her wholesale bundle system and how she’s helped thousands of students through her online course and podcast.
In this episode, we talk about a product offering, revenue stream, and selling platform that we’ve never talked about on the podcast before: Amazon, and more specifically, selling wholesale bundles on Amazon. Honestly, there was so much information that we did not know. So we really think you guys will get a lot of good ideas from this episode if you’re interested in selling a new product, getting a second stream of revenue up and running or just testing your toes in running a business that might be a little different to what everyone else is doing. Kristin breaks down her strategies in the order that she did stuff really, really well, and has some incredible resources for you guys to keep learning if you want to find out how to sell on Amazon. We’re sure this show will give you a lot of great ideas!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Kristin Ostrander from Mommy Income. She is an e-commerce expert who got her start 17 years ago on eBay. She has since transitioned to Amazon where she has been a serial entrepreneur who has learned all the ins and outs of how to run a successful wholesale business selling on the platform. Today she touches on her wholesale bundle system and how she’s helped thousands of students through her online course and podcast.</p><p>In this episode, we talk about a product offering, revenue stream, and selling platform that we’ve never talked about on the podcast before: Amazon, and more specifically, selling wholesale bundles on Amazon. Honestly, there was so much information that we did not know. So we really think you guys will get a lot of good ideas from this episode if you’re interested in selling a new product, getting a second stream of revenue up and running or just testing your toes in running a business that might be a little different to what everyone else is doing. Kristin breaks down her strategies in the order that she did stuff really, really well, and has some incredible resources for you guys to keep learning if you want to find out how to sell on Amazon. We’re sure this show will give you a lot of great ideas!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2994</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b77b0fb2-f74a-4733-884c-5ea891306fab]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6700105880.mp3?updated=1659381210" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>524: Feb 2021 Profit Report: Our First Loss in Over a Year - Here's What Happened</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/february-2021-profit-report</link>
      <description>We feel like the anniversary of the global pandemic that is quickly approaching is hitting us really hard! We just want to remind all of you business owners out there that you have been running a business for the last year in the midst of one of the craziest years any of us will ever go through, especially as a collective. For us, running a business in the midst of all this has been the most surprising thing that has ever happened, because March 2020 was the most afraid we have ever been about the future of our business. A year later though, we are now more confident than ever that we will continue to grow!
We have spoken a lot about the different areas of our business that we have invested in and how they change over time. We want to spend today’s profit report for February talking about how these decisions have ultimately affected our profit and how we are looking at this side of things. We want to talk about why things are just incredibly different now than they were last year and the place of greater maturity at which we have arrived with regards to the way we cope with the supposed ups and downs.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 30 Mar 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Feb 2021 Profit Report: Our First Loss in Over a Year - Here's What Happened</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>524</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/63ad4504-ae9a-11ec-91b1-5fa91716fa3c/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We feel like the anniversary of the global pandemic that is quickly approaching is hitting us really hard! We just want to remind all of you business owners out there that you have been running a business for the last year in the midst of one of the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We feel like the anniversary of the global pandemic that is quickly approaching is hitting us really hard! We just want to remind all of you business owners out there that you have been running a business for the last year in the midst of one of the craziest years any of us will ever go through, especially as a collective. For us, running a business in the midst of all this has been the most surprising thing that has ever happened, because March 2020 was the most afraid we have ever been about the future of our business. A year later though, we are now more confident than ever that we will continue to grow!
We have spoken a lot about the different areas of our business that we have invested in and how they change over time. We want to spend today’s profit report for February talking about how these decisions have ultimately affected our profit and how we are looking at this side of things. We want to talk about why things are just incredibly different now than they were last year and the place of greater maturity at which we have arrived with regards to the way we cope with the supposed ups and downs.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We feel like the anniversary of the global pandemic that is quickly approaching is hitting us really hard! We just want to remind all of you business owners out there that you have been running a business for the last year in the midst of one of the craziest years any of us will ever go through, especially as a collective. For us, running a business in the midst of all this has been the most surprising thing that has ever happened, because March 2020 was the most afraid we have ever been about the future of our business. A year later though, we are now more confident than ever that we will continue to grow!</p><p>We have spoken a lot about the different areas of our business that we have invested in and how they change over time. We want to spend today’s profit report for February talking about how these decisions have ultimately affected our profit and how we are looking at this side of things. We want to talk about why things are just incredibly different now than they were last year and the place of greater maturity at which we have arrived with regards to the way we cope with the supposed ups and downs.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3037</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f16156a1-4042-4c0c-8a63-e1b42a9e4fd5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2670162173.mp3?updated=1659381150" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>523: Creating Killer Case Studies to Boost Sales with Melissa Harstine</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-killer-case-studies-to-boost-sales-with-melissa-harstine</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Melissa Harstine. She helps creatives, coaches, and consultants land next-level clients with customer-centric copy and gripping case studies. As a trained journalist, she leverages her research and interview superpowers to write killer copy that makes readers think, “holy guacamole, did they read my journal?!”
We’re breaking down everything about case studies today; what they are, how you can use them to land more clients, how you can use them to vet your clients, and to work with your dream clients. We also dive into how you should set up the interview, how to transcribe it, and how to repurpose your content. Everything about this process makes it seem so tangible and 100% worth it! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 25 Mar 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating Killer Case Studies to Boost Sales with Melissa Harstine</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>523</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/643ca7bc-ae9a-11ec-91b1-ab083754cb56/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Melissa Harstine. She helps creatives, coaches, and consultants land next-level clients with customer-centric copy and gripping case studies. As a trained journalist, she leverages her research and interview superpowers to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Melissa Harstine. She helps creatives, coaches, and consultants land next-level clients with customer-centric copy and gripping case studies. As a trained journalist, she leverages her research and interview superpowers to write killer copy that makes readers think, “holy guacamole, did they read my journal?!”
We’re breaking down everything about case studies today; what they are, how you can use them to land more clients, how you can use them to vet your clients, and to work with your dream clients. We also dive into how you should set up the interview, how to transcribe it, and how to repurpose your content. Everything about this process makes it seem so tangible and 100% worth it! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Melissa Harstine. She helps creatives, coaches, and consultants land next-level clients with customer-centric copy and gripping case studies. As a trained journalist, she leverages her research and interview superpowers to write killer copy that makes readers think, “holy guacamole, did they read my journal?!”</p><p>We’re breaking down everything about case studies today; what they are, how you can use them to land more clients, how you can use them to vet your clients, and to work with your dream clients. We also dive into how you should set up the interview, how to transcribe it, and how to repurpose your content. Everything about this process makes it seem so tangible and 100% worth it! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2456</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b614036d-8f58-4baa-aba8-ea2bf450a735]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9230270393.mp3?updated=1659381016" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>522: Separating Your Self-Worth from Your Business Performance</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/separating-your-self-worth-from-your-business-performance</link>
      <description>Okay, so this is going to be a rambling conversation that we still feel you guys will get a lot of benefit from. This conversation has come up multiple times with a good friend of ours who you all know, Jessica Eley, and in Emylee’s maker community as well. Abagail and Emylee have also had this conversation between themselves over and over, and with their students too, so it is something that definitely affects many people. The overarching concept is how to separate your self-worth from the success of your business.
We are going to share a few tangible strategies that we have picked up recently, but we want to open the conversation by saying that if you struggle with this problem, we want to give you some examples of what you can do to help yourself feel better. These are things that we have learned ourselves and also lessons that other creatives have helped us to learn. So tune in and hear about how you can learn to identify this self-sabotaging behavior and, if you suffer from it, how you can learn to manage it and be kinder to yourself going forward.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Mar 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Separating Your Self-Worth from Your Business Performance</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>522</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/6502e468-ae9a-11ec-91b1-9b8ff4fb24d7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Okay, so this is going to be a rambling conversation that we still feel you guys will get a lot of benefit from. This conversation has come up multiple times with a good friend of ours who you all know, Jessica Eley, and in Emylee’s maker community...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Okay, so this is going to be a rambling conversation that we still feel you guys will get a lot of benefit from. This conversation has come up multiple times with a good friend of ours who you all know, Jessica Eley, and in Emylee’s maker community as well. Abagail and Emylee have also had this conversation between themselves over and over, and with their students too, so it is something that definitely affects many people. The overarching concept is how to separate your self-worth from the success of your business.
We are going to share a few tangible strategies that we have picked up recently, but we want to open the conversation by saying that if you struggle with this problem, we want to give you some examples of what you can do to help yourself feel better. These are things that we have learned ourselves and also lessons that other creatives have helped us to learn. So tune in and hear about how you can learn to identify this self-sabotaging behavior and, if you suffer from it, how you can learn to manage it and be kinder to yourself going forward.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Okay, so this is going to be a rambling conversation that we still feel you guys will get a lot of benefit from. This conversation has come up multiple times with a good friend of ours who you all know, Jessica Eley, and in Emylee’s maker community as well. Abagail and Emylee have also had this conversation between themselves over and over, and with their students too, so it is something that definitely affects many people. The overarching concept is how to separate your self-worth from the success of your business.</p><p>We are going to share a few tangible strategies that we have picked up recently, but we want to open the conversation by saying that if you struggle with this problem, we want to give you some examples of what you can do to help yourself feel better. These are things that we have learned ourselves and also lessons that other creatives have helped us to learn. So tune in and hear about how you can learn to identify this self-sabotaging behavior and, if you suffer from it, how you can learn to manage it and be kinder to yourself going forward.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2089</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[be166c84-aa49-42bc-95ab-e8dbfe1c2f37]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8480286542.mp3?updated=1659119977" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>521: Tweak Your Messaging to Serve Clients Right Now with Courtney Chaal</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/tweak-your-messaging-to-serve-clients-right-now-with-courtney-chaal</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Courtney Chaal, the founder of The Rule Breaker’s Club where she teaches women to package and sell with brilliance and offers awesome products, and her work has been featured in Inc., Creative Live, and The Huffpost to name only a few. She is crazy-talented when it comes to messaging specifically, so this interview is right on time. We get that we shouldn’t necessarily be changing our offers or postpone our launches, but how do we talk differently about our services, so that it appeals to people at this moment? 
What messaging do we need to tweak to make it relevant, and where is the balance between being empathetic and helpful versus making sales because we’ve got businesses to run? Courtney shares the top tips that she herself is implementing in her business, from getting your mindset right and brainstorming ideas, to asking your audience what they need and putting it all together in a project plan, so strap in and let’s dive in!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 18 Mar 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Tweak Your Messaging to Serve Clients Right Now with Courtney Chaal</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>521</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/65981d80-ae9a-11ec-91b1-23a8605fe66a/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Courtney Chaal, the founder of The Rule Breaker’s Club where she teaches women to package and sell with brilliance and offers awesome products, and her work has been featured in Inc., Creative Live, and The Huffpost to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Courtney Chaal, the founder of The Rule Breaker’s Club where she teaches women to package and sell with brilliance and offers awesome products, and her work has been featured in Inc., Creative Live, and The Huffpost to name only a few. She is crazy-talented when it comes to messaging specifically, so this interview is right on time. We get that we shouldn’t necessarily be changing our offers or postpone our launches, but how do we talk differently about our services, so that it appeals to people at this moment? 
What messaging do we need to tweak to make it relevant, and where is the balance between being empathetic and helpful versus making sales because we’ve got businesses to run? Courtney shares the top tips that she herself is implementing in her business, from getting your mindset right and brainstorming ideas, to asking your audience what they need and putting it all together in a project plan, so strap in and let’s dive in!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Courtney Chaal, the founder of The Rule Breaker’s Club where she teaches women to package and sell with brilliance and offers awesome products, and her work has been featured in <em>Inc</em>., Creative Live, and <em>The Huffpost</em> to name only a few. She is crazy-talented when it comes to messaging specifically, so this interview is right on time. We get that we shouldn’t necessarily be changing our offers or postpone our launches, but how do we talk differently about our services, so that it appeals to people at this moment? </p><p>What messaging do we need to tweak to make it relevant, and where is the balance between being empathetic and helpful versus making sales because we’ve got businesses to run? Courtney shares the top tips that she herself is implementing in her business, from getting your mindset right and brainstorming ideas, to asking your audience what they need and putting it all together in a project plan, so strap in and let’s dive in!  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2313</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2f3909b5-b71d-43aa-bb45-c71a502bd62d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6274857233.mp3?updated=1659119872" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>520: Behind the Scenes of Creating an Affiliate Program</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/behind-the-scenes-of-creating-an-affiliate-program</link>
      <description>Any business that is selling through a one-to-many system is going to, at some point, debate whether or not their strategy is worth their time and energy. That’s why today, we are going to talk a little bit about why we decided to roll out our affiliate program, as well as some of the logistics behind setting it up. When it comes to affiliate programs, there are a few mysteries that need solving, like what kind of software is out there and how to make it work in your business. We are also going to focus on some of the aspects that didn’t make sense for us in the past, because like we said: affiliate programs aren’t always the best idea. So join us and get the lowdown on the dos and definitely don’ts of setting up an affiliate program. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 16 Mar 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Behind the Scenes of Creating an Affiliate Program</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>520</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/662ce276-ae9a-11ec-91b1-438537f13037/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Any business that is selling through a one-to-many system is going to, at some point, debate whether or not their strategy is worth their time and energy. That’s why today, we are going to talk a little bit about why we decided to roll out our...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Any business that is selling through a one-to-many system is going to, at some point, debate whether or not their strategy is worth their time and energy. That’s why today, we are going to talk a little bit about why we decided to roll out our affiliate program, as well as some of the logistics behind setting it up. When it comes to affiliate programs, there are a few mysteries that need solving, like what kind of software is out there and how to make it work in your business. We are also going to focus on some of the aspects that didn’t make sense for us in the past, because like we said: affiliate programs aren’t always the best idea. So join us and get the lowdown on the dos and definitely don’ts of setting up an affiliate program. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Any business that is selling through a one-to-many system is going to, at some point, debate whether or not their strategy is worth their time and energy. That’s why today, we are going to talk a little bit about why we decided to roll out our affiliate program, as well as some of the logistics behind setting it up. When it comes to affiliate programs, there are a few mysteries that need solving, like what kind of software is out there and how to make it work in your business. We are also going to focus on some of the aspects that didn’t make sense for us in the past, because like we said: affiliate programs aren’t always the best idea. So join us and get the lowdown on the dos and definitely don’ts of setting up an affiliate program. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2756</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e2ddb5b9-961e-42de-9a8f-1035fb4b33b1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1628988762.mp3?updated=1659119815" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>519: Creating a Successful Opt-in and a Psychology Driven Brand Strategy with Kaye Putnam</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-a-successful-opt-in-and-a-psychology-driven-brand-strategy-with-kaye-putnam</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Kaye Putnam. Kaye is is a psychology-driven brand strategist for entrepreneurs. Through work with over 100 clients, from Fortune 50’s to entrepreneurs, she developed the In Demand Brand method. She has had some crazy success though with her famous opt-in. 55,000 people have taken her psychology quiz all about branding and ya’ll need to take it too. Inside this episode, all three of us nerd out pretty hardcore. We talk about the psychology behind understanding your competition and establishing your brand presence. We uncover a couple of the most popular archetypes and the least popular ones.
Kaye brings to the conversation a different way of looking at your brand, your messaging, and what you’re serving to your clients based on what you are actually best at and who you are as a human being, which is like the easiest and the best thing to do, right? Of course, we also talk about her quiz, and the strategy behind how she set that up, how she has collected the leads, and what it’s meant for her financially. This a good one to listen to just to uncover a little bit more about yourself and how you can use that to craft your brand messaging to your benefit.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 11 Mar 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating a Successful Opt-in and a Psychology Driven Brand Strategy with Kaye Putnam</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>519</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/66d3940e-ae9a-11ec-91b1-dfc1e85454b0/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Kaye Putnam. Kaye is is a psychology-driven brand strategist for entrepreneurs. Through work with over 100 clients, from Fortune 50’s to entrepreneurs, she developed the In Demand Brand method. She has had some crazy...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Kaye Putnam. Kaye is is a psychology-driven brand strategist for entrepreneurs. Through work with over 100 clients, from Fortune 50’s to entrepreneurs, she developed the In Demand Brand method. She has had some crazy success though with her famous opt-in. 55,000 people have taken her psychology quiz all about branding and ya’ll need to take it too. Inside this episode, all three of us nerd out pretty hardcore. We talk about the psychology behind understanding your competition and establishing your brand presence. We uncover a couple of the most popular archetypes and the least popular ones.
Kaye brings to the conversation a different way of looking at your brand, your messaging, and what you’re serving to your clients based on what you are actually best at and who you are as a human being, which is like the easiest and the best thing to do, right? Of course, we also talk about her quiz, and the strategy behind how she set that up, how she has collected the leads, and what it’s meant for her financially. This a good one to listen to just to uncover a little bit more about yourself and how you can use that to craft your brand messaging to your benefit.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Kaye Putnam. Kaye is is a psychology-driven brand strategist for entrepreneurs. Through work with over 100 clients, from Fortune 50’s to entrepreneurs, she developed the In Demand Brand method. She has had some crazy success though with her famous opt-in. 55,000 people have taken her psychology quiz all about branding and ya’ll need to take it too. Inside this episode, all three of us nerd out pretty hardcore. We talk about the psychology behind understanding your competition and establishing your brand presence. We uncover a couple of the most popular archetypes and the least popular ones.</p><p>Kaye brings to the conversation a different way of looking at your brand, your messaging, and what you’re serving to your clients based on what you are actually best at and who you are as a human being, which is like the easiest and the best thing to do, right? Of course, we also talk about her quiz, and the strategy behind how she set that up, how she has collected the leads, and what it’s meant for her financially. This a good one to listen to just to uncover a little bit more about yourself and how you can use that to craft your brand messaging to your benefit.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3029</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[56dfe765-5016-4b6a-ab8c-d98a477ba935]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3723923028.mp3?updated=1659119690" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>518: Adopting a Profit First Mentality</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/adopting-a-profit-first-mentality</link>
      <description>Back in the day, we reported an entire series on starting your business and one of the first subjects we talked about was adopting a profit-first mentality. Here’s the thing, we re-looked at that episode and have so many more things to say! The way we run our business has dramatically shifted in the last 12 months and because of that, we have so many things to say to people who are just getting started. Even if you have an established business, we have some thoughts about what you should be doing differently when it comes to your dollar bills.
We recorded that first episode about adopting a profit-first mentality in February of 2018 but we honestly didn’t really put our ideas into practice until 2020! It took two years for us to learn how to do that, so we are going to save you that time today. We are not saying that that first episode has no value, but now that we have actually been through the trenches, this is the episode you want!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 09 Mar 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Adopting a Profit First Mentality</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>518</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/67969c56-ae9a-11ec-91b1-f7c4797d3ad7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Back in the day, we reported an entire series on starting your business and one of the first subjects we talked about was adopting a profit-first mentality. Here’s the thing, we re-looked at that episode and have so many more things to say! The way...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Back in the day, we reported an entire series on starting your business and one of the first subjects we talked about was adopting a profit-first mentality. Here’s the thing, we re-looked at that episode and have so many more things to say! The way we run our business has dramatically shifted in the last 12 months and because of that, we have so many things to say to people who are just getting started. Even if you have an established business, we have some thoughts about what you should be doing differently when it comes to your dollar bills.
We recorded that first episode about adopting a profit-first mentality in February of 2018 but we honestly didn’t really put our ideas into practice until 2020! It took two years for us to learn how to do that, so we are going to save you that time today. We are not saying that that first episode has no value, but now that we have actually been through the trenches, this is the episode you want!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Back in the day, we reported an entire series on starting your business and one of the first subjects we talked about was adopting a profit-first mentality. Here’s the thing, we re-looked at that episode and have so many more things to say! The way we run our business has dramatically shifted in the last 12 months and because of that, we have so many things to say to people who are just getting started. Even if you have an established business, we have some thoughts about what you should be doing differently when it comes to your dollar bills.</p><p>We recorded that first episode about adopting a profit-first mentality in February of 2018 but we honestly didn’t really put our ideas into practice until 2020! It took two years for us to learn how to do that, so we are going to save you that time today. We are not saying that that first episode has no value, but now that we have actually been through the trenches, this is the episode you want!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2779</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0f6b50f4-f99f-48d6-b85a-4d07f7562a70]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8740991797.mp3?updated=1659123997" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>517: Leaving Retail to Pursue Her Creative Business Full-Time with Krystina Benedetti of The Messy Cookie</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/leaving-retail-to-pursue-her-creative-business-full-time-with-krystina-benedetti-of-the-messy-cookie</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Krystina Benedetti of The Messy Cookie. She is a lifelong entrepreneur who has grown her love of baking into a business and started spreading her joy through COVID. She has left her full-time job and has built an online business that offers virtual Cookie Ice Nights and she is also making all these amazing custom cookies. We love this girl, she is so amazing! 
Krystina is soon to be a Strategy Academy alumni! She is not even a year through our course, hasn’t even celebrated her first birthday with us, and has already done super amazing things in her business, like putting in her notice to leave her retail job to pursue her cookie business full-time. We break down everything that she has gone through in the last eight months that has led up to the moment where she felt comfortable and ready to leave her job. We talk about what she had logistically prepared for, how she got there mentally, what investing in her business looked like to her, and how she tackled the program and made the most of it to see the most traction. If you are interested in the Strategy Academy, we have a free training video that you can watch here.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 04 Mar 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Leaving Retail to Pursue Her Creative Business Full-Time with Krystina Benedetti of The Messy Cookie</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>517</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/685bd7e6-ae9a-11ec-91b1-e795b7a86f08/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Krystina Benedetti of The Messy Cookie. She is a lifelong entrepreneur who has grown her love of baking into a business and started spreading her joy through COVID. She has left her full-time job and has built an online...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Krystina Benedetti of The Messy Cookie. She is a lifelong entrepreneur who has grown her love of baking into a business and started spreading her joy through COVID. She has left her full-time job and has built an online business that offers virtual Cookie Ice Nights and she is also making all these amazing custom cookies. We love this girl, she is so amazing! 
Krystina is soon to be a Strategy Academy alumni! She is not even a year through our course, hasn’t even celebrated her first birthday with us, and has already done super amazing things in her business, like putting in her notice to leave her retail job to pursue her cookie business full-time. We break down everything that she has gone through in the last eight months that has led up to the moment where she felt comfortable and ready to leave her job. We talk about what she had logistically prepared for, how she got there mentally, what investing in her business looked like to her, and how she tackled the program and made the most of it to see the most traction. If you are interested in the Strategy Academy, we have a free training video that you can watch here.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Krystina Benedetti of The Messy Cookie. She is a lifelong entrepreneur who has grown her love of baking into a business and started spreading her joy through COVID. She has left her full-time job and has built an online business that offers virtual Cookie Ice Nights and she is also making all these amazing custom cookies. We love this girl, she is so amazing! </p><p>Krystina is soon to be a Strategy Academy alumni! She is not even a year through our course, hasn’t even celebrated her first birthday with us, and has already done super amazing things in her business, like putting in her notice to leave her retail job to pursue her cookie business full-time. We break down everything that she has gone through in the last eight months that has led up to the moment where she felt comfortable and ready to leave her job. We talk about what she had logistically prepared for, how she got there mentally, what investing in her business looked like to her, and how she tackled the program and made the most of it to see the most traction. If you are interested in the Strategy Academy, we have a free training video that you can watch <a href="https://thinkcreativecollective.lpages.co/day-job-to-dream-job-webinar-registration/">here</a>.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2588</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[91a517e4-ab91-4ae3-a18c-997094f9ffd7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9585648466.mp3?updated=1659123920" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>516: Keeping Your Business Smaller on Purpose without Sacrificing Profit</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/keeping-your-business-smaller-on-purpose-without-sacrificing-profit</link>
      <description>A couple of episodes ago, we teased at the end that we were already going into what could be a whole other conversation. This is that conversation. We are going to be sharing some tidbits that we have learned and have deliberately decided to do or not to do in Boss Project and within our side business to seek growth and to keep our business and our companies in the range we want them to be. This is based on what we do and don’t want to do in that job. We know this sounds confusing but stick with us, and we will break it all down. We really want you to go and listen to episode 512 because at the end we start this conversation, so it might make a little more sense to listen to that one first.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 02 Mar 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Keeping Your Business Smaller on Purpose without Sacrificing Profit</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>516</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/6ac30ae0-ae9a-11ec-91b1-73b07c66d7f7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>A couple of episodes ago, we teased at the end that we were already going into what could be a whole other conversation. This is that conversation. We are going to be sharing some tidbits that we have learned and have deliberately decided to do or not...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>A couple of episodes ago, we teased at the end that we were already going into what could be a whole other conversation. This is that conversation. We are going to be sharing some tidbits that we have learned and have deliberately decided to do or not to do in Boss Project and within our side business to seek growth and to keep our business and our companies in the range we want them to be. This is based on what we do and don’t want to do in that job. We know this sounds confusing but stick with us, and we will break it all down. We really want you to go and listen to episode 512 because at the end we start this conversation, so it might make a little more sense to listen to that one first.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A couple of episodes ago, we teased at the end that we were already going into what could be a whole other conversation. This is that conversation. We are going to be sharing some tidbits that we have learned and have deliberately decided to do or not to do in Boss Project and within our side business to seek growth and to keep our business and our companies in the range we want them to be. This is based on what we do and don’t want to do in that job. We know this sounds confusing but stick with us, and we will break it all down. We really want you to go and listen to episode 512 because at the end we start this conversation, so it might make a little more sense to listen to that one first.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2003</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f43d2395-2ab5-4ca4-9abc-e172b94399f3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8762813303.mp3?updated=1659123817" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>515: Your New Sales Pitch with Aandra Bohlen</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/your-new-sales-pitch-with-aandra-bohlen</link>
      <description>Today we welcome Aandra Bohlen, sales guru, inspiring friend, and all-round badass! She is here to demystify the sigmas around selling and the ways it is being taught. Her work is centered on developing and teaching entrepreneurs to create an amazing enrolment experience that leads to high conversion rates. She is an expert on sales calls and mentality and if you did not get the point already, she has it going on! We are going to talk about getting your mindset right and some real techniques for conversion so you are not going to want to miss this, we promise!
Aandra has almost 30 years of experience in sales and we are so lucky to get to throw a bunch of questions at her, things we know you would love to have answered. We discuss getting past money-mentality blocks, perfecting your pitch and how to translate sales onto social media and your content creation process. Aandra has a bunch of great reframes of the sales thought process and we promise that this conversation is going to help do better and think better about your sales game. We also have a great activity that we really want you to do, so stay tuned for that!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 25 Feb 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Your New Sales Pitch with Aandra Bohlen</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>515</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/6b7a87b0-ae9a-11ec-91b1-f313f4ee2808/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we welcome Aandra Bohlen, sales guru, inspiring friend, and all-round badass! She is here to demystify the sigmas around selling and the ways it is being taught. Her work is centered on developing and teaching entrepreneurs to create an amazing...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we welcome Aandra Bohlen, sales guru, inspiring friend, and all-round badass! She is here to demystify the sigmas around selling and the ways it is being taught. Her work is centered on developing and teaching entrepreneurs to create an amazing enrolment experience that leads to high conversion rates. She is an expert on sales calls and mentality and if you did not get the point already, she has it going on! We are going to talk about getting your mindset right and some real techniques for conversion so you are not going to want to miss this, we promise!
Aandra has almost 30 years of experience in sales and we are so lucky to get to throw a bunch of questions at her, things we know you would love to have answered. We discuss getting past money-mentality blocks, perfecting your pitch and how to translate sales onto social media and your content creation process. Aandra has a bunch of great reframes of the sales thought process and we promise that this conversation is going to help do better and think better about your sales game. We also have a great activity that we really want you to do, so stay tuned for that!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we welcome Aandra Bohlen, sales guru, inspiring friend, and all-round badass! She is here to demystify the sigmas around selling and the ways it is being taught. Her work is centered on developing and teaching entrepreneurs to create an amazing enrolment experience that leads to high conversion rates. She is an expert on sales calls and mentality and if you did not get the point already, she has it going on! We are going to talk about getting your mindset right and some real techniques for conversion so you are not going to want to miss this, we promise!</p><p>Aandra has almost 30 years of experience in sales and we are so lucky to get to throw a bunch of questions at her, things we know you would love to have answered. We discuss getting past money-mentality blocks, perfecting your pitch and how to translate sales onto social media and your content creation process. Aandra has a bunch of great reframes of the sales thought process and we promise that this conversation is going to help do better and think better about your sales game. We also have a great activity that we really want you to do, so stay tuned for that!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2853</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4f0e98d5-9e02-47e3-9aac-9dc6a653e3d8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1042099814.mp3?updated=1661792188" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>514: January 2021 Profit Report: Hiring and Investing While Maintaining a High Profit Margin</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/january-2021-profit-report-hiring-and-investing-while-maintaining-a-high-profit-margin</link>
      <description>It's 2021, and we are diving into our profit reports. If you are new to this segment of the show, we really like to dive deep into what it takes to run an online business while avoiding comparison and not having to question your every move. So, instead of sharing dollars and cents, we share percentages, and we share strategies. We also dive into sharing behind-the-scenes thoughts and actions so you can see what makes sense for you without having to worry about whether you are in the right place and questioning where you’re at. 
We have a good accompanying episode to this one, where we break down the strategies we are trying to tackle for this quarter, and more specifically, we break down the accompanying expenses to those strategies. So if you want to hear more about them, definitely listen to that episode too. Now, without further ado, let’s dive in to today’s profit report.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Feb 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>January 2021 Profit Report: Hiring and Investing While Maintaining a High Profit Margin</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>514</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/6c87f750-ae9a-11ec-91b1-df2369175d6b/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>It's 2021, and we are diving into our profit reports. If you are new to this segment of the show, we really like to dive deep into what it takes to run an online business while avoiding comparison and not having to question your every move. So,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It's 2021, and we are diving into our profit reports. If you are new to this segment of the show, we really like to dive deep into what it takes to run an online business while avoiding comparison and not having to question your every move. So, instead of sharing dollars and cents, we share percentages, and we share strategies. We also dive into sharing behind-the-scenes thoughts and actions so you can see what makes sense for you without having to worry about whether you are in the right place and questioning where you’re at. 
We have a good accompanying episode to this one, where we break down the strategies we are trying to tackle for this quarter, and more specifically, we break down the accompanying expenses to those strategies. So if you want to hear more about them, definitely listen to that episode too. Now, without further ado, let’s dive in to today’s profit report.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It's 2021, and we are diving into our profit reports. If you are new to this segment of the show, we really like to dive deep into what it takes to run an online business while avoiding comparison and not having to question your every move. So, instead of sharing dollars and cents, we share percentages, and we share strategies. We also dive into sharing behind-the-scenes thoughts and actions so you can see what makes sense for you without having to worry about whether you are in the right place and questioning where you’re at. </p><p>We have a good accompanying episode to this one, where we break down the strategies we are trying to tackle for this quarter, and more specifically, we break down the accompanying expenses to those strategies. So if you want to hear more about them, definitely listen to that episode too. Now, without further ado, let’s dive in to today’s profit report.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2719</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[909ae6fe-0837-458e-afca-002bbe141be9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8020122542.mp3?updated=1659123191" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>513: Pivoting From In-Person Services to Online Courses and a Membership with Melissa Fryer of Build a Better Baker</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/pivoting-from-in-person-services-to-online-courses-and-a-membership-with-melissa-fryer-of-build-a-better-baker</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Melissa Fryer. She is a creative artist, who has been in the professional baking industry for sixteen years and she noticed that people needed to find out more information about building their own baking business. But this was not until after she moved to the middle of the desert, had to leave another business behind, and start all over again with the help of Strategy Academy. Melissa is one of our rockstar, OG Strategy Academy students who have truly taken the program to a tee of how it was designed. We brought her on to not only get a peek behind the curtain of her business but to follow along with her thought processes and different strategies that she implemented in her business with how she was learning and what she was learning from the program.
You’ll get a good glimpse today behind Melissa’s business that has succeeded and continues to succeed and thrive as she has taken pivots and made different decisions and tweaks based on not only what she is learning from our program but by knowing her audience and herself as her life has changed. This is exactly what we designed the program for – your life and not the other way round. So we are going to talk about the Strategy Academy a lot today but you are also going to get so many good tips about memberships, monetizing a Facebook group, how to grow an email list, and how to identify your offer depending on your lifestyle. Learn more about Strategy Academy here.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 18 Feb 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Pivoting From In-Person Services to Online Courses and a Membership with Melissa Fryer of Build a Better Baker</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>513</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/6d466406-ae9a-11ec-91b1-3bc4ff332556/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Melissa Fryer. She is a creative artist, who has been in the professional baking industry for sixteen years and she noticed that people needed to find out more information about building their own baking business. But this...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Melissa Fryer. She is a creative artist, who has been in the professional baking industry for sixteen years and she noticed that people needed to find out more information about building their own baking business. But this was not until after she moved to the middle of the desert, had to leave another business behind, and start all over again with the help of Strategy Academy. Melissa is one of our rockstar, OG Strategy Academy students who have truly taken the program to a tee of how it was designed. We brought her on to not only get a peek behind the curtain of her business but to follow along with her thought processes and different strategies that she implemented in her business with how she was learning and what she was learning from the program.
You’ll get a good glimpse today behind Melissa’s business that has succeeded and continues to succeed and thrive as she has taken pivots and made different decisions and tweaks based on not only what she is learning from our program but by knowing her audience and herself as her life has changed. This is exactly what we designed the program for – your life and not the other way round. So we are going to talk about the Strategy Academy a lot today but you are also going to get so many good tips about memberships, monetizing a Facebook group, how to grow an email list, and how to identify your offer depending on your lifestyle. Learn more about Strategy Academy here.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Melissa Fryer. She is a creative artist, who has been in the professional baking industry for sixteen years and she noticed that people needed to find out more information about building their own baking business. But this was not until after she moved to the middle of the desert, had to leave another business behind, and start all over again with the help of Strategy Academy. Melissa is one of our rockstar, OG Strategy Academy students who have truly taken the program to a tee of how it was designed. We brought her on to not only get a peek behind the curtain of her business but to follow along with her thought processes and different strategies that she implemented in her business with how she was learning and what she was learning from the program.</p><p>You’ll get a good glimpse today behind Melissa’s business that has succeeded and continues to succeed and thrive as she has taken pivots and made different decisions and tweaks based on not only what she is learning from our program but by knowing her audience and herself as her life has changed. This is exactly what we designed the program for – your life and not the other way round. So we are going to talk about the Strategy Academy a lot today but you are also going to get so many good tips about memberships, monetizing a Facebook group, how to grow an email list, and how to identify your offer depending on your lifestyle. Learn more about Strategy Academy <a href="http://bossproject.com/dreamjob">here</a>.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3121</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f980b80d-2791-4e87-8db3-26efe8c599fd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9158622771.mp3?updated=1659123133" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>512: Our Master SEO, Affiliate Program and Social Media Plan for Massive Growth in 2021</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/pivoting-from-in-person-services-to-online-courses-and-a-membership-with-melissa-fryer-of-build-a-better-baker</link>
      <description>Okay, we’re finally here for the episode we’d said we were going to give you. We are going to share a sneak peek behind the scenes of what we are doing and what we are focussing on for Q1, including not just big projects, but also some exciting shifts we’ve had in our team! If you have been following us for any length of time, you know we do a big planning dream-dump and break down our quarters into these “sexy chunks,” as we refer to them. Historically speaking, Q1 has always been a time for us to reevaluate and to really clean up and optimize our existing systems. That’s worked for us because, in terms of outside obligations, we are home the most in Q1. We also have the least going on with others in our business and we can really focus on what’s going on internally. It’s a great time to haul in and not go anywhere, especially because it’s the worst part of winter. So when we have no choice but to be cooped up inside, we use it as an opportunity to perfect everything for the rest of their year so that when spring blooms, we can come out of our shells ready and prepared. Join us today and get the three-step blueprint to our 2021 Q1 masterplan.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 16 Feb 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our Master SEO, Affiliate Program and Social Media Plan for Massive Growth in 2021</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>512</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/6e0e59ac-ae9a-11ec-91b1-67dd3471c412/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Okay, we’re finally here for the episode we’d said we were going to give you. We are going to share a sneak peek behind the scenes of what we are doing and what we are focussing on for Q1, including not just big projects, but also some exciting...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Okay, we’re finally here for the episode we’d said we were going to give you. We are going to share a sneak peek behind the scenes of what we are doing and what we are focussing on for Q1, including not just big projects, but also some exciting shifts we’ve had in our team! If you have been following us for any length of time, you know we do a big planning dream-dump and break down our quarters into these “sexy chunks,” as we refer to them. Historically speaking, Q1 has always been a time for us to reevaluate and to really clean up and optimize our existing systems. That’s worked for us because, in terms of outside obligations, we are home the most in Q1. We also have the least going on with others in our business and we can really focus on what’s going on internally. It’s a great time to haul in and not go anywhere, especially because it’s the worst part of winter. So when we have no choice but to be cooped up inside, we use it as an opportunity to perfect everything for the rest of their year so that when spring blooms, we can come out of our shells ready and prepared. Join us today and get the three-step blueprint to our 2021 Q1 masterplan.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Okay, we’re finally here for the episode we’d said we were going to give you. We are going to share a sneak peek behind the scenes of what we are doing and what we are focussing on for Q1, including not just big projects, but also some exciting shifts we’ve had in our team! If you have been following us for any length of time, you know we do a big planning dream-dump and break down our quarters into these “sexy chunks,” as we refer to them. Historically speaking, Q1 has always been a time for us to reevaluate and to really clean up and optimize our existing systems. That’s worked for us because, in terms of outside obligations, we are home the most in Q1. We also have the least going on with others in our business and we can really focus on what’s going on internally. It’s a great time to haul in and not go anywhere, especially because it’s the worst part of winter. So when we have no choice but to be cooped up inside, we use it as an opportunity to perfect everything for the rest of their year so that when spring blooms, we can come out of our shells ready and prepared. Join us today and get the three-step blueprint to our 2021 Q1 masterplan.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3332</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[58209d33-3e99-4eda-9e61-5e333b01c161]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7457963646.mp3?updated=1659119648" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>511: Why Your Business Needs a Brand Strategy with Rachel Green</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-your-business-needs-a-brand-strategy-with-rachel-green</link>
      <description>On the Strategy Hour Podcast today, we are joined by the wonderful and amazing Rachel Green! She is one of the first people we connected with when we were starting out in the online business world and she has been in business for the last seven years, helping hundreds of businesses grow and succeed. As a brand strategist, designer and educator, Rachel has generated over 5 million dollars in sales for her clients and her focus on empowering female business owners is truly inspiring!
In this episode, we are breaking down what a brand strategy is, why it is important to start there, and the questions that you need to ask when figuring this all out. Rachel offers some great thoughts to work through in order to help you make sure your story and brand are pushing you forward. She is all about progression, not just pretty branding and logos! We really respect Rachel's perspective on the strategic part of branding and we know you will all find it very useful. So buckle up and let's get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 11 Feb 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why Your Business Needs a Brand Strategy with Rachel Green</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>511</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/701e5620-ae9a-11ec-91b1-af737f233615/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>On the Strategy Hour Podcast today, we are joined by the wonderful and amazing Rachel Green! She is one of the first people we connected with when we were starting out in the online business world and she has been in business for the last seven years,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On the Strategy Hour Podcast today, we are joined by the wonderful and amazing Rachel Green! She is one of the first people we connected with when we were starting out in the online business world and she has been in business for the last seven years, helping hundreds of businesses grow and succeed. As a brand strategist, designer and educator, Rachel has generated over 5 million dollars in sales for her clients and her focus on empowering female business owners is truly inspiring!
In this episode, we are breaking down what a brand strategy is, why it is important to start there, and the questions that you need to ask when figuring this all out. Rachel offers some great thoughts to work through in order to help you make sure your story and brand are pushing you forward. She is all about progression, not just pretty branding and logos! We really respect Rachel's perspective on the strategic part of branding and we know you will all find it very useful. So buckle up and let's get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On the Strategy Hour Podcast today, we are joined by the wonderful and amazing Rachel Green! She is one of the first people we connected with when we were starting out in the online business world and she has been in business for the last seven years, helping hundreds of businesses grow and succeed. As a brand strategist, designer and educator, Rachel has generated over 5 million dollars in sales for her clients and her focus on empowering female business owners is truly inspiring!</p><p>In this episode, we are breaking down what a brand strategy is, why it is important to start there, and the questions that you need to ask when figuring this all out. Rachel offers some great thoughts to work through in order to help you make sure your story and brand are pushing you forward. She is all about progression, not just pretty branding and logos! We really respect Rachel's perspective on the strategic part of branding and we know you will all find it very useful. So buckle up and let's get into some strategy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1885</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ee9eab3b-9d65-4f48-ae4c-2261b0fd1abe]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1276885151.mp3?updated=1659119561" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>510: How we are using these 4 highly effective sales techniques in our business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-we-are-using-these-4-highly-effective-sales-techniques-in-our-business</link>
      <description>Do you want to increase your sales? Of course, you do, we all do! There are so many strategies out there on how to do this and today we are picking out four that we use and that have been highly effective for us! We hope that sharing this with you will help you to decide which strategies are best for you and your hustle. When we speak about our work we are referring to Boss Project, our main thing and then each of our own side gigs. Some of the strategies have worked better in different places but we will be unpacking all of that, do not worry!
The cool thing is that you get to try these out for yourself and see which suits you. We want you to think about which fits with your goals and lifestyle, as well as its conversion efficacy. These are the most important metrics for you to keep an eye on while testing things out. Don't forget to keep the conversation going over on Instagram, you know we love to hear from you, so hit us up with any thoughts or questions!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 09 Feb 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How we are using these 4 highly effective sales techniques in our business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>510</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/73958f8a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-9bd26dc5867f/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Do you want to increase your sales? Of course, you do, we all do! There are so many strategies out there on how to do this and today we are picking out four that we use and that have been highly effective for us! We hope that sharing this with you...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Do you want to increase your sales? Of course, you do, we all do! There are so many strategies out there on how to do this and today we are picking out four that we use and that have been highly effective for us! We hope that sharing this with you will help you to decide which strategies are best for you and your hustle. When we speak about our work we are referring to Boss Project, our main thing and then each of our own side gigs. Some of the strategies have worked better in different places but we will be unpacking all of that, do not worry!
The cool thing is that you get to try these out for yourself and see which suits you. We want you to think about which fits with your goals and lifestyle, as well as its conversion efficacy. These are the most important metrics for you to keep an eye on while testing things out. Don't forget to keep the conversation going over on Instagram, you know we love to hear from you, so hit us up with any thoughts or questions!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Do you want to increase your sales? Of course, you do, we all do! There are so many strategies out there on how to do this and today we are picking out four that we use and that have been highly effective for us! We hope that sharing this with you will help you to decide which strategies are best for you and your hustle. When we speak about our work we are referring to Boss Project, our main thing and then each of our own side gigs. Some of the strategies have worked better in different places but we will be unpacking all of that, do not worry!</p><p>The cool thing is that you get to try these out for yourself and see which suits you. We want you to think about which fits with your goals and lifestyle, as well as its conversion efficacy. These are the most important metrics for you to keep an eye on while testing things out. Don't forget to keep the conversation going over on Instagram, you know we love to hear from you, so hit us up with any thoughts or questions!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2106</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6a96a412-4127-4715-9256-0a9e59a036d3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1476029136.mp3?updated=1659118455" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>509: Restock Models, Launch Strategies and Growth Tactics for Your Product Business with Rachel Allene &amp; Mia Graves of Honey Bee Clay</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/running-an-intuitive-business-and-finding-contentment</link>
      <description>Today, we have two of our good friends and product-based business gurus on the show. First up is Rachel Allene, who Abagail met years ago at a creative entrepreneur conference. They have stayed friends, and Abagail has watched her hand calligraphy business grow into what it is today. She makes all kinds of products that are not necessarily handmade but rather, hand-lettered. We're comparing and contrasting that with our other guest, Emylee's friend, Mia Graves. We are so excited to hear from her because we love the way her marketing and business brain works. She makes polymer clay earrings and also sells cutters for polymer clay makers. She has two different business models, and in this episode, we are breaking down a deliberate sellout, restock model strategy and the mentality behind it, why it works, why it's hard sometimes, who it's right for, and the pros and cons both for you as the maker and for the customer. We hear about the journeys Rachel and Mia have been on and the slight tweaks they have made to their selling mechanisms, strategies, and marketing in order to please more people and not go absolutely insane. This roundtable discussion will give you some really great insights into the product world. You have asked for more product-focused content, and this information is coming from two very smart women.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 04 Feb 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Restock Models, Launch Strategies and Growth Tactics for Your Product Business with Rachel Allene &amp; Mia Graves of Honey Bee Clay</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>509</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/77dec9c6-ae9a-11ec-91b1-6784ffa60f73/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, we have two of our good friends and product-based business gurus on the show. First up is Rachel Allene, who Abagail met years ago at a creative entrepreneur conference. They have stayed friends, and Abagail has watched her hand calligraphy...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we have two of our good friends and product-based business gurus on the show. First up is Rachel Allene, who Abagail met years ago at a creative entrepreneur conference. They have stayed friends, and Abagail has watched her hand calligraphy business grow into what it is today. She makes all kinds of products that are not necessarily handmade but rather, hand-lettered. We're comparing and contrasting that with our other guest, Emylee's friend, Mia Graves. We are so excited to hear from her because we love the way her marketing and business brain works. She makes polymer clay earrings and also sells cutters for polymer clay makers. She has two different business models, and in this episode, we are breaking down a deliberate sellout, restock model strategy and the mentality behind it, why it works, why it's hard sometimes, who it's right for, and the pros and cons both for you as the maker and for the customer. We hear about the journeys Rachel and Mia have been on and the slight tweaks they have made to their selling mechanisms, strategies, and marketing in order to please more people and not go absolutely insane. This roundtable discussion will give you some really great insights into the product world. You have asked for more product-focused content, and this information is coming from two very smart women.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we have two of our good friends and product-based business gurus on the show. First up is Rachel Allene, who Abagail met years ago at a creative entrepreneur conference. They have stayed friends, and Abagail has watched her hand calligraphy business grow into what it is today. She makes all kinds of products that are not necessarily handmade but rather, hand-lettered. We're comparing and contrasting that with our other guest, Emylee's friend, Mia Graves. We are so excited to hear from her because we love the way her marketing and business brain works. She makes polymer clay earrings and also sells cutters for polymer clay makers. She has two different business models, and in this episode, we are breaking down a deliberate sellout, restock model strategy and the mentality behind it, why it works, why it's hard sometimes, who it's right for, and the pros and cons both for you as the maker and for the customer. We hear about the journeys Rachel and Mia have been on and the slight tweaks they have made to their selling mechanisms, strategies, and marketing in order to please more people and not go absolutely insane. This roundtable discussion will give you some really great insights into the product world. You have asked for more product-focused content, and this information is coming from two very smart women.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3138</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0bfa2685-3da0-4e77-8525-04affd2a5ab4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6531870868.mp3?updated=1659118415" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>508: Running an Intuitive Business and Finding Contentment</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/running-an-intuitive-business-and-finding-contentment</link>
      <description>Hey friends, so we are putting an introduction on the top of this episode because we had every intention to talk about all of our plans for Q1 and the cool, exciting stuff that we are trying, the people we recently hired, and the strategies we are starting. And then, somehow, we got down a rabbit hole of intuitive business ownership, contentment, our problem with happiness, and everything in between!
So we are going to save our episode about Q1 for another time, and what you are hearing today is slightly different than what you think you might be getting ready to hear! But it is still a really good episode, so stay until the very end. We also have a disclaimer that relates to a lot of what we say today at the very end, so you need to stay till then to hear it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 02 Feb 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Running an Intuitive Business and Finding Contentment</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>508</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/7869b6a8-ae9a-11ec-91b1-23101cbdd396/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Hey friends, so we are putting an introduction on the top of this episode because we had every intention to talk about all of our plans for Q1 and the cool, exciting stuff that we are trying, the people we recently hired, and the strategies we are...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey friends, so we are putting an introduction on the top of this episode because we had every intention to talk about all of our plans for Q1 and the cool, exciting stuff that we are trying, the people we recently hired, and the strategies we are starting. And then, somehow, we got down a rabbit hole of intuitive business ownership, contentment, our problem with happiness, and everything in between!
So we are going to save our episode about Q1 for another time, and what you are hearing today is slightly different than what you think you might be getting ready to hear! But it is still a really good episode, so stay until the very end. We also have a disclaimer that relates to a lot of what we say today at the very end, so you need to stay till then to hear it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey friends, so we are putting an introduction on the top of this episode because we had every intention to talk about all of our plans for Q1 and the cool, exciting stuff that we are trying, the people we recently hired, and the strategies we are starting. And then, somehow, we got down a rabbit hole of intuitive business ownership, contentment, our problem with happiness, and everything in between!</p><p>So we are going to save our episode about Q1 for another time, and what you are hearing today is slightly different than what you think you might be getting ready to hear! But it is still a really good episode, so stay until the very end. We also have a disclaimer that relates to a lot of what we say today at the very end, so you need to stay till then to hear it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2481</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3cae5752-cdd7-4845-bdf6-43572f062bab]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3696492168.mp3?updated=1659118350" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>507: Creating a Premium High Touch Experience Utilizing Dubsado with Cami Monet</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-a-premium-high-touch-experience-utilizing-dubsado-with-cami-monet</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Cami Monet, a watercolor artist, and custom wedding stationer. She is all about paper goods with purpose and personality. Camille Monet operates under two branches where she has custom wedding clients and does all their custom stationery. Her product line is also available for both retail and wholesale. When she isn’t doing all of these things, she also has a podcast with a friend, where they share ways to make business strategy a piece of cake for paper people.
In this episode, we’re talking a little bit about processes, using Dubsado, and all about how to create a high-touch premium service with your clients. This is for anyone who wants to dip their toe into charging premium prices this year, and for those who are already offering premium services. This episode will also give you some good ideas on how to be high-touch without having to be in the process every time. Camille shares details about her speedy process on getting clients in the door and paying. The customization and personality aspect of her process is unlike any other that we have heard of, so we know you guys are going to get some really good takeaways today. Let’s get going!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 28 Jan 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating a Premium High Touch Experience Utilizing Dubsado with Cami Monet</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>507</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/78fdb86c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-fbe7d7dbee1a/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Cami Monet, a watercolor artist, and custom wedding stationer. She is all about paper goods with purpose and personality. Camille Monet operates under two branches where she has custom wedding clients and does all their...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Cami Monet, a watercolor artist, and custom wedding stationer. She is all about paper goods with purpose and personality. Camille Monet operates under two branches where she has custom wedding clients and does all their custom stationery. Her product line is also available for both retail and wholesale. When she isn’t doing all of these things, she also has a podcast with a friend, where they share ways to make business strategy a piece of cake for paper people.
In this episode, we’re talking a little bit about processes, using Dubsado, and all about how to create a high-touch premium service with your clients. This is for anyone who wants to dip their toe into charging premium prices this year, and for those who are already offering premium services. This episode will also give you some good ideas on how to be high-touch without having to be in the process every time. Camille shares details about her speedy process on getting clients in the door and paying. The customization and personality aspect of her process is unlike any other that we have heard of, so we know you guys are going to get some really good takeaways today. Let’s get going!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Cami Monet, a watercolor artist, and custom wedding stationer. She is all about paper goods with purpose and personality. Camille Monet operates under two branches where she has custom wedding clients and does all their custom stationery. Her product line is also available for both retail and wholesale. When she isn’t doing all of these things, she also has a podcast with a friend, where they share ways to make business strategy a piece of cake for paper people.</p><p>In this episode, we’re talking a little bit about processes, using Dubsado, and all about how to create a high-touch premium service with your clients. This is for anyone who wants to dip their toe into charging premium prices this year, and for those who are already offering premium services. This episode will also give you some good ideas on how to be high-touch without having to be in the process every time. Camille shares details about her speedy process on getting clients in the door and paying. The customization and personality aspect of her process is unlike any other that we have heard of, so we know you guys are going to get some really good takeaways today. Let’s get going!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2559</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1ed30651-9e99-4e65-8295-532f2ad7c996]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1952394681.mp3?updated=1659118304" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>506: December 2020 Profit Report: Planning for a Loss, But then THIS Happened</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/december-2020-profit-report-planning-for-a-loss-but-then-this-happened</link>
      <description>2020 feels a bit like a lifetime ago, even though we are only a few weeks into January. Even though we projected and gave you some ideas of where we might land, we are still so surprised with how last year ended up going for us. For all of us, 2020 will be a standout year for good and bad reasons. For us, it was ridiculous how our business year ended up. When big things happen in the world, you don’t know how they’re going to impact you, your partner, your family, your business, the climate, and the people buying your product. Everything. Being in charge of how you make money is sometimes scary when you can’t control all of those scenarios. So, we are so thankful that we had the time and space in January 2020 to set the expectations of what we wanted to do, and more importantly, what we didn’t want to do for the year. This really helped because when shit hit the fan (and continued to hit the fan throughout the year), we were really focused on securing our foundation. And, in December 2020, this is what caught us.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 26 Jan 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>December 2020 Profit Report: Planning for a Loss, But then THIS Happened</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>506</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/79946ab4-ae9a-11ec-91b1-9360077a8d74/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>2020 feels a bit like a lifetime ago, even though we are only a few weeks into January. Even though we projected and gave you some ideas of where we might land, we are still so surprised with how last year ended up going for us. For all of us, 2020...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>2020 feels a bit like a lifetime ago, even though we are only a few weeks into January. Even though we projected and gave you some ideas of where we might land, we are still so surprised with how last year ended up going for us. For all of us, 2020 will be a standout year for good and bad reasons. For us, it was ridiculous how our business year ended up. When big things happen in the world, you don’t know how they’re going to impact you, your partner, your family, your business, the climate, and the people buying your product. Everything. Being in charge of how you make money is sometimes scary when you can’t control all of those scenarios. So, we are so thankful that we had the time and space in January 2020 to set the expectations of what we wanted to do, and more importantly, what we didn’t want to do for the year. This really helped because when shit hit the fan (and continued to hit the fan throughout the year), we were really focused on securing our foundation. And, in December 2020, this is what caught us.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>2020 feels a bit like a lifetime ago, even though we are only a few weeks into January. Even though we projected and gave you some ideas of where we might land, we are still so surprised with how last year ended up going for us. For all of us, 2020 will be a standout year for good and bad reasons. For us, it was ridiculous how our business year ended up. When big things happen in the world, you don’t know how they’re going to impact you, your partner, your family, your business, the climate, and the people buying your product. Everything. Being in charge of how you make money is sometimes scary when you can’t control all of those scenarios. So, we are so thankful that we had the time and space in January 2020 to set the expectations of what we wanted to do, and more importantly, what we didn’t want to do for the year. This really helped because when shit hit the fan (and continued to hit the fan throughout the year), we were really focused on securing our foundation. And, in December 2020, this is what caught us.  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2344</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8d480695-83e7-4638-86e8-b2257034902d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9160414852.mp3?updated=1659118273" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>505: Best SEO Strategies for 2021 with Dresean Ryan</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/best-seo-strategies-for-2021-with-dresean-ryan</link>
      <description>In today’s episode, we speak with Dresean Ryan. He started his SEO career only four years ago after bootstrapping it and learning everything he could because he wanted to make a better life for himself. Dresean has gone on to work with some large companies like Etna, Signa, and Blue Cross Blue Shield. He helps his clients make millions of dollars just by improving their search engine optimization. 
Today we are diving into how you can DIY this process and how you can learn how to hire the right kind of person. Dresean breaks down SEO in an easily-understandable, digestible way to keep things simple for you. He supplies listeners with actionable steps that have to do with outlining your content, deciding what your content should be, and creating that content. To do this, Dresean uses a bunch of cool tools both free and paid, and references his amazing resources at the end, including his very own program that you can use or even pass on to your VA. This ensures that even if you’re not up to speed with SEO in your business, someone on your team definitely will be. Let’s get to it then!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 21 Jan 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Best SEO Strategies for 2021 with Dresean Ryan</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>505</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/7a235968-ae9a-11ec-91b1-a3a3baa13a85/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>In today’s episode, we speak with Dresean Ryan. He started his SEO career only four years ago after bootstrapping it and learning everything he could because he wanted to make a better life for himself. Dresean has gone on to work with some large...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today’s episode, we speak with Dresean Ryan. He started his SEO career only four years ago after bootstrapping it and learning everything he could because he wanted to make a better life for himself. Dresean has gone on to work with some large companies like Etna, Signa, and Blue Cross Blue Shield. He helps his clients make millions of dollars just by improving their search engine optimization. 
Today we are diving into how you can DIY this process and how you can learn how to hire the right kind of person. Dresean breaks down SEO in an easily-understandable, digestible way to keep things simple for you. He supplies listeners with actionable steps that have to do with outlining your content, deciding what your content should be, and creating that content. To do this, Dresean uses a bunch of cool tools both free and paid, and references his amazing resources at the end, including his very own program that you can use or even pass on to your VA. This ensures that even if you’re not up to speed with SEO in your business, someone on your team definitely will be. Let’s get to it then!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today’s episode, we speak with Dresean Ryan. He started his SEO career only four years ago after bootstrapping it and learning everything he could because he wanted to make a better life for himself. Dresean has gone on to work with some large companies like Etna, Signa, and Blue Cross Blue Shield. He helps his clients make millions of dollars just by improving their search engine optimization. </p><p>Today we are diving into how you can DIY this process and how you can learn how to hire the right kind of person. Dresean breaks down SEO in an easily-understandable, digestible way to keep things simple for you. He supplies listeners with actionable steps that have to do with outlining your content, deciding what your content should be, and creating that content. To do this, Dresean uses a bunch of cool tools both free and paid, and references his amazing resources at the end, including his very own program that you can use or even pass on to your VA. This ensures that even if you’re not up to speed with SEO in your business, someone on your team definitely will be. Let’s get to it then!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2756</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ff11596e-220f-473c-a455-fbd1edc8a671]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7597594895.mp3?updated=1659118222" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>504: If Abagail were Laid Off (Again) - Here's What She Would Do Differently 5 Years Later</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/if-abagail-were-laid-off-again-heres-what-she-would-do-differently-5-years-later</link>
      <description>We get a million DMs from people saying they are ready to strike out on their own and telling us they will listen and start with services. If you have been listening for some time now, you will know just how much we believe in service-based businesses. But before you do anything, as always, we recommend you listen to our second episode, back in 2017, the year we launched the show, where we had Abagail on as a guest. 
In that episode, Emylee interviewed her to find out how she replaced her corporate income after getting laid off. Since we reference that episode a billion times, we thought it would be fun to do a 2021 version, where we find out how Abagail would handle the same situation today. Some of the things might be similar, but what are the new strategies Abagail would leverage now? Technology and marketing have changed so much that there are sure to be a few new ways to bounce back quicker.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 19 Jan 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>If Abagail were Laid Off (Again) - Here's What She Would Do Differently 5 Years Later</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>504</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/7ab9d2c6-ae9a-11ec-91b1-7fe1f964fbe7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We get a million DMs from people saying they are ready to strike out on their own and telling us they will listen and start with services. If you have been listening for some time now, you will know just how much we believe in service-based...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We get a million DMs from people saying they are ready to strike out on their own and telling us they will listen and start with services. If you have been listening for some time now, you will know just how much we believe in service-based businesses. But before you do anything, as always, we recommend you listen to our second episode, back in 2017, the year we launched the show, where we had Abagail on as a guest. 
In that episode, Emylee interviewed her to find out how she replaced her corporate income after getting laid off. Since we reference that episode a billion times, we thought it would be fun to do a 2021 version, where we find out how Abagail would handle the same situation today. Some of the things might be similar, but what are the new strategies Abagail would leverage now? Technology and marketing have changed so much that there are sure to be a few new ways to bounce back quicker.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We get a million DMs from people saying they are ready to strike out on their own and telling us they will listen and start with services. If you have been listening for some time now, you will know just how much we believe in service-based businesses. But before you do anything, as always, we recommend you listen to our second episode, back in 2017, the year we launched the show, where we had Abagail on as a guest. </p><p>In that episode, Emylee interviewed her to find out how she replaced her corporate income after getting laid off. Since we reference that episode a billion times, we thought it would be fun to do a 2021 version, where we find out how Abagail would handle the same situation today. Some of the things might be similar, but what are the new strategies Abagail would leverage now? Technology and marketing have changed so much that there are sure to be a few new ways to bounce back quicker.  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2679</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cca627a5-cc80-4845-87d1-6b890cd82283]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3748269123.mp3?updated=1659118243" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>503: How to Tackle Pinterest with Kali Rogers</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-tackle-pinterest-with-kali-rogers-of-blush-online-life-coaching</link>
      <description>Joining us today on the podcast is Kali Rogers, the Founder of Blush Online Life Coaching, a life coaching business aimed at female millennials. Kali is here to teach us more about the super do-able, fun, and stress-free Pinterest strategies that have boosted their site traffic and sales and grown their clients and customers. The best of all? You don’t need a Pinterest marketing degree to implement them, you can start today! If you have a Pinterest account but have stopped using it for some reason, we hope this episode will inspire you to get back into it, or if you have been utilizing this potentially awesome tool, that you will get what you need to brush up your skills even more. 
In the beginning, Kali used Pinterest for personal reasons such as recipes and fashion inspo, until she decided to take a break. At first she didn’t see how Pinterest, a mostly visual medium, would be applicable to Blush, a service-based business. How would she promote a life coaching business through images? When she first started she didn’t have any entrepreneurial skills but realized that she needed to communicate to people that she and her team knew what they were talking about. She resorted to writing as a cheap, safe means of publicity, creating numerous articles for The Huffington Post, including “An Open Letter From Introverts To Everyone Else”, which went completely viral. Many people have a Pinterest account when they first get started in business, but then they get distracted along the line and stop using it on a regular basis. In this episode we are going to show you that, even though it’s an oldie, it’s still a real goodie. So be sure to join us for this awesome conversation!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 14 Jan 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Tackle Pinterest with Kali Rogers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>503</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/7b4bf2f0-ae9a-11ec-91b1-774733e2fe4d/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Joining us today on the podcast is Kali Rogers, the Founder of Blush Online Life Coaching, a life coaching business aimed at female millennials. Kali is here to teach us more about the super do-able, fun, and stress-free Pinterest strategies that have...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Joining us today on the podcast is Kali Rogers, the Founder of Blush Online Life Coaching, a life coaching business aimed at female millennials. Kali is here to teach us more about the super do-able, fun, and stress-free Pinterest strategies that have boosted their site traffic and sales and grown their clients and customers. The best of all? You don’t need a Pinterest marketing degree to implement them, you can start today! If you have a Pinterest account but have stopped using it for some reason, we hope this episode will inspire you to get back into it, or if you have been utilizing this potentially awesome tool, that you will get what you need to brush up your skills even more. 
In the beginning, Kali used Pinterest for personal reasons such as recipes and fashion inspo, until she decided to take a break. At first she didn’t see how Pinterest, a mostly visual medium, would be applicable to Blush, a service-based business. How would she promote a life coaching business through images? When she first started she didn’t have any entrepreneurial skills but realized that she needed to communicate to people that she and her team knew what they were talking about. She resorted to writing as a cheap, safe means of publicity, creating numerous articles for The Huffington Post, including “An Open Letter From Introverts To Everyone Else”, which went completely viral. Many people have a Pinterest account when they first get started in business, but then they get distracted along the line and stop using it on a regular basis. In this episode we are going to show you that, even though it’s an oldie, it’s still a real goodie. So be sure to join us for this awesome conversation!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Joining us today on the podcast is Kali Rogers, the Founder of Blush Online Life Coaching, a life coaching business aimed at female millennials. Kali is here to teach us more about the super do-able, fun, and stress-free Pinterest strategies that have boosted their site traffic and sales and grown their clients and customers. The best of all? You don’t need a Pinterest marketing degree to implement them, you can start today! If you have a Pinterest account but have stopped using it for some reason, we hope this episode will inspire you to get back into it, or if you have been utilizing this potentially awesome tool, that you will get what you need to brush up your skills even more. </p><p>In the beginning, Kali used Pinterest for personal reasons such as recipes and fashion inspo, until she decided to take a break. At first she didn’t see how Pinterest, a mostly visual medium, would be applicable to Blush, a service-based business. How would she promote a life coaching business through images? When she first started she didn’t have any entrepreneurial skills but realized that she needed to communicate to people that she and her team knew what they were talking about. She resorted to writing as a cheap, safe means of publicity, creating numerous articles for The Huffington Post, including “An Open Letter From Introverts To Everyone Else”, which went completely viral. Many people have a Pinterest account when they first get started in business, but then they get distracted along the line and stop using it on a regular basis. In this episode we are going to show you that, even though it’s an oldie, it’s still a real goodie. So be sure to join us for this awesome conversation!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2371</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[393b5305-c3b5-4540-88ed-4865fa85e4c9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7799973867.mp3?updated=1659044452" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>502: Do this One Thing in Your Business Every Week</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/do-this-one-thing-in-your-business-every-week</link>
      <description>Today we get to talk about one of our favorite things — meetings! While most people hate them, we are going to share a few things that might change your mind. Meetings are notorious for consuming a lot of time, often with little real progress, but we will present you with an outline that will make your every meeting from here on out a super productive, efficient one. We’ve spoken about the book Traction many times, but we want to remind you once more to go read it because this is where this outline and our guidelines around meetings come from. 
Sometimes a meeting is not necessary and a Slack message or quick update will suffice, but other times having a meeting makes sense, and therefore it’s important to know how to approach them. Having a weekly meeting keeps all parties fully informed on decisions that were made, as it can be easy to think that everybody is in the loop when they’re not. If you are someone who has little patience for inefficiency and is always looking for the quickest, most productive ways to communicate and do things, this outline is perfect for you! This is as applicable to small teams as it is big ones, and don’t hesitate to ask your contractor to attend these meetings. Be sure to tune in to this episode to get the best strategy for efficient meetings!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 12 Jan 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Do this One Thing in Your Business Every Week</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>502</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/7c0e0fa2-ae9a-11ec-91b1-ab273a27c440/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we get to talk about one of our favorite things — meetings! While most people hate them, we are going to share a few things that might change your mind. Meetings are notorious for consuming a lot of time, often with little real progress, but...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we get to talk about one of our favorite things — meetings! While most people hate them, we are going to share a few things that might change your mind. Meetings are notorious for consuming a lot of time, often with little real progress, but we will present you with an outline that will make your every meeting from here on out a super productive, efficient one. We’ve spoken about the book Traction many times, but we want to remind you once more to go read it because this is where this outline and our guidelines around meetings come from. 
Sometimes a meeting is not necessary and a Slack message or quick update will suffice, but other times having a meeting makes sense, and therefore it’s important to know how to approach them. Having a weekly meeting keeps all parties fully informed on decisions that were made, as it can be easy to think that everybody is in the loop when they’re not. If you are someone who has little patience for inefficiency and is always looking for the quickest, most productive ways to communicate and do things, this outline is perfect for you! This is as applicable to small teams as it is big ones, and don’t hesitate to ask your contractor to attend these meetings. Be sure to tune in to this episode to get the best strategy for efficient meetings!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we get to talk about one of our favorite things — meetings! While most people hate them, we are going to share a few things that might change your mind. Meetings are notorious for consuming a lot of time, often with little real progress, but we will present you with an outline that will make your every meeting from here on out a super productive, efficient one. We’ve spoken about the book <em>Traction</em> many times, but we want to remind you once more to go read it because this is where this outline and our guidelines around meetings come from. </p><p>Sometimes a meeting is not necessary and a Slack message or quick update will suffice, but other times having a meeting makes sense, and therefore it’s important to know how to approach them. Having a weekly meeting keeps all parties fully informed on decisions that were made, as it can be easy to think that everybody is in the loop when they’re not. If you are someone who has little patience for inefficiency and is always looking for the quickest, most productive ways to communicate and do things, this outline is perfect for you! This is as applicable to small teams as it is big ones, and don’t hesitate to ask your contractor to attend these meetings. Be sure to tune in to this episode to get the best strategy for efficient meetings!  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2068</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[562a228b-ebd7-4a46-a44c-9046b9fcd884]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3021984389.mp3?updated=1652211684" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>501: Offering VIP Days in Your Service Based Business with Jordan Gill of Systems Saved Me</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/optimizing-your-services-and-making-more-money-through-vip-days-with-jordan-gill</link>
      <description>Today on the show we have Jordan Gill. Jordan is an operations consultant and the founder of Systems Saved Me. She helps overwhelmed, one-woman shows become streamlined solopreneurs and her jam is creating a cohesive operating system for managing your tasks, files, and inbox. But today we are actually talking about something that could really change the game for you if you are running a service-based business. If you are the type of service-based babe who resents client workloads and is not a fan of the lengthy, back-and-forth communications, and is thinking about changing your entire business because you are almost on the brink of burnout, we encourage you to listen to this episode first! 
What we are sharing today is all about VIP days. With VIP days, you’ll create an amazing, lengthy, costly, profit-inducing service for your clients that also leaves them with a great impression of you. VIP days will also help you to free up your time for the rest of the year so you can do other things in your business. Jordan shares all about how she structures VIP days, how they changed her business, the lessons they taught her as a creative, and how you can implement them in your own business. Spoiler alert – in part of this episode we are talking about using a system that is going to make your VIP experience even better. And that system is Dubsado!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 07 Jan 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Offering VIP Days in Your Service Based Business with Jordan Gill of Systems Saved Me</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>501</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/7d559d3a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-cfe4c784b7d6/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we have Jordan Gill. Jordan is an operations consultant and the founder of Systems Saved Me. She helps overwhelmed, one-woman shows become streamlined solopreneurs and her jam is creating a cohesive operating system for managing your...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we have Jordan Gill. Jordan is an operations consultant and the founder of Systems Saved Me. She helps overwhelmed, one-woman shows become streamlined solopreneurs and her jam is creating a cohesive operating system for managing your tasks, files, and inbox. But today we are actually talking about something that could really change the game for you if you are running a service-based business. If you are the type of service-based babe who resents client workloads and is not a fan of the lengthy, back-and-forth communications, and is thinking about changing your entire business because you are almost on the brink of burnout, we encourage you to listen to this episode first! 
What we are sharing today is all about VIP days. With VIP days, you’ll create an amazing, lengthy, costly, profit-inducing service for your clients that also leaves them with a great impression of you. VIP days will also help you to free up your time for the rest of the year so you can do other things in your business. Jordan shares all about how she structures VIP days, how they changed her business, the lessons they taught her as a creative, and how you can implement them in your own business. Spoiler alert – in part of this episode we are talking about using a system that is going to make your VIP experience even better. And that system is Dubsado!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we have Jordan Gill. Jordan is an operations consultant and the founder of Systems Saved Me. She helps overwhelmed, one-woman shows become streamlined solopreneurs and her jam is creating a cohesive operating system for managing your tasks, files, and inbox. But today we are actually talking about something that could really change the game for you if you are running a service-based business. If you are the type of service-based babe who resents client workloads and is not a fan of the lengthy, back-and-forth communications, and is thinking about changing your entire business because you are almost on the brink of burnout, we encourage you to listen to this episode first! </p><p>What we are sharing today is all about VIP days. With VIP days, you’ll create an amazing, lengthy, costly, profit-inducing service for your clients that also leaves them with a great impression of you. VIP days will also help you to free up your time for the rest of the year so you can do other things in your business. Jordan shares all about how she structures VIP days, how they changed her business, the lessons they taught her as a creative, and how you can implement them in your own business. Spoiler alert – in part of this episode we are talking about using a system that is going to make your VIP experience even better. And that system is Dubsado!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2559</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[abb7befe-9e0a-483c-9b9d-f8467224a6d3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5739218337.mp3?updated=1652211496" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>500: Favorite Podcast Memories, Highlights From 5 Years in Business and 3 Years on the Show</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/favorite-podcast-memories-highlights-from-5-years-in-business-and-3-years-on-the-show</link>
      <description>Welcome to our 500th episode! That means we have spoken on air for 22,500 minutes or 16 days, and we are not going anywhere anytime soon. For us, there is no shortage of things to say about business, life, and everything in between. We could talk for 500 more episodes on all of these things! Today's show will be a smorgasbord of us talking about our memories, favorite highlights, not just of the show, but being in business in general. We discuss some of the cool things the show has done for us, our best episodes, and everything in between. We are so proud we have made it to 500, and with no plans of slowing down anytime soon, you don’t have to worry about not hearing our beautiful voices. We have had so much fun and are so grateful that we continued with the podcast despite the ebbs and flows of a business. Often creative projects fall by the wayside, but this podcast has stayed steady for three years, and we could not be prouder. We are not sure how we kept it going for so long when other things, like our blog, got cut after some time. While we are back blogging once a week, this podcast has been the one constant alongside our business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 05 Jan 2021 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Favorite Podcast Memories, Highlights From 5 Years in Business and 3 Years on the Show</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>500</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/8226ab4c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-0bc82a0e5749/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome to our 500th episode! That means we have spoken on air for 22,500 minutes or 16 days, and we are not going anywhere anytime soon. For us, there is no shortage of things to say about business, life, and everything in between. We could talk for...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to our 500th episode! That means we have spoken on air for 22,500 minutes or 16 days, and we are not going anywhere anytime soon. For us, there is no shortage of things to say about business, life, and everything in between. We could talk for 500 more episodes on all of these things! Today's show will be a smorgasbord of us talking about our memories, favorite highlights, not just of the show, but being in business in general. We discuss some of the cool things the show has done for us, our best episodes, and everything in between. We are so proud we have made it to 500, and with no plans of slowing down anytime soon, you don’t have to worry about not hearing our beautiful voices. We have had so much fun and are so grateful that we continued with the podcast despite the ebbs and flows of a business. Often creative projects fall by the wayside, but this podcast has stayed steady for three years, and we could not be prouder. We are not sure how we kept it going for so long when other things, like our blog, got cut after some time. While we are back blogging once a week, this podcast has been the one constant alongside our business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to our 500th episode! That means we have spoken on air for 22,500 minutes or 16 days, and we are not going anywhere anytime soon. For us, there is no shortage of things to say about business, life, and everything in between. We could talk for 500 more episodes on all of these things! Today's show will be a smorgasbord of us talking about our memories, favorite highlights, not just of the show, but being in business in general. We discuss some of the cool things the show has done for us, our best episodes, and everything in between. We are so proud we have made it to 500, and with no plans of slowing down anytime soon, you don’t have to worry about not hearing our beautiful voices. We have had so much fun and are so grateful that we continued with the podcast despite the ebbs and flows of a business. Often creative projects fall by the wayside, but this podcast has stayed steady for three years, and we could not be prouder. We are not sure how we kept it going for so long when other things, like our blog, got cut after some time. While we are back blogging once a week, this podcast has been the one constant alongside our business.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2621</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2a7b1d5a-026c-4b8e-8da6-259be120685d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7956865933.mp3?updated=1659044310" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>499: Creating an Engaged Online Community with Ashley Knight of The Ashley Knight Co.</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-an-engaged-online-community-with-ashley-knight-of-the-ashley-knight-co</link>
      <description>On today’s episode, we are super-duper excited to host Ashley Knight of The Hello Boss Community. Ashley founded the community as a means to support and bolster other businesswomen who were in the same boat as her. Through her group, she is able to teach and coach strategy to an ever-growing number of dedicated members and she loves it! And we love her for it! Here at the Strategy Hour Podcast, we know the value of groups we have run and been a part of, they can be the lifeboat bringing you back in when you are out at sea, so we know exactly what Ashley is talking about!
In our discussion, we cover the early stages of starting a supportive community, relationships within this space, real-world events, social media, sensitivity masterminds and much more. Ashley is one of the most dedicated community founders we have spoken to and we are sure her attitude and advice is going to be wonderfully useful and inspiring to all of out listeners. So whether you are part of an online community or looking to start one yourself, this is definitely the episode for you. Listen in to get the low-down.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 31 Dec 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating an Engaged Online Community with Ashley Knight of The Ashley Knight Co.</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>499</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/831471b0-ae9a-11ec-91b1-5ba04cf12dda/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>On today’s episode, we are super-duper excited to host Ashley Knight of The Hello Boss Community. Ashley founded the community as a means to support and bolster other businesswomen who were in the same boat as her. Through her group, she is able to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s episode, we are super-duper excited to host Ashley Knight of The Hello Boss Community. Ashley founded the community as a means to support and bolster other businesswomen who were in the same boat as her. Through her group, she is able to teach and coach strategy to an ever-growing number of dedicated members and she loves it! And we love her for it! Here at the Strategy Hour Podcast, we know the value of groups we have run and been a part of, they can be the lifeboat bringing you back in when you are out at sea, so we know exactly what Ashley is talking about!
In our discussion, we cover the early stages of starting a supportive community, relationships within this space, real-world events, social media, sensitivity masterminds and much more. Ashley is one of the most dedicated community founders we have spoken to and we are sure her attitude and advice is going to be wonderfully useful and inspiring to all of out listeners. So whether you are part of an online community or looking to start one yourself, this is definitely the episode for you. Listen in to get the low-down.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s episode, we are super-duper excited to host Ashley Knight of The Hello Boss Community. Ashley founded the community as a means to support and bolster other businesswomen who were in the same boat as her. Through her group, she is able to teach and coach strategy to an ever-growing number of dedicated members and she loves it! And we love her for it! Here at the Strategy Hour Podcast, we know the value of groups we have run and been a part of, they can be the lifeboat bringing you back in when you are out at sea, so we know exactly what Ashley is talking about!</p><p>In our discussion, we cover the early stages of starting a supportive community, relationships within this space, real-world events, social media, sensitivity masterminds and much more. Ashley is one of the most dedicated community founders we have spoken to and we are sure her attitude and advice is going to be wonderfully useful and inspiring to all of out listeners. So whether you are part of an online community or looking to start one yourself, this is definitely the episode for you. Listen in to get the low-down.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2152</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[eb90fafa-202a-4c34-9da1-0d591b7601ab]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3275349186.mp3?updated=1659044174" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>498: Why Boring, Stable, and Consistent is Our 2021 Motto</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-boring-stable-and-consistent-is-our-2021-motto</link>
      <description>Are you ready to plan the year ahead? It might be easier to do when you’ve had a great 2020 but, even then, you can plan to stick to the plan! We know that we just want more of what we had but we are also keen to try new things too. In 2020, we found the sweet spot of consistent and boring and realized that they are our middle names. We embrace them, we love them, and this is where we flourish and feel comfortable. While it’s not flashy or sexy and it doesn’t do dances on TikTok, we are 100% okay with that!
Not all of us dream of making seven figures. For some of us, our businesses are perfect the way they are when they work for us instead of us for them. In other words, while you might not roll in the dough, if you are satisfied with what your business brings in and it supports you to the extent that it suits your lifestyle, who cares about the rest? It is worth remembering that you risk much more when you try to grow and scale your business aggressively, and many have closed their doors after pursuing exponential growth instead of keeping to the stable and consistent things. We would like to be around, no matter what happens in the world, and we believe that we can do that by doing more of the same-old. This strategy will not get us on Oprah’s couch or anything spectacular like that, and we don’t have $10 million growth plans, but tune in to hear how we are planning to bring boring, stable, and consistent back!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 29 Dec 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why Boring, Stable, and Consistent is Our 2021 Motto</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>498</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/83d5fc22-ae9a-11ec-91b1-d3413dac061c/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Are you ready to plan the year ahead? It might be easier to do when you’ve had a great 2020 but, even then, you can plan to stick to the plan! We know that we just want more of what we had but we are also keen to try new things too. In 2020, we...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you ready to plan the year ahead? It might be easier to do when you’ve had a great 2020 but, even then, you can plan to stick to the plan! We know that we just want more of what we had but we are also keen to try new things too. In 2020, we found the sweet spot of consistent and boring and realized that they are our middle names. We embrace them, we love them, and this is where we flourish and feel comfortable. While it’s not flashy or sexy and it doesn’t do dances on TikTok, we are 100% okay with that!
Not all of us dream of making seven figures. For some of us, our businesses are perfect the way they are when they work for us instead of us for them. In other words, while you might not roll in the dough, if you are satisfied with what your business brings in and it supports you to the extent that it suits your lifestyle, who cares about the rest? It is worth remembering that you risk much more when you try to grow and scale your business aggressively, and many have closed their doors after pursuing exponential growth instead of keeping to the stable and consistent things. We would like to be around, no matter what happens in the world, and we believe that we can do that by doing more of the same-old. This strategy will not get us on Oprah’s couch or anything spectacular like that, and we don’t have $10 million growth plans, but tune in to hear how we are planning to bring boring, stable, and consistent back!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you ready to plan the year ahead? It might be easier to do when you’ve had a great 2020 but, even then, you can plan to stick to the plan! We know that we just want more of what we had but we are also keen to try new things too. In 2020, we found the sweet spot of consistent and boring and realized that they are our middle names. We embrace them, we love them, and this is where we flourish and feel comfortable. While it’s not flashy or sexy and it doesn’t do dances on TikTok, we are 100% okay with that!</p><p>Not all of us dream of making seven figures. For some of us, our businesses are perfect the way they are when they work for us instead of us for them. In other words, while you might not roll in the dough, if you are satisfied with what your business brings in and it supports you to the extent that it suits your lifestyle, who cares about the rest? It is worth remembering that you risk much more when you try to grow and scale your business aggressively, and many have closed their doors after pursuing exponential growth instead of keeping to the stable and consistent things. We would like to be around, no matter what happens in the world, and we believe that we can do that by doing more of the same-old. This strategy will not get us on Oprah’s couch or anything spectacular like that, and we don’t have $10 million growth plans, but tune in to hear how we are planning to bring boring, stable, and consistent back!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2827</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e4fe6c5a-a0e5-4d76-afb5-a73b14882986]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1522691714.mp3?updated=1659044264" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>497: November 2020 Profit Report: The Month We Increased Members by 8%, But Saw 11% Less Revenue (Here’s Why)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/november-2020-profit-report-the-month-we-increased-members-by-8-but-saw-11-less-revenue-heres-why</link>
      <description>Hi! Let’s take it back to the month of turkey days! We feel like with the holidays you quickly forget how November went, because you just roll straight into the next holiday, get distracted by family, and shopping, and cookies. Emylee promises to make Abagail some marsh-mellows again this year, but instead of talking about marsh-mellows for the whole episode which we definitely could do, we are here for another profit report! 
If you are new here you should know that we now have well over a year’s worth of episodes where we share profit reports with you. We made a goal at the end of 2019 to focus more on profit – keeping more profit within our business to make more money and pay ourselves instead of reaching huge, sexy revenue goals, and our business drastically changed because of that mindset. So now, every month we share with you the breakdown of expenses, profit, where the money went – a breakdown of products in our company, so you can be inspired to do the same breakdown within yours!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 24 Dec 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>November 2020 Profit Report: The Month We Increased Members by 8%, But Saw 11% Less Revenue (Here’s Why)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>497</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/858fd204-ae9a-11ec-91b1-cfae86af529f/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Hi! Let’s take it back to the month of turkey days! We feel like with the holidays you quickly forget how November went, because you just roll straight into the next holiday, get distracted by family, and shopping, and cookies. Emylee promises to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hi! Let’s take it back to the month of turkey days! We feel like with the holidays you quickly forget how November went, because you just roll straight into the next holiday, get distracted by family, and shopping, and cookies. Emylee promises to make Abagail some marsh-mellows again this year, but instead of talking about marsh-mellows for the whole episode which we definitely could do, we are here for another profit report! 
If you are new here you should know that we now have well over a year’s worth of episodes where we share profit reports with you. We made a goal at the end of 2019 to focus more on profit – keeping more profit within our business to make more money and pay ourselves instead of reaching huge, sexy revenue goals, and our business drastically changed because of that mindset. So now, every month we share with you the breakdown of expenses, profit, where the money went – a breakdown of products in our company, so you can be inspired to do the same breakdown within yours!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hi! Let’s take it back to the month of turkey days! We feel like with the holidays you quickly forget how November went, because you just roll straight into the next holiday, get distracted by family, and shopping, and cookies. Emylee promises to make Abagail some marsh-mellows again this year, but instead of talking about marsh-mellows for the whole episode which we definitely could do, we are here for another profit report! </p><p>If you are new here you should know that we now have well over a year’s worth of episodes where we share profit reports with you. We made a goal at the end of 2019 to focus more on profit – keeping more profit within our business to make more money and pay ourselves instead of reaching huge, sexy revenue goals, and our business drastically changed because of that mindset. So now, every month we share with you the breakdown of expenses, profit, where the money went – a breakdown of products in our company, so you can be inspired to do the same breakdown within yours!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2033</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[72ab9c86-cab1-43f1-89d5-89666382acc9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9334215148.mp3?updated=1659044059" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>496: Behind-The-Scenes of a Full-Time Influencer with Liz Rishel of Within the Grove</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/behind-the-scenes-of-a-full-time-influencer-with-liz-rishel-of-within-the-grove</link>
      <description>Today on the show we have Liz Rishel from Within the Grove. For the last five years, Liz has grown her blog and Instagram to become an influencer to watch! We have loved observing her journey since she was a Strategy Academy student who accomplished amazing things and, in this episode, we pick her brain about what she has done to get such phenomenal results. 
We’ve often talked about blogging and making money from working with brands and have given our listeners some insights into how this all works, and Liz is here to give us her perspective on the whole thing. She gives us a peek behind the curtain of her growth over the past five years, getting into when it became a full-time job, how many hours she had to put in before it became a viable financial option for her and her family, how she collaborates with brands, her engagement with followers, and creating amazing products in her own home. Be sure to tune in for an episode that might just inspire you to start your next DIY project or finally get that online business of yours off the ground! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 22 Dec 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Behind-The-Scenes of a Full-Time Influencer with Liz Rishel of Within the Grove</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>496</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/8619f484-ae9a-11ec-91b1-3f1bef23a73d/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we have Liz Rishel from Within the Grove. For the last five years, Liz has grown her blog and Instagram to become an influencer to watch! We have loved observing her journey since she was a Strategy Academy student who accomplished...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we have Liz Rishel from Within the Grove. For the last five years, Liz has grown her blog and Instagram to become an influencer to watch! We have loved observing her journey since she was a Strategy Academy student who accomplished amazing things and, in this episode, we pick her brain about what she has done to get such phenomenal results. 
We’ve often talked about blogging and making money from working with brands and have given our listeners some insights into how this all works, and Liz is here to give us her perspective on the whole thing. She gives us a peek behind the curtain of her growth over the past five years, getting into when it became a full-time job, how many hours she had to put in before it became a viable financial option for her and her family, how she collaborates with brands, her engagement with followers, and creating amazing products in her own home. Be sure to tune in for an episode that might just inspire you to start your next DIY project or finally get that online business of yours off the ground! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we have Liz Rishel from Within the Grove. For the last five years, Liz has grown her blog and Instagram to become an influencer to watch! We have loved observing her journey since she was a Strategy Academy student who accomplished amazing things and, in this episode, we pick her brain about what she has done to get such phenomenal results. </p><p>We’ve often talked about blogging and making money from working with brands and have given our listeners some insights into how this all works, and Liz is here to give us her perspective on the whole thing. She gives us a peek behind the curtain of her growth over the past five years, getting into when it became a full-time job, how many hours she had to put in before it became a viable financial option for her and her family, how she collaborates with brands, her engagement with followers, and creating amazing products in her own home. Be sure to tune in for an episode that might just inspire you to start your next DIY project or finally get that online business of yours off the ground! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2647</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[314f8f42-9265-47e3-a8da-f5446856e065]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6224048042.mp3?updated=1659042884" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>495: Utilizing the TASK Method to Streamline Prospects into Clients with Dolly DeLong</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/utilizing-the-task-method-to-streamline-prospects-into-clients-with-dolly-delong</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Dolly DeLong. She is a photographer and she has been in business since 2006. In 2020 she started educating small business owners on how to go from scattered to streamlined using powerful tools like Dubsado.
This episode is jam-packed with her exact framework, the TASK method, that is going to walk you through how she utilizes it in her business to really streamline her interactions with potential clients and actually turn those prospects into clients. Abagail had a ton of fun interviewing her because Emylee was on a little MIA for this episode. Shocking, we know! But Abagail knows she can still make it work! If you haven’t been introduced to the wonders of Dubsado yet, after this episode you most definitely will want to. If you haven’t signed up for a free trial yet, visit this link, and upgrade when you are ready! You can get 50% off your first month or year with the code BOSSPROJECT at checkout!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 17 Dec 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Utilizing the TASK Method to Streamline Prospects into Clients with Dolly DeLong</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>495</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/86f99094-ae9a-11ec-91b1-87940cae6df5/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Dolly DeLong. She is a photographer and she has been in business since 2006. In 2020 she started educating small business owners on how to go from scattered to streamlined using powerful tools like Dubsado. This episode is...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Dolly DeLong. She is a photographer and she has been in business since 2006. In 2020 she started educating small business owners on how to go from scattered to streamlined using powerful tools like Dubsado.
This episode is jam-packed with her exact framework, the TASK method, that is going to walk you through how she utilizes it in her business to really streamline her interactions with potential clients and actually turn those prospects into clients. Abagail had a ton of fun interviewing her because Emylee was on a little MIA for this episode. Shocking, we know! But Abagail knows she can still make it work! If you haven’t been introduced to the wonders of Dubsado yet, after this episode you most definitely will want to. If you haven’t signed up for a free trial yet, visit this link, and upgrade when you are ready! You can get 50% off your first month or year with the code BOSSPROJECT at checkout!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Dolly DeLong. She is a photographer and she has been in business since 2006. In 2020 she started educating small business owners on how to go from scattered to streamlined using powerful tools like Dubsado.</p><p>This episode is jam-packed with her exact framework, the TASK method, that is going to walk you through how she utilizes it in her business to really streamline her interactions with potential clients and actually turn those prospects into clients. Abagail had a ton of fun interviewing her because Emylee was on a little MIA for this episode. Shocking, we know! But Abagail knows she can still make it work! If you haven’t been introduced to the wonders of Dubsado yet, after this episode you most definitely will want to. If you haven’t signed up for a free trial yet, visit <a href="https://bossproject.com/dubsado">this link</a>, and upgrade when you are ready! You can get 50% off your first month or year with the code BOSSPROJECT at checkout!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2872</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[17e0034b-e967-409c-8f9c-f4a88345f4af]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2100653692.mp3?updated=1659042821" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>494: 2020 Recap: Massive Growth with 32% Profit Margins</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/2020-recap-massive-growth-with-32-profit-margins</link>
      <description>How are we able to talk about the end of 2020 already? We don’t know because this has been the fastest, craziest year in life and business for us in a while. For a while, it felt like we were having the longest months, and then things just seemed to speed up. We think a lot of people have had a similar experience. We don’t know if it was because people were home and things didn’t feel like they were changing and then suddenly it was fall and then winter. And now Christmas is around the corner! How are we at this point in the year already?
So today we want to talk about 2020 specifically and what happened in our businesses. If you look at all the goals we set for 2020, how did things ultimately shape up? We will tell you, we don’t know if there were guardian angels above us but there were a few things we did really differently in Q1 that ultimately set us up for huge success, and in today’s show you will hear all about it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 15 Dec 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>2020 Recap: Massive Growth with 32% Profit Margins</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>494</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/87a8bbfa-ae9a-11ec-91b1-671b398e3cb6/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>How are we able to talk about the end of 2020 already? We don’t know because this has been the fastest, craziest year in life and business for us in a while. For a while, it felt like we were having the longest months, and then things just seemed to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>How are we able to talk about the end of 2020 already? We don’t know because this has been the fastest, craziest year in life and business for us in a while. For a while, it felt like we were having the longest months, and then things just seemed to speed up. We think a lot of people have had a similar experience. We don’t know if it was because people were home and things didn’t feel like they were changing and then suddenly it was fall and then winter. And now Christmas is around the corner! How are we at this point in the year already?
So today we want to talk about 2020 specifically and what happened in our businesses. If you look at all the goals we set for 2020, how did things ultimately shape up? We will tell you, we don’t know if there were guardian angels above us but there were a few things we did really differently in Q1 that ultimately set us up for huge success, and in today’s show you will hear all about it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>How are we able to talk about the end of 2020 already? We don’t know because this has been the fastest, craziest year in life and business for us in a while. For a while, it felt like we were having the longest months, and then things just seemed to speed up. We think a lot of people have had a similar experience. We don’t know if it was because people were home and things didn’t feel like they were changing and then suddenly it was fall and then winter. And now Christmas is around the corner! How are we at this point in the year already?</p><p>So today we want to talk about 2020 specifically and what happened in our businesses. If you look at all the goals we set for 2020, how did things ultimately shape up? We will tell you, we don’t know if there were guardian angels above us but there were a few things we did really differently in Q1 that ultimately set us up for huge success, and in today’s show you will hear all about it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2646</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[74fc98a6-dd4b-489e-8455-2bc342deef59]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7028871488.mp3?updated=1659042815" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>493: Identifying Your Customer Journey to Make More Money with Mia Graves of Honey Bee Clay</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/identifying-your-customer-journey-to-make-more-money-with-mia-graves-of-honey-bee-clay</link>
      <description>Today we are talking to Emylee’s good friend, Mia Graves. She is another maker from a tiny town in Northern Alabama but she is now a Louisville transplant. She has a background in politics, philosophy, and economics but she has a maker-based business where she makes jewelry called Honey Bee Clay. She specializes in handmade and 3D printed clay cutters and, as a total side note, she also has a talking dog named Gus! But we are not talking about Gus today, we are talking about marketing strategies, and while Mia isn’t formally trained in marketing, she is really smart when it comes to this side of business. We are talking about how she uses the magic of call to actions anywhere and everywhere she can to direct her clients, customers, fans, and followers to go from one platform to another with the end goal of making her money. 
She shares all of her customers’ journeys and the different things she uses like Instagram, DMs, comments, TikTok, and email to get people to follow her and buy from her on a continued basis. We also talk about an exclusive Facebook group that she just recently started and her opinions on sellout launches and everything in between. Regardless of whether you have a physical, product-based business or not, the marketing strategies taught here today are going to help your business and give it a new life if you have hit a wall in your growth or engagement, so be sure to take notes during this one!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 10 Dec 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Identifying Your Customer Journey to Make More Money with Mia Graves of Honey Bee Clay</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>493</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/888c1a1c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-f768df515e62/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are talking to Emylee’s good friend, Mia Graves. She is another maker from a tiny town in Northern Alabama but she is now a Louisville transplant. She has a background in politics, philosophy, and economics but she has a maker-based...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are talking to Emylee’s good friend, Mia Graves. She is another maker from a tiny town in Northern Alabama but she is now a Louisville transplant. She has a background in politics, philosophy, and economics but she has a maker-based business where she makes jewelry called Honey Bee Clay. She specializes in handmade and 3D printed clay cutters and, as a total side note, she also has a talking dog named Gus! But we are not talking about Gus today, we are talking about marketing strategies, and while Mia isn’t formally trained in marketing, she is really smart when it comes to this side of business. We are talking about how she uses the magic of call to actions anywhere and everywhere she can to direct her clients, customers, fans, and followers to go from one platform to another with the end goal of making her money. 
She shares all of her customers’ journeys and the different things she uses like Instagram, DMs, comments, TikTok, and email to get people to follow her and buy from her on a continued basis. We also talk about an exclusive Facebook group that she just recently started and her opinions on sellout launches and everything in between. Regardless of whether you have a physical, product-based business or not, the marketing strategies taught here today are going to help your business and give it a new life if you have hit a wall in your growth or engagement, so be sure to take notes during this one!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are talking to Emylee’s good friend, Mia Graves. She is another maker from a tiny town in Northern Alabama but she is now a Louisville transplant. She has a background in politics, philosophy, and economics but she has a maker-based business where she makes jewelry called Honey Bee Clay. She specializes in handmade and 3D printed clay cutters and, as a total side note, she also has a talking dog named Gus! But we are not talking about Gus today, we are talking about marketing strategies, and while Mia isn’t formally trained in marketing, she is really smart when it comes to this side of business. We are talking about how she uses the magic of call to actions anywhere and everywhere she can to direct her clients, customers, fans, and followers to go from one platform to another with the end goal of making her money. </p><p>She shares all of her customers’ journeys and the different things she uses like Instagram, DMs, comments, TikTok, and email to get people to follow her and buy from her on a continued basis. We also talk about an exclusive Facebook group that she just recently started and her opinions on sellout launches and everything in between. Regardless of whether you have a physical, product-based business or not, the marketing strategies taught here today are going to help your business and give it a new life if you have hit a wall in your growth or engagement, so be sure to take notes during this one!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3039</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f50efa9b-7e1d-4ff1-9d72-d1960e66ce15]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7559575059.mp3?updated=1659042834" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>492: Getting out of a Creative Funk, Overwhelm and Comparisonitis</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/getting-out-of-a-creative-funk-overwhelm-and-comparisonitis</link>
      <description>Emylee is back from a much-needed break, but now she feels like she has forgotten how to do her job! Getting back into business mode with Boss Project is also different from returning to her side hustle, since the more creative tasks use another side of the brain. It got her thinking about overwhelm and taking breaks and thought it’s high time they did an episode on honoring your creative process. Abagail, on the other hand, is in the middle of a big house move and, as they both want to take a break over December, they find themselves in an interesting place. Abagail finds that, after a busy day, it is more relaxing and energizing to do something creative rather than vegging out on the couch. Once Emylee got back into her clay-making studio, she also had an idea for a pair of earrings she wanted to get out, surprising herself with creativity she didn’t even think she had at that point.  
If you feel like you lack creativity, feel overwhelmed, and get stuck comparing yourself with everybody else, this episode will help you navigate these ‘meh’ situations and get your creative fire going again! At the very least, you will walk away encouraged by the knowledge that others also go through dry spells. Tune in! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 08 Dec 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Getting out of a Creative Funk, Overwhelm and Comparisonitis</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>492</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/89382a78-ae9a-11ec-91b1-d7370734c4fd/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Emylee is back from a much-needed break, but now she feels like she has forgotten how to do her job! Getting back into business mode with Boss Project is also different from returning to her side hustle, since the more creative tasks use another side...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Emylee is back from a much-needed break, but now she feels like she has forgotten how to do her job! Getting back into business mode with Boss Project is also different from returning to her side hustle, since the more creative tasks use another side of the brain. It got her thinking about overwhelm and taking breaks and thought it’s high time they did an episode on honoring your creative process. Abagail, on the other hand, is in the middle of a big house move and, as they both want to take a break over December, they find themselves in an interesting place. Abagail finds that, after a busy day, it is more relaxing and energizing to do something creative rather than vegging out on the couch. Once Emylee got back into her clay-making studio, she also had an idea for a pair of earrings she wanted to get out, surprising herself with creativity she didn’t even think she had at that point.  
If you feel like you lack creativity, feel overwhelmed, and get stuck comparing yourself with everybody else, this episode will help you navigate these ‘meh’ situations and get your creative fire going again! At the very least, you will walk away encouraged by the knowledge that others also go through dry spells. Tune in! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Emylee is back from a much-needed break, but now she feels like she has forgotten how to do her job! Getting back into business mode with Boss Project is also different from returning to her side hustle, since the more creative tasks use another side of the brain. It got her thinking about overwhelm and taking breaks and thought it’s high time they did an episode on honoring your creative process. Abagail, on the other hand, is in the middle of a big house move and, as they both want to take a break over December, they find themselves in an interesting place. Abagail finds that, after a busy day, it is more relaxing and energizing to do something creative rather than vegging out on the couch. Once Emylee got back into her clay-making studio, she also had an idea for a pair of earrings she wanted to get out, surprising herself with creativity she didn’t even think she had at that point.  </p><p>If you feel like you lack creativity, feel overwhelmed, and get stuck comparing yourself with everybody else, this episode will help you navigate these ‘meh’ situations and get your creative fire going again! At the very least, you will walk away encouraged by the knowledge that others also go through dry spells. Tune in! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2201</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[26a24531-0f2f-46d5-b715-57c3d6c32c63]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3416490108.mp3?updated=1659042801" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>491: Diversity, Equity, Inclusion, and a Million Dollar Mindset with Rachel Rogers of Hello Seven</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/diversity-equity-inclusion-and-a-million-dollar-mindset-with-rachel-rodgers-of-hello-seven</link>
      <description>On today’s show, we talk to Rachel Rodgers, the CEO of Hello Seven. Previously, she was an intellectual property lawyer but today she is a business coach who helps women hit seven figures without sacrificing their home lives and sanity! Rachel works with entrepreneurs and helps them create and protect their own intellectual property to scale their business to $1million and beyond. She has worked with The New York Times bestselling authors, tech startups, coaches, consultants, doctors, accountants, nutritionists, and more. 
In this episode, we talk not only about a healthy growth mentality and seven-figure mindset, but also about diversity, inclusion, and equity, and how deciding to have those as a priority in your business is smart and strategic. Rachel gives heaps of takeaways for listeners to implement in their businesses today, and suggests some resources for finding people to begin to expand your circle.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 03 Dec 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Diversity, Equity, Inclusion, and a Million Dollar Mindset with Rachel Rogers of Hello Seven</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>491</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/8b08c088-ae9a-11ec-91b1-3785d8cda0ae/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>On today’s show, we talk to Rachel Rodgers, the CEO of Hello Seven. Previously, she was an intellectual property lawyer but today she is a business coach who helps women hit seven figures without sacrificing their home lives and sanity! Rachel works...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s show, we talk to Rachel Rodgers, the CEO of Hello Seven. Previously, she was an intellectual property lawyer but today she is a business coach who helps women hit seven figures without sacrificing their home lives and sanity! Rachel works with entrepreneurs and helps them create and protect their own intellectual property to scale their business to $1million and beyond. She has worked with The New York Times bestselling authors, tech startups, coaches, consultants, doctors, accountants, nutritionists, and more. 
In this episode, we talk not only about a healthy growth mentality and seven-figure mindset, but also about diversity, inclusion, and equity, and how deciding to have those as a priority in your business is smart and strategic. Rachel gives heaps of takeaways for listeners to implement in their businesses today, and suggests some resources for finding people to begin to expand your circle.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s show, we talk to Rachel Rodgers, the CEO of Hello Seven. Previously, she was an intellectual property lawyer but today she is a business coach who helps women hit seven figures without sacrificing their home lives and sanity! Rachel works with entrepreneurs and helps them create and protect their own intellectual property to scale their business to $1million and beyond. She has worked with <em>The New York Times</em> bestselling authors, tech startups, coaches, consultants, doctors, accountants, nutritionists, and more. </p><p>In this episode, we talk not only about a healthy growth mentality and seven-figure mindset, but also about diversity, inclusion, and equity, and how deciding to have those as a priority in your business is smart and strategic. Rachel gives heaps of takeaways for listeners to implement in their businesses today, and suggests some resources for finding people to begin to expand your circle.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2823</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4463d837-2bab-4186-8546-ce6035acbf11]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5096255929.mp3?updated=1659042766" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>490: Using a Welcome Email Sequence for Your Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/using-a-welcome-email-sequence-for-your-business</link>
      <description>Hey everybody and welcome back to the The Strategy Hour! We hope you’re as excited for today’s episode as we are because we have something special for your earbuds that we know you are going to love. Today we will be talking about email welcome sequences and how to do them right. It took us some time and few missteps to get our’s where it is today and we are happy to share all the blunders we made with you for you and your business’ benefit! We want to help you get your welcome sequence just right for your needs and most importantly to make it profitable, so buckle up!
During this discussion we’ll be guiding you through our history with our email tools and ideas and showing all our listeners just what worked and what didn’t. And at the end of the chat we will be sharing something extra special that can take you one step further in your marketing so make sure to listen out for that. We cover the purpose and reasons for having a welcome sequence that is the bomb, we also do a deep dive on why our first welcome sequence was so bad! Imagine that! From there we share some of the reasons why it can be so difficult to get this right, especially in the beginning and we finish off by emphasizing what you should be focussing on when you are putting your sequence together. So let’s get all the way in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 Dec 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Using a Welcome Email Sequence for Your Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>490</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/8c07d938-ae9a-11ec-91b1-37015397caf8/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Hey everybody and welcome back to the The Strategy Hour! We hope you’re as excited for today’s episode as we are because we have something special for your earbuds that we know you are going to love. Today we will be talking about email welcome...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey everybody and welcome back to the The Strategy Hour! We hope you’re as excited for today’s episode as we are because we have something special for your earbuds that we know you are going to love. Today we will be talking about email welcome sequences and how to do them right. It took us some time and few missteps to get our’s where it is today and we are happy to share all the blunders we made with you for you and your business’ benefit! We want to help you get your welcome sequence just right for your needs and most importantly to make it profitable, so buckle up!
During this discussion we’ll be guiding you through our history with our email tools and ideas and showing all our listeners just what worked and what didn’t. And at the end of the chat we will be sharing something extra special that can take you one step further in your marketing so make sure to listen out for that. We cover the purpose and reasons for having a welcome sequence that is the bomb, we also do a deep dive on why our first welcome sequence was so bad! Imagine that! From there we share some of the reasons why it can be so difficult to get this right, especially in the beginning and we finish off by emphasizing what you should be focussing on when you are putting your sequence together. So let’s get all the way in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey everybody and welcome back to the The Strategy Hour! We hope you’re as excited for today’s episode as we are because we have something special for your earbuds that we know you are going to love. Today we will be talking about email welcome sequences and how to do them right. It took us some time and few missteps to get our’s where it is today and we are happy to share all the blunders we made with you for you and your business’ benefit! We want to help you get your welcome sequence just right for your needs and most importantly to make it profitable, so buckle up!</p><p>During this discussion we’ll be guiding you through our history with our email tools and ideas and showing all our listeners just what worked and what didn’t. And at the end of the chat we will be sharing something extra special that can take you one step further in your marketing so make sure to listen out for that. We cover the purpose and reasons for having a welcome sequence that is the bomb, we also do a deep dive on why our first welcome sequence was so bad! Imagine that! From there we share some of the reasons why it can be so difficult to get this right, especially in the beginning and we finish off by emphasizing what you should be focussing on when you are putting your sequence together. So let’s get all the way in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1463</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1bf68bf9-aa0f-46ab-9823-218aed5da3cd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4669169299.mp3?updated=1659042357" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>489: Replacing Your Salary by Selling Services Online with Jereshia Hawk</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/replacing-your-salary-by-selling-services-online-with-jereshia-hawk</link>
      <description>Welcome back to the show, all you biz badasses, and money queens! Today we have a great episode in store for you that you are most definitely not going to want to miss! Our guest is Jereshia Hawk and she is here to tell us about how she switched from a big corporate job to selling her services online and increasing her salary in the process! Jereshia was working on huge, high-profile engineering projects when she left her job and during this first year of going solo, she managed to double her salary! Sound amazing? We think so! She has subsequently taught her strategies to hundreds of people online and helped them get going on their own road to success. 
A lot of what Jereshia teaches is a little different to the majority of information that is available online. She has a focus on grassroots growth that we just love! It was such a pleasure to have her on the show and the conversation is motivating and really informative for anyone looking to get out of their day job and start their own little thing. This topic is really near and dear to our hearts as Abagail started out on her own, selling services when she quit her corporate job and so much of what Jereshia says rings true for us. For a great conversation with a massively inspiring person, be sure to get it all on The Strategy Hour!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Nov 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Replacing Your Salary by Selling Services Online with Jereshia Hawk</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>489</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/8c9e8a86-ae9a-11ec-91b1-63d572352bb1/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome back to the show, all you biz badasses, and money queens! Today we have a great episode in store for you that you are most definitely not going to want to miss! Our guest is Jereshia Hawk and she is here to tell us about how she switched from...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to the show, all you biz badasses, and money queens! Today we have a great episode in store for you that you are most definitely not going to want to miss! Our guest is Jereshia Hawk and she is here to tell us about how she switched from a big corporate job to selling her services online and increasing her salary in the process! Jereshia was working on huge, high-profile engineering projects when she left her job and during this first year of going solo, she managed to double her salary! Sound amazing? We think so! She has subsequently taught her strategies to hundreds of people online and helped them get going on their own road to success. 
A lot of what Jereshia teaches is a little different to the majority of information that is available online. She has a focus on grassroots growth that we just love! It was such a pleasure to have her on the show and the conversation is motivating and really informative for anyone looking to get out of their day job and start their own little thing. This topic is really near and dear to our hearts as Abagail started out on her own, selling services when she quit her corporate job and so much of what Jereshia says rings true for us. For a great conversation with a massively inspiring person, be sure to get it all on The Strategy Hour!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to the show, all you biz badasses, and money queens! Today we have a great episode in store for you that you are most definitely not going to want to miss! Our guest is Jereshia Hawk and she is here to tell us about how she switched from a big corporate job to selling her services online and increasing her salary in the process! Jereshia was working on huge, high-profile engineering projects when she left her job and during this first year of going solo, she managed to double her salary! Sound amazing? We think so! She has subsequently taught her strategies to hundreds of people online and helped them get going on their own road to success. </p><p>A lot of what Jereshia teaches is a little different to the majority of information that is available online. She has a focus on grassroots growth that we just love! It was such a pleasure to have her on the show and the conversation is motivating and really informative for anyone looking to get out of their day job and start their own little thing. This topic is really near and dear to our hearts as Abagail started out on her own, selling services when she quit her corporate job and so much of what Jereshia says rings true for us. For a great conversation with a massively inspiring person, be sure to get it all on The Strategy Hour!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2381</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f8073a2f-5901-47c0-a01d-a7edf3db2cc7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9465557871.mp3?updated=1659042297" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>488: October 2020 Profit Report: One UX Tweak We Made that Increased Our Membership by 15%</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/october-2020-profit-report-one-ux-tweak-we-made-that-increased-our-membership-by-15</link>
      <description>Today on the show, Emylee and Abagail walk listeners through their October profit report and, as per usual, it is nothing short of wild! Before October kicked off, Abagail and Jared suddenly needed a bigger space and ended up purchasing a new home without even planning to. What’s more is it is a fixer-upper that needs quite a bit of work, and we don’t need to tell you what a time-suck buying and renovating can be. At the same time, Emylee was away for a week on a much-needed break, and things got crazy and chaotic very quickly, but they managed to pull it together and still make a great profit in the end.
Amidst it all, they planned for a big launch in November and ran their first sale on the Creative Template Shop’s annual membership, all of which they discuss in this episode. They also had to establish whether a monthly or annual membership would be more profitable in the long term, so they did an experiment to see whether they could switch over to just an annual membership but realized that the slower conversion rate was not going to cut it just yet.
Tuning in, listeners will find out how they managed to increase their memberships while reducing the one-off purchases in the Shop, and where all the other revenue came from in October. Of course, they also share the details on what they had to spend to keep things moving along smoothly and treat themselves appropriately. Be sure to tune in for all of it, and more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 24 Nov 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>October 2020 Profit Report: One UX Tweak We Made that Increased Our Membership by 15%</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>488</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/8e731336-ae9a-11ec-91b1-fb3e6d1ac95a/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show, Emylee and Abagail walk listeners through their October profit report and, as per usual, it is nothing short of wild! Before October kicked off, Abagail and Jared suddenly needed a bigger space and ended up purchasing a new home...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show, Emylee and Abagail walk listeners through their October profit report and, as per usual, it is nothing short of wild! Before October kicked off, Abagail and Jared suddenly needed a bigger space and ended up purchasing a new home without even planning to. What’s more is it is a fixer-upper that needs quite a bit of work, and we don’t need to tell you what a time-suck buying and renovating can be. At the same time, Emylee was away for a week on a much-needed break, and things got crazy and chaotic very quickly, but they managed to pull it together and still make a great profit in the end.
Amidst it all, they planned for a big launch in November and ran their first sale on the Creative Template Shop’s annual membership, all of which they discuss in this episode. They also had to establish whether a monthly or annual membership would be more profitable in the long term, so they did an experiment to see whether they could switch over to just an annual membership but realized that the slower conversion rate was not going to cut it just yet.
Tuning in, listeners will find out how they managed to increase their memberships while reducing the one-off purchases in the Shop, and where all the other revenue came from in October. Of course, they also share the details on what they had to spend to keep things moving along smoothly and treat themselves appropriately. Be sure to tune in for all of it, and more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show, Emylee and Abagail walk listeners through their October profit report and, as per usual, it is nothing short of wild! Before October kicked off, Abagail and Jared suddenly needed a bigger space and ended up purchasing a new home without even planning to. What’s more is it is a fixer-upper that needs quite a bit of work, and we don’t need to tell you what a time-suck buying and renovating can be. At the same time, Emylee was away for a week on a much-needed break, and things got crazy and chaotic very quickly, but they managed to pull it together and still make a great profit in the end.</p><p>Amidst it all, they planned for a big launch in November and ran their first sale on the Creative Template Shop’s annual membership, all of which they discuss in this episode. They also had to establish whether a monthly or annual membership would be more profitable in the long term, so they did an experiment to see whether they could switch over to just an annual membership but realized that the slower conversion rate was not going to cut it just yet.</p><p>Tuning in, listeners will find out how they managed to increase their memberships while reducing the one-off purchases in the Shop, and where all the other revenue came from in October. Of course, they also share the details on what they had to spend to keep things moving along smoothly and treat themselves appropriately. Be sure to tune in for all of it, and more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3373</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cdbb6b3c-615d-45b9-821f-3ba5f4aec863]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9331473767.mp3?updated=1656104393" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>487: Scaling Your Service Based Business to 6-Figures Using Dubsado with Elizabeth McCravy</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/scaling-your-service-based-business-to-6-figures-using-dubsado-with-elizabeth-mccravy</link>
      <description>In today’s episode, we are talking with Elizabeth McCravy. She is a Nashville-based website designer and business strategist. She designs strategic and fun website templates for female entrepreneurs. Today we are focusing on her journey utilizing Dubsado to grow her business to six figures plus. We are going to be looking behind the scenes at what features she loves most about Dubsado, what order of importance she recommends for you to set up using Dubsado’s features, to get stuff off your plate so you can focus on clients and actually scale. 
Elizabeth says she was only able to scale to six figures because of Dubsado, so if scaling and clients are in your future, Dubsado is going to be for you. We also do a little sneak peek on how Elizabeth has set up Dubsado to use for her podcasts guests’ inquiries. She also answers the question of what feature Dubsado should have if it could only have one! We hope this one is an eye-opener for you as far as different strategies to implement in Dubsado in your client-based business, podcast, guest blogs, or anything related to getting people interested in working with you. Let’s get those workflows set up!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 19 Nov 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Scaling Your Service Based Business to 6-Figures Using Dubsado with Elizabeth McCravy</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>487</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/8f2cf210-ae9a-11ec-91b1-3355cac07cd0/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>In today’s episode, we are talking with Elizabeth McCravy. She is a Nashville-based website designer and business strategist. She designs strategic and fun website templates for female entrepreneurs. Today we are focusing on her journey utilizing...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today’s episode, we are talking with Elizabeth McCravy. She is a Nashville-based website designer and business strategist. She designs strategic and fun website templates for female entrepreneurs. Today we are focusing on her journey utilizing Dubsado to grow her business to six figures plus. We are going to be looking behind the scenes at what features she loves most about Dubsado, what order of importance she recommends for you to set up using Dubsado’s features, to get stuff off your plate so you can focus on clients and actually scale. 
Elizabeth says she was only able to scale to six figures because of Dubsado, so if scaling and clients are in your future, Dubsado is going to be for you. We also do a little sneak peek on how Elizabeth has set up Dubsado to use for her podcasts guests’ inquiries. She also answers the question of what feature Dubsado should have if it could only have one! We hope this one is an eye-opener for you as far as different strategies to implement in Dubsado in your client-based business, podcast, guest blogs, or anything related to getting people interested in working with you. Let’s get those workflows set up!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today’s episode, we are talking with Elizabeth McCravy. She is a Nashville-based website designer and business strategist. She designs strategic and fun website templates for female entrepreneurs. Today we are focusing on her journey utilizing Dubsado to grow her business to six figures plus. We are going to be looking behind the scenes at what features she loves most about Dubsado, what order of importance she recommends for you to set up using Dubsado’s features, to get stuff off your plate so you can focus on clients and actually scale. </p><p>Elizabeth says she was only able to scale to six figures because of Dubsado, so if scaling and clients are in your future, Dubsado is going to be for you. We also do a little sneak peek on how Elizabeth has set up Dubsado to use for her podcasts guests’ inquiries. She also answers the question of what feature Dubsado should have if it could only have one! We hope this one is an eye-opener for you as far as different strategies to implement in Dubsado in your client-based business, podcast, guest blogs, or anything related to getting people interested in working with you. Let’s get those workflows set up!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2154</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[fa09f980-5355-4fdf-b6e6-a34e7f4e5339]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4148058031.mp3?updated=1659041577" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>486: How to Reorganize Roles &amp; Responsibilities in Your Team to Prep for Hiring</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-reorganize-roles-and-responsibilities-in-your-team-to-prep-for-hiring</link>
      <description>In today’s episode, we are going to talk a bit about reorganization and what it looks like to really get clear on the roles and responsibilities of your team members inside your business. We will talk about how you might do this as a way to clean up and get your head straight before you go through a hiring process.
We have probably made every mistake in the book when it comes to hiring and have learned a lot over the last few years as we have expanded our team. We have come from every end of the spectrum when it comes to hiring a team – having a big team, a small team, no team, contractors, and everything in between!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 17 Nov 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Reorganize Roles &amp; Responsibilities in Your Team to Prep for Hiring</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>486</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/90157a30-ae9a-11ec-91b1-c7124436e440/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>In today’s episode, we are going to talk a bit about reorganization and what it looks like to really get clear on the roles and responsibilities of your team members inside your business. We will talk about how you might do this as a way to clean up...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today’s episode, we are going to talk a bit about reorganization and what it looks like to really get clear on the roles and responsibilities of your team members inside your business. We will talk about how you might do this as a way to clean up and get your head straight before you go through a hiring process.
We have probably made every mistake in the book when it comes to hiring and have learned a lot over the last few years as we have expanded our team. We have come from every end of the spectrum when it comes to hiring a team – having a big team, a small team, no team, contractors, and everything in between!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today’s episode, we are going to talk a bit about reorganization and what it looks like to really get clear on the roles and responsibilities of your team members inside your business. We will talk about how you might do this as a way to clean up and get your head straight before you go through a hiring process.</p><p>We have probably made every mistake in the book when it comes to hiring and have learned a lot over the last few years as we have expanded our team. We have come from every end of the spectrum when it comes to hiring a team – having a big team, a small team, no team, contractors, and everything in between!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2851</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[783ae655-feda-4be9-9e7d-768845f3e597]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2081382594.mp3?updated=1659041506" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>485: Leadership Development and Creating a Sense of Ownership with Alyssa Bloom</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/leadership-development-and-creating-a-sense-of-ownership-with-alyssa-bloom</link>
      <description>Today's guest, Alyssa Bloom, has spent the last 10 years working for one of the biggest companies in the world, being a manager for virtual teams. She manages over 120 people and has an incredible background in management and people leadership. In this episode, we are talking about creating a sense of ownership in your community and culture in your business. We have always been open about our struggles as leaders of our internal teams. We have had challenges with motivation, delegation, and just making sure that our staff is happy and that they like what they are doing. 
It has been something we have wanted to get better at ever since we hired our first VA. So, having someone we love and respect so much help us get organized and in shape was crucial, and we are sharing that process with you today, along with how you can replicate it. There are so many good takeaways that Alyssa shares. We hear how to get more organized, make good hires, and most importantly, how to create a sense of ownership within your team and have your staff be as happy as they can be.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 12 Nov 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Leadership Development and Creating a Sense of Ownership with Alyssa Bloom</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>485</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/9123c0e4-ae9a-11ec-91b1-9346d159aad5/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today's guest, Alyssa Bloom, has spent the last 10 years working for one of the biggest companies in the world, being a manager for virtual teams. She manages over 120 people and has an incredible background in management and people leadership. In...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today's guest, Alyssa Bloom, has spent the last 10 years working for one of the biggest companies in the world, being a manager for virtual teams. She manages over 120 people and has an incredible background in management and people leadership. In this episode, we are talking about creating a sense of ownership in your community and culture in your business. We have always been open about our struggles as leaders of our internal teams. We have had challenges with motivation, delegation, and just making sure that our staff is happy and that they like what they are doing. 
It has been something we have wanted to get better at ever since we hired our first VA. So, having someone we love and respect so much help us get organized and in shape was crucial, and we are sharing that process with you today, along with how you can replicate it. There are so many good takeaways that Alyssa shares. We hear how to get more organized, make good hires, and most importantly, how to create a sense of ownership within your team and have your staff be as happy as they can be.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today's guest, Alyssa Bloom, has spent the last 10 years working for one of the biggest companies in the world, being a manager for virtual teams. She manages over 120 people and has an incredible background in management and people leadership. In this episode, we are talking about creating a sense of ownership in your community and culture in your business. We have always been open about our struggles as leaders of our internal teams. We have had challenges with motivation, delegation, and just making sure that our staff is happy and that they like what they are doing. </p><p>It has been something we have wanted to get better at ever since we hired our first VA. So, having someone we love and respect so much help us get organized and in shape was crucial, and we are sharing that process with you today, along with how you can replicate it. There are so many good takeaways that Alyssa shares. We hear how to get more organized, make good hires, and most importantly, how to create a sense of ownership within your team and have your staff be as happy as they can be.  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2706</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f28c2c26-740e-465a-b769-82dcc53db8f0]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4616372080.mp3?updated=1659041412" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>484: Free Challenge: 4-Day Batch Blitz</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/free-challenge-4-day-batch-blitz</link>
      <description>Today we are talking about batching your shiz! Yeah, girl! We know it’s a sexy topic going into the holiday season, but even in general, people want to get as much done in as small a window as possible so they can focus on the thing that they started their business to do. A lot of people find marketing monotonous, which we get, and we have been making it not only easier for you but also more fun with the Creative Template Shop. 
Another great way you can wrap up the end of the year is by batching a bunch of content so you can serve your clients, finish projects, ship out orders, get things listed, have fun in the holidays with your family, and renovate the new house you just bought too! So, to do this and to make it fun, we decided to bring back the challenge concept, and today’s show is all about our newest one – The 4-Day Batch Blitz!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 10 Nov 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Free Challenge: 4-Day Batch Blitz</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>484</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/91b52e76-ae9a-11ec-91b1-8bbadff38076/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are talking about batching your shiz! Yeah, girl! We know it’s a sexy topic going into the holiday season, but even in general, people want to get as much done in as small a window as possible so they can focus on the thing that they...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are talking about batching your shiz! Yeah, girl! We know it’s a sexy topic going into the holiday season, but even in general, people want to get as much done in as small a window as possible so they can focus on the thing that they started their business to do. A lot of people find marketing monotonous, which we get, and we have been making it not only easier for you but also more fun with the Creative Template Shop. 
Another great way you can wrap up the end of the year is by batching a bunch of content so you can serve your clients, finish projects, ship out orders, get things listed, have fun in the holidays with your family, and renovate the new house you just bought too! So, to do this and to make it fun, we decided to bring back the challenge concept, and today’s show is all about our newest one – The 4-Day Batch Blitz!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are talking about batching your shiz! Yeah, girl! We know it’s a sexy topic going into the holiday season, but even in general, people want to get as much done in as small a window as possible so they can focus on the thing that they started their business to do. A lot of people find marketing monotonous, which we get, and we have been making it not only easier for you but also more fun with the Creative Template Shop. </p><p>Another great way you can wrap up the end of the year is by batching a bunch of content so you can serve your clients, finish projects, ship out orders, get things listed, have fun in the holidays with your family, and renovate the new house you just bought too! So, to do this and to make it fun, we decided to bring back the challenge concept, and today’s show is all about our newest one – The 4-Day Batch Blitz!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1381</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c8c0647e-3d16-4a27-87e3-57d789925f0d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3628123079.mp3?updated=1660828502" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>483: Preparing for Your Black Friday Promotions with Abbey Ashley</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/preparing-your-for-black-friday-promotions-with-abbey-ashley</link>
      <description>Our guest on the show today is Abbey Ashley, the founder of The Virtual Savvy! After running her own successful VA business for a few years, she has gone on to help other aspiring virtual assistants launch and grow their own at-home businesses from scratch. We get to pick her brain today, and the reason we’re so excited is that she has an amazing business philosophy which involves keeping things simple while still making a major impact! She has perfected the art of doubling down on the areas that work and remaining laser-focused on those rather than getting distracted. 
In this episode, you’ll learn about her launch game plans as well as how she deals with Black Fridays, teaching us how to set ourselves up for a booming year ahead. You’ll be thrilled to know that Abbey will also be a speaker at our upcoming Boss Project Summit, another great reason to sign up and get your pass!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 05 Nov 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Preparing for Your Black Friday Promotions with Abbey Ashley</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>483</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/92c82656-ae9a-11ec-91b1-672e1c99afdd/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Our guest on the show today is Abbey Ashley, the founder of The Virtual Savvy! After running her own successful VA business for a few years, she has gone on to help other aspiring virtual assistants launch and grow their own at-home businesses from...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Our guest on the show today is Abbey Ashley, the founder of The Virtual Savvy! After running her own successful VA business for a few years, she has gone on to help other aspiring virtual assistants launch and grow their own at-home businesses from scratch. We get to pick her brain today, and the reason we’re so excited is that she has an amazing business philosophy which involves keeping things simple while still making a major impact! She has perfected the art of doubling down on the areas that work and remaining laser-focused on those rather than getting distracted. 
In this episode, you’ll learn about her launch game plans as well as how she deals with Black Fridays, teaching us how to set ourselves up for a booming year ahead. You’ll be thrilled to know that Abbey will also be a speaker at our upcoming Boss Project Summit, another great reason to sign up and get your pass!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Our guest on the show today is Abbey Ashley, the founder of The Virtual Savvy! After running her own successful VA business for a few years, she has gone on to help other aspiring virtual assistants launch and grow their own at-home businesses from scratch. We get to pick her brain today, and the reason we’re so excited is that she has an amazing business philosophy which involves keeping things simple while still making a major impact! She has perfected the art of doubling down on the areas that work and remaining laser-focused on those rather than getting distracted. </p><p>In this episode, you’ll learn about her launch game plans as well as how she deals with Black Fridays, teaching us how to set ourselves up for a booming year ahead. You’ll be thrilled to know that Abbey will also be a speaker at our upcoming <a href="https://bossprojectsummit.com/">Boss Project Summit</a>, another great reason to sign up and get your pass!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2247</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[94e319a1-0d80-46a2-9f45-76ce77dd7129]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2105386539.mp3?updated=1660828591" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>482: Crafting Your Perfect Sales Pitch (without being icky)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/crafting-your-perfect-sales-pitch-without-being-icky</link>
      <description>We remember our first good sales experiences so well! It can be one of the best feelings in the world and it does not have to have that slimy and sleazy feeling to it at all. Today we are talking about what we are actually doing and the process for having more efficient, successful sales meetings, that just feel better. No one wants to feel icky and coercive when they are pitching and the truth is you really do not have to! What you really need to learn how to do is to let people fall in love with your offer, so it is less about selling and more about showcasing your process. If you follow these simple pointers the actual sales pitch will be a home run, we promise!
We have spoken at length recently on the podcast about locating your ideal and appropriate clients and this episode is essentially what to do once you have found them. Bad experiences in this department can make you feel terrible so we are trying to steer as far clear from these as possible. You do not want to be word-vomiting your way through nervous, un-researched meetings. These can leave you feeling like a wreck and with no more money to your name! Let's rather get strategic and get selling! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 03 Nov 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Crafting Your Perfect Sales Pitch (without being icky)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>482</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/93ef507c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-e38d285ec855/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We remember our first good sales experiences so well! It can be one of the best feelings in the world and it does not have to have that slimy and sleazy feeling to it at all. Today we are talking about what we are actually doing and the process for...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We remember our first good sales experiences so well! It can be one of the best feelings in the world and it does not have to have that slimy and sleazy feeling to it at all. Today we are talking about what we are actually doing and the process for having more efficient, successful sales meetings, that just feel better. No one wants to feel icky and coercive when they are pitching and the truth is you really do not have to! What you really need to learn how to do is to let people fall in love with your offer, so it is less about selling and more about showcasing your process. If you follow these simple pointers the actual sales pitch will be a home run, we promise!
We have spoken at length recently on the podcast about locating your ideal and appropriate clients and this episode is essentially what to do once you have found them. Bad experiences in this department can make you feel terrible so we are trying to steer as far clear from these as possible. You do not want to be word-vomiting your way through nervous, un-researched meetings. These can leave you feeling like a wreck and with no more money to your name! Let's rather get strategic and get selling! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We remember our first good sales experiences so well! It can be one of the best feelings in the world and it does not have to have that slimy and sleazy feeling to it at all. Today we are talking about what we are actually doing and the process for having more efficient, successful sales meetings, that just feel better. No one wants to feel icky and coercive when they are pitching and the truth is you really do not have to! What you really need to learn how to do is to let people fall in love with your offer, so it is less about selling and more about showcasing your process. If you follow these simple pointers the actual sales pitch will be a home run, we promise!</p><p>We have spoken at length recently on the podcast about locating your ideal and appropriate clients and this episode is essentially what to do once you have found them. Bad experiences in this department can make you feel terrible so we are trying to steer as far clear from these as possible. You do not want to be word-vomiting your way through nervous, un-researched meetings. These can leave you feeling like a wreck and with no more money to your name! Let's rather get strategic and get selling! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1774</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[694c1dfe-5ac0-4419-875b-e80e60197814]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8133134425.mp3?updated=1660828644" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>481: Creating a Community for Your Membership using Circle with Ward Sandler of Memberspace</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-a-community-for-your-members-using-circle-with-ward-sandler-of-memberspace</link>
      <description>Joining us on the show today is returning guest Ward Sandler, the co-founder and CEO of MemberSpace. Ward runs a SaaS company that enables entrepreneurs and organizations to turn any part of their website into members only with just a few clicks. But we are not talking only about MemberSpace in this conversation but a new way to integrate an amazing community to your membership or products using a tool called Circle. While Circle isn’t affiliated with MemberSpace, they work together perfectly — which we love! Ward breaks down the features of Circle and how you can add-on a community to make a great experience for your members and customers. 
We did an episode on Patreon and Mighty Networks a while ago (Episode 468), and this is yet another option for those who want to move their community away from social media platforms such as Facebook groups. Ward gives his take on Patreon and Mighty Networks, explaining how the pricing and features differ from MemberSpace and Circle and why he is a huge fan of picking the best tools for every need and then making them fit together seamlessly. Listeners will also get plenty of advice for setting up MemberSpace and Circle and learn how it can transform their membership engagement. Be sure to try it and check it out at bossproject.com/memberspace!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 29 Oct 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating a Community for Your Membership using Circle with Ward Sandler of Memberspace</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>481</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/94c14a32-ae9a-11ec-91b1-833a4b6e0e15/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Joining us on the show today is returning guest Ward Sandler, the co-founder and CEO of MemberSpace. Ward runs a SaaS company that enables entrepreneurs and organizations to turn any part of their website into members only with just a few clicks. But...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Joining us on the show today is returning guest Ward Sandler, the co-founder and CEO of MemberSpace. Ward runs a SaaS company that enables entrepreneurs and organizations to turn any part of their website into members only with just a few clicks. But we are not talking only about MemberSpace in this conversation but a new way to integrate an amazing community to your membership or products using a tool called Circle. While Circle isn’t affiliated with MemberSpace, they work together perfectly — which we love! Ward breaks down the features of Circle and how you can add-on a community to make a great experience for your members and customers. 
We did an episode on Patreon and Mighty Networks a while ago (Episode 468), and this is yet another option for those who want to move their community away from social media platforms such as Facebook groups. Ward gives his take on Patreon and Mighty Networks, explaining how the pricing and features differ from MemberSpace and Circle and why he is a huge fan of picking the best tools for every need and then making them fit together seamlessly. Listeners will also get plenty of advice for setting up MemberSpace and Circle and learn how it can transform their membership engagement. Be sure to try it and check it out at bossproject.com/memberspace!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Joining us on the show today is returning guest Ward Sandler, the co-founder and CEO of MemberSpace. Ward runs a SaaS company that enables entrepreneurs and organizations to turn any part of their website into members only with just a few clicks. But we are not talking only about MemberSpace in this conversation but a new way to integrate an amazing community to your membership or products using a tool called Circle. While Circle isn’t affiliated with MemberSpace, they work together perfectly — which we love! Ward breaks down the features of Circle and how you can add-on a community to make a great experience for your members and customers. </p><p>We did an episode on Patreon and Mighty Networks a while ago (Episode 468), and this is yet another option for those who want to move their community away from social media platforms such as Facebook groups. Ward gives his take on Patreon and Mighty Networks, explaining how the pricing and features differ from MemberSpace and Circle and why he is a huge fan of picking the best tools for every need and then making them fit together seamlessly. Listeners will also get plenty of advice for setting up MemberSpace and Circle and learn how it can transform their membership engagement. Be sure to try it and check it out at <a href="http://bossproject.com/memberspace">bossproject.com/memberspace</a>!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2262</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[95b04c89-f4af-4110-ac91-c938c19539d2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4156859863.mp3?updated=1660828702" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>480: September 2020 Profit: 5 Years in Biz Reflection, Our Thoughts on FB Ad Costs and  Botox</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/september-2020-profit-five-years-in-biz-reflection-our-thoughts-on-fb-ad-costs-and-botox</link>
      <description>We’re excited to talk about business in September and the fact that we’ve been in business for five whole years! Honestly, it now feels like we were babies when we started this whole thing because looking back at old blog posts and videos we created in the early days – you can tell that a lot has changed. We have really aged – but we think in the way that fine wine does. Abagail used to have a perfectly smooth forehead when she got botox to alleviate her migraines, but now she embraces her age and is happy to have a few extra lines. It comes with the territory! Emylee, on the other hand, loves her potions and creams and whatever it takes to bring out her youthful side. 
But in this episode, we talk about how our business has aged (along with us) and how we have found our groove, shifting from a do-er to a be-er mentality and enjoying much more calm than chaos. We share what we got up to in September, focusing on the live launch we did for Strategy Academy and how we have adjusted our approach to ads for the better. Tuning in, you will also hear us talk about the appropriate amount of planning, the strategy we implemented to make the next few months easy, and all our profit and expense numbers for September.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 27 Oct 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>September 2020 Profit: 5 Years in Biz Reflection, Our Thoughts on FB Ad Costs and  Botox</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>480</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/95715fc6-ae9a-11ec-91b1-cfbf679d6059/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’re excited to talk about business in September and the fact that we’ve been in business for five whole years! Honestly, it now feels like we were babies when we started this whole thing because looking back at old blog posts and videos we...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’re excited to talk about business in September and the fact that we’ve been in business for five whole years! Honestly, it now feels like we were babies when we started this whole thing because looking back at old blog posts and videos we created in the early days – you can tell that a lot has changed. We have really aged – but we think in the way that fine wine does. Abagail used to have a perfectly smooth forehead when she got botox to alleviate her migraines, but now she embraces her age and is happy to have a few extra lines. It comes with the territory! Emylee, on the other hand, loves her potions and creams and whatever it takes to bring out her youthful side. 
But in this episode, we talk about how our business has aged (along with us) and how we have found our groove, shifting from a do-er to a be-er mentality and enjoying much more calm than chaos. We share what we got up to in September, focusing on the live launch we did for Strategy Academy and how we have adjusted our approach to ads for the better. Tuning in, you will also hear us talk about the appropriate amount of planning, the strategy we implemented to make the next few months easy, and all our profit and expense numbers for September.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’re excited to talk about business in September and the fact that we’ve been in business for five whole years! Honestly, it now feels like we were babies when we started this whole thing because looking back at old blog posts and videos we created in the early days – you can tell that a lot has changed. We have really aged – but we think in the way that fine wine does. Abagail used to have a perfectly smooth forehead when she got botox to alleviate her migraines, but now she embraces her age and is happy to have a few extra lines. It comes with the territory! Emylee, on the other hand, loves her potions and creams and whatever it takes to bring out her youthful side. </p><p>But in this episode, we talk about how our business has aged (along with us) and how we have found our groove, shifting from a do-er to a be-er mentality and enjoying much more calm than chaos. We share what we got up to in September, focusing on the live launch we did for Strategy Academy and how we have adjusted our approach to ads for the better. Tuning in, you will also hear us talk about the appropriate amount of planning, the strategy we implemented to make the next few months easy, and all our profit and expense numbers for September.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2425</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[04da89ac-9e02-4171-8274-3a7f2aa1075e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4992748171.mp3?updated=1660828744" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>479: Building Company Culture and Wowing Clients with Your Customer Service with Jake &amp; Becca Berg of Dubsado</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/building-company-culture-and-wowing-clients-with-your-customer-service-with-jake-becca-berg-of-dubsado</link>
      <description>Prepare yourselves for one of the best episodes! Why? Because we are interviewing two of our favorite people, Jake and Becca Berg, the founders of Dubsado. Not only have they done amazing things for us in our business but they have helped many other service-based babes get a grip on things. We love watching them continue to grow over the last five years and admire them for building a software service while also leading one of the best customer service teams out there, making a huge impact on small business owners. They are now five years in and have expanded to 45 employees!  
In today’s episode, we are touching on some of those unique aspects that make Dubsado tick and pick their brains about what they are doing that we can all apply to our businesses. Jake and Becca share the lessons they have learned as a SaaS company, how their business has evolved and changed in 2020, and how they have kept customer service a priority throughout. Be sure to tune in for a super fun interview!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 22 Oct 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Building Company Culture and Wowing Clients with Your Customer Service with Jake &amp; Becca Berg of Dubsado</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>479</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/96754338-ae9a-11ec-91b1-df7c5bba248b/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Prepare yourselves for one of the best episodes! Why? Because we are interviewing two of our favorite people, Jake and Becca Berg, the founders of Dubsado. Not only have they done amazing things for us in our business but they have helped many other...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Prepare yourselves for one of the best episodes! Why? Because we are interviewing two of our favorite people, Jake and Becca Berg, the founders of Dubsado. Not only have they done amazing things for us in our business but they have helped many other service-based babes get a grip on things. We love watching them continue to grow over the last five years and admire them for building a software service while also leading one of the best customer service teams out there, making a huge impact on small business owners. They are now five years in and have expanded to 45 employees!  
In today’s episode, we are touching on some of those unique aspects that make Dubsado tick and pick their brains about what they are doing that we can all apply to our businesses. Jake and Becca share the lessons they have learned as a SaaS company, how their business has evolved and changed in 2020, and how they have kept customer service a priority throughout. Be sure to tune in for a super fun interview!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Prepare yourselves for one of the best episodes! Why? Because we are interviewing two of our favorite people, Jake and Becca Berg, the founders of Dubsado. Not only have they done amazing things for us in our business but they have helped many other service-based babes get a grip on things. We love watching them continue to grow over the last five years and admire them for building a software service while also leading one of the best customer service teams out there, making a huge impact on small business owners. They are now five years in and have expanded to 45 employees!  </p><p>In today’s episode, we are touching on some of those unique aspects that make Dubsado tick and pick their brains about what they are doing that we can all apply to our businesses. Jake and Becca share the lessons they have learned as a SaaS company, how their business has evolved and changed in 2020, and how they have kept customer service a priority throughout. Be sure to tune in for a super fun interview!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2291</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3957b5e5-38a0-4f20-8ff9-2d9c34558feb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3825562119.mp3?updated=1660828784" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>478: Boss Talk: How to Deal with Stress and Remain Productive in 2020</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/boss-talk-how-to-deal-with-stress-and-remain-productive-in-2020</link>
      <description>In today’s episode, we are going to bring back an oldie but a goodie — We are going to do a Boss Talk episode, where we just ask a question, riff on it, and see where it leads us. That's totally our style anyway; we love to riff on things. No-one is surprised that we go on tangents and talk about whatever we want, whenever we want. The question for today is, how do you cope with stress and still remain productive when you have got all this stuff going on? We both run two businesses, so there is a lot on our plates! Also, we are in the middle of a pandemic, heading into a new season, Emylee has a kid who is bouncing off the walls, and Abagail just bought a house that needs renovations! 
So, as you can hear, there is hardly anything going on at all (sarcasm much?). The question around productivity is one we hear super often, and Emylee finds she always gets it in her DMs when she has shared an especially productive day. People want to know how she manages to sleep, much less do it all. So, just to clear the air, she wants to let everyone know that she is not a workaholic, and it’s actually something she actively puts effort into not being. It's so easy in today’s world to just work all the time, especially for her personality type. So, she wants to share some of the expectations she has for herself, and how she and Abagail have stayed productive in the midst of it all.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 20 Oct 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Boss Talk: How to Deal with Stress and Remain Productive in 2020</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>478</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/976b6b64-ae9a-11ec-91b1-abaa5048cd9f/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>In today’s episode, we are going to bring back an oldie but a goodie — We are going to do a Boss Talk episode, where we just ask a question, riff on it, and see where it leads us. That's totally our style anyway; we love to riff on things. No-one...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today’s episode, we are going to bring back an oldie but a goodie — We are going to do a Boss Talk episode, where we just ask a question, riff on it, and see where it leads us. That's totally our style anyway; we love to riff on things. No-one is surprised that we go on tangents and talk about whatever we want, whenever we want. The question for today is, how do you cope with stress and still remain productive when you have got all this stuff going on? We both run two businesses, so there is a lot on our plates! Also, we are in the middle of a pandemic, heading into a new season, Emylee has a kid who is bouncing off the walls, and Abagail just bought a house that needs renovations! 
So, as you can hear, there is hardly anything going on at all (sarcasm much?). The question around productivity is one we hear super often, and Emylee finds she always gets it in her DMs when she has shared an especially productive day. People want to know how she manages to sleep, much less do it all. So, just to clear the air, she wants to let everyone know that she is not a workaholic, and it’s actually something she actively puts effort into not being. It's so easy in today’s world to just work all the time, especially for her personality type. So, she wants to share some of the expectations she has for herself, and how she and Abagail have stayed productive in the midst of it all.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today’s episode, we are going to bring back an oldie but a goodie — We are going to do a Boss Talk episode, where we just ask a question, riff on it, and see where it leads us. That's totally our style anyway; we love to riff on things. No-one is surprised that we go on tangents and talk about whatever we want, whenever we want. The question for today is, how do you cope with stress and still remain productive when you have got all this stuff going on? We both run two businesses, so there is a lot on our plates! Also, we are in the middle of a pandemic, heading into a new season, Emylee has a kid who is bouncing off the walls, and Abagail just bought a house that needs renovations! </p><p>So, as you can hear, there is hardly anything going on at all (sarcasm much?). The question around productivity is one we hear super often, and Emylee finds she always gets it in her DMs when she has shared an especially productive day. People want to know how she manages to sleep, much less do it all. So, just to clear the air, she wants to let everyone know that she is not a workaholic, and it’s actually something she actively puts effort into not being. It's so easy in today’s world to just work all the time, especially for her personality type. So, she wants to share some of the expectations she has for herself, and how she and Abagail have stayed productive in the midst of it all.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2612</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[95c0d66b-154d-4029-bc6e-928e02c6c137]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4085324172.mp3?updated=1660845805" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>477: Selling High-Four Figure Packages Utilizing Dubsado with Tiffany Tolliver</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/selling-high-four-figure-packages-utilizing-dubsado-with-tiffany-tolliver</link>
      <description>Today on the show we have Tiffany Tolliver, the owner of the Emma Rose Agency. Tiffany is a rebrand and relaunch strategist who specializes in income-generating web design for service-based womenpreneurs. While she stays in her lane with graphic and web design, her mission is rooted in creating income-generating services, helping her clients get $300,000-launches. We talk about how she is able to create this high-end experience using our favorite Dubsado, getting into the features of Dubsado she relies on to land high-paying clients. Tuning in for this episode, listeners will learn more about the frustration that led up to Tiffany getting Dubsado, what is has changed in her business, and how she incorporates the platform in every step of her client onboarding process. She also talks about what optimizing your systems can mean for your stress levels and business, why you shouldn’t shy away from making such investments, and about being realistic in your expectations of an ROI. Tiffany walks us through her approach to sales calls, why she believes face-to-face engagements are crucial for landing high-paying clients, and wraps up the interview by giving other strategies for taking a client from interested to sold out!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 15 Oct 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Selling High-Four Figure Packages Utilizing Dubsado with Tiffany Tolliver</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>477</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/97fc796a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-4b0c175115f2/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we have Tiffany Tolliver, the owner of the Emma Rose Agency. Tiffany is a rebrand and relaunch strategist who specializes in income-generating web design for service-based womenpreneurs. While she stays in her lane with graphic and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we have Tiffany Tolliver, the owner of the Emma Rose Agency. Tiffany is a rebrand and relaunch strategist who specializes in income-generating web design for service-based womenpreneurs. While she stays in her lane with graphic and web design, her mission is rooted in creating income-generating services, helping her clients get $300,000-launches. We talk about how she is able to create this high-end experience using our favorite Dubsado, getting into the features of Dubsado she relies on to land high-paying clients. Tuning in for this episode, listeners will learn more about the frustration that led up to Tiffany getting Dubsado, what is has changed in her business, and how she incorporates the platform in every step of her client onboarding process. She also talks about what optimizing your systems can mean for your stress levels and business, why you shouldn’t shy away from making such investments, and about being realistic in your expectations of an ROI. Tiffany walks us through her approach to sales calls, why she believes face-to-face engagements are crucial for landing high-paying clients, and wraps up the interview by giving other strategies for taking a client from interested to sold out!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we have Tiffany Tolliver, the owner of the Emma Rose Agency. Tiffany is a rebrand and relaunch strategist who specializes in income-generating web design for service-based womenpreneurs. While she stays in her lane with graphic and web design, her mission is rooted in creating income-generating services, helping her clients get $300,000-launches. We talk about how she is able to create this high-end experience using our favorite Dubsado, getting into the features of Dubsado she relies on to land high-paying clients. Tuning in for this episode, listeners will learn more about the frustration that led up to Tiffany getting Dubsado, what is has changed in her business, and how she incorporates the platform in every step of her client onboarding process. She also talks about what optimizing your systems can mean for your stress levels and business, why you shouldn’t shy away from making such investments, and about being realistic in your expectations of an ROI. Tiffany walks us through her approach to sales calls, why she believes face-to-face engagements are crucial for landing high-paying clients, and wraps up the interview by giving other strategies for taking a client from interested to sold out!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1913</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[77f47fe9-2519-4ce4-953e-bbffdf699ca1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9725263038.mp3?updated=1660845403" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>476: How to Create Tangible Transformations: 3 Core Components Every Group Program Needs</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-create-tangible-transformations-three-core-components-every-group-program-needs</link>
      <description>We know our listeners are super smart, and there are tons of cool things you do every day, so maybe the best thing you can do today is to outline your group course! We have been in the teaching space for a while now, and Boss Project has recently celebrated its fifth anniversary. Go us! Interestingly, even though we have taught tons of people over the years, we haven’t shared that much about what we put out into the world. We teach a lot about business and marketing, but we have not really gone into course development that much. This is mostly because this is not everyone’s primary job. 
We have, however, noticed an influx of coaches, and the majority of the people in the Creative Template Shop are actually coaches. While this is surprising, it is also really incredible because people are increasingly looking for connection and transformation, and they want someone to guide them in that process. Before we get started, we want to invite you to a party. All you need to do is open the Strategy Hour Podcast up in your favorite podcast app, give us five-star reviews only, and then share these screenshots on Instagram. You can win one of two great prizes, either a free copy of Trello for Business or a whole month free of the Creative Template Shop.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 13 Oct 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Create Tangible Transformations: 3 Core Components Every Group Program Needs</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>476</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/988a067c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-6f5133e317ac/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We know our listeners are super smart, and there are tons of cool things you do every day, so maybe the best thing you can do today is to outline your group course! We have been in the teaching space for a while now, and Boss Project has recently...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We know our listeners are super smart, and there are tons of cool things you do every day, so maybe the best thing you can do today is to outline your group course! We have been in the teaching space for a while now, and Boss Project has recently celebrated its fifth anniversary. Go us! Interestingly, even though we have taught tons of people over the years, we haven’t shared that much about what we put out into the world. We teach a lot about business and marketing, but we have not really gone into course development that much. This is mostly because this is not everyone’s primary job. 
We have, however, noticed an influx of coaches, and the majority of the people in the Creative Template Shop are actually coaches. While this is surprising, it is also really incredible because people are increasingly looking for connection and transformation, and they want someone to guide them in that process. Before we get started, we want to invite you to a party. All you need to do is open the Strategy Hour Podcast up in your favorite podcast app, give us five-star reviews only, and then share these screenshots on Instagram. You can win one of two great prizes, either a free copy of Trello for Business or a whole month free of the Creative Template Shop.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We know our listeners are super smart, and there are tons of cool things you do every day, so maybe the best thing you can do today is to outline your group course! We have been in the teaching space for a while now, and Boss Project has recently celebrated its fifth anniversary. Go us! Interestingly, even though we have taught tons of people over the years, we haven’t shared that much about what we put out into the world. We teach a lot about business and marketing, but we have not really gone into course development that much. This is mostly because this is not everyone’s primary job. </p><p>We have, however, noticed an influx of coaches, and the majority of the people in the Creative Template Shop are actually coaches. While this is surprising, it is also really incredible because people are increasingly looking for connection and transformation, and they want someone to guide them in that process. Before we get started, we want to invite you to a party. All you need to do is open the Strategy Hour Podcast up in your favorite podcast app, give us five-star reviews only, and then share these screenshots on Instagram. You can win one of two great prizes, either a free copy of Trello for Business or a whole month free of the Creative Template Shop.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2257</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[835795ed-ec1b-4dc9-9465-7bfe4296a401]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8385014247.mp3?updated=1660828839" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>475: Tips to Get Your Website on the 1st Page of Google with Melissa McGraw</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/tips-to-get-your-website-on-the-1st-page-of-google-with-melissa-mcgraw</link>
      <description>Today on The Strategy Hour we are joined by the amazing, the wonderful, the gifted, Melissa McGraw! Melissa is the founder of The Creative Potential, an agency dedicated to helping online business owners increase their traffic and revenue through improved SEO. She and the company have aided countless brands to grow their audience by millions and applying her strategies can multiply your organic search results tenfold in just a few months! With Melissa's help, we are going to be breaking down SEO in the most simple of ways, not getting too nerdy but also not skimping on great, actionable plans and ideas. We want to get you ranked on Google ASAP! Get your notebook ready so we can start getting more traffic and customers and have that reflect in your bank account!
It's been a while since we have talked about SEO and just as a reminder, it is very important for all, and we mean all, businesses! If we are honest, SEO is still a foreign language for some of us, while some of us have kind of got the hang of it. Our goal today is to get your site search engine friendly and high up in the rankings! We will be going from the simplest questions about what SEO is and how it functions, how to utilize it for your biz, and even touching on some of the higher-end stuff that will get you to the top of the first page! These strategies are super accomplishable but it is also worth noting that you are able to hire someone like Melissa to help you out with this task, get an expert to do the work for you, so there is that option too! Now, let's get you found online!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 08 Oct 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Tips to Get Your Website on the 1st Page of Google with Melissa McGraw</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>475</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/99192eb0-ae9a-11ec-91b1-a7b641ee86d7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on The Strategy Hour we are joined by the amazing, the wonderful, the gifted, Melissa McGraw! Melissa is the founder of The Creative Potential, an agency dedicated to helping online business owners increase their traffic and revenue through...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on The Strategy Hour we are joined by the amazing, the wonderful, the gifted, Melissa McGraw! Melissa is the founder of The Creative Potential, an agency dedicated to helping online business owners increase their traffic and revenue through improved SEO. She and the company have aided countless brands to grow their audience by millions and applying her strategies can multiply your organic search results tenfold in just a few months! With Melissa's help, we are going to be breaking down SEO in the most simple of ways, not getting too nerdy but also not skimping on great, actionable plans and ideas. We want to get you ranked on Google ASAP! Get your notebook ready so we can start getting more traffic and customers and have that reflect in your bank account!
It's been a while since we have talked about SEO and just as a reminder, it is very important for all, and we mean all, businesses! If we are honest, SEO is still a foreign language for some of us, while some of us have kind of got the hang of it. Our goal today is to get your site search engine friendly and high up in the rankings! We will be going from the simplest questions about what SEO is and how it functions, how to utilize it for your biz, and even touching on some of the higher-end stuff that will get you to the top of the first page! These strategies are super accomplishable but it is also worth noting that you are able to hire someone like Melissa to help you out with this task, get an expert to do the work for you, so there is that option too! Now, let's get you found online!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on The Strategy Hour we are joined by the amazing, the wonderful, the gifted, Melissa McGraw! Melissa is the founder of The Creative Potential, an agency dedicated to helping online business owners increase their traffic and revenue through improved SEO. She and the company have aided countless brands to grow their audience by millions and applying her strategies can multiply your organic search results tenfold in just a few months! With Melissa's help, we are going to be breaking down SEO in the most simple of ways, not getting too nerdy but also not skimping on great, actionable plans and ideas. We want to get you ranked on Google ASAP! Get your notebook ready so we can start getting more traffic and customers and have that reflect in your bank account!</p><p>It's been a while since we have talked about SEO and just as a reminder, it is very important for all, and we mean all, businesses! If we are honest, SEO is still a foreign language for some of us, while some of us have kind of got the hang of it. Our goal today is to get your site search engine friendly and high up in the rankings! We will be going from the simplest questions about what SEO is and how it functions, how to utilize it for your biz, and even touching on some of the higher-end stuff that will get you to the top of the first page! These strategies are super accomplishable but it is also worth noting that you are able to hire someone like Melissa to help you out with this task, get an expert to do the work for you, so there is that option too! Now, let's get you found online!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2166</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4b5f5988-1c1b-4fff-bc88-772e59cbdf23]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8181165876.mp3?updated=1660828927" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>474: 4 Sales Techniques We Are Using in Our Businesses</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/4-sales-techniques-we-are-using-in-our-businesses</link>
      <description>Do you want to increase your sales? Of course, you do, we all do! There are so many strategies out there on how to do this and today we are picking out four that we use and that have been highly effective for us! We hope that sharing this with you will help you to decide which strategies are best for you and your hustle. When we speak about our work we are referring to Boss Project, our main thing, and then each of our own side gigs. Some of the strategies have worked better in different places but we will be unpacking all of that, do not worry!
The cool thing is that you get to try these out for yourself and see which suits you. We want you to think about which fits with your goals and lifestyle, as well as its conversion efficacy. These are the most important metrics for you to keep an eye on while testing things out. Don't forget to keep the conversation going over on Instagram, you know we love to hear from you, so hit us up with any thoughts or questions!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 06 Oct 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>4 Sales Techniques We Are Using in Our Businesses</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>474</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/99a57136-ae9a-11ec-91b1-9362b38270f5/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Do you want to increase your sales? Of course, you do, we all do! There are so many strategies out there on how to do this and today we are picking out four that we use and that have been highly effective for us! We hope that sharing this with you...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Do you want to increase your sales? Of course, you do, we all do! There are so many strategies out there on how to do this and today we are picking out four that we use and that have been highly effective for us! We hope that sharing this with you will help you to decide which strategies are best for you and your hustle. When we speak about our work we are referring to Boss Project, our main thing, and then each of our own side gigs. Some of the strategies have worked better in different places but we will be unpacking all of that, do not worry!
The cool thing is that you get to try these out for yourself and see which suits you. We want you to think about which fits with your goals and lifestyle, as well as its conversion efficacy. These are the most important metrics for you to keep an eye on while testing things out. Don't forget to keep the conversation going over on Instagram, you know we love to hear from you, so hit us up with any thoughts or questions!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Do you want to increase your sales? Of course, you do, we all do! There are so many strategies out there on how to do this and today we are picking out four that we use and that have been highly effective for us! We hope that sharing this with you will help you to decide which strategies are best for you and your hustle. When we speak about our work we are referring to Boss Project, our main thing, and then each of our own side gigs. Some of the strategies have worked better in different places but we will be unpacking all of that, do not worry!</p><p>The cool thing is that you get to try these out for yourself and see which suits you. We want you to think about which fits with your goals and lifestyle, as well as its conversion efficacy. These are the most important metrics for you to keep an eye on while testing things out. Don't forget to keep the conversation going over on Instagram, you know we love to hear from you, so hit us up with any thoughts or questions!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2104</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c82ebdef-f8be-4b80-abab-a0bbbb8a816b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7964768419.mp3?updated=1660829015" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>473: Reduce Risk and Cover Your Legal Shizz with Braden Drake</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/reduce-risk-and-cover-your-legal-shizz-with-braden-drake</link>
      <description>Most of us can do with a little help with the tax and accounting side of our businesses and we have just the person to talk us through the important parts of this process! Back on the show is our friend Braden Drake, who runs Braden Drake Law, where he works with a handful of one on one clients to sort out their tax and legal issues. His mission is to help as many people get as much of their business on the right track and running smoothly! He believes strongly in treating yourself like the CEO you need to be and in this episode, he covers exactly what this looks like. Spoiler alert! Braden has just finished writing a book that is about to be published! It is called Unf*ck Your Biz and details the service that Braden provides for his clients. 
Braden does an amazing job of unpacking the framework of the book for us and shares the initial steps in tackling the biggest and most common mistakes he comes across. He talks about the 'oh shit cycle' that business owners get into with their taxes, how to know you are in this, and how to go about getting out! Braden shares many of our biz philosophies, striving to help you become profitable, paying yourself, and paying your taxes. We know tax can sound a bit boring but Braden is amazing at making it fun and lighthearted, so make sure to stay tuned as we get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 01 Oct 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Reduce Risk and Cover Your Legal Shizz with Braden Drake</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>473</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/9a33b766-ae9a-11ec-91b1-b782369fc5f4/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Most of us can do with a little help with the tax and accounting side of our businesses and we have just the person to talk us through the important parts of this process! Back on the show is our friend Braden Drake, who runs Braden Drake Law, where...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Most of us can do with a little help with the tax and accounting side of our businesses and we have just the person to talk us through the important parts of this process! Back on the show is our friend Braden Drake, who runs Braden Drake Law, where he works with a handful of one on one clients to sort out their tax and legal issues. His mission is to help as many people get as much of their business on the right track and running smoothly! He believes strongly in treating yourself like the CEO you need to be and in this episode, he covers exactly what this looks like. Spoiler alert! Braden has just finished writing a book that is about to be published! It is called Unf*ck Your Biz and details the service that Braden provides for his clients. 
Braden does an amazing job of unpacking the framework of the book for us and shares the initial steps in tackling the biggest and most common mistakes he comes across. He talks about the 'oh shit cycle' that business owners get into with their taxes, how to know you are in this, and how to go about getting out! Braden shares many of our biz philosophies, striving to help you become profitable, paying yourself, and paying your taxes. We know tax can sound a bit boring but Braden is amazing at making it fun and lighthearted, so make sure to stay tuned as we get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Most of us can do with a little help with the tax and accounting side of our businesses and we have just the person to talk us through the important parts of this process! Back on the show is our friend Braden Drake, who runs Braden Drake Law, where he works with a handful of one on one clients to sort out their tax and legal issues. His mission is to help as many people get as much of their business on the right track and running smoothly! He believes strongly in treating yourself like the CEO you need to be and in this episode, he covers exactly what this looks like. Spoiler alert! Braden has just finished writing a book that is about to be published! It is called <em>Unf*ck Your Biz </em>and details the service that Braden provides for his clients. </p><p>Braden does an amazing job of unpacking the framework of the book for us and shares the initial steps in tackling the biggest and most common mistakes he comes across. He talks about the 'oh shit cycle' that business owners get into with their taxes, how to know you are in this, and how to go about getting out! Braden shares many of our biz philosophies, striving to help you become profitable, paying yourself, and paying your taxes. We know tax can sound a bit boring but Braden is amazing at making it fun and lighthearted, so make sure to stay tuned as we get into some strategy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2320</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[74992f0b-fbed-4d4c-b416-bb3e4539dfc4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3355138361.mp3?updated=1652211309" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>472: August 2020 Profit Report: We ALREADY Hit Our 2020 Revenue Goal!</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/august-2020-profit-report-we-already-hit-our-2020-revenue-goal</link>
      <description>Can you believe it’s already time for another profit report? Literally, before we hopped on to record this show we were like what happened last month, what month was even last month? We couldn’t have told you! There has been a lot going on, and it’s not so much business – it’s like, life is crazy right now and we are keeping it together but hanging on by a thread. It’s a lot!
But August went so well despite what typically happens, which is sometimes a hot mess. And we definitely want to get into all the data around that, but one thing we did, as most of you would have, was throw out our 2020 plan. We didn’t even have one and just have been taking every month at a time. We expected we would have a dip in August, and then when we got on here, we were like, ‘Oh my gosh.’
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 29 Sep 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>August 2020 Profit Report: We ALREADY Hit Our 2020 Revenue Goal!</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>472</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/9ac45e60-ae9a-11ec-91b1-f30ef5c9faf2/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Can you believe it’s already time for another profit report? Literally, before we hopped on to record this show we were like what happened last month, what month was even last month? We couldn’t have told you! There has been a lot going on, and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Can you believe it’s already time for another profit report? Literally, before we hopped on to record this show we were like what happened last month, what month was even last month? We couldn’t have told you! There has been a lot going on, and it’s not so much business – it’s like, life is crazy right now and we are keeping it together but hanging on by a thread. It’s a lot!
But August went so well despite what typically happens, which is sometimes a hot mess. And we definitely want to get into all the data around that, but one thing we did, as most of you would have, was throw out our 2020 plan. We didn’t even have one and just have been taking every month at a time. We expected we would have a dip in August, and then when we got on here, we were like, ‘Oh my gosh.’
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Can you believe it’s already time for another profit report? Literally, before we hopped on to record this show we were like what happened last month, what month was even last month? We couldn’t have told you! There has been a lot going on, and it’s not so much business – it’s like, life is crazy right now and we are keeping it together but hanging on by a thread. It’s a lot!</p><p>But August went so well despite what typically happens, which is sometimes a hot mess. And we definitely want to get into all the data around that, but one thing we did, as most of you would have, was throw out our 2020 plan. We didn’t even have one and just have been taking every month at a time. We expected we would have a dip in August, and then when we got on here, we were like, ‘Oh my gosh.’</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2162</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[385dfd8b-202e-4556-bf57-2546302ebd0c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2440165023.mp3?updated=1660829103" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>471: Why Now is the Best Time to Start a Business with Rachel L. Proctor</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-now-is-the-best-time-to-start-a-business-with-rachel-l-proctor</link>
      <description>Today on the show we have Rachel Proctor, an author, speaker, and second-generation entrepreneur who helps people turn ideas into successful online businesses. She is a self-proclaimed market research junkie, she’s hit seven figures, and she knows what she’s doing, having built a versatile and trusted learning resource hub for aspiring and successful business owners. In this episode, we get into Rachel’s belief and strategy that there is no better time to start a business than right now, even in a crazy 2020, even with less time – now is still the opportune moment! She explains why she believes that and dishes out tangible steps to figure out what to offer, how to find out what you’re good at, how to find people to pay you, perfect your process, grow, and everything in between. So, for those of you who had an idea and dropped it once the pandemic hit or are just ready to take the leap but don’t know where to start, tune in to learn more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 24 Sep 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why Now is the Best Time to Start a Business with Rachel L. Proctor</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>471</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/9b5df804-ae9a-11ec-91b1-07cbb7327994/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we have Rachel Proctor, an author, speaker, and second-generation entrepreneur who helps people turn ideas into successful online businesses. She is a self-proclaimed market research junkie, she’s hit seven figures, and she knows...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we have Rachel Proctor, an author, speaker, and second-generation entrepreneur who helps people turn ideas into successful online businesses. She is a self-proclaimed market research junkie, she’s hit seven figures, and she knows what she’s doing, having built a versatile and trusted learning resource hub for aspiring and successful business owners. In this episode, we get into Rachel’s belief and strategy that there is no better time to start a business than right now, even in a crazy 2020, even with less time – now is still the opportune moment! She explains why she believes that and dishes out tangible steps to figure out what to offer, how to find out what you’re good at, how to find people to pay you, perfect your process, grow, and everything in between. So, for those of you who had an idea and dropped it once the pandemic hit or are just ready to take the leap but don’t know where to start, tune in to learn more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we have Rachel Proctor, an author, speaker, and second-generation entrepreneur who helps people turn ideas into successful online businesses. She is a self-proclaimed market research junkie, she’s hit seven figures, and she knows what she’s doing, having built a versatile and trusted learning resource hub for aspiring and successful business owners. In this episode, we get into Rachel’s belief and strategy that there is no better time to start a business than right now, even in a crazy 2020, even with less time – now is still the opportune moment! She explains why she believes that and dishes out tangible steps to figure out what to offer, how to find out what you’re good at, how to find people to pay you, perfect your process, grow, and everything in between. So, for those of you who had an idea and dropped it once the pandemic hit or are just ready to take the leap but don’t know where to start, tune in to learn more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2874</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[67e7fc83-57b1-4c21-b620-6f7abdac208c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7452380404.mp3?updated=1660829309" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>470: Creating a Holiday Master Marketing Game Plan</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-a-holiday-master-marketing-game-plan</link>
      <description>Are y’all ready to start hearing Jingle Bells? Well, you need to prepare yourself cause the holiday season is fast approaching even though it felt like we all lived in a time warp this year. Usually, we are not great with planning far in advance, but this year, while the weather is still warm, we thought we would jump ahead and create a holiday master marketing game plan. Q4 has this weird way of flying by in the blink of an eye, so we want to share with you some of our top strategies to make the most of the festive season. Because, while the world is in recovery mode and things uncertain, we know that people are still spending their dollar bills, and the predictions suggest that people will spend more money online this year than they ever have. Whether you are in products, services, coaching, or something else, people are spending their cash on the internet, so let’s capitalize on that and see how we can leverage this fact this coming season. While we do not know what exactly you will be offering these holidays, we can help you work backward (from the end of December to where we are currently) to give you a pretty clear idea of what you need to work on and when. So, fill up your cup and be ready to take down notes, cause this is going to be a goodie!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 22 Sep 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating a Holiday Master Marketing Game Plan</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>470</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/9beb8552-ae9a-11ec-91b1-87e3203bd490/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Our top strategies to make the most of the festive season.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are y’all ready to start hearing Jingle Bells? Well, you need to prepare yourself cause the holiday season is fast approaching even though it felt like we all lived in a time warp this year. Usually, we are not great with planning far in advance, but this year, while the weather is still warm, we thought we would jump ahead and create a holiday master marketing game plan. Q4 has this weird way of flying by in the blink of an eye, so we want to share with you some of our top strategies to make the most of the festive season. Because, while the world is in recovery mode and things uncertain, we know that people are still spending their dollar bills, and the predictions suggest that people will spend more money online this year than they ever have. Whether you are in products, services, coaching, or something else, people are spending their cash on the internet, so let’s capitalize on that and see how we can leverage this fact this coming season. While we do not know what exactly you will be offering these holidays, we can help you work backward (from the end of December to where we are currently) to give you a pretty clear idea of what you need to work on and when. So, fill up your cup and be ready to take down notes, cause this is going to be a goodie!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are y’all ready to start hearing Jingle Bells? Well, you need to prepare yourself cause the holiday season is fast approaching even though it felt like we all lived in a time warp this year. Usually, we are not great with planning far in advance, but this year, while the weather is still warm, we thought we would jump ahead and create a holiday master marketing game plan. Q4 has this weird way of flying by in the blink of an eye, so we want to share with you some of our top strategies to make the most of the festive season. Because, while the world is in recovery mode and things uncertain, we know that people are still spending their dollar bills, and the predictions suggest that people will spend more money online this year than they ever have. Whether you are in products, services, coaching, or something else, people are spending their cash on the internet, so let’s capitalize on that and see how we can leverage this fact this coming season. While we do not know what exactly you will be offering these holidays, we can help you work backward (from the end of December to where we are currently) to give you a pretty clear idea of what you need to work on and when. So, fill up your cup and be ready to take down notes, cause this is going to be a goodie!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2441</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[89318ffb-1be2-459b-bcde-246e0837d4d4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7661386252.mp3?updated=1660829213" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>469: Increasing Client Conversions and Offloading Admin Tasks Using Dubsado with Colin Tierney</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/increasing-client-conversions-and-offloading-admin-tasks-using-dubsado-with-colin-tierney</link>
      <description>On the show today, we have brand designer Colin Tierney joining us. He owns and runs Tierney Studio where he has grown his branding and started a whole new business before the pandemic hit, which we will get into today. Talking to Colin, we give you another perspective on a Dubsado customer’s experience and how they have used the software and CRM to perfect their client process, land deals faster, offload projects, and more. 
As a fellow designer, Abagail wishes she knew about Dubsado when she was still in the design business since their software takes the client management side of things off your hands to free you up for doing the design work. There are just too many benefits of signing up for Dubsado, as you will hear from Emylee, Abagail, and Colin. If you’ve had questions about the capabilities of Dubsado or have thought about getting started with the platform, this episode will give you a really good peek behind the curtain. Remember, as a listener of the podcast, you can also get Dubsado for 30% off your first month or year!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 17 Sep 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Increasing Client Conversions and Offloading Admin Tasks Using Dubsado with Colin Tierney</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>469</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/9c7e315e-ae9a-11ec-91b1-d3a17b8100a5/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>On the show today, we have brand designer Colin Tierney joining us. He owns and runs Tierney Studio where he has grown his branding and started a whole new business before the pandemic hit, which we will get into today. Talking to Colin, we give you...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On the show today, we have brand designer Colin Tierney joining us. He owns and runs Tierney Studio where he has grown his branding and started a whole new business before the pandemic hit, which we will get into today. Talking to Colin, we give you another perspective on a Dubsado customer’s experience and how they have used the software and CRM to perfect their client process, land deals faster, offload projects, and more. 
As a fellow designer, Abagail wishes she knew about Dubsado when she was still in the design business since their software takes the client management side of things off your hands to free you up for doing the design work. There are just too many benefits of signing up for Dubsado, as you will hear from Emylee, Abagail, and Colin. If you’ve had questions about the capabilities of Dubsado or have thought about getting started with the platform, this episode will give you a really good peek behind the curtain. Remember, as a listener of the podcast, you can also get Dubsado for 30% off your first month or year!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On the show today, we have brand designer Colin Tierney joining us. He owns and runs Tierney Studio where he has grown his branding and started a whole new business before the pandemic hit, which we will get into today. Talking to Colin, we give you another perspective on a Dubsado customer’s experience and how they have used the software and CRM to perfect their client process, land deals faster, offload projects, and more. </p><p>As a fellow designer, Abagail wishes she knew about Dubsado when she was still in the design business since their software takes the client management side of things off your hands to free you up for doing the design work. There are just too many benefits of signing up for Dubsado, as you will hear from Emylee, Abagail, and Colin. If you’ve had questions about the capabilities of Dubsado or have thought about getting started with the platform, this episode will give you a really good peek behind the curtain. Remember, as a listener of the podcast, you can also get Dubsado for 30% off your first month or year!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2707</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[784fefca-c738-4202-b6e5-b71585aceee7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9074798363.mp3?updated=1660829233" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>468: Building a Paid Community: Patreon vs. Mighty Networks</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/building-a-paid-community-patreon-vs-mighty-networks</link>
      <description>In this episode, Emylee and Abagail get into the topic of building a community that you get paid to run, talking about two of the more popular options in the creator space – Patreon and Mighty Networks. We see musicians, comedians, artists, podcasters, and the like use these platforms to create a network. As you all know, Emylee is always looking toward the next thing and has taken the leap to start her online community for those interested in building clay earring businesses, so she has done some research, signed up (and canceled) subscriptions, and figured out the details so that you don’t have to! We know that you love your Facebook group, but there are serious limitations to it, such as that you can’t get paid for it. However, migrating from one platform to another can be a nasty business since humans are creatures of habit who often resist new paths. You’ve got to have pretty solid reasons for wanting to migrate, and Emylee and Abagail break it all down for you in this episode. Before you get started on a paid community, be sure to tune in for this episode!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 15 Sep 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Building a Paid Community: Patreon vs. Mighty Networks</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>468</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/9d0cf7fe-ae9a-11ec-91b1-af857418dee9/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, Emylee and Abagail get into the topic of building a community that you get paid to run, talking about two of the more popular options in the creator space – Patreon and Mighty Networks. We see musicians, comedians, artists,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode, Emylee and Abagail get into the topic of building a community that you get paid to run, talking about two of the more popular options in the creator space – Patreon and Mighty Networks. We see musicians, comedians, artists, podcasters, and the like use these platforms to create a network. As you all know, Emylee is always looking toward the next thing and has taken the leap to start her online community for those interested in building clay earring businesses, so she has done some research, signed up (and canceled) subscriptions, and figured out the details so that you don’t have to! We know that you love your Facebook group, but there are serious limitations to it, such as that you can’t get paid for it. However, migrating from one platform to another can be a nasty business since humans are creatures of habit who often resist new paths. You’ve got to have pretty solid reasons for wanting to migrate, and Emylee and Abagail break it all down for you in this episode. Before you get started on a paid community, be sure to tune in for this episode!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode, Emylee and Abagail get into the topic of building a community that you get paid to run, talking about two of the more popular options in the creator space – Patreon and Mighty Networks. We see musicians, comedians, artists, podcasters, and the like use these platforms to create a network. As you all know, Emylee is always looking toward the next thing and has taken the leap to start her online community for those interested in building clay earring businesses, so she has done some research, signed up (and canceled) subscriptions, and figured out the details so that you don’t have to! We know that you love your Facebook group, but there are serious limitations to it, such as that you can’t get paid for it. However, migrating from one platform to another can be a nasty business since humans are creatures of habit who often resist new paths. You’ve got to have pretty solid reasons for wanting to migrate, and Emylee and Abagail break it all down for you in this episode. Before you get started on a paid community, be sure to tune in for this episode!  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2249</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[438070ac-9f4b-4cdd-9192-749fb0b5835a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1478621682.mp3?updated=1660829170" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>467: How to Listen to Your Audience So You Can Create Services That Sell with Sarah Peck</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/listening-to-your-audience-so-you-can-create-services-that-sell-with-sarah-peck</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we are joined by our wonderful friend and all-round badass, Sarah Peck. Sarah is the founder of Startup Pregnant, a New York City-based company dedicated to documenting women’s leadership. She is a writer, yoga teacher, and hosts Startup Pregnant’s weekly podcast too! Her goal is to amplify women’s voices and promote their business through her work and she definitely has one of our favorite brains in the game! We share a lot of her business philosophy and will be using this episode to geek out on some strategies for listening to your audience as a way to help grow your product or service.
This super under-utilized and somewhat simple strategy can help you and your biz so much! By paying closer attention to your audience, you can really improve what you offer and make the direct connection between those paying you and what you provide for them. Quite a straightforward equation, right? This is the second time Sarah is joining us on the Strategy Hour and if you haven’t heard her previous appearance go back and check it out immediately, it’s Episode 185! This episode’s topic was sparked by a conversation a few days prior where we were chatting to Sarah about business philosophies and implementation of these. We really believe in these ideas and they are so in line with our core values that we could not resist having her on to talk all about it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 10 Sep 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Listen to Your Audience So You Can Create Services That Sell with Sarah Peck</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>467</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/9d93446c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-0b2d0d606440/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we are joined by our wonderful friend and all-round badass, Sarah Peck. Sarah is the founder of Startup Pregnant, a New York City-based company dedicated to documenting women’s leadership. She is a writer, yoga teacher, and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we are joined by our wonderful friend and all-round badass, Sarah Peck. Sarah is the founder of Startup Pregnant, a New York City-based company dedicated to documenting women’s leadership. She is a writer, yoga teacher, and hosts Startup Pregnant’s weekly podcast too! Her goal is to amplify women’s voices and promote their business through her work and she definitely has one of our favorite brains in the game! We share a lot of her business philosophy and will be using this episode to geek out on some strategies for listening to your audience as a way to help grow your product or service.
This super under-utilized and somewhat simple strategy can help you and your biz so much! By paying closer attention to your audience, you can really improve what you offer and make the direct connection between those paying you and what you provide for them. Quite a straightforward equation, right? This is the second time Sarah is joining us on the Strategy Hour and if you haven’t heard her previous appearance go back and check it out immediately, it’s Episode 185! This episode’s topic was sparked by a conversation a few days prior where we were chatting to Sarah about business philosophies and implementation of these. We really believe in these ideas and they are so in line with our core values that we could not resist having her on to talk all about it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we are joined by our wonderful friend and all-round badass, Sarah Peck. Sarah is the founder of Startup Pregnant, a New York City-based company dedicated to documenting women’s leadership. She is a writer, yoga teacher, and hosts Startup Pregnant’s weekly podcast too! Her goal is to amplify women’s voices and promote their business through her work and she definitely has one of our favorite brains in the game! We share a lot of her business philosophy and will be using this episode to geek out on some strategies for listening to your audience as a way to help grow your product or service.</p><p>This super under-utilized and somewhat simple strategy can help you and your biz so much! By paying closer attention to your audience, you can really improve what you offer and make the direct connection between those paying you and what you provide for them. Quite a straightforward equation, right? This is the second time Sarah is joining us on the Strategy Hour and if you haven’t heard her previous appearance go back and check it out immediately, it’s Episode 185! This episode’s topic was sparked by a conversation a few days prior where we were chatting to Sarah about business philosophies and implementation of these. We really believe in these ideas and they are so in line with our core values that we could not resist having her on to talk all about it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2234</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[235c0732-8b4e-4dc1-a57a-a562a3eb2ab0]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7873697261.mp3?updated=1660829208" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>466: Making $100k from Your Services is Easier than You Think</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/making-100k-from-your-services-is-easier-than-you-think</link>
      <description>Today on The Strategy Hour we’re diving deeper into what exactly we mean when we say that is should be easy and fun to make $100k from your service-based business, within a year. There’s a misconception that money cannot be earned without really hard work, and to an extent, this is true, especially for certain types of businesses. But you also have to be smart about it! Just to reiterate, when we say it’s easy to make six figures, we are talking about offering services like copywriting, designing, and photography. And this is by doing the basic work only, aside from all the other side offerings like podcasts and training courses. 
In fact, you should keep it as simple as possible, focusing on doing one thing really well instead of doing a bunch of different things. These other ideas are not bad, but until you’ve done the one thing properly, you won’t enjoy its full benefits. We’re also guilty of this and we’ve seen many of our mentees battling with the same thing. Today we’re breaking this down in a way that we hope will help you not to fall into the trap of believing that diversifying will necessarily expand your business and make you more money. Whether you’re thinking of adding on products or offering more services, you think that the single solid service you’re offering will not get you to your financial goals. Today we’re busting that myth, and we’re going to show you have it is totally possible to achieve your goals by sticking to the basics.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 08 Sep 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Making $100k from Your Services is Easier than You Think</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>466</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/9e21a162-ae9a-11ec-91b1-772679106075/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on The Strategy Hour we’re diving deeper into what exactly we mean when we say that is should be easy and fun to make $100k from your service-based business, within a year. There’s a misconception that money cannot be earned without really...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on The Strategy Hour we’re diving deeper into what exactly we mean when we say that is should be easy and fun to make $100k from your service-based business, within a year. There’s a misconception that money cannot be earned without really hard work, and to an extent, this is true, especially for certain types of businesses. But you also have to be smart about it! Just to reiterate, when we say it’s easy to make six figures, we are talking about offering services like copywriting, designing, and photography. And this is by doing the basic work only, aside from all the other side offerings like podcasts and training courses. 
In fact, you should keep it as simple as possible, focusing on doing one thing really well instead of doing a bunch of different things. These other ideas are not bad, but until you’ve done the one thing properly, you won’t enjoy its full benefits. We’re also guilty of this and we’ve seen many of our mentees battling with the same thing. Today we’re breaking this down in a way that we hope will help you not to fall into the trap of believing that diversifying will necessarily expand your business and make you more money. Whether you’re thinking of adding on products or offering more services, you think that the single solid service you’re offering will not get you to your financial goals. Today we’re busting that myth, and we’re going to show you have it is totally possible to achieve your goals by sticking to the basics.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on The Strategy Hour we’re diving deeper into what exactly we mean when we say that is should be easy and fun to make $100k from your service-based business, within a year. There’s a misconception that money cannot be earned without really hard work, and to an extent, this is true, especially for certain types of businesses. But you also have to be smart about it! Just to reiterate, when we say it’s easy to make six figures, we are talking about offering services like copywriting, designing, and photography. And this is by doing the basic work only, aside from all the other side offerings like podcasts and training courses. </p><p>In fact, you should keep it as simple as possible, focusing on doing one thing really well instead of doing a bunch of different things. These other ideas are not bad, but until you’ve done the one thing properly, you won’t enjoy its full benefits. We’re also guilty of this and we’ve seen many of our mentees battling with the same thing. Today we’re breaking this down in a way that we hope will help you not to fall into the trap of believing that diversifying will necessarily expand your business and make you more money. Whether you’re thinking of adding on products or offering more services, you think that the single solid service you’re offering will not get you to your financial goals. Today we’re busting that myth, and we’re going to show you have it is totally possible to achieve your goals by sticking to the basics.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2078</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[306786e4-bbd7-4c34-a68b-6264195563cb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1701415434.mp3?updated=1660845871" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>465: From Crickets to Customers with Stephanie Crowder</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/from-crickets-to-customers-with-steph-crowder</link>
      <description>In this episode, we talk to our good friend Steph Crowder, a business strategist, sales expert, and host of the Courage &amp; Clarity podcast. In her past life, Steph was a director of sales training over at Groupon but now helps entrepreneurs get more customers easily by working with those they already know. Today she is spilling all the beans from her extensive experience in sales, talking about how you can go from crickets to customers by following a three-step formula all about the problem, platform, and people, and we just share hacks from what we have learned here at Boss Project and in our side businesses. Switch on your strategic thinking, and tune in! 
Remember to leave a five-star rating and review of the show wherever you listen to your podcasts and share it on Instagram, tagging us! When you do this, you stand a chance to win one of two awesome prizes: a free copy of Trello for Business or a month’s access to the Creative Template Shop.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 03 Sep 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From Crickets to Customers with Stephanie Crowder</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>465</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/9ed45d34-ae9a-11ec-91b1-87479afd26a2/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, we talk to our good friend Steph Crowder, a business strategist, sales expert, and host of the Courage &amp; Clarity podcast. In her past life, Steph was a director of sales training over at Groupon but now helps entrepreneurs get...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode, we talk to our good friend Steph Crowder, a business strategist, sales expert, and host of the Courage &amp; Clarity podcast. In her past life, Steph was a director of sales training over at Groupon but now helps entrepreneurs get more customers easily by working with those they already know. Today she is spilling all the beans from her extensive experience in sales, talking about how you can go from crickets to customers by following a three-step formula all about the problem, platform, and people, and we just share hacks from what we have learned here at Boss Project and in our side businesses. Switch on your strategic thinking, and tune in! 
Remember to leave a five-star rating and review of the show wherever you listen to your podcasts and share it on Instagram, tagging us! When you do this, you stand a chance to win one of two awesome prizes: a free copy of Trello for Business or a month’s access to the Creative Template Shop.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode, we talk to our good friend Steph Crowder, a business strategist, sales expert, and host of the Courage &amp; Clarity podcast. In her past life, Steph was a director of sales training over at Groupon but now helps entrepreneurs get more customers easily by working with those they already know. Today she is spilling all the beans from her extensive experience in sales, talking about how you can go from crickets to customers by following a three-step formula all about the <em>problem</em>, <em>platform</em>, and <em>people</em>, and we just share hacks from what we have learned here at Boss Project and in our side businesses. Switch on your strategic thinking, and tune in! </p><p>Remember to leave a five-star rating and review of the show wherever you listen to your podcasts and share it on Instagram, tagging us! When you do this, you stand a chance to win one of two awesome prizes: a free copy of Trello for Business or a month’s access to the Creative Template Shop.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2477</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6a63196b-a093-4de5-9a80-d49341aa9727]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9052653358.mp3?updated=1660845922" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>464: July 2020 Profit Report: Up 40% in Revenue, Down $100k in Expenses</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/july-2020-profit-report-up-40-in-revenue-down-100k-in-expenses</link>
      <description>Let’s get into our July 2020 profit report! This year has just been super satisfying. Around fall last year we had decided and declared out loud to you that we were on this mission to get to 30% reoccurring profit each month, and at the time it felt like climbing a mountain. We were just really struggling and had spent all this time and money trying to figure out who makes up our team, what our products are, and how we are selling them, but something about this year just really clicked for us!
We started sharing our profit reports last fall with this goal to hold ourselves accountable. We know you guys like to hear behind the scenes. We also restructured how we did our profit reports. We don’t do it like how a lot of others do it where we don’t share our actual numbers – not that we don’t want to, but we honestly think they are distracting and put you in a space of ‘comparisonitis’, and no-one needs to suffer from that. So we wanted to showcase more of the percentages, breakdowns of our expenses, our profits, and just big picture decisions that we make every month in order to reach our goals.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 Sep 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>July 2020 Profit Report: Up 40% in Revenue, Down $100k in Expenses</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>464</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/9f7875f4-ae9a-11ec-91b1-8f97d5bbc532/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Let’s get into our July 2020 profit report! This year has just been super satisfying. Around fall last year we had decided and declared out loud to you that we were on this mission to get to 30% reoccurring profit each month, and at the time it felt...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Let’s get into our July 2020 profit report! This year has just been super satisfying. Around fall last year we had decided and declared out loud to you that we were on this mission to get to 30% reoccurring profit each month, and at the time it felt like climbing a mountain. We were just really struggling and had spent all this time and money trying to figure out who makes up our team, what our products are, and how we are selling them, but something about this year just really clicked for us!
We started sharing our profit reports last fall with this goal to hold ourselves accountable. We know you guys like to hear behind the scenes. We also restructured how we did our profit reports. We don’t do it like how a lot of others do it where we don’t share our actual numbers – not that we don’t want to, but we honestly think they are distracting and put you in a space of ‘comparisonitis’, and no-one needs to suffer from that. So we wanted to showcase more of the percentages, breakdowns of our expenses, our profits, and just big picture decisions that we make every month in order to reach our goals.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Let’s get into our July 2020 profit report! This year has just been super satisfying. Around fall last year we had decided and declared out loud to you that we were on this mission to get to 30% reoccurring profit each month, and at the time it felt like climbing a mountain. We were just really struggling and had spent all this time and money trying to figure out who makes up our team, what our products are, and how we are selling them, but something about this year just really clicked for us!</p><p>We started sharing our profit reports last fall with this goal to hold ourselves accountable. We know you guys like to hear behind the scenes. We also restructured how we did our profit reports. We don’t do it like how a lot of others do it where we don’t share our actual numbers – not that we don’t want to, but we honestly think they are distracting and put you in a space of ‘comparisonitis’, and no-one needs to suffer from that. So we wanted to showcase more of the percentages, breakdowns of our expenses, our profits, and just big picture decisions that we make every month in order to reach our goals.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2817</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1428f046-2748-4251-94fd-cd906a1526f3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3885470463.mp3?updated=1660846453" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>463: Simplifying Workflows and Automating Your Business Using Dubsado with Krystal Clark</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/simplifying-workflows-and-automating-your-business-using-dubsado-with-krystal-clark</link>
      <description>When we say that today’s episode is going to rock your world, we’re not even joking! If you have a client-based business and use Dusado, maybe you have wanted to set up workflows, but been so overwhelmed that you haven’t started, then stop what you're doing and listen to this show with a notebook because Krystal Clark literally breaks every step down! From lead capture to onboarding to delivering to offboarding, she leaves no stone unturned. Krystal even goes so far as to give us five hacks on how she’s using Dubsado differently than what we have heard before! 
Krystal's creative brain takes something that already exists in Dusado and then reworks it to be custom for her clients and you guys. If you do not have Dubsado yet, you can get 50% off for the first year by going to the link at the end of the page. It will rock your world when it comes to infusing beautiful brand and designing the workflow process. A lot of what Krystal talks about, we either have a template that will make it simpler or she gave us new ideas for templates that you best believe are coming out. Please share the workflow that you’re going to get set up because you were inspired by this episode, tag us, and then be sure to also tag Krystal on Instagram.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 27 Aug 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Simplifying Workflows and Automating Your Business Using Dubsado with Krystal Clark</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>463</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/a00d9328-ae9a-11ec-91b1-2bd5b0d81ee5/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>When we say that today’s episode is going to rock your world, we’re not even joking! If you have a client-based business and use Dusado, maybe you have wanted to set up workflows, but been so overwhelmed that you haven’t started, then stop what...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When we say that today’s episode is going to rock your world, we’re not even joking! If you have a client-based business and use Dusado, maybe you have wanted to set up workflows, but been so overwhelmed that you haven’t started, then stop what you're doing and listen to this show with a notebook because Krystal Clark literally breaks every step down! From lead capture to onboarding to delivering to offboarding, she leaves no stone unturned. Krystal even goes so far as to give us five hacks on how she’s using Dubsado differently than what we have heard before! 
Krystal's creative brain takes something that already exists in Dusado and then reworks it to be custom for her clients and you guys. If you do not have Dubsado yet, you can get 50% off for the first year by going to the link at the end of the page. It will rock your world when it comes to infusing beautiful brand and designing the workflow process. A lot of what Krystal talks about, we either have a template that will make it simpler or she gave us new ideas for templates that you best believe are coming out. Please share the workflow that you’re going to get set up because you were inspired by this episode, tag us, and then be sure to also tag Krystal on Instagram.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When we say that today’s episode is going to rock your world, we’re not even joking! If you have a client-based business and use Dusado, maybe you have wanted to set up workflows, but been so overwhelmed that you haven’t started, then stop what you're doing and listen to this show with a notebook because Krystal Clark literally breaks every step down! From lead capture to onboarding to delivering to offboarding, she leaves no stone unturned. Krystal even goes so far as to give us five hacks on how she’s using Dubsado differently than what we have heard before! </p><p>Krystal's creative brain takes something that already exists in Dusado and then reworks it to be custom for her clients and you guys. If you do not have Dubsado yet, you can get 50% off for the first year by going to the link at the end of the page. It will rock your world when it comes to infusing beautiful brand and designing the workflow process. A lot of what Krystal talks about, we either have a template that will make it simpler or she gave us new ideas for templates that you best believe are coming out. Please share the workflow that you’re going to get set up because you were inspired by this episode, tag us, and then be sure to also tag Krystal on Instagram.  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2128</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[031f41e5-2102-4032-a5f2-271fa2bc24e6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6021067667.mp3?updated=1656621790" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>462: The New Way to Price Your Products, Offers and Services</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-new-way-to-price-your-products-offers-and-services</link>
      <description>It’s been a hot minute since we had this conversation and we think we have some fresh takes on this taboo topic that seems to happen in every single niche, every single industry, and that is the conversation about pricing! We have so many thoughts and ideas around this and think there are a lot of very strong opinions about what you should and should not do and so we just want to put a disclaimer at the top of the whole episode to say, “You do whatever you want, and that’s okay!” Nevertheless, we want to have this conversation again because we both have our own businesses on the side of Boss Project. 
Abagail will share how pricing impacts her marketing and clients, some complexities about pricing, and how she has felt differently about this topic over the years. For Emylee, the maker community is rampant with conversations about pricing, but she believes the questions being asked are often actually about something different to pricing. So, Emylee will pick apart what this means for her, and talk about the different conversations that actually need to be had!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 25 Aug 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The New Way to Price Your Products, Offers and Services</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>462</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/a09b2a6c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-c38d247605ff/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>It’s been a hot minute since we had this conversation and we think we have some fresh takes on this taboo topic that seems to happen in every single niche, every single industry, and that is the conversation about pricing! We have so many thoughts...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It’s been a hot minute since we had this conversation and we think we have some fresh takes on this taboo topic that seems to happen in every single niche, every single industry, and that is the conversation about pricing! We have so many thoughts and ideas around this and think there are a lot of very strong opinions about what you should and should not do and so we just want to put a disclaimer at the top of the whole episode to say, “You do whatever you want, and that’s okay!” Nevertheless, we want to have this conversation again because we both have our own businesses on the side of Boss Project. 
Abagail will share how pricing impacts her marketing and clients, some complexities about pricing, and how she has felt differently about this topic over the years. For Emylee, the maker community is rampant with conversations about pricing, but she believes the questions being asked are often actually about something different to pricing. So, Emylee will pick apart what this means for her, and talk about the different conversations that actually need to be had!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It’s been a hot minute since we had this conversation and we think we have some fresh takes on this taboo topic that seems to happen in every single niche, every single industry, and that is the conversation about pricing! We have so many thoughts and ideas around this and think there are a lot of very strong opinions about what you should and should not do and so we just want to put a disclaimer at the top of the whole episode to say, “You do whatever you want, and that’s okay!” Nevertheless, we want to have this conversation again because we both have our own businesses on the side of Boss Project. </p><p>Abagail will share how pricing impacts her marketing and clients, some complexities about pricing, and how she has felt differently about this topic over the years. For Emylee, the maker community is rampant with conversations about pricing, but she believes the questions being asked are often actually about something different to pricing. So, Emylee will pick apart what this means for her, and talk about the different conversations that actually need to be had!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2505</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[19756c4c-a6e4-45b4-ae85-d57805f1ba8c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5240620523.mp3?updated=1656621731" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>461: Creating Viral Marketing with TikTok &amp; Our Theories on Instagram Reels with JB &amp; Brittany Jacquot</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-viral-marketing-with-tiktok-our-theories-on-instagram-reels-with-jb-and-brittany-jacquot</link>
      <description>Today, we are talking to JB and Brittany Jacquot, who own their own media company out of San Francisco where they do video and photography for brands, influencers, and high-end weddings. Like so many people our age, they jumped on TikTok at the beginning of quarantine. This has translated into over 100 000 followers and a booked wedding in less than 24 hours! So, you best believe they got some hot tips for us. They break down every single thing they have learned about the platform — How to make the perfect viral video, how to get people to sign up for a freebie or opt-in, and how to get people to follow you or other channels. They also share actual numbers and stats so that you have a better understanding of the kinds of expectations you should set for yourself when you are growing your own or your business’s TikTok following, and you are trying to monetize it. 
They talk really candidly about how they broke down and thought about who they want to target, what they wanted to share, and how they wanted to get people to move over to different channels so they could actually use it to make money, rather than gaining followers for the sake of having followers. We know you will get a lot of ideas on how to utilize this for TikTok, Instagram Reels, and even video content in general. It's a really great one, and we can’t wait to see what you all come up with on TikTok after this! Before we get started, you’ve been invited to a podcast party. Find us on your favorite podcast platform, leave a five-star review, head over to Instagram, and tag us. You will then be entered into a draw, where you stand the chance to win one of two prizes — A free copy of Trello for Business, or a whole month of The Creative Template Shop for free!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 20 Aug 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating Viral Marketing with TikTok &amp; Our Theories on Instagram Reels with JB &amp; Brittany Jacquot</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>461</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/a167010a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-2fd99369aad1/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, we are talking to JB and Brittany Jacquot, who own their own media company out of San Francisco where they do video and photography for brands, influencers, and high-end weddings. Like so many people our age, they jumped on TikTok at the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we are talking to JB and Brittany Jacquot, who own their own media company out of San Francisco where they do video and photography for brands, influencers, and high-end weddings. Like so many people our age, they jumped on TikTok at the beginning of quarantine. This has translated into over 100 000 followers and a booked wedding in less than 24 hours! So, you best believe they got some hot tips for us. They break down every single thing they have learned about the platform — How to make the perfect viral video, how to get people to sign up for a freebie or opt-in, and how to get people to follow you or other channels. They also share actual numbers and stats so that you have a better understanding of the kinds of expectations you should set for yourself when you are growing your own or your business’s TikTok following, and you are trying to monetize it. 
They talk really candidly about how they broke down and thought about who they want to target, what they wanted to share, and how they wanted to get people to move over to different channels so they could actually use it to make money, rather than gaining followers for the sake of having followers. We know you will get a lot of ideas on how to utilize this for TikTok, Instagram Reels, and even video content in general. It's a really great one, and we can’t wait to see what you all come up with on TikTok after this! Before we get started, you’ve been invited to a podcast party. Find us on your favorite podcast platform, leave a five-star review, head over to Instagram, and tag us. You will then be entered into a draw, where you stand the chance to win one of two prizes — A free copy of Trello for Business, or a whole month of The Creative Template Shop for free!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we are talking to JB and Brittany Jacquot, who own their own media company out of San Francisco where they do video and photography for brands, influencers, and high-end weddings. Like so many people our age, they jumped on TikTok at the beginning of quarantine. This has translated into over 100 000 followers and a booked wedding in less than 24 hours! So, you best believe they got some hot tips for us. They break down every single thing they have learned about the platform — How to make the perfect viral video, how to get people to sign up for a freebie or opt-in, and how to get people to follow you or other channels. They also share actual numbers and stats so that you have a better understanding of the kinds of expectations you should set for yourself when you are growing your own or your business’s TikTok following, and you are trying to monetize it. </p><p>They talk really candidly about how they broke down and thought about who they want to target, what they wanted to share, and how they wanted to get people to move over to different channels so they could actually use it to make money, rather than gaining followers for the sake of having followers. We know you will get a lot of ideas on how to utilize this for TikTok, Instagram Reels, and even video content in general. It's a really great one, and we can’t wait to see what you all come up with on TikTok after this! Before we get started, you’ve been invited to a podcast party. Find us on your favorite podcast platform, leave a five-star review, head over to Instagram, and tag us. You will then be entered into a draw, where you stand the chance to win one of two prizes — A free copy of Trello for Business, or a whole month of The Creative Template Shop for free!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2678</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5345504c-88f3-4489-8f2a-f722218e5969]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4343739915.mp3?updated=1656621576" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>460: Email Marketing &amp; High Touch Customer Engagement for Product, Coaches and Network Marketing Businesses</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/email-marketing-high-touch-customer-engagement-for-product-coaches-and-network-marketing-businesses</link>
      <description>In this episode, we get into exciting topics like email marketing, conversions, texting, relationships, and more! We talk about what we get up to in Boss Project (our main gig) and our side hustles, cause have accumulated some valuable experience over the years. Emylee sells handmade accessories (physical products) and hosts her website on Shopify, and every month she learns more and more about e-commerce and all things product-based. Abagail started her wellness company after going through a serious car accident, and as she journeyed to improve her health, people wanted to join her. She used her story to build a group coaching program called Jumpstart where she helps women lose weight and focus on their health. She is also a leader in the Young Living network marketing business. While it can be overwhelming to run different businesses, we find that it triggers different parts of the brain and keeps things fresh! As we grow, we realize how important automation is and why we should leverage key tools to make things more streamlined in all of our businesses. Stay tuned to hear about our most trusted apps and tools!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 18 Aug 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Email Marketing &amp; High Touch Customer Engagement for Product, Coaches and Network Marketing Businesses</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>460</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/a20a814a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-f730c8015bb6/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, we get into exciting topics like email marketing, conversions, texting, relationships, and more! We talk about what we get up to in Boss Project (our main gig) and our side hustles, cause have accumulated some valuable experience over...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode, we get into exciting topics like email marketing, conversions, texting, relationships, and more! We talk about what we get up to in Boss Project (our main gig) and our side hustles, cause have accumulated some valuable experience over the years. Emylee sells handmade accessories (physical products) and hosts her website on Shopify, and every month she learns more and more about e-commerce and all things product-based. Abagail started her wellness company after going through a serious car accident, and as she journeyed to improve her health, people wanted to join her. She used her story to build a group coaching program called Jumpstart where she helps women lose weight and focus on their health. She is also a leader in the Young Living network marketing business. While it can be overwhelming to run different businesses, we find that it triggers different parts of the brain and keeps things fresh! As we grow, we realize how important automation is and why we should leverage key tools to make things more streamlined in all of our businesses. Stay tuned to hear about our most trusted apps and tools!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode, we get into exciting topics like email marketing, conversions, texting, relationships, and more! We talk about what we get up to in Boss Project (our main gig) and our side hustles, cause have accumulated some valuable experience over the years. Emylee sells handmade accessories (physical products) and hosts her website on Shopify, and every month she learns more and more about e-commerce and all things product-based. Abagail started her wellness company after going through a serious car accident, and as she journeyed to improve her health, people wanted to join her. She used her story to build a group coaching program called Jumpstart where she helps women lose weight and focus on their health. She is also a leader in the Young Living network marketing business. While it can be overwhelming to run different businesses, we find that it triggers different parts of the brain and keeps things fresh! As we grow, we realize how important automation is and why we should leverage key tools to make things more streamlined in all of our businesses. Stay tuned to hear about our most trusted apps and tools!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2782</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ead452d0-2b23-4241-97b0-0c8fbb1693b9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5216016121.mp3?updated=1656621504" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>459: 22 Tips to Rock Instagram with with Tyler J. McCall</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/22-tips-to-rock-instagram-with-tyler-j-mccall</link>
      <description>Hey everybody and welcome to another fantastic episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast! Today we are joined by one of our favorite people in the world, a real internet bestie and the Instagram King, Tyler J. McCall! Tyler is here to talk to us about his specialty, how to get Instagram working for you immediately. Of course, Instagram, like all social platforms is constantly evolving so Tyler will be talking about what the best strategies are right now, but also looking at some of the more timeless rules of the framework. Tyler has helped a huge amount of entrepreneurs (including us!) to grow their Instagram following and engagement through the lessons he teaches. For Tyler, it really is quite simple: if you follow a few easy rules, have fun, and bring your own personality to your account you really can’t go wrong!
During our conversation, we cover some of the basics around content and captions and the move away from highly curated profiles. Tyler also stresses the importance of knowledge of your audience and how this informs your strategy. We get into the nitty-gritty of telling your brand’s story and how to convey this in an effective and engaging way as well as looking at the values that underscore everything that you post. One of the biggest recent developments on Instagram is obviously the Stories feature and Tyler breaks down some lessons for approaching that area and also reiterates just how important they are to your reach, engagement, and potential profits. Lastly, we cover some tips and ideas for personal versus business profiles and how to go about starting out on the platform for newbies. Jump in, it’s going to be a fun ride!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 13 Aug 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>22 Tips to Rock Instagram with with Tyler J. McCall</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>459</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/a2f06dfe-ae9a-11ec-91b1-6b0ece176a2f/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Hey everybody and welcome to another fantastic episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast! Today we are joined by one of our favorite people in the world, a real internet bestie and the Instagram King, Tyler J. McCall! Tyler is here to talk to us about his...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey everybody and welcome to another fantastic episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast! Today we are joined by one of our favorite people in the world, a real internet bestie and the Instagram King, Tyler J. McCall! Tyler is here to talk to us about his specialty, how to get Instagram working for you immediately. Of course, Instagram, like all social platforms is constantly evolving so Tyler will be talking about what the best strategies are right now, but also looking at some of the more timeless rules of the framework. Tyler has helped a huge amount of entrepreneurs (including us!) to grow their Instagram following and engagement through the lessons he teaches. For Tyler, it really is quite simple: if you follow a few easy rules, have fun, and bring your own personality to your account you really can’t go wrong!
During our conversation, we cover some of the basics around content and captions and the move away from highly curated profiles. Tyler also stresses the importance of knowledge of your audience and how this informs your strategy. We get into the nitty-gritty of telling your brand’s story and how to convey this in an effective and engaging way as well as looking at the values that underscore everything that you post. One of the biggest recent developments on Instagram is obviously the Stories feature and Tyler breaks down some lessons for approaching that area and also reiterates just how important they are to your reach, engagement, and potential profits. Lastly, we cover some tips and ideas for personal versus business profiles and how to go about starting out on the platform for newbies. Jump in, it’s going to be a fun ride!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey everybody and welcome to another fantastic episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast! Today we are joined by one of our favorite people in the world, a real internet bestie and the Instagram King, Tyler J. McCall! Tyler is here to talk to us about his specialty, how to get Instagram working for you immediately. Of course, Instagram, like all social platforms is constantly evolving so Tyler will be talking about what the best strategies are right now, but also looking at some of the more timeless rules of the framework. Tyler has helped a huge amount of entrepreneurs (including us!) to grow their Instagram following and engagement through the lessons he teaches. For Tyler, it really is quite simple: if you follow a few easy rules, have fun, and bring your own personality to your account you really can’t go wrong!</p><p>During our conversation, we cover some of the basics around content and captions and the move away from highly curated profiles. Tyler also stresses the importance of knowledge of your audience and how this informs your strategy. We get into the nitty-gritty of telling your brand’s story and how to convey this in an effective and engaging way as well as looking at the values that underscore everything that you post. One of the biggest recent developments on Instagram is obviously the Stories feature and Tyler breaks down some lessons for approaching that area and also reiterates just how important they are to your reach, engagement, and potential profits. Lastly, we cover some tips and ideas for personal versus business profiles and how to go about starting out on the platform for newbies. Jump in, it’s going to be a fun ride!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2049</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a1c1a1d5-fc23-4e24-8f40-0512870872ea]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9350314589.mp3?updated=1656621501" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>458: Stop Living in a Fear Based Mentality</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/stop-living-in-a-fear-based-mentality</link>
      <description>Are you unsure of what you are doing or where you are going? We know the feeling! Here at Think Creative Collective, we want to talk about these things with you! On this episode of The Strategy Hour we are talking about the crippling effects of fear and anxiety. We are here to tell you that everyone feels these things at different times and you need to be kind to yourself when these scary feelings come around! It is the unknowingness and feeling unsure that make it so unbearable most of the time. But if we can talk about and acknowledge what is going on maybe we can make some progress and take a little more control of our lives. Come on sister, we know you got this!
Emylee feels that she has an unhealthy fixation on the amount of time she has left before she dies, something that can become overwhelming and paralyzing. This can stop her from achieving the exact goal that these fears arise out of, wanting to be impactful and do great things. She feels like she is not sure what to do next and how to go about getting over these hurdles. Abagail on the other hand finds that she is stuck more in the present than on the future. She ends up settling for the dissatisfaction and inaction of not having any more to give and just wants to put her feet up and do nothing. We are sure all our listeners have all their own worries and concerns that affect them in different ways and we really feel for all of you and hope that this episode can be the beginning of some important conversations towards better managing these issues. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 11 Aug 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Stop Living in a Fear Based Mentality</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>458</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/a3ba5fec-ae9a-11ec-91b1-67dbf2005ae1/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Are you unsure of what you are doing or where you are going? We know the feeling! Here at Think Creative Collective, we want to talk about these things with you! On this episode of The Strategy Hour we are talking about the crippling effects of fear...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you unsure of what you are doing or where you are going? We know the feeling! Here at Think Creative Collective, we want to talk about these things with you! On this episode of The Strategy Hour we are talking about the crippling effects of fear and anxiety. We are here to tell you that everyone feels these things at different times and you need to be kind to yourself when these scary feelings come around! It is the unknowingness and feeling unsure that make it so unbearable most of the time. But if we can talk about and acknowledge what is going on maybe we can make some progress and take a little more control of our lives. Come on sister, we know you got this!
Emylee feels that she has an unhealthy fixation on the amount of time she has left before she dies, something that can become overwhelming and paralyzing. This can stop her from achieving the exact goal that these fears arise out of, wanting to be impactful and do great things. She feels like she is not sure what to do next and how to go about getting over these hurdles. Abagail on the other hand finds that she is stuck more in the present than on the future. She ends up settling for the dissatisfaction and inaction of not having any more to give and just wants to put her feet up and do nothing. We are sure all our listeners have all their own worries and concerns that affect them in different ways and we really feel for all of you and hope that this episode can be the beginning of some important conversations towards better managing these issues. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you unsure of what you are doing or where you are going? We know the feeling! Here at Think Creative Collective, we want to talk about these things with you! On this episode of The Strategy Hour we are talking about the crippling effects of fear and anxiety. We are here to tell you that everyone feels these things at different times and you need to be kind to yourself when these scary feelings come around! It is the unknowingness and feeling unsure that make it so unbearable most of the time. But if we can talk about and acknowledge what is going on maybe we can make some progress and take a little more control of our lives. Come on sister, we know you got this!</p><p>Emylee feels that she has an unhealthy fixation on the amount of time she has left before she dies, something that can become overwhelming and paralyzing. This can stop her from achieving the exact goal that these fears arise out of, wanting to be impactful and do great things. She feels like she is not sure what to do next and how to go about getting over these hurdles. Abagail on the other hand finds that she is stuck more in the present than on the future. She ends up settling for the dissatisfaction and inaction of not having any more to give and just wants to put her feet up and do nothing. We are sure all our listeners have all their own worries and concerns that affect them in different ways and we really feel for all of you and hope that this episode can be the beginning of some important conversations towards better managing these issues. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1651</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[96427a20-7ab4-4295-b26f-075c9e674682]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4712659654.mp3?updated=1656621408" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>457: Growing Your Brand on Instagram with Natasha Samuel of Sol Studio Marketing</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/growing-your-brand-on-instagram-with-natasha-samuel-of-sol-studio-marketing</link>
      <description>The 'Gram is a topic near and dear to our hearts, and it’s one we know every entrepreneur who we cross paths with thinks about on a daily basis. For most of the people that we know, it’s their happy place — that’s definitely the case for us! Today's guest does things differently on this incredible platform. Natasha Samuel, Founder of Sol Studio Marketing, is not simply posting stories or putting things on her feed. Of course, she is still doing these important things intentionally, but she has some other tricks up her sleeve that most people probably have not thought about when it comes to their Instagram account, so you definitely want to stick around to hear what she has to say.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 06 Aug 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Growing Your Brand on Instagram with Natasha Samuel of Sol Studio Marketing</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>457</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/a46fac6c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-9b90faf5db10/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>The 'Gram is a topic near and dear to our hearts, and it’s one we know every entrepreneur who we cross paths with thinks about on a daily basis. For most of the people that we know, it’s their happy place — that’s definitely the case for us!...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>The 'Gram is a topic near and dear to our hearts, and it’s one we know every entrepreneur who we cross paths with thinks about on a daily basis. For most of the people that we know, it’s their happy place — that’s definitely the case for us! Today's guest does things differently on this incredible platform. Natasha Samuel, Founder of Sol Studio Marketing, is not simply posting stories or putting things on her feed. Of course, she is still doing these important things intentionally, but she has some other tricks up her sleeve that most people probably have not thought about when it comes to their Instagram account, so you definitely want to stick around to hear what she has to say.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The 'Gram is a topic near and dear to our hearts, and it’s one we know every entrepreneur who we cross paths with thinks about on a daily basis. For most of the people that we know, it’s their happy place — that’s definitely the case for us! Today's guest does things differently on this incredible platform. Natasha Samuel, Founder of Sol Studio Marketing, is not simply posting stories or putting things on her feed. Of course, she is still doing these important things intentionally, but she has some other tricks up her sleeve that most people probably have not thought about when it comes to their Instagram account, so you definitely want to stick around to hear what she has to say.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2541</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ac536587-14e0-4117-9ed6-43db4b321785]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9932540442.mp3?updated=1656621384" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>456: June 2020 Profit Report: Investing During a Growth Season</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/june-2020-profit-report-investing-during-a-growth-season</link>
      <description>We received a DM the other day all about how amazing our profit reports have been for people but it was also somewhat of a review. So, we just want to remind people that they can review this podcast and be a part of our podcast party (tune in to find out how!). But back to our DM about our profit report and how helpful it was for this woman in her business, and how these reports continue to feel like an inside peek into the actual workings of our behind the scenes.
At the end of the day, the dollars are not what matters. We want you to see profit – more income in your business. Revenue is fancy. Revenue feels sexy. Revenue does not give you the lifestyle you want though. If you’re not keeping any of that revenue, then it is irrelevant. So we want to help you keep more revenue, that is making more profit so you can increase how much you’re getting paid and also just save for crazy times! So today, we are excited to talk about our June 2020 profit report.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 04 Aug 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>June 2020 Profit Report: Investing During a Growth Season</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>456</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/a55ece14-ae9a-11ec-91b1-ef44f53b4f42/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We received a DM the other day all about how amazing our profit reports have been for people but it was also somewhat of a review. So, we just want to remind people that they can review this podcast and be a part of our podcast party (tune in to find...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We received a DM the other day all about how amazing our profit reports have been for people but it was also somewhat of a review. So, we just want to remind people that they can review this podcast and be a part of our podcast party (tune in to find out how!). But back to our DM about our profit report and how helpful it was for this woman in her business, and how these reports continue to feel like an inside peek into the actual workings of our behind the scenes.
At the end of the day, the dollars are not what matters. We want you to see profit – more income in your business. Revenue is fancy. Revenue feels sexy. Revenue does not give you the lifestyle you want though. If you’re not keeping any of that revenue, then it is irrelevant. So we want to help you keep more revenue, that is making more profit so you can increase how much you’re getting paid and also just save for crazy times! So today, we are excited to talk about our June 2020 profit report.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We received a DM the other day all about how amazing our profit reports have been for people but it was also somewhat of a review. So, we just want to remind people that they can review this podcast and be a part of our podcast party (tune in to find out how!). But back to our DM about our profit report and how helpful it was for this woman in her business, and how these reports continue to feel like an inside peek into the actual workings of our behind the scenes.</p><p>At the end of the day, the dollars are not what matters. We want you to see profit – more income in your business. Revenue is fancy. Revenue feels sexy. Revenue does not give you the lifestyle you want though. If you’re not keeping any of that revenue, then it is irrelevant. So we want to help you keep more revenue, that is making more profit so you can increase how much you’re getting paid and also just save for crazy times! So today, we are excited to talk about our June 2020 profit report.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2264</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[df32cd80-795e-47aa-989d-7fe0acf0ba70]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2881546409.mp3?updated=1656621293" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>455: Rebranding: How to Get What You Want and Communicate with a Designer</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/rebranding-how-to-get-what-you-want-and-communicate-with-a-designer</link>
      <description>Today, we are so excited to have this conversation, mostly because one of our favorite things in the world is to either learn, do something, or unlock a strategy, and then, in two seconds, turn around and start talking about it! We don’t like to let things fester for too long and want our listeners to take a peek behind the curtain as quickly as possible! Some of you might have seen on Emily’s personal Instagram (@emilysays) or our stories @bossproject, that Emily just did a rebrand! It’s so different in an amazing kind of way! 
Part of why Abagail loves it is because for the first time in forever, she didn’t do it herself, so it turned out nothing like it would if she had done it. It’s modern, woo, and earthy! For the first time in forever, Emylee was the client, so today, she gives some behind the scenes insights into how her rebranding process went. She talks about how long it took, what she did herself as far as preparation, the relationship she had with her amazing designer, and a whole lot more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 30 Jul 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Rebranding: How to Get What You Want and Communicate with a Designer</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>455</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/a5f7a436-ae9a-11ec-91b1-471d79ed299d/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, we are so excited to have this conversation, mostly because one of our favorite things in the world is to either learn, do something, or unlock a strategy, and then, in two seconds, turn around and start talking about it! We don’t like to let...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we are so excited to have this conversation, mostly because one of our favorite things in the world is to either learn, do something, or unlock a strategy, and then, in two seconds, turn around and start talking about it! We don’t like to let things fester for too long and want our listeners to take a peek behind the curtain as quickly as possible! Some of you might have seen on Emily’s personal Instagram (@emilysays) or our stories @bossproject, that Emily just did a rebrand! It’s so different in an amazing kind of way! 
Part of why Abagail loves it is because for the first time in forever, she didn’t do it herself, so it turned out nothing like it would if she had done it. It’s modern, woo, and earthy! For the first time in forever, Emylee was the client, so today, she gives some behind the scenes insights into how her rebranding process went. She talks about how long it took, what she did herself as far as preparation, the relationship she had with her amazing designer, and a whole lot more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we are so excited to have this conversation, mostly because one of our favorite things in the world is to either learn, do something, or unlock a strategy, and then, in two seconds, turn around and start talking about it! We don’t like to let things fester for too long and want our listeners to take a peek behind the curtain as quickly as possible! Some of you might have seen on Emily’s personal Instagram (@emilysays) or our stories @bossproject, that Emily just did a rebrand! It’s so different in an amazing kind of way! </p><p>Part of why Abagail loves it is because for the first time in forever, she didn’t do it herself, so it turned out nothing like it would if she had done it. It’s modern, woo, and earthy! For the first time in forever, Emylee was the client, so today, she gives some behind the scenes insights into how her rebranding process went. She talks about how long it took, what she did herself as far as preparation, the relationship she had with her amazing designer, and a whole lot more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2400</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dd5a2897-62cc-4687-9484-47253dd8c5c5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8430581248.mp3?updated=1656621222" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>454: Conversations that Convert and How to Leverage it for High Ticket Sales with Lattice Hudson</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/conversations-that-convert-and-how-to-leverage-it-for-high-ticket-sales-with-lattice-hudson</link>
      <description>You guys will enjoy our guest just as much as we do, and to share the love, why not leave us a glowing review and join the party over on Instagram? When you’ve told us just how much you love the podcast and given it a five-star rating, take a screenshot and post it on Instagram – and remember to tag us. When you follow these easy steps, you stand a chance to win one of two awesome prizes: a copy of Trello for Business or a month free membership on the Creative Template Shop! 
Our guest today, Lattice Hudson, is a born and raised Chicago girl who has earned a degree in human resources. She has spent considerable time in corporate America working in human resources before she took the leap of starting her own business, which comprises online coaching and mentoring. In a short period, she managed to grow her business exponentially, and today we talk to her about the power of good, authentic conversations to boost your business. If you are a service-based entrepreneur, you can double down on serving your clients well, but we will show you how it can work in the product space too. She shares strategies for having impactful conversations on Facebook and in your DMs and building relationships on a solid foundation from day one. Check it out!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 28 Jul 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Conversations that Convert and How to Leverage it for High Ticket Sales with Lattice Hudson</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>454</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/a6801f82-ae9a-11ec-91b1-7b8ca612ddc8/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>You guys will enjoy our guest just as much as we do, and to share the love, why not leave us a glowing review and join the party over on Instagram? When you’ve told us just how much you love the podcast and given it a five-star rating, take a...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You guys will enjoy our guest just as much as we do, and to share the love, why not leave us a glowing review and join the party over on Instagram? When you’ve told us just how much you love the podcast and given it a five-star rating, take a screenshot and post it on Instagram – and remember to tag us. When you follow these easy steps, you stand a chance to win one of two awesome prizes: a copy of Trello for Business or a month free membership on the Creative Template Shop! 
Our guest today, Lattice Hudson, is a born and raised Chicago girl who has earned a degree in human resources. She has spent considerable time in corporate America working in human resources before she took the leap of starting her own business, which comprises online coaching and mentoring. In a short period, she managed to grow her business exponentially, and today we talk to her about the power of good, authentic conversations to boost your business. If you are a service-based entrepreneur, you can double down on serving your clients well, but we will show you how it can work in the product space too. She shares strategies for having impactful conversations on Facebook and in your DMs and building relationships on a solid foundation from day one. Check it out!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You guys will enjoy our guest just as much as we do, and to share the love, why not leave us a glowing review and join the party over on Instagram? When you’ve told us just how much you love the podcast and given it a five-star rating, take a screenshot and post it on Instagram – and remember to tag us. When you follow these easy steps, you stand a chance to win one of two awesome prizes: a copy of Trello for Business or a month free membership on the Creative Template Shop! </p><p>Our guest today, Lattice Hudson, is a born and raised Chicago girl who has earned a degree in human resources. She has spent considerable time in corporate America working in human resources before she took the leap of starting her own business, which comprises online coaching and mentoring. In a short period, she managed to grow her business exponentially, and today we talk to her about the power of good, authentic conversations to boost your business. If you are a service-based entrepreneur, you can double down on serving your clients well, but we will show you how it can work in the product space too. She shares strategies for having impactful conversations on Facebook and in your DMs and building relationships on a solid foundation from day one. Check it out!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1990</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[75b6ea87-8588-44ab-ae5d-ec250152749d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7162657709.mp3?updated=1656621175" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>453: Instilling and Creating Company Culture with Jamie King of Flex &amp; Flow</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/instilling-and-creating-company-culture-with-jamie-king-of-flex-flow</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Jamie King, the owner of Flex and Flow PDX (originally Fit Approach) joining us! Together with her cousin/business partner, she has built a successful online fitness community, but that’s not what we are talking about today. Nope, we discuss company culture, how to establish it based on who you are as a human being, integrating it into your business, and how you can maintain it even when you have a virtual team. We also talk about the evolution of our company culture and what our business values are. We have often alluded to company culture in our conversations, but since it is something that seems abstract and that isn’t necessarily featured on the everyday to-do-list, we tend to easily forget about it. For a long time, we let our company culture be what it was and watched the evolution of it over the years, but now we are trying to give it more direction. We aim to cultivate a relaxed, easy-going culture that promotes independence and functions on a trust basis. But company culture does not happen overnight either; it develops when you show up consistently over time. At the same time, company culture is in everything you do: every social media post, every graphic, every email you send out—so be mindful about it. We have such a great conversation with Jamie today, so be sure to listen in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 23 Jul 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Instilling and Creating Company Culture with Jamie King of Flex &amp; Flow</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>453</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/a717e15a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-8b8db92ebb52/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Jamie King, the owner of Flex and Flow PDX (originally Fit Approach) joining us! Together with her cousin/business partner, she has built a successful online fitness community, but that’s not what we are talking about...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Jamie King, the owner of Flex and Flow PDX (originally Fit Approach) joining us! Together with her cousin/business partner, she has built a successful online fitness community, but that’s not what we are talking about today. Nope, we discuss company culture, how to establish it based on who you are as a human being, integrating it into your business, and how you can maintain it even when you have a virtual team. We also talk about the evolution of our company culture and what our business values are. We have often alluded to company culture in our conversations, but since it is something that seems abstract and that isn’t necessarily featured on the everyday to-do-list, we tend to easily forget about it. For a long time, we let our company culture be what it was and watched the evolution of it over the years, but now we are trying to give it more direction. We aim to cultivate a relaxed, easy-going culture that promotes independence and functions on a trust basis. But company culture does not happen overnight either; it develops when you show up consistently over time. At the same time, company culture is in everything you do: every social media post, every graphic, every email you send out—so be mindful about it. We have such a great conversation with Jamie today, so be sure to listen in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Jamie King, the owner of Flex and Flow PDX (originally Fit Approach) joining us! Together with her cousin/business partner, she has built a successful online fitness community, but that’s not what we are talking about today. Nope, we discuss company culture, how to establish it based on who you are as a human being, integrating it into your business, and how you can maintain it even when you have a virtual team. We also talk about the evolution of our company culture and what our business values are. We have often alluded to company culture in our conversations, but since it is something that seems abstract and that isn’t necessarily featured on the everyday to-do-list, we tend to easily forget about it. For a long time, we let our company culture be what it was and watched the evolution of it over the years, but now we are trying to give it more direction. We aim to cultivate a relaxed, easy-going culture that promotes independence and functions on a trust basis. But company culture does not happen overnight either; it develops when you show up consistently over time. At the same time, company culture is in everything you do: every social media post, every graphic, every email you send out—so be mindful about it. We have such a great conversation with Jamie today, so be sure to listen in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2404</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ca03b186-e13e-4c60-8dd1-427963a6eb5e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5531950165.mp3?updated=1656605075" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>452: Behind the Scenes Creating a Client Management System for Creatives with Becca and Jake Berg of Dubsado</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-a-client-management-system-for-creatives-with-becca-and-jake-berg-of-dubsado</link>
      <description>Today on the show, we have Becca and Jake Berg of Dubsado. We are super excited to have them on. They are a husband and wife team that are the brains, power, and geniuses behind Dubsado, which is a client management system for creatives. They have built one amazing and beautiful platform for all of those things that you have 75 different logins for, including your contracts, how you get paid, and how you respond back to clients after they book with you. All of those pieces are neatly tied up in one amazing software bow. 
In today’s episode, you are going to get a peek behind the curtain. We are walking you through the steps they took to build the software company, from idea to launch, and doing all of this amongst building a family and having full-time jobs. They share with us how they have been able to grow and scale their business, and how Becca had to make sure it was her own. They also dive into exactly how they were able to make this awesome idea into an actual product, get it launched, and then how they have been able to scale and grow their team. We are even talking about some inside scoops on how to better perfect your client-based business and get paid faster. So we are excited for you to jump in, listen, and learn!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 21 Jul 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Behind the Scenes Creating a Client Management System for Creatives with Becca and Jake Berg of Dubsado</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>452</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/a7aaa0f8-ae9a-11ec-91b1-035bbf77e9da/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show, we have Becca and Jake Berg of Dubsado. We are super excited to have them on. They are a husband and wife team that are the brains, power, and geniuses behind Dubsado, which is a client management system for creatives. They have...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show, we have Becca and Jake Berg of Dubsado. We are super excited to have them on. They are a husband and wife team that are the brains, power, and geniuses behind Dubsado, which is a client management system for creatives. They have built one amazing and beautiful platform for all of those things that you have 75 different logins for, including your contracts, how you get paid, and how you respond back to clients after they book with you. All of those pieces are neatly tied up in one amazing software bow. 
In today’s episode, you are going to get a peek behind the curtain. We are walking you through the steps they took to build the software company, from idea to launch, and doing all of this amongst building a family and having full-time jobs. They share with us how they have been able to grow and scale their business, and how Becca had to make sure it was her own. They also dive into exactly how they were able to make this awesome idea into an actual product, get it launched, and then how they have been able to scale and grow their team. We are even talking about some inside scoops on how to better perfect your client-based business and get paid faster. So we are excited for you to jump in, listen, and learn!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show, we have Becca and Jake Berg of Dubsado. We are super excited to have them on. They are a husband and wife team that are the brains, power, and geniuses behind Dubsado, which is a client management system for creatives. They have built one amazing and beautiful platform for all of those things that you have 75 different logins for, including your contracts, how you get paid, and how you respond back to clients after they book with you. All of those pieces are neatly tied up in one amazing software bow. </p><p>In today’s episode, you are going to get a peek behind the curtain. We are walking you through the steps they took to build the software company, from idea to launch, and doing all of this amongst building a family and having full-time jobs. They share with us how they have been able to grow and scale their business, and how Becca had to make sure it was her own. They also dive into exactly how they were able to make this awesome idea into an actual product, get it launched, and then how they have been able to scale and grow their team. We are even talking about some inside scoops on how to better perfect your client-based business and get paid faster. So we are excited for you to jump in, listen, and learn!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2746</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[42e4021f-424c-405b-b1fb-b852a096a820]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3023536183.mp3?updated=1656605019" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>451: Creating Marketing That Feels Fun and Converts with Shunta Grant</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-marketing-that-feels-fun-and-converts-with-shunta-grant</link>
      <description>Hey everybody, we are thrilled to bring you this episode with our good friend Shunta Grant! You might remember our Episode 441 that was all about tiny offers and why they might not be for everyone. Well, our guest today is the founder of the Best Today Brand and Guide and more recently the Right Now Routine, which is the bombshell tiny offer she developed. The way she is marketing this pocket product (with cool gamification aspects!) is just next level, so we talk about that and how we swiped the idea for our own marketing for the Creative Template Shop. We also get into how creating a low-priced offer was right for her in her business at this moment and what kind of groundwork she had to do before she could even begin creating it. She shares how leaning into something that is fun, simple, and feels good produces miraculous results and how you can implement it in your marketing strategies. Be sure to give this episode a listen: you will not only love it but also walk away more inspired and much better equipped! 
Ps. Remember to join our virtual party! All you need to do is leave a rating and review on our podcast and go share it on Instagram. You then stand a chance to win either free access to our popular Trello for Business course or a free month to the Creative Template Shop! Do. It. Now!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating Marketing That Feels Fun and Converts with Shunta Grant</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>451</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/a85a3ab8-ae9a-11ec-91b1-eb6412e4c4d2/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Hey everybody, we are thrilled to bring you this episode with our good friend Shunta Grant! You might remember our Episode 441 that was all about tiny offers and why they might not be for everyone. Well, our guest today is the founder of the Best...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey everybody, we are thrilled to bring you this episode with our good friend Shunta Grant! You might remember our Episode 441 that was all about tiny offers and why they might not be for everyone. Well, our guest today is the founder of the Best Today Brand and Guide and more recently the Right Now Routine, which is the bombshell tiny offer she developed. The way she is marketing this pocket product (with cool gamification aspects!) is just next level, so we talk about that and how we swiped the idea for our own marketing for the Creative Template Shop. We also get into how creating a low-priced offer was right for her in her business at this moment and what kind of groundwork she had to do before she could even begin creating it. She shares how leaning into something that is fun, simple, and feels good produces miraculous results and how you can implement it in your marketing strategies. Be sure to give this episode a listen: you will not only love it but also walk away more inspired and much better equipped! 
Ps. Remember to join our virtual party! All you need to do is leave a rating and review on our podcast and go share it on Instagram. You then stand a chance to win either free access to our popular Trello for Business course or a free month to the Creative Template Shop! Do. It. Now!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey everybody, we are thrilled to bring you this episode with our good friend Shunta Grant! You might remember our Episode 441 that was all about tiny offers and why they might not be for everyone. Well, our guest today is the founder of the Best Today Brand and Guide and more recently the Right Now Routine, which is the bombshell tiny offer she developed. The way she is marketing this pocket product (with cool gamification aspects!) is just next level, so we talk about that and how we swiped the idea for our own marketing for the Creative Template Shop. We also get into how creating a low-priced offer was right for her in her business at this moment and what kind of groundwork she had to do before she could even begin creating it. She shares how leaning into something that is fun, simple, and feels good produces miraculous results and how you can implement it in your marketing strategies. Be sure to give this episode a listen: you will not only love it but also walk away more inspired and much better equipped! </p><p>Ps. Remember to join our virtual party! All you need to do is leave a rating and review on our podcast and go share it on Instagram. You then stand a chance to win either free access to our popular Trello for Business course or a free month to the Creative Template Shop! Do. It. Now!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2784</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1a4470e7-af03-46df-b75d-fff4fe69905c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1221078580.mp3?updated=1656604974" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>450: Launching Strategies for Coaches, Digital Sellers + Physical Products</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/launching-strategies-for-coaches-digital-sellers-physical-products</link>
      <description>Have you heard about the virtual party we are having at the moment? One that you are all invited to? It is super easy to get in on the fun! All you need to do is leave a rating and review on our podcast and go share it on Instagram. You then stand a chance to win an awesome prize: either free access to our popular Trello for Business course or a free month to the Creative Template Shop! 
Today we are talking about launching various types of business, sharing a bit about what we are doing with the Creative Template Shop, and what the different avenues of our business entail. We sell courses, run a membership, sell products, and run a coaching business, so between all of that, things can get intense! We are always curious about the behind-the-scenes of a launch and what people are having success with, but the truth is, there are no guarantees. There is no perfect equation. At some point, you just have to jump. What is more important is taking an approach that you feel aligned with and excited about because your enthusiasm and confidence is what will win people over. In this episode, we break down a few strategies that we have used in our various businesses to help us grow—the kind of intel you do not want to miss out on!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jul 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Launching Strategies for Coaches, Digital Sellers + Physical Products</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>450</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/a8eabe62-ae9a-11ec-91b1-cfb4f68d2130/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you heard about the virtual party we are having at the moment? One that you are all invited to? It is super easy to get in on the fun! All you need to do is leave a rating and review on our podcast and go share it on Instagram. You then stand a...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you heard about the virtual party we are having at the moment? One that you are all invited to? It is super easy to get in on the fun! All you need to do is leave a rating and review on our podcast and go share it on Instagram. You then stand a chance to win an awesome prize: either free access to our popular Trello for Business course or a free month to the Creative Template Shop! 
Today we are talking about launching various types of business, sharing a bit about what we are doing with the Creative Template Shop, and what the different avenues of our business entail. We sell courses, run a membership, sell products, and run a coaching business, so between all of that, things can get intense! We are always curious about the behind-the-scenes of a launch and what people are having success with, but the truth is, there are no guarantees. There is no perfect equation. At some point, you just have to jump. What is more important is taking an approach that you feel aligned with and excited about because your enthusiasm and confidence is what will win people over. In this episode, we break down a few strategies that we have used in our various businesses to help us grow—the kind of intel you do not want to miss out on!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you heard about the virtual party we are having at the moment? One that you are all invited to? It is super easy to get in on the fun! All you need to do is leave a rating and review on our podcast and go share it on Instagram. You then stand a chance to win an awesome prize: either free access to our popular Trello for Business course or a free month to the Creative Template Shop! </p><p>Today we are talking about launching various types of business, sharing a bit about what we are doing with the Creative Template Shop, and what the different avenues of our business entail. We sell courses, run a membership, sell products, and run a coaching business, so between all of that, things can get intense! We are always curious about the behind-the-scenes of a launch and what people are having success with, but the truth is, there are no guarantees. There is no perfect equation. At some point, you just have to jump. What is more important is taking an approach that you feel aligned with and excited about because your enthusiasm and confidence is what will win people over. In this episode, we break down a few strategies that we have used in our various businesses to help us grow—the kind of intel you do not want to miss out on!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2456</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6fa4282d-06c8-4078-abcb-3401188e34cc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9043302042.mp3?updated=1656604931" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>449: How to Beat Imposter Syndrome</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/beating-imposter-syndrome</link>
      <description>Today's episode is all about the required step that you need to take in order to successfully sell what you do. That's right we are giving you the tools to really beat your imposter syndrome and beat it well! For the last couple of weeks we have been speaking a lot about where you clients are and how to find them, this is a big internal piece and it means getting over a big hairy monster! We also suffer and have suffered from this issue, so do not fear, this is the way to crack the code and move forward. We know you are doing this so no need to hide in the reeds! We see you convincing yourself that if your work gets better you will get more clients and that the reason you are not currently getting more clients is because of the quality of your work. It is easy to start thinking you should work for free or very cheaply and get into the churn of lowering your value, so that one day the glory gates will miraculously open and you will have arrived. 
You know this is not the world we live in! It is not like your portfolio does not have any say in your client base but so many potential clients out there are less concerned with your portfolio than you. Customers are not in your field and do not have as discerning an eye as you do, they are more interested in the experience you are selling. So we are hear to tell you to stop selling yourself purely on what you have already done and how good you think you are, not everyone knows good from bad as well as you do!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 09 Jul 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Beat Imposter Syndrome</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>449</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/a9796720-ae9a-11ec-91b1-4fa484ea71f3/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today's episode is all about the required step that you need to take in order to successfully sell what you do. That's right we are giving you the tools to really beat your imposter syndrome and beat it well! For the last couple of weeks we have been...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today's episode is all about the required step that you need to take in order to successfully sell what you do. That's right we are giving you the tools to really beat your imposter syndrome and beat it well! For the last couple of weeks we have been speaking a lot about where you clients are and how to find them, this is a big internal piece and it means getting over a big hairy monster! We also suffer and have suffered from this issue, so do not fear, this is the way to crack the code and move forward. We know you are doing this so no need to hide in the reeds! We see you convincing yourself that if your work gets better you will get more clients and that the reason you are not currently getting more clients is because of the quality of your work. It is easy to start thinking you should work for free or very cheaply and get into the churn of lowering your value, so that one day the glory gates will miraculously open and you will have arrived. 
You know this is not the world we live in! It is not like your portfolio does not have any say in your client base but so many potential clients out there are less concerned with your portfolio than you. Customers are not in your field and do not have as discerning an eye as you do, they are more interested in the experience you are selling. So we are hear to tell you to stop selling yourself purely on what you have already done and how good you think you are, not everyone knows good from bad as well as you do!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today's episode is all about the required step that you need to take in order to successfully sell what you do. That's right we are giving you the tools to really beat your imposter syndrome and beat it well! For the last couple of weeks we have been speaking a lot about where you clients are and how to find them, this is a big internal piece and it means getting over a big hairy monster! We also suffer and have suffered from this issue, so do not fear, this is the way to crack the code and move forward. We know you are doing this so no need to hide in the reeds! We see you convincing yourself that if your work gets better you will get more clients and that the reason you are not currently getting more clients is because of the quality of your work. It is easy to start thinking you should work for free or very cheaply and get into the churn of lowering your value, so that one day the glory gates will miraculously open and you will have arrived. </p><p>You know this is not the world we live in! It is not like your portfolio does not have any say in your client base but so many potential clients out there are less concerned with your portfolio than you. Customers are not in your field and do not have as discerning an eye as you do, they are more interested in the experience you are selling. So we are hear to tell you to stop selling yourself purely on what you have already done and how good you think you are, not everyone knows good from bad as well as you do!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2053</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e4097a83-10a6-4141-b094-d7f402d0997d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3364836066.mp3?updated=1656604877" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>448: Migrating Our 100k+ Email List</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/migrating-our-100k-email-list</link>
      <description>Are you ready to hear about the biggest change we have made to our business in a LONG time? If you have been with us for a while, you will know all about our email marketing journey. It’s been truly huge for our company and an integral part of our growth and the foundation for our global reach. We have been with many email marketing providers over time for a variety of reasons. If you want to hear about why we migrated between the different platforms, like Mailchimp, ConvertKit, Infusionsoft, and ActiveCampaign, dive into our archives because we have documented all of these moves. We believe that regardless of the size of your business, email should be easy, and dare we say, pretty? All of the platforms we have used have their pros and cons, but for us, we want it to be as simple as logging in, writing an email, having it look good without knowing anything about code, and being able to send it to the right people at the right time. A lot of people, especially in the creative industry, can get carried away by pretty things, and we are guilty of it too, and it does drive a lot of our decision-making. That does not mean we do not value functionality as well. So, today we are going to share more about the new email platform we have found that merges our love of beautiful things with a fantastic backend user experience.  
If you’re listening to this episode, we sure hope you’ve joined the podcast party. It’s super easy, and you can win things. It's as simple as going to your podcast app, searching for the Strategy Hour Podcast, and leaving us a glowing review about all of the amazing things you love about us and the podcast. Then, screenshot the review, what episode you’re listening to, where you are in the world, and what you are doing. Share this all on social. When you do this, you are automatically entered into a once a month giveaway — and you can do choose your adventure. You can pick between our most popular program, Trello for Business, or you get a free month to our most popular membership, The Creative Template Shop. You are only eligible for prizes if you share, so best get those thumbs moving if you want to get your hands on a fantastic freebie!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 07 Jul 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Migrating Our 100k+ Email List</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>448</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/aa313026-ae9a-11ec-91b1-bf31b75ca135/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Are you ready to hear about the biggest change we have made to our business in a LONG time? If you have been with us for a while, you will know all about our email marketing journey. It’s been truly huge for our company and an integral part of our...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you ready to hear about the biggest change we have made to our business in a LONG time? If you have been with us for a while, you will know all about our email marketing journey. It’s been truly huge for our company and an integral part of our growth and the foundation for our global reach. We have been with many email marketing providers over time for a variety of reasons. If you want to hear about why we migrated between the different platforms, like Mailchimp, ConvertKit, Infusionsoft, and ActiveCampaign, dive into our archives because we have documented all of these moves. We believe that regardless of the size of your business, email should be easy, and dare we say, pretty? All of the platforms we have used have their pros and cons, but for us, we want it to be as simple as logging in, writing an email, having it look good without knowing anything about code, and being able to send it to the right people at the right time. A lot of people, especially in the creative industry, can get carried away by pretty things, and we are guilty of it too, and it does drive a lot of our decision-making. That does not mean we do not value functionality as well. So, today we are going to share more about the new email platform we have found that merges our love of beautiful things with a fantastic backend user experience.  
If you’re listening to this episode, we sure hope you’ve joined the podcast party. It’s super easy, and you can win things. It's as simple as going to your podcast app, searching for the Strategy Hour Podcast, and leaving us a glowing review about all of the amazing things you love about us and the podcast. Then, screenshot the review, what episode you’re listening to, where you are in the world, and what you are doing. Share this all on social. When you do this, you are automatically entered into a once a month giveaway — and you can do choose your adventure. You can pick between our most popular program, Trello for Business, or you get a free month to our most popular membership, The Creative Template Shop. You are only eligible for prizes if you share, so best get those thumbs moving if you want to get your hands on a fantastic freebie!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you ready to hear about the biggest change we have made to our business in a LONG time? If you have been with us for a while, you will know all about our email marketing journey. It’s been truly huge for our company and an integral part of our growth and the foundation for our global reach. We have been with many email marketing providers over time for a variety of reasons. If you want to hear about why we migrated between the different platforms, like Mailchimp, ConvertKit, Infusionsoft, and ActiveCampaign, dive into our archives because we have documented all of these moves. We believe that regardless of the size of your business, email should be easy, and dare we say, pretty? All of the platforms we have used have their pros and cons, but for us, we want it to be as simple as logging in, writing an email, having it look good without knowing anything about code, and being able to send it to the right people at the right time. A lot of people, especially in the creative industry, can get carried away by pretty things, and we are guilty of it too, and it does drive a lot of our decision-making. That does not mean we do not value functionality as well. So, today we are going to share more about the new email platform we have found that merges our love of beautiful things with a fantastic backend user experience.  </p><p>If you’re listening to this episode, we sure hope you’ve joined the podcast party. It’s super easy, and you can win things. It's as simple as going to your podcast app, searching for the Strategy Hour Podcast, and leaving us a glowing review about all of the amazing things you love about us and the podcast. Then, screenshot the review, what episode you’re listening to, where you are in the world, and what you are doing. Share this all on social. When you do this, you are automatically entered into a once a month giveaway — and you can do choose your adventure. You can pick between our most popular program, Trello for Business, or you get a free month to our most popular membership, The Creative Template Shop. You are only eligible for prizes if you share, so best get those thumbs moving if you want to get your hands on a fantastic freebie!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2575</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[460bac19-655c-420f-8fed-b6d23ac63f73]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2763172778.mp3?updated=1652639693" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>447: Expand, Engage &amp; Convert: 3 Ways to See Growth with Josh Coats</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/expand-engage-and-convert-three-ways-to-see-growth-with-josh-coats</link>
      <description>Today’s guest is Josh Coats, #1 best-selling author of F*** Leadership, a leaders’ guide for every network marketer so that they can get out of their heads and lead better. With a background in life coaching, Josh teaches masterminds and coaching programs. While the conversation is centered around network marketing, the message is much broader than that. Josh is into marketing made simple — Easy, fun, simple marketing that works. So, we go over the three categories that he walks through within his business when sales might be slow or he reaches a plateau or there’s something that’s just not driving. These three areas are his go-to's to see what could be done better. Josh gives us some strategy examples in these three categories, so you can simply copy and paste them into your business.  
Along with this, we also dive into freemiums and how to convert without feeling like you’re selling all the time, while also still feeling like you’re engaging in a way that doesn’t take all your time, but creates really good results. This episode is packed to the brim with ideas, so you might need to stop and pause and back up. We get down to such a granular level, that at times this feels like a one-on-one coaching session. Be sure to tune in today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 02 Jul 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Expand, Engage &amp; Convert: 3 Ways to See Growth with Josh Coats</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>447</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/aad1f25e-ae9a-11ec-91b1-0f2d1ef2b8df/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today’s guest is Josh Coats, #1 best-selling author of F*** Leadership, a leaders’ guide for every network marketer so that they can get out of their heads and lead better. With a background in life coaching, Josh teaches masterminds and coaching...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today’s guest is Josh Coats, #1 best-selling author of F*** Leadership, a leaders’ guide for every network marketer so that they can get out of their heads and lead better. With a background in life coaching, Josh teaches masterminds and coaching programs. While the conversation is centered around network marketing, the message is much broader than that. Josh is into marketing made simple — Easy, fun, simple marketing that works. So, we go over the three categories that he walks through within his business when sales might be slow or he reaches a plateau or there’s something that’s just not driving. These three areas are his go-to's to see what could be done better. Josh gives us some strategy examples in these three categories, so you can simply copy and paste them into your business.  
Along with this, we also dive into freemiums and how to convert without feeling like you’re selling all the time, while also still feeling like you’re engaging in a way that doesn’t take all your time, but creates really good results. This episode is packed to the brim with ideas, so you might need to stop and pause and back up. We get down to such a granular level, that at times this feels like a one-on-one coaching session. Be sure to tune in today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s guest is Josh Coats, #1 best-selling author of <em>F*** Leadership</em>, a leaders’ guide for every network marketer so that they can get out of their heads and lead better. With a background in life coaching, Josh teaches masterminds and coaching programs. While the conversation is centered around network marketing, the message is much broader than that. Josh is into marketing made simple — Easy, fun, simple marketing that works. So, we go over the three categories that he walks through within his business when sales might be slow or he reaches a plateau or there’s something that’s just not driving. These three areas are his go-to's to see what could be done better. Josh gives us some strategy examples in these three categories, so you can simply copy and paste them into your business.  </p><p>Along with this, we also dive into freemiums and how to convert without feeling like you’re selling all the time, while also still feeling like you’re engaging in a way that doesn’t take all your time, but creates really good results. This episode is packed to the brim with ideas, so you might need to stop and pause and back up. We get down to such a granular level, that at times this feels like a one-on-one coaching session. Be sure to tune in today!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3205</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8ee461cc-a7a4-4bcc-92e6-456c103fee5c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1621650202.mp3?updated=1656604836" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>446: Your Launch Can Be Simple</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/your-launch-can-be-simple</link>
      <description>Before we get into today’s strategy, we want to tell you about our podcast party because there are awesome prizes up for grabs! Simply head over to your podcast app, find our show, and leave a five-star rating and review. Take a screenshot of your review, post it in your Instagram stories, and remember to tag us @bossproject so we can see and share it on our stories too. If you do that, you can win one of two amazing prizes, either our Trello for Business course or a month free to the Creative Template Shop, and we pick a new winner every month! The more times you share, the bigger chance you stand, so what are you waiting for? 
In this episode, we talk about launching. We recently posted a fill-in-the-blank about how the idea of doing a launch made you feel, and you guys made us laugh! You came up with such funny descriptions ranging from super excitement to wanting to jump off a cliff—and we totally feel ya! The majority of you expressed some degree of anxiety, though. And we get is, because for so long, launching felt like this burden that put so much pressure on who we were and how our business was performing, it never used to feel good to us either. Fortunately, that’s changed a lot over the years and today we’re sharing how you can adjust your mindset about launching, so that it becomes a fun and profitable thing to do.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 30 Jun 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>our Launch Can Be Simple</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>446</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ab79cff6-ae9a-11ec-91b1-5bcba73c4ff8/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Before we get into today’s strategy, we want to tell you about our podcast party because there are awesome prizes up for grabs! Simply head over to your podcast app, find our show, and leave a five-star rating and review. Take a screenshot of your...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Before we get into today’s strategy, we want to tell you about our podcast party because there are awesome prizes up for grabs! Simply head over to your podcast app, find our show, and leave a five-star rating and review. Take a screenshot of your review, post it in your Instagram stories, and remember to tag us @bossproject so we can see and share it on our stories too. If you do that, you can win one of two amazing prizes, either our Trello for Business course or a month free to the Creative Template Shop, and we pick a new winner every month! The more times you share, the bigger chance you stand, so what are you waiting for? 
In this episode, we talk about launching. We recently posted a fill-in-the-blank about how the idea of doing a launch made you feel, and you guys made us laugh! You came up with such funny descriptions ranging from super excitement to wanting to jump off a cliff—and we totally feel ya! The majority of you expressed some degree of anxiety, though. And we get is, because for so long, launching felt like this burden that put so much pressure on who we were and how our business was performing, it never used to feel good to us either. Fortunately, that’s changed a lot over the years and today we’re sharing how you can adjust your mindset about launching, so that it becomes a fun and profitable thing to do.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Before we get into today’s strategy, we want to tell you about our podcast party because there are awesome prizes up for grabs! Simply head over to your podcast app, find our show, and leave a five-star rating and review. Take a screenshot of your review, post it in your Instagram stories, and remember to tag us @bossproject so we can see and share it on our stories too. If you do that, you can win one of two amazing prizes, either our Trello for Business course or a month free to the Creative Template Shop, and we pick a new winner every month! The more times you share, the bigger chance you stand, so what are you waiting for? </p><p>In this episode, we talk about launching. We recently posted a fill-in-the-blank about how the idea of doing a launch made you feel, and you guys made us laugh! You came up with such funny descriptions ranging from super excitement to wanting to jump off a cliff—and we totally feel ya! The majority of you expressed some degree of anxiety, though. And we get is, because for so long, launching felt like this burden that put so much pressure on who we were and how our business was performing, it never used to feel good to us either. Fortunately, that’s changed a lot over the years and today we’re sharing how you can adjust your mindset about launching, so that it becomes a fun and profitable thing to do.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2362</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[784b14c8-a8d2-4f66-b8a8-d122c7e6b0f0]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2469961586.mp3?updated=1656604786" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>445: Launch Mistakes Your Business Can't Afford</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/launch-mistakes-your-business-cant-afford</link>
      <description>Today we are going to be talking about the 23 launch mistakes that your business can’t afford to make. But before we get started, first and foremost, we want to encourage you to get into the mindset of treating every single thing in your business like a launch. Whether that’s an Instagram post, a blog post, creating a course, new brand colors – treat it like a launch. Because if you do not treat it like a launch, it becomes one of those things that sits in your to-do list and doesn’t get done! As soon as you treat it like a launch, you will take the steps you need to in order to make it happen. 
We have gone through the process of launching an obscene amount of times, and we have helped so many others do the same. Through these experiences have noticed a pattern of common mistakes made throughout the launch process, and today we want to share the top 23 mistakes we see happening in a launch. From aiming for perfection, to poor planning and promotion, or just not reaching out for support. There are small (and big) things we can do to maximize any launch and keep our sanity in the process! We believe in you and If you’re thinking about launching, you are in the process of launching, or you are just wondering how you can improve on your next launch – this episode is an absolute must!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 25 Jun 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Launch Mistakes Your Business Can't Afford</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>445</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ac2e093a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-dfbfb29f8b51/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are going to be talking about the 23 launch mistakes that your business can’t afford to make. But before we get started, first and foremost, we want to encourage you to get into the mindset of treating every single thing in your business...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are going to be talking about the 23 launch mistakes that your business can’t afford to make. But before we get started, first and foremost, we want to encourage you to get into the mindset of treating every single thing in your business like a launch. Whether that’s an Instagram post, a blog post, creating a course, new brand colors – treat it like a launch. Because if you do not treat it like a launch, it becomes one of those things that sits in your to-do list and doesn’t get done! As soon as you treat it like a launch, you will take the steps you need to in order to make it happen. 
We have gone through the process of launching an obscene amount of times, and we have helped so many others do the same. Through these experiences have noticed a pattern of common mistakes made throughout the launch process, and today we want to share the top 23 mistakes we see happening in a launch. From aiming for perfection, to poor planning and promotion, or just not reaching out for support. There are small (and big) things we can do to maximize any launch and keep our sanity in the process! We believe in you and If you’re thinking about launching, you are in the process of launching, or you are just wondering how you can improve on your next launch – this episode is an absolute must!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are going to be talking about the 23 launch mistakes that your business can’t afford to make. But before we get started, first and foremost, we want to encourage you to get into the mindset of treating every single thing in your business like a launch. Whether that’s an Instagram post, a blog post, creating a course, new brand colors – treat it like a launch. Because if you do not treat it like a launch, it becomes one of those things that sits in your to-do list and doesn’t get done! As soon as you treat it like a launch, you will take the steps you need to in order to make it happen. </p><p>We have gone through the process of launching an obscene amount of times, and we have helped so many others do the same. Through these experiences have noticed a pattern of common mistakes made throughout the launch process, and today we want to share the top 23 mistakes we see happening in a launch. From aiming for perfection, to poor planning and promotion, or just not reaching out for support. There are small (and big) things we can do to maximize any launch and keep our sanity in the process! We believe in you and If you’re thinking about launching, you are in the process of launching, or you are just wondering how you can improve on your next launch – this episode is an absolute must!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate, and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2316</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8f4fee99-a8ab-418f-aa63-e51927497eb7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4270041731.mp3?updated=1656604741" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>444: May 2020 Profit Report: Realign for Results and 2.87x Profits</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/may-2020-profit-report-realign-for-results-and-287x-profits</link>
      <description>Hey, friends! Today we are super excited to bring you another Boss Project profit report. As you may know, we love sharing all of the behind-the-scenes data about what worked, what didn’t work, and how everything got split up within May of this year. In this episode, you’ll get a little peek behind the curtain of our business, comparing last year to this year, and asking the hard questions for you to consider in your own business. 
Before we dive in, we want to know: are you joining our podcast party? Because if you haven’t yet, now is the time! It is super easy to be a part of it. All you have to do is make sure that you are subscribed to the podcast, take a screenshot of the show, and share it over on your social to be entered to win our monthly contest. Plus, make sure to leave a rating and review! As part of the perks of winning, you get to choose your prize: either a free copy of Trello for Business or one month free to the Creative Template Shop.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Jun 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>May 2020 Profit Report: Realign for Results and 2.87x Profits</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>444</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/acd9decc-ae9a-11ec-91b1-f38ecd1cd23d/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Hey, friends! Today we are super excited to bring you another Boss Project profit report. As you may know, we love sharing all of the behind-the-scenes data about what worked, what didn’t work, and how everything got split up within May of this...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey, friends! Today we are super excited to bring you another Boss Project profit report. As you may know, we love sharing all of the behind-the-scenes data about what worked, what didn’t work, and how everything got split up within May of this year. In this episode, you’ll get a little peek behind the curtain of our business, comparing last year to this year, and asking the hard questions for you to consider in your own business. 
Before we dive in, we want to know: are you joining our podcast party? Because if you haven’t yet, now is the time! It is super easy to be a part of it. All you have to do is make sure that you are subscribed to the podcast, take a screenshot of the show, and share it over on your social to be entered to win our monthly contest. Plus, make sure to leave a rating and review! As part of the perks of winning, you get to choose your prize: either a free copy of Trello for Business or one month free to the Creative Template Shop.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey, friends! Today we are super excited to bring you another Boss Project profit report. As you may know, we love sharing all of the behind-the-scenes data about what worked, what didn’t work, and how everything got split up within May of this year. In this episode, you’ll get a little peek behind the curtain of our business, comparing last year to this year, and asking the hard questions for you to consider in your own business. </p><p>Before we dive in, we want to know: are you joining our podcast party? Because if you haven’t yet, now is the time! It is super easy to be a part of it. All you have to do is make sure that you are subscribed to the podcast, take a screenshot of the show, and share it over on your social to be entered to win our monthly contest. Plus, make sure to leave a rating and review! As part of the perks of winning, you get to choose your prize: either a free copy of Trello for Business or one month free to the Creative Template Shop.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2241</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[281d231f-dc0b-4f92-857c-c2e49b3906b6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7729260514.mp3?updated=1656604695" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>443: Making Less to Make More $$</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/making-less-to-make-more-money</link>
      <description>We have this theory that you can make less revenue and walk away with more money in your pocket if you do a few very strategic things. Like many of you, we came to a point in our business where we were ready to see big growth—and we don’t mean make a little bit more money, but exponentially more! Who doesn’t want that, right? And we managed to do that. In the first six months, we made $100,000, doubled it four months later, and we went on to have a multiple six-figure business in our second year, and over $500,000 the year after that. We just kept going after bigger dreams and pursuing more. But we believe there are some things you can do to help you along, and it doesn’t include focusing on that top-line number—which you can shoot yourself in the foot with. We know people who look like they are super successful online, but when you dig a little deeper, you would discover that they had set themselves up in such a way that they get to keep very little of the money they make. We were headed in this same direction. In this episode, we talk about this learning curve we experienced in 2018 and 2019 during which we thought we needed to do XYZ when we didn’t! Besides, what’s the point of reaching your big goals when you are not personally making any more money? Stay tuned to find out.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 18 Jun 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Making Less to Make More $$</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>443</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ad927e46-ae9a-11ec-91b1-c79e63d7985e/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We have this theory that you can make less revenue and walk away with more money in your pocket if you do a few very strategic things. Like many of you, we came to a point in our business where we were ready to see big growth—and we don’t mean...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We have this theory that you can make less revenue and walk away with more money in your pocket if you do a few very strategic things. Like many of you, we came to a point in our business where we were ready to see big growth—and we don’t mean make a little bit more money, but exponentially more! Who doesn’t want that, right? And we managed to do that. In the first six months, we made $100,000, doubled it four months later, and we went on to have a multiple six-figure business in our second year, and over $500,000 the year after that. We just kept going after bigger dreams and pursuing more. But we believe there are some things you can do to help you along, and it doesn’t include focusing on that top-line number—which you can shoot yourself in the foot with. We know people who look like they are super successful online, but when you dig a little deeper, you would discover that they had set themselves up in such a way that they get to keep very little of the money they make. We were headed in this same direction. In this episode, we talk about this learning curve we experienced in 2018 and 2019 during which we thought we needed to do XYZ when we didn’t! Besides, what’s the point of reaching your big goals when you are not personally making any more money? Stay tuned to find out.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We have this theory that you can make less revenue and walk away with more money in your pocket if you do a few very strategic things. Like many of you, we came to a point in our business where we were ready to see big growth—and we don’t mean make a little bit more money, but exponentially more! Who doesn’t want that, right? And we managed to do that. In the first six months, we made $100,000, doubled it four months later, and we went on to have a multiple six-figure business in our second year, and over $500,000 the year after that. We just kept going after bigger dreams and pursuing more. But we believe there are some things you can do to help you along, and it doesn’t include focusing on that top-line number—which you can shoot yourself in the foot with. We know people who look like they are super successful online, but when you dig a little deeper, you would discover that they had set themselves up in such a way that they get to keep very little of the money they make. We were headed in this same direction. In this episode, we talk about this learning curve we experienced in 2018 and 2019 during which we thought we needed to do XYZ when we didn’t! Besides, what’s the point of reaching your big goals when you are not personally making any more money? Stay tuned to find out.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2450</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0bc4165e-ecba-4470-8d4b-a78b9da79438]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8848853776.mp3?updated=1656604652" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>442: How Your Values Shape Your Business Strategy with Lindsay Hotmire</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-your-values-shape-your-business-strategy-with-lindsay-hotmire</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Lindsay Hotmire. She loves to work with female creatives, entrepreneurs, and CEOs to help them discover a non-formulaic version of authenticity. She’s helped over 200 clients and counting ditch the one-size-fits-all formulas and frameworks and helps them genuinely align with their message. In this episode with Lindsay, we break down what being authentic actually means and how to be authentic in a way that feels good for you and with your audience. 
We talk a lot about business values, your core values as a person, and how to not only identify them but then use the results in marketing, branding, messaging, and in your overall strategy to grow your business and sell your product, offer, or service. There are so many examples that we talk about today, everything from messaging and Instagram presence to how you build community; so many different ideas! It’s a really good one and we hope you love it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 16 Jun 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How Your Values Shape Your Business Strategy with Lindsay Hotmire</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>442</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ae56195a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-5f60c9c75558/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Lindsay Hotmire. She loves to work with female creatives, entrepreneurs, and CEOs to help them discover a non-formulaic version of authenticity. She’s helped over 200 clients and counting ditch the one-size-fits-all...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Lindsay Hotmire. She loves to work with female creatives, entrepreneurs, and CEOs to help them discover a non-formulaic version of authenticity. She’s helped over 200 clients and counting ditch the one-size-fits-all formulas and frameworks and helps them genuinely align with their message. In this episode with Lindsay, we break down what being authentic actually means and how to be authentic in a way that feels good for you and with your audience. 
We talk a lot about business values, your core values as a person, and how to not only identify them but then use the results in marketing, branding, messaging, and in your overall strategy to grow your business and sell your product, offer, or service. There are so many examples that we talk about today, everything from messaging and Instagram presence to how you build community; so many different ideas! It’s a really good one and we hope you love it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Lindsay Hotmire. She loves to work with female creatives, entrepreneurs, and CEOs to help them discover a non-formulaic version of authenticity. She’s helped over 200 clients and counting ditch the one-size-fits-all formulas and frameworks and helps them genuinely align with their message. In this episode with Lindsay, we break down what being authentic actually means and how to be authentic in a way that feels good for you and with your audience. </p><p>We talk a lot about business values, your core values as a person, and how to not only identify them but then use the results in marketing, branding, messaging, and in your overall strategy to grow your business and sell your product, offer, or service. There are so many examples that we talk about today, everything from messaging and Instagram presence to how you build community; so many different ideas! It’s a really good one and we hope you love it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2962</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2a60b0b9-9da2-4ad1-8d8c-682adbf17ef7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6367296361.mp3?updated=1656534789" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>441: Our Take on Tiny Offers (It might surprise you!)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/our-take-on-tiny-offers-it-might-surprise-you</link>
      <description>Tiny offers … what are they? Small, inexpensive products that are supposed to blow up your business. At least that’s what we think people are saying they do: start with a tiny offer, grow your audience exponentially, and make a ton of money. Those people suggest that it’s possible to create a six-figure business on the back of a $29 product; that you can launch with a tiny offer and make the big bucks. But hear us out: while we have a tiny offer (Trello for Business), this only came much later in our business—we didn’t start with it. 
We made a tiny offer before tiny offers were a thing, and now people ask us about it all the time since it became the cool thing to do. This is what we’re talking about in this episode. We’re walking you through whether or not a tiny offer makes sense for your business right now. The pros, the cons, the whole shebang. But take note that these are just our opinions and experiences; you might not agree with them. Still, there is always something new to learn. Grab your go-to Strategy Hour drink and let’s go!

To read the show notes of this episode, head to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 11 Jun 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our Take on Tiny Offers (It might surprise you!)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>441</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/aef50de4-ae9a-11ec-91b1-c3892fdf4ffa/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tiny offers … what are they? Small, inexpensive products that are supposed to blow up your business. At least that’s what we think people are saying they do: start with a tiny offer, grow your audience exponentially, and make a ton of money. Those...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Tiny offers … what are they? Small, inexpensive products that are supposed to blow up your business. At least that’s what we think people are saying they do: start with a tiny offer, grow your audience exponentially, and make a ton of money. Those people suggest that it’s possible to create a six-figure business on the back of a $29 product; that you can launch with a tiny offer and make the big bucks. But hear us out: while we have a tiny offer (Trello for Business), this only came much later in our business—we didn’t start with it. 
We made a tiny offer before tiny offers were a thing, and now people ask us about it all the time since it became the cool thing to do. This is what we’re talking about in this episode. We’re walking you through whether or not a tiny offer makes sense for your business right now. The pros, the cons, the whole shebang. But take note that these are just our opinions and experiences; you might not agree with them. Still, there is always something new to learn. Grab your go-to Strategy Hour drink and let’s go!

To read the show notes of this episode, head to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Tiny offers … what are they? Small, inexpensive products that are supposed to blow up your business. At least that’s what we think people are saying they do: start with a tiny offer, grow your audience exponentially, and make a ton of money. Those people suggest that it’s possible to create a six-figure business on the back of a $29 product; that you can launch with a tiny offer and make the big bucks. But hear us out: while we have a tiny offer (Trello for Business), this only came much later in our business—we didn’t start with it. </p><p>We made a tiny offer before tiny offers were a thing, and now people ask us about it all the time since it became the cool thing to do. This is what we’re talking about in this episode. We’re walking you through whether or not a tiny offer makes sense for your business right now. The pros, the cons, the whole shebang. But take note that these are just our opinions and experiences; you might not agree with them. Still, there is always something new to learn. Grab your go-to Strategy Hour drink and let’s go!</p><p><br></p><p>To read the show notes of this episode, head to: <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2302</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[092d8183-9e96-4314-8b65-9114704cb95d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7706502538.mp3?updated=1652639532" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>440 - How to Land Over 100 Podcast Interviews with Christine McAlister of Life With Passion</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-land-over-100-podcast-interviews-with-christine-mcalister-of-life-with-passion</link>
      <description>Today, we have serial entrepreneur and business coach Christine McAlister back on the show! She is an amazing friend of ours. We love having her on the show and we hope you get some really good nuggets from today. Christine has a unique skill where she gets people to say yes to pretty much anything she puts out there, including coming back on our show all the time! What she is teaching you today is how to pitch yourself and how to be an amazing guest on other peoples’ podcasts, and why this strategy – being interviewed for other peoples’ shows – is one she recommends over actually having your own show. 
She is going to walk you through how to use it to network, how to leverage, how to grow your audience and increase sales, and it’s just an all-round good, honest conversation about to-dos and not to-dos! So get out your notebook, jot some of the amazing strategies shared in this episode down, and we cannot wait to see what episodes you land your booty on!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 09 Jun 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Land Over 100 Podcast Interviews with Christine McAlister of Life With Passion</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>440</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/afa4a330-ae9a-11ec-91b1-d786688a8eb1/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, we have serial entrepreneur and business coach Christine McAlister back on the show! She is an amazing friend of ours. We love having her on the show and we hope you get some really good nuggets from today. Christine has a unique skill where...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we have serial entrepreneur and business coach Christine McAlister back on the show! She is an amazing friend of ours. We love having her on the show and we hope you get some really good nuggets from today. Christine has a unique skill where she gets people to say yes to pretty much anything she puts out there, including coming back on our show all the time! What she is teaching you today is how to pitch yourself and how to be an amazing guest on other peoples’ podcasts, and why this strategy – being interviewed for other peoples’ shows – is one she recommends over actually having your own show. 
She is going to walk you through how to use it to network, how to leverage, how to grow your audience and increase sales, and it’s just an all-round good, honest conversation about to-dos and not to-dos! So get out your notebook, jot some of the amazing strategies shared in this episode down, and we cannot wait to see what episodes you land your booty on!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we have serial entrepreneur and business coach Christine McAlister back on the show! She is an amazing friend of ours. We love having her on the show and we hope you get some really good nuggets from today. Christine has a unique skill where she gets people to say yes to pretty much anything she puts out there, including coming back on our show all the time! What she is teaching you today is how to pitch yourself and how to be an amazing guest on other peoples’ podcasts, and why this strategy – being interviewed for other peoples’ shows – is one she recommends over actually having your own show. </p><p>She is going to walk you through how to use it to network, how to leverage, how to grow your audience and increase sales, and it’s just an all-round good, honest conversation about to-dos and not to-dos! So get out your notebook, jot some of the amazing strategies shared in this episode down, and we cannot wait to see what episodes you land your booty on!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2504</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d54d1fc3-5881-4576-b602-6d45d46ab41f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8107214935.mp3?updated=1656534710" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>439: April Profit Report: The Month We Surpassed Our Profit Goal by 15% and What We’re Focusing on Now</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/identifying-your-customer-journey-to-make-more-money-with-mia-graves-of-honey-bee-clay</link>
      <description>In this episode, we’re excited to do the profit report for April because we don’t know about y’all, but for us, April felt much better than March. When the pandemic first escalated in the US mid-March, everyone was freaking out and didn’t know what to expect. But when April swung by, people got more accustomed to the changes and things started coming into a rhythm again. Businesses were pivoting and finding ways to keep at least a portion of their income steady. We decided to lean into what was already working—to focus on what was performing well naturally. We could easily have tried new things but instead, we kept focused on growing the shop rather than pushing our $2000 signature program—which would have been a hard sell in the context of an uncertain economy. 
In contrast, the Creative Template Shop is a $47 commitment that helps people with their marketing, which they desperately need now to stay afloat. But for us to approach the crisis with the focus and energy that we are, we needed to make some good choices early on. We avoided mindlessly consuming media and thought carefully about how we were spending our time and who we were surrounding ourselves with. Negativity was the order of the day but we just decided that we weren’t going to get sucked into it. This shift in headspace had a huge impact on our business because we spent less time worrying and poured more time into what was already working. In this episode, we once again tell it all—and we are thrilled with the results!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 04 Jun 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>April Profit Report: The Month We Surpassed Our Profit Goal by 15% and What We’re Focusing on Now</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>439</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/b0a0bf62-ae9a-11ec-91b1-f730dcbba103/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, we’re excited to do the profit report for April because we don’t know about y’all, but for us, April felt much better than March. When the pandemic first escalated in the US mid-March, everyone was freaking out and didn’t know...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode, we’re excited to do the profit report for April because we don’t know about y’all, but for us, April felt much better than March. When the pandemic first escalated in the US mid-March, everyone was freaking out and didn’t know what to expect. But when April swung by, people got more accustomed to the changes and things started coming into a rhythm again. Businesses were pivoting and finding ways to keep at least a portion of their income steady. We decided to lean into what was already working—to focus on what was performing well naturally. We could easily have tried new things but instead, we kept focused on growing the shop rather than pushing our $2000 signature program—which would have been a hard sell in the context of an uncertain economy. 
In contrast, the Creative Template Shop is a $47 commitment that helps people with their marketing, which they desperately need now to stay afloat. But for us to approach the crisis with the focus and energy that we are, we needed to make some good choices early on. We avoided mindlessly consuming media and thought carefully about how we were spending our time and who we were surrounding ourselves with. Negativity was the order of the day but we just decided that we weren’t going to get sucked into it. This shift in headspace had a huge impact on our business because we spent less time worrying and poured more time into what was already working. In this episode, we once again tell it all—and we are thrilled with the results!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode, we’re excited to do the profit report for April because we don’t know about y’all, but for us, April felt much better than March. When the pandemic first escalated in the US mid-March, everyone was freaking out and didn’t know what to expect. But when April swung by, people got more accustomed to the changes and things started coming into a rhythm again. Businesses were pivoting and finding ways to keep at least a portion of their income steady. We decided to lean into what was already working—to focus on what was performing well naturally. We could easily have tried new things but instead, we kept focused on growing the shop rather than pushing our $2000 signature program—which would have been a hard sell in the context of an uncertain economy. </p><p>In contrast, the Creative Template Shop is a $47 commitment that helps people with their marketing, which they desperately need now to stay afloat. But for us to approach the crisis with the focus and energy that we are, we needed to make some good choices early on. We avoided mindlessly consuming media and thought carefully about how we were spending our time and who we were surrounding ourselves with. Negativity was the order of the day but we just decided that we weren’t going to get sucked into it. This shift in headspace had a huge impact on our business because we spent less time worrying and poured more time into what was already working. In this episode, we once again tell it all—and we are thrilled with the results!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2299</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[915df559-7519-4bae-84fd-c80725a4e4f7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5342006368.mp3?updated=1656534656" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>438: Marketing that Feels Good Is Marketing that Works with Brit Kolo</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/marketing-that-feels-good-is-marketing-that-works-with-brit-kolo</link>
      <description>Today on the show we are so excited to have Brit Kolo joining us once again! She is the creator of the Marketing Personality Type Framework to be found at marketingpersonalities.com. Through her framework, Brit has designed a match up system that works to find the best marketing strategies built for you based on your Myers-Briggs personality test! You guys know we love personality tests, so it is not shocking that Brit is back on the show but today, there’s a twist! 
In this episode, we are throwing out a lot of what we have been raised to believe in this online marketing world about finding your ideal avatar. Today, we explore how maybe the concept of an ideal avatar is actually not what we should be paying attention to at all! So, be sure to listen to this episode to find out what Brit thinks you should value more than your ideal client or avatar, and how you can best filter marketing strategies that feel comfortable, good, and fun, so you can be super effective!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 02 Jun 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Marketing that Feels Good Is Marketing that Works with Brit Kolo</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>438</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/b16b3792-ae9a-11ec-91b1-8f910364af14/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we are so excited to have Brit Kolo joining us once again! She is the creator of the Marketing Personality Type Framework to be found at . Through her framework, Brit has designed a match up system that works to find the best...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we are so excited to have Brit Kolo joining us once again! She is the creator of the Marketing Personality Type Framework to be found at marketingpersonalities.com. Through her framework, Brit has designed a match up system that works to find the best marketing strategies built for you based on your Myers-Briggs personality test! You guys know we love personality tests, so it is not shocking that Brit is back on the show but today, there’s a twist! 
In this episode, we are throwing out a lot of what we have been raised to believe in this online marketing world about finding your ideal avatar. Today, we explore how maybe the concept of an ideal avatar is actually not what we should be paying attention to at all! So, be sure to listen to this episode to find out what Brit thinks you should value more than your ideal client or avatar, and how you can best filter marketing strategies that feel comfortable, good, and fun, so you can be super effective!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we are so excited to have Brit Kolo joining us once again! She is the creator of the Marketing Personality Type Framework to be found at <a href="http://marketingpersonalities.com/">marketingpersonalities.com</a>. Through her framework, Brit has designed a match up system that works to find the best marketing strategies built for you based on your Myers-Briggs personality test! You guys know we love personality tests, so it is not shocking that Brit is back on the show but today, there’s a twist! </p><p>In this episode, we are throwing out a lot of what we have been raised to believe in this online marketing world about finding your ideal avatar. Today, we explore how maybe the concept of an ideal avatar is actually not what we should be paying attention to at all! So, be sure to listen to this episode to find out what Brit thinks you should value more than your ideal client or avatar, and how you can best filter marketing strategies that feel comfortable, good, and fun, so you can be super effective!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2952</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[000e8c43-21ad-48cf-a18d-60f99d7fd6f8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8909845227.mp3?updated=1656534609" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>437: How to Never Have to Think About Your Marketing Again (+ We Need Your Feedback!)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-never-have-to-think-about-your-marketing-again-we-need-your-feedback</link>
      <description>As of this week, we are officially five months into the launching of the Creative Template Shop and it’s so exciting, still! There are so many different moving parts and really cool aspects behind the scenes that are going on with this product of ours, and what’s more, they have never been a part of the process for other products we have developed! So, we wanted to share an update with all of our people!
We want to share some things we are thinking about developing – new features – and we want to hear from you too! So, we are officially opening our project to the public airwaves for your guys’ feedback and we are talking shop about the really cool things we think are so special about our baby. After today’s show, maybe our shop can become a nice little home for you on the internet as well!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 28 May 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Never Have to Think About Your Marketing Again (+ We Need Your Feedback!)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>437</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/b22c240c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-7bbddcef6c17/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>As of this week, we are officially five months into the launching of the Creative Template Shop and it’s so exciting, still! There are so many different moving parts and really cool aspects behind the scenes that are going on with this product of...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>As of this week, we are officially five months into the launching of the Creative Template Shop and it’s so exciting, still! There are so many different moving parts and really cool aspects behind the scenes that are going on with this product of ours, and what’s more, they have never been a part of the process for other products we have developed! So, we wanted to share an update with all of our people!
We want to share some things we are thinking about developing – new features – and we want to hear from you too! So, we are officially opening our project to the public airwaves for your guys’ feedback and we are talking shop about the really cool things we think are so special about our baby. After today’s show, maybe our shop can become a nice little home for you on the internet as well!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>As of this week, we are officially five months into the launching of the Creative Template Shop and it’s so exciting, still! There are so many different moving parts and really cool aspects behind the scenes that are going on with this product of ours, and what’s more, they have never been a part of the process for other products we have developed! So, we wanted to share an update with all of our people!</p><p>We want to share some things we are thinking about developing – new features – and we want to hear from you too! So, we are officially opening our project to the public airwaves for your guys’ feedback and we are talking shop about the really cool things we think are so special about our baby. After today’s show, maybe our shop can become a nice little home for you on the internet as well!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2424</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[645d0816-7f13-4ded-9afe-b9c52e4d4921]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1838410238.mp3?updated=1656534552" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>436: Using Tailwind to Organically Grow Traffic and Sales with Danny Maloney</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/using-tailwind-to-organically-grow-traffic-and-sales-with-danny-maloney</link>
      <description>Today on the show our guest is Danny Maloney, CEO of Tailwind, and we are so excited to have him here to talk about what his company has done for online business and how you can utilize it to drive more traffic and sales on your own! It’s important that you know that before we started using Tailwind we were using Pinterest. We had been on Pinterest for five years and had created a ton of content at that time. 
Back in the day we hacked it so we could explode on that platform and we had a strategy that we shared all over the internet. We wrote a  blog post about it, but then, we found Tailwind and were like, “What is this? This is a lifesaver!” So, we are really looking forward to chatting to Danny about the changing landscape of content ranking algorithms and how to increase traffic while driving sales on Instagram and Pinterest using Tailwind!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 26 May 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Using Tailwind to Organically Grow Traffic and Sales with Danny Maloney</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>436</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/b2f13be8-ae9a-11ec-91b1-7f68ff01c9ce/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show our guest is Danny Maloney, CEO of Tailwind, and we are so excited to have him here to talk about what his company has done for online business and how you can utilize it to drive more traffic and sales on your own! It’s important...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show our guest is Danny Maloney, CEO of Tailwind, and we are so excited to have him here to talk about what his company has done for online business and how you can utilize it to drive more traffic and sales on your own! It’s important that you know that before we started using Tailwind we were using Pinterest. We had been on Pinterest for five years and had created a ton of content at that time. 
Back in the day we hacked it so we could explode on that platform and we had a strategy that we shared all over the internet. We wrote a  blog post about it, but then, we found Tailwind and were like, “What is this? This is a lifesaver!” So, we are really looking forward to chatting to Danny about the changing landscape of content ranking algorithms and how to increase traffic while driving sales on Instagram and Pinterest using Tailwind!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show our guest is Danny Maloney, CEO of Tailwind, and we are so excited to have him here to talk about what his company has done for online business and how you can utilize it to drive more traffic and sales on your own! It’s important that you know that before we started using Tailwind we were using Pinterest. We had been on Pinterest for five years and had created a ton of content at that time. </p><p>Back in the day we hacked it so we could explode on that platform and we had a strategy that we shared all over the internet. We wrote a <a href="https://bossproject.com/blog/2015/6/25/the-daily-pinterest-formula-to-jumpstart-your-referral-traffic"> blog post</a> about it, but then, we found Tailwind and were like, “What is this? This is a lifesaver!” So, we are really looking forward to chatting to Danny about the changing landscape of content ranking algorithms and how to increase traffic while driving sales on Instagram and Pinterest using Tailwind!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2593</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0b104011-83fd-4fa8-8401-b5824eb5858d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8197638264.mp3?updated=1656531265" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>435: Migrating from Squarespace 7.0 to 7.1 (and a mini Shopify update)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/migrating-from-squarespace-7-to-7-1-and-a-mini-shopify-update</link>
      <description>Emylee recently decided to migrate from Squarespace to Shopify for her side hustle website, which got Abagail questioning hers too. She had some issues with Squarespace but she didn’t want to go through the hassle of moving from one platform to another. But since then, Squarespace has released its 7.1 version which is not quite an iteration because it is almost an entirely new platform. Some aspects have remained the same but mostly it is different. 
Abagail has gone through the process of comparing 7.0 to 7.1, so, in this episode, she walks listeners through the differences so that, should they consider migrating to the updated version, they know what to expect. If you are still on the fence about whether you should opt for Squarespace or Shopify or want to learn about everything the new version of Squarespace offers, this episode is a must-listen—don’t decide before hearing us out!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 21 May 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Migrating from Squarespace 7.0 to 7.1 (and a mini Shopify update)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>435</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/b3a558bc-ae9a-11ec-91b1-47de9143819e/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Emylee recently decided to migrate from Squarespace to Shopify for her side hustle website, which got Abagail questioning hers too. She had some issues with Squarespace but she didn’t want to go through the hassle of moving from one platform to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Emylee recently decided to migrate from Squarespace to Shopify for her side hustle website, which got Abagail questioning hers too. She had some issues with Squarespace but she didn’t want to go through the hassle of moving from one platform to another. But since then, Squarespace has released its 7.1 version which is not quite an iteration because it is almost an entirely new platform. Some aspects have remained the same but mostly it is different. 
Abagail has gone through the process of comparing 7.0 to 7.1, so, in this episode, she walks listeners through the differences so that, should they consider migrating to the updated version, they know what to expect. If you are still on the fence about whether you should opt for Squarespace or Shopify or want to learn about everything the new version of Squarespace offers, this episode is a must-listen—don’t decide before hearing us out!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Emylee recently decided to migrate from Squarespace to Shopify for her side hustle website, which got Abagail questioning hers too. She had some issues with Squarespace but she didn’t want to go through the hassle of moving from one platform to another. But since then, Squarespace has released its 7.1 version which is not quite an iteration because it is almost an entirely new platform. Some aspects have remained the same but mostly it is different. </p><p>Abagail has gone through the process of comparing 7.0 to 7.1, so, in this episode, she walks listeners through the differences so that, should they consider migrating to the updated version, they know what to expect. If you are still on the fence about whether you should opt for Squarespace or Shopify or want to learn about everything the new version of Squarespace offers, this episode is a must-listen—don’t decide before hearing us out!  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2298</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f72ac46a-4dac-4baa-88f0-d120680c50a2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2845094894.mp3?updated=1656531319" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>434: How to Have Amazing Customer Service and Implement Product Feedback Loops with Ward Sandler of Memberspace</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-have-amazing-customer-service-and-implement-product-feedback-loops-with-ward-sandler-of-memberspace</link>
      <description>Today we are super excited to welcome Ward Sandler to the show! Ward is the co-founder and CEO of Memberspace, where he and his team help entrepreneurs and organizations to turn any part of their site into a members-only area! They make it so easy, anyone can do it! Our topic for today's conversation, however, is customer service and feedback loops and we were over the moon when Ward pitched this idea to us and we cannot wait to share it all with you. We get into all the helpful and authentic ways that you can keep in contact with your clients and customers, and Ward talks about the ways he does this every day, all week long!
This kind of proximity to an audience is what has helped Memberspace grow and grow in such an exciting way. They have raving fans and Ward explains what has contributed to this. Spoiler alert, its the feedback loops and great service! These lessons can be applied to whatever kind of business you run, whether it is for services, courses or products, you do not have to be a software company for these strategies to be implementable. We really recommend that you check out Memberspace and give it a shot if you have been considering something like this! Without further ado, let's get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 19 May 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Have Amazing Customer Service and Implement Product Feedback Loops with Ward Sandler of Memberspace</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>434</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/b499c668-ae9a-11ec-91b1-270c84bb8174/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are super excited to welcome Ward Sandler to the show! Ward is the co-founder and CEO of Memberspace, where he and his team help entrepreneurs and organizations to turn any part of their site into a members-only area! They make it so easy,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are super excited to welcome Ward Sandler to the show! Ward is the co-founder and CEO of Memberspace, where he and his team help entrepreneurs and organizations to turn any part of their site into a members-only area! They make it so easy, anyone can do it! Our topic for today's conversation, however, is customer service and feedback loops and we were over the moon when Ward pitched this idea to us and we cannot wait to share it all with you. We get into all the helpful and authentic ways that you can keep in contact with your clients and customers, and Ward talks about the ways he does this every day, all week long!
This kind of proximity to an audience is what has helped Memberspace grow and grow in such an exciting way. They have raving fans and Ward explains what has contributed to this. Spoiler alert, its the feedback loops and great service! These lessons can be applied to whatever kind of business you run, whether it is for services, courses or products, you do not have to be a software company for these strategies to be implementable. We really recommend that you check out Memberspace and give it a shot if you have been considering something like this! Without further ado, let's get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are super excited to welcome Ward Sandler to the show! Ward is the co-founder and CEO of Memberspace, where he and his team help entrepreneurs and organizations to turn any part of their site into a members-only area! They make it so easy, anyone can do it! Our topic for today's conversation, however, is customer service and feedback loops and we were over the moon when Ward pitched this idea to us and we cannot wait to share it all with you. We get into all the helpful and authentic ways that you can keep in contact with your clients and customers, and Ward talks about the ways he does this every day, all week long!</p><p>This kind of proximity to an audience is what has helped Memberspace grow and grow in such an exciting way. They have raving fans and Ward explains what has contributed to this. Spoiler alert, its the feedback loops and great service! These lessons can be applied to whatever kind of business you run, whether it is for services, courses or products, you do not have to be a software company for these strategies to be implementable. We really recommend that you check out Memberspace and give it a shot if you have been considering something like this! Without further ado, let's get into some strategy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2270</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[163d9ba9-677d-4599-980e-7f3510bbb0b4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9365701529.mp3?updated=1656531424" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>433: Marketing Strategies that Work and Tactics to Try If You’re In a Rut</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/marketing-strategies-that-work-and-tactics-to-try-if-youre-in-a-rut</link>
      <description>Okay, guys, we finally stopped putting our things off and worked on some marketing strategies we told you we would test out to see what would happen, and they worked! We’re just a little disappointed at ourselves, but also proud at the same time! We knew they would work and so we’re really glad that we did them, even after putting them off for an obscene amount of time! We know everyone listening has their own version of, ‘I put this off,’ when it comes to a marketing strategy they have heard about that works. 
So, today we’re talking about simple marketing strategies that we finally put into practice and proved! The only thing you need to do is spend some time setting these strategies up, putting some things in place to prepare, and then actually doing it! Listen along and hear some of the amazing marketing tricks we tested and proved to be a great success!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 14 May 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Marketing Strategies that Work and Tactics to Try If You’re In a Rut</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>433</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/b5400f00-ae9a-11ec-91b1-2b6c821c0ce7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Okay, guys, we finally stopped putting our things off and worked on some marketing strategies we told you we would test out to see what would happen, and they worked! We’re just a little disappointed at ourselves, but also proud at the same...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Okay, guys, we finally stopped putting our things off and worked on some marketing strategies we told you we would test out to see what would happen, and they worked! We’re just a little disappointed at ourselves, but also proud at the same time! We knew they would work and so we’re really glad that we did them, even after putting them off for an obscene amount of time! We know everyone listening has their own version of, ‘I put this off,’ when it comes to a marketing strategy they have heard about that works. 
So, today we’re talking about simple marketing strategies that we finally put into practice and proved! The only thing you need to do is spend some time setting these strategies up, putting some things in place to prepare, and then actually doing it! Listen along and hear some of the amazing marketing tricks we tested and proved to be a great success!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Okay, guys, we finally stopped putting our things off and worked on some marketing strategies we told you we would test out to see what would happen, and they worked! We’re just a little disappointed at ourselves, but also proud at the same time! We knew they would work and so we’re really glad that we did them, even after putting them off for an obscene amount of time! We know everyone listening has their own version of, ‘I put this off,’ when it comes to a marketing strategy they have heard about that works. </p><p>So, today we’re talking about simple marketing strategies that we finally put into practice and proved! The only thing you need to do is spend some time setting these strategies up, putting some things in place to prepare, and then actually doing it! Listen along and hear some of the amazing marketing tricks we tested and proved to be a great success!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2260</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[092942ec-b1aa-41bb-89fa-91ff5ce28bf8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8300040248.mp3?updated=1652639444" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>432: Redefining Your Expectations for Your Work At Home Life with Kat Harris of the Refined Woman</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/redefining-your-expectations-for-your-work-at-home-life-with-kat-harris-of-the-refined-woman</link>
      <description>Today on the Strategy Hour podcast we have Kat Harris joining us. She is a Brooklyn-based online educator, digital content creator, co-founder of The Refined Woman, and the host of The Refined Collective podcast. Kat is also a photographer who has spent the last decade working from home—so she can teach us a thing or two about getting working from home right! After so many years of experience, she had tons of advice and shares her strategies for organizing your schedule to serve you. Because, for Kat, your time and energy matters and you should be spending it exactly like you want to while still getting the job done. 
She talks about how she has adjusted her schedule, mindset, and expectations during the crisis to strike the balance between growing and giving yourself a lot of grace. This episode is full of practical advice that everyone can implement on some level, according to your reality and set of priorities. Let’s jump in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 12 May 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Redefining Your Expectations for Your Work At Home Life with Kat Harris of the Refined Woman</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>432</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/b5ff21c4-ae9a-11ec-91b1-e7250eb307f9/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the Strategy Hour podcast we have Kat Harris joining us. She is a Brooklyn-based online educator, digital content creator, co-founder of The Refined Woman, and the host of The Refined Collective podcast. Kat is also a photographer who has...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the Strategy Hour podcast we have Kat Harris joining us. She is a Brooklyn-based online educator, digital content creator, co-founder of The Refined Woman, and the host of The Refined Collective podcast. Kat is also a photographer who has spent the last decade working from home—so she can teach us a thing or two about getting working from home right! After so many years of experience, she had tons of advice and shares her strategies for organizing your schedule to serve you. Because, for Kat, your time and energy matters and you should be spending it exactly like you want to while still getting the job done. 
She talks about how she has adjusted her schedule, mindset, and expectations during the crisis to strike the balance between growing and giving yourself a lot of grace. This episode is full of practical advice that everyone can implement on some level, according to your reality and set of priorities. Let’s jump in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the Strategy Hour podcast we have Kat Harris joining us. She is a Brooklyn-based online educator, digital content creator, co-founder of The Refined Woman, and the host of The Refined Collective podcast. Kat is also a photographer who has spent the last decade working from home—so she can teach us a thing or two about getting working from home right! After so many years of experience, she had tons of advice and shares her strategies for organizing your schedule to serve you. Because, for Kat, your time and energy matters and you should be spending it exactly like you want to while still getting the job done. </p><p>She talks about how she has adjusted her schedule, mindset, and expectations during the crisis to strike the balance between growing and giving yourself a lot of grace. This episode is full of practical advice that everyone can implement on some level, according to your reality and set of priorities. Let’s jump in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2550</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a580dff7-8483-4d5b-973c-7016711225ca]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8095361760.mp3?updated=1656531508" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>431: Switching from Squarespace to Shopify: New Features &amp; Who It Doesn’t Make Sense For</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/switching-from-squarespace-to-shopify-new-features-who-it-doesnt-make-sense-for</link>
      <description>We have exciting news! Word on the street is that Emylee is trying something new—gasp! Because, as you may know, she isn’t stuck in her ways at all…But before she shares her news, we have to state upfront that Abagail is going to be fulfilling the role of devil’s advocate on today’s show, poking holes in Emylee’s gutsy decision to switch from Squarespace to Shopify. We’ve been using the former since 2014 and we’ve been incredibly loyal, building our entire business on this site. At one point we considered having the site customized because we thought we were getting too big for the platform, but we ended up proving that Squarespace really can work for large businesses. And we still love Squarespace! 
But then Emylee started this whole product-based business venture and it’s been a learning experience par excellence: of course, it is completely different from running a service-based business like Boss Project. So, Emylee called Abagail a few days ago and let her in on the secret: she was rebuilding her website on a new platform—Shopify. Now she’s getting messages from friends saying, “Welcome to the club! You’re doing what every e-commerce person should be doing.” In this episode, Emylee is going to walk you through the reasons for her decision, the features she’s excited about and the ones she misses, who she thinks Squarespace is right for, and more. Be sure to listen in as the two of them hash it out!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 07 May 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Switching from Squarespace to Shopify: New Features &amp; Who It Doesn’t Make Sense For</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>431</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/b6b4c0ec-ae9a-11ec-91b1-bbe79560d671/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We have exciting news! Word on the street is that Emylee is trying something new—gasp! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We have exciting news! Word on the street is that Emylee is trying something new—gasp! Because, as you may know, she isn’t stuck in her ways at all…But before she shares her news, we have to state upfront that Abagail is going to be fulfilling the role of devil’s advocate on today’s show, poking holes in Emylee’s gutsy decision to switch from Squarespace to Shopify. We’ve been using the former since 2014 and we’ve been incredibly loyal, building our entire business on this site. At one point we considered having the site customized because we thought we were getting too big for the platform, but we ended up proving that Squarespace really can work for large businesses. And we still love Squarespace! 
But then Emylee started this whole product-based business venture and it’s been a learning experience par excellence: of course, it is completely different from running a service-based business like Boss Project. So, Emylee called Abagail a few days ago and let her in on the secret: she was rebuilding her website on a new platform—Shopify. Now she’s getting messages from friends saying, “Welcome to the club! You’re doing what every e-commerce person should be doing.” In this episode, Emylee is going to walk you through the reasons for her decision, the features she’s excited about and the ones she misses, who she thinks Squarespace is right for, and more. Be sure to listen in as the two of them hash it out!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We have exciting news! Word on the street is that Emylee is trying something new—gasp! Because, as you may know, she isn’t stuck in her ways at all…But before she shares her news, we have to state upfront that Abagail is going to be fulfilling the role of devil’s advocate on today’s show, poking holes in Emylee’s gutsy decision to switch from Squarespace to Shopify. We’ve been using the former since 2014 and we’ve been incredibly loyal, building our entire business on this site. At one point we considered having the site customized because we thought we were getting too big for the platform, but we ended up proving that Squarespace really can work for large businesses. And we still love Squarespace! </p><p>But then Emylee started this whole product-based business venture and it’s been a learning experience par excellence: of course, it is completely different from running a service-based business like Boss Project. So, Emylee called Abagail a few days ago and let her in on the secret: she was rebuilding her website on a new platform—Shopify. Now she’s getting messages from friends saying, “Welcome to the club! You’re doing what every e-commerce person should be doing.” In this episode, Emylee is going to walk you through the reasons for her decision, the features she’s excited about and the ones she misses, who she thinks Squarespace is right for, and more. Be sure to listen in as the two of them hash it out!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2359</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dcaee175-805b-4825-a103-52e50783ec40]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1121189199.mp3?updated=1656531494" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>430: 4 Things to Do Right Now if You’re Starting a Business from Scratch with Amanda Boleyn</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/4-things-to-do-right-now-if-youre-starting-a-business-from-scratch-with-amanda-boleyn</link>
      <description>Today, we have Amanda Boleyn back on the show! She is the founder of She Did It Her Way, where she coaches women how to quit their jobs, replace their income, and build an online business they love. In this episode, we are talking about the four steps that she has developed that you can implement right now to start landing clients and offering your services!
We know that considering current circumstances these steps might need to be expedited a little bit and they could feel a little hurried and rushed, but the point is they work so implementing them effectively could be just what you need. So, today we are giving you a lot of ideas on who you can be reaching out to, how you can figure out what to offer, and how to actually market and get your product or service sold! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 05 May 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>4 Things to Do Right Now if You’re Starting a Business from Scratch with Amanda Boleyn</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>430</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/b7644c24-ae9a-11ec-91b1-7bc4424d1740/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, we have Amanda Boleyn back on the show! She is the founder of She Did It Her Way, where she coaches women how to quit their jobs, replace their income, and build an online business they love. In this episode, we are talking about the four steps...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we have Amanda Boleyn back on the show! She is the founder of She Did It Her Way, where she coaches women how to quit their jobs, replace their income, and build an online business they love. In this episode, we are talking about the four steps that she has developed that you can implement right now to start landing clients and offering your services!
We know that considering current circumstances these steps might need to be expedited a little bit and they could feel a little hurried and rushed, but the point is they work so implementing them effectively could be just what you need. So, today we are giving you a lot of ideas on who you can be reaching out to, how you can figure out what to offer, and how to actually market and get your product or service sold! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we have Amanda Boleyn back on the show! She is the founder of She Did It Her Way, where she coaches women how to quit their jobs, replace their income, and build an online business they love. In this episode, we are talking about the four steps that she has developed that you can implement right now to start landing clients and offering your services!</p><p>We know that considering current circumstances these steps might need to be expedited a little bit and they could feel a little hurried and rushed, but the point is they work so implementing them effectively could be just what you need. So, today we are giving you a lot of ideas on who you can be reaching out to, how you can figure out what to offer, and how to actually market and get your product or service sold! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2641</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[162730d2-0a1c-4380-8249-44f4de2d2806]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7425141366.mp3?updated=1652639280" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>429: Planning for Worst Case Scenarios</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/planning-for-worst-case-scenarios-2020</link>
      <description>For those of you who don’t already know Emylee – welcome to her anxious life. She is the type of person who can tell you where every exit in a building is, or how to stop drop and roll in case of a fire, and where to hide just in case a tornado suddenly appears on route to the mall. In business, Emylee is the kind of person that likes to go through every single worst case scenario. She always has a back up plan… and a backup plan for the backup plan. Emylee is the queen of doing this and it turns out that this can be a super helpful attribute to have in a business partnership. 
This episode is about planning for the things that you can never plan for. It’s about answering those difficult “What if” questions. It’s about securing your business for the future and the reassurance that this brings to your life. For those of you who are single business owners, we’re not sure you’ve thought of planning for worst case scenarios and exactly how to do that. So in today’s episode, we’re going to be sharing our experiences and the reasons we have made planning for worst case scenarios an integral part of our overall business strategy. We discuss the various insurance options you have, the various questions you need to ask yourself and how you can effectively plan for the worst, in the best kind of way. Take a listen!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 30 Apr 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Planning for Worst Case Scenarios</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>429</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/b846dc6a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-b31acd882539/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This episode is about planning for the things that you can never plan for. It’s about answering those difficult “What if” questions. It’s about securing your business for the future and the reassurance that this brings to your life. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>For those of you who don’t already know Emylee – welcome to her anxious life. She is the type of person who can tell you where every exit in a building is, or how to stop drop and roll in case of a fire, and where to hide just in case a tornado suddenly appears on route to the mall. In business, Emylee is the kind of person that likes to go through every single worst case scenario. She always has a back up plan… and a backup plan for the backup plan. Emylee is the queen of doing this and it turns out that this can be a super helpful attribute to have in a business partnership. 
This episode is about planning for the things that you can never plan for. It’s about answering those difficult “What if” questions. It’s about securing your business for the future and the reassurance that this brings to your life. For those of you who are single business owners, we’re not sure you’ve thought of planning for worst case scenarios and exactly how to do that. So in today’s episode, we’re going to be sharing our experiences and the reasons we have made planning for worst case scenarios an integral part of our overall business strategy. We discuss the various insurance options you have, the various questions you need to ask yourself and how you can effectively plan for the worst, in the best kind of way. Take a listen!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For those of you who don’t already know Emylee – welcome to her anxious life. She is the type of person who can tell you where every exit in a building is, or how to stop drop and roll in case of a fire, and where to hide just in case a tornado suddenly appears on route to the mall. In business, Emylee is the kind of person that likes to go through every single worst case scenario. She always has a back up plan… and a backup plan for the backup plan. Emylee is the queen of doing this and it turns out that this can be a super helpful attribute to have in a business partnership. </p><p>This episode is about planning for the things that you can never plan for. It’s about answering those difficult “What if” questions. It’s about securing your business for the future and the reassurance that this brings to your life. For those of you who are single business owners, we’re not sure you’ve thought of planning for worst case scenarios and exactly how to do that. So in today’s episode, we’re going to be sharing our experiences and the reasons we have made planning for worst case scenarios an integral part of our overall business strategy. We discuss the various insurance options you have, the various questions you need to ask yourself and how you can effectively plan for the worst, in the best kind of way. Take a listen!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2015</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a1179d30-3de6-44a9-a7f8-e5252f0917ed]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6233620330.mp3?updated=1656443044" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>428: How to Tweak Your Messaging and Serve Clients *Right Now* with Courtney Chaal, founder of The Rule Breaker’s Club </title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-tweak-your-messaging-and-serve-clients-right-now-with-courtney-chaal</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Courtney Chaal, the founder of The Rule Breaker’s Club where she teaches women to package and sell with brilliance and offers awesome products, and her work has been featured in Inc., Creative Live, and The Huffpost to name only a few. She is crazy-talented when it comes to messaging specifically, so this interview is right on time. We get that we shouldn’t necessarily be changing our offers or postpone our launches, but how do we talk differently about our services, so that it appeals to people at this moment? 
What messaging do we need to tweak to make it relevant, and where is the balance between being empathetic and helpful versus making sales because we’ve got businesses to run? Courtney shares the top tips that she herself is implementing in her business, from getting your mindset right and brainstorming ideas, to asking your audience what they need and putting it all together in a project plan, so strap in and let’s dive in!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 28 Apr 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Tweak Your Messaging and Serve Clients *Right Now* with Courtney Chaal, founder of The Rule Breaker’s Club </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>428</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/b8f67602-ae9a-11ec-91b1-bf408fd810e0/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Courtney shares the top tips that she herself is implementing in her business, from getting your mindset right and brainstorming ideas, to asking your audience what they need and putting it all together in a project plan, so strap in and let’s dive in! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Courtney Chaal, the founder of The Rule Breaker’s Club where she teaches women to package and sell with brilliance and offers awesome products, and her work has been featured in Inc., Creative Live, and The Huffpost to name only a few. She is crazy-talented when it comes to messaging specifically, so this interview is right on time. We get that we shouldn’t necessarily be changing our offers or postpone our launches, but how do we talk differently about our services, so that it appeals to people at this moment? 
What messaging do we need to tweak to make it relevant, and where is the balance between being empathetic and helpful versus making sales because we’ve got businesses to run? Courtney shares the top tips that she herself is implementing in her business, from getting your mindset right and brainstorming ideas, to asking your audience what they need and putting it all together in a project plan, so strap in and let’s dive in!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Courtney Chaal, the founder of The Rule Breaker’s Club where she teaches women to package and sell with brilliance and offers awesome products, and her work has been featured in <em>Inc</em>., Creative Live, and <em>The Huffpost</em> to name only a few. She is crazy-talented when it comes to messaging specifically, so this interview is right on time. We get that we shouldn’t necessarily be changing our offers or postpone our launches, but how do we talk differently about our services, so that it appeals to people at this moment? </p><p>What messaging do we need to tweak to make it relevant, and where is the balance between being empathetic and helpful versus making sales because we’ve got businesses to run? Courtney shares the top tips that she herself is implementing in her business, from getting your mindset right and brainstorming ideas, to asking your audience what they need and putting it all together in a project plan, so strap in and let’s dive in!  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2321</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[277d62b7-8b60-48e8-9f84-0bc93ca743bb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4353462295.mp3?updated=1656443011" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>427: March Profit Report: How COIVD Impacted Our Profit + Did We Reach Our Profit Goal for Q1?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/march-profit-report-how-covid-impacted-our-profit-did-we-reach-our-profit-goal-for-q1</link>
      <description>We dunno if y’all noticed, but March was weird. March was also hard, hurtful, and 7000 times longer than January. That’s probably because March asked us to adjust to the new normal and we were still getting used to being home—all the time. And we’re not here to pretend like our situations are better or worse than anybody else’s because, like you, neither of us knew what was going to go down in 2020. What we do know is that this period will be a watershed in small business, the impact of which will likely be felt years from now. 
While we don’t know how this will pan out, we can give you our March profit report and roll it out into a Q1 report in general for you guys to see how the first three months of the year went for us. You can always DM us if there is anything you want to know that we didn’t cover—we’re all here to learn together, right? In this episode, we tell you how each of our products fared, including the surprises and the disappointments we had and how we overcame certain obstacles. One thing is certain: tuning in to this episode will encourage you because we show you how reaching your goals is still possible!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 23 Apr 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>March Profit Report: How COIVD Impacted Our Profit + Did We Reach Our Profit Goal for Q1?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>427</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/b9b2c780-ae9a-11ec-91b1-674bef058fc3/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We dunno if y’all noticed, but March was weird. March was also hard, hurtful, and 7000 times longer than January. That’s probably because March asked us to adjust to the new normal and we were still getting used to being home—all the time. And...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We dunno if y’all noticed, but March was weird. March was also hard, hurtful, and 7000 times longer than January. That’s probably because March asked us to adjust to the new normal and we were still getting used to being home—all the time. And we’re not here to pretend like our situations are better or worse than anybody else’s because, like you, neither of us knew what was going to go down in 2020. What we do know is that this period will be a watershed in small business, the impact of which will likely be felt years from now. 
While we don’t know how this will pan out, we can give you our March profit report and roll it out into a Q1 report in general for you guys to see how the first three months of the year went for us. You can always DM us if there is anything you want to know that we didn’t cover—we’re all here to learn together, right? In this episode, we tell you how each of our products fared, including the surprises and the disappointments we had and how we overcame certain obstacles. One thing is certain: tuning in to this episode will encourage you because we show you how reaching your goals is still possible!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We dunno if y’all noticed, but March was weird. March was also hard, hurtful, and 7000 times longer than January. That’s probably because March asked us to adjust to the new normal and we were still getting used to being home—all the time. And we’re not here to pretend like our situations are better or worse than anybody else’s because, like you, neither of us knew what was going to go down in 2020. What we do know is that this period will be a watershed in small business, the impact of which will likely be felt years from now. </p><p>While we don’t know how this will pan out, we can give you our March profit report and roll it out into a Q1 report in general for you guys to see how the first three months of the year went for us. You can always DM us if there is anything you want to know that we didn’t cover—we’re all here to learn together, right? In this episode, we tell you how each of our products fared, including the surprises and the disappointments we had and how we overcame certain obstacles. One thing is certain: tuning in to this episode will encourage you because we show you how reaching your goals is still possible!  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2727</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2c5e0529-b557-4e00-a205-c7fe180913c9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1463818731.mp3?updated=1652639169" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>426: What's Working Right Now in 2020 for Pinterest with Melanie Fountain</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/whats-working-right-now-in-2020-for-pinterest-with-melanie-fountain</link>
      <description>On today’s show, we interview Melanie Fountain, a blog and Pinterest strategist who started her virtual assistant business a while ago and has since equipped herself in the area of all things Pinterest. We hopped on a call with her to chat about all the changes that 2020 brought to the business landscape, and we were so blown away by her knowledge that we asked her to record an episode of Strategy Hour with us. She talks about the behind-the-scenes strategies for getting your content discovered and seen by more people. Earlier this year, Pinterest underwent a shift toward different looking content but fortunately, it does not mean you have to go out and make a bunch of new content. 
Melanie walks us through their adjusted policies and how you should adjust your approach, how Pinterest can work for product-based businesses, and what it means to be discoverable on the platform, including the ins and outs of hashtags, keywords, and descriptions. We adore Pinterest and have since its inception when it was all about planning dream weddings. In the early days, you saw more lifestyle content than business blogs, so using it for business purposes was still fairly new. But fast forward five years: we’ve been terrible at keeping up with Pinterest, but now they’ve done a major update that is very much applicable to your business. Stay tuned to learn everything about creating the strongest Pinterest profile in 2020!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 21 Apr 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What's Working Right Now in 2020 for Pinterest with Melanie Fountain</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>426</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ba686770-ae9a-11ec-91b1-97070f6dab0a/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Melanie talks about the behind-the-scenes strategies for getting your content discovered and seen by more people.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s show, we interview Melanie Fountain, a blog and Pinterest strategist who started her virtual assistant business a while ago and has since equipped herself in the area of all things Pinterest. We hopped on a call with her to chat about all the changes that 2020 brought to the business landscape, and we were so blown away by her knowledge that we asked her to record an episode of Strategy Hour with us. She talks about the behind-the-scenes strategies for getting your content discovered and seen by more people. Earlier this year, Pinterest underwent a shift toward different looking content but fortunately, it does not mean you have to go out and make a bunch of new content. 
Melanie walks us through their adjusted policies and how you should adjust your approach, how Pinterest can work for product-based businesses, and what it means to be discoverable on the platform, including the ins and outs of hashtags, keywords, and descriptions. We adore Pinterest and have since its inception when it was all about planning dream weddings. In the early days, you saw more lifestyle content than business blogs, so using it for business purposes was still fairly new. But fast forward five years: we’ve been terrible at keeping up with Pinterest, but now they’ve done a major update that is very much applicable to your business. Stay tuned to learn everything about creating the strongest Pinterest profile in 2020!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s show, we interview Melanie Fountain, a blog and Pinterest strategist who started her virtual assistant business a while ago and has since equipped herself in the area of all things Pinterest. We hopped on a call with her to chat about all the changes that 2020 brought to the business landscape, and we were so blown away by her knowledge that we asked her to record an episode of Strategy Hour with us. She talks about the behind-the-scenes strategies for getting your content discovered and seen by more people. Earlier this year, Pinterest underwent a shift toward different looking content but fortunately, it does not mean you have to go out and make a bunch of new content. </p><p>Melanie walks us through their adjusted policies and how you should adjust your approach, how Pinterest can work for product-based businesses, and what it means to be discoverable on the platform, including the ins and outs of hashtags, keywords, and descriptions. We adore Pinterest and have since its inception when it was all about planning dream weddings. In the early days, you saw more lifestyle content than business blogs, so using it for business purposes was still fairly new. But fast forward five years: we’ve been terrible at keeping up with Pinterest, but now they’ve done a major update that is very much applicable to your business. Stay tuned to learn everything about creating the strongest Pinterest profile in 2020!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2335</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c8b4e434-a575-4ba0-84aa-9d850790af31]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2449529962.mp3?updated=1656442967" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>425: Best SEO Practices for 2020 with Megan Clarke of Clapping Dog Media.</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/best-seo-practices-for-2020-with-meg-clarke</link>
      <description>Today on the show we have Meg Clarke of Clapping Dog Media. She is an SEO strategist who teaches creative small business owners how to grow their organic traffic and rankings so they can make a great impact and reach more people. She is also a sourdough bread baking genius, so you can look forward to several bread references throughout this episode! In Episode 45, we interviewed Meg where she talked about SEO for newbies, but today we’re taking it a step further by addressing intermediate and advanced issues that are more applicable to listeners who are somewhat experienced in this area. A lot has changed since 2017, so she discusses updated SEO practices, stuff you can do to prep your business and brand for launch and what to do if you are pivoting and need to start tackling different topics on your existing website. She also dishes out resources for finding targeting keywords and hidden SEO within your website and shares what she reckons is worth spending time on.
Before we get into the meat of the episode, it’s worth mentioning the incredible strides we have made with our SEO since a few years ago. But, while we’ve done well, we also desperately need maintenance. Our traffic used to be at a low 5 to 10% from Google despite our volume of content, but now over 50% of our traffic comes straight from search. But, as we said, we also need to brush up on our SEO, so we’re just as eager to hear what Meg’s got for us. So, pull your notebook closer and get ready for some fresh SEO strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Apr 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Best SEO Practices for 2020 with Megan Clarke of Clapping Dog Media.</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>425</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/bb5595c2-ae9a-11ec-91b1-7fca778b8d5e/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Meg is an SEO strategist who teaches creative small business owners how to grow their organic traffic and rankings so they can make a great impact and reach more people.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we have Meg Clarke of Clapping Dog Media. She is an SEO strategist who teaches creative small business owners how to grow their organic traffic and rankings so they can make a great impact and reach more people. She is also a sourdough bread baking genius, so you can look forward to several bread references throughout this episode! In Episode 45, we interviewed Meg where she talked about SEO for newbies, but today we’re taking it a step further by addressing intermediate and advanced issues that are more applicable to listeners who are somewhat experienced in this area. A lot has changed since 2017, so she discusses updated SEO practices, stuff you can do to prep your business and brand for launch and what to do if you are pivoting and need to start tackling different topics on your existing website. She also dishes out resources for finding targeting keywords and hidden SEO within your website and shares what she reckons is worth spending time on.
Before we get into the meat of the episode, it’s worth mentioning the incredible strides we have made with our SEO since a few years ago. But, while we’ve done well, we also desperately need maintenance. Our traffic used to be at a low 5 to 10% from Google despite our volume of content, but now over 50% of our traffic comes straight from search. But, as we said, we also need to brush up on our SEO, so we’re just as eager to hear what Meg’s got for us. So, pull your notebook closer and get ready for some fresh SEO strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we have Meg Clarke of Clapping Dog Media. She is an SEO strategist who teaches creative small business owners how to grow their organic traffic and rankings so they can make a great impact and reach more people. She is also a sourdough bread baking genius, so you can look forward to several bread references throughout this episode! In Episode 45, we interviewed Meg where she talked about SEO for newbies, but today we’re taking it a step further by addressing intermediate and advanced issues that are more applicable to listeners who are somewhat experienced in this area. A lot has changed since 2017, so she discusses updated SEO practices, stuff you can do to prep your business and brand for launch and what to do if you are pivoting and need to start tackling different topics on your existing website. She also dishes out resources for finding targeting keywords and hidden SEO within your website and shares what she reckons is worth spending time on.</p><p>Before we get into the meat of the episode, it’s worth mentioning the incredible strides we have made with our SEO since a few years ago. But, while we’ve done well, we also desperately need maintenance. Our traffic used to be at a low 5 to 10% from Google despite our volume of content, but now over 50% of our traffic comes straight from search. But, as we said, we also need to brush up on our SEO, so we’re just as eager to hear what Meg’s got for us. So, pull your notebook closer and get ready for some fresh SEO strategy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2499</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5c081fec-bc3d-4728-9105-9babc6b0ee1b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5092351449.mp3?updated=1656442924" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>424: February Profit Report: A Shop Drop, 5-Day Challenge and Launch - Here’s How it All Shaped out</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/february-profit-report-we-nearly-reached-our-goal-profit</link>
      <description>It feels like it’s been 87 months since February, both in business and life, but we are going back in time to revisit that month and stay consistent with our profit reports. We’ve heard that these episodes are super helpful to you. For those who are unfamiliar with profit reports, we started them in August of 2019, sharing not income reports but profit reports, including the exact percentages of gains, losses, and so on. Our goal is to chase higher profit margins and we share what that looks like for us and the processes we go through to get there. These episodes give you a peek into our business, which will hopefully encourage and help you in setting up your strategies without any comparisons. 
Today we talk about how we used the Five Days to Launch challenge to feed Strategy Academy, why we’re okay with Trello for Business breaking even, how The Creative Template Shop blew our socks off, and why we permitting you to pivot a little right now! Intending to double down on this learning experience, we will also be hosting a live workshop to practically guide you to implement the same things in your business. Stay tuned till the end to hear where to go to learn more about crunching the numbers!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Apr 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>February Profit Report: A Shop Drop, 5-Day Challenge and Launch - Here’s How it All Shaped out</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>424</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/bc2108ba-ae9a-11ec-91b1-c3c08bf6dedb/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Our goal is to chase higher profit margins and we share what that looks like for us and the processes we go through to get there. These episodes give you a peek into our business, which will hopefully encourage and help you in setting up your strategies without any comparisons. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It feels like it’s been 87 months since February, both in business and life, but we are going back in time to revisit that month and stay consistent with our profit reports. We’ve heard that these episodes are super helpful to you. For those who are unfamiliar with profit reports, we started them in August of 2019, sharing not income reports but profit reports, including the exact percentages of gains, losses, and so on. Our goal is to chase higher profit margins and we share what that looks like for us and the processes we go through to get there. These episodes give you a peek into our business, which will hopefully encourage and help you in setting up your strategies without any comparisons. 
Today we talk about how we used the Five Days to Launch challenge to feed Strategy Academy, why we’re okay with Trello for Business breaking even, how The Creative Template Shop blew our socks off, and why we permitting you to pivot a little right now! Intending to double down on this learning experience, we will also be hosting a live workshop to practically guide you to implement the same things in your business. Stay tuned till the end to hear where to go to learn more about crunching the numbers!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It feels like it’s been 87 months since February, both in business and life, but we are going back in time to revisit that month and stay consistent with our profit reports. We’ve heard that these episodes are super helpful to you. For those who are unfamiliar with profit reports, we started them in August of 2019, sharing not income reports but profit reports, including the exact percentages of gains, losses, and so on. Our goal is to chase higher profit margins and we share what that looks like for us and the processes we go through to get there. These episodes give you a peek into our business, which will hopefully encourage and help you in setting up your strategies without any comparisons. </p><p>Today we talk about how we used the Five Days to Launch challenge to feed Strategy Academy, why we’re okay with Trello for Business breaking even, how The Creative Template Shop blew our socks off, and why we permitting you to pivot a little right now! Intending to double down on this learning experience, we will also be hosting a live workshop to practically guide you to implement the same things in your business. Stay tuned till the end to hear where to go to learn more about crunching the numbers!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2090</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[13b3e933-6a77-402a-a8d0-601f2afbfa00]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1200439113.mp3?updated=1656442877" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>423: How to Share a Story Your Audience Actually Cares About with Jessica Rasdall</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-share-a-story-your-audience-actually-cares-about-with-jessica-rasdall</link>
      <description>Today on the show we have Jessica Rasdall, a motivational speaker, bestselling author, public speaking strategist, and host to the Speak to Scale Podcast to talk to us about crafting your story for the virtual stage. Now that we are homebound and communicating with our audiences online, we can do with some help when it comes to showing up as ourselves and helping people rather than just have a self-serving online presence. You’ve heard the vulnerability piece – that you need to be relatable and reveal your “humanness” to your followers, but what is the right amount of sharing? 
Jessica walks us through a formula for breaking your story down into three acts so that it is most helpful to people, a structure that outlines the before, middle, and after phases of your story. Each of these three phases is important: from hooking the audience and relating to their experiences to showing them how the significant event changed your life and the difficult decisions you have had to make. For Jessica, the most important aspect is the motivation behind sharing your story, and if its primary purpose is not to help your audience in some way, you might want to reconsider. Be sure to tune in to hear the rest! motivation behind sharing your story, and if its primary purpose is not to help your audience in some way, you might want to reconsider. Be sure to tune in to hear the rest!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 09 Apr 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Share a Story Your Audience Actually Cares About with Jessica Rasdall</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>423</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/bcf6552e-ae9a-11ec-91b1-773efb293107/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we have Jessica Rasdall, a motivational speaker, bestselling author, public speaking strategist, and host to the Speak to Scale Podcast to talk to us about crafting your story for the virtual stage. Now that we are homebound and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we have Jessica Rasdall, a motivational speaker, bestselling author, public speaking strategist, and host to the Speak to Scale Podcast to talk to us about crafting your story for the virtual stage. Now that we are homebound and communicating with our audiences online, we can do with some help when it comes to showing up as ourselves and helping people rather than just have a self-serving online presence. You’ve heard the vulnerability piece – that you need to be relatable and reveal your “humanness” to your followers, but what is the right amount of sharing? 
Jessica walks us through a formula for breaking your story down into three acts so that it is most helpful to people, a structure that outlines the before, middle, and after phases of your story. Each of these three phases is important: from hooking the audience and relating to their experiences to showing them how the significant event changed your life and the difficult decisions you have had to make. For Jessica, the most important aspect is the motivation behind sharing your story, and if its primary purpose is not to help your audience in some way, you might want to reconsider. Be sure to tune in to hear the rest! motivation behind sharing your story, and if its primary purpose is not to help your audience in some way, you might want to reconsider. Be sure to tune in to hear the rest!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we have Jessica Rasdall, a motivational speaker, bestselling author, public speaking strategist, and host to the Speak to Scale Podcast to talk to us about crafting your story for the virtual stage. Now that we are homebound and communicating with our audiences online, we can do with some help when it comes to showing up as ourselves and helping people rather than just have a self-serving online presence. You’ve heard the vulnerability piece – that you need to be relatable and reveal your “humanness” to your followers, but what is the right amount of sharing? </p><p>Jessica walks us through a formula for breaking your story down into three acts so that it is most helpful to people, a structure that outlines the before, middle, and after phases of your story. Each of these three phases is important: from hooking the audience and relating to their experiences to showing them how the significant event changed your life and the difficult decisions you have had to make. For Jessica, the most important aspect is the motivation behind sharing your story, and if its primary purpose is not to help your audience in some way, you might want to reconsider. Be sure to tune in to hear the rest! motivation behind sharing your story, and if its primary purpose is not to help your audience in some way, you might want to reconsider. Be sure to tune in to hear the rest!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2554</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6aade955-0f7d-4959-933f-b75fc2620082]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5327327916.mp3?updated=1652639065" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>422: What Is Human Design and How Can You Use it to Become a Better Business Owner Part 1</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-is-human-design-and-how-can-you-use-it-to-become-a-better-business-owner-part-1</link>
      <description>Hey everybody and welcome back to the show. This is going to be a really good episode because today we are finally talking about the Human Design personality test method. We have heard such muttering about this topic and we are obsessed with personality tests in general. It’s amazing how in this Human Design model, personality is seen as something baked into who you are. You don’t get to pick or adjust over time like in other test models. It’s literally based off of your birth hour/minute/location, so you cannot change what you are.
We know very little about this topic but wanted to share what we have learned so far. Tests like the Enneagram and Myers–Briggs give you such good insight about who you are, and you can learn how to be a better person and understand your faults. The Human Design model, by contrast, can help people become more balanced through collaboration. Our conversation today is structured by running through the book Human Design: Discover the Person You Were Born To Be, which helps breakdown how Human Design came about. We will talk about some of those basic principles today and how they relate to our types as business partners. Enjoy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 07 Apr 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Is Human Design and How Can You Use it to Become a Better Business Owner Part 1</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>422</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/bdb4ffec-ae9a-11ec-91b1-cb0acfa22d5b/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Hey everybody and welcome back to the show. This is going to be a really good episode because today we are finally talking about the Human Design personality test method. We have heard such muttering about this topic and we are obsessed with...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey everybody and welcome back to the show. This is going to be a really good episode because today we are finally talking about the Human Design personality test method. We have heard such muttering about this topic and we are obsessed with personality tests in general. It’s amazing how in this Human Design model, personality is seen as something baked into who you are. You don’t get to pick or adjust over time like in other test models. It’s literally based off of your birth hour/minute/location, so you cannot change what you are.
We know very little about this topic but wanted to share what we have learned so far. Tests like the Enneagram and Myers–Briggs give you such good insight about who you are, and you can learn how to be a better person and understand your faults. The Human Design model, by contrast, can help people become more balanced through collaboration. Our conversation today is structured by running through the book Human Design: Discover the Person You Were Born To Be, which helps breakdown how Human Design came about. We will talk about some of those basic principles today and how they relate to our types as business partners. Enjoy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey everybody and welcome back to the show. This is going to be a really good episode because today we are finally talking about the Human Design personality test method. We have heard such muttering about this topic and we are obsessed with personality tests in general. It’s amazing how in this Human Design model, personality is seen as something baked into who you are. You don’t get to pick or adjust over time like in other test models. It’s literally based off of your birth hour/minute/location, so you cannot change what you are.</p><p>We know very little about this topic but wanted to share what we have learned so far. Tests like the Enneagram and Myers–Briggs give you such good insight about who you are, and you can learn how to be a better person and understand your faults. The Human Design model, by contrast, can help people become more balanced through collaboration. Our conversation today is structured by running through the book <em>Human Design: Discover the Person You Were Born To Be,</em> which helps breakdown how Human Design came about. We will talk about some of those basic principles today and how they relate to our types as business partners. Enjoy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3353</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1afefd68-7458-4ec6-af61-467c0f220a3e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5819690599.mp3?updated=1652638998" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>421: The Dance of Spreading Kindness in a Difficult Time with Carrie Grace McQuaid</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-dance-of-spreading-kindness-in-a-difficult-time-with-carrie-grace-mcquaid</link>
      <description>Welcome back all of you lovely quarantined listeners! We are sending you some love and strength in these trying times! And in order to show you that we are having a chat with a special person today. Carrie Grace McQuaid is a former teacher who is now a full-time motivational speaker and spends most of her time traveling around the country spreading joy and kindness! Sound great? We think so! She talks to companies, colleges, sororities, schools and more about how they incorporate more joy and kindness into the workplace and their practices. The current crisis has put traveling on hold for a while, but Carrie is here specifically to help us unpack how you can share the love and offer help in these difficult times! 
She has literally gone viral for her work in this area and we just wanted to bring her on to open up the conversation about feelings and thoughts and how to be kind, open up your capacity for others, take care of your mental space and what to focus on business-wise as we all hunker down for an unsure future. Everything is so unclear at the moment and a lot of things are up in the air, the economy, health, income and everything else! Carrie shares some great action steps for everyone but we would like to say that if you are currently feeling overwhelmed or have too much information on your plate, maybe save this for when you are feeling a bit more receptive. It is a great episode and deserves your attention, so best to make use of it in the right headspace! We really feel that what Carrie is offering can help us be the amazing community of amazing people that we can be, so let's get into it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 02 Apr 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Dance of Spreading Kindness in a Difficult Time with Carrie Grace McQuaid</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>421</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/be6f4924-ae9a-11ec-91b1-4f51d5a63ecc/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome back all of you lovely quarantined listeners! We are sending you some love and strength in these trying times! And in order to show you that we are having a chat with a special person today. Carrie Grace McQuaid is a former teacher who is now...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back all of you lovely quarantined listeners! We are sending you some love and strength in these trying times! And in order to show you that we are having a chat with a special person today. Carrie Grace McQuaid is a former teacher who is now a full-time motivational speaker and spends most of her time traveling around the country spreading joy and kindness! Sound great? We think so! She talks to companies, colleges, sororities, schools and more about how they incorporate more joy and kindness into the workplace and their practices. The current crisis has put traveling on hold for a while, but Carrie is here specifically to help us unpack how you can share the love and offer help in these difficult times! 
She has literally gone viral for her work in this area and we just wanted to bring her on to open up the conversation about feelings and thoughts and how to be kind, open up your capacity for others, take care of your mental space and what to focus on business-wise as we all hunker down for an unsure future. Everything is so unclear at the moment and a lot of things are up in the air, the economy, health, income and everything else! Carrie shares some great action steps for everyone but we would like to say that if you are currently feeling overwhelmed or have too much information on your plate, maybe save this for when you are feeling a bit more receptive. It is a great episode and deserves your attention, so best to make use of it in the right headspace! We really feel that what Carrie is offering can help us be the amazing community of amazing people that we can be, so let's get into it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back all of you lovely quarantined listeners! We are sending you some love and strength in these trying times! And in order to show you that we are having a chat with a special person today. Carrie Grace McQuaid is a former teacher who is now a full-time motivational speaker and spends most of her time traveling around the country spreading joy and kindness! Sound great? We think so! She talks to companies, colleges, sororities, schools and more about how they incorporate more joy and kindness into the workplace and their practices. The current crisis has put traveling on hold for a while, but Carrie is here specifically to help us unpack how you can share the love and offer help in these difficult times! </p><p>She has literally gone viral for her work in this area and we just wanted to bring her on to open up the conversation about feelings and thoughts and how to be kind, open up your capacity for others, take care of your mental space and what to focus on business-wise as we all hunker down for an unsure future. Everything is so unclear at the moment and a lot of things are up in the air, the economy, health, income and everything else! Carrie shares some great action steps for everyone but we would like to say that if you are currently feeling overwhelmed or have too much information on your plate, maybe save this for when you are feeling a bit more receptive. It is a great episode and deserves your attention, so best to make use of it in the right headspace! We really feel that what Carrie is offering can help us be the amazing community of amazing people that we can be, so let's get into it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2218</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a776cabc-a926-40d7-a88f-40d06b8c4fef]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4696038491.mp3?updated=1656442655" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>420: Disruptive Ad Campaigns in a Time of Crisis with Meghan Maydel</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/disruptive-ad-campaigns-in-a-time-of-crisis-with-meghan-maydel</link>
      <description>Before diving into the show we wanted to let our listeners know the date on which this was recorded – March 18th – because we know the world is in a weird place right now. The strategies discussed here are hyper tailored to this moment and things could be totally different by the time you listen! In any case, from our side, we are trying to create a sense of normalcy in our business and within our friends, so we wanted to go ahead with our chat with Meghan Maydel. 
The strategies our dear guest shares today are highly valuable due to their applicability not only in this time of pandemic and crisis but also to other spikes within the world and the industry of advertising in general that could happen in the future. Meghan talks about how advertising doesn’t just have to happen on Facebook and gives a whole bunch of pro tips about other platforms and what using them can look like for you. We will be brainstorming different ways for you to be really effective in your ads today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 31 Mar 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Disruptive Ad Campaigns in a Time of Crisis with Meghan Maydel</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>420</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/bf2694da-ae9a-11ec-91b1-af815440715e/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>These strategies apply not only in times of pandemic and crisis but also to other spikes within the world and the industry of advertising in general that could happen in the future.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Before diving into the show we wanted to let our listeners know the date on which this was recorded – March 18th – because we know the world is in a weird place right now. The strategies discussed here are hyper tailored to this moment and things could be totally different by the time you listen! In any case, from our side, we are trying to create a sense of normalcy in our business and within our friends, so we wanted to go ahead with our chat with Meghan Maydel. 
The strategies our dear guest shares today are highly valuable due to their applicability not only in this time of pandemic and crisis but also to other spikes within the world and the industry of advertising in general that could happen in the future. Meghan talks about how advertising doesn’t just have to happen on Facebook and gives a whole bunch of pro tips about other platforms and what using them can look like for you. We will be brainstorming different ways for you to be really effective in your ads today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Before diving into the show we wanted to let our listeners know the date on which this was recorded – March 18th – because we know the world is in a weird place right now. The strategies discussed here are hyper tailored to this moment and things could be totally different by the time you listen! In any case, from our side, we are trying to create a sense of normalcy in our business and within our friends, so we wanted to go ahead with our chat with Meghan Maydel. </p><p>The strategies our dear guest shares today are highly valuable due to their applicability not only in this time of pandemic and crisis but also to other spikes within the world and the industry of advertising in general that could happen in the future. Meghan talks about how advertising doesn’t just have to happen on Facebook and gives a whole bunch of pro tips about other platforms and what using them can look like for you. We will be brainstorming different ways for you to be really effective in your ads today!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2566</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9e1d0ff5-ab98-4e6d-9578-aa64e796250e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6925326435.mp3?updated=1656442613" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>419: How to Create A Super Productive Work Environment At Home</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-create-a-super-productive-work-environment-at-home</link>
      <description>Today on the Strategy Hour Podcast, we figured that – in light of the current coronavirus restrictions – it might be a good idea to share some strategies for creating a super productive work environment at home. With a great deal of travel suspended, in-person events canceled, schools closed, and employees asked to go home, people around the globe are having to think about how they can remain productive out of the office. 
Some of you might already be working from home, but for some, this might be a first-time experience and we want to help you master the most common challenges when living, working and parenting in the same space. With kids at home, parents are now confronted with the added challenge of having to look after their children while still maintaining work productivity. In this episode, we dish out strategies for getting your to-do-list crossed off, whether you are a business owner, parent, or both!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Mar 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Create A Super Productive Work Environment At Home</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>419</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/bfe8a7dc-ae9a-11ec-91b1-a3f39b75d98b/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the Strategy Hour Podcast, we figured that – in light of the current coronavirus restrictions – it might be a good idea to share some strategies for creating a super productive work environment at home. With a great deal of travel...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the Strategy Hour Podcast, we figured that – in light of the current coronavirus restrictions – it might be a good idea to share some strategies for creating a super productive work environment at home. With a great deal of travel suspended, in-person events canceled, schools closed, and employees asked to go home, people around the globe are having to think about how they can remain productive out of the office. 
Some of you might already be working from home, but for some, this might be a first-time experience and we want to help you master the most common challenges when living, working and parenting in the same space. With kids at home, parents are now confronted with the added challenge of having to look after their children while still maintaining work productivity. In this episode, we dish out strategies for getting your to-do-list crossed off, whether you are a business owner, parent, or both!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the Strategy Hour Podcast, we figured that – in light of the current coronavirus restrictions – it might be a good idea to share some strategies for creating a super productive work environment at home. With a great deal of travel suspended, in-person events canceled, schools closed, and employees asked to go home, people around the globe are having to think about how they can remain productive out of the office. </p><p>Some of you might already be working from home, but for some, this might be a first-time experience and we want to help you master the most common challenges when living, working and parenting in the same space. With kids at home, parents are now confronted with the added challenge of having to look after their children while still maintaining work productivity. In this episode, we dish out strategies for getting your to-do-list crossed off, whether you are a business owner, parent, or both!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1640</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0bc821d1-dd81-4187-bbd4-1a1aed173460]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5158365361.mp3?updated=1652638895" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>418: How to Have Your Best Today with The Best Today(TM) Guide with Shunta Grant</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-have-your-best-today-using-the-best-today-guide-with-shunta-grant</link>
      <description>Today we are joined by our badass biz bestie, Shunta Grant! Shunta has released something amazing that we think so many people in our audience need and in fact a bunch have already started using and loving! It is called The Best Today™ Guide and it is all strategy and no fluff! We will be going over the ins and outs of the guide today, so you can get a sneak peek of what is inside and the strategy behind its creation. 
Shunta is a great example of someone who has taken her business to the next level and is now letting her audience in on some of her wisdom. She is the mind behind Because of Zoe Designs and her new foray into online education promises to be just as successful as what has come before. So without further ado, let's hear what she has to say!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 24 Mar 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Have Your Best Today with The Best Today(TM) Guide with Shunta Grant</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>418</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c0c21076-ae9a-11ec-91b1-533bf9ead06d/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We will be going over the ins and outs of the guide today, so you can get a sneak peek of what is inside and the strategy behind its creation. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are joined by our badass biz bestie, Shunta Grant! Shunta has released something amazing that we think so many people in our audience need and in fact a bunch have already started using and loving! It is called The Best Today™ Guide and it is all strategy and no fluff! We will be going over the ins and outs of the guide today, so you can get a sneak peek of what is inside and the strategy behind its creation. 
Shunta is a great example of someone who has taken her business to the next level and is now letting her audience in on some of her wisdom. She is the mind behind Because of Zoe Designs and her new foray into online education promises to be just as successful as what has come before. So without further ado, let's hear what she has to say!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are joined by our badass biz bestie, Shunta Grant! Shunta has released something amazing that we think so many people in our audience need and in fact a bunch have already started using and loving! It is called The Best Today™ Guide and it is all strategy and no fluff! We will be going over the ins and outs of the guide today, so you can get a sneak peek of what is inside and the strategy behind its creation. </p><p>Shunta is a great example of someone who has taken her business to the next level and is now letting her audience in on some of her wisdom. She is the mind behind Because of Zoe Designs and her new foray into online education promises to be just as successful as what has come before. So without further ado, let's hear what she has to say!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2699</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[863dab71-c8ee-45ef-9d88-6f724cc1045f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4371695292.mp3?updated=1656442487" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>417: 5 Strategies to Grow Your Email List by The Thousands Per Month (4 are free!)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/5-strategies-to-grow-your-email-list-by-the-thousands-per-month-4-are-free</link>
      <description>Every single month we add thousands and thousands of people to our email list, which sounds bananas because when we started getting to the first 10,000 subscribers, it felt unbelievable. It was a lot! So, we want to give you guys a little bit of a vision of what it looks like to grow your email list at a rapid rate in today’s episode. Several of the concepts we are going to cover could be 100% organic. You do not have to utilize paid strategies at all. 
Now, some of these things we definitely have put dollars behind, but some of the concepts without paid dollars are the same! There are more ways to grow your email list than you’re perhaps aware of, and we are going to cover our top five today! We might come up with a few others too though, and just throw them in! So tune in and join us for the ride as we get into the best ways that you can keep those subscribers on the up and up!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 19 Mar 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Strategies to Grow Your Email List by The Thousands Per Month (4 are free!)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>417</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c18f121a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-6706643018f2/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Every single month we add thousands and thousands of people to our email list, which sounds bananas because when we started getting to the first 10,000 subscribers, it felt unbelievable. It was a lot! So, we want to give you guys a little bit of a...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Every single month we add thousands and thousands of people to our email list, which sounds bananas because when we started getting to the first 10,000 subscribers, it felt unbelievable. It was a lot! So, we want to give you guys a little bit of a vision of what it looks like to grow your email list at a rapid rate in today’s episode. Several of the concepts we are going to cover could be 100% organic. You do not have to utilize paid strategies at all. 
Now, some of these things we definitely have put dollars behind, but some of the concepts without paid dollars are the same! There are more ways to grow your email list than you’re perhaps aware of, and we are going to cover our top five today! We might come up with a few others too though, and just throw them in! So tune in and join us for the ride as we get into the best ways that you can keep those subscribers on the up and up!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Every single month we add thousands and thousands of people to our email list, which sounds bananas because when we started getting to the first 10,000 subscribers, it felt unbelievable. It was a lot! So, we want to give you guys a little bit of a vision of what it looks like to grow your email list at a rapid rate in today’s episode. Several of the concepts we are going to cover could be 100% organic. You do not have to utilize paid strategies at all. </p><p>Now, some of these things we definitely have put dollars behind, but some of the concepts without paid dollars are the same! There are more ways to grow your email list than you’re perhaps aware of, and we are going to cover our top five today! We might come up with a few others too though, and just throw them in! So tune in and join us for the ride as we get into the best ways that you can keep those subscribers on the up and up!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2340</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4d0dd619-b834-4e84-9335-a1645c990316]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4830822028.mp3?updated=1652638865" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>416: Not Everyone Has An Internal Monologue with Hannah Chester and Dr. Barbara Shabazz</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/not-everyone-has-an-internal-monologue-with-hannah-chester-and-dr-barbara-shabazz</link>
      <description>At the tail end of January, there was a viral blog post that blew our minds, and since then we have been on the hunt to find others who are experiencing similar things. The post was about a guy who had a bad day because he found out that not everyone has an inner monologue, in other words, they do not talk to themselves. We’ve managed to track down a handful of people who swear that they do not have that internal voice happening at all. One of these people is Hannah Chester. Hannah never realized that there was such a thing as internal monologue until she was diagnosed with ADHD and listened to a podcast about it. 
For her, her thoughts are more like a visualization rather than a conversation that takes place within. When she remembers something that needs to be done, she sees a mental picture of it — there is no inner voice that narrates the scenario to her. We invited Dr. Barbara Shabazz to give us a scientific perspective on internal monologue and how that ties into ADHD, and the four of us have a fascinating conversation about how differently each of us experiences and engages with the world. Join us to hear more about this internal monologue from those who do and those who don’t!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 17 Mar 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Not Everyone Has An Internal Monologue with Hannah Chester and Dr. Barbara Shabazz</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>416</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c24b0a92-ae9a-11ec-91b1-bb8efbf74ef9/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>At the tail end of January, there was a viral blog post that blew our minds, and since then we have been on the hunt to find others who are experiencing similar things. The post was about a guy who had a bad day because he found out that not everyone...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>At the tail end of January, there was a viral blog post that blew our minds, and since then we have been on the hunt to find others who are experiencing similar things. The post was about a guy who had a bad day because he found out that not everyone has an inner monologue, in other words, they do not talk to themselves. We’ve managed to track down a handful of people who swear that they do not have that internal voice happening at all. One of these people is Hannah Chester. Hannah never realized that there was such a thing as internal monologue until she was diagnosed with ADHD and listened to a podcast about it. 
For her, her thoughts are more like a visualization rather than a conversation that takes place within. When she remembers something that needs to be done, she sees a mental picture of it — there is no inner voice that narrates the scenario to her. We invited Dr. Barbara Shabazz to give us a scientific perspective on internal monologue and how that ties into ADHD, and the four of us have a fascinating conversation about how differently each of us experiences and engages with the world. Join us to hear more about this internal monologue from those who do and those who don’t!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>At the tail end of January, there was a viral blog post that blew our minds, and since then we have been on the hunt to find others who are experiencing similar things. The post was about a guy who had a bad day because he found out that not everyone has an inner monologue, in other words, they do not talk to themselves. We’ve managed to track down a handful of people who swear that they do not have that internal voice happening at all. One of these people is Hannah Chester. Hannah never realized that there was such a thing as internal monologue until she was diagnosed with ADHD and listened to a podcast about it. </p><p>For her, her thoughts are more like a visualization rather than a conversation that takes place within. When she remembers something that needs to be done, she sees a mental picture of it — there is no inner voice that narrates the scenario to her. We invited Dr. Barbara Shabazz to give us a scientific perspective on internal monologue and how that ties into ADHD, and the four of us have a fascinating conversation about how differently each of us experiences and engages with the world. Join us to hear more about this internal monologue from those who do and those who don’t!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2266</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0cafa853-4d6f-4fba-9567-ec1ad00cfd76]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4346634143.mp3?updated=1652638758" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>415: Love is Blind: Lessons for Your Business from Netflix's Hit Reality Show</title>
      <link>https://strategyhour.libsyn.com/415-love-is-blind-lessons-for-your-business-from-netflixs-hit-reality-show</link>
      <description>Like most of the US population, we are currently obsessed with the new hit show on Netflix Love is Blind! Today we are picking apart why we think this has been a viral sensation that has hit our country, and most importantly, what takeaways there are for your business. It may seem odd that we are comparing a reality show about finding love to business but you will be surprised at the similarities – especially when you look beyond what happens in public view. And if you haven’t watched this show or aren’t caught up, you might want to wait before listening to this episode because there will be spoilers. 
Love is Blind came out about two weeks ago but Emylee was late to the party since reality television is not her thing, but after watching the trailer, she was hooked! Let’s be honest though: reality shows are trashy more often than not, and some of us don’t even like admitting that we watch them – it’s a guilty pleasure for many. But they can be a rich source of learning life and business lessons. In this episode, we compare relationships to business and the principles that apply equally to both. Just as the dating stage is required to build trust between two people, so business owners need to find strategies to attract customers and then to establish themselves as trustworthy and relatable. We also talk about the importance of showing up as your true self rather than trying to be who you think others want you to be — all of which we relate to the choices of the contestants in our new favorite show. Let’s jump in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 12 Mar 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Love is Blind: Lessons for Your Business from Netflix's Hit Reality Show</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>415</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c302d870-ae9a-11ec-91b1-4b25086a33dd/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Like most of the US population, we are currently obsessed with the new hit show on Netflix Love is Blind! Today we are picking apart why we think this has been a viral sensation that has hit our country, and most importantly, what takeaways there are...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Like most of the US population, we are currently obsessed with the new hit show on Netflix Love is Blind! Today we are picking apart why we think this has been a viral sensation that has hit our country, and most importantly, what takeaways there are for your business. It may seem odd that we are comparing a reality show about finding love to business but you will be surprised at the similarities – especially when you look beyond what happens in public view. And if you haven’t watched this show or aren’t caught up, you might want to wait before listening to this episode because there will be spoilers. 
Love is Blind came out about two weeks ago but Emylee was late to the party since reality television is not her thing, but after watching the trailer, she was hooked! Let’s be honest though: reality shows are trashy more often than not, and some of us don’t even like admitting that we watch them – it’s a guilty pleasure for many. But they can be a rich source of learning life and business lessons. In this episode, we compare relationships to business and the principles that apply equally to both. Just as the dating stage is required to build trust between two people, so business owners need to find strategies to attract customers and then to establish themselves as trustworthy and relatable. We also talk about the importance of showing up as your true self rather than trying to be who you think others want you to be — all of which we relate to the choices of the contestants in our new favorite show. Let’s jump in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Like most of the US population, we are currently obsessed with the new hit show on Netflix <em>Love is Blind</em>! Today we are picking apart why we think this has been a viral sensation that has hit our country, and most importantly, what takeaways there are for your business. It may seem odd that we are comparing a reality show about finding love to business but you will be surprised at the similarities – especially when you look beyond what happens in public view. And if you haven’t watched this show or aren’t caught up, you might want to wait before listening to this episode because there will be spoilers. </p><p><em>Love is Blind</em> came out about two weeks ago but Emylee was late to the party since reality television is not her thing, but after watching the trailer, she was hooked! Let’s be honest though: reality shows are trashy more often than not, and some of us don’t even like admitting that we watch them – it’s a guilty pleasure for many. But they can be a rich source of learning life and business lessons. In this episode, we compare relationships to business and the principles that apply equally to both. Just as the dating stage is required to build trust between two people, so business owners need to find strategies to attract customers and then to establish themselves as trustworthy and relatable. We also talk about the importance of showing up as your true self rather than trying to be who you think others want you to be — all of which we relate to the choices of the contestants in our new favorite show. Let’s jump in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3012</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8df7dbd1-4c19-4348-bea1-4714f87224ab]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8543138503.mp3?updated=1652638672" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>414: Facebook Ads in 2020, Features to Pay Attention to on Instagram &amp; Organic Marketing that Works with Tony Rulli of Intentional Spark</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/facebook-ads-in-2020-features-to-pay-attention-to-on-instagram-organic-marketing-that-works-with-tony-rulli-of-intentional-spark</link>
      <description>Today on the show we have Tony Rulli, the co-founder, and CEO of Intentional Spark, an amazing paid advertising consultancy which we are proud to have the service of! He is the lead strategist for all their paid marketing campaigns which include Facebook ads, AdWords, web re-targeting, Instagram – the whole nine yards! As we said before, he is our ad guy, so Intentional Spark runs all the things behind-the-scenes for us which you, our listeners, see all the time!  
In this episode, we are diving in and talking about a bit of the mechanics behind how these platforms function regarding sales and building an audience. We’re breaking down and picking Tony’s marketing brain all about the future of Facebook and Instagram, and what the next hot features are that everybody should be paying attention to. We also dabble into a little bit of conspiracy theories and a short clip of some of our favorite shows. So this is a really good smorgasbord but it’s all things nerding out about marketing and it should be really enjoyable. Tony also shares a freebie at the very end all about how you can start getting set up with your Pixel, and a little bit on how to read an ad report, so definitely make sure you’re listening till the end so you can grab that link!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 10 Mar 2020 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Facebook Ads in 2020, Features to Pay Attention to on Instagram &amp; Organic Marketing that Works with Tony Rulli of Intentional Spark</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>414</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c3bb58f0-ae9a-11ec-91b1-57508b50c925/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tony is the lead strategist for paid marketing campaigns which include Facebook ads, AdWords, web re-targeting, Instagram – the whole nine yards!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we have Tony Rulli, the co-founder, and CEO of Intentional Spark, an amazing paid advertising consultancy which we are proud to have the service of! He is the lead strategist for all their paid marketing campaigns which include Facebook ads, AdWords, web re-targeting, Instagram – the whole nine yards! As we said before, he is our ad guy, so Intentional Spark runs all the things behind-the-scenes for us which you, our listeners, see all the time!  
In this episode, we are diving in and talking about a bit of the mechanics behind how these platforms function regarding sales and building an audience. We’re breaking down and picking Tony’s marketing brain all about the future of Facebook and Instagram, and what the next hot features are that everybody should be paying attention to. We also dabble into a little bit of conspiracy theories and a short clip of some of our favorite shows. So this is a really good smorgasbord but it’s all things nerding out about marketing and it should be really enjoyable. Tony also shares a freebie at the very end all about how you can start getting set up with your Pixel, and a little bit on how to read an ad report, so definitely make sure you’re listening till the end so you can grab that link!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we have Tony Rulli, the co-founder, and CEO of Intentional Spark, an amazing paid advertising consultancy which we are proud to have the service of! He is the lead strategist for all their paid marketing campaigns which include Facebook ads, AdWords, web re-targeting, Instagram – the whole nine yards! As we said before, he is our ad guy, so Intentional Spark runs all the things behind-the-scenes for us which you, our listeners, see all the time!  </p><p>In this episode, we are diving in and talking about a bit of the mechanics behind how these platforms function regarding sales and building an audience. We’re breaking down and picking Tony’s marketing brain all about the future of Facebook and Instagram, and what the next hot features are that everybody should be paying attention to. We also dabble into a little bit of conspiracy theories and a short clip of some of our favorite shows. So this is a really good smorgasbord but it’s all things nerding out about marketing and it should be really enjoyable. Tony also shares a freebie at the very end all about how you can start getting set up with your Pixel, and a little bit on how to read an ad report, so definitely make sure you’re listening till the end so you can grab that link!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3038</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[37efe164-0f74-48b1-bf0a-f41fdb809196]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1834823501.mp3?updated=1656442471" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>413: January Profit Report: 46% Profit on a Historically Low Month</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/january-profit-report-46-profit-on-a-historically-low-month</link>
      <description>Hey friends! We are back for another profit report. It is time to break down January’s profit, the first profit report of 2020, and we are super excited! If you’re new here and this is the first profit report that you’re listening to it might be a little bit different than what you’ve seen floating around online where people do ‘income reports’. We decided last fall to change up the narrative, not only for ourselves and our mentality when we’re talking about business and our own goals but also for the ‘comparisonitis’ that happens. Sometimes when you hear income reports where people list high figures and goals it gets really overwhelming and unattainable, and we can’t really compare that progress or those strategies to our business because we feel like the expectations are so different. 
So, what we have tried to do is share percentages and profit. We have made it a goal to focus more on profit than big, shiny, sexy revenue, and that goal is continuing into 2020. It feels really good too! So, throughout this episode, we’re going to share percentages of products or expenses in our own business so you can begin to see the weight that those things bear on us, and can make easier comparisons with you own business too!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 05 Mar 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>January Profit Report: 46% Profit on a Historically Low Month</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>413</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c5452da4-ae9a-11ec-91b1-efc951fd3502/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We share percentages and profit, which we think will be more helpful for you than just talking about big, shiny, sexy revenue. Nobody needs comparisonitis’ </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey friends! We are back for another profit report. It is time to break down January’s profit, the first profit report of 2020, and we are super excited! If you’re new here and this is the first profit report that you’re listening to it might be a little bit different than what you’ve seen floating around online where people do ‘income reports’. We decided last fall to change up the narrative, not only for ourselves and our mentality when we’re talking about business and our own goals but also for the ‘comparisonitis’ that happens. Sometimes when you hear income reports where people list high figures and goals it gets really overwhelming and unattainable, and we can’t really compare that progress or those strategies to our business because we feel like the expectations are so different. 
So, what we have tried to do is share percentages and profit. We have made it a goal to focus more on profit than big, shiny, sexy revenue, and that goal is continuing into 2020. It feels really good too! So, throughout this episode, we’re going to share percentages of products or expenses in our own business so you can begin to see the weight that those things bear on us, and can make easier comparisons with you own business too!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey friends! We are back for another profit report. It is time to break down January’s profit, the first profit report of 2020, and we are super excited! If you’re new here and this is the first profit report that you’re listening to it might be a little bit different than what you’ve seen floating around online where people do ‘income reports’. We decided last fall to change up the narrative, not only for ourselves and our mentality when we’re talking about business and our own goals but also for the ‘comparisonitis’ that happens. Sometimes when you hear income reports where people list high figures and goals it gets really overwhelming and unattainable, and we can’t really compare that progress or those strategies to our business because we feel like the expectations are so different. </p><p>So, what we have tried to do is share percentages and profit. We have made it a goal to focus more on profit than big, shiny, sexy revenue, and that goal is continuing into 2020. It feels really good too! So, throughout this episode, we’re going to share percentages of products or expenses in our own business so you can begin to see the weight that those things bear on us, and can make easier comparisons with you own business too!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3080</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[94d3b7a0-5a96-4e19-ae8f-03031cd358b1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3779134740.mp3?updated=1656442414" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>412: That Awkward Teenager Business Growth Phase Its Time to Get Unstuck</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/that-awkward-teenager-business-growth-phase-its-time-to-get-unstuck</link>
      <description>A relevant question recently popped up in our Facebook community, one we felt warranted some unpacking. The question came from someone who wanted to hear from others whose businesses were also passed the early stage and now in the season of awkward adolescence. You have made some sales and lined up loyal clients, but you still have higher goals and are eager to learn the next steps. Frankly, you need reliable strategies to get you past this almost-entrepreneur phase ASAP! 
We’re in the unique position to offer our advice not only because Boss Project has mastered that stage but because our side hustles are now entering the teenage realm, so we are having to go through all of that again – at this moment. But rather than bumming us out, we’re excited about this challenge because it feels familiar now; we’ve been here before and therefore we have a good idea about navigating it. Tune in for advice about growing through the awkward teenager phase and running your business like a boss!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 03 Mar 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>That Awkward Teenager Business Growth Phase Its Time to Get Unstuck</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>412</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c5eb24f2-ae9a-11ec-91b1-67c1e8370be7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>A relevant question recently popped up in our Facebook community, one we felt warranted some unpacking. The question came from someone who wanted to hear from others whose businesses were also passed the early stage and now in the season of awkward...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>A relevant question recently popped up in our Facebook community, one we felt warranted some unpacking. The question came from someone who wanted to hear from others whose businesses were also passed the early stage and now in the season of awkward adolescence. You have made some sales and lined up loyal clients, but you still have higher goals and are eager to learn the next steps. Frankly, you need reliable strategies to get you past this almost-entrepreneur phase ASAP! 
We’re in the unique position to offer our advice not only because Boss Project has mastered that stage but because our side hustles are now entering the teenage realm, so we are having to go through all of that again – at this moment. But rather than bumming us out, we’re excited about this challenge because it feels familiar now; we’ve been here before and therefore we have a good idea about navigating it. Tune in for advice about growing through the awkward teenager phase and running your business like a boss!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A relevant question recently popped up in our Facebook community, one we felt warranted some unpacking. The question came from someone who wanted to hear from others whose businesses were also passed the early stage and now in the season of awkward adolescence. You have made some sales and lined up loyal clients, but you still have higher goals and are eager to learn the next steps. Frankly, you need reliable strategies to get you past this almost-entrepreneur phase ASAP! </p><p>We’re in the unique position to offer our advice not only because Boss Project has mastered that stage but because our side hustles are now entering the teenage realm, so we are having to go through all of that again – at this moment. But rather than bumming us out, we’re excited about this challenge because it feels familiar now; we’ve been here before and therefore we have a good idea about navigating it. Tune in for advice about growing through the awkward teenager phase and running your business like a boss!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2770</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[65749dda-2212-42b2-b3eb-d79df2eac7ef]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8521807357.mp3?updated=1652638517" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>411: Life Lessons from Oprah: It's Time to Give Y-O-U a New Focus</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/life-lessons-from-oprah-its-time-to-give-y-o-u-a-new-focus</link>
      <description>It’s probably not much of a long shot to assume that many people dream they could meet Oprah in real life. Indeed Abagail spent much of her youth watching the Oprah as soon as she was old enough. One thing she didn’t realize though was that in all Oprah’s years of her show, she focused so much on everyone else’s story that one rarely heard about her personal life. Oprah protected her personal life for a lot of reasons but Abagail had an opportunity to spend some time with her recently, which sounds unbelievable but it's true! 
During her time with Oprah, Abagail learned some really interesting things about how the talk show legend approached habits and intentionality, and the role that these played in her huge success. The things Oprah taught Abagail lend huge insight both into her personal life and business, and are tips that anybody can take away and apply to themselves. Emylee hadn’t heard much about the trip yet so in this episode, Abagail walks her through some of the exercises around intentionality that Oprah did with her over the weekend to check how they resonate with her. The exercises gave Abagail some new perspectives on things she thought she had a good handle on so make sure you follow along for today’s show.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 27 Feb 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Life Lessons from Oprah: It's Time to Give Y-O-U a New Focus</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>411</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c6bce5c8-ae9a-11ec-91b1-17e10fd4587f/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>It’s probably not much of a long shot to assume that many people dream they could meet Oprah in real life. Indeed Abagail spent much of her youth watching the Oprah as soon as she was old enough. One thing she didn’t realize though was that in all...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It’s probably not much of a long shot to assume that many people dream they could meet Oprah in real life. Indeed Abagail spent much of her youth watching the Oprah as soon as she was old enough. One thing she didn’t realize though was that in all Oprah’s years of her show, she focused so much on everyone else’s story that one rarely heard about her personal life. Oprah protected her personal life for a lot of reasons but Abagail had an opportunity to spend some time with her recently, which sounds unbelievable but it's true! 
During her time with Oprah, Abagail learned some really interesting things about how the talk show legend approached habits and intentionality, and the role that these played in her huge success. The things Oprah taught Abagail lend huge insight both into her personal life and business, and are tips that anybody can take away and apply to themselves. Emylee hadn’t heard much about the trip yet so in this episode, Abagail walks her through some of the exercises around intentionality that Oprah did with her over the weekend to check how they resonate with her. The exercises gave Abagail some new perspectives on things she thought she had a good handle on so make sure you follow along for today’s show.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It’s probably not much of a long shot to assume that many people dream they could meet Oprah in real life. Indeed Abagail spent much of her youth watching the Oprah as soon as she was old enough. One thing she didn’t realize though was that in all Oprah’s years of her show, she focused so much on everyone else’s story that one rarely heard about her personal life. Oprah protected her personal life for a lot of reasons but Abagail had an opportunity to spend some time with her recently, which sounds unbelievable but it's true! </p><p>During her time with Oprah, Abagail learned some really interesting things about how the talk show legend approached habits and intentionality, and the role that these played in her huge success. The things Oprah taught Abagail lend huge insight both into her personal life and business, and are tips that anybody can take away and apply to themselves. Emylee hadn’t heard much about the trip yet so in this episode, Abagail walks her through some of the exercises around intentionality that Oprah did with her over the weekend to check how they resonate with her. The exercises gave Abagail some new perspectives on things she thought she had a good handle on so make sure you follow along for today’s show.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2847</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a55dd880-69d5-44ea-af36-bf9729050959]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1933533241.mp3?updated=1652638381" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>410: Validating Your Offer and Leaning Into Your Role as Founder with Jessica Korthuis of Sohuis</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/validating-your-offer-and-leaning-into-your-role-as-founder-with-jessica-korthuis-of-sohuis</link>
      <description>Life as a successful female entrepreneur can be frazzling with all the different responsibilities you have to take on. Sometimes it can be difficult to know which thing to tackle first! Today on the podcast we have Jessica Korthuis, founder of Sohuis, a marketing and branding education resources company that provides on-demand training for early-stage female entrepreneurs. Jessica is a powerhouse brand strategist marketer, and she has worked with brands like Red Bull, TEDxWomen, Girls Who Code, Stanford University, Bloomingdale’s, and Florida Institute of Technology. 
In this episode, we are talking about all the differences between small business ownership and entrepreneurship. We cover marketing tips, feeling the need to do everything and be everywhere, and how to prioritize the stuff that is actually working in your business so that you can move forward. Joining this discussion, you’ll hear some top tips for validating your product, how to stop being a perfectionist and take action, and the value of being transparent to build audience trust. There is a lot of mindset-related stuff that we are tackling today! Jessica is really in tune with female founders, and the different way intuition works when running a business. So, if you’re feeling a little overwhelmed about what is on your plate and what you have to handle, perfect! This episode will definitely provide some clarity fo you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 25 Feb 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Validating Your Offer and Leaning Into Your Role as Founder with Jessica Korthuis of Sohuis</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>410</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c75c1936-ae9a-11ec-91b1-bf576b129729/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Life as a successful female entrepreneur can be frazzling with all the different responsibilities you have to take on. Sometimes it can be difficult to know which thing to tackle first! Today on the podcast we have Jessica Korthuis, founder of Sohuis,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Life as a successful female entrepreneur can be frazzling with all the different responsibilities you have to take on. Sometimes it can be difficult to know which thing to tackle first! Today on the podcast we have Jessica Korthuis, founder of Sohuis, a marketing and branding education resources company that provides on-demand training for early-stage female entrepreneurs. Jessica is a powerhouse brand strategist marketer, and she has worked with brands like Red Bull, TEDxWomen, Girls Who Code, Stanford University, Bloomingdale’s, and Florida Institute of Technology. 
In this episode, we are talking about all the differences between small business ownership and entrepreneurship. We cover marketing tips, feeling the need to do everything and be everywhere, and how to prioritize the stuff that is actually working in your business so that you can move forward. Joining this discussion, you’ll hear some top tips for validating your product, how to stop being a perfectionist and take action, and the value of being transparent to build audience trust. There is a lot of mindset-related stuff that we are tackling today! Jessica is really in tune with female founders, and the different way intuition works when running a business. So, if you’re feeling a little overwhelmed about what is on your plate and what you have to handle, perfect! This episode will definitely provide some clarity fo you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Life as a successful female entrepreneur can be frazzling with all the different responsibilities you have to take on. Sometimes it can be difficult to know which thing to tackle first! Today on the podcast we have Jessica Korthuis, founder of Sohuis, a marketing and branding education resources company that provides on-demand training for early-stage female entrepreneurs. Jessica is a powerhouse brand strategist marketer, and she has worked with brands like Red Bull, TEDxWomen, Girls Who Code, Stanford University, Bloomingdale’s, and Florida Institute of Technology. </p><p>In this episode, we are talking about all the differences between small business ownership and entrepreneurship. We cover marketing tips, feeling the need to do everything and be everywhere, and how to prioritize the stuff that is actually working in your business so that you can move forward. Joining this discussion, you’ll hear some top tips for validating your product, how to stop being a perfectionist and take action, and the value of being transparent to build audience trust. There is a lot of mindset-related stuff that we are tackling today! Jessica is really in tune with female founders, and the different way intuition works when running a business. So, if you’re feeling a little overwhelmed about what is on your plate and what you have to handle, perfect! This episode will definitely provide some clarity fo you.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2540</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3a279a5b-9d9a-45e8-be47-dbcfc97dbf17]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1225451117.mp3?updated=1652638307" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>409: Why Strangers Support You More Than The People You Actually Know</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-strangers-support-you-more-than-the-people-you-actually-know</link>
      <description>Oftentimes the people closest to us are the most apprehensive about our business goals and dreams, and this can be isolating. You worry that perhaps you have done the wrong thing as their lack of enthusiasm or support makes you doubt yourself. But have you ever considered that this might be because you going for your dream might remind them that they are stuck? Maybe their skepticism is more about them and how your aspirations make them feel – how it highlights their passivity or the rut they find themselves in. Conversely, it could be that your loved ones offer the wrong kind of support or they share their fears around your decisions because they do want you to succeed. 
It could be that your spouse is more anxious than you are and that he or she is uncomfortable with you taking risks. As we all know, being an entrepreneur is all about insecurity and unpredictability! In this episode, we share our thoughts about why strangers are often more supportive than our loved ones. We talk about setting boundaries, not giving power to the wrong people, keeping a healthy perspective on the opinions of others, and why it is okay to unfollow people on social media!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 20 Feb 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why Strangers Support You More Than The People You Actually Know</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>409</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c80c78b2-ae9a-11ec-91b1-d3f3542fe5b0/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Oftentimes the people closest to us are the most apprehensive about our business goals and dreams, and this can be isolating. You worry that perhaps you have done the wrong thing as their lack of enthusiasm or support makes you doubt yourself. But...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Oftentimes the people closest to us are the most apprehensive about our business goals and dreams, and this can be isolating. You worry that perhaps you have done the wrong thing as their lack of enthusiasm or support makes you doubt yourself. But have you ever considered that this might be because you going for your dream might remind them that they are stuck? Maybe their skepticism is more about them and how your aspirations make them feel – how it highlights their passivity or the rut they find themselves in. Conversely, it could be that your loved ones offer the wrong kind of support or they share their fears around your decisions because they do want you to succeed. 
It could be that your spouse is more anxious than you are and that he or she is uncomfortable with you taking risks. As we all know, being an entrepreneur is all about insecurity and unpredictability! In this episode, we share our thoughts about why strangers are often more supportive than our loved ones. We talk about setting boundaries, not giving power to the wrong people, keeping a healthy perspective on the opinions of others, and why it is okay to unfollow people on social media!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Oftentimes the people closest to us are the most apprehensive about our business goals and dreams, and this can be isolating. You worry that perhaps you have done the wrong thing as their lack of enthusiasm or support makes you doubt yourself. But have you ever considered that this might be because you going for your dream might remind them that they are stuck? Maybe their skepticism is more about them and how your aspirations make them feel – how it highlights their passivity or the rut they find themselves in. Conversely, it could be that your loved ones offer the wrong kind of support or they share their fears around your decisions because they do want you to succeed. </p><p>It could be that your spouse is more anxious than you are and that he or she is uncomfortable with you taking risks. As we all know, being an entrepreneur is all about insecurity and unpredictability! In this episode, we share our thoughts about why strangers are often more supportive than our loved ones. We talk about setting boundaries, not giving power to the wrong people, keeping a healthy perspective on the opinions of others, and why it is okay to unfollow people on social media!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2567</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4a8edfae-cc00-4e60-aed1-e54e1a793ee3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3289564514.mp3?updated=1652638119" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>408: How to Create Authority and Authentic Relationships You Can Leverage In Your Business with Jaclyn Mellone</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-create-authority-and-authentic-relationships-you-can-leverage-in-your-business-with-jaclyn-mellone</link>
      <description>Relationships can make all the difference in your business and as many of us have learned, focussing on connections and networking in the right way can take your biz from quiet to booming! Our guest today is Jaclyn Mellon and she helps experts exponentially grow their businesses by becoming an authority in their space. One of the ways that she helps them do this is through authentic relationships. Jaclyn is a coach, strategist, keynote speaker, momma, guac lover and host of the Go-to Gal Podcast! In this episode, she shares how to create strategic relationships and how to utilize them as more than friendships without being weird about it!
For Jaclyn, it all starts with an authentic connection and she breaks down exactly what that looks like. We also talk about how this translates into creating more friends in your own space and work environment and how to utilize these to continue to grow your business in the long term. We cover leveraging relationships, creating intimate connections that fill your cup and how to jumpstart your biz in a big way!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 18 Feb 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Create Authority and Authentic Relationships You Can Leverage In Your Business with Jaclyn Mellone</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>408</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c8c87fc6-ae9a-11ec-91b1-2b99c6c48c68/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Relationships can make all the difference in your business and as many of us have learned, focussing on connections and networking in the right way can take your biz from quiet to booming! Our guest today is Jaclyn Mellon and she helps experts...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Relationships can make all the difference in your business and as many of us have learned, focussing on connections and networking in the right way can take your biz from quiet to booming! Our guest today is Jaclyn Mellon and she helps experts exponentially grow their businesses by becoming an authority in their space. One of the ways that she helps them do this is through authentic relationships. Jaclyn is a coach, strategist, keynote speaker, momma, guac lover and host of the Go-to Gal Podcast! In this episode, she shares how to create strategic relationships and how to utilize them as more than friendships without being weird about it!
For Jaclyn, it all starts with an authentic connection and she breaks down exactly what that looks like. We also talk about how this translates into creating more friends in your own space and work environment and how to utilize these to continue to grow your business in the long term. We cover leveraging relationships, creating intimate connections that fill your cup and how to jumpstart your biz in a big way!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Relationships can make all the difference in your business and as many of us have learned, focussing on connections and networking in the right way can take your biz from quiet to booming! Our guest today is Jaclyn Mellon and she helps experts exponentially grow their businesses by becoming an authority in their space. One of the ways that she helps them do this is through authentic relationships. Jaclyn is a coach, strategist, keynote speaker, momma, guac lover and host of the Go-to Gal Podcast! In this episode, she shares how to create strategic relationships and how to utilize them as more than friendships without being weird about it!</p><p>For Jaclyn, it all starts with an authentic connection and she breaks down exactly what that looks like. We also talk about how this translates into creating more friends in your own space and work environment and how to utilize these to continue to grow your business in the long term. We cover leveraging relationships, creating intimate connections that fill your cup and how to jumpstart your biz in a big way!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3206</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[15ffff77-ec72-46b4-b46c-34e269882085]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2700226509.mp3?updated=1652638062" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>407: How We've Stayed Biz Partners for Nearly 5 Years</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-weve-stayed-biz-partners-for-nearly-5-years</link>
      <description>Someone asked us the other day why it is we still work together after all these years and how we have managed to stay afloat as a business partnership. Most biz partnerships end before the five-year mark and it is crazy that we are approaching that milestone very soon! The truth is we do not really know the answer to the question, so we are taking this opportunity to talk it out and share what we think may have helped to keep us going! 
Whether it comes down to balancing our friendship with our business goals or simply maturing together in our venture, we are here to lay it all out for you! We have had a few episodes of the podcast that have dealt with this subject in the past, so definitely go back and check those out if you have not listened to them already. There is something very special and magical about our partnership that is hard to explain in words, but we are still going to try!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 13 Feb 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How We've Stayed Biz Partners for Nearly 5 Years</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>407</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c96f0260-ae9a-11ec-91b1-efa2851ae1ef/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Someone asked us the other day why it is we still work together after all these years and how we have managed to stay afloat as a business partnership. Most biz partnerships end before the five-year mark and it is crazy that we are approaching that...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Someone asked us the other day why it is we still work together after all these years and how we have managed to stay afloat as a business partnership. Most biz partnerships end before the five-year mark and it is crazy that we are approaching that milestone very soon! The truth is we do not really know the answer to the question, so we are taking this opportunity to talk it out and share what we think may have helped to keep us going! 
Whether it comes down to balancing our friendship with our business goals or simply maturing together in our venture, we are here to lay it all out for you! We have had a few episodes of the podcast that have dealt with this subject in the past, so definitely go back and check those out if you have not listened to them already. There is something very special and magical about our partnership that is hard to explain in words, but we are still going to try!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Someone asked us the other day why it is we still work together after all these years and how we have managed to stay afloat as a business partnership. Most biz partnerships end before the five-year mark and it is crazy that we are approaching that milestone very soon! The truth is we do not really know the answer to the question, so we are taking this opportunity to talk it out and share what we think may have helped to keep us going! </p><p>Whether it comes down to balancing our friendship with our business goals or simply maturing together in our venture, we are here to lay it all out for you! We have had a few episodes of the podcast that have dealt with this subject in the past, so definitely go back and check those out if you have not listened to them already. There is something very special and magical about our partnership that is hard to explain in words, but we are still going to try!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2099</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0f9061ff-38cd-491e-8610-a84bd46df1ff]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3371114511.mp3?updated=1652637998" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>406: How to Cycle Sync Your Business with Laura Charelle of Balanced Bombshells</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-cycle-sync-your-business-with-laura-charelle-of-balanced-bombshells</link>
      <description>Balanced Bombshells is a health and lifestyle brand for high performing women and we are very lucky to have the brains behind the business, Laura Charelle, as our guest today! Laura teaches women how to use their hormones to benefit their active and busy lives and she reminds us that hormones are way more than just your period, fertility and your mother's menopause problems! They impact our thoughts, energy levels and you know they can affect your waistline too! Today we are focussing on how your hormones affect your biz and Laura tells us about the increasingly popular idea of cycle syncing, something that has been coming up in our community more and more. It is all about understanding what your body is going through at different stages of your cycle, all month long and finding out which time is the best for different activities. 
Better self-knowledge can lead to improved communication, relationships, productivity and help you achieve what you want out of your life! We recommend that you listen to this episode in full and then go back and take notes on a second listen, there is that much good stuff you do not want to miss! Laura gives us loads of information, free resources and enough to get you really inspired and motivated. We have always felt that we are not really qualified to talk about this topic but have been aware of its importance so we are really pumped to get to share all of this with you all!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 11 Feb 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Cycle Sync Your Business with Laura Charelle of Balanced Bombshells</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>406</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ca0fcf06-ae9a-11ec-91b1-4f8273c19a1c/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Balanced Bombshells is a health and lifestyle brand for high performing women and we are very lucky to have the brains behind the business, Laura Charelle, as our guest today! Laura teaches women how to use their hormones to benefit their active and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Balanced Bombshells is a health and lifestyle brand for high performing women and we are very lucky to have the brains behind the business, Laura Charelle, as our guest today! Laura teaches women how to use their hormones to benefit their active and busy lives and she reminds us that hormones are way more than just your period, fertility and your mother's menopause problems! They impact our thoughts, energy levels and you know they can affect your waistline too! Today we are focussing on how your hormones affect your biz and Laura tells us about the increasingly popular idea of cycle syncing, something that has been coming up in our community more and more. It is all about understanding what your body is going through at different stages of your cycle, all month long and finding out which time is the best for different activities. 
Better self-knowledge can lead to improved communication, relationships, productivity and help you achieve what you want out of your life! We recommend that you listen to this episode in full and then go back and take notes on a second listen, there is that much good stuff you do not want to miss! Laura gives us loads of information, free resources and enough to get you really inspired and motivated. We have always felt that we are not really qualified to talk about this topic but have been aware of its importance so we are really pumped to get to share all of this with you all!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Balanced Bombshells is a health and lifestyle brand for high performing women and we are very lucky to have the brains behind the business, Laura Charelle, as our guest today! Laura teaches women how to use their hormones to benefit their active and busy lives and she reminds us that hormones are way more than just your period, fertility and your mother's menopause problems! They impact our thoughts, energy levels and you know they can affect your waistline too! Today we are focussing on how your hormones affect your biz and Laura tells us about the increasingly popular idea of cycle syncing, something that has been coming up in our community more and more. It is all about understanding what your body is going through at different stages of your cycle, all month long and finding out which time is the best for different activities. </p><p>Better self-knowledge can lead to improved communication, relationships, productivity and help you achieve what you want out of your life! We recommend that you listen to this episode in full and then go back and take notes on a second listen, there is that much good stuff you do not want to miss! Laura gives us loads of information, free resources and enough to get you really inspired and motivated. We have always felt that we are not really qualified to talk about this topic but have been aware of its importance so we are really pumped to get to share all of this with you all!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2798</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[70306388-18c0-4c1e-8025-ea52d4147a7c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3046378335.mp3?updated=1652637918" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>405: Selling Without a Website: Strategies to Land High Paying Clients (Even if You Don’t Have a Website)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/selling-without-a-website-strategies-to-land-high-paying-clients-even-if-you-dont-have-a-website</link>
      <description>For those of you that do not know, we used to work directly with clients, Emylee as a photographer, Abagail as a graphic designer and then as a branding and marketing company together! When you work clients in this way, selling packages and presenting offers there are strategic ways to do this that can improve your results and help you sell for higher price points. 
This is where we started before diving fully into the online education space. In today's show we want to help you get better at this selling process and here's the good news, you don't even need a website to do it! Listen to this episode to get going, growing and making more money and make sure to listen to the end when we drop some info on two great tools we have set up for you and your business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 06 Feb 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Selling Without a Website: Strategies to Land High Paying Clients (Even if You Don’t Have a Website)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>405</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/caba71fe-ae9a-11ec-91b1-efc8d51769b7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>For those of you that do not know, we used to work directly with clients, Emylee as a photographer, Abagail as a graphic designer and then as a branding and marketing company together! When you work clients in this way, selling packages and presenting...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>For those of you that do not know, we used to work directly with clients, Emylee as a photographer, Abagail as a graphic designer and then as a branding and marketing company together! When you work clients in this way, selling packages and presenting offers there are strategic ways to do this that can improve your results and help you sell for higher price points. 
This is where we started before diving fully into the online education space. In today's show we want to help you get better at this selling process and here's the good news, you don't even need a website to do it! Listen to this episode to get going, growing and making more money and make sure to listen to the end when we drop some info on two great tools we have set up for you and your business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For those of you that do not know, we used to work directly with clients, Emylee as a photographer, Abagail as a graphic designer and then as a branding and marketing company together! When you work clients in this way, selling packages and presenting offers there are strategic ways to do this that can improve your results and help you sell for higher price points. </p><p>This is where we started before diving fully into the online education space. In today's show we want to help you get better at this selling process and here's the good news, you don't even need a website to do it! Listen to this episode to get going, growing and making more money and make sure to listen to the end when we drop some info on two great tools we have set up for you and your business!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2272</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[efd86d17-d20f-481d-b4aa-954ac5cdaa0e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4909805058.mp3?updated=1652637828" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>404: 3 Resources to Create Your Next Opt-in, Grow Your List, and Make More Sales</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/3-resources-to-create-your-next-opt-in-grow-your-list-and-make-more-sales</link>
      <description>Hey, Friends! Let’s talk about email, opt-ins, lead magnets, freebies, and everything else you worry about in your efforts to grow your email list. While you can move a business forward without an email list, you will hit a point where your growth slows down quite drastically, so leveraging email as a platform to engage your audience and remind them about your awesome product or service is a smart move. 
In this episode of Strategy Hour, we break down exactly what an opt-in is, the resources you need to set it up, and what kind of value they can bring to your business. We dish out opt-in ideas for a variety of business types and give you the best practices for introducing a new audience member to you, your business, and what you can offer to help solve their problems. Knowing the steps that newbies typically go through as they convert from an opt-in to buy-in is super important as it will help you to be intentional in designing the sequence that gets them there. We also tackle the common question of what to do with those who have opted-in but who are not purchasing anything and give you plenty of all-round great advice for optimizing your email.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 04 Feb 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>3 Resources to Create Your Next Opt-in, Grow Your List, and Make More Sales</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>404</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cb67f298-ae9a-11ec-91b1-ff32a9f6e14f/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Hey, Friends! Let’s talk about email, opt-ins, lead magnets, freebies, and everything else you worry about in your efforts to grow your email list. While you can move a business forward without an email list, you will hit a point where your growth...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey, Friends! Let’s talk about email, opt-ins, lead magnets, freebies, and everything else you worry about in your efforts to grow your email list. While you can move a business forward without an email list, you will hit a point where your growth slows down quite drastically, so leveraging email as a platform to engage your audience and remind them about your awesome product or service is a smart move. 
In this episode of Strategy Hour, we break down exactly what an opt-in is, the resources you need to set it up, and what kind of value they can bring to your business. We dish out opt-in ideas for a variety of business types and give you the best practices for introducing a new audience member to you, your business, and what you can offer to help solve their problems. Knowing the steps that newbies typically go through as they convert from an opt-in to buy-in is super important as it will help you to be intentional in designing the sequence that gets them there. We also tackle the common question of what to do with those who have opted-in but who are not purchasing anything and give you plenty of all-round great advice for optimizing your email.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey, Friends! Let’s talk about email, opt-ins, lead magnets, freebies, and everything else you worry about in your efforts to grow your email list. While you can move a business forward without an email list, you will hit a point where your growth slows down quite drastically, so leveraging email as a platform to engage your audience and remind them about your awesome product or service is a smart move. </p><p>In this episode of Strategy Hour, we break down exactly what an opt-in is, the resources you need to set it up, and what kind of value they can bring to your business. We dish out opt-in ideas for a variety of business types and give you the best practices for introducing a new audience member to you, your business, and what you can offer to help solve their problems. Knowing the steps that newbies typically go through as they convert from an opt-in to buy-in is super important as it will help you to be intentional in designing the sequence that gets them there. We also tackle the common question of what to do with those who have opted-in but who are not purchasing anything and give you plenty of all-round great advice for optimizing your email.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2227</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8fdc77b3-4682-483c-bbda-3c48e3141099]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4064120645.mp3?updated=1652637716" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>403: December Profit Report: When It’s Helpful to NOT Launch</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/december-profit-report-when-its-helpful-to-not-launch</link>
      <description>You may have wondered what kind of revenue our business made over the holiday season, so today’s we’re giving you all the details about December. So, even though we’re properly settled into 2020 by now, let’s just backtrack a little to the end of 2019 – because there’s still something we can learn there. During the past December, we took time off for family and enjoying the holidays, but we also prepared ourselves for a big launch in January. We recognized that making a big profit was not on the cards for this month as we had other plates spinning and purposefully decided to focus on our long-term vision. 
Sometimes it’s okay not to have profit as your biggest priority each month because as your business evolves, different things are required at different times. Sometimes you have to do the groundwork for what is to come and sacrifice the quick short-term cash and listening to this episode, you will hear that this was what December looked like for us. Still, we talk about the outstanding performance of our Trello for Business course, why we expected a decline in profit from Strategy Academy, how we’ve rediscovered the power of strategic emails, and a whole lot more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 30 Jan 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>December Profit Report: When It’s Helpful to NOT Launch</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>403</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cbf92d3a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-879651ea0196/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>During the past December, we took time off for family and enjoying the holidays, but we also prepared ourselves for a big launch in January. We recognized that making a big profit was not on the cards for this month as we had other plates spinning and purposefully decided to focus on our long-term vision. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You may have wondered what kind of revenue our business made over the holiday season, so today’s we’re giving you all the details about December. So, even though we’re properly settled into 2020 by now, let’s just backtrack a little to the end of 2019 – because there’s still something we can learn there. During the past December, we took time off for family and enjoying the holidays, but we also prepared ourselves for a big launch in January. We recognized that making a big profit was not on the cards for this month as we had other plates spinning and purposefully decided to focus on our long-term vision. 
Sometimes it’s okay not to have profit as your biggest priority each month because as your business evolves, different things are required at different times. Sometimes you have to do the groundwork for what is to come and sacrifice the quick short-term cash and listening to this episode, you will hear that this was what December looked like for us. Still, we talk about the outstanding performance of our Trello for Business course, why we expected a decline in profit from Strategy Academy, how we’ve rediscovered the power of strategic emails, and a whole lot more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You may have wondered what kind of revenue our business made over the holiday season, so today’s we’re giving you all the details about December. So, even though we’re properly settled into 2020 by now, let’s just backtrack a little to the end of 2019 – because there’s still something we can learn there. During the past December, we took time off for family and enjoying the holidays, but we also prepared ourselves for a big launch in January. We recognized that making a big profit was not on the cards for this month as we had other plates spinning and purposefully decided to focus on our long-term vision. </p><p>Sometimes it’s okay not to have profit as your biggest priority each month because as your business evolves, different things are required at different times. Sometimes you have to do the groundwork for what is to come and sacrifice the quick short-term cash and listening to this episode, you will hear that this was what December looked like for us. Still, we talk about the outstanding performance of our Trello for Business course, why we expected a decline in profit from Strategy Academy, how we’ve rediscovered the power of strategic emails, and a whole lot more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1873</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0c27f31b-30c5-49c4-a4e5-14e33440de76]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8404967358.mp3?updated=1656441744" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>402: Creating Sustainable Growth After Sold Out Product Launches</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-sustainable-growth-after-sold-out-product-launches</link>
      <description>Today we are giving Emylee the guest chair and are diving into her newish side-hustle, making clay earrings! You have probably heard it mentioned on the show in the past couple of months since she started hand-making everything from home and selling it through her personal Instagram account. She has kept the whole thing quite fun and casual, not wanting to put too much pressure on the fledgling business. 
In this episode, we talk about four major thoughts and ideas for growth in a product-based business and Emylee weighs in with her experience of each. The truth is her earring side-hustle might be a fully-blown business soon! So without further ado, let's hear what she has to say and get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 28 Jan 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating Sustainable Growth After Sold Out Product Launches</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>402</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cca11342-ae9a-11ec-91b1-8384faf03001/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are giving Emylee the guest chair and are diving into her newish side-hustle, making clay earrings! You have probably heard it mentioned on the show in the past couple of months since she started hand-making everything from home and selling...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are giving Emylee the guest chair and are diving into her newish side-hustle, making clay earrings! You have probably heard it mentioned on the show in the past couple of months since she started hand-making everything from home and selling it through her personal Instagram account. She has kept the whole thing quite fun and casual, not wanting to put too much pressure on the fledgling business. 
In this episode, we talk about four major thoughts and ideas for growth in a product-based business and Emylee weighs in with her experience of each. The truth is her earring side-hustle might be a fully-blown business soon! So without further ado, let's hear what she has to say and get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are giving Emylee the guest chair and are diving into her newish side-hustle, making clay earrings! You have probably heard it mentioned on the show in the past couple of months since she started hand-making everything from home and selling it through her personal Instagram account. She has kept the whole thing quite fun and casual, not wanting to put too much pressure on the fledgling business. </p><p>In this episode, we talk about four major thoughts and ideas for growth in a product-based business and Emylee weighs in with her experience of each. The truth is her earring side-hustle might be a fully-blown business soon! So without further ado, let's hear what she has to say and get into some strategy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2049</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f0db8aa6-a011-4928-ab7d-83a2ec431a11]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2348905842.mp3?updated=1652632965" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>401: Ready to Launch? With Parker Stevenson of Evolved Finance</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/ready-to-launch-with-parker-stevenson-of-evolved-finance</link>
      <description>Parker Stevenson is a great friend of ours and someone we love and respect a lot! He has done so much for us and our business in the years that we have been working together with Parker handling all of our bookkeeping. He has already been on the podcast a bunch of times and today he is back to talk about the all-important topic of launching! We get into cash-flowing a launch, how to know when you are ready or not ready, questions and preparation and how to pay yourself when it's all done. So basically we cover all the things you might be thinking about and what better person to ask than a bookkeeper.
Parker is all about helping his clients remain profitable and this conversation will get you into a great headspace for possible launches in the future. We offer tons of free resources in the second half of the show so be sure to stick around for those and Parker gives the inside scoop on many business and how he has seen launches evolve. In his work, he has helped countless small businesses that apply to so much of our audience. So for all that and a whole more on getting your next launch off the ground and into the air, join us as we talk strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 23 Jan 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Ready to Launch? With Parker Stevenson of Evolved Finance</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>401</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cd35b8b2-ae9a-11ec-91b1-53c14e464a5b/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Parker Stevenson is a great friend of ours and someone we love and respect a lot! He has done so much for us and our business in the years that we have been working together with Parker handling all of our bookkeeping. He has already been on the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Parker Stevenson is a great friend of ours and someone we love and respect a lot! He has done so much for us and our business in the years that we have been working together with Parker handling all of our bookkeeping. He has already been on the podcast a bunch of times and today he is back to talk about the all-important topic of launching! We get into cash-flowing a launch, how to know when you are ready or not ready, questions and preparation and how to pay yourself when it's all done. So basically we cover all the things you might be thinking about and what better person to ask than a bookkeeper.
Parker is all about helping his clients remain profitable and this conversation will get you into a great headspace for possible launches in the future. We offer tons of free resources in the second half of the show so be sure to stick around for those and Parker gives the inside scoop on many business and how he has seen launches evolve. In his work, he has helped countless small businesses that apply to so much of our audience. So for all that and a whole more on getting your next launch off the ground and into the air, join us as we talk strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Parker Stevenson is a great friend of ours and someone we love and respect a lot! He has done so much for us and our business in the years that we have been working together with Parker handling all of our bookkeeping. He has already been on the podcast a bunch of times and today he is back to talk about the all-important topic of launching! We get into cash-flowing a launch, how to know when you are ready or not ready, questions and preparation and how to pay yourself when it's all done. So basically we cover all the things you might be thinking about and what better person to ask than a bookkeeper.</p><p>Parker is all about helping his clients remain profitable and this conversation will get you into a great headspace for possible launches in the future. We offer tons of free resources in the second half of the show so be sure to stick around for those and Parker gives the inside scoop on many business and how he has seen launches evolve. In his work, he has helped countless small businesses that apply to so much of our audience. So for all that and a whole more on getting your next launch off the ground and into the air, join us as we talk strategy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2932</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5240f73d-2818-4642-a56f-be9a87afe14f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8190701183.mp3?updated=1652632913" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>400: No Sales Page. No Email List. 10k in Sales a Month</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/no-sales-page-no-email-list-10k-in-sales-a-month</link>
      <description>We’ve been getting a lot of questions about our side hustles, the things we work on outside of Boss Project. Since we’re right back at the beginning stages with these projects, we thought it might be a good idea to share things as we implement and test them out. In this episode, we are going to dive into Abagail’s side hustle, sharing with listeners her processes, struggled and everything she’s learning. 
She gives us the inside scoop on why she decided to take on this new endeavor, why she is personally invested in the health and wellness space, and what she hopes to offer other women who are in the same boat. Despite some people’s hesitancy about this type of business, Abagail shares how network marketing has been serving her well and then elaborates about the relevance of blogging, social media, email lists, Facebook ads, and other common strategies in her business. Finally, you will hear some great pointers for creating more consistency in your business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 21 Jan 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>No Sales Page. No Email List. 10k in Sales a Month</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>400</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cdc22054-ae9a-11ec-91b1-af4e9eb4af52/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’ve been getting a lot of questions about our side hustles, the things we work on outside of Boss Project. Since we’re right back at the beginning stages with these projects, we thought it might be a good idea to share things as we implement and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’ve been getting a lot of questions about our side hustles, the things we work on outside of Boss Project. Since we’re right back at the beginning stages with these projects, we thought it might be a good idea to share things as we implement and test them out. In this episode, we are going to dive into Abagail’s side hustle, sharing with listeners her processes, struggled and everything she’s learning. 
She gives us the inside scoop on why she decided to take on this new endeavor, why she is personally invested in the health and wellness space, and what she hopes to offer other women who are in the same boat. Despite some people’s hesitancy about this type of business, Abagail shares how network marketing has been serving her well and then elaborates about the relevance of blogging, social media, email lists, Facebook ads, and other common strategies in her business. Finally, you will hear some great pointers for creating more consistency in your business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’ve been getting a lot of questions about our side hustles, the things we work on outside of Boss Project. Since we’re right back at the beginning stages with these projects, we thought it might be a good idea to share things as we implement and test them out. In this episode, we are going to dive into Abagail’s side hustle, sharing with listeners her processes, struggled and everything she’s learning. </p><p>She gives us the inside scoop on why she decided to take on this new endeavor, why she is personally invested in the health and wellness space, and what she hopes to offer other women who are in the same boat. Despite some people’s hesitancy about this type of business, Abagail shares how network marketing has been serving her well and then elaborates about the relevance of blogging, social media, email lists, Facebook ads, and other common strategies in her business. Finally, you will hear some great pointers for creating more consistency in your business!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2233</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[810595b3-f640-439e-ae34-5e71c91d4fc4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4299238753.mp3?updated=1652632849" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>399: Setting Financial Goals and Budgeting for Your Business with Justine Nelson of Debt Free Millennials</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/setting-financial-goals-and-budgeting-for-your-business-with-justine-nelson-of-debt-free-millennials</link>
      <description>Today on the show we welcome Justine Nelson, founder of Debt Free Millennials. Justine is on a mission to advocate for a debt-free lifestyle, and today you will learn how this is relevant for your business and how it can fuel your personal financial goals. By the age of 25, Justine Nelson had paid off $35,000 in student loan debt making an average of $37,000 per year. Grit, discipline and a motivation to kick debt's ass for good helped her achieve this goal within two and a half years.
In this episode, we talk about leveraging your side hustle to pay off debt or save for that dream vacation, Justine’s go-to worksheets and business books, and a list of things you can do each month to ensure that you stay on track with your goals. We also talk about bookkeeping systems, budgeting, planning for annual subscriptions, and setting measurable goals. Now that 2020 is in full swing, why not tune in to this episode and learn how to get your debt and savings dealt with?
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jan 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Setting Financial Goals and Budgeting for Your Business with Justine Nelson of Debt Free Millennials</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>399</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ce51969e-ae9a-11ec-91b1-9b2e0fac4fd0/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we welcome Justine Nelson, founder of Debt Free Millennials. Justine is on a mission to advocate for a debt-free lifestyle, and today you will learn how this is relevant for your business and how it can fuel your personal financial...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we welcome Justine Nelson, founder of Debt Free Millennials. Justine is on a mission to advocate for a debt-free lifestyle, and today you will learn how this is relevant for your business and how it can fuel your personal financial goals. By the age of 25, Justine Nelson had paid off $35,000 in student loan debt making an average of $37,000 per year. Grit, discipline and a motivation to kick debt's ass for good helped her achieve this goal within two and a half years.
In this episode, we talk about leveraging your side hustle to pay off debt or save for that dream vacation, Justine’s go-to worksheets and business books, and a list of things you can do each month to ensure that you stay on track with your goals. We also talk about bookkeeping systems, budgeting, planning for annual subscriptions, and setting measurable goals. Now that 2020 is in full swing, why not tune in to this episode and learn how to get your debt and savings dealt with?
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we welcome Justine Nelson, founder of Debt Free Millennials. Justine is on a mission to advocate for a debt-free lifestyle, and today you will learn how this is relevant for your business and how it can fuel your personal financial goals. By the age of 25, Justine Nelson had paid off $35,000 in student loan debt making an average of $37,000 per year. Grit, discipline and a motivation to kick debt's ass for good helped her achieve this goal within two and a half years.</p><p>In this episode, we talk about leveraging your side hustle to pay off debt or save for that dream vacation, Justine’s go-to worksheets and business books, and a list of things you can do each month to ensure that you stay on track with your goals. We also talk about bookkeeping systems, budgeting, planning for annual subscriptions, and setting measurable goals. Now that 2020 is in full swing, why not tune in to this episode and learn how to get your debt and savings dealt with?</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3121</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[33cfc3fd-b436-4df4-ab3b-563ad6c7ec8a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2115112290.mp3?updated=1652632790" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>398: The One Thing Your Business Needs to Do Every Week</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-one-thing-your-business-needs-to-do-every-week</link>
      <description>Today we get to talk about one of our favorite things — meetings! While most people hate them, we are going to share a few things that might change your mind. Meetings are notorious for consuming a lot of time, often with little real progress, but we will present you with an outline that will make your every meeting from here on out a super productive, efficient one. We’ve spoken about the book Traction many times, but we want to remind you once more to go read it because this is where this outline and our guidelines around meetings come from. 
Sometimes a meeting is not necessary and a Slack message or quick update will suffice, but other times having a meeting makes sense, and therefore it’s important to know how to approach them. Having a weekly meeting keeps all parties fully informed on decisions that were made, as it can be easy to think that everybody is in the loop when they’re not. If you are someone who has little patience for inefficiency and is always looking for the quickest, most productive ways to communicate and do things, this outline is perfect for you! This is as applicable to small teams as it is big ones, and don’t hesitate to ask your contractor to attend these meetings. Be sure to tune in to this episode to get the best strategy for efficient meetings!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jan 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The One Thing Your Business Needs to Do Every Week</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>398</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ced3d2ee-ae9a-11ec-91b1-b776fa91eb18/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we get to talk about one of our favorite things — meetings! While most people hate them, we are going to share a few things that might change your mind. Meetings are notorious for consuming a lot of time, often with little real progress, but...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we get to talk about one of our favorite things — meetings! While most people hate them, we are going to share a few things that might change your mind. Meetings are notorious for consuming a lot of time, often with little real progress, but we will present you with an outline that will make your every meeting from here on out a super productive, efficient one. We’ve spoken about the book Traction many times, but we want to remind you once more to go read it because this is where this outline and our guidelines around meetings come from. 
Sometimes a meeting is not necessary and a Slack message or quick update will suffice, but other times having a meeting makes sense, and therefore it’s important to know how to approach them. Having a weekly meeting keeps all parties fully informed on decisions that were made, as it can be easy to think that everybody is in the loop when they’re not. If you are someone who has little patience for inefficiency and is always looking for the quickest, most productive ways to communicate and do things, this outline is perfect for you! This is as applicable to small teams as it is big ones, and don’t hesitate to ask your contractor to attend these meetings. Be sure to tune in to this episode to get the best strategy for efficient meetings!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we get to talk about one of our favorite things — meetings! While most people hate them, we are going to share a few things that might change your mind. Meetings are notorious for consuming a lot of time, often with little real progress, but we will present you with an outline that will make your every meeting from here on out a super productive, efficient one. We’ve spoken about the book <em>Traction</em> many times, but we want to remind you once more to go read it because this is where this outline and our guidelines around meetings come from. </p><p>Sometimes a meeting is not necessary and a Slack message or quick update will suffice, but other times having a meeting makes sense, and therefore it’s important to know how to approach them. Having a weekly meeting keeps all parties fully informed on decisions that were made, as it can be easy to think that everybody is in the loop when they’re not. If you are someone who has little patience for inefficiency and is always looking for the quickest, most productive ways to communicate and do things, this outline is perfect for you! This is as applicable to small teams as it is big ones, and don’t hesitate to ask your contractor to attend these meetings. Be sure to tune in to this episode to get the best strategy for efficient meetings!  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2070</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c9859121-4986-4209-a9e2-128c84821852]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2081901847.mp3?updated=1652632655" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>397: Should You Ditch Instagram and Create New Habits in 2020?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/should-you-ditch-instagram-and-create-new-habits-in-2020</link>
      <description>Welcome to our very first episode of 2020! As we all know, ’tis the season to set new goals, make resolutions, and ditch those nasty habits that were holding us back in 2019. We’ve already seen a whole range of resolutions from all of you; everything from what you want to learn, what you want to get better at, and what you want to let go of in the new year. Within those, we’ve seen one similar theme that constantly pops up, and that is removing or scaling down on social media, specifically Facebook and Instagram. 
So, in today’s episode want to dive into our relationship with social media and offer some reframes that will be truly helpful in redefining this relationship, especially as it pertains to your business. As with all trends, there are always highs and lows and the conversation we are seeing nowadays is painting social media in a bad light. So instead of being bogged down by all that is bad about social media, we want to give you the tools to refocus on your business needs. Stay tuned as we go through our top tips to help you get a head start on your resolutions for 2020!
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 09 Jan 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Should You Ditch Instagram and Create New Habits in 2020?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>397</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cf6042a6-ae9a-11ec-91b1-2f8ecb4e0d8a/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>As we all know, ’tis the season to set new goals, make resolutions, and ditch those nasty habits that were holding us back last year.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to our very first episode of 2020! As we all know, ’tis the season to set new goals, make resolutions, and ditch those nasty habits that were holding us back in 2019. We’ve already seen a whole range of resolutions from all of you; everything from what you want to learn, what you want to get better at, and what you want to let go of in the new year. Within those, we’ve seen one similar theme that constantly pops up, and that is removing or scaling down on social media, specifically Facebook and Instagram. 
So, in today’s episode want to dive into our relationship with social media and offer some reframes that will be truly helpful in redefining this relationship, especially as it pertains to your business. As with all trends, there are always highs and lows and the conversation we are seeing nowadays is painting social media in a bad light. So instead of being bogged down by all that is bad about social media, we want to give you the tools to refocus on your business needs. Stay tuned as we go through our top tips to help you get a head start on your resolutions for 2020!
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to our very first episode of 2020! As we all know, ’tis the season to set new goals, make resolutions, and ditch those nasty habits that were holding us back in 2019. We’ve already seen a whole range of resolutions from all of you; everything from what you want to learn, what you want to get better at, and what you want to let go of in the new year. Within those, we’ve seen one similar theme that constantly pops up, and that is removing or scaling down on social media, specifically Facebook and Instagram. </p><p>So, in today’s episode want to dive into our relationship with social media and offer some reframes that will be truly helpful in redefining this relationship, especially as it pertains to your business. As with all trends, there are always highs and lows and the conversation we are seeing nowadays is painting social media in a bad light. So instead of being bogged down by all that is bad about social media, we want to give you the tools to refocus on your business needs. Stay tuned as we go through our top tips to help you get a head start on your resolutions for 2020!</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2114</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cad8b21c-f01e-4909-9369-f0a915f4489f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7426763379.mp3?updated=1656441685" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>396: Huge Announcement: Our Secret Project is Revealed!</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/huge-announcement-our-secret-project-is-revealed</link>
      <description>Spoiler alert! This whole episode is a giant spoiler alert because you are finding out something before it launches – and we are stoked! We are seven days out from doing the biggest thing since our signature program came out. We hope for your sake that you’re listening to this after the launch so you don’t have to wait seven whole days for it. And we can tell you, we’ve been working on this project for more than a year, and we were pretty sure it would be a huge surprise to all of you, so we wanted it perfectly polished. 
We’ve given it tons of thought and came up with the solutions for all your design worries. If you’re not a graphic designer and are always fretting over getting your branding right and looking professional, don’t worry, the dark days are over. Tune into this episode for the big reveal that will be a game-changer for your business in 2020!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 07 Jan 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Huge Announcement: Our Secret Project is Revealed!</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>396</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d0106564-ae9a-11ec-91b1-178fe896a3f4/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Spoiler alert! This whole episode is a giant spoiler alert because you are finding out something before it launches – and we are stoked! We are seven days out from doing the biggest thing since our signature program came out. We hope for your sake...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Spoiler alert! This whole episode is a giant spoiler alert because you are finding out something before it launches – and we are stoked! We are seven days out from doing the biggest thing since our signature program came out. We hope for your sake that you’re listening to this after the launch so you don’t have to wait seven whole days for it. And we can tell you, we’ve been working on this project for more than a year, and we were pretty sure it would be a huge surprise to all of you, so we wanted it perfectly polished. 
We’ve given it tons of thought and came up with the solutions for all your design worries. If you’re not a graphic designer and are always fretting over getting your branding right and looking professional, don’t worry, the dark days are over. Tune into this episode for the big reveal that will be a game-changer for your business in 2020!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Spoiler alert! This whole episode is a giant spoiler alert because you are finding out something before it launches – and we are stoked! We are seven days out from doing the biggest thing since our signature program came out. We hope for your sake that you’re listening to this after the launch so you don’t have to wait seven whole days for it. And we can tell you, we’ve been working on this project for more than a year, and we were pretty sure it would be a huge surprise to all of you, so we wanted it perfectly polished. </p><p>We’ve given it tons of thought and came up with the solutions for all your design worries. If you’re not a graphic designer and are always fretting over getting your branding right and looking professional, don’t worry, the dark days are over. Tune into this episode for the big reveal that will be a game-changer for your business in 2020!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1235</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dd95685c-11d1-40f0-b3bc-f1f02751302d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1686827447.mp3?updated=1656441634" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>395: Four-Step Formula for Higher-Converting Copy with Jennifer Turner</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/four-step-formula-for-higher-converting-copy-with-jennifer-turner</link>
      <description>Today our guest is Jennifer Turner, the founder of Gemini where she helps online business owners improve their copywriting and design to create higher conversion rates. Gemini is an online branding and education platform and Jennifer is the rare combination of a trained copywriter and designer! Their MO is unifying a business' voice in the copy and design to tell a stronger story. We love it! Today we will be focussing solely on the copy side of things and how to get your up to scratch! 
We are super excited for Jennifer to dive into her four-step formula for high converting copy and it is honestly one of the best formulas we have found in a long time! These kinds of frameworks can sometimes put you in a box or make you sound a bit robotic and this one is a really cool way to insert your story and your audience's story while coming up with something that gets your conversion rate all the way up! This can be used for freebies, opt-ins or paid services and programs, it can be applied in those areas just as effectively, that's how versatile it is, so get your notes ready and let's get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 02 Jan 2020 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Four-Step Formula for Higher-Converting Copy with Jennifer Turner</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>395</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d09b45ee-ae9a-11ec-91b1-973d2db25fbc/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today our guest is Jennifer Turner, the founder of Gemini where she helps online business owners improve their copywriting and design to create higher conversion rates. Gemini is an online branding and education platform and Jennifer is the rare...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today our guest is Jennifer Turner, the founder of Gemini where she helps online business owners improve their copywriting and design to create higher conversion rates. Gemini is an online branding and education platform and Jennifer is the rare combination of a trained copywriter and designer! Their MO is unifying a business' voice in the copy and design to tell a stronger story. We love it! Today we will be focussing solely on the copy side of things and how to get your up to scratch! 
We are super excited for Jennifer to dive into her four-step formula for high converting copy and it is honestly one of the best formulas we have found in a long time! These kinds of frameworks can sometimes put you in a box or make you sound a bit robotic and this one is a really cool way to insert your story and your audience's story while coming up with something that gets your conversion rate all the way up! This can be used for freebies, opt-ins or paid services and programs, it can be applied in those areas just as effectively, that's how versatile it is, so get your notes ready and let's get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today our guest is Jennifer Turner, the founder of Gemini where she helps online business owners improve their copywriting and design to create higher conversion rates. Gemini is an online branding and education platform and Jennifer is the rare combination of a trained copywriter <em>and </em>designer! Their MO is unifying a business' voice in the copy and design to tell a stronger story. We love it! Today we will be focussing solely on the copy side of things and how to get your up to scratch! </p><p>We are super excited for Jennifer to dive into her four-step formula for high converting copy and it is honestly one of the best formulas we have found in a long time! These kinds of frameworks can sometimes put you in a box or make you sound a bit robotic and this one is a really cool way to insert your story and your audience's story while coming up with something that gets your conversion rate all the way up! This can be used for freebies, opt-ins or paid services and programs, it can be applied in those areas just as effectively, that's how versatile it is, so get your notes ready and let's get into some strategy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2689</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5b237729-ab6c-49be-a523-34bfdbcd2861]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1494777647.mp3?updated=1652632605" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>394: 9 HUGE Lessons from 2019 and What they Mean for Your 2020</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/9-huge-lessons-from-2019-and-what-they-mean-for-your-2020</link>
      <description>Can you believe it? The year 2019 is over and we’re starting 2020 in just a few hours! We’re talking about our New Year’s Eve plans and how Emylee is going to navigate a house full of party people – thanks to marrying a frat guy who has a million friends! But speaking about plans to enter the new year on a high note, today we share with you our biggest lessons from 2019 and how they should impact your (and our) strategies for 2020. Tricky situations are unavoidable, and we offer you some solid advice for mitigating their potentially negative effects. 
As business owners, we are required to keep learning and developing all the time – otherwise, we simply won’t be able to keep up and we’d never reach our full potential. There are logistics and technicalities that you must deal with at some point, whether it’s your thing or not because entrepreneurs and business owners need to fulfill a multitude of roles and responsibilities. We reckon that you can give yourself a pat on the back for what you have achieved in your business this year. It’s not easy, and it takes a lot of grit. Join us for this last episode of 2019 to hear more about break-even points, short-term sacrifices, distractions, and a whole lot more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 31 Dec 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>9 HUGE Lessons from 2019 and What they Mean for Your 2020</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>394</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d1291ad6-ae9a-11ec-91b1-333cf7ab42fe/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Can you believe it? The year 2019 is over and we’re starting 2020 in just a few hours! We’re talking about our New Year’s Eve plans and how Emylee is going to navigate a house full of party people – thanks to marrying a frat guy who has a...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Can you believe it? The year 2019 is over and we’re starting 2020 in just a few hours! We’re talking about our New Year’s Eve plans and how Emylee is going to navigate a house full of party people – thanks to marrying a frat guy who has a million friends! But speaking about plans to enter the new year on a high note, today we share with you our biggest lessons from 2019 and how they should impact your (and our) strategies for 2020. Tricky situations are unavoidable, and we offer you some solid advice for mitigating their potentially negative effects. 
As business owners, we are required to keep learning and developing all the time – otherwise, we simply won’t be able to keep up and we’d never reach our full potential. There are logistics and technicalities that you must deal with at some point, whether it’s your thing or not because entrepreneurs and business owners need to fulfill a multitude of roles and responsibilities. We reckon that you can give yourself a pat on the back for what you have achieved in your business this year. It’s not easy, and it takes a lot of grit. Join us for this last episode of 2019 to hear more about break-even points, short-term sacrifices, distractions, and a whole lot more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Can you believe it? The year 2019 is over and we’re starting 2020 in just a few hours! We’re talking about our New Year’s Eve plans and how Emylee is going to navigate a house full of party people – thanks to marrying a frat guy who has a million friends! But speaking about plans to enter the new year on a high note, today we share with you our biggest lessons from 2019 and how they should impact your (and our) strategies for 2020. Tricky situations are unavoidable, and we offer you some solid advice for mitigating their potentially negative effects. </p><p>As business owners, we are required to keep learning and developing all the time – otherwise, we simply won’t be able to keep up and we’d never reach our full potential. There are logistics and technicalities that you must deal with at some point, whether it’s your thing or not because entrepreneurs and business owners need to fulfill a multitude of roles and responsibilities. We reckon that you can give yourself a pat on the back for what you have achieved in your business this year. It’s not easy, and it takes a lot of grit. Join us for this last episode of 2019 to hear more about break-even points, short-term sacrifices, distractions, and a whole lot more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2978</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7a3960c3-d7dd-4001-bb8b-6f17cfa89843]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8651686502.mp3?updated=1656441623" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>393: Are You a Be-er or a Do-er With Jessica Eley</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/are-you-a-be-er-or-a-do-er-with-jessica-eley</link>
      <description>Today on the show we are joined by the wonderful, the amazing, the multi-talented, Jessica Eley. If you do not already know Jessica, well you should! She is a mindset coach for high-achievers and has helped loads of business owners improve their practices and reach for the stars. She goes deep, wide and everywhere in-between with them and today we will be talking about the two different types of people there are in this world; be-ers and do-ers!
Jessica unpacks who figuring out which of these types you are can make such a difference to the way you approach life and business. She explains the pros and cons of each and how striving for more balance can serve you so well moving forward. We talk about the types of tools and strategies that work for each and we give great examples of how these play out. Jessica is definitely more of a be-er, while Emylee is definitely a do-er, the conversation has a natural contrasting dynamic, which you will definitely appreciate. Join us as we dive deep with Jessica!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Dec 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Are You a Be-er or a Do-er With Jessica Eley</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>393</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d1b4ea7a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-479963e5e6ee/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we are joined by the wonderful, the amazing, the multi-talented, Jessica Eley. If you do not already know Jessica, well you should! She is a mindset coach for high-achievers and has helped loads of business owners improve their...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we are joined by the wonderful, the amazing, the multi-talented, Jessica Eley. If you do not already know Jessica, well you should! She is a mindset coach for high-achievers and has helped loads of business owners improve their practices and reach for the stars. She goes deep, wide and everywhere in-between with them and today we will be talking about the two different types of people there are in this world; be-ers and do-ers!
Jessica unpacks who figuring out which of these types you are can make such a difference to the way you approach life and business. She explains the pros and cons of each and how striving for more balance can serve you so well moving forward. We talk about the types of tools and strategies that work for each and we give great examples of how these play out. Jessica is definitely more of a be-er, while Emylee is definitely a do-er, the conversation has a natural contrasting dynamic, which you will definitely appreciate. Join us as we dive deep with Jessica!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we are joined by the wonderful, the amazing, the multi-talented, Jessica Eley. If you do not already know Jessica, well you should! She is a mindset coach for high-achievers and has helped loads of business owners improve their practices and reach for the stars. She goes deep, wide and everywhere in-between with them and today we will be talking about the two different types of people there are in this world; be-ers and do-ers!</p><p>Jessica unpacks who figuring out which of these types you are can make such a difference to the way you approach life and business. She explains the pros and cons of each and how striving for more balance can serve you so well moving forward. We talk about the types of tools and strategies that work for each and we give great examples of how these play out. Jessica is definitely more of a be-er, while Emylee is definitely a do-er, the conversation has a natural contrasting dynamic, which you will definitely appreciate. Join us as we dive deep with Jessica!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2448</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[050dde75-fc21-428e-8e55-525bcc39c129]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4265378937.mp3?updated=1652632532" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>392: November Profit Report: Would You Take a Short Term Loss for a 5X ROI?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/november-profit-report-would-you-take-a-short-term-loss-for-a-5x-roi</link>
      <description>Welcome to the November profit report! Businesses all experience ups and downs – we do too – and sometimes what at first seems like a minor thing turns out to have a big impact on profitability. You all know by now that we’re all about profit here at Boss Project and we’ve spent too much time focused on the top line that we missed many of the intricacies going on in the background of our business. We’ve been showing you how to stabilize your profit and our own goal is to get to that 30% mark, but we also understand that there are many moving parts – things that are beyond our control – that ultimately determine your profit. For starters, it’s imperative for you to know exactly what comes in and goes out of your business every single month and to be truly aware: you can’t fix something if you didn’t know it was broken! Three factors impacted us negatively in November, two of them were actually preventable, but now we know and we won’t make those same mistakes again. 
When we talk about being aware, you have to know that your awareness not only drives your decision-making, but it makes you alter your focus on the flip side. It’s not necessarily that you need to decrease your costs, but it’s about looking carefully at what the root problem is. Something might even seem like an issue when it really isn’t. That’s why you never make decisions on a whim: decisions should be made after digging deeper to find the underlying problem. When you have this kind of information, you might look at your results differently. Join us again today as we take you through the highs and lows of November 2019!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 24 Dec 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>November Profit Report: Would You Take a Short Term Loss for a 5X ROI?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>392</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d24a27b6-ae9a-11ec-91b1-9fc5fb4335e9/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Businesses all experience ups and downs – we do too – and sometimes what at first seems like a minor thing turns out to have a big impact on profitability.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to the November profit report! Businesses all experience ups and downs – we do too – and sometimes what at first seems like a minor thing turns out to have a big impact on profitability. You all know by now that we’re all about profit here at Boss Project and we’ve spent too much time focused on the top line that we missed many of the intricacies going on in the background of our business. We’ve been showing you how to stabilize your profit and our own goal is to get to that 30% mark, but we also understand that there are many moving parts – things that are beyond our control – that ultimately determine your profit. For starters, it’s imperative for you to know exactly what comes in and goes out of your business every single month and to be truly aware: you can’t fix something if you didn’t know it was broken! Three factors impacted us negatively in November, two of them were actually preventable, but now we know and we won’t make those same mistakes again. 
When we talk about being aware, you have to know that your awareness not only drives your decision-making, but it makes you alter your focus on the flip side. It’s not necessarily that you need to decrease your costs, but it’s about looking carefully at what the root problem is. Something might even seem like an issue when it really isn’t. That’s why you never make decisions on a whim: decisions should be made after digging deeper to find the underlying problem. When you have this kind of information, you might look at your results differently. Join us again today as we take you through the highs and lows of November 2019!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to the November profit report! Businesses all experience ups and downs – we do too – and sometimes what at first seems like a minor thing turns out to have a big impact on profitability. You all know by now that we’re all about profit here at Boss Project and we’ve spent too much time focused on the top line that we missed many of the intricacies going on in the background of our business. We’ve been showing you how to stabilize your profit and our own goal is to get to that 30% mark, but we also understand that there are many moving parts – things that are beyond our control – that ultimately determine your profit. For starters, it’s imperative for you to know exactly what comes in and goes out of your business every single month and to be truly aware: you can’t fix something if you didn’t know it was broken! Three factors impacted us negatively in November, two of them were actually preventable, but now we know and we won’t make those same mistakes again. </p><p>When we talk about being aware, you have to know that your awareness not only drives your decision-making, but it makes you alter your focus on the flip side. It’s not necessarily that you need to decrease your costs, but it’s about looking carefully at what the root problem is. Something might even seem like an issue when it really isn’t. That’s why you never make decisions on a whim: decisions should be made after digging deeper to find the underlying problem. When you have this kind of information, you might look at your results differently. Join us again today as we take you through the highs and lows of November 2019!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2610</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ec39948b-79f8-4a5b-acd0-4fe52feacf63]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6385559778.mp3?updated=1656441559" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>391: Brand Marketing vs. Direct Marketing: Why Your Goal on Social Media Should Not be an Immediate Sale with Claire Diaz-Ortiz</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/brand-marketing-vs-direct-marketing-why-your-goal-on-social-media-should-not-be-an-immediate-sale-with-claire-diaz-ortiz</link>
      <description>Today our guest is Claire Diaz-Ortiz! Claire is an author, renowned speaker, and startup investor. She was an early employee at Twitter and has taken that essential expertise into her work as a consultant and authority on social media and online branding. Her books have been published in 12 countries, won many awards and she has been featured widely in both print and broadcast media! Today we are referring specifically to her latest book, Social Media Success for Every Brand and unpacking some of the lessons she has compiled in its pages. 
When we say that Claire is a social media genius we really mean it! In our conversation, we unpack the difference between direct marketing and brand marketing and why you should not be targeting an immediate sale on social media platforms. Claire breaks down a few common mistakes made by brands and big businesses on the various social sites that we all use and shares some very easy and quick strategies you can start implementing today to get things going!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 19 Dec 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Brand Marketing vs. Direct Marketing: Why Your Goal on Social Media Should Not be an Immediate Sale with Claire Diaz-Ortiz</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>391</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d2f274ac-ae9a-11ec-91b1-5327fc9b05b9/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today our guest is Claire Diaz-Ortiz! Claire is an author, renowned speaker, and startup investor. She was an early employee at Twitter and has taken that essential expertise into her work as a consultant and authority on social media and online...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today our guest is Claire Diaz-Ortiz! Claire is an author, renowned speaker, and startup investor. She was an early employee at Twitter and has taken that essential expertise into her work as a consultant and authority on social media and online branding. Her books have been published in 12 countries, won many awards and she has been featured widely in both print and broadcast media! Today we are referring specifically to her latest book, Social Media Success for Every Brand and unpacking some of the lessons she has compiled in its pages. 
When we say that Claire is a social media genius we really mean it! In our conversation, we unpack the difference between direct marketing and brand marketing and why you should not be targeting an immediate sale on social media platforms. Claire breaks down a few common mistakes made by brands and big businesses on the various social sites that we all use and shares some very easy and quick strategies you can start implementing today to get things going!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today our guest is Claire Diaz-Ortiz! Claire is an author, renowned speaker, and startup investor. She was an early employee at Twitter and has taken that essential expertise into her work as a consultant and authority on social media and online branding. Her books have been published in 12 countries, won many awards and she has been featured widely in both print and broadcast media! Today we are referring specifically to her latest book, <em>Social Media Success for Every Brand </em>and<em> </em>unpacking some of the lessons she has compiled in its pages. </p><p>When we say that Claire is a social media genius we really mean it! In our conversation, we unpack the difference between direct marketing and brand marketing and why you should not be targeting an immediate sale on social media platforms. Claire breaks down a few common mistakes made by brands and big businesses on the various social sites that we all use and shares some very easy and quick strategies you can start implementing today to get things going!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2594</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b32d8f68-56c4-47ce-9a30-a7e1ef13c995]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2488162065.mp3?updated=1652632420" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>390: Our 2020 Words of the Year and How They Apply to Your Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/our-2020-words-of-the-year-and-how-they-apply-to-your-business</link>
      <description>It’s that time of the year again — we’re sharing our favorite words for 2020 and how they relate to your business! This past year, Abagail’s word has been “react”. She worked hard at learning to process her emotions in healthier ways and to not overreact to situations, trying to find that delicate balance between allowing yourself to feel the feelings but also not letting them guide your decision-making. 
Emylee, on the other hand, wanted to approach this year with “ease”, knowing that she had many changes ahead, such as moving house and figuring out childcare. What she learned in the process was that she needed to make a decision that worked for her at that moment instead of trying to make long-term, “forever” decisions for every little thing. In this episode, we share our new words for 2020, and they’re good! Why not choose a word of your own (and share it with us over on Instagram) to guide you through the year; a word that summarizes the mindset you would like to adopt and take into the new year? Be sure to join our conversation to learn the whats, whys, and hows!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 17 Dec 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our 2020 Words of the Year and How They Apply to Your Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>390</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d3834d7e-ae9a-11ec-91b1-a7430ebb7cd7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>It’s that time of the year again — we’re sharing our favorite words for 2020 and how they relate to your business! This past year, Abagail’s word has been “react”. She worked hard at learning to process her emotions in healthier ways and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It’s that time of the year again — we’re sharing our favorite words for 2020 and how they relate to your business! This past year, Abagail’s word has been “react”. She worked hard at learning to process her emotions in healthier ways and to not overreact to situations, trying to find that delicate balance between allowing yourself to feel the feelings but also not letting them guide your decision-making. 
Emylee, on the other hand, wanted to approach this year with “ease”, knowing that she had many changes ahead, such as moving house and figuring out childcare. What she learned in the process was that she needed to make a decision that worked for her at that moment instead of trying to make long-term, “forever” decisions for every little thing. In this episode, we share our new words for 2020, and they’re good! Why not choose a word of your own (and share it with us over on Instagram) to guide you through the year; a word that summarizes the mindset you would like to adopt and take into the new year? Be sure to join our conversation to learn the whats, whys, and hows!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It’s that time of the year again — we’re sharing our favorite words for 2020 and how they relate to your business! This past year, Abagail’s word has been “react”. She worked hard at learning to process her emotions in healthier ways and to not overreact to situations, trying to find that delicate balance between allowing yourself to feel the feelings but also not letting them guide your decision-making. </p><p>Emylee, on the other hand, wanted to approach this year with “ease”, knowing that she had many changes ahead, such as moving house and figuring out childcare. What she learned in the process was that she needed to make a decision that worked for her at that moment instead of trying to make long-term, “forever” decisions for every little thing. In this episode, we share our new words for 2020, and they’re good! Why not choose a word of your own (and share it with us over on Instagram) to guide you through the year; a word that summarizes the mindset you would like to adopt and take into the new year? Be sure to join our conversation to learn the whats, whys, and hows!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1544</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[de8f6114-74ac-4b23-b7ff-4188fec2aff8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1872528115.mp3?updated=1656441129" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>389: How to Get Over Self-Sabotage and Increase Your Take Home Pay by 20 with Claire Pelletreau</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-get-over-self-sabotage-and-increase-your-take-home-pay-by-20-with-claire-pelletreau</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast our guest is Claire Pelletreau, a Facebook add and conversion optimization expert. Her genius involves brainstorming, strategizing, training and overseeing aspects of add spend for her clients – but that’s not what we’re picking her brain for today. We hear her take on what it means to show up in your business and focus on things that increase profits. We also talk about the nagging sense that you’re not growing as you ought to in your business and those things that lead to self-sabotage. If you’ve ever suffered from imposter syndrome, this episode offers you loads of questions and points of consideration that will help you to move past those gnarly mindsets.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 12 Dec 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Get Over Self-Sabotage and Increase Your Take Home Pay by 20 with Claire Pelletreau</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>389</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d414ca4c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-97bdd95571af/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast our guest is Claire Pelletreau, a Facebook add and conversion optimization expert. Her genius involves brainstorming, strategizing, training and overseeing aspects of add spend for her clients – but that’s not what we’re...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast our guest is Claire Pelletreau, a Facebook add and conversion optimization expert. Her genius involves brainstorming, strategizing, training and overseeing aspects of add spend for her clients – but that’s not what we’re picking her brain for today. We hear her take on what it means to show up in your business and focus on things that increase profits. We also talk about the nagging sense that you’re not growing as you ought to in your business and those things that lead to self-sabotage. If you’ve ever suffered from imposter syndrome, this episode offers you loads of questions and points of consideration that will help you to move past those gnarly mindsets.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast our guest is Claire Pelletreau, a Facebook add and conversion optimization expert. Her genius involves brainstorming, strategizing, training and overseeing aspects of add spend for her clients – but that’s not what we’re picking her brain for today. We hear her take on what it means to show up in your business and focus on things that increase profits. We also talk about the nagging sense that you’re not growing as you ought to in your business and those things that lead to self-sabotage. If you’ve ever suffered from imposter syndrome, this episode offers you loads of questions and points of consideration that will help you to move past those gnarly mindsets.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2794</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[eb9b794c-cb6f-4662-8bb6-8f29217ea77d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7512784786.mp3?updated=1652632302" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>388: Lego is more Profitable than Louis Vuitton and Other Fun Facts You Didn't Know About Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/lego-is-more-profitable-than-louis-vuitton-and-other-fun-facts-you-didnt-know-about-business</link>
      <description>So Emylee has been following a new Instagram account and just wanted to share some of the amazing data that she has been geeking out over for the last while! We have selected four specific posts that she found thought-provoking and worth talking about and will be unpacking what they are about and what we can learn from them. The Account is called Chartr Daily and they post charts and graphs that represent interesting statistics and facts from the business world. They often add some commentary and discussion in the description, as well as having a newsletter with more detailed information. 
Here at the Strategy Hour, we love looking at charts! They might be slightly more difficult to make but that does not mean we cannot appreciate and enjoy what they are communicating! The four charts we have selected to discuss in today's episode are especially applicable to us, our industry and the conversations we have been having on this podcast, so head over have a look at the posts and let's get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 10 Dec 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title> Lego is more Profitable than Louis Vuitton and Other Fun Facts You Didn't Know About Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>388</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d4a3de44-ae9a-11ec-91b1-6391ccbd8da7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Emylee has been following a new Instagram account and just wanted to share some of the amazing data that she has been geeking out over for the last while! We have selected four specific posts that she found thought-provoking and worth talking about and will be unpacking what they are about and what we can learn from them. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>So Emylee has been following a new Instagram account and just wanted to share some of the amazing data that she has been geeking out over for the last while! We have selected four specific posts that she found thought-provoking and worth talking about and will be unpacking what they are about and what we can learn from them. The Account is called Chartr Daily and they post charts and graphs that represent interesting statistics and facts from the business world. They often add some commentary and discussion in the description, as well as having a newsletter with more detailed information. 
Here at the Strategy Hour, we love looking at charts! They might be slightly more difficult to make but that does not mean we cannot appreciate and enjoy what they are communicating! The four charts we have selected to discuss in today's episode are especially applicable to us, our industry and the conversations we have been having on this podcast, so head over have a look at the posts and let's get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>So Emylee has been following a new Instagram account and just wanted to share some of the amazing data that she has been geeking out over for the last while! We have selected four specific posts that she found thought-provoking and worth talking about and will be unpacking what they are about and what we can learn from them. The Account is called <a href="https://www.instagram.com/chartrdaily">Chartr Daily</a> and they post charts and graphs that represent interesting statistics and facts from the business world. They often add some commentary and discussion in the description, as well as having a newsletter with more detailed information. </p><p>Here at the Strategy Hour, we love looking at charts! They might be slightly more difficult to make but that does not mean we cannot appreciate and enjoy what they are communicating! The four charts we have selected to discuss in today's episode are especially applicable to us, our industry and the conversations we have been having on this podcast, so head over have a look at the posts and let's get into some strategy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2156</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f091e95b-a80e-47fa-ab29-bf31d48a7345]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3908546601.mp3?updated=1656441080" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>387: Why Your Business Needs to Start with a Brand Strategy with Rachel Green</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-your-business-needs-to-start-with-a-brand-strategy-with-rachel-green</link>
      <description>On the Strategy Hour Podcast today, we are joined by the wonderful and amazing Rachel Green! She is one of the first people we connected with when we were starting out in the online business world and she has been in business for the last seven years, helping hundreds of businesses grow and succeed. As a brand strategist, designer and educator, Rachel has generated over 5 million dollars in sales for her clients and her focus on empowering female business owners is truly inspiring!
In this episode, we are breaking down what a brand strategy is, why it is important to start there and the questions that you need to ask when figuring this all out. Rachel offers some great thoughts to work through in order to help you make sure your story and brand are pushing you forward. She is all about progression, not just pretty branding and logos! We really respect Rachel's perspective on the strategic part of branding and we know you will all find it very useful. So buckle up and let's get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 05 Dec 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why Your Business Needs to Start with a Brand Strategy with Rachel Green</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>387</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d52e6f28-ae9a-11ec-91b1-af7e7ef694d2/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>On the Strategy Hour Podcast today, we are joined by the wonderful and amazing Rachel Green! She is one of the first people we connected with when we were starting out in the online business world and she has been in business for the last seven years,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On the Strategy Hour Podcast today, we are joined by the wonderful and amazing Rachel Green! She is one of the first people we connected with when we were starting out in the online business world and she has been in business for the last seven years, helping hundreds of businesses grow and succeed. As a brand strategist, designer and educator, Rachel has generated over 5 million dollars in sales for her clients and her focus on empowering female business owners is truly inspiring!
In this episode, we are breaking down what a brand strategy is, why it is important to start there and the questions that you need to ask when figuring this all out. Rachel offers some great thoughts to work through in order to help you make sure your story and brand are pushing you forward. She is all about progression, not just pretty branding and logos! We really respect Rachel's perspective on the strategic part of branding and we know you will all find it very useful. So buckle up and let's get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On the Strategy Hour Podcast today, we are joined by the wonderful and amazing Rachel Green! She is one of the first people we connected with when we were starting out in the online business world and she has been in business for the last seven years, helping hundreds of businesses grow and succeed. As a brand strategist, designer and educator, Rachel has generated over 5 million dollars in sales for her clients and her focus on empowering female business owners is truly inspiring!</p><p>In this episode, we are breaking down what a brand strategy is, why it is important to start there and the questions that you need to ask when figuring this all out. Rachel offers some great thoughts to work through in order to help you make sure your story and brand are pushing you forward. She is all about progression, not just pretty branding and logos! We really respect Rachel's perspective on the strategic part of branding and we know you will all find it very useful. So buckle up and let's get into some strategy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1885</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5992c9ba-f756-4cd9-b5f9-3a9379e54f3b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5374442940.mp3?updated=1652639896" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>386: Design &amp; Branding Tips for the Non-Designer</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/design-branding-tips-for-the-non-designer</link>
      <description>In the creative entrepreneur world, there are so many talents and you guys are doing great! But the one thing we’re seeing, and we’ve done the same thing, is that design work sometimes falls a little short. You might be a photographer, fine artist or wedding planner but do not necessarily have to expertise when it comes to your branding — that’s a set of skills entirely on its own. It could be an email header, a social media announcement or an infographic you need to whip up, and it’s not as easy as it looks. Graphic designers are trained to know what works and have a sharp eye to identify off-balance designs, but we regular folk don’t have that same skill. 
So, today Emylee gets to direct questions at the Abagail who, as you all know, is a kick-ass designer. Wearing her designer hat, she will advise you about representing your brand in the most professional manner even though you lack professional skills. As much as we focus on teaching you guys about increasing profit, the way you show your brand to the world can be a make or break aspect. The bottom line is this: when you use the same styles, colors and fonts consistently, you become recognized as a brand, and that is your goal.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 03 Dec 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Design &amp; Branding Tips for the Non-Designer</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>386</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d61a8d54-ae9a-11ec-91b1-c723b4a6cf7b/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>In the creative entrepreneur world, there are so many talents and you guys are doing great! But the one thing we’re seeing, and we’ve done the same thing, is that design work sometimes falls a little short. You might be a photographer, fine artist...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In the creative entrepreneur world, there are so many talents and you guys are doing great! But the one thing we’re seeing, and we’ve done the same thing, is that design work sometimes falls a little short. You might be a photographer, fine artist or wedding planner but do not necessarily have to expertise when it comes to your branding — that’s a set of skills entirely on its own. It could be an email header, a social media announcement or an infographic you need to whip up, and it’s not as easy as it looks. Graphic designers are trained to know what works and have a sharp eye to identify off-balance designs, but we regular folk don’t have that same skill. 
So, today Emylee gets to direct questions at the Abagail who, as you all know, is a kick-ass designer. Wearing her designer hat, she will advise you about representing your brand in the most professional manner even though you lack professional skills. As much as we focus on teaching you guys about increasing profit, the way you show your brand to the world can be a make or break aspect. The bottom line is this: when you use the same styles, colors and fonts consistently, you become recognized as a brand, and that is your goal.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In the creative entrepreneur world, there are so many talents and you guys are doing great! But the one thing we’re seeing, and we’ve done the same thing, is that design work sometimes falls a little short. You might be a photographer, fine artist or wedding planner but do not necessarily have to expertise when it comes to your branding — that’s a set of skills entirely on its own. It could be an email header, a social media announcement or an infographic you need to whip up, and it’s not as easy as it looks. Graphic designers are trained to know what works and have a sharp eye to identify off-balance designs, but we regular folk don’t have that same skill. </p><p>So, today Emylee gets to direct questions at the Abagail who, as you all know, is a kick-ass designer. Wearing her designer hat, she will advise you about representing your brand in the most professional manner even though you lack professional skills. As much as we focus on teaching you guys about increasing profit, the way you show your brand to the world can be a make or break aspect. The bottom line is this: when you use the same styles, colors and fonts consistently, you become recognized as a brand, and that is your goal.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2634</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[23df81d6-beaf-41c5-b8aa-6f9ef58c1097]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5860248974.mp3?updated=1652128674" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>385: Top Tips to Be a Better Communicator and Add Humanity to Your Brand with Alexis Teichmiller</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/top-tips-to-be-a-better-communicator-and-add-humanity-to-your-brand-with-alexis-teichmiller</link>
      <description>This week on the Strategy Hour, we welcome a great friend of ours. Alexis Teichmiller is here on the show for the first time, which is kind of weird and surprising! We have known each other for over 3 years and we are super happy to have her, finally! Alexis is currently in Texas, although Illinois is definitely her home, and she works at ConvertKit where she creates, explores and inspires entrepreneurs through her position as the manager of ConvertKit's affiliate program. She loves building relationships with influential creators and got in the game as an online entrepreneur and blogger herself! So she knows the game and its frustrations. She wants to help bloggers find the right fit at ConvertKit and how they can be more human in communication and branding!
In this episode, Alexis gives us some great tangible action steps! The script she offers can easily be used to do what she does and we guarantee you will see some great results! We can all improve our communication with all those who are close to us; this means partners, friends, family and those we work with. Alexis also shares two amazing tactics that ConvertKit has adopted as a company which is a bit scary but pretty revolutionary! There are a bunch of cool takeaways for your business, as well as some book and podcast recommendations that we know y'all are going to love! We are so excited to be talking about the human element to business and how you can show up as vulnerable, relatable, real and strong all at the same time!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 28 Nov 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Top Tips to Be a Better Communicator and Add Humanity to Your Brand with Alexis Teichmiller</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>385</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d6a95f98-ae9a-11ec-91b1-83d87ba5e964/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week on the Strategy Hour, we welcome a great friend of ours. Alexis Teichmiller is here on the show for the first time, which is kind of weird and surprising! We have known each other for over 3 years and we are super happy to have her, finally!...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This week on the Strategy Hour, we welcome a great friend of ours. Alexis Teichmiller is here on the show for the first time, which is kind of weird and surprising! We have known each other for over 3 years and we are super happy to have her, finally! Alexis is currently in Texas, although Illinois is definitely her home, and she works at ConvertKit where she creates, explores and inspires entrepreneurs through her position as the manager of ConvertKit's affiliate program. She loves building relationships with influential creators and got in the game as an online entrepreneur and blogger herself! So she knows the game and its frustrations. She wants to help bloggers find the right fit at ConvertKit and how they can be more human in communication and branding!
In this episode, Alexis gives us some great tangible action steps! The script she offers can easily be used to do what she does and we guarantee you will see some great results! We can all improve our communication with all those who are close to us; this means partners, friends, family and those we work with. Alexis also shares two amazing tactics that ConvertKit has adopted as a company which is a bit scary but pretty revolutionary! There are a bunch of cool takeaways for your business, as well as some book and podcast recommendations that we know y'all are going to love! We are so excited to be talking about the human element to business and how you can show up as vulnerable, relatable, real and strong all at the same time!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on the Strategy Hour, we welcome a great friend of ours. Alexis Teichmiller is here on the show for the first time, which is kind of weird and surprising! We have known each other for over 3 years and we are super happy to have her, finally! Alexis is currently in Texas, although Illinois is definitely her home, and she works at ConvertKit where she creates, explores and inspires entrepreneurs through her position as the manager of ConvertKit's affiliate program. She loves building relationships with influential creators and got in the game as an online entrepreneur and blogger herself! So she knows the game and its frustrations. She wants to help bloggers find the right fit at ConvertKit and how they can be more human in communication and branding!</p><p>In this episode, Alexis gives us some great tangible action steps! The script she offers can easily be used to do what she does and we guarantee you will see some great results! We can all improve our communication with all those who are close to us; this means partners, friends, family and those we work with. Alexis also shares two amazing tactics that ConvertKit has adopted as a company which is a bit scary but pretty revolutionary! There are a bunch of cool takeaways for your business, as well as some book and podcast recommendations that we know y'all are going to love! We are so excited to be talking about the human element to business and how you can show up as vulnerable, relatable, real and strong all at the same time!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2866</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[609864e0-0be4-48c7-86d3-8567aa537397]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6516364521.mp3?updated=1652128550" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>384: Crocodile Tears and the 3 Biggest Mistakes You are Making in Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/crocodile-tears-and-the-3-biggest-mistakes-youre-making-in-business</link>
      <description>Ya’ll now that we’re on a mission to turn you into a full-time creative entrepreneur who earns a sustainable income from your passion. Because we’ve been on this journey ourselves for the past four years and have helped thousands of people through it, we have seen and heard most if not all of the mistakes in the book. While we’ve spoken a great deal about getting your perfectionist or overachieving mindset right, that alone won’t help you to succeed. On a practical level, you need to stop making crucial mistakes, including focusing too heavily on the appearance of your brand, thinking that your audience is a bunch of strangers and convincing yourself that gadgets and systems will get you to where you want to be. Today we unpack each of these common mistakes, so get your notebook and listen up!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 26 Nov 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Crocodile Tears and the 3 Biggest Mistakes You are Making in Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>384</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d734e2de-ae9a-11ec-91b1-7b1abfa41eb1/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>including: focusing too heavily on the appearance of your brand, thinking that your audience is a bunch of strangers and convincing yourself that gadgets and systems will get you to where you want to be. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Ya’ll now that we’re on a mission to turn you into a full-time creative entrepreneur who earns a sustainable income from your passion. Because we’ve been on this journey ourselves for the past four years and have helped thousands of people through it, we have seen and heard most if not all of the mistakes in the book. While we’ve spoken a great deal about getting your perfectionist or overachieving mindset right, that alone won’t help you to succeed. On a practical level, you need to stop making crucial mistakes, including focusing too heavily on the appearance of your brand, thinking that your audience is a bunch of strangers and convincing yourself that gadgets and systems will get you to where you want to be. Today we unpack each of these common mistakes, so get your notebook and listen up!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ya’ll now that we’re on a mission to turn you into a full-time creative entrepreneur who earns a sustainable income from your passion. Because we’ve been on this journey ourselves for the past four years and have helped thousands of people through it, we have seen and heard most if not all of the mistakes in the book. While we’ve spoken a great deal about getting your perfectionist or overachieving mindset right, that alone won’t help you to succeed. On a practical level, you need to stop making crucial mistakes, including focusing too heavily on the appearance of your brand, thinking that your audience is a bunch of strangers and convincing yourself that gadgets and systems will get you to where you want to be. Today we unpack each of these common mistakes, so get your notebook and listen up!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1501</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c39fed9d-9adf-4364-98c9-da87af83e65b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5132663773.mp3?updated=1656441017" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>383: Hiring for Growth Positions in Your Company with Jill Stanton of Screw the Nine to Five</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/hiring-for-growth-positions-in-your-company-with-jill-stanton-of-screw-the-nine-to-five</link>
      <description>Today on The Strategy Hour we are so happy to be joined by our friend Jill Stanton! Jill is the co-founder of Screw the 9 to 5, where she helps ambitious entrepreneurs quit their day jobs and live out their business dreams. They also have a very popular podcast and through all this work has inspired tens of thousands of people to build thriving businesses and live lives full of meaning and purpose. You can see why we love Jill! This is such a fun conversation, in which we focus on what it means to hire for growth instead of filling spaces. There is a big difference between building a team that actually helps you make more money and just getting bigger. It is such an opportune time to talk to Jill about this as she and her husband have just implemented these changes themselves within the last year! So the results are not all in yet, but it is looking good so far.
No matter how big or small your business is, this episode has lessons for you, many of which can be implemented from day one in order to set yourself up for success. As many of you will have noticed we are getting into the habit of emphasizing profit above all else and this is something we have in common with Jill! We are just so excited to have someone with this much experience in the online business world to share their genius with you. We have so much respect for Jill and Screw the 9 to 5, she has learned so many lessons and we can all be really grateful that she is here to share these us!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 21 Nov 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Hiring for Growth Positions in Your Company with Jill Stanton of Screw the Nine to Five</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>383</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d7c27f72-ae9a-11ec-91b1-b79ffdbad8a4/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on The Strategy Hour we are so happy to be joined by our friend Jill Stanton! Jill is the co-founder of Screw the 9 to 5, where she helps ambitious entrepreneurs quit their day jobs and live out their business dreams. They also have a very...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on The Strategy Hour we are so happy to be joined by our friend Jill Stanton! Jill is the co-founder of Screw the 9 to 5, where she helps ambitious entrepreneurs quit their day jobs and live out their business dreams. They also have a very popular podcast and through all this work has inspired tens of thousands of people to build thriving businesses and live lives full of meaning and purpose. You can see why we love Jill! This is such a fun conversation, in which we focus on what it means to hire for growth instead of filling spaces. There is a big difference between building a team that actually helps you make more money and just getting bigger. It is such an opportune time to talk to Jill about this as she and her husband have just implemented these changes themselves within the last year! So the results are not all in yet, but it is looking good so far.
No matter how big or small your business is, this episode has lessons for you, many of which can be implemented from day one in order to set yourself up for success. As many of you will have noticed we are getting into the habit of emphasizing profit above all else and this is something we have in common with Jill! We are just so excited to have someone with this much experience in the online business world to share their genius with you. We have so much respect for Jill and Screw the 9 to 5, she has learned so many lessons and we can all be really grateful that she is here to share these us!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on The Strategy Hour we are so happy to be joined by our friend Jill Stanton! Jill is the co-founder of Screw the 9 to 5, where she helps ambitious entrepreneurs quit their day jobs and live out their business dreams. They also have a very popular podcast and through all this work has inspired tens of thousands of people to build thriving businesses and live lives full of meaning and purpose. You can see why we love Jill! This is such a fun conversation, in which we focus on what it means to hire for growth instead of filling spaces. There is a big difference between building a team that actually helps you make more money and just getting bigger. It is such an opportune time to talk to Jill about this as she and her husband have just implemented these changes themselves within the last year! So the results are not all in yet, but it is looking good so far.</p><p>No matter how big or small your business is, this episode has lessons for you, many of which can be implemented from day one in order to set yourself up for success. As many of you will have noticed we are getting into the habit of emphasizing profit above all else and this is something we have in common with Jill! We are just so excited to have someone with this much experience in the online business world to share their genius with you. We have so much respect for Jill and Screw the 9 to 5, she has learned so many lessons and we can all be really grateful that she is here to share these us!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3111</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f06c4f1d-4314-4758-8172-c95261e55f40]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7499290998.mp3?updated=1652128231" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>382: October Profit Report: How We Nearly Tripled Our Profit</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/october-profit-report-how-we-nearly-tripled-our-profit</link>
      <description>It’s time for another profit report! These are not an excuse to talk about our business – we truly want to arm you with helpful information that you can apply to your business as a full-time creative entrepreneur. Ups and downs are a natural part of any business, so we want to give you a glimpse into our month-to-month profit not so that you might compare your business to ours, but learn from our mistakes and find your own rhythm. We aim for a 30% profit and share what all our expenses are each month and the different sources of income over that period. Today you’ll learn what profit means to us, how our summit sales performed, why you must get hooked up with sponsors, the ins and outs of payment plans, and more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 19 Nov 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>October Profit Report: How We Nearly Tripled Our Profit</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>382</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d86d3eee-ae9a-11ec-91b1-6f63bea39615/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Ups and downs are a natural part of any business, so we want to give you a glimpse into our month-to-month profit not so that you might compare your business to ours, but learn from our mistakes and find your own rhythm. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It’s time for another profit report! These are not an excuse to talk about our business – we truly want to arm you with helpful information that you can apply to your business as a full-time creative entrepreneur. Ups and downs are a natural part of any business, so we want to give you a glimpse into our month-to-month profit not so that you might compare your business to ours, but learn from our mistakes and find your own rhythm. We aim for a 30% profit and share what all our expenses are each month and the different sources of income over that period. Today you’ll learn what profit means to us, how our summit sales performed, why you must get hooked up with sponsors, the ins and outs of payment plans, and more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It’s time for another profit report! These are not an excuse to talk about our business – we truly want to arm you with helpful information that you can apply to your business as a full-time creative entrepreneur. Ups and downs are a natural part of any business, so we want to give you a glimpse into our month-to-month profit not so that you might compare your business to ours, but learn from our mistakes and find your own rhythm. We aim for a 30% profit and share what all our expenses are each month and the different sources of income over that period. Today you’ll learn what profit means to us, how our summit sales performed, why you must get hooked up with sponsors, the ins and outs of payment plans, and more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2121</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[13fcce64-d84a-46d9-9841-2ab77e11a086]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2792638917.mp3?updated=1656440982" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>381: Is LinkedIn a Social Media Platform You Should Be Paying Attention To with Cassandra Thompson</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/is-linkedin-a-social-media-platform-you-should-be-paying-attention-to-a-conversation-with-cassandra-thompson</link>
      <description>Joining us for Strategy Hour today is networking ninja, Cassandra Thompson, who helps businesses extend their network through LinkedIn! But before you think that LinkedIn is only for professional or corporate folks and therefore not applicable to creative entrepreneurs like us, think again. Illustrators, jewelry designers, and service-based providers can all benefit greatly from a LinkedIn presence, and in this episode, Cassandra gives us the step-by-step of setting up a profile, an explanation of how exactly it works and she shares loads of strategies for getting the absolute maximum out of this platform. 
We have to be honest, we too neglected LinkedIn because we thought that it wasn’t really a space for creatives to connect, but after a debate with Cassandra, we have done a 180 — and we’re pretty sure you will too after listening to what she has to say. Be sure to stay tuned in until the end because we are going to give you a 30-day LinkedIn challenge that we’d love for you to participate in! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 14 Nov 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Is LinkedIn a Social Media Platform You Should Be Paying Attention To with Cassandra Thompson</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>381</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d8fbb0d4-ae9a-11ec-91b1-d7c7ee1f91cd/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Before you think that LinkedIn is only for professional or corporate folks and therefore not applicable to creative entrepreneurs like us, think again. Illustrators, jewelry designers, and service-based providers can all benefit greatly from a LinkedIn presence.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Joining us for Strategy Hour today is networking ninja, Cassandra Thompson, who helps businesses extend their network through LinkedIn! But before you think that LinkedIn is only for professional or corporate folks and therefore not applicable to creative entrepreneurs like us, think again. Illustrators, jewelry designers, and service-based providers can all benefit greatly from a LinkedIn presence, and in this episode, Cassandra gives us the step-by-step of setting up a profile, an explanation of how exactly it works and she shares loads of strategies for getting the absolute maximum out of this platform. 
We have to be honest, we too neglected LinkedIn because we thought that it wasn’t really a space for creatives to connect, but after a debate with Cassandra, we have done a 180 — and we’re pretty sure you will too after listening to what she has to say. Be sure to stay tuned in until the end because we are going to give you a 30-day LinkedIn challenge that we’d love for you to participate in! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Joining us for Strategy Hour today is networking ninja, Cassandra Thompson, who helps businesses extend their network through LinkedIn! But before you think that LinkedIn is only for professional or corporate folks and therefore not applicable to creative entrepreneurs like us, think again. Illustrators, jewelry designers, and service-based providers can all benefit greatly from a LinkedIn presence, and in this episode, Cassandra gives us the step-by-step of setting up a profile, an explanation of how exactly it works and she shares loads of strategies for getting the absolute maximum out of this platform. </p><p>We have to be honest, we too neglected LinkedIn because we thought that it wasn’t really a space for creatives to connect, but after a debate with Cassandra, we have done a 180 — and we’re pretty sure you will too after listening to what she has to say. Be sure to stay tuned in until the end because we are going to give you a 30-day LinkedIn challenge that we’d love for you to participate in! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3014</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[826f4f48-ad69-4846-8d50-1534d983c7c2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8542757521.mp3?updated=1656440940" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>380: What We are Thinking About for 2020 and How to Prep for Your Next Planning Session</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/draft-what-we-are-thinking-about-for-2020-and-how-to-prep-for-your-next-planning-session</link>
      <description>We cannot believe we are about to enter into a new decade! It's crazy but it's true, so get ready! This is a bit of an unplanned episode, which is what makes it special. We want to take this chance to share our planning around the new year with all of you, and exactly what we are thinking about accomplishing for our business in 2020. 
This chat will be the build-up to our end of year meetings around wrapping up and looking ahead. Just think of it as an unofficial look inside our minds as we close out another year at Boss Project and The Strategy Hour! So many businesses do not make it past the fifth year and we do not aim to add to this statistic! So feel free to drop in and eavesdrop on a typical meeting between us as we voice our thoughts and ideas going into the last part of 2019!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 12 Nov 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What We are Thinking About for 2020 and How to Prep for Your Next Planning Session</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>380</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d991256a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-db7a9e7049f7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We cannot believe we are about to enter into a new decade! It's crazy but it's true, so get ready! This is a bit of an unplanned episode, which is what makes it special. We want to take this chance to share our planning around the new year with all of...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We cannot believe we are about to enter into a new decade! It's crazy but it's true, so get ready! This is a bit of an unplanned episode, which is what makes it special. We want to take this chance to share our planning around the new year with all of you, and exactly what we are thinking about accomplishing for our business in 2020. 
This chat will be the build-up to our end of year meetings around wrapping up and looking ahead. Just think of it as an unofficial look inside our minds as we close out another year at Boss Project and The Strategy Hour! So many businesses do not make it past the fifth year and we do not aim to add to this statistic! So feel free to drop in and eavesdrop on a typical meeting between us as we voice our thoughts and ideas going into the last part of 2019!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We cannot believe we are about to enter into a new decade! It's crazy but it's true, so get ready! This is a bit of an unplanned episode, which is what makes it special. We want to take this chance to share our planning around the new year with all of you, and exactly what we are thinking about accomplishing for our business in 2020. </p><p>This chat will be the build-up to our end of year meetings around wrapping up and looking ahead. Just think of it as an unofficial look inside our minds as we close out another year at Boss Project and The Strategy Hour! So many businesses do not make it past the fifth year and we do not aim to add to this statistic! So feel free to drop in and eavesdrop on a typical meeting between us as we voice our thoughts and ideas going into the last part of 2019!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1617</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[eac7028c554d40028ba830e820bb640b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9076929877.mp3?updated=1656421938" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>379: Running a Simplified Business and Bangin' Black Friday Sales with Abbey Ashley</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/planning-and-preparing-for-black-friday-promotions-with-abbey-ashley</link>
      <description>Our guest on the show today is Abbey Ashley, the founder of The Virtual Savvy! After running her own successful VA business for a few years, she has gone on to help other aspiring virtual assistants launch and grow their own at-home businesses from scratch. We get to pick her brain today, and the reason we’re so excited is that she has an amazing business philosophy which involves keeping things simple while still making a major impact! She has perfected the art of doubling down on the areas that work and remaining laser-focused on those rather than getting distracted. 
In this episode, you’ll learn about her launch game plans as well as how she deals with Black Fridays, teaching us how to set ourselves up for a booming year ahead. You’ll be thrilled to know that Abbey will also be a speaker at our upcoming Boss Project Summit, another great reason to sign up and get your pass!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 07 Nov 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Running a Simplified Business and Bangin' Black Friday Sales with Abbey Ashley</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>379</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/da241690-ae9a-11ec-91b1-0b8478509cb6/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Our guest on the show today is Abbey Ashley, the founder of The Virtual Savvy! After running her own successful VA business for a few years, she has gone on to help other aspiring virtual assistants launch and grow their own at-home businesses from...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Our guest on the show today is Abbey Ashley, the founder of The Virtual Savvy! After running her own successful VA business for a few years, she has gone on to help other aspiring virtual assistants launch and grow their own at-home businesses from scratch. We get to pick her brain today, and the reason we’re so excited is that she has an amazing business philosophy which involves keeping things simple while still making a major impact! She has perfected the art of doubling down on the areas that work and remaining laser-focused on those rather than getting distracted. 
In this episode, you’ll learn about her launch game plans as well as how she deals with Black Fridays, teaching us how to set ourselves up for a booming year ahead. You’ll be thrilled to know that Abbey will also be a speaker at our upcoming Boss Project Summit, another great reason to sign up and get your pass!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Our guest on the show today is Abbey Ashley, the founder of The Virtual Savvy! After running her own successful VA business for a few years, she has gone on to help other aspiring virtual assistants launch and grow their own at-home businesses from scratch. We get to pick her brain today, and the reason we’re so excited is that she has an amazing business philosophy which involves keeping things simple while still making a major impact! She has perfected the art of doubling down on the areas that work and remaining laser-focused on those rather than getting distracted. </p><p>In this episode, you’ll learn about her launch game plans as well as how she deals with Black Fridays, teaching us how to set ourselves up for a booming year ahead. You’ll be thrilled to know that Abbey will also be a speaker at our upcoming <a href="https://bossprojectsummit.com/">Boss Project Summit</a>, another great reason to sign up and get your pass!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2299</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a642d8d9739848958d970efb76bd3c1b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1314288710.mp3?updated=1652128108" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>378: 4 Highly Effective Sales Techniques &amp; How We Are Using Them in Our Businesses</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/4-highly-effective-sales-techniques-how-we-are-using-them-in-our-businesses</link>
      <description>Do you want to increase your sales? Of course, you do, we all do! There are so many strategies out there on how to do this and today we are picking out four that we use and that have been highly effective for us! We hope that sharing this with you will help you to decide which strategies are best for you and your hustle. When we speak about our work we are referring to Boss Project, our main thing and then each of our own side gigs. Some of the strategies have worked better in different places but we will be unpacking all of that, do not worry!
The cool thing is that you get to try these out for yourself and see which suits you. We want you to think about which fits with your goals and lifestyle, as well as its conversion efficacy. These are the most important metrics for you to keep an eye on while testing things out. Don't forget to keep the conversation going over on Instagram, you know we love to hear from you, so hit us up with any thoughts or questions!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 05 Nov 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>4 Highly Effective Sales Techniques &amp; How We Are Using Them in Our Businesses</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>378</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/dae6e5a8-ae9a-11ec-91b1-cb8f84e425c3/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Do you want to increase your sales? Of course, you do, we all do! There are so many strategies out there on how to do this and today we are picking out four that we use and that have been highly effective for us! We hope that sharing this with you...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Do you want to increase your sales? Of course, you do, we all do! There are so many strategies out there on how to do this and today we are picking out four that we use and that have been highly effective for us! We hope that sharing this with you will help you to decide which strategies are best for you and your hustle. When we speak about our work we are referring to Boss Project, our main thing and then each of our own side gigs. Some of the strategies have worked better in different places but we will be unpacking all of that, do not worry!
The cool thing is that you get to try these out for yourself and see which suits you. We want you to think about which fits with your goals and lifestyle, as well as its conversion efficacy. These are the most important metrics for you to keep an eye on while testing things out. Don't forget to keep the conversation going over on Instagram, you know we love to hear from you, so hit us up with any thoughts or questions!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Do you want to increase your sales? Of course, you do, we all do! There are so many strategies out there on how to do this and today we are picking out four that we use and that have been highly effective for us! We hope that sharing this with you will help you to decide which strategies are best for you and your hustle. When we speak about our work we are referring to Boss Project, our main thing and then each of our own side gigs. Some of the strategies have worked better in different places but we will be unpacking all of that, do not worry!</p><p>The cool thing is that you get to try these out for yourself and see which suits you. We want you to think about which fits with your goals and lifestyle, as well as its conversion efficacy. These are the most important metrics for you to keep an eye on while testing things out. Don't forget to keep the conversation going over on Instagram, you know we love to hear from you, so hit us up with any thoughts or questions!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2104</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[62e79637e6ef4ee183f462398def3e8c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5401513292.mp3?updated=1652128047" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>377: How to Scale to 6-Figures and Leave Your 9-5 in Under 12 months with Taylor Slango</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-scale-to-6-figures-and-leave-your-9-5-in-under-12-months-with-taylor-slango</link>
      <description>Welcome back to the show all you lovely listeners! Today we have a great guest who we cannot wait to share with you. Taylor Slango is an online business coach who helps women looking to grow their empire without compromising the things that are important to them! Her focus is on helping clients align their energy and strategy, in order to have more fun, make more money and ultimately make more sales! She started her business just one year ago and has since scaled to six figures and managed to leave her 9 to 5 in under 12 months. Impressive, right? This path is exactly what we will be talking about today!
We are sure you all have a million questions around this transition. What it looks like, what to watch out for, how to know you're ready, the mindset to aim for and so on. Do not fear, we cover it all! We think the fact that Taylor is so fresh into this journey herself makes this an amazing opportunity to get her perspective! Taylor will also be at our upcoming summit, which we hope all of you have your free tickets for and if you do not yet, go get them! Her presentation is titled, 'How to Plan Your Next Sold Out Launch Without Stress, Overwhelm or Burnout'. This fits perfectly into today's conversation and we think you all need to hear it, so join us as we dive in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 31 Oct 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Scale to 6-Figures and Leave Your 9-5 in Under 12 months with Taylor Slango</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>377</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/db75c034-ae9a-11ec-91b1-fbd03aaa28ac/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Taylor Slango is an online business coach who helps women looking to grow their empire without compromising the things that are important to them! Her focus is on helping clients align their energy and strategy, in order to have more fun, make more money and ultimately make more sales! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to the show all you lovely listeners! Today we have a great guest who we cannot wait to share with you. Taylor Slango is an online business coach who helps women looking to grow their empire without compromising the things that are important to them! Her focus is on helping clients align their energy and strategy, in order to have more fun, make more money and ultimately make more sales! She started her business just one year ago and has since scaled to six figures and managed to leave her 9 to 5 in under 12 months. Impressive, right? This path is exactly what we will be talking about today!
We are sure you all have a million questions around this transition. What it looks like, what to watch out for, how to know you're ready, the mindset to aim for and so on. Do not fear, we cover it all! We think the fact that Taylor is so fresh into this journey herself makes this an amazing opportunity to get her perspective! Taylor will also be at our upcoming summit, which we hope all of you have your free tickets for and if you do not yet, go get them! Her presentation is titled, 'How to Plan Your Next Sold Out Launch Without Stress, Overwhelm or Burnout'. This fits perfectly into today's conversation and we think you all need to hear it, so join us as we dive in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to the show all you lovely listeners! Today we have a great guest who we cannot wait to share with you. Taylor Slango is an online business coach who helps women looking to grow their empire without compromising the things that are important to them! Her focus is on helping clients align their energy and strategy, in order to have more fun, make more money and ultimately make more sales! She started her business just one year ago and has since scaled to six figures and managed to leave her 9 to 5 in under 12 months. Impressive, right? This path is exactly what we will be talking about today!</p><p>We are sure you all have a million questions around this transition. What it looks like, what to watch out for, how to know you're ready, the mindset to aim for and so on. Do not fear, we cover it all! We think the fact that Taylor is so fresh into this journey herself makes this an amazing opportunity to get her perspective! Taylor will also be at our upcoming summit, which we hope all of you have your free tickets for and if you do not yet, go get them! Her presentation is titled, 'How to Plan Your Next Sold Out Launch Without Stress, Overwhelm or Burnout'. This fits perfectly into today's conversation and we think you all need to hear it, so join us as we dive in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1730</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[976bd2c8276847d9905c88065976be77]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2473395125.mp3?updated=1656421880" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>376: How to Get Unstuck if You’re a Perfectionist or an Over Achiever</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-get-unstuck-if-youre-a-perfectionist-or-an-overachiever</link>
      <description>Our whole mission is to help you transform your passion into a full-time business that provides you with a sustainable income, while also giving you the freedom to make your own rules. But becoming a creative entrepreneur comes with its own obstacles, and today we talk about the three-level model that we use to help our audience better understand business and where they are at in the process. The first tier of the model has you stuck in the idea phase, which often involves redesigning your brand, changing your website and trying to get all the cosmetic aspects perfect. The problem is, however, that you never move on to the implementation stage. 
When you are on the second level, you have started implementing your ideas and have made a few sales, but here you might also get trapped. There is a temptation to try several ideas at once and you come up with many tools and programs to help you grow. But the truth is, if you want to get to that third level, you need to simplify by choosing to focus on only one or two things, and then to carefully measure their results. Remember to sign up for our upcoming webinar at https://bossproject.com/dreamjob where you’ll learn a whole lot more, including our business philosophy, the most common mistakes creative entrepreneurs are making and how to get past yourself! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 29 Oct 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Get Unstuck if You’re a Perfectionist or an Over Achiever</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>376</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/dc0f201c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-ab3f0335a9c7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Our whole mission is to help you transform your passion into a full-time business that provides you with a sustainable income, while also giving you the freedom to make your own rules. But becoming a creative entrepreneur comes with its own obstacles,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Our whole mission is to help you transform your passion into a full-time business that provides you with a sustainable income, while also giving you the freedom to make your own rules. But becoming a creative entrepreneur comes with its own obstacles, and today we talk about the three-level model that we use to help our audience better understand business and where they are at in the process. The first tier of the model has you stuck in the idea phase, which often involves redesigning your brand, changing your website and trying to get all the cosmetic aspects perfect. The problem is, however, that you never move on to the implementation stage. 
When you are on the second level, you have started implementing your ideas and have made a few sales, but here you might also get trapped. There is a temptation to try several ideas at once and you come up with many tools and programs to help you grow. But the truth is, if you want to get to that third level, you need to simplify by choosing to focus on only one or two things, and then to carefully measure their results. Remember to sign up for our upcoming webinar at https://bossproject.com/dreamjob where you’ll learn a whole lot more, including our business philosophy, the most common mistakes creative entrepreneurs are making and how to get past yourself! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Our whole mission is to help you transform your passion into a full-time business that provides you with a sustainable income, while also giving you the freedom to make your own rules. But becoming a creative entrepreneur comes with its own obstacles, and today we talk about the three-level model that we use to help our audience better understand business and where they are at in the process. The first tier of the model has you stuck in the idea phase, which often involves redesigning your brand, changing your website and trying to get all the cosmetic aspects perfect. The problem is, however, that you never move on to the implementation stage. </p><p>When you are on the second level, you have started implementing your ideas and have made a few sales, but here you might also get trapped. There is a temptation to try several ideas at once and you come up with many tools and programs to help you grow. But the truth is, if you want to get to that third level, you need to simplify by choosing to focus on only one or two things, and then to carefully measure their results. Remember to sign up for our upcoming webinar at <a href="https://bossproject.com/dreamjob">https://bossproject.com/dreamjob</a> where you’ll learn a whole lot more, including our business philosophy, the most common mistakes creative entrepreneurs are making and how to get past yourself! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1918</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9443fdf4e98042b18cd337bcc3e973cd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4352998203.mp3?updated=1652127876" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>375: Increase Engagement and Grow on Instagram in 2019 with Joelle Bradfield</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/increase-engagement-and-grow-on-instagram-in-2020-with-joelle-elizabeth</link>
      <description>Today we are so lucky to host Joelle Elizabeth on the show! Joelle is a boudoir photographer and marketing strategist for other ambitious photographers and she is here to talk about growing a following and creating engagement on Instagram! 
Remember when we almost deleted out Instagram account? Well, Joelle was one of the amazing people who reached out to us and offered some great alternative ideas and so we are eternally thankful to Joelle for the great value she has provided to us! Join us today as we get into how to double down on what you have going on and boost your status on the 'gram to get that business pumping!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 24 Oct 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Increase Engagement and Grow on Instagram in 2019 with Joelle Bradfield</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>375</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/dcb3c108-ae9a-11ec-91b1-4fbe0df02473/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are so lucky to host Joelle Elizabeth on the show! Joelle is a boudoir photographer and marketing strategist for other ambitious photographers and she is here to talk about growing a following and creating engagement on Instagram! ...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are so lucky to host Joelle Elizabeth on the show! Joelle is a boudoir photographer and marketing strategist for other ambitious photographers and she is here to talk about growing a following and creating engagement on Instagram! 
Remember when we almost deleted out Instagram account? Well, Joelle was one of the amazing people who reached out to us and offered some great alternative ideas and so we are eternally thankful to Joelle for the great value she has provided to us! Join us today as we get into how to double down on what you have going on and boost your status on the 'gram to get that business pumping!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are so lucky to host Joelle Elizabeth on the show! Joelle is a boudoir photographer and marketing strategist for other ambitious photographers and she is here to talk about growing a following and creating engagement on Instagram! </p><p>Remember when we almost deleted out Instagram account? Well, Joelle was one of the amazing people who reached out to us and offered some great alternative ideas and so we are eternally thankful to Joelle for the great value she has provided to us! Join us today as we get into how to double down on what you have going on and boost your status on the 'gram to get that business pumping!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2998</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5516bc14342844548e4881f2c625d267]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6613356721.mp3?updated=1656421760" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>374: September Profit Report: What We’re Doing to Avoid Losing $4k Each Month</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/september-profit-report-what-were-doing-to-avoid-losing-4k-each-month</link>
      <description>Today we’re sharing with you our profit report for September. This is such a great opportunity for us to reflect on our business while also giving you a sneak-peak into how this might be applicable to yours. And before you think this is going to be boring – it’s not a traditional income report and we’re not giving you every single figure because it leads to a lot of unnecessary comparisons, disrupting the possibility of learning something. 
In this episode, we’re going to go over what worked and what didn’t, where the money came in from and how it left, and what profit was left right at the end. Comparing September’s report with the previous month’s will also be helpful in understanding the unpredictable nature of business and will be a good starting point for getting some new strategies in place. Be sure to check in for another business masterclass!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 22 Oct 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>September Profit Report: What We’re Doing to Avoid Losing $4k Each Month</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>374</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/dd42e810-ae9a-11ec-91b1-176d64b09f89/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we’re sharing with you our profit report for September. This is such a great opportunity for us to reflect on our business while also giving you a sneak-peak into how this might be applicable to yours. And before you think this is going to be...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we’re sharing with you our profit report for September. This is such a great opportunity for us to reflect on our business while also giving you a sneak-peak into how this might be applicable to yours. And before you think this is going to be boring – it’s not a traditional income report and we’re not giving you every single figure because it leads to a lot of unnecessary comparisons, disrupting the possibility of learning something. 
In this episode, we’re going to go over what worked and what didn’t, where the money came in from and how it left, and what profit was left right at the end. Comparing September’s report with the previous month’s will also be helpful in understanding the unpredictable nature of business and will be a good starting point for getting some new strategies in place. Be sure to check in for another business masterclass!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we’re sharing with you our profit report for September. This is such a great opportunity for us to reflect on our business while also giving you a sneak-peak into how this might be applicable to yours. And before you think this is going to be boring – it’s not a traditional income report and we’re not giving you every single figure because it leads to a lot of unnecessary comparisons, disrupting the possibility of learning something. </p><p>In this episode, we’re going to go over what worked and what didn’t, where the money came in from and how it left, and what profit was left right at the end. Comparing September’s report with the previous month’s will also be helpful in understanding the unpredictable nature of business and will be a good starting point for getting some new strategies in place. Be sure to check in for another business masterclass!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2298</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[773ffc42fc9f415dbe4a07d7795df385]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2636243751.mp3?updated=1656421711" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>373: The Secrets Behind Scaling Your Service Based Business with Amy Northard and Parker Stevenson</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-secrets-behind-scaling-your-service-based-business-with-amy-northard-and-parker-stevenson</link>
      <description>Today we have our first roundtable discussion of sorts! We are joined by Parker Stevenson of Evolved Finance and Amy Northard of Amy Northard CPA! Both of our guests are people that we work with and they are here to tell us about their experiences scaling service-based business scaling service-based businesses. Parker is our resident bookkeeping and financial guru and Amy is our tax accountant and so much more! Now you might be thinking that these topics might not make for the most interesting episode but we promise this is going to be super fun and not at all dull!
Both our guests spoke at our recent summit about growing a team and productizing a service
growing team, productizing your service and we wanted to pick their brains just a little bit more on the subject! So they are here to give you some suggestions on realistic scaling and how they have found it possible to move things upward in their service-based businesses. So if you love client work but also want to keep growing and cannot quite imagine how it might all work, this is the episode for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 17 Oct 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Secrets Behind Scaling Your Service Based Business with Amy Northard and Parker Stevenson</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>373</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/de195b34-ae9a-11ec-91b1-87276998e126/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we have our first roundtable discussion of sorts! We are joined by Parker Stevenson of Evolved Finance and Amy Northard of Amy Northard CPA! Both of our guests are people that we work with and they are here to tell us about their experiences...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we have our first roundtable discussion of sorts! We are joined by Parker Stevenson of Evolved Finance and Amy Northard of Amy Northard CPA! Both of our guests are people that we work with and they are here to tell us about their experiences scaling service-based business scaling service-based businesses. Parker is our resident bookkeeping and financial guru and Amy is our tax accountant and so much more! Now you might be thinking that these topics might not make for the most interesting episode but we promise this is going to be super fun and not at all dull!
Both our guests spoke at our recent summit about growing a team and productizing a service
growing team, productizing your service and we wanted to pick their brains just a little bit more on the subject! So they are here to give you some suggestions on realistic scaling and how they have found it possible to move things upward in their service-based businesses. So if you love client work but also want to keep growing and cannot quite imagine how it might all work, this is the episode for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we have our first roundtable discussion of sorts! We are joined by Parker Stevenson of Evolved Finance and Amy Northard of Amy Northard CPA! Both of our guests are people that we work with and they are here to tell us about their experiences scaling service-based business scaling service-based businesses. Parker is our resident bookkeeping and financial guru and Amy is our tax accountant and so much more! Now you might be thinking that these topics might not make for the most interesting episode but we promise this is going to be super fun and not at all dull!</p><p>Both our guests spoke at our recent summit about growing a team and productizing a service</p><p>growing team, productizing your service and we wanted to pick their brains just a little bit more on the subject! So they are here to give you some suggestions on realistic scaling and how they have found it possible to move things upward in their service-based businesses. So if you love client work but also want to keep growing and cannot quite imagine how it might all work, this is the episode for you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2858</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[72fb1cda36c640c08adc66cb129e40ef]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3957956193.mp3?updated=1652127798" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>372: Seasonal Marketing Strategies and Conquering 2020 with the Boss Project Summit</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/seasonal-marketing-strategies-and-conquering-2020-with-the-boss-project-summit</link>
      <description>Welcome to the Strategy Hour, everybody! Today’s show is all about our upcoming summit! Yup, it is our fourth summit, can you believe it? This time out we are focused on helping you make the most of the end of the year and soaring into the new year like a rockstar! It is going to be so awesome and we can hardly contain our excitement about it! There is so much potential for the last part of the year and we probably do not need to tell you that Q4 is a really big one for small business owners.
Our summit is going to set you up to tie a big, beautiful bow around 2019 and kickstart the new year on the right foot with the best energy. It can also be used as a great way to take stock and move into the next phase based on the lessons available. We wanted to bring you a complete package that offers a selection of things you need for now, the end of the year and the new year too! These time-sensitive strategies and ideas will cover Black Friday, Cyber Monday, the holiday season, planning, questions and setting goals. We want to help you commit to the right things and give you the right stuff to implement in your business for the better. Join us as we give a preview of what to expect!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 15 Oct 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Seasonal Marketing Strategies and Conquering 2020 with the Boss Project Summit</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>372</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/dea0777c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-872dc196ada2/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This time out we are focused on helping you make the most of the end of the year and soaring into the new year like a rockstar! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to the Strategy Hour, everybody! Today’s show is all about our upcoming summit! Yup, it is our fourth summit, can you believe it? This time out we are focused on helping you make the most of the end of the year and soaring into the new year like a rockstar! It is going to be so awesome and we can hardly contain our excitement about it! There is so much potential for the last part of the year and we probably do not need to tell you that Q4 is a really big one for small business owners.
Our summit is going to set you up to tie a big, beautiful bow around 2019 and kickstart the new year on the right foot with the best energy. It can also be used as a great way to take stock and move into the next phase based on the lessons available. We wanted to bring you a complete package that offers a selection of things you need for now, the end of the year and the new year too! These time-sensitive strategies and ideas will cover Black Friday, Cyber Monday, the holiday season, planning, questions and setting goals. We want to help you commit to the right things and give you the right stuff to implement in your business for the better. Join us as we give a preview of what to expect!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to the Strategy Hour, everybody! Today’s show is all about our upcoming summit! Yup, it is our fourth summit, can you believe it? This time out we are focused on helping you make the most of the end of the year and soaring into the new year like a rockstar! It is going to be so awesome and we can hardly contain our excitement about it! There is so much potential for the last part of the year and we probably do not need to tell you that Q4 is a really big one for small business owners.</p><p>Our summit is going to set you up to tie a big, beautiful bow around 2019 and kickstart the new year on the right foot with the best energy. It can also be used as a great way to take stock and move into the next phase based on the lessons available. We wanted to bring you a complete package that offers a selection of things you need for now, the end of the year and the new year too! These time-sensitive strategies and ideas will cover Black Friday, Cyber Monday, the holiday season, planning, questions and setting goals. We want to help you commit to the right things and give you the right stuff to implement in your business for the better. Join us as we give a preview of what to expect!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2050</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[de1852a248914192a4f94d6d38ad0728]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9953497028.mp3?updated=1656421682" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>371: Using NLP to Perfect Your Sales Language, Change Your Deep Beliefs and Rewire Neural Pathways with Jen Casey</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/using-nlp-to-perfect-your-sales-language-change-your-deep-beliefs-and-rewire-neural-pathways-with-jen-casey</link>
      <description>Today we are super glad to welcome business and NLP coach Jen Casey to the show! Hailing from NYC, Jen is focussed on helping coaches sell profitable group programs by incorporating psychology into their sales techniques. She also has her own podcast called the Inner Boss Podcast, so make sure to check that out! As you probably know, here at The Strategy Hour we are pretty obsessed with psychology! Jen is all about perfecting sales language for webinars and in-person meetings and uses her techniques to change deep-rooted beliefs and alter the neural pathways that hold us back. 
She has action steps for repeating patterns that create new pathways and habits that are more in line with our goals and ambitions and by learning these ideas you can help your customers do the same thing! This is a long episode with lots to think about, so you might want to grab a notepad and jot down some homework! Take part in the exercises and share your experiences on our Instagram, we love hearing from you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 10 Oct 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Using NLP to Perfect Your Sales Language, Change Your Deep Beliefs and Rewire Neural Pathways with Jen Casey</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>371</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/df4f4216-ae9a-11ec-91b1-db86240a3014/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are super glad to welcome business and NLP coach Jen Casey to the show! Hailing from NYC, Jen is focussed on helping coaches sell profitable group programs by incorporating psychology into their sales techniques. She also has her own podcast...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are super glad to welcome business and NLP coach Jen Casey to the show! Hailing from NYC, Jen is focussed on helping coaches sell profitable group programs by incorporating psychology into their sales techniques. She also has her own podcast called the Inner Boss Podcast, so make sure to check that out! As you probably know, here at The Strategy Hour we are pretty obsessed with psychology! Jen is all about perfecting sales language for webinars and in-person meetings and uses her techniques to change deep-rooted beliefs and alter the neural pathways that hold us back. 
She has action steps for repeating patterns that create new pathways and habits that are more in line with our goals and ambitions and by learning these ideas you can help your customers do the same thing! This is a long episode with lots to think about, so you might want to grab a notepad and jot down some homework! Take part in the exercises and share your experiences on our Instagram, we love hearing from you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are super glad to welcome business and NLP coach Jen Casey to the show! Hailing from NYC, Jen is focussed on helping coaches sell profitable group programs by incorporating psychology into their sales techniques. She also has her own podcast called the Inner Boss Podcast, so make sure to check that out! As you probably know, here at The Strategy Hour we are pretty obsessed with psychology! Jen is all about perfecting sales language for webinars and in-person meetings and uses her techniques to change deep-rooted beliefs and alter the neural pathways that hold us back. </p><p>She has action steps for repeating patterns that create new pathways and habits that are more in line with our goals and ambitions and by learning these ideas you can help your customers do the same thing! This is a long episode with lots to think about, so you might want to grab a notepad and jot down some homework! Take part in the exercises and share your experiences on our Instagram, we love hearing from you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3054</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f8b208c1874342e99443b29c357c4059]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3262456816.mp3?updated=1652127730" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>370: The Side Hustle Epidemic</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-side-hustle-epidemic</link>
      <description>We did a survey to find out where you guys are currently at in your businesses, the areas you are struggling in, what kind of profits you are making and where we could come in and offer some guidance. What we’ve noticed from the feedback and about the industry generally is that there is an epidemic going on – one that involves the side hustle! So, we thought we better address this topic, not to pigeonhole you, but rather to give you the facts we’ve gathered. 
The survey is technically still live, and the report is automatically updated, so you can keep checking in to see how the data shifts. In our email correspondence to you, we will link the survey and the results page for you to access easily. What do other similar surveys say? Where are most of you at in your businesses? What kind of money are you making or hoping to make? We get into all of these questions, revealing some super surprising results! Join us to find out what your sisters said about their side hustles! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 08 Oct 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Side Hustle Epidemic</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>370</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/e00f4548-ae9a-11ec-91b1-cf502ba02320/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We did a survey to find out where you guys are currently at in your businesses, the areas you are struggling in, what kind of profits you are making and where we could come in and offer some guidance. What we’ve noticed from the feedback and about...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We did a survey to find out where you guys are currently at in your businesses, the areas you are struggling in, what kind of profits you are making and where we could come in and offer some guidance. What we’ve noticed from the feedback and about the industry generally is that there is an epidemic going on – one that involves the side hustle! So, we thought we better address this topic, not to pigeonhole you, but rather to give you the facts we’ve gathered. 
The survey is technically still live, and the report is automatically updated, so you can keep checking in to see how the data shifts. In our email correspondence to you, we will link the survey and the results page for you to access easily. What do other similar surveys say? Where are most of you at in your businesses? What kind of money are you making or hoping to make? We get into all of these questions, revealing some super surprising results! Join us to find out what your sisters said about their side hustles! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We did a survey to find out where you guys are currently at in your businesses, the areas you are struggling in, what kind of profits you are making and where we could come in and offer some guidance. What we’ve noticed from the feedback and about the industry generally is that there is an epidemic going on – one that involves the side hustle! So, we thought we better address this topic, not to pigeonhole you, but rather to give you the facts we’ve gathered. </p><p>The survey is technically still live, and the report is automatically updated, so you can keep checking in to see how the data shifts. In our email correspondence to you, we will link the survey and the results page for you to access easily. What do other similar surveys say? Where are most of you at in your businesses? What kind of money are you making or hoping to make? We get into all of these questions, revealing some super surprising results! Join us to find out what your sisters said about their side hustles! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1661</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a9daf3ef20024dd0ae9f1d70b8159dbd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5667107665.mp3?updated=1656421547" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>369: Unf*ck Your Biz Framework with Braden Drake</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/unfck-your-biz-framework-with-braden-drake</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Braden Drake, a California licensed attorney with a master’s degree in tax law joining our conversation. He runs an education company that teaches other small business owners how to get the legal and tax stuff in order to ultimately unf*ck your business framework! He’s a pro at sorting out all the accounting and tax mess we make in our businesses, all those things that are totally befuddling to most of us! 
You’ll be happy to hear that he dishes out a lot of great strategy regarding lawyer-y things, and towards the end of our talk, he also gives away an awesome resource. If you need to do some damage control or brush up on your know-how around the sticky issues like choosing the right entity, paying quarterly taxes and avoiding Frankenstein contracts, be sure to tune in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 03 Oct 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Unf*ck Your Biz Framework with Braden Drake</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>369</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/e09e649e-ae9a-11ec-91b1-9bdf0c3549b9/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Braden Drake, a California licensed attorney with a master’s degree in tax law joining our conversation. He runs an education company that teaches other small business owners how to get the legal and tax stuff in order...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Braden Drake, a California licensed attorney with a master’s degree in tax law joining our conversation. He runs an education company that teaches other small business owners how to get the legal and tax stuff in order to ultimately unf*ck your business framework! He’s a pro at sorting out all the accounting and tax mess we make in our businesses, all those things that are totally befuddling to most of us! 
You’ll be happy to hear that he dishes out a lot of great strategy regarding lawyer-y things, and towards the end of our talk, he also gives away an awesome resource. If you need to do some damage control or brush up on your know-how around the sticky issues like choosing the right entity, paying quarterly taxes and avoiding Frankenstein contracts, be sure to tune in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Braden Drake, a California licensed attorney with a master’s degree in tax law joining our conversation. He runs an education company that teaches other small business owners how to get the legal and tax stuff in order to ultimately unf*ck your business framework! He’s a pro at sorting out all the accounting and tax mess we make in our businesses, all those things that are totally befuddling to most of us! </p><p>You’ll be happy to hear that he dishes out a lot of great strategy regarding lawyer-y things, and towards the end of our talk, he also gives away an awesome resource. If you need to do some damage control or brush up on your know-how around the sticky issues like choosing the right entity, paying quarterly taxes and avoiding Frankenstein contracts, be sure to tune in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2122</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3301712a94f14977b6cb3114a15073bf]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4344895307.mp3?updated=1652127575" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>368: The Truth About Employees Vs. Contractors</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-truth-about-employees-vs-contractors</link>
      <description>We’ve heard from a lot of people that going from contractors to employees is complicated, expensive and overwhelming, so for a long time, we avoided going down that road. But then we started looking into it and considered all the potentially good stuff about having employees, such as having more control over how they spend their time and when they work. On today’s episode, we want to talk about all the things to think about before hiring an employee, because the truth is, it is very different and a much bigger responsibility. 
There are pros and cons to both, though, and that is why we share with you our experience over the last few years, so that you can be prepared for whichever scenario you choose. It’s all about looking at your business and figuring out whether you are in a financial position to take on a full-time employee and whether you are prepared to deal with the positives and negatives of you each option. Join us for everything you need to know about the people who do work for your business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 Oct 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Truth About Employees Vs. Contractors</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>368</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/e44b4ca6-ae9a-11ec-91b1-438d16ef2fae/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’ve heard from a lot of people that going from contractors to employees is complicated, expensive and overwhelming, so for a long time, we avoided going down that road. But then we started looking into it and considered all the potentially good...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’ve heard from a lot of people that going from contractors to employees is complicated, expensive and overwhelming, so for a long time, we avoided going down that road. But then we started looking into it and considered all the potentially good stuff about having employees, such as having more control over how they spend their time and when they work. On today’s episode, we want to talk about all the things to think about before hiring an employee, because the truth is, it is very different and a much bigger responsibility. 
There are pros and cons to both, though, and that is why we share with you our experience over the last few years, so that you can be prepared for whichever scenario you choose. It’s all about looking at your business and figuring out whether you are in a financial position to take on a full-time employee and whether you are prepared to deal with the positives and negatives of you each option. Join us for everything you need to know about the people who do work for your business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’ve heard from a lot of people that going from contractors to employees is complicated, expensive and overwhelming, so for a long time, we avoided going down that road. But then we started looking into it and considered all the potentially good stuff about having employees, such as having more control over how they spend their time and when they work. On today’s episode, we want to talk about all the things to think about before hiring an employee, because the truth is, it is very different and a much bigger responsibility. </p><p>There are pros and cons to both, though, and that is why we share with you our experience over the last few years, so that you can be prepared for whichever scenario you choose. It’s all about looking at your business and figuring out whether you are in a financial position to take on a full-time employee and whether you are prepared to deal with the positives and negatives of you each option. Join us for everything you need to know about the people who do work for your business!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1630</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1b49a0881fdc427ca898aec2e7e875bf]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6240478429.mp3?updated=1656421485" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>367: Your Sales Fix with Aandra Bohlen</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/your-sales-fix-with-aandra-bohlen</link>
      <description>Today we welcome Aandra Bohlen, sales guru, inspiring friend, and all-round badass! She is here to demystify the sigmas around selling and the ways it is being taught. Her work is centered on developing and teaching entrepreneurs to create an amazing enrolment experience that leads to high conversion rates. She is an expert on sales calls and mentality and if you did not get the point already, she has it going on! We are going to talk about getting your mindset right and some real techniques for conversion so you are not going to want to miss this, we promise!
Aandra has almost 30 years of experience in sales and we are so lucky to get to throw a bunch of questions at her, things we know you would love to have answered. We discuss getting past money-mentality blocks, perfecting your pitch and how to translate sales onto social media and your content creation process. Aandra has a bunch of great reframes of the sales thought process and we promise that this conversation is going to help do better and think better about your sales game. We also have a great activity that we really want you to do, so stay tuned for that!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Sep 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Your Sales Fix with Aandra Bohlen</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>367</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/e55a0d8a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-d3f97d380b0d/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we welcome Aandra Bohlen, sales guru, inspiring friend, and all-round badass! She is here to demystify the sigmas around selling and the ways it is being taught. Her work is centered on developing and teaching entrepreneurs to create an amazing...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we welcome Aandra Bohlen, sales guru, inspiring friend, and all-round badass! She is here to demystify the sigmas around selling and the ways it is being taught. Her work is centered on developing and teaching entrepreneurs to create an amazing enrolment experience that leads to high conversion rates. She is an expert on sales calls and mentality and if you did not get the point already, she has it going on! We are going to talk about getting your mindset right and some real techniques for conversion so you are not going to want to miss this, we promise!
Aandra has almost 30 years of experience in sales and we are so lucky to get to throw a bunch of questions at her, things we know you would love to have answered. We discuss getting past money-mentality blocks, perfecting your pitch and how to translate sales onto social media and your content creation process. Aandra has a bunch of great reframes of the sales thought process and we promise that this conversation is going to help do better and think better about your sales game. We also have a great activity that we really want you to do, so stay tuned for that!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we welcome Aandra Bohlen, sales guru, inspiring friend, and all-round badass! She is here to demystify the sigmas around selling and the ways it is being taught. Her work is centered on developing and teaching entrepreneurs to create an amazing enrolment experience that leads to high conversion rates. She is an expert on sales calls and mentality and if you did not get the point already, she has it going on! We are going to talk about getting your mindset right and some real techniques for conversion so you are not going to want to miss this, we promise!</p><p>Aandra has almost 30 years of experience in sales and we are so lucky to get to throw a bunch of questions at her, things we know you would love to have answered. We discuss getting past money-mentality blocks, perfecting your pitch and how to translate sales onto social media and your content creation process. Aandra has a bunch of great reframes of the sales thought process and we promise that this conversation is going to help do better and think better about your sales game. We also have a great activity that we really want you to do, so stay tuned for that!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2853</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9d769c301137447fba235d776e0b800a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5870344562.mp3?updated=1652127465" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>366: August Profit Report: How We Made 24% of our Income from a $29 Product</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/august-profit-report-how-we-made-24-of-our-income-from-a-29-product</link>
      <description>Income reports can be super distracting and set you on a road of comparison, so instead of focusing on the exact dollars, it might be more useful to look at the profit and give you a breakdown of the biggest sources of income as well as the major expenses. Therefore, we are calling it a profit report and we want to ask all of you, even before we start, to DM us feedback – whether this format worked and helped you in your business. 
In this episode, you will hear more about our thought processes around profits and expenses, but it is important to keep in mind that there are many different ways in which to approach this, so we are not suggesting that you replicate exactly what we do. For the sake of transparency, we also want to let all of you in instead of just talking about the topic. Really sharing the truth about our business, we believe, will be of much greater value to you than simply giving you a blueprint for what it should look like. The focus should be profit and figuring out what your goal is in this regard is more important than being able to say you are a six-figure business. We’re baring it all today, so don’t miss out! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 24 Sep 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>August Profit Report: How We Made 24% of our Income from a $29 Product</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>366</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/e5fa782e-ae9a-11ec-91b1-f76c835469f1/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Income reports can be super distracting and set you on a road of comparison, so instead of focusing on the exact dollars, it might be more useful to look at the profit and give you a breakdown of the biggest sources of income as well as the major...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Income reports can be super distracting and set you on a road of comparison, so instead of focusing on the exact dollars, it might be more useful to look at the profit and give you a breakdown of the biggest sources of income as well as the major expenses. Therefore, we are calling it a profit report and we want to ask all of you, even before we start, to DM us feedback – whether this format worked and helped you in your business. 
In this episode, you will hear more about our thought processes around profits and expenses, but it is important to keep in mind that there are many different ways in which to approach this, so we are not suggesting that you replicate exactly what we do. For the sake of transparency, we also want to let all of you in instead of just talking about the topic. Really sharing the truth about our business, we believe, will be of much greater value to you than simply giving you a blueprint for what it should look like. The focus should be profit and figuring out what your goal is in this regard is more important than being able to say you are a six-figure business. We’re baring it all today, so don’t miss out! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Income reports can be super distracting and set you on a road of comparison, so instead of focusing on the exact dollars, it might be more useful to look at the profit and give you a breakdown of the biggest sources of income as well as the major expenses. Therefore, we are calling it a profit report and we want to ask all of you, even before we start, to DM us feedback – whether this format worked and helped you in your business. </p><p>In this episode, you will hear more about our thought processes around profits and expenses, but it is important to keep in mind that there are many different ways in which to approach this, so we are not suggesting that you replicate exactly what we do. For the sake of transparency, we also want to let all of you in instead of just talking about the topic. Really sharing the truth about our business, we believe, will be of much greater value to you than simply giving you a blueprint for what it should look like. The focus should be profit and figuring out what your goal is in this regard is more important than being able to say you are a six-figure business. We’re baring it all today, so don’t miss out! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2747</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3da829cd79464b2180e1288b3a1ceb3e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4374676391.mp3?updated=1656421443" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>365: Becoming a Full-Time Creative Entrepreneur</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/becoming-a-full-time-creative-entrepreneur</link>
      <description>Today we talk about what it means to become a full-time creative entrepreneur. Scary thought? Maybe, but we’re here to tell you that starting your own business does not have to be the insurmountable project that it is often believed to be. Yes, it can be less stable and riskier in many ways, but what we are going to tell you today is really going to surprise you, and hopefully encourage you to take the leap of faith toward becoming a full-time creative entrepreneur. 
Ultimately, our goal is for you to create for yourself not only a job but a sustainable income so that you can provide for your family while also enjoying the lifestyle you want. We share with you a bit of background about our early lives and how it shaped our desire to work for ourselves and talk about the different pressures and circumstances that influence your perspective on entrepreneurship. We also talk about getting to your success point ASAP, what you can expect in terms of free time as an entrepreneur and why this is all 100% within your reach. So, get ready for some encouraging insight!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 19 Sep 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Becoming a Full-Time Creative Entrepreneur</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>365</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/e6a29c70-ae9a-11ec-91b1-53b4b21d6f48/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we talk about what it means to become a full-time creative entrepreneur. Scary thought? Maybe, but we’re here to tell you that starting your own business does not have to be the insurmountable project that it is often believed to be. Yes, it...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we talk about what it means to become a full-time creative entrepreneur. Scary thought? Maybe, but we’re here to tell you that starting your own business does not have to be the insurmountable project that it is often believed to be. Yes, it can be less stable and riskier in many ways, but what we are going to tell you today is really going to surprise you, and hopefully encourage you to take the leap of faith toward becoming a full-time creative entrepreneur. 
Ultimately, our goal is for you to create for yourself not only a job but a sustainable income so that you can provide for your family while also enjoying the lifestyle you want. We share with you a bit of background about our early lives and how it shaped our desire to work for ourselves and talk about the different pressures and circumstances that influence your perspective on entrepreneurship. We also talk about getting to your success point ASAP, what you can expect in terms of free time as an entrepreneur and why this is all 100% within your reach. So, get ready for some encouraging insight!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we talk about what it means to become a full-time creative entrepreneur. Scary thought? Maybe, but we’re here to tell you that starting your own business does not have to be the insurmountable project that it is often believed to be. Yes, it can be less stable and riskier in many ways, but what we are going to tell you today is really going to surprise you, and hopefully encourage you to take the leap of faith toward becoming a full-time creative entrepreneur. </p><p>Ultimately, our goal is for you to create for yourself not only a job but a sustainable income so that you can provide for your family while also enjoying the lifestyle you want. We share with you a bit of background about our early lives and how it shaped our desire to work for ourselves and talk about the different pressures and circumstances that influence your perspective on entrepreneurship. We also talk about getting to your success point ASAP, what you can expect in terms of free time as an entrepreneur and why this is all 100% within your reach. So, get ready for some encouraging insight!  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2226</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4a8bc2883cbe47439d8da6c71989e7fe]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1065896960.mp3?updated=1652127294" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>364: Is a Course, Group Program or One-on-One Coaching Your Next Step in your Business with Christine McAlister</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/is-a-course-group-program-or-one-on-one-coaching-your-next-step-in-your-business-with-christine-mcalister</link>
      <description>Today on the show we are so happy to welcome back Christine McAlister! If you are not already familiar with Christine, she helps high achievers replace income and continue to grow their businesses and be generally awesome! This episode is a look behind the scenes on coaching, group courses and one on one programs. We want to try to help you to decide which might be the right one for you at any particular time. All of us on the show believe that different times require specific approaches, the trick is to know what you need and then follow that path to success! 
In order to do this, you need to establish expectations and clarify your goals. This relaxed conversation will feature all of us sharing our opinions and experiences in this realm, seeing our students progress and helping you figure out what is the best fit for you. We are going to hash it all out for you listening please, so sit tight and do not forget to hit up our Instagram and DM us any thoughts, questions or reflection you might have!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 17 Sep 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Is a Course, Group Program or One-on-One Coaching Your Next Step in your Business with Christine McAlister</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>364</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/e835a352-ae9a-11ec-91b1-bfd7e300da60/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We want to try to help you to decide which might be the right one for you at any particular time. All of us on the show believe that different times require specific approaches, the trick is to know what you need and then follow that path to success! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we are so happy to welcome back Christine McAlister! If you are not already familiar with Christine, she helps high achievers replace income and continue to grow their businesses and be generally awesome! This episode is a look behind the scenes on coaching, group courses and one on one programs. We want to try to help you to decide which might be the right one for you at any particular time. All of us on the show believe that different times require specific approaches, the trick is to know what you need and then follow that path to success! 
In order to do this, you need to establish expectations and clarify your goals. This relaxed conversation will feature all of us sharing our opinions and experiences in this realm, seeing our students progress and helping you figure out what is the best fit for you. We are going to hash it all out for you listening please, so sit tight and do not forget to hit up our Instagram and DM us any thoughts, questions or reflection you might have!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we are so happy to welcome back Christine McAlister! If you are not already familiar with Christine, she helps high achievers replace income and continue to grow their businesses and be generally awesome! This episode is a look behind the scenes on coaching, group courses and one on one programs. We want to try to help you to decide which might be the right one for you at any particular time. All of us on the show believe that different times require specific approaches, the trick is to know what you need and then follow that path to success! </p><p>In order to do this, you need to establish expectations and clarify your goals. This relaxed conversation will feature all of us sharing our opinions and experiences in this realm, seeing our students progress and helping you figure out what is the best fit for you. We are going to hash it all out for you listening please, so sit tight and do not forget to hit up our Instagram and DM us any thoughts, questions or reflection you might have!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2301</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c84a4172dff64728a61896a9f0938be3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3987541512.mp3?updated=1656421350" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>363: Busy versus Productive: How to Stop Spinning Your Wheels and Get Some Traction with Lauren Goldstein</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/busy-vs-productive-how-to-stop-spinning-your-wheels-and-get-some-traction-with-lauren-goldstein</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we are joined by the fabulous Lauren Goldstein, CEO, and founder of Golden Key Partnership, a strategy consulting firm that helps businesses to scale smart in order to be more sustainable. There are tons to learn from her seasoned and scientifically backed up approach, so today she will be dishing out straightforward facts, particularly as it pertains to productivity and how it relates to your profit. She shares time-wasting tactics that many of us are skilled at and pulls up some new studies that illuminate what distraction does to our day. A question we often think about is what we need to be doing to move our business forward, and it can be stressful to decide which of the dozens of things to take or leave. Lauren weighs in on the matter with some simple, no-nonsense advice. 
Being overwhelmed with tasks can lead to decision fatigue, which prevents us from effectively prioritizing the tasks that are most important. Productivity and processes can make or break an entrepreneur because of burnout or be the demise of business due to revenue and profit leaks. According to the IDC, companies lose 20 to 30% in revenue every year as a result of inefficiencies. This is a staggering statistic! Therefore, we bring you this episode that is guaranteed to help you improve your productivity, so be sure to join in the conversation!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 12 Sep 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Busy versus Productive: How to Stop Spinning Your Wheels and Get Some Traction with Lauren Goldstein</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>363</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/e9525f0a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-1bf017fa82b2/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we are joined by the fabulous Lauren Goldstein, CEO, and founder of Golden Key Partnership, a strategy consulting firm that helps businesses to scale smart in order to be more sustainable. There are tons to learn from her seasoned...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we are joined by the fabulous Lauren Goldstein, CEO, and founder of Golden Key Partnership, a strategy consulting firm that helps businesses to scale smart in order to be more sustainable. There are tons to learn from her seasoned and scientifically backed up approach, so today she will be dishing out straightforward facts, particularly as it pertains to productivity and how it relates to your profit. She shares time-wasting tactics that many of us are skilled at and pulls up some new studies that illuminate what distraction does to our day. A question we often think about is what we need to be doing to move our business forward, and it can be stressful to decide which of the dozens of things to take or leave. Lauren weighs in on the matter with some simple, no-nonsense advice. 
Being overwhelmed with tasks can lead to decision fatigue, which prevents us from effectively prioritizing the tasks that are most important. Productivity and processes can make or break an entrepreneur because of burnout or be the demise of business due to revenue and profit leaks. According to the IDC, companies lose 20 to 30% in revenue every year as a result of inefficiencies. This is a staggering statistic! Therefore, we bring you this episode that is guaranteed to help you improve your productivity, so be sure to join in the conversation!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we are joined by the fabulous Lauren Goldstein, CEO, and founder of Golden Key Partnership, a strategy consulting firm that helps businesses to scale smart in order to be more sustainable. There are tons to learn from her seasoned and scientifically backed up approach, so today she will be dishing out straightforward facts, particularly as it pertains to productivity and how it relates to your profit. She shares time-wasting tactics that many of us are skilled at and pulls up some new studies that illuminate what distraction does to our day. A question we often think about is what we need to be doing to move our business forward, and it can be stressful to decide which of the dozens of things to take or leave. Lauren weighs in on the matter with some simple, no-nonsense advice. </p><p>Being overwhelmed with tasks can lead to decision fatigue, which prevents us from effectively prioritizing the tasks that are most important. Productivity and processes can make or break an entrepreneur because of burnout or be the demise of business due to revenue and profit leaks. According to the IDC, companies lose 20 to 30% in revenue every year as a result of inefficiencies. This is a staggering statistic! Therefore, we bring you this episode that is guaranteed to help you improve your productivity, so be sure to join in the conversation!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3161</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[12c98f2b6b72451f88e7fedacb95ddaa]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5353277703.mp3?updated=1652127056" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>362: What Does it Really Cost to Grow a Million Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-does-it-really-cost-to-grow-a-million-dollar-business</link>
      <description>Welcome back to the show, everybody! Today we are going to be letting you in, even further into our business lives! As we continue to grow we are constantly asking ourselves, "What is the content that people want to hear about?" This goal of keeping you entertained, educated, and engaged is very important to us and we have always loved sharing our lives and work with all of you. When we started out, everything we did felt fun, fresh, and engaging and it was easy to share this with our listeners in a natural way. As we have grown things have changed and we have been more considerate in our choices but we want to carry on sharing stuff with you that is exciting, new, and informative. It has always been our best thing, being able to share something about a problem we solved or a strategy we discovered. 
As we enter year four of our biz we have to continue to look for these opportunities when we have had a different reality from where started out and many of our listeners. We want to help you now and set you up for success in the future! We have a feeling that there may be some inaccurate perceptions out there of what is happening in our business. You are welcome to DM us on Instagram with your thoughts but we sense that people find us less relatable than when we started out and were smaller. There have been challenges in continually connecting with our audience as our situation has changed, our team has grown and so on but we want, more than anything, to stay relatable to all of you! We actually think we are probably in more similar situations to a lot of you than you may think! All this to say, we have resolved to let you in on some of this and share more of what is going on in our current lives than we have been!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 10 Sep 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Does it Really Cost to Grow a Million Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>362</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/e9e8b8d8-ae9a-11ec-91b1-87b8c3916776/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome back to the show, everybody! Today we are going to be letting you in, even further into our business lives! As we continue to grow we are constantly asking ourselves, "What is the content that people want to hear about?" This goal of keeping...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to the show, everybody! Today we are going to be letting you in, even further into our business lives! As we continue to grow we are constantly asking ourselves, "What is the content that people want to hear about?" This goal of keeping you entertained, educated, and engaged is very important to us and we have always loved sharing our lives and work with all of you. When we started out, everything we did felt fun, fresh, and engaging and it was easy to share this with our listeners in a natural way. As we have grown things have changed and we have been more considerate in our choices but we want to carry on sharing stuff with you that is exciting, new, and informative. It has always been our best thing, being able to share something about a problem we solved or a strategy we discovered. 
As we enter year four of our biz we have to continue to look for these opportunities when we have had a different reality from where started out and many of our listeners. We want to help you now and set you up for success in the future! We have a feeling that there may be some inaccurate perceptions out there of what is happening in our business. You are welcome to DM us on Instagram with your thoughts but we sense that people find us less relatable than when we started out and were smaller. There have been challenges in continually connecting with our audience as our situation has changed, our team has grown and so on but we want, more than anything, to stay relatable to all of you! We actually think we are probably in more similar situations to a lot of you than you may think! All this to say, we have resolved to let you in on some of this and share more of what is going on in our current lives than we have been!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to the show, everybody! Today we are going to be letting you in, even further into our business lives! As we continue to grow we are constantly asking ourselves, "What is the content that people want to hear about?" This goal of keeping you entertained, educated, and engaged is very important to us and we have always loved sharing our lives and work with all of you. When we started out, everything we did felt fun, fresh, and engaging and it was easy to share this with our listeners in a natural way. As we have grown things have changed and we have been more considerate in our choices but we want to carry on sharing stuff with you that is exciting, new, and informative. It has always been our best thing, being able to share something about a problem we solved or a strategy we discovered. </p><p>As we enter year four of our biz we have to continue to look for these opportunities when we have had a different reality from where started out and many of our listeners. We want to help you now and set you up for success in the future! We have a feeling that there may be some inaccurate perceptions out there of what is happening in our business. You are welcome to DM us on Instagram with your thoughts but we sense that people find us less relatable than when we started out and were smaller. There have been challenges in continually connecting with our audience as our situation has changed, our team has grown and so on but we want, more than anything, to stay relatable to all of you! We actually think we are probably in more similar situations to a lot of you than you may think! All this to say, we have resolved to let you in on some of this and share more of what is going on in our current lives than we have been!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1581</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6a55e1b7d3504c53b273795a34b331a0]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9162665884.mp3?updated=1652126940" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>361: We Almost Deleted Our 39k Follower Instagram Account</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/we-almost-deleted-our-39k-follower-instagram-account</link>
      <description>Would you ever consider deleting your Instagram account if you had nearly 40 000 followers? Businesses go through different seasons and for a long time we had not been focusing on Instagram because we were otherwise occupied. But for some reason, our account remained semi-active and we were still slowly but surely gaining followers, even though we only really posted about the podcast and random bits in between. But the engagement was poor, so much so that we no longer saw the need to post at all or to have the account, and this set us on a rollercoaster of a journey of trying to figure out whether we should delete our existing account and start all over again. This might sound crazy, but we had what we believed were legitimate reasons for wanting to do that, and our intentions were so good! 
We were absolutely convinced that this was the way to go, that is, until a comment or two from our audience and friends threw a spanner in the works and forced us back to square one. This was an amazing educational process that we came though as we learned a ton about ourselves, our business and what our approach to our followers should be. If you are thinking about deleting your account and starting off with a clean slate or just looking to grow your Instagram engagement, this episode is perfect for you, so be sure to listen in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 05 Sep 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>We Almost Deleted Our 39k Follower Instagram Account</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>361</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ea76ff26-ae9a-11ec-91b1-fbbe3991977c/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Would you ever consider deleting your Instagram account if you had nearly 40 000 followers? Businesses go through different seasons and for a long time we had not been focusing on Instagram because we were otherwise occupied. But for some reason,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Would you ever consider deleting your Instagram account if you had nearly 40 000 followers? Businesses go through different seasons and for a long time we had not been focusing on Instagram because we were otherwise occupied. But for some reason, our account remained semi-active and we were still slowly but surely gaining followers, even though we only really posted about the podcast and random bits in between. But the engagement was poor, so much so that we no longer saw the need to post at all or to have the account, and this set us on a rollercoaster of a journey of trying to figure out whether we should delete our existing account and start all over again. This might sound crazy, but we had what we believed were legitimate reasons for wanting to do that, and our intentions were so good! 
We were absolutely convinced that this was the way to go, that is, until a comment or two from our audience and friends threw a spanner in the works and forced us back to square one. This was an amazing educational process that we came though as we learned a ton about ourselves, our business and what our approach to our followers should be. If you are thinking about deleting your account and starting off with a clean slate or just looking to grow your Instagram engagement, this episode is perfect for you, so be sure to listen in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Would you ever consider deleting your Instagram account if you had nearly 40 000 followers? Businesses go through different seasons and for a long time we had not been focusing on Instagram because we were otherwise occupied. But for some reason, our account remained semi-active and we were still slowly but surely gaining followers, even though we only really posted about the podcast and random bits in between. But the engagement was poor, so much so that we no longer saw the need to post at all or to have the account, and this set us on a rollercoaster of a journey of trying to figure out whether we should delete our existing account and start all over again. This might sound crazy, but we had what we believed were legitimate reasons for wanting to do that, and our intentions were so good! </p><p>We were absolutely convinced that this was the way to go, that is, until a comment or two from our audience and friends threw a spanner in the works and forced us back to square one. This was an amazing educational process that we came though as we learned a ton about ourselves, our business and what our approach to our followers should be. If you are thinking about deleting your account and starting off with a clean slate or just looking to grow your Instagram engagement, this episode is perfect for you, so be sure to listen in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2021</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dcd3771b734d461e9dbff1c2a20960e7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9593104474.mp3?updated=1656421297" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>360: Marketing to Millennials &amp; the Generational Divide</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/marketing-to-millennials-the-generational-divide</link>
      <description>Today we talk about a fascinating topic, one that affects every single one of you in one way or another in your business. When we think about marketing, we tend to think about psychology in general and the things that inherently appeal to all people. But, there is a better way to approach marketing and it pertains to the different generations. Ever thought about why people of different ages think and behave so differently from one another and often bump heads, whether in families or in business? What we discuss today will shed a whole lot of light on this subject. We compare and contrast the generations, from the traditionalists up to Gen Z and everything in between. 
Each new generation is constructed in a unique way with different things that impact how they view the world and what kinds of consumers they are. For this reason, marketing efforts should be adjusted accordingly to ensure that you speak to the needs of the generation you are targeting and so that you better understand why certain initiatives will be more effective than others. We have relied heavily on the research of the amazing Jason Dorsey for this episode, so a lot of the information provided here is from his work on the topic. Definitely check out his website if you want to find out more. Jason also speaks about a very interesting new thought about millennials, one which we will get into on this episode, so be sure to tune in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 03 Sep 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Marketing to Millennials &amp; the Generational Divide</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>360</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/eb1e898a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-ffcc9de13163/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we talk about a fascinating topic, one that affects every single one of you in one way or another in your business. When we think about marketing, we tend to think about psychology in general and the things that inherently appeal to all people....</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we talk about a fascinating topic, one that affects every single one of you in one way or another in your business. When we think about marketing, we tend to think about psychology in general and the things that inherently appeal to all people. But, there is a better way to approach marketing and it pertains to the different generations. Ever thought about why people of different ages think and behave so differently from one another and often bump heads, whether in families or in business? What we discuss today will shed a whole lot of light on this subject. We compare and contrast the generations, from the traditionalists up to Gen Z and everything in between. 
Each new generation is constructed in a unique way with different things that impact how they view the world and what kinds of consumers they are. For this reason, marketing efforts should be adjusted accordingly to ensure that you speak to the needs of the generation you are targeting and so that you better understand why certain initiatives will be more effective than others. We have relied heavily on the research of the amazing Jason Dorsey for this episode, so a lot of the information provided here is from his work on the topic. Definitely check out his website if you want to find out more. Jason also speaks about a very interesting new thought about millennials, one which we will get into on this episode, so be sure to tune in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we talk about a fascinating topic, one that affects every single one of you in one way or another in your business. When we think about marketing, we tend to think about psychology in general and the things that inherently appeal to all people. But, there is a better way to approach marketing and it pertains to the different generations. Ever thought about why people of different ages think and behave so differently from one another and often bump heads, whether in families or in business? What we discuss today will shed a whole lot of light on this subject. We compare and contrast the generations, from the traditionalists up to Gen Z and everything in between. </p><p>Each new generation is constructed in a unique way with different things that impact how they view the world and what kinds of consumers they are. For this reason, marketing efforts should be adjusted accordingly to ensure that you speak to the needs of the generation you are targeting and so that you better understand why certain initiatives will be more effective than others. We have relied heavily on the research of the amazing Jason Dorsey for this episode, so a lot of the information provided here is from his work on the topic. Definitely check out his website if you want to find out more. Jason also speaks about a very interesting new thought about millennials, one which we will get into on this episode, so be sure to tune in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2140</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4ea0337e4f684dd5918b70aee792a0bb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9513627442.mp3?updated=1652126867" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>359: Think Inside the Box - Constraints Drive Creativity</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/think-inside-the-box-constraints-drive-creativity</link>
      <description>If you have not already heard of the law of diminishing returns, it states that everything we do is on a bell curve and as we do more work so the results improve. But once we pass a certain point or amount of work, the results begin to lessen and the work we do becomes less effective. After a certain amount of time and effort, our results can even start to decline and drop off to a point below our earlier work! The main lesson we want to extrapolate here is that more work equals better results up to a certain point.
As we work on projects, we have to find these points and understand how far our effort is going. We have to be able to apply this theory to our business otherwise we run the risk of shooting ourselves in the foot through overwork and time-wasting. We need to focus on productivity, how to spend our time wisely and when we are done with a specific task. Learning the answer to this question might take time but we can start to notice patterns if we are sensitive to this dynamic. This law will apply to physical as well as digital work and remember that your creativity and energy is subjective, we never really know for sure, but we can work on our mindset and perspective to minimize these negative effects.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 29 Aug 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Think Inside the Box - Constraints Drive Creativity</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>359</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ee221bec-ae9a-11ec-91b1-eb73e44ea9ea/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you have not already heard of the law of diminishing returns, it states that everything we do is on a bell curve and as we do more work so the results improve. But once we pass a certain point or amount of work, the results begin to lessen and the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you have not already heard of the law of diminishing returns, it states that everything we do is on a bell curve and as we do more work so the results improve. But once we pass a certain point or amount of work, the results begin to lessen and the work we do becomes less effective. After a certain amount of time and effort, our results can even start to decline and drop off to a point below our earlier work! The main lesson we want to extrapolate here is that more work equals better results up to a certain point.
As we work on projects, we have to find these points and understand how far our effort is going. We have to be able to apply this theory to our business otherwise we run the risk of shooting ourselves in the foot through overwork and time-wasting. We need to focus on productivity, how to spend our time wisely and when we are done with a specific task. Learning the answer to this question might take time but we can start to notice patterns if we are sensitive to this dynamic. This law will apply to physical as well as digital work and remember that your creativity and energy is subjective, we never really know for sure, but we can work on our mindset and perspective to minimize these negative effects.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you have not already heard of the law of diminishing returns, it states that everything we do is on a bell curve and as we do more work so the results improve. But once we pass a certain point or amount of work, the results begin to lessen and the work we do becomes less effective. After a certain amount of time and effort, our results can even start to decline and drop off to a point below our earlier work! The main lesson we want to extrapolate here is that more work equals better results up to a certain point.</p><p>As we work on projects, we have to find these points and understand how far our effort is going. We have to be able to apply this theory to our business otherwise we run the risk of shooting ourselves in the foot through overwork and time-wasting. We need to focus on productivity, how to spend our time wisely and when we are done with a specific task. Learning the answer to this question might take time but we can start to notice patterns if we are sensitive to this dynamic. This law will apply to physical as well as digital work and remember that your creativity and energy is subjective, we never really know for sure, but we can work on our mindset and perspective to minimize these negative effects.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2329</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[26c7d0229078471bbd477afd3d2df38f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6907361969.mp3?updated=1652126787" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>358: Owning &amp; Changing Your Deeply Rooted Beliefs</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/owning-and-changing-your-deeply-rooted-beliefs</link>
      <description>Welcome back to another episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast! Today, we dive into the topic of owning and changing your deeply rooted beliefs. We are a lot like trees. Imagine you are a tree and you have an abundance of beautiful fruit hanging from you, but you also have fruit that is rotten, that you feel ashamed of and that you don’t want others to see. The only way to determine what the problem is, why there is this bad fruit, is to go through the entire system to see where the change needs to happen.
On this episode, we talk about behavior, values, and beliefs using the metaphor of a tree – a helpful way to better understand ourselves and others. How do you bring about change in your life, where do you begin? We talk about where our values come from and how we can begin to not only change ourselves but our entire communities. Regardless of how ingrained you think your behavior is, we all have the ability to grow and improve and to even do a complete 180! This episode brings you inspirational stories and lots of practical advice for business, raising kids, and life in general, so be sure to tune in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 27 Aug 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Owning &amp; Changing Your Deeply Rooted Beliefs</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>358</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/eeb2f75c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-8b5760097e2c/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are a lot like trees. Imagine you are a tree and you have an abundance of beautiful fruit hanging from you, but you also have fruit that is rotten, that you feel ashamed of and that you don’t want others to see. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to another episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast! Today, we dive into the topic of owning and changing your deeply rooted beliefs. We are a lot like trees. Imagine you are a tree and you have an abundance of beautiful fruit hanging from you, but you also have fruit that is rotten, that you feel ashamed of and that you don’t want others to see. The only way to determine what the problem is, why there is this bad fruit, is to go through the entire system to see where the change needs to happen.
On this episode, we talk about behavior, values, and beliefs using the metaphor of a tree – a helpful way to better understand ourselves and others. How do you bring about change in your life, where do you begin? We talk about where our values come from and how we can begin to not only change ourselves but our entire communities. Regardless of how ingrained you think your behavior is, we all have the ability to grow and improve and to even do a complete 180! This episode brings you inspirational stories and lots of practical advice for business, raising kids, and life in general, so be sure to tune in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to another episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast! Today, we dive into the topic of owning and changing your deeply rooted beliefs. We are a lot like trees. Imagine you are a tree and you have an abundance of beautiful fruit hanging from you, but you also have fruit that is rotten, that you feel ashamed of and that you don’t want others to see. The only way to determine what the problem is, why there is this bad fruit, is to go through the entire system to see where the change needs to happen.</p><p>On this episode, we talk about behavior, values, and beliefs using the metaphor of a tree – a helpful way to better understand ourselves and others. How do you bring about change in your life, where do you begin? We talk about where our values come from and how we can begin to not only change ourselves but our entire communities. Regardless of how ingrained you think your behavior is, we all have the ability to grow and improve and to even do a complete 180! This episode brings you inspirational stories and lots of practical advice for business, raising kids, and life in general, so be sure to tune in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1868</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4acc6a6a7c0441318b7ec91c153ba080]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1957027530.mp3?updated=1656421249" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>357: Life Updates: What Really Happens Outside of Boss Project</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/life-updates-what-really-happens-outside-of-boss-project</link>
      <description>Today on the show we are giving you a little break from the norm and offering a few updates on things besides Boss Project. That's right, this episode is dedicated to all those things outside of work, although some of it is more work! We both have a lot going behind the scenes, in our personal lives and we wanted to share some of what keeps us inspired, busy and our occupied when we are not doing our main thing!  
This conversation includes a lot of life changes because that is what has been going on for both of us, personally. Hopefully, you will find it insightful, useful and show you just a little bit more of the world. We sure do love sharing it all with you, so let's go ahead and dive right in! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 22 Aug 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Life Updates: What Really Happens Outside of Boss Project</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>357</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ef40f174-ae9a-11ec-91b1-b38e37d0ccd7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we are giving you a little break from the norm and offering a few updates on things besides Boss Project. That's right, this episode is dedicated to all those things outside of work, although some of it is more work! We both have a...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we are giving you a little break from the norm and offering a few updates on things besides Boss Project. That's right, this episode is dedicated to all those things outside of work, although some of it is more work! We both have a lot going behind the scenes, in our personal lives and we wanted to share some of what keeps us inspired, busy and our occupied when we are not doing our main thing!  
This conversation includes a lot of life changes because that is what has been going on for both of us, personally. Hopefully, you will find it insightful, useful and show you just a little bit more of the world. We sure do love sharing it all with you, so let's go ahead and dive right in! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we are giving you a little break from the norm and offering a few updates on things besides Boss Project. That's right, this episode is dedicated to all those things outside of work, although some of it is more work! We both have a lot going behind the scenes, in our personal lives and we wanted to share some of what keeps us inspired, busy and our occupied when we are not doing our main thing!  </p><p>This conversation includes a lot of life changes because that is what has been going on for both of us, personally. Hopefully, you will find it insightful, useful and show you just a little bit more of the world. We sure do love sharing it all with you, so let's go ahead and dive right in! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2052</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d55a215a7aa54e0d851ed785cb7971f9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2099989899.mp3?updated=1652126646" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>356: Tips to Structure Your Work Day for Productivity</title>
      <link>https://strategyhour.libsyn.com/356-tips-to-structure-your-work-day-for-productivity</link>
      <description>Today we’re excited to be talking about a number of awesome productivity hacks. We know this is a popular topic many have covered, but it’s because it shapes the future of your business and in fact, your day-to-day happiness! We sometimes get stuck in a rut where we simply can’t focus and work like we are able to at other times. Now, with the changing season, we thought it would be an appropriate time to relook at some of these daily practices and share what we’ve personally done to up our level of productivity. 
In this episode, each of us will share three tips that have worked for us, including claiming your me-time, structuring your day, considering your optimal work environment and building rewards into stressful tasks. For all of this and more, don’t miss out on today’s productivity hacks episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 20 Aug 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Tips to Structure Your Work Day for Productivity</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>356</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f021dbee-ae9a-11ec-91b1-339778fbd645/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we’re excited to be talking about a number of awesome productivity hacks that can help shape the future of your business and your day-to-day happiness!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we’re excited to be talking about a number of awesome productivity hacks. We know this is a popular topic many have covered, but it’s because it shapes the future of your business and in fact, your day-to-day happiness! We sometimes get stuck in a rut where we simply can’t focus and work like we are able to at other times. Now, with the changing season, we thought it would be an appropriate time to relook at some of these daily practices and share what we’ve personally done to up our level of productivity. 
In this episode, each of us will share three tips that have worked for us, including claiming your me-time, structuring your day, considering your optimal work environment and building rewards into stressful tasks. For all of this and more, don’t miss out on today’s productivity hacks episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we’re excited to be talking about a number of awesome productivity hacks. We know this is a popular topic many have covered, but it’s because it shapes the future of your business and in fact, your day-to-day happiness! We sometimes get stuck in a rut where we simply can’t focus and work like we are able to at other times. Now, with the changing season, we thought it would be an appropriate time to relook at some of these daily practices and share what we’ve personally done to up our level of productivity. </p><p>In this episode, each of us will share three tips that have worked for us, including claiming your me-time, structuring your day, considering your optimal work environment and building rewards into stressful tasks. For all of this and more, don’t miss out on today’s productivity hacks episode!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1112</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[bdaa417d879749eb822fd7f08e333b8b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1130564289.mp3?updated=1654109026" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>355: How to Get People on Board with Your Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-get-people-on-board-with-your-business</link>
      <description>This is an episode that can apply to any of our listeners, no matter where you are currently at with your biz! There are always times that you need to get people on board and with what you are doing or hoping to do. Whether you are just starting out or ramping up to a new level, conversations have to be had with those close to us, in order to create understanding, buy-in and a system that can work for you. You need to be able to communicate where your passion lies and how you want to do things moving forward and these can be awkward conversations at times but we are here to guide you the process and make it that little bit easier! We want to help you to see what is important, what must be said and what can be left out.
These are such necessary conversations with our friends, partners, and family and their buy can be the help that you need to get where you are going. At the same time, you do not have to rely on people being on board with us in order to be successful, you will have to gauge your own needs in this regard. Change, whether big or small, can be a gamble and moving in new directions often has no guarantees. We suggest a bit of planning of these types of conversations as well as some warning for the other party involved. Most people do not like big announcements sprung on them out of nowhere! We also want to mention that other people's feelings are not your problem or your choice but that does not mean they will not affect you. We want to help you make things go smoother in potentially rocky terrain, so join us as we dive in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 15 Aug 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Get People on Board with Your Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>355</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f0b2082c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-b764a718d8d0/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This is an episode that can apply to any of our listeners, no matter where you are currently at with your biz! There are always times that you need to get people on board and with what you are doing or hoping to do. Whether you are just starting out...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This is an episode that can apply to any of our listeners, no matter where you are currently at with your biz! There are always times that you need to get people on board and with what you are doing or hoping to do. Whether you are just starting out or ramping up to a new level, conversations have to be had with those close to us, in order to create understanding, buy-in and a system that can work for you. You need to be able to communicate where your passion lies and how you want to do things moving forward and these can be awkward conversations at times but we are here to guide you the process and make it that little bit easier! We want to help you to see what is important, what must be said and what can be left out.
These are such necessary conversations with our friends, partners, and family and their buy can be the help that you need to get where you are going. At the same time, you do not have to rely on people being on board with us in order to be successful, you will have to gauge your own needs in this regard. Change, whether big or small, can be a gamble and moving in new directions often has no guarantees. We suggest a bit of planning of these types of conversations as well as some warning for the other party involved. Most people do not like big announcements sprung on them out of nowhere! We also want to mention that other people's feelings are not your problem or your choice but that does not mean they will not affect you. We want to help you make things go smoother in potentially rocky terrain, so join us as we dive in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This is an episode that can apply to any of our listeners, no matter where you are currently at with your biz! There are always times that you need to get people on board and with what you are doing or hoping to do. Whether you are just starting out or ramping up to a new level, conversations have to be had with those close to us, in order to create understanding, buy-in and a system that can work for you. You need to be able to communicate where your passion lies and how you want to do things moving forward and these can be awkward conversations at times but we are here to guide you the process and make it that little bit easier! We want to help you to see what is important, what must be said and what can be left out.</p><p>These are such necessary conversations with our friends, partners, and family and their buy can be the help that you need to get where you are going. At the same time, you do not have to rely on people being on board with us in order to be successful, you will have to gauge your own needs in this regard. Change, whether big or small, can be a gamble and moving in new directions often has no guarantees. We suggest a bit of planning of these types of conversations as well as some warning for the other party involved. Most people do not like big announcements sprung on them out of nowhere! We also want to mention that other people's feelings are not your problem or your choice but that does not mean they will not affect you. We want to help you make things go smoother in potentially rocky terrain, so join us as we dive in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1705</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[31143054344f40dbb3c6c86cf20576c3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3139617920.mp3?updated=1652126498" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>354: 8 Steps for Growing Your New Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/8-steps-for-growing-your-new-business</link>
      <description>On today’s show, we will be answering our most frequently asked question: How did you get from point A to point B? We will be sharing what to do, when to do it and how to do it, in your first two years of business. These steps got us from zero dollars to nearly half a million dollars and we want to give you a step-by-step breakdown of everything we did along the way. Even if your goal is not to make half a million dollars, the strategies we implemented and the lessons we have learned can definitely be applied to any business goal. Whatever your ultimate goal, the strategies and the order we did them in are the same. 
Inside this episode, we give you a business roadmap and the eight main steps we took to reach our goal. The order of these steps are key and that is exactly why we will be sharing them with you, in detail! To give you a little taste, here is how we are going to break it all down. 1) Build Your Foundation, 2) Craft Your Message, 3) Nurture Your Dreamies, 4) Streamline With Systems, 5) See The Big Picture, 6) Create Sustainability, 7) Formulate A Passive Business, 8) Reach Those #Squad Goals. Okay, are you ready? Let’s get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 13 Aug 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>8 Steps for Growing Your New Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>354</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f165fa44-ae9a-11ec-91b1-8bf48c9cf9d2/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>On today’s show, we will be answering our most frequently asked question: How did you get from point A to point B? We will be sharing what to do, when to do it and how to do it, in your first two years of business. These steps got us from zero...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s show, we will be answering our most frequently asked question: How did you get from point A to point B? We will be sharing what to do, when to do it and how to do it, in your first two years of business. These steps got us from zero dollars to nearly half a million dollars and we want to give you a step-by-step breakdown of everything we did along the way. Even if your goal is not to make half a million dollars, the strategies we implemented and the lessons we have learned can definitely be applied to any business goal. Whatever your ultimate goal, the strategies and the order we did them in are the same. 
Inside this episode, we give you a business roadmap and the eight main steps we took to reach our goal. The order of these steps are key and that is exactly why we will be sharing them with you, in detail! To give you a little taste, here is how we are going to break it all down. 1) Build Your Foundation, 2) Craft Your Message, 3) Nurture Your Dreamies, 4) Streamline With Systems, 5) See The Big Picture, 6) Create Sustainability, 7) Formulate A Passive Business, 8) Reach Those #Squad Goals. Okay, are you ready? Let’s get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s show, we will be answering our most frequently asked question: How did you get from point A to point B? We will be sharing what to do, when to do it and how to do it, in your first two years of business. These steps got us from zero dollars to nearly half a million dollars and we want to give you a step-by-step breakdown of everything we did along the way. Even if your goal is not to make half a million dollars, the strategies we implemented and the lessons we have learned can definitely be applied to any business goal. Whatever your ultimate goal, the strategies and the order we did them in are the same. </p><p>Inside this episode, we give you a business roadmap and the eight main steps we took to reach our goal. The order of these steps are key and that is exactly why we will be sharing them with you, in detail! To give you a little taste, here is how we are going to break it all down. 1) Build Your Foundation, 2) Craft Your Message, 3) Nurture Your Dreamies, 4) Streamline With Systems, 5) See The Big Picture, 6) Create Sustainability, 7) Formulate A Passive Business, 8) Reach Those #Squad Goals. Okay, are you ready? Let’s get started!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2825</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d739ef11fe2a4d1daa34014608220757]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3132758438.mp3?updated=1656104457" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>353: Boss Talk: What Failure Really Means</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/boss-talk-what-failure-really-means</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have a Boss Talk about a topic that’s been on our minds a lot lately, probably because we’ve been going through all these transitions. So today we discuss what failure is to each of us and how it makes us feel. We felt that it was really important to open up this conversation because there’s a lot of shame that can come with failure, and that makes us not want to talk about it! But sharing ideas around this topic will hopefully build even stronger support in our community as it is something that all of us has gone through at some point in our lives.
As cliché as it sounds, failure is always an opportunity to learn – even though this is not what we want to hear when it happens to us. It’s true though, failure gives us another opportunity to try again and brings us one step closer to that thing that we’re supposed to be doing and that feels good! Don’t miss out on this episode and join in the conversation by sending us a DM on Instagram!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 08 Aug 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Boss Talk: What Failure Really Means</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>353</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f1f3c0fe-ae9a-11ec-91b1-67bacab9c544/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We felt that it was really important to open up this conversation because there’s a lot of shame that can come with failure, and that makes us not want to talk about it!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have a Boss Talk about a topic that’s been on our minds a lot lately, probably because we’ve been going through all these transitions. So today we discuss what failure is to each of us and how it makes us feel. We felt that it was really important to open up this conversation because there’s a lot of shame that can come with failure, and that makes us not want to talk about it! But sharing ideas around this topic will hopefully build even stronger support in our community as it is something that all of us has gone through at some point in our lives.
As cliché as it sounds, failure is always an opportunity to learn – even though this is not what we want to hear when it happens to us. It’s true though, failure gives us another opportunity to try again and brings us one step closer to that thing that we’re supposed to be doing and that feels good! Don’t miss out on this episode and join in the conversation by sending us a DM on Instagram!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have a Boss Talk about a topic that’s been on our minds a lot lately, probably because we’ve been going through all these transitions. So today we discuss what failure is to each of us and how it makes us feel. We felt that it was really important to open up this conversation because there’s a lot of shame that can come with failure, and that makes us not want to talk about it! But sharing ideas around this topic will hopefully build even stronger support in our community as it is something that all of us has gone through at some point in our lives.</p><p>As cliché as it sounds, failure is always an opportunity to learn – even though this is not what we want to hear when it happens to us. It’s true though, failure gives us another opportunity to try again and brings us one step closer to that thing that we’re supposed to be doing and that feels good! Don’t miss out on this episode and join in the conversation by sending us a DM on Instagram!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1297</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[de8c6e5b44ec4f0db93842dcc717fd5d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7857143223.mp3?updated=1656421192" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>352: What You Need to Know Before Starting a Podcast</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-you-need-to-know-before-starting-a-podcast</link>
      <description>We’ve previously done an episode about what you need to consider before starting a podcast, and we admit that it was a bit of a Debbie Downer, so today we want to do a follow up of that where we go over some of the things we’ve learned in the meantime. We talk about the reasons for starting a podcast and about everything you should have set up before you can start, including deciding on the extent to which to you will be involved and the equipment you will need to record and where to find it.
On a more serious note, we talk about the profitability of podcasting and what you can expect to get out of it as well as different ways you might think of monetizing it. We then switch to chatting about bringing guests on the show and finding fun topics and conclude with our number one tip for getting your show noticed and sponsored, so be sure to join in on the conversation!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 06 Aug 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What You Need to Know Before Starting a Podcast</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>352</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f29eb5a4-ae9a-11ec-91b1-ef9b18a3561f/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We talk about the reasons for starting a podcast and about everything you should have set up before you can start, including deciding on the extent to which to you will be involved and the equipment you will need to record and where to find it.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’ve previously done an episode about what you need to consider before starting a podcast, and we admit that it was a bit of a Debbie Downer, so today we want to do a follow up of that where we go over some of the things we’ve learned in the meantime. We talk about the reasons for starting a podcast and about everything you should have set up before you can start, including deciding on the extent to which to you will be involved and the equipment you will need to record and where to find it.
On a more serious note, we talk about the profitability of podcasting and what you can expect to get out of it as well as different ways you might think of monetizing it. We then switch to chatting about bringing guests on the show and finding fun topics and conclude with our number one tip for getting your show noticed and sponsored, so be sure to join in on the conversation!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’ve previously done an episode about what you need to consider before starting a podcast, and we admit that it was a bit of a Debbie Downer, so today we want to do a follow up of that where we go over some of the things we’ve learned in the meantime. We talk about the reasons for starting a podcast and about everything you should have set up before you can start, including deciding on the extent to which to you will be involved and the equipment you will need to record and where to find it.</p><p>On a more serious note, we talk about the profitability of podcasting and what you can expect to get out of it as well as different ways you might think of monetizing it. We then switch to chatting about bringing guests on the show and finding fun topics and conclude with our number one tip for getting your show noticed and sponsored, so be sure to join in on the conversation!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2575</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9add4f9131864a4cab1b820bea6f168e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8765785078.mp3?updated=1656421153" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>351: How to go from Stuck to Taking Action in your Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-go-from-stuck-to-taking-action-in-your-business</link>
      <description>Ever been stuck with ideas and you just didn’t know if they were right for you or how to put them into action? We’ve been getting tons of questions from you all out there, most of the question being along the lines of, “How do you guys know when a product or a launch is the right thing to do?” and “When do you reassess and change things and how do you actually know that something isn’t quite right?” We’re here today to tell you about our past experiences and how we got to figuring it all out. 
In our experience, we’ve always just kinda “did it” and generally made it happen. There haven’t been many ideas that have come up and ultimately didn’t end up being created. We’re digging into how we originally started and how we knew it was the right choice for us, where our heads were at along the process and what you can do turn your vision into daily actions. From idea to conception to sale, we’re giving you both parts of our system. Be sure to keep listening to find out more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 01 Aug 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to go from Stuck to Taking Action in your Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>351</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f364eb0c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-0fa8982a7597/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Ever been stuck with ideas and you just didn’t know if they were right for you or how to put them into action? We’ve been getting tons of questions from you all out there, most of the question being along the lines of, “How do you guys know when...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Ever been stuck with ideas and you just didn’t know if they were right for you or how to put them into action? We’ve been getting tons of questions from you all out there, most of the question being along the lines of, “How do you guys know when a product or a launch is the right thing to do?” and “When do you reassess and change things and how do you actually know that something isn’t quite right?” We’re here today to tell you about our past experiences and how we got to figuring it all out. 
In our experience, we’ve always just kinda “did it” and generally made it happen. There haven’t been many ideas that have come up and ultimately didn’t end up being created. We’re digging into how we originally started and how we knew it was the right choice for us, where our heads were at along the process and what you can do turn your vision into daily actions. From idea to conception to sale, we’re giving you both parts of our system. Be sure to keep listening to find out more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ever been stuck with ideas and you just didn’t know if they were right for you or how to put them into action? We’ve been getting tons of questions from you all out there, most of the question being along the lines of, “How do you guys know when a product or a launch is the right thing to do?” and “When do you reassess and change things and how do you actually know that something isn’t quite right?” We’re here today to tell you about our past experiences and how we got to figuring it all out. </p><p>In our experience, we’ve always just kinda “did it” and generally made it happen. There haven’t been many ideas that have come up and ultimately didn’t end up being created. We’re digging into how we originally started and how we knew it was the right choice for us, where our heads were at along the process and what you can do turn your vision into daily actions. From idea to conception to sale, we’re giving you both parts of our system. Be sure to keep listening to find out more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1421</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[687f560a4a024905af92a5dab5f75c02]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9262845784.mp3?updated=1656104582" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>350: 7 Things You Didn't Know About Us Starting Our Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/7-things-you-didnt-know-about-us-starting-our-business</link>
      <description>With all these transitions going on lately, we’ve had to do some reflection because as we move forward. It’s important to figure out what we want and where we’ve been and so we decided to share some things you probably didn’t know about us starting our business. Emylee might be remembering everything as perfect, but it definitely wasn’t! 
On this episode, we make a few confessions and share some of the behind the scenes info that we haven’t talked about before. You might find these seven things surprising, you might find them relatable, but maybe you find it encouraging to hear that we did not have everything figured out before we started our business. A lot of stuff we had to learn along the way – stuff we’re happy to share with you, so be sure to join us for this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 30 Jul 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>7 Things You Didn't Know About Us Starting Our Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>350</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f3f4d5be-ae9a-11ec-91b1-67c1ec599311/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We make a few confessions and share some behind the scenes info we haven’t talked about before. You might find these things surprising, you might find them relatable, but maybe you find it encouraging to hear that we did not have everything figured out before we started our business.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>With all these transitions going on lately, we’ve had to do some reflection because as we move forward. It’s important to figure out what we want and where we’ve been and so we decided to share some things you probably didn’t know about us starting our business. Emylee might be remembering everything as perfect, but it definitely wasn’t! 
On this episode, we make a few confessions and share some of the behind the scenes info that we haven’t talked about before. You might find these seven things surprising, you might find them relatable, but maybe you find it encouraging to hear that we did not have everything figured out before we started our business. A lot of stuff we had to learn along the way – stuff we’re happy to share with you, so be sure to join us for this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>With all these transitions going on lately, we’ve had to do some reflection because as we move forward. It’s important to figure out what we want and where we’ve been and so we decided to share some things you probably didn’t know about us starting our business. Emylee might be remembering everything as perfect, but it definitely wasn’t! </p><p>On this episode, we make a few confessions and share some of the behind the scenes info that we haven’t talked about before. You might find these seven things surprising, you might find them relatable, but maybe you find it encouraging to hear that we did not have everything figured out before we started our business. A lot of stuff we had to learn along the way – stuff we’re happy to share with you, so be sure to join us for this episode!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1141</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d9493416d9854b45b618c9a683325a19]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8350563641.mp3?updated=1656421086" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>349: 4 Lessons About Business From The Bachelorette</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/4-lessons-about-business-from-the-bachelorette</link>
      <description>So as you may or may not know, Abagail is completely addicted to The Bachelorette and all the associated shows! She has been following them for ages and seems to know almost all of the rotating cast of characters from each season and the ins and outs of this huge TV show. So she thought, why not use the show as a way to draw out some important life and business lessons seeing as though they are exemplified so well during the action of the latest season and the format in general? 
Even if you are not particularly in love with or follow the show that closely, there is a whole lot here for you! We draw out a few of these lessons and explain how they can impact your business in the long run, and all thanks to The Bachelorette! So make sure to tune in to a new twist on the regular Strategy Hour Show!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 25 Jul 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>4 Lessons About Business From The Bachelorette</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>349</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f48608ae-ae9a-11ec-91b1-13e54e404727/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Abagail is completely addicted to The Bachelorette! We draw out some important life and business lessons and explain how they can impact your business in the long run.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>So as you may or may not know, Abagail is completely addicted to The Bachelorette and all the associated shows! She has been following them for ages and seems to know almost all of the rotating cast of characters from each season and the ins and outs of this huge TV show. So she thought, why not use the show as a way to draw out some important life and business lessons seeing as though they are exemplified so well during the action of the latest season and the format in general? 
Even if you are not particularly in love with or follow the show that closely, there is a whole lot here for you! We draw out a few of these lessons and explain how they can impact your business in the long run, and all thanks to The Bachelorette! So make sure to tune in to a new twist on the regular Strategy Hour Show!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>So as you may or may not know, Abagail is completely addicted to The Bachelorette and all the associated shows! She has been following them for ages and seems to know almost all of the rotating cast of characters from each season and the ins and outs of this huge TV show. So she thought, why not use the show as a way to draw out some important life and business lessons seeing as though they are exemplified so well during the action of the latest season and the format in general? </p><p>Even if you are not particularly in love with or follow the show that closely, there is a whole lot here for you! We draw out a few of these lessons and explain how they can impact your business in the long run, and all thanks to The Bachelorette! So make sure to tune in to a new twist on the regular Strategy Hour Show!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1730</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[47368199dfab48ddb92ecc34af788eae]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9167844864.mp3?updated=1656421045" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>348: Living Beyond Society's Standards: Working Mom Life &amp; Working With Your Spouse</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/living-beyond-societys-standards-working-mom-life-working-with-your-spouse</link>
      <description>As you know, all of our lives are ever-evolving and the schedules and routines that organize our days are constantly in motion. A big part of this, for us, is obviously our business and we have learned some big lessons about riding the waves of change so that everything doesn't go terribly wrong any time something comes up. Today we will be talking about two major curveballs that life has thrown at us, one at Emylee in the form of childcare and one at Abagail in the form of her husband's uncertain career. 
In the episode, we will be unpacking these stories and sharing the silver linings of each for your listening pleasure! The biggest takeaway that we want to share with all of you from this topic is that the choices you make as life changes must be the right ones for you and for your family. Not for others' standards or by their advice or opinions. Do not let the norms of society manipulate how you live your life! We are sharing all of this to support you and remind you that the right way is your way and with enough thought and time you will find it! With all that said, let's get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Jul 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Living Beyond Society's Standards: Working Mom Life &amp; Working With Your Spouse</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>348</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f527725c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-7ff442369712/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we will be talking about two major curveballs that life has thrown at us, one at Emylee in the form of childcare and one at Abagail in the form of her husband's uncertain career. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>As you know, all of our lives are ever-evolving and the schedules and routines that organize our days are constantly in motion. A big part of this, for us, is obviously our business and we have learned some big lessons about riding the waves of change so that everything doesn't go terribly wrong any time something comes up. Today we will be talking about two major curveballs that life has thrown at us, one at Emylee in the form of childcare and one at Abagail in the form of her husband's uncertain career. 
In the episode, we will be unpacking these stories and sharing the silver linings of each for your listening pleasure! The biggest takeaway that we want to share with all of you from this topic is that the choices you make as life changes must be the right ones for you and for your family. Not for others' standards or by their advice or opinions. Do not let the norms of society manipulate how you live your life! We are sharing all of this to support you and remind you that the right way is your way and with enough thought and time you will find it! With all that said, let's get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>As you know, all of our lives are ever-evolving and the schedules and routines that organize our days are constantly in motion. A big part of this, for us, is obviously our business and we have learned some big lessons about riding the waves of change so that everything doesn't go terribly wrong any time something comes up. Today we will be talking about two major curveballs that life has thrown at us, one at Emylee in the form of childcare and one at Abagail in the form of her husband's uncertain career. </p><p>In the episode, we will be unpacking these stories and sharing the silver linings of each for your listening pleasure! The biggest takeaway that we want to share with all of you from this topic is that the choices you make as life changes must be the right ones for you and for your family. Not for others' standards or by their advice or opinions. Do not let the norms of society manipulate how you live your life! We are sharing all of this to support you and remind you that the right way is your way and with enough thought and time you will find it! With all that said, let's get into some strategy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2460</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3eaf194b8c73477586c0e0baba81a342]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6424471888.mp3?updated=1656364187" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>347: The Boss Project Summit Is Back</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-boss-project-summit-is-back</link>
      <description>Guess what’s back? Another Boss Project Summit! For those who have not yet joined us for one of these events, it’s basically an amazing, free business conference during which you can wear your PJs while attending in the comfort of your own home. We gather all the best entrepreneurs and business owners to teach you everything they know, from starting an online business to pivoting and scaling, and everything in between. Had to the Boss Project Summit website to sign up and get your virtual ticket. It is happening live on August 20th through to the 22nd, so make a note of that. 
On this episode, we give you a quick overview of some of the topics that will be covered and the great sponsors we have for the summit. We also tell you how you should go about getting access to the summit and what an all-access pass will allow you to do. So be sure to get with the Boss Project Summit program! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 18 Jul 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Boss Project Summit Is Back</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>347</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f5e21562-ae9a-11ec-91b1-2f1d5868e858/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>For those who have not yet joined us for one of these events, it’s basically an amazing, free business conference during which you can wear your PJs while attending in the comfort of your own home....</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Guess what’s back? Another Boss Project Summit! For those who have not yet joined us for one of these events, it’s basically an amazing, free business conference during which you can wear your PJs while attending in the comfort of your own home. We gather all the best entrepreneurs and business owners to teach you everything they know, from starting an online business to pivoting and scaling, and everything in between. Had to the Boss Project Summit website to sign up and get your virtual ticket. It is happening live on August 20th through to the 22nd, so make a note of that. 
On this episode, we give you a quick overview of some of the topics that will be covered and the great sponsors we have for the summit. We also tell you how you should go about getting access to the summit and what an all-access pass will allow you to do. So be sure to get with the Boss Project Summit program! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Guess what’s back? Another Boss Project Summit! For those who have not yet joined us for one of these events, it’s basically an amazing, free business conference during which you can wear your PJs while attending in the comfort of your own home. We gather all the best entrepreneurs and business owners to teach you everything they know, from starting an online business to pivoting and scaling, and everything in between. Had to the Boss Project Summit website to sign up and get your virtual ticket. It is happening live on August 20th through to the 22nd, so make a note of that. </p><p>On this episode, we give you a quick overview of some of the topics that will be covered and the great sponsors we have for the summit. We also tell you how you should go about getting access to the summit and what an all-access pass will allow you to do. So be sure to get with the Boss Project Summit program! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1271</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0ea5375a176a425aba5c3981fec2505a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8118492820.mp3?updated=1656364076" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>346: Our Favorite Systems, Tools and Apps for the Creative Entepreneur</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/draft-our-favorite-systems-tools-and-apps-for-the-creative-entrepreneur</link>
      <description>So, we get questions all of the time about which app is the best for each task. On today's episode of The Strategy Hour, we thought we would give you all of that and break down all of our favorite tools and tips for getting the most for your biz! We will go through each section of our business and give you a selection of what we use, recommend, do not like, and even some things that might be beyond your scope right now. 
Remember, just because we use it does not make it the best or the one you should use. Often you have to patch together a toolbox that is best for your specific needs, but we are here to show you the lay of the land! We want to be as transparent as possible and often the reason we use a certain tool at this time is it was just the one we selected first! So all that being said we are sure you will get a bunch from this episode and might just find your new favorite thing out there! Let's get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 16 Jul 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our Favorite Systems, Tools and Apps for the Creative Entepreneur</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>346</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f672483a-ae9a-11ec-91b1-5f7501e61ad6/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>So, we get questions all of the time about which app is the best for each task. On today's episode of The Strategy Hour, we thought we would give you all of that and break down all of our favorite tools and tips for getting the most for your biz! We...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>So, we get questions all of the time about which app is the best for each task. On today's episode of The Strategy Hour, we thought we would give you all of that and break down all of our favorite tools and tips for getting the most for your biz! We will go through each section of our business and give you a selection of what we use, recommend, do not like, and even some things that might be beyond your scope right now. 
Remember, just because we use it does not make it the best or the one you should use. Often you have to patch together a toolbox that is best for your specific needs, but we are here to show you the lay of the land! We want to be as transparent as possible and often the reason we use a certain tool at this time is it was just the one we selected first! So all that being said we are sure you will get a bunch from this episode and might just find your new favorite thing out there! Let's get into some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>So, we get questions all of the time about which app is the best for each task. On today's episode of The Strategy Hour, we thought we would give you all of that and break down all of our favorite tools and tips for getting the most for your biz! We will go through each section of our business and give you a selection of what we use, recommend, do not like, and even some things that might be beyond your scope right now. </p><p>Remember, just because we use it does not make it the best or the one you should use. Often you have to patch together a toolbox that is best for your specific needs, but we are here to show you the lay of the land! We want to be as transparent as possible and often the reason we use a certain tool at this time is it was just the one we selected first! So all that being said we are sure you will get a bunch from this episode and might just find your new favorite thing out there! Let's get into some strategy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2463</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[bb35eadf33ac4c429dc1ecf8eae43448]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3953303630.mp3?updated=1652126320" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>345: Quick Tips to Hire Your Next VA</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/quick-tips-to-hire-your-next-virtual-assistant</link>
      <description>As your business is growing, you might find the need to hire a virtual assistant. How we approach hiring now is very different from what it used to be and getting someone who is the right fit takes a good portion of know-how. It’s a learning curve and a process for sure. The first step is to make sure that you actually need a person and that a well-functioning system or software application is not able to address the need, because that will naturally work out way cheaper! 
When you’ve done your research and figured out that you absolutely do need a human to do the task, you might begin by asking for referrals. But how will you know if this is the right person for the job? Well, on this episode we share some of the greatest advice for hiring a virtual assistant – tips and tricks that you can apply to really any position you need to be filled. So be sure to tune for today’s Strategy Hour Podcast!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 11 Jul 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Quick Tips to Hire Your Next VA</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>345</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f6f56e40-ae9a-11ec-91b1-f3ddd0247d74/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>As your business is growing, you might find the need to hire a virtual assistant. How we approach hiring now is very different from what it used to be and getting someone who is the right fit takes a good portion of know-how. It’s a learning curve...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>As your business is growing, you might find the need to hire a virtual assistant. How we approach hiring now is very different from what it used to be and getting someone who is the right fit takes a good portion of know-how. It’s a learning curve and a process for sure. The first step is to make sure that you actually need a person and that a well-functioning system or software application is not able to address the need, because that will naturally work out way cheaper! 
When you’ve done your research and figured out that you absolutely do need a human to do the task, you might begin by asking for referrals. But how will you know if this is the right person for the job? Well, on this episode we share some of the greatest advice for hiring a virtual assistant – tips and tricks that you can apply to really any position you need to be filled. So be sure to tune for today’s Strategy Hour Podcast!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>As your business is growing, you might find the need to hire a virtual assistant. How we approach hiring now is very different from what it used to be and getting someone who is the right fit takes a good portion of know-how. It’s a learning curve and a process for sure. The first step is to make sure that you actually need a person and that a well-functioning system or software application is not able to address the need, because that will naturally work out way cheaper! </p><p>When you’ve done your research and figured out that you absolutely do need a human to do the task, you might begin by asking for referrals. But how will you know if this is the right person for the job? Well, on this episode we share some of the greatest advice for hiring a virtual assistant – tips and tricks that you can apply to really any position you need to be filled. So be sure to tune for today’s Strategy Hour Podcast!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2865</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6ed562e09aa44eb698d869b63da5506a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1342251671.mp3?updated=1652126209" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>344: How to Have A Simple Automated Business that Creates Consistent Income with Haley Burkhead</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-have-a-simple-automated-business-that-creates-consistent-income-with-haley-burkhead</link>
      <description>Welcome back to the show everyone out there! So happy to have you and also so happy to have a great friend with us today! None other than Haley Burkhead to tell you all about how to make your business more profitable through automation and what she calls the scalability factor. Haley is our go-to texting buddy for all things business and we are basically texting best buds at this point! We are able to help each other out so much in times of need so we hope that what she has to say on the show today will help you too!
All of us want you to have that consistency that makes a business work! This is what the scalability factor can do for you. It can take the parts of your biz that are challenging and the least fun and get them done; better, faster and at higher levels, so you can focus on what you to do; be creative and connect with your peeps! It is such a unique and well-proven model we cannot wait for you to share in the results!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 09 Jul 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Have A Simple Automated Business that Creates Consistent Income with Haley Burkhead</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>344</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f77cd592-ae9a-11ec-91b1-5fa80ed26d64/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome back to the show everyone out there! So happy to have you and also so happy to have a great friend with us today! None other than Haley Burkhead to tell you all about how to make your business more profitable through automation and what she...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to the show everyone out there! So happy to have you and also so happy to have a great friend with us today! None other than Haley Burkhead to tell you all about how to make your business more profitable through automation and what she calls the scalability factor. Haley is our go-to texting buddy for all things business and we are basically texting best buds at this point! We are able to help each other out so much in times of need so we hope that what she has to say on the show today will help you too!
All of us want you to have that consistency that makes a business work! This is what the scalability factor can do for you. It can take the parts of your biz that are challenging and the least fun and get them done; better, faster and at higher levels, so you can focus on what you to do; be creative and connect with your peeps! It is such a unique and well-proven model we cannot wait for you to share in the results!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to the show everyone out there! So happy to have you and also so happy to have a great friend with us today! None other than Haley Burkhead to tell you all about how to make your business more profitable through automation and what she calls the scalability factor. Haley is our go-to texting buddy for all things business and we are basically texting best buds at this point! We are able to help each other out so much in times of need so we hope that what she has to say on the show today will help you too!</p><p>All of us want you to have that consistency that makes a business work! This is what the scalability factor can do for you. It can take the parts of your biz that are challenging and the least fun and get them done; better, faster and at higher levels, so you can focus on what you to do; be creative and connect with your peeps! It is such a unique and well-proven model we cannot wait for you to share in the results!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2127</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[41863fc46a344de0bdba861ee3c1b062]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9068337724.mp3?updated=1652126086" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>343: How to Communicate Clearly with Your Team or in a Partnership</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-communicate-clearly-with-your-team-or-in-a-partnership</link>
      <description>Today we are carrying on with listener questions, so do not forget to send yours in if you have any! You can do this on Instagram or on the Facebook Group, we love to hear your ideas and questions, so go ahead and ask away! Today we are tackling a question on how to keep communication clear, deal fairly with different amounts of input and how to keep a partnership strong and working well. We have talked about this a little before in other episodes, in different contexts, we have looked at the legal side, how we started out, how things have changed, our thoughts on partnership and breaking down our team. But it is high time for an update, so here we go!
Truth be told, we do not really suggest you go out looking for a partnership like ours. We have seen again and again how difficult it can be and how businesses dissolve, we have just been very lucky in the way that we fit together. So this is us sharing our lessons that you can apply to your team in whatever shape or form it is in now or takes in the future. We are sharing some strategies that have worked for us in resolving conflict and sharing the roles of a business and truthfully, it has mostly been really smooth and easy for us, but that is not always the case. So join us as we break down some tools, books, software, and ideas that can make it work that much better for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 04 Jul 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Communicate Clearly with Your Team or in a Partnership</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>343</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f80ae77e-ae9a-11ec-91b1-b3c4722b08ef/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are tackling a question on how to keep communication clear, deal fairly with different amounts of input and how to keep a partnership strong and working well. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are carrying on with listener questions, so do not forget to send yours in if you have any! You can do this on Instagram or on the Facebook Group, we love to hear your ideas and questions, so go ahead and ask away! Today we are tackling a question on how to keep communication clear, deal fairly with different amounts of input and how to keep a partnership strong and working well. We have talked about this a little before in other episodes, in different contexts, we have looked at the legal side, how we started out, how things have changed, our thoughts on partnership and breaking down our team. But it is high time for an update, so here we go!
Truth be told, we do not really suggest you go out looking for a partnership like ours. We have seen again and again how difficult it can be and how businesses dissolve, we have just been very lucky in the way that we fit together. So this is us sharing our lessons that you can apply to your team in whatever shape or form it is in now or takes in the future. We are sharing some strategies that have worked for us in resolving conflict and sharing the roles of a business and truthfully, it has mostly been really smooth and easy for us, but that is not always the case. So join us as we break down some tools, books, software, and ideas that can make it work that much better for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are carrying on with listener questions, so do not forget to send yours in if you have any! You can do this on Instagram or on the Facebook Group, we love to hear your ideas and questions, so go ahead and ask away! Today we are tackling a question on how to keep communication clear, deal fairly with different amounts of input and how to keep a partnership strong and working well. We have talked about this a little before in other episodes, in different contexts, we have looked at the legal side, how we started out, how things have changed, our thoughts on partnership and breaking down our team. But it is high time for an update, so here we go!</p><p>Truth be told, we do not really suggest you go out looking for a partnership like ours. We have seen again and again how difficult it can be and how businesses dissolve, we have just been very lucky in the way that we fit together. So this is us sharing our lessons that you can apply to your team in whatever shape or form it is in now or takes in the future. We are sharing some strategies that have worked for us in resolving conflict and sharing the roles of a business and truthfully, it has mostly been really smooth and easy for us, but that is not always the case. So join us as we break down some tools, books, software, and ideas that can make it work that much better for you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2158</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a02cfaa513634a2aa01c28e43787cdf5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9998957140.mp3?updated=1656363835" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>342: What Not to Do When Pivoting from Services to Courses</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-not-to-do-when-pivoting-from-services-to-courses</link>
      <description>Something that we repeatedly get asked about is content, specifically around what should be free and what should come at a cost, which platforms should be used to deliver the content in the best way. This is especially relevant for those of you who want to transition from services to digital offerings where you teach what you know. Truth is, there are so many different ways to approach this and this gets us overwhelmed very quickly. First of all, we’re going to give you permission to do less! So if you feel like you are doing too much and overcomplicating it, you probably are. 
If you’re running a strictly service-based business and you do not have a consistent income in that $5000 to $8000 range yet, then creating content is a massive distraction that is taking your time away from getting more clients. But if you have reached that six-figure goal, there are really two main ways you can progress from here. One, you create an agency model, take yourself out of the work and hire people to do the work and you just scale from there by adding more people. Or two, you start doing less of what you’re doing now by transitioning to teaching other people how to do what you do. And this is what we’re talking about today: dos and don’ts when pivoting from services to courses, so stay tuned!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 02 Jul 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Not to Do When Pivoting from Services to Courses</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>342</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f895daaa-ae9a-11ec-91b1-7b555935cf26/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Something that we repeatedly get asked about is content, specifically around what should be free and what should come at a cost, which platforms should be used to deliver the content in the best way. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Something that we repeatedly get asked about is content, specifically around what should be free and what should come at a cost, which platforms should be used to deliver the content in the best way. This is especially relevant for those of you who want to transition from services to digital offerings where you teach what you know. Truth is, there are so many different ways to approach this and this gets us overwhelmed very quickly. First of all, we’re going to give you permission to do less! So if you feel like you are doing too much and overcomplicating it, you probably are. 
If you’re running a strictly service-based business and you do not have a consistent income in that $5000 to $8000 range yet, then creating content is a massive distraction that is taking your time away from getting more clients. But if you have reached that six-figure goal, there are really two main ways you can progress from here. One, you create an agency model, take yourself out of the work and hire people to do the work and you just scale from there by adding more people. Or two, you start doing less of what you’re doing now by transitioning to teaching other people how to do what you do. And this is what we’re talking about today: dos and don’ts when pivoting from services to courses, so stay tuned!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Something that we repeatedly get asked about is content, specifically around what should be free and what should come at a cost, which platforms should be used to deliver the content in the best way. This is especially relevant for those of you who want to transition from services to digital offerings where you teach what you know. Truth is, there are so many different ways to approach this and this gets us overwhelmed very quickly. First of all, we’re going to give you permission to do less! So if you feel like you are doing too much and overcomplicating it, you probably are. </p><p>If you’re running a strictly service-based business and you do not have a consistent income in that $5000 to $8000 range yet, then creating content is a massive distraction that is taking your time away from getting more clients. But if you have reached that six-figure goal, there are really two main ways you can progress from here. One, you create an agency model, take yourself out of the work and hire people to do the work and you just scale from there by adding more people. Or two, you start doing less of what you’re doing now by transitioning to teaching other people how to do what you do. And this is what we’re talking about today: dos and don’ts when pivoting from services to courses, so stay tuned!  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2009</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e84f02b9c6eb411e8e5cf8b4b77f5655]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8821305812.mp3?updated=1656364139" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>341: Inclusivity and Diversity: Inviting More People To Your Table</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/draft-inclusivity-and-diversity-inviting-more-people-to-your-table</link>
      <description>Today we are talking about a really hot topic and something we should all be talking about more often! We will be unpacking inclusivity and diversity and our own experiences and the lessons we have learned in this area. We will be drawing mostly from our recent summit and what we took away from the event that we will carry forward. This episode will have actionable strategies and tips about how to invite everyone to your table. We have spoken on this topic in various ways on the podcast before but it definitely deserves a dedicated episode, so we will be discussing community over competition, inclusion in our own company, the speakers we invited to the summit and what to do when something rubs you the wrong way. 
We all have a responsibility to open up these conversations if we are going to make any progress as a society. Do not worry, you are not alone if the discomfort itself makes you feel uncomfortable! There is a lot of work to do and processing all of this is not always easy but you learn best by doing and mistakes are okay! It is a big misconception that we will all get it right every time, so do not put too much pressure on yourself in that regard, rather commit to learning, listening and trying your best to contribute to important change!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 27 Jun 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Inclusivity and Diversity: Inviting More People To Your Table</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>341</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f9539748-ae9a-11ec-91b1-87fe85976b57/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We will be unpacking inclusivity and diversity and our own experiences and the lessons we have learned in this area. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are talking about a really hot topic and something we should all be talking about more often! We will be unpacking inclusivity and diversity and our own experiences and the lessons we have learned in this area. We will be drawing mostly from our recent summit and what we took away from the event that we will carry forward. This episode will have actionable strategies and tips about how to invite everyone to your table. We have spoken on this topic in various ways on the podcast before but it definitely deserves a dedicated episode, so we will be discussing community over competition, inclusion in our own company, the speakers we invited to the summit and what to do when something rubs you the wrong way. 
We all have a responsibility to open up these conversations if we are going to make any progress as a society. Do not worry, you are not alone if the discomfort itself makes you feel uncomfortable! There is a lot of work to do and processing all of this is not always easy but you learn best by doing and mistakes are okay! It is a big misconception that we will all get it right every time, so do not put too much pressure on yourself in that regard, rather commit to learning, listening and trying your best to contribute to important change!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are talking about a really hot topic and something we should all be talking about more often! We will be unpacking inclusivity and diversity and our own experiences and the lessons we have learned in this area. We will be drawing mostly from our recent summit and what we took away from the event that we will carry forward. This episode will have actionable strategies and tips about how to invite everyone to your table. We have spoken on this topic in various ways on the podcast before but it definitely deserves a dedicated episode, so we will be discussing community over competition, inclusion in our own company, the speakers we invited to the summit and what to do when something rubs you the wrong way. </p><p>We all have a responsibility to open up these conversations if we are going to make any progress as a society. Do not worry, you are not alone if the discomfort itself makes you feel uncomfortable! There is a lot of work to do and processing all of this is not always easy but you learn best by doing and mistakes are okay! It is a big misconception that we will all get it right every time, so do not put too much pressure on yourself in that regard, rather commit to learning, listening and trying your best to contribute to important change!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2332</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8584df2af09f4754811639a7c6dd1e90]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7376883423.mp3?updated=1656363746" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>340: How to Increase Your Personal Income: Focus More on Profit and Less On Revenue</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-increase-your-personal-income-focus-more-on-profit-and-less-on-revenue</link>
      <description>Welcome back to the Strategy Hour Podcast! Today’s episode is mostly for the listeners out there whose businesses are under the $500k a year earning mark but who have this possibility on the horizon. We want to talk to you about the growth that happens around this point and for you to ask yourself whether you really need to keep growing. The reason this is an important question is that as you scale past $500k you actually may not increase your profits. 
This law of diminishing returns is something we have experienced at Boss Projects as we grew. What does it really mean to have a seven-figure business? The answer might not be quite what you expect. In order to get you ready for these possibilities, we will be talking accounting and the different ways that making money works in your business. So if you are ready to start making your revenue work for you and to keep your profits up, listen in, we cover it all!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 25 Jun 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Increase Your Personal Income: Focus More on Profit and Less On Revenue</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>340</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/f9dfac4c-ae9a-11ec-91b1-73a8f7a0e60a/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today’s episode is mostly for the listeners out there whose businesses are under the $500k a year earning mark but who have this possibility on the horizon. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to the Strategy Hour Podcast! Today’s episode is mostly for the listeners out there whose businesses are under the $500k a year earning mark but who have this possibility on the horizon. We want to talk to you about the growth that happens around this point and for you to ask yourself whether you really need to keep growing. The reason this is an important question is that as you scale past $500k you actually may not increase your profits. 
This law of diminishing returns is something we have experienced at Boss Projects as we grew. What does it really mean to have a seven-figure business? The answer might not be quite what you expect. In order to get you ready for these possibilities, we will be talking accounting and the different ways that making money works in your business. So if you are ready to start making your revenue work for you and to keep your profits up, listen in, we cover it all!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to the Strategy Hour Podcast! Today’s episode is mostly for the listeners out there whose businesses are under the $500k a year earning mark but who have this possibility on the horizon. We want to talk to you about the growth that happens around this point and for you to ask yourself whether you really need to keep growing. The reason this is an important question is that as you scale past $500k you actually may not increase your profits. </p><p>This law of diminishing returns is something we have experienced at Boss Projects as we grew. What does it really mean to have a seven-figure business? The answer might not be quite what you expect. In order to get you ready for these possibilities, we will be talking accounting and the different ways that making money works in your business. So if you are ready to start making your revenue work for you and to keep your profits up, listen in, we cover it all!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1706</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[53c3c9d720f24beb85a1cb0faa43c9c1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2566709745.mp3?updated=1656359331" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>339: Lame House Analogies and Business Advice</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/lame-house-analogies-and-business-advice</link>
      <description>Many times people come to us and ask where they should start with their business. They’re overwhelmed and feel like they’re having to do so many different things when really they want to focus on doing only the things that actually get results. You can also get totally snowed under by the ideas and opinions of others. The biggest detriment can be wanting to have all the bells and whistles of a thriving business and wanting all of them straight away. We argue for the opposite: first, get the foundational things in order and get really good at it before worrying too much about the fluff. 
Here is a construction analogy: In the Midwest, houses often have basements because their foundations have to be built below the snow line, otherwise it will crack. The same applies to our businesses: they require really solid foundations. Some of you have to take a few steps back and dig out a basement so that the structure of your business can be healthy and sturdy. A foundation allows you to have stability, and frankly, without a foundation, you don’t have a sustainable business. Today we’re talking about what’s involved in those initial stages that many people are skipping or putting off, so get ready to join us for another fun episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 20 Jun 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Lame House Analogies and Business Advice</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>339</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/fa855278-ae9a-11ec-91b1-33b2d38a95ba/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>First, get the foundational things in order for your business, and get really good at it before worrying too much about the fluff. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Many times people come to us and ask where they should start with their business. They’re overwhelmed and feel like they’re having to do so many different things when really they want to focus on doing only the things that actually get results. You can also get totally snowed under by the ideas and opinions of others. The biggest detriment can be wanting to have all the bells and whistles of a thriving business and wanting all of them straight away. We argue for the opposite: first, get the foundational things in order and get really good at it before worrying too much about the fluff. 
Here is a construction analogy: In the Midwest, houses often have basements because their foundations have to be built below the snow line, otherwise it will crack. The same applies to our businesses: they require really solid foundations. Some of you have to take a few steps back and dig out a basement so that the structure of your business can be healthy and sturdy. A foundation allows you to have stability, and frankly, without a foundation, you don’t have a sustainable business. Today we’re talking about what’s involved in those initial stages that many people are skipping or putting off, so get ready to join us for another fun episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast!  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Many times people come to us and ask where they should start with their business. They’re overwhelmed and feel like they’re having to do so many different things when really they want to focus on doing only the things that actually get results. You can also get totally snowed under by the ideas and opinions of others. The biggest detriment can be wanting to have all the bells and whistles of a thriving business and wanting all of them straight away. We argue for the opposite: first, get the foundational things in order and get really good at it before worrying too much about the fluff. </p><p>Here is a construction analogy: In the Midwest, houses often have basements because their foundations have to be built below the snow line, otherwise it will crack. The same applies to our businesses: they require really solid foundations. Some of you have to take a few steps back and dig out a basement so that the structure of your business can be healthy and sturdy. A foundation allows you to have stability, and frankly, without a foundation, you don’t have a sustainable business. Today we’re talking about what’s involved in those initial stages that many people are skipping or putting off, so get ready to join us for another fun episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast!  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1629</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9be91318709f4a34bd6e2044b4df9f32]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2538179050.mp3?updated=1656359286" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>338: How to Have Deeper Relationships Even if You're An Introvert</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-have-deeper-relationships-even-if-youre-an-introvert</link>
      <description>Welcome back to the Strategy Hour ya’ll! A couple of weeks ago we had a workshop and we got a few comments that caught us totally off guard. This came after we spoke about using referrals and tapping into the resources of your inner circle to jumpstart your business. We know what we are talking about when it comes to network marketing, but there is the icky side of this that involves random messages from people you haven’t been in contact with for ages and then they suddenly need something from you. That is not what we are advising you to do! 
These “Hey Girl” messages are simply not the way to go! You don’t even need social media to have the conversations we are urging you to have. But if you are using social, here is our ten cents about it: respond to others in the way that you want to be responded to. Building our business came down to personal relationships and conversations and today we’re sharing more of our personal experiences and successes on this front. So be sure to tune in for this episode of Strategy Hour, and find out how to create those meaningful business relationships! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 18 Jun 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Have Deeper Relationships Even if You're An Introvert</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>338</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/fbf26966-ae9a-11ec-91b1-031b1f4a0d39/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Building our business came down to personal relationships and conversations and today we’re sharing more of our personal experiences and successes on this front. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to the Strategy Hour ya’ll! A couple of weeks ago we had a workshop and we got a few comments that caught us totally off guard. This came after we spoke about using referrals and tapping into the resources of your inner circle to jumpstart your business. We know what we are talking about when it comes to network marketing, but there is the icky side of this that involves random messages from people you haven’t been in contact with for ages and then they suddenly need something from you. That is not what we are advising you to do! 
These “Hey Girl” messages are simply not the way to go! You don’t even need social media to have the conversations we are urging you to have. But if you are using social, here is our ten cents about it: respond to others in the way that you want to be responded to. Building our business came down to personal relationships and conversations and today we’re sharing more of our personal experiences and successes on this front. So be sure to tune in for this episode of Strategy Hour, and find out how to create those meaningful business relationships! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to the Strategy Hour ya’ll! A couple of weeks ago we had a workshop and we got a few comments that caught us totally off guard. This came after we spoke about using referrals and tapping into the resources of your inner circle to jumpstart your business. We know what we are talking about when it comes to network marketing, but there is the icky side of this that involves random messages from people you haven’t been in contact with for ages and then they suddenly need something from you. That is not what we are advising you to do! </p><p>These “Hey Girl” messages are simply not the way to go! You don’t even need social media to have the conversations we are urging you to have. But if you are using social, here is our ten cents about it: respond to others in the way that you want to be responded to. Building our business came down to personal relationships and conversations and today we’re sharing more of our personal experiences and successes on this front. So be sure to tune in for this episode of Strategy Hour, and find out how to create those meaningful business relationships! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2143</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c84c379c711041c19b2bba73a8ec4a50]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5212795699.mp3?updated=1656359254" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>337: Minna &amp; Jacqueline The Product Boss</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/becoming-a-product-boss-with-jacqueline-snyder-and-minna-khounlo-sithep</link>
      <description>Today on the show we are so happy to welcome the combined force behind the The Product Boss Podcast, Jacqueline and Minna! Through their show, they teach business owners how to grow product-based businesses with strategies and a strong community. Each of them have their own business as well and have taken their personal work into their joint venture, offering their expertise as a great service to other creatives out there!
Today's talk is all about taking your products further and the idea of going deeper instead of wider. Although Jacqueline and Minna mainly focus on product-based business, these strategies can be applied to whatever you are working on with the basic idea being to make more of the customers you already have rather than going to find new customers from scratch. So let's dive in and hear what they have to say!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 13 Jun 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Minna &amp; Jacqueline The Product Boss</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>337</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/fd910462-ae9a-11ec-91b1-f3fbdb9257f3/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today's talk is all about taking your products and services further and the idea of going deeper instead of wider. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we are so happy to welcome the combined force behind the The Product Boss Podcast, Jacqueline and Minna! Through their show, they teach business owners how to grow product-based businesses with strategies and a strong community. Each of them have their own business as well and have taken their personal work into their joint venture, offering their expertise as a great service to other creatives out there!
Today's talk is all about taking your products further and the idea of going deeper instead of wider. Although Jacqueline and Minna mainly focus on product-based business, these strategies can be applied to whatever you are working on with the basic idea being to make more of the customers you already have rather than going to find new customers from scratch. So let's dive in and hear what they have to say!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we are so happy to welcome the combined force behind the The Product Boss Podcast, Jacqueline and Minna! Through their show, they teach business owners how to grow product-based businesses with strategies and a strong community. Each of them have their own business as well and have taken their personal work into their joint venture, offering their expertise as a great service to other creatives out there!</p><p>Today's talk is all about taking your products further and the idea of going deeper instead of wider. Although Jacqueline and Minna mainly focus on product-based business, these strategies can be applied to whatever you are working on with the basic idea being to make more of the customers you already have rather than going to find new customers from scratch. So let's dive in and hear what they have to say!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2304</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[73649fda3b3d403482fc121468c60d6f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4694784081.mp3?updated=1656359226" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>336: It's Easier Than You Think to Make $100k from Your Services</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/its-easier-than-you-think-to-make-100k-from-your-services</link>
      <description>Today on The Strategy Hour we’re diving deeper into what exactly we mean when we say that is should be easy and fun to make $100k from your service based business, within a year. There’s a misconception that money cannot be earned without really hard work, and to an extent, this is true, especially for certain types of businesses. But you also have to be smart about it! Just to reiterate, when we say it’s easy to make six figures, we are talking about offering services like copywriting, designing and photography. And this is by doing the basic work only, aside from all the other side offerings like podcasts and training courses. 
In fact, you should keep it as simple as possible, focusing on doing one thing really well instead of doing a bunch of different things. These other ideas are not bad, but until you’ve done the one thing properly, you won’t enjoy its full benefits. We’re also guilty of this and we’ve seen many of our mentees battling with the same thing. Today we’re breaking this down in a way that we hope will help you not to fall into the trap of believing that diversifying will necessarily expand your business and make you more money. Whether you’re thinking of adding on products or offering more services, you think that the single solid service you’re offering will not get you to your financial goals. Today we’re busting that myth, and we’re going to show you have it is totally possible to achieve your goals by sticking to the basics.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 11 Jun 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>It's Easier Than You Think to Make $100k from Your Services</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>336</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/fe1450c4-ae9a-11ec-91b1-af05e85973f0/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>There’s a misconception that money cannot be earned without really hard work, and to an extent, this is true, especially for certain types of businesses. But you also have to be smart about it! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on The Strategy Hour we’re diving deeper into what exactly we mean when we say that is should be easy and fun to make $100k from your service based business, within a year. There’s a misconception that money cannot be earned without really hard work, and to an extent, this is true, especially for certain types of businesses. But you also have to be smart about it! Just to reiterate, when we say it’s easy to make six figures, we are talking about offering services like copywriting, designing and photography. And this is by doing the basic work only, aside from all the other side offerings like podcasts and training courses. 
In fact, you should keep it as simple as possible, focusing on doing one thing really well instead of doing a bunch of different things. These other ideas are not bad, but until you’ve done the one thing properly, you won’t enjoy its full benefits. We’re also guilty of this and we’ve seen many of our mentees battling with the same thing. Today we’re breaking this down in a way that we hope will help you not to fall into the trap of believing that diversifying will necessarily expand your business and make you more money. Whether you’re thinking of adding on products or offering more services, you think that the single solid service you’re offering will not get you to your financial goals. Today we’re busting that myth, and we’re going to show you have it is totally possible to achieve your goals by sticking to the basics.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on The Strategy Hour we’re diving deeper into what exactly we mean when we say that is should be easy and fun to make $100k from your service based business, within a year. There’s a misconception that money cannot be earned without really hard work, and to an extent, this is true, especially for certain types of businesses. But you also have to be smart about it! Just to reiterate, when we say it’s easy to make six figures, we are talking about offering services like copywriting, designing and photography. And this is by doing the basic work only, aside from all the other side offerings like podcasts and training courses. </p><p>In fact, you should keep it as simple as possible, focusing on doing one thing really well instead of doing a bunch of different things. These other ideas are not bad, but until you’ve done the one thing properly, you won’t enjoy its full benefits. We’re also guilty of this and we’ve seen many of our mentees battling with the same thing. Today we’re breaking this down in a way that we hope will help you not to fall into the trap of believing that diversifying will necessarily expand your business and make you more money. Whether you’re thinking of adding on products or offering more services, you think that the single solid service you’re offering will not get you to your financial goals. Today we’re busting that myth, and we’re going to show you have it is totally possible to achieve your goals by sticking to the basics.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2078</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[237a385fbc8447479afc3a72c080bec7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2800966054.mp3?updated=1656359180" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>335: What We're Digging: In Life, Health &amp; Home</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-were-digging-in-life-health-home</link>
      <description>Hey, everyone! Welcome to another episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast. Today's show is dedicated to chatting about all the latest things we are addicted to, the things we are digging and what we are into right now! Sound exciting? We hope so! Luckily for all of you, most of these of things are all things that you can buy, so you can use this as a fantasy shopping list if you so please, no one is stopping you!
So basically, in this episode we are just going to chat stuff today; stuff that helps you get one step closer to your own personal success. Take your cues from us! We have scoured our lives to find what is making them better and bring them to you. We are talking the last six or so months in gadgets, ideas, aids and plans. And believe us, there is no shortage of it! So without further ado, let's get to the list!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 06 Jun 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What We're Digging: In Life, Health &amp; Home</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>335</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/feacea1e-ae9a-11ec-91b1-1f96ffb529aa/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today's show is dedicated to chatting about all the latest things we are addicted to, the things we are digging and what we are into right now! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey, everyone! Welcome to another episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast. Today's show is dedicated to chatting about all the latest things we are addicted to, the things we are digging and what we are into right now! Sound exciting? We hope so! Luckily for all of you, most of these of things are all things that you can buy, so you can use this as a fantasy shopping list if you so please, no one is stopping you!
So basically, in this episode we are just going to chat stuff today; stuff that helps you get one step closer to your own personal success. Take your cues from us! We have scoured our lives to find what is making them better and bring them to you. We are talking the last six or so months in gadgets, ideas, aids and plans. And believe us, there is no shortage of it! So without further ado, let's get to the list!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey, everyone! Welcome to another episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast. Today's show is dedicated to chatting about all the latest things we are addicted to, the things we are digging and what we are into right now! Sound exciting? We hope so! Luckily for all of you, most of these of things are all things that you can buy, so you can use this as a fantasy shopping list if you so please, no one is stopping you!</p><p>So basically, in this episode we are just going to chat stuff today; stuff that helps you get one step closer to your own personal success. Take your cues from us! We have scoured our lives to find what is making them better and bring them to you. We are talking the last six or so months in gadgets, ideas, aids and plans. And believe us, there is no shortage of it! So without further ado, let's get to the list!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2887</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2f54262d06a842fd8a23c196a3f16b93]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6636177847.mp3?updated=1656359158" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>334: Boss Talk: Did You Have Any Fears When You First Started Your Business?</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/boss-talk-did-you-have-any-fears-when-you-first-started-your-business</link>
      <description>We’re pumped to do another Boss Talk episode today! Our question for today is, “Did you have any fears when you first started your business?” Before we jump into this though, it’s worth mentioning that Emylee has a habit of conveniently forgetting all the negative memories of an experience, looking back at them with rose-colored spectacles! Nonetheless, we’re talking about fears and what it was that drove our decisions in those early days of starting our own businesses. 
There were many factors that played a role in those decisions, including long-distance relationships and being desperate to move closer to our families. In this episode we share some of our fresh-out-of-college experiences trying to navigate new phases in life and trying to figure out what our next steps would be. We also chat about confidence and what motivated us to start our own businesses and the many considerations involved, so join us to find out more about our early days as startup entrepreneurs! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 04 Jun 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Boss Talk: Did You Have Any Fears When You First Started Your Business?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>334</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ff4b82a0-ae9a-11ec-91b1-abfc604912d0/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’re talking about fears and what it was that drove our decisions in those early days of starting our own businesses. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’re pumped to do another Boss Talk episode today! Our question for today is, “Did you have any fears when you first started your business?” Before we jump into this though, it’s worth mentioning that Emylee has a habit of conveniently forgetting all the negative memories of an experience, looking back at them with rose-colored spectacles! Nonetheless, we’re talking about fears and what it was that drove our decisions in those early days of starting our own businesses. 
There were many factors that played a role in those decisions, including long-distance relationships and being desperate to move closer to our families. In this episode we share some of our fresh-out-of-college experiences trying to navigate new phases in life and trying to figure out what our next steps would be. We also chat about confidence and what motivated us to start our own businesses and the many considerations involved, so join us to find out more about our early days as startup entrepreneurs! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’re pumped to do another Boss Talk episode today! Our question for today is, “Did you have any fears when you first started your business?” Before we jump into this though, it’s worth mentioning that Emylee has a habit of conveniently forgetting all the negative memories of an experience, looking back at them with rose-colored spectacles! Nonetheless, we’re talking about fears and what it was that drove our decisions in those early days of starting our own businesses. </p><p>There were many factors that played a role in those decisions, including long-distance relationships and being desperate to move closer to our families. In this episode we share some of our fresh-out-of-college experiences trying to navigate new phases in life and trying to figure out what our next steps would be. We also chat about confidence and what motivated us to start our own businesses and the many considerations involved, so join us to find out more about our early days as startup entrepreneurs! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1954</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6201827644a5497784503ab1e553d1f7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2340114291.mp3?updated=1656359059" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>333: Many Businesses You Recognize Today Started with Services</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/many-businesses-you-recognize-today-started-with-services</link>
      <description>Here at Boss Project we remember being young in the game; it was not that long ago! It is easy to look around and feel frustrated at everyone else's success, the success you are so badly lusting after. We usually try and figure out what our heroes are doing and how we can mimic it to get to where they are. Something that flipped this whole dynamic for us was the idea that you should never be comparing your beginnings to someone else's middle. This sentence stuck with us for a long time and helped us to take down our guard and look backwards to where other people started instead of where they are now. 
Try this with us; think about a popular business or business person that you admire, one that makes you think, 'Damn! I want a piece of that!' If you want a business like theirs or something similar, the chances is are you keep them in mind pretty often. Now believe us when we tell you that almost all of them started with services! That's why we have launched our new program this week! It is called Start with Services and it is the bomb! We know that for most of you, the biggest hurdle is not having nothing to sell or no great ideas, but rather that you need more leads and buyers. We teach the exact methods for these things. We want you to be able to go to your inbox and find new and interesting leads there every morning! Wouldn't that be great? So we made this program just for you to get there. Let's start this journey together!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 30 May 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Many Businesses You Recognize Today Started with Services</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>333</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/fff7e388-ae9a-11ec-91b1-2b33034d78bb/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>It is easy to look around and feel frustrated at everyone else's success, the success you are so badly lusting after. We usually try and figure out what our heroes are doing and how we can mimic it to get to where they are. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Here at Boss Project we remember being young in the game; it was not that long ago! It is easy to look around and feel frustrated at everyone else's success, the success you are so badly lusting after. We usually try and figure out what our heroes are doing and how we can mimic it to get to where they are. Something that flipped this whole dynamic for us was the idea that you should never be comparing your beginnings to someone else's middle. This sentence stuck with us for a long time and helped us to take down our guard and look backwards to where other people started instead of where they are now. 
Try this with us; think about a popular business or business person that you admire, one that makes you think, 'Damn! I want a piece of that!' If you want a business like theirs or something similar, the chances is are you keep them in mind pretty often. Now believe us when we tell you that almost all of them started with services! That's why we have launched our new program this week! It is called Start with Services and it is the bomb! We know that for most of you, the biggest hurdle is not having nothing to sell or no great ideas, but rather that you need more leads and buyers. We teach the exact methods for these things. We want you to be able to go to your inbox and find new and interesting leads there every morning! Wouldn't that be great? So we made this program just for you to get there. Let's start this journey together!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Here at Boss Project we remember being young in the game; it was not that long ago! It is easy to look around and feel frustrated at everyone else's success, the success you are so badly lusting after. We usually try and figure out what our heroes are doing and how we can mimic it to get to where they are. Something that flipped this whole dynamic for us was the idea that you should never be comparing your beginnings to someone else's middle. This sentence stuck with us for a long time and helped us to take down our guard and look backwards to where other people started instead of where they are now. </p><p>Try this with us; think about a popular business or business person that you admire, one that makes you think, 'Damn! I want a piece of that!' If you want a business like theirs or something similar, the chances is are you keep them in mind pretty often. Now believe us when we tell you that almost all of them started with services! That's why we have launched our new program this week! It is called Start with Services and it is the bomb! We know that for most of you, the biggest hurdle is not having nothing to sell or no great ideas, but rather that you need more leads and buyers. We teach the exact methods for these things. We want you to be able to go to your inbox and find new and interesting leads there every morning! Wouldn't that be great? So we made this program just for you to get there. Let's start this journey together!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1648</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0f8df133cea04edf8ba3506ed9d8196b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8661758370.mp3?updated=1656359001" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>332: Introducing Start with Services - A Course Guaranteed to Get You More Leads</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/introducing-start-with-services-a-course-guaranteed-to-get-you-more-leads</link>
      <description>Hey everybody and welcome to a really, really epic episode! We are so excited to share some amazing stuff with all of you today, we can barely control ourselves! Okay, so we have a brand new program that we are launching and it is probably the best thing that has ever existed, anywhere, at any time. It is called the Start with Services Program and we are going to be digging into all its great benefits and telling you exactly why you should be signing up yesterday. We do not say this lightly, you could just go straight over the website and sign up immediately, it's that good! So if you are interested in getting booked out in your business, which you obviously are, look no further!
The thing that we have noticed is that most of you have amazing services, that is definitely not the problem. You have skills, ideas and all the rest in bucket loads. You know your craft and we would never claim to be able to teach you that side of things any better. We just want you to have more opportunities to share these gifts with more people and more clients. That's where the program comes in, it will guarantee and we mean guarantee, you more leads. In fact, you will most probably have more leads than you will know what to do with, so what are you waiting for?
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 28 May 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Introducing Start with Services - A Course Guaranteed to Get You More Leads</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>332</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/00839298-ae9b-11ec-91b1-db5d9cbb92ba/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you are interested in getting booked out in your business, which you obviously are, look no further!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey everybody and welcome to a really, really epic episode! We are so excited to share some amazing stuff with all of you today, we can barely control ourselves! Okay, so we have a brand new program that we are launching and it is probably the best thing that has ever existed, anywhere, at any time. It is called the Start with Services Program and we are going to be digging into all its great benefits and telling you exactly why you should be signing up yesterday. We do not say this lightly, you could just go straight over the website and sign up immediately, it's that good! So if you are interested in getting booked out in your business, which you obviously are, look no further!
The thing that we have noticed is that most of you have amazing services, that is definitely not the problem. You have skills, ideas and all the rest in bucket loads. You know your craft and we would never claim to be able to teach you that side of things any better. We just want you to have more opportunities to share these gifts with more people and more clients. That's where the program comes in, it will guarantee and we mean guarantee, you more leads. In fact, you will most probably have more leads than you will know what to do with, so what are you waiting for?
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey everybody and welcome to a really, really epic episode! We are so excited to share some amazing stuff with all of you today, we can barely control ourselves! Okay, so we have a brand new program that we are launching and it is probably the best thing that has ever existed, anywhere, at any time. It is called the Start with Services Program and we are going to be digging into all its great benefits and telling you exactly why you should be signing up yesterday. We do not say this lightly, you could just go straight over the website and sign up immediately, it's that good! So if you are interested in getting booked out in your business, which you obviously are, look no further!</p><p>The thing that we have noticed is that most of you have amazing services, that is definitely not the problem. You have skills, ideas and all the rest in bucket loads. You know your craft and we would never claim to be able to teach you that side of things any better. We just want you to have more opportunities to share these gifts with more people and more clients. That's where the program comes in, it will guarantee and we mean <em>guarantee</em>, you more leads. In fact, you will most probably have more leads than you will know what to do with, so what are you waiting for?</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1934</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e397b53f425f47599d1135ee0c9bffd5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4501251930.mp3?updated=1656358937" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>331: The 3 Biggest Mistakes You Are Making in Your Service Based Business Right Now</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-3-biggest-mistakes-you-are-making-in-your-service-based-business-right-now</link>
      <description>Last time we shared a lot about our personal journey and the mishaps we had. Everybody makes mistakes, but we hope to learn as we go. So today we’re talking about the things that you might be getting wrong in trying to scale your service based business. Regardless of where you are in the process, these mistakes can be made at any and every level. So the episode today is going to involve a conversation that no one else is really talking about. You might have incorporated some of the most popular strategies with the hope of landing more clients but have discovered that they are ineffective. 
Trust us when we say we’ve tried and tested every trick in the book! Sometimes the problem is that we are aligning the wrong goal with the strategy. Other times we try something just because everyone else is doing it and it seems to be appropriate for the service we offer. We are bombarded with information about how we should run our businesses, and sometimes this just clouds our judgment and overcomplicates everything. Get ready to find out how to fix these bugs with some practical examples from our own experience, so be sure to tune in for this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 23 May 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The 3 Biggest Mistakes You Are Making in Your Service Based Business Right Now</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>331</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/0114e0ae-ae9b-11ec-91b1-f360ef1d704d/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we’re talking about the things that you might be getting wrong in trying to scale your service based business. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Last time we shared a lot about our personal journey and the mishaps we had. Everybody makes mistakes, but we hope to learn as we go. So today we’re talking about the things that you might be getting wrong in trying to scale your service based business. Regardless of where you are in the process, these mistakes can be made at any and every level. So the episode today is going to involve a conversation that no one else is really talking about. You might have incorporated some of the most popular strategies with the hope of landing more clients but have discovered that they are ineffective. 
Trust us when we say we’ve tried and tested every trick in the book! Sometimes the problem is that we are aligning the wrong goal with the strategy. Other times we try something just because everyone else is doing it and it seems to be appropriate for the service we offer. We are bombarded with information about how we should run our businesses, and sometimes this just clouds our judgment and overcomplicates everything. Get ready to find out how to fix these bugs with some practical examples from our own experience, so be sure to tune in for this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Last time we shared a lot about our personal journey and the mishaps we had. Everybody makes mistakes, but we hope to learn as we go. So today we’re talking about the things that you might be getting wrong in trying to scale your service based business. Regardless of where you are in the process, these mistakes can be made at any and every level. So the episode today is going to involve a conversation that no one else is really talking about. You might have incorporated some of the most popular strategies with the hope of landing more clients but have discovered that they are ineffective. </p><p>Trust us when we say we’ve tried and tested every trick in the book! Sometimes the problem is that we are aligning the wrong goal with the strategy. Other times we try something just because everyone else is doing it and it seems to be appropriate for the service we offer. We are bombarded with information about how we should run our businesses, and sometimes this just clouds our judgment and overcomplicates everything. Get ready to find out how to fix these bugs with some practical examples from our own experience, so be sure to tune in for this episode!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2069</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a92b0c4ef70442ac8e70cf362e6fe2fd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3897076934.mp3?updated=1656358877" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>330: Lessons from Getting Laid Off Twice and a Failed Cupcakery</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/lessons-from-getting-laid-off-twice-and-a-failed-cupcakery</link>
      <description>Welcome back to the show everyone, today we are talking about the lessons we have learned in the failed businesses from the past and giving you the scoop and how much you should lean into your dreams. We start businesses for a number of reasons, maybe you were laid off, want your own identity back, can't find another job, hate your current job, whatever it is, it is valid! So when we start something we usually tell ourselves a story of why we are starting it, we might want to be our own boss, make more money or any other of a plethora of reasons. The problem is that our strategies often do not match these initial motivations and we can find ourselves in our 'dream job', in a nightmare arrangement!
In our experience, this is the number one cause of burnout and panic attacks. If you do not allow yourself the space and grace to live the life you wanted when you set out on this journey, you might find yourself hating your biz more than any other thing you have done. Why would you want that? Some of us make big sacrifices in the beginning, telling ourselves that we will get to where we need to be one day and that this discomfort is only temporary. This usually lasts a long time and the hole only gets deeper, so do not dig yourself into it in the beginning! Why not guarantee your business and lifestyle of your dreams from the start? Take control and make the life you want, you do not need anyone's permission for that!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 21 May 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Lessons from Getting Laid Off Twice and a Failed Cupcakery</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>330</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/01a38eb2-ae9b-11ec-91b1-e39de1d4e81b/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are talking about the lessons we have learned in the failed businesses from the past and giving you the scoop and how much you should lean into your dreams. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to the show everyone, today we are talking about the lessons we have learned in the failed businesses from the past and giving you the scoop and how much you should lean into your dreams. We start businesses for a number of reasons, maybe you were laid off, want your own identity back, can't find another job, hate your current job, whatever it is, it is valid! So when we start something we usually tell ourselves a story of why we are starting it, we might want to be our own boss, make more money or any other of a plethora of reasons. The problem is that our strategies often do not match these initial motivations and we can find ourselves in our 'dream job', in a nightmare arrangement!
In our experience, this is the number one cause of burnout and panic attacks. If you do not allow yourself the space and grace to live the life you wanted when you set out on this journey, you might find yourself hating your biz more than any other thing you have done. Why would you want that? Some of us make big sacrifices in the beginning, telling ourselves that we will get to where we need to be one day and that this discomfort is only temporary. This usually lasts a long time and the hole only gets deeper, so do not dig yourself into it in the beginning! Why not guarantee your business and lifestyle of your dreams from the start? Take control and make the life you want, you do not need anyone's permission for that!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to the show everyone, today we are talking about the lessons we have learned in the failed businesses from the past and giving you the scoop and how much you should lean into your dreams. We start businesses for a number of reasons, maybe you were laid off, want your own identity back, can't find another job, hate your current job, whatever it is, it is valid! So when we start something we usually tell ourselves a story of why we are starting it, we might want to be our own boss, make more money or any other of a plethora of reasons. The problem is that our strategies often do not match these initial motivations and we can find ourselves in our 'dream job', in a nightmare arrangement!</p><p>In our experience, this is the number one cause of burnout and panic attacks. If you do not allow yourself the space and grace to live the life you wanted when you set out on this journey, you might find yourself hating your biz more than any other thing you have done. Why would you want that? Some of us make big sacrifices in the beginning, telling ourselves that we will get to where we need to be one day and that this discomfort is only temporary. This usually lasts a long time and the hole only gets deeper, so do not dig yourself into it in the beginning! Why not guarantee your business and lifestyle of your dreams from the start? Take control and make the life you want, you do not need anyone's permission for that!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2068</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2613db2a527f45ba897978e2b2f9576a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9593934978.mp3?updated=1656352222" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>329: Grow Your Business on Pinterest using Tailwind with Melissa Megginson</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/grow-your-business-on-pinterest-using-tailwind-with-melissa-megginson</link>
      <description>Today on the show we welcome Melissa Megginson! She is the Community Manager and resident Cat Lady at Tailwind, a company that is dedicated to helping brands with their visual and Pinterest aspirations. Tailwind can really help you and your biz conquer Pinterest in a way you might never have thought was possible. We really love Melissa and the work she does, Tailwind has helped us out a lot over the years! They offer organic and free ways for you to get more engagement, traffic, and customers on the platform and that is exactly what we are going to be talking to Melissa about today! She will also be filling us in on what is new and exciting on Pinterest and what we might expect for the future.
We have pretty much loved Pinterest since the beginning and were definitely part of the 'Pinterest wedding' generation! You know what we mean! Over time we have watched it evolve and change, thankfully not as much as some other social platforms out there but there has been some definite development and growth since we started using it. We began using Pinterest for business pretty early on in our company history and definitely found that Tailwind helped tremendously with our efforts, so let's hear what Melissa has to say!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 May 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Grow Your Business on Pinterest using Tailwind with Melissa Megginson</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>329</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/02307412-ae9b-11ec-91b1-bf1f04d63b1a/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Melissa Megginson is the Community Manager and resident Cat Lady at Tailwind, a company that is dedicated to helping brands with their visual and Pinterest aspirations. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we welcome Melissa Megginson! She is the Community Manager and resident Cat Lady at Tailwind, a company that is dedicated to helping brands with their visual and Pinterest aspirations. Tailwind can really help you and your biz conquer Pinterest in a way you might never have thought was possible. We really love Melissa and the work she does, Tailwind has helped us out a lot over the years! They offer organic and free ways for you to get more engagement, traffic, and customers on the platform and that is exactly what we are going to be talking to Melissa about today! She will also be filling us in on what is new and exciting on Pinterest and what we might expect for the future.
We have pretty much loved Pinterest since the beginning and were definitely part of the 'Pinterest wedding' generation! You know what we mean! Over time we have watched it evolve and change, thankfully not as much as some other social platforms out there but there has been some definite development and growth since we started using it. We began using Pinterest for business pretty early on in our company history and definitely found that Tailwind helped tremendously with our efforts, so let's hear what Melissa has to say!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we welcome Melissa Megginson! She is the Community Manager and resident Cat Lady at Tailwind, a company that is dedicated to helping brands with their visual and Pinterest aspirations. Tailwind can really help you and your biz conquer Pinterest in a way you might never have thought was possible. We really love Melissa and the work she does, Tailwind has helped us out a lot over the years! They offer organic and free ways for you to get more engagement, traffic, and customers on the platform and that is exactly what we are going to be talking to Melissa about today! She will also be filling us in on what is new and exciting on Pinterest and what we might expect for the future.</p><p>We have pretty much loved Pinterest since the beginning and were definitely part of the 'Pinterest wedding' generation! You know what we mean! Over time we have watched it evolve and change, thankfully not as much as some other social platforms out there but there has been some definite development and growth since we started using it. We began using Pinterest for business pretty early on in our company history and definitely found that Tailwind helped tremendously with our efforts, so let's hear what Melissa has to say!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2048</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d96fa54603f6489082b1982ccd44f0db]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3776841282.mp3?updated=1656352149" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>328: Why We Started Another Facebook Group</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-we-started-another-facebook-group</link>
      <description>We did this kind of crazy thing and started up yet another Facebook group, while everyone else is shutting them down left and right! What we’re talking about today is the thought process behind it, who the group is for and how you can get your booty inside. This group is specifically designed for service-based entrepreneurs who deliver a creative tangible product, so designers, photographers – listen up! You would have to apply first, but don’t be put off, this is just to make sure that only the most relevant peeps have access, so simply head over to bossproject.com/booked. 
In this episode, we let you in on where we got this idea from and tell you exactly what we are aiming to achieve with this new platform. It is about our business, but it is just as much about helping you and other creative entrepreneurs grow and get the most relevant, helpful input you can get. Be sure to join us for this episode of Strategy Hour to get all the details!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 May 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why We Started Another Facebook Group</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>328</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/02dcd2c0-ae9b-11ec-91b1-2f41576856e2/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We did this kind of crazy thing and started up yet another Facebook group, while everyone else is shutting them down left and right! What we’re talking about today is the thought process behind it, who the group is for and how you can get your booty...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We did this kind of crazy thing and started up yet another Facebook group, while everyone else is shutting them down left and right! What we’re talking about today is the thought process behind it, who the group is for and how you can get your booty inside. This group is specifically designed for service-based entrepreneurs who deliver a creative tangible product, so designers, photographers – listen up! You would have to apply first, but don’t be put off, this is just to make sure that only the most relevant peeps have access, so simply head over to bossproject.com/booked. 
In this episode, we let you in on where we got this idea from and tell you exactly what we are aiming to achieve with this new platform. It is about our business, but it is just as much about helping you and other creative entrepreneurs grow and get the most relevant, helpful input you can get. Be sure to join us for this episode of Strategy Hour to get all the details!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We did this kind of crazy thing and started up yet another Facebook group, while everyone else is shutting them down left and right! What we’re talking about today is the thought process behind it, who the group is for and how you can get your booty inside. This group is specifically designed for service-based entrepreneurs who deliver a creative tangible product, so designers, photographers – listen up! You would have to apply first, but don’t be put off, this is just to make sure that only the most relevant peeps have access, so simply head over to bossproject.com/booked. </p><p>In this episode, we let you in on where we got this idea from and tell you exactly what we are aiming to achieve with this new platform. It is about our business, but it is just as much about helping you and other creative entrepreneurs grow and get the most relevant, helpful input you can get. Be sure to join us for this episode of Strategy Hour to get all the details!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2143</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d9378dc8529a43628faa33bd04ecede5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2710157581.mp3?updated=1656352099" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>327: How to Get Your Website on the 1st Page of Google with Melissa McGraw</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-get-your-website-on-the-1st-page-of-google-with-melissa-mcgraw</link>
      <description>Today on The Strategy Hour we are joined by the amazing, the wonderful, the gifted, Melissa McGraw! Melissa is the founder of The Creative Potential, an agency dedicated to helping online business owners increase their traffic and revenue through improved SEO. She and the company have aided countless brands to grow their audience by millions and applying her strategies can multiply your organic search results tenfold in just a few months! With Melissa's help, we are going to be breaking down SEO in the most simple of ways, not getting too nerdy but also not skimping on great, actionable plans and ideas. We want to get you ranked on Google ASAP! Get your notebook ready so we can start getting more traffic and customers and have that reflect in your bank account!
It's been a while since we have talked about SEO and just as a reminder, it is very important for all, and we mean all, businesses! If we are honest, SEO is still a foreign language for some of us, while some of us have kind of got the hang of it. Our goal today is to get your site search engine friendly and high up in the rankings! We will be going from the simplest questions about what SEO is and how it functions, how to utilize it for your biz and even touching on some of the higher end stuff that will get you to the top of the first page! These strategies are super accomplishable but it is also worth noting that you are able to hire someone like Melissa to help you out with this task, get an expert to do the work for you, so there is that option too! Now, let's get you found online!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 09 May 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Get Your Website on the 1st Page of Google with Melissa McGraw</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>327</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/048f4706-ae9b-11ec-91b1-1f686b65064d/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>With Melissa's help, we are going to be breaking down SEO in the most simple of ways, not getting too nerdy but also not skimping on great, actionable plans and ideas. We want to get you ranked on Google ASAP! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on The Strategy Hour we are joined by the amazing, the wonderful, the gifted, Melissa McGraw! Melissa is the founder of The Creative Potential, an agency dedicated to helping online business owners increase their traffic and revenue through improved SEO. She and the company have aided countless brands to grow their audience by millions and applying her strategies can multiply your organic search results tenfold in just a few months! With Melissa's help, we are going to be breaking down SEO in the most simple of ways, not getting too nerdy but also not skimping on great, actionable plans and ideas. We want to get you ranked on Google ASAP! Get your notebook ready so we can start getting more traffic and customers and have that reflect in your bank account!
It's been a while since we have talked about SEO and just as a reminder, it is very important for all, and we mean all, businesses! If we are honest, SEO is still a foreign language for some of us, while some of us have kind of got the hang of it. Our goal today is to get your site search engine friendly and high up in the rankings! We will be going from the simplest questions about what SEO is and how it functions, how to utilize it for your biz and even touching on some of the higher end stuff that will get you to the top of the first page! These strategies are super accomplishable but it is also worth noting that you are able to hire someone like Melissa to help you out with this task, get an expert to do the work for you, so there is that option too! Now, let's get you found online!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on The Strategy Hour we are joined by the amazing, the wonderful, the gifted, Melissa McGraw! Melissa is the founder of The Creative Potential, an agency dedicated to helping online business owners increase their traffic and revenue through improved SEO. She and the company have aided countless brands to grow their audience by millions and applying her strategies can multiply your organic search results tenfold in just a few months! With Melissa's help, we are going to be breaking down SEO in the most simple of ways, not getting too nerdy but also not skimping on great, actionable plans and ideas. We want to get you ranked on Google ASAP! Get your notebook ready so we can start getting more traffic and customers and have that reflect in your bank account!</p><p>It's been a while since we have talked about SEO and just as a reminder, it is very important for all, and we mean all, businesses! If we are honest, SEO is still a foreign language for some of us, while some of us have kind of got the hang of it. Our goal today is to get your site search engine friendly and high up in the rankings! We will be going from the simplest questions about what SEO is and how it functions, how to utilize it for your biz and even touching on some of the higher end stuff that will get you to the top of the first page! These strategies are super accomplishable but it is also worth noting that you are able to hire someone like Melissa to help you out with this task, get an expert to do the work for you, so there is that option too! Now, let's get you found online!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2170</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[73a0ddec5913471fad7956271fce87d9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9342770230.mp3?updated=1656352058" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>326: Crafting an Experience Your Clients Can't Stop Talking About</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/crafting-an-experience-your-clients-cant-stop-talking-about</link>
      <description>Gift giving might not be your love language, but you should pick out any opportunity to dazzle your client with something special! Sometimes the biggest gift you can give is communication: being 100% clear about where you are in the process, at all times, cause most clients just want to see results and that they’re getting the best quality. When we land new clients, we often quickly forget about them when we go back into our little cubby holes to dig into the job they’ve given us – and perhaps we don’t even see them again. We need to stop this weird behavior! There is so much to gain from staying in contact when we get paid or once we have completed the job. What can we do so that that they don’t forget us, so that we make a lasting impression?
There are three main parts to any relationship with a client: the beginning, middle, and end. It’s important to remember that your client can choose to get out at any stage of this relationship, especially if they feel like you’re not holding their hand throughout. It must have happened to all of us: you land the client, get going with the work, but then you get busy with other clients and trying to build your business and you end up ghosting them. So how do you prevent this from happening? Be sure to join us for this episode to find out how to absolutely optimize your client experience from beginning to end!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 07 May 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Crafting an Experience Your Clients Can't Stop Talking About</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>326</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/05228ac0-ae9b-11ec-91b1-33d1e68f348d/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Gift giving might not be your love language, but you should pick out any opportunity to dazzle your client with something special! Sometimes the biggest gift you can give is communication: being 100% clear about where you are in the process, at all...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Gift giving might not be your love language, but you should pick out any opportunity to dazzle your client with something special! Sometimes the biggest gift you can give is communication: being 100% clear about where you are in the process, at all times, cause most clients just want to see results and that they’re getting the best quality. When we land new clients, we often quickly forget about them when we go back into our little cubby holes to dig into the job they’ve given us – and perhaps we don’t even see them again. We need to stop this weird behavior! There is so much to gain from staying in contact when we get paid or once we have completed the job. What can we do so that that they don’t forget us, so that we make a lasting impression?
There are three main parts to any relationship with a client: the beginning, middle, and end. It’s important to remember that your client can choose to get out at any stage of this relationship, especially if they feel like you’re not holding their hand throughout. It must have happened to all of us: you land the client, get going with the work, but then you get busy with other clients and trying to build your business and you end up ghosting them. So how do you prevent this from happening? Be sure to join us for this episode to find out how to absolutely optimize your client experience from beginning to end!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Gift giving might not be your love language, but you should pick out any opportunity to dazzle your client with something special! Sometimes the biggest gift you can give is communication: being 100% clear about where you are in the process, at all times, cause most clients just want to see results and that they’re getting the best quality. When we land new clients, we often quickly forget about them when we go back into our little cubby holes to dig into the job they’ve given us – and perhaps we don’t even see them again. We need to stop this weird behavior! There is so much to gain from staying in contact when we get paid or once we have completed the job. What can we do so that that they don’t forget us, so that we make a lasting impression?</p><p>There are three main parts to any relationship with a client: the beginning, middle, and end. It’s important to remember that your client can choose to get out at any stage of this relationship, especially if they feel like you’re not holding their hand throughout. It must have happened to all of us: you land the client, get going with the work, but then you get busy with other clients and trying to build your business and you end up ghosting them. So how do you prevent this from happening? Be sure to join us for this episode to find out how to absolutely optimize your client experience from beginning to end!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1545</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ae35e15b5a1047f6b78bb2959502faf4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1426226274.mp3?updated=1656351996" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>325: How to Get Booked on More Podcasts with Jessica Rhodes and Margy Feldhuhn</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-get-booked-on-more-podcasts-with-jessica-rhodes-and-margy-feldhuhn</link>
      <description>We have yet another awesome duo on the show today! Jessica Rhodes and Margy Feldhuhn are equal co-owners of the company Interview Connections, the first and leading podcast booking agency. Jessica founded the business is 2013 and Margy joined just a couple of years later, and now they have a booming business, booking podcasts left, right and center. They are totally on fire, and today they’re sharing with us how we can DIY getting on podcasts, what sort of return on investment we can expect and how we can measure what we’re actually getting out of it. 
You’re going to walk away from today with tips on how to approach the conversation and build the relationships, show up for the interview prepared and how to make the most of it. So even though you guys are going to have many voices in your earballs today, it’s going to be so worth it! Many of you have asked the questions they are answering today, such as how effective podcasts really are for building brand awareness and how to go about doing it. We’re revealing all of this and more, so don’t miss out!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 02 May 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Get Booked on More Podcasts with Jessica Rhodes and Margy Feldhuhn</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>325</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/05b46616-ae9b-11ec-91b1-3f5dbff0679e/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Jessica Rhodes and Margy Feldhuhn are equal co-owners of the company Interview Connections, the first and leading podcast booking agency. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We have yet another awesome duo on the show today! Jessica Rhodes and Margy Feldhuhn are equal co-owners of the company Interview Connections, the first and leading podcast booking agency. Jessica founded the business is 2013 and Margy joined just a couple of years later, and now they have a booming business, booking podcasts left, right and center. They are totally on fire, and today they’re sharing with us how we can DIY getting on podcasts, what sort of return on investment we can expect and how we can measure what we’re actually getting out of it. 
You’re going to walk away from today with tips on how to approach the conversation and build the relationships, show up for the interview prepared and how to make the most of it. So even though you guys are going to have many voices in your earballs today, it’s going to be so worth it! Many of you have asked the questions they are answering today, such as how effective podcasts really are for building brand awareness and how to go about doing it. We’re revealing all of this and more, so don’t miss out!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We have yet another awesome duo on the show today! Jessica Rhodes and Margy Feldhuhn are equal co-owners of the company Interview Connections, the first and leading podcast booking agency. Jessica founded the business is 2013 and Margy joined just a couple of years later, and now they have a booming business, booking podcasts left, right and center. They are totally on fire, and today they’re sharing with us how we can DIY getting on podcasts, what sort of return on investment we can expect and how we can measure what we’re actually getting out of it. </p><p>You’re going to walk away from today with tips on how to approach the conversation and build the relationships, show up for the interview prepared and how to make the most of it. So even though you guys are going to have many voices in your earballs today, it’s going to be so worth it! Many of you have asked the questions they are answering today, such as how effective podcasts really are for building brand awareness and how to go about doing it. We’re revealing all of this and more, so don’t miss out!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2158</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8fa25a468c4a4b80859c0a93a4d72daf]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1108378219.mp3?updated=1656351925" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>324: How to Perfect Your Pitch without Icky Sales Conversations</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-perfect-your-pitch-without-icky-sales-conversations</link>
      <description>We remember our first good sales experiences so well! It can be one of the best feelings in the world and it does not have to have that slimy and sleazy feeling to it at all. Today we are talking about what we are actually doing and the process for having more efficient, successful sales meetings, that just feel better. No one wants to feel icky and coercive when they are pitching and the truth is you really do not have to! What you really need to learn how to do is to let people fall in love with your offer, so it is less about selling and more about showcasing your process. If you follow these simple pointers the actual sales pitch will be a home run, we promise!
We have spoken at length recently on the podcast about locating your ideal and appropriate clients and this episode is essentially what to do once you have found them. Bad experiences in this department can make you feel terrible so we are trying to steer as far clear from these as possible. You do not want to be word-vomiting your way through nervous, un-researched meetings. These can leave you feeling like a wreck and with no more money to your name! Let's rather get strategic and get selling! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 30 Apr 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Perfect Your Pitch without Icky Sales Conversations</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>324</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/06449146-ae9b-11ec-91b1-7bb6d400f463/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We remember our first good sales experiences so well! It can be one of the best feelings in the world and it does not have to have that slimy and sleazy feeling to it at all. Today we are talking about what we are actually doing and the process for...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We remember our first good sales experiences so well! It can be one of the best feelings in the world and it does not have to have that slimy and sleazy feeling to it at all. Today we are talking about what we are actually doing and the process for having more efficient, successful sales meetings, that just feel better. No one wants to feel icky and coercive when they are pitching and the truth is you really do not have to! What you really need to learn how to do is to let people fall in love with your offer, so it is less about selling and more about showcasing your process. If you follow these simple pointers the actual sales pitch will be a home run, we promise!
We have spoken at length recently on the podcast about locating your ideal and appropriate clients and this episode is essentially what to do once you have found them. Bad experiences in this department can make you feel terrible so we are trying to steer as far clear from these as possible. You do not want to be word-vomiting your way through nervous, un-researched meetings. These can leave you feeling like a wreck and with no more money to your name! Let's rather get strategic and get selling! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We remember our first good sales experiences so well! It can be one of the best feelings in the world and it does not have to have that slimy and sleazy feeling to it at all. Today we are talking about what we are actually doing and the process for having more efficient, successful sales meetings, that just feel better. No one wants to feel icky and coercive when they are pitching and the truth is you really do not have to! What you really need to learn how to do is to let people fall in love with your offer, so it is less about selling and more about showcasing your process. If you follow these simple pointers the actual sales pitch will be a home run, we promise!</p><p>We have spoken at length recently on the podcast about locating your ideal and appropriate clients and this episode is essentially what to do once you have found them. Bad experiences in this department can make you feel terrible so we are trying to steer as far clear from these as possible. You do not want to be word-vomiting your way through nervous, un-researched meetings. These can leave you feeling like a wreck and with no more money to your name! Let's rather get strategic and get selling! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1773</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[16c13e400abd4816a7b51e2c8217d628]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8152860063.mp3?updated=1656351869" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>323: Own Your Everyday and Show Up for What You Were Made to Do with Jordan Lee Dooley of Choice Publicity</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/own-your-everyday-and-show-up-for-what-you-were-made-to-do-with-jordan-lee-dooley-of-choice-publicity</link>
      <description>Looking for a fantastic opportunity to flourish in your personal and professional life? On the show today we have the amazing Jordan Lee Dooley with us! She’s a speaker, blogger, podcast host, entrepreneur and now an author who loves encouraging and advising women to live with more honesty, passion, and grace – basically all the good stuff! Jordan is going to give us some of the key insights from her new book Own Your Everyday that is going to help us be the best version of ourselves. 
But before you think it’s all pie in the sky ideas, she gives us the actual steps to doing that, from overcoming distractions and anxiety to cultivating a mindset where we’re no longer comparing ourselves to others. This is going to be a great episode for all of you who feel like you are going through a season of personal growth and for our sisters out there who might need a loving kick in the butt to get down to the business of becoming your best self. And let’s not mess around, we probably need all the help we can get, so tune in today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 25 Apr 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Own Your Everyday and Show Up for What You Were Made to Do with Jordan Lee Dooley of Choice Publicity</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>323</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/06d1c7e6-ae9b-11ec-91b1-83242a9818dc/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Looking for a fantastic opportunity to flourish in your personal and professional life? On the show today we have the amazing Jordan Lee Dooley with us! She’s a speaker, blogger, podcast host, entrepreneur and now an author who loves encouraging and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Looking for a fantastic opportunity to flourish in your personal and professional life? On the show today we have the amazing Jordan Lee Dooley with us! She’s a speaker, blogger, podcast host, entrepreneur and now an author who loves encouraging and advising women to live with more honesty, passion, and grace – basically all the good stuff! Jordan is going to give us some of the key insights from her new book Own Your Everyday that is going to help us be the best version of ourselves. 
But before you think it’s all pie in the sky ideas, she gives us the actual steps to doing that, from overcoming distractions and anxiety to cultivating a mindset where we’re no longer comparing ourselves to others. This is going to be a great episode for all of you who feel like you are going through a season of personal growth and for our sisters out there who might need a loving kick in the butt to get down to the business of becoming your best self. And let’s not mess around, we probably need all the help we can get, so tune in today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Looking for a fantastic opportunity to flourish in your personal and professional life? On the show today we have the amazing Jordan Lee Dooley with us! She’s a speaker, blogger, podcast host, entrepreneur and now an author who loves encouraging and advising women to live with more honesty, passion, and grace – basically all the good stuff! Jordan is going to give us some of the key insights from her new book <em>Own Your Everyday</em> that is going to help us be the best version of ourselves. </p><p>But before you think it’s all pie in the sky ideas, she gives us the actual steps to doing that, from overcoming distractions and anxiety to cultivating a mindset where we’re no longer comparing ourselves to others. This is going to be a great episode for all of you who feel like you are going through a season of personal growth and for our sisters out there who might need a loving kick in the butt to get down to the business of becoming your best self. And let’s not mess around, we probably need all the help we can get, so tune in today!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1865</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[43f23b2da9f94f5ba0879f071854c095]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5199247809.mp3?updated=1656351825" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>322: How to Beat Imposter Syndrome</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-beat-imposter-syndrome</link>
      <description>Today's episode is all about the required step that you need to take in order to successfully sell what you do. That's right we are giving you the tools to really beat your imposter syndrome and beat it well! For the last couple of weeks, we have been speaking a lot about where you clients are and how to find them, this is a big internal piece and it means getting over a big hairy monster! We also suffer and have suffered from this issue, so do not fear, this is the way to crack the code and move forward. We know you are doing this so no need to hide in the reeds! We see you convincing yourself that if your work gets better you will get more clients and that the reason you are not currently getting more clients is because of the quality of your work. It is easy to start thinking you should work for free or very cheaply and get into the churn of lowering your value so that one day the glory gates will miraculously open and you will have arrived. 
You know this is not the world we live in! It is not like your portfolio does not have any say in your client base but so many potential clients out there are less concerned with your portfolio than you. Customers are not in your field and do not have as discerning an eye as you do, they are more interested in the experience you are selling. So we are here to tell you to stop selling yourself purely on what you have already done and how good you think you are, not everyone knows good from bad as well as you do!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Apr 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Beat Imposter Syndrome</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>322</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/077140c8-ae9b-11ec-91b1-43f18d30aec3/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today's episode is all about the required step that you need to take in order to successfully sell what you do. That's right we are giving you the tools to really beat your imposter syndrome and beat it well! For the last couple of weeks, we have been...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today's episode is all about the required step that you need to take in order to successfully sell what you do. That's right we are giving you the tools to really beat your imposter syndrome and beat it well! For the last couple of weeks, we have been speaking a lot about where you clients are and how to find them, this is a big internal piece and it means getting over a big hairy monster! We also suffer and have suffered from this issue, so do not fear, this is the way to crack the code and move forward. We know you are doing this so no need to hide in the reeds! We see you convincing yourself that if your work gets better you will get more clients and that the reason you are not currently getting more clients is because of the quality of your work. It is easy to start thinking you should work for free or very cheaply and get into the churn of lowering your value so that one day the glory gates will miraculously open and you will have arrived. 
You know this is not the world we live in! It is not like your portfolio does not have any say in your client base but so many potential clients out there are less concerned with your portfolio than you. Customers are not in your field and do not have as discerning an eye as you do, they are more interested in the experience you are selling. So we are here to tell you to stop selling yourself purely on what you have already done and how good you think you are, not everyone knows good from bad as well as you do!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today's episode is all about the required step that you need to take in order to successfully sell what you do. That's right we are giving you the tools to really beat your imposter syndrome and beat it well! For the last couple of weeks, we have been speaking a lot about where you clients are and how to find them, this is a big internal piece and it means getting over a big hairy monster! We also suffer and have suffered from this issue, so do not fear, this is the way to crack the code and move forward. We know you are doing this so no need to hide in the reeds! We see you convincing yourself that if your work gets better you will get more clients and that the reason you are not currently getting more clients is because of the quality of your work. It is easy to start thinking you should work for free or very cheaply and get into the churn of lowering your value so that one day the glory gates will miraculously open and you will have arrived. </p><p>You know this is not the world we live in! It is not like your portfolio does not have any say in your client base but so many potential clients out there are less concerned with your portfolio than you. Customers are not in your field and do not have as discerning an eye as you do, they are more interested in the experience you are selling. So we are here to tell you to stop selling yourself purely on what you have already done and how good you think you are, not everyone knows good from bad as well as you do!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2054</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[fd7aaaff55964d00947dcd84efdd635b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7729543574.mp3?updated=1656351750" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>321: Creating Margin and Make More Money with Emily Benson</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-margin-and-make-more-money-with-emily-benson</link>
      <description>Our guest today, Emily Benson, is an expert in everything retail, working for companies like Abercrombie &amp; Fitch and Club Monaco. For those who aren’t aware, 80 percent of boutique owners go out of business within their first two years – most often because of a lack of education. Emily’s boutique training academy is here to help lower that percentage, offering both beginner and advanced coaching to people who want to grow their boutiques. But it’s not only super helpful to product-based businesses; her advice is applicable to service-based babes too, because business is business, right? 
On this episode we’re talking inventory, margins, increasing profits and generally making smart business decisions based on the results you are currently getting in your business. So whether you’re selling t-shirts or courses, it’s all about paying attention to your data, customers, and trends and we are going to dish out detailed strategies for exponential business growth. So buckle up, take down some notes and get ready to learn a whole bunch from the boutique master herself!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 18 Apr 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating Margin and Make More Money with Emily Benson</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>321</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/08053e0e-ae9b-11ec-91b1-db09b002b36d/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>On this episode we’re talking inventory, margins, increasing profits and generally making smart business decisions based on the results you are currently getting in your business. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Our guest today, Emily Benson, is an expert in everything retail, working for companies like Abercrombie &amp; Fitch and Club Monaco. For those who aren’t aware, 80 percent of boutique owners go out of business within their first two years – most often because of a lack of education. Emily’s boutique training academy is here to help lower that percentage, offering both beginner and advanced coaching to people who want to grow their boutiques. But it’s not only super helpful to product-based businesses; her advice is applicable to service-based babes too, because business is business, right? 
On this episode we’re talking inventory, margins, increasing profits and generally making smart business decisions based on the results you are currently getting in your business. So whether you’re selling t-shirts or courses, it’s all about paying attention to your data, customers, and trends and we are going to dish out detailed strategies for exponential business growth. So buckle up, take down some notes and get ready to learn a whole bunch from the boutique master herself!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Our guest today, Emily Benson, is an expert in everything retail, working for companies like Abercrombie &amp; Fitch and Club Monaco. For those who aren’t aware, 80 percent of boutique owners go out of business within their first two years – most often because of a lack of education. Emily’s boutique training academy is here to help lower that percentage, offering both beginner and advanced coaching to people who want to grow their boutiques. But it’s not only super helpful to product-based businesses; her advice is applicable to service-based babes too, because business is business, right? </p><p>On this episode we’re talking inventory, margins, increasing profits and generally making smart business decisions based on the results you are currently getting in your business. So whether you’re selling t-shirts or courses, it’s all about paying attention to your data, customers, and trends and we are going to dish out detailed strategies for exponential business growth. So buckle up, take down some notes and get ready to learn a whole bunch from the boutique master herself!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2500</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[40fc8d23f8fd4098a774d8a6bfa652a7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7769213628.mp3?updated=1656351671" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>320: Your Next Client Isn't Online So Stop Looking There for Her</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/your-next-client-isnt-online-so-stop-looking-there-for-her</link>
      <description>So we have been propagating some pretty scandalous ideas lately and they have got some of you thinking and moving! Today we are dropping the full knowledge bomb on all of you about the myth of online businesses. A lot of you seem to still be convinced that your next client or even all of your clients will be found online and to be honest this is just not true. If you run a service based business you need to rethink your model! Just to be clear this does not mean that your clients do not use the internet or are not on Facebook and Instagram, it just means that people find services and make connections in real life and through referrals, people! We need levels of trust and real life relationships will always trump online advertising and presence. 
This is the know, like, and trust principle. So think about human connection, your personality and those tactics that can work in these arenas. It's like as a community we have become confused. A lot of us have started small businesses trying to mimic huge online businesses rather than think about what will get us going in our own stream. This line should have been drawn more clearly a long time ago! These are growth strategies for people with already established client bases, not tactics to find new clients when you are starting out. If you follow this popular online strategy and social media presence rulebook, you will end up with no clients! This is true all over the world, so get your head straight and let's find you some clients!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 16 Apr 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Your Next Client Isn't Online So Stop Looking There for Her</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>320</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/08a91254-ae9b-11ec-91b1-936ba087f1d4/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>People find services and make connections in real life and through referrals, people! We need levels of trust and real life relationships will always trump online advertising and presence. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>So we have been propagating some pretty scandalous ideas lately and they have got some of you thinking and moving! Today we are dropping the full knowledge bomb on all of you about the myth of online businesses. A lot of you seem to still be convinced that your next client or even all of your clients will be found online and to be honest this is just not true. If you run a service based business you need to rethink your model! Just to be clear this does not mean that your clients do not use the internet or are not on Facebook and Instagram, it just means that people find services and make connections in real life and through referrals, people! We need levels of trust and real life relationships will always trump online advertising and presence. 
This is the know, like, and trust principle. So think about human connection, your personality and those tactics that can work in these arenas. It's like as a community we have become confused. A lot of us have started small businesses trying to mimic huge online businesses rather than think about what will get us going in our own stream. This line should have been drawn more clearly a long time ago! These are growth strategies for people with already established client bases, not tactics to find new clients when you are starting out. If you follow this popular online strategy and social media presence rulebook, you will end up with no clients! This is true all over the world, so get your head straight and let's find you some clients!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>So we have been propagating some pretty scandalous ideas lately and they have got some of you thinking and moving! Today we are dropping the full knowledge bomb on all of you about the myth of online businesses. A lot of you seem to still be convinced that your next client or even all of your clients will be found online and to be honest this is just not true. If you run a service based business you need to rethink your model! Just to be clear this does not mean that your clients do not use the internet or are not on Facebook and Instagram, it just means that people find services and make connections in real life and through referrals, people! We need levels of trust and real life relationships will always trump online advertising and presence. </p><p>This is the know, like, and trust principle. So think about human connection, your personality and those tactics that can work in these arenas. It's like as a community we have become confused. A lot of us have started small businesses trying to mimic huge online businesses rather than think about what will get us going in our own stream. This line should have been drawn more clearly a long time ago! These are growth strategies for people with already established client bases, not tactics to find new clients when you are starting out. If you follow this popular online strategy and social media presence rulebook, you will end up with no clients! This is true all over the world, so get your head straight and let's find you some clients!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2340</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[90a9e387eb2a4c2d912e77f9ad2f4eec]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9550810361.mp3?updated=1663446505" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>319: Learning to Focus So You Can Achieve More with Jonathan Cronstedt President of Kajabi</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/learning-to-focus-so-you-can-achieve-more-with-jonathan-cronstedt-president-of-kajabi</link>
      <description>Today is all about learning to focus and just doing the actual work! We often play work, procrastinating, doing the fun little things and walking circles around the actual tasks, and then we wonder why we are not succeeding or reaching our business goals. In this episode we are joined by Jonathan Cronstedt, the President of Kajabi, who tells us exactly what we need to hear about the actual requirements for positive business results. Kajabi is a majorly successful company in the digital world, serving online entrepreneurs and helping them to overcome all kinds of technology challenges. In their 7-year history, the company has had back to back showings on the Inc. 5000 and has helped its users sell over $400 million dollars of their products via the platform. This is bananas, right? 
We talk about marketing and the online space, using Facebook Lives to grow your brand and generate sales, and we get into identifying distractions versus opportunities and how to be more productive in general. Jonathan emphasizes the need for mastering one marketing area rather than trying to do a bit of everything, and why it is so important to see a strategy through. Jonathan has so many amazing stories that will resonate with you and that’ll help you in your business, so don’t miss out on this straight up awesome episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 11 Apr 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Learning to Focus So You Can Achieve More with Jonathan Cronstedt President of Kajabi</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>319</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/0936d9d6-ae9b-11ec-91b1-db888757cf46/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today is all about doing the actual work! We often play work, procrastinating, doing the fun little things and walking circles around the actual tasks, and then wonder why we aren't succeeding or reaching our business. goals.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today is all about learning to focus and just doing the actual work! We often play work, procrastinating, doing the fun little things and walking circles around the actual tasks, and then we wonder why we are not succeeding or reaching our business goals. In this episode we are joined by Jonathan Cronstedt, the President of Kajabi, who tells us exactly what we need to hear about the actual requirements for positive business results. Kajabi is a majorly successful company in the digital world, serving online entrepreneurs and helping them to overcome all kinds of technology challenges. In their 7-year history, the company has had back to back showings on the Inc. 5000 and has helped its users sell over $400 million dollars of their products via the platform. This is bananas, right? 
We talk about marketing and the online space, using Facebook Lives to grow your brand and generate sales, and we get into identifying distractions versus opportunities and how to be more productive in general. Jonathan emphasizes the need for mastering one marketing area rather than trying to do a bit of everything, and why it is so important to see a strategy through. Jonathan has so many amazing stories that will resonate with you and that’ll help you in your business, so don’t miss out on this straight up awesome episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today is all about learning to focus and just doing the actual work! We often play work, procrastinating, doing the fun little things and walking circles around the actual tasks, and then we wonder why we are not succeeding or reaching our business goals. In this episode we are joined by Jonathan Cronstedt, the President of Kajabi, who tells us exactly what we need to hear about the actual requirements for positive business results. Kajabi is a majorly successful company in the digital world, serving online entrepreneurs and helping them to overcome all kinds of technology challenges. In their 7-year history, the company has had back to back showings on the Inc. 5000 and has helped its users sell over $400 million dollars of their products via the platform. This is bananas, right? </p><p>We talk about marketing and the online space, using Facebook Lives to grow your brand and generate sales, and we get into identifying distractions versus opportunities and how to be more productive in general. Jonathan emphasizes the need for mastering one marketing area rather than trying to do a bit of everything, and why it is so important to see a strategy through. Jonathan has so many amazing stories that will resonate with you and that’ll help you in your business, so don’t miss out on this straight up awesome episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2303</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5811a0d7a49749739fc22327e06bf385]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1471053784.mp3?updated=1656093266" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>318: Why You Don't Need a Blog Website or Instagram to Get Clients</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-you-dont-need-a-blog-website-or-instagram-to-get-clients</link>
      <description>Hey everybody! Today on the show we are giving you a very important lesson, so listen up! We learned this lesson just the same, so the sooner we can get this through to you the better: content creation will not get you more clients. Yes, we said it. We used to blog five times a week sometimes, and saw almost zero increase in clients from it. In this episode we will be breaking down why exactly it just does not work as a strategy and what you should be doing instead. In fact, we are taking it as far as to tell you why you should stop building an online business altogether and instead focus on growing your local reputation, which can take you further, grow you faster and make you more money! This episode is perfect for service-based biz owners, so copywriters, photographers and designers, we are talking to you.
We have to admit that we do love content but if you think that it will land you new clients, you are sadly mistaken. New people will not just magically find you on social media or your blog and want to start paying you money out of nowhere. We hope you can see that this is a ridiculous idea. One trouble here is that we see our heroes creating great content and we want to mimic this, but we have to remind ourselves that they are rather serving an established customer base through that content rather than building one from scratch. The clients we are looking for out on the internet are usually waiting on our very own street, we just have to go out and get them!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 09 Apr 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why You Don't Need a Blog Website or Instagram to Get Clients</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>318</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/09c586f4-ae9b-11ec-91b1-f76dca78738e/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Content creation will not get you more clients. Yes, we said it. In this episode we will be breaking down why exactly it just does not work as a strategy and what you should be doing instead.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey everybody! Today on the show we are giving you a very important lesson, so listen up! We learned this lesson just the same, so the sooner we can get this through to you the better: content creation will not get you more clients. Yes, we said it. We used to blog five times a week sometimes, and saw almost zero increase in clients from it. In this episode we will be breaking down why exactly it just does not work as a strategy and what you should be doing instead. In fact, we are taking it as far as to tell you why you should stop building an online business altogether and instead focus on growing your local reputation, which can take you further, grow you faster and make you more money! This episode is perfect for service-based biz owners, so copywriters, photographers and designers, we are talking to you.
We have to admit that we do love content but if you think that it will land you new clients, you are sadly mistaken. New people will not just magically find you on social media or your blog and want to start paying you money out of nowhere. We hope you can see that this is a ridiculous idea. One trouble here is that we see our heroes creating great content and we want to mimic this, but we have to remind ourselves that they are rather serving an established customer base through that content rather than building one from scratch. The clients we are looking for out on the internet are usually waiting on our very own street, we just have to go out and get them!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey everybody! Today on the show we are giving you a very important lesson, so listen up! We learned this lesson just the same, so the sooner we can get this through to you the better: content creation will not get you more clients. Yes, we said it. We used to blog five times a week sometimes, and saw almost zero increase in clients from it. In this episode we will be breaking down why exactly it just does not work as a strategy and what you should be doing instead. In fact, we are taking it as far as to tell you why you should stop building an online business altogether and instead focus on growing your local reputation, which can take you further, grow you faster and make you more money! This episode is perfect for service-based biz owners, so copywriters, photographers and designers, we are talking to you.</p><p>We have to admit that we do love content but if you think that it will land you new clients, you are sadly mistaken. New people will not just magically find you on social media or your blog and want to start paying you money out of nowhere. We hope you can see that this is a ridiculous idea. One trouble here is that we see our heroes creating great content and we want to mimic this, but we have to remind ourselves that they are rather serving an established customer base through that content rather than building one from scratch. The clients we are looking for out on the internet are usually waiting on our very own street, we just have to go out and get them!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1742</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[907d1b60db3f4888887c7de7e8aeb4b1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7569579147.mp3?updated=1664467242" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>317: Tackling Pinterest for the Newbie with Kali Rogers</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/tackling-pinterest-for-the-newbie-with-kali-rogers</link>
      <description>Joining us today on the podcast is Kali Rogers, the Founder of Blush Online Life Coaching, a life coaching business aimed at female millennials. Kali is here to teach us more about the super do-able, fun and stress-free Pinterest strategies that have boosted their site traffic and sales and grown their clients and customers. The best of all? You don’t need a Pinterest marketing degree to implement them, you can start today! If you have a Pinterest account but have stopped using it for some reason, we hope this episode will inspire you to get back into it, or if you have been utilizing this potentially awesome tool, that you will get what you need to brush up your skills even more. 
In the beginning, Kali used Pinterest for personal reasons such as recipes and fashion inspo, until she decided to take a break. At first she didn’t see how Pinterest, a mostly visual medium, would be applicable to Blush, a service-based business. How would she promote a life coaching business through images? When she first started she didn’t have any entrepreneurial skills but realized that she needed to communicate to people that she and her team knew what they were talking about. She resorted to writing as a cheap, safe means of publicity, creating numerous articles for The Huffington Post, including “An Open Letter From Introverts To Everyone Else”, which went completely viral. Many people have a Pinterest account when they first get started in business, but then they get distracted along the line and stop using it on a regular basis. In this episode we are going to show you that, even though it’s an oldie, it’s still a real goodie. So be sure to join us for this awesome conversation!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 04 Apr 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Tackling Pinterest for the Newbie with Kali Rogers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>317</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/0a67decc-ae9b-11ec-91b1-63647e3afe6c/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Kali, the Founder of Blush Online Life Coaching, shares more about the super do-able, fun and stress-free Pinterest strategies that have boosted their site traffic and sales and grown their clients and customers.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Joining us today on the podcast is Kali Rogers, the Founder of Blush Online Life Coaching, a life coaching business aimed at female millennials. Kali is here to teach us more about the super do-able, fun and stress-free Pinterest strategies that have boosted their site traffic and sales and grown their clients and customers. The best of all? You don’t need a Pinterest marketing degree to implement them, you can start today! If you have a Pinterest account but have stopped using it for some reason, we hope this episode will inspire you to get back into it, or if you have been utilizing this potentially awesome tool, that you will get what you need to brush up your skills even more. 
In the beginning, Kali used Pinterest for personal reasons such as recipes and fashion inspo, until she decided to take a break. At first she didn’t see how Pinterest, a mostly visual medium, would be applicable to Blush, a service-based business. How would she promote a life coaching business through images? When she first started she didn’t have any entrepreneurial skills but realized that she needed to communicate to people that she and her team knew what they were talking about. She resorted to writing as a cheap, safe means of publicity, creating numerous articles for The Huffington Post, including “An Open Letter From Introverts To Everyone Else”, which went completely viral. Many people have a Pinterest account when they first get started in business, but then they get distracted along the line and stop using it on a regular basis. In this episode we are going to show you that, even though it’s an oldie, it’s still a real goodie. So be sure to join us for this awesome conversation!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Joining us today on the podcast is Kali Rogers, the Founder of Blush Online Life Coaching, a life coaching business aimed at female millennials. Kali is here to teach us more about the super do-able, fun and stress-free Pinterest strategies that have boosted their site traffic and sales and grown their clients and customers. The best of all? You don’t need a Pinterest marketing degree to implement them, you can start today! If you have a Pinterest account but have stopped using it for some reason, we hope this episode will inspire you to get back into it, or if you have been utilizing this potentially awesome tool, that you will get what you need to brush up your skills even more. </p><p>In the beginning, Kali used Pinterest for personal reasons such as recipes and fashion inspo, until she decided to take a break. At first she didn’t see how Pinterest, a mostly visual medium, would be applicable to Blush, a service-based business. How would she promote a life coaching business through images? When she first started she didn’t have any entrepreneurial skills but realized that she needed to communicate to people that she and her team knew what they were talking about. She resorted to writing as a cheap, safe means of publicity, creating numerous articles for The Huffington Post, including “An Open Letter From Introverts To Everyone Else”, which went completely viral. Many people have a Pinterest account when they first get started in business, but then they get distracted along the line and stop using it on a regular basis. In this episode we are going to show you that, even though it’s an oldie, it’s still a real goodie. So be sure to join us for this awesome conversation!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2371</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3c5777b830d849a78785fbc9287ea128]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6594804458.mp3?updated=1656093248" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>316: The Secret Double Whammy Referral Engine for Service Based Businesses</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-secret-double-whammy-referral-engine-for-service-based-businesses</link>
      <description>Ready for our drop-the-mic statement? Service-based peeps listen up: You already know your next client, and guess where she is not? Online. In this episode we are sharing with you the secret double whammy referral engine that service-based owners can use right now, today, to get booked out within thirty days. This exact method can be used to get a constant stream of referrals who pay quickly and who are a dream to serve.
Today we are unwrapping the secrets of a super effective referral engine for service-based businesses and we’re coming at it from two, no three, different angles, starting with that first important connection and going onto how existing clients can be leveraged to gain even more quality leads. But before you think you’ve heard it all before, we are not giving you the same old tips and tricks, we’re dishing out hot off the press information, things that very few people have heard of. If you have ever worried about where your next client is going to come from, grab a notebook and a yummy cup of something because this episode is going to knock your socks off!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 02 Apr 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Secret Double Whammy Referral Engine for Service Based Businesses</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>316</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/0af3fb0a-ae9b-11ec-91b1-f3431ff5014b/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Ready for our drop-the-mic statement? Service-based peeps listen up: You already know your next client, and guess where she is not? Online.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Ready for our drop-the-mic statement? Service-based peeps listen up: You already know your next client, and guess where she is not? Online. In this episode we are sharing with you the secret double whammy referral engine that service-based owners can use right now, today, to get booked out within thirty days. This exact method can be used to get a constant stream of referrals who pay quickly and who are a dream to serve.
Today we are unwrapping the secrets of a super effective referral engine for service-based businesses and we’re coming at it from two, no three, different angles, starting with that first important connection and going onto how existing clients can be leveraged to gain even more quality leads. But before you think you’ve heard it all before, we are not giving you the same old tips and tricks, we’re dishing out hot off the press information, things that very few people have heard of. If you have ever worried about where your next client is going to come from, grab a notebook and a yummy cup of something because this episode is going to knock your socks off!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ready for our drop-the-mic statement? Service-based peeps listen up: You already know your next client, and guess where she is not? Online. In this episode we are sharing with you the secret double whammy referral engine that service-based owners can use right now, today, to get booked out within thirty days. This exact method can be used to get a constant stream of referrals who pay quickly and who are a dream to serve.</p><p>Today we are unwrapping the secrets of a super effective referral engine for service-based businesses and we’re coming at it from two, no three, different angles, starting with that first important connection and going onto how existing clients can be leveraged to gain even more quality leads. But before you think you’ve heard it all before, we are not giving you the same old tips and tricks, we’re dishing out hot off the press information, things that very few people have heard of. If you have ever worried about where your next client is going to come from, grab a notebook and a yummy cup of something because this episode is going to knock your socks off!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1794</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d2065d13bfc546ea8607f02611e33ebf]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7526092387.mp3?updated=1663446440" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>315: Three Golden Rules for a More Profitable Business with Kathleen Cutler</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/three-golden-rules-for-a-more-profitable-business-with-kathleen-cutler</link>
      <description>Today on the show we are joined by the wonderful and inspiring Kathleen Cutler! Kathleen has worked behind the scenes on multiple million dollar online stores with her main area of focus being jewelers. She has coached over a hundred different jewelers to help them achieve their business goals and get their products selling online, but Kathleen’s expertise extends so much further than just jewelry! She wants to help everyone selling products or even services online to extend the experience of the customer and drive sales through the type connections that you would usually associate with a physical retail space. 
Along with all her incredible business skills, Kathleen is also an awesome speaker who will be joining us at our upcoming Product Powerhouse Summit! Make sure to go get your free ticket immediately! She will be one of many great speakers talking about the world of online product sales and marketing and getting your store busy and making that money! So without further ado, let’s get into today’s strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 28 Mar 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Three Golden Rules for a More Profitable Business with Kathleen Cutler</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>315</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/0b9b9874-ae9b-11ec-91b1-67154ca572bc/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Kathleen wants to help everyone selling products or even services online to extend the experience of the customer and drive sales through the type connections that you would usually associate with a physical retail space. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we are joined by the wonderful and inspiring Kathleen Cutler! Kathleen has worked behind the scenes on multiple million dollar online stores with her main area of focus being jewelers. She has coached over a hundred different jewelers to help them achieve their business goals and get their products selling online, but Kathleen’s expertise extends so much further than just jewelry! She wants to help everyone selling products or even services online to extend the experience of the customer and drive sales through the type connections that you would usually associate with a physical retail space. 
Along with all her incredible business skills, Kathleen is also an awesome speaker who will be joining us at our upcoming Product Powerhouse Summit! Make sure to go get your free ticket immediately! She will be one of many great speakers talking about the world of online product sales and marketing and getting your store busy and making that money! So without further ado, let’s get into today’s strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we are joined by the wonderful and inspiring Kathleen Cutler! Kathleen has worked behind the scenes on multiple million dollar online stores with her main area of focus being jewelers. She has coached over a hundred different jewelers to help them achieve their business goals and get their products selling online, but Kathleen’s expertise extends so much further than just jewelry! She wants to help everyone selling products or even services online to extend the experience of the customer and drive sales through the type connections that you would usually associate with a physical retail space. </p><p>Along with all her incredible business skills, Kathleen is also an awesome speaker who will be joining us at our upcoming Product Powerhouse Summit! Make sure to go get your free ticket immediately! She will be one of many great speakers talking about the world of online product sales and marketing and getting your store busy and making that money! So without further ado, let’s get into today’s strategy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1953</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5669ab9c21bd402480b4ac3135de2b7f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3036408799.mp3?updated=1656093094" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>314: Utilizing a Street Team and Affiliates to Explode Your Launch</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/utilizing-a-street-team-and-affiliate-to-explode-your-launch</link>
      <description>Word on the street is that you want to do an epic launch! On today’s podcast we’re talking about three things that led to an incredible launch: using affiliates, getting together a street team and of course having a valuable product that everyone wants. But what is a street team? We’re discussing the need for one of those, no matter how big or small your business is, dishing out advice on who you might want to include, the process of asking someone to be on your team and how to communicate effectively with them.
We then give you a breakdown of how we succeeded in pulling off our recent rebranding launch, sharing how we kept our followers and fans engaged with our communications, what we did to promote this change and our business at large. From our first-hand experience with launches, we advise you on using affiliates as an incredibly powerful tool to market your brand, giving you practical tips for recruiting key people who can really boost your business, even if you are only starting off. If you have a launch in the pipeline, thinking about it, or just want to learn a ton about making valuable connections in business, do not miss out on today’s Strategy Hour Podcast!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 26 Mar 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Utilizing a Street Team and Affiliates to Explode Your Launch</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>314</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/0c280bd8-ae9b-11ec-91b1-33622d4e3e9e/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Word on the street is that you want to do an epic launch! On today’s podcast we’re talking about three things that led to an incredible launch: using affiliates, getting together a street team and having a valuable product that everyone wants.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Word on the street is that you want to do an epic launch! On today’s podcast we’re talking about three things that led to an incredible launch: using affiliates, getting together a street team and of course having a valuable product that everyone wants. But what is a street team? We’re discussing the need for one of those, no matter how big or small your business is, dishing out advice on who you might want to include, the process of asking someone to be on your team and how to communicate effectively with them.
We then give you a breakdown of how we succeeded in pulling off our recent rebranding launch, sharing how we kept our followers and fans engaged with our communications, what we did to promote this change and our business at large. From our first-hand experience with launches, we advise you on using affiliates as an incredibly powerful tool to market your brand, giving you practical tips for recruiting key people who can really boost your business, even if you are only starting off. If you have a launch in the pipeline, thinking about it, or just want to learn a ton about making valuable connections in business, do not miss out on today’s Strategy Hour Podcast!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Word on the street is that you want to do an epic launch! On today’s podcast we’re talking about three things that led to an incredible launch: using affiliates, getting together a street team and of course having a valuable product that everyone wants. But what is a street team? We’re discussing the need for one of those, no matter how big or small your business is, dishing out advice on who you might want to include, the process of asking someone to be on your team and how to communicate effectively with them.</p><p>We then give you a breakdown of how we succeeded in pulling off our recent rebranding launch, sharing how we kept our followers and fans engaged with our communications, what we did to promote this change and our business at large. From our first-hand experience with launches, we advise you on using affiliates as an incredibly powerful tool to market your brand, giving you practical tips for recruiting key people who can really boost your business, even if you are only starting off. If you have a launch in the pipeline, thinking about it, or just want to learn a ton about making valuable connections in business, do not miss out on today’s Strategy Hour Podcast!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1749</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[bd54b9abe299473ab842067d02a32210]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7309536287.mp3?updated=1663446396" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>313: How to Listen to Your Audience So You Can Create Services That Sell with Sarah Peck</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-listen-to-your-audience-so-you-can-create-services-that-sell-with-sarah-peck</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we are joined by our wonderful friend and all-round badass, Sarah Peck. Sarah is the founder of Startup Pregnant, a New York City based company dedicated to documenting women’s leadership. She is a writer, yoga teacher and hosts Startup Pregnant’s weekly podcast too! Her goal is to amplify women’s voices and promote their business through her work and she definitely has one of our favorite brains in the game! We share a lot of her business philosophy and will be using this episode to geek out on some strategies for listening to your audience as a way to help grow your product or service.
This super under-utilized and somewhat simple strategy can help you and your biz so much! By paying closer attention to your audience, you can really improve what you offer and make the direct connection between those paying you and what you provide for them. Quite a straightforward equation, right? This is the second time Sarah is joining us on the Strategy Hour and if you haven’t heard her previous appearance go back and check it out immediately, it’s Episode 185! This episode’s topic was sparked by a conversation a few days prior where we were chatting to Sarah about business philosophies and implementation of these. We really believe in these ideas and they are so in line with our core values that we could not resist having her on to talk all about it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 21 Mar 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Listen to Your Audience So You Can Create Services That Sell with Sarah Peck</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>313</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/0cd26ea2-ae9b-11ec-91b1-4b27636a8636/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This super under-utilized and somewhat simple strategy can help you and your biz so much! By paying closer attention to your audience, you can really improve what you offer and make the direct connection between those paying you and what you provide for them. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we are joined by our wonderful friend and all-round badass, Sarah Peck. Sarah is the founder of Startup Pregnant, a New York City based company dedicated to documenting women’s leadership. She is a writer, yoga teacher and hosts Startup Pregnant’s weekly podcast too! Her goal is to amplify women’s voices and promote their business through her work and she definitely has one of our favorite brains in the game! We share a lot of her business philosophy and will be using this episode to geek out on some strategies for listening to your audience as a way to help grow your product or service.
This super under-utilized and somewhat simple strategy can help you and your biz so much! By paying closer attention to your audience, you can really improve what you offer and make the direct connection between those paying you and what you provide for them. Quite a straightforward equation, right? This is the second time Sarah is joining us on the Strategy Hour and if you haven’t heard her previous appearance go back and check it out immediately, it’s Episode 185! This episode’s topic was sparked by a conversation a few days prior where we were chatting to Sarah about business philosophies and implementation of these. We really believe in these ideas and they are so in line with our core values that we could not resist having her on to talk all about it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we are joined by our wonderful friend and all-round badass, Sarah Peck. Sarah is the founder of Startup Pregnant, a New York City based company dedicated to documenting women’s leadership. She is a writer, yoga teacher and hosts Startup Pregnant’s weekly podcast too! Her goal is to amplify women’s voices and promote their business through her work and she definitely has one of our favorite brains in the game! We share a lot of her business philosophy and will be using this episode to geek out on some strategies for listening to your audience as a way to help grow your product or service.</p><p>This super under-utilized and somewhat simple strategy can help you and your biz so much! By paying closer attention to your audience, you can really improve what you offer and make the direct connection between those paying you and what you provide for them. Quite a straightforward equation, right? This is the second time Sarah is joining us on the Strategy Hour and if you haven’t heard her previous appearance go back and check it out immediately, it’s Episode 185! This episode’s topic was sparked by a conversation a few days prior where we were chatting to Sarah about business philosophies and implementation of these. We really believe in these ideas and they are so in line with our core values that we could not resist having her on to talk all about it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2234</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[063fd62c2beb45c5a575e24435836721]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1124116672.mp3?updated=1656092952" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>312: The 9 Biggest Flops in Our Business Ever</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-9-biggest-flops-in-our-business-ever</link>
      <description>Today we are taking you through everything that we have messed up on! Products, launches, events, campaigns, everything! We have made a checklist of all the things we kind of wished we had done differently over the last few years, but at the same time we do need to say that for the most part, we think the mistakes were necessary and don’t believe in wanting to travel back in time to fix past problems. We all make choices as best we can at the time, so hypotheticals do not really exist in real, present tense life.
All that to say, we do not really regret any of these decisions but want to play this game where we can look back at things and see where we might have gone wrong. Also, it is important to remember that our experiences are not yours. Things that did not work for us, might be amazing for you and your business. We are not making blanket statements about all businesses, because most things work for somebody at some point in time. Most mistakes are more about wrong time and wrong personnel than anything else. So without further ado, let’s get into our flops!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 19 Mar 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The 9 Biggest Flops in Our Business Ever</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>312</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/0d7a1558-ae9b-11ec-91b1-b789e230e280/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are taking you through everything that we have messed up on! Products, launches, events, campaigns, everything! We have made a checklist of all the things we kind of wished we had done differently over the last few years.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are taking you through everything that we have messed up on! Products, launches, events, campaigns, everything! We have made a checklist of all the things we kind of wished we had done differently over the last few years, but at the same time we do need to say that for the most part, we think the mistakes were necessary and don’t believe in wanting to travel back in time to fix past problems. We all make choices as best we can at the time, so hypotheticals do not really exist in real, present tense life.
All that to say, we do not really regret any of these decisions but want to play this game where we can look back at things and see where we might have gone wrong. Also, it is important to remember that our experiences are not yours. Things that did not work for us, might be amazing for you and your business. We are not making blanket statements about all businesses, because most things work for somebody at some point in time. Most mistakes are more about wrong time and wrong personnel than anything else. So without further ado, let’s get into our flops!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are taking you through everything that we have messed up on! Products, launches, events, campaigns, everything! We have made a checklist of all the things we kind of wished we had done differently over the last few years, but at the same time we do need to say that for the most part, we think the mistakes were necessary and don’t believe in wanting to travel back in time to fix past problems. We all make choices as best we can at the time, so hypotheticals do not really exist in real, present tense life.</p><p>All that to say, we do not really regret any of these decisions but want to play this game where we can look back at things and see where we might have gone wrong. Also, it is important to remember that our experiences are not yours. Things that did not work for us, might be amazing for you and your business. We are not making blanket statements about all businesses, because most things work for somebody at some point in time. Most mistakes are more about wrong time and wrong personnel than anything else. So without further ado, let’s get into our flops!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2596</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cd7069b2bad44f61a115f5ce325f8e20]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7493378010.mp3?updated=1663446314" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>311: Why Creating Community is Crucial for Your Brand and Happiness with Jordan Ellis</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-creating-community-is-crucial-for-your-brand-and-happiness-with-jordan-ellis</link>
      <description>Today we are joined by our great friend, Jordan Ellis, from Jordanené Clothing and she is here to talk about the importance of building a community in the success and longevity of your business. Jordan is also speaking at our upcoming event, The Product Powerhouse Summit, which we know you are not going to want to miss! It is going to be incredible with over 25 speakers in 3 days. So go sign up right now, it is free! Today’s chat is kind of like a trailer to that and she will be giving some insight into the idea of creating community in your business’ particular niche and the benefits that can come from this.
Jordan has been around our community since day zero and is part of our ride or die community, the exact thing that she wants to help you build. We will be talking about her journey with this and she even credits the TCC community with helping her learn the importance of connecting with people, her customers and peers! For Jordan, this means her mailing list, repeat customers, getting feedback, and much more. All these great tactics and strategies have helped her grow to where she is now with her product based business and you can even start to apply some of these ideas to your business, no matter if you are service based or are selling products. So come on, let’s get into it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 14 Mar 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why Creating Community is Crucial for Your Brand and Happiness with Jordan Ellis</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>311</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/0e10183c-ae9b-11ec-91b1-b7dc4aee10eb/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Jordan Ellis, from Jordanené Clothing is here to talk about the importance of building a community in the success and longevity of your business. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are joined by our great friend, Jordan Ellis, from Jordanené Clothing and she is here to talk about the importance of building a community in the success and longevity of your business. Jordan is also speaking at our upcoming event, The Product Powerhouse Summit, which we know you are not going to want to miss! It is going to be incredible with over 25 speakers in 3 days. So go sign up right now, it is free! Today’s chat is kind of like a trailer to that and she will be giving some insight into the idea of creating community in your business’ particular niche and the benefits that can come from this.
Jordan has been around our community since day zero and is part of our ride or die community, the exact thing that she wants to help you build. We will be talking about her journey with this and she even credits the TCC community with helping her learn the importance of connecting with people, her customers and peers! For Jordan, this means her mailing list, repeat customers, getting feedback, and much more. All these great tactics and strategies have helped her grow to where she is now with her product based business and you can even start to apply some of these ideas to your business, no matter if you are service based or are selling products. So come on, let’s get into it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are joined by our great friend, Jordan Ellis, from Jordanené Clothing and she is here to talk about the importance of building a community in the success and longevity of your business. Jordan is also speaking at our upcoming event, The Product Powerhouse Summit, which we know you are not going to want to miss! It is going to be incredible with over 25 speakers in 3 days. So go sign up right now, it is free! Today’s chat is kind of like a trailer to that and she will be giving some insight into the idea of creating community in your business’ particular niche and the benefits that can come from this.</p><p>Jordan has been around our community since day zero and is part of our ride or die community, the exact thing that she wants to help you build. We will be talking about her journey with this and she even credits the TCC community with helping her learn the importance of connecting with people, her customers and peers! For Jordan, this means her mailing list, repeat customers, getting feedback, and much more. All these great tactics and strategies have helped her grow to where she is now with her product based business and you can even start to apply some of these ideas to your business, no matter if you are service based or are selling products. So come on, let’s get into it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1527</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[abeee784ad7647ef8f03f3c6d928d4cb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8528035736.mp3?updated=1656092830" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>310: Introducing the Product Powerhouse Summit</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/introducing-the-product-powerhouse-summit</link>
      <description>Hello again, you guys! Guess what? It’s time for another summit! In November 2018 we launched our very first summit and it was amazing. We started thinking about how we could improve on our already-spectacular event and came up with the idea of focusing on a very special portion of our audience, particularly because there seems to be a lack of resources for this type of business owner. The upcoming summit, called Product Powerhouse Summit, is especially aimed at all the product-based babes and those aspiring to step into the retail market, whether you have your own boutique or want to introduce e-commerce to your website. 
Just to lay it all out there, it’s 100% free to attend! Simply head over to the Boss Project Summit website to claim your complimentary ticket. We’re going to have about 25 speakers over three days, from April 9 –11th. You are going to get 24 hours free, which would allow you to watch almost all of the speakers. The best part of it all? It’s all virtual! As long as you have an Internet connection, you can access it through your phone, iPad, or on your desktop, and you don’t even have to be wearing pants! So stay tuned for the breakdown of the exciting topics you can look forward to!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 12 Mar 2019 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Introducing the Product Powerhouse Summit</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>310</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/0eb692fc-ae9b-11ec-91b1-7bd62a8e1f19/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>The upcoming summit, called Product Powerhouse Summit, is especially aimed at all the product-based babes and those aspiring to step into the retail market, whether you have your own boutique or want to introduce e-commerce to your website. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hello again, you guys! Guess what? It’s time for another summit! In November 2018 we launched our very first summit and it was amazing. We started thinking about how we could improve on our already-spectacular event and came up with the idea of focusing on a very special portion of our audience, particularly because there seems to be a lack of resources for this type of business owner. The upcoming summit, called Product Powerhouse Summit, is especially aimed at all the product-based babes and those aspiring to step into the retail market, whether you have your own boutique or want to introduce e-commerce to your website. 
Just to lay it all out there, it’s 100% free to attend! Simply head over to the Boss Project Summit website to claim your complimentary ticket. We’re going to have about 25 speakers over three days, from April 9 –11th. You are going to get 24 hours free, which would allow you to watch almost all of the speakers. The best part of it all? It’s all virtual! As long as you have an Internet connection, you can access it through your phone, iPad, or on your desktop, and you don’t even have to be wearing pants! So stay tuned for the breakdown of the exciting topics you can look forward to!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hello again, you guys! Guess what? It’s time for another summit! In November 2018 we launched our very first summit and it was amazing. We started thinking about how we could improve on our already-spectacular event and came up with the idea of focusing on a very special portion of our audience, particularly because there seems to be a lack of resources for this type of business owner. The upcoming summit, called Product Powerhouse Summit, is especially aimed at all the product-based babes and those aspiring to step into the retail market, whether you have your own boutique or want to introduce e-commerce to your website. </p><p>Just to lay it all out there, it’s 100% free to attend! Simply head over to the Boss Project Summit website to claim your complimentary ticket. We’re going to have about 25 speakers over three days, from April 9 –11th. You are going to get 24 hours free, which would allow you to watch almost all of the speakers. The best part of it all? It’s all virtual! As long as you have an Internet connection, you can access it through your phone, iPad, or on your desktop, and you don’t even have to be wearing pants! So stay tuned for the breakdown of the exciting topics you can look forward to!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1550</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8042e706f54c4d83835c540a098d5849]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9421875778.mp3?updated=1663446257" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>309: How to 2x Your Income With Affiliate Marketing with Jill Stanton of Screw the Nine to Five</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-2x-your-income-with-affiliate-marketing-with-jill-stanton</link>
      <description>Today on the show we welcome Jill Stanton who is the co-founder of Screw the Nine to Five and certified affiliate marketing badass! She and her husband, Josh, have built a massively successful business out of helping other businesses partner with yet more businesses! Everyone wins and everyone earns! Their mission is to transform unsatisfied employees into dangerously successful entrepreneurs and build skills and resources to help them with their growth, so they can work as much as they want to, wherever they want to!
This is such a hilarious and insightful episode, we know you are going to love every minute of it. We sure did, and by the end of it you will be at least one step closer to doubling your income through affiliate marketing. Jill’s brand of affiliation is not slimy and gross and is so simple to start today, no matter the size of your biz. We all know the bad reputation that these kinds of partnerships can have but this is not that, trust us! Jill is here to help you better serve your audience, stay inclusive and engaging, and make more money doing it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 07 Mar 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to 2x Your Income With Affiliate Marketing with Jill Stanton of Screw the Nine to Five</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>309</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/0f4a058c-ae9b-11ec-91b1-a353a7e6a722/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Jill’s brand of affiliation is not slimy and gross and is so simple to start today, no matter the size of your biz. She and her husband, Josh, have built a massively successful business out of helping other businesses partner with yet more businesses! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we welcome Jill Stanton who is the co-founder of Screw the Nine to Five and certified affiliate marketing badass! She and her husband, Josh, have built a massively successful business out of helping other businesses partner with yet more businesses! Everyone wins and everyone earns! Their mission is to transform unsatisfied employees into dangerously successful entrepreneurs and build skills and resources to help them with their growth, so they can work as much as they want to, wherever they want to!
This is such a hilarious and insightful episode, we know you are going to love every minute of it. We sure did, and by the end of it you will be at least one step closer to doubling your income through affiliate marketing. Jill’s brand of affiliation is not slimy and gross and is so simple to start today, no matter the size of your biz. We all know the bad reputation that these kinds of partnerships can have but this is not that, trust us! Jill is here to help you better serve your audience, stay inclusive and engaging, and make more money doing it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we welcome Jill Stanton who is the co-founder of Screw the Nine to Five and certified affiliate marketing badass! She and her husband, Josh, have built a massively successful business out of helping other businesses partner with yet more businesses! Everyone wins and everyone earns! Their mission is to transform unsatisfied employees into dangerously successful entrepreneurs and build skills and resources to help them with their growth, so they can work as much as they want to, wherever they want to!</p><p>This is such a hilarious and insightful episode, we know you are going to love every minute of it. We sure did, and by the end of it you will be at least one step closer to doubling your income through affiliate marketing. Jill’s brand of affiliation is not slimy and gross and is so simple to start today, no matter the size of your biz. We all know the bad reputation that these kinds of partnerships can have but this is not that, trust us! Jill is here to help you better serve your audience, stay inclusive and engaging, and make more money doing it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2509</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d42a0eb38f8041ab9ae41033a297c8af]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8859735560.mp3?updated=1656092729" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>308: The 20+ People It Takes to Run Our Growing Company</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-20-people-it-takes-to-run-our-growing-company</link>
      <description>Welcome back to another episode of your favorite podcast! Today we are answering your requests to break down the various roles we currently have at our company. So, just for all of you, we will be unpacking the size and impact of each of these in our beautiful little biz! We have been taking on new people and restructuring lately so what better time than now to do this exploration. We finally have a solid group and each role is pretty clear, which is more than we used to be able to say! We have to admit that for quite a long time certain jobs and departments remained quite a mystery to us, what they were really for and how much we could ask. Building a business is always going to include bringing people on and letting people go and it can sometimes prove quite hard to find the right fit. But we are much more confident right now than we have ever been!
So at the moment, we have a nice mix of new faces and old hands and we have to shoutout once again to Traction, the book we have drawn so much inspiration from, for helping us figure out our company structure. We have had to change our mindset from small business owners to the CEOs and founders of a company, which is harder than it sounds! It has taken three years of trial and error and in the beginning, we did not even have plans to build a team at all! We are still figuring out how big we want to be; right now we stand at about 20 people working on things. Quite a lot, we know! Some of these are contracted out, some are employees, some are part-time, but it is quite crazy to us that there are so many heads together on our little biz! So stay tuned as we dive into our business together.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 05 Mar 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The 20+ People It Takes to Run Our Growing Company</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>308</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/0fe3ee2c-ae9b-11ec-91b1-c7b9041ee744/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We break down the various roles we currently have at our company and unpack the size and impact of each of these in our beautiful little biz! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to another episode of your favorite podcast! Today we are answering your requests to break down the various roles we currently have at our company. So, just for all of you, we will be unpacking the size and impact of each of these in our beautiful little biz! We have been taking on new people and restructuring lately so what better time than now to do this exploration. We finally have a solid group and each role is pretty clear, which is more than we used to be able to say! We have to admit that for quite a long time certain jobs and departments remained quite a mystery to us, what they were really for and how much we could ask. Building a business is always going to include bringing people on and letting people go and it can sometimes prove quite hard to find the right fit. But we are much more confident right now than we have ever been!
So at the moment, we have a nice mix of new faces and old hands and we have to shoutout once again to Traction, the book we have drawn so much inspiration from, for helping us figure out our company structure. We have had to change our mindset from small business owners to the CEOs and founders of a company, which is harder than it sounds! It has taken three years of trial and error and in the beginning, we did not even have plans to build a team at all! We are still figuring out how big we want to be; right now we stand at about 20 people working on things. Quite a lot, we know! Some of these are contracted out, some are employees, some are part-time, but it is quite crazy to us that there are so many heads together on our little biz! So stay tuned as we dive into our business together.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to another episode of your favorite podcast! Today we are answering your requests to break down the various roles we currently have at our company. So, just for all of you, we will be unpacking the size and impact of each of these in our beautiful little biz! We have been taking on new people and restructuring lately so what better time than now to do this exploration. We finally have a solid group and each role is pretty clear, which is more than we used to be able to say! We have to admit that for quite a long time certain jobs and departments remained quite a mystery to us, what they were really for and how much we could ask. Building a business is always going to include bringing people on and letting people go and it can sometimes prove quite hard to find the right fit. But we are much more confident right now than we have ever been!</p><p>So at the moment, we have a nice mix of new faces and old hands and we have to shoutout once again to <em>Traction,</em> the book we have drawn so much inspiration from, for helping us figure out our company structure. We have had to change our mindset from small business owners to the CEOs and founders of a company, which is harder than it sounds! It has taken three years of trial and error and in the beginning, we did not even have plans to build a team at all! We are still figuring out how big we want to be; right now we stand at about 20 people working on things. Quite a lot, we know! Some of these are contracted out, some are employees, some are part-time, but it is quite crazy to us that there are so many heads together on our little biz! So stay tuned as we dive into our business together.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2565</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f2b01a04476941d7b4669692737d4875]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8895623775.mp3?updated=1663446272" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>307: From Garage Startup to On Track to 100 Million with Jane Lu Founder of Showpo</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/from-garage-startup-to-on-track-to-100-million-with-jane-lu-founder-of-showpo</link>
      <description>Hey everybody and welcome back to the Strategy Hour Podcast! Today we are very, very excited to have Jane Lu as our guest. Jane is the founder of Showpo and has been in Forbes, Cosmopolitan and won numerous awards for her business! What started as a small clothing store in her parents garage in 2010 has grown and grown to the huge online store that is today. Their goal is to reach $100 million in revenue by 2020 and boy do we think they will achieve it! Jane is so inspiring and we love the way her brain works, she makes fast decisions and is such a visionary; qualities that have taken her company to amazing heights.
In our conversation Jane breaks down the milestones, learning curves, mistake, strategies and almost every important step in the process, so get ready to take some notes! This episode is a great insight into the turning points that any business faces and how to ride them out to success. Jane admits that some of the strategy she now espouses she has only seen in hindsight, quite an achievement for a business that now has 150 staff members and started with two racks of clothing less than nine years ago! Now, let’s get into the show.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 28 Feb 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From Garage Startup to On Track to 100 Million with Jane Lu Founder of Showpo</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>307</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/10bd854c-ae9b-11ec-91b1-df0eaa314cc8/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Jane is the founder of Showpo and has been in Forbes, Cosmopolitan and won numerous awards for her business!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey everybody and welcome back to the Strategy Hour Podcast! Today we are very, very excited to have Jane Lu as our guest. Jane is the founder of Showpo and has been in Forbes, Cosmopolitan and won numerous awards for her business! What started as a small clothing store in her parents garage in 2010 has grown and grown to the huge online store that is today. Their goal is to reach $100 million in revenue by 2020 and boy do we think they will achieve it! Jane is so inspiring and we love the way her brain works, she makes fast decisions and is such a visionary; qualities that have taken her company to amazing heights.
In our conversation Jane breaks down the milestones, learning curves, mistake, strategies and almost every important step in the process, so get ready to take some notes! This episode is a great insight into the turning points that any business faces and how to ride them out to success. Jane admits that some of the strategy she now espouses she has only seen in hindsight, quite an achievement for a business that now has 150 staff members and started with two racks of clothing less than nine years ago! Now, let’s get into the show.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey everybody and welcome back to the Strategy Hour Podcast! Today we are very, very excited to have Jane Lu as our guest. Jane is the founder of Showpo and has been in Forbes, Cosmopolitan and won numerous awards for her business! What started as a small clothing store in her parents garage in 2010 has grown and grown to the huge online store that is today. Their goal is to reach $100 million in revenue by 2020 and boy do we think they will achieve it! Jane is so inspiring and we love the way her brain works, she makes fast decisions and is such a visionary; qualities that have taken her company to amazing heights.</p><p>In our conversation Jane breaks down the milestones, learning curves, mistake, strategies and almost every important step in the process, so get ready to take some notes! This episode is a great insight into the turning points that any business faces and how to ride them out to success. Jane admits that some of the strategy she now espouses she has only seen in hindsight, quite an achievement for a business that now has 150 staff members and started with two racks of clothing less than nine years ago! Now, let’s get into the show.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2612</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5b07d162693842bca510b79ea2974975]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8515787763.mp3?updated=1656092598" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>306: How to Run an Effective Photo Shoot For Your Brand</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-run-an-effective-photo-shoot-for-your-brand</link>
      <description>Hey, all of you strategists and biz queens! If you haven’t heard yet, we have been going through a big rebrand! All of our work will now fall under the Boss Project banner. That’s right, TCC is now a thing of the past and we are onto even bigger and better things! Since we have started this process we have been getting so many questions about the new photos we have been taking and sharing sporadically. We have to admit they look amazing and we are so proud of how they have come out. We look pretty good in them, if we don’t say so ourselves!
So today we wanted to share some tips and tricks for organizing a great shoot! After this experience, we have loads of opinions and ideas to give you. In the past, we mostly went pretty DIY with the process with varying degrees of success and have learned many lessons, and this time we applied a bunch of that knowledge! This was the first occasion that we went full professional and the experience was so fluid and we were so prepared! In our discussion, we get into these preparations, budgeting, roles, and things to remember. So let’s get to it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 26 Feb 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Run an Effective Photo Shoot For Your Brand</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>306</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/11509fe4-ae9b-11ec-91b1-5fa503513b0a/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tips and tricks for organizing a great shoot!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey, all of you strategists and biz queens! If you haven’t heard yet, we have been going through a big rebrand! All of our work will now fall under the Boss Project banner. That’s right, TCC is now a thing of the past and we are onto even bigger and better things! Since we have started this process we have been getting so many questions about the new photos we have been taking and sharing sporadically. We have to admit they look amazing and we are so proud of how they have come out. We look pretty good in them, if we don’t say so ourselves!
So today we wanted to share some tips and tricks for organizing a great shoot! After this experience, we have loads of opinions and ideas to give you. In the past, we mostly went pretty DIY with the process with varying degrees of success and have learned many lessons, and this time we applied a bunch of that knowledge! This was the first occasion that we went full professional and the experience was so fluid and we were so prepared! In our discussion, we get into these preparations, budgeting, roles, and things to remember. So let’s get to it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey, all of you strategists and biz queens! If you haven’t heard yet, we have been going through a big rebrand! All of our work will now fall under the Boss Project banner. That’s right, TCC is now a thing of the past and we are onto even bigger and better things! Since we have started this process we have been getting so many questions about the new photos we have been taking and sharing sporadically. We have to admit they look amazing and we are so proud of how they have come out. We look pretty good in them, if we don’t say so ourselves!</p><p>So today we wanted to share some tips and tricks for organizing a great shoot! After this experience, we have loads of opinions and ideas to give you. In the past, we mostly went pretty DIY with the process with varying degrees of success and have learned many lessons, and this time we applied a bunch of that knowledge! This was the first occasion that we went full professional and the experience was so fluid and we were so prepared! In our discussion, we get into these preparations, budgeting, roles, and things to remember. So let’s get to it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2680</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[22378a654d8c463fa3f8ac2364dcc94d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6937532312.mp3?updated=1663446215" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>305: Growing a Movement from a Blog with Nikki Porcher, Founder of Buy From a Black Woman</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/growing-a-movement-from-a-blog-with-nikki-porcher-founder-of-buy-from-a-black-lady</link>
      <description>Hey, everybody, we are super excited to have our friend Nikki Porcher on the show today! Nikki is the owner and founder of Buy From a Black Woman, which is an online non-profit organization that is bringing awareness and funding to businesses owned by black women! Nikki has had an amazing journey since starting this initiative and she now showcases a large number of black women business owners in her directory, Instagram, and in her shop. A fearless and natural creative, Nikki is so much fun to talk to and we know you are going to love this conversation too! During the episode we hear about this incredible journey that she has been on, starting with a blog, which became a hot Instagram account, then a directory and now a non-profit organization.
She currently gives out grants to black women to start their business and get off the ground, providing a network of support and knowledge to aid them in their pursuits. We have to admit we learned a lot in this conversation and Nikki is so open in sharing with us and we ended off this chat just wanting to know more, support more and spread the love! There are so many great businesses in her directory and we should all be buying from them! It is so easy to do a little research, branch out a little further and diversify your world! Nikki is such a great example of turning your passion into something amazing and impactful and to be honest her story really reiterates a lot of what we always say!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 21 Feb 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Growing a Movement from a Blog with Nikki Porcher, Founder of Buy From a Black Woman</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>305</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/11e18306-ae9b-11ec-91b1-3730d72ae6c4/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Nikki shares about her online non-profit organization that is bringing awareness and funding to businesses owned by black women!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey, everybody, we are super excited to have our friend Nikki Porcher on the show today! Nikki is the owner and founder of Buy From a Black Woman, which is an online non-profit organization that is bringing awareness and funding to businesses owned by black women! Nikki has had an amazing journey since starting this initiative and she now showcases a large number of black women business owners in her directory, Instagram, and in her shop. A fearless and natural creative, Nikki is so much fun to talk to and we know you are going to love this conversation too! During the episode we hear about this incredible journey that she has been on, starting with a blog, which became a hot Instagram account, then a directory and now a non-profit organization.
She currently gives out grants to black women to start their business and get off the ground, providing a network of support and knowledge to aid them in their pursuits. We have to admit we learned a lot in this conversation and Nikki is so open in sharing with us and we ended off this chat just wanting to know more, support more and spread the love! There are so many great businesses in her directory and we should all be buying from them! It is so easy to do a little research, branch out a little further and diversify your world! Nikki is such a great example of turning your passion into something amazing and impactful and to be honest her story really reiterates a lot of what we always say!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey, everybody, we are super excited to have our friend Nikki Porcher on the show today! Nikki is the owner and founder of Buy From a Black Woman, which is an online non-profit organization that is bringing awareness and funding to businesses owned by black women! Nikki has had an amazing journey since starting this initiative and she now showcases a large number of black women business owners in her directory, Instagram, and in her shop. A fearless and natural creative, Nikki is so much fun to talk to and we know you are going to love this conversation too! During the episode we hear about this incredible journey that she has been on, starting with a blog, which became a hot Instagram account, then a directory and now a non-profit organization.</p><p>She currently gives out grants to black women to start their business and get off the ground, providing a network of support and knowledge to aid them in their pursuits. We have to admit we learned a lot in this conversation and Nikki is so open in sharing with us and we ended off this chat just wanting to know more, support more and spread the love! There are so many great businesses in her directory and we should all be buying from them! It is so easy to do a little research, branch out a little further and diversify your world! Nikki is such a great example of turning your passion into something amazing and impactful and to be honest her story really reiterates a lot of what we always say!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2288</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7ddafe11aa5f405a9bf5421554a12597]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5028542414.mp3?updated=1656078880" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>304: Think Creative Collective is No Longer</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/think-creative-collective-is-no-longer</link>
      <description>Today’s episode is a really big deal. We are bursting with excitement to share with you our motivation behind changing a key aspect of our business—the name! When you start a new company, the last thing you think about is changing it. Even though change can be terrifying, we hope that you will be equally as enthusiastic about the new direction we are moving into as we are. We assure you that we will do everything possible to continue serving you to the best of our abilities, and we can almost guarantee that you will love this change as much as we do.
Part of the name changing process involves making our brand more inclusive by collaborating with online entrepreneurs who will be educating you on a wide range of topics. You will not be hearing from only us in the future but will be enriched by the knowledge of a plethora of experts in various fields of business. Be sure to tune in today to join in our celebrations and to find out all the cool new things we are going to be offering you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 19 Feb 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Think Creative Collective is No Longer</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>304</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/126f3b10-ae9b-11ec-91b1-c79fa47191a2/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We share our motivation behind changing a key aspect of our business—the name!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today’s episode is a really big deal. We are bursting with excitement to share with you our motivation behind changing a key aspect of our business—the name! When you start a new company, the last thing you think about is changing it. Even though change can be terrifying, we hope that you will be equally as enthusiastic about the new direction we are moving into as we are. We assure you that we will do everything possible to continue serving you to the best of our abilities, and we can almost guarantee that you will love this change as much as we do.
Part of the name changing process involves making our brand more inclusive by collaborating with online entrepreneurs who will be educating you on a wide range of topics. You will not be hearing from only us in the future but will be enriched by the knowledge of a plethora of experts in various fields of business. Be sure to tune in today to join in our celebrations and to find out all the cool new things we are going to be offering you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s episode is a really big deal. We are bursting with excitement to share with you our motivation behind changing a key aspect of our business—the name! When you start a new company, the last thing you think about is changing it. Even though change can be terrifying, we hope that you will be equally as enthusiastic about the new direction we are moving into as we are. We assure you that we will do everything possible to continue serving you to the best of our abilities, and we can almost guarantee that you will love this change as much as we do.</p><p>Part of the name changing process involves making our brand more inclusive by collaborating with online entrepreneurs who will be educating you on a wide range of topics. You will not be hearing from only us in the future but will be enriched by the knowledge of a plethora of experts in various fields of business. Be sure to tune in today to join in our celebrations and to find out all the cool new things we are going to be offering you.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1515</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7c7ab83a9ba34e7a8646cda718061e9a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5858743134.mp3?updated=1656078815" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>303: Building an Audience that Sticks Working with Micro-Influencers with Erin Abernathy Steph Pulido of Out of Office Media</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/building-an-audience-that-sticks-working-with-micro-influencers-with-erin-abernathy-steph-pulido-of-out-of-office-media</link>
      <description>Today we welcome Erin Abernathy &amp; Steph Pulido from Out of Office Media. We are so excited to have them here on the Strategy Hour Podcast to talk about working with micro-influencers and how brands can create strong content and build a really engaged audience. Our guests are best friends, the co-founders of their company, and they have recently been recognized by Forbes! Their goal is to serve and interact with female millennials and they are now based in New York City. In their business, they work with micro-influencers, or those that have less than about 10k followers on social media, to grow their following and in turn aid a brand’s goals. This is really about building a small yet strong tribe whether you are a solopreneur, budding influencer or big brand.
So if you are what may be called a micro-influencer and would like to dabble in working with brands and companies, creating another revenue stream, this episode might be just the thing you have been looking for. Erin and Steph offer a bunch of great strategies to get started, boost engagement, and niche down your market. So no matter what business or field you are in this can help you get to where you need to be. So without further ado, let’s dive in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 14 Feb 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Building an Audience that Sticks Working with Micro-Influencers with Erin Abernathy Steph Pulido of Out of Office Media</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>303</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/132965d0-ae9b-11ec-91b1-9fcad26bb4f6/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>How brands can create strong content and build a really engaged audience.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we welcome Erin Abernathy &amp; Steph Pulido from Out of Office Media. We are so excited to have them here on the Strategy Hour Podcast to talk about working with micro-influencers and how brands can create strong content and build a really engaged audience. Our guests are best friends, the co-founders of their company, and they have recently been recognized by Forbes! Their goal is to serve and interact with female millennials and they are now based in New York City. In their business, they work with micro-influencers, or those that have less than about 10k followers on social media, to grow their following and in turn aid a brand’s goals. This is really about building a small yet strong tribe whether you are a solopreneur, budding influencer or big brand.
So if you are what may be called a micro-influencer and would like to dabble in working with brands and companies, creating another revenue stream, this episode might be just the thing you have been looking for. Erin and Steph offer a bunch of great strategies to get started, boost engagement, and niche down your market. So no matter what business or field you are in this can help you get to where you need to be. So without further ado, let’s dive in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we welcome Erin Abernathy &amp; Steph Pulido from Out of Office Media. We are so excited to have them here on the Strategy Hour Podcast to talk about working with micro-influencers and how brands can create strong content and build a really engaged audience. Our guests are best friends, the co-founders of their company, and they have recently been recognized by Forbes! Their goal is to serve and interact with female millennials and they are now based in New York City. In their business, they work with micro-influencers, or those that have less than about 10k followers on social media, to grow their following and in turn aid a brand’s goals. This is really about building a small yet strong tribe whether you are a solopreneur, budding influencer or big brand.</p><p>So if you are what may be called a micro-influencer and would like to dabble in working with brands and companies, creating another revenue stream, this episode might be just the thing you have been looking for. Erin and Steph offer a bunch of great strategies to get started, boost engagement, and niche down your market. So no matter what business or field you are in this can help you get to where you need to be. So without further ado, let’s dive in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2023</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[553aef8d198b4eef88fd82d93126b1f2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6876047839.mp3?updated=1656078812" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>302: Abbie Is Not An Enneagram 3 There I Said It</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/abbie-is-not-an-enneagram-3-there-i-said-it</link>
      <description>Hi everybody! On today’s show, we are talking about one of our favorite things — personality tests! If you know us at all you know we can’t get enough of these kind of exercises and understanding where we fit into each and every system. Today we will be discussing Enneagrams, our types, and Emylee’s controversial opinion that Abagail was mistyped in her first assessment. Enneagrams are relatively new to us, with Abagail doing hers first, just under a year ago. However, Emylee still feels she has enough expertise to assert some claims over Abbie’s type and what it really is, contrary to the results.
We are doing this episode in the lead up to the Enneagram and Coffee Summit that is happening very soon, which we will be speaking at! So to get you excited for that, we will be spilling the beans on everything we know about the subject and how we relate to it. Remember to go get your tickets for the summit if you still have time! And if you haven’t already done the test, go take it immediately. You know you want another way to understand yourself! In the meantime, tune in to today’s episode for an in-depth look at how it all works.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 12 Feb 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Abbie Is Not An Enneagram 3 There I Said It</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>302</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/13c2fd3a-ae9b-11ec-91b1-8bec6936b29a/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We're talking about one of our favorite things — personality tests! We can’t get enough of these kind of exercises and understanding where we fit into each and every system.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hi everybody! On today’s show, we are talking about one of our favorite things — personality tests! If you know us at all you know we can’t get enough of these kind of exercises and understanding where we fit into each and every system. Today we will be discussing Enneagrams, our types, and Emylee’s controversial opinion that Abagail was mistyped in her first assessment. Enneagrams are relatively new to us, with Abagail doing hers first, just under a year ago. However, Emylee still feels she has enough expertise to assert some claims over Abbie’s type and what it really is, contrary to the results.
We are doing this episode in the lead up to the Enneagram and Coffee Summit that is happening very soon, which we will be speaking at! So to get you excited for that, we will be spilling the beans on everything we know about the subject and how we relate to it. Remember to go get your tickets for the summit if you still have time! And if you haven’t already done the test, go take it immediately. You know you want another way to understand yourself! In the meantime, tune in to today’s episode for an in-depth look at how it all works.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hi everybody! On today’s show, we are talking about one of our favorite things — personality tests! If you know us at all you know we can’t get enough of these kind of exercises and understanding where we fit into each and every system. Today we will be discussing Enneagrams, our types, and Emylee’s controversial opinion that Abagail was mistyped in her first assessment. Enneagrams are relatively new to us, with Abagail doing hers first, just under a year ago. However, Emylee still feels she has enough expertise to assert some claims over Abbie’s type and what it really is, contrary to the results.</p><p>We are doing this episode in the lead up to the Enneagram and Coffee Summit that is happening very soon, which we will be speaking at! So to get you excited for that, we will be spilling the beans on everything we know about the subject and how we relate to it. Remember to go get your tickets for the summit if you still have time! And if you haven’t already done the test, go take it immediately. You know you want another way to understand yourself! In the meantime, tune in to today’s episode for an in-depth look at how it all works.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1941</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8bda3b959f12446dae7a41bd46459565]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7740795089.mp3?updated=1656078780" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>301: Using Your Dollars to Make a Difference with Bethany Tran of The Root Collective</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/using-your-dollars-to-make-a-difference-with-bethany-tran-of-the-root-collective</link>
      <description>Welcome back to the podcast all of you wonderful listeners! Today we have a great show in store for you, one that is less about how you make money and more about how you spend it. We know that most of us quite like doing that! Bethany Tran of The Root Collective is here to tell us all about how to spend your money in more positive ways to create a better world around you. She is a problem solver and entrepreneur who started the company to help serve struggling communities through job creation. She actually left a stable job to pursue this work and we applaud her for that. She explains The Root Collective’s business model as well as giving some general ideas and information on wiser ways to spend your bucks!
Essentially, this episode is all about how we as women can spend our money in better ways and make a conscious impact on the economy and communities. Bethany has lots of ideas for how to implement these ideas and changes at a reasonable speed and we are pretty sure that after this episode you are going to want to buy some boots from her shop. You have been warned! She talks about branding, community, sustainability, and we ask her why she has the best hair in the world! Here at TCC we really believe that women rule the world and we need to step into the role as much as we can!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 07 Feb 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Using Your Dollars to Make a Difference with Bethany Tran of The Root Collective</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>301</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/1481a3a2-ae9b-11ec-91b1-f72192fa8a4f/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>How to spend your money in more positive ways to create a better world around you.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to the podcast all of you wonderful listeners! Today we have a great show in store for you, one that is less about how you make money and more about how you spend it. We know that most of us quite like doing that! Bethany Tran of The Root Collective is here to tell us all about how to spend your money in more positive ways to create a better world around you. She is a problem solver and entrepreneur who started the company to help serve struggling communities through job creation. She actually left a stable job to pursue this work and we applaud her for that. She explains The Root Collective’s business model as well as giving some general ideas and information on wiser ways to spend your bucks!
Essentially, this episode is all about how we as women can spend our money in better ways and make a conscious impact on the economy and communities. Bethany has lots of ideas for how to implement these ideas and changes at a reasonable speed and we are pretty sure that after this episode you are going to want to buy some boots from her shop. You have been warned! She talks about branding, community, sustainability, and we ask her why she has the best hair in the world! Here at TCC we really believe that women rule the world and we need to step into the role as much as we can!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to the podcast all of you wonderful listeners! Today we have a great show in store for you, one that is less about how you make money and more about how you spend it. We know that most of us quite like doing that! Bethany Tran of The Root Collective is here to tell us all about how to spend your money in more positive ways to create a better world around you. She is a problem solver and entrepreneur who started the company to help serve struggling communities through job creation. She actually left a stable job to pursue this work and we applaud her for that. She explains The Root Collective’s business model as well as giving some general ideas and information on wiser ways to spend your bucks!</p><p>Essentially, this episode is all about how we as women can spend our money in better ways and make a conscious impact on the economy and communities. Bethany has lots of ideas for how to implement these ideas and changes at a reasonable speed and we are pretty sure that after this episode you are going to want to buy some boots from her shop. You have been warned! She talks about branding, community, sustainability, and we ask her why she has the best hair in the world! Here at TCC we really believe that women rule the world and we need to step into the role as much as we can!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2247</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8895768f38b74932a17a34af1d316955]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2682283002.mp3?updated=1656078670" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>300: Making Our First Million Dollars</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/making-our-first-million-dollars</link>
      <description>Can you believe we have made it to Episode 300 of the podcast? How is this possible? We are so grateful to have had all of you along for the ride and cannot wait to do the next 300! As we go into our third full year here at TCC, we wanted to celebrate another milestone besides that one. Sometime during the last six months or so, without us even really being aware, we made our first million! We know, this sounds crazy but it’s true!
So what does that number mean when we say we have made a million? From the start, we have said that we want to grow into a million dollar company and we have not actually reached that landmark yet. This just means that since going full-time with our educational courses that we have brought in a million dollars in revenue. Pretty impressive? Quite surprising? We think so too! To be completely honest though, as the years have passed we feel a little less concerned with the numbers and more with what they represent and for us the money shows the level of impact that we are making and this just feels so good! We feel so happy and lucky to have come this far and touched this many lives and businesses and now we have students who are even making as much as we are! Wow! So tune in, and come celebrate with us on today’s episode.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 05 Feb 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Making Our First Million Dollars</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>300</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/15458970-ae9b-11ec-91b1-df63a76f594b/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We feel so happy and lucky to have come this far and touched this many lives and businesses and now we have students who are even making as much as we are! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Can you believe we have made it to Episode 300 of the podcast? How is this possible? We are so grateful to have had all of you along for the ride and cannot wait to do the next 300! As we go into our third full year here at TCC, we wanted to celebrate another milestone besides that one. Sometime during the last six months or so, without us even really being aware, we made our first million! We know, this sounds crazy but it’s true!
So what does that number mean when we say we have made a million? From the start, we have said that we want to grow into a million dollar company and we have not actually reached that landmark yet. This just means that since going full-time with our educational courses that we have brought in a million dollars in revenue. Pretty impressive? Quite surprising? We think so too! To be completely honest though, as the years have passed we feel a little less concerned with the numbers and more with what they represent and for us the money shows the level of impact that we are making and this just feels so good! We feel so happy and lucky to have come this far and touched this many lives and businesses and now we have students who are even making as much as we are! Wow! So tune in, and come celebrate with us on today’s episode.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Can you believe we have made it to Episode 300 of the podcast? How is this possible? We are so grateful to have had all of you along for the ride and cannot wait to do the next 300! As we go into our third full year here at TCC, we wanted to celebrate another milestone besides that one. Sometime during the last six months or so, without us even really being aware, we made our first million! We know, this sounds crazy but it’s true!</p><p>So what does that number mean when we say we have made a million? From the start, we have said that we want to grow into a million dollar company and we have not actually reached that landmark yet. This just means that since going full-time with our educational courses that we have brought in a million dollars in revenue. Pretty impressive? Quite surprising? We think so too! To be completely honest though, as the years have passed we feel a little less concerned with the numbers and more with what they represent and for us the money shows the level of impact that we are making and this just feels so good! We feel so happy and lucky to have come this far and touched this many lives and businesses and now we have students who are even making as much as we are! Wow! So tune in, and come celebrate with us on today’s episode.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2233</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d5ba0f16bbc945e99eb5478d62c7c940]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4754359298.mp3?updated=1656010418" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>299: Going All In With One Client with Kimberly Crossland</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/going-all-in-with-one-client-with-kimberly-crossland</link>
      <description>Hey everybody and welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast! Today we are joined by Kimberly Crossland who is the former founder, owner, and operator of Savvy Copywriters, a communication and digital marketing agency based in Tucson, Arizona. However, she has now transitioned into a role as Content and Marketing Manager at Rocket Source and she is going to be talking to us all about this transition and how she went from a business owner to working directly and solely for one client. You might recall that this is the second conversation we are having of this type but today we are offering a slightly different perspective on the idea. We will be talking work-life balance, mental time and space, motherhood and creativity.
This episode will hopefully show you a way that you can trim the fat off your work, if that is something you have been considering, and this roadmap might be just the inspiration you need to keep moving forward. This conversation is applicable to both service and product based businesses and from Kimberly’s specific journey, many applicable lessons can be extrapolated. These types of ideas definitely seem to be popping up more and more since we did our first episode on the subject and the online biz community is increasingly interested in scaling back and working more directly and with more focus. We hope you enjoy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 31 Jan 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Going All In With One Client with Kimberly Crossland</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>299</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/15d1aa22-ae9b-11ec-91b1-fbf08efd0b87/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We will be talking work-life balance, mental time and space, motherhood and creativity.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey everybody and welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast! Today we are joined by Kimberly Crossland who is the former founder, owner, and operator of Savvy Copywriters, a communication and digital marketing agency based in Tucson, Arizona. However, she has now transitioned into a role as Content and Marketing Manager at Rocket Source and she is going to be talking to us all about this transition and how she went from a business owner to working directly and solely for one client. You might recall that this is the second conversation we are having of this type but today we are offering a slightly different perspective on the idea. We will be talking work-life balance, mental time and space, motherhood and creativity.
This episode will hopefully show you a way that you can trim the fat off your work, if that is something you have been considering, and this roadmap might be just the inspiration you need to keep moving forward. This conversation is applicable to both service and product based businesses and from Kimberly’s specific journey, many applicable lessons can be extrapolated. These types of ideas definitely seem to be popping up more and more since we did our first episode on the subject and the online biz community is increasingly interested in scaling back and working more directly and with more focus. We hope you enjoy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey everybody and welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast! Today we are joined by Kimberly Crossland who is the former founder, owner, and operator of Savvy Copywriters, a communication and digital marketing agency based in Tucson, Arizona. However, she has now transitioned into a role as Content and Marketing Manager at Rocket Source and she is going to be talking to us all about this transition and how she went from a business owner to working directly and solely for one client. You might recall that this is the second conversation we are having of this type but today we are offering a slightly different perspective on the idea. We will be talking work-life balance, mental time and space, motherhood and creativity.</p><p>This episode will hopefully show you a way that you can trim the fat off your work, if that is something you have been considering, and this roadmap might be just the inspiration you need to keep moving forward. This conversation is applicable to both service and product based businesses and from Kimberly’s specific journey, many applicable lessons can be extrapolated. These types of ideas definitely seem to be popping up more and more since we did our first episode on the subject and the online biz community is increasingly interested in scaling back and working more directly and with more focus. We hope you enjoy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2262</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[678d157e513d44cc8d98cf37513100e5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2341701239.mp3?updated=1656010409" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>298: How to Ease Back into 2019</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-ease-back-into-2019</link>
      <description>Hello everyone, and welcome back to another episode! Today we talking about getting back into the swing of things in the new year. We will mostly be talking about our own experiences getting into work-mode after the nice holiday break we had over December. It is quite a personal episode, but we are pretty sure a lot of you out there will be able to relate! It feels quite weird to be back at work after the time off but you know we are excited and pumped up as usual. As you may know. we pretty much took the whole of December off, which was only possible due to the serious preparation we did throughout the year.
In December we did a total of two interviews, two meetings, and our usual monthly coaching sessions. We did not work on any day to day things and for the most part were able to be lazy, relaxed, and bored as much as we wanted. The one exception was Emylee moving house at the end of the month, which was its own kettle of fish! But all in all, December was the much-needed break we both needed after such a busy year. So in this episode, we talk about how we prepared for the whole month off, how we are getting into gear now in January, and our intentions and hopes for the year moving forward. Let’s get into it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 29 Jan 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Ease Back into 2019</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>298</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/16614204-ae9b-11ec-91b1-4bab406bcb70/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We will mostly be talking about our own experiences getting into work-mode after the nice holiday break we had over December. It is quite a personal episode, but we are pretty sure a lot of you out there will be able to relate! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hello everyone, and welcome back to another episode! Today we talking about getting back into the swing of things in the new year. We will mostly be talking about our own experiences getting into work-mode after the nice holiday break we had over December. It is quite a personal episode, but we are pretty sure a lot of you out there will be able to relate! It feels quite weird to be back at work after the time off but you know we are excited and pumped up as usual. As you may know. we pretty much took the whole of December off, which was only possible due to the serious preparation we did throughout the year.
In December we did a total of two interviews, two meetings, and our usual monthly coaching sessions. We did not work on any day to day things and for the most part were able to be lazy, relaxed, and bored as much as we wanted. The one exception was Emylee moving house at the end of the month, which was its own kettle of fish! But all in all, December was the much-needed break we both needed after such a busy year. So in this episode, we talk about how we prepared for the whole month off, how we are getting into gear now in January, and our intentions and hopes for the year moving forward. Let’s get into it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hello everyone, and welcome back to another episode! Today we talking about getting back into the swing of things in the new year. We will mostly be talking about our own experiences getting into work-mode after the nice holiday break we had over December. It is quite a personal episode, but we are pretty sure a lot of you out there will be able to relate! It feels quite weird to be back at work after the time off but you know we are excited and pumped up as usual. As you may know. we pretty much took the whole of December off, which was only possible due to the serious preparation we did throughout the year.</p><p>In December we did a total of two interviews, two meetings, and our usual monthly coaching sessions. We did not work on any day to day things and for the most part were able to be lazy, relaxed, and bored as much as we wanted. The one exception was Emylee moving house at the end of the month, which was its own kettle of fish! But all in all, December was the much-needed break we both needed after such a busy year. So in this episode, we talk about how we prepared for the whole month off, how we are getting into gear now in January, and our intentions and hopes for the year moving forward. Let’s get into it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1930</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[18c82cc86e2b411985d403fcbd2f1e2e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7431568848.mp3?updated=1656010314" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>297: What a Marketing Director Could Do For Your Small Business with Suzi Istvan</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-a-marketing-director-could-do-for-your-small-business-with-suzi-istvan</link>
      <description>Hello everybody and welcome back to another episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast! Today our guest is Suzi Istvan from Splendidly Curious. Suzi is a brand strategist, marketing expert and has many years of experience working with a wide variety of different types of companies and organizations. She lives in upstate New York with her beautiful big family and we cannot wait to share this amazing conversation with all of y’all! Suzi is here to tell us about the roles of marketing director and integrator and how they can take your business from lighting up to burning hot! If your biz is currently small and just starting out or you are making a step up to the next level, trust us, this episode is going to help a ton!
The chat was amazing and enlightening for us and we gained so much just talking to Suzi, so we are sure there will be a treasure trove of stuff for you to mine in here! During the conversation, Suzi even interviews us a little bit, which was fun! We cover how to build and coordinate your team cleverly and finding that all-important person who is as invested in your business as you are. This role, which Suzi and others have dubbed the integrator, can take a lot off of your hands and free up more time for you to explore and double down on your areas of genius. In the end, you are looking for someone who thinks of your business as their business and who can free up your mental load, so you can pursue all your dreams with more energy and vigor!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 24 Jan 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What a Marketing Director Could Do For Your Small Business with Suzi Istvan</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>297</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/16e80988-ae9b-11ec-91b1-4b30fbd8c6be/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Suzi is here to tell us about the roles of marketing director and integrator and how they can take your business from lighting up to burning hot! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hello everybody and welcome back to another episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast! Today our guest is Suzi Istvan from Splendidly Curious. Suzi is a brand strategist, marketing expert and has many years of experience working with a wide variety of different types of companies and organizations. She lives in upstate New York with her beautiful big family and we cannot wait to share this amazing conversation with all of y’all! Suzi is here to tell us about the roles of marketing director and integrator and how they can take your business from lighting up to burning hot! If your biz is currently small and just starting out or you are making a step up to the next level, trust us, this episode is going to help a ton!
The chat was amazing and enlightening for us and we gained so much just talking to Suzi, so we are sure there will be a treasure trove of stuff for you to mine in here! During the conversation, Suzi even interviews us a little bit, which was fun! We cover how to build and coordinate your team cleverly and finding that all-important person who is as invested in your business as you are. This role, which Suzi and others have dubbed the integrator, can take a lot off of your hands and free up more time for you to explore and double down on your areas of genius. In the end, you are looking for someone who thinks of your business as their business and who can free up your mental load, so you can pursue all your dreams with more energy and vigor!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hello everybody and welcome back to another episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast! Today our guest is Suzi Istvan from Splendidly Curious. Suzi is a brand strategist, marketing expert and has many years of experience working with a wide variety of different types of companies and organizations. She lives in upstate New York with her beautiful big family and we cannot wait to share this amazing conversation with all of y’all! Suzi is here to tell us about the roles of marketing director and integrator and how they can take your business from lighting up to burning hot! If your biz is currently small and just starting out or you are making a step up to the next level, trust us, this episode is going to help a ton!</p><p>The chat was amazing and enlightening for us and we gained so much just talking to Suzi, so we are sure there will be a treasure trove of stuff for you to mine in here! During the conversation, Suzi even interviews us a little bit, which was fun! We cover how to build and coordinate your team cleverly and finding that all-important person who is as invested in your business as you are. This role, which Suzi and others have dubbed the integrator, can take a lot off of your hands and free up more time for you to explore and double down on your areas of genius. In the end, you are looking for someone who thinks of your business as their business and who can free up your mental load, so you can pursue all your dreams with more energy and vigor!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2625</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[96d8556d8fa642b3a19ec683114080a3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2379353720.mp3?updated=1662558190" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>296: Hiring a Full Time Employee - Part 2</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/hiring-a-full-time-employee-part-2</link>
      <description>Welcome back to the show, everyone! As promised we are doing the second part of our segment on hiring a full-time employee. So if you haven’t listened to part one yet, we recommend you go catch up on that, ASAP! In that episode, we covered the application process, defining the role, finding and vetting candidates. Today we are diving straight on into the interview and onboarding process. We will be doing a follow up part three in a few months to report back on the outcomes of this whole process, so stay alert for that in the not too distant future!
Now, we have to be clear, we were looking for a unicorn. We needed someone who was creative and motivated but did not feel compelled to do these things in a business of their own. We have found that this configuration is quite rare and quickly found out that we would be lucky to nab someone who fits the bill. Having part-time or freelancers work for you can be great and you may love these people but there is a limit to how much they can actually do for you if they are running their own thing as well and you are only part of that bigger picture. This was one of the main reasons we were looking to fill this particular role, so we could get a little more out of a full-time employee and have someone who is as dedicated to our biz as we are!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 22 Jan 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Hiring a Full Time Employee - Part 2</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>296</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/1772b9f2-ae9b-11ec-91b1-e7002e837fd6/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are diving straight on into the interview and onboarding process. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to the show, everyone! As promised we are doing the second part of our segment on hiring a full-time employee. So if you haven’t listened to part one yet, we recommend you go catch up on that, ASAP! In that episode, we covered the application process, defining the role, finding and vetting candidates. Today we are diving straight on into the interview and onboarding process. We will be doing a follow up part three in a few months to report back on the outcomes of this whole process, so stay alert for that in the not too distant future!
Now, we have to be clear, we were looking for a unicorn. We needed someone who was creative and motivated but did not feel compelled to do these things in a business of their own. We have found that this configuration is quite rare and quickly found out that we would be lucky to nab someone who fits the bill. Having part-time or freelancers work for you can be great and you may love these people but there is a limit to how much they can actually do for you if they are running their own thing as well and you are only part of that bigger picture. This was one of the main reasons we were looking to fill this particular role, so we could get a little more out of a full-time employee and have someone who is as dedicated to our biz as we are!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to the show, everyone! As promised we are doing the second part of our segment on hiring a full-time employee. So if you haven’t listened to part one yet, we recommend you go catch up on that, ASAP! In that episode, we covered the application process, defining the role, finding and vetting candidates. Today we are diving straight on into the interview and onboarding process. We will be doing a follow up part three in a few months to report back on the outcomes of this whole process, so stay alert for that in the not too distant future!</p><p>Now, we have to be clear, we were looking for a unicorn. We needed someone who was creative and motivated but did not feel compelled to do these things in a business of their own. We have found that this configuration is quite rare and quickly found out that we would be lucky to nab someone who fits the bill. Having part-time or freelancers work for you can be great and you may love these people but there is a limit to how much they can actually do for you if they are running their own thing as well and you are only part of that bigger picture. This was one of the main reasons we were looking to fill this particular role, so we could get a little more out of a full-time employee and have someone who is as dedicated to our biz as we are!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1733</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dd529d87b0f34b0d86da674653db6685]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6708283099.mp3?updated=1656010104" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>295: How to Replace Your Salary by Selling Services Online with Jereshia Hawk</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-replace-your-salary-by-selling-services-online-with-jereshia-hawk</link>
      <description>Welcome back to the show, all you biz badasses, and money queens! Today we have a great episode in store for you that you are most definitely not going to want to miss! Our guest is Jereshia Hawk and she is here to tell us about how she switched from a big corporate job to selling her services online and increasing her salary in the process! Jereshia was working on huge, high profile engineering projects when she left her job and during this first year of going solo, she managed to double her salary! Sound amazing? We think so! She has subsequently taught her strategies to hundreds of people online and helped them get going on their own road to success.
A lot of what Jereshia teaches is a little different to the majority of information that is available online. She has a focus on grassroots growth that we just love! It was such a pleasure to have her on the show and the conversation is motivating and really informative for anyone looking to get out of their day job and start their own little thing. This topic is really near and dear to our hearts as Abagail started out on her own, selling services when she quit her corporate job and so much of what Jereshia says rings true for us. For a great conversation with a massively inspiring person, be sure to get it all on The Strategy Hour!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 17 Jan 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Replace Your Salary by Selling Services Online with Jereshia Hawk</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>295</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/1800e358-ae9b-11ec-91b1-d7c05499cba8/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Jereshia Hawk shares how she switched from a big corporate job to selling her services online and increasing her salary in the process! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to the show, all you biz badasses, and money queens! Today we have a great episode in store for you that you are most definitely not going to want to miss! Our guest is Jereshia Hawk and she is here to tell us about how she switched from a big corporate job to selling her services online and increasing her salary in the process! Jereshia was working on huge, high profile engineering projects when she left her job and during this first year of going solo, she managed to double her salary! Sound amazing? We think so! She has subsequently taught her strategies to hundreds of people online and helped them get going on their own road to success.
A lot of what Jereshia teaches is a little different to the majority of information that is available online. She has a focus on grassroots growth that we just love! It was such a pleasure to have her on the show and the conversation is motivating and really informative for anyone looking to get out of their day job and start their own little thing. This topic is really near and dear to our hearts as Abagail started out on her own, selling services when she quit her corporate job and so much of what Jereshia says rings true for us. For a great conversation with a massively inspiring person, be sure to get it all on The Strategy Hour!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to the show, all you biz badasses, and money queens! Today we have a great episode in store for you that you are most definitely not going to want to miss! Our guest is Jereshia Hawk and she is here to tell us about how she switched from a big corporate job to selling her services online and increasing her salary in the process! Jereshia was working on huge, high profile engineering projects when she left her job and during this first year of going solo, she managed to double her salary! Sound amazing? We think so! She has subsequently taught her strategies to hundreds of people online and helped them get going on their own road to success.</p><p>A lot of what Jereshia teaches is a little different to the majority of information that is available online. She has a focus on grassroots growth that we just love! It was such a pleasure to have her on the show and the conversation is motivating and really informative for anyone looking to get out of their day job and start their own little thing. This topic is really near and dear to our hearts as Abagail started out on her own, selling services when she quit her corporate job and so much of what Jereshia says rings true for us. For a great conversation with a massively inspiring person, be sure to get it all on The Strategy Hour!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2383</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0d9e8ca40a404c89b46c6b5cbe12abbe]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5798110634.mp3?updated=1656010016" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>294: Hiring a Full Time Employee - Part 1</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/hiring-a-full-time-employee-part-1</link>
      <description>Hello all you wonderful listeners and welcome back to The Strategy Hour! Today we will be talking about a big step we took recently and when we say big, we mean really big! That’s right, we hired our first full time employee here at TCC and we are going to be talking all about the first part of this process and helping you think about this idea for yourselves. Before this everyone we have hired has been part time as a contractor and we were their client. To tell you the truth, we have been itching to get someone on board with more time and commitment to our business and this is when we decided to do it!
When someone is an actual full time employee everyone can get a lot more out of the relationship and knowing boundaries and how and when to do what can be a lot clearer. We do have to admit that there was some hesitation on our part due to going into the unknown. We had some concerns about what this would mean financially and legally and so we asked ourselves and others a lot of questions before getting serious. When we felt like these were answered and it was the right time, we got serious! As we cover during today’s conversation, our favorite book at the moment, Traction, came in handy for some helpful ways in which to go about this process. So join us as we break down this big step and hopefully get you thinking about your own big steps too!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 15 Jan 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Hiring a Full Time Employee - Part 1</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>294</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/1888a6a8-ae9b-11ec-91b1-837ba4a8da94/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We hired our first full time employee here at TCC and we are going to be talking all about the first part of this process and helping you think about this idea for yourselves</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hello all you wonderful listeners and welcome back to The Strategy Hour! Today we will be talking about a big step we took recently and when we say big, we mean really big! That’s right, we hired our first full time employee here at TCC and we are going to be talking all about the first part of this process and helping you think about this idea for yourselves. Before this everyone we have hired has been part time as a contractor and we were their client. To tell you the truth, we have been itching to get someone on board with more time and commitment to our business and this is when we decided to do it!
When someone is an actual full time employee everyone can get a lot more out of the relationship and knowing boundaries and how and when to do what can be a lot clearer. We do have to admit that there was some hesitation on our part due to going into the unknown. We had some concerns about what this would mean financially and legally and so we asked ourselves and others a lot of questions before getting serious. When we felt like these were answered and it was the right time, we got serious! As we cover during today’s conversation, our favorite book at the moment, Traction, came in handy for some helpful ways in which to go about this process. So join us as we break down this big step and hopefully get you thinking about your own big steps too!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hello all you wonderful listeners and welcome back to The Strategy Hour! Today we will be talking about a big step we took recently and when we say big, we mean really big! That’s right, we hired our first full time employee here at TCC and we are going to be talking all about the first part of this process and helping you think about this idea for yourselves. Before this everyone we have hired has been part time as a contractor and we were their client. To tell you the truth, we have been itching to get someone on board with more time and commitment to our business and this is when we decided to do it!</p><p>When someone is an actual full time employee everyone can get a lot more out of the relationship and knowing boundaries and how and when to do what can be a lot clearer. We do have to admit that there was some hesitation on our part due to going into the unknown. We had some concerns about what this would mean financially and legally and so we asked ourselves and others a lot of questions before getting serious. When we felt like these were answered and it was the right time, we got serious! As we cover during today’s conversation, our favorite book at the moment, Traction, came in handy for some helpful ways in which to go about this process. So join us as we break down this big step and hopefully get you thinking about your own big steps too!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1733</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7afcc34810a94e108f7c6167aaea64f7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5113509320.mp3?updated=1656010169" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>293: Reach Thousands of Your Ideal Customers Using Media with Christina Nicholson of Media Maven</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/reach-thousands-of-your-ideal-customers-using-media-with-christina-nicholson-of-media-maven</link>
      <description>Hey everybody and welcome back to The Strategy Hour! Today we are talking PR, media, and marketing with Christina Nicholson of the Media Maven. Christina was in news broadcasting for many years before she decided to start her PR firm and now helps businesses grow their brands by gaining exposure and using it wisely. Today’s show has Abagail riding solo as Emylee is away with a sick little one, but do not fear! It promises to be just as jam-packed and dynamic as usual with such an amazing guest.
Inside this episode, we will be talking about how to get more media coverage, utilizing it, getting comfortable in front of a camera and much more! Christina also talks about common mistakes and simple tips for getting the most of out of your PR. As an industry expert from the other side of the fence, Christina really has a lot of wisdom to share on how to get noticed, placed and present well. We get into reaching out, who are the best people to speak to, and ways to make the process of marketing yourself more enjoyable for better results. For all of this and a whole lot more, you know what to do!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 10 Jan 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Reach Thousands of Your Ideal Customers Using Media with Christina Nicholson of Media Maven</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>293</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/19340444-ae9b-11ec-91b1-03636015144b/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>How to get more media coverage, utilizing it, getting comfortable in front of a camera and much more! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey everybody and welcome back to The Strategy Hour! Today we are talking PR, media, and marketing with Christina Nicholson of the Media Maven. Christina was in news broadcasting for many years before she decided to start her PR firm and now helps businesses grow their brands by gaining exposure and using it wisely. Today’s show has Abagail riding solo as Emylee is away with a sick little one, but do not fear! It promises to be just as jam-packed and dynamic as usual with such an amazing guest.
Inside this episode, we will be talking about how to get more media coverage, utilizing it, getting comfortable in front of a camera and much more! Christina also talks about common mistakes and simple tips for getting the most of out of your PR. As an industry expert from the other side of the fence, Christina really has a lot of wisdom to share on how to get noticed, placed and present well. We get into reaching out, who are the best people to speak to, and ways to make the process of marketing yourself more enjoyable for better results. For all of this and a whole lot more, you know what to do!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey everybody and welcome back to The Strategy Hour! Today we are talking PR, media, and marketing with Christina Nicholson of the Media Maven. Christina was in news broadcasting for many years before she decided to start her PR firm and now helps businesses grow their brands by gaining exposure and using it wisely. Today’s show has Abagail riding solo as Emylee is away with a sick little one, but do not fear! It promises to be just as jam-packed and dynamic as usual with such an amazing guest.</p><p>Inside this episode, we will be talking about how to get more media coverage, utilizing it, getting comfortable in front of a camera and much more! Christina also talks about common mistakes and simple tips for getting the most of out of your PR. As an industry expert from the other side of the fence, Christina really has a lot of wisdom to share on how to get noticed, placed and present well. We get into reaching out, who are the best people to speak to, and ways to make the process of marketing yourself more enjoyable for better results. For all of this and a whole lot more, you know what to do!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2233</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c1848d33588c41e9b21c4b6855a89a3a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9356847723.mp3?updated=1656009896" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>292: Creating Your New Possibility</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-your-new-possibility</link>
      <description>On today’s show we are doing things a little bit differently, and taking you through a process that we at The Strategy Hour Podcast believe can make a world of difference in your life! This episode will be all about inventing a new possibility in your life, and you’ll see just what a shift this can make. Abagail tried out this exercise recently and found it super helpful and enlightening and so could not resist sharing it with our listeners. Full disclaimer though, it might be a bit of bumpy ride because let’s face it, most things that help you grow are not pain-free. But we promise you’ll thank us in the end!
Emylee will be going through the guided exercise for the first time during the episode and you can join in with her and we can all get down to the nitty gritty together! A lot of the time we deal with the positive and negative aspects of lives in repeated patterns of behavior that do not allow for very much progress. The process we will detail is simple and straightforward, yet it really provides a lot of insight and hope into how small adjustments can change our lives in big ways. So if you’re game, grab a piece of you favorite notepad and buckle in, we’re going deep!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 08 Jan 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating Your New Possibility</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>292</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/19c29a38-ae9b-11ec-91b1-176f820b1439/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Emylee will be going through the guided exercise for the first time during the episode and you can join in with her and we can all get down to the nitty gritty together! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s show we are doing things a little bit differently, and taking you through a process that we at The Strategy Hour Podcast believe can make a world of difference in your life! This episode will be all about inventing a new possibility in your life, and you’ll see just what a shift this can make. Abagail tried out this exercise recently and found it super helpful and enlightening and so could not resist sharing it with our listeners. Full disclaimer though, it might be a bit of bumpy ride because let’s face it, most things that help you grow are not pain-free. But we promise you’ll thank us in the end!
Emylee will be going through the guided exercise for the first time during the episode and you can join in with her and we can all get down to the nitty gritty together! A lot of the time we deal with the positive and negative aspects of lives in repeated patterns of behavior that do not allow for very much progress. The process we will detail is simple and straightforward, yet it really provides a lot of insight and hope into how small adjustments can change our lives in big ways. So if you’re game, grab a piece of you favorite notepad and buckle in, we’re going deep!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s show we are doing things a little bit differently, and taking you through a process that we at The Strategy Hour Podcast believe can make a world of difference in your life! This episode will be all about inventing a new possibility in your life, and you’ll see just what a shift this can make. Abagail tried out this exercise recently and found it super helpful and enlightening and so could not resist sharing it with our listeners. Full disclaimer though, it might be a bit of bumpy ride because let’s face it, most things that help you grow are not pain-free. But we promise you’ll thank us in the end!</p><p>Emylee will be going through the guided exercise for the first time during the episode and you can join in with her and we can all get down to the nitty gritty together! A lot of the time we deal with the positive and negative aspects of lives in repeated patterns of behavior that do not allow for very much progress. The process we will detail is simple and straightforward, yet it really provides a lot of insight and hope into how small adjustments can change our lives in big ways. So if you’re game, grab a piece of you favorite notepad and buckle in, we’re going deep!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2042</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[04c185c24096414fad76abf8c730e747]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5544163326.mp3?updated=1656009825" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>291: Scaling a Service Based Business with Parker Stevenson of Evolved Finance</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/scaling-your-service-based-business-with-parker-stevenson-of-evolved-finance</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have our work husband, Parker Stevenson. Parker is our bookkeeper, our CFO, business adviser, our friend, our friend-enemy and everything in between. You have probably heard us mention Parker throughout this podcast series. He is like the Where’s Waldo? Of TCC and an absolute hoot. Today, we are revealing the mystery of Parker Stevenson and are going to be talking all about scaling a service-based business. Instead of teaching you sexy bookkeeping things, Parker is actually going to talk about his own business and give you a peek into some of his own business strategies.
Parker went down the same rabbit hole that many entrepreneurs do, where he thought creating a passive online course program was going to be the solution for his business growth and scalability. But you’ll learn in the episode, how they decided it wasn’t going to work for them and why they decided to scale the service side of their business instead. Parker has a wealth of experience and is here to share with you why service-based businesses are severely underrated. If you are a new business owner or in the process of re-thinking your current online business model – this is definitely an episode you won’t want to miss!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 03 Jan 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Scaling a Service Based Business with Parker Stevenson of Evolved Finance</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>291</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/1a51fa16-ae9b-11ec-91b1-afe5047dc5e9/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Parker is actually going to talk about his own business and give you a peek into some of his own business strategies.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have our work husband, Parker Stevenson. Parker is our bookkeeper, our CFO, business adviser, our friend, our friend-enemy and everything in between. You have probably heard us mention Parker throughout this podcast series. He is like the Where’s Waldo? Of TCC and an absolute hoot. Today, we are revealing the mystery of Parker Stevenson and are going to be talking all about scaling a service-based business. Instead of teaching you sexy bookkeeping things, Parker is actually going to talk about his own business and give you a peek into some of his own business strategies.
Parker went down the same rabbit hole that many entrepreneurs do, where he thought creating a passive online course program was going to be the solution for his business growth and scalability. But you’ll learn in the episode, how they decided it wasn’t going to work for them and why they decided to scale the service side of their business instead. Parker has a wealth of experience and is here to share with you why service-based businesses are severely underrated. If you are a new business owner or in the process of re-thinking your current online business model – this is definitely an episode you won’t want to miss!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have our work husband, Parker Stevenson. Parker is our bookkeeper, our CFO, business adviser, our friend, our friend-enemy and everything in between. You have probably heard us mention Parker throughout this podcast series. He is like the <em>Where’s Waldo?</em> Of TCC and an absolute hoot. Today, we are revealing the mystery of Parker Stevenson and are going to be talking all about scaling a service-based business. Instead of teaching you sexy bookkeeping things, Parker is actually going to talk about his own business and give you a peek into some of his own business strategies.</p><p>Parker went down the same rabbit hole that many entrepreneurs do, where he thought creating a passive online course program was going to be the solution for his business growth and scalability. But you’ll learn in the episode, how they decided it wasn’t going to work for them and why they decided to scale the service side of their business instead. Parker has a wealth of experience and is here to share with you why service-based businesses are severely underrated. If you are a new business owner or in the process of re-thinking your current online business model – this is definitely an episode you won’t want to miss!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3063</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d29bf2ce5ef14f3b90e2112e994c9520]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6906775681.mp3?updated=1656009015" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>290: Our Words of the Year for 2019</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/our-words-of-the-year-for-2019</link>
      <description>Hello, all of you wonderful listeners! We are so glad to have you back for this very important episode of our podcast! You know what time of year it is and you know we have done this before. Yes, it is time for us to each choose a word of intention for the coming year and to make sure that 2019 is the best one yet! While preparing for this episode we listened back to some of our previous words and new years’ ideas and got some serious flashbacks! They feel so long ago but at the same time are still fresh in our minds.
Now we have to be honest, we came up with these words this morning! But at the same time we have probably been mentally preparing these ideas for ages now and in the episode you will hear all the background to why we chose our specific words and the pieces that came together to make this quick decision. We would also love to hear your own words for the coming year, so when you are done listening to this episode please share them with us, we would love to connect and affirm your choices. It is so impactful to communicate these ideas, it creates a sense of accountability and commitment!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 Jan 2019 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our Words of the Year for 2019</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>290</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/1ae262f4-ae9b-11ec-91b1-f71bcd4214b3/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle> Yes, it is time for us to each choose a word of intention for the coming year and to make sure that its the best one yet! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hello, all of you wonderful listeners! We are so glad to have you back for this very important episode of our podcast! You know what time of year it is and you know we have done this before. Yes, it is time for us to each choose a word of intention for the coming year and to make sure that 2019 is the best one yet! While preparing for this episode we listened back to some of our previous words and new years’ ideas and got some serious flashbacks! They feel so long ago but at the same time are still fresh in our minds.
Now we have to be honest, we came up with these words this morning! But at the same time we have probably been mentally preparing these ideas for ages now and in the episode you will hear all the background to why we chose our specific words and the pieces that came together to make this quick decision. We would also love to hear your own words for the coming year, so when you are done listening to this episode please share them with us, we would love to connect and affirm your choices. It is so impactful to communicate these ideas, it creates a sense of accountability and commitment!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hello, all of you wonderful listeners! We are so glad to have you back for this very important episode of our podcast! You know what time of year it is and you know we have done this before. Yes, it is time for us to each choose a word of intention for the coming year and to make sure that 2019 is the best one yet! While preparing for this episode we listened back to some of our previous words and new years’ ideas and got some serious flashbacks! They feel so long ago but at the same time are still fresh in our minds.</p><p>Now we have to be honest, we came up with these words this morning! But at the same time we have probably been mentally preparing these ideas for ages now and in the episode you will hear all the background to why we chose our specific words and the pieces that came together to make this quick decision. We would also love to hear your own words for the coming year, so when you are done listening to this episode please share them with us, we would love to connect and affirm your choices. It is so impactful to communicate these ideas, it creates a sense of accountability and commitment!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1721</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5f229ce7a04442c0a8317c17ae301513]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8401537658.mp3?updated=1656008508" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>289: How to Build an Engaged Community Online and IRL with Ashley Knight of Hello Boss</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-build-an-engaged-community-online-and-irl-with-ashley-knight-of-hello-boss</link>
      <description>On today’s episode, we are super-duper excited to host Ashley Knight of The Hello Boss Community. Ashley founded the community as a means to support and bolster other businesswomen who were in the same boat as her. Through her group, she is able to teach and coach strategy to an ever-growing number of dedicated members and she loves it! And we love her for it! Here at the Strategy Hour Podcast we know the value the of groups we have run and been a part of, they can be the lifeboat bringing you back in when you are out at sea, so we know exactly what Ashley is talking about!
In our discussion, we cover the early stages of starting a supportive community, relationships within this space, real-world events, social media, sensitivity masterminds and much more. Ashley is one of the most dedicated community founders we have spoken to and we are sure her attitude and advice is going to be wonderfully useful and inspiring to all of out listeners. So whether you are part of an online community or looking to start one yourself, this is definitely the episode for you. Listen in to get the low-down.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 27 Dec 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Build an Engaged Community Online and IRL with Ashley Knight of Hello Boss</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>289</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/1b6781dc-ae9b-11ec-91b1-6fc6883d9010/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>In our discussion, we cover the early stages of starting a supportive community, relationships within this space, real-world events, social media, sensitivity masterminds and much more.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s episode, we are super-duper excited to host Ashley Knight of The Hello Boss Community. Ashley founded the community as a means to support and bolster other businesswomen who were in the same boat as her. Through her group, she is able to teach and coach strategy to an ever-growing number of dedicated members and she loves it! And we love her for it! Here at the Strategy Hour Podcast we know the value the of groups we have run and been a part of, they can be the lifeboat bringing you back in when you are out at sea, so we know exactly what Ashley is talking about!
In our discussion, we cover the early stages of starting a supportive community, relationships within this space, real-world events, social media, sensitivity masterminds and much more. Ashley is one of the most dedicated community founders we have spoken to and we are sure her attitude and advice is going to be wonderfully useful and inspiring to all of out listeners. So whether you are part of an online community or looking to start one yourself, this is definitely the episode for you. Listen in to get the low-down.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s episode, we are super-duper excited to host Ashley Knight of The Hello Boss Community. Ashley founded the community as a means to support and bolster other businesswomen who were in the same boat as her. Through her group, she is able to teach and coach strategy to an ever-growing number of dedicated members and she loves it! And we love her for it! Here at the Strategy Hour Podcast we know the value the of groups we have run and been a part of, they can be the lifeboat bringing you back in when you are out at sea, so we know exactly what Ashley is talking about!</p><p>In our discussion, we cover the early stages of starting a supportive community, relationships within this space, real-world events, social media, sensitivity masterminds and much more. Ashley is one of the most dedicated community founders we have spoken to and we are sure her attitude and advice is going to be wonderfully useful and inspiring to all of out listeners. So whether you are part of an online community or looking to start one yourself, this is definitely the episode for you. Listen in to get the low-down.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2321</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[92244ed382d140e49f7c6b014284884b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2711014347.mp3?updated=1656008379" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>288: 7 Productivity Hacks for the New Year</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/7-productivity-hacks-for-the-new-year</link>
      <description>In this episode, we dive into seven habits that we believe lead to a more productive life and a more productive business. These seven habits will ultimately help you achieve the goals and dreams you are seeking – whether those are personal or financial. You are one person, with multiple facets, and you can’t play blind to the fact that you have a life outside of work! We want to incorporate that into living a lifestyle that gets you where you want to go. These seven habits have been monitored over time in our own business. Whenever we are incredibly productive, we take a look at everything that we were doing over that time and ask, “What was a constant? What habits combined aided our productivity?”
A lot of people ask us what is it that makes us so productive, and everyone seems to be waiting for that miracle answer. But the reason why we are covering seven habits is because it is never just one thing. It’s never just one thing you do that helps you sell more, or get more people on your list, or land more clients. It is a combination of things that helps to create a successful business and a successful human being. So take a listen and learn more about the seven habits we focus on that have led to more productivity in our lives and how it can lead to more productivity in your life too.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 25 Dec 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>7 Productivity Hacks for the New Year</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>288</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/1c00241e-ae9b-11ec-91b1-678cf5efdc98/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>These seven habits will ultimately help you achieve the goals and dreams you are seeking – whether those are personal or financial. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode, we dive into seven habits that we believe lead to a more productive life and a more productive business. These seven habits will ultimately help you achieve the goals and dreams you are seeking – whether those are personal or financial. You are one person, with multiple facets, and you can’t play blind to the fact that you have a life outside of work! We want to incorporate that into living a lifestyle that gets you where you want to go. These seven habits have been monitored over time in our own business. Whenever we are incredibly productive, we take a look at everything that we were doing over that time and ask, “What was a constant? What habits combined aided our productivity?”
A lot of people ask us what is it that makes us so productive, and everyone seems to be waiting for that miracle answer. But the reason why we are covering seven habits is because it is never just one thing. It’s never just one thing you do that helps you sell more, or get more people on your list, or land more clients. It is a combination of things that helps to create a successful business and a successful human being. So take a listen and learn more about the seven habits we focus on that have led to more productivity in our lives and how it can lead to more productivity in your life too.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode, we dive into seven habits that we believe lead to a more productive life and a more productive business. These seven habits will ultimately help you achieve the goals and dreams you are seeking – whether those are personal or financial. You are one person, with multiple facets, and you can’t play blind to the fact that you have a life outside of work! We want to incorporate that into living a lifestyle that gets you where you want to go. These seven habits have been monitored over time in our own business. Whenever we are incredibly productive, we take a look at everything that we were doing over that time and ask, “What was a constant? What habits combined aided our productivity?”</p><p>A lot of people ask us what is it that makes us so productive, and everyone seems to be waiting for that miracle answer. But the reason why we are covering seven habits is because it is never just one thing. It’s never just one thing you do that helps you sell more, or get more people on your list, or land more clients. It is a combination of things that helps to create a successful business and a successful human being. So take a listen and learn more about the seven habits we focus on that have led to more productivity in our lives and how it can lead to more productivity in your life too.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1636</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d54fd55c814345b8aa05565eab9a70d8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6306272976.mp3?updated=1656008239" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>287: Lessons in Name Changes and How to Truly Run a Business That Serves First with Nathan Barry of Convertkit</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/lessons-in-name-changes-and-how-to-truly-run-a-business-that-serves-first-with-nathan-barry-of-convertkit</link>
      <description>We have such a great episode for all of you today, we literally cannot wait to share it! Today on the Strategy Hour we host Nathan Barry from ConvertKit! Now it may come as a bit of surprise he is not actually here to talk about email marketing and funnels and all that good stuff that we all love him for, but rather he is going to explain the big changes that almost happened at ConvertKit this year. We say almost because, for those who might not know, ConvertKit, the hugely successful and constantly growing company almost changed their name during the summer and then decided not to. So Nathan is here to give the low down on this experience, how it all transpired and the lessons he and the company took away from it.
There is so much to learn in the episode so grab whatever you need. Maybe even some tissues because it gets a little emotional! We chat about handling audience reactions, moving forward with ConvertKit, difficult conversations, the big lessons, and much more! This conversation is such a true and honest reflection on a difficult and potentially disastrous process and it is not often we all get to have such an inside scoop on a true industry leader. So without much more ado, let’s dive right in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 20 Dec 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Lessons in Name Changes and How to Truly Run a Business That Serves First with Nathan Barry of Convertkit</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>287</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/1c8cc5ae-ae9b-11ec-91b1-13999983f85c/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>ConvertKit almost changed their name during the summer and then decided not to. Nathan is here to give the low down on this experience, how it all transpired and the lessons he and the company took away from it.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We have such a great episode for all of you today, we literally cannot wait to share it! Today on the Strategy Hour we host Nathan Barry from ConvertKit! Now it may come as a bit of surprise he is not actually here to talk about email marketing and funnels and all that good stuff that we all love him for, but rather he is going to explain the big changes that almost happened at ConvertKit this year. We say almost because, for those who might not know, ConvertKit, the hugely successful and constantly growing company almost changed their name during the summer and then decided not to. So Nathan is here to give the low down on this experience, how it all transpired and the lessons he and the company took away from it.
There is so much to learn in the episode so grab whatever you need. Maybe even some tissues because it gets a little emotional! We chat about handling audience reactions, moving forward with ConvertKit, difficult conversations, the big lessons, and much more! This conversation is such a true and honest reflection on a difficult and potentially disastrous process and it is not often we all get to have such an inside scoop on a true industry leader. So without much more ado, let’s dive right in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We have such a great episode for all of you today, we literally cannot wait to share it! Today on the Strategy Hour we host Nathan Barry from ConvertKit! Now it may come as a bit of surprise he is not actually here to talk about email marketing and funnels and all that good stuff that we all love him for, but rather he is going to explain the big changes that almost happened at ConvertKit this year. We say almost because, for those who might not know, ConvertKit, the hugely successful and constantly growing company almost changed their name during the summer and then decided not to. So Nathan is here to give the low down on this experience, how it all transpired and the lessons he and the company took away from it.</p><p>There is so much to learn in the episode so grab whatever you need. Maybe even some tissues because it gets a little emotional! We chat about handling audience reactions, moving forward with ConvertKit, difficult conversations, the big lessons, and much more! This conversation is such a true and honest reflection on a difficult and potentially disastrous process and it is not often we all get to have such an inside scoop on a true industry leader. So without much more ado, let’s dive right in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2553</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1dd24f5b07a345f28cc417f398ccf28a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2142910850.mp3?updated=1656008045" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>286: Haven't Planned 2019 Yet? This Is How You Can Do It In a Day</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/havent-planned-2019-yet-this-is-how-you-can-do-it-in-a-day</link>
      <description>Hello and welcome everybody to another episode of your favorite podcast! We are doing all the end of year round-ups, reflections and strategy activities and today is all about getting that planning in for next year. We cannot believe 2018 is basically already over, it has just flown by and we are pretty sure you feel the same way! So if you have not yet got down to planning things for you and your biz, this is just what you need to get started and crush that session. We all need things on our calendars so we do not go stumbling blindly into the next rotation around the sun. So why not get down to it with us? We got you!
We will also be giving a few sneak peeks into what we will be doing next year, so you are not going to want to miss that juicy info! We chat about making time for your planning session and how to prepare successfully as well as getting into some of the key aspects of realistic and inspiring goal setting. A key takeaway from today is how to look at the drivers of your goals and using this information to make more accurate and helpful plans. On top of this, we give a few frameworks and suggestions, things that have helped us immensely in the past and we finish off today’s show with some failsafes, so you don’t do a lot of planning only to forget about it a few months into the new year. So for all that and more, join us on today’s episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 18 Dec 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Haven't Planned 2019 Yet? This Is How You Can Do It In a Day</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>286</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/1d3371ce-ae9b-11ec-91b1-6b3e114f14f6/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We all need things on our calendars so we do not go stumbling blindly into the next rotation around the sun. So why not get down to it with us? </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hello and welcome everybody to another episode of your favorite podcast! We are doing all the end of year round-ups, reflections and strategy activities and today is all about getting that planning in for next year. We cannot believe 2018 is basically already over, it has just flown by and we are pretty sure you feel the same way! So if you have not yet got down to planning things for you and your biz, this is just what you need to get started and crush that session. We all need things on our calendars so we do not go stumbling blindly into the next rotation around the sun. So why not get down to it with us? We got you!
We will also be giving a few sneak peeks into what we will be doing next year, so you are not going to want to miss that juicy info! We chat about making time for your planning session and how to prepare successfully as well as getting into some of the key aspects of realistic and inspiring goal setting. A key takeaway from today is how to look at the drivers of your goals and using this information to make more accurate and helpful plans. On top of this, we give a few frameworks and suggestions, things that have helped us immensely in the past and we finish off today’s show with some failsafes, so you don’t do a lot of planning only to forget about it a few months into the new year. So for all that and more, join us on today’s episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hello and welcome everybody to another episode of your favorite podcast! We are doing all the end of year round-ups, reflections and strategy activities and today is all about getting that planning in for next year. We cannot believe 2018 is basically already over, it has just flown by and we are pretty sure you feel the same way! So if you have not yet got down to planning things for you and your biz, this is just what you need to get started and crush that session. We all need things on our calendars so we do not go stumbling blindly into the next rotation around the sun. So why not get down to it with us? We got you!</p><p>We will also be giving a few sneak peeks into what we will be doing next year, so you are not going to want to miss that juicy info! We chat about making time for your planning session and how to prepare successfully as well as getting into some of the key aspects of realistic and inspiring goal setting. A key takeaway from today is how to look at the drivers of your goals and using this information to make more accurate and helpful plans. On top of this, we give a few frameworks and suggestions, things that have helped us immensely in the past and we finish off today’s show with some failsafes, so you don’t do a lot of planning only to forget about it a few months into the new year. So for all that and more, join us on today’s episode!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1870</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[de71cfa52353451db55c422525635789]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1740360175.mp3?updated=1656007839" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>285: When Leaving Your Business to Work For Someone Else Makes Sense With Indigo Colton</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/when-leaving-your-business-to-work-for-someone-else-makes-sense-with-indigo-colton</link>
      <description>Hello, all of you beautiful people and wonderful biz queens! Today on the show we are super happy to be speaking to our friend Indigo Colton about the recent switch she made from running her own business to become a full-time employee at someone else’s company. We think this topic has not really been covered enough and it is really an important subject to understand if this question ever arises for you. We will be hearing from Indigo about her thought process, the deciding factors and some of the potential red flags. For Indigo, the change was the right move and we will try and unpack why that is the case so hopefully you can keep making the right choices for yourselves!
Some of you may already know Indigo but this peek inside her mind is a great way to get to know another side of her. We have a really interesting conversation that we know you are going to love! We have noticed that people seem to be a little hesitant to share their own experiences and inner workings on this subject, so it is just great to have an open and honest conversation about these things. We will be covering the feeling of going from being your own boss to the position of an employee, benefits, and things that can be learned at another business, networking possibilities and all of Indigo’s ideas and feelings in-between! So let’s get right down to it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 13 Dec 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>When Leaving Your Business to Work For Someone Else Makes Sense With Indigo Colton</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>285</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/1dc12af0-ae9b-11ec-91b1-67ec18733a30/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We will be hearing from Indigo about her thought process, the deciding factors and some of the potential red flags.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hello, all of you beautiful people and wonderful biz queens! Today on the show we are super happy to be speaking to our friend Indigo Colton about the recent switch she made from running her own business to become a full-time employee at someone else’s company. We think this topic has not really been covered enough and it is really an important subject to understand if this question ever arises for you. We will be hearing from Indigo about her thought process, the deciding factors and some of the potential red flags. For Indigo, the change was the right move and we will try and unpack why that is the case so hopefully you can keep making the right choices for yourselves!
Some of you may already know Indigo but this peek inside her mind is a great way to get to know another side of her. We have a really interesting conversation that we know you are going to love! We have noticed that people seem to be a little hesitant to share their own experiences and inner workings on this subject, so it is just great to have an open and honest conversation about these things. We will be covering the feeling of going from being your own boss to the position of an employee, benefits, and things that can be learned at another business, networking possibilities and all of Indigo’s ideas and feelings in-between! So let’s get right down to it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hello, all of you beautiful people and wonderful biz queens! Today on the show we are super happy to be speaking to our friend Indigo Colton about the recent switch she made from running her own business to become a full-time employee at someone else’s company. We think this topic has not really been covered enough and it is really an important subject to understand if this question ever arises for you. We will be hearing from Indigo about her thought process, the deciding factors and some of the potential red flags. For Indigo, the change was the right move and we will try and unpack why that is the case so hopefully you can keep making the right choices for yourselves!</p><p>Some of you may already know Indigo but this peek inside her mind is a great way to get to know another side of her. We have a really interesting conversation that we know you are going to love! We have noticed that people seem to be a little hesitant to share their own experiences and inner workings on this subject, so it is just great to have an open and honest conversation about these things. We will be covering the feeling of going from being your own boss to the position of an employee, benefits, and things that can be learned at another business, networking possibilities and all of Indigo’s ideas and feelings in-between! So let’s get right down to it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1938</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7d740af43d8f4ecc9e5723a76d44463b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9553614231.mp3?updated=1655857284" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>284: Lessons from 2018 - Scaling, Creating Connections, and Personal Growth</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/lessons-from-2018-scaling-creating-connections-personal-growth</link>
      <description>Hey everybody! Welcome to our round up of the lessons we learned in 2018! As usual we learned a lot, if not more during this last year, so we have so much to share with all of you. You also know we love reflecting and reviewing and this podcast will basically be a fleshing out of all the important steps we took and progress we made in our business. We are hoping that you will follow along with us and do the same sort of thing with your biz! Hopefully ours will give you some ideas of how to reflect on the past year and the important points that came out of it.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 11 Dec 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Lessons from 2018 - Scaling, Creating Connections, and Personal Growth</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>284</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/1e65a922-ae9b-11ec-91b1-d7245b78ac62/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>A fleshing out of all the important steps we took and progress we made in our business.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey everybody! Welcome to our round up of the lessons we learned in 2018! As usual we learned a lot, if not more during this last year, so we have so much to share with all of you. You also know we love reflecting and reviewing and this podcast will basically be a fleshing out of all the important steps we took and progress we made in our business. We are hoping that you will follow along with us and do the same sort of thing with your biz! Hopefully ours will give you some ideas of how to reflect on the past year and the important points that came out of it.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey everybody! Welcome to our round up of the lessons we learned in 2018! As usual we learned a lot, if not more during this last year, so we have so much to share with all of you. You also know we love reflecting and reviewing and this podcast will basically be a fleshing out of all the important steps we took and progress we made in our business. We are hoping that you will follow along with us and do the same sort of thing with your biz! Hopefully ours will give you some ideas of how to reflect on the past year and the important points that came out of it.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2470</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[07be8a3ddd0a4b268e6c4c58e15389f5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4497334155.mp3?updated=1655857120" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>283: Boss Talk - Is it Possible for Someone with Mindset Issues to Get Past Them and Succeed Or are Successful People just Naturally in the Right Place</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/boss-talk-is-it-possible-for-someone-with-mindset-issues-to-get-past-them-and-succeed-or-are-successful-people-just-naturally-in-the-right-place</link>
      <description>Hello everyone and welcome back to The Strategy Hour! Today we are once again joined by our friend Steph Crowder for a Boss Talk session and we will be discussing the role of mindset in defining success. These episodes are definitely some of our favorites and it is always a pleasure having Steph sit down for a dive into an interesting subject. We actually stole this topic straight from her and she dug into her deep archives and pulled this one out just for our listeners. We will really be considering how to get passed mindset issues and how differently we combat these problems. It is such a great question and we cannot wait to unpack it right here on Boss Talk!
The discussion covers a meditation on different kinds of mindsets and attitudes and how these impact levels of success. We then go on to talk about grit, determination, and perseverance and how vital these qualities are in any type of achievement. The topics of nature and nurture are also relevant and a large takeaway from today is that we do not start on an even playing field but we do get to decide how we play the game and when we get back up from a fall. For an inspiring chat with a great soul-sister of ours, be sure to tune in! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 06 Dec 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Boss Talk - Is it Possible for Someone with Mindset Issues to Get Past Them and Succeed Or are Successful People just Naturally in the Right Place</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>283</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/1f05413a-ae9b-11ec-91b1-572e95b82f77/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle> We discuss the role of mindset in defining success with Steph Crowder</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hello everyone and welcome back to The Strategy Hour! Today we are once again joined by our friend Steph Crowder for a Boss Talk session and we will be discussing the role of mindset in defining success. These episodes are definitely some of our favorites and it is always a pleasure having Steph sit down for a dive into an interesting subject. We actually stole this topic straight from her and she dug into her deep archives and pulled this one out just for our listeners. We will really be considering how to get passed mindset issues and how differently we combat these problems. It is such a great question and we cannot wait to unpack it right here on Boss Talk!
The discussion covers a meditation on different kinds of mindsets and attitudes and how these impact levels of success. We then go on to talk about grit, determination, and perseverance and how vital these qualities are in any type of achievement. The topics of nature and nurture are also relevant and a large takeaway from today is that we do not start on an even playing field but we do get to decide how we play the game and when we get back up from a fall. For an inspiring chat with a great soul-sister of ours, be sure to tune in! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hello everyone and welcome back to The Strategy Hour! Today we are once again joined by our friend Steph Crowder for a Boss Talk session and we will be discussing the role of mindset in defining success. These episodes are definitely some of our favorites and it is always a pleasure having Steph sit down for a dive into an interesting subject. We actually stole this topic straight from her and she dug into her deep archives and pulled this one out just for our listeners. We will really be considering how to get passed mindset issues and how differently we combat these problems. It is such a great question and we cannot wait to unpack it right here on Boss Talk!</p><p>The discussion covers a meditation on different kinds of mindsets and attitudes and how these impact levels of success. We then go on to talk about grit, determination, and perseverance and how vital these qualities are in any type of achievement. The topics of nature and nurture are also relevant and a large takeaway from today is that we do not start on an even playing field but we do get to decide how we play the game and when we get back up from a fall. For an inspiring chat with a great soul-sister of ours, be sure to tune in! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2226</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[55ce413bd2864189a26dbba89d28a3a2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1740305027.mp3?updated=1655857012" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>282: How the Book "Traction" Changed Our Business Trajectory</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-the-book-traction-changed-our-business-trajectory</link>
      <description>Hello everybody and welcome back to our podcast! Today’s show is almost like a grown-up book review project, so just imagine us handing in a report and giving a presentation at the front of the classroom! The reason we are going back to school for this one is because the book in question has made such an impact on both of us and TCC as a whole, since we recently read it, that we just could not wait to share it with all of you. Today we will be talking about Traction by Gino Wickman and how it immediately changed our trajectory and gave us so many tools for our biz. We know you are going to love them all! We cannot say this enough, whatever stage of your business you are in, go read it! The book has so many great strategies and this is the Strategy Hour, after all, so there you go!
Today we will be looking at a few of the exercises and frameworks that Wickman offers in the book, which cover goal setting, company roles, vision and loads of other good stuff. We guarantee that these tools will change your biz for the better, forever! The book contains fun and engaging quizzes and activities and we really recommend that you use it as a kind of workbook, moving through it with your own projects and departments. We will definitely be following this episode up sometime in the not too distant future with a report back on the effects of the framework, so keep your eyes and ears peeled for that sometime next year. So without more fuss, let’s get down to it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 04 Dec 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>282: How the Book "Traction" Changed Our Business Trajectory</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>282</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/1f99c03a-ae9b-11ec-91b1-bbd7e780c5ea/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>How the book "Traction" by Gino Wickman immediately changed our trajectory and gave us so many tools for our biz.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hello everybody and welcome back to our podcast! Today’s show is almost like a grown-up book review project, so just imagine us handing in a report and giving a presentation at the front of the classroom! The reason we are going back to school for this one is because the book in question has made such an impact on both of us and TCC as a whole, since we recently read it, that we just could not wait to share it with all of you. Today we will be talking about Traction by Gino Wickman and how it immediately changed our trajectory and gave us so many tools for our biz. We know you are going to love them all! We cannot say this enough, whatever stage of your business you are in, go read it! The book has so many great strategies and this is the Strategy Hour, after all, so there you go!
Today we will be looking at a few of the exercises and frameworks that Wickman offers in the book, which cover goal setting, company roles, vision and loads of other good stuff. We guarantee that these tools will change your biz for the better, forever! The book contains fun and engaging quizzes and activities and we really recommend that you use it as a kind of workbook, moving through it with your own projects and departments. We will definitely be following this episode up sometime in the not too distant future with a report back on the effects of the framework, so keep your eyes and ears peeled for that sometime next year. So without more fuss, let’s get down to it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hello everybody and welcome back to our podcast! Today’s show is almost like a grown-up book review project, so just imagine us handing in a report and giving a presentation at the front of the classroom! The reason we are going back to school for this one is because the book in question has made such an impact on both of us and TCC as a whole, since we recently read it, that we just could not wait to share it with all of you. Today we will be talking about <em>Traction</em> by Gino Wickman and how it immediately changed our trajectory and gave us so many tools for our biz. We know you are going to love them all! We cannot say this enough, whatever stage of your business you are in, go read it! The book has so many great strategies and this is the Strategy Hour, after all, so there you go!</p><p>Today we will be looking at a few of the exercises and frameworks that Wickman offers in the book, which cover goal setting, company roles, vision and loads of other good stuff. We guarantee that these tools will change your biz for the better, forever! The book contains fun and engaging quizzes and activities and we really recommend that you use it as a kind of workbook, moving through it with your own projects and departments. We will definitely be following this episode up sometime in the not too distant future with a report back on the effects of the framework, so keep your eyes and ears peeled for that sometime next year. So without more fuss, let’s get down to it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2398</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e50672dd1a674049b97173910e11bee7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4802672804.mp3?updated=1655856823" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>281: Using the Good Better Best Method for Goal Setting Partner Buy-In with Megan Hale</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/using-the-good-better-best-method-for-goal-setting-partner-buy-in-with-megan-hale</link>
      <description>Hello listeners, and welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast. Today we are so lucky to have our friend Megan Hale to chat to us about the newest goal setting method she has adopted! What better time to talk about goal setting than November as we reach the end of another busy year and look forward to the next one. If you haven’t already started planning for 2019 then this episode is a great place to start! Megan found a way through one of the most challenging and action-packed years of her life and somehow managed, through all the commitments, to have her most successful and profitable calendar year yet, which we think is just crazy!
Having a baby at the beginning of January and her husband leaving on military deployment soon after was not quite the comfortable start to the year that many of us might hope for. Let’s just say that with her business to boot, she had a lot on her plate! Anyway, prompted by this chock-a-block schedule she decided to start laying out some goals and what followed, quickly became her Good, Better, Best model, which immediately helped to achieve and exceed her minimum goals. Sound great? We think so! Megan does a great job of unpacking all of the juicy and useful parts of this. So stay tuned to hear how you can get a complimentary template from Megan to start you off!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 29 Nov 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Using the Good Better Best Method for Goal Setting Partner Buy-In with Megan Hale</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>281</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2033cfae-ae9b-11ec-91b1-afdf5c95ce62/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Prompted by her chock-a-block schedule, Megan decided to start laying out some goals and what followed quickly became her Good, Better, Best model, which immediately helped to achieve and exceed her minimum goals.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hello listeners, and welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast. Today we are so lucky to have our friend Megan Hale to chat to us about the newest goal setting method she has adopted! What better time to talk about goal setting than November as we reach the end of another busy year and look forward to the next one. If you haven’t already started planning for 2019 then this episode is a great place to start! Megan found a way through one of the most challenging and action-packed years of her life and somehow managed, through all the commitments, to have her most successful and profitable calendar year yet, which we think is just crazy!
Having a baby at the beginning of January and her husband leaving on military deployment soon after was not quite the comfortable start to the year that many of us might hope for. Let’s just say that with her business to boot, she had a lot on her plate! Anyway, prompted by this chock-a-block schedule she decided to start laying out some goals and what followed, quickly became her Good, Better, Best model, which immediately helped to achieve and exceed her minimum goals. Sound great? We think so! Megan does a great job of unpacking all of the juicy and useful parts of this. So stay tuned to hear how you can get a complimentary template from Megan to start you off!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hello listeners, and welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast. Today we are so lucky to have our friend Megan Hale to chat to us about the newest goal setting method she has adopted! What better time to talk about goal setting than November as we reach the end of another busy year and look forward to the next one. If you haven’t already started planning for 2019 then this episode is a great place to start! Megan found a way through one of the most challenging and action-packed years of her life and somehow managed, through all the commitments, to have her most successful and profitable calendar year yet, which we think is just crazy!</p><p>Having a baby at the beginning of January and her husband leaving on military deployment soon after was not quite the comfortable start to the year that many of us might hope for. Let’s just say that with her business to boot, she had a lot on her plate! Anyway, prompted by this chock-a-block schedule she decided to start laying out some goals and what followed, quickly became her Good, Better, Best model, which immediately helped to achieve and exceed her minimum goals. Sound great? We think so! Megan does a great job of unpacking all of the juicy and useful parts of this. So stay tuned to hear how you can get a complimentary template from Megan to start you off!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2273</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ae83975cdad4472bbfb873d61aaef92f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7168285704.mp3?updated=1655856659" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>280: Why We Take Every December Off And How You Can Too</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-we-take-every-december-off-and-how-you-can-too</link>
      <description>Welcome back to another episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast. Today we are diving into why we take every December off. Now the truth is, we love you all, but we are tired! Our brains hurt, our throats hurt, and it’s time to take some time away. Life can get incredibly busy, especially around the holiday season, and sometimes that can be just too much to handle on top of running a business full-time. We all know that as Murphy’s Law would have it, everything happens all at once; business picks up, family events are scheduled, big life changes happen, you name it!
So inside this episode, we are diving into exactly why we have adopted this strategy of taking the month of December off, and what it has done for our business and our personal lives. We also dig into exactly how we manage to prepare and plan ahead with our team to be able to pull it off. Finally, we share all the juicy details to help you do it too. That’s right, you can do it too! Just take what you learn here from us today, see how you can apply it directly to your business, and jump on the magical train to free Decembers!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 27 Nov 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why We Take Every December Off And How You Can Too</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>280</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/20bfcbd0-ae9b-11ec-91b1-6fea963d276a/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We share what this has done for our business and personal lives and how we prepare and plan ahead with our team to be able to pull it off.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to another episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast. Today we are diving into why we take every December off. Now the truth is, we love you all, but we are tired! Our brains hurt, our throats hurt, and it’s time to take some time away. Life can get incredibly busy, especially around the holiday season, and sometimes that can be just too much to handle on top of running a business full-time. We all know that as Murphy’s Law would have it, everything happens all at once; business picks up, family events are scheduled, big life changes happen, you name it!
So inside this episode, we are diving into exactly why we have adopted this strategy of taking the month of December off, and what it has done for our business and our personal lives. We also dig into exactly how we manage to prepare and plan ahead with our team to be able to pull it off. Finally, we share all the juicy details to help you do it too. That’s right, you can do it too! Just take what you learn here from us today, see how you can apply it directly to your business, and jump on the magical train to free Decembers!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to another episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast. Today we are diving into why we take every December off. Now the truth is, we love you all, but we are tired! Our brains hurt, our throats hurt, and it’s time to take some time away. Life can get incredibly busy, especially around the holiday season, and sometimes that can be just too much to handle on top of running a business full-time. We all know that as Murphy’s Law would have it, everything happens all at once; business picks up, family events are scheduled, big life changes happen, you name it!</p><p>So inside this episode, we are diving into exactly why we have adopted this strategy of taking the month of December off, and what it has done for our business and our personal lives. We also dig into exactly how we manage to prepare and plan ahead with our team to be able to pull it off. Finally, we share all the juicy details to help you do it too. That’s right, you can do it too! Just take what you learn here from us today, see how you can apply it directly to your business, and jump on the magical train to free Decembers!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1213</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cc6a2ea7961e4f43b61b8432c97308da]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1704143235.mp3?updated=1663452583" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>279: Boss Talk - How Do You Deal with People Not Understanding What You Do for a Living</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/boss-talk-how-do-you-deal-with-people-not-understanding-what-you-do-for-a-living-with-courtney-foster-donahue</link>
      <description>Hello all you business badasses and wonderful women! We are so glad to have you here for yet another episode of our little podcast. This week The Strategy Hour is all about dealing with what can be a very tricky and irritating problem. Yup, you guessed it: how can you go about approaching the issue of people not understanding what your job really is? Most of us as entrepreneurs and online business owners have encountered this dynamic in some way and it can be pretty tiresome and not infrequent!
So what are we to say and do in these situations? Whether it’s at a family gathering or in another social or business setting, we want to talk a little about what it’s like and share a few ideas on how to deal with this. To help us unpack the issue we have invited our dear friend Courtney Foster-Donahue who shares our frustrations in these regards and she has some great advice for all of you introverts out there that you are not going to want to miss. So without further ado, let’s get into it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 22 Nov 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>279: Boss Talk - How Do You Deal with People Not Understanding What You Do for a Living</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>279</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2162b5ca-ae9b-11ec-91b1-6f1e4129974e/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Whether it’s at a family gathering or in another social or business setting, we want to talk a little about what it’s like and share a few ideas on how to deal with this. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hello all you business badasses and wonderful women! We are so glad to have you here for yet another episode of our little podcast. This week The Strategy Hour is all about dealing with what can be a very tricky and irritating problem. Yup, you guessed it: how can you go about approaching the issue of people not understanding what your job really is? Most of us as entrepreneurs and online business owners have encountered this dynamic in some way and it can be pretty tiresome and not infrequent!
So what are we to say and do in these situations? Whether it’s at a family gathering or in another social or business setting, we want to talk a little about what it’s like and share a few ideas on how to deal with this. To help us unpack the issue we have invited our dear friend Courtney Foster-Donahue who shares our frustrations in these regards and she has some great advice for all of you introverts out there that you are not going to want to miss. So without further ado, let’s get into it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hello all you business badasses and wonderful women! We are so glad to have you here for yet another episode of our little podcast. This week The Strategy Hour is all about dealing with what can be a very tricky and irritating problem. Yup, you guessed it: how can you go about approaching the issue of people not understanding what your job really is? Most of us as entrepreneurs and online business owners have encountered this dynamic in some way and it can be pretty tiresome and not infrequent!</p><p>So what are we to say and do in these situations? Whether it’s at a family gathering or in another social or business setting, we want to talk a little about what it’s like and share a few ideas on how to deal with this. To help us unpack the issue we have invited our dear friend Courtney Foster-Donahue who shares our frustrations in these regards and she has some great advice for all of you introverts out there that you are not going to want to miss. So without further ado, let’s get into it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2341</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b2491f2225b94810924bdd803aafe410]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7438003738.mp3?updated=1655856517" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>278:  A Breakdown of the Boss Project Summit - 77k in Sales 380k Minutes Watched 171k Messages Delivered and Counting</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/a-breakdown-of-the-boss-project-summit-77k-in-sales-380k-minutes-watched-171k-messages-delivered-counting</link>
      <description>Welcome back to the show! Today’s episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast is a breakdown of our recent amazing and wonderful Boss Project Summit! This was pretty much the biggest thing we have ever done at TCC and it has just wrapped, so what better to talk about than that? This behind the scenes look at the summit and the statistics that came out of it is just a taste of things to come. The few days over which we held the event had a massive impact and we had fun and made money and we cannot wait to share more of the in-depth information we have gathered.
Bear in mind that it is still early stages in terms of the outcomes, which we will continue to collect and collate, but there is definitely more than enough to talk about today and give you the inside scoop after all the madness! We would be amiss not to send out a big thank you to everyone who made the summit possible and we are eternally grateful to our sponsors, contributors, the participants, and each other for bringing this great thing to life! We have to admit that we are already thinking about the next time and how we might make it better, stronger, and more of everything it was this time!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 20 Nov 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>A Breakdown of the Boss Project Summit - 77k in Sales 380k Minutes Watched 171k Messages Delivered and Counting</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>278</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2200d7f0-ae9b-11ec-91b1-87e02717a8f1/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome back to the show! Today’s episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast is a breakdown of our recent amazing and wonderful Boss Project Summit! This was pretty much the biggest thing we have ever done at TCC and it has just wrapped, so what better to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to the show! Today’s episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast is a breakdown of our recent amazing and wonderful Boss Project Summit! This was pretty much the biggest thing we have ever done at TCC and it has just wrapped, so what better to talk about than that? This behind the scenes look at the summit and the statistics that came out of it is just a taste of things to come. The few days over which we held the event had a massive impact and we had fun and made money and we cannot wait to share more of the in-depth information we have gathered.
Bear in mind that it is still early stages in terms of the outcomes, which we will continue to collect and collate, but there is definitely more than enough to talk about today and give you the inside scoop after all the madness! We would be amiss not to send out a big thank you to everyone who made the summit possible and we are eternally grateful to our sponsors, contributors, the participants, and each other for bringing this great thing to life! We have to admit that we are already thinking about the next time and how we might make it better, stronger, and more of everything it was this time!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to the show! Today’s episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast is a breakdown of our recent amazing and wonderful Boss Project Summit! This was pretty much the biggest thing we have ever done at TCC and it has just wrapped, so what better to talk about than that? This behind the scenes look at the summit and the statistics that came out of it is just a taste of things to come. The few days over which we held the event had a massive impact and we had fun and made money and we cannot wait to share more of the in-depth information we have gathered.</p><p>Bear in mind that it is still early stages in terms of the outcomes, which we will continue to collect and collate, but there is definitely more than enough to talk about today and give you the inside scoop after all the madness! We would be amiss not to send out a big thank you to everyone who made the summit possible and we are eternally grateful to our sponsors, contributors, the participants, and each other for bringing this great thing to life! We have to admit that we are already thinking about the next time and how we might make it better, stronger, and more of everything it was this time!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1952</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[269859a6d3cd46e5b99acec6ecb6c9b4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8946138330.mp3?updated=1663452592" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>277: Hiring Your First or Next VA Domestic or Abroad with Bonnie Fahy</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/hiring-your-first-or-next-va-domestic-or-abroad-with-bonnie-fahy</link>
      <description>Hey everybody, and welcome back to The Strategy Hour. Today we are super happy to have a conversation with Bonnie Fahy, who is the founder of SourceIt where she helps her students and clients grow their businesses through outsourcing. Bonnie has a particular approach, which she calls “hybrid sourcing”, that can make your company run more smoothly and iron out some of the traditional issues with getting outside help. Bonnie is going to be telling us all about how it works and how you can use it to your great advantage. Sound great? We think so! She is going to be giving concrete, actionable advice on how you can build your team and grow your revenue through some very simple steps. So you are not going to want to miss this episode!
The subject of hiring and how you go about sourcing your employees can sometimes be taboo; but don’t worry, in this fearless conversation we break down all these walls and give you the real inside scoop. Here at TCC we have had our fair share of successes and failures with hiring over the Internet and we are so excited to share Bonnie’s revolutionary and forward-thinking rules of the game with all of you, our listeners. Bonnie even tells us how she managed to quadruple her income in just three months using the strategies she is going to be explaining today! This means that by outsourcing smartly, you can have a lot more money in your pocket and also free up more time to do the things most important to you. Get ready, and let’s dive in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 15 Nov 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Hiring Your First or Next VA Domestic or Abroad with Bonnie Fahy</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>277</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/22922430-ae9b-11ec-91b1-efbfa5056de7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Learn how “hybrid sourcing”, can make your company run more smoothly and iron out some of the traditional issues with getting outside help.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey everybody, and welcome back to The Strategy Hour. Today we are super happy to have a conversation with Bonnie Fahy, who is the founder of SourceIt where she helps her students and clients grow their businesses through outsourcing. Bonnie has a particular approach, which she calls “hybrid sourcing”, that can make your company run more smoothly and iron out some of the traditional issues with getting outside help. Bonnie is going to be telling us all about how it works and how you can use it to your great advantage. Sound great? We think so! She is going to be giving concrete, actionable advice on how you can build your team and grow your revenue through some very simple steps. So you are not going to want to miss this episode!
The subject of hiring and how you go about sourcing your employees can sometimes be taboo; but don’t worry, in this fearless conversation we break down all these walls and give you the real inside scoop. Here at TCC we have had our fair share of successes and failures with hiring over the Internet and we are so excited to share Bonnie’s revolutionary and forward-thinking rules of the game with all of you, our listeners. Bonnie even tells us how she managed to quadruple her income in just three months using the strategies she is going to be explaining today! This means that by outsourcing smartly, you can have a lot more money in your pocket and also free up more time to do the things most important to you. Get ready, and let’s dive in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey everybody, and welcome back to The Strategy Hour. Today we are super happy to have a conversation with Bonnie Fahy, who is the founder of SourceIt where she helps her students and clients grow their businesses through outsourcing. Bonnie has a particular approach, which she calls “hybrid sourcing”, that can make your company run more smoothly and iron out some of the traditional issues with getting outside help. Bonnie is going to be telling us all about how it works and how you can use it to your great advantage. Sound great? We think so! She is going to be giving concrete, actionable advice on how you can build your team and grow your revenue through some very simple steps. So you are not going to want to miss this episode!</p><p>The subject of hiring and how you go about sourcing your employees can sometimes be taboo; but don’t worry, in this fearless conversation we break down all these walls and give you the real inside scoop. Here at TCC we have had our fair share of successes and failures with hiring over the Internet and we are so excited to share Bonnie’s revolutionary and forward-thinking rules of the game with all of you, our listeners. Bonnie even tells us how she managed to quadruple her income in just three months using the strategies she is going to be explaining today! This means that by outsourcing smartly, you can have a lot more money in your pocket and also free up more time to do the things most important to you. Get ready, and let’s dive in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3018</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5c05bd5b4aae41819de83bbcd09968fa]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6124541439.mp3?updated=1655855986" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>276: This Myth About Overwhelm Has Us Fired Up</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/this-myth-about-overwhelm-has-us-fired-up</link>
      <description>Hello everybody and welcome to another episode of your favorite biz podcast! Here at the Strategy Hour we always hope to give you the best advice, tools, and inspiration to get that business of yours popping and today is no different. This episode is all about a certain myth that has us a bit hot under the collar and we want nothing more than to dispel it! It goes something along the lines of not being able to reach your goals because of being overwhelmed by too much content and too many things to do. Now, we know this feeling, so don’t think it’s just you! But we are also here to tell you, get off your backside and start working because it is just not true and it is certainly no excuse to not put in the work!
So today we are going to be putting this myth to rest and giving you the fire and energy to go and get out of that overwhelmed funk! Okay? Great! We’ll be talking about how to interact with resources and content in an effective way and connect the dots between your to-do list and the strategies you hear about. We implore you again and again to take action, a constant reminder throughout the episode, so take heed! And don’t worry, we also get into how we have slipped up in these ways over the past year and talk about some of the missteps we took in this regard. An important takeaway is the idea of co-working and accountability groups, something we have used — especially when starting out — to great effect. We finish off the chat thinking about ways to simplify your business and identifying your KPIs and critical numbers. So let’s get right into it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 13 Nov 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>This Myth About Overwhelm Has Us Fired Up</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>276</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/23734b72-ae9b-11ec-91b1-3b4900d384ec/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Get off your backside and start working because it is just not true and it is certainly no excuse to not put in the work!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hello everybody and welcome to another episode of your favorite biz podcast! Here at the Strategy Hour we always hope to give you the best advice, tools, and inspiration to get that business of yours popping and today is no different. This episode is all about a certain myth that has us a bit hot under the collar and we want nothing more than to dispel it! It goes something along the lines of not being able to reach your goals because of being overwhelmed by too much content and too many things to do. Now, we know this feeling, so don’t think it’s just you! But we are also here to tell you, get off your backside and start working because it is just not true and it is certainly no excuse to not put in the work!
So today we are going to be putting this myth to rest and giving you the fire and energy to go and get out of that overwhelmed funk! Okay? Great! We’ll be talking about how to interact with resources and content in an effective way and connect the dots between your to-do list and the strategies you hear about. We implore you again and again to take action, a constant reminder throughout the episode, so take heed! And don’t worry, we also get into how we have slipped up in these ways over the past year and talk about some of the missteps we took in this regard. An important takeaway is the idea of co-working and accountability groups, something we have used — especially when starting out — to great effect. We finish off the chat thinking about ways to simplify your business and identifying your KPIs and critical numbers. So let’s get right into it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hello everybody and welcome to another episode of your favorite biz podcast! Here at the Strategy Hour we always hope to give you the best advice, tools, and inspiration to get that business of yours popping and today is no different. This episode is all about a certain myth that has us a bit hot under the collar and we want nothing more than to dispel it! It goes something along the lines of not being able to reach your goals because of being overwhelmed by too much content and too many things to do. Now, we know this feeling, so don’t think it’s just you! But we are also here to tell you, get off your backside and start working because it is just not true and it is certainly no excuse to not put in the work!</p><p>So today we are going to be putting this myth to rest and giving you the fire and energy to go and get out of that overwhelmed funk! Okay? Great! We’ll be talking about how to interact with resources and content in an effective way and connect the dots between your to-do list and the strategies you hear about. We implore you again and again to take action, a constant reminder throughout the episode, so take heed! And don’t worry, we also get into how we have slipped up in these ways over the past year and talk about some of the missteps we took in this regard. An important takeaway is the idea of co-working and accountability groups, something we have used — especially when starting out — to great effect. We finish off the chat thinking about ways to simplify your business and identifying your KPIs and critical numbers. So let’s get right into it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1922</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a40a912f67324012bfe09640bb97a651]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2029165220.mp3?updated=1663452535" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>275: Manifesting Space and Empowering People with Kinzie Ferguson</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/manifesting-space-and-empowering-people-with-kinzie-ferguson</link>
      <description>Today we have a great episode for you and one that is a little out of the ordinary. We are chatting to Kinzie Ferguson who is a boudoir photographer and a great friend of ours too! This conversation is going to be all about how Kinzie recently manifested her dream studio space and the process that allowed her to do it. This was a big deal for her and the experience really drove home some things that Kinzie believes in. We will also be chatting about how Kinzie goes about empowering people and her philosophy towards compliments, positivity, and intentionality.
It was recently Kinzie’s birthday and we decided pretty spontaneously to have this conversation at her party! This episode has it all, we talk about the importance of hard work and family, intentionality and just serving your people as best you can. We are going to getting kind of woo today, which is something we have been wanting to do for a while and this was the perfect excuse. We will be talking tarot readings, birth charts, the moon, and more. So get strapped in, we are going deep!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 08 Nov 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Manifesting Space and Empowering People with Kinzie Ferguson</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>275</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/24030a3c-ae9b-11ec-91b1-7391ce80c656/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>How Kinzie recently manifested her dream studio space and the process that allowed her to do it. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we have a great episode for you and one that is a little out of the ordinary. We are chatting to Kinzie Ferguson who is a boudoir photographer and a great friend of ours too! This conversation is going to be all about how Kinzie recently manifested her dream studio space and the process that allowed her to do it. This was a big deal for her and the experience really drove home some things that Kinzie believes in. We will also be chatting about how Kinzie goes about empowering people and her philosophy towards compliments, positivity, and intentionality.
It was recently Kinzie’s birthday and we decided pretty spontaneously to have this conversation at her party! This episode has it all, we talk about the importance of hard work and family, intentionality and just serving your people as best you can. We are going to getting kind of woo today, which is something we have been wanting to do for a while and this was the perfect excuse. We will be talking tarot readings, birth charts, the moon, and more. So get strapped in, we are going deep!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we have a great episode for you and one that is a little out of the ordinary. We are chatting to Kinzie Ferguson who is a boudoir photographer and a great friend of ours too! This conversation is going to be all about how Kinzie recently manifested her dream studio space and the process that allowed her to do it. This was a big deal for her and the experience really drove home some things that Kinzie believes in. We will also be chatting about how Kinzie goes about empowering people and her philosophy towards compliments, positivity, and intentionality.</p><p>It was recently Kinzie’s birthday and we decided pretty spontaneously to have this conversation at her party! This episode has it all, we talk about the importance of hard work and family, intentionality and just serving your people as best you can. We are going to getting kind of woo today, which is something we have been wanting to do for a while and this was the perfect excuse. We will be talking tarot readings, birth charts, the moon, and more. So get strapped in, we are going deep!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2505</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8812772227694e35890ae9d062234275]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7039173890.mp3?updated=1655855614" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>274: The Boss Project Summit Is Here</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-boss-project-summit-is-here</link>
      <description>Guess what’s happening today? It’s the start of the Boss Project Summit! Did you just fist-bump the air? Because we sure did! This is like the day before Christmas, the first day of school, the thing we’ve been waiting for and it’s finally here! It feels like this has been years in the making, even though we’ve only been working on it for a couple of months, and the lineup is just insane! If you don’t know what we’re talking about, pause right now and head over to the Boss Project Summit website to get your free ticket because it’s all starting today!
If you’re brand new to the podcast and it’s your first day on the internet ever, we are going to give you a quick rundown of what the French toast we’re even talking about. The Boss Project Summit is 100% free to attend and we’ve got sessions ranging from how to write a professional email, to perfecting your brand, to be profitable, and more! So inside this episode, we are breaking down the highlights and themes for each day, which speakers to look out for, and how you can get your hands on the all-access pass to be able to watch the videos after the summit is over. So get your calendars ready, pencil in those must-see sessions, and let’s get this summit started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 06 Nov 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Boss Project Summit Is Here</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>274</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/24a16f06-ae9b-11ec-91b1-ffc59568a214/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Guess what’s happening today? It’s the start of the Boss Project Summit! Did you just fist-bump the air? Because we sure did! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Guess what’s happening today? It’s the start of the Boss Project Summit! Did you just fist-bump the air? Because we sure did! This is like the day before Christmas, the first day of school, the thing we’ve been waiting for and it’s finally here! It feels like this has been years in the making, even though we’ve only been working on it for a couple of months, and the lineup is just insane! If you don’t know what we’re talking about, pause right now and head over to the Boss Project Summit website to get your free ticket because it’s all starting today!
If you’re brand new to the podcast and it’s your first day on the internet ever, we are going to give you a quick rundown of what the French toast we’re even talking about. The Boss Project Summit is 100% free to attend and we’ve got sessions ranging from how to write a professional email, to perfecting your brand, to be profitable, and more! So inside this episode, we are breaking down the highlights and themes for each day, which speakers to look out for, and how you can get your hands on the all-access pass to be able to watch the videos after the summit is over. So get your calendars ready, pencil in those must-see sessions, and let’s get this summit started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Guess what’s happening today? It’s the start of the Boss Project Summit! Did you just fist-bump the air? Because we sure did! This is like the day before Christmas, the first day of school, the thing we’ve been waiting for and it’s finally here! It feels like this has been years in the making, even though we’ve only been working on it for a couple of months, and the lineup is just insane! If you don’t know what we’re talking about, pause right now and head over to the Boss Project Summit website to get your free ticket because it’s all starting today!</p><p>If you’re brand new to the podcast and it’s your first day on the internet ever, we are going to give you a quick rundown of what the French toast we’re even talking about. The Boss Project Summit is 100% free to attend and we’ve got sessions ranging from how to write a professional email, to perfecting your brand, to be profitable, and more! So inside this episode, we are breaking down the highlights and themes for each day, which speakers to look out for, and how you can get your hands on the all-access pass to be able to watch the videos after the summit is over. So get your calendars ready, pencil in those must-see sessions, and let’s get this summit started!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1018</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[14ef71cd820f4a4a8ca2c8a2e5fd7d06]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9916648843.mp3?updated=1663452380" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>273: Walking Away From a 6-Figure Salary From Microsoft to Start Her Own Business with Michelle Evans</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/walking-away-from-a-6-figure-salary-from-microsoft-to-start-her-own-business-with-michelle-evans</link>
      <description>Welcome to another episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast, where we give you the tools, tips, and tricks to get your biz hopping and popping! Today on the show we are joined by Michelle Evans who is going to talk us through her journey of giving up a secure, well-paid job at Microsoft to pursue her entrepreneurial dreams. This obviously has great relevance for most of us as we have either made the switch or would still like to. It is just a part of doing this thing that we do! Michelle now runs her own marketing company helping business owners achieve their dreams and coaching them towards the kind of success they hope for.
In our conversation, we go through this all-important process and how it played out for Michelle. Her story is really inspiring and has lessons in it for all of us of following your own path and playing to your own strengths. We chat about what led up to the decision to leave and then the all important actions that Michelle took following her departure, which led to her paving her own way ever since. Michelle gives us some great strategy pointers and you are not going to want to miss those so stay tuned right to the end of the show!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 01 Nov 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Walking Away From a 6-Figure Salary From Microsoft to Start Her Own Business with Michelle Evans</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>273</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/254e5fae-ae9b-11ec-91b1-33c1c664dc36/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Michelle Evans talks us through her journey of giving up a secure, well-paid job at Microsoft to pursue her entrepreneurial dreams. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to another episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast, where we give you the tools, tips, and tricks to get your biz hopping and popping! Today on the show we are joined by Michelle Evans who is going to talk us through her journey of giving up a secure, well-paid job at Microsoft to pursue her entrepreneurial dreams. This obviously has great relevance for most of us as we have either made the switch or would still like to. It is just a part of doing this thing that we do! Michelle now runs her own marketing company helping business owners achieve their dreams and coaching them towards the kind of success they hope for.
In our conversation, we go through this all-important process and how it played out for Michelle. Her story is really inspiring and has lessons in it for all of us of following your own path and playing to your own strengths. We chat about what led up to the decision to leave and then the all important actions that Michelle took following her departure, which led to her paving her own way ever since. Michelle gives us some great strategy pointers and you are not going to want to miss those so stay tuned right to the end of the show!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to another episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast, where we give you the tools, tips, and tricks to get your biz hopping and popping! Today on the show we are joined by Michelle Evans who is going to talk us through her journey of giving up a secure, well-paid job at Microsoft to pursue her entrepreneurial dreams. This obviously has great relevance for most of us as we have either made the switch or would still like to. It is just a part of doing this thing that we do! Michelle now runs her own marketing company helping business owners achieve their dreams and coaching them towards the kind of success they hope for.</p><p>In our conversation, we go through this all-important process and how it played out for Michelle. Her story is really inspiring and has lessons in it for all of us of following your own path and playing to your own strengths. We chat about what led up to the decision to leave and then the all important actions that Michelle took following her departure, which led to her paving her own way ever since. Michelle gives us some great strategy pointers and you are not going to want to miss those so stay tuned right to the end of the show!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2176</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[86255e6603ce46609eff7b843bd83f01]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8065387167.mp3?updated=1655855341" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>272: Behind the Scenes of Our First And Profitable Online Summit</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/behind-the-scenes-of-our-first-and-profitable-online-summit</link>
      <description>Today on the show we are breaking it down and showing you the behind-the-scenes of the creation and the progress of our very first online virtual summit, The Boss Project Summit. The Summit will run for four full days from November 6th to the 9th, 2018. We have 40 different speakers, including keynotes and breakouts and we have divided each day into four themes throughout the summit. So as you can see, we have a ton of great stuff planned for ya’ll!
Now before we jump into this episode and all the things that are happening, if you have yet to sign up, get your booty over to the Boss Project Summit website and sign up. It’s totally free and we are so excited for the 5,000 people who have already signed up! So if you want to hear about why we decided to do a summit and what lit the fire for us to take on this new project, you’re going to want to go back and listen to Episode 270. However, that episode is definitely not a prerequisite for jumping into this one, so let’s get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 30 Oct 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Behind the Scenes of Our First And Profitable Online Summit</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>272</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/25dcbccc-ae9b-11ec-91b1-af4815900ebf/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>The creation and progress of our very first online virtual summit, The Boss Project Summit. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we are breaking it down and showing you the behind-the-scenes of the creation and the progress of our very first online virtual summit, The Boss Project Summit. The Summit will run for four full days from November 6th to the 9th, 2018. We have 40 different speakers, including keynotes and breakouts and we have divided each day into four themes throughout the summit. So as you can see, we have a ton of great stuff planned for ya’ll!
Now before we jump into this episode and all the things that are happening, if you have yet to sign up, get your booty over to the Boss Project Summit website and sign up. It’s totally free and we are so excited for the 5,000 people who have already signed up! So if you want to hear about why we decided to do a summit and what lit the fire for us to take on this new project, you’re going to want to go back and listen to Episode 270. However, that episode is definitely not a prerequisite for jumping into this one, so let’s get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we are breaking it down and showing you the behind-the-scenes of the creation and the progress of our very first online virtual summit, The Boss Project Summit. The Summit will run for four full days from November 6th to the 9th, 2018. We have 40 different speakers, including keynotes and breakouts and we have divided each day into four themes throughout the summit. So as you can see, we have a ton of great stuff planned for ya’ll!</p><p>Now before we jump into this episode and all the things that are happening, if you have yet to sign up, get your booty over to the Boss Project Summit website and sign up. It’s totally free and we are so excited for the 5,000 people who have already signed up! So if you want to hear about why we decided to do a summit and what lit the fire for us to take on this new project, you’re going to want to go back and listen to Episode 270. However, that episode is definitely not a prerequisite for jumping into this one, so let’s get started!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2168</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3818e82912bb42c4a34da4f2361d2dff]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2531533766.mp3?updated=1663452332" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>271: Whats Working Now on Instagram - 22 Tips to Rock It with Tyler McCall</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/whats-working-now-on-instagram-22-tips-to-rock-it-with-tyler-j-mccall</link>
      <description>Today we are joined by one of our favorite people in the world, a real internet bestie and the Instagram King, Tyler J. McCall! Tyler is here to talk to us about his specialty, how to get Instagram working for you immediately. Of course, Instagram, like all social platforms is constantly evolving so Tyler will be talking about what the best strategies are right now, but also looking at some of the more timeless rules of the framework. Tyler has helped a huge amount of entrepreneurs (including us!) to grow their Instagram following and engagement through the lessons he teaches. For Tyler, it really is quite simple: if you follow a few easy rules, have fun, and bring your own personality to your account you really can’t go wrong!
During our conversation, we cover some of the basics around content and captions and the move away from highly curated profiles. Tyler also stresses the importance of knowledge of your audience and how this informs your strategy. We get into the nitty-gritty of telling your brand’s story and how to convey this in an effective and engaging way as well as looking at the values that underscore everything that you post. One of the biggest recent developments on Instagram is obviously the Stories feature and Tyler breaks down some lessons for approaching that area and also reiterates just how important they are to your reach, engagement, and potential profits. Lastly, we cover some tips and ideas for personal versus business profiles and how to go about starting out on the platform for newbies. Jump in, it’s going to be a fun ride!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 25 Oct 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Whats Working Now on Instagram - 22 Tips to Rock It with Tyler McCall</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>271</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/266ab00e-ae9b-11ec-91b1-cffcea64f204/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tyler is here to talk to us about his specialty, how to get Instagram working for you immediately.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are joined by one of our favorite people in the world, a real internet bestie and the Instagram King, Tyler J. McCall! Tyler is here to talk to us about his specialty, how to get Instagram working for you immediately. Of course, Instagram, like all social platforms is constantly evolving so Tyler will be talking about what the best strategies are right now, but also looking at some of the more timeless rules of the framework. Tyler has helped a huge amount of entrepreneurs (including us!) to grow their Instagram following and engagement through the lessons he teaches. For Tyler, it really is quite simple: if you follow a few easy rules, have fun, and bring your own personality to your account you really can’t go wrong!
During our conversation, we cover some of the basics around content and captions and the move away from highly curated profiles. Tyler also stresses the importance of knowledge of your audience and how this informs your strategy. We get into the nitty-gritty of telling your brand’s story and how to convey this in an effective and engaging way as well as looking at the values that underscore everything that you post. One of the biggest recent developments on Instagram is obviously the Stories feature and Tyler breaks down some lessons for approaching that area and also reiterates just how important they are to your reach, engagement, and potential profits. Lastly, we cover some tips and ideas for personal versus business profiles and how to go about starting out on the platform for newbies. Jump in, it’s going to be a fun ride!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are joined by one of our favorite people in the world, a real internet bestie and the Instagram King, Tyler J. McCall! Tyler is here to talk to us about his specialty, how to get Instagram working for you immediately. Of course, Instagram, like all social platforms is constantly evolving so Tyler will be talking about what the best strategies are right now, but also looking at some of the more timeless rules of the framework. Tyler has helped a huge amount of entrepreneurs (including us!) to grow their Instagram following and engagement through the lessons he teaches. For Tyler, it really is quite simple: if you follow a few easy rules, have fun, and bring your own personality to your account you really can’t go wrong!</p><p>During our conversation, we cover some of the basics around content and captions and the move away from highly curated profiles. Tyler also stresses the importance of knowledge of your audience and how this informs your strategy. We get into the nitty-gritty of telling your brand’s story and how to convey this in an effective and engaging way as well as looking at the values that underscore everything that you post. One of the biggest recent developments on Instagram is obviously the Stories feature and Tyler breaks down some lessons for approaching that area and also reiterates just how important they are to your reach, engagement, and potential profits. Lastly, we cover some tips and ideas for personal versus business profiles and how to go about starting out on the platform for newbies. Jump in, it’s going to be a fun ride!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2051</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4b5e53f203684736be50772206b0e472]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6106134887.mp3?updated=1663452287" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>270: The Boss Project Summit - The How The Why and The Where</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-boss-project-summit-the-how-the-why-and-the-where</link>
      <description>Welcome to another episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast all of you wonderful and beautiful biz unicorns! Today we will be talking about something extra special and exciting and something we have been looking forward to spilling the beans on for ages! This episode is going to be all about our upcoming Boss Project Summit, that we are hosting in November. Are you as excited as we are? Because we have never really been this excited before. Today we will be giving you a quick overview of what the summit will include, a little behind the scenes, and then we will drop down into some more details about the event. Sound good? We think so!
We give you the how, the why, and the where because we know you are going to want to know it all! We talk about which speakers we are most excited about, but really we are pretty crazy about all of them, we get into the reasons why it has taken us this long to get around to making this dream a reality and we talk about the magical All Access Pass that is vital if you want to get the most out of the summit. It’s hard for us to express just how great this event is going to be, but if you know us and know what our business and podcast is about, imagine that to the nth degree and you are getting close!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Oct 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Boss Project Summit - The How The Why and The Where</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>270</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/26fa0b0a-ae9b-11ec-91b1-af0532022e12/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>A quick overview of what the summit will include, a little behind the scenes, and details about the event.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to another episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast all of you wonderful and beautiful biz unicorns! Today we will be talking about something extra special and exciting and something we have been looking forward to spilling the beans on for ages! This episode is going to be all about our upcoming Boss Project Summit, that we are hosting in November. Are you as excited as we are? Because we have never really been this excited before. Today we will be giving you a quick overview of what the summit will include, a little behind the scenes, and then we will drop down into some more details about the event. Sound good? We think so!
We give you the how, the why, and the where because we know you are going to want to know it all! We talk about which speakers we are most excited about, but really we are pretty crazy about all of them, we get into the reasons why it has taken us this long to get around to making this dream a reality and we talk about the magical All Access Pass that is vital if you want to get the most out of the summit. It’s hard for us to express just how great this event is going to be, but if you know us and know what our business and podcast is about, imagine that to the nth degree and you are getting close!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to another episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast all of you wonderful and beautiful biz unicorns! Today we will be talking about something extra special and exciting and something we have been looking forward to spilling the beans on for ages! This episode is going to be all about our upcoming Boss Project Summit, that we are hosting in November. Are you as excited as we are? Because we have never really been this excited before. Today we will be giving you a quick overview of what the summit will include, a little behind the scenes, and then we will drop down into some more details about the event. Sound good? We think so!</p><p>We give you the how, the why, and the where because we know you are going to want to know it all! We talk about which speakers we are most excited about, but really we are pretty crazy about all of them, we get into the reasons why it has taken us this long to get around to making this dream a reality and we talk about the magical All Access Pass that is vital if you want to get the most out of the summit. It’s hard for us to express just how great this event is going to be, but if you know us and know what our business and podcast is about, imagine that to the nth degree and you are getting close!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1352</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1db2beda791042e989e98e16498761a0]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6843897110.mp3?updated=1663452177" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>269: Behind the Scenes - Self-Publishing an Amazon Best Seller with Parijat Deshpande</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/behind-the-scenes-self-publishing-an-amazon-best-seller-with-parijat-deshpande</link>
      <description>Welcome back to another episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast with your favorite business sisters! We have a great episode in store for you today in which we will be talking to our friend Parijat Deshpande about her experiences self-publishing an Amazon bestseller. Parijat is a high-risk pregnancy expert and decided to turn her work and wisdom into a book called Pregnancy Brain, which has quickly become a hit and is selling fast since it was published! We chat about what led to the writing and publishing of Pregnancy Brain and what that process was like, from start to finish.
Parijat is a great example of someone taking their business and turning it into something else, namely a distributable and profitable outlet. This is one way that a one on one business can be scaled to create more revenue and reach. During our discussion, Parijat takes us through the lessons she learned over the last year and a half as she was able to very quickly move from deciding on creating the book to selling it. She really is an inspiration and we at TCC hope she can inspire you to reach your dreams and get your book out of your head and out into the world! We chat about editors, design choices, the writing process and the ups and downs of becoming an author. All things we know you are dying to hear about so without further ado, let’s jump right in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 18 Oct 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Behind the Scenes - Self-Publishing an Amazon Best Seller with Parijat Deshpande</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>269</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/27b162d2-ae9b-11ec-91b1-3bad991217db/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We talk to our friend Parijat Deshpande about her experiences self-publishing an Amazon bestseller.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to another episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast with your favorite business sisters! We have a great episode in store for you today in which we will be talking to our friend Parijat Deshpande about her experiences self-publishing an Amazon bestseller. Parijat is a high-risk pregnancy expert and decided to turn her work and wisdom into a book called Pregnancy Brain, which has quickly become a hit and is selling fast since it was published! We chat about what led to the writing and publishing of Pregnancy Brain and what that process was like, from start to finish.
Parijat is a great example of someone taking their business and turning it into something else, namely a distributable and profitable outlet. This is one way that a one on one business can be scaled to create more revenue and reach. During our discussion, Parijat takes us through the lessons she learned over the last year and a half as she was able to very quickly move from deciding on creating the book to selling it. She really is an inspiration and we at TCC hope she can inspire you to reach your dreams and get your book out of your head and out into the world! We chat about editors, design choices, the writing process and the ups and downs of becoming an author. All things we know you are dying to hear about so without further ado, let’s jump right in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to another episode of the Strategy Hour Podcast with your favorite business sisters! We have a great episode in store for you today in which we will be talking to our friend Parijat Deshpande about her experiences self-publishing an Amazon bestseller. Parijat is a high-risk pregnancy expert and decided to turn her work and wisdom into a book called <em>Pregnancy Brain</em>, which has quickly become a hit and is selling fast since it was published! We chat about what led to the writing and publishing of <em>Pregnancy Brain</em> and what that process was like, from start to finish.</p><p>Parijat is a great example of someone taking their business and turning it into something else, namely a distributable and profitable outlet. This is one way that a one on one business can be scaled to create more revenue and reach. During our discussion, Parijat takes us through the lessons she learned over the last year and a half as she was able to very quickly move from deciding on creating the book to selling it. She really is an inspiration and we at TCC hope she can inspire you to reach your dreams and get your book out of your head and out into the world! We chat about editors, design choices, the writing process and the ups and downs of becoming an author. All things we know you are dying to hear about so without further ado, let’s jump right in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2541</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[49fa2627b0c34f75844d54c1465638f7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9007465092.mp3?updated=1663452122" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>268: Our NEW Online Shop Book Club</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/our-new-online-shop-and-book-club</link>
      <description>Yes, you read that heading right! We feel like one of our dreams came true recently. We have been dying for physical products for God knows how long. Well, instead of developing our own products, which will probably happen at some point in the future, this feels like a major stepping stone in the right direction for us. We’re SUPER excited to announce it and we can’t wait to tell you all about it.
We officially have our own online shop! You can literally go buy anything from there. It’s curated to have our most favorite items from the most important categories in our lives and it’s hosted on your favorite platform ever! If you want to screw this whole episode and rather go shop, you can — we won’t hold it against you! However, if you want to know more about it, listen up first and then you can go shop til you drop!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 15 Oct 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our NEW Online Shop Book Club</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>268</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/28519504-ae9b-11ec-91b1-03985304f9d8/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’re SUPER excited to announce it and we can’t wait to tell you all about it.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Yes, you read that heading right! We feel like one of our dreams came true recently. We have been dying for physical products for God knows how long. Well, instead of developing our own products, which will probably happen at some point in the future, this feels like a major stepping stone in the right direction for us. We’re SUPER excited to announce it and we can’t wait to tell you all about it.
We officially have our own online shop! You can literally go buy anything from there. It’s curated to have our most favorite items from the most important categories in our lives and it’s hosted on your favorite platform ever! If you want to screw this whole episode and rather go shop, you can — we won’t hold it against you! However, if you want to know more about it, listen up first and then you can go shop til you drop!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Yes, you read that heading right! We feel like one of our dreams came true recently. We have been dying for physical products for God knows how long. Well, instead of developing our own products, which will probably happen at some point in the future, this feels like a major stepping stone in the right direction for us. We’re SUPER excited to announce it and we can’t wait to tell you all about it.</p><p>We officially have our own online shop! You can literally go buy anything from there. It’s curated to have our most favorite items from the most important categories in our lives and it’s hosted on your favorite platform ever! If you want to screw this whole episode and rather go shop, you can — we won’t hold it against you! However, if you want to know more about it, listen up first and then you can go shop til you drop!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1120</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4a8989e759d64fa6a2a09eeaf5450273]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1217065982.mp3?updated=1663452043" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>267: How Your Style Can Affect Your Brand with Jennifer Mary of Apple and Pear Wardrobe</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-your-style-can-affect-your-brand-with-jennifer-mary-of-apple-and-pear-wardrobe</link>
      <description>On today’s episode of the Strategy Hour we have a very wonderful guest and conversation to share with all our listeners! We welcome Jennifer Mary of Apple and Pear Wardrobe and she is here to tell us all about how to curate your best wardrobe and the difference that it can make in your business and life in general. Funnily enough, Jennifer admits she is not the person who loves clothes more than anything, but she is obsessed with the difference they can make to our lives. At the end of the day, it’s all about what clothes mean to us and how they can make us feel. Because let’s face it, we perform much better when we are feeling good and we feel good when we look good, so really it’s quite a simple equation.
We talk about compiling a great capsule wardrobe and decluttering your cupboard for a stress-free mind and less decision fatigue. We also get into how to really dress according to your needs and to make the right impression. Jennifer shows how you can easily increase your levels of productivity and happiness by just making a few changes to your dressing habits and looking the part. A big takeaway from the episode is the idea that you can make a statement wherever you are with how you dress before you even say anything and when you are showing up for you biz, you really want to show up in the right way!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 11 Oct 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How Your Style Can Affect Your Brand with Jennifer Mary of Apple and Pear Wardrobe</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>267</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/28ebf734-ae9b-11ec-91b1-833731e5cfab/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>How to curate your best wardrobe and the difference that it can make in your business and life in general.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s episode of the Strategy Hour we have a very wonderful guest and conversation to share with all our listeners! We welcome Jennifer Mary of Apple and Pear Wardrobe and she is here to tell us all about how to curate your best wardrobe and the difference that it can make in your business and life in general. Funnily enough, Jennifer admits she is not the person who loves clothes more than anything, but she is obsessed with the difference they can make to our lives. At the end of the day, it’s all about what clothes mean to us and how they can make us feel. Because let’s face it, we perform much better when we are feeling good and we feel good when we look good, so really it’s quite a simple equation.
We talk about compiling a great capsule wardrobe and decluttering your cupboard for a stress-free mind and less decision fatigue. We also get into how to really dress according to your needs and to make the right impression. Jennifer shows how you can easily increase your levels of productivity and happiness by just making a few changes to your dressing habits and looking the part. A big takeaway from the episode is the idea that you can make a statement wherever you are with how you dress before you even say anything and when you are showing up for you biz, you really want to show up in the right way!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s episode of the Strategy Hour we have a very wonderful guest and conversation to share with all our listeners! We welcome Jennifer Mary of Apple and Pear Wardrobe and she is here to tell us all about how to curate your best wardrobe and the difference that it can make in your business and life in general. Funnily enough, Jennifer admits she is not the person who loves clothes more than anything, but she is obsessed with the difference they can make to our lives. At the end of the day, it’s all about what clothes mean to us and how they can make us feel. Because let’s face it, we perform much better when we are feeling good and we feel good when we look good, so really it’s quite a simple equation.</p><p>We talk about compiling a great capsule wardrobe and decluttering your cupboard for a stress-free mind and less decision fatigue. We also get into how to really dress according to your needs and to make the right impression. Jennifer shows how you can easily increase your levels of productivity and happiness by just making a few changes to your dressing habits and looking the part. A big takeaway from the episode is the idea that you can make a statement wherever you are with how you dress before you even say anything and when you are showing up for you biz, you really want to show up in the right way!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2153</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b3412bd5c75043cbb27d0e1eeebabdab]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4646141572.mp3?updated=1655733205" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>266: Exactly How to Turn Your Vision Into Daily Actions</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/exactly-how-to-turn-your-vision-into-daily-actions</link>
      <description>Ever been stuck with ideas and you just didn’t know if they were right for you or how to put them into action? We’ve been getting tons of questions from you all out there, most of the question being along the lines of, “How do you guys know when a product or a launch is the right thing to do?” and “When do you reassess and change things and how do you actually know that something isn’t quite right?” We’re here today to tell you about our past experiences and how we got to figuring it all out.
In our experience, we’ve always just kinda “did it” and generally made it happen. There haven’t been many ideas that have come up and ultimately didn’t end up being created. We’re digging into how we originally started and how we knew it was the right choice for us, where our heads were at along the process and what you can do turn your vision into daily actions. From idea to conception to sale, we’re giving you both parts of our system. Be sure to keep listening to find out more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 09 Oct 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Exactly How to Turn Your Vision Into Daily Actions</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>266</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/297b9dbc-ae9b-11ec-91b1-3bc6394cfb37/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’re digging into how we originally started and how we knew it was the right choice for us, where our heads were at along the process and what you can do turn your vision into daily actions.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Ever been stuck with ideas and you just didn’t know if they were right for you or how to put them into action? We’ve been getting tons of questions from you all out there, most of the question being along the lines of, “How do you guys know when a product or a launch is the right thing to do?” and “When do you reassess and change things and how do you actually know that something isn’t quite right?” We’re here today to tell you about our past experiences and how we got to figuring it all out.
In our experience, we’ve always just kinda “did it” and generally made it happen. There haven’t been many ideas that have come up and ultimately didn’t end up being created. We’re digging into how we originally started and how we knew it was the right choice for us, where our heads were at along the process and what you can do turn your vision into daily actions. From idea to conception to sale, we’re giving you both parts of our system. Be sure to keep listening to find out more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ever been stuck with ideas and you just didn’t know if they were right for you or how to put them into action? We’ve been getting tons of questions from you all out there, most of the question being along the lines of, “How do you guys know when a product or a launch is the right thing to do?” and “When do you reassess and change things and how do you actually know that something isn’t quite right?” We’re here today to tell you about our past experiences and how we got to figuring it all out.</p><p>In our experience, we’ve always just kinda “did it” and generally made it happen. There haven’t been many ideas that have come up and ultimately didn’t end up being created. We’re digging into how we originally started and how we knew it was the right choice for us, where our heads were at along the process and what you can do turn your vision into daily actions. From idea to conception to sale, we’re giving you both parts of our system. Be sure to keep listening to find out more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1363</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e4b8f2fc75494618bababd5654e4eb29]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8312871176.mp3?updated=1663451972" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>265: When You Realize You Don't Love Your Biz - How to Sell It with Haley Williams</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/when-you-realize-you-dont-love-your-biz-and-how-to-sell-it-with-haley-williams</link>
      <description>Welcome back to The Strategy Hour everybody we hope you are excited about today’s episode because we sure are! Today we are chatting with Haley Williams about selling a business when you realize that you might not love what you are doing. This is an experience Haley had with a project she had been running for the last seven years only a few months ago! This can obviously be quite a difficult process and that is what this chat is all about. Making tough choices that are the best for you. It took some time but Haley found the clarity she needed to feel good about her decision and has not looked back since.
There are a number of choices that are available to us as business owners when these feelings arise. One of the options is to just shut down the business completely, which is quite drastic but is sometimes necessary. The second option is to think about changing the way you work and how the business runs and the last is to let go of it and have someone else buy and take care of it. The last of these is what Haley did and she found it was a lot about letting go of the identity she had come to correlate to her business and realizing that she was more than that part of herself. Even at TCC, we are also slowly finding our way through this dynamic and learning to value ourselves beyond the work we put into our jobs. So come along for this important journey and hopefully you can come out the side inspired and ready for any necessary changes.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 04 Oct 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>When You Realize You Don't Love Your Biz - How to Sell It with Haley Williams</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>265</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2a073a0c-ae9b-11ec-91b1-9b919821b48f/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are chatting with Haley Williams about selling a business when you realize that you might not love what you are doing.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to The Strategy Hour everybody we hope you are excited about today’s episode because we sure are! Today we are chatting with Haley Williams about selling a business when you realize that you might not love what you are doing. This is an experience Haley had with a project she had been running for the last seven years only a few months ago! This can obviously be quite a difficult process and that is what this chat is all about. Making tough choices that are the best for you. It took some time but Haley found the clarity she needed to feel good about her decision and has not looked back since.
There are a number of choices that are available to us as business owners when these feelings arise. One of the options is to just shut down the business completely, which is quite drastic but is sometimes necessary. The second option is to think about changing the way you work and how the business runs and the last is to let go of it and have someone else buy and take care of it. The last of these is what Haley did and she found it was a lot about letting go of the identity she had come to correlate to her business and realizing that she was more than that part of herself. Even at TCC, we are also slowly finding our way through this dynamic and learning to value ourselves beyond the work we put into our jobs. So come along for this important journey and hopefully you can come out the side inspired and ready for any necessary changes.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to The Strategy Hour everybody we hope you are excited about today’s episode because we sure are! Today we are chatting with Haley Williams about selling a business when you realize that you might not love what you are doing. This is an experience Haley had with a project she had been running for the last seven years only a few months ago! This can obviously be quite a difficult process and that is what this chat is all about. Making tough choices that are the best for you. It took some time but Haley found the clarity she needed to feel good about her decision and has not looked back since.</p><p>There are a number of choices that are available to us as business owners when these feelings arise. One of the options is to just shut down the business completely, which is quite drastic but is sometimes necessary. The second option is to think about changing the way you work and how the business runs and the last is to let go of it and have someone else buy and take care of it. The last of these is what Haley did and she found it was a lot about letting go of the identity she had come to correlate to her business and realizing that she was more than that part of herself. Even at TCC, we are also slowly finding our way through this dynamic and learning to value ourselves beyond the work we put into our jobs. So come along for this important journey and hopefully you can come out the side inspired and ready for any necessary changes.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2423</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[80c7d0974caa427b94aff16aa9ce9d24]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2258403603.mp3?updated=1655732954" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>264: What Do We Actually Do Every Day</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-do-we-actually-do-every-day</link>
      <description>Welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast everybody! We are so happy to have you and can’t wait to share another batch of super useful biz info with our beautiful tribe. We thought it would be a good idea to let all of you know what our day to day work looks like and how we actually spend our time working. To do this we are going to look back a bit, and see how things started, what we did in the beginning and then run through the developments over the last few years and see how our processes have evolved. Sound good? We thought so!
A lot of what a successful business is, is the day to day dealings and schedule and how you spend your time. If you can figure out effective planning and calendar solutions you are halfway to realizing your dreams, at least that’s what we have experienced. This podcast has been a great way of measuring our progress and we have plenty of old episodes that deal with related content so make sure you are all up to date on those! Today we’ll be delving into our separate schedules before joining forces in 2015, and then show how our relationship and partnership has continued to mold the way we work up until now. So without further ado, let’s get right into it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 02 Oct 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Do We Actually Do Every Day</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>264</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2a9854c4-ae9b-11ec-91b1-7b60fe4a61b7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>What our day to day work looks like and how we actually spend our time working. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast everybody! We are so happy to have you and can’t wait to share another batch of super useful biz info with our beautiful tribe. We thought it would be a good idea to let all of you know what our day to day work looks like and how we actually spend our time working. To do this we are going to look back a bit, and see how things started, what we did in the beginning and then run through the developments over the last few years and see how our processes have evolved. Sound good? We thought so!
A lot of what a successful business is, is the day to day dealings and schedule and how you spend your time. If you can figure out effective planning and calendar solutions you are halfway to realizing your dreams, at least that’s what we have experienced. This podcast has been a great way of measuring our progress and we have plenty of old episodes that deal with related content so make sure you are all up to date on those! Today we’ll be delving into our separate schedules before joining forces in 2015, and then show how our relationship and partnership has continued to mold the way we work up until now. So without further ado, let’s get right into it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast everybody! We are so happy to have you and can’t wait to share another batch of super useful biz info with our beautiful tribe. We thought it would be a good idea to let all of you know what our day to day work looks like and how we actually spend our time working. To do this we are going to look back a bit, and see how things started, what we did in the beginning and then run through the developments over the last few years and see how our processes have evolved. Sound good? We thought so!</p><p>A lot of what a successful business is, is the day to day dealings and schedule and how you spend your time. If you can figure out effective planning and calendar solutions you are halfway to realizing your dreams, at least that’s what we have experienced. This podcast has been a great way of measuring our progress and we have plenty of old episodes that deal with related content so make sure you are all up to date on those! Today we’ll be delving into our separate schedules before joining forces in 2015, and then show how our relationship and partnership has continued to mold the way we work up until now. So without further ado, let’s get right into it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2753</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9ea053840670400692d9cb585a9fa5d9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4298032915.mp3?updated=1663451929" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>263: A 30-Minute Meditation Practice with Alma Omeralovic</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/a-30-minute-meditation-practice-with-alma-omeralovic</link>
      <description>Welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast all of you wonderful and beautiful business badasses! We are so excited about today’s show and believe us when we say it’s and extra special one. Our guest today is Alma Omeralovic, who we met a few months ago when Amanda Boleyn brought her out at a speaking event and she guided a group of us through a meditation. We both felt an instant affinity with her and immediately and excitedly asked if she would join us on the show for a taste of what her mediation practice has to offer. So today we have a 30 minute, uninterrupted meditation, guided by Alma, followed by a short discussion on our experiences and questions. Sounds great, don’t you think?
This is an episode you may want to come back to a few times, depending on your needs. If you do not make it through all 30 minutes the first time, that’s okay, just go at your own pace. We recommend marking when the actual meditation starts in the audio so that you can skip directly to that part each time you would like to practice it. Another point we would like to make here, and something Alma mentions in our discussion, is that you do not have to have some perfect environment or situation to begin. We often might put off something like mediation because we do not have a perfectly serene, empty room, Alma says one of her favorite places to meditate is on the train or at the airport! So no excuses! Just try do as much as you can and see how you feel, it will definitely be a learning experience. So make yourself comfortable, find a gentle seat and keep an open mind.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 27 Sep 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>A 30-Minute Meditation Practice with Alma Omeralovic</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>263</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2b4697c8-ae9b-11ec-91b1-63c21de0844c/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we have a 30 minute, uninterrupted meditation, guided by Alma, followed by a short discussion on our experiences and questions.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast all of you wonderful and beautiful business badasses! We are so excited about today’s show and believe us when we say it’s and extra special one. Our guest today is Alma Omeralovic, who we met a few months ago when Amanda Boleyn brought her out at a speaking event and she guided a group of us through a meditation. We both felt an instant affinity with her and immediately and excitedly asked if she would join us on the show for a taste of what her mediation practice has to offer. So today we have a 30 minute, uninterrupted meditation, guided by Alma, followed by a short discussion on our experiences and questions. Sounds great, don’t you think?
This is an episode you may want to come back to a few times, depending on your needs. If you do not make it through all 30 minutes the first time, that’s okay, just go at your own pace. We recommend marking when the actual meditation starts in the audio so that you can skip directly to that part each time you would like to practice it. Another point we would like to make here, and something Alma mentions in our discussion, is that you do not have to have some perfect environment or situation to begin. We often might put off something like mediation because we do not have a perfectly serene, empty room, Alma says one of her favorite places to meditate is on the train or at the airport! So no excuses! Just try do as much as you can and see how you feel, it will definitely be a learning experience. So make yourself comfortable, find a gentle seat and keep an open mind.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast all of you wonderful and beautiful business badasses! We are so excited about today’s show and believe us when we say it’s and extra special one. Our guest today is Alma Omeralovic, who we met a few months ago when Amanda Boleyn brought her out at a speaking event and she guided a group of us through a meditation. We both felt an instant affinity with her and immediately and excitedly asked if she would join us on the show for a taste of what her mediation practice has to offer. So today we have a 30 minute, uninterrupted meditation, guided by Alma, followed by a short discussion on our experiences and questions. Sounds great, don’t you think?</p><p>This is an episode you may want to come back to a few times, depending on your needs. If you do not make it through all 30 minutes the first time, that’s okay, just go at your own pace. We recommend marking when the actual meditation starts in the audio so that you can skip directly to that part each time you would like to practice it. Another point we would like to make here, and something Alma mentions in our discussion, is that you do not have to have some perfect environment or situation to begin. We often might put off something like mediation because we do not have a perfectly serene, empty room, Alma says one of her favorite places to meditate is on the train or at the airport! So no excuses! Just try do as much as you can and see how you feel, it will definitely be a learning experience. So make yourself comfortable, find a gentle seat and keep an open mind.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3213</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5db0ba9b2db44ed2a41a4c8c5bab2f1b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2034653855.mp3?updated=1655483622" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>262: Community Managers Facebook Moderators and Baby Wearing</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/community-managers-facebook-moderators-and-baby-wearing</link>
      <description>Hey all you beautiful people! Welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast. Today we are going to be talking about something that have we implemented recently that was a great help to us and it might just be something you can use too. We’ll be talking about community managers and what this role means, why it is different from a brand ambassador or a group moderator and why you might want to think about employing one. We have a big old free Facebook Group that is currently about 20k members strong. And then we have two paid, private communities and it is for these that we implemented this role of community manager.  
We’ll be talking about what differentiates these positions and why both are useful in their separate iterations. As these groups and communities grow, they change and shift, like anything. We want to continue to make sure that we can provide for all the members in the best possible way. We want everyone to have a great experience and for this experience to continue to improve and progress as the members grow. So we heard from a couple friends about how they were using community managers and how useful they were finding it. At first we were a bit confused by the title but once we looked into it we thought it was worth a try and it most definitely was! We’ll be talking a bit about the application process for this and how we defined the role and we also somehow segue into a section on baby sling fashion. We promise it is on topic, kind of! Anyway, for all this and more let’s dive right in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 25 Sep 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Community Managers Facebook Moderators and Baby Wearing</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>262</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2bd38bc4-ae9b-11ec-91b1-9fcd6dc7fa86/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>What the role of Community Manager means, why it is different from a brand ambassador or a group moderator and why you might want to think about employing one. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey all you beautiful people! Welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast. Today we are going to be talking about something that have we implemented recently that was a great help to us and it might just be something you can use too. We’ll be talking about community managers and what this role means, why it is different from a brand ambassador or a group moderator and why you might want to think about employing one. We have a big old free Facebook Group that is currently about 20k members strong. And then we have two paid, private communities and it is for these that we implemented this role of community manager.  
We’ll be talking about what differentiates these positions and why both are useful in their separate iterations. As these groups and communities grow, they change and shift, like anything. We want to continue to make sure that we can provide for all the members in the best possible way. We want everyone to have a great experience and for this experience to continue to improve and progress as the members grow. So we heard from a couple friends about how they were using community managers and how useful they were finding it. At first we were a bit confused by the title but once we looked into it we thought it was worth a try and it most definitely was! We’ll be talking a bit about the application process for this and how we defined the role and we also somehow segue into a section on baby sling fashion. We promise it is on topic, kind of! Anyway, for all this and more let’s dive right in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey all you beautiful people! Welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast. Today we are going to be talking about something that have we implemented recently that was a great help to us and it might just be something you can use too. We’ll be talking about community managers and what this role means, why it is different from a brand ambassador or a group moderator and why you might want to think about employing one. We have a big old free Facebook Group that is currently about 20k members strong. And then we have two paid, private communities and it is for these that we implemented this role of community manager.  </p><p>We’ll be talking about what differentiates these positions and why both are useful in their separate iterations. As these groups and communities grow, they change and shift, like anything. We want to continue to make sure that we can provide for all the members in the best possible way. We want everyone to have a great experience and for this experience to continue to improve and progress as the members grow. So we heard from a couple friends about how they were using community managers and how useful they were finding it. At first we were a bit confused by the title but once we looked into it we thought it was worth a try and it most definitely was! We’ll be talking a bit about the application process for this and how we defined the role and we also somehow segue into a section on baby sling fashion. We promise it is on topic, kind of! Anyway, for all this and more let’s dive right in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1693</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ff7749192dd24ef2849fc8f284fc56c0]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4393843911.mp3?updated=1663451875" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>261: Living in a Fear Based Mentality</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/living-in-a-fear-based-mentality</link>
      <description>Are you unsure of what you are doing or where you are going? We know the feeling! We want to talk about these things with you! On this episode of The Strategy Hour we are talking about the crippling effects of fear and anxiety. We are here to tell you that everyone feels these things at different times and you need to be kind to yourself when these scary feelings come around! It is the unknowingness and feeling unsure that makes it so unbearable most of the time. But if we can talk about and acknowledge what is going on maybe we can make some progress and take a little more control of our lives. Come on sister, we know you got this!
Emylee feels that she has an unhealthy fixation on the amount of time she has left before she dies, something that can become overwhelming and paralyzing. This can stop her from achieving the exact goal that these fears arise out of, wanting to be impactful and do great things. She feels like she is not sure what do next and how to go about getting over these hurdles. Abagail, on the other hand, finds that she is stuck more in the present than on the future. She ends up settling for the dissatisfaction and inaction of not having any more to give and just wants to put her feet up and do nothing. We are sure all our listeners have all their own worries and concerns that effect them in different ways and we really feel for all of you and hope that this episode can be the beginning of some important conversations towards better managing these issues.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 20 Sep 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Living in a Fear Based Mentality</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>261</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2c6acfd4-ae9b-11ec-91b1-9b97d19f6c50/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>The crippling effects of fear and anxiety- We are here to tell you that everyone feels these things at different times and you need to be kind to yourself when these scary feelings come around! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you unsure of what you are doing or where you are going? We know the feeling! We want to talk about these things with you! On this episode of The Strategy Hour we are talking about the crippling effects of fear and anxiety. We are here to tell you that everyone feels these things at different times and you need to be kind to yourself when these scary feelings come around! It is the unknowingness and feeling unsure that makes it so unbearable most of the time. But if we can talk about and acknowledge what is going on maybe we can make some progress and take a little more control of our lives. Come on sister, we know you got this!
Emylee feels that she has an unhealthy fixation on the amount of time she has left before she dies, something that can become overwhelming and paralyzing. This can stop her from achieving the exact goal that these fears arise out of, wanting to be impactful and do great things. She feels like she is not sure what do next and how to go about getting over these hurdles. Abagail, on the other hand, finds that she is stuck more in the present than on the future. She ends up settling for the dissatisfaction and inaction of not having any more to give and just wants to put her feet up and do nothing. We are sure all our listeners have all their own worries and concerns that effect them in different ways and we really feel for all of you and hope that this episode can be the beginning of some important conversations towards better managing these issues.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you unsure of what you are doing or where you are going? We know the feeling! We want to talk about these things with you! On this episode of The Strategy Hour we are talking about the crippling effects of fear and anxiety. We are here to tell you that everyone feels these things at different times and you need to be kind to yourself when these scary feelings come around! It is the unknowingness and feeling unsure that makes it so unbearable most of the time. But if we can talk about and acknowledge what is going on maybe we can make some progress and take a little more control of our lives. Come on sister, we know you got this!</p><p>Emylee feels that she has an unhealthy fixation on the amount of time she has left before she dies, something that can become overwhelming and paralyzing. This can stop her from achieving the exact goal that these fears arise out of, wanting to be impactful and do great things. She feels like she is not sure what do next and how to go about getting over these hurdles. Abagail, on the other hand, finds that she is stuck more in the present than on the future. She ends up settling for the dissatisfaction and inaction of not having any more to give and just wants to put her feet up and do nothing. We are sure all our listeners have all their own worries and concerns that effect them in different ways and we really feel for all of you and hope that this episode can be the beginning of some important conversations towards better managing these issues.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes, go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1653</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[90452320f27e43d589cdf02da75a82ab]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4983469031.mp3?updated=1655490337" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>260: How Volunteerism Impacts Our Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-volunteerism-impacts-our-business</link>
      <description>Hey all you wonderful Wonder Women! We have a super fun episode for you today where we will be talking about our experiences in volunteering and just how much we have benefited from these. Specifically, we will be going over the time both of us have spent in the Kansas City Junior League and the work we have been involved in there. As part of our general mission to help all of our amazing listeners find their power and move with strength through this world, we would highly recommend any type of volunteer work and have extra faith in the Junior League organization which has chapters all over the world. During this episode, we give some context to its work and how it operates.
We chat about how many great things the organization has to offer, both to its recipients and participants. We then dive into some of the many lessons that we have learned over the last couple of years and Abagail shares her experiences working in partnership with the local animal shelter and anti-cruelty unit. This has been a particularly profound time for her and please excuse us if there are a few tears! Emylee also chats about her evolving position in the League and how trying new things has been such a rewarding process for her. We finish off by rounding up the multiple ways in which you and your business can grow through this type of involvement, a truly symbiotic relationship. So come with us and get inspired to help and grow!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 18 Sep 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How Volunteerism Impacts Our Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>260</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2cf800c0-ae9b-11ec-91b1-2f87fa51ca6f/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>As part of our general mission to help all of our amazing listeners find their power and move with strength through this world, we would highly recommend any type of volunteer work and have extra faith in the Junior League organization which has chapters all over the world. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey all you wonderful Wonder Women! We have a super fun episode for you today where we will be talking about our experiences in volunteering and just how much we have benefited from these. Specifically, we will be going over the time both of us have spent in the Kansas City Junior League and the work we have been involved in there. As part of our general mission to help all of our amazing listeners find their power and move with strength through this world, we would highly recommend any type of volunteer work and have extra faith in the Junior League organization which has chapters all over the world. During this episode, we give some context to its work and how it operates.
We chat about how many great things the organization has to offer, both to its recipients and participants. We then dive into some of the many lessons that we have learned over the last couple of years and Abagail shares her experiences working in partnership with the local animal shelter and anti-cruelty unit. This has been a particularly profound time for her and please excuse us if there are a few tears! Emylee also chats about her evolving position in the League and how trying new things has been such a rewarding process for her. We finish off by rounding up the multiple ways in which you and your business can grow through this type of involvement, a truly symbiotic relationship. So come with us and get inspired to help and grow!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey all you wonderful Wonder Women! We have a super fun episode for you today where we will be talking about our experiences in volunteering and just how much we have benefited from these. Specifically, we will be going over the time both of us have spent in the Kansas City Junior League and the work we have been involved in there. As part of our general mission to help all of our amazing listeners find their power and move with strength through this world, we would highly recommend any type of volunteer work and have extra faith in the Junior League organization which has chapters all over the world. During this episode, we give some context to its work and how it operates.</p><p>We chat about how many great things the organization has to offer, both to its recipients and participants. We then dive into some of the many lessons that we have learned over the last couple of years and Abagail shares her experiences working in partnership with the local animal shelter and anti-cruelty unit. This has been a particularly profound time for her and please excuse us if there are a few tears! Emylee also chats about her evolving position in the League and how trying new things has been such a rewarding process for her. We finish off by rounding up the multiple ways in which you and your business can grow through this type of involvement, a truly symbiotic relationship. So come with us and get inspired to help and grow!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2122</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9d57affb6fb843379db7f7849cdbe177]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8130184694.mp3?updated=1663451803" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>259: How to Have Difficult Conversations</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-have-difficult-conversations</link>
      <description>Hey everybody and welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast! We have a great episode in store for all of you biz unicorns that we think will be super helpful with a big part of everyone’s lives. Today we are going to be talking about communication, resolution, and how to have those difficult conversations that we all have to have sometimes. You know that when problems arise you have to deal with them in one way or another and that there are good ways and bad ways. Well, today we are going to be showing you one of the better ways to go about it. This episode was inspired by a speech by Sheila Heen from Harvard Law School that Abagail recently witnessed and needless to say, she was inspired. We hoped to pass on some of that inspiration to all our wonderful listeners so you can go out and be your best selves for the world!
During our discussion Abagail leads us through some of the steps that Sheila outlined and we give some examples of what these steps can be from personal experiences. We talk about inner dialogue and intentionality and why certain attitudes lead to having the same fight over and over. We are really trying to help you find a better way to conflict resolution and the first part of that is definitely in the way you approach an issue. Abagail explains how stories play a huge role in the way we understand our own perspective and these stories that we tell ourselves often determine how a particular conversation will play out. We also offer some tips for more reading on the subject and look at the book that Emylee has been reading which is dealing with similar subject matter. Ultimately the message of this episode is to slow down and take some time to try and understand someone’s point of view rather than try and prove why you are right. We know! This can be difficult! But don’t you think the world would be better off with a little more understanding? We think so!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 13 Sep 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Have Difficult Conversations</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>259</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2dadb672-ae9b-11ec-91b1-3b1be9f03d6f/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are going to be talking about communication, resolution, and how to have those difficult conversations that we all have to have sometimes. You know that when problems arise you have to deal with them in one way or another and that there are good ways and bad ways. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey everybody and welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast! We have a great episode in store for all of you biz unicorns that we think will be super helpful with a big part of everyone’s lives. Today we are going to be talking about communication, resolution, and how to have those difficult conversations that we all have to have sometimes. You know that when problems arise you have to deal with them in one way or another and that there are good ways and bad ways. Well, today we are going to be showing you one of the better ways to go about it. This episode was inspired by a speech by Sheila Heen from Harvard Law School that Abagail recently witnessed and needless to say, she was inspired. We hoped to pass on some of that inspiration to all our wonderful listeners so you can go out and be your best selves for the world!
During our discussion Abagail leads us through some of the steps that Sheila outlined and we give some examples of what these steps can be from personal experiences. We talk about inner dialogue and intentionality and why certain attitudes lead to having the same fight over and over. We are really trying to help you find a better way to conflict resolution and the first part of that is definitely in the way you approach an issue. Abagail explains how stories play a huge role in the way we understand our own perspective and these stories that we tell ourselves often determine how a particular conversation will play out. We also offer some tips for more reading on the subject and look at the book that Emylee has been reading which is dealing with similar subject matter. Ultimately the message of this episode is to slow down and take some time to try and understand someone’s point of view rather than try and prove why you are right. We know! This can be difficult! But don’t you think the world would be better off with a little more understanding? We think so!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey everybody and welcome back to The Strategy Hour Podcast! We have a great episode in store for all of you biz unicorns that we think will be super helpful with a big part of everyone’s lives. Today we are going to be talking about communication, resolution, and how to have those difficult conversations that we all have to have sometimes. You know that when problems arise you have to deal with them in one way or another and that there are good ways and bad ways. Well, today we are going to be showing you one of the better ways to go about it. This episode was inspired by a speech by Sheila Heen from Harvard Law School that Abagail recently witnessed and needless to say, she was inspired. We hoped to pass on some of that inspiration to all our wonderful listeners so you can go out and be your best selves for the world!</p><p>During our discussion Abagail leads us through some of the steps that Sheila outlined and we give some examples of what these steps can be from personal experiences. We talk about inner dialogue and intentionality and why certain attitudes lead to having the same fight over and over. We are really trying to help you find a better way to conflict resolution and the first part of that is definitely in the way you approach an issue. Abagail explains how stories play a huge role in the way we understand our own perspective and these stories that we tell ourselves often determine how a particular conversation will play out. We also offer some tips for more reading on the subject and look at the book that Emylee has been reading which is dealing with similar subject matter. Ultimately the message of this episode is to slow down and take some time to try and understand someone’s point of view rather than try and prove why you are right. We know! This can be difficult! But don’t you think the world would be better off with a little more understanding? We think so!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1843</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c97c0b6f8d264a33b37c50aa77dd8e92]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9462157919.mp3?updated=1655492568" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>258: How to Host Your First Profitable Virtual Summit with Kyrsten Sherwood</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-host-your-first-profitable-virtual-summit-with-kyrsten-sherwood</link>
      <description>Hello, all you wonderful entrepreneurial unicorns and biz badasses! We have a really kickass buddy on the show today to share some great information and inspiring stories. Please help us welcome Kyrsten Sherwood from Copper Kettle! Kyrsten is here to tell us about her experiences hosting virtual, online summits and hopefully help you to think how you could possibly do it in the future! Isn’t that fun? This episode will get you started on thinking about how you can set up and run your own events and there is a ton of valuable information for those interested. So if you have ever wondered about doing something like this you will love what Kyrsten has to say!
We also believe that online events, like Kyrsten’s summit, are a great stepping stone to bigger, in-person events, so who knows what you could be achieving in next to no time! In our discussion, we look at the differences between these types of events and which parts of the online overlap with real-world hosting. Kyrsten gives us some insight into Copper Kettle’s business plan and how her virtual summit now fits into that. From there she takes us through some of the setup procedures and how you might go about getting ready for an event before talking about the monetization of free online video summits. You are not going to want to miss this one! We promise!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 11 Sep 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Host Your First Profitable Virtual Summit with Kyrsten Sherwood</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>258</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2e36471c-ae9b-11ec-91b1-7b1dbf1b9e7c/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Hello, all you wonderful entrepreneurial unicorns and biz badasses! We have a really kickass buddy on the show today to share some great information and inspiring stories. Please help us welcome Kyrsten Sherwood from Copper Kettle! Kyrsten is here to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hello, all you wonderful entrepreneurial unicorns and biz badasses! We have a really kickass buddy on the show today to share some great information and inspiring stories. Please help us welcome Kyrsten Sherwood from Copper Kettle! Kyrsten is here to tell us about her experiences hosting virtual, online summits and hopefully help you to think how you could possibly do it in the future! Isn’t that fun? This episode will get you started on thinking about how you can set up and run your own events and there is a ton of valuable information for those interested. So if you have ever wondered about doing something like this you will love what Kyrsten has to say!
We also believe that online events, like Kyrsten’s summit, are a great stepping stone to bigger, in-person events, so who knows what you could be achieving in next to no time! In our discussion, we look at the differences between these types of events and which parts of the online overlap with real-world hosting. Kyrsten gives us some insight into Copper Kettle’s business plan and how her virtual summit now fits into that. From there she takes us through some of the setup procedures and how you might go about getting ready for an event before talking about the monetization of free online video summits. You are not going to want to miss this one! We promise!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hello, all you wonderful entrepreneurial unicorns and biz badasses! We have a really kickass buddy on the show today to share some great information and inspiring stories. Please help us welcome Kyrsten Sherwood from Copper Kettle! Kyrsten is here to tell us about her experiences hosting virtual, online summits and hopefully help you to think how you could possibly do it in the future! Isn’t that fun? This episode will get you started on thinking about how you can set up and run your own events and there is a ton of valuable information for those interested. So if you have ever wondered about doing something like this you will love what Kyrsten has to say!</p><p>We also believe that online events, like Kyrsten’s summit, are a great stepping stone to bigger, in-person events, so who knows what you could be achieving in next to no time! In our discussion, we look at the differences between these types of events and which parts of the online overlap with real-world hosting. Kyrsten gives us some insight into Copper Kettle’s business plan and how her virtual summit now fits into that. From there she takes us through some of the setup procedures and how you might go about getting ready for an event before talking about the monetization of free online video summits. You are not going to want to miss this one! We promise!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2262</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f9cc86042ed54bb292c78de906b18fcc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1371809155.mp3?updated=1663451783" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>257: Boss Talk - If you could outsource three things in your life or business right now what would they be</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/boss-talk-if-you-could-outsource-three-things-in-your-life-or-business-right-now-what-would-they-be</link>
      <description>Welcome back to another special episode of The Strategy Hour everyone! We are doing another round of our favorite thing, Boss Talk! We are lucky enough to have Steph Crowder back with us for this and you know how much we love it when she is around. This week we are asking each other what the top three things we wish we could outsource are. That’s right strategists, what are those jobs that you want someone else to do because it’s not your thing, you’re bored of it or you just have better ways to spend your time now that you are a boss?
As our business has grown we have found we need and want more and more of the day to day stuff handled by other professionals, so we can have space for the most important jobs and all the rest of the good things that life has to offer. This is one of the blessings of growing a business, you get to choose how it transforms and shape its future according to your instincts and needs. This conversation covers the most fantastical desires we have as well as the most mundane, don’t worry we didn’t skimp on the things we wish we could have just a little different! Come with us on this journey of wishes and wonderment and think about what you may like to outsource in your biz!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 06 Sep 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Boss Talk - If you could outsource three things in your life or business right now what would they be</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>257</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2ec27336-ae9b-11ec-91b1-7b0f16f0101f/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome back to another special episode of The Strategy Hour everyone! We are doing another round of our favorite thing, Boss Talk! We are lucky enough to have Steph Crowder back with us for this and you know how much we love it when she is around....</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to another special episode of The Strategy Hour everyone! We are doing another round of our favorite thing, Boss Talk! We are lucky enough to have Steph Crowder back with us for this and you know how much we love it when she is around. This week we are asking each other what the top three things we wish we could outsource are. That’s right strategists, what are those jobs that you want someone else to do because it’s not your thing, you’re bored of it or you just have better ways to spend your time now that you are a boss?
As our business has grown we have found we need and want more and more of the day to day stuff handled by other professionals, so we can have space for the most important jobs and all the rest of the good things that life has to offer. This is one of the blessings of growing a business, you get to choose how it transforms and shape its future according to your instincts and needs. This conversation covers the most fantastical desires we have as well as the most mundane, don’t worry we didn’t skimp on the things we wish we could have just a little different! Come with us on this journey of wishes and wonderment and think about what you may like to outsource in your biz!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to another special episode of The Strategy Hour everyone! We are doing another round of our favorite thing, Boss Talk! We are lucky enough to have Steph Crowder back with us for this and you know how much we love it when she is around. This week we are asking each other what the top three things we wish we could outsource are. That’s right strategists, what are those jobs that you want someone else to do because it’s not your thing, you’re bored of it or you just have better ways to spend your time now that you are a boss?</p><p>As our business has grown we have found we need and want more and more of the day to day stuff handled by other professionals, so we can have space for the most important jobs and all the rest of the good things that life has to offer. This is one of the blessings of growing a business, you get to choose how it transforms and shape its future according to your instincts and needs. This conversation covers the most fantastical desires we have as well as the most mundane, don’t worry we didn’t skimp on the things we wish we could have just a little different! Come with us on this journey of wishes and wonderment and think about what you may like to outsource in your biz!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2047</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[55cf14c6325343139d21c53e82863d38]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9684004875.mp3?updated=1660847640" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>256: Ask Us Anything</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/ask-tcc-anything</link>
      <description>Today’s episode of The Strategy Hour is dedicated to all of your wonderful questions! We opened up the opportunity on our Facebook Group and have compiled a few of the questions to answer on the podcast, so we hope you enjoy our answers! We like to have these sessions from time to time because we owe so much to all of you, our family, and what way better for giving back than a little bit of quality time, right? So why not dive right in with us as we go deep?
During this discussion, we answer questions on dream businesses, meeting each other, pivoting careers, our hobbies, health, confidence, new businesses, calendars and much more. As usual we try to be as honest as possible and give you everything we’ve got, because we know how much that little push of inspiration or motivation can do to get you on the track to success. Some of the big takeaways from this episode are following your heart and finding your own path, being kind and peaceful to yourself in the face of disappointment, pushing through challenges and taking opportunities when they present themselves. These are strategies that have worked for us and we are sure they can work for you too!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 04 Sep 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Ask Us Anything</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>256</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/2fd96b58-ae9b-11ec-91b1-5f3387758701/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today’s episode of The Strategy Hour is dedicated to all of your wonderful questions! We opened up the opportunity on our Facebook Group and have compiled a few of the questions to answer on the podcast, so we hope you enjoy our answers! We like to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today’s episode of The Strategy Hour is dedicated to all of your wonderful questions! We opened up the opportunity on our Facebook Group and have compiled a few of the questions to answer on the podcast, so we hope you enjoy our answers! We like to have these sessions from time to time because we owe so much to all of you, our family, and what way better for giving back than a little bit of quality time, right? So why not dive right in with us as we go deep?
During this discussion, we answer questions on dream businesses, meeting each other, pivoting careers, our hobbies, health, confidence, new businesses, calendars and much more. As usual we try to be as honest as possible and give you everything we’ve got, because we know how much that little push of inspiration or motivation can do to get you on the track to success. Some of the big takeaways from this episode are following your heart and finding your own path, being kind and peaceful to yourself in the face of disappointment, pushing through challenges and taking opportunities when they present themselves. These are strategies that have worked for us and we are sure they can work for you too!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s episode of The Strategy Hour is dedicated to all of your wonderful questions! We opened up the opportunity on our Facebook Group and have compiled a few of the questions to answer on the podcast, so we hope you enjoy our answers! We like to have these sessions from time to time because we owe so much to all of you, our family, and what way better for giving back than a little bit of quality time, right? So why not dive right in with us as we go deep?</p><p>During this discussion, we answer questions on dream businesses, meeting each other, pivoting careers, our hobbies, health, confidence, new businesses, calendars and much more. As usual we try to be as honest as possible and give you everything we’ve got, because we know how much that little push of inspiration or motivation can do to get you on the track to success. Some of the big takeaways from this episode are following your heart and finding your own path, being kind and peaceful to yourself in the face of disappointment, pushing through challenges and taking opportunities when they present themselves. These are strategies that have worked for us and we are sure they can work for you too!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1711</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[609e00157f8546199eb9f904787a0185]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6248911458.mp3?updated=1660847592" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>255: 7 Steps to Replace Your 9-5 Income with Christine</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/7-steps-to-replace-your-9-5-income-with-christine-mcalister</link>
      <description>Hello everybody and welcome back to your favorite entrepreneurial podcast! On this edition of The Strategy Hour we have a very special guest in the form of Christine McAlister, founder of Life With Passion and author of the new book The Income Replacement Formula. Christine’s business is dedicated to helping hopeful entrepreneurs transition from their day jobs into owning the business of their dreams, and boy, do we love her for it! It is a challenge that almost all business owners have to face and doing it correctly can be so tricky, that’s why Christine’s service is so important!
During the episode, we go over the steps that Christine lays out in her book and she details each step with enough to get you started and excited about this shift. We talk about mindset, marketing, visibility and much more that you are not going to want to miss! Our guest has one of the longest and most diverse lists of achievements we have ever seen, having been an Olympic broadcaster, horse mother, and raising service dogs, amongst other things. So do we even need to say how excited we are to have her here? We will anyway! The point of this episode is to start your journey to the point where you can quit the slog and start working on your passion full time, so jump right in and let’s get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 30 Aug 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>7 Steps to Replace Your 9-5 Income with Christine</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>255</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3073dada-ae9b-11ec-91b1-07fc62ea9d76/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Hello everybody and welcome back to your favorite entrepreneurial podcast! On this edition of The Strategy Hour we have a very special guest in the form of Christine McAlister, founder of Life With Passion and author of the new book The Income...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hello everybody and welcome back to your favorite entrepreneurial podcast! On this edition of The Strategy Hour we have a very special guest in the form of Christine McAlister, founder of Life With Passion and author of the new book The Income Replacement Formula. Christine’s business is dedicated to helping hopeful entrepreneurs transition from their day jobs into owning the business of their dreams, and boy, do we love her for it! It is a challenge that almost all business owners have to face and doing it correctly can be so tricky, that’s why Christine’s service is so important!
During the episode, we go over the steps that Christine lays out in her book and she details each step with enough to get you started and excited about this shift. We talk about mindset, marketing, visibility and much more that you are not going to want to miss! Our guest has one of the longest and most diverse lists of achievements we have ever seen, having been an Olympic broadcaster, horse mother, and raising service dogs, amongst other things. So do we even need to say how excited we are to have her here? We will anyway! The point of this episode is to start your journey to the point where you can quit the slog and start working on your passion full time, so jump right in and let’s get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hello everybody and welcome back to your favorite entrepreneurial podcast! On this edition of The Strategy Hour we have a very special guest in the form of Christine McAlister, founder of Life With Passion and author of the new book <em>The Income Replacement Formula.</em> Christine’s business is dedicated to helping hopeful entrepreneurs transition from their day jobs into owning the business of their dreams, and boy, do we love her for it! It is a challenge that almost all business owners have to face and doing it correctly can be so tricky, that’s why Christine’s service is so important!</p><p>During the episode, we go over the steps that Christine lays out in her book and she details each step with enough to get you started and excited about this shift. We talk about mindset, marketing, visibility and much more that you are not going to want to miss! Our guest has one of the longest and most diverse lists of achievements we have ever seen, having been an Olympic broadcaster, horse mother, and raising service dogs, amongst other things. So do we even need to say how excited we are to have her here? We will anyway! The point of this episode is to start your journey to the point where you can quit the slog and start working on your passion full time, so jump right in and let’s get started!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2500</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a107edfa6f734ba39f63f8848135adcc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7435517645.mp3?updated=1660848062" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>254: The Month We Reached 100k in 45 Days on Our Evergreen Funnel</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-month-we-reached-100k-in-45-days-on-our-evergreen-funnel</link>
      <description>Welcome back to the podcast all you beautiful business unicorns! Today we are doing the monthly round-up and recap of July and we’ll be looking forward to August, so jump on board with us as we take this fun ride. We will mostly be talking about the funnels we have implemented and these helpful changes that we made to our website that have continued to improve our engagement and sales. We will carry on implementing more funnels as time goes on but mapping these ones out and seeing the positive results has been so exciting that we could not resist sharing these successes with y’all!
As our business has grown it has become more and more complex to understand and map the journey our customers and new visitors make within it. It is, as always, vitally important to have a handle on these dynamics and it is always exciting to understand what efforts yield results and where you may be able to improve. It’s so invigorating to see how these funnels impact our programs and we can’t wait to see the growth in sales continue into the future! At times reflecting like this can be a be tricky or difficult and we may not always give ourselves a fair review, but please remember how important it is! When we see the numbers and the contrasts across the last months, it makes it all worth it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 28 Aug 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Month We Reached 100k in 45 Days on Our Evergreen Funnel</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>254</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/312439c0-ae9b-11ec-91b1-ab6b5d8b76ee/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome back to the podcast all you beautiful business unicorns! Today we are doing the monthly round-up and recap of July and we’ll be looking forward to August, so jump on board with us as we take this fun ride. We will mostly be talking about the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to the podcast all you beautiful business unicorns! Today we are doing the monthly round-up and recap of July and we’ll be looking forward to August, so jump on board with us as we take this fun ride. We will mostly be talking about the funnels we have implemented and these helpful changes that we made to our website that have continued to improve our engagement and sales. We will carry on implementing more funnels as time goes on but mapping these ones out and seeing the positive results has been so exciting that we could not resist sharing these successes with y’all!
As our business has grown it has become more and more complex to understand and map the journey our customers and new visitors make within it. It is, as always, vitally important to have a handle on these dynamics and it is always exciting to understand what efforts yield results and where you may be able to improve. It’s so invigorating to see how these funnels impact our programs and we can’t wait to see the growth in sales continue into the future! At times reflecting like this can be a be tricky or difficult and we may not always give ourselves a fair review, but please remember how important it is! When we see the numbers and the contrasts across the last months, it makes it all worth it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to the podcast all you beautiful business unicorns! Today we are doing the monthly round-up and recap of July and we’ll be looking forward to August, so jump on board with us as we take this fun ride. We will mostly be talking about the funnels we have implemented and these helpful changes that we made to our website that have continued to improve our engagement and sales. We will carry on implementing more funnels as time goes on but mapping these ones out and seeing the positive results has been so exciting that we could not resist sharing these successes with y’all!</p><p>As our business has grown it has become more and more complex to understand and map the journey our customers and new visitors make within it. It is, as always, vitally important to have a handle on these dynamics and it is always exciting to understand what efforts yield results and where you may be able to improve. It’s so invigorating to see how these funnels impact our programs and we can’t wait to see the growth in sales continue into the future! At times reflecting like this can be a be tricky or difficult and we may not always give ourselves a fair review, but please remember how important it is! When we see the numbers and the contrasts across the last months, it makes it all worth it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1903</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c384eb1c0eb94acf8a56f90c39757414]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4783712880.mp3?updated=1660847316" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>253: Creating Your Profit Plan with Haley Burkhead</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-your-profit-plan-with-haley-burkhead-of-profit-planner</link>
      <description>Welcome back to the Strategy Hour Podcast all you beautiful creatures! We have a great show in store for you today which we cannot wait for you to hear. We have an extra special unicorn joining us in the form of Haley Burkhead and she is here to tell us all about her business and her company called Profit Planner. Now we say this all the time on the Strategy Hour, but it is worth repeating, your profits really should be your highest priority, the money is what drives your business and you need to put that in the front seat!
In our chat with Haley, we talk all about the way in which she has laid out her planner and how it can massively improve the way all of you run your businesses! Haley has so much energy and so many great ideas that we know you will be able to use immediately and will probably make you want to dig deeper into your planning methods. Haley gives us the whole break down on how the different levels of her framework and how each of these levels supports the next. Plus it is so fun and inspiring that we are pretty darn sure that after this episode you will not be able to wait to get started on optimizing everything you do! Throughout the episode Haley gives us steady reminders to keep you eyes on the profit prize and let everything fall into place around that. Great advice and something we urge you all to take to heart!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 23 Aug 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating Your Profit Plan with Haley Burkhead</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>253</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/32565b34-ae9b-11ec-91b1-d341e69274a8/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome back to the Strategy Hour Podcast all you beautiful creatures! We have a great show in store for you today which we cannot wait for you to hear. We have an extra special unicorn joining us in the form of Haley Burkhead and she is here to tell...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to the Strategy Hour Podcast all you beautiful creatures! We have a great show in store for you today which we cannot wait for you to hear. We have an extra special unicorn joining us in the form of Haley Burkhead and she is here to tell us all about her business and her company called Profit Planner. Now we say this all the time on the Strategy Hour, but it is worth repeating, your profits really should be your highest priority, the money is what drives your business and you need to put that in the front seat!
In our chat with Haley, we talk all about the way in which she has laid out her planner and how it can massively improve the way all of you run your businesses! Haley has so much energy and so many great ideas that we know you will be able to use immediately and will probably make you want to dig deeper into your planning methods. Haley gives us the whole break down on how the different levels of her framework and how each of these levels supports the next. Plus it is so fun and inspiring that we are pretty darn sure that after this episode you will not be able to wait to get started on optimizing everything you do! Throughout the episode Haley gives us steady reminders to keep you eyes on the profit prize and let everything fall into place around that. Great advice and something we urge you all to take to heart!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to the Strategy Hour Podcast all you beautiful creatures! We have a great show in store for you today which we cannot wait for you to hear. We have an extra special unicorn joining us in the form of Haley Burkhead and she is here to tell us all about her business and her company called Profit Planner. Now we say this all the time on the Strategy Hour, but it is worth repeating, your profits really should be your highest priority, the money is what drives your business and you need to put that in the front seat!</p><p>In our chat with Haley, we talk all about the way in which she has laid out her planner and how it can massively improve the way all of you run your businesses! Haley has so much energy and so many great ideas that we know you will be able to use immediately and will probably make you want to dig deeper into your planning methods. Haley gives us the whole break down on how the different levels of her framework and how each of these levels supports the next. Plus it is so fun and inspiring that we are pretty darn sure that after this episode you will not be able to wait to get started on optimizing everything you do! Throughout the episode Haley gives us steady reminders to keep you eyes on the profit prize and let everything fall into place around that. Great advice and something we urge you all to take to heart!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2232</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[fbcde65424c34b718fd9927914d61ebd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1736355869.mp3?updated=1660847247" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>252: Real Talk - Anxiety Overwhelm and Not Knowing What You Want</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/real-talk-anxiety-overwhelm-and-not-knowing-what-you-want</link>
      <description>Do you know that things need to change but have no idea what it means? Do you often get anxious, overwhelmed, and don’t have a clue what you want? Well, you’re not alone! This is a common season that every entrepreneur goes through at one point or another and it’s something that can happen over and over again. We specifically feel this around content; it’s a weird mix of feelings where we don’t know what we like and we’re not too sure of what we don’t like. It ends up being a ton of back and forth and ultimately we’re left feeling overwhelmed.
In today’s episode, we’re tackling this head on! We are getting a peek into Emylee’s brain and talking about some of her experiences with anxiety. We’re discussing how to redefine what we want, recognize whether it’s even something we want to be saying yes to, and finding some of sort clarity amongst the chaos. If this sounds like you and something you might be going through, keep listening to hear more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 21 Aug 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Real Talk - Anxiety Overwhelm and Not Knowing What You Want</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>252</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/32fccd16-ae9b-11ec-91b1-e3a82d0e7985/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Do you know that things need to change but have no idea what it means? Do you often get anxious, overwhelmed, and don’t have a clue what you want? Well, you’re not alone! This is a common season that every entrepreneur goes through at one point or...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Do you know that things need to change but have no idea what it means? Do you often get anxious, overwhelmed, and don’t have a clue what you want? Well, you’re not alone! This is a common season that every entrepreneur goes through at one point or another and it’s something that can happen over and over again. We specifically feel this around content; it’s a weird mix of feelings where we don’t know what we like and we’re not too sure of what we don’t like. It ends up being a ton of back and forth and ultimately we’re left feeling overwhelmed.
In today’s episode, we’re tackling this head on! We are getting a peek into Emylee’s brain and talking about some of her experiences with anxiety. We’re discussing how to redefine what we want, recognize whether it’s even something we want to be saying yes to, and finding some of sort clarity amongst the chaos. If this sounds like you and something you might be going through, keep listening to hear more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Do you know that things need to change but have no idea what it means? Do you often get anxious, overwhelmed, and don’t have a clue what you want? Well, you’re not alone! This is a common season that every entrepreneur goes through at one point or another and it’s something that can happen over and over again. We specifically feel this around content; it’s a weird mix of feelings where we don’t know what we like and we’re not too sure of what we don’t like. It ends up being a ton of back and forth and ultimately we’re left feeling overwhelmed.</p><p>In today’s episode, we’re tackling this head on! We are getting a peek into Emylee’s brain and talking about some of her experiences with anxiety. We’re discussing how to redefine what we want, recognize whether it’s even something we want to be saying yes to, and finding some of sort clarity amongst the chaos. If this sounds like you and something you might be going through, keep listening to hear more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1894</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6710c6812be54611addf0b416b1f7cbf]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4573101552.mp3?updated=1660847191" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>251: The Essential Shift You Need to Make to Conquer Anything with Jessica Eley</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-essential-shift-you-need-to-make-to-conquer-anything-with-jessica-eley</link>
      <description>Hey amazing TCC tribe! We are so happy to welcome you back to another episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast. Today we have long time favorite and past guest Jessica Eley here to talk about how you can make the important shifts in your life to be able conquer anything and everything. Apart from being one of our “bestest” people in the world, Jessica is a verified badass and has loads of great stuff to share in this episode so you are not going to want to miss this one! We promise! We’ll be talking about finding points of resistance and ease, how to build up your confidence and basically tearing your life apart so you can build it all up again, stronger and better than ever.
Make sure to stay tuned to the very end as we will be making an extra special announcement about an offer you can take advantage of! But before we get there we will be having the type of conversation in which we wish all our listeners will be able to participate. Open, honest and self aware, these are the qualities that are going to take you from where you are now to where you want to be! We talk about that elephant that we find to be in the room just a little too much, this idea that if you are struggling with something you can just pour more money into it and then hope that some change will just miraculously happen. This episode is all about how you can do better by using your potential and taking action!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Aug 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Essential Shift You Need to Make to Conquer Anything with Jessica Eley</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>251</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/33b6a98e-ae9b-11ec-91b1-d7852b64a4e6/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Hey amazing TCC tribe! We are so happy to welcome you back to another episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast. Today we have long time favorite and past guest Jessica Eley here to talk about how you can make the important shifts in your life to be able...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey amazing TCC tribe! We are so happy to welcome you back to another episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast. Today we have long time favorite and past guest Jessica Eley here to talk about how you can make the important shifts in your life to be able conquer anything and everything. Apart from being one of our “bestest” people in the world, Jessica is a verified badass and has loads of great stuff to share in this episode so you are not going to want to miss this one! We promise! We’ll be talking about finding points of resistance and ease, how to build up your confidence and basically tearing your life apart so you can build it all up again, stronger and better than ever.
Make sure to stay tuned to the very end as we will be making an extra special announcement about an offer you can take advantage of! But before we get there we will be having the type of conversation in which we wish all our listeners will be able to participate. Open, honest and self aware, these are the qualities that are going to take you from where you are now to where you want to be! We talk about that elephant that we find to be in the room just a little too much, this idea that if you are struggling with something you can just pour more money into it and then hope that some change will just miraculously happen. This episode is all about how you can do better by using your potential and taking action!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey amazing TCC tribe! We are so happy to welcome you back to another episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast. Today we have long time favorite and past guest Jessica Eley here to talk about how you can make the important shifts in your life to be able conquer anything and everything. Apart from being one of our “bestest” people in the world, Jessica is a verified badass and has loads of great stuff to share in this episode so you are not going to want to miss this one! We promise! We’ll be talking about finding points of resistance and ease, how to build up your confidence and basically tearing your life apart so you can build it all up again, stronger and better than ever.</p><p>Make sure to stay tuned to the very end as we will be making an extra special announcement about an offer you can take advantage of! But before we get there we will be having the type of conversation in which we wish all our listeners will be able to participate. Open, honest and self aware, these are the qualities that are going to take you from where you are now to where you want to be! We talk about that elephant that we find to be in the room just a little too much, this idea that if you are struggling with something you can just pour more money into it and then hope that some change will just miraculously happen. This episode is all about how you can do better by using your potential and taking action!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2845</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c33f2b6bb4b94ba9a14687a390b54f93]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4213408393.mp3?updated=1660847180" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>250: The Dos and Dont's of Your Email Sequence</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-dos-and-donts-of-your-email-welcome-sequence</link>
      <description>Hey everybody and welcome back to The Strategy Hour! We hope you’re as excited for today’s episode as we are because we have something special for your earbuds that we know you are going to love. Today we will be talking about email welcome sequences and how to do them right. It took us some time and few missteps to get our’s where it is today and we are happy to share all the blunders we made with you for you and your business’ benefit! We want to help you get your welcome sequence just right for your needs and most importantly to make it profitable, so buckle up!
During this discussion, we’ll be guiding you through our history with our email tools and ideas and showing all our listeners just what worked and what didn’t. And at the end of the chat, we will be sharing something extra special that can take you one step further in your marketing so make sure to listen out for that. We cover the purpose and reasons for having a welcome sequence that is the bomb, we also do a deep dive on why our first welcome sequence was so bad! Imagine that! From there we share some of the reasons why it can be so difficult to get this right, especially in the beginning and we finish off by emphasizing what you should be focussing on when you are putting your sequence together. So let’s get all the way in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Aug 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Dos and Dont's of Your Email Sequence</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>250</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/346c5da6-ae9b-11ec-91b1-b398dac749dc/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Hey everybody and welcome back to The Strategy Hour! We hope you’re as excited for today’s episode as we are because we have something special for your earbuds that we know you are going to love. Today we will be talking about email welcome...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey everybody and welcome back to The Strategy Hour! We hope you’re as excited for today’s episode as we are because we have something special for your earbuds that we know you are going to love. Today we will be talking about email welcome sequences and how to do them right. It took us some time and few missteps to get our’s where it is today and we are happy to share all the blunders we made with you for you and your business’ benefit! We want to help you get your welcome sequence just right for your needs and most importantly to make it profitable, so buckle up!
During this discussion, we’ll be guiding you through our history with our email tools and ideas and showing all our listeners just what worked and what didn’t. And at the end of the chat, we will be sharing something extra special that can take you one step further in your marketing so make sure to listen out for that. We cover the purpose and reasons for having a welcome sequence that is the bomb, we also do a deep dive on why our first welcome sequence was so bad! Imagine that! From there we share some of the reasons why it can be so difficult to get this right, especially in the beginning and we finish off by emphasizing what you should be focussing on when you are putting your sequence together. So let’s get all the way in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey everybody and welcome back to The Strategy Hour! We hope you’re as excited for today’s episode as we are because we have something special for your earbuds that we know you are going to love. Today we will be talking about email welcome sequences and how to do them right. It took us some time and few missteps to get our’s where it is today and we are happy to share all the blunders we made with you for you and your business’ benefit! We want to help you get your welcome sequence just right for your needs and most importantly to make it profitable, so buckle up!</p><p>During this discussion, we’ll be guiding you through our history with our email tools and ideas and showing all our listeners just what worked and what didn’t. And at the end of the chat, we will be sharing something extra special that can take you one step further in your marketing so make sure to listen out for that. We cover the purpose and reasons for having a welcome sequence that is the bomb, we also do a deep dive on why our first welcome sequence was so bad! Imagine that! From there we share some of the reasons why it can be so difficult to get this right, especially in the beginning and we finish off by emphasizing what you should be focussing on when you are putting your sequence together. So let’s get all the way in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1463</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ae7ef159899e4a5185579df06d02f9cd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6423562669.mp3?updated=1659041366" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>249: How to Massively Increase Your Facebook ROI with Courtney Foster Donahue</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-massively-increase-your-facebook-roi-with-courtney-foster-donahue</link>
      <description>Today’s show is an extra special one. In fact, it was so special that we had to rerelease to all of our listeners because it was too good for just one run! This was a chat we had a little while ago with our friend, fellow unicorn and amazing red-headed beauty, Courtney Foster-Donahue. Courtney Foster-Donahue is an Atlanta-based four-time entrepreneur, business strategist who specializes in video content creation and Facebook marketing and advertising. Courtney helps entrepreneurs to win using Facebook through her new program called FB Framework. The company was previously, and in some portions of this conversation, called FB Everything, just so you do not need to be confused between the two.
With over 1.96 billion people around the world on Facebook today, why are so many businesses claiming Facebook is dead, turning away from Facebook Ads, or not seeing any benefits in them? From Facebook page optimization, your business Facebook page, Facebook ads, to all the tiny tips to get you maximizing your reach and growing your business, we are covering everything. This re-run busts the Facebook myths that will help you turn your business around!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 09 Aug 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Massively Increase Your Facebook ROI with Courtney Foster Donahue</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>249</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3528aae2-ae9b-11ec-91b1-5fd65447236b/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today’s show is an extra special one. In fact, it was so special that we had to rerelease to all of our listeners because it was too good for just one run! This was a chat we had a little while ago with our friend, fellow unicorn and amazing...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today’s show is an extra special one. In fact, it was so special that we had to rerelease to all of our listeners because it was too good for just one run! This was a chat we had a little while ago with our friend, fellow unicorn and amazing red-headed beauty, Courtney Foster-Donahue. Courtney Foster-Donahue is an Atlanta-based four-time entrepreneur, business strategist who specializes in video content creation and Facebook marketing and advertising. Courtney helps entrepreneurs to win using Facebook through her new program called FB Framework. The company was previously, and in some portions of this conversation, called FB Everything, just so you do not need to be confused between the two.
With over 1.96 billion people around the world on Facebook today, why are so many businesses claiming Facebook is dead, turning away from Facebook Ads, or not seeing any benefits in them? From Facebook page optimization, your business Facebook page, Facebook ads, to all the tiny tips to get you maximizing your reach and growing your business, we are covering everything. This re-run busts the Facebook myths that will help you turn your business around!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s show is an extra special one. In fact, it was so special that we had to rerelease to all of our listeners because it was too good for just one run! This was a chat we had a little while ago with our friend, fellow unicorn and amazing red-headed beauty, Courtney Foster-Donahue. Courtney Foster-Donahue is an Atlanta-based four-time entrepreneur, business strategist who specializes in video content creation and Facebook marketing and advertising. Courtney helps entrepreneurs to win using Facebook through her new program called FB Framework. The company was previously, and in some portions of this conversation, called FB Everything, just so you do not need to be confused between the two.</p><p>With over 1.96 billion people around the world on Facebook today, why are so many businesses claiming Facebook is dead, turning away from Facebook Ads, or not seeing any benefits in them? From Facebook page optimization, your business Facebook page, Facebook ads, to all the tiny tips to get you maximizing your reach and growing your business, we are covering everything. This re-run busts the Facebook myths that will help you turn your business around!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3133</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ebe6901e625943d5af540150be621dc9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7631501273.mp3?updated=1661436780" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>248: 5 Guiding Principles to Live an Irresistible Life with Aimee Beltran of Irresistible Icing</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/5-guiding-principles-to-live-an-irresistible-life-with-aimee-beltran-of-irresistible-icing</link>
      <description>Welcome back to the Strategy Hour Podcast everyone! Today we have a very special and meaningful episode with a wonderful guest that we cannot wait to share with you. Her name is Aimee Beltran and she started her own business and podcast called Irresistible Icing. We are huge fans and cannot wait to hear what Aimee has to say! Our guest has struggled with weight and body issues since she can remember and she has turned this difficulty into a source of support and care though her company. She always felt she needed to get to this idea of the perfect body but after years of bad experiences and self destruction, she realized there were other ways to live the life she was dreaming of. 
Aimee gives us the scoop on her five guiding principles that have helped her to start living an irresistible life. She takes us through these and gives us many other great insights and personal experiences. This episode is quite a deep one and we would like anyone with any history of body issues to be kind and caring to themselves while listening as we know these kinds of conversations can be very triggering. Nonetheless, there are some tears and lots of laughter during our chat and the overwhelming message that we and Aimee really want to bring to our listeners is one of body positivity and acceptance. And remember things do not always have to be perfect!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 07 Aug 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>248: 5 Guiding Principles to Live an Irresistible Life with Aimee Beltran of Irresistible Icing</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>248</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/35d4be18-ae9b-11ec-91b1-7f06f04373b9/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome back to the Strategy Hour Podcast everyone! Today we have a very special and meaningful episode with a wonderful guest that we cannot wait to share with you. Her name is Aimee Beltran and she started her own business and podcast called...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome back to the Strategy Hour Podcast everyone! Today we have a very special and meaningful episode with a wonderful guest that we cannot wait to share with you. Her name is Aimee Beltran and she started her own business and podcast called Irresistible Icing. We are huge fans and cannot wait to hear what Aimee has to say! Our guest has struggled with weight and body issues since she can remember and she has turned this difficulty into a source of support and care though her company. She always felt she needed to get to this idea of the perfect body but after years of bad experiences and self destruction, she realized there were other ways to live the life she was dreaming of. 
Aimee gives us the scoop on her five guiding principles that have helped her to start living an irresistible life. She takes us through these and gives us many other great insights and personal experiences. This episode is quite a deep one and we would like anyone with any history of body issues to be kind and caring to themselves while listening as we know these kinds of conversations can be very triggering. Nonetheless, there are some tears and lots of laughter during our chat and the overwhelming message that we and Aimee really want to bring to our listeners is one of body positivity and acceptance. And remember things do not always have to be perfect!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome back to the Strategy Hour Podcast everyone! Today we have a very special and meaningful episode with a wonderful guest that we cannot wait to share with you. Her name is Aimee Beltran and she started her own business and podcast called Irresistible Icing. We are huge fans and cannot wait to hear what Aimee has to say! Our guest has struggled with weight and body issues since she can remember and she has turned this difficulty into a source of support and care though her company. She always felt she needed to get to this idea of the perfect body but after years of bad experiences and self destruction, she realized there were other ways to live the life she was dreaming of. </p><p>Aimee gives us the scoop on her five guiding principles that have helped her to start living an irresistible life. She takes us through these and gives us many other great insights and personal experiences. This episode is quite a deep one and we would like anyone with any history of body issues to be kind and caring to themselves while listening as we know these kinds of conversations can be very triggering. Nonetheless, there are some tears and lots of laughter during our chat and the overwhelming message that we and Aimee really want to bring to our listeners is one of body positivity and acceptance. And remember things do not always have to be perfect!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2798</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e393ced863cf47cc944496a9aa0edb8f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3398133417.mp3?updated=1661384565" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>247: The Kinda Crunchy Movement Why We Love You The Way You Are</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-kinda-crunchy-movement-why-we-love-you-the-way-you-are</link>
      <description>Today on the show we’re talking The Kinda Crunchy Movement. You must be thinking, “What the french toast does this have to do with business?” Well, half jumping on a movement or half doing anything is freakin’ common and we think it only makes you human. But how can we identify those things and either make a decision that, it’s okay that you’re not going all the way or just decide that you want to make changes? Are you beating yourself up about some of the decisions you’re making or not making? Don’t worry, you’re not alone; We half-ass a lot of stuff!
Now you’re thinking, “How does this relate to other parts of my life?” Today we’re identifying it and recognizing where we’re doing it and where we want to make changes for the better. The common highlighter we’re talking about is our own flaws and our own ways, because we aren’t quite full anything just yet. Also, there is power in calling stuff out on what it is, so let us call out all the bullshit that we still do and don’t do so maybe you can feel a bit more normal.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 02 Aug 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Kinda Crunchy Movement Why We Love You The Way You Are</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>247</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/36866afa-ae9b-11ec-91b1-ef79205be097/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we’re talking The Kinda Crunchy Movement. You must be thinking, “What the french toast does this have to do with business?” Well, half jumping on a movement or half doing anything is freakin’ common and we think it only makes...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we’re talking The Kinda Crunchy Movement. You must be thinking, “What the french toast does this have to do with business?” Well, half jumping on a movement or half doing anything is freakin’ common and we think it only makes you human. But how can we identify those things and either make a decision that, it’s okay that you’re not going all the way or just decide that you want to make changes? Are you beating yourself up about some of the decisions you’re making or not making? Don’t worry, you’re not alone; We half-ass a lot of stuff!
Now you’re thinking, “How does this relate to other parts of my life?” Today we’re identifying it and recognizing where we’re doing it and where we want to make changes for the better. The common highlighter we’re talking about is our own flaws and our own ways, because we aren’t quite full anything just yet. Also, there is power in calling stuff out on what it is, so let us call out all the bullshit that we still do and don’t do so maybe you can feel a bit more normal.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we’re talking The Kinda Crunchy Movement. You must be thinking, “What the french toast does this have to do with business?” Well, half jumping on a movement or half doing anything is freakin’ common and we think it only makes you human. But how can we identify those things and either make a decision that, it’s okay that you’re not going all the way or just decide that you want to make changes? Are you beating yourself up about some of the decisions you’re making or not making? Don’t worry, you’re not alone; <em>We</em> half-ass a lot of stuff!</p><p>Now you’re thinking, “How does this relate to other parts of my life?” Today we’re identifying it and recognizing where we’re doing it and where we want to make changes for the better. The common highlighter we’re talking about is our own flaws and our own ways, because we aren’t quite <em>full</em> anything just yet. Also, there is power in calling stuff out on what it is, so let us call out all the bullshit that we still do and don’t do so maybe you can feel a bit more normal.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2449</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c695b87d006140ad85d7da1ada834883]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5323212177.mp3?updated=1661384470" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>246: Using Redbubble for Your Product Based Business with Kit Cronk</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/using-redbubble-for-your-product-based-business-with-kit-cronk</link>
      <description>On today’s episode we welcome wonder woman, super biz lady and all round badass Kit Cronk! Kit is part of our Think Creative Collective family and we love her entrepreneurial spirit as well. She is here today to tell us all about how she uses Redbubble and drop shipping for her business and how you might be able to do the same. Some of you may have heard of drop shipping but if you haven’t do not fear, all will be explained and become clear shortly! Kit has managed to come up with a great model for her particular artistic business and we cannot wait to have her share her expertise with you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 31 Jul 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>246: Using Redbubble for Your Product Based Business with Kit Cronk</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>246</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/37782818-ae9b-11ec-91b1-df80d8f7fe1d/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>On today’s episode we welcome wonder woman, super biz lady and all round badass Kit Cronk! Kit is part of our Think Creative Collective family and we love her entrepreneurial spirit as well. She is here today to tell us all about how she uses Redbubble and drop shipping for her business and how you might be able to do the same. Some of you may have heard of drop shipping but if you haven’t do not fear, all will be explained and become clear shortly! Kit has managed to come up with a great model for her particular artistic business and we cannot wait to have her share her expertise with you!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s episode we welcome wonder woman, super biz lady and all round badass Kit Cronk! Kit is part of our Think Creative Collective family and we love her entrepreneurial spirit as well. She is here today to tell us all about how she uses Redbubble and drop shipping for her business and how you might be able to do the same. Some of you may have heard of drop shipping but if you haven’t do not fear, all will be explained and become clear shortly! Kit has managed to come up with a great model for her particular artistic business and we cannot wait to have her share her expertise with you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s episode we welcome wonder woman, super biz lady and all round badass Kit Cronk! Kit is part of our Think Creative Collective family and we love her entrepreneurial spirit as well. She is here today to tell us all about how she uses Redbubble and drop shipping for her business and how you might be able to do the same. Some of you may have heard of drop shipping but if you haven’t do not fear, all will be explained and become clear shortly! Kit has managed to come up with a great model for her particular artistic business and we cannot wait to have her share her expertise with you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3065</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3ca8d9a7d40d4da4a10301bf94cc57d5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6362529809.mp3?updated=1661384545" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>245: The 10 Things No One Ever Tells You About Going Evergreen</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-10-things-no-one-ever-tells-you-about-going-evergreen</link>
      <description>We have been working our booty’s off behind the scenes trying to set up something pretty epic in our business – the evergreen machine. So, in this episode, we’re finally ready to tell you about the pros and cons of this soul-destroying process and why it is so worth it! We all talk about financial freedom, we all want it, but you don’t always hear about the nitty-gritty testing, the waiting, the endless funnels inside the funnels and the unsurmountable self-doubt it takes pushing through to get there.
Despite the many cons of evergreening, we managed to maintain our sanity, not kill each other, stick it out and evergreen a $2000 course online. The benefits of this have been more than we ever dreamed, and we want to tell you all about it, and how you can do it too, here today. If you are a six-figure business owner and are interested in evergreening one of your courses, then we want you to pay attention to this episode – it could just change your life.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Jul 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The 10 Things No One Ever Tells You About Going Evergreen</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>245</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/383076c0-ae9b-11ec-91b1-63e3a30ce53e/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We have been working our booty’s off behind the scenes trying to set up something pretty epic in our business – the evergreen machine. So, in this episode, we’re finally ready to tell you about the pros and cons of this soul-destroying process...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We have been working our booty’s off behind the scenes trying to set up something pretty epic in our business – the evergreen machine. So, in this episode, we’re finally ready to tell you about the pros and cons of this soul-destroying process and why it is so worth it! We all talk about financial freedom, we all want it, but you don’t always hear about the nitty-gritty testing, the waiting, the endless funnels inside the funnels and the unsurmountable self-doubt it takes pushing through to get there.
Despite the many cons of evergreening, we managed to maintain our sanity, not kill each other, stick it out and evergreen a $2000 course online. The benefits of this have been more than we ever dreamed, and we want to tell you all about it, and how you can do it too, here today. If you are a six-figure business owner and are interested in evergreening one of your courses, then we want you to pay attention to this episode – it could just change your life.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We have been working our booty’s off behind the scenes trying to set up something pretty epic in our business – the evergreen machine. So, in this episode, we’re finally ready to tell you about the pros and cons of this soul-destroying process and why it is so worth it! We all talk about financial freedom, we all want it, but you don’t always hear about the nitty-gritty testing, the waiting, the endless funnels inside the funnels and the unsurmountable self-doubt it takes pushing through to get there.</p><p>Despite the many cons of evergreening, we managed to maintain our sanity, not kill each other, stick it out and evergreen a $2000 course online. The benefits of this have been more than we ever dreamed, and we want to tell you all about it, and how you can do it too, here today. If you are a six-figure business owner and are interested in evergreening one of your courses, then we want you to pay attention to this episode – it could just change your life.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2271</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[10ff76afa2b04057b05ac78d506c8da7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8565059067.mp3?updated=1660955315" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>244: Your Mess is Your Message How to Feel Your Feels with Amber Rae</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/your-mess-is-your-message-how-to-feel-your-feels-with-amber-rae</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we welcome Amber Rae. Amber is an author, artist and speaker and has been called the “Millennial Motivator” by Fortune and "The Brené Brown of Wonder” by Mind Body Green. Amber’s work invites the truth that lives within us and helps you befriend your emotions and express your gifts. In this episode, we find out more about Amber’s new book titled, Choose Wonder Over Worry, where you’ll get a sneak peek into the book and some of Amber’s practices.
These include: The Break Down Panic Attack, the Moving Across the Country to Change Your Life and the How You Actually Feel Your Feelings. We uncover a lot of techniques on how to deal with anxiety, worry, perfectionism and everything in between. Amber is here to help us let all that self-sabotaging sh*t go to live a better life – possibly our best life! If you want some action steps on how to make that happen, then this, right here, is the episode for you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 24 Jul 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Your Mess is Your Message How to Feel Your Feels with Amber Rae</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>244</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/38e02958-ae9b-11ec-91b1-679443dacbaf/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we welcome Amber Rae. Amber is an author, artist and speaker and has been called the “Millennial Motivator” by Fortune and "The Brené Brown of Wonder” by Mind Body Green. Amber’s work invites the truth that lives within...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we welcome Amber Rae. Amber is an author, artist and speaker and has been called the “Millennial Motivator” by Fortune and "The Brené Brown of Wonder” by Mind Body Green. Amber’s work invites the truth that lives within us and helps you befriend your emotions and express your gifts. In this episode, we find out more about Amber’s new book titled, Choose Wonder Over Worry, where you’ll get a sneak peek into the book and some of Amber’s practices.
These include: The Break Down Panic Attack, the Moving Across the Country to Change Your Life and the How You Actually Feel Your Feelings. We uncover a lot of techniques on how to deal with anxiety, worry, perfectionism and everything in between. Amber is here to help us let all that self-sabotaging sh*t go to live a better life – possibly our best life! If you want some action steps on how to make that happen, then this, right here, is the episode for you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we welcome Amber Rae. Amber is an author, artist and speaker and has been called the “Millennial Motivator” by Fortune and "The Brené Brown of Wonder” by Mind Body Green. Amber’s work invites the truth that lives within us and helps you befriend your emotions and express your gifts. In this episode, we find out more about Amber’s new book titled, <em>Choose Wonder Over Worry</em>, where you’ll get a sneak peek into the book and some of Amber’s practices.</p><p>These include: The Break Down Panic Attack, the Moving Across the Country to Change Your Life and the How You Actually Feel Your Feelings. We uncover a lot of techniques on how to deal with anxiety, worry, perfectionism and everything in between. Amber is here to help us let all that self-sabotaging sh*t go to live a better life – possibly our best life! If you want some action steps on how to make that happen, then this, right here, is the episode for you.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2446</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c6361ec8da254fd1869ebe953fea5ebf]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4478076983.mp3?updated=1661264867" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>243: Boss Talk: How Do You Think Email Marketing is Changing Due to New Regulations? (+The Future of Email)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/boss-talk-how-do-you-think-email-marketing-is-changing-due-to-new-regulations-the-future-of-email</link>
      <description>Today’s Boss Talk question is: How do you think email marketing is changing due to new regulations? We all know the importance of email marketing, but the truth is that the state of email has changed a lot over the past few years and with the new data protection regulations, it is changing even more. Where is it headed and how are we going to have to adapt? Tackling this question here with us today, is our favorite regular, Steph Crowder.
In this episode, we discuss the trending question, “Is email marketing dead?” and how you can make your emails stand out in a way that doesn’t make people kick you to their spam folder. We also discuss the power of in-person marketing, why talking to people like they’re human is the best tactic and how Abbie has been able to have a successful side business with no email marketing at all.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 19 Jul 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>243: Boss Talk: How Do You Think Email Marketing is Changing Due to New Regulations? (+The Future of Email)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>243</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3997be74-ae9b-11ec-91b1-8787516dc3f1/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today’s Boss Talk question is: How do you think email marketing is changing due to new regulations? We all know the importance of email marketing, but the truth is that the state of email has changed a lot over the past few years and with the new...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today’s Boss Talk question is: How do you think email marketing is changing due to new regulations? We all know the importance of email marketing, but the truth is that the state of email has changed a lot over the past few years and with the new data protection regulations, it is changing even more. Where is it headed and how are we going to have to adapt? Tackling this question here with us today, is our favorite regular, Steph Crowder.
In this episode, we discuss the trending question, “Is email marketing dead?” and how you can make your emails stand out in a way that doesn’t make people kick you to their spam folder. We also discuss the power of in-person marketing, why talking to people like they’re human is the best tactic and how Abbie has been able to have a successful side business with no email marketing at all.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s Boss Talk question is: How do you think email marketing is changing due to new regulations? We all know the importance of email marketing, but the truth is that the state of email has changed a lot over the past few years and with the new data protection regulations, it is changing even more. Where is it headed and how are we going to have to adapt? Tackling this question here with us today, is our favorite regular, Steph Crowder.</p><p>In this episode, we discuss the trending question, “Is email marketing dead?” and how you can make your emails stand out in a way that doesn’t make people kick you to their spam folder. We also discuss the power of in-person marketing, why talking to people like they’re human is the best tactic and how Abbie has been able to have a successful side business with no email marketing at all.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2407</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5ba42a6792d64527a0c65c6456792c98]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8141279591.mp3?updated=1660955249" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>242: Whats At Risk if You Don't Change Your Business Action Plan</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/whats-at-risk-if-you-dont-change-your-business-action-plan</link>
      <description>There tends to be this thing that happens. This thing that has been happening for a while now. This thing where everybody tries to implement the exact same strategy, at the same time. What then ends up happening is that everybody starts to look, sound and feel pretty much the same. Have you noticed it? This is where things start to get icky and this icky-ness is what we’re going to be bringing to the surface today.
In this episode, we’ll be highlighting some of the common mistakes we see businesses making today. We’re here to help you cut the crap, stop following fickle trends and really get back to laying the foundations of basic business practice. Here we’ll be walking you through our PANCAKES Method to help you identify where you are at in your business and how you can reach those upper-level results. If you need a reality check, a kick in the booty and an actionable gameplan to ground your business for the long haul – then you’re going to love this episode.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 17 Jul 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Whats At Risk if You Don't Change Your Business Action Plan</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>242</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3a41b708-ae9b-11ec-91b1-c3a7204e9252/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>There tends to be this thing that happens. This thing that has been happening for a while now. This thing where everybody tries to implement the exact same strategy, at the same time. What then ends up happening is that everybody starts to look, sound...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There tends to be this thing that happens. This thing that has been happening for a while now. This thing where everybody tries to implement the exact same strategy, at the same time. What then ends up happening is that everybody starts to look, sound and feel pretty much the same. Have you noticed it? This is where things start to get icky and this icky-ness is what we’re going to be bringing to the surface today.
In this episode, we’ll be highlighting some of the common mistakes we see businesses making today. We’re here to help you cut the crap, stop following fickle trends and really get back to laying the foundations of basic business practice. Here we’ll be walking you through our PANCAKES Method to help you identify where you are at in your business and how you can reach those upper-level results. If you need a reality check, a kick in the booty and an actionable gameplan to ground your business for the long haul – then you’re going to love this episode.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There tends to be this thing that happens. This thing that has been happening for a while now. This thing where everybody tries to implement the exact same strategy, at the same time. What then ends up happening is that everybody starts to look, sound and feel pretty much the same. Have you noticed it? This is where things start to get icky and this icky-ness is what we’re going to be bringing to the surface today.</p><p>In this episode, we’ll be highlighting some of the common mistakes we see businesses making today. We’re here to help you cut the crap, stop following fickle trends and really get back to laying the foundations of basic business practice. Here we’ll be walking you through our PANCAKES Method to help you identify where you are at in your business and how you can reach those upper-level results. If you need a reality check, a kick in the booty and an actionable gameplan to ground your business for the long haul – then you’re going to love this episode.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2056</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b352865f481849e0bf1e0d58304ba348]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4262046748.mp3?updated=1660955280" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>241: Getting Your VA Business Off the Ground with Abbey Ashley of the Virtual Savvy</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/getting-your-va-business-off-the-ground-with-abbey-ashley-of-the-virtual-savvy</link>
      <description>Today on the show we welcome Abbey Ashley, founder of The Virtual Savvy. Abbey is a virtual assistant startup coach who is helping women all over the world start their online businesses and launch and grow their VA businesses to $5,000 per month and beyond! Ashley has been featured on Boss Mom, Smart Passive Income and NBC News – so you can image, this girl knows her sh*t! If you’re someone who can’t stand the 9-5 life, being a VA is a great place to start for anyone who is wanting to get their feet wet in the online world. But how do you get started?
For anyone who is stuck, not knowing where or how to even begin tapping into the online VA space, then this is literally the episode for you. In this episode, Abbey provides so many fantastic ideas for you to get something off the ground as well as how to pivot, niche and scale your VA business so that you can totally crush it. After listening to this episode, you will be able to start making money this very week! So, take some notes and let’s get started.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 13 Jul 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Getting Your VA Business Off the Ground with Abbey Ashley of the Virtual Savvy</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>241</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3afdd9ce-ae9b-11ec-91b1-d3cf410a2081/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we welcome Abbey Ashley, founder of The Virtual Savvy. Abbey is a virtual assistant startup coach who is helping women all over the world start their online businesses and launch and grow their VA businesses to $5,000 per month and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we welcome Abbey Ashley, founder of The Virtual Savvy. Abbey is a virtual assistant startup coach who is helping women all over the world start their online businesses and launch and grow their VA businesses to $5,000 per month and beyond! Ashley has been featured on Boss Mom, Smart Passive Income and NBC News – so you can image, this girl knows her sh*t! If you’re someone who can’t stand the 9-5 life, being a VA is a great place to start for anyone who is wanting to get their feet wet in the online world. But how do you get started?
For anyone who is stuck, not knowing where or how to even begin tapping into the online VA space, then this is literally the episode for you. In this episode, Abbey provides so many fantastic ideas for you to get something off the ground as well as how to pivot, niche and scale your VA business so that you can totally crush it. After listening to this episode, you will be able to start making money this very week! So, take some notes and let’s get started.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we welcome Abbey Ashley, founder of The Virtual Savvy. Abbey is a virtual assistant startup coach who is helping women all over the world start their online businesses and launch and grow their VA businesses to $5,000 per month and beyond! Ashley has been featured on Boss Mom, Smart Passive Income and NBC News – so you can image, this girl knows her sh*t! If you’re someone who can’t stand the 9-5 life, being a VA is a great place to start for anyone who is wanting to get their feet wet in the online world. But how do you get started?</p><p>For anyone who is stuck, not knowing where or how to even begin tapping into the online VA space, then this is literally the episode for you. In this episode, Abbey provides so many fantastic ideas for you to get something off the ground as well as how to pivot, niche and scale your VA business so that you can totally crush it. After listening to this episode, you will be able to start making money this very week! So, take some notes and let’s get started.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2525</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a4a55ff7220e42daa451e9f77182ee9a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4510804384.mp3?updated=1660955169" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>240: Launch Lessons Food Analogies - Our June Review</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/launch-lessons-food-analogies-our-2018-june-review</link>
      <description>June was the most slap in the face lesson that Emylee has ever had in business. Abbie, on the other hand, felt like we had it coming. But no matter which way you see it, we’re going to talk about it – and many other delicious things – today in our June Review episode. This June, we launched The Strategy Academy live for the first time since November 2017. We have evergreened the program for the past six months and this launch was to give us a big public push. We did a successful live launch but did not reach the goals that we had set for it.
In this episode, we reflect on the process and the results of our Strategy Academy relaunch and highlight some of the latest changes and additions to TCC. We have some exciting things coming up for July, which we’ll share with you too, and round things off with some strategy, pancakes, and spaghetti. By end of this episode, you’ll be reminded that sometimes you don’t need to burn your projects but rather, speak about them in a different way.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 Jul 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Launch Lessons Food Analogies - Our June Review</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>240</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3bbd5452-ae9b-11ec-91b1-575bafb3fbb4/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>June was the most slap in the face lesson that Emylee has ever had in business. Abbie, on the other hand, felt like we had it coming. But no matter which way you see it, we’re going to talk about it – and many other delicious things – today in...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>June was the most slap in the face lesson that Emylee has ever had in business. Abbie, on the other hand, felt like we had it coming. But no matter which way you see it, we’re going to talk about it – and many other delicious things – today in our June Review episode. This June, we launched The Strategy Academy live for the first time since November 2017. We have evergreened the program for the past six months and this launch was to give us a big public push. We did a successful live launch but did not reach the goals that we had set for it.
In this episode, we reflect on the process and the results of our Strategy Academy relaunch and highlight some of the latest changes and additions to TCC. We have some exciting things coming up for July, which we’ll share with you too, and round things off with some strategy, pancakes, and spaghetti. By end of this episode, you’ll be reminded that sometimes you don’t need to burn your projects but rather, speak about them in a different way.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>June was the most slap in the face lesson that Emylee has ever had in business. Abbie, on the other hand, felt like we had it coming. But no matter which way you see it, we’re going to talk about it – and many other delicious things – today in our June Review episode. This June, we launched The Strategy Academy live for the first time since November 2017. We have evergreened the program for the past six months and this launch was to give us a big public push. We did a successful live launch but did not reach the goals that we had set for it.</p><p>In this episode, we reflect on the process and the results of our Strategy Academy relaunch and highlight some of the latest changes and additions to TCC. We have some exciting things coming up for July, which we’ll share with you too, and round things off with some strategy, pancakes, and spaghetti. By end of this episode, you’ll be reminded that sometimes you don’t need to burn your projects but rather, speak about them in a different way.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1344</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8ba2a56efabc41d090ee2ab6a98c02fd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5721797417.mp3?updated=1660954819" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>239: Finding Your Voice and the Power of StoryTelling with Michelle Knight of Brand Merry</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/finding-your-voice-and-the-power-of-storytelling-with-michelle-knight-of-brand-merry</link>
      <description>Today on the show we welcome Michelle Knight – mother, wife, world traveler and storyteller. Michelle is also a branding coach and the founder of Brand Merry, where she works with female entrepreneurs to create an authentic, captivating and money-making brand through the power of story. Today we are breaking down the different types of stories that Michelle sees as most effective in the online space, as well as how you can literally integrate yourself, your background, your purpose and all the little stories that make you an amazing human being – into your brand.
Michelle shares some tricks, tips, and tactics on how you can outline really big stories, break them down, share them authentically and how to truly draw a connection between your audience so that you can build trust – which in turn, builds sales and a money-making business! This episode is really actionable and is going to spark a ton of ideas for you and your business. Everyone has a story to tell, right? So grab a notebook and start brainstorming yours here with us today.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 09 Jul 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Finding Your Voice and the Power of StoryTelling with Michelle Knight of Brand Merry</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>239</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3c676050-ae9b-11ec-91b1-23def2398d09/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we welcome Michelle Knight – mother, wife, world traveler and storyteller. Michelle is also a branding coach and the founder of Brand Merry, where she works with female entrepreneurs to create an authentic, captivating and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we welcome Michelle Knight – mother, wife, world traveler and storyteller. Michelle is also a branding coach and the founder of Brand Merry, where she works with female entrepreneurs to create an authentic, captivating and money-making brand through the power of story. Today we are breaking down the different types of stories that Michelle sees as most effective in the online space, as well as how you can literally integrate yourself, your background, your purpose and all the little stories that make you an amazing human being – into your brand.
Michelle shares some tricks, tips, and tactics on how you can outline really big stories, break them down, share them authentically and how to truly draw a connection between your audience so that you can build trust – which in turn, builds sales and a money-making business! This episode is really actionable and is going to spark a ton of ideas for you and your business. Everyone has a story to tell, right? So grab a notebook and start brainstorming yours here with us today.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we welcome Michelle Knight – mother, wife, world traveler and storyteller. Michelle is also a branding coach and the founder of Brand Merry, where she works with female entrepreneurs to create an authentic, captivating and money-making brand through the power of story. Today we are breaking down the different types of stories that Michelle sees as most effective in the online space, as well as how you can literally integrate yourself, your background, your purpose and all the little stories that make you an amazing human being – into your brand.</p><p>Michelle shares some tricks, tips, and tactics on how you can outline really big stories, break them down, share them authentically and how to truly draw a connection between your audience so that you can build trust – which in turn, builds sales and a money-making business! This episode is really actionable and is going to spark a ton of ideas for you and your business. Everyone has a story to tell, right? So grab a notebook and start brainstorming yours here with us today.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2370</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[fc4936dfa51440758908b211e4471d6a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9595066083.mp3?updated=1661384126" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>238: Two Reasons Why Your Business is Stuck What to Do About It</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/two-reasons-why-your-business-is-stuck-what-to-do-about-it</link>
      <description>On today’s episode of The Strategy Hour we are tackling a very important subject and a problem that is very close to home for most business owners including ourselves here at TCC. We are going to be looking at the two schools of thought that might be holding up your business’ progress. With the rise in entrepreneurship and self-made business owners, their has been a natural growth in literature and thought on the subject. So much of this has been helpful and inspiring in many different ways but there are also ways in which it can be stunting you and your work.
The first popular school of thought we look at is the “hustle ‘till you die” attitude which has been popularized by many successful entrepreneurs and has so much influence over the way go-getters portray themselves at events and online. We at Think Creative Collective know the value of hard work and persistence but attaching someone else’s or a collectively held image of blood sweat and tears to your own life can have devastating effects on your health, family life and of course your work. The second thing we look at is the idea that hiring and outsourcing is the direct line to success and credibility. After unpacking just how damaging these two ideas can be to you and those around you we look at ways in which you can avoid these problems, taking only the necessary pearls of wisdom from the philosophies and finding your own, healthy pathway to success!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 06 Jul 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Two Reasons Why Your Business is Stuck What to Do About It</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>238</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3d14167e-ae9b-11ec-91b1-77ac4bbdfbfe/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>On today’s episode of The Strategy Hour we are tackling a very important subject and a problem that is very close to home for most business owners including ourselves here at TCC. We are going to be looking at the two schools of thought that might...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s episode of The Strategy Hour we are tackling a very important subject and a problem that is very close to home for most business owners including ourselves here at TCC. We are going to be looking at the two schools of thought that might be holding up your business’ progress. With the rise in entrepreneurship and self-made business owners, their has been a natural growth in literature and thought on the subject. So much of this has been helpful and inspiring in many different ways but there are also ways in which it can be stunting you and your work.
The first popular school of thought we look at is the “hustle ‘till you die” attitude which has been popularized by many successful entrepreneurs and has so much influence over the way go-getters portray themselves at events and online. We at Think Creative Collective know the value of hard work and persistence but attaching someone else’s or a collectively held image of blood sweat and tears to your own life can have devastating effects on your health, family life and of course your work. The second thing we look at is the idea that hiring and outsourcing is the direct line to success and credibility. After unpacking just how damaging these two ideas can be to you and those around you we look at ways in which you can avoid these problems, taking only the necessary pearls of wisdom from the philosophies and finding your own, healthy pathway to success!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s episode of The Strategy Hour we are tackling a very important subject and a problem that is very close to home for most business owners including ourselves here at TCC. We are going to be looking at the two schools of thought that might be holding up your business’ progress. With the rise in entrepreneurship and self-made business owners, their has been a natural growth in literature and thought on the subject. So much of this has been helpful and inspiring in many different ways but there are also ways in which it can be stunting you and your work.</p><p>The first popular school of thought we look at is the “hustle ‘till you die” attitude which has been popularized by many successful entrepreneurs and has so much influence over the way go-getters portray themselves at events and online. We at Think Creative Collective know the value of hard work and persistence but attaching someone else’s or a collectively held image of blood sweat and tears to your own life can have devastating effects on your health, family life and of course your work. The second thing we look at is the idea that hiring and outsourcing is the direct line to success and credibility. After unpacking just how damaging these two ideas can be to you and those around you we look at ways in which you can avoid these problems, taking only the necessary pearls of wisdom from the philosophies and finding your own, healthy pathway to success!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1985</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[674844505e3e454da4ba244478cf064f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7170308785.mp3?updated=1661384058" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>237: Feel-Good Marketing - Using Your Personality to Grow Your Biz with Brit Kolo of Jam Marketing Group</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/feel-good-marketing-using-your-personality-to-grow-your-biz-with-brit-kolo-of-jam-marketing-group</link>
      <description>Today on the show we welcome Brit Kolo of Jam Marketing Group. Brit is a feel-good Marketing Coach, accountability partner, abundance junkie and hugger of all things plants. Brit coaches boxed-in business owners to become independent, profitable leaders through self-awareness and #MarketingThatFeelsGood. In this episode, we’re diving into all things personality type and this corresponds to marketing plans. Brit believes that you shouldn’t have to feel fake and sales-y in order to grow your business.
By knowing your personality type and using that as a home base for your marketing strategy, she believes that you can truly create marketing that feels good for you. Here we break down what types of things feel good for certain personalities and what things might make us feel icky and uncomfortable so that you can lean into the thing that is going to help you market faster, better and stronger. By the end of this episode, you’ll have a good sense of how you can make selling feel so right for you in your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 Jul 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Feel-Good Marketing - Using Your Personality to Grow Your Biz with Brit Kolo of Jam Marketing Group</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>237</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3dc0cb3a-ae9b-11ec-91b1-7bf2e94a4fe7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we welcome Brit Kolo of Jam Marketing Group. Brit is a feel-good Marketing Coach, accountability partner, abundance junkie and hugger of all things plants. Brit coaches boxed-in business owners to become independent, profitable...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we welcome Brit Kolo of Jam Marketing Group. Brit is a feel-good Marketing Coach, accountability partner, abundance junkie and hugger of all things plants. Brit coaches boxed-in business owners to become independent, profitable leaders through self-awareness and #MarketingThatFeelsGood. In this episode, we’re diving into all things personality type and this corresponds to marketing plans. Brit believes that you shouldn’t have to feel fake and sales-y in order to grow your business.
By knowing your personality type and using that as a home base for your marketing strategy, she believes that you can truly create marketing that feels good for you. Here we break down what types of things feel good for certain personalities and what things might make us feel icky and uncomfortable so that you can lean into the thing that is going to help you market faster, better and stronger. By the end of this episode, you’ll have a good sense of how you can make selling feel so right for you in your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we welcome Brit Kolo of Jam Marketing Group. Brit is a feel-good Marketing Coach, accountability partner, abundance junkie and hugger of all things plants. Brit coaches boxed-in business owners to become independent, profitable leaders through self-awareness and #MarketingThatFeelsGood. In this episode, we’re diving into all things personality type and this corresponds to marketing plans. Brit believes that you shouldn’t have to feel fake and sales-y in order to grow your business.</p><p>By knowing your personality type and using that as a home base for your marketing strategy, she believes that you can truly create marketing that feels good for you. Here we break down what types of things feel good for certain personalities and what things might make us feel icky and uncomfortable so that you can lean into the thing that is going to help you market faster, better and stronger. By the end of this episode, you’ll have a good sense of how you can make selling feel so right for you in your business.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2281</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1f6721d3416745c0903202caebb8818e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9604226730.mp3?updated=1661384014" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>236: Celebrating Our 3 Year MeetAversary</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/celebrating-our-3-year-meetaversary</link>
      <description>Today’s podcast is really special retrospective, looking back on our meetaversary! We met three years ago and those of you who have been with us for a while, know just how special the journey we have made together has been! So we thought we would take this opportunity to look back on the last three years and really just pay tribute to each other and what we have achieved. Although it has not all been plain sailing and easy terrain the good times have made the challenges that much more manageable. Through all the ups and downs that life has thrown at us, this business we have built together is a blessing and we are both so grateful for it!
We start by trying to remember exactly how we first met and the first conversations we in the Savvy Community and the following phone calls and sleepovers. Once we spent time together we knew it was something special and the honesty we were able to exercise so quickly really showed us how rare our connection was. Very soon after meeting we started to see how we balanced each other out and complimented each other’s strengths and weakness. We hope everyone out there gets to feel this great feeling! We look back at some of the best and worst memories from this period and look forward to what the future might hold. This episode is a bit gushy and is all about us - but we know you care, otherwise, you wouldn’t be here! And who doesn’t need a little bit more inspirations and gratefulness in their lives?
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 02 Jul 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Celebrating Our 3 Year MeetAversary</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>236</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3e791938-ae9b-11ec-91b1-2b31575ec3ce/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today’s podcast is really special retrospective, looking back on our meetaversary! We met three years ago and those of you who have been with us for a while, know just how special the journey we have made together has been! So we thought we would...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today’s podcast is really special retrospective, looking back on our meetaversary! We met three years ago and those of you who have been with us for a while, know just how special the journey we have made together has been! So we thought we would take this opportunity to look back on the last three years and really just pay tribute to each other and what we have achieved. Although it has not all been plain sailing and easy terrain the good times have made the challenges that much more manageable. Through all the ups and downs that life has thrown at us, this business we have built together is a blessing and we are both so grateful for it!
We start by trying to remember exactly how we first met and the first conversations we in the Savvy Community and the following phone calls and sleepovers. Once we spent time together we knew it was something special and the honesty we were able to exercise so quickly really showed us how rare our connection was. Very soon after meeting we started to see how we balanced each other out and complimented each other’s strengths and weakness. We hope everyone out there gets to feel this great feeling! We look back at some of the best and worst memories from this period and look forward to what the future might hold. This episode is a bit gushy and is all about us - but we know you care, otherwise, you wouldn’t be here! And who doesn’t need a little bit more inspirations and gratefulness in their lives?
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s podcast is really special retrospective, looking back on our meetaversary! We met three years ago and those of you who have been with us for a while, know just how special the journey we have made together has been! So we thought we would take this opportunity to look back on the last three years and really just pay tribute to each other and what we have achieved. Although it has not all been plain sailing and easy terrain the good times have made the challenges that much more manageable. Through all the ups and downs that life has thrown at us, this business we have built together is a blessing and we are both so grateful for it!</p><p>We start by trying to remember exactly how we first met and the first conversations we in the Savvy Community and the following phone calls and sleepovers. Once we spent time together we knew it was something special and the honesty we were able to exercise so quickly really showed us how rare our connection was. Very soon after meeting we started to see how we balanced each other out and complimented each other’s strengths and weakness. We hope everyone out there gets to feel this great feeling! We look back at some of the best and worst memories from this period and look forward to what the future might hold. This episode is a bit gushy and is all about us - but we know you care, otherwise, you wouldn’t be here! And who doesn’t need a little bit more inspirations and gratefulness in their lives?</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2226</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4103069a6dab46cfadfea2fc0a5a18ed]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7937839990.mp3?updated=1661383920" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>235: Finding Time When You Don't Have Time with Lauren Golden of the Free Mama</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/finding-time-when-you-dont-have-time-with-lauren-golden-of-the-free-mama</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we welcome Lauren Golden. Lauren loves helping mamas free themselves from the nine to five grind. Lauren launched The Free Mama Movement to show working moms that they don’t have to choose between family and financial stability. We’ve all said it and we’ve all heard it: “I don’t have time.” This is the easiest excuse that people love to pull out of their pockets when they’re not seeing business growth or success. But is it really true?
For every single person out there who has ever said, “But I don’t have any time to grow my business” – this episode is for you. Here, Lauren is busting myths, knocking excuses out the window and giving you action steps on how to better utilize the time that you do have in your day – regardless of kids, dogs, full-time jobs, health, hobbies and life. All this so you can make amazing things happen in your business. No more excuses – grab your notebook and give this one a listen!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 29 Jun 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Finding Time When You Don't Have Time with Lauren Golden of the Free Mama</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>235</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3f26a210-ae9b-11ec-91b1-bbbcaa4a87fb/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we welcome Lauren Golden. Lauren loves helping mamas free themselves from the nine to five grind. Lauren launched The Free Mama Movement to show working moms that they don’t have to choose between family and financial...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we welcome Lauren Golden. Lauren loves helping mamas free themselves from the nine to five grind. Lauren launched The Free Mama Movement to show working moms that they don’t have to choose between family and financial stability. We’ve all said it and we’ve all heard it: “I don’t have time.” This is the easiest excuse that people love to pull out of their pockets when they’re not seeing business growth or success. But is it really true?
For every single person out there who has ever said, “But I don’t have any time to grow my business” – this episode is for you. Here, Lauren is busting myths, knocking excuses out the window and giving you action steps on how to better utilize the time that you do have in your day – regardless of kids, dogs, full-time jobs, health, hobbies and life. All this so you can make amazing things happen in your business. No more excuses – grab your notebook and give this one a listen!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we welcome Lauren Golden. Lauren loves helping mamas free themselves from the nine to five grind. Lauren launched The Free Mama Movement to show working moms that they don’t have to choose between family and financial stability. We’ve all said it and we’ve all heard it: “I don’t have time.” This is the easiest excuse that people love to pull out of their pockets when they’re not seeing business growth or success. But is it really true?</p><p>For every single person out there who has ever said, “But I don’t have any time to grow my business” – this episode is for you. Here, Lauren is busting myths, knocking excuses out the window and giving you action steps on how to better utilize the time that you <em>do</em> have in your day – regardless of kids, dogs, full-time jobs, health, hobbies and life. All this so you can make amazing things happen in your business. No more excuses – grab your notebook and give this one a listen!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2743</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cba7120ddfb2427e8be49156e340d742]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4539686191.mp3?updated=1661380101" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>234: May Review Session - The Month We Deleted 21k Subscribers</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/may-review-session-the-month-we-deleted-21k-subscribers</link>
      <description>Hey ya’ll! It’s our May review / June planning session coming to you live from Emylee’s very dirty office. In this episode, we go over some of the things we accomplished and didn’t accomplish in May, some of our daring plans for June and let you in on a little big secret… This June we will be bringing you the biggest launch you have ever witnessed at TCC and share some of our exciting new sponsorship prospects on the horizon.
We also share some successful news from our grueling switch over to Active Campaign and reveal why we deleted 21k subscribers from our list and are as cool as cucumbers about it. We also share the changes we have made to the business with GDPR compliance and why vanity numbers really don’t mean a thing. By the end of this episode, you will have a few great resources to help you take the steps you need to take in your business in order to reach success and sustainability.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 27 Jun 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>May Review Session - The Month We Deleted 21k Subscribers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>234</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/3fca640e-ae9b-11ec-91b1-73d7dd7fce69/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Hey ya’ll! It’s our May review / June planning session coming to you live from Emylee’s very dirty office. In this episode, we go over some of the things we accomplished and didn’t accomplish in May, some of our daring plans for June and let...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey ya’ll! It’s our May review / June planning session coming to you live from Emylee’s very dirty office. In this episode, we go over some of the things we accomplished and didn’t accomplish in May, some of our daring plans for June and let you in on a little big secret… This June we will be bringing you the biggest launch you have ever witnessed at TCC and share some of our exciting new sponsorship prospects on the horizon.
We also share some successful news from our grueling switch over to Active Campaign and reveal why we deleted 21k subscribers from our list and are as cool as cucumbers about it. We also share the changes we have made to the business with GDPR compliance and why vanity numbers really don’t mean a thing. By the end of this episode, you will have a few great resources to help you take the steps you need to take in your business in order to reach success and sustainability.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey ya’ll! It’s our May review / June planning session coming to you live from Emylee’s very dirty office. In this episode, we go over some of the things we accomplished and didn’t accomplish in May, some of our daring plans for June and let you in on a little big secret… This June we will be bringing you the biggest launch you have ever witnessed at TCC and share some of our exciting new sponsorship prospects on the horizon.</p><p>We also share some successful news from our grueling switch over to Active Campaign and reveal why we deleted 21k subscribers from our list and are as cool as cucumbers about it. We also share the changes we have made to the business with GDPR compliance and why vanity numbers really don’t mean a thing. By the end of this episode, you will have a few great resources to help you take the steps you need to take in your business in order to reach success and sustainability.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1767</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[903498d174bd434897196e53a27c4592]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9371460739.mp3?updated=1661380044" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>233: 7 Reasons Your To-Do List Isn't Getting Done with Steph Crowder</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/7-reasons-your-to-do-list-isnt-getting-done-with-steph-crowder</link>
      <description>Today on the show we welcome back Steph Crowder. Steph is so awesome, that we decided she needed to become a regular! So here she is, to talk about keeping your to-do list alive once you’ve lost momentum in your business. After the hype of a launch has died down, losing momentum is common. Trust us, we know! There is a certain amount of adrenaline that keeps you going during a launch that keeps you alert, that keeps you firing when you’re in that challenge mode. But what do you do after this frenzy subsides? A lot of us go back to the same old habits and the same old routines and this is where a lot of us get super unproductive.
Steph has found that there are 7 major reasons why your to-do list is not getting done. If you are one of those people who are like, “What the hell? It’s Friday and I’ve crossed off barely anything on my to-do list!” Then girl, this episode is for you. Here, Steph talks about the big commonalities she has seen for why people aren’t getting their shit done. Better yet, she gives us actionable steps we can take toward more productivity and sustainable momentum. After this episode, you will be able to take a deep breath, re-evaluate your time, kick that self-doubt to the curb and be the boss lady you’ve always dreamed of being.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 25 Jun 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>7 Reasons Your To-Do List Isn't Getting Done with Steph Crowder</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>233</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4085b31c-ae9b-11ec-91b1-b3c375a4f692/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we welcome back Steph Crowder. Steph is so awesome, that we decided she needed to become a regular! So here she is, to talk about keeping your to-do list alive once you’ve lost momentum in your business. After the hype of a launch...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we welcome back Steph Crowder. Steph is so awesome, that we decided she needed to become a regular! So here she is, to talk about keeping your to-do list alive once you’ve lost momentum in your business. After the hype of a launch has died down, losing momentum is common. Trust us, we know! There is a certain amount of adrenaline that keeps you going during a launch that keeps you alert, that keeps you firing when you’re in that challenge mode. But what do you do after this frenzy subsides? A lot of us go back to the same old habits and the same old routines and this is where a lot of us get super unproductive.
Steph has found that there are 7 major reasons why your to-do list is not getting done. If you are one of those people who are like, “What the hell? It’s Friday and I’ve crossed off barely anything on my to-do list!” Then girl, this episode is for you. Here, Steph talks about the big commonalities she has seen for why people aren’t getting their shit done. Better yet, she gives us actionable steps we can take toward more productivity and sustainable momentum. After this episode, you will be able to take a deep breath, re-evaluate your time, kick that self-doubt to the curb and be the boss lady you’ve always dreamed of being.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we welcome back Steph Crowder. Steph is so awesome, that we decided she needed to become a regular! So here she is, to talk about keeping your to-do list alive once you’ve lost momentum in your business. After the hype of a launch has died down, losing momentum is common. Trust us, we know! There is a certain amount of adrenaline that keeps you going during a launch that keeps you alert, that keeps you firing when you’re in that challenge mode. But what do you do after this frenzy subsides? A lot of us go back to the same old habits and the same old routines and this is where a lot of us get super unproductive.</p><p>Steph has found that there are 7 major reasons why your to-do list is not getting done. If you are one of those people who are like, “What the hell? It’s Friday and I’ve crossed off barely anything on my to-do list!” Then girl, this episode is for you. Here, Steph talks about the big commonalities she has seen for why people aren’t getting their shit done. Better yet, she gives us actionable steps we can take toward more productivity and sustainable momentum. After this episode, you will be able to take a deep breath, re-evaluate your time, kick that self-doubt to the curb and be the boss lady you’ve always dreamed of being.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2591</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cc000fb1868048f18e5309bfbf5a5ede]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7171761047.mp3?updated=1661380039" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>232: Boss Talk Series - How do you maintain healthy female relationships</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/boss-talk-series-how-do-you-maintain-healthy-female-relationships</link>
      <description>For those of you who missed the last Boss Talk Series episode, we brought Steph Crowder of Courage &amp; Clarity on and everybody loved it! We got such good feedback, that we decided to bring her on again. Yep, she’s officially moved in! So today’s question is, how do you maintain healthy female relationships? We’ve touched on this in previous episodes, but today we want to focus specifically on business female friendships. This is a tricky topic and goes hand in hand with the theme: Community VS Competition. So how do you stay in your lane and be friends with someone who is doing what you’re doing? When are you crossing the line of taking advantage of a friendship? And how do you know whether your own helpfulness is being taken advantage of too?
These are the types of tough questions we’ll be digging into in this episode. We also share how we personally manage our business female friendships and how having the support of other business women has radically enhanced our lives and careers. By the end of this episode, you’ll really see the benefits of having business female friendships in your life and will know how to determine whether these friendships are in a healthy give-and-take balance. No more hiding, it’s time to get out there and take a chance on the women in your midst.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 22 Jun 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Boss Talk Series - How do you maintain healthy female relationships</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>232</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/412a3798-ae9b-11ec-91b1-9b303f34ba0d/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>For those of you who missed the last Boss Talk Series episode, we brought Steph Crowder of Courage &amp; Clarity on and everybody loved it! We got such good feedback, that we decided to bring her on again. Yep, she’s officially moved in! So...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>For those of you who missed the last Boss Talk Series episode, we brought Steph Crowder of Courage &amp; Clarity on and everybody loved it! We got such good feedback, that we decided to bring her on again. Yep, she’s officially moved in! So today’s question is, how do you maintain healthy female relationships? We’ve touched on this in previous episodes, but today we want to focus specifically on business female friendships. This is a tricky topic and goes hand in hand with the theme: Community VS Competition. So how do you stay in your lane and be friends with someone who is doing what you’re doing? When are you crossing the line of taking advantage of a friendship? And how do you know whether your own helpfulness is being taken advantage of too?
These are the types of tough questions we’ll be digging into in this episode. We also share how we personally manage our business female friendships and how having the support of other business women has radically enhanced our lives and careers. By the end of this episode, you’ll really see the benefits of having business female friendships in your life and will know how to determine whether these friendships are in a healthy give-and-take balance. No more hiding, it’s time to get out there and take a chance on the women in your midst.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For those of you who missed the last Boss Talk Series episode, we brought Steph Crowder of Courage &amp; Clarity on and everybody loved it! We got such good feedback, that we decided to bring her on again. Yep, she’s officially moved in! So today’s question is, how do you maintain healthy female relationships? We’ve touched on this in previous episodes, but today we want to focus specifically on business female friendships. This is a tricky topic and goes hand in hand with the theme: Community VS Competition. So how do you stay in your lane and be friends with someone who is doing what you’re doing? When are you crossing the line of taking advantage of a friendship? And how do you know whether your own helpfulness is being taken advantage of too?</p><p>These are the types of tough questions we’ll be digging into in this episode. We also share how we personally manage our business female friendships and how having the support of other business women has radically enhanced our lives and careers. By the end of this episode, you’ll really see the benefits of having business female friendships in your life and will know how to determine whether these friendships are in a healthy give-and-take balance. No more hiding, it’s time to get out there and take a chance on the women in your midst.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2342</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3c9d9439eb134caaa73780e221e6a9ee]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8099483234.mp3?updated=1661379993" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>231: Tactics to Defeat Self-Doubt Negotiate for What You Want and How to Find a Wing Woman with Mia Scharphie</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/tactics-to-defeat-self-doubt-negotiate-for-what-you-want-and-how-to-find-a-wing-woman-with-mia-scharphie</link>
      <description>Today on the show, we welcome Mia "Maya" Scharphie – creative career coach, designer, and agent of change. Mia founded Build Yourself to help women in creative fields move past the obstacles that hold them back in in their careers. This episode goes hand-in-hand with the previous few conversations we have been having on the podcast around competition versus community and what empowering women really looks like. Through Mia’s Build Yourself program, services, workshops and courses, she helps women to build confidence in their work and in their work environments – assisting them with practical things such as asking for a raise or a promotion, negotiating better and lead a healthier work-life balance.
Mia also helps women understand and control their inner-critic and become comfortable with the fear of rejection and the heavily-weighted “No’s” that none of us want to receive. Mia also encourages us to find a wing woman and leverage the power of the women in our lives today. In this episode, we unpack our thoughts on empowering women and how we can make the changes necessary to tackle our self-sabotaging thoughts. Mia gives some really great, practical new routines and habits that you can start implementing in your life to see these changes and unlock the power of your own gifts.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 20 Jun 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Tactics to Defeat Self-Doubt Negotiate for What You Want and How to Find a Wing Woman with Mia Scharphie</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>231</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/41d8883e-ae9b-11ec-91b1-af9fa0cc69c2/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show, we welcome Mia "Maya" Scharphie – creative career coach, designer, and agent of change. Mia founded Build Yourself to help women in creative fields move past the obstacles that hold them back in in their careers. This episode goes...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show, we welcome Mia "Maya" Scharphie – creative career coach, designer, and agent of change. Mia founded Build Yourself to help women in creative fields move past the obstacles that hold them back in in their careers. This episode goes hand-in-hand with the previous few conversations we have been having on the podcast around competition versus community and what empowering women really looks like. Through Mia’s Build Yourself program, services, workshops and courses, she helps women to build confidence in their work and in their work environments – assisting them with practical things such as asking for a raise or a promotion, negotiating better and lead a healthier work-life balance.
Mia also helps women understand and control their inner-critic and become comfortable with the fear of rejection and the heavily-weighted “No’s” that none of us want to receive. Mia also encourages us to find a wing woman and leverage the power of the women in our lives today. In this episode, we unpack our thoughts on empowering women and how we can make the changes necessary to tackle our self-sabotaging thoughts. Mia gives some really great, practical new routines and habits that you can start implementing in your life to see these changes and unlock the power of your own gifts.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show, we welcome Mia "Maya" Scharphie – creative career coach, designer, and agent of change. Mia founded Build Yourself to help women in creative fields move past the obstacles that hold them back in in their careers. This episode goes hand-in-hand with the previous few conversations we have been having on the podcast around competition versus community and what empowering women really looks like. Through Mia’s Build Yourself program, services, workshops and courses, she helps women to build confidence in their work and in their work environments – assisting them with practical things such as asking for a raise or a promotion, negotiating better and lead a healthier work-life balance.</p><p>Mia also helps women understand and control their inner-critic and become comfortable with the fear of rejection and the heavily-weighted “No’s” that none of us want to receive. Mia also encourages us to find a wing woman and leverage the power of the women in our lives today. In this episode, we unpack our thoughts on empowering women and how we can make the changes necessary to tackle our self-sabotaging thoughts. Mia gives some really great, practical new routines and habits that you can start implementing in your life to see these changes and unlock the power of your own gifts.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2734</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9de0f13f56ed48f2ad6459eb88b50990]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5361608745.mp3?updated=1661380032" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>230: All the Woo-Woo Shiz We are Diggin</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/all-the-woo-woo-shiz-we-are-diggin</link>
      <description>Ya’ll know that we’re into some woo-woo shit. A big chunk of that woo-woo shit is essential oils – which we know you’ve already heard us talk about. But we have a whole lot of other woo-woo things that we do in our daily lives. Things like DIY cupping, getting Chinese foot massages, wearing crystals in our bra’s and going on family excursions to The Stinky Store. In this episode, we take you through an entertaining list of ten woo-woo things that make our lives better, that make us better, and in turn, make our business better.
In their own unique ways, these things help us to destress. They help us to keep our energy and our chakras in check. And ultimately, they keep us sane and weird, at the same time. So, if you’re looking for some tips, resources and advice on a few small things you can add to your daily life – then you’ve come to the right place. Come and take a look into our crystal ball and get woo with us – we know you want to! [Sexy radio voice].
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 18 Jun 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>All the Woo-Woo Shiz We are Diggin</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>230</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/42942cf6-ae9b-11ec-91b1-03af34e72788/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Ya’ll know that we’re into some woo-woo shit. A big chunk of that woo-woo shit is essential oils – which we know you’ve already heard us talk about. But we have a whole lot of other woo-woo things that we do in our daily lives. Things like DIY...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Ya’ll know that we’re into some woo-woo shit. A big chunk of that woo-woo shit is essential oils – which we know you’ve already heard us talk about. But we have a whole lot of other woo-woo things that we do in our daily lives. Things like DIY cupping, getting Chinese foot massages, wearing crystals in our bra’s and going on family excursions to The Stinky Store. In this episode, we take you through an entertaining list of ten woo-woo things that make our lives better, that make us better, and in turn, make our business better.
In their own unique ways, these things help us to destress. They help us to keep our energy and our chakras in check. And ultimately, they keep us sane and weird, at the same time. So, if you’re looking for some tips, resources and advice on a few small things you can add to your daily life – then you’ve come to the right place. Come and take a look into our crystal ball and get woo with us – we know you want to! [Sexy radio voice].
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ya’ll know that we’re into some woo-woo shit. A big chunk of that woo-woo shit is essential oils – which we know you’ve already heard us talk about. But we have a whole lot of other woo-woo things that we do in our daily lives. Things like DIY cupping, getting Chinese foot massages, wearing crystals in our bra’s and going on family excursions to The Stinky Store. In this episode, we take you through an entertaining list of ten woo-woo things that make our lives better, that make us better, and in turn, make our business better.</p><p>In their own unique ways, these things help us to destress. They help us to keep our energy and our chakras in check. And ultimately, they keep us sane and weird, at the same time. So, if you’re looking for some tips, resources and advice on a few small things you can add to your daily life – then you’ve come to the right place. Come and take a look into our crystal ball and get woo with us – <em>we know you want to!</em> [Sexy radio voice].</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1865</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4c8f75c424624daf9f21fccb9d504bb5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4364965936.mp3?updated=1661380017" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>229: Showing Up For Your Brand In A Way That Is So You, with Jen Miller</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/showing-up-for-your-brand-in-a-way-that-is-so-you-with-jen-miller</link>
      <description>Today on the show we welcome Jen Miller. Jen is a brand strategy consultant and is super pumped about helping women build their brands. In 2003 Jen also started a blog, interviewing female founders to discover how she might be able to build a brand of her own. Jen has learned from the best and the proof is in the pudding! Jen is really great at helping entrepreneurs ask themselves the right questions; questions that will help them lay the foundation of their brand and get them headed on the right path from day one.
In this episode, we are talking about the importance of brand personality and how it is so much more than just your logo, your color scheme, and your website. We’re also talking about how you can take care of people in a way that serves your brand well, how to put yourself out there, dressing the part and being a little vulnerable in your own self. At the end of the day, it boils down to authenticity. But authenticity with intention. So, whether you’re starting a brand from ground zero or trying to get your brand back on track, by the end of this episode, you’ll have some awesome tools to get you going with a bang.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 15 Jun 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Showing Up For Your Brand In A Way That Is So You, with Jen Miller</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>229</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/43339048-ae9b-11ec-91b1-67f0eea18f5c/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we welcome Jen Miller. Jen is a brand strategy consultant and is super pumped about helping women build their brands. In 2003 Jen also started a blog, interviewing female founders to discover how she might be able to build a brand of...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we welcome Jen Miller. Jen is a brand strategy consultant and is super pumped about helping women build their brands. In 2003 Jen also started a blog, interviewing female founders to discover how she might be able to build a brand of her own. Jen has learned from the best and the proof is in the pudding! Jen is really great at helping entrepreneurs ask themselves the right questions; questions that will help them lay the foundation of their brand and get them headed on the right path from day one.
In this episode, we are talking about the importance of brand personality and how it is so much more than just your logo, your color scheme, and your website. We’re also talking about how you can take care of people in a way that serves your brand well, how to put yourself out there, dressing the part and being a little vulnerable in your own self. At the end of the day, it boils down to authenticity. But authenticity with intention. So, whether you’re starting a brand from ground zero or trying to get your brand back on track, by the end of this episode, you’ll have some awesome tools to get you going with a bang.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we welcome Jen Miller. Jen is a brand strategy consultant and is super pumped about helping women build their brands. In 2003 Jen also started a blog, interviewing female founders to discover how she might be able to build a brand of her own. Jen has learned from the best and the proof is in the pudding! Jen is really great at helping entrepreneurs ask themselves the right questions; questions that will help them lay the foundation of their brand and get them headed on the right path from day one.</p><p>In this episode, we are talking about the importance of brand personality and how it is so much more than just your logo, your color scheme, and your website. We’re also talking about how you can take care of people in a way that serves your brand well, how to put yourself out there, dressing the part and being a little vulnerable in your own self. At the end of the day, it boils down to authenticity. But authenticity with intention. So, whether you’re starting a brand from ground zero or trying to get your brand back on track, by the end of this episode, you’ll have some awesome tools to get you going with a bang.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://the">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2324</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ab58c9f3d4794b85a49a585a31fd8aa1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2198525965.mp3?updated=1661380119" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>228: 5 Days to Launch is Back</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/5-days-to-launch-is-back</link>
      <description>If you missed our 5 Days to Launch episode (#68), way back when, chances are you’ve been sitting on your launch ideas since then! This is why we’ve decided to bring the 5 Days To Launch Challenge episode back to get your booty in gear once and for all. Word on the street is, you have some pretty bomb ideas but for whatever reason, you just keep them in your pocket, you sit on them, you hold onto them, and you don’t launch them. What the heck? What are you waiting for, lady? There is a valuable opportunity there that can earn you some real cash dollar bills for your business. So many of you come to us saying that you have this amazing dreamy idea, but you are frozen, you are stuck, and you are on the fence. A lot of you live in Sitting-on-the-fence-ville, right? But the reality of it all is, it is not comfortable or really beneficial for anyone.
We want to help you to get into the launch mindset and this is why we created the 5 Days to Launch Challenge to arm you with the strategies and the steps you need to get there. We have determined that launching something and launching it well really just comes down to five steps. That’s it. Five steps. And we’re here to remind you what those steps are with a repeat one of most valuable episode to-date. You can do one step a day and at the end of five days, you will have launched a product and made actual money. So, if you missed it the first time ‘round or are new to the show, get ready to jump into your very own launch by signing up for the challenge today! No excuses.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 13 Jun 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Days to Launch is Back</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>228</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/43db3686-ae9b-11ec-91b1-0f8b1ce256e9/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you missed our 5 Days to Launch episode (#68), way back when, chances are you’ve been sitting on your launch ideas since then! This is why we’ve decided to bring the 5 Days To Launch Challenge episode back to get your booty in gear once and for...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you missed our 5 Days to Launch episode (#68), way back when, chances are you’ve been sitting on your launch ideas since then! This is why we’ve decided to bring the 5 Days To Launch Challenge episode back to get your booty in gear once and for all. Word on the street is, you have some pretty bomb ideas but for whatever reason, you just keep them in your pocket, you sit on them, you hold onto them, and you don’t launch them. What the heck? What are you waiting for, lady? There is a valuable opportunity there that can earn you some real cash dollar bills for your business. So many of you come to us saying that you have this amazing dreamy idea, but you are frozen, you are stuck, and you are on the fence. A lot of you live in Sitting-on-the-fence-ville, right? But the reality of it all is, it is not comfortable or really beneficial for anyone.
We want to help you to get into the launch mindset and this is why we created the 5 Days to Launch Challenge to arm you with the strategies and the steps you need to get there. We have determined that launching something and launching it well really just comes down to five steps. That’s it. Five steps. And we’re here to remind you what those steps are with a repeat one of most valuable episode to-date. You can do one step a day and at the end of five days, you will have launched a product and made actual money. So, if you missed it the first time ‘round or are new to the show, get ready to jump into your very own launch by signing up for the challenge today! No excuses.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you missed our 5 Days to Launch episode (#68), way back when, chances are you’ve been sitting on your launch ideas since then! This is why we’ve decided to bring the 5 Days To Launch Challenge episode back to get your booty in gear once and for all. Word on the street is, you have some pretty bomb ideas but for whatever reason, you just keep them in your pocket, you sit on them, you hold onto them, and you don’t launch them. What the heck? What are you waiting for, lady? There is a valuable opportunity there that can earn you some real cash dollar bills for your business. So many of you come to us saying that you have this amazing dreamy idea, but you are frozen, you are stuck, and you are on the fence. A lot of you live in Sitting-on-the-fence-ville, right? But the reality of it all is, it is not comfortable or really beneficial for anyone.</p><p>We want to help you to get into the launch mindset and this is why we created the <em>5 Days to Launch Challenge</em> to arm you with the strategies and the steps you need to get there. We have determined that launching something and launching it well really just comes down to five steps. That’s it. Five steps. And we’re here to remind you what those steps are with a repeat one of most valuable episode to-date. You can do one step a day and at the end of five days, you will have launched a product and made actual money. So, if you missed it the first time ‘round or are new to the show, get ready to jump into your very own launch by signing up for the challenge today! No excuses.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1434</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a9b05354ba82493e927e3defd756b9a7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8395812811.mp3?updated=1661379817" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>227: Embracing the Power Couple Lifestyle with Brooke Genn</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/embracing-the-power-couple-lifestyle-with-brooke-genn</link>
      <description>Today on the show we welcome Brooke Genn. Brooke is a writer, a photographer, podcast host and one part of a power couple together with her husband, Wilhelm. Brooke has had a really interesting and eclectic past and today works full-time with her spouse, building a business together as well as building a tiny home on wheels. In this episode, we are talking about what it takes to be a power couple. We get into the steps Brooke and her husband took to get her husband to come home and work with her full-time and how they are able to travel the world together and do exactly what they’ve always wanted.
We find out what Brooke has learned from working with her husband and how they have navigated this transition, navigated having their own independence and navigated what it takes to run a business when you and your partner are so emotionally tied. A lot of us have thought on and off about working with our spouses but Brooke and her husband are actually doing it successfully! There is a lot to be learned from this episode about business and about relationships… even if you aren’t working together.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 11 Jun 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Embracing the Power Couple Lifestyle with Brooke Genn</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>227</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4492a9d8-ae9b-11ec-91b1-0fd699eadf9f/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we welcome Brooke Genn. Brooke is a writer, a photographer, podcast host and one part of a power couple together with her husband, Wilhelm. Brooke has had a really interesting and eclectic past and today works full-time with her...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we welcome Brooke Genn. Brooke is a writer, a photographer, podcast host and one part of a power couple together with her husband, Wilhelm. Brooke has had a really interesting and eclectic past and today works full-time with her spouse, building a business together as well as building a tiny home on wheels. In this episode, we are talking about what it takes to be a power couple. We get into the steps Brooke and her husband took to get her husband to come home and work with her full-time and how they are able to travel the world together and do exactly what they’ve always wanted.
We find out what Brooke has learned from working with her husband and how they have navigated this transition, navigated having their own independence and navigated what it takes to run a business when you and your partner are so emotionally tied. A lot of us have thought on and off about working with our spouses but Brooke and her husband are actually doing it successfully! There is a lot to be learned from this episode about business and about relationships… even if you aren’t working together.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we welcome Brooke Genn. Brooke is a writer, a photographer, podcast host and one part of a power couple together with her husband, Wilhelm. Brooke has had a really interesting and eclectic past and today works full-time with her spouse, building a business together as well as building a tiny home on wheels. In this episode, we are talking about what it takes to be a power couple. We get into the steps Brooke and her husband took to get her husband to come home and work with her full-time and how they are able to travel the world together and do exactly what they’ve always wanted.</p><p>We find out what Brooke has learned from working with her husband and how they have navigated this transition, navigated having their own independence and navigated what it takes to run a business when you and your partner are so emotionally tied. A lot of us have thought on and off about working with our spouses but Brooke and her husband are actually doing it successfully! There is a lot to be learned from this episode about business and about relationships… even if you aren’t working together.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestr">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2023</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[90f94f46f39b4b0f8ef48d3d2ae3483c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5377262927.mp3?updated=1661379626" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>226: 3 Questions to Ask Yourself if You've Got Money Blocks</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/3-questions-to-ask-yourself-if-youve-got-money-blocks</link>
      <description>Today on the show, we are talking about money mindsets. Figuring out your own relationship with money takes a long time. How do you know when you’re over-spending? How do you know when you’re being too frugal? What are the thoughts and emotions that control your spending and how do you get over your deeply engrained money blocks? As women, we are taught that being financially successful, is something to fear. It might sound silly, but it’s the truth! So much of our decision making is fear-based and so often we don’t recognize this as fear.
These are the sorts of questions and topics we’ll be chatting through in this episode today. We’ll be referring to our own experience, our own money blocks and be giving you a few questions that you need to be asking yourself in order to break free from the shackles of your bank balance! By the end of this episode, you will be more conscious of your own money mindset, have a foundation from which to tackle it and feel empowered to make the changes you need to make toward a more healthy and happy (financial) life.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 08 Jun 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>3 Questions to Ask Yourself if You've Got Money Blocks</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>226</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4547d164-ae9b-11ec-91b1-0b9aca6b3fe2/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show, we are talking about money mindsets. Figuring out your own relationship with money takes a long time. How do you know when you’re over-spending? How do you know when you’re being too frugal? What are the thoughts and emotions...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show, we are talking about money mindsets. Figuring out your own relationship with money takes a long time. How do you know when you’re over-spending? How do you know when you’re being too frugal? What are the thoughts and emotions that control your spending and how do you get over your deeply engrained money blocks? As women, we are taught that being financially successful, is something to fear. It might sound silly, but it’s the truth! So much of our decision making is fear-based and so often we don’t recognize this as fear.
These are the sorts of questions and topics we’ll be chatting through in this episode today. We’ll be referring to our own experience, our own money blocks and be giving you a few questions that you need to be asking yourself in order to break free from the shackles of your bank balance! By the end of this episode, you will be more conscious of your own money mindset, have a foundation from which to tackle it and feel empowered to make the changes you need to make toward a more healthy and happy (financial) life.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show, we are talking about money mindsets. Figuring out your own relationship with money takes a long time. How do you know when you’re over-spending? How do you know when you’re being too frugal? What are the thoughts and emotions that control your spending and how do you get over your deeply engrained money blocks? As women, we are taught that being financially successful, is something to fear. It might sound silly, but it’s the truth! So much of our decision making is fear-based and so often we don’t recognize this as fear.</p><p>These are the sorts of questions and topics we’ll be chatting through in this episode today. We’ll be referring to our own experience, our own money blocks and be giving you a few questions that you need to be asking yourself in order to break free from the shackles of your bank balance! By the end of this episode, you will be more conscious of your own money mindset, have a foundation from which to tackle it and feel empowered to make the changes you need to make toward a more healthy and happy (financial) life.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2203</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[374be68b34c447a6a5b3665639c314af]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6215474856.mp3?updated=1664467457" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>225: Gamify Your Business with Erin Kelly of Member Vault</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/gamify-your-business-with-erin-kelly-of-membervault</link>
      <description>Today on the Strategy Hour Podcast we welcome the wonderful, the magnificent, the powerhouse, Erin Kelly! Erin is here to talk to us about MemberVault, something we are more than excited about. We’ll be hearing about how MemberVault uses gamification as way to boost your business and increase your revenue. Erin will be starting from the very beginning and explaining exactly what MemberVault does and what gamification actually means, so if any of this sounds new and a little daunting, don’t worry because we have you covered!
During our discussion, you’ll get everything you need to know about the great service that MemberVault provides and how you might be able to incorporate it into your strategy. By incentivizing, tracking and tagging, MemberVault enables businesses to tailor and curate their communications and offers to their audiences that are proven to increase results. Sound good? We thought so! The most exciting part of it all is how the service actually cuts down on your workload and allows many automated actions to occur, so you will be getting more interaction for less time spent, and if that isn’t the ticket, we do not know what is. So stay tuned as Erin helps us break it all down for your listening pleasure.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 06 Jun 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Gamify Your Business with Erin Kelly of Member Vault</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>225</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/46030196-ae9b-11ec-91b1-77ce0cba4a04/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the Strategy Hour Podcast we welcome the wonderful, the magnificent, the powerhouse, Erin Kelly! Erin is here to talk to us about MemberVault, something we are more than excited about. We’ll be hearing about how MemberVault uses...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the Strategy Hour Podcast we welcome the wonderful, the magnificent, the powerhouse, Erin Kelly! Erin is here to talk to us about MemberVault, something we are more than excited about. We’ll be hearing about how MemberVault uses gamification as way to boost your business and increase your revenue. Erin will be starting from the very beginning and explaining exactly what MemberVault does and what gamification actually means, so if any of this sounds new and a little daunting, don’t worry because we have you covered!
During our discussion, you’ll get everything you need to know about the great service that MemberVault provides and how you might be able to incorporate it into your strategy. By incentivizing, tracking and tagging, MemberVault enables businesses to tailor and curate their communications and offers to their audiences that are proven to increase results. Sound good? We thought so! The most exciting part of it all is how the service actually cuts down on your workload and allows many automated actions to occur, so you will be getting more interaction for less time spent, and if that isn’t the ticket, we do not know what is. So stay tuned as Erin helps us break it all down for your listening pleasure.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the Strategy Hour Podcast we welcome the wonderful, the magnificent, the powerhouse, Erin Kelly! Erin is here to talk to us about MemberVault, something we are more than excited about. We’ll be hearing about how MemberVault uses gamification as way to boost your business and increase your revenue. Erin will be starting from the very beginning and explaining exactly what MemberVault does and what gamification actually means, so if any of this sounds new and a little daunting, don’t worry because we have you covered!</p><p>During our discussion, you’ll get everything you need to know about the great service that MemberVault provides and how you might be able to incorporate it into your strategy. By incentivizing, tracking and tagging, MemberVault enables businesses to tailor and curate their communications and offers to their audiences that are proven to increase results. Sound good? We thought so! The most exciting part of it all is how the service actually cuts down on your workload and allows many automated actions to occur, so you will be getting more interaction for less time spent, and if that isn’t the ticket, we do not know what is. So stay tuned as Erin helps us break it all down for your listening pleasure.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2522</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ab9de8432d2f4f40b6466654c001ad48]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9239055233.mp3?updated=1661379539" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>224: Friend So Hard - Maintaining Friendships While Hustling from Home</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/friend-so-hard-maintaining-friendships-while-hustling-from-home</link>
      <description>We’ve been getting a lot of questions from our community recently about how the heck we stay friends, even though we’re business partners. So, what does our relationship look like and how do we maintain friends outside of our business circle at TCC? Well girl, “It’s complicated,” and this is why we’ll be tackling questions around our own friendship and our friendships with others in this episode. As any business owners knows, it can be a challenge to maintain friendships with people who don’t really understand what you do. People drift apart, lives change and these days, we just move in so many different directions!
So how do you make new friends (without being awkward about it) and how do you know when a friendship is just not working anymore? We’ll just be chatting this topic out and sharing how these dynamics ebb and flow in our own lives. By the end of this episode, you’ll have a few tips that you can use to help maintain (or sever) your own relationships. Because the truth is, we all get by with a little help from our friends, but you have to get out of your comfort zone to make them and sustain them.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 04 Jun 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Friend So Hard - Maintaining Friendships While Hustling from Home</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>224</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/46b7a88a-ae9b-11ec-91b1-8356241f0094/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’ve been getting a lot of questions from our community recently about how the heck we stay friends, even though we’re business partners. So, what does our relationship look like and how do we maintain friends outside of our business circle at...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’ve been getting a lot of questions from our community recently about how the heck we stay friends, even though we’re business partners. So, what does our relationship look like and how do we maintain friends outside of our business circle at TCC? Well girl, “It’s complicated,” and this is why we’ll be tackling questions around our own friendship and our friendships with others in this episode. As any business owners knows, it can be a challenge to maintain friendships with people who don’t really understand what you do. People drift apart, lives change and these days, we just move in so many different directions!
So how do you make new friends (without being awkward about it) and how do you know when a friendship is just not working anymore? We’ll just be chatting this topic out and sharing how these dynamics ebb and flow in our own lives. By the end of this episode, you’ll have a few tips that you can use to help maintain (or sever) your own relationships. Because the truth is, we all get by with a little help from our friends, but you have to get out of your comfort zone to make them and sustain them.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’ve been getting a lot of questions from our community recently about how the heck we stay friends, even though we’re business partners. So, what does our relationship look like and how do we maintain friends outside of our business circle at TCC? Well girl, “It’s complicated,” and this is why we’ll be tackling questions around our own friendship and our friendships with others in this episode. As any business owners knows, it can be a challenge to maintain friendships with people who don’t really understand what you do. People drift apart, lives change and these days, we just move in so many different directions!</p><p>So how do you make new friends (without being awkward about it) and how do you know when a friendship is just not working anymore? We’ll just be chatting this topic out and sharing how these dynamics ebb and flow in our own lives. By the end of this episode, you’ll have a few tips that you can use to help maintain (or sever) your own relationships. Because the truth is, we all get by with a little help from our friends, but you have to get out of your comfort zone to make them and sustain them.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2235</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1bceba0ef90e4abea68ff821064dc893]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8040626810.mp3?updated=1661379504" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>223: Rethinking Your Email Marketing Strategies with Chris Davis of Active Campaign</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/rethinking-your-email-marketing-strategies-with-chris-davis-of-activecampaign</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we welcome our latest internet crush, Chris Davis. Chris is the Director of Education at ActiveCampaign and is an email marketing genius. With everything going on in your business, the truth is, you need to take your email marketing seriously. Chris has helped us so much in getting our email marketing strategy off the ground and quickly soaring. He is an incredible resource, and in this episode, we get really deep into discovering information out about your customers, as well as some of the basic mindsets you need to be in when you’re starting your email marketing game.
Chris uses a ton of analogies to break this information down in a way that is easily digestible for newcomers and old times alike. We discuss how to personalize your emails, the benefit of multiple marketing platforms and a few key tips for using the ActiveCampaign platform. If you are about to tackle your own email strategy, this episode will really help you to dive in with the right mindset. And if you already have an email marketing strategy set up and sailing, there is information in this episode that will get you to reconsider, adapt and improve it. If you are just stuck or overwhelmed, in any shape or form, about your strategies – this episode is here to help you reset that mentality, help you move forward and get your audience through the door.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 01 Jun 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Rethinking Your Email Marketing Strategies with Chris Davis of Active Campaign</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>223</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/478575da-ae9b-11ec-91b1-b37d531a25d6/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we welcome our latest internet crush, Chris Davis. Chris is the Director of Education at ActiveCampaign and is an email marketing genius. With everything going on in your business, the truth is, you need to take your email...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we welcome our latest internet crush, Chris Davis. Chris is the Director of Education at ActiveCampaign and is an email marketing genius. With everything going on in your business, the truth is, you need to take your email marketing seriously. Chris has helped us so much in getting our email marketing strategy off the ground and quickly soaring. He is an incredible resource, and in this episode, we get really deep into discovering information out about your customers, as well as some of the basic mindsets you need to be in when you’re starting your email marketing game.
Chris uses a ton of analogies to break this information down in a way that is easily digestible for newcomers and old times alike. We discuss how to personalize your emails, the benefit of multiple marketing platforms and a few key tips for using the ActiveCampaign platform. If you are about to tackle your own email strategy, this episode will really help you to dive in with the right mindset. And if you already have an email marketing strategy set up and sailing, there is information in this episode that will get you to reconsider, adapt and improve it. If you are just stuck or overwhelmed, in any shape or form, about your strategies – this episode is here to help you reset that mentality, help you move forward and get your audience through the door.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we welcome our latest internet crush, Chris Davis. Chris is the Director of Education at ActiveCampaign and is an email marketing genius. With everything going on in your business, the truth is, you need to take your email marketing seriously. Chris has helped us so much in getting our email marketing strategy off the ground and quickly soaring. He is an incredible resource, and in this episode, we get really deep into discovering information out about your customers, as well as some of the basic mindsets you need to be in when you’re starting your email marketing game.</p><p>Chris uses a ton of analogies to break this information down in a way that is easily digestible for newcomers and old times alike. We discuss how to personalize your emails, the benefit of multiple marketing platforms and a few key tips for using the ActiveCampaign platform. If you are about to tackle your own email strategy, this episode will really help you to dive in with the right mindset. And if you already have an email marketing strategy set up and sailing, there is information in this episode that will get you to reconsider, adapt and improve it. If you are just stuck or overwhelmed, in any shape or form, about your strategies – this episode is here to help you reset that mentality, help you move forward and get your audience through the door.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3041</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[09a64ea5144d47aeb28c59fdea1e0463]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3149541210.mp3?updated=1661379472" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>222: Boss Talk: What are Your Thoughts on the Phrase "Community Over Competition?"</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/boss-talk-what-are-your-thoughts-on-the-phrase-community-over-competition</link>
      <description>Today we are welcoming you to a brand new series that we are kicking off right here, right now! The monthly series is called Boss Talk and it’s an unscripted, uncensored, roundtable, brainstorming session between Abbie, Emylee and our lovely visiting guests. We’ll be diving into hot topics in the industry right now and will kick off every episode by posing a question to each of us in the discussion, which we’ll flesh out throughout the show. Today’s question is, “What are your thoughts on the phrase "community over competition?" And here to help us answer it, is the delightful boss babe, Steph Crowder of Courage &amp; Clarity.
Here in this series, there is no holding back, no sugar-coating, no censoring. It’s just us, cracking open beers and navigating important questions that you’re probably wondering about too… So, are you someone who is all for community, or all for competition? Or is it about striking a healthy balance between the two? But how do we do that and are authentic communities really possible? This is an important and topical debate across all industries right now and one that we’re not sure people are speaking about as honestly as openly as we’d like. This series is all about real, off-the-cuff, honest opinions and if that’s your jam, then come and join us!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 30 May 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Boss Talk: What are Your Thoughts on the Phrase "Community Over Competition?"</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>222</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4834876e-ae9b-11ec-91b1-eb2fa2f2fcbc/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are welcoming you to a brand new series that we are kicking off right here, right now! The monthly series is called Boss Talk and it’s an unscripted, uncensored, roundtable, brainstorming session between Abbie, Emylee and our lovely...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are welcoming you to a brand new series that we are kicking off right here, right now! The monthly series is called Boss Talk and it’s an unscripted, uncensored, roundtable, brainstorming session between Abbie, Emylee and our lovely visiting guests. We’ll be diving into hot topics in the industry right now and will kick off every episode by posing a question to each of us in the discussion, which we’ll flesh out throughout the show. Today’s question is, “What are your thoughts on the phrase "community over competition?" And here to help us answer it, is the delightful boss babe, Steph Crowder of Courage &amp; Clarity.
Here in this series, there is no holding back, no sugar-coating, no censoring. It’s just us, cracking open beers and navigating important questions that you’re probably wondering about too… So, are you someone who is all for community, or all for competition? Or is it about striking a healthy balance between the two? But how do we do that and are authentic communities really possible? This is an important and topical debate across all industries right now and one that we’re not sure people are speaking about as honestly as openly as we’d like. This series is all about real, off-the-cuff, honest opinions and if that’s your jam, then come and join us!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are welcoming you to a brand new series that we are kicking off right here, right now! The monthly series is called Boss Talk and it’s an unscripted, uncensored, roundtable, brainstorming session between Abbie, Emylee and our lovely visiting guests. We’ll be diving into hot topics in the industry right now and will kick off every episode by posing a question to each of us in the discussion, which we’ll flesh out throughout the show. Today’s question is, “What are your thoughts on the phrase "community over competition?" And here to help us answer it, is the delightful boss babe, Steph Crowder of Courage &amp; Clarity.</p><p>Here in this series, there is no holding back, no sugar-coating, no censoring. It’s just us, cracking open beers and navigating important questions that you’re probably wondering about too… So, are you someone who is all for community, or all for competition? Or is it about striking a healthy balance between the two? But how do we do that and are authentic communities really possible? This is an important and topical debate across all industries right now and one that we’re not sure people are speaking about as honestly as openly as we’d like. This series is all about real, off-the-cuff, honest opinions and if that’s your jam, then come and join us!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2405</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b85270d08d714a2da25309a8a81c6ba5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7899544943.mp3?updated=1661379419" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>221: Create a Highly Engaged Facebook Group with Josh Stanton of Screw the Nine to Five</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/create-a-highly-engaged-facebook-group-with-josh-stanton-of-screw-the-nine-to-five</link>
      <description>Today on the show we welcome Josh Stanton. Josh is the co-founder of Screw The Nine To Five, which is him and his wife, Jill’s, slice of the internet where they help entrepreneurs build more attention to their brands, make more money in their business and get more out of their life through simple strategies, how to’s and behind-the-scenes glimpses into the realities of building a business online. In this episode, we tackle the topic of how to create a highly engaged Facebook group. We’re here today to let you in on a little secret and that is that Facebook member numbers is kind of a load of BS if you don’t have engagement! But how do you cultivate engagement, and better yet sustain it, from the get-go?
Josh lets us in on their tips, tricks, and processes that have helped him and Jill create a successful, highly engaged and empowered Facebook group that actually drives members to sales. All done in as little as thirty minutes a week! We discuss how to show up for your people personally, how to drive them to your products or services, how to set group rules and expectations and how to keep your page alive and buzzing with content, questions and resources that impact the community you are serving. If you are looking to step up your Facebook game and create a thriving community – then this is the episode to fill up your notepad up with!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 28 May 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Create a Highly Engaged Facebook Group with Josh Stanton of Screw the Nine to Five</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>221</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/48e3e6aa-ae9b-11ec-91b1-a7a24725c7b5/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we welcome Josh Stanton. Josh is the co-founder of Screw The Nine To Five, which is him and his wife, Jill’s, slice of the internet where they help entrepreneurs build more attention to their brands, make more money in their...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we welcome Josh Stanton. Josh is the co-founder of Screw The Nine To Five, which is him and his wife, Jill’s, slice of the internet where they help entrepreneurs build more attention to their brands, make more money in their business and get more out of their life through simple strategies, how to’s and behind-the-scenes glimpses into the realities of building a business online. In this episode, we tackle the topic of how to create a highly engaged Facebook group. We’re here today to let you in on a little secret and that is that Facebook member numbers is kind of a load of BS if you don’t have engagement! But how do you cultivate engagement, and better yet sustain it, from the get-go?
Josh lets us in on their tips, tricks, and processes that have helped him and Jill create a successful, highly engaged and empowered Facebook group that actually drives members to sales. All done in as little as thirty minutes a week! We discuss how to show up for your people personally, how to drive them to your products or services, how to set group rules and expectations and how to keep your page alive and buzzing with content, questions and resources that impact the community you are serving. If you are looking to step up your Facebook game and create a thriving community – then this is the episode to fill up your notepad up with!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we welcome Josh Stanton. Josh is the co-founder of Screw The Nine To Five, which is him and his wife, Jill’s, slice of the internet where they help entrepreneurs build more attention to their brands, make more money in their business and get more out of their life through simple strategies, how to’s and behind-the-scenes glimpses into the realities of building a business online. In this episode, we tackle the topic of how to create a highly engaged Facebook group. We’re here today to let you in on a little secret and that is that Facebook member numbers is kind of a load of BS if you don’t have engagement! But how do you cultivate engagement, and better yet sustain it, from the get-go?</p><p>Josh lets us in on their tips, tricks, and processes that have helped him and Jill create a successful, highly engaged and empowered Facebook group that actually drives members to sales. All done in as little as thirty minutes a week! We discuss how to show up for your people personally, how to drive them to your products or services, how to set group rules and expectations and how to keep your page alive and buzzing with content, questions and resources that impact the community you are serving. If you are looking to step up your Facebook game and create a thriving community – then this is the episode to fill up your notepad up with!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com.</a></p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2188</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[90335f2dcd2849248c35cbc18f5957bb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2488104310.mp3?updated=1661379374" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>220: Focusing on Ourselves Instead of Our Business in Order to Grow</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/focusing-on-ourselves-instead-of-our-business-in-order-to-grow</link>
      <description>Today on the show we discuss what has happened this year, outside of business. So personal development, things we’ve been focusing on in our personal lives, the things we’ve been doing, the books we’ve been reading, what we need, what we want, what we like and ultimately, how we’ve been trying to grow as individuals. For the first time in a long time, we have taken a small step away from the goals of the business and worked on identifying where our heads are at, who we are as people and what our personal goals are. We decided to tackle our personal development ahead of the game, i.e before the business became all-consuming and everything in our lives was falling apart! Nothing in our personal lives up until this point has been necessarily broken, but we just realized that, hey, things could be better!
We think that a lot of you listening out there might really identify with what we’ve been going through in our personal lives and this episode is here to offer you some helpful resources and to let you know that girl, you are not alone! In this episode, we’ll be discussing who we are and who we want to be outside of work and why life is not just a bunch of boxes you can tick. We also discuss the weight of societal expectations we’ve experienced, especially as women, and how we are working to love ourselves a little more.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 25 May 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Focusing on Ourselves Instead of Our Business in Order to Grow</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>220</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/49b5936c-ae9b-11ec-91b1-57753b0e6e80/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we discuss what has happened this year, outside of business. So personal development, things we’ve been focusing on in our personal lives, the things we’ve been doing, the books we’ve been reading, what we need, what we want,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we discuss what has happened this year, outside of business. So personal development, things we’ve been focusing on in our personal lives, the things we’ve been doing, the books we’ve been reading, what we need, what we want, what we like and ultimately, how we’ve been trying to grow as individuals. For the first time in a long time, we have taken a small step away from the goals of the business and worked on identifying where our heads are at, who we are as people and what our personal goals are. We decided to tackle our personal development ahead of the game, i.e before the business became all-consuming and everything in our lives was falling apart! Nothing in our personal lives up until this point has been necessarily broken, but we just realized that, hey, things could be better!
We think that a lot of you listening out there might really identify with what we’ve been going through in our personal lives and this episode is here to offer you some helpful resources and to let you know that girl, you are not alone! In this episode, we’ll be discussing who we are and who we want to be outside of work and why life is not just a bunch of boxes you can tick. We also discuss the weight of societal expectations we’ve experienced, especially as women, and how we are working to love ourselves a little more.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we discuss what has happened this year, outside of business. So personal development, things we’ve been focusing on in our personal lives, the things we’ve been doing, the books we’ve been reading, what we need, what we want, what we like and ultimately, how we’ve been trying to grow as individuals. For the first time in a long time, we have taken a small step away from the goals of the business and worked on identifying where our heads are at, who we are as people and what our personal goals are. We decided to tackle our personal development ahead of the game, i.e before the business became all-consuming and everything in our lives was falling apart! Nothing in our personal lives up until this point has been necessarily broken, but we just realized that, hey, things could be better!</p><p>We think that a lot of you listening out there might really identify with what we’ve been going through in our personal lives and this episode is here to offer you some helpful resources and to let you know that girl, you are not alone! In this episode, we’ll be discussing who we are and who we want to be outside of work and why life is not just a bunch of boxes you can tick. We also discuss the weight of societal expectations we’ve experienced, especially as women, and how we are working to love ourselves a little more.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2836</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[caf5e508901b4d6c8d2e0194f34325c6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4331438244.mp3?updated=1661379325" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>219: Increasing Conversions and Humanizing Your Next Launch with Kate Boyd of Cobblestone Creative Co</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/increasing-conversions-and-humanizing-your-next-launch-with-kate-boyd-of-cobblestone-creative-co</link>
      <description>Today on the show we welcome Kate Boyd. Kate is the Founder of Cobblestone Creative Co and does this girlfriend know conversions! After raising seven figures in revenue for a non-profit organization through powerful messaging, copywriting and marketing she started her own business that helps build more creativity and genuine connection to the digital marketing space. In just three years she has built three profitable online businesses and created live and automated sales and marketing experiences that convert up to five times the normal rates!
Kate is a serious conversion expert and in this episode, she shares a lot of helpful tools, tricks, and resources for you to use for an upcoming launch or perhaps to help you analyze an “unsuccessful” launch that you’ve had in the past. We are talking all about increasing conversions and humanizing your launch so that people trust you more and feel more involved. We discuss how you are priming your audience, how you are getting their mindsets ready for the sale and how to have an aspect of personal outreach included in your automated strategies in order to make your next launch even more powerful. Grab your notebook and be on the lookout because we might be trying out some of these tactics for our next launch… and you can too!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 23 May 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Increasing Conversions and Humanizing Your Next Launch with Kate Boyd of Cobblestone Creative Co</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>219</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4a773698-ae9b-11ec-91b1-b75262eb8a4f/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we welcome Kate Boyd. Kate is the Founder of Cobblestone Creative Co and does this girlfriend know conversions! After raising seven figures in revenue for a non-profit organization through powerful messaging, copywriting and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we welcome Kate Boyd. Kate is the Founder of Cobblestone Creative Co and does this girlfriend know conversions! After raising seven figures in revenue for a non-profit organization through powerful messaging, copywriting and marketing she started her own business that helps build more creativity and genuine connection to the digital marketing space. In just three years she has built three profitable online businesses and created live and automated sales and marketing experiences that convert up to five times the normal rates!
Kate is a serious conversion expert and in this episode, she shares a lot of helpful tools, tricks, and resources for you to use for an upcoming launch or perhaps to help you analyze an “unsuccessful” launch that you’ve had in the past. We are talking all about increasing conversions and humanizing your launch so that people trust you more and feel more involved. We discuss how you are priming your audience, how you are getting their mindsets ready for the sale and how to have an aspect of personal outreach included in your automated strategies in order to make your next launch even more powerful. Grab your notebook and be on the lookout because we might be trying out some of these tactics for our next launch… and you can too!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we welcome Kate Boyd. Kate is the Founder of Cobblestone Creative Co and does this girlfriend know conversions! After raising seven figures in revenue for a non-profit organization through powerful messaging, copywriting and marketing she started her own business that helps build more creativity and genuine connection to the digital marketing space. In just three years she has built three profitable online businesses and created live and automated sales and marketing experiences that convert up to five times the normal rates!</p><p>Kate is a serious conversion expert and in this episode, she shares a lot of helpful tools, tricks, and resources for you to use for an upcoming launch or perhaps to help you analyze an “unsuccessful” launch that you’ve had in the past. We are talking all about increasing conversions and humanizing your launch so that people trust you more and feel more involved. We discuss how you are priming your audience, how you are getting their mindsets ready for the sale and how to have an aspect of personal outreach included in your automated strategies in order to make your next launch even more powerful. Grab your notebook and be on the lookout because we might be trying out some of these tactics for our next launch… and you can too!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2285</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1032fa43aeec4bce8181391bef9abadd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8638143059.mp3?updated=1661436718" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>218: ConvertKit vs ActiveCampaign</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/convertkit-vs-activecampaign</link>
      <description>Alright, it’s the episode you’ve all been waiting for. We are finally ready to talk about the biggest change we’ve made in TCC in a long time. We’ve moved email service providers… TWICE and we spoke about this is in our monthly review for April but promised we would break it all down into an episode all of its own. So here it is. Today we are run through the reason why we switched from MailChimp to ConvertKit, and then switched again from ConvertKit to Infusionsoft and then again from Infusionsoft to ActiveCampaign. Complexities aside, what we really want this episode to do is serve as an educational resource for you if you are needing help deciding between two platforms.
 
So in this episode, we will be diving into why certain platforms just didn’t work, as well as the key reasons that made us sway to ConvertKit and ActiveCampaign. We walk you through various system features of the platforms, like ConvertKit’s tagging-based system versus ActiveCampaign’s automation-based system and how these worked for us.
We also get into the nitty-gritty’s of how integrations, deep integrations, and visual automation work in ConvertKit as well as in ActiveCampaign and how we were able to find out so much more about our customers using certain features. No matter what service provider you choose, at the end of the day you should always pick what feels right for you and your business. We hope that this episode will help you to make a more informed choice and get you a step closer to being a turbo-boss babe!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 21 May 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>ConvertKit vs ActiveCampaign</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>218</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4b1c61ea-ae9b-11ec-91b1-835d6a8f1097/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Alright, it’s the episode you’ve all been waiting for. We are finally ready to talk about the biggest change we’ve made in TCC in a long time. We’ve moved email service providers… TWICE and we spoke about this is in our monthly review for...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Alright, it’s the episode you’ve all been waiting for. We are finally ready to talk about the biggest change we’ve made in TCC in a long time. We’ve moved email service providers… TWICE and we spoke about this is in our monthly review for April but promised we would break it all down into an episode all of its own. So here it is. Today we are run through the reason why we switched from MailChimp to ConvertKit, and then switched again from ConvertKit to Infusionsoft and then again from Infusionsoft to ActiveCampaign. Complexities aside, what we really want this episode to do is serve as an educational resource for you if you are needing help deciding between two platforms.
 
So in this episode, we will be diving into why certain platforms just didn’t work, as well as the key reasons that made us sway to ConvertKit and ActiveCampaign. We walk you through various system features of the platforms, like ConvertKit’s tagging-based system versus ActiveCampaign’s automation-based system and how these worked for us.
We also get into the nitty-gritty’s of how integrations, deep integrations, and visual automation work in ConvertKit as well as in ActiveCampaign and how we were able to find out so much more about our customers using certain features. No matter what service provider you choose, at the end of the day you should always pick what feels right for you and your business. We hope that this episode will help you to make a more informed choice and get you a step closer to being a turbo-boss babe!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Alright, it’s the episode you’ve all been waiting for. We are finally ready to talk about the biggest change we’ve made in TCC in a long time. We’ve moved email service providers… TWICE and we spoke about this is in our monthly review for April but promised we would break it all down into an episode all of its own. So here it is. Today we are run through the reason why we switched from MailChimp to ConvertKit, and then switched again from ConvertKit to Infusionsoft and then again from Infusionsoft to ActiveCampaign. Complexities aside, what we really want this episode to do is serve as an educational resource for you if you are needing help deciding between two platforms.</p><p> </p><p>So in this episode, we will be diving into why certain platforms just didn’t work, as well as the key reasons that made us sway to ConvertKit and ActiveCampaign. We walk you through various system features of the platforms, like ConvertKit’s tagging-based system versus ActiveCampaign’s automation-based system and how these worked for us.</p><p>We also get into the nitty-gritty’s of how integrations, deep integrations, and visual automation work in ConvertKit as well as in ActiveCampaign and how we were able to find out so much more about our customers using certain features. No matter what service provider you choose, at the end of the day you should always pick what feels right for you and your business. We hope that this episode will help you to make a more informed choice and get you a step closer to being a turbo-boss babe!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2452</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c491ea3114474211a4327bac23cb7106]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7324575597.mp3?updated=1661436655" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>217: How Oprah Changed My Life Forever with Jill Donovan of Rustic Cuff</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-oprah-changed-my-life-forever-with-jill-donovan-of-rustic-cuff</link>
      <description>We have very few business crushes in this world, but Jill Donovan of Rustic Cuff is definitely one of them. In this episode, Jill talks to us about how she was publicly humiliated on national television, sitting on the couch next to Oprah. This moment, which Jill will go on to explain, drastically changed her life. We hear how she was able to move on after this incident and turn it around into the best thing that could have ever happened to her. We learn more about how Jill scaled her product-based business called Rustic Cuff, where she makes and sells beautiful bracelets and encourages the spirit of giving.
Jill started out giving away her cuffs to strangers at the local grocery store and today, Rustic Cuffs has over 160 employees and strong social media community of over 70,000 people. Jill’s designs are being worn by big celebrities today and through her business, she is showing others how they can make a difference to the lives of others. Jill is someone who has been guided a lot by her intuition. But how do you know when you’re following it? In this episode, Jill also gives us some great tips for listening to your heart and finding what it is you excel at.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 18 May 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How Oprah Changed My Life Forever with Jill Donovan of Rustic Cuff</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>217</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4bddf0c6-ae9b-11ec-91b1-fbea0e27cda6/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We have very few business crushes in this world, but Jill Donovan of Rustic Cuff is definitely one of them. In this episode, Jill talks to us about how she was publicly humiliated on national television, sitting on the couch next to Oprah. This...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We have very few business crushes in this world, but Jill Donovan of Rustic Cuff is definitely one of them. In this episode, Jill talks to us about how she was publicly humiliated on national television, sitting on the couch next to Oprah. This moment, which Jill will go on to explain, drastically changed her life. We hear how she was able to move on after this incident and turn it around into the best thing that could have ever happened to her. We learn more about how Jill scaled her product-based business called Rustic Cuff, where she makes and sells beautiful bracelets and encourages the spirit of giving.
Jill started out giving away her cuffs to strangers at the local grocery store and today, Rustic Cuffs has over 160 employees and strong social media community of over 70,000 people. Jill’s designs are being worn by big celebrities today and through her business, she is showing others how they can make a difference to the lives of others. Jill is someone who has been guided a lot by her intuition. But how do you know when you’re following it? In this episode, Jill also gives us some great tips for listening to your heart and finding what it is you excel at.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We have very few business crushes in this world, but Jill Donovan of Rustic Cuff is definitely one of them. In this episode, Jill talks to us about how she was publicly humiliated on national television, sitting on the couch next to Oprah. This moment, which Jill will go on to explain, drastically changed her life. We hear how she was able to move on after this incident and turn it around into the best thing that could have ever happened to her. We learn more about how Jill scaled her product-based business called Rustic Cuff, where she makes and sells beautiful bracelets and encourages the spirit of giving.</p><p>Jill started out giving away her cuffs to strangers at the local grocery store and today, Rustic Cuffs has over 160 employees and strong social media community of over 70,000 people. Jill’s designs are being worn by big celebrities today and through her business, she is showing others how they can make a difference to the lives of others. Jill is someone who has been guided a lot by her intuition. But how do you know when you’re following it? In this episode, Jill also gives us some great tips for listening to your heart and finding what it is you excel at.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2448</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[06957e3e7316dcdb8b13ca4726655413]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9186852804.mp3?updated=1661436651" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>216: April 2018 Monthly Review Session</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/april-2018-monthly-review-session</link>
      <description>Today on the show we are doing our monthly review for April 2018. Our monthly review is a popular episode that we do every month. In the past, we have gone into a lot of depth with all of our numbers and our tracking. However, we have decided to narrow it down a little bit to be a more of an overview. If you want all the nitty-gritty’s, you can find them inside The Goal Crusher Club. In the episode, we are a little goofy because well, April was crazy! We just got back from a week-long trip to Chicago for the She Did It Her Way Summit. We did some strategizing in our hotel room (which we covered in post-it notes and crazy-lady handwriting) and will be reporting back on our plans and goals for the future. We’ll also be discussing our experience switching email providers (again) from Infusion Soft to ActiveCampaign, as well as how we got 100 members into the Goal Crusher Club through some darn fine teamwork.
In addition to that, we get into some deeper identity crises we’ve been experiencing in our business and the “Aha” moment in Chicago that reminded us that the destination is the journey. Our biggest glory moment this month has been the positive shifts we have seen in our team and how we have come to learn that teamwork takes, well, so much work. Work that is so worth it! We end off this episode with some good ol’ fashion funnel talk and our improvements to work toward for next month. We hope this episode will inspire you to keep going, even if you don’t have it all figured out yet. We sure don’t, but hey, we’re enjoying the ride. Bring it on May!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 16 May 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>April 2018 Monthly Review Session</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>216</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4c8d5890-ae9b-11ec-91b1-d7064064b9f7/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we are doing our monthly review for April 2018. Our monthly review is a popular episode that we do every month. In the past, we have gone into a lot of depth with all of our numbers and our tracking. However, we have decided to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we are doing our monthly review for April 2018. Our monthly review is a popular episode that we do every month. In the past, we have gone into a lot of depth with all of our numbers and our tracking. However, we have decided to narrow it down a little bit to be a more of an overview. If you want all the nitty-gritty’s, you can find them inside The Goal Crusher Club. In the episode, we are a little goofy because well, April was crazy! We just got back from a week-long trip to Chicago for the She Did It Her Way Summit. We did some strategizing in our hotel room (which we covered in post-it notes and crazy-lady handwriting) and will be reporting back on our plans and goals for the future. We’ll also be discussing our experience switching email providers (again) from Infusion Soft to ActiveCampaign, as well as how we got 100 members into the Goal Crusher Club through some darn fine teamwork.
In addition to that, we get into some deeper identity crises we’ve been experiencing in our business and the “Aha” moment in Chicago that reminded us that the destination is the journey. Our biggest glory moment this month has been the positive shifts we have seen in our team and how we have come to learn that teamwork takes, well, so much work. Work that is so worth it! We end off this episode with some good ol’ fashion funnel talk and our improvements to work toward for next month. We hope this episode will inspire you to keep going, even if you don’t have it all figured out yet. We sure don’t, but hey, we’re enjoying the ride. Bring it on May!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we are doing our monthly review for April 2018. Our monthly review is a popular episode that we do every month. In the past, we have gone into a lot of depth with all of our numbers and our tracking. However, we have decided to narrow it down a little bit to be a more of an overview. If you want all the nitty-gritty’s, you can find them inside The Goal Crusher Club. In the episode, we are a little goofy because well, April was crazy! We just got back from a week-long trip to Chicago for the She Did It Her Way Summit. We did some strategizing in our hotel room (which we covered in post-it notes and crazy-lady handwriting) and will be reporting back on our plans and goals for the future. We’ll also be discussing our experience switching email providers (again) from Infusion Soft to ActiveCampaign, as well as how we got 100 members into the Goal Crusher Club through some darn fine teamwork.</p><p>In addition to that, we get into some deeper identity crises we’ve been experiencing in our business and the “Aha” moment in Chicago that reminded us that the destination is the journey. Our biggest glory moment this month has been the positive shifts we have seen in our team and how we have come to learn that teamwork takes, well, so much work. Work that is so worth it! We end off this episode with some good ol’ fashion funnel talk and our improvements to work toward for next month. We hope this episode will inspire you to keep going, even if you don’t have it all figured out yet. We sure don’t, but hey, we’re enjoying the ride. Bring it on May!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2327</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0139cfda0e014f8eb6140e045f8827d8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8531013810.mp3?updated=1661436362" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>215: Becoming a Debt Free Millennial with Justine Nelson</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/becoming-a-debt-free-millennial-with-justine-nelson</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we welcome Justine Nelson. Justine is a friend and previous co-worker who embarked on a personal journey to get rid of debt… and then decided to teach other people how to do it too. Justine is the founder of Debt Free Millennials, an online resource blog and coaching center helping thousands of millennials ditch debt and live like a boss. Today we are speaking about all the fun things – like student loans, debt culture and budgeting. We are also going to be discussing how to navigate conversations around debt with your partner and family and how having a budget and goals in your personal life leads to amazing things in your business life.
We hear how this Midwest millennial got into debt in the first place, how she broke out of debt's chains and was able to start a business from the ground up and do things in her life that she never even imagined. Since Justine has been in the dark pits of debt herself, she is a really great person to get some tips and advice from on how to cope with these financial practicalities, as well as the emotional strain that debt can place on your relationships. If you are feeling overwhelmed by your own debt, honestly, Justine is going to show you just how doable (and surprisingly fun) paying off your debt can be. If you want to live that debt-free life and grow the business you have always dreamed of growing, then this inspirational episode is a great place to start!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 14 May 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Becoming a Debt Free Millennial with Justine Nelson</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>215</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4d45f864-ae9b-11ec-91b1-e3dc800bf741/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we welcome Justine Nelson. Justine is a friend and previous co-worker who embarked on a personal journey to get rid of debt… and then decided to teach other people how to do it too. Justine is the founder of Debt Free...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we welcome Justine Nelson. Justine is a friend and previous co-worker who embarked on a personal journey to get rid of debt… and then decided to teach other people how to do it too. Justine is the founder of Debt Free Millennials, an online resource blog and coaching center helping thousands of millennials ditch debt and live like a boss. Today we are speaking about all the fun things – like student loans, debt culture and budgeting. We are also going to be discussing how to navigate conversations around debt with your partner and family and how having a budget and goals in your personal life leads to amazing things in your business life.
We hear how this Midwest millennial got into debt in the first place, how she broke out of debt's chains and was able to start a business from the ground up and do things in her life that she never even imagined. Since Justine has been in the dark pits of debt herself, she is a really great person to get some tips and advice from on how to cope with these financial practicalities, as well as the emotional strain that debt can place on your relationships. If you are feeling overwhelmed by your own debt, honestly, Justine is going to show you just how doable (and surprisingly fun) paying off your debt can be. If you want to live that debt-free life and grow the business you have always dreamed of growing, then this inspirational episode is a great place to start!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we welcome Justine Nelson. Justine is a friend and previous co-worker who embarked on a personal journey to get rid of debt… and then decided to teach other people how to do it too. Justine is the founder of Debt Free Millennials, an online resource blog and coaching center helping thousands of millennials ditch debt and live like a boss. Today we are speaking about all the fun things – like student loans, debt culture and budgeting. We are also going to be discussing how to navigate conversations around debt with your partner and family and how having a budget and goals in your personal life leads to amazing things in your business life.</p><p>We hear how this Midwest millennial got into debt in the first place, how she broke out of debt's chains and was able to start a business from the ground up and do things in her life that she never even imagined. Since Justine has been in the dark pits of debt herself, she is a really great person to get some tips and advice from on how to cope with these financial practicalities, as well as the emotional strain that debt can place on your relationships. If you are feeling overwhelmed by your own debt, honestly, Justine is going to show you just how doable (and surprisingly fun) paying off your debt can be. If you want to live that debt-free life and grow the business you have always dreamed of growing, then this inspirational episode is a great place to start!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2356</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dc9135a5525bcf372bde4e6a1b55433c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9640342214.mp3?updated=1661436311" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>214: Goal Crusher Club Part 5 - 3 Goal Reaching Mistakes</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/goal-crusher-club-part-5-3-goal-reaching-mistakes</link>
      <description>Welcome to part 5 of the Goal Crusher Club series! Well done for making it this far. We hope you’ve learned a ton and are ready to identify everything you’ve been doing wrong! In this episode, we are going to be looking at the three major things you are definitely doing wrong when it comes to setting your goals. Wondering how we know you’re doing these things wrong? Well, because we did them too! This episode isn’t about dogging you and we’re not necessarily saying that some of these things can’t work, but in order to not only reach your goals but fly past them, we want you to take these things into account.
In this episode, we will be discussing the three most commonly made mistakes that prevent a lot of us from reaching our goals. 1) Picking “buy work” goals. 2) Paying your way as the only way and 3) Hiring people to fix what’s broken. We’re going to explain why these things don’t work and what you could do instead. Ultimately, we want you to get to know your business before you add on or distract yourself with ventures that are sure to veer you off course. We’re here to help you skip the hurdles and the mistakes that we’ve already made, so if you’re looking for a faster and more thorough route to your goals – then take a listen to this episode.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 11 May 2018 16:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Goal Crusher Club Part 5 - 3 Goal Reaching Mistakes</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>214</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4e87d45e-ae9b-11ec-91b1-5ff3e4db918e/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome to part 5 of the Goal Crusher Club series! Well done for making it this far. We hope you’ve learned a ton and are ready to identify everything you’ve been doing wrong! In this episode, we are going to be looking at the three major things...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to part 5 of the Goal Crusher Club series! Well done for making it this far. We hope you’ve learned a ton and are ready to identify everything you’ve been doing wrong! In this episode, we are going to be looking at the three major things you are definitely doing wrong when it comes to setting your goals. Wondering how we know you’re doing these things wrong? Well, because we did them too! This episode isn’t about dogging you and we’re not necessarily saying that some of these things can’t work, but in order to not only reach your goals but fly past them, we want you to take these things into account.
In this episode, we will be discussing the three most commonly made mistakes that prevent a lot of us from reaching our goals. 1) Picking “buy work” goals. 2) Paying your way as the only way and 3) Hiring people to fix what’s broken. We’re going to explain why these things don’t work and what you could do instead. Ultimately, we want you to get to know your business before you add on or distract yourself with ventures that are sure to veer you off course. We’re here to help you skip the hurdles and the mistakes that we’ve already made, so if you’re looking for a faster and more thorough route to your goals – then take a listen to this episode.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to part 5 of the Goal Crusher Club series! Well done for making it this far. We hope you’ve learned a ton and are ready to identify everything you’ve been doing wrong! In this episode, we are going to be looking at the three major things you are definitely doing wrong when it comes to setting your goals. Wondering how we know you’re doing these things wrong? Well, because we did them too! This episode isn’t about dogging you and we’re not necessarily saying that some of these things <em>can’t</em> work, but in order to not only reach your goals but fly past them, we want you to take these things into account.</p><p>In this episode, we will be discussing the three most commonly made mistakes that prevent a lot of us from reaching our goals. 1) Picking “buy work” goals. 2) Paying your way as the only way and 3) Hiring people to fix what’s broken. We’re going to explain why these things don’t work and what you could do instead. Ultimately, we want you to get to know your business before you add on or distract yourself with ventures that are sure to veer you off course. We’re here to help you skip the hurdles and the mistakes that we’ve already made, so if you’re looking for a faster and more thorough route to your goals – then take a listen to this episode.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1358</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5474604b161f28189d7599af5f0f306a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1723675652.mp3?updated=1661436264" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>213: Live Therapy Session - Setting Boundaries Our Relationship with Food and Intentional Mindfulness with Dr Rachel L Alan</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/live-therapy-session-setting-boundaries-our-relationship-with-food-and-intentional-mindfulness-with-dr-rachel-l-alan</link>
      <description>Today on the show we welcome Dr. Rachel L. Alan. Dr. Rachel is a licensed clinical psychologist with over a decade of experience supporting people to take inspired action to connect to self-discovery. She focuses on healing, cultivating healthy habits and enhancing self-wellness, balance and living life passionately. This episode is pretty close to an actual therapy session for us! But we know that so many of you out there struggle with these types of issues too and will be able to relate in one way or another. Health and wellness is something we speak about a lot on the show, given the challenges we have had had with our own health and wellness – physically, emotionally and mentally.
Today we dive into some of the common choices that a lot of us out there make around food and setting boundaries, especially as women business owners. If you are struggling with setting boundaries with yourself and with others, or with under-eating, over-eating, binge eating, snacking and are just trying to get your life in balance, we think you will find this episode really beneficial. These often deeply ingrained habits can leak into our business and into our personal lives and we need to question the root of our unhealthy habits before we can even begin to create healthier new ones. It’s important to know that you are not alone out there and taking a listen to this episode might just be the step you need to take toward having more control in your life!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 09 May 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Live Therapy Session - Setting Boundaries Our Relationship with Food and Intentional Mindfulness with Dr Rachel L Alan</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>213</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/4f54c112-ae9b-11ec-91b1-4b00306830d1/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we welcome Dr. Rachel L. Alan. Dr. Rachel is a licensed clinical psychologist with over a decade of experience supporting people to take inspired action to connect to self-discovery. She focuses on healing, cultivating healthy habits...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we welcome Dr. Rachel L. Alan. Dr. Rachel is a licensed clinical psychologist with over a decade of experience supporting people to take inspired action to connect to self-discovery. She focuses on healing, cultivating healthy habits and enhancing self-wellness, balance and living life passionately. This episode is pretty close to an actual therapy session for us! But we know that so many of you out there struggle with these types of issues too and will be able to relate in one way or another. Health and wellness is something we speak about a lot on the show, given the challenges we have had had with our own health and wellness – physically, emotionally and mentally.
Today we dive into some of the common choices that a lot of us out there make around food and setting boundaries, especially as women business owners. If you are struggling with setting boundaries with yourself and with others, or with under-eating, over-eating, binge eating, snacking and are just trying to get your life in balance, we think you will find this episode really beneficial. These often deeply ingrained habits can leak into our business and into our personal lives and we need to question the root of our unhealthy habits before we can even begin to create healthier new ones. It’s important to know that you are not alone out there and taking a listen to this episode might just be the step you need to take toward having more control in your life!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we welcome Dr. Rachel L. Alan. Dr. Rachel is a licensed clinical psychologist with over a decade of experience supporting people to take inspired action to connect to self-discovery. She focuses on healing, cultivating healthy habits and enhancing self-wellness, balance and living life passionately. This episode is pretty close to an actual therapy session for us! But we know that so many of you out there struggle with these types of issues too and will be able to relate in one way or another. Health and wellness is something we speak about a lot on the show, given the challenges we have had had with our own health and wellness – physically, emotionally and mentally.</p><p>Today we dive into some of the common choices that a lot of us out there make around food and setting boundaries, especially as women business owners. If you are struggling with setting boundaries with yourself and with others, or with under-eating, over-eating, binge eating, snacking and are just trying to get your life in balance, we think you will find this episode really beneficial. These often deeply ingrained habits can leak into our business and into our personal lives and we need to question the root of our unhealthy habits before we can even begin to create healthier new ones. It’s important to know that you are not alone out there and taking a listen to this episode might just be the step you need to take toward having more control in your life!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2711</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[45cc890aefba234cc993245d6b17c1a8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7603535138.mp3?updated=1661436216" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>212: Goal Crusher Club Part 4 - Creating Key Performance Indicators</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/goal-crusher-club-part-4-creating-key-performance-indicators</link>
      <description>Welcome to Part 4 of the Goal Crusher Club Series! Today we are talking about one of Abbie’s favorite things on the planet – creating Key Performance Indicators in your business, otherwise known as KPI’s. We will be walking you through some of the things you need to be tracking on a month to month basis that will genuinely help you realize the health and wellness of your business and exactly what you need to be paying attention to. KPI’s are going to give you all the knowledge you need about where you should be spending your time; what needs more babying and perhaps what needs to be cut. If you aren’t tracking these things you may never be able to recognize what might be an issue in your business, or which aspect of your business you need to grow. This leaves you guessing over and over again and this is not where you want to be!
Ultimately, it comes down to performance and numbers and this is where identifying your KPI’s come in! In this episode, we are going to get you tracking like you’re on safari. We’re going to be explaining exactly how to track your data over a launch period and show you exactly how to calculate your earnings per lead, your cost per lead and the additional numbers you should be paying attention to. We are also going to be showing you how to analyze your monthly data; including your most popular posts and your most engaged customer and how you can use them to propel your business forward with confidence.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 07 May 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Goal Crusher Club Part 4 - Creating Key Performance Indicators</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>212</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/50037716-ae9b-11ec-91b1-d39fd6446d92/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome to Part 4 of the Goal Crusher Club Series! Today we are talking about one of Abbie’s favorite things on the planet – creating Key Performance Indicators in your business, otherwise known as KPI’s. We will be walking you through some of...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to Part 4 of the Goal Crusher Club Series! Today we are talking about one of Abbie’s favorite things on the planet – creating Key Performance Indicators in your business, otherwise known as KPI’s. We will be walking you through some of the things you need to be tracking on a month to month basis that will genuinely help you realize the health and wellness of your business and exactly what you need to be paying attention to. KPI’s are going to give you all the knowledge you need about where you should be spending your time; what needs more babying and perhaps what needs to be cut. If you aren’t tracking these things you may never be able to recognize what might be an issue in your business, or which aspect of your business you need to grow. This leaves you guessing over and over again and this is not where you want to be!
Ultimately, it comes down to performance and numbers and this is where identifying your KPI’s come in! In this episode, we are going to get you tracking like you’re on safari. We’re going to be explaining exactly how to track your data over a launch period and show you exactly how to calculate your earnings per lead, your cost per lead and the additional numbers you should be paying attention to. We are also going to be showing you how to analyze your monthly data; including your most popular posts and your most engaged customer and how you can use them to propel your business forward with confidence.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Part 4 of the Goal Crusher Club Series! Today we are talking about one of Abbie’s favorite things on the planet – creating Key Performance Indicators in your business, otherwise known as KPI’s. We will be walking you through some of the things you need to be tracking on a month to month basis that will genuinely help you realize the health and wellness of your business and exactly what you need to be paying attention to. KPI’s are going to give you all the knowledge you need about where you should be spending your time; what needs more babying and perhaps what needs to be cut. If you aren’t tracking these things you may never be able to recognize what might be an issue in your business, or which aspect of your business you need to grow. This leaves you guessing over and over again and this is not where you want to be!</p><p>Ultimately, it comes down to performance and numbers and this is where identifying your KPI’s come in! In this episode, we are going to get you tracking like you’re on safari. We’re going to be explaining exactly how to track your data over a launch period and show you exactly how to calculate your earnings per lead, your cost per lead and the additional numbers you should be paying attention to. We are also going to be showing you how to analyze your monthly data; including your most popular posts and your most engaged customer and how you can use them to propel your business forward with confidence.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1828</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[671968f8f02d7b4dc7f53d843ba7b753]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9100856067.mp3?updated=1661436167" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>211: Building Your Passion Business in the Midst of Lifes Chaos with Ben Laura Harrison of Jonas Paul Eyewear</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/building-your-passion-business-in-the-midst-of-lifes-chaos-with-ben-laura-harrison-of-jonas-paul-eyewear</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we welcome husband and wife business duo, Ben and Laura Harrison, of Jonas Paul Eyewear. This episode is for anyone who has ever been afraid to go after that seemingly unattainable business or their passion project. A lot of us let those things sit on the shelf gathering dust because they seem, well, really hard and really scary! Ben and Laura are two people who are really living what a lot of people only dream of creating. In 2013, Ben and Laura gave birth to their son, Jonas Paul. Jonas was born with a rare disorder, Peter’s Anomaly. As Ben and Laura searched for fashionable eyeglasses for their visually impaired son, they grew increasingly frustrated at the limited (and very un-trendy) options for children.
They were so inspired by their son, that they decided to leave their careers to launch Jonas Paul Eyewear with the mission of helping children feel beautiful in their glasses and providing sight to children in need with every purchase. Laura and Ben saw a gap in the market, combined their skills and followed their passions and their need to make a difference in the world to create a unique and impactful business. In this episode, we’ll be diving deeper into how their business came about, the challenges they faced along the way and how they transitioned from a service based business in wedding photography to a product based business in eye care! Ben and Laura have a truly inspiring story and if you have an idea you’ve been wanting to get off the ground – trust us, you’ll have all the motivation you need after this episode.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 04 May 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Building Your Passion Business in the Midst of Lifes Chaos with Ben Laura Harrison of Jonas Paul Eyewear</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>211</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/50b4ec62-ae9b-11ec-91b1-e3ab536e341a/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we welcome husband and wife business duo, Ben and Laura Harrison, of Jonas Paul Eyewear. This episode is for anyone who has ever been afraid to go after that seemingly unattainable business or their passion project. A lot of us...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we welcome husband and wife business duo, Ben and Laura Harrison, of Jonas Paul Eyewear. This episode is for anyone who has ever been afraid to go after that seemingly unattainable business or their passion project. A lot of us let those things sit on the shelf gathering dust because they seem, well, really hard and really scary! Ben and Laura are two people who are really living what a lot of people only dream of creating. In 2013, Ben and Laura gave birth to their son, Jonas Paul. Jonas was born with a rare disorder, Peter’s Anomaly. As Ben and Laura searched for fashionable eyeglasses for their visually impaired son, they grew increasingly frustrated at the limited (and very un-trendy) options for children.
They were so inspired by their son, that they decided to leave their careers to launch Jonas Paul Eyewear with the mission of helping children feel beautiful in their glasses and providing sight to children in need with every purchase. Laura and Ben saw a gap in the market, combined their skills and followed their passions and their need to make a difference in the world to create a unique and impactful business. In this episode, we’ll be diving deeper into how their business came about, the challenges they faced along the way and how they transitioned from a service based business in wedding photography to a product based business in eye care! Ben and Laura have a truly inspiring story and if you have an idea you’ve been wanting to get off the ground – trust us, you’ll have all the motivation you need after this episode.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we welcome husband and wife business duo, Ben and Laura Harrison, of Jonas Paul Eyewear. This episode is for anyone who has ever been afraid to go after that seemingly unattainable business or their passion project. A lot of us let those things sit on the shelf gathering dust because they seem, well, really hard and really scary! Ben and Laura are two people who are really living what a lot of people only dream of creating. In 2013, Ben and Laura gave birth to their son, Jonas Paul. Jonas was born with a rare disorder, Peter’s Anomaly. As Ben and Laura searched for fashionable eyeglasses for their visually impaired son, they grew increasingly frustrated at the limited (and very un-trendy) options for children.</p><p>They were so inspired by their son, that they decided to leave their careers to launch Jonas Paul Eyewear with the mission of helping children feel beautiful in their glasses and providing sight to children in need with every purchase. Laura and Ben saw a gap in the market, combined their skills and followed their passions and their need to make a difference in the world to create a unique and impactful business. In this episode, we’ll be diving deeper into how their business came about, the challenges they faced along the way and how they transitioned from a service based business in wedding photography to a product based business in eye care! Ben and Laura have a truly inspiring story and if you have an idea you’ve been wanting to get off the ground – trust us, you’ll have all the motivation you need after this episode.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3050</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[45f6cf44ddebffe27497a843421f2da2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7958228863.mp3?updated=1661436145" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>210: What To Do When You're Busy Chasing Sparkly Squirrels</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-to-do-when-youre-busy-chasing-sparkly-squirrels</link>
      <description>Today on the show we are going back in time to an old episode. Our schedules were jam-packed this past week — speaking at a conference in Chicago for She Did It Her Way, and having our massive strategy planning session for the rest of the year and our future — so we didn’t get to record another episode of the Goal Crusher Series. However, we think you will enjoy this episode because it is definitely an oldie, but a goodie! It is all about chasing those sparkly squirrels, what to do, and what questions to ask yourself when those sparkly squirrels pop up, as they always do!
Most creatives seem to also be known as “serial entrepreneurs” because we’re constantly thinking of new ideas and wanting to try them out. Although this keeps us innovative in business, it can also paralyze us and hold us back. Inside this episode, we go through how you can stay on track or maybe get distracted intentionally to help grow your business. We’re getting you focused and making you ask the hard questions before you dive into something unknown or add on something new to what you already have to offer. So jump into this episode as we get some clarity up in here!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 May 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What To Do When You're Busy Chasing Sparkly Squirrels</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>210</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/5165ca1e-ae9b-11ec-91b1-17794bc7e5e6/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we are going back in time to an old episode. Our schedules were jam-packed this past week — speaking at a conference in Chicago for She Did It Her Way, and having our massive strategy planning session for the rest of the year and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we are going back in time to an old episode. Our schedules were jam-packed this past week — speaking at a conference in Chicago for She Did It Her Way, and having our massive strategy planning session for the rest of the year and our future — so we didn’t get to record another episode of the Goal Crusher Series. However, we think you will enjoy this episode because it is definitely an oldie, but a goodie! It is all about chasing those sparkly squirrels, what to do, and what questions to ask yourself when those sparkly squirrels pop up, as they always do!
Most creatives seem to also be known as “serial entrepreneurs” because we’re constantly thinking of new ideas and wanting to try them out. Although this keeps us innovative in business, it can also paralyze us and hold us back. Inside this episode, we go through how you can stay on track or maybe get distracted intentionally to help grow your business. We’re getting you focused and making you ask the hard questions before you dive into something unknown or add on something new to what you already have to offer. So jump into this episode as we get some clarity up in here!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we are going back in time to an old episode. Our schedules were jam-packed this past week — speaking at a conference in Chicago for She Did It Her Way, and having our massive strategy planning session for the rest of the year and our future — so we didn’t get to record another episode of the Goal Crusher Series. However, we think you will enjoy this episode because it is definitely an oldie, but a goodie! It is all about chasing those sparkly squirrels, what to do, and what questions to ask yourself when those sparkly squirrels pop up, as they always do!</p><p>Most creatives seem to also be known as “serial entrepreneurs” because we’re constantly thinking of new ideas and wanting to try them out. Although this keeps us innovative in business, it can also paralyze us and hold us back. Inside this episode, we go through how you can stay on track or maybe get distracted intentionally to help grow your business. We’re getting you focused and making you ask the hard questions before you dive into something unknown or add on something new to what you already have to offer. So jump into this episode as we get some clarity up in here!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2195</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[323798253e4f52dea12b32ebc6fea856]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7823308022.mp3?updated=1661436088" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>209: Finding Your Purpose and Your Person with Molly Stillman of Still Being Molly</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/finding-your-purpose-and-your-personwith-molly-stillman-of-still-being-molly</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Molly Stillman. Molly is the founder and creator of Still Being Molly, a lifestyle blog that has been around since 2007, and the host of the Business with Purpose podcast. Molly had over 600,000 readers last year and she has become a trusted community for women, especially moms – covering everything from ethical style, clean beauty, real food, parenting, to serving your community and making the world a better place. We all have a purpose in life and one of life’s most challenging journey’s is discovering exactly what that purpose is. So many of us suffer from an identity crisis. We don’t know if we’re on the right path and we often don’t know who to turn to for wisdom and advice.
Today, we delve into Molly’s personal story and what she went through on the discovery of finding her true purpose and her true people. Molly shares the rough journey she went through losing her mom in school and a lot of authentic, deep conversation around how you can start having your own self-realization and self-discovery. If you have lost a parent or your “person”, this might be a story to which you can really relate. Molly shares a lot of tools that you will find in this episode to help you do some of your own self-reflection, find you're deeper, “Why?” and how to apply that to into your life and business today. By the end of this episode, we’ll have you peeling back those onion layers to get to the core of your purpose... without crying.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Finding Your Purpose and Your Person with Molly Stillman of Still Being Molly</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>209</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/521a8ae4-ae9b-11ec-91b1-93cdb70e7aa6/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Molly Stillman. Molly is the founder and creator of Still Being Molly, a lifestyle blog that has been around since 2007, and the host of the Business with Purpose podcast. Molly had over 600,000 readers last year and she...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Molly Stillman. Molly is the founder and creator of Still Being Molly, a lifestyle blog that has been around since 2007, and the host of the Business with Purpose podcast. Molly had over 600,000 readers last year and she has become a trusted community for women, especially moms – covering everything from ethical style, clean beauty, real food, parenting, to serving your community and making the world a better place. We all have a purpose in life and one of life’s most challenging journey’s is discovering exactly what that purpose is. So many of us suffer from an identity crisis. We don’t know if we’re on the right path and we often don’t know who to turn to for wisdom and advice.
Today, we delve into Molly’s personal story and what she went through on the discovery of finding her true purpose and her true people. Molly shares the rough journey she went through losing her mom in school and a lot of authentic, deep conversation around how you can start having your own self-realization and self-discovery. If you have lost a parent or your “person”, this might be a story to which you can really relate. Molly shares a lot of tools that you will find in this episode to help you do some of your own self-reflection, find you're deeper, “Why?” and how to apply that to into your life and business today. By the end of this episode, we’ll have you peeling back those onion layers to get to the core of your purpose... without crying.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Molly Stillman. Molly is the founder and creator of Still Being Molly, a lifestyle blog that has been around since 2007, and the host of the Business with Purpose podcast. Molly had over 600,000 readers last year and she has become a trusted community for women, especially moms – covering everything from ethical style, clean beauty, real food, parenting, to serving your community and making the world a better place. We all have a purpose in life and one of life’s most challenging journey’s is discovering exactly what that purpose is. So many of us suffer from an identity crisis. We don’t know if we’re on the right path and we often don’t know who to turn to for wisdom and advice.</p><p>Today, we delve into Molly’s personal story and what she went through on the discovery of finding her true purpose and her true people. Molly shares the rough journey she went through losing her mom in school and a lot of authentic, deep conversation around how you can start having your own self-realization and self-discovery. If you have lost a parent or your “person”, this might be a story to which you can really relate. Molly shares a lot of tools that you will find in this episode to help you do some of your own self-reflection, find you're deeper, “Why?” and how to apply that to into your life and business today. By the end of this episode, we’ll have you peeling back those onion layers to get to the core of your purpose... without crying.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2809</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[952cdae5fe3bbce28bb3f2cf0bdb092d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8615625523.mp3?updated=1661436039" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>208: Goal Crusher Club - Part 3 How to Figure Out What to Pay Yourself</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/goal-crusher-club-part-3-how-to-figure-out-what-to-pay-yourself</link>
      <description>Welcome to Part Three of the Goal Crusher Club Series! Today on the podcast, we are talking about the fun side of business – getting paid! Woohoo! Getting paid should be an exciting and rewarding part of business; but who knew that it could be the cause of so much anxiety and confusion, right? We want to give you a little break here today and share with you what we have used in the past to help us define what to pay ourselves as business owners and how that works for us today since our business has grown.
If you have severe anxiety around money, we totally understand the fear of not wanting to pay yourself. A lot of the time people are either afraid that that money is going to disappear, or that it is supposed to be allocated toward something else or are just simply feeling that they don’t deserve that money. This is something to be aware of going into this episode but for the most part, we are going to be diving into the different formulas that you can use in order to figure out what to pay yourself. We will also be discussing helpful tools to help you with payroll, saving for tax, saving for retirement, how to separate your income into different bank accounts and what determines a “reasonable” salary.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Goal Crusher Club - Part 3 How to Figure Out What to Pay Yourself</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>208</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/52bfed5e-ae9b-11ec-91b1-c3c2338fad70/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome to Part Three of the Goal Crusher Club Series! Today on the podcast, we are talking about the fun side of business – getting paid! Woohoo! Getting paid should be an exciting and rewarding part of business; but who knew that it could be the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to Part Three of the Goal Crusher Club Series! Today on the podcast, we are talking about the fun side of business – getting paid! Woohoo! Getting paid should be an exciting and rewarding part of business; but who knew that it could be the cause of so much anxiety and confusion, right? We want to give you a little break here today and share with you what we have used in the past to help us define what to pay ourselves as business owners and how that works for us today since our business has grown.
If you have severe anxiety around money, we totally understand the fear of not wanting to pay yourself. A lot of the time people are either afraid that that money is going to disappear, or that it is supposed to be allocated toward something else or are just simply feeling that they don’t deserve that money. This is something to be aware of going into this episode but for the most part, we are going to be diving into the different formulas that you can use in order to figure out what to pay yourself. We will also be discussing helpful tools to help you with payroll, saving for tax, saving for retirement, how to separate your income into different bank accounts and what determines a “reasonable” salary.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Part Three of the Goal Crusher Club Series! Today on the podcast, we are talking about the fun side of business – getting paid! Woohoo! Getting paid should be an exciting and rewarding part of business; but who knew that it could be the cause of so much anxiety and confusion, right? We want to give you a little break here today and share with you what we have used in the past to help us define what to pay ourselves as business owners and how that works for us today since our business has grown.</p><p>If you have severe anxiety around money, we totally understand the fear of not wanting to pay yourself. A lot of the time people are either afraid that that money is going to disappear, or that it is supposed to be allocated toward something else or are just simply feeling that they don’t deserve that money. This is something to be aware of going into this episode but for the most part, we are going to be diving into the different formulas that you can use in order to figure out what to pay yourself. We will also be discussing helpful tools to help you with payroll, saving for tax, saving for retirement, how to separate your income into different bank accounts and what determines a “reasonable” salary.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2054</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0896eb740142ffb3ab2549af54bec9b2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9190771406.mp3?updated=1661436002" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>207: The Inside Details of How to Become an Influencer with Mae Karwowski of Obvious.ly</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-inside-details-of-how-to-become-an-influencer-with-mae-karwowski-of-obviously</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we welcome Mae Karwowski, the Founder and CEO of Obvious.ly, a technology-driven influencer marketing platform that launched in 2014. In this episode, we are talking all about building a business from the ground up. Mae shares how she scaled her company to over 20 employees without any outside funding, as well as her experience working as a woman in the tech industry today. But for the most part, we really hone in on influencer marketing; what it’s really like working in that space as an agency and how you, as an influencer or brand, can work with an agency like Obvious.ly and start making a little money!
Mae is an absolute badass with heaps of insight, tips, tricks and advice. The influencer marketing landscape has truly evolved over the past four years and Mae gives us an overview of how influencer marketing started, the progressions it has made, and where it is today. This is a really exciting and rapidly growing marketing road to be on today and we can’t wait to share what Mae has to say on this. If you are a brand looking to partner with influencers, or an influencer looking to partner with brands – then you’re going to love this one!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 25 Apr 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Inside Details of How to Become an Influencer with Mae Karwowski of Obvious.ly</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>207</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/537036fa-ae9b-11ec-91b1-afcd40d3d30a/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we welcome Mae Karwowski, the Founder and CEO of Obvious.ly, a technology-driven influencer marketing platform that launched in 2014. In this episode, we are talking all about building a business from the ground up. Mae shares how...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we welcome Mae Karwowski, the Founder and CEO of Obvious.ly, a technology-driven influencer marketing platform that launched in 2014. In this episode, we are talking all about building a business from the ground up. Mae shares how she scaled her company to over 20 employees without any outside funding, as well as her experience working as a woman in the tech industry today. But for the most part, we really hone in on influencer marketing; what it’s really like working in that space as an agency and how you, as an influencer or brand, can work with an agency like Obvious.ly and start making a little money!
Mae is an absolute badass with heaps of insight, tips, tricks and advice. The influencer marketing landscape has truly evolved over the past four years and Mae gives us an overview of how influencer marketing started, the progressions it has made, and where it is today. This is a really exciting and rapidly growing marketing road to be on today and we can’t wait to share what Mae has to say on this. If you are a brand looking to partner with influencers, or an influencer looking to partner with brands – then you’re going to love this one!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we welcome Mae Karwowski, the Founder and CEO of Obvious.ly, a technology-driven influencer marketing platform that launched in 2014. In this episode, we are talking all about building a business from the ground up. Mae shares how she scaled her company to over 20 employees without any outside funding, as well as her experience working as a woman in the tech industry today. But for the most part, we really hone in on influencer marketing; what it’s really like working in that space as an agency and how you, as an influencer or brand, can work with an agency like Obvious.ly and start making a little money!</p><p>Mae is an absolute badass with heaps of insight, tips, tricks and advice. The influencer marketing landscape has truly evolved over the past four years and Mae gives us an overview of how influencer marketing started, the progressions it has made, and where it is today. This is a really exciting and rapidly growing marketing road to be on today and we can’t wait to share what Mae has to say on this. If you are a brand looking to partner with influencers, or an influencer looking to partner with brands – then you’re going to love this one!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2255</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7d61c738a678a719e32cb7553510216f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8942263144.mp3?updated=1661435961" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>206: Goal Crusher Club - Part 2 Aligning Projects with Your</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/goal-crusher-club-part-2-aligning-projects-with-your-goals</link>
      <description>Today’s Goal Crusher Club episode is all about aligning your projects with your goals. The entire purpose of this episode is to get you achieving the things on your dreamy bucket to-do list faster. We know that so many of you sit there twiddling your thumbs, hoping to get more stuff done, but are not getting more stuff done! We know it’s not because you’re not willing to get stuff done; the issue is that coming up with an end goal just feels very definite and restricting, right? Often, we just don’t have a clue what our end goal should be, we don’t know where to start, we don’t know what goals and tasks to prioritize and we don’t know which opportunities to follow. We feel you, and we’re here to help you really hone in, define and focus on what it is you’re working towards.
In this episode, we are going to be giving you great tips to help you set your goals and break them down into small projects and even tinier daily tasks. We are also going to help you prioritize your tasks throughout the day and give you some helpful tips on how to say no to the often distracting opportunities that arise. We know you are a creative, but we also want to see your creativity turn into a sustainable and profitable business – so if we’re mean, it’s only because we care. It’s time to knuckle down and get your booty in check, so start crushing your goals today and take a listen.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 23 Apr 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Goal Crusher Club - Part 2 Aligning Projects with Your</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>206</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/541929ae-ae9b-11ec-91b1-dfce79603797/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today’s Goal Crusher Club episode is all about aligning your projects with your goals. The entire purpose of this episode is to get you achieving the things on your dreamy bucket to-do list faster. We know that so many of you sit there twiddling...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today’s Goal Crusher Club episode is all about aligning your projects with your goals. The entire purpose of this episode is to get you achieving the things on your dreamy bucket to-do list faster. We know that so many of you sit there twiddling your thumbs, hoping to get more stuff done, but are not getting more stuff done! We know it’s not because you’re not willing to get stuff done; the issue is that coming up with an end goal just feels very definite and restricting, right? Often, we just don’t have a clue what our end goal should be, we don’t know where to start, we don’t know what goals and tasks to prioritize and we don’t know which opportunities to follow. We feel you, and we’re here to help you really hone in, define and focus on what it is you’re working towards.
In this episode, we are going to be giving you great tips to help you set your goals and break them down into small projects and even tinier daily tasks. We are also going to help you prioritize your tasks throughout the day and give you some helpful tips on how to say no to the often distracting opportunities that arise. We know you are a creative, but we also want to see your creativity turn into a sustainable and profitable business – so if we’re mean, it’s only because we care. It’s time to knuckle down and get your booty in check, so start crushing your goals today and take a listen.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s Goal Crusher Club episode is all about aligning your projects with your goals. The entire purpose of this episode is to get you achieving the things on your dreamy bucket to-do list faster. We know that so many of you sit there twiddling your thumbs, <em>hoping</em> to get more stuff done, but are not getting more stuff done! We know it’s not because you’re not willing to get stuff done; the issue is that coming up with an end goal just feels very definite and restricting, right? Often, we just don’t have a clue what our end goal should be, we don’t know where to start, we don’t know what goals and tasks to prioritize and we don’t know which opportunities to follow. We feel you, and we’re here to help you really hone in, define and focus on what it is you’re working towards.</p><p>In this episode, we are going to be giving you great tips to help you set your goals and break them down into small projects and even tinier daily tasks. We are also going to help you prioritize your tasks throughout the day and give you some helpful tips on how to say no to the often distracting opportunities that arise. We know you are a creative, but we also want to see your creativity turn into a sustainable and profitable business – so if we’re mean, it’s only because we care. It’s time to knuckle down and get your booty in check, so start crushing your goals today and take a listen.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrat">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1814</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[515ce567390e120172d303973c2fb082]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6682229737.mp3?updated=1661435922" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>205: Adding a Product Shop to Your Service-Based Business with Katie Hunt of Tradeshow Bootcamp</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/adding-a-product-shop-to-your-service-based-business-with-katie-hunt-of-tradeshow-bootcamp</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we welcome Katie Hunt of Tradeshow Bootcamp. Katie is a third-time guest on the show, where she was on previously to talk about wholesale and tradeshows. Katie is a business strategist, a mentor to creative entrepreneurs and has been super helpful for us in the realm of retail and all things product based. Today, Katie brings a new conversation to the table to help all you service-based babes who are wanting to dip your toes into physical products but just don’t know where to start. She is going to talk to us about how service-based businesses, and any business really, can start having a product shop without housing an inventory.
We are going to be breaking down drop shipping, print on demand and the different software and systems that you can set up to get you going as hassle-free as possible. Katie will also be giving you a bunch of vital questions that you need to be asking yourself in order to help get yourself ready for your product journey and ensure that you are setting expectations from the get-go. This conversation definitely set fire to our own booties and inspired us to get our own products listed. If introducing products is an idea you’ve been toying with for a while but just don’t know where to start, Katie is here to help us hit the ground running.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 20 Apr 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Adding a Product Shop to Your Service-Based Business with Katie Hunt of Tradeshow Bootcamp</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>205</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/54caf3e6-ae9b-11ec-91b1-53eae87e427b/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we welcome Katie Hunt of Tradeshow Bootcamp. Katie is a third-time guest on the show, where she was on previously to talk about wholesale and tradeshows. Katie is a business strategist, a mentor to creative entrepreneurs and has...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we welcome Katie Hunt of Tradeshow Bootcamp. Katie is a third-time guest on the show, where she was on previously to talk about wholesale and tradeshows. Katie is a business strategist, a mentor to creative entrepreneurs and has been super helpful for us in the realm of retail and all things product based. Today, Katie brings a new conversation to the table to help all you service-based babes who are wanting to dip your toes into physical products but just don’t know where to start. She is going to talk to us about how service-based businesses, and any business really, can start having a product shop without housing an inventory.
We are going to be breaking down drop shipping, print on demand and the different software and systems that you can set up to get you going as hassle-free as possible. Katie will also be giving you a bunch of vital questions that you need to be asking yourself in order to help get yourself ready for your product journey and ensure that you are setting expectations from the get-go. This conversation definitely set fire to our own booties and inspired us to get our own products listed. If introducing products is an idea you’ve been toying with for a while but just don’t know where to start, Katie is here to help us hit the ground running.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we welcome Katie Hunt of Tradeshow Bootcamp. Katie is a third-time guest on the show, where she was on previously to talk about wholesale and tradeshows. Katie is a business strategist, a mentor to creative entrepreneurs and has been super helpful for us in the realm of retail and all things product based. Today, Katie brings a new conversation to the table to help all you service-based babes who are wanting to dip your toes into physical products but just don’t know where to start. She is going to talk to us about how service-based businesses, and any business really, can start having a product shop without housing an inventory.</p><p>We are going to be breaking down drop shipping, print on demand and the different software and systems that you can set up to get you going as hassle-free as possible. Katie will also be giving you a bunch of vital questions that you need to be asking yourself in order to help get yourself ready for your product journey and ensure that you are setting expectations from the get-go. This conversation definitely set fire to our own booties and inspired us to get our own products listed. If introducing products is an idea you’ve been toying with for a while but just don’t know where to start, Katie is here to help us hit the ground running.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2434</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2c9fd5e067b8006037e26014b0ff0f53]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3647162096.mp3?updated=1661435840" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>204: Goal Crusher Club - Part 1: 7 Habits for Productivity</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/goal-crusher-club-part-1-7-habits-for-productivity</link>
      <description>In this episode we dive into seven habits that we believe lead to a more productive life and a more productive business. These seven habits will ultimately help you achieve the goals and dreams you are seeking – whether those are personal or financial. You are one person, with multiple facets, and you can’t play blind to the fact that you have a life outside of work! We want to incorporate that into living a lifestyle that gets you where you want to go. These seven habits have been monitored over time in our own business. Whenever we are incredibly productive, we take a look at everything that we were doing over that time and ask, “What was a constant? What habits combined aided our productivity?”
A lot of people ask us what is it that makes us so productive, and everyone seems to be waiting for that miracle answer. But the reason why we are covering seven habits is because it is never just one thing. It’s never just one thing you do that helps you sell more, or get more people on your list, or land more clients. It is a combination of things that helps to create a successful business and a successful human being. So take a listen and learn more about the seven habits we focus on that have led to more productivity in our lives and how it can lead to more productivity in your life too.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 Apr 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Goal Crusher Club - Part 1: 7 Habits for Productivity</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>204</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/55743bcc-ae9b-11ec-91b1-43a9b70720d1/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode we dive into seven habits that we believe lead to a more productive life and a more productive business. These seven habits will ultimately help you achieve the goals and dreams you are seeking – whether those are personal or...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode we dive into seven habits that we believe lead to a more productive life and a more productive business. These seven habits will ultimately help you achieve the goals and dreams you are seeking – whether those are personal or financial. You are one person, with multiple facets, and you can’t play blind to the fact that you have a life outside of work! We want to incorporate that into living a lifestyle that gets you where you want to go. These seven habits have been monitored over time in our own business. Whenever we are incredibly productive, we take a look at everything that we were doing over that time and ask, “What was a constant? What habits combined aided our productivity?”
A lot of people ask us what is it that makes us so productive, and everyone seems to be waiting for that miracle answer. But the reason why we are covering seven habits is because it is never just one thing. It’s never just one thing you do that helps you sell more, or get more people on your list, or land more clients. It is a combination of things that helps to create a successful business and a successful human being. So take a listen and learn more about the seven habits we focus on that have led to more productivity in our lives and how it can lead to more productivity in your life too.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode we dive into seven habits that we believe lead to a more productive life and a more productive business. These seven habits will ultimately help you achieve the goals and dreams you are seeking – whether those are personal or financial. You are one person, with multiple facets, and you can’t play blind to the fact that you have a life outside of work! We want to incorporate that into living a lifestyle that gets you where you want to go. These seven habits have been monitored over time in our own business. Whenever we are incredibly productive, we take a look at everything that we were doing over that time and ask, “What was a constant? What habits combined aided our productivity?”</p><p>A lot of people ask us what is it that makes us so productive, and everyone seems to be waiting for that miracle answer. But the reason why we are covering seven habits is because it is never just one thing. It’s never just one thing you do that helps you sell more, or get more people on your list, or land more clients. It is a combination of things that helps to create a successful business and a successful human being. So take a listen and learn more about the seven habits we focus on that have led to more productivity in our lives and how it can lead to more productivity in your life too.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1573</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[68a3b0f9b6aaa167cee9b20145aa505d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5696150594.mp3?updated=1661435788" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>203: Utilizing LIVE video with Facebook Instagram with Jenny Melrose</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/utilizing-live-video-with-facebook-instagram-with-jenny-melrose</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we welcome Jenny Melrose. Jenny is a former reading specialist who retired from her teaching career and started blogging. She is the owner at jennymelrose.com, the lifestyle blogger over at The Melrose Family and has worked with brands that are nationally recognized, such as Neutrogena, Smuckers, Glad, Costco, Stanley Steamer, Sarah Lee and many more. In this episode, we are talking to Jenny specifically about live video broadcasting and how to utilize this fantastic new tool for Facebook and Instagram.
We briefly touch on topics like sponsored posts and sponsored live content, but for the most part we are talking about how to get over the fear of live video, how to get started, how to create engaging content and how to get people to interact with you so that you can increase your organic reach, which ultimately leads to sales! We will also be discussing how you can pitch to brands and how this has been crucial to Jenny’s business success – and the good news is, it’s easier than you think! If you have been on the fence about live broadcasting, are not sure how to structure your video or what topics to cover – no matter what industry you an in, this episode will help you find your voice.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 16 Apr 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Utilizing LIVE video with Facebook Instagram with Jenny Melrose</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>203</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/561a1c68-ae9b-11ec-91b1-4b0ae063d193/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we welcome Jenny Melrose. Jenny is a former reading specialist who retired from her teaching career and started blogging. She is the owner at jennymelrose.com, the lifestyle blogger over at The Melrose Family and has worked with...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we welcome Jenny Melrose. Jenny is a former reading specialist who retired from her teaching career and started blogging. She is the owner at jennymelrose.com, the lifestyle blogger over at The Melrose Family and has worked with brands that are nationally recognized, such as Neutrogena, Smuckers, Glad, Costco, Stanley Steamer, Sarah Lee and many more. In this episode, we are talking to Jenny specifically about live video broadcasting and how to utilize this fantastic new tool for Facebook and Instagram.
We briefly touch on topics like sponsored posts and sponsored live content, but for the most part we are talking about how to get over the fear of live video, how to get started, how to create engaging content and how to get people to interact with you so that you can increase your organic reach, which ultimately leads to sales! We will also be discussing how you can pitch to brands and how this has been crucial to Jenny’s business success – and the good news is, it’s easier than you think! If you have been on the fence about live broadcasting, are not sure how to structure your video or what topics to cover – no matter what industry you an in, this episode will help you find your voice.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we welcome Jenny Melrose. Jenny is a former reading specialist who retired from her teaching career and started blogging. She is the owner at jennymelrose.com, the lifestyle blogger over at The Melrose Family and has worked with brands that are nationally recognized, such as Neutrogena, Smuckers, Glad, Costco, Stanley Steamer, Sarah Lee and many more. In this episode, we are talking to Jenny specifically about live video broadcasting and how to utilize this fantastic new tool for Facebook and Instagram.</p><p>We briefly touch on topics like sponsored posts and sponsored live content, but for the most part we are talking about how to get over the fear of live video, how to get started, how to create engaging content and how to get people to interact with you so that you can increase your organic reach, which ultimately leads to sales! We will also be discussing how you can pitch to brands and how this has been crucial to Jenny’s business success – and the good news is, it’s easier than you think! If you have been on the fence about live broadcasting, are not sure how to structure your video or what topics to cover – no matter what industry you an in, this episode will help you find your voice.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2311</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6f12a46c8684dad3b0bc56081ab4b948]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4170064512.mp3?updated=1661435753" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>202: March 2018 Review</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/march-2018-review</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we are bringing you another monthly review session. This time around we will be taking a look at March 2018. We are going to take a look at everything that happened, everything that didn’t happen, why things happened and ultimately, what this all means! More specifically, we’ll be walking you through the nerve-wracking spending freeze that we had to place on the company this month, as well as the goal that changed course, how we quickly adapted and implemented the new goal which led to our exciting new course you see today – The Goal Crusher Club.
We’ll also be sharing with you how we shifted to a new email service provider and the benefits of getting your systems in order, even when it draws you away from those money-making activities. We take a dig at the areas we want to improve on, like our personal internal leadership capabilities, our upcoming hotel spa strategy and why we need to have weekly check-ins with one another r.e our individual decision-making progress. In addition, we have some sexy new numbers to dazzle you with and will be sharing why our April affirmation is to realign. By the end of this episode, you will certainly have seen our flaws and be reminded that we, of course, are only human too. We know that you are coming up against these challenges in your own business and we are here to tell you that sometimes, you’ve just got to live and let be!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 13 Apr 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>March 2018 Review</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>202</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/56cfcbee-ae9b-11ec-91b1-eb7a722747fa/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we are bringing you another monthly review session. This time around we will be taking a look at March 2018. We are going to take a look at everything that happened, everything that didn’t happen, why things happened and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we are bringing you another monthly review session. This time around we will be taking a look at March 2018. We are going to take a look at everything that happened, everything that didn’t happen, why things happened and ultimately, what this all means! More specifically, we’ll be walking you through the nerve-wracking spending freeze that we had to place on the company this month, as well as the goal that changed course, how we quickly adapted and implemented the new goal which led to our exciting new course you see today – The Goal Crusher Club.
We’ll also be sharing with you how we shifted to a new email service provider and the benefits of getting your systems in order, even when it draws you away from those money-making activities. We take a dig at the areas we want to improve on, like our personal internal leadership capabilities, our upcoming hotel spa strategy and why we need to have weekly check-ins with one another r.e our individual decision-making progress. In addition, we have some sexy new numbers to dazzle you with and will be sharing why our April affirmation is to realign. By the end of this episode, you will certainly have seen our flaws and be reminded that we, of course, are only human too. We know that you are coming up against these challenges in your own business and we are here to tell you that sometimes, you’ve just got to live and let be!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we are bringing you another monthly review session. This time around we will be taking a look at March 2018. We are going to take a look at everything that happened, everything that didn’t happen, why things happened and ultimately, what this all means! More specifically, we’ll be walking you through the nerve-wracking spending freeze that we had to place on the company this month, as well as the goal that changed course, how we quickly adapted and implemented the new goal which led to our exciting new course you see today – The Goal Crusher Club.</p><p>We’ll also be sharing with you how we shifted to a new email service provider and the benefits of getting your systems in order, even when it draws you away from those money-making activities. We take a dig at the areas we want to improve on, like our personal internal leadership capabilities, our upcoming hotel spa strategy and why we need to have weekly check-ins with one another r.e our individual decision-making progress. In addition, we have some sexy new numbers to dazzle you with and will be sharing why our April affirmation is to realign. By the end of this episode, you will certainly have seen our flaws and be reminded that we, of course, are only human too. We know that you are coming up against these challenges in your own business and we are here to tell you that sometimes, you’ve just got to live and let be!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2172</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c7fdd36f0a58ef0d5adf04b12c7169a8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1910718711.mp3?updated=1661435749" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>201: Creating a Workspace that Inspires You with Desha Peacock of Sweet Spot Style</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-a-workspace-that-inspires-you</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Desha Peacock. Desha is an international retreat leader, lifeSTYLE Design Coach and the Founder of Sweet Spot Style. Desha works with creative entrepreneurial women to upgrade their lifestyle and live fully in their sweet spot. She is also the author of Create The Style You Crave and Your Creative Workspace. Today on the podcast we are diving into how to create a work environment that inspires you.
We will be touching on light, colors, wallpaper, Feng Shui and all the things that you need to focus on in order to be more productive and work in a space you truly appreciate. A workspace means different things to different people, depending on your personality and what you do. Desha’s job is not to be a “style guru,” but rather to help people think about what is important to them and what kind of workspace would inspire them. Whether you have a formal office space, work from home, or have a tiny corner in your room – Desha is going to help us create a space that will enable us to do our best work.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 Apr 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating a Workspace that Inspires You with Desha Peacock of Sweet Spot Style</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>201</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/57740c86-ae9b-11ec-91b1-4b3d72872379/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Desha Peacock. Desha is an international retreat leader, lifeSTYLE Design Coach and the Founder of Sweet Spot Style. Desha works with creative entrepreneurial women to upgrade their lifestyle and live fully in their sweet...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Desha Peacock. Desha is an international retreat leader, lifeSTYLE Design Coach and the Founder of Sweet Spot Style. Desha works with creative entrepreneurial women to upgrade their lifestyle and live fully in their sweet spot. She is also the author of Create The Style You Crave and Your Creative Workspace. Today on the podcast we are diving into how to create a work environment that inspires you.
We will be touching on light, colors, wallpaper, Feng Shui and all the things that you need to focus on in order to be more productive and work in a space you truly appreciate. A workspace means different things to different people, depending on your personality and what you do. Desha’s job is not to be a “style guru,” but rather to help people think about what is important to them and what kind of workspace would inspire them. Whether you have a formal office space, work from home, or have a tiny corner in your room – Desha is going to help us create a space that will enable us to do our best work.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Desha Peacock. Desha is an international retreat leader, lifeSTYLE Design Coach and the Founder of Sweet Spot Style. Desha works with creative entrepreneurial women to upgrade their lifestyle and live fully in their sweet spot. She is also the author of <em>Create The Style You Crave</em> and <em>Your Creative Workspace.</em> Today on the podcast we are diving into how to create a work environment that inspires you.</p><p>We will be touching on light, colors, wallpaper, Feng Shui and all the things that you need to focus on in order to be more productive and work in a space you truly appreciate. A workspace means different things to different people, depending on your personality and what you do. Desha’s job is not to be a “style guru,” but rather to help people think about what is important to them and what kind of workspace would inspire them. Whether you have a formal office space, work from home, or have a tiny corner in your room – Desha is going to help us create a space that will enable us to do our best work.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2181</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a58b9018543380cd631e8144b5a1e99d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7941300213.mp3?updated=1661435697" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>200: Introducing Goal Crusher Club</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/introducing-the-goal-crusher-club</link>
      <description>Before we dive into anything, can we just have a moment of silence for the phenomenal fact that this is episode 200! And guess what? We’re not going anywhere – hopefully we will be around for another 200 episodes. If you’re listening to this right now, we’re sending you a big fat thank you. Your time, energy and ears really mean a lot to us. Now that we’re done jumping up and down in celebration of this 200-episode milestone, let’s move onto the topic of today’s episode…Spoiler alert, there’s something new in TCC land, it’s called the Goal Crusher Club, it’s available right now and it’s fricken’ incredible! We know that you’ve got more biz ideas than you know what to do with and what you need is someone to help you organize the chaos and hold you accountable. That’s what we’re best at, babe and that’s what The Goal Crusher Club is all about – accountability.
We created The Goal Crusher Club to help you go from that frazzled hot mess to a master-of-systems goal crusher. This is going to be a super unique way to interact with us, other creatives and allow you to get elbow-deep into the mechanics of your own business. In this episode, we are going to walk you through why we created The Goal Crusher Club, how it will help you, how it is organized, what you can expect, the insane benefits and why it is the most unique course on the block! This club provides the perfect opportunity for people who are wanting to get more stuff done, get some hardcore focus, get some support and in-depth feedback and finally start reaching their goals. And did we mention it’s just $29 a month?
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 09 Apr 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Introducing Goal Crusher Club</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>200</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/58337c9c-ae9b-11ec-91b1-27f9b6fe75bc/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Before we dive into anything, can we just have a moment of silence for the phenomenal fact that this is episode 200! And guess what? We’re not going anywhere – hopefully we will be around for another 200 episodes. If you’re listening to this...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Before we dive into anything, can we just have a moment of silence for the phenomenal fact that this is episode 200! And guess what? We’re not going anywhere – hopefully we will be around for another 200 episodes. If you’re listening to this right now, we’re sending you a big fat thank you. Your time, energy and ears really mean a lot to us. Now that we’re done jumping up and down in celebration of this 200-episode milestone, let’s move onto the topic of today’s episode…Spoiler alert, there’s something new in TCC land, it’s called the Goal Crusher Club, it’s available right now and it’s fricken’ incredible! We know that you’ve got more biz ideas than you know what to do with and what you need is someone to help you organize the chaos and hold you accountable. That’s what we’re best at, babe and that’s what The Goal Crusher Club is all about – accountability.
We created The Goal Crusher Club to help you go from that frazzled hot mess to a master-of-systems goal crusher. This is going to be a super unique way to interact with us, other creatives and allow you to get elbow-deep into the mechanics of your own business. In this episode, we are going to walk you through why we created The Goal Crusher Club, how it will help you, how it is organized, what you can expect, the insane benefits and why it is the most unique course on the block! This club provides the perfect opportunity for people who are wanting to get more stuff done, get some hardcore focus, get some support and in-depth feedback and finally start reaching their goals. And did we mention it’s just $29 a month?
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Before we dive into anything, can we just have a moment of silence for the phenomenal fact that this is episode 200! And guess what? We’re not going anywhere – hopefully we will be around for another 200 episodes. If you’re listening to this right now, we’re sending you a big fat thank you. Your time, energy and ears really mean a lot to us. Now that we’re done jumping up and down in celebration of this 200-episode milestone, let’s move onto the topic of today’s episode…Spoiler alert, there’s something new in TCC land, it’s called the Goal Crusher Club, it’s available right now and it’s fricken’ incredible! We know that you’ve got more biz ideas than you know what to do with and what you need is someone to help you organize the chaos and hold you accountable. That’s what we’re best at, babe and that’s what The Goal Crusher Club is all about – accountability.</p><p>We created The Goal Crusher Club to help you go from that frazzled hot mess to a master-of-systems goal crusher. This is going to be a super unique way to interact with us, other creatives and allow you to get elbow-deep into the mechanics of your own business. In this episode, we are going to walk you through why we created The Goal Crusher Club, how it will help you, how it is organized, what you can expect, the insane benefits and why it is the most unique course on the block! This club provides the perfect opportunity for people who are wanting to get more stuff done, get some hardcore focus, get some support and in-depth feedback and finally start reaching their goals. And did we mention it’s just $29 a month?</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1639</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[924f129622c4b39f715ea035e803b19e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7331282369.mp3?updated=1661435591" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>199: Quadrupling Your Email List and Selling Out a Group Program with Steph Crowder of Courage Clarity</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/quadrupling-your-email-list-and-selling-out-a-group-program-with-steph-crowder-of-courage-clarity</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we welcome the email list queen, Steph Crowder. Steph is an educator and coach at Courage &amp; Clarity, one of our Mastermind members and the “Den Mamma” at Fizzle.co. She is a delight to have on the show and we’re excited to dive into her secret sauce! The email list is where it’s at, right? Everyone has heard about the email list buzz, but the truth is, that that email list is keeping a lot of you up at night! This episode is helpful for those who are terrified of opt-ins, emails and have no clue what to do with those subscribers afterwards! Steph has been on a recent journey of quadrupling her email list in just 30 days. But what is brilliant about Steph is that she then successfully went on to sell programs to those already warmed up dreamy dreamers.
Steph has so many action steps for those who are feeling overwhelmed by their email list, are not sure what to focus on and don’t know how they should grow. For those of you just starting to get your business off the ground – Steph feels ya and gives some great tips on what to do, as well as what not to do in those early stages. She also gives us a great model for setting up your work week in just 15 minutes every Sunday afternoon while you sip a cuppa tea. So take notes because by the end of this episode you will have all the tools and all the inspiration needed to get to work on this right away!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 06 Apr 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Quadrupling Your Email List and Selling Out a Group Program with Steph Crowder of Courage Clarity</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>199</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/58ec9f7e-ae9b-11ec-91b1-372bc9dec83e/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we welcome the email list queen, Steph Crowder. Steph is an educator and coach at Courage &amp; Clarity, one of our Mastermind members and the “Den Mamma” at Fizzle.co. She is a delight to have on the show and we’re excited...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we welcome the email list queen, Steph Crowder. Steph is an educator and coach at Courage &amp; Clarity, one of our Mastermind members and the “Den Mamma” at Fizzle.co. She is a delight to have on the show and we’re excited to dive into her secret sauce! The email list is where it’s at, right? Everyone has heard about the email list buzz, but the truth is, that that email list is keeping a lot of you up at night! This episode is helpful for those who are terrified of opt-ins, emails and have no clue what to do with those subscribers afterwards! Steph has been on a recent journey of quadrupling her email list in just 30 days. But what is brilliant about Steph is that she then successfully went on to sell programs to those already warmed up dreamy dreamers.
Steph has so many action steps for those who are feeling overwhelmed by their email list, are not sure what to focus on and don’t know how they should grow. For those of you just starting to get your business off the ground – Steph feels ya and gives some great tips on what to do, as well as what not to do in those early stages. She also gives us a great model for setting up your work week in just 15 minutes every Sunday afternoon while you sip a cuppa tea. So take notes because by the end of this episode you will have all the tools and all the inspiration needed to get to work on this right away!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we welcome the email list queen, Steph Crowder. Steph is an educator and coach at Courage &amp; Clarity, one of our Mastermind members and the “Den Mamma” at Fizzle.co. She is a delight to have on the show and we’re excited to dive into her secret sauce! The email list is where it’s at, right? Everyone has heard about the email list buzz, but the truth is, that that email list is keeping a lot of you up at night! This episode is helpful for those who are terrified of opt-ins, emails and have no clue what to do with those subscribers afterwards! Steph has been on a recent journey of quadrupling her email list in just 30 days. But what is brilliant about Steph is that she then successfully went on to sell programs to those already warmed up dreamy dreamers.</p><p>Steph has so many action steps for those who are feeling overwhelmed by their email list, are not sure what to focus on and don’t know how they should grow. For those of you just starting to get your business off the ground – Steph feels ya and gives some great tips on what to do, as well as what not to do in those early stages. She also gives us a great model for setting up your work week in just 15 minutes every Sunday afternoon while you sip a cuppa tea. So take notes because by the end of this episode you will have all the tools and all the inspiration needed to get to work on this right away!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2897</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[125784f40ace1357a7b539772b6fecc8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2178125419.mp3?updated=1661549280" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>198: January and February Monthly Reviews - We Learned Something MAJOR During These Months</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/january-and-february-monthly-reviews-we-learned-something-major-during-these-months</link>
      <description>Today on the show, we are bringing you a two-in-one monthly review session. We know we are always telling you to check your data, but the truth is, we forgot. January slipped away and then February slipped away and before we knew it we had the monthly reviews way off of our minds! Even we make mistakes and the upside of that, is that you guys get to learn from them! Yay! So, even if it is March and you also haven’t done last month’s report yet, that’s okay, you can give yourself some grace and do yours with us here today.
In this episode, we are diving straight in to our monthly business review sheets which you can find within the  Follow Through Method. We’ll be going through our goals and whether we accomplished them or not, as well as our numbers for our various social media pages, our email list and our website. We’ll also be taking a look at increases and decreases in sales and talking about the importance of allowing your goals to pivot and be tweaked. So, grab a pen and paper, dig out the calculator and let’s start collecting some data.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 Apr 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>January and February Monthly Reviews - We Learned Something MAJOR During These Months</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>198</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/59c932ae-ae9b-11ec-91b1-738e5525e6e6/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show, we are bringing you a two-in-one monthly review session. We know we are always telling you to check your data, but the truth is, we forgot. January slipped away and then February slipped away and before we knew it we had the monthly...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show, we are bringing you a two-in-one monthly review session. We know we are always telling you to check your data, but the truth is, we forgot. January slipped away and then February slipped away and before we knew it we had the monthly reviews way off of our minds! Even we make mistakes and the upside of that, is that you guys get to learn from them! Yay! So, even if it is March and you also haven’t done last month’s report yet, that’s okay, you can give yourself some grace and do yours with us here today.
In this episode, we are diving straight in to our monthly business review sheets which you can find within the  Follow Through Method. We’ll be going through our goals and whether we accomplished them or not, as well as our numbers for our various social media pages, our email list and our website. We’ll also be taking a look at increases and decreases in sales and talking about the importance of allowing your goals to pivot and be tweaked. So, grab a pen and paper, dig out the calculator and let’s start collecting some data.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show, we are bringing you a two-in-one monthly review session. We know we are always telling you to check your data, but the truth is, we forgot. January slipped away and then February slipped away and before we knew it we had the monthly reviews way off of our minds! Even we make mistakes and the upside of that, is that you guys get to learn from them! Yay! So, even if it is March and you also haven’t done last month’s report yet, that’s okay, you can give yourself some grace and do yours with us here today.</p><p>In this episode, we are diving straight in to our monthly business review sheets which you can find within the <a href="https://academy.thinkcreativecollective.com/p/follow-through-method"> Follow Through Method</a>. We’ll be going through our goals and whether we accomplished them or not, as well as our numbers for our various social media pages, our email list and our website. We’ll also be taking a look at increases and decreases in sales and talking about the importance of allowing your goals to pivot and be tweaked. So, grab a pen and paper, dig out the calculator and let’s start collecting some data.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrateg">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1854</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ac2dc8b4f077f512a9f6f06dc842fb01]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3510168273.mp3?updated=1661549218" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>197: Cultivating Diversity and Creating Community for the Geek Chic with Jordan Ellis of Jordandene</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/cultivating-diversity-and-creating-community-for-the-geek-chic-with-jordan-ellis-of-jordandene</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we welcome our good friend, Jordan Ellis of Jordandené. She is an amazing woman who has a geeky lifestyle brand based in Brooklyn. She sells things that are juts subtly nerdy, from T’s, to tanks, to mugs, to phone cases and more. Jordan also recently started the Satorial Geek, a quarterly magazine and now a podcast all about girl power and promoting that nerd culture. Jordan is so amazing that it’s no wonder that this is our third time having her on the show!
We’ll give you an overview of the other episodes Jordan has done with us, in order to give you a bird’s eye view of her business and some of the strategic moves she’s made. In this episode, however, we discuss adding extra aspects to a physical product-based business as a way to contribute to bigger goals that might not be present today. We also discuss the challenges around diversity, representation, and inclusivity in the online space and look to Jordan as a business owner who is really leading the way. We also get her insights on how to stand out in a super tiny product-based niche. There is so much to be learned from Jordan and we hope you enjoy her company as much as we do!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 02 Apr 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Cultivating Diversity and Creating Community for the Geek Chic with Jordan Ellis of Jordandene</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>197</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/5a7551ba-ae9b-11ec-91b1-7bf410f944f8/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we welcome our good friend, Jordan Ellis of Jordandené. She is an amazing woman who has a geeky lifestyle brand based in Brooklyn. She sells things that are juts subtly nerdy, from T’s, to tanks, to mugs, to phone cases and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we welcome our good friend, Jordan Ellis of Jordandené. She is an amazing woman who has a geeky lifestyle brand based in Brooklyn. She sells things that are juts subtly nerdy, from T’s, to tanks, to mugs, to phone cases and more. Jordan also recently started the Satorial Geek, a quarterly magazine and now a podcast all about girl power and promoting that nerd culture. Jordan is so amazing that it’s no wonder that this is our third time having her on the show!
We’ll give you an overview of the other episodes Jordan has done with us, in order to give you a bird’s eye view of her business and some of the strategic moves she’s made. In this episode, however, we discuss adding extra aspects to a physical product-based business as a way to contribute to bigger goals that might not be present today. We also discuss the challenges around diversity, representation, and inclusivity in the online space and look to Jordan as a business owner who is really leading the way. We also get her insights on how to stand out in a super tiny product-based niche. There is so much to be learned from Jordan and we hope you enjoy her company as much as we do!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we welcome our good friend, Jordan Ellis of Jordandené. She is an amazing woman who has a geeky lifestyle brand based in Brooklyn. She sells things that are juts subtly nerdy, from T’s, to tanks, to mugs, to phone cases and more. Jordan also recently started the <em>Satorial Geek</em>, a quarterly magazine and now a podcast all about girl power and promoting that nerd culture. Jordan is so amazing that it’s no wonder that this is our third time having her on the show!</p><p>We’ll give you an overview of the other episodes Jordan has done with us, in order to give you a bird’s eye view of her business and some of the strategic moves she’s made. In this episode, however, we discuss adding extra aspects to a physical product-based business as a way to contribute to bigger goals that might not be present today. We also discuss the challenges around diversity, representation, and inclusivity in the online space and look to Jordan as a business owner who is really leading the way. We also get her insights on how to stand out in a super tiny product-based niche. There is so much to be learned from Jordan and we hope you enjoy her company as much as we do!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2170</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4b77dcd43b7b77ad17fabfd061787e83]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1853202552.mp3?updated=1661549189" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>196: Planning for Worst-Case Scenarios</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/planning-for-worst-case-scenarios</link>
      <description>For those of you who don’t already know Emylee – welcome to her anxious life. She is the type of person who can tell you where every exit in a building is, or how to stop drop and roll in case of a fire, and where to hide just in case a tornado suddenly appears on route to the mall. In business, Emylee is the kind of person that likes to go through every single worst case scenario. She always has a backup plan… and a backup plan for the backup plan. Emylee is the queen of doing this and it turns out that this can be a super helpful attribute to have in a business partnership.
This episode is about planning for the things that you can never plan for. It’s about answering those difficult “What if” questions. It’s about securing your business for the future and the reassurance that this brings to your life. For those of you who are single business owners, we’re not sure you’ve thought of planning for worst-case scenarios and exactly how to do that. So in today’s episode, we’re going to be sharing our experiences and the reasons we have made planning for worst-case scenarios an integral part of our overall business strategy. We discuss the various insurance options you have, the various questions you need to ask yourself and how you can effectively plan for the worst, in the best kind of way. Take a listen!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 30 Mar 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Planning for Worst Case Scenarios</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>196</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/5b22815a-ae9b-11ec-91b1-5355a586d1f3/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>For those of you who don’t already know Emylee – welcome to her anxious life. She is the type of person who can tell you where every exit in a building is, or how to stop drop and roll in case of a fire, and where to hide just in case a tornado...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>For those of you who don’t already know Emylee – welcome to her anxious life. She is the type of person who can tell you where every exit in a building is, or how to stop drop and roll in case of a fire, and where to hide just in case a tornado suddenly appears on route to the mall. In business, Emylee is the kind of person that likes to go through every single worst case scenario. She always has a backup plan… and a backup plan for the backup plan. Emylee is the queen of doing this and it turns out that this can be a super helpful attribute to have in a business partnership.
This episode is about planning for the things that you can never plan for. It’s about answering those difficult “What if” questions. It’s about securing your business for the future and the reassurance that this brings to your life. For those of you who are single business owners, we’re not sure you’ve thought of planning for worst-case scenarios and exactly how to do that. So in today’s episode, we’re going to be sharing our experiences and the reasons we have made planning for worst-case scenarios an integral part of our overall business strategy. We discuss the various insurance options you have, the various questions you need to ask yourself and how you can effectively plan for the worst, in the best kind of way. Take a listen!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For those of you who don’t already know Emylee – welcome to her anxious life. She is the type of person who can tell you where every exit in a building is, or how to stop drop and roll in case of a fire, and where to hide just in case a tornado suddenly appears on route to the mall. In business, Emylee is the kind of person that likes to go through every single worst case scenario. She always has a backup plan… and a backup plan for the backup plan. Emylee is the queen of doing this and it turns out that this can be a super helpful attribute to have in a business partnership.</p><p>This episode is about planning for the things that you can never plan for. It’s about answering those difficult “What if” questions. It’s about securing your business for the future and the reassurance that this brings to your life. For those of you who are single business owners, we’re not sure you’ve thought of planning for worst-case scenarios and exactly how to do that. So in today’s episode, we’re going to be sharing our experiences and the reasons we have made planning for worst-case scenarios an integral part of our overall business strategy. We discuss the various insurance options you have, the various questions you need to ask yourself and how you can effectively plan for the worst, in the best kind of way. Take a listen!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2049</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1486b5fd41d5bf6787c2136429382af4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4349481281.mp3?updated=1661549171" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>195: Leaving a Legacy and Making an Impact with Kelly Roach of Kelly Roach Coaching</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/leaving-a-legacy-and-making-an-impact-with-kelly-roach-of-kelly-roach-coaching</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we welcome Kelly Roach. Kelly is a national bestselling author, the host of the podcast Unstoppable Success Radio and the CEO of her own coaching company, Kelly Roach Coaching. Kelly has NFL cheerleading experience, Fortune 500 executive status and today is “bringing it” with strategy, mindset, wellness and everything in between that will help you build the legacy you want to leave behind. In this episode, we talk about how to create a legacy, what a legacy looks like for you and the impact that tiny every-day decisions have on the future of your business. Our episodes usually center around getting a business off the ground, but the question we’re asking today is, what do you do after?
Often when we think of legacy, we think of something grand, something awe-inspiring, something world-renowned but the truth is that no matter how small your business is, you can leave a legacy too and according to Kelly, this is the calling and responsibility of all entrepreneurs. Kelly really unpacks what leaving a legacy means to you, and for creative entrepreneurs especially, this is super helpful to hear. Kelly gives us some great ideas on how we can create a more sellable business and stresses the importance of wellness and self-care in legacy building. If you are wanting to make an impact in the world with your business after you sell it, move on, or retire, then this is definitely an episode for the you of today and for the you of tomorrow!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 Mar 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Leaving a Legacy and Making an Impact with Kelly Roach of Kelly Roach Coaching</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>195</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/5be677fe-ae9b-11ec-91b1-936f1f0cdca2/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we welcome Kelly Roach. Kelly is a national bestselling author, the host of the podcast Unstoppable Success Radio and the CEO of her own coaching company, Kelly Roach Coaching. Kelly has NFL cheerleading experience, Fortune 500...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we welcome Kelly Roach. Kelly is a national bestselling author, the host of the podcast Unstoppable Success Radio and the CEO of her own coaching company, Kelly Roach Coaching. Kelly has NFL cheerleading experience, Fortune 500 executive status and today is “bringing it” with strategy, mindset, wellness and everything in between that will help you build the legacy you want to leave behind. In this episode, we talk about how to create a legacy, what a legacy looks like for you and the impact that tiny every-day decisions have on the future of your business. Our episodes usually center around getting a business off the ground, but the question we’re asking today is, what do you do after?
Often when we think of legacy, we think of something grand, something awe-inspiring, something world-renowned but the truth is that no matter how small your business is, you can leave a legacy too and according to Kelly, this is the calling and responsibility of all entrepreneurs. Kelly really unpacks what leaving a legacy means to you, and for creative entrepreneurs especially, this is super helpful to hear. Kelly gives us some great ideas on how we can create a more sellable business and stresses the importance of wellness and self-care in legacy building. If you are wanting to make an impact in the world with your business after you sell it, move on, or retire, then this is definitely an episode for the you of today and for the you of tomorrow!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we welcome Kelly Roach. Kelly is a national bestselling author, the host of the podcast Unstoppable Success Radio and the CEO of her own coaching company, Kelly Roach Coaching. Kelly has NFL cheerleading experience, Fortune 500 executive status and today is “bringing it” with strategy, mindset, wellness and everything in between that will help you build the legacy you want to leave behind. In this episode, we talk about how to create a legacy, what a legacy looks like for you and the impact that tiny every-day decisions have on the future of your business. Our episodes usually center around getting a business off the ground, but the question we’re asking today is, what do you do after?</p><p>Often when we think of legacy, we think of something grand, something awe-inspiring, something world-renowned but the truth is that no matter how small your business is, you can leave a legacy too and according to Kelly, this is the calling and responsibility of all entrepreneurs. Kelly really unpacks what leaving a legacy means to you, and for creative entrepreneurs especially, this is super helpful to hear. Kelly gives us some great ideas on how we can create a more sellable business and stresses the importance of wellness and self-care in legacy building. If you are wanting to make an impact in the world with your business after you sell it, move on, or retire, then this is definitely an episode for the you of today and for the you of tomorrow!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestra">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2069</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e8573af0f2c0a204b8b2ada3ea8df98c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2226252134.mp3?updated=1661549189" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>194: They're More Successful Than Me Because - And Other Excuses We Tell Ourselves</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/theyre-more-successful-than-me-because-and-other-excuses-we-tell-ourselves</link>
      <description>“I don’t have enough time”, “I don’t know the right people”, “I don’t have enough money.” There are a lot of excuses we make for not being or most successful selves. We’ve all used them at least once, or have heard other people use them, over and over again! But how true are they really? This is a conversation we have recently been having and we wanted to bring you in on it. In this episode, we are talking about the excuses we make for not achieving success in our business and the things we like to tell ourselves about how others achieved their success.
We start off by looking at the geographical location and how the attitudes toward money and status can influence the way we start to define and articulate our own success. We also discuss the “overnight success” myth and why time is one of the most misunderstood aspect of success. We also want to take this opportunity to remind you that you don’t need to know all the hot shots, or even know much at all for that matter, to be successful. The most successful people are great learners who focused, made the time, didn’t blame their kids and tried! If you are finding yourself constantly making excuses about your business, or the lack thereof, then this is the episode to listen to for a fresh perspective and a kick up the rear!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 26 Mar 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>They're More Successful Than Me Because - And Other Excuses We Tell Ourselves</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>194</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/5c9edd94-ae9b-11ec-91b1-872724dd8e8f/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“I don’t have enough time”, “I don’t know the right people”, “I don’t have enough money.” There are a lot of excuses we make for not being or most successful selves. We’ve all used them at least once, or have heard other people use...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“I don’t have enough time”, “I don’t know the right people”, “I don’t have enough money.” There are a lot of excuses we make for not being or most successful selves. We’ve all used them at least once, or have heard other people use them, over and over again! But how true are they really? This is a conversation we have recently been having and we wanted to bring you in on it. In this episode, we are talking about the excuses we make for not achieving success in our business and the things we like to tell ourselves about how others achieved their success.
We start off by looking at the geographical location and how the attitudes toward money and status can influence the way we start to define and articulate our own success. We also discuss the “overnight success” myth and why time is one of the most misunderstood aspect of success. We also want to take this opportunity to remind you that you don’t need to know all the hot shots, or even know much at all for that matter, to be successful. The most successful people are great learners who focused, made the time, didn’t blame their kids and tried! If you are finding yourself constantly making excuses about your business, or the lack thereof, then this is the episode to listen to for a fresh perspective and a kick up the rear!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“I don’t have enough time”, “I don’t know the right people”, “I don’t have enough money.” There are a lot of excuses we make for not being or most successful selves. We’ve all used them at least once, or have heard other people use them, over and over again! But how true are they really? This is a conversation we have recently been having and we wanted to bring you in on it. In this episode, we are talking about the excuses we make for not achieving success in our business and the things we like to tell ourselves about how others achieved their success.</p><p>We start off by looking at the geographical location and how the attitudes toward money and status can influence the way we start to define and articulate our own success. We also discuss the “overnight success” myth and why time is one of the most misunderstood aspect of success. We also want to take this opportunity to remind you that you don’t need to know all the hot shots, or even know much at all for that matter, to be successful. The most successful people are great learners who focused, made the time, didn’t blame their kids and tried! If you are finding yourself constantly making excuses about your business, or the lack thereof, then this is the episode to listen to for a fresh perspective and a kick up the rear!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2522</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cd7d6c103ee710baaa7148a3ee5fe853]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9638393767.mp3?updated=1661549134" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>193: Scaling a Service Based Business with Parker Stevenson of Evolved Finance</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/scaling-a-service-based-business</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have our work husband, Parker Stevenson. Parker is our bookkeeper, our CFO, business adviser, our friend, our friend-enemy and everything in between. You have probably heard us mention Parker throughout this podcast series. He is like the Where’s Waldo? Of TCC and an absolute hoot. Today, we are revealing the mystery of Parker Stevenson and are going to be talking all about scaling a service-based business. Instead of teaching you sexy bookkeeping things, Parker is actually going to talk about his own business and give you a peek into some of his own business strategies.
Parker went down the same rabbit hole that many entrepreneurs do, where he thought creating a passive online course program was going to be the solution for his business growth and scalability. But you’ll learn in the episode, how they decided it wasn’t going to work for them and why they decided to scale the service side of their business instead. Parker has a wealth of experience and is here to share with you why service-based businesses are severely underrated. If you are a new business owner or in the process of re-thinking your current online business model – this is definitely an episode you won’t want to miss!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 23 Mar 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Scaling a Service Based Business with Parker Stevenson of Evolved Finance</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>193</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/5d4659d4-ae9b-11ec-91b1-97e1259c0db0/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have our work husband, Parker Stevenson. Parker is our bookkeeper, our CFO, business adviser, our friend, our friend-enemy and everything in between. You have probably heard us mention Parker throughout this podcast series. He...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have our work husband, Parker Stevenson. Parker is our bookkeeper, our CFO, business adviser, our friend, our friend-enemy and everything in between. You have probably heard us mention Parker throughout this podcast series. He is like the Where’s Waldo? Of TCC and an absolute hoot. Today, we are revealing the mystery of Parker Stevenson and are going to be talking all about scaling a service-based business. Instead of teaching you sexy bookkeeping things, Parker is actually going to talk about his own business and give you a peek into some of his own business strategies.
Parker went down the same rabbit hole that many entrepreneurs do, where he thought creating a passive online course program was going to be the solution for his business growth and scalability. But you’ll learn in the episode, how they decided it wasn’t going to work for them and why they decided to scale the service side of their business instead. Parker has a wealth of experience and is here to share with you why service-based businesses are severely underrated. If you are a new business owner or in the process of re-thinking your current online business model – this is definitely an episode you won’t want to miss!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have our work husband, Parker Stevenson. Parker is our bookkeeper, our CFO, business adviser, our friend, our friend-enemy and everything in between. You have probably heard us mention Parker throughout this podcast series. He is like the <em>Where’s Waldo?</em> Of TCC and an absolute hoot. Today, we are revealing the mystery of Parker Stevenson and are going to be talking all about scaling a service-based business. Instead of teaching you sexy bookkeeping things, Parker is actually going to talk about his own business and give you a peek into some of his own business strategies.</p><p>Parker went down the same rabbit hole that many entrepreneurs do, where he thought creating a passive online course program was going to be the solution for his business growth and scalability. But you’ll learn in the episode, how they decided it wasn’t going to work for them and why they decided to scale the service side of their business instead. Parker has a wealth of experience and is here to share with you why service-based businesses are severely underrated. If you are a new business owner or in the process of re-thinking your current online business model – this is definitely an episode you won’t want to miss!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3063</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[329691488d472814770f1ba845bc4771]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1004528789.mp3?updated=1661549198" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>192: A Roundup of Stuff Were Digging Right Now In Life Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/stuff-were-digging</link>
      <description>Today on the show we are sharing all the things that we are digging right now. Things that we love, things that bring us happiness, things that make our lives easier, things that are guilty pleasures and everything in between. From handmade clogs from Sweden to crime thrillers, to kombucha and shipping hacks – this is just a fun little break between all the hardcore business bootcamping and emotional trail runs that we have just about almost every other episode!
Today we are diving into the most marvelously random list: some are products, some are services, some are just things that we like to do – minus the sponsors or affiliates! These are things we are recommending because we genuinely enjoy them. We are sharing ten things each, so a total of twenty, epic random things we are just digging! We hope you’ll find them interesting or inspiring, entertaining or insightful. We hope that you try some of them and hopefully dig them too. Take a listen and let us know if you do!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 21 Mar 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>A Roundup of Stuff Were Digging Right Now In Life Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>192</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/5dedc962-ae9b-11ec-91b1-3370ca3732af/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we are sharing all the things that we are digging right now. Things that we love, things that bring us happiness, things that make our lives easier, things that are guilty pleasures and everything in between. From handmade clogs from...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we are sharing all the things that we are digging right now. Things that we love, things that bring us happiness, things that make our lives easier, things that are guilty pleasures and everything in between. From handmade clogs from Sweden to crime thrillers, to kombucha and shipping hacks – this is just a fun little break between all the hardcore business bootcamping and emotional trail runs that we have just about almost every other episode!
Today we are diving into the most marvelously random list: some are products, some are services, some are just things that we like to do – minus the sponsors or affiliates! These are things we are recommending because we genuinely enjoy them. We are sharing ten things each, so a total of twenty, epic random things we are just digging! We hope you’ll find them interesting or inspiring, entertaining or insightful. We hope that you try some of them and hopefully dig them too. Take a listen and let us know if you do!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we are sharing all the things that we are digging right now. Things that we love, things that bring us happiness, things that make our lives easier, things that are guilty pleasures and everything in between. From handmade clogs from Sweden to crime thrillers, to kombucha and shipping hacks – this is just a fun little break between all the hardcore business bootcamping and emotional trail runs that we have just about almost every other episode!</p><p>Today we are diving into the most marvelously random list: some are products, some are services, some are just things that we like to do – minus the sponsors or affiliates! These are things we are recommending because we genuinely enjoy them. We are sharing ten things each, so a total of twenty, epic random things we are just digging! We hope you’ll find them interesting or inspiring, entertaining or insightful. We hope that you try some of them and hopefully dig them too. Take a listen and let us know if you do!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3337</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[68dea804e4b37d3ce8a354fc8877c233]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5350179716.mp3?updated=1661549149" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>191: How to Build a Business that Leaves a Legacy with Lauren Taylor of the Letter Mag</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-build-a-business-that-leaves-a-legacy</link>
      <description>Today on the show we welcome Lauren Taylor. Lauren is the founder of The Letter; an annual mag that inspires women to live their best lives. She is also a content creator, brand ambassador, has partnered with empowering brands like Aerie and Abercrombie and has done amazing things in both her writing, photography and now filming for her YouTube channel. When we think about a social media influencer, we tend to think of someone who has five million followers! But this is not necessarily true and this is one of the reasons we are excited to welcome Lauren back on the show.
Lauren was last here over a year ago, way back in episode 23, where we talked about how to collaborate with big brands and being a social media influencer with a small following and why that model works, as proven by Lauren. Today, we catch up with Lauren and dive into some of the results from the strategies she has been implementing into her social media over the last year. We also discuss how to find your purpose and stay true to yourself when big brands come a-knocking and ultimately, how to find joy in what you are doing every single day. We hope you enjoy listening to Lauren as much as we do!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 19 Mar 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Build a Business that Leaves a Legacy with Lauren Taylor of the Letter Mag</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>191</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/5e9edf9a-ae9b-11ec-91b1-1f9d80babf09/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we welcome Lauren Taylor. Lauren is the founder of The Letter; an annual mag that inspires women to live their best lives. She is also a content creator, brand ambassador, has partnered with empowering brands like Aerie and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we welcome Lauren Taylor. Lauren is the founder of The Letter; an annual mag that inspires women to live their best lives. She is also a content creator, brand ambassador, has partnered with empowering brands like Aerie and Abercrombie and has done amazing things in both her writing, photography and now filming for her YouTube channel. When we think about a social media influencer, we tend to think of someone who has five million followers! But this is not necessarily true and this is one of the reasons we are excited to welcome Lauren back on the show.
Lauren was last here over a year ago, way back in episode 23, where we talked about how to collaborate with big brands and being a social media influencer with a small following and why that model works, as proven by Lauren. Today, we catch up with Lauren and dive into some of the results from the strategies she has been implementing into her social media over the last year. We also discuss how to find your purpose and stay true to yourself when big brands come a-knocking and ultimately, how to find joy in what you are doing every single day. We hope you enjoy listening to Lauren as much as we do!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we welcome Lauren Taylor. Lauren is the founder of The Letter; an annual mag that inspires women to live their best lives. She is also a content creator, brand ambassador, has partnered with empowering brands like Aerie and Abercrombie and has done amazing things in both her writing, photography and now filming for her YouTube channel. When we think about a social media influencer, we tend to think of someone who has five million followers! But this is not necessarily true and this is one of the reasons we are excited to welcome Lauren back on the show.</p><p>Lauren was last here over a year ago, way back in episode 23, where we talked about how to collaborate with big brands and being a social media influencer with a small following and why that model works, as proven by Lauren. Today, we catch up with Lauren and dive into some of the results from the strategies she has been implementing into her social media over the last year. We also discuss how to find your purpose and stay true to yourself when big brands come a-knocking and ultimately, how to find joy in what you are doing every single day. We hope you enjoy listening to Lauren as much as we do!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2733</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e3dc81625f620141b23d6b2e11aa3360]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3382416428.mp3?updated=1661548976" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>190: Our 15k Mistake And How You Can Avoid Making It Yourself</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/our-15k-mistake-and-how-you-can-avoid-making-it-yourself</link>
      <description>Today on the show, we’ll be telling you a story about a $15k mistake we just made. We are finally at a place where we are no longer blaming others for this mistake and we are able to reflect on it and share it with you. So, we are going to talk to you about a concept we had hoped to implement in our business, the mistake we made, the giant role we played in allowing the bad crap to continue happening – and most importantly, how you guys can avoid making the same mistake in your own business!
Our desperation to create a successful funnel in our business last year led us to hire an outside marketing team. After numerous red flags and no deliverables, we eventually had to cut ties with the team and call it a day. But it was already too late and we were already at a $15k loss! In this episode, we explain how we got ourselves into this situation in the first place, exactly what the red flags were, what we should have done differently and how we are going to bounce back from this ever so slight hiccup. In addition, we walk you through the nitty-gritty’s of contract negotiation, KPI’s and managing the social dynamics of a new team. We hope that you will learn some lessons from our own sad story and takes this as a friendly reminder to always be the BOSS!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 16 Mar 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our 15k Mistake And How You Can Avoid Making It Yourself</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>190</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/5f3f77e8-ae9b-11ec-91b1-9fdaf3794980/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show, we’ll be telling you a story about a $15k mistake we just made. We are finally at a place where we are no longer blaming others for this mistake and we are able to reflect on it and share it with you. So, we are going to talk to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show, we’ll be telling you a story about a $15k mistake we just made. We are finally at a place where we are no longer blaming others for this mistake and we are able to reflect on it and share it with you. So, we are going to talk to you about a concept we had hoped to implement in our business, the mistake we made, the giant role we played in allowing the bad crap to continue happening – and most importantly, how you guys can avoid making the same mistake in your own business!
Our desperation to create a successful funnel in our business last year led us to hire an outside marketing team. After numerous red flags and no deliverables, we eventually had to cut ties with the team and call it a day. But it was already too late and we were already at a $15k loss! In this episode, we explain how we got ourselves into this situation in the first place, exactly what the red flags were, what we should have done differently and how we are going to bounce back from this ever so slight hiccup. In addition, we walk you through the nitty-gritty’s of contract negotiation, KPI’s and managing the social dynamics of a new team. We hope that you will learn some lessons from our own sad story and takes this as a friendly reminder to always be the BOSS!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show, we’ll be telling you a story about a $15k mistake we just made. We are finally at a place where we are no longer blaming others for this mistake and we are able to reflect on it and share it with you. So, we are going to talk to you about a concept we had hoped to implement in our business, the mistake we made, the giant role we played in allowing the bad crap to continue happening – and most importantly, how you guys can avoid making the same mistake in your own business!</p><p>Our desperation to create a successful funnel in our business last year led us to hire an outside marketing team. After numerous red flags and no deliverables, we eventually had to cut ties with the team and call it a day. But it was already too late and we were already at a $15k loss! In this episode, we explain how we got ourselves into this situation in the first place, exactly what the red flags were, what we should have done differently and how we are going to bounce back from this ever so slight hiccup. In addition, we walk you through the nitty-gritty’s of contract negotiation, KPI’s and managing the social dynamics of a new team. We hope that you will learn some lessons from our own sad story and takes this as a friendly reminder to always be the BOSS!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2181</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7ce24b853d278525b85553ee0d26a64f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3682655765.mp3?updated=1661548902" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>189: Copyright, Copy Cats and What Creatives Can Do to Protect Themselves with Autumn Boyd</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/copyright-copy-cats-and-what-creatives-can-do-to-protect-themselves</link>
      <description>Today on the show we welcome Autumn Witt Boyd. Autumn is an experienced lawyer who helps ambitious and creative business owners, such as yourself, reach your big scary goals. She has the law office of Autumn Witt Boyd where she guides online and e-commerce businesses as they grow. She has special expertise in copyright and trademark issues and her firm offers full legal support to creative businesses. Autumn is also the host of The Legal Road Map podcast which teaches business owners to protect their rights and stay out of legal hot water!
A lot of entrepreneurs and business owners tend to shy away from legal conversations, particularly when it comes to copyrights, as these situations can get complicated, awkward and are often just downright confusing! But they shouldn’t have to be and this is why we’ve brought Autumn on to simplify our lives and ensure that we’re all on the right track and protecting our booty’s! In this episode, you’ll hear more about the biggest legal mistakes that creative and online business owners are making and get some special insights related to copyright, trademarks and dealing with copycats. To top it all off, you’ll get to hear Emylee go off on a tangent about people stealing our sh*t!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Mar 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Copyright, Copy Cats and What Creatives Can Do to Protect Themselves with Autumn Boyd</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>189</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/60b14d4a-ae9b-11ec-91b1-77db861ce299/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we welcome Autumn Witt Boyd. Autumn is an experienced lawyer who helps ambitious and creative business owners, such as yourself, reach your big scary goals. She has the law office of Autumn Witt Boyd where she guides online and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we welcome Autumn Witt Boyd. Autumn is an experienced lawyer who helps ambitious and creative business owners, such as yourself, reach your big scary goals. She has the law office of Autumn Witt Boyd where she guides online and e-commerce businesses as they grow. She has special expertise in copyright and trademark issues and her firm offers full legal support to creative businesses. Autumn is also the host of The Legal Road Map podcast which teaches business owners to protect their rights and stay out of legal hot water!
A lot of entrepreneurs and business owners tend to shy away from legal conversations, particularly when it comes to copyrights, as these situations can get complicated, awkward and are often just downright confusing! But they shouldn’t have to be and this is why we’ve brought Autumn on to simplify our lives and ensure that we’re all on the right track and protecting our booty’s! In this episode, you’ll hear more about the biggest legal mistakes that creative and online business owners are making and get some special insights related to copyright, trademarks and dealing with copycats. To top it all off, you’ll get to hear Emylee go off on a tangent about people stealing our sh*t!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we welcome Autumn Witt Boyd. Autumn is an experienced lawyer who helps ambitious and creative business owners, such as yourself, reach your big scary goals. She has the law office of Autumn Witt Boyd where she guides online and e-commerce businesses as they grow. She has special expertise in copyright and trademark issues and her firm offers full legal support to creative businesses. Autumn is also the host of The Legal Road Map podcast which teaches business owners to protect their rights and stay out of legal hot water!</p><p>A lot of entrepreneurs and business owners tend to shy away from legal conversations, particularly when it comes to copyrights, as these situations can get complicated, awkward and are often just downright confusing! But they shouldn’t have to be and this is why we’ve brought Autumn on to simplify our lives and ensure that we’re all on the right track and protecting our booty’s! In this episode, you’ll hear more about the biggest legal mistakes that creative and online business owners are making and get some special insights related to copyright, trademarks and dealing with copycats. To top it all off, you’ll get to hear Emylee go off on a tangent about people stealing our sh*t!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://t">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2645</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[30c0ef108e8875434b21b9701d2963e6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2736355318.mp3?updated=1661548800" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>188: Whats a CEO Supposed to Be Doing - Our Journey of Figuring It Out</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/whats-a-ceo-supposed-to-be-doing-our-journey-of-figuring-it-out</link>
      <description>We have both been on a very personal journey to try and figure our sh*t out and a lot of it has had to do with figuring out what our role is within our own company. So, what does a CEO look like and what is a CEO actually supposed to be doing? This is the golden question that we’ll be tackling in today’s episode. The role of CEO looks so different in every company. It is a role that can be completely unique and takes a while to find your groove. So no matter where you are in your own business, it will be helpful for you to hear us working through our own thoughts, your role as CEO, what you take on and what you don’t, is a personal decision at the end of the day and takes time and a lot of trial and error to figure out. Trust us, we know!
In this episode, we discuss how our role as CEO’s have evolved as we’ve slowly started outsourcing more, dropping certain tasks and hiring more. We also take a look at what other women have said about CEO’s, what their roles should be and how they can be so different. We don’t have it all figured out just yet, but as we said, this is a process and we’re getting there! So no matter where you are at in your own business, come with us on this journey as we discuss where we’ve been, where we are, and where we want to be as CEO’s of our own company.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 12 Mar 2018 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Whats a CEO Supposed to Be Doing - Our Journey of Figuring It Out</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>188</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/6155361c-ae9b-11ec-91b1-3349a4db1176/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We have both been on a very personal journey to try and figure our sh*t out and a lot of it has had to do with figuring out what our role is within our own company. So, what does a CEO look like and what is a CEO actually supposed to be doing? This is...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We have both been on a very personal journey to try and figure our sh*t out and a lot of it has had to do with figuring out what our role is within our own company. So, what does a CEO look like and what is a CEO actually supposed to be doing? This is the golden question that we’ll be tackling in today’s episode. The role of CEO looks so different in every company. It is a role that can be completely unique and takes a while to find your groove. So no matter where you are in your own business, it will be helpful for you to hear us working through our own thoughts, your role as CEO, what you take on and what you don’t, is a personal decision at the end of the day and takes time and a lot of trial and error to figure out. Trust us, we know!
In this episode, we discuss how our role as CEO’s have evolved as we’ve slowly started outsourcing more, dropping certain tasks and hiring more. We also take a look at what other women have said about CEO’s, what their roles should be and how they can be so different. We don’t have it all figured out just yet, but as we said, this is a process and we’re getting there! So no matter where you are at in your own business, come with us on this journey as we discuss where we’ve been, where we are, and where we want to be as CEO’s of our own company.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We have both been on a very personal journey to try and figure our sh*t out and a lot of it has had to do with figuring out what our role is within our own company. So, what does a CEO look like and what is a CEO actually supposed to be doing? This is the golden question that we’ll be tackling in today’s episode. The role of CEO looks so different in every company. It is a role that can be completely unique and takes a while to find your groove. So no matter where you are in your own business, it will be helpful for you to hear us working through our own thoughts, your role as CEO, what you take on and what you don’t, is a personal decision at the end of the day and takes time and a lot of trial and error to figure out. Trust us, we know!</p><p>In this episode, we discuss how our role as CEO’s have evolved as we’ve slowly started outsourcing more, dropping certain tasks and hiring more. We also take a look at what other women have said about CEO’s, what their roles should be and how they can be so different. We don’t have it all figured out just yet, but as we said, this is a process and we’re getting there! So no matter where you are at in your own business, come with us on this journey as we discuss where we’ve been, where we are, and where we want to be as CEO’s of our own company.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2691</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9da5677873a893ebf48650c59a81204f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4385021781.mp3?updated=1661548798" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>187: Becoming a Wellness Guinea Pig with Monica Woodhams of 45 Fairmount</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/becoming-a-wellness-guinea-pig</link>
      <description>Today on the show we welcome Monica Woodhams. Monica is a Success Coach &amp; Lifestyle Expert with over half a decade of experience in the blogging industry. She assists influencers and creative entrepreneurs in conquering the work-life balance needed for success and is also the host of the Influencer Lifestyle Podcast. Today we speak with Monica about health and success and how the two go hand in hand. As business owners, and especially as women business owners, we have a tendency to want to accomplish great things. Taking care of yourself, mentally and physically, is not something that you can just check off your list and it’s done. It is an ongoing practice and because of this, we tend not to prioritize it because the benefits are not immediate.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 09 Mar 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Becoming a Wellness Guinea Pig with Monica Woodhams of 45 Fairmount</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>187</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/620ddeba-ae9b-11ec-91b1-4381399e13e4/image/February22_StrategyHourThumbnail.jpeg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we welcome Monica Woodhams. Monica is a Success Coach &amp; Lifestyle Expert with over half a decade of experience in the blogging industry. She assists influencers and creative entrepreneurs in conquering the work-life balance...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we welcome Monica Woodhams. Monica is a Success Coach &amp; Lifestyle Expert with over half a decade of experience in the blogging industry. She assists influencers and creative entrepreneurs in conquering the work-life balance needed for success and is also the host of the Influencer Lifestyle Podcast. Today we speak with Monica about health and success and how the two go hand in hand. As business owners, and especially as women business owners, we have a tendency to want to accomplish great things. Taking care of yourself, mentally and physically, is not something that you can just check off your list and it’s done. It is an ongoing practice and because of this, we tend not to prioritize it because the benefits are not immediate.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we welcome Monica Woodhams. Monica is a Success Coach &amp; Lifestyle Expert with over half a decade of experience in the blogging industry. She assists influencers and creative entrepreneurs in conquering the work-life balance needed for success and is also the host of the Influencer Lifestyle Podcast. Today we speak with Monica about health and success and how the two go hand in hand. As business owners, and especially as women business owners, we have a tendency to want to accomplish great things. Taking care of yourself, mentally and physically, is not something that you can just check off your list and it’s done. It is an ongoing practice and because of this, we tend not to prioritize it because the benefits are not immediate.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2399</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ea04bf94962d0271f174aa7fe405a1aa]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2337358887.mp3?updated=1661548717" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>186: Inventing Your New Possibility</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/inventing-your-new-possibility</link>
      <description>On today’s show we are doing things a little bit differently, and taking you through a process that we at The Strategy Hour Podcast believe can make a world of difference in your life! This episode will be all about inventing a new possibility in your life, and you’ll see just what a shift this can make. Abagail tried out this exercise recently and found it super helpful and enlightening and so could not resist sharing it with our listeners. Full disclaimer though, it might be a bit of bumpy ride because let’s face it, most things that help you grow are not pain free. But we promise you’ll thank us in the end!
Emylee will be going through the guided exercise for the first time during the episode and you can join in with her and we can all get down to the nitty gritty together! A lot of the time we deal with the positive and negative aspects of lives in repeated patterns of behavior that do not allow for very much progress. The process we will detailing is simple and straight forward, yet it really provides a lot of insight and hope into how small adjustments can change our lives in big ways. So if you’re game, grab a piece of you favorite notepad and buckle in, we’re going deep!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 Mar 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Inventing Your New Possibility</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>186</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>On today’s show we are doing things a little bit differently, and taking you through a process that we at The Strategy Hour Podcast believe can make a world of difference in your life! This episode will be all about inventing a new possibility in...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s show we are doing things a little bit differently, and taking you through a process that we at The Strategy Hour Podcast believe can make a world of difference in your life! This episode will be all about inventing a new possibility in your life, and you’ll see just what a shift this can make. Abagail tried out this exercise recently and found it super helpful and enlightening and so could not resist sharing it with our listeners. Full disclaimer though, it might be a bit of bumpy ride because let’s face it, most things that help you grow are not pain free. But we promise you’ll thank us in the end!
Emylee will be going through the guided exercise for the first time during the episode and you can join in with her and we can all get down to the nitty gritty together! A lot of the time we deal with the positive and negative aspects of lives in repeated patterns of behavior that do not allow for very much progress. The process we will detailing is simple and straight forward, yet it really provides a lot of insight and hope into how small adjustments can change our lives in big ways. So if you’re game, grab a piece of you favorite notepad and buckle in, we’re going deep!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s show we are doing things a little bit differently, and taking you through a process that we at The Strategy Hour Podcast believe can make a world of difference in your life! This episode will be all about inventing a new possibility in your life, and you’ll see just what a shift this can make. Abagail tried out this exercise recently and found it super helpful and enlightening and so could not resist sharing it with our listeners. Full disclaimer though, it might be a bit of bumpy ride because let’s face it, most things that help you grow are not pain free. But we promise you’ll thank us in the end!</p><p>Emylee will be going through the guided exercise for the first time during the episode and you can join in with her and we can all get down to the nitty gritty together! A lot of the time we deal with the positive and negative aspects of lives in repeated patterns of behavior that do not allow for very much progress. The process we will detailing is simple and straight forward, yet it really provides a lot of insight and hope into how small adjustments can change our lives in big ways. So if you’re game, grab a piece of you favorite notepad and buckle in, we’re going deep!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1918</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5fe25bb39d3abbee019bf711d1f0b803]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7951018041.mp3?updated=1661548661" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>185: Planning Ahead For 2018 and Eliminating 50% of My Workload with Sarah Peck of Startup Pregnant</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/planning-ahead-for-2018-and-eliminating-50-of-my-workload</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Sarah Peck, who is a writer, startup advisor, and yoga teacher based out of New York City. She is the Founder and Executive Director of Startup Pregnant and media company documenting the stories of women’s leadership across work and family. Inside today’s episode, we are talking all about planning ahead for this year, how to eliminate 50% of your workload, and we’re going through the process of the system she used to really figure out how much time she realistically had so she could plan accordingly.
If you’re a momma, or you’re busy, or you’re a human, then you just need to pay attention because we will take you step-by-step through an exercise to reduce your to-do list in a cray way so that you can have a happier and more fulfilled life. Sarah is an incredible human being with a lovely soft radio voice that we often try to mimic, so we really think you are going to enjoy this episode just because of the sound of her voice alone. Don’t miss out!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 05 Mar 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Planning Ahead For 2018 and Eliminating 50% of My Workload with Sarah Peck of Startup Pregnant</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>185</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Sarah Peck, who is a writer, startup advisor, and yoga teacher based out of New York City. She is the Founder and Executive Director of Startup Pregnant and media company documenting the stories of women’s leadership...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Sarah Peck, who is a writer, startup advisor, and yoga teacher based out of New York City. She is the Founder and Executive Director of Startup Pregnant and media company documenting the stories of women’s leadership across work and family. Inside today’s episode, we are talking all about planning ahead for this year, how to eliminate 50% of your workload, and we’re going through the process of the system she used to really figure out how much time she realistically had so she could plan accordingly.
If you’re a momma, or you’re busy, or you’re a human, then you just need to pay attention because we will take you step-by-step through an exercise to reduce your to-do list in a cray way so that you can have a happier and more fulfilled life. Sarah is an incredible human being with a lovely soft radio voice that we often try to mimic, so we really think you are going to enjoy this episode just because of the sound of her voice alone. Don’t miss out!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Sarah Peck, who is a writer, startup advisor, and yoga teacher based out of New York City. She is the Founder and Executive Director of Startup Pregnant and media company documenting the stories of women’s leadership across work and family. Inside today’s episode, we are talking all about planning ahead for this year, how to eliminate 50% of your workload, and we’re going through the process of the system she used to really figure out how much time she realistically had so she could plan accordingly.</p><p>If you’re a momma, or you’re busy, or you’re a human, then you just need to pay attention because we will take you step-by-step through an exercise to reduce your to-do list in a cray way so that you can have a happier and more fulfilled life. Sarah is an incredible human being with a lovely soft radio voice that we often try to mimic, so we really think you are going to enjoy this episode just because of the sound of her voice alone. Don’t miss out!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2541</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7689156811533b8814b07445a4e755c0]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2050128859.mp3?updated=1661548614" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>184: Beginner Business Series - Part 5: Launch, Launch Baby</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/beginner-business-series-part-5-launch-launch-baby</link>
      <description>In this episode, we speak about the stage where most people give up and why you are not going to be one of those people. So let’s recap – by now, you have created a product from something you are already amazing at doing. You’ve got it out the door and up quickly, you’ve validated your dreamies, you’ve packaged it, you’ve priced it, you’ve created a plan to market it and you’ve created a website landing page so that someone can pay you. Now is the time to implement so that you can get sales in the door and make a plan for re-launching. Where people fall now, is when their plan fizzles and they lose motivation after all their hard work and vulnerability.
Sounding like you? Well, guess what? This is NOT the time to scrap everything and start over! You are so close to seeing success and in this episode, we’re going to help you get through this last leg of the journey and recognize your worth. You could easily quit now but you’ve just got to push through, so we are going to help you get over your fear of re-launching by giving you actionable steps that you can implement. A lot of that comes back to your personal attitude about your own product or service and today, we’re here tell you why you have to believe in your product and yourself, just like we do.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 02 Mar 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Beginner Business Series - Part 5: Launch, Launch Baby</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>184</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, we speak about the stage where most people give up and why you are not going to be one of those people. So let’s recap – by now, you have created a product from something you are already amazing at doing. You’ve got it out the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode, we speak about the stage where most people give up and why you are not going to be one of those people. So let’s recap – by now, you have created a product from something you are already amazing at doing. You’ve got it out the door and up quickly, you’ve validated your dreamies, you’ve packaged it, you’ve priced it, you’ve created a plan to market it and you’ve created a website landing page so that someone can pay you. Now is the time to implement so that you can get sales in the door and make a plan for re-launching. Where people fall now, is when their plan fizzles and they lose motivation after all their hard work and vulnerability.
Sounding like you? Well, guess what? This is NOT the time to scrap everything and start over! You are so close to seeing success and in this episode, we’re going to help you get through this last leg of the journey and recognize your worth. You could easily quit now but you’ve just got to push through, so we are going to help you get over your fear of re-launching by giving you actionable steps that you can implement. A lot of that comes back to your personal attitude about your own product or service and today, we’re here tell you why you have to believe in your product and yourself, just like we do.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode, we speak about the stage where most people give up and why you are not going to be one of those people. So let’s recap – by now, you have created a product from something you are already amazing at doing. You’ve got it out the door and up quickly, you’ve validated your dreamies, you’ve packaged it, you’ve priced it, you’ve created a plan to market it and you’ve created a website landing page so that someone can pay you. Now is the time to implement so that you can get sales in the door and make a plan for re-launching. Where people fall now, is when their plan fizzles and they lose motivation after all their hard work and vulnerability.</p><p>Sounding like you? Well, guess what? This is NOT the time to scrap everything and start over! You are so close to seeing success and in this episode, we’re going to help you get through this last leg of the journey and recognize your worth. You could easily quit now but you’ve just got to push through, so we are going to help you get over your fear of re-launching by giving you actionable steps that you can implement. A lot of that comes back to your personal attitude about your own product or service and today, we’re here tell you why you have to believe in your product and yourself, just like we do.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1862</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e74e9b78f627da57c04409f4a31e0898]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8065356459.mp3?updated=1652125949" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>183: The Dangers of Procrastinating with Abbi Perets of Successful Freelance Mom</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-dangers-of-procrastinating</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Abbi Perets. Abbi is passionate about showing moms how to have it all and create a business from home. She is the founder of successfulfreelancemom.com, where she teaches mothers how to break into freelance writing and create high paying jobs for themselves where they can continue to work from home with their kids. Abbi has a cutthroat approach to procrastination and today we discuss this dreaded demon we all face.
In this episode, Abbi touches on the all the things that you are dangerously procrastinating on – the things that are wasting your time and energy and the things you should rather be working on in order to see profit faster, clients faster, and to create that business – even when you might have a slew of kids at home, mental illness or family issues.Whatever excuse you choose to make, the chances are you’ve made it over and over again… and so have so many other mom’s in your position. We want to help you get out that rut and just do it! Abbi has a bunch of crazy issues that she’s been put through with her family and she touches on these to show you that it can be done, it will be done and that you are the one to do it, today!
If you are looking for a new mind shift toward tackling your tasks, this is the episode for you. We are all super passionate about this topic, so don’t be scared, this episode is really fun. Take a listen. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 Feb 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Dangers of Procrastinating with Abbi Perets of Successful Freelance Mom</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>183</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Abbi Perets. Abbi is passionate about showing moms how to have it all and create a business from home. She is the founder of successfulfreelancemom.com, where she teaches mothers how to break into freelance writing and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Abbi Perets. Abbi is passionate about showing moms how to have it all and create a business from home. She is the founder of successfulfreelancemom.com, where she teaches mothers how to break into freelance writing and create high paying jobs for themselves where they can continue to work from home with their kids. Abbi has a cutthroat approach to procrastination and today we discuss this dreaded demon we all face.
In this episode, Abbi touches on the all the things that you are dangerously procrastinating on – the things that are wasting your time and energy and the things you should rather be working on in order to see profit faster, clients faster, and to create that business – even when you might have a slew of kids at home, mental illness or family issues.Whatever excuse you choose to make, the chances are you’ve made it over and over again… and so have so many other mom’s in your position. We want to help you get out that rut and just do it! Abbi has a bunch of crazy issues that she’s been put through with her family and she touches on these to show you that it can be done, it will be done and that you are the one to do it, today!
If you are looking for a new mind shift toward tackling your tasks, this is the episode for you. We are all super passionate about this topic, so don’t be scared, this episode is really fun. Take a listen. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Abbi Perets. Abbi is passionate about showing moms how to have it all and create a business from home. She is the founder of successfulfreelancemom.com, where she teaches mothers how to break into freelance writing and create high paying jobs for themselves where they can continue to work from home with their kids. Abbi has a cutthroat approach to procrastination and today we discuss this dreaded demon we all face.</p><p>In this episode, Abbi touches on the all the things that you are dangerously procrastinating on – the things that are wasting your time and energy and the things you should rather be working on in order to see profit faster, clients faster, and to create that business – even when you might have a slew of kids at home, mental illness or family issues.Whatever excuse you choose to make, the chances are you’ve made it over and over again… and so have so many other mom’s in your position. We want to help you get out that rut and just do it! Abbi has a bunch of crazy issues that she’s been put through with her family and she touches on these to show you that it can be done, it will be done and that you are the one to do it, today!</p><p>If you are looking for a new mind shift toward tackling your tasks, this is the episode for you. We are all super passionate about this topic, so don’t be scared, this episode is really fun. Take a listen. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2653</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[de9d3ef0668c78f5847c46fabad2405b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3124026658.mp3?updated=1661548528" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>182: Finding Strength in Adversity: Revisiting Our Past in a Past Episode</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/finding-strength-in-adversity-revisiting-our-past-in-a-past-episode</link>
      <description>For today’s episode, maybe have a glass of wine when while you’re listening to it. Kick back in your PJ’s, just chill, and be with us for a second. We are getting super real today. Not that we are any less real any other day, but we are taking it way back today.
We hear so often that lives on Instagram look fancier than they are, and that Facebook portrays a certain façade. However, we are also really are in tune with being authentic for you guys and portraying our real selves as much as we can. We show our real selves as we are now and I think sometimes we forget where people have come from and what they have gone through in order to get to be where they are today. So that is exactly what we are doing today.
We are going to share all the way back to when we were little wee babies and perhaps you can relate to some of the things that we bring up. Hopefully, you can begin to understand that it’s not just sparkles, unicorns, and Starbucks over here all the time. So grab some tissues, maybe some wine, and just hang out with us. Let’s get to know each other a bit.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 26 Feb 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Finding Strength in Adversity: Revisiting Our Past in a Past Episode</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>182</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>For today’s episode, maybe have a glass of wine when while you’re listening to it. Kick back in your PJ’s, just chill, and be with us for a second. We are getting super real today. Not that we are any less real any other day, but we are taking...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>For today’s episode, maybe have a glass of wine when while you’re listening to it. Kick back in your PJ’s, just chill, and be with us for a second. We are getting super real today. Not that we are any less real any other day, but we are taking it way back today.
We hear so often that lives on Instagram look fancier than they are, and that Facebook portrays a certain façade. However, we are also really are in tune with being authentic for you guys and portraying our real selves as much as we can. We show our real selves as we are now and I think sometimes we forget where people have come from and what they have gone through in order to get to be where they are today. So that is exactly what we are doing today.
We are going to share all the way back to when we were little wee babies and perhaps you can relate to some of the things that we bring up. Hopefully, you can begin to understand that it’s not just sparkles, unicorns, and Starbucks over here all the time. So grab some tissues, maybe some wine, and just hang out with us. Let’s get to know each other a bit.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For today’s episode, maybe have a glass of wine when while you’re listening to it. Kick back in your PJ’s, just chill, and be with us for a second. We are getting super real today. Not that we are any less real any other day, but we are taking it way back today.</p><p>We hear so often that lives on Instagram look fancier than they are, and that Facebook portrays a certain façade. However, we are also really are in tune with being authentic for you guys and portraying our real selves as much as we can. We show our real selves as we are now and I think sometimes we forget where people have come from and what they have gone through in order to get to be where they are today. So that is exactly what we are doing today.</p><p>We are going to share all the way back to when we were little wee babies and perhaps you can relate to some of the things that we bring up. Hopefully, you can begin to understand that it’s not just sparkles, unicorns, and Starbucks over here all the time. So grab some tissues, maybe some wine, and just hang out with us. Let’s get to know each other a bit.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2504</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0a949ee0b636f9e60077de5d30d16765]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8625391207.mp3?updated=1661548476" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>181: Releasing the Shame and Creating Real Relationships with Women with Cyndie Spiegel</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/releasing-the-shame-and-creating-real-relationships-with-women</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we are bringing back Cyndie Spiegel. Cyndie is a Brooklyn-based consultant, coach and TedX speaker. She is the founder of The Community of Us – an inclusive strategic community for women change makers, founders, creative business owners, and solopreneurs. Today, we are talking about creating real relationships and what it means to have friendships and empower other women. In the creative community, particularly the entrepreneurial women’s space today, there has been a shift in the way we support one another. That all love, all positivity, all empowering, 2018 feminism, all sisters high-fiving sisters! When in reality, it’s all a little phony.
Despite what we promote online, there is often still shameful feelings of jealousy, envy, and resentment that are difficult to talk about. These feelings often get in the way of us helping others, which is really not what we want as good human beings! So, how do we release our shame, embrace this community mindset and truly empower other women? Cyndie gives us four really tangible steps to analyze how we are treating other women, be it in our industry or in our friendships, in order to help us forgive ourselves and quit the Tall Poppy Syndrome! Take a listen to find out what that is. It’s real!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 23 Feb 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Releasing the Shame and Creating Real Relationships with Women with Cyndie Spiegel</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>181</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we are bringing back Cyndie Spiegel. Cyndie is a Brooklyn-based consultant, coach and TedX speaker. She is the founder of The Community of Us – an inclusive strategic community for women change makers, founders, creative...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we are bringing back Cyndie Spiegel. Cyndie is a Brooklyn-based consultant, coach and TedX speaker. She is the founder of The Community of Us – an inclusive strategic community for women change makers, founders, creative business owners, and solopreneurs. Today, we are talking about creating real relationships and what it means to have friendships and empower other women. In the creative community, particularly the entrepreneurial women’s space today, there has been a shift in the way we support one another. That all love, all positivity, all empowering, 2018 feminism, all sisters high-fiving sisters! When in reality, it’s all a little phony.
Despite what we promote online, there is often still shameful feelings of jealousy, envy, and resentment that are difficult to talk about. These feelings often get in the way of us helping others, which is really not what we want as good human beings! So, how do we release our shame, embrace this community mindset and truly empower other women? Cyndie gives us four really tangible steps to analyze how we are treating other women, be it in our industry or in our friendships, in order to help us forgive ourselves and quit the Tall Poppy Syndrome! Take a listen to find out what that is. It’s real!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we are bringing back Cyndie Spiegel. Cyndie is a Brooklyn-based consultant, coach and TedX speaker. She is the founder of The Community of Us – an inclusive strategic community for women change makers, founders, creative business owners, and solopreneurs. Today, we are talking about creating real relationships and what it means to have friendships and empower other women. In the creative community, particularly the entrepreneurial women’s space today, there has been a shift in the way we support one another. That all love, all positivity, all empowering, 2018 feminism, all sisters high-fiving sisters! When in reality, it’s all a little phony.</p><p>Despite what we promote online, there is often still shameful feelings of jealousy, envy, and resentment that are difficult to talk about. These feelings often get in the way of us helping others, which is really not what we want as good human beings! So, how do we release our shame, embrace this community mindset and truly empower other women? Cyndie gives us four really tangible steps to analyze how we are treating other women, be it in our industry or in our friendships, in order to help us forgive ourselves and quit the Tall Poppy Syndrome! Take a listen to find out what that is. It’s real!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2942</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[17c4644e58caa59037da1b979bb6564d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6240906597.mp3?updated=1661548438" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>180: Beginner Business Series - Part 4: Your Marketing Gameplan</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/beginner-business-series-part-4-your-marketing-game-plan</link>
      <description>Today we are creating your marketing gameplan and we couldn’t be more jazzed. Up until this point in the Beginner Business Series, you have figured out what you are best at and what you can get to market the quickest without learning anything new. We’ve also figured out how to package and price it, we’ve set up your shop, you have it listed and are ready to sell! You’ve come a long way and in today’s episode we’re going to dive into your marketing gameplan so that you can get your stuff out into the world and start making money right away.
A lot of the time, people get to this point of selling, they’ve taken all the necessary steps to get there, but their product just won’t sell! Why? Well, we want to tell you that this is not because you or your product or service or idea suck – it’s because you just didn’t have a solid marketing gameplan in place. So if this sounds like you, then you’re in the right place. Marketing just so happens to be our internet love child and in this episode, we’re going to be walking you through you social media posts and the three foundational posts you should be doing in order to engage your audience and build a consistent relationship with them – one that will benefit them as much as it does you. So let’s jump in and get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 21 Feb 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Beginner Business Series - Part 4: Your Marketing Gameplan</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>180</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are creating your marketing gameplan and we couldn’t be more jazzed. Up until this point in the Beginner Business Series, you have figured out what you are best at and what you can get to market the quickest without learning anything new....</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are creating your marketing gameplan and we couldn’t be more jazzed. Up until this point in the Beginner Business Series, you have figured out what you are best at and what you can get to market the quickest without learning anything new. We’ve also figured out how to package and price it, we’ve set up your shop, you have it listed and are ready to sell! You’ve come a long way and in today’s episode we’re going to dive into your marketing gameplan so that you can get your stuff out into the world and start making money right away.
A lot of the time, people get to this point of selling, they’ve taken all the necessary steps to get there, but their product just won’t sell! Why? Well, we want to tell you that this is not because you or your product or service or idea suck – it’s because you just didn’t have a solid marketing gameplan in place. So if this sounds like you, then you’re in the right place. Marketing just so happens to be our internet love child and in this episode, we’re going to be walking you through you social media posts and the three foundational posts you should be doing in order to engage your audience and build a consistent relationship with them – one that will benefit them as much as it does you. So let’s jump in and get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are creating your marketing gameplan and we couldn’t be more jazzed. Up until this point in the Beginner Business Series, you have figured out what you are best at and what you can get to market the quickest without learning anything new. We’ve also figured out how to package and price it, we’ve set up your shop, you have it listed and are ready to sell! You’ve come a long way and in today’s episode we’re going to dive into your marketing gameplan so that you can get your stuff out into the world and start making money right away.</p><p>A lot of the time, people get to this point of selling, they’ve taken all the necessary steps to get there, but their product just won’t sell! Why? Well, we want to tell you that this is not because you or your product or service or idea suck – it’s because you just didn’t have a solid marketing gameplan in place. So if this sounds like you, then you’re in the right place. Marketing just so happens to be our internet love child and in this episode, we’re going to be walking you through you social media posts and the three foundational posts you should be doing in order to engage your audience and build a consistent relationship with them – one that will benefit them as much as it does you. So let’s jump in and get started!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1892</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e97b935192545a9a07340f082230244b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9058844547.mp3?updated=1656104664" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>179: How to Build an Engaged Community (Online and IRL) with Ashley Knight of Hello Boss</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-build-an-engaged-community</link>
      <description>On today’s episode we are super-duper excited to host Ashley Knight of The Hello Boss Community. Ashley founded the community as a means to support and bolster other businesswomen who were in the same boat as her. Through her group she is able to teach and coach strategy to an ever growing number of dedicated members and she loves it! And we love her for it! Here at the Strategy Hour Podcast we know the value the of groups we have run and been a part of, they can be the lifeboat bringing you back in when you are out at sea, so we know exactly what Ashley is talking about!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 19 Feb 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Build an Engaged Community (Online and IRL) with Ashley Knight of Hello Boss</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>179</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>On today’s episode we are super-duper excited to host Ashley Knight of The Hello Boss Community. Ashley founded the community as a means to support and bolster other businesswomen who were in the same boat as her. Through her group she is able to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s episode we are super-duper excited to host Ashley Knight of The Hello Boss Community. Ashley founded the community as a means to support and bolster other businesswomen who were in the same boat as her. Through her group she is able to teach and coach strategy to an ever growing number of dedicated members and she loves it! And we love her for it! Here at the Strategy Hour Podcast we know the value the of groups we have run and been a part of, they can be the lifeboat bringing you back in when you are out at sea, so we know exactly what Ashley is talking about!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s episode we are super-duper excited to host Ashley Knight of The Hello Boss Community. Ashley founded the community as a means to support and bolster other businesswomen who were in the same boat as her. Through her group she is able to teach and coach strategy to an ever growing number of dedicated members and she loves it! And we love her for it! Here at the Strategy Hour Podcast we know the value the of groups we have run and been a part of, they can be the lifeboat bringing you back in when you are out at sea, so we know exactly what Ashley is talking about!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2276</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[68393190b44532a99fb4f69e946e51d6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9684335742.mp3?updated=1661557916" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>178: Beginner Business Series - Part 3: Setting Up Shop</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/beginner-business-series-part-3-setting-up-shop</link>
      <description>We’re back for part three of the Beginner Business Series! First off, the response has been great and we just want to thank you for your comments on Facebook and Instagram – we love hearing from you! And keep using the hashtag #bbs, because it helps us keep track of your questions, concerns, comments and feedback. If you’re just joining us now and don’t know what the hell this is, we’d advise you pause right now and go back to part one and part two and then dive into this one. So, let’s dive in!
In this episode, we are going to do a quick recap of where you should be at and make sure that you’re ready to tackle part three – setting up shop. Websites are where we see so many people get stuck. Often, they get so obsessed with perfecting it, that they hold themselves back from actually doing what their business is supposed to be doing – which is making money, honey! Sound like you? In this part three episode, we’re going to be tackling this challenge with you step by step. We’ll be focusing on the four core pages that get people from landing page to checkout, feeling confident in their purchase and believing that you are their superhero. We’re going to help you put the most relevant information on these pages and show you just how easy it really is.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 16 Feb 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Beginner Business Series - Part 3: Setting Up Shop</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>178</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’re back for part three of the Beginner Business Series! First off, the response has been great and we just want to thank you for your comments on Facebook and Instagram – we love hearing from you! And keep using the hashtag #bbs, because it...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’re back for part three of the Beginner Business Series! First off, the response has been great and we just want to thank you for your comments on Facebook and Instagram – we love hearing from you! And keep using the hashtag #bbs, because it helps us keep track of your questions, concerns, comments and feedback. If you’re just joining us now and don’t know what the hell this is, we’d advise you pause right now and go back to part one and part two and then dive into this one. So, let’s dive in!
In this episode, we are going to do a quick recap of where you should be at and make sure that you’re ready to tackle part three – setting up shop. Websites are where we see so many people get stuck. Often, they get so obsessed with perfecting it, that they hold themselves back from actually doing what their business is supposed to be doing – which is making money, honey! Sound like you? In this part three episode, we’re going to be tackling this challenge with you step by step. We’ll be focusing on the four core pages that get people from landing page to checkout, feeling confident in their purchase and believing that you are their superhero. We’re going to help you put the most relevant information on these pages and show you just how easy it really is.  
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’re back for part three of the Beginner Business Series! First off, the response has been great and we just want to thank you for your comments on Facebook and Instagram – we love hearing from you! And keep using the hashtag #bbs, because it helps us keep track of your questions, concerns, comments and feedback. If you’re just joining us now and don’t know what the hell this is, we’d advise you pause right now and go back to part one and part two and then dive into this one. So, let’s dive in!</p><p>In this episode, we are going to do a quick recap of where you should be at and make sure that you’re ready to tackle part three – setting up shop. Websites are where we see so many people get stuck. Often, they get so obsessed with perfecting it, that they hold themselves back from actually doing what their business is supposed to be doing – which is making money, honey! Sound like you? In this part three episode, we’re going to be tackling this challenge with you step by step. We’ll be focusing on the four core pages that get people from landing page to checkout, feeling confident in their purchase and believing that you are their superhero. We’re going to help you put the most relevant information on these pages and show you just how easy it really is.  </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2079</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1f268a57bbe4977af91c3696dfb5a604]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5900469745.mp3?updated=1656104751" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>177: How to Eat Healthy When Your Work At Home with Ashley Stephens of Macro Ed</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-eat-healthy-when-you-work-at-home</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we’re covering a little bit of a different side of the strategy of being a business owner and worker at home. Our guest today is Ashley Stephens and she is a mom, a teacher, a tech geek, a bossy big sister, an amateur home cook and the average girl next door – all bundled up into one great big personality. Ashley co-founded a company called MacroEd which is a program dedicated to helping you become your healthiest self, focusing on real food nutrition while controlling your insulin levels for long-term health benefits.
We are so happy she is here today to tackle a subject that a lot of us struggle with, and this is how to take better care of ourselves, eat healthier and invest in our own macro nutrition – while trying to be boss business women and super mom’s! We all make excuses for why we don’t make healthy choices and in this episode, Ashley shows us how to make this lifestyle change without changing our lives much at all! We’ll be breaking down what macro nutrition means and how we can take better care of ourselves (without living on kale smoothies)!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Feb 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Eat Healthy When Your Work At Home with Ashley Stephens of Macro Ed</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>177</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we’re covering a little bit of a different side of the strategy of being a business owner and worker at home. Our guest today is Ashley Stephens and she is a mom, a teacher, a tech geek, a bossy big sister, an amateur home cook...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we’re covering a little bit of a different side of the strategy of being a business owner and worker at home. Our guest today is Ashley Stephens and she is a mom, a teacher, a tech geek, a bossy big sister, an amateur home cook and the average girl next door – all bundled up into one great big personality. Ashley co-founded a company called MacroEd which is a program dedicated to helping you become your healthiest self, focusing on real food nutrition while controlling your insulin levels for long-term health benefits.
We are so happy she is here today to tackle a subject that a lot of us struggle with, and this is how to take better care of ourselves, eat healthier and invest in our own macro nutrition – while trying to be boss business women and super mom’s! We all make excuses for why we don’t make healthy choices and in this episode, Ashley shows us how to make this lifestyle change without changing our lives much at all! We’ll be breaking down what macro nutrition means and how we can take better care of ourselves (without living on kale smoothies)!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we’re covering a little bit of a different side of the strategy of being a business owner and worker at home. Our guest today is Ashley Stephens and she is a mom, a teacher, a tech geek, a bossy big sister, an amateur home cook and the average girl next door – all bundled up into one great big personality. Ashley co-founded a company called MacroEd which is a program dedicated to helping you become your healthiest self, focusing on real food nutrition while controlling your insulin levels for long-term health benefits.</p><p>We are so happy she is here today to tackle a subject that a lot of us struggle with, and this is how to take better care of ourselves, eat healthier and invest in our own macro nutrition – while trying to be boss business women and super mom’s! We all make excuses for why we don’t make healthy choices and in this episode, Ashley shows us how to make this lifestyle change without changing our lives much at all! We’ll be breaking down what macro nutrition means and how we can take better care of ourselves (without living on kale smoothies)!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2955</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7004a7728f1d67d57b378bcbde2c9f08]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1916825109.mp3?updated=1661557946" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>176: Beginner Business Series - Part 2: Packaging &amp; Pricing Your Offer</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/beginner-business-series-part-2-packaging-pricing-your-offer</link>
      <description>Welcome to the second part of our Beginner Business Series! If you have not checked out the first episode in this series we highly recommend you do that before listening to this golden egg! So now that you are up to date, let’s get down to it, today we are going to be talking about packaging and pricing your offer. This goes for selling products or services and we will be dealing with specifics as well as general rules during this discussion. You can post in the Think Creative Group, with the hashtag ‘bbs, that’s #bbs, so we can get to your questions and feedback easily and serve you even better.
In the first episode, we got you to look at what you should be selling by gauging your skills and interests. In this episode, we are asking that you make this final decision from the ideas of last time and dive in with that choice. This choice does not have to be forever, but you do need some commitment, so let’s go! The talk includes looking at motivators for buying, what might be holding sales back, good ideas to jumpstart sales, trusting yourself and your business and how all of this and more ties into a successful business. So without any more ceremony let’s get into the episode, join us as we help you with you beginner business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 12 Feb 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Beginner Business Series - Part 2: Packaging &amp; Pricing Your Offer</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>176</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome to the second part of our Beginner Business Series! If you have not checked out the first episode in this series we highly recommend you do that before listening to this golden egg! So now that you are up to date, let’s get down to it, today...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to the second part of our Beginner Business Series! If you have not checked out the first episode in this series we highly recommend you do that before listening to this golden egg! So now that you are up to date, let’s get down to it, today we are going to be talking about packaging and pricing your offer. This goes for selling products or services and we will be dealing with specifics as well as general rules during this discussion. You can post in the Think Creative Group, with the hashtag ‘bbs, that’s #bbs, so we can get to your questions and feedback easily and serve you even better.
In the first episode, we got you to look at what you should be selling by gauging your skills and interests. In this episode, we are asking that you make this final decision from the ideas of last time and dive in with that choice. This choice does not have to be forever, but you do need some commitment, so let’s go! The talk includes looking at motivators for buying, what might be holding sales back, good ideas to jumpstart sales, trusting yourself and your business and how all of this and more ties into a successful business. So without any more ceremony let’s get into the episode, join us as we help you with you beginner business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to the second part of our Beginner Business Series! If you have not checked out the first episode in this series we highly recommend you do that before listening to this golden egg! So now that you are up to date, let’s get down to it, today we are going to be talking about packaging and pricing your offer. This goes for selling products or services and we will be dealing with specifics as well as general rules during this discussion. You can post in the Think Creative Group, with the hashtag ‘bbs, that’s #bbs, so we can get to your questions and feedback easily and serve you even better.</p><p>In the first episode, we got you to look at what you should be selling by gauging your skills and interests. In this episode, we are asking that you make this final decision from the ideas of last time and dive in with that choice. This choice does not have to be forever, but you do need some commitment, so let’s go! The talk includes looking at motivators for buying, what might be holding sales back, good ideas to jumpstart sales, trusting yourself and your business and how all of this and more ties into a successful business. So without any more ceremony let’s get into the episode, join us as we help you with you beginner business!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2503</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5ad98a19e8d4295630464d57dd857079]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4217640454.mp3?updated=1651933512" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>175: How to Make Your Instagram Algorithm Proof with Melissa Camilleri of Compliment, Inc</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-make-your-instagram-algorithm-proof</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Melisa Camilleri of Compliment Inc. Melissa is a high school English teacher turned CEO and Founder; she owns a lifestyle brand that encourages, inspires, and educates; she also sells jewelry and has an Instagram course! This woman is all over the place and she is one hardworking mamma! Instagram has gone through a lot of changes over the years and if you’re still on the fence about utilizing the platform – Melissa is here to make it easy it easy for you.
Melissa really knows her stuff when it comes to Instagram and in this episode, she shows us how we can beat the Insta algorithm so that you can nurture your audience, bring in those dollar bills and enjoy the platform – rather than letting it freak you out. Melissa shows us how to create compelling stories, how to enhance engagement, create a formula for what to post and how to take advantage of those captions to find new audiences and gain more followers. She also shares some helpful tips and tricks on the hashtag phenomena, likes and comments. #takealisten
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 09 Feb 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Make Your Instagram Algorithm Proof with Melissa Camilleri of Compliment, Inc</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>175</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Melisa Camilleri of Compliment Inc. Melissa is a high school English teacher turned CEO and Founder; she owns a lifestyle brand that encourages, inspires, and educates; she also sells jewelry and has an Instagram course!...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Melisa Camilleri of Compliment Inc. Melissa is a high school English teacher turned CEO and Founder; she owns a lifestyle brand that encourages, inspires, and educates; she also sells jewelry and has an Instagram course! This woman is all over the place and she is one hardworking mamma! Instagram has gone through a lot of changes over the years and if you’re still on the fence about utilizing the platform – Melissa is here to make it easy it easy for you.
Melissa really knows her stuff when it comes to Instagram and in this episode, she shows us how we can beat the Insta algorithm so that you can nurture your audience, bring in those dollar bills and enjoy the platform – rather than letting it freak you out. Melissa shows us how to create compelling stories, how to enhance engagement, create a formula for what to post and how to take advantage of those captions to find new audiences and gain more followers. She also shares some helpful tips and tricks on the hashtag phenomena, likes and comments. #takealisten
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Melisa Camilleri of Compliment Inc. Melissa is a high school English teacher turned CEO and Founder; she owns a lifestyle brand that encourages, inspires, and educates; she also sells jewelry and has an Instagram course! This woman is all over the place and she is one hardworking mamma! Instagram has gone through a lot of changes over the years and if you’re still on the fence about utilizing the platform – Melissa is here to make it easy it easy for you.</p><p>Melissa really knows her stuff when it comes to Instagram and in this episode, she shows us how we can beat the Insta algorithm so that you can nurture your audience, bring in those dollar bills and enjoy the platform – rather than letting it freak you out. Melissa shows us how to create compelling stories, how to enhance engagement, create a formula for what to post and how to take advantage of those captions to find new audiences and gain more followers. She also shares some helpful tips and tricks on the hashtag phenomena, likes and comments. #takealisten</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3263</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dafaa67acc78256d90bbb4bb67a1f59a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2471518764.mp3?updated=1661557756" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>174: Beginner Business Series - Part 1: Adopting a Profit First Mentality</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/beginner-business-series-part-1-adopting-a-profit-first-mentality</link>
      <description>We’re excited to be doing something new over the next few episodes and this is thanks to all your amazing feedback! A question that came up inside the TCC network, was “Where are the podcasts for brand new business owners? Business owners who haven’t made anything yet or haven’t got off the ground yet?” So, we’re going to be sharing with you over the next few episodes, our five-part Beginner Business Series (BBS) and we’re going to be asking you to share your homework, takeaways, and insights inside of our community using the hashtag #bbs.
Even if you’ve been in business for a while, a lot of these things are going to be in review for you, but it might also be an opportunity for you to go back and solidify a foundation. So regardless of where you’re at or what industry you are in, you should definitely be listening. If you are brand new and wondering where to even begin – this is an awesome place to start! In this episode, we are going to help you identify your skills and unique strengths, your why and your goals and help you discover your potential most viable product or skill that you can start putting out this very week! Making you nervous? The good news is that this is something you already have!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 Feb 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Beginner Business Series - Part 1: Adopting a Profit First Mentality</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>174</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’re excited to be doing something new over the next few episodes and this is thanks to all your amazing feedback! A question that came up inside the TCC network, was “Where are the podcasts for brand new business owners? Business owners who...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’re excited to be doing something new over the next few episodes and this is thanks to all your amazing feedback! A question that came up inside the TCC network, was “Where are the podcasts for brand new business owners? Business owners who haven’t made anything yet or haven’t got off the ground yet?” So, we’re going to be sharing with you over the next few episodes, our five-part Beginner Business Series (BBS) and we’re going to be asking you to share your homework, takeaways, and insights inside of our community using the hashtag #bbs.
Even if you’ve been in business for a while, a lot of these things are going to be in review for you, but it might also be an opportunity for you to go back and solidify a foundation. So regardless of where you’re at or what industry you are in, you should definitely be listening. If you are brand new and wondering where to even begin – this is an awesome place to start! In this episode, we are going to help you identify your skills and unique strengths, your why and your goals and help you discover your potential most viable product or skill that you can start putting out this very week! Making you nervous? The good news is that this is something you already have!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’re excited to be doing something new over the next few episodes and this is thanks to all your amazing feedback! A question that came up inside the TCC network, was “Where are the podcasts for brand new business owners? Business owners who haven’t made anything yet or haven’t got off the ground yet?” So, we’re going to be sharing with you over the next few episodes, our five-part Beginner Business Series (BBS) and we’re going to be asking you to share your homework, takeaways, and insights inside of our community using the hashtag #bbs.</p><p>Even if you’ve been in business for a while, a lot of these things are going to be in review for you, but it might also be an opportunity for you to go back and solidify a foundation. So regardless of where you’re at or what industry you are in, you should definitely be listening. If you are brand new and wondering where to even begin – this is an awesome place to start! In this episode, we are going to help you identify your skills and unique strengths, your why and your goals and help you discover your potential most viable product or skill that you can start putting out this very week! Making you nervous? The good news is that this is something you already have!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2628</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4ad7c85d2af03ebf3bf89f6cccdbf086]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1211766443.mp3?updated=1651933557" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>173: Mama to Work from Home Freelancer with Micala Quinn of The Live Free Mama Movement</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/from-mama-to-work-from-home-freelancer</link>
      <description>Today on the show, we welcome Micala Quinn. Micala is a wife, mom, teacher, lifelong learner and founder of The Live Free Mama Movement. She helps moms launch their freelance business using the skills they already have so that they can have more freedom, flexibility, and financial stability. Our lives were very similar in that Micala had worked for a bit, started freelancing from home and has now started her own business. A lot of mom’s want to work from home in the freelance world, but don’t know where to start. It can be daunting and overwhelming, but not if you know where to start. This is where Micala comes in.
In this episode, Micala shares how a mom can do things from home to create a sustainable business. So if you’re out there wondering, “What is the thing I can do to bring in some extra cash-dollar bills this month?” This is the episode you want to listen to. Today we share so many brain-storming activities and questions you can ask yourself to help you pull out those skills into a profitable thing you can actually charge for. If you’ve ever had an interest in freelancing or VA work, this episode will sure as hell give you some ideas.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 05 Feb 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Mama to Work from Home Freelancer with Micala Quinn of The Live Free Mama Movement</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>173</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show, we welcome Micala Quinn. Micala is a wife, mom, teacher, lifelong learner and founder of The Live Free Mama Movement. She helps moms launch their freelance business using the skills they already have so that they can have more...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show, we welcome Micala Quinn. Micala is a wife, mom, teacher, lifelong learner and founder of The Live Free Mama Movement. She helps moms launch their freelance business using the skills they already have so that they can have more freedom, flexibility, and financial stability. Our lives were very similar in that Micala had worked for a bit, started freelancing from home and has now started her own business. A lot of mom’s want to work from home in the freelance world, but don’t know where to start. It can be daunting and overwhelming, but not if you know where to start. This is where Micala comes in.
In this episode, Micala shares how a mom can do things from home to create a sustainable business. So if you’re out there wondering, “What is the thing I can do to bring in some extra cash-dollar bills this month?” This is the episode you want to listen to. Today we share so many brain-storming activities and questions you can ask yourself to help you pull out those skills into a profitable thing you can actually charge for. If you’ve ever had an interest in freelancing or VA work, this episode will sure as hell give you some ideas.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show, we welcome Micala Quinn. Micala is a wife, mom, teacher, lifelong learner and founder of The Live Free Mama Movement. She helps moms launch their freelance business using the skills they already have so that they can have more freedom, flexibility, and financial stability. Our lives were very similar in that Micala had worked for a bit, started freelancing from home and has now started her own business. A lot of mom’s want to work from home in the freelance world, but don’t know where to start. It can be daunting and overwhelming, but not if you know where to start. This is where Micala comes in.</p><p>In this episode, Micala shares how a mom can do things from home to create a sustainable business. So if you’re out there wondering, “What is the thing I can do to bring in some extra cash-dollar bills this month?” This is the episode you want to listen to. Today we share so many brain-storming activities and questions you can ask yourself to help you pull out those skills into a profitable thing you can actually charge for. If you’ve ever had an interest in freelancing or VA work, this episode will sure as hell give you some ideas.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2389</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1872046027e3487ff0314c3e1c6df681]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8934729062.mp3?updated=1661557699" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>172: Our Journey to $100K Per Month</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/our-journey-to-100k-per-month</link>
      <description>So, we have a crazy idea! We’re excited and nervous about it and can’t wait to share it with you. We have big dreams this year and yep, you guessed it, we want to take you on our journey to $100k per month. We recently came to the conclusion that making this amount of money every month is realistically quite doable for us at this point. We have formulated some new strategies, broken down more of our goals and in the next few weeks we’re going to be pushing to make our $100k month a reality.
In this episode, we will be sharing with you how this dream came about, and delving into the shifts of our money mindset, our questions, fears and why money is amoral and much like a brick. We want to open up the conversation about money with you and encourage you to examine your own money mindset. So, by the end of this episode, you should feel more comfortable talking about money, dreaming big and feeling less guilty about wanting more money – if that is what you truly want.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 02 Feb 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our Journey to $100K Per Month</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>172</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>So, we have a crazy idea! We’re excited and nervous about it and can’t wait to share it with you. We have big dreams this year and yep, you guessed it, we want to take you on our journey to $100k per month. We recently came to the conclusion that...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>So, we have a crazy idea! We’re excited and nervous about it and can’t wait to share it with you. We have big dreams this year and yep, you guessed it, we want to take you on our journey to $100k per month. We recently came to the conclusion that making this amount of money every month is realistically quite doable for us at this point. We have formulated some new strategies, broken down more of our goals and in the next few weeks we’re going to be pushing to make our $100k month a reality.
In this episode, we will be sharing with you how this dream came about, and delving into the shifts of our money mindset, our questions, fears and why money is amoral and much like a brick. We want to open up the conversation about money with you and encourage you to examine your own money mindset. So, by the end of this episode, you should feel more comfortable talking about money, dreaming big and feeling less guilty about wanting more money – if that is what you truly want.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>So, we have a crazy idea! We’re excited and nervous about it and can’t wait to share it with you. We have big dreams this year and yep, you guessed it, we want to take you on our journey to $100k per month. We recently came to the conclusion that making this amount of money every month is realistically quite doable for us at this point. We have formulated some new strategies, broken down more of our goals and in the next few weeks we’re going to be pushing to make our $100k month a reality.</p><p>In this episode, we will be sharing with you how this dream came about, and delving into the shifts of our money mindset, our questions, fears and why money is amoral and much like a brick. We want to open up the conversation about money with you and encourage you to examine your own money mindset. So, by the end of this episode, you should feel more comfortable talking about money, dreaming big and feeling less guilty about wanting more money – if that is what you truly want.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2287</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[aaa7be75a0a4042f666b2ee10cbd67b4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7952898965.mp3?updated=1661557647" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>171: The Problem You Have With Reaching 6 Figures with Lisa Young of Ark Entertainment Media</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-problem-you-have-with-reaching-6-figures</link>
      <description>We are super excited to welcome our guest on today’s show and we know you will love this episode! We talk to Lisa Robbin Young of Ark Entertainment Media about the idea of a six-figure business, something that all entrepreneurs at least think about. For many of us, and Lisa included, six figures is a bottom line that a business needs to reach in order to feel successful. Lisa, however also talks about how this does not have to be the case. There are in fact some instances where these standards do not apply, but realizing when is the key.
Lisa has a wealth of experience and expertise that we cannot wait to share with you as we discuss different types of entrepreneurial styles and personalities and how these influence the way a business is run. We break down how to start translating those strengths into money and success as well as tactics such as freebies and promotions. We sure are grateful for Lisa’s know-how and know you will be too after this great episode, so get ready and let’s get into it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 31 Jan 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Problem You Have With Reaching 6 Figures with Lisa Young of Ark Entertainment Media</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>171</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are super excited to welcome our guest on today’s show and we know you will love this episode! We talk to Lisa Robbin Young of Ark Entertainment Media about the idea of a six-figure business, something that all entrepreneurs at least think about....</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are super excited to welcome our guest on today’s show and we know you will love this episode! We talk to Lisa Robbin Young of Ark Entertainment Media about the idea of a six-figure business, something that all entrepreneurs at least think about. For many of us, and Lisa included, six figures is a bottom line that a business needs to reach in order to feel successful. Lisa, however also talks about how this does not have to be the case. There are in fact some instances where these standards do not apply, but realizing when is the key.
Lisa has a wealth of experience and expertise that we cannot wait to share with you as we discuss different types of entrepreneurial styles and personalities and how these influence the way a business is run. We break down how to start translating those strengths into money and success as well as tactics such as freebies and promotions. We sure are grateful for Lisa’s know-how and know you will be too after this great episode, so get ready and let’s get into it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are super excited to welcome our guest on today’s show and we know you will love this episode! We talk to Lisa Robbin Young of Ark Entertainment Media about the idea of a six-figure business, something that all entrepreneurs at least think about. For many of us, and Lisa included, six figures is a bottom line that a business needs to reach in order to feel successful. Lisa, however also talks about how this does not have to be the case. There are in fact some instances where these standards do not apply, but realizing when is the key.</p><p>Lisa has a wealth of experience and expertise that we cannot wait to share with you as we discuss different types of entrepreneurial styles and personalities and how these influence the way a business is run. We break down how to start translating those strengths into money and success as well as tactics such as freebies and promotions. We sure are grateful for Lisa’s know-how and know you will be too after this great episode, so get ready and let’s get into it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2652</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a21344bf72c13af62a96850751826b4e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4482423711.mp3?updated=1661557610" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>170: How to Set Boundaries in Your Business &amp; Life</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-set-boundaries-in-your-business-life</link>
      <description>Today on the show we are tackling a topic that has cropped up in a lot of Facebook groups recently, ours included, and it’s a real good one for discussion! The question is, “How the heck do you set, handle and enforce boundaries when you work from home?” Not only with yourself, clients and customers but also if you have a spouse, a partner, or your kids at home. So whatever your situation, we are digging deep and pulling out the good stuff to help you with those boundaries.
In this episode, we share how we managed the transition from working in an office to working from home. We discuss the importance of figuring out your own workflow, setting concrete boundaries with your family and friends and how to communicate them effectively. At the end of the day, you have to manage the expectations of others, ensure that your business is respected and at the same time, enjoy the wonderful privileges that come with working from home! We will share with you the challenges that we’ve faced and how we have managed these often tricky scenarios, in the hope that this will empower you to crack that whip and lay down the law!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 29 Jan 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Set Boundaries in Your Business &amp; Life</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>170</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we are tackling a topic that has cropped up in a lot of Facebook groups recently, ours included, and it’s a real good one for discussion! The question is, “How the heck do you set, handle and enforce boundaries when you work from...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we are tackling a topic that has cropped up in a lot of Facebook groups recently, ours included, and it’s a real good one for discussion! The question is, “How the heck do you set, handle and enforce boundaries when you work from home?” Not only with yourself, clients and customers but also if you have a spouse, a partner, or your kids at home. So whatever your situation, we are digging deep and pulling out the good stuff to help you with those boundaries.
In this episode, we share how we managed the transition from working in an office to working from home. We discuss the importance of figuring out your own workflow, setting concrete boundaries with your family and friends and how to communicate them effectively. At the end of the day, you have to manage the expectations of others, ensure that your business is respected and at the same time, enjoy the wonderful privileges that come with working from home! We will share with you the challenges that we’ve faced and how we have managed these often tricky scenarios, in the hope that this will empower you to crack that whip and lay down the law!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we are tackling a topic that has cropped up in a lot of Facebook groups recently, ours included, and it’s a real good one for discussion! The question is, “How the heck do you set, handle and enforce boundaries when you work from home?” Not only with yourself, clients and customers but also if you have a spouse, a partner, or your kids at home. So whatever your situation, we are digging deep and pulling out the good stuff to help you with those boundaries.</p><p>In this episode, we share how we managed the transition from working in an office to working from home. We discuss the importance of figuring out your own workflow, setting concrete boundaries with your family and friends and how to communicate them effectively. At the end of the day, you have to manage the expectations of others, ensure that your business is respected and at the same time, enjoy the wonderful privileges that come with working from home! We will share with you the challenges that we’ve faced and how we have managed these often tricky scenarios, in the hope that this will empower you to crack that whip and lay down the law!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2341</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7de3084aed862c59e8a30d9264959198]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3177758822.mp3?updated=1661557544" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>169: Utilizing Software, Building Communication Channels and Striving for Common Goals with Angela Greaser of All the Ops</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/utilizing-software-building-communication-channels-and-striving-for-common-goals</link>
      <description>We are super excited to welcome a great friend and colleague to the show today, Angela Greaser! Angela works with us as the Director of Operations at Think Creative Collective and is the Co-Founder of All the Ops. We really know how much Angela’s expertise has helped us in our business since she came on board and we cannot wait to share it with you! We get down to it with Angela on how you can streamline your operations, open communication channels and the importance of documenting your processes.
During our chat we break down different social media platforms, software solutions and the integral value of company culture. Before we hired Angela at TCC, we are open to admit, we really did not have any company culture to write home about. But with Angela’s help and proficiency, we are glad to say we have built much stronger practices within our virtual workspace. We even kept Angela’s name a secret until very recently just so no one could poach her from us! She’s just that good! If you are looking for ways to enhance and optimize operations in your business, or even just want some inspiration to get things moving in the office, this episode is for you! Let’s get right into it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 26 Jan 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Utilizing Software, Building Communication Channels and Striving for Common Goals with Angela Greaser of All the Ops</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>169</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are super excited to welcome a great friend and colleague to the show today, Angela Greaser! Angela works with us as the Director of Operations at Think Creative Collective and is the Co-Founder of All the Ops. We really know how much Angela’s...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are super excited to welcome a great friend and colleague to the show today, Angela Greaser! Angela works with us as the Director of Operations at Think Creative Collective and is the Co-Founder of All the Ops. We really know how much Angela’s expertise has helped us in our business since she came on board and we cannot wait to share it with you! We get down to it with Angela on how you can streamline your operations, open communication channels and the importance of documenting your processes.
During our chat we break down different social media platforms, software solutions and the integral value of company culture. Before we hired Angela at TCC, we are open to admit, we really did not have any company culture to write home about. But with Angela’s help and proficiency, we are glad to say we have built much stronger practices within our virtual workspace. We even kept Angela’s name a secret until very recently just so no one could poach her from us! She’s just that good! If you are looking for ways to enhance and optimize operations in your business, or even just want some inspiration to get things moving in the office, this episode is for you! Let’s get right into it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are super excited to welcome a great friend and colleague to the show today, Angela Greaser! Angela works with us as the Director of Operations at Think Creative Collective and is the Co-Founder of All the Ops. We really know how much Angela’s expertise has helped us in our business since she came on board and we cannot wait to share it with you! We get down to it with Angela on how you can streamline your operations, open communication channels and the importance of documenting your processes.</p><p>During our chat we break down different social media platforms, software solutions and the integral value of company culture. Before we hired Angela at TCC, we are open to admit, we really did not have any company culture to write home about. But with Angela’s help and proficiency, we are glad to say we have built much stronger practices within our virtual workspace. We even kept Angela’s name a secret until very recently just so no one could poach her from us! She’s just that good! If you are looking for ways to enhance and optimize operations in your business, or even just want some inspiration to get things moving in the office, this episode is for you! Let’s get right into it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2369</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[712f8ac96ab721890d2b8bad0462a7a2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9303233022.mp3?updated=1661557499" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>168: 2017 Review: How Much We Made, Where the $ Came From</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/2017-review-how-much-we-made-and-where-the-money-came-from</link>
      <description>Today’s episode is all about the 2017 Review – where we share our triumphs and our milestones, the bumps on the road, the numbers, the sexy data and everything in between! 2017 was a big year for us; Penelope was born, we took off all of January and we launched our signature program, The Strategy Academy, twice! We also hosted a ton of webinars and we ran Facebook Ads strategically well for the first time.
We took a total of 12 weeks off, we launched the podcast, we launched a website and ended up in the Top 15 Business Podcasts on iTunes... And to think that all of that happened in one year is pretty crazy! In this episode, we’ll be giving you an overview of our year, diving into our four main income generators, our two biggest costs, our two biggest myths and sharing a stat that might just blow your mind! We hope that you will extract some of these strategies and use them to analyze your own business year and make empowered decisions as we dance into 2018.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Jan 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>2017 Review: How Much We Made, Where the $ Came From</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>168</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today’s episode is all about the 2017 Review – where we share our triumphs and our milestones, the bumps on the road, the numbers, the sexy data and everything in between! 2017 was a big year for us; Penelope was born, we took off all of January...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today’s episode is all about the 2017 Review – where we share our triumphs and our milestones, the bumps on the road, the numbers, the sexy data and everything in between! 2017 was a big year for us; Penelope was born, we took off all of January and we launched our signature program, The Strategy Academy, twice! We also hosted a ton of webinars and we ran Facebook Ads strategically well for the first time.
We took a total of 12 weeks off, we launched the podcast, we launched a website and ended up in the Top 15 Business Podcasts on iTunes... And to think that all of that happened in one year is pretty crazy! In this episode, we’ll be giving you an overview of our year, diving into our four main income generators, our two biggest costs, our two biggest myths and sharing a stat that might just blow your mind! We hope that you will extract some of these strategies and use them to analyze your own business year and make empowered decisions as we dance into 2018.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s episode is all about the 2017 Review – where we share our triumphs and our milestones, the bumps on the road, the numbers, the sexy data and everything in between! 2017 was a big year for us; Penelope was born, we took off all of January and we launched our signature program, The Strategy Academy, twice! We also hosted a ton of webinars and we ran Facebook Ads strategically well for the first time.</p><p>We took a total of 12 weeks off, we launched the podcast, we launched a website and ended up in the Top 15 Business Podcasts on iTunes... And to think that all of that happened in one year is pretty crazy! In this episode, we’ll be giving you an overview of our year, diving into our four main income generators, our two biggest costs, our two biggest myths and sharing a stat that might just blow your mind! We hope that you will extract some of these strategies and use them to analyze your own business year and make empowered decisions as we dance into 2018.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2645</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[258addf1f8a5d266deb3c1c881ff1cef]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6825203016.mp3?updated=1661557446" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>167: How to Use a Podcast to Fill Your Programs with Katie Krimitsos of Biz Women Rock</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-use-a-podcast-to-fill-your-programs</link>
      <description>Today on the show we have the amazing Katie Krimitsos! Katie is the founder of Biz Women Rock, which is a community and education provider for women entrepreneurs around the world, a.k.a, everyone listening. She is so helpful and an absolute open book on how she has found success in her corner of the world. Inside this episode, Katie shares a ton of incredible strategies. Not only are we talking about how to use a podcast to fill your programs, but really how to promote your podcast in order to get the most traction out of it.
Now, if you’re not a podcast, don’t you worry! Because all of these tactics and strategies can really be interchanged with things like Facebook lives and Instagram posts, and email market strategies, and growing a Facebook community. So listen up! Because we have a lot of super specific strategies that you can try right away to start selling more, more often. At the end of the show we also talk about how you can join Katie’s Private Mastermind Community, so if masterminding is something that you might have on your horizon, be sure to get inside that group!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 22 Jan 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Use a Podcast to Fill Your Programs with Katie Krimitsos of Biz Women Rock</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>167</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we have the amazing Katie Krimitsos! Katie is the founder of Biz Women Rock, which is a community and education provider for women entrepreneurs around the world, a.k.a, everyone listening. She is so helpful and an absolute open book...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we have the amazing Katie Krimitsos! Katie is the founder of Biz Women Rock, which is a community and education provider for women entrepreneurs around the world, a.k.a, everyone listening. She is so helpful and an absolute open book on how she has found success in her corner of the world. Inside this episode, Katie shares a ton of incredible strategies. Not only are we talking about how to use a podcast to fill your programs, but really how to promote your podcast in order to get the most traction out of it.
Now, if you’re not a podcast, don’t you worry! Because all of these tactics and strategies can really be interchanged with things like Facebook lives and Instagram posts, and email market strategies, and growing a Facebook community. So listen up! Because we have a lot of super specific strategies that you can try right away to start selling more, more often. At the end of the show we also talk about how you can join Katie’s Private Mastermind Community, so if masterminding is something that you might have on your horizon, be sure to get inside that group!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we have the amazing Katie Krimitsos! Katie is the founder of Biz Women Rock, which is a community and education provider for women entrepreneurs around the world, a.k.a, everyone listening. She is so helpful and an absolute open book on how she has found success in her corner of the world. Inside this episode, Katie shares a ton of incredible strategies. Not only are we talking about how to use a podcast to fill your programs, but really how to promote your podcast in order to get the most traction out of it.</p><p>Now, if you’re not a podcast, don’t you worry! Because all of these tactics and strategies can really be interchanged with things like Facebook lives and Instagram posts, and email market strategies, and growing a Facebook community. So listen up! Because we have a lot of super specific strategies that you can try right away to start selling more, more often. At the end of the show we also talk about how you can join Katie’s Private Mastermind Community, so if masterminding is something that you might have on your horizon, be sure to get inside that group!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2668</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f6a9ab837d1f936deb0c397496e55a42]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3305175747.mp3?updated=1661557409" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>166: A Quick Update on our Side Hustles + Other Nonsense</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/a-quick-update-on-our-side-hustles-other-nonsense</link>
      <description>You guys have been knocking on our virtual door saying, “Give us a damn update on the damn side hustles!” You asked for it, so here it is! The update episode. A couple episode ago, if you missed it, we talked about our side hustles – why we started them, what they are and how they work. But today’s episode is really just an update on how our side hustles are going, what’s new and where they are going. To give you a brief overview, Abbie began an MLM business in essential oils and Emylee began painting again.
Our side hustles grew out of a need to do something creative again and to do something for ourselves, outside of TCC. They’ve been a great learning curve and we’re here today to give you a quick lowdown! In this episode, you’ll find out how Abbie’s MLM team has sky-rocked and about the exciting new partnerships in the pipeline for Emylee. We share what we’ve learnt this far from our side hustles and take a casual deviation into a hilarious conversation about bikini bootcamps and burning holes in our yoga mats. Talk about a side note.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 19 Jan 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>A Quick Update on our Side Hustles + Other Nonsense</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>166</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>You guys have been knocking on our virtual door saying, “Give us a damn update on the damn side hustles!” You asked for it, so here it is! The update episode. A couple episode ago, if you missed it, we talked about our side hustles – why we...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You guys have been knocking on our virtual door saying, “Give us a damn update on the damn side hustles!” You asked for it, so here it is! The update episode. A couple episode ago, if you missed it, we talked about our side hustles – why we started them, what they are and how they work. But today’s episode is really just an update on how our side hustles are going, what’s new and where they are going. To give you a brief overview, Abbie began an MLM business in essential oils and Emylee began painting again.
Our side hustles grew out of a need to do something creative again and to do something for ourselves, outside of TCC. They’ve been a great learning curve and we’re here today to give you a quick lowdown! In this episode, you’ll find out how Abbie’s MLM team has sky-rocked and about the exciting new partnerships in the pipeline for Emylee. We share what we’ve learnt this far from our side hustles and take a casual deviation into a hilarious conversation about bikini bootcamps and burning holes in our yoga mats. Talk about a side note.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You guys have been knocking on our virtual door saying, “Give us a damn update on the damn side hustles!” You asked for it, so here it is! The update episode. A couple episode ago, if you missed it, we talked about our side hustles – why we started them, what they are and how they work. But today’s episode is really just an update on how our side hustles are going, what’s new and where they are going. To give you a brief overview, Abbie began an MLM business in essential oils and Emylee began painting again.</p><p>Our side hustles grew out of a need to do something creative again and to do something for ourselves, outside of TCC. They’ve been a great learning curve and we’re here today to give you a quick lowdown! In this episode, you’ll find out how Abbie’s MLM team has sky-rocked and about the exciting new partnerships in the pipeline for Emylee. We share what we’ve learnt this far from our side hustles and take a casual deviation into a hilarious conversation about bikini bootcamps and burning holes in our yoga mats. Talk about a side note.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1703</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[83bb04e491e7f7695f9a3d78585713ca]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3526555786.mp3?updated=1661557392" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>165: You're Fired - How to Fire Bad Clients and Not Repeat the Same Mistakes with Lauren Goldstein</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/youre-fired-how-to-fire-bad-clients-and-not-repeat-the-same-mistakes</link>
      <description>Today on the show we have Lauren Goldstein of Golden Key Partnerships. Lauren has been an entrepreneur for over six years and helps businesses with consulting, training and web design. In this episode, you are going to hear about two of Lauren’s crazy client stories where she ended up having to fire them. This is not an easy conversation to have, especially when you can end up in a little bit of legal hoo-ha, as was the case with Lauren!
When a partnership is no longer working and expectations are no longer being met, firing a client is no easy conversation to have. We want to help you avoid these tricky situations and so today we’re talking about questions you should ask your clients in the vetting process, how to weed out the “bad” clients and only work with the dreamiest of unicorns, as Lauren calls them. We’re also talking about the importance of setting expectations and boundaries, how to say “No” and value your business and yourself as a woman.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 Jan 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>You're Fired - How to Fire Bad Clients and Not Repeat the Same Mistakes with Lauren Goldstein</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>165</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we have Lauren Goldstein of Golden Key Partnerships. Lauren has been an entrepreneur for over six years and helps businesses with consulting, training and web design. In this episode, you are going to hear about two of Lauren’s...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we have Lauren Goldstein of Golden Key Partnerships. Lauren has been an entrepreneur for over six years and helps businesses with consulting, training and web design. In this episode, you are going to hear about two of Lauren’s crazy client stories where she ended up having to fire them. This is not an easy conversation to have, especially when you can end up in a little bit of legal hoo-ha, as was the case with Lauren!
When a partnership is no longer working and expectations are no longer being met, firing a client is no easy conversation to have. We want to help you avoid these tricky situations and so today we’re talking about questions you should ask your clients in the vetting process, how to weed out the “bad” clients and only work with the dreamiest of unicorns, as Lauren calls them. We’re also talking about the importance of setting expectations and boundaries, how to say “No” and value your business and yourself as a woman.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we have Lauren Goldstein of Golden Key Partnerships. Lauren has been an entrepreneur for over six years and helps businesses with consulting, training and web design. In this episode, you are going to hear about two of Lauren’s crazy client stories where she ended up having to fire them. This is not an easy conversation to have, especially when you can end up in a little bit of legal hoo-ha, as was the case with Lauren!</p><p>When a partnership is no longer working and expectations are no longer being met, firing a client is no easy conversation to have. We want to help you avoid these tricky situations and so today we’re talking about questions you should ask your clients in the vetting process, how to weed out the “bad” clients and only work with the dreamiest of unicorns, as Lauren calls them. We’re also talking about the importance of setting expectations and boundaries, how to say “No” and value your business and yourself as a woman.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2912</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[18c65fe6f12e555540b07a92d5e650f6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8669435439.mp3?updated=1661557417" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>164: Celebrating One Year of Podcasting: Mistakes, Highlights + Lessons Learned</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/celebrating-one-year-of-podcasting-mistakes-highlights-lessons-learned</link>
      <description>OMG! We made a whole year of podcasting and we didn’t fall off the bandwagon guys! Yep, we’re officially addicted and this podcast ain’t going nowhere. Today in this celebratory episode, we are going to go break down what has happened over the last year of the SHP podcast – the amazing guests we’ve had on, amazing moments, the epic fails and all the juicy things that you do, or don’t know, about the making of this podcast. We’ll take you through some of the download, rating, sponsor and guest stats, as well as share our lessons learnt throughout the whirlwind of 2017. 2018 is looking bright and we couldn’t imagine the year without this podcast. We’re happy to tell you that we’ll be continuing to bring you three awesome episodes a week and have some exciting new guests for you to look forward to! If you’re still on the fence about starting your own podcast, are looking for tips, or are just a die-hard groupie – then this episode was tailor-talked for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 15 Jan 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Celebrating One Year of Podcasting: Mistakes, Highlights + Lessons Learned</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>164</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>OMG! We made a whole year of podcasting and we didn’t fall off the bandwagon guys! Yep, we’re officially addicted and this podcast ain’t going nowhere. Today in this celebratory episode, we are going to go break down what has happened over the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>OMG! We made a whole year of podcasting and we didn’t fall off the bandwagon guys! Yep, we’re officially addicted and this podcast ain’t going nowhere. Today in this celebratory episode, we are going to go break down what has happened over the last year of the SHP podcast – the amazing guests we’ve had on, amazing moments, the epic fails and all the juicy things that you do, or don’t know, about the making of this podcast. We’ll take you through some of the download, rating, sponsor and guest stats, as well as share our lessons learnt throughout the whirlwind of 2017. 2018 is looking bright and we couldn’t imagine the year without this podcast. We’re happy to tell you that we’ll be continuing to bring you three awesome episodes a week and have some exciting new guests for you to look forward to! If you’re still on the fence about starting your own podcast, are looking for tips, or are just a die-hard groupie – then this episode was tailor-talked for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>OMG! We made a whole year of podcasting and we didn’t fall off the bandwagon guys! Yep, we’re officially addicted and this podcast ain’t going nowhere. Today in this celebratory episode, we are going to go break down what has happened over the last year of the SHP podcast – the amazing guests we’ve had on, amazing moments, the epic fails and all the juicy things that you do, or don’t know, about the making of this podcast. We’ll take you through some of the download, rating, sponsor and guest stats, as well as share our lessons learnt throughout the whirlwind of 2017. 2018 is looking bright and we couldn’t imagine the year without this podcast. We’re happy to tell you that we’ll be continuing to bring you three awesome episodes a week and have some exciting new guests for you to look forward to! If you’re still on the fence about starting your own podcast, are looking for tips, or are just a die-hard groupie – then this episode was tailor-talked for you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1871</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[18b55bba4b5e55eb5b7fd8123b50b91e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3690342705.mp3?updated=1661557289" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>163: Our Most Popular Interview of 2017: Getting Your Customers to Say "Yes": Neuroscience and Business with Natalie Franke of Rising Tide Society</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/our-most-popular-interview-of-2017</link>
      <description>Last January, we had Natalie Franke, the founder of Rising Tide Society join us on The Strategy Hour Podcast. Little did we know that 2017 would be a whirlwind for Natalie. She went on to work for Honey Book, sky rocket The Rising Tide Society and has become the number one downloaded podcast interview that we’ve had over the last year of The Strategy Hour Podcast. We’ve loved watching her journey and couldn’t be more proud. With that being said, today we really wanted to pay homage to everything that she has done. If you missed the episode with Natalie the first time around or just want a refresher on how to get your customers to say “Yes” – we’re giving you a second chance with this repeat episode!
In case you don’t already know who Natalie is, you may be surprised to find out that she’s a huge neuroscience nerd and uses this background to strategically make decisions in her business. In this episode, she will be sharing how you can take cues from neuroscience and psychology to communicate with your clients and customers, form your message on your website and social media, grow your audience and more. Natalie also shares why Rising Tide Society was built, how quickly it grew, and how she became interested in the nerdy stuff in the first place. This episode shows an entirely new side of Natalie and will help you to take her strategies and tweak them into your own business. Take a listen! It’s even better the second time around…
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 12 Jan 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our Most Popular Interview of 2017: Getting Your Customers to Say "Yes": Neuroscience and Business with Natalie Franke of Rising Tide Society</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>163</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Last January, we had Natalie Franke, the founder of Rising Tide Society join us on The Strategy Hour Podcast. Little did we know that 2017 would be a whirlwind for Natalie. She went on to work for Honey Book, sky rocket The Rising Tide Society and has...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Last January, we had Natalie Franke, the founder of Rising Tide Society join us on The Strategy Hour Podcast. Little did we know that 2017 would be a whirlwind for Natalie. She went on to work for Honey Book, sky rocket The Rising Tide Society and has become the number one downloaded podcast interview that we’ve had over the last year of The Strategy Hour Podcast. We’ve loved watching her journey and couldn’t be more proud. With that being said, today we really wanted to pay homage to everything that she has done. If you missed the episode with Natalie the first time around or just want a refresher on how to get your customers to say “Yes” – we’re giving you a second chance with this repeat episode!
In case you don’t already know who Natalie is, you may be surprised to find out that she’s a huge neuroscience nerd and uses this background to strategically make decisions in her business. In this episode, she will be sharing how you can take cues from neuroscience and psychology to communicate with your clients and customers, form your message on your website and social media, grow your audience and more. Natalie also shares why Rising Tide Society was built, how quickly it grew, and how she became interested in the nerdy stuff in the first place. This episode shows an entirely new side of Natalie and will help you to take her strategies and tweak them into your own business. Take a listen! It’s even better the second time around…
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Last January, we had Natalie Franke, the founder of Rising Tide Society join us on The Strategy Hour Podcast. Little did we know that 2017 would be a whirlwind for Natalie. She went on to work for Honey Book, sky rocket The Rising Tide Society and has become the number one downloaded podcast interview that we’ve had over the last year of The Strategy Hour Podcast. We’ve loved watching her journey and couldn’t be more proud. With that being said, today we really wanted to pay homage to everything that she has done. If you missed the episode with Natalie the first time around or just want a refresher on how to get your customers to say “Yes” – we’re giving you a second chance with this repeat episode!</p><p>In case you don’t already know who Natalie is, you may be surprised to find out that she’s a huge neuroscience nerd and uses this background to strategically make decisions in her business. In this episode, she will be sharing how you can take cues from neuroscience and psychology to communicate with your clients and customers, form your message on your website and social media, grow your audience and more. Natalie also shares why Rising Tide Society was built, how quickly it grew, and how she became interested in the nerdy stuff in the first place. This episode shows an entirely new side of Natalie and will help you to take her strategies and tweak them into your own business. Take a listen! It’s even better the second time around…</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2790</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1c6b740e77550512c1a0ba018019411e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2377048446.mp3?updated=1661557346" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>162: 2017 Yearly Breakdown - Lessons Learned + Milestones Reached</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/december-2017-breakdown-lessons-learned-milestones-reached</link>
      <description>Happy New Year everybody! We’ve just returned back after a 12-week holiday and today, we travel back in time to do our monthly review of December 2017. We also plan for January 2018, tackle our four-quarter breakdown, review our stats and set goals and projects for the new year. We hope that this episode will inspire you to thoroughly review your own past business year and set thorough goals and projects as you move into 2018.
In this episode, we outline the difference between a goal and a project, take you through The Follow Through Method and encourage you to always to set your good, better, best scenario for your income goals. We’ll be sharing what we’ve learnt and what we’ll be doing differently in 2018. Just a heads up: This is going to be a long episode of calculator crunching and in-the-moment chatting! So grab some coffee, get comfy and know that 2018 is going to be great, if you break it down!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 Jan 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>2017 Yearly Breakdown - Lessons Learned + Milestones Reached</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>162</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Happy New Year everybody! We’ve just returned back after a 12-week holiday and today, we travel back in time to do our monthly review of December 2017. We also plan for January 2018, tackle our four-quarter breakdown, review our stats and set goals...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Happy New Year everybody! We’ve just returned back after a 12-week holiday and today, we travel back in time to do our monthly review of December 2017. We also plan for January 2018, tackle our four-quarter breakdown, review our stats and set goals and projects for the new year. We hope that this episode will inspire you to thoroughly review your own past business year and set thorough goals and projects as you move into 2018.
In this episode, we outline the difference between a goal and a project, take you through The Follow Through Method and encourage you to always to set your good, better, best scenario for your income goals. We’ll be sharing what we’ve learnt and what we’ll be doing differently in 2018. Just a heads up: This is going to be a long episode of calculator crunching and in-the-moment chatting! So grab some coffee, get comfy and know that 2018 is going to be great, if you break it down!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Happy New Year everybody! We’ve just returned back after a 12-week holiday and today, we travel back in time to do our monthly review of December 2017. We also plan for January 2018, tackle our four-quarter breakdown, review our stats and set goals and projects for the new year. We hope that this episode will inspire you to thoroughly review your own past business year and set thorough goals and projects as you move into 2018.</p><p>In this episode, we outline the difference between a goal and a project, take you through The Follow Through Method and encourage you to always to set your good, better, best scenario for your income goals. We’ll be sharing what we’ve learnt and what we’ll be doing differently in 2018. Just a heads up: This is going to be a long episode of calculator crunching and in-the-moment chatting! So grab some coffee, get comfy and know that 2018 is going to be great, if you break it down!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thest">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3806</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[db605ad469f6fe7744dd8f2bb685e5d6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2002383516.mp3?updated=1661557357" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>161: Workflow, workflow, workflow with Laura Neff</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/establishing-effective-workflows-to-balance-life-and-a-thriving-business</link>
      <description>On today’s show, we are absolutely delighted to welcome a great friend and massive inspiration, the one and only Laura Neff from Laura Lee Creative! Laura is a wedding and brand photographer as well as an educator in the creative community. Her particular style of creative magic has enabled her to share her expertise on workflow, systems, productivity and time management, all things every one of us can always improve upon.
Her values and priorities have pushed her to succeed in her own special way and now she is helping others follow their dreams and we absolutely love Laura for it! We get the lowdown on all things Laura, and Laura just gives gem after gem of great inspiration. Trust us, you are not going to want to miss this episode. Tune in and let’s go!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 08 Jan 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Workflow, workflow, workflow with Laura Neff</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>161</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>On today’s show, we are absolutely delighted to welcome a great friend and massive inspiration, the one and only Laura Neff from Laura Lee Creative! Laura is a wedding and brand photographer as well as an educator in the creative community. Her...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s show, we are absolutely delighted to welcome a great friend and massive inspiration, the one and only Laura Neff from Laura Lee Creative! Laura is a wedding and brand photographer as well as an educator in the creative community. Her particular style of creative magic has enabled her to share her expertise on workflow, systems, productivity and time management, all things every one of us can always improve upon.
Her values and priorities have pushed her to succeed in her own special way and now she is helping others follow their dreams and we absolutely love Laura for it! We get the lowdown on all things Laura, and Laura just gives gem after gem of great inspiration. Trust us, you are not going to want to miss this episode. Tune in and let’s go!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s show, we are absolutely delighted to welcome a great friend and massive inspiration, the one and only Laura Neff from Laura Lee Creative! Laura is a wedding and brand photographer as well as an educator in the creative community. Her particular style of creative magic has enabled her to share her expertise on workflow, systems, productivity and time management, all things every one of us can always improve upon.</p><p>Her values and priorities have pushed her to succeed in her own special way and now she is helping others follow their dreams and we absolutely love Laura for it! We get the lowdown on all things Laura, and Laura just gives gem after gem of great inspiration. Trust us, you are not going to want to miss this episode. Tune in and let’s go!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2993</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d92e84f8b57c160c48aed94fa122c95d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2287289168.mp3?updated=1661557216" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>160: Our Word of the Year and Why It Matters to You</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/our-word-of-the-year-and-why-it-matters-to-you</link>
      <description>In this episode, we are talking about our word year. We’ll be reflecting on our words for 2017 and revealing our words for 2018. There is an energy shift that happens at the beginning of the year and the word of the year is the word that is to establish the tone for the entire year. We really want this episode to inspire you to pick your own keywords, so that whenever you get overwhelmed, lost or can’t see the light at the end of the tunnel – you have this word to rely on.
We want you to remember the headspace you were in when you chose that word at the beginning of the year. So use this time, use this energy shift, to choose your word. Is it “hustle”? Or “relax”? We want to know what your word of the year is going to be? Whatever, it is, write it down and put it up somewhere where you can see it. Add this word to your vision board… it’s amazing what it can do! Take a listen.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 05 Jan 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our Word of the Year and Why It Matters to You</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>160</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, we are talking about our word year. We’ll be reflecting on our words for 2017 and revealing our words for 2018. There is an energy shift that happens at the beginning of the year and the word of the year is the word that is to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode, we are talking about our word year. We’ll be reflecting on our words for 2017 and revealing our words for 2018. There is an energy shift that happens at the beginning of the year and the word of the year is the word that is to establish the tone for the entire year. We really want this episode to inspire you to pick your own keywords, so that whenever you get overwhelmed, lost or can’t see the light at the end of the tunnel – you have this word to rely on.
We want you to remember the headspace you were in when you chose that word at the beginning of the year. So use this time, use this energy shift, to choose your word. Is it “hustle”? Or “relax”? We want to know what your word of the year is going to be? Whatever, it is, write it down and put it up somewhere where you can see it. Add this word to your vision board… it’s amazing what it can do! Take a listen.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode, we are talking about our word year. We’ll be reflecting on our words for 2017 and revealing our words for 2018. There is an energy shift that happens at the beginning of the year and the word of the year is the word that is to establish the tone for the entire year. We really want this episode to inspire you to pick your own keywords, so that whenever you get overwhelmed, lost or can’t see the light at the end of the tunnel – you have this word to rely on.</p><p>We want you to remember the headspace you were in when you chose that word at the beginning of the year. So use this time, use this energy shift, to choose your word. Is it “hustle”? Or “relax”? We want to know what your word of the year is going to be? Whatever, it is, write it down and put it up somewhere where you can see it. Add this word to your vision board… it’s amazing what it can do! Take a listen.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1719</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f74b99207a5a28a0c522918ef770ac9d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8387978631.mp3?updated=1661557012" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>159: Our Most Popular Episode of 2017: How to Replace Your Income (in 30 Days) After Getting Laid Off with Abagail Pumphrey</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/our-most-popular-episode-2017</link>
      <description>Today, we get to hear from Abagail. I sat doing to interview her to learn all about her journey before Think Creative Collective was born. Abagail graduated from Kansas State University with a degree in Fine Art in Graphic Design and a minor in Business Administration. Before the launch of TCC, Abagail had an incredible five plus years of business and design experience accelerating companies of all shapes and sizes. She also shares about her time running her free lance design business. One of the most amazing stories is how, within 30 days of getting the pink slip, she was able to completely replace her corporate income. Wow!
Before the inevitable moment came along, Abagail created a website and started blogging five days a week. Eventually she grew her own business and worked day and night to find success. So if you are just starting out in the business world, this episode is definitely one for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 Jan 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our Most Popular Episode of 2017: How to Replace Your Income (in 30 Days) After Getting Laid Off with Abagail Pumphrey</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>159</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, we get to hear from Abagail. I sat doing to interview her to learn all about her journey before Think Creative Collective was born. Abagail graduated from Kansas State University with a degree in Fine Art in Graphic Design and a minor in...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we get to hear from Abagail. I sat doing to interview her to learn all about her journey before Think Creative Collective was born. Abagail graduated from Kansas State University with a degree in Fine Art in Graphic Design and a minor in Business Administration. Before the launch of TCC, Abagail had an incredible five plus years of business and design experience accelerating companies of all shapes and sizes. She also shares about her time running her free lance design business. One of the most amazing stories is how, within 30 days of getting the pink slip, she was able to completely replace her corporate income. Wow!
Before the inevitable moment came along, Abagail created a website and started blogging five days a week. Eventually she grew her own business and worked day and night to find success. So if you are just starting out in the business world, this episode is definitely one for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we get to hear from Abagail. I sat doing to interview her to learn all about her journey before Think Creative Collective was born. Abagail graduated from Kansas State University with a degree in Fine Art in Graphic Design and a minor in Business Administration. Before the launch of TCC, Abagail had an incredible five plus years of business and design experience accelerating companies of all shapes and sizes. She also shares about her time running her free lance design business. One of the most amazing stories is how, within 30 days of getting the pink slip, she was able to completely replace her corporate income. Wow!</p><p>Before the inevitable moment came along, Abagail created a website and started blogging five days a week. Eventually she grew her own business and worked day and night to find success. So if you are just starting out in the business world, this episode is definitely one for you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2548</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[49df502ddc92a728948c1fd00762cda8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9396026129.mp3?updated=1662580257" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>158: TCC 2018 Bucket List</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-tcc-2018-bucket-list</link>
      <description>Today, we are going over our 2018 TCC bucket list. Yep, that’s right we are confirming our 2018 dreams it into the world so that you can hopefully be inspired and hold us accountable! We want to challenge you to, after this episode, go and write down the things that are on your heart for 2018.
This is different to goal setting in that these are things you really want to affirm into your life. They don’t have to be business related, even though many of ours are. They can also be affirmations about your family or personal life too. Today, we are going to go over our bucket list in no particular order and in the next episode, we’ll be setting the goals list that will help us achieve them. So let’s jump in and get this thing started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show, notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 01 Jan 2018 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>TCC 2018 Bucket List</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>158</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, we are going over our 2018 TCC bucket list. Yep, that’s right we are confirming our 2018 dreams it into the world so that you can hopefully be inspired and hold us accountable! We want to challenge you to, after this episode, go and write...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we are going over our 2018 TCC bucket list. Yep, that’s right we are confirming our 2018 dreams it into the world so that you can hopefully be inspired and hold us accountable! We want to challenge you to, after this episode, go and write down the things that are on your heart for 2018.
This is different to goal setting in that these are things you really want to affirm into your life. They don’t have to be business related, even though many of ours are. They can also be affirmations about your family or personal life too. Today, we are going to go over our bucket list in no particular order and in the next episode, we’ll be setting the goals list that will help us achieve them. So let’s jump in and get this thing started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show, notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we are going over our 2018 TCC bucket list. Yep, that’s right we are confirming our 2018 dreams it into the world so that you can hopefully be inspired and hold us accountable! We want to challenge you to, after this episode, go and write down the things that are on your heart for 2018.</p><p>This is different to goal setting in that these are things you really want to affirm into your life. They don’t have to be business related, even though many of ours are. They can also be affirmations about your family or personal life too. Today, we are going to go over our bucket list in no particular order and in the next episode, we’ll be setting the goals list that will help us achieve them. So let’s jump in and get this thing started!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show, notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2388</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9e54621a3555efdb19cc8e96cdf2381f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3263574623.mp3?updated=1662557536" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>157: How Burning Your Bridges Pays Off (Big Time) with Jessica Rodriquez of Day Dream Achiever</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-burning-your-bridges-pays-off-big-time</link>
      <description>On today’s show we have a very special guest to share with our listeners, none other than Jessica Rodriguez! Jessica runs The Day Dream Achiever and is a Business and Visibility Strategist and Podcast Host. Through her business she helps purpose-driven women scale their online business to six figure years. We love Jessica’s attitude towards achieving the dreams that you have always wanted! One of the key aspects of Jessica’s approach is her idea of burning bridges as means to growth. This may sound a little crazy but bear with us, you’re going to want to hear just how this idea can help you transition from a small, stressful operation to a profitable and flourishing one!
Within the first year of her business, she went from working 4 jobs and carrying $120k worth of debt to replacing her income to become a full-time lifestyle entrepreneur - along with becoming completely consumer, debt free just a few years later. When she’s not helping people create massive growth in their online business, you can find her curled up on the couch with her husband and fur-babies, Netflix binging or traveling to the next adventure life brings. Tune in to hear all about it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 29 Dec 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How Burning Your Bridges Pays Off (Big Time) with Jessica Rodriquez of Day Dream Achiever</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>157</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>On today’s show we have a very special guest to share with our listeners, none other than Jessica Rodriguez! Jessica runs The Day Dream Achiever and is a Business and Visibility Strategist and Podcast Host. Through her business she helps...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s show we have a very special guest to share with our listeners, none other than Jessica Rodriguez! Jessica runs The Day Dream Achiever and is a Business and Visibility Strategist and Podcast Host. Through her business she helps purpose-driven women scale their online business to six figure years. We love Jessica’s attitude towards achieving the dreams that you have always wanted! One of the key aspects of Jessica’s approach is her idea of burning bridges as means to growth. This may sound a little crazy but bear with us, you’re going to want to hear just how this idea can help you transition from a small, stressful operation to a profitable and flourishing one!
Within the first year of her business, she went from working 4 jobs and carrying $120k worth of debt to replacing her income to become a full-time lifestyle entrepreneur - along with becoming completely consumer, debt free just a few years later. When she’s not helping people create massive growth in their online business, you can find her curled up on the couch with her husband and fur-babies, Netflix binging or traveling to the next adventure life brings. Tune in to hear all about it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s show we have a very special guest to share with our listeners, none other than Jessica Rodriguez! Jessica runs The Day Dream Achiever and is a Business and Visibility Strategist and Podcast Host. Through her business she helps purpose-driven women scale their online business to six figure years. We love Jessica’s attitude towards achieving the dreams that you have always wanted! One of the key aspects of Jessica’s approach is her idea of burning bridges as means to growth. This may sound a little crazy but bear with us, you’re going to want to hear just how this idea can help you transition from a small, stressful operation to a profitable and flourishing one!</p><p>Within the first year of her business, she went from working 4 jobs and carrying $120k worth of debt to replacing her income to become a full-time lifestyle entrepreneur - along with becoming completely consumer, debt free just a few years later. When she’s not helping people create massive growth in their online business, you can find her curled up on the couch with her husband and fur-babies, Netflix binging or traveling to the next adventure life brings. Tune in to hear all about it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2631</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e0837f7d345b8dca92d8d84ee4a1aab6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1960467992.mp3?updated=1662557669" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>156: Post Mortem of Our Free Challenge + Launch of Our Flagship Program</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/post-mortem-of-our-free-challenge-launch-of-our-flagship-program</link>
      <description>Today, we’re talking about the launch baby! The breakdown, the numbers, the data and the takeaways. For the second time this year we did our Five Days To Launch challenge and there were some major hiccups going into it! In total, we spent $20,427.64 on this launch and we made… drumroll… $126,716, in just three weeks! Although we spent way more than anticipated and didn’t reach our $200,000 target, this was still our biggest launch of the year!
But a launch just happen and the money certainly doesn’t just fall into your pocket. There is so much work that goes into making a launch happen. There is a lot of learning curves, risks and unexpected surprises that will get thrown at you. We had a lot of roadblocks along the way of this particular launch and we’d like to share these with you today. Learn from our mistakes, take everything with a pinch of salt and get ready for takeoff! Take a listen.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 27 Dec 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Post Mortem of Our Free Challenge + Launch of Our Flagship Program</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>156</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, we’re talking about the launch baby! The breakdown, the numbers, the data and the takeaways. For the second time this year we did our Five Days To Launch challenge and there were some major hiccups going into it! In total, we spent $20,427.64...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we’re talking about the launch baby! The breakdown, the numbers, the data and the takeaways. For the second time this year we did our Five Days To Launch challenge and there were some major hiccups going into it! In total, we spent $20,427.64 on this launch and we made… drumroll… $126,716, in just three weeks! Although we spent way more than anticipated and didn’t reach our $200,000 target, this was still our biggest launch of the year!
But a launch just happen and the money certainly doesn’t just fall into your pocket. There is so much work that goes into making a launch happen. There is a lot of learning curves, risks and unexpected surprises that will get thrown at you. We had a lot of roadblocks along the way of this particular launch and we’d like to share these with you today. Learn from our mistakes, take everything with a pinch of salt and get ready for takeoff! Take a listen.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we’re talking about the launch baby! The breakdown, the numbers, the data and the takeaways. For the second time this year we did our Five Days To Launch challenge and there were some major hiccups going into it! In total, we spent $20,427.64 on this launch and we made… drumroll… $126,716, in just three weeks! Although we spent way more than anticipated and didn’t reach our $200,000 target, this was still our biggest launch of the year!</p><p>But a launch just happen and the money certainly doesn’t just fall into your pocket. There is so much work that goes into making a launch happen. There is a lot of learning curves, risks and unexpected surprises that will get thrown at you. We had a lot of roadblocks along the way of this particular launch and we’d like to share these with you today. Learn from our mistakes, take everything with a pinch of salt and get ready for takeoff! Take a listen.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3037</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d94a319c893ee0c5a20b804a5e96d76f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6488572545.mp3?updated=1662557732" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>155: Scaling Your VA Business with AllieDanae Walker of the Social Walker Agency</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/scaling-your-va-business</link>
      <description>On today’s episode we welcome our good friend and social media whizz Allie Danae Walker. Allie owns a Virtual Assistant and Media Managing company called of The Social Walker Agency. She works with companies, running their online presence and keeping their social platforms in check. We are actually lucky enough to say that we have had first-hand experience with Allie while she has been the VA for The Strategy Hour Podcast! We love Allie and know you will too and we cannot wait to share all her knowledge with our listeners!
What are some of the ways that you can apply for a Virtual Assistant position? How do you grow a small, one-person operation into a company with employees and assistants of its own? What can companies looking for VAs do to ensure the healthy and successful relationships in this regard? If any of these questions sound faintly familiar, or if you just want to get the low down on an important aspect of present-day business then we know this episode is for you. Tune in to hear more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 25 Dec 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Scaling Your VA Business with AllieDanae Walker of the Social Walker Agency</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>155</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>On today’s episode we welcome our good friend and social media whizz Allie Danae Walker. Allie owns a Virtual Assistant and Media Managing company called of The Social Walker Agency. She works with companies, running their online presence and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s episode we welcome our good friend and social media whizz Allie Danae Walker. Allie owns a Virtual Assistant and Media Managing company called of The Social Walker Agency. She works with companies, running their online presence and keeping their social platforms in check. We are actually lucky enough to say that we have had first-hand experience with Allie while she has been the VA for The Strategy Hour Podcast! We love Allie and know you will too and we cannot wait to share all her knowledge with our listeners!
What are some of the ways that you can apply for a Virtual Assistant position? How do you grow a small, one-person operation into a company with employees and assistants of its own? What can companies looking for VAs do to ensure the healthy and successful relationships in this regard? If any of these questions sound faintly familiar, or if you just want to get the low down on an important aspect of present-day business then we know this episode is for you. Tune in to hear more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s episode we welcome our good friend and social media whizz Allie Danae Walker. Allie owns a Virtual Assistant and Media Managing company called of The Social Walker Agency. She works with companies, running their online presence and keeping their social platforms in check. We are actually lucky enough to say that we have had first-hand experience with Allie while she has been the VA for The Strategy Hour Podcast! We love Allie and know you will too and we cannot wait to share all her knowledge with our listeners!</p><p>What are some of the ways that you can apply for a Virtual Assistant position? How do you grow a small, one-person operation into a company with employees and assistants of its own? What can companies looking for VAs do to ensure the healthy and successful relationships in this regard? If any of these questions sound faintly familiar, or if you just want to get the low down on an important aspect of present-day business then we know this episode is for you. Tune in to hear more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2721</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[49cce4ec0614aebe5535cd80f32a5608]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5228940477.mp3?updated=1661805733" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>154: Setting Your Goals for 2018</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/setting-your-goals-for-2018</link>
      <description>2018 is right around the corner and if you’re feeling flustered about all the things you want to do and achieve, this episode is here to help. Today, we are talking about goal setting. We look at the importance of reflection in being able to move forward and why you need to analyze what worked and what didn’t for 2017, to help pave the way to a more successful 2018. We also take a look at how you can set attainable goals, identify your money strategy and the value of being SMART.
Often entrepreneurs veer away from their goals if they haven’t been clearly set. This results in them spending time of tasks that aren’t going to generate them any income or help them achieve their goal. We want to ensure that you are setting the right goals to grow and scale your business effectively and this episode is here to remind you that if you break your big dreams down into day-to-day tasks – that they can be achieved! So start off your 2018 with a bang by listening to this episode for actionable steps toward your own attainable goals.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 22 Dec 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Setting Your Goals for 2018</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>154</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>2018 is right around the corner and if you’re feeling flustered about all the things you want to do and achieve, this episode is here to help. Today, we are talking about goal setting. We look at the importance of reflection in being able to move...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>2018 is right around the corner and if you’re feeling flustered about all the things you want to do and achieve, this episode is here to help. Today, we are talking about goal setting. We look at the importance of reflection in being able to move forward and why you need to analyze what worked and what didn’t for 2017, to help pave the way to a more successful 2018. We also take a look at how you can set attainable goals, identify your money strategy and the value of being SMART.
Often entrepreneurs veer away from their goals if they haven’t been clearly set. This results in them spending time of tasks that aren’t going to generate them any income or help them achieve their goal. We want to ensure that you are setting the right goals to grow and scale your business effectively and this episode is here to remind you that if you break your big dreams down into day-to-day tasks – that they can be achieved! So start off your 2018 with a bang by listening to this episode for actionable steps toward your own attainable goals.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>2018 is right around the corner and if you’re feeling flustered about all the things you want to do and achieve, this episode is here to help. Today, we are talking about goal setting. We look at the importance of reflection in being able to move forward and why you need to analyze what worked and what didn’t for 2017, to help pave the way to a more successful 2018. We also take a look at how you can set attainable goals, identify your money strategy and the value of being SMART.</p><p>Often entrepreneurs veer away from their goals if they haven’t been clearly set. This results in them spending time of tasks that aren’t going to generate them any income or help them achieve their goal. We want to ensure that you are setting the right goals to grow and scale your business effectively and this episode is here to remind you that if you break your big dreams down into day-to-day tasks – that they can be achieved! So start off your 2018 with a bang by listening to this episode for actionable steps toward your own attainable goals.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2128</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1b0d9f5899274012f526b5b99af0f53a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7109586254.mp3?updated=1661805755" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>153: 8 Tactics for Creating, Promoting, and Sharing Valuable Video Content, With Andrea Corson</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/8-tactics-for-creating-valuable-video-content</link>
      <description>In this episode, we welcome the video queen, Andrea Corson. Andrea is an Emmy-nominated television producer, digital strategist and consultant. She has created awesome video for a wide range of clients including Google, Disney, Covergirl, DSW, Carnival Cruise Line and Nordstrom Rack, to name just a few. Everybody is always saying that video is where it’s at, video is where you have to be and video is what you need to be investing your time. But how do you actually get started with the video component of your business, with little to no experience? Well, Andrea has devised actionable steps to get you started and moving forward with video.
Whether you’re looking to improve your editing skills, wondering what equipment to use or where to market your video – Andrea has it all mapped out. In this episode, she is going to give us the steps to get started with video, tell us how to prepare and where to market. If you’re anything like us, and have been talking about starting a vlog for the past eleven years and are feeling like a total fool sitting down in front of a camera – then this episode is a must for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 20 Dec 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>8 Tactics for Creating, Promoting, and Sharing Valuable Video Content, With Andrea Corson</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>153</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, we welcome the video queen, Andrea Corson. Andrea is an Emmy-nominated television producer, digital strategist and consultant. She has created awesome video for a wide range of clients including Google, Disney, Covergirl, DSW,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode, we welcome the video queen, Andrea Corson. Andrea is an Emmy-nominated television producer, digital strategist and consultant. She has created awesome video for a wide range of clients including Google, Disney, Covergirl, DSW, Carnival Cruise Line and Nordstrom Rack, to name just a few. Everybody is always saying that video is where it’s at, video is where you have to be and video is what you need to be investing your time. But how do you actually get started with the video component of your business, with little to no experience? Well, Andrea has devised actionable steps to get you started and moving forward with video.
Whether you’re looking to improve your editing skills, wondering what equipment to use or where to market your video – Andrea has it all mapped out. In this episode, she is going to give us the steps to get started with video, tell us how to prepare and where to market. If you’re anything like us, and have been talking about starting a vlog for the past eleven years and are feeling like a total fool sitting down in front of a camera – then this episode is a must for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode, we welcome the video queen, Andrea Corson. Andrea is an Emmy-nominated television producer, digital strategist and consultant. She has created awesome video for a wide range of clients including Google, Disney, Covergirl, DSW, Carnival Cruise Line and Nordstrom Rack, to name just a few. Everybody is always saying that video is where it’s at, video is where you have to be and video is what you need to be investing your time. But how do you actually get started with the video component of your business, with little to no experience? Well, Andrea has devised actionable steps to get you started and moving forward with video.</p><p>Whether you’re looking to improve your editing skills, wondering what equipment to use or where to market your video – Andrea has it all mapped out. In this episode, she is going to give us the steps to get started with video, tell us how to prepare and where to market. If you’re anything like us, and have been talking about starting a vlog for the past eleven years and are feeling like a total fool sitting down in front of a camera – then this episode is a must for you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2542</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[875f9d1084a73df0db9a725e6c41749a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6863130722.mp3?updated=1661805738" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>152: 13 Secrets to Work Less and Live More</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/13-secrets-to-work-less-and-live-more</link>
      <description>Today on the show, we are dishing out all the secret sauce! We get asked all the time, “How do you get so much done and not work an insane amount of hours?” And today, we are going to be answering this question by looking really specifically at the systems and software that we use to make our business happen and give us the time to have a four-day weekend if we want it!
If you have been looking into these systems for your own business, this episode might just help you to narrow down your options. We are going to run through our list of apps and programs and tell you the pros of each system and how it helps our business function without having to do all the nitty-gritty little things throughout the day. If you are looking for a way to automate your business as much as possible, communicate effectively with your team, and do half the work in half the amount of time – then this episode is for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 18 Dec 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>13 Secrets to Work Less and Live More</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>152</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show, we are dishing out all the secret sauce! We get asked all the time, “How do you get so much done and not work an insane amount of hours?” And today, we are going to be answering this question by looking really specifically at...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show, we are dishing out all the secret sauce! We get asked all the time, “How do you get so much done and not work an insane amount of hours?” And today, we are going to be answering this question by looking really specifically at the systems and software that we use to make our business happen and give us the time to have a four-day weekend if we want it!
If you have been looking into these systems for your own business, this episode might just help you to narrow down your options. We are going to run through our list of apps and programs and tell you the pros of each system and how it helps our business function without having to do all the nitty-gritty little things throughout the day. If you are looking for a way to automate your business as much as possible, communicate effectively with your team, and do half the work in half the amount of time – then this episode is for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show, we are dishing out all the secret sauce! We get asked all the time, “How do you get so much done and not work an insane amount of hours?” And today, we are going to be answering this question by looking really specifically at the systems and software that we use to make our business happen and give us the time to have a four-day weekend if we want it!</p><p>If you have been looking into these systems for your own business, this episode might just help you to narrow down your options. We are going to run through our list of apps and programs and tell you the pros of each system and how it helps our business function without having to do all the nitty-gritty little things throughout the day. If you are looking for a way to automate your business as much as possible, communicate effectively with your team, and do half the work in half the amount of time – then this episode is for you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2718</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[defdb15fdad6638069fdcb68eb281e21]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9440440342.mp3?updated=1661805780" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>151: A (Soon To Be) Million Dollar Bow Business with Shunta Grant of Because of Zoe</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/a-soon-to-be-million-dollar-bow-business</link>
      <description>We are very excited to welcome Shunta Grant as our guest on today’s show. Shunta is the creator of Because of Zoe Designs, host of the Business, Life &amp; Joy podcast, and business educator teaching entrepreneurs how to build and grow successful businesses that keep customers coming back. Having left the practice of law for full-time entrepreneurship, Shunta is an ardent advocate for enterprising women who want to take control of their lives by turning their talents and abilities into satisfying and profitable businesses.
Are you looking to turn your passion into a business? Or looking for new way to energize your company? Shunta is a great example of approaching your goals with purpose and clarity and we know our listeners will find her inspiring to say the least. Shunta teaches entrepreneurs how to confidently prioritize their life all while putting in the work that is necessary to see tangible and measurable results. No matter what your personal brand or goals are, if you are serious about success, this episode is for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 15 Dec 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>A (Soon To Be) Million Dollar Bow Business with Shunta Grant of Because of Zoe</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>151</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are very excited to welcome Shunta Grant as our guest on today’s show. Shunta is the creator of Because of Zoe Designs, host of the Business, Life &amp; Joy podcast, and business educator teaching entrepreneurs how to build and grow successful...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are very excited to welcome Shunta Grant as our guest on today’s show. Shunta is the creator of Because of Zoe Designs, host of the Business, Life &amp; Joy podcast, and business educator teaching entrepreneurs how to build and grow successful businesses that keep customers coming back. Having left the practice of law for full-time entrepreneurship, Shunta is an ardent advocate for enterprising women who want to take control of their lives by turning their talents and abilities into satisfying and profitable businesses.
Are you looking to turn your passion into a business? Or looking for new way to energize your company? Shunta is a great example of approaching your goals with purpose and clarity and we know our listeners will find her inspiring to say the least. Shunta teaches entrepreneurs how to confidently prioritize their life all while putting in the work that is necessary to see tangible and measurable results. No matter what your personal brand or goals are, if you are serious about success, this episode is for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are very excited to welcome Shunta Grant as our guest on today’s show. Shunta is the creator of Because of Zoe Designs, host of the Business, Life &amp; Joy podcast, and business educator teaching entrepreneurs how to build and grow successful businesses that keep customers coming back. Having left the practice of law for full-time entrepreneurship, Shunta is an ardent advocate for enterprising women who want to take control of their lives by turning their talents and abilities into satisfying and profitable businesses.</p><p>Are you looking to turn your passion into a business? Or looking for new way to energize your company? Shunta is a great example of approaching your goals with purpose and clarity and we know our listeners will find her inspiring to say the least. Shunta teaches entrepreneurs how to confidently prioritize their life all while putting in the work that is necessary to see tangible and measurable results. No matter what your personal brand or goals are, if you are serious about success, this episode is for you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2924</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1902e35a51d16fb3ae4cdd58e5151999]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6238685591.mp3?updated=1661805721" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>150: Communicating with a Growing Team + Our New Favorite Free App</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/communicating-with-a-growing-team-our-new-favorite-free-app</link>
      <description>In today’s episode, we’re going to walk you through how we went from communicating as single business owners, to a partnership, to now growing a team. We want to show you how communication systems can evolve and how we keep our business organized through our various communication tools, old and new. We have come a long way from endless phone calls and constant emailing and want to share with you how we stay on top of projects and ensure all of our work gets done and our team is on top of their tasks.
We have tried many different communication channels; our most recent addition being Slack, our new favorite (and yes, free!) app which we are going to tell you all about. Growing a team is not easy and if you are feeling overwhelmed with slipping and unproductive communication flows, we want you to know that there are systems out there to help you. It’s time to do your research and fix your ish! This episode is here to help you do it, so take a listen!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 13 Dec 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Communicating with a Growing Team + Our New Favorite Free App</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>150</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In today’s episode, we’re going to walk you through how we went from communicating as single business owners, to a partnership, to now growing a team. We want to show you how communication systems can evolve and how we keep our business organized...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today’s episode, we’re going to walk you through how we went from communicating as single business owners, to a partnership, to now growing a team. We want to show you how communication systems can evolve and how we keep our business organized through our various communication tools, old and new. We have come a long way from endless phone calls and constant emailing and want to share with you how we stay on top of projects and ensure all of our work gets done and our team is on top of their tasks.
We have tried many different communication channels; our most recent addition being Slack, our new favorite (and yes, free!) app which we are going to tell you all about. Growing a team is not easy and if you are feeling overwhelmed with slipping and unproductive communication flows, we want you to know that there are systems out there to help you. It’s time to do your research and fix your ish! This episode is here to help you do it, so take a listen!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today’s episode, we’re going to walk you through how we went from communicating as single business owners, to a partnership, to now growing a team. We want to show you how communication systems can evolve and how we keep our business organized through our various communication tools, old and new. We have come a long way from endless phone calls and constant emailing and want to share with you how we stay on top of projects and ensure all of our work gets done and our team is on top of their tasks.</p><p>We have tried many different communication channels; our most recent addition being Slack, our new favorite (and yes, free!) app which we are going to tell you all about. Growing a team is not easy and if you are feeling overwhelmed with slipping and unproductive communication flows, we want you to know that there are systems out there to help you. It’s time to do your research and fix your ish! This episode is here to help you do it, so take a listen!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1791</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[748e04dc02ad2c9d2d220738de537816]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2183722829.mp3?updated=1661805550" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>149: How to Go From Breakdown to Breakthrough with Mary Shores</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-go-from-breakdown-to-breakthrough</link>
      <description>In today’s episode, we welcome Mary Shores. Mary is the international bestselling author of Conscious Communications: Your Step-by-Step Guide to Harnessing the Power of Your Words to Change Your Mind, Your Choices, and Your Life. As an author, speaker, entrepreneur, and CEO, Mary teaches individuals and businesses to fearlessly create their own realities by using scientific methods and practical personal development.
Have you ever been stuck in a rut? Found yourself overwhelmed with problems or drowning in negative self-talk? Well, Mary has a scientifically backed, five-step process to help get you from breakdown to breakthrough and today, she’ll be talking us through it. In this episode, we’ll be talking about the power words have in your life, about Mary’s cleanse and clog formula, how to turn a possibility into a probability, make your problems smaller and come out on the bright side of life. If you’ve got some shit in your life, then you’ve got to listen to this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 11 Dec 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Go From Breakdown to Breakthrough with Mary Shores</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>149</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In today’s episode, we welcome Mary Shores. Mary is the international bestselling author of Conscious Communications: Your Step-by-Step Guide to Harnessing the Power of Your Words to Change Your Mind, Your Choices, and Your Life. As an author,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today’s episode, we welcome Mary Shores. Mary is the international bestselling author of Conscious Communications: Your Step-by-Step Guide to Harnessing the Power of Your Words to Change Your Mind, Your Choices, and Your Life. As an author, speaker, entrepreneur, and CEO, Mary teaches individuals and businesses to fearlessly create their own realities by using scientific methods and practical personal development.
Have you ever been stuck in a rut? Found yourself overwhelmed with problems or drowning in negative self-talk? Well, Mary has a scientifically backed, five-step process to help get you from breakdown to breakthrough and today, she’ll be talking us through it. In this episode, we’ll be talking about the power words have in your life, about Mary’s cleanse and clog formula, how to turn a possibility into a probability, make your problems smaller and come out on the bright side of life. If you’ve got some shit in your life, then you’ve got to listen to this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today’s episode, we welcome Mary Shores. Mary is the international bestselling author of <em>Conscious Communications: Your Step-by-Step Guide to Harnessing the Power of Your Words to Change Your Mind, Your Choices, and Your Life.</em> As an author, speaker, entrepreneur, and CEO, Mary teaches individuals and businesses to fearlessly create their own realities by using scientific methods and practical personal development.</p><p>Have you ever been stuck in a rut? Found yourself overwhelmed with problems or drowning in negative self-talk? Well, Mary has a scientifically backed, five-step process to help get you from breakdown to breakthrough and today, she’ll be talking us through it. In this episode, we’ll be talking about the power words have in your life, about Mary’s cleanse and clog formula, how to turn a possibility into a probability, make your problems smaller and come out on the bright side of life. If you’ve got some shit in your life, then you’ve got to listen to this episode!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2400</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[14ed20a3c1d3b78d96e3640cdb5cd155]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8967319537.mp3?updated=1661805319" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>148: Decisions Suck, They Don't Have To</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/2017/12/8/decisions-suck-but-they-dont-have-to</link>
      <description>‘Tis the holidays! And we’re heading into good, stressful, happy seasons in business and in life. This is a busy time where we are forced to make many decisions. Are you doing the whole indecision, never making a decision thing? Are you second-guessing every move and letting the process of making a decision stress you out so much that you don’t make a decision about anything, at all? If this sounds like you, then we want you to use this episode as a little fairy godmother on your shoulder to help you decide.
Today we are talking about making decisions and how best to make them. There are so many decisions we have to make every day. Decisions about how many blogposts you should have cued up, how much material you should order or where you should have something shipped to. It can become overwhelming, but we want you to know that there really is a yes or a no to all these questions. All you have to do, first and foremost, is remind yourself that you are the boss and no one is as equipped as you are to decide! Take a listen and take action!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 08 Dec 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Decisions Suck, They Don't Have To</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>148</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>‘Tis the holidays! And we’re heading into good, stressful, happy seasons in business and in life. This is a busy time where we are forced to make many decisions. Are you doing the whole indecision, never making a decision thing? Are you...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>‘Tis the holidays! And we’re heading into good, stressful, happy seasons in business and in life. This is a busy time where we are forced to make many decisions. Are you doing the whole indecision, never making a decision thing? Are you second-guessing every move and letting the process of making a decision stress you out so much that you don’t make a decision about anything, at all? If this sounds like you, then we want you to use this episode as a little fairy godmother on your shoulder to help you decide.
Today we are talking about making decisions and how best to make them. There are so many decisions we have to make every day. Decisions about how many blogposts you should have cued up, how much material you should order or where you should have something shipped to. It can become overwhelming, but we want you to know that there really is a yes or a no to all these questions. All you have to do, first and foremost, is remind yourself that you are the boss and no one is as equipped as you are to decide! Take a listen and take action!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>‘Tis the holidays! And we’re heading into good, stressful, happy seasons in business and in life. This is a busy time where we are forced to make many decisions. Are you doing the whole indecision, never making a decision thing? Are you second-guessing every move and letting the process of making a decision stress you out so much that you don’t make a decision about anything, at all? If this sounds like you, then we want you to use this episode as a little fairy godmother on your shoulder to help you decide.</p><p>Today we are talking about making decisions and how best to make them. There are so many decisions we have to make every day. Decisions about how many blogposts you should have cued up, how much material you should order or where you should have something shipped to. It can become overwhelming, but we want you to know that there really is a yes or a no to all these questions. All you have to do, first and foremost, is remind yourself that you are the boss and no one is as equipped as you are to decide! Take a listen and take action!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1707</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f115839b7592ab8a5bb008b88a0bd2c2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5693733308.mp3?updated=1661805381" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>147: Prepping Your Product Based Business for the Holidays with Jordan Ellis</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/prepping-your-product-based-business-for-the-holidays</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we welcome back one of our BFF’s, Jordan Ellis, of Jordandené. Jordan owns a geek chic apparel company where she sells all the nerdy, girly stuff you could ever imagine – all across the country and the world. Jordan also does live events and sells her products online, making almost half of her annual revenue during the three to four-week holiday season! That’s right, ‘tis the season for sales!
So today, we are talking products and how to not miss out on opportunities and stress yourself out when it comes to the crazy holiday season. We discuss everything from the best time to start preparing for the holiday season, lining up your stock, handling Black Friday promotions, roping in assistance and how to get yourself super prepared for this exciting and rewarding time of the year. We want to encourage you to use this episode as your guiding light for the holiday season, whether for this year or next. It’s never too late to get prepared so that you can win in the realm of product. So let’s jump in and get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 06 Dec 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Prepping Your Product Based Business for the Holidays with Jordan Ellis</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>147</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we welcome back one of our BFF’s, Jordan Ellis, of Jordandené. Jordan owns a geek chic apparel company where she sells all the nerdy, girly stuff you could ever imagine – all across the country and the world. Jordan also does...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we welcome back one of our BFF’s, Jordan Ellis, of Jordandené. Jordan owns a geek chic apparel company where she sells all the nerdy, girly stuff you could ever imagine – all across the country and the world. Jordan also does live events and sells her products online, making almost half of her annual revenue during the three to four-week holiday season! That’s right, ‘tis the season for sales!
So today, we are talking products and how to not miss out on opportunities and stress yourself out when it comes to the crazy holiday season. We discuss everything from the best time to start preparing for the holiday season, lining up your stock, handling Black Friday promotions, roping in assistance and how to get yourself super prepared for this exciting and rewarding time of the year. We want to encourage you to use this episode as your guiding light for the holiday season, whether for this year or next. It’s never too late to get prepared so that you can win in the realm of product. So let’s jump in and get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we welcome back one of our BFF’s, Jordan Ellis, of Jordandené. Jordan owns a geek chic apparel company where she sells all the nerdy, girly stuff you could ever imagine – all across the country and the world. Jordan also does live events and sells her products online, making almost half of her annual revenue during the three to four-week holiday season! That’s right, ‘tis the season for sales!</p><p>So today, we are talking products and how to not miss out on opportunities and stress yourself out when it comes to the crazy holiday season. We discuss everything from the best time to start preparing for the holiday season, lining up your stock, handling Black Friday promotions, roping in assistance and how to get yourself super prepared for this exciting and rewarding time of the year. We want to encourage you to use this episode as your guiding light for the holiday season, whether for this year or next. It’s never too late to get prepared so that you can win in the realm of product. So let’s jump in and get started!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2717</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ddbcf729d667058f9007ae67e3697071]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4146316154.mp3?updated=1661805256" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>146: From an Invertebrate Biologist to a Floral Maven with Gina Thresher</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/from-an-invertebrate-biologist-to-a-floral-maven</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Gina Thresher. Gina is the founder of From the Ground Up Floral and she started out her journey, believe it or not, pursuing marine biology, DIY’ing her own wedding and eventually turning into a very talented florist in her industry. In her own words, she makes kick-ass floral arrangements, and we are talking more about her journey today. We are taking the idea outside of just the realm of a bouquet and really looking at it as a business and what she can add on.
Inside this episode we are talking about the transition of Gina’s hobby mindset to a business mindset and what it really looked like when she was chasing brides and chasing weddings, then finally realizing that she really needed to be paying attention to other pieces of her business. She shares with us some tactics and strategies that she was able to pull from The Strategy Academy to help her do that; figuring out what to do and when to do it to actually focus on your business holistically instead of just one tiny detail. We dive into everything form travelling the world to speak, workshops, educating other florists, and everything in between. This will spark you with some ideas that you can implement on your own business so that you are not just focusing on one tiny detail.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 04 Dec 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From an Invertebrate Biologist to a Floral Maven with Gina Thresher</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>146</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Gina Thresher. Gina is the founder of From the Ground Up Floral and she started out her journey, believe it or not, pursuing marine biology, DIY’ing her own wedding and eventually turning into a very talented florist in...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Gina Thresher. Gina is the founder of From the Ground Up Floral and she started out her journey, believe it or not, pursuing marine biology, DIY’ing her own wedding and eventually turning into a very talented florist in her industry. In her own words, she makes kick-ass floral arrangements, and we are talking more about her journey today. We are taking the idea outside of just the realm of a bouquet and really looking at it as a business and what she can add on.
Inside this episode we are talking about the transition of Gina’s hobby mindset to a business mindset and what it really looked like when she was chasing brides and chasing weddings, then finally realizing that she really needed to be paying attention to other pieces of her business. She shares with us some tactics and strategies that she was able to pull from The Strategy Academy to help her do that; figuring out what to do and when to do it to actually focus on your business holistically instead of just one tiny detail. We dive into everything form travelling the world to speak, workshops, educating other florists, and everything in between. This will spark you with some ideas that you can implement on your own business so that you are not just focusing on one tiny detail.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Gina Thresher. Gina is the founder of From the Ground Up Floral and she started out her journey, believe it or not, pursuing marine biology, DIY’ing her own wedding and eventually turning into a very talented florist in her industry. In her own words, she makes kick-ass floral arrangements, and we are talking more about her journey today. We are taking the idea outside of just the realm of a bouquet and really looking at it as a business and what she can add on.</p><p>Inside this episode we are talking about the transition of Gina’s hobby mindset to a business mindset and what it really looked like when she was chasing brides and chasing weddings, then finally realizing that she really needed to be paying attention to other pieces of her business. She shares with us some tactics and strategies that she was able to pull from The Strategy Academy to help her do that; figuring out what to do and when to do it to actually focus on your business holistically instead of just one tiny detail. We dive into everything form travelling the world to speak, workshops, educating other florists, and everything in between. This will spark you with some ideas that you can implement on your own business so that you are not just focusing on one tiny detail.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2099</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6c195a32d9cfdb600f6a92a8d2027cc3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9942123916.mp3?updated=1661805200" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>145: Starting from Scratch Fears &amp; Fumbles While Growing Our Side Hustles</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/starting-from-scratch-fears-fumbles-while-growing-our-side-hustles</link>
      <description>The cat’s out the bag! We have just started our own new businesses. Two different business. Two different industries. And we’re building them completely on our own. Emylee’s latest side-hustle is selling her own hand-painted artworks online, while Abbie has started an MLM business with Young Living products. In addition to TCC, we wanted to start something completely on our own and as exciting as it is – the truth is, we’re both a hot mess and are grappling with so many aspects of product-based entrepreneurship that we didn’t even expect as mentors in this field.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 01 Dec 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Starting from Scratch: Fears &amp; Fumbles While Growing Our Side Hustles</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>145</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>The cat’s out the bag! We have just started our own new businesses. Two different business. Two different industries. And we’re building them completely on our own. Emylee’s latest side-hustle is selling her own hand-painted artworks online,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>The cat’s out the bag! We have just started our own new businesses. Two different business. Two different industries. And we’re building them completely on our own. Emylee’s latest side-hustle is selling her own hand-painted artworks online, while Abbie has started an MLM business with Young Living products. In addition to TCC, we wanted to start something completely on our own and as exciting as it is – the truth is, we’re both a hot mess and are grappling with so many aspects of product-based entrepreneurship that we didn’t even expect as mentors in this field.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The cat’s out the bag! We have just started our own new businesses. Two different business. Two different industries. And we’re building them completely on our own. Emylee’s latest side-hustle is selling her own hand-painted artworks online, while Abbie has started an MLM business with Young Living products. In addition to TCC, we wanted to start something completely on our own and as exciting as it is – the truth is, we’re both a hot mess and are grappling with so many aspects of product-based entrepreneurship that we didn’t even expect as mentors in this field.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2294</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3dacd0adf8feba08d2409604a843d268]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9486338600.mp3?updated=1661805058" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>144: How We Put Our Business on Autopilot &amp; Had 12 Weeks of Paid Leave this Year</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-we-put-our-business-on-autopilot-and-had-12-weeks-of-paid-leave-this-year</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we are talking payments, money, and how it all happens. Now we know we toot our own horns all the time, and we are really freakin’ proud of ourselves for doing the work that we do; six-figure months, six-figure launches, just six-figure all the things! However, sometimes when you hear that from business owners, especially online, you often imagine that those people are working non-stop, night and day. But we want to come into the conversation today and remind you guys that we have never been those super-hustler type of creatives and entrepreneurs. It’s just not in our nature, and we literally want to do the opposite.
Inside this episode, we want to show you that this is totally attainable for you to have a successful business and not be working around the clock. It is all possible by setting up the right systems, having the right processes, offering the right products, and having all the things that make a great business. Success in business does NOT always mean that you have to be working nights and weekends or spending no time with your families. In fact, we don’t believe in working liking that at all because it’s literally not healthy. So if you are ready to put your business on autopilot, then you better tune in to this one!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 Nov 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How We Put Our Business on Autopilot &amp; Had 12 Weeks of Paid Leave this Year</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>144</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we are talking payments, money, and how it all happens. Now we know we toot our own horns all the time, and we are really freakin’ proud of ourselves for doing the work that we do; six-figure months, six-figure launches, just...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we are talking payments, money, and how it all happens. Now we know we toot our own horns all the time, and we are really freakin’ proud of ourselves for doing the work that we do; six-figure months, six-figure launches, just six-figure all the things! However, sometimes when you hear that from business owners, especially online, you often imagine that those people are working non-stop, night and day. But we want to come into the conversation today and remind you guys that we have never been those super-hustler type of creatives and entrepreneurs. It’s just not in our nature, and we literally want to do the opposite.
Inside this episode, we want to show you that this is totally attainable for you to have a successful business and not be working around the clock. It is all possible by setting up the right systems, having the right processes, offering the right products, and having all the things that make a great business. Success in business does NOT always mean that you have to be working nights and weekends or spending no time with your families. In fact, we don’t believe in working liking that at all because it’s literally not healthy. So if you are ready to put your business on autopilot, then you better tune in to this one!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we are talking payments, money, and how it all happens. Now we know we toot our own horns all the time, and we are really freakin’ proud of ourselves for doing the work that we do; six-figure months, six-figure launches, just six-figure all the things! However, sometimes when you hear that from business owners, especially online, you often imagine that those people are working non-stop, night and day. But we want to come into the conversation today and remind you guys that we have never been those super-hustler type of creatives and entrepreneurs. It’s just not in our nature, and we literally want to do the opposite.</p><p>Inside this episode, we want to show you that this is totally attainable for you to have a successful business and not be working around the clock. It is all possible by setting up the right systems, having the right processes, offering the right products, and having all the things that make a great business. Success in business does <em>NOT</em> always mean that you have to be working nights and weekends or spending no time with your families. In fact, we don’t believe in working liking that at all because it’s literally not healthy. So if you are ready to put your business on autopilot, then you better tune in to this one!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2561</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c759b8d8b3c9b2b9ada02bd825481067]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1621465957.mp3?updated=1661805119" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>143: The #1 Marketing Strategy Every Business Owner Forgets (and How it Sabotages Their Growth) with Julie Solomon</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-1-marketing-strategy-every-business-owner-forgets</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have our new friend, Julie Solomon. Julie is a long-time listener, first time interview, and an all-around fan of the podcast. Julie is a communicator at heart and a believer in the power of sharing stories. Her purpose is to encourage confidence and determination to create, perform and share connectively. She also comes with some sexy taglines like New York Best-Selling Publicist, Influencer Marketing Exert and Strategist, Founder of an iTunes Top 15 Business Podcasts, and Speaker. Girlfriend knows her stuff.
In this episode, we are talking about the number one marketing strategy every business owner forgets and how it sabotages their growth. Not to mention all of these crazy, insane places on the internet that ya’ll did not know existed and how they can help unlock some crazy publicity for you inside your biz. So if you are sick and tired of going down the same old path, constantly sabotaging your business from reaching its true potential, then this episode is for you! Stay tuned to hear more about how to change your approach.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 27 Nov 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The #1 Marketing Strategy Every Business Owner Forgets (and How it Sabotages Their Growth) with Julie Solomon</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>143</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have our new friend, Julie Solomon. Julie is a long-time listener, first time interview, and an all-around fan of the podcast. Julie is a communicator at heart and a believer in the power of sharing stories. Her purpose is to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have our new friend, Julie Solomon. Julie is a long-time listener, first time interview, and an all-around fan of the podcast. Julie is a communicator at heart and a believer in the power of sharing stories. Her purpose is to encourage confidence and determination to create, perform and share connectively. She also comes with some sexy taglines like New York Best-Selling Publicist, Influencer Marketing Exert and Strategist, Founder of an iTunes Top 15 Business Podcasts, and Speaker. Girlfriend knows her stuff.
In this episode, we are talking about the number one marketing strategy every business owner forgets and how it sabotages their growth. Not to mention all of these crazy, insane places on the internet that ya’ll did not know existed and how they can help unlock some crazy publicity for you inside your biz. So if you are sick and tired of going down the same old path, constantly sabotaging your business from reaching its true potential, then this episode is for you! Stay tuned to hear more about how to change your approach.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have our new friend, Julie Solomon. Julie is a long-time listener, first time interview, and an all-around fan of the podcast. Julie is a communicator at heart and a believer in the power of sharing stories. Her purpose is to encourage confidence and determination to create, perform and share connectively. She also comes with some sexy taglines like New York Best-Selling Publicist, Influencer Marketing Exert and Strategist, Founder of an iTunes Top 15 Business Podcasts, and Speaker. Girlfriend knows her stuff.</p><p>In this episode, we are talking about the number one marketing strategy every business owner forgets and how it sabotages their growth. Not to mention all of these crazy, insane places on the internet that ya’ll did not know existed and how they can help unlock some crazy publicity for you inside your biz. So if you are sick and tired of going down the same old path, constantly sabotaging your business from reaching its true potential, then this episode is for you! Stay tuned to hear more about how to change your approach.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2656</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8bc5cb461207d6ac4068b62f81f3169e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9744333923.mp3?updated=1661804947" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>142: Q&amp;A with Abagail &amp; Emylee: We're Answering Your Burning Questions Live!</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/q-a-with-abagail-emylee-were-answering-your-burning-questions-live</link>
      <description>We are back for another Q&amp;A with Abagail and Emylee! Sometimes we allow you, our audience, to post up a thread of burning questions in our Facebook Group. These questions could be anything; business, life — literally anything is on the table. We recently did this a couple of days ago and received a ton of really great questions so we thought we would share them here on the podcast and make it an educational experience for ya’ll. So hopefully we get to answer your question on air, and give you all a bit of free coaching in today’s episode and even some strategy if you will.
With all the questions we cover a big range of topics, including launching new products, knowing when to hire out and advice we wish we had known before starting our business. We also dive into the best strategies for creating challenges and let you know how to get those eyes on your prize! So if you have submitted a question in the group or you are just simply dying to hear the answers to all the many questions, stick around to hear us answer them. Now grab that coffee, get yourself comfy, and let the answering games begin!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 24 Nov 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Q&amp;A with Abagail &amp; Emylee: We're Answering Your Burning Questions Live!</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>142</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are back for another Q&amp;A with Abagail and Emylee! Sometimes we allow you, our audience, to post up a thread of burning questions in our Facebook Group. These questions could be anything; business, life — literally anything is on the table. We...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are back for another Q&amp;A with Abagail and Emylee! Sometimes we allow you, our audience, to post up a thread of burning questions in our Facebook Group. These questions could be anything; business, life — literally anything is on the table. We recently did this a couple of days ago and received a ton of really great questions so we thought we would share them here on the podcast and make it an educational experience for ya’ll. So hopefully we get to answer your question on air, and give you all a bit of free coaching in today’s episode and even some strategy if you will.
With all the questions we cover a big range of topics, including launching new products, knowing when to hire out and advice we wish we had known before starting our business. We also dive into the best strategies for creating challenges and let you know how to get those eyes on your prize! So if you have submitted a question in the group or you are just simply dying to hear the answers to all the many questions, stick around to hear us answer them. Now grab that coffee, get yourself comfy, and let the answering games begin!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are back for another Q&amp;A with Abagail and Emylee! Sometimes we allow you, our audience, to post up a thread of burning questions in our Facebook Group. These questions could be anything; business, life — literally anything is on the table. We recently did this a couple of days ago and received a ton of really great questions so we thought we would share them here on the podcast and make it an educational experience for ya’ll. So hopefully we get to answer your question on air, and give you all a bit of free coaching in today’s episode and even some strategy if you will.</p><p>With all the questions we cover a big range of topics, including launching new products, knowing when to hire out and advice we wish we had known before starting our business. We also dive into the best strategies for creating challenges and let you know how to get those eyes on your prize! So if you have submitted a question in the group or you are just simply dying to hear the answers to all the many questions, stick around to hear us answer them. Now grab that coffee, get yourself comfy, and let the answering games begin!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3441</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c9c5714623c3072ba6731e0281beef1d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9632480787.mp3?updated=1661804903" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>141: How You Invest Based On Your Personality Type with Jessica Eley</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-you-invest-based-on-your-personality-type</link>
      <description>Today on the show, we welcome back Jessica Eley, a woman who sets our souls on fire in all the best ways! Jessica is a Mindset coach to high-achieving entrepreneurs and is bringing clean water to hundreds of people through her Workshops for Water Program, while helping small business owners with their money mindset. Today, we are talking through money mindsets and how they vary based on your personality. We are offering ourselves, to Jessica, on a silver platter for her to pick apart and call out all of our “bad” money habits.
A money mindset is the underlying structure and the core beliefs you have, that are running your show around money. The things that you don’t even question and the beliefs that you “absorb”, from your parents, friends and society. This forms a sort of cocktail, if you will, of how you perceive money and your own personal relationship with it. Some cocktails are well-mixed and others are just a really bad blend! In this episode, we’ll be breaking down four types of spenders, and equipping you with the right questions to ask yourself before making a purchase. By the end of this episode, you’ll feel more confident in making better money decisions and investments and ensure they’re not coming from a place of fear.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Nov 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How You Invest Based On Your Personality Type with Jessica Eley</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>141</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show, we welcome back Jessica Eley, a woman who sets our souls on fire in all the best ways! Jessica is a Mindset coach to high-achieving entrepreneurs and is bringing clean water to hundreds of people through her Workshops for Water...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show, we welcome back Jessica Eley, a woman who sets our souls on fire in all the best ways! Jessica is a Mindset coach to high-achieving entrepreneurs and is bringing clean water to hundreds of people through her Workshops for Water Program, while helping small business owners with their money mindset. Today, we are talking through money mindsets and how they vary based on your personality. We are offering ourselves, to Jessica, on a silver platter for her to pick apart and call out all of our “bad” money habits.
A money mindset is the underlying structure and the core beliefs you have, that are running your show around money. The things that you don’t even question and the beliefs that you “absorb”, from your parents, friends and society. This forms a sort of cocktail, if you will, of how you perceive money and your own personal relationship with it. Some cocktails are well-mixed and others are just a really bad blend! In this episode, we’ll be breaking down four types of spenders, and equipping you with the right questions to ask yourself before making a purchase. By the end of this episode, you’ll feel more confident in making better money decisions and investments and ensure they’re not coming from a place of fear.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show, we welcome back Jessica Eley, a woman who sets our souls on fire in all the best ways! Jessica is a Mindset coach to high-achieving entrepreneurs and is bringing clean water to hundreds of people through her Workshops for Water Program, while helping small business owners with their money mindset. Today, we are talking through money mindsets and how they vary based on your personality. We are offering ourselves, to Jessica, on a silver platter for her to pick apart and call out all of our “bad” money habits.</p><p>A money mindset is the underlying structure and the core beliefs you have, that are running your show around money. The things that you don’t even question and the beliefs that you “absorb”, from your parents, friends and society. This forms a sort of cocktail, if you will, of how you perceive money and your own personal relationship with it. Some cocktails are well-mixed and others are just a really bad blend! In this episode, we’ll be breaking down four types of spenders, and equipping you with the right questions to ask yourself before making a purchase. By the end of this episode, you’ll feel more confident in making better money decisions and investments and ensure they’re not coming from a place of fear.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3236</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[44856f7f113abfa906ea744afdea8053]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9092102997.mp3?updated=1662558712" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>140: Our October Monthly Breakdown</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/our-october-monthly-breakdown</link>
      <description>Today on the show we are back for another monthly review session! This is something that we do on the regular here at TCC so today we thought we’d share it will all of you. We break down all the stats, all the data, everything the did, crunch the numbers and check in on our goals every 30 days. So this is us doing it for October, 2017. As you all know by now, we love sharing the behind-the-scenes with ya’ll and giving you the step-by-step break down of what we have been up to in our business, what worked, and what didn’t.
We start by going over all of our goals, reviewing what went down and how we could have done things differently. Next, we go over what we actually accomplished and what the outcomes were. We also check in on all of our stats, including social media audiences, website pages views, and all of our other end of month audience numbers. As part of our breakdown, we also do an in-depth quarterly check-in from September and set new goals for November. We end it all off with new goals of our end of month audience numbers as well as setting an affirmation for the month of November. So if you want a little behind-the-scenes look at how we get it done, listen in and get writing!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 20 Nov 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our October Monthly Breakdown</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>140</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we are back for another monthly review session! This is something that we do on the regular here at TCC so today we thought we’d share it will all of you. We break down all the stats, all the data, everything the did, crunch...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we are back for another monthly review session! This is something that we do on the regular here at TCC so today we thought we’d share it will all of you. We break down all the stats, all the data, everything the did, crunch the numbers and check in on our goals every 30 days. So this is us doing it for October, 2017. As you all know by now, we love sharing the behind-the-scenes with ya’ll and giving you the step-by-step break down of what we have been up to in our business, what worked, and what didn’t.
We start by going over all of our goals, reviewing what went down and how we could have done things differently. Next, we go over what we actually accomplished and what the outcomes were. We also check in on all of our stats, including social media audiences, website pages views, and all of our other end of month audience numbers. As part of our breakdown, we also do an in-depth quarterly check-in from September and set new goals for November. We end it all off with new goals of our end of month audience numbers as well as setting an affirmation for the month of November. So if you want a little behind-the-scenes look at how we get it done, listen in and get writing!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we are back for another monthly review session! This is something that we do on the regular here at TCC so today we thought we’d share it will all of you. We break down all the stats, all the data, everything the did, crunch the numbers and check in on our goals every 30 days. So this is us doing it for October, 2017. As you all know by now, we love sharing the behind-the-scenes with ya’ll and giving you the step-by-step break down of what we have been up to in our business, what worked, and what didn’t.</p><p>We start by going over all of our goals, reviewing what went down and how we could have done things differently. Next, we go over what we <em>actually</em> accomplished and what the outcomes were. We also check in on all of our stats, including social media audiences, website pages views, and all of our other end of month audience numbers. As part of our breakdown, we also do an in-depth quarterly check-in from September and set new goals for November. We end it all off with new goals of our end of month audience numbers as well as setting an affirmation for the month of November. So if you want a little behind-the-scenes look at how we get it done, listen in and get writing!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1951</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0a0f40d7130a861533239f96faab82f2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2200373586.mp3?updated=1661804932" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>139: Self-Help Junkie Gives a Behind the Scenes Look at the Strategy Academy with Kendalyn Banks of Sage &amp; Sea Apothecary</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/self-help-junkie-gives-a-behind-the-scenes-look-at-the-strategy-academy</link>
      <description>We have one of our dreamy students on the show today, Kendalyn Banks. She is a wanna-be mermaid, Lightworker, and Soul Proprietor of Sage &amp; Sea Apothecary. She is multi-passionate and believes in taking the holistic approach to self-care, and she’s got some amazing natural products in her shop. She is also a pretty smart entrepreneur! We had her on the show to walk you through exactly what she went through, from starting her Etsy shop to growing her product-based business.
Kendalyn also shares her experience with Strategy Academy and what she was able to implement from the program and how she really started to see growth, both personally and inside her business. We are diving into nurturing versus growth, we are talking about pivoting, being a self-help junkie, and what it’s like to being a multi-passionate. At the end we also go into the topic of meditation! This episode is a really amazing look at the behind-the-scenes of what a student inside Strategy Academy goes through. So if this is something you have been considering, you should definitely have a listen!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 17 Nov 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Self-Help Junkie Gives a Behind the Scenes Look at the Strategy Academy with Kendalyn Banks of Sage &amp; Sea Apothecary</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>139</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We have one of our dreamy students on the show today, Kendalyn Banks. She is a wanna-be mermaid, Lightworker, and Soul Proprietor of Sage &amp; Sea Apothecary. She is multi-passionate and believes in taking the holistic approach to self-care, and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We have one of our dreamy students on the show today, Kendalyn Banks. She is a wanna-be mermaid, Lightworker, and Soul Proprietor of Sage &amp; Sea Apothecary. She is multi-passionate and believes in taking the holistic approach to self-care, and she’s got some amazing natural products in her shop. She is also a pretty smart entrepreneur! We had her on the show to walk you through exactly what she went through, from starting her Etsy shop to growing her product-based business.
Kendalyn also shares her experience with Strategy Academy and what she was able to implement from the program and how she really started to see growth, both personally and inside her business. We are diving into nurturing versus growth, we are talking about pivoting, being a self-help junkie, and what it’s like to being a multi-passionate. At the end we also go into the topic of meditation! This episode is a really amazing look at the behind-the-scenes of what a student inside Strategy Academy goes through. So if this is something you have been considering, you should definitely have a listen!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We have one of our dreamy students on the show today, Kendalyn Banks. She is a wanna-be mermaid, Lightworker, and Soul Proprietor of Sage &amp; Sea Apothecary. She is multi-passionate and believes in taking the holistic approach to self-care, and she’s got some amazing natural products in her shop. She is also a pretty smart entrepreneur! We had her on the show to walk you through exactly what she went through, from starting her Etsy shop to growing her product-based business.</p><p>Kendalyn also shares her experience with Strategy Academy and what she was able to implement from the program and how she really started to see growth, both personally and inside her business. We are diving into nurturing versus growth, we are talking about pivoting, being a self-help junkie, and what it’s like to being a multi-passionate. At the end we also go into the topic of meditation! This episode is a really amazing look at the behind-the-scenes of what a student inside Strategy Academy goes through. So if this is something you have been considering, you should definitely have a listen!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2860</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[094be78cd7f9d3276c43caa09135fcf5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3185780016.mp3?updated=1661858927" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>138: Your Business Needs a Roadmap (Here's What To Do In Your First 2 Years of Business)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/your-business-needs-a-roadmap-heres-what-to-do-in-your-first-2-years-of-business</link>
      <description>On today’s show, we will be answering our most frequently asked question: How did you get from point A to point B? We will be sharing what to do, when to do it and how to do it, in your first two years of business. These steps got us from zero dollars to nearly half a million dollars and we want to give you a step-by-step breakdown of everything we did along the way. Even if your goal is not to make half a million dollars, the strategies we implemented and the lessons we have learned can definitely be applied to any business goal. Whatever your ultimate goal, the strategies and the order we did them in are the same.
Inside this episode we give you a business roadmap and the eight main steps we took to reaching our goal. The order of these steps are key and that is exactly why we will be sharing them with you, in detail! To give you a little taste, here is how we are going to break it all down. 1) Build Your Foundation, 2) Craft Your Message, 3) Nurture Your Dreamies, 4) Streamline With Systems, 5) See The Big Picture, 6) Create Sustainability, 7) Formulate A Passive Business, 8) Reach Those #Squad Goals. Okay, are you ready? Let’s get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Nov 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title> Your Business Needs a Roadmap (Here's What To Do In Your First 2 Years of Business)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>138</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>On today’s show, we will be answering our most frequently asked question: How did you get from point A to point B? We will be sharing what to do, when to do it and how to do it, in your first two years of business. These steps got us from zero...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s show, we will be answering our most frequently asked question: How did you get from point A to point B? We will be sharing what to do, when to do it and how to do it, in your first two years of business. These steps got us from zero dollars to nearly half a million dollars and we want to give you a step-by-step breakdown of everything we did along the way. Even if your goal is not to make half a million dollars, the strategies we implemented and the lessons we have learned can definitely be applied to any business goal. Whatever your ultimate goal, the strategies and the order we did them in are the same.
Inside this episode we give you a business roadmap and the eight main steps we took to reaching our goal. The order of these steps are key and that is exactly why we will be sharing them with you, in detail! To give you a little taste, here is how we are going to break it all down. 1) Build Your Foundation, 2) Craft Your Message, 3) Nurture Your Dreamies, 4) Streamline With Systems, 5) See The Big Picture, 6) Create Sustainability, 7) Formulate A Passive Business, 8) Reach Those #Squad Goals. Okay, are you ready? Let’s get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s show, we will be answering our most frequently asked question: How did you get from point A to point B? We will be sharing what to do, when to do it and how to do it, in your first two years of business. These steps got us from zero dollars to nearly half a million dollars and we want to give you a step-by-step breakdown of everything we did along the way. Even if your goal is not to make half a million dollars, the strategies we implemented and the lessons we have learned can definitely be applied to any business goal. Whatever your ultimate goal, the strategies and the order we did them in are the same.</p><p>Inside this episode we give you a business roadmap and the eight main steps we took to reaching our goal. The order of these steps are key and that is exactly why we will be sharing them with you, in detail! To give you a little taste, here is how we are going to break it all down. 1) Build Your Foundation, 2) Craft Your Message, 3) Nurture Your Dreamies, 4) Streamline With Systems, 5) See The Big Picture, 6) Create Sustainability, 7) Formulate A Passive Business, 8) Reach Those #Squad Goals. Okay, are you ready? Let’s get started!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2865</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f8ed2cb8f6accd4befe3ff1ee35a09a1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7551312535.mp3?updated=1661858874" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>137: Psychology Driven Brand Strategy + an Opt-in that 55k People Have Dived into with Kaye Putnam</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/psychology-driven-brand-strategy-and-an-opt-in-that-55k-people-have-dived-into</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Kaye Putnam. Kaye is is a psychology-driven brand strategist for entrepreneurs. Through work with over a 100 clients, from Fortune 50’s to entrepreneurs, she developed the In Demand Brand method. She has had some crazy success though with her famous opt-in. 55,000 people have taken her psychology quiz all about branding and ya’ll need to take it too. Inside this episode, all three of us nerd out pretty hardcore. We talk about the psychology behind understanding your competition and establishing your brand presence. We uncover a couple of the most popular archetypes and the least popular ones.
Kaye brings to the conversation a different way of looking at your brand, your messaging, and what you’re serving to your clients based off what you are actually best at and who you are as a human being, which is like the easiest and best thing to do, right? Of course we also talk about her quiz, and the strategy behind how she set that up, how she has collected the leads and what it’s meant for her financially. This a good one to listen to just to uncover a little bit more about yourself and how you can use that to craft your brand messaging to your benefit.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 13 Nov 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Psychology Driven Brand Strategy + an Opt-in that 55k People Have Dived into with Kaye Putnam</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>137</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Kaye Putnam. Kaye is is a psychology-driven brand strategist for entrepreneurs. Through work with over a 100 clients, from Fortune 50’s to entrepreneurs, she developed the In Demand Brand method. She has had some crazy...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Kaye Putnam. Kaye is is a psychology-driven brand strategist for entrepreneurs. Through work with over a 100 clients, from Fortune 50’s to entrepreneurs, she developed the In Demand Brand method. She has had some crazy success though with her famous opt-in. 55,000 people have taken her psychology quiz all about branding and ya’ll need to take it too. Inside this episode, all three of us nerd out pretty hardcore. We talk about the psychology behind understanding your competition and establishing your brand presence. We uncover a couple of the most popular archetypes and the least popular ones.
Kaye brings to the conversation a different way of looking at your brand, your messaging, and what you’re serving to your clients based off what you are actually best at and who you are as a human being, which is like the easiest and best thing to do, right? Of course we also talk about her quiz, and the strategy behind how she set that up, how she has collected the leads and what it’s meant for her financially. This a good one to listen to just to uncover a little bit more about yourself and how you can use that to craft your brand messaging to your benefit.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Kaye Putnam. Kaye is is a psychology-driven brand strategist for entrepreneurs. Through work with over a 100 clients, from Fortune 50’s to entrepreneurs, she developed the In Demand Brand method. She has had some crazy success though with her famous opt-in. 55,000 people have taken her psychology quiz all about branding and ya’ll need to take it too. Inside this episode, all three of us nerd out pretty hardcore. We talk about the psychology behind understanding your competition and establishing your brand presence. We uncover a couple of the most popular archetypes and the least popular ones.</p><p>Kaye brings to the conversation a different way of looking at your brand, your messaging, and what you’re serving to your clients based off what you are actually best at and who you are as a human being, which is like the easiest and best thing to do, right? Of course we also talk about her quiz, and the strategy behind how she set that up, how she has collected the leads and what it’s meant for her financially. This a good one to listen to just to uncover a little bit more about yourself and how you can use that to craft your brand messaging to your benefit.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3029</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e65f897907ac929faf72569a11a98525]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7947344629.mp3?updated=1659041310" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>136: Why We Made Changes to Our Signature Program (pssst...Doors are Opening Soon!)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-we-made-changes-to-our-signature-program</link>
      <description>Today on the shown we are digging into our whole new sales and launch strategy. Previously when we launched programs, we did not really talk about it. It kind of came as a sneak attack or added bonus for those who have already had a little taste of what we have to offer. This time around we did things a little differently; instead of waiting until launch time to actually talk about it, we let ya’ll know early on that the doors would be opening soon and created some buzz around the pre-launch time. This really took the ‘ick’ out of selling and a lot of people were really excited about the program coming back. Plus, everyone gets to have some anticipation about what we’re about to put out into the universe.
Now we are backing it up even further, letting you guys know way ahead of time that a program, like our Signature Program, is coming back! Doors are opening real soon and we wanted to come on the show to let you all know when it’s coming back so that you can be ready for it. Plus, we are stepping out and breaking one of the marketing rules — we are actually going to be talking about price! We are also going to be talking about how you can get your butt inside, and what it’s all about. We love doing it this way because it definitely takes off the pressure of making a surprise sell at the end of a webinar, and instead it gets people legit ready for it and in the mindset of investing in themselves. So if you need to switch up your sales game and get your tribe excited, listen in to this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 10 Nov 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why We Made Changes to Our Signature Program (pssst...Doors are Opening Soon!)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>136</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the shown we are digging into our whole new sales and launch strategy. Previously when we launched programs, we did not really talk about it. It kind of came as a sneak attack or added bonus for those who have already had a little taste of...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the shown we are digging into our whole new sales and launch strategy. Previously when we launched programs, we did not really talk about it. It kind of came as a sneak attack or added bonus for those who have already had a little taste of what we have to offer. This time around we did things a little differently; instead of waiting until launch time to actually talk about it, we let ya’ll know early on that the doors would be opening soon and created some buzz around the pre-launch time. This really took the ‘ick’ out of selling and a lot of people were really excited about the program coming back. Plus, everyone gets to have some anticipation about what we’re about to put out into the universe.
Now we are backing it up even further, letting you guys know way ahead of time that a program, like our Signature Program, is coming back! Doors are opening real soon and we wanted to come on the show to let you all know when it’s coming back so that you can be ready for it. Plus, we are stepping out and breaking one of the marketing rules — we are actually going to be talking about price! We are also going to be talking about how you can get your butt inside, and what it’s all about. We love doing it this way because it definitely takes off the pressure of making a surprise sell at the end of a webinar, and instead it gets people legit ready for it and in the mindset of investing in themselves. So if you need to switch up your sales game and get your tribe excited, listen in to this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the shown we are digging into our whole new sales and launch strategy. Previously when we launched programs, we did not really talk about it. It kind of came as a sneak attack or added bonus for those who have already had a little taste of what we have to offer. This time around we did things a little differently; instead of waiting until launch time to actually talk about it, we let ya’ll know early on that the doors would be opening soon and created some buzz around the pre-launch time. This really took the ‘ick’ out of selling and a lot of people were really excited about the program coming back. Plus, everyone gets to have some anticipation about what we’re about to put out into the universe.</p><p>Now we are backing it up even <em>further,</em> letting you guys know way ahead of time that a program, like our Signature Program, is coming back! Doors are opening real soon and we wanted to come on the show to let you all know when it’s coming back so that you can be ready for it. Plus, we are stepping out and breaking one of the marketing rules — we are actually going to be talking about price! We are also going to be talking about how you can get your butt inside, and what it’s all about. We love doing it this way because it definitely takes off the pressure of making a surprise sell at the end of a webinar, and instead it gets people legit ready for it and in the mindset of investing in themselves. So if you need to switch up your sales game and get your tribe excited, listen in to this episode!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2155</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ed5f87244a33bc60aeaa382048c99892]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8870609986.mp3?updated=1661858847" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>135: Bootstrapping a Brick &amp; Mortar Business with Amber Budd</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/bootstrapping-a-brick-and-mortar-business</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we welcome Amber Budd. Amber is a self-described Skincare Nerd and the Founder and Creator of her own skincare line, Amber Budd Skincare. Starting out with just a $500 loan, Amber left her job at one of the best spa’s in the country and founded her own. She has since managed to scale her clients from only ten to hundreds, by taking her business one small step at a time. In Amber’s industry, the client return rate is 20%, but Amber on the other hand, knocks that figure out the park, seeing an 80% return rate with her clients! This is because of Amber’s customer care philosophy, which is taking the time to nurture every client relationship.
On the podcast today, we find out how Amber found a manufacturer, got her products approved by the FDA and grew her skincare line from just an idea. We will also find out how she bootstrapped a brick and mortar business, and the strategies she has recently implemented to grow her business even further! Amber reiterates the importance of taking one small step of a time and the value of consistent, steady growth in your business and client relationships. So get your notebooks out, put your feet up, and let’s get ready to hear some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 Nov 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Bootstrapping a Brick &amp; Mortar Business with Amber Budd</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>135</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we welcome Amber Budd. Amber is a self-described Skincare Nerd and the Founder and Creator of her own skincare line, Amber Budd Skincare. Starting out with just a $500 loan, Amber left her job at one of the best spa’s in the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we welcome Amber Budd. Amber is a self-described Skincare Nerd and the Founder and Creator of her own skincare line, Amber Budd Skincare. Starting out with just a $500 loan, Amber left her job at one of the best spa’s in the country and founded her own. She has since managed to scale her clients from only ten to hundreds, by taking her business one small step at a time. In Amber’s industry, the client return rate is 20%, but Amber on the other hand, knocks that figure out the park, seeing an 80% return rate with her clients! This is because of Amber’s customer care philosophy, which is taking the time to nurture every client relationship.
On the podcast today, we find out how Amber found a manufacturer, got her products approved by the FDA and grew her skincare line from just an idea. We will also find out how she bootstrapped a brick and mortar business, and the strategies she has recently implemented to grow her business even further! Amber reiterates the importance of taking one small step of a time and the value of consistent, steady growth in your business and client relationships. So get your notebooks out, put your feet up, and let’s get ready to hear some strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we welcome Amber Budd. Amber is a self-described Skincare Nerd and the Founder and Creator of her own skincare line, Amber Budd Skincare. Starting out with just a $500 loan, Amber left her job at one of the best spa’s in the country and founded her own. She has since managed to scale her clients from only ten to hundreds, by taking her business one small step at a time. In Amber’s industry, the client return rate is 20%, but Amber on the other hand, knocks that figure out the park, seeing an 80% return rate with her clients! This is because of Amber’s customer care philosophy, which is taking the time to nurture every client relationship.</p><p>On the podcast today, we find out how Amber found a manufacturer, got her products approved by the FDA and grew her skincare line from just an idea. We will also find out how she bootstrapped a brick and mortar business, and the strategies she has recently implemented to grow her business even further! Amber reiterates the importance of taking one small step of a time and the value of consistent, steady growth in your business and client relationships. So get your notebooks out, put your feet up, and let’s get ready to hear some strategy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1956</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a48a17ee42cabb85498dfc7b68746155]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6894866706.mp3?updated=1661858794" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>134: 23 Launch Mistakes Your Business Can't Afford</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/23-launch-mistakes-your-business-cant-afford</link>
      <description>Today we are going to be talking about the 23 launch mistakes that your business can’t afford to make. But before we get started, first and foremost, we want to encourage you to get into the mindset of treating every single thing in your business like a launch. Whether that’s an Instagram post, a blog post, creating a course, new brand colors – treat it like a launch. Because if you do not treat it like a launch, it becomes one of those things that sits in your to-do list and doesn’t get done! As soon as you treat it like a launch, you will take the steps you need to in order to make it happen.
We have gone through the process of launching an obscene amount of times, and we have helped so many others do the same. Through these experiences have noticed a pattern of common mistakes made throughout the launch process, and today we want to share the top 23 mistakes we see happening in a launch. From aiming for perfection, to poor planning and promotion, or just not reaching out for support. There are small (and big) things we can do to maximize any launch and keep our sanity in the process! We believe in you and If you’re thinking about launching, you are in the process of launching, or you are just wondering how you can improve on your next launch – this episode is an absolute must!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 06 Nov 2017 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>23 Launch Mistakes Your Business Can't Afford</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>134</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are going to be talking about the 23 launch mistakes that your business can’t afford to make. But before we get started, first and foremost, we want to encourage you to get into the mindset of treating every single thing in your business...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are going to be talking about the 23 launch mistakes that your business can’t afford to make. But before we get started, first and foremost, we want to encourage you to get into the mindset of treating every single thing in your business like a launch. Whether that’s an Instagram post, a blog post, creating a course, new brand colors – treat it like a launch. Because if you do not treat it like a launch, it becomes one of those things that sits in your to-do list and doesn’t get done! As soon as you treat it like a launch, you will take the steps you need to in order to make it happen.
We have gone through the process of launching an obscene amount of times, and we have helped so many others do the same. Through these experiences have noticed a pattern of common mistakes made throughout the launch process, and today we want to share the top 23 mistakes we see happening in a launch. From aiming for perfection, to poor planning and promotion, or just not reaching out for support. There are small (and big) things we can do to maximize any launch and keep our sanity in the process! We believe in you and If you’re thinking about launching, you are in the process of launching, or you are just wondering how you can improve on your next launch – this episode is an absolute must!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are going to be talking about the 23 launch mistakes that your business can’t afford to make. But before we get started, first and foremost, we want to encourage you to get into the mindset of treating every single thing in your business like a launch. Whether that’s an Instagram post, a blog post, creating a course, new brand colors – treat it like a launch. Because if you do not treat it like a launch, it becomes one of those things that sits in your to-do list and doesn’t get done! As soon as you treat it like a launch, you will take the steps you need to in order to make it happen.</p><p>We have gone through the process of launching an obscene amount of times, and we have helped so many others do the same. Through these experiences have noticed a pattern of common mistakes made throughout the launch process, and today we want to share the top 23 mistakes we see happening in a launch. From aiming for perfection, to poor planning and promotion, or just not reaching out for support. There are small (and big) things we can do to maximize any launch and keep our sanity in the process! We believe in you and If you’re thinking about launching, you are in the process of launching, or you are just wondering how you can improve on your next launch – this episode is an absolute must!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2331</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[bcdb8f49822cbfbcde0ffbc3549e23de]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2376530888.mp3?updated=1661858787" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>133: Be Good to People with Kris Wittenberg</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/be-good-to-people</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Kris Wittenberg of Be Good to People. We fell in with her brand and the impact it was making on people around the world. The idea for Be Good to People was inspired by a rude experience that Wittenberg had back in the spring of 2008 while running errands at lunch. Kris has long forgotten the exact bad experience but the idea that people need to be better to one another has stuck with her ever since. We have loved hearing her message and getting to the root of how she got started.
Inside this episode you are going to hear a pretty crazy story, all about how a failed business helped Kris instead follow her passions and her dreams and then how she landed in front of Oprah and Gayle, like actually hugging and seeing Gayle in-person. The impacts of that exposure on her business, on her confidence and on everything Be Good to People stood for. There are a lot of lessons learned here from an entrepreneur who has been in business for a while, so we hope you take away some good nuggets today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 03 Nov 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Be Good to People with Kris Wittenberg</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>133</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Kris Wittenberg of Be Good to People. We fell in with her brand and the impact it was making on people around the world. The idea for Be Good to People was inspired by a rude experience that Wittenberg had back...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Kris Wittenberg of Be Good to People. We fell in with her brand and the impact it was making on people around the world. The idea for Be Good to People was inspired by a rude experience that Wittenberg had back in the spring of 2008 while running errands at lunch. Kris has long forgotten the exact bad experience but the idea that people need to be better to one another has stuck with her ever since. We have loved hearing her message and getting to the root of how she got started.
Inside this episode you are going to hear a pretty crazy story, all about how a failed business helped Kris instead follow her passions and her dreams and then how she landed in front of Oprah and Gayle, like actually hugging and seeing Gayle in-person. The impacts of that exposure on her business, on her confidence and on everything Be Good to People stood for. There are a lot of lessons learned here from an entrepreneur who has been in business for a while, so we hope you take away some good nuggets today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Kris Wittenberg of Be Good to People. We fell in with her brand and the impact it was making on people around the world. The idea for Be Good to People was inspired by a rude experience that Wittenberg had back in the spring of 2008 while running errands at lunch. Kris has long forgotten the exact bad experience but the idea that people need to be better to one another has stuck with her ever since. We have loved hearing her message and getting to the root of how she got started.</p><p>Inside this episode you are going to hear a pretty crazy story, all about how a failed business helped Kris instead follow her passions and her dreams and then how she landed in front of Oprah and Gayle, like actually hugging and seeing Gayle in-person. The impacts of that exposure on her business, on her confidence and on everything Be Good to People stood for. There are a lot of lessons learned here from an entrepreneur who has been in business for a while, so we hope you take away some good nuggets today!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2224</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[67c821e293df21b96567d8cc97b0c13b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6165381921.mp3?updated=1661858755" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>132: #5DaysToLaunch Challenge is Back</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/5daystolaunch-challenge-is-back</link>
      <description>The #5DaysToLaunch Challenge is back and we are beyond pumped! If you’re not sure what The #5DaysToLaunch Challenge is, this is a free challenge we designed to help you go from figuring out what your product should be, to selling it by the end of the week. You might be thinking, “What!? That’s impossible!” But the truth is, it’s absolutely not. We have had hundreds of students accomplish this, and much more, in this five-day challenge and the reason we created this course is because so many of you are just sitting on your laurels.
“It’s not good enough. It’s not ready. This thing is not perfect.” Sound familiar? Well, we are tired of it because we believe in you guys more than you believe in yourselves. We know that you have some brilliant ideas and that your audience deserves to see your good stuff! So, The #5DaysToLaunch Challenge is a way for us to get your booty into gear push you, ever so kindly, every step of the way. If you’ve been on the fence about launching a product or just putting yourself out there, now is the time to do it, and we’re going to show you how.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 Nov 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>#5DaysToLaunch Challenge is Back</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>132</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>The #5DaysToLaunch Challenge is back and we are beyond pumped! If you’re not sure what The #5DaysToLaunch Challenge is, this is a free challenge we designed to help you go from figuring out what your product should be, to selling it by the end of...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>The #5DaysToLaunch Challenge is back and we are beyond pumped! If you’re not sure what The #5DaysToLaunch Challenge is, this is a free challenge we designed to help you go from figuring out what your product should be, to selling it by the end of the week. You might be thinking, “What!? That’s impossible!” But the truth is, it’s absolutely not. We have had hundreds of students accomplish this, and much more, in this five-day challenge and the reason we created this course is because so many of you are just sitting on your laurels.
“It’s not good enough. It’s not ready. This thing is not perfect.” Sound familiar? Well, we are tired of it because we believe in you guys more than you believe in yourselves. We know that you have some brilliant ideas and that your audience deserves to see your good stuff! So, The #5DaysToLaunch Challenge is a way for us to get your booty into gear push you, ever so kindly, every step of the way. If you’ve been on the fence about launching a product or just putting yourself out there, now is the time to do it, and we’re going to show you how.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The #5DaysToLaunch Challenge is back and we are beyond pumped! If you’re not sure what The #5DaysToLaunch Challenge is, this is a free challenge we designed to help you go from figuring out what your product should be, to selling it by the end of the week. You might be thinking, “What!? That’s impossible!” But the truth is, it’s absolutely not. We have had hundreds of students accomplish this, and much more, in this five-day challenge and the reason we created this course is because so many of you are just sitting on your laurels.</p><p>“It’s not good enough. It’s not ready. This thing is not perfect.” Sound familiar? Well, we are tired of it because we believe in you guys more than you believe in yourselves. We know that you have some brilliant ideas and that your audience deserves to see your good stuff! So, The #5DaysToLaunch Challenge is a way for us to get your booty into gear push you, ever so kindly, every step of the way. If you’ve been on the fence about launching a product or just putting yourself out there, now is the time to do it, and we’re going to show you how.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1401</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[59005323d39cd0ea6610966a65a1d590]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6293627637.mp3?updated=1661858723" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>131: Spreading Kindness with Carrie McQuaid</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/spreading-kindness</link>
      <description>Today on the show we have Carrie McQuid. If we could describe her in any way, Carrie is truly a kindness spreader. She loves pink, Taylor Swift, confetti, having fun, and she travels the world to speak to companies and colleges about the power of kindness and generosity. She is head over heals in love with mason jars, sweet tea, and rocking chairs on a front porch. A classic Southern belle at heart. Picture fresh flowers, polka dots and stripes, a day filled with love and laughter, and spreading joy to others around — that’s Carrie!
In this episode, Carrie comes with some pretty fantastic ideas for business owners, entrepreneurs, and just human beings in general, on how we can be nicer people, helping fellow strangers (even in the Target parking lot). She also shares her story of viral kindness success. You might have heard of her on the little Southwest Airlines birthday party that she threw? This is a really upbeat episode and if you have ever wanted to start implementing small acts of kindness in your every day or in your business, Carrie comes full with ideas for you to take away and start implementing right now. So let’s jump in, and spread some kindness around like confetti!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Oct 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Spreading Kindness with Carrie McQuaid</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>131</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show we have Carrie McQuid. If we could describe her in any way, Carrie is truly a kindness spreader. She loves pink, Taylor Swift, confetti, having fun, and she travels the world to speak to companies and colleges about the power of...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show we have Carrie McQuid. If we could describe her in any way, Carrie is truly a kindness spreader. She loves pink, Taylor Swift, confetti, having fun, and she travels the world to speak to companies and colleges about the power of kindness and generosity. She is head over heals in love with mason jars, sweet tea, and rocking chairs on a front porch. A classic Southern belle at heart. Picture fresh flowers, polka dots and stripes, a day filled with love and laughter, and spreading joy to others around — that’s Carrie!
In this episode, Carrie comes with some pretty fantastic ideas for business owners, entrepreneurs, and just human beings in general, on how we can be nicer people, helping fellow strangers (even in the Target parking lot). She also shares her story of viral kindness success. You might have heard of her on the little Southwest Airlines birthday party that she threw? This is a really upbeat episode and if you have ever wanted to start implementing small acts of kindness in your every day or in your business, Carrie comes full with ideas for you to take away and start implementing right now. So let’s jump in, and spread some kindness around like confetti!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show we have Carrie McQuid. If we could describe her in any way, Carrie is truly a kindness spreader. She loves pink, Taylor Swift, confetti, having fun, and she travels the world to speak to companies and colleges about the power of kindness and generosity. She is head over heals in love with mason jars, sweet tea, and rocking chairs on a front porch. A classic Southern belle at heart. Picture fresh flowers, polka dots and stripes, a day filled with love and laughter, and spreading joy to others around — that’s Carrie!</p><p>In this episode, Carrie comes with some pretty fantastic ideas for business owners, entrepreneurs, and just human beings in general, on how we can be nicer people, helping fellow strangers (even in the Target parking lot). She also shares her story of viral kindness success. You might have heard of her on the little Southwest Airlines birthday party that she threw? This is a really upbeat episode and if you have ever wanted to start implementing small acts of kindness in your every day or in your business, Carrie comes full with ideas for you to take away and start implementing right now. So let’s jump in, and spread some kindness around like confetti!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3068</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6c3ca43537d9c9057f042278992e76e9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8824222556.mp3?updated=1661858749" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>130: Embracing the Lifestyle Brand We've Become</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/embracing-the-lifestyle-brand-weve-become</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we’re doing things a little differently. We are going to have an actual conversation about how our business is going to evolve after we were hit with some crazy new perspectives. Spoiler alert! We have an agent now, which is super weird! We brought her on to help us deal with sponsor requests for the podcast and land us some opportunities that really fit and say no to opportunities that don’t. It takes an entirely different set of skills that we simply do not possess, and so we brought her on to give it a try.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Oct 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Embracing the Lifestyle Brand We've Become</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>130</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we’re doing things a little differently. We are going to have an actual conversation about how our business is going to evolve after we were hit with some crazy new perspectives. Spoiler alert! We have an agent now, which is super weird! We brought her on to help us deal with sponsor requests for the podcast and land us some opportunities that really fit and say no to opportunities that don’t. It takes an entirely different set of skills that we simply do not possess, and so we brought her on to give it a try.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we’re doing things a little differently. We are going to have an actual conversation about how our business is going to evolve after we were hit with some crazy new perspectives. Spoiler alert! We have an agent now, which is super weird! We brought her on to help us deal with sponsor requests for the podcast and land us some opportunities that really fit and say no to opportunities that don’t. It takes an entirely different set of skills that we simply do not possess, and so we brought her on to give it a try.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we’re doing things a little differently. We are going to have an actual conversation about how our business is going to evolve after we were hit with some crazy new perspectives. Spoiler alert! We have an agent now, which is super weird! We brought her on to help us deal with sponsor requests for the podcast and land us some opportunities that really fit and say no to opportunities that don’t. It takes an entirely different set of skills that we simply do not possess, and so we brought her on to give it a try.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2269</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[14cc263ee9fbfc9bd5506d9fa09770cc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3691642581.mp3?updated=1661858743" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>129: Balancing a Membership and Being a Momma with Heather Crabtree of the Savvy Community</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/balancing-a-membership-and-being-a-momma</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have our friend, our mentor, the lovely Mamma Heather Crabtree from the Savvy Community. If you are not familiar with this woman, what business rock have you been hiding under? Her Facebook community and her community in general that she has built over the last few years is phenomenal and literally the online space where we first met. Sparkles and all the confetti for that! We talk a bit about this legendary Savvy Community where we met online, and how it’s transitioned over the years.
In this episode Heather shares with us how she has grown just a couple 100 members to over 13,000 and how that evolved into her bringing on a membership community where she hosts female entrepreneurs from all over the world and helps train and coach them. We also go into the programs that she has brought along with her and even how she has been able to walk with her daughter as she has gone through stage four cancer, what it’s like balancing a business and a chronic illness like cancer, and how that has affected her as a person and really made her stronger for the better. This is a little bit of a rollercoaster episode, but know that it comes from a good place and we are so excited to have her on.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 25 Oct 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Balancing a Membership and Being a Momma with Heather Crabtree of the Savvy Community</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>129</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have our friend, our mentor, the lovely Mamma Heather Crabtree from the Savvy Community. If you are not familiar with this woman, what business rock have you been hiding under? Her Facebook community and her community in...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have our friend, our mentor, the lovely Mamma Heather Crabtree from the Savvy Community. If you are not familiar with this woman, what business rock have you been hiding under? Her Facebook community and her community in general that she has built over the last few years is phenomenal and literally the online space where we first met. Sparkles and all the confetti for that! We talk a bit about this legendary Savvy Community where we met online, and how it’s transitioned over the years.
In this episode Heather shares with us how she has grown just a couple 100 members to over 13,000 and how that evolved into her bringing on a membership community where she hosts female entrepreneurs from all over the world and helps train and coach them. We also go into the programs that she has brought along with her and even how she has been able to walk with her daughter as she has gone through stage four cancer, what it’s like balancing a business and a chronic illness like cancer, and how that has affected her as a person and really made her stronger for the better. This is a little bit of a rollercoaster episode, but know that it comes from a good place and we are so excited to have her on.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have our friend, our mentor, the lovely Mamma Heather Crabtree from the Savvy Community. If you are not familiar with this woman, what business rock have you been hiding under? Her Facebook community and her community in general that she has built over the last few years is phenomenal and literally the online space where we first met. Sparkles and all the confetti for <em>that!</em> We talk a bit about this legendary Savvy Community where we met online, and how it’s transitioned over the years.</p><p>In this episode Heather shares with us how she has grown just a couple 100 members to over 13,000 and how that evolved into her bringing on a membership community where she hosts female entrepreneurs from all over the world and helps train and coach them. We also go into the programs that she has brought along with her and even how she has been able to walk with her daughter as she has gone through stage four cancer, what it’s like balancing a business and a chronic illness like cancer, and how that has affected her as a person and really made her stronger for the better. This is a little bit of a rollercoaster episode, but know that it comes from a good place and we are so excited to have her on.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2897</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b8c391f8f861a8235d20285d4e2f87a1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5313040938.mp3?updated=1661823775" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>128: P.S. - We Also Run an MLM Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/ps-we-also-run-a-mlm-business</link>
      <description>Surprise! We also have another business that’s not TCC! If you haven’t already heard, the truth is we are actually oily, hippie weirdos. The cat’s out the bag and this is what we are going to be talking about today. Our discovery, love and business venture into Young Living Oils and how it blends into our full-time job at TCC. Young Love Oils have been life-changing for both of us. We started using them to help with our migraines, insomnia and reoccurring sicknesses. They helped us feel amazing, be healthier and make clearer decisions in all aspects of our lives. Then we realized, “Hey, wait. There could be a business opportunity in this.”
So today, we are going to be sharing our unique strategies for our side business in oils, how it has become a creative outlet for us and changed the way we live. If you are wanting to improve your approach to brands and products as well as your side-hustle, then this is an episode for you. So get those notebooks out, and start writing babes!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 23 Oct 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>P.S. - We Also Run an MLM Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>128</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Surprise! We also have another business that’s not TCC! If you haven’t already heard, the truth is we are actually oily, hippie weirdos. The cat’s out the bag and this is what we are going to be talking about today. Our discovery, love and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Surprise! We also have another business that’s not TCC! If you haven’t already heard, the truth is we are actually oily, hippie weirdos. The cat’s out the bag and this is what we are going to be talking about today. Our discovery, love and business venture into Young Living Oils and how it blends into our full-time job at TCC. Young Love Oils have been life-changing for both of us. We started using them to help with our migraines, insomnia and reoccurring sicknesses. They helped us feel amazing, be healthier and make clearer decisions in all aspects of our lives. Then we realized, “Hey, wait. There could be a business opportunity in this.”
So today, we are going to be sharing our unique strategies for our side business in oils, how it has become a creative outlet for us and changed the way we live. If you are wanting to improve your approach to brands and products as well as your side-hustle, then this is an episode for you. So get those notebooks out, and start writing babes!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Surprise! We also have another business that’s not TCC! If you haven’t already heard, the truth is we are actually oily, hippie weirdos. The cat’s out the bag and this is what we are going to be talking about today. Our discovery, love and business venture into Young Living Oils and how it blends into our full-time job at TCC. Young Love Oils have been life-changing for both of us. We started using them to help with our migraines, insomnia and reoccurring sicknesses. They helped us feel amazing, be healthier and make clearer decisions in all aspects of our lives. Then we realized, “Hey, wait. There could be a business opportunity in this.”</p><p>So today, we are going to be sharing our unique strategies for our side business in oils, how it has become a creative outlet for us and changed the way we live. If you are wanting to improve your approach to brands and products as well as your side-hustle, then this is an episode for you. So get those notebooks out, and start writing babes!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2203</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[19e47b6ad3439f0c8439c8f87a050700]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2793812688.mp3?updated=1661823635" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>127: Overcoming Crisis &amp; Pivoting Your Business with Erin Shebish</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/overcoming-crisis-and-pivoting-your-business</link>
      <description>On today’s episode we are so excited to welcome on Erin Shebish. Erin is a certified mindset coach for solo entrepreneurs and she helps women find their version of success by gaining clarity, direction and confidence. Today we are talking about Erin’s personal journey where she went from a little bit of a hot mess to setting boundaries and creating systems within her business. We will also hear more about her journey throughout The Strategy Academy and how she was able to handle all of that with some major health crisis’s.
There are very few business programs that also offer an emotional component and this is something that Erin has managed to balance beautifully into her business. In this episode, find out how she was able to re-discover her real passion, pivot her business and implement it with no real hiccups. Erin gives us actionable steps that we can start implementing today for our own emotional well-being and business processes. We hope that you will take her experience and learn how to apply it to your own life and business today.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 20 Oct 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Overcoming Crisis &amp; Pivoting Your Business with Erin Shebish</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>127</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>On today’s episode we are so excited to welcome on Erin Shebish. Erin is a certified mindset coach for solo entrepreneurs and she helps women find their version of success by gaining clarity, direction and confidence. Today we are talking about...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s episode we are so excited to welcome on Erin Shebish. Erin is a certified mindset coach for solo entrepreneurs and she helps women find their version of success by gaining clarity, direction and confidence. Today we are talking about Erin’s personal journey where she went from a little bit of a hot mess to setting boundaries and creating systems within her business. We will also hear more about her journey throughout The Strategy Academy and how she was able to handle all of that with some major health crisis’s.
There are very few business programs that also offer an emotional component and this is something that Erin has managed to balance beautifully into her business. In this episode, find out how she was able to re-discover her real passion, pivot her business and implement it with no real hiccups. Erin gives us actionable steps that we can start implementing today for our own emotional well-being and business processes. We hope that you will take her experience and learn how to apply it to your own life and business today.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s episode we are so excited to welcome on Erin Shebish. Erin is a certified mindset coach for solo entrepreneurs and she helps women find their version of success by gaining clarity, direction and confidence. Today we are talking about Erin’s personal journey where she went from a little bit of a hot mess to setting boundaries and creating systems within her business. We will also hear more about her journey throughout The Strategy Academy and how she was able to handle all of that with some major health crisis’s.</p><p>There are very few business programs that also offer an emotional component and this is something that Erin has managed to balance beautifully into her business. In this episode, find out how she was able to re-discover her real passion, pivot her business and implement it with no real hiccups. Erin gives us actionable steps that we can start implementing today for our own emotional well-being and business processes. We hope that you will take her experience and learn how to apply it to your own life and business today.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrat">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2411</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[fc98f4878f1f2bdca1ab9dad8391d6f9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6565471335.mp3?updated=1661823646" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>126: This is For You If...</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/this-episode-is-for-you-if</link>
      <description>Today we are tackling this concept and this question that we get asked ALL THE TIME. Specifically, we are going to answer it around the framework of The Strategy Academy because in case you haven’t been paying attention, the doors are opening again soon and we are pretty freaking pumped about it. But, regardless of whether you are considering The Strategy Academy or any other program, or you’ve asked this question from us in the past, maybe this kind of walkthrough, this mindset, the framework will help you answer this question next time it pops up for you. We get asked this question all the time, “Ok, but who is this program perfect for? What type of person is this program for, someone who is just starting out or someone who has been in business and needs to up a level?”
It’s one of those questions we have always had a hard time answering and we have always felt like we need to box ourselves in but it turns out that we kinda gave the middle finger to that rule and did what we want to anyways. This program isn’t just for someone brand new in business, it isn’t just for someone who is ready to up a level and take things seriously, it isn’t just for someone who is not profitable yet, it isn’t just for someone who is profitable. It’s for all of those people — for different reasons. Today we are diving into the why and the how and the benefit of why opening it up to so many different people has created a community in which all these different types of people thrive. So, keep listening to hear more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 Oct 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>This is For You If...</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>126</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are tackling this concept and this question that we get asked ALL THE TIME. Specifically, we are going to answer it around the framework of The Strategy Academy because in case you haven’t been paying attention, the doors are opening again...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are tackling this concept and this question that we get asked ALL THE TIME. Specifically, we are going to answer it around the framework of The Strategy Academy because in case you haven’t been paying attention, the doors are opening again soon and we are pretty freaking pumped about it. But, regardless of whether you are considering The Strategy Academy or any other program, or you’ve asked this question from us in the past, maybe this kind of walkthrough, this mindset, the framework will help you answer this question next time it pops up for you. We get asked this question all the time, “Ok, but who is this program perfect for? What type of person is this program for, someone who is just starting out or someone who has been in business and needs to up a level?”
It’s one of those questions we have always had a hard time answering and we have always felt like we need to box ourselves in but it turns out that we kinda gave the middle finger to that rule and did what we want to anyways. This program isn’t just for someone brand new in business, it isn’t just for someone who is ready to up a level and take things seriously, it isn’t just for someone who is not profitable yet, it isn’t just for someone who is profitable. It’s for all of those people — for different reasons. Today we are diving into the why and the how and the benefit of why opening it up to so many different people has created a community in which all these different types of people thrive. So, keep listening to hear more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are tackling this concept and this question that we get asked ALL THE TIME. Specifically, we are going to answer it around the framework of The Strategy Academy because in case you haven’t been paying attention, the doors are opening again soon and we are pretty freaking pumped about it. But, regardless of whether you are considering The Strategy Academy or any other program, or you’ve asked this question from us in the past, maybe this kind of walkthrough, this mindset, the framework will help you answer this question next time it pops up for you. We get asked this question all the time, “Ok, but who is this program perfect for? What type of person is this program for, someone who is just starting out or someone who has been in business and needs to up a level?”</p><p>It’s one of those questions we have always had a hard time answering and we have always felt like we need to box ourselves in but it turns out that we kinda gave the middle finger to that rule and did what we want to anyways. This program isn’t just for someone brand new in business, it isn’t just for someone who is ready to up a level and take things seriously, it isn’t just for someone who is not profitable yet, it isn’t just for someone who is profitable. It’s for all of those people — for different reasons. Today we are diving into the why and the how and the benefit of why opening it up to so many different people has created a community in which all these different types of people thrive. So, keep listening to hear more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1728</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c4722865540ce55cf6f083d5af3bcbc2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4961285373.mp3?updated=1661823217" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>125: The Makers Growth Strategy with Megan Auman of Designing an MBA</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-makers-growth-strategy</link>
      <description>Megan Auman is a designer, metalsmith, educator, and entrepreneur who has built a multi-faceted business around her passion for art, commerce, and visual content creation. AKA she rocks Instagram and Pinterest! In addition to running her eponymous jewelry line, you’ll find her on Designing an MBA, talking and teaching about the intersection of art and business. In this episode, we’ll be looking at how to use Instagram and Pinterest to see a return on investment and grow your email list. We’ll even be getting some tips on what to do with New York Now, how to plan a holiday marketing strategy and why keeping it simple it key. So hold onto your panties! As a trained and practicing metalsmith, Megan is a great person to help those entrepreneurs who are specifically hand-makers trying to grow a hand-made business. Take a listen! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 16 Oct 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Makers Growth Strategy with Megan Auman of Designing an MBA</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>125</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Megan Auman is a designer, metalsmith, educator, and entrepreneur who has built a multi-faceted business around her passion for art, commerce, and visual content creation. AKA she rocks Instagram and Pinterest! In addition to running her eponymous...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Megan Auman is a designer, metalsmith, educator, and entrepreneur who has built a multi-faceted business around her passion for art, commerce, and visual content creation. AKA she rocks Instagram and Pinterest! In addition to running her eponymous jewelry line, you’ll find her on Designing an MBA, talking and teaching about the intersection of art and business. In this episode, we’ll be looking at how to use Instagram and Pinterest to see a return on investment and grow your email list. We’ll even be getting some tips on what to do with New York Now, how to plan a holiday marketing strategy and why keeping it simple it key. So hold onto your panties! As a trained and practicing metalsmith, Megan is a great person to help those entrepreneurs who are specifically hand-makers trying to grow a hand-made business. Take a listen! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Megan Auman is a designer, metalsmith, educator, and entrepreneur who has built a multi-faceted business around her passion for art, commerce, and visual content creation. AKA she rocks Instagram and Pinterest! In addition to running her eponymous jewelry line, you’ll find her on Designing an MBA, talking and teaching about the intersection of art and business. In this episode, we’ll be looking at how to use Instagram and Pinterest to see a return on investment and grow your email list. We’ll even be getting some tips on what to do with New York Now, how to plan a holiday marketing strategy and why keeping it simple it key. So hold onto your panties! As a trained and practicing metalsmith, Megan is a great person to help those entrepreneurs who are specifically hand-makers trying to grow a hand-made business. Take a listen! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3124</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cddb2362f055b8c863f2ae44839d3b77]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2999981779.mp3?updated=1661817866" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>124: Launching a Product Using Trello</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/launching-a-product-using-trello</link>
      <description>We get asked so many questions all the time about our launches and how on earth we manage to do so many while keeping it all organized, keeping communication going with our community, and just how we get it all done!? There are so many tiny steps that go into launching just about anything that you end up feeling so anxious about it all. Well, babes, we are here to tell you that there’s an easy way to do this, to schedule it all and to keep on top of what you are doing when you are doing it, and how you are doing it.
On today’s episode, we are here to give you an overview of every single step starting at the very beginning of what we do before we launch anything. Specifically, we will be talking about what we do before we launch a program so you can adjust this for your own business to make it work for you. We are going to walk you through how we do it, and of course, we can’t do it without our little magic tool, our favorite platform, Trello. So make sure you are listening intently to this one as we are about to help you help your business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 13 Oct 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Launching a Product Using Trello</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>124</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We get asked so many questions all the time about our launches and how on earth we manage to do so many while keeping it all organized, keeping communication going with our community, and just how we get it all done!? There are so many tiny steps that...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We get asked so many questions all the time about our launches and how on earth we manage to do so many while keeping it all organized, keeping communication going with our community, and just how we get it all done!? There are so many tiny steps that go into launching just about anything that you end up feeling so anxious about it all. Well, babes, we are here to tell you that there’s an easy way to do this, to schedule it all and to keep on top of what you are doing when you are doing it, and how you are doing it.
On today’s episode, we are here to give you an overview of every single step starting at the very beginning of what we do before we launch anything. Specifically, we will be talking about what we do before we launch a program so you can adjust this for your own business to make it work for you. We are going to walk you through how we do it, and of course, we can’t do it without our little magic tool, our favorite platform, Trello. So make sure you are listening intently to this one as we are about to help you help your business!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We get asked so many questions all the time about our launches and how on earth we manage to do so many while keeping it all organized, keeping communication going with our community, and just how we get it all done!? There are so many tiny steps that go into launching just about anything that you end up feeling so anxious about it all. Well, babes, we are here to tell you that there’s an easy way to do this, to schedule it all and to keep on top of what you are doing when you are doing it, and how you are doing it.</p><p>On today’s episode, we are here to give you an overview of every single step starting at the very beginning of what we do before we launch anything. Specifically, we will be talking about what we do before we launch a program so you can adjust this for your own business to make it work for you. We are going to walk you through how we do it, and of course, we can’t do it without our little magic tool, our favorite platform, Trello. So make sure you are listening intently to this one as we are about to help you help your business!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1941</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[57c00f1c85cdc5b8e84d10cc2074f76e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4090411544.mp3?updated=1661817811" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>123: Starving Artist to Instagram All-Star with Amira Rahim</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/starving-artist-to-instagram-all-star</link>
      <description>We are so excited for today! On the show we welcome Amira Rahim who is Amira The Abstract. If your eyeballs want some glorious material you need to check her out. She is a contemporary abstract expressionist painter and she’s legit. Amira has been featured in numerous magazines and basically, in addition to being a painting bad-ass, she is also an educator. She has a program that helps other fine artists learn how to master Instagram.
Inside this episode we take a really raw behind-the-scenes look of how Amira went from starving artist to Instagram all-star. We are talking about everything about the real and raw emotions that people have and go through and connecting with people and creating community. We also find out how that has evolved into teaching and helping others be both, creating beautiful and strategic feeds that allow them to succeed inside their own businesses. This is definitely more raw than normal, in all the best ways so keep listening to hear more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 Oct 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Starving Artist to Instagram All-Star with Amira Rahim</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>123</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are so excited for today! On the show we welcome Amira Rahim who is Amira The Abstract. If your eyeballs want some glorious material you need to check her out. She is a contemporary abstract expressionist painter and she’s legit. Amira has been...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are so excited for today! On the show we welcome Amira Rahim who is Amira The Abstract. If your eyeballs want some glorious material you need to check her out. She is a contemporary abstract expressionist painter and she’s legit. Amira has been featured in numerous magazines and basically, in addition to being a painting bad-ass, she is also an educator. She has a program that helps other fine artists learn how to master Instagram.
Inside this episode we take a really raw behind-the-scenes look of how Amira went from starving artist to Instagram all-star. We are talking about everything about the real and raw emotions that people have and go through and connecting with people and creating community. We also find out how that has evolved into teaching and helping others be both, creating beautiful and strategic feeds that allow them to succeed inside their own businesses. This is definitely more raw than normal, in all the best ways so keep listening to hear more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are so excited for today! On the show we welcome Amira Rahim who is Amira The Abstract. If your eyeballs want some glorious material you need to check her out. She is a contemporary abstract expressionist painter and she’s legit. Amira has been featured in numerous magazines and basically, in addition to being a painting bad-ass, she is also an educator. She has a program that helps other fine artists learn how to master Instagram.</p><p>Inside this episode we take a really raw behind-the-scenes look of how Amira went from starving artist to Instagram all-star. We are talking about everything about the real and raw emotions that people have and go through and connecting with people and creating community. We also find out how that has evolved into teaching and helping others be both, creating beautiful and strategic feeds that allow them to succeed inside their own businesses. This is definitely more raw than normal, in all the best ways so keep listening to hear more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3318</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[432b9d453b6f530d6c9b04969e1eefbc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3692308228.mp3?updated=1661817754" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>122: What a Blogger, a Podcaster, a Consultant and a Soap Maker Have in Common</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-a-blogger-a-podcaster-and-a-consultant-and-have-in-common</link>
      <description>Today we are bringing you something new and unique and kind of awesome. In this episode you are going to get to hear from alumni from our program, The Strategy Academy, and hear us ask them some questions about their businesses and their growth and their mindsets and all the amazing things that have happened in their lives and in their businesses from taking our program earlier this year.
They are all pretty awesome peeps. You are hearing from not only a service-based person but a product-based person, a blogger, and a podcaster. We are giving you the full enchilada of what’s going on inside their businesses, where they were before and how Strategy Academy has helped them ramp up. We have formatted it a bit differently today so each guest’s story is summarized for you to get the most out of their experience with The Strategy Academy. Keep listening to hear more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 09 Oct 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What a Blogger, a Podcaster, a Consultant and a Soap Maker Have in Common</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>122</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are bringing you something new and unique and kind of awesome. In this episode you are going to get to hear from alumni from our program, The Strategy Academy, and hear us ask them some questions about their businesses and their growth and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are bringing you something new and unique and kind of awesome. In this episode you are going to get to hear from alumni from our program, The Strategy Academy, and hear us ask them some questions about their businesses and their growth and their mindsets and all the amazing things that have happened in their lives and in their businesses from taking our program earlier this year.
They are all pretty awesome peeps. You are hearing from not only a service-based person but a product-based person, a blogger, and a podcaster. We are giving you the full enchilada of what’s going on inside their businesses, where they were before and how Strategy Academy has helped them ramp up. We have formatted it a bit differently today so each guest’s story is summarized for you to get the most out of their experience with The Strategy Academy. Keep listening to hear more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are bringing you something new and unique and kind of awesome. In this episode you are going to get to hear from alumni from our program, The Strategy Academy, and hear us ask them some questions about their businesses and their growth and their mindsets and all the amazing things that have happened in their lives and in their businesses from taking our program earlier this year.</p><p>They are all pretty awesome peeps. You are hearing from not only a service-based person but a product-based person, a blogger, and a podcaster. We are giving you the full enchilada of what’s going on inside their businesses, where they were before and how Strategy Academy has helped them ramp up. We have formatted it a bit differently today so each guest’s story is summarized for you to get the most out of their experience with The Strategy Academy. Keep listening to hear more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2939</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[37ce329b00211f40cbfce40c2ebff536]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1950436330.mp3?updated=1661817635" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>121: The Verticals Method with Reina Pomeroy</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-verticals-method</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Reina Pomeroy. Reina is the founder of Reina and Co, she is a life and business success coach and she helps right-brained heart-centered women be their best selves. We have loved Reina for a long time and have been able to watch Reina’s business grow and prosper, so we definitely have a personal connection with her. We’re excited for you to hear about the amazing things we jumped into in this podcast.
Today we are talking about something that might make some of you cringe but we really want you to stick around for this one because the unique perspective Reina brings to sales funnels is actually REALLY good. She works with a lot of creatives so she knows how our brains work and she created a new method for thinking about bringing our clients, our audience and our customer on a journey with us and how to set that up to where it makes sense and where you are profitable and giving away content. We are asking her what she thinks when people say they are worried about giving away too much for free, what comes first, the free content or the paid content and how to fill the spaces in between. So believe us when we say, this episode is jam-packed and you are going to love it.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 06 Oct 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Verticals Method with Reina Pomeroy</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>121</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Reina Pomeroy. Reina is the founder of Reina and Co, she is a life and business success coach and she helps right-brained heart-centered women be their best selves. We have loved Reina for a long time and have been able to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Reina Pomeroy. Reina is the founder of Reina and Co, she is a life and business success coach and she helps right-brained heart-centered women be their best selves. We have loved Reina for a long time and have been able to watch Reina’s business grow and prosper, so we definitely have a personal connection with her. We’re excited for you to hear about the amazing things we jumped into in this podcast.
Today we are talking about something that might make some of you cringe but we really want you to stick around for this one because the unique perspective Reina brings to sales funnels is actually REALLY good. She works with a lot of creatives so she knows how our brains work and she created a new method for thinking about bringing our clients, our audience and our customer on a journey with us and how to set that up to where it makes sense and where you are profitable and giving away content. We are asking her what she thinks when people say they are worried about giving away too much for free, what comes first, the free content or the paid content and how to fill the spaces in between. So believe us when we say, this episode is jam-packed and you are going to love it.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Reina Pomeroy. Reina is the founder of Reina and Co, she is a life and business success coach and she helps right-brained heart-centered women be their best selves. We have loved Reina for a long time and have been able to watch Reina’s business grow and prosper, so we definitely have a personal connection with her. We’re excited for you to hear about the amazing things we jumped into in this podcast.</p><p>Today we are talking about something that might make some of you cringe but we really want you to stick around for this one because the unique perspective Reina brings to sales funnels is actually REALLY good. She works with a lot of creatives so she knows how our brains work and she created a new method for thinking about bringing our clients, our audience and our customer on a journey with us and how to set that up to where it makes sense and where you are profitable and giving away content. We are asking her what she thinks when people say they are worried about giving away too much for free, what comes first, the free content or the paid content and how to fill the spaces in between. So believe us when we say, this episode is jam-packed and you are going to love it.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2644</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0bc6d4d487915bb3ec36654f77dd45fb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5936746577.mp3?updated=1661817501" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>120: Our September Monthly Breakdown (AKA That Time We Had a 6-Figure Month)</title>
      <link>https://strategyhour.libsyn.com/120-our-september-monthly-breakdown-aka-that-time-we-had-a-6-figure-month</link>
      <description>Six-figure September! Yep, last month was the biggest month in TTC history. So today we are going to be breaking down our successful launch by taking an in-depth look at our actual numbers, our growth and our stumbling blocks. We both celebrate birthdays in September and TCC turned two in September, so this is very sweet gift from the universe that we reached a six-figure month. By that, we mean the cash came in and landed in our bank account. This blew our minds and is more money than we have ever made!
Want to hear another cool thing? Not only did we reach six figures, but we reached it by September 19th. That’s a little less than three weeks. Want to hear another cool thing? We reached $100,100,00 – that’s an additional $10,000, just for fun! And this number happened without us even reaching our projected numbers during our September launch. If you want to hear more about that launch, definitely go back a couple of episodes and check that out. Because today, we are going to be reviewing the process step by step and finding out how the heck we got to a six-figure month? An exciting milestone for us. Take a listen, you know we’ve got tips to share!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 Oct 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our September Monthly Breakdown (AKA That Time We Had a 6-Figure Month)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>120</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Six-figure September! Yep, last month was the biggest month in TTC history. So today we are going to be breaking down our successful launch by taking an in-depth look at our actual numbers, our growth and our stumbling blocks. We both celebrate...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Six-figure September! Yep, last month was the biggest month in TTC history. So today we are going to be breaking down our successful launch by taking an in-depth look at our actual numbers, our growth and our stumbling blocks. We both celebrate birthdays in September and TCC turned two in September, so this is very sweet gift from the universe that we reached a six-figure month. By that, we mean the cash came in and landed in our bank account. This blew our minds and is more money than we have ever made!
Want to hear another cool thing? Not only did we reach six figures, but we reached it by September 19th. That’s a little less than three weeks. Want to hear another cool thing? We reached $100,100,00 – that’s an additional $10,000, just for fun! And this number happened without us even reaching our projected numbers during our September launch. If you want to hear more about that launch, definitely go back a couple of episodes and check that out. Because today, we are going to be reviewing the process step by step and finding out how the heck we got to a six-figure month? An exciting milestone for us. Take a listen, you know we’ve got tips to share!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Six-figure September! Yep, last month was the biggest month in TTC history. So today we are going to be breaking down our successful launch by taking an in-depth look at our actual numbers, our growth and our stumbling blocks. We both celebrate birthdays in September and TCC turned two in September, so this is very sweet gift from the universe that we reached a six-figure month. By that, we mean the cash came in and landed in our bank account. This blew our minds and is more money than we have ever made!</p><p>Want to hear another cool thing? Not only did we reach six figures, but we reached it by September 19th. That’s a little less than three weeks. Want to hear another cool thing? We reached $100,100,00 – that’s an additional $10,000, just for fun! And this number happened without us even reaching our projected numbers during our September launch. If you want to hear more about that launch, definitely go back a couple of episodes and check that out. Because today, we are going to be reviewing the process step by step and finding out how the heck we got to a six-figure month? An exciting milestone for us. Take a listen, you know we’ve got tips to share!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3838</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8e2cf18e31f81d65fd6fed6d72b8284c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8161287565.mp3?updated=1661817454" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>119: How This Boss Bootstrapped a $4 Mil. Company with Laura of Meet Edgar</title>
      <link>https://strategyhour.libsyn.com/119-how-this-boss-bootstrapped-a-4-mil-company-with-laura-of-meet-edgar</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we welcome Meet Edgar Founder and CEO, Laura Roeder. Meet Edgar is a social media automation tool, that makes sure your social media gets posted to all the appropriate places. Often we are so afraid to re-purpose or re-post content more than once. But if you knew that your reach per post is often sitting around 5%, you might start to think a little differently! Meet Edgar helps small businesses and entrepreneurs reuse their best content to bring in a ton of views.
But we are not talking all about social media today; we are talking about how Laura bootstrapped her company, how she has developed a 100% remote team of 30 employees across the US, generated over seven thousand subscribers, is bringing in $4 million in annual revenue and how she has survived all of this with zero sales team. Oh, and in just three years. Today we will be diving into all her juicy secrets, discussing the future of social media and why we should be utilizing them while they are still free.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 02 Oct 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How This Boss Bootstrapped a $4 Mil. Company with Laura of Meet Edgar</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>119</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we welcome Meet Edgar Founder and CEO, Laura Roeder. Meet Edgar is a social media automation tool, that makes sure your social media gets posted to all the appropriate places. Often we are so afraid to re-purpose or re-post...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we welcome Meet Edgar Founder and CEO, Laura Roeder. Meet Edgar is a social media automation tool, that makes sure your social media gets posted to all the appropriate places. Often we are so afraid to re-purpose or re-post content more than once. But if you knew that your reach per post is often sitting around 5%, you might start to think a little differently! Meet Edgar helps small businesses and entrepreneurs reuse their best content to bring in a ton of views.
But we are not talking all about social media today; we are talking about how Laura bootstrapped her company, how she has developed a 100% remote team of 30 employees across the US, generated over seven thousand subscribers, is bringing in $4 million in annual revenue and how she has survived all of this with zero sales team. Oh, and in just three years. Today we will be diving into all her juicy secrets, discussing the future of social media and why we should be utilizing them while they are still free.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we welcome Meet Edgar Founder and CEO, Laura Roeder. Meet Edgar is a social media automation tool, that makes sure your social media gets posted to all the appropriate places. Often we are so afraid to re-purpose or re-post content more than once. But if you knew that your reach per post is often sitting around 5%, you might start to think a little differently! Meet Edgar helps small businesses and entrepreneurs reuse their best content to bring in a ton of views.</p><p>But we are not talking all about social media today; we are talking about how Laura bootstrapped her company, how she has developed a 100% remote team of 30 employees across the US, generated over seven thousand subscribers, is bringing in $4 million in annual revenue and how she has survived all of this with zero sales team. Oh, and in just three years. Today we will be diving into all her juicy secrets, discussing the future of social media and why we should be utilizing them while they are still free.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2382</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f7381fdb00f8a278d2fb6b79eafdd40c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6264846423.mp3?updated=1661868021" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>118: Celebrating Two Years for TCC: Reflecting Back and Looking Ahead</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/celebrating-two-years-for-tcc-reflecting-back-and-looking-ahead</link>
      <description>Happy Birthday to us (queue birthday song). Did you know Think Creative Collective just turned two? We are worried now, because the terrible two’s, does that happen in business too? We certainly hope not! We want to tell you everything we’ve worked on, everything that’s kinda worked for us, some stats to get you familiar with how things have been going and talk a little bit about the future of TCC.
Also, we have opened and started and closed seven businesses together, so this ain’t our first rodeo, babes. It might be our first rodeo together and our most successful business, but we have been in so many other businesses and we have been through all the ups and downs. So we get it, we get it all. Want to find out how we have made this business work? Keep listening to hear more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 29 Sep 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Celebrating Two Years for TCC: Reflecting Back and Looking Ahead</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>118</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Happy Birthday to us (queue birthday song). Did you know Think Creative Collective just turned two? We are worried now, because the terrible two’s, does that happen in business too? We certainly hope not! We want to tell you everything we’ve...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Happy Birthday to us (queue birthday song). Did you know Think Creative Collective just turned two? We are worried now, because the terrible two’s, does that happen in business too? We certainly hope not! We want to tell you everything we’ve worked on, everything that’s kinda worked for us, some stats to get you familiar with how things have been going and talk a little bit about the future of TCC.
Also, we have opened and started and closed seven businesses together, so this ain’t our first rodeo, babes. It might be our first rodeo together and our most successful business, but we have been in so many other businesses and we have been through all the ups and downs. So we get it, we get it all. Want to find out how we have made this business work? Keep listening to hear more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Happy Birthday to us (queue birthday song). Did you know Think Creative Collective just turned two? We are worried now, because the terrible two’s, does that happen in business too? We certainly hope not! We want to tell you everything we’ve worked on, everything that’s kinda worked for us, some stats to get you familiar with how things have been going and talk a little bit about the future of TCC.</p><p>Also, we have opened and started and closed seven businesses together, so this ain’t our first rodeo, babes. It might be our first rodeo together and our most successful business, but we have been in so many other businesses and we have been through all the ups and downs. So we get it, we get it all. Want to find out how we have made this business work? Keep listening to hear more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2458</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[65bc4b6bdb437683f641515975c28294]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9429308300.mp3?updated=1661867980" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>117: Strategies Every Successful Wedding Planner Needs with Madison Sanders</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/strategies-every-successful-wedding-planner-needs</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Madison Sanders, of Madison Sanders Events. Madi has been a wedding planner and designer since 2014 (and also, it just so happens that we went to high school together!) Madison has gone from working for other agencies to building her own business, to even growing her agency where she now has other planners working for her. We talk about how that entire process worked, what she invested in along the way and how she was able to utilize relationships with vendors to continue to grow her business.
We discuss the ins and outs of wedding planning – from managing multiple marketing platforms, how she gets her clients, communicating with employees and clients, asking for referrals and setting boundaries so that you can look after your own well-being. Even if you are not in the wedding industry, there are so many valuable nuggets here, for any entrepreneur, in any industry. Take a listen!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 27 Sep 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Strategies Every Successful Wedding Planner Needs with Madison Sanders</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>117</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Madison Sanders, of Madison Sanders Events. Madi has been a wedding planner and designer since 2014 (and also, it just so happens that we went to high school together!) Madison has gone from working for other agencies to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Madison Sanders, of Madison Sanders Events. Madi has been a wedding planner and designer since 2014 (and also, it just so happens that we went to high school together!) Madison has gone from working for other agencies to building her own business, to even growing her agency where she now has other planners working for her. We talk about how that entire process worked, what she invested in along the way and how she was able to utilize relationships with vendors to continue to grow her business.
We discuss the ins and outs of wedding planning – from managing multiple marketing platforms, how she gets her clients, communicating with employees and clients, asking for referrals and setting boundaries so that you can look after your own well-being. Even if you are not in the wedding industry, there are so many valuable nuggets here, for any entrepreneur, in any industry. Take a listen!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Madison Sanders, of Madison Sanders Events. Madi has been a wedding planner and designer since 2014 (and also, it just so happens that we went to high school together!) Madison has gone from working for other agencies to building her own business, to even growing her agency where she now has other planners working for her. We talk about how that entire process worked, what she invested in along the way and how she was able to utilize relationships with vendors to continue to grow her business.</p><p>We discuss the ins and outs of wedding planning – from managing multiple marketing platforms, how she gets her clients, communicating with employees and clients, asking for referrals and setting boundaries so that you can look after your own well-being. Even if you are not in the wedding industry, there are so many valuable nuggets here, for any entrepreneur, in any industry. Take a listen!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2688</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d375ae2f9d74debc1fc48a5f65b9f0e2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4353699263.mp3?updated=1661867940" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>116: Our 2nd Rock Your Biz Launch Breakdown</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/our-second-rock-your-biz-launch-breakdown</link>
      <description>We are here for another launch breakdown, we hope you’re as excited as we are. Today we’re breaking down our second Rock Your Biz launch. We’re giving you the inside scoop and believe me, it’s something you’ll want to hear. We learned a lot and we have a lot of stats to cover with you all today because we like sharing the nitty-gritty details. ( you already know that though)
In case you’re brand spanking new and don't know what the heck Rock Your Biz is. It’s a program that we opened and then closed just this month. We ran a free four-day challenge to kind of warm people up to the concept of what was going to be so good to them once we open the doors. We had 3 webinars and it was awesome. To say we were the most baffled by this launch, ever, would be an understatement and babes, you’re hearing it all here first. So keep listening to hear more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 25 Sep 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our 2nd Rock Your Biz Launch Breakdown</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>116</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are here for another launch breakdown, we hope you’re as excited as we are. Today we’re breaking down our second Rock Your Biz launch. We’re giving you the inside scoop and believe me, it’s something you’ll want to hear. We learned a lot...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are here for another launch breakdown, we hope you’re as excited as we are. Today we’re breaking down our second Rock Your Biz launch. We’re giving you the inside scoop and believe me, it’s something you’ll want to hear. We learned a lot and we have a lot of stats to cover with you all today because we like sharing the nitty-gritty details. ( you already know that though)
In case you’re brand spanking new and don't know what the heck Rock Your Biz is. It’s a program that we opened and then closed just this month. We ran a free four-day challenge to kind of warm people up to the concept of what was going to be so good to them once we open the doors. We had 3 webinars and it was awesome. To say we were the most baffled by this launch, ever, would be an understatement and babes, you’re hearing it all here first. So keep listening to hear more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are here for another launch breakdown, we hope you’re as excited as we are. Today we’re breaking down our second Rock Your Biz launch. We’re giving you the inside scoop and believe me, it’s something you’ll want to hear. We learned a lot and we have a lot of stats to cover with you all today because we like sharing the nitty-gritty details. ( you already know that though)</p><p>In case you’re brand spanking new and don't know what the heck Rock Your Biz is. It’s a program that we opened and then closed just this month. We ran a free four-day challenge to kind of warm people up to the concept of what was going to be so good to them once we open the doors. We had 3 webinars and it was awesome. To say we were the most baffled by this launch, ever, would be an understatement and babes, you’re hearing it all here first. So keep listening to hear more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2489</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a5ec5d8e8f7cb0236ed4d1ae8e06d80d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4259409842.mp3?updated=1661867890" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>115: Tackling Inbox Overwhelm with Val Geisler</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/tackling-inbox-overwhelm</link>
      <description>Today on the show, we welcome Val Geisler. Val is an Email Marketing Strategist with a passion for digital entrepreneurs. With over a decade of experience working with everything from non-profits to multi-six-figure businesses, Val knows email like the back of her hand and is going to help us tackle the dreaded inbox today. We all communicate by email, especially in business. If email is one of our most fundamental communication tools, shouldn’t we be using it to the best of our ability? We all know what it’s like to have an overflowing inbox, scattered folders, hundreds of unread newsletters and emails we keep saying we’ll get back to. Managing your inbox can be stressful, time-consuming and down-right overwhelming – but it doesn’t have to be, not if it’s done right. Today on the show we discuss the strategies, tips and tricks that you can start implementing today into your business. Tips to help you efficiently sift through the clutter, get things done and ultimately improve your business communication. We’ll be taking a look at different approaches to email; such as hiring out your inbox, Val’s OHIO method, the Pomodoro Technique, email marketing and why you should treat the inbox of other’s the way you want your inbox to be treated. Take a listen! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 22 Sep 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Tackling Inbox Overwhelm with Val Geisler</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>115</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show, we welcome Val Geisler. Val is an Email Marketing Strategist with a passion for digital entrepreneurs. With over a decade of experience working with everything from non-profits to multi-six-figure businesses, Val knows email like...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show, we welcome Val Geisler. Val is an Email Marketing Strategist with a passion for digital entrepreneurs. With over a decade of experience working with everything from non-profits to multi-six-figure businesses, Val knows email like the back of her hand and is going to help us tackle the dreaded inbox today. We all communicate by email, especially in business. If email is one of our most fundamental communication tools, shouldn’t we be using it to the best of our ability? We all know what it’s like to have an overflowing inbox, scattered folders, hundreds of unread newsletters and emails we keep saying we’ll get back to. Managing your inbox can be stressful, time-consuming and down-right overwhelming – but it doesn’t have to be, not if it’s done right. Today on the show we discuss the strategies, tips and tricks that you can start implementing today into your business. Tips to help you efficiently sift through the clutter, get things done and ultimately improve your business communication. We’ll be taking a look at different approaches to email; such as hiring out your inbox, Val’s OHIO method, the Pomodoro Technique, email marketing and why you should treat the inbox of other’s the way you want your inbox to be treated. Take a listen! 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. 
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show, we welcome Val Geisler. Val is an Email Marketing Strategist with a passion for digital entrepreneurs. With over a decade of experience working with everything from non-profits to multi-six-figure businesses, Val knows email like the back of her hand and is going to help us tackle the dreaded inbox today. We all communicate by email, especially in business. If email is one of our most fundamental communication tools, shouldn’t we be using it to the best of our ability? We all know what it’s like to have an overflowing inbox, scattered folders, hundreds of unread newsletters and emails we keep saying we’ll get back to. Managing your inbox can be stressful, time-consuming and down-right overwhelming – but it doesn’t have to be, not if it’s done right. Today on the show we discuss the strategies, tips and tricks that you can start implementing today into your business. Tips to help you efficiently sift through the clutter, get things done and ultimately improve your business communication. We’ll be taking a look at different approaches to email; such as hiring out your inbox, Val’s OHIO method, the Pomodoro Technique, email marketing and why you should treat the inbox of other’s the way you want your inbox to be treated. Take a listen! </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2852</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8b04b4fb993e3e77add2ff518bb5f29f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7983707697.mp3?updated=1661867897" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>114: Our Second Challenge Breakdown: 4 Days to Sexy Systems</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/our-second-challenge-breakdown-4-days-to-sexy-systems</link>
      <description>We’re here for our very first evening recording of the podcast. Today on the show we are breaking down our second free challenge that we hosted recently. We’re giving you all the data, all the numbers about the results we got from that challenge. We want you to know that the biggest take away from all of this is that challenges are awesome sauce and we don’t know why you haven't run one.
They’re still kind of new and hot. We’re walking you through our 4 Days To Sexy Systems challenge and giving you the low down. All the things you need to know about running a challenge and the results that we saw because of it. Keep listening to hear more babes!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 20 Sep 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our Second Challenge Breakdown: 4 Days to Sexy Systems</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>114</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’re here for our very first evening recording of the podcast. Today on the show we are breaking down our second free challenge that we hosted recently. We’re giving you all the data, all the numbers about the results we got from that challenge....</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’re here for our very first evening recording of the podcast. Today on the show we are breaking down our second free challenge that we hosted recently. We’re giving you all the data, all the numbers about the results we got from that challenge. We want you to know that the biggest take away from all of this is that challenges are awesome sauce and we don’t know why you haven't run one.
They’re still kind of new and hot. We’re walking you through our 4 Days To Sexy Systems challenge and giving you the low down. All the things you need to know about running a challenge and the results that we saw because of it. Keep listening to hear more babes!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’re here for our very first evening recording of the podcast. Today on the show we are breaking down our second free challenge that we hosted recently. We’re giving you all the data, all the numbers about the results we got from that challenge. We want you to know that the biggest take away from all of this is that challenges are awesome sauce and we don’t know why you haven't run one.</p><p>They’re still kind of new and hot. We’re walking you through our 4 Days To Sexy Systems challenge and giving you the low down. All the things you need to know about running a challenge and the results that we saw because of it. Keep listening to hear more babes!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2207</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d516e6c5013d298719db30b700057210]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8733719544.mp3?updated=1661867801" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>113: Managing Your Small Business Finances with Geily Romero of Cutting Edge Financial Solutions</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/managing-your-small-business-finances</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have the numbers queen, Geily Romero. Geily is a financial consultant and strategist for businesses. She has some amazing knowledge all about getting your business financially stable, setting goals and growing your business. On today’s show we’re going over one of our favorite things; profit and loss statements!
We are talking numbers and all the things you need to do to get setup so you can start analyzing the financial side of your business, what mistakes you might be making and how you can start paying more attention to this very important piece of your business. We are also giving you some free solutions on how to make it all happen! Yeah, you heard that right, so stay tuned!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 18 Sep 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Managing Your Small Business Finances with Geily Romero of Cutting Edge Financial Solutions</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>113</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have the numbers queen, Geily Romero. Geily is a financial consultant and strategist for businesses. She has some amazing knowledge all about getting your business financially stable, setting goals and growing your business. On...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have the numbers queen, Geily Romero. Geily is a financial consultant and strategist for businesses. She has some amazing knowledge all about getting your business financially stable, setting goals and growing your business. On today’s show we’re going over one of our favorite things; profit and loss statements!
We are talking numbers and all the things you need to do to get setup so you can start analyzing the financial side of your business, what mistakes you might be making and how you can start paying more attention to this very important piece of your business. We are also giving you some free solutions on how to make it all happen! Yeah, you heard that right, so stay tuned!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have the numbers queen, Geily Romero. Geily is a financial consultant and strategist for businesses. She has some amazing knowledge all about getting your business financially stable, setting goals and growing your business. On today’s show we’re going over one of our favorite things; profit and loss statements!</p><p>We are talking numbers and all the things you need to do to get setup so you can start analyzing the financial side of your business, what mistakes you might be making and how you can start paying more attention to this very important piece of your business. We are also giving you some free solutions on how to make it all happen! Yeah, you heard that right, so stay tuned!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2915</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c408fa6ff0e51a103aadda9260a6b0fa]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2712159164.mp3?updated=1661867825" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>112: Rock Your Biz Babe: Boost Productivity and Build Sustainable Freaking Systems for Your Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/rock-your-biz-babe-boost-productivity-and-build-sustainable-freaking-systems-for-your-business</link>
      <description>Rock Your Biz is back! Doors are open! And we can’t wait to tell you all about this game-changing opportunity starting September 25th. Rock Your Biz is a five week online course for overwhelmed creatives who want to build productive, sustainable and profitable system inside their businesses. We’re recording this episode in the middle of the Rock Your Biz launch so that you can get a taste for what it’s all about – what’s inside, what you’re going to tackle, as well as what this program can do for you and what it’s done for thousands of creative entrepreneurs around the globe.
Today, we’ll be discussing the course framework, giving real life examples of how this course has helped others, as well as giving you an outline of the course from week one through to week five. Even if you are already enrolled, this episode will give you a framework of what to expect in the coming weeks as you go through the program. If you want to enroll you can go to rockyourbizbabe.com where you’ll find a ton of information. Enrollment is open for just a few more days, so sign up now and get ready to go from frazzled hot mess to master of systems with Rock Your Biz. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 15 Sep 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Rock Your Biz Babe: Boost Productivity and Build Sustainable Freaking Systems for Your Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>112</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Rock Your Biz is back! Doors are open! And we can’t wait to tell you all about this game-changing opportunity starting September 25th. Rock Your Biz is a five week online course for overwhelmed creatives who want to build productive, sustainable and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Rock Your Biz is back! Doors are open! And we can’t wait to tell you all about this game-changing opportunity starting September 25th. Rock Your Biz is a five week online course for overwhelmed creatives who want to build productive, sustainable and profitable system inside their businesses. We’re recording this episode in the middle of the Rock Your Biz launch so that you can get a taste for what it’s all about – what’s inside, what you’re going to tackle, as well as what this program can do for you and what it’s done for thousands of creative entrepreneurs around the globe.
Today, we’ll be discussing the course framework, giving real life examples of how this course has helped others, as well as giving you an outline of the course from week one through to week five. Even if you are already enrolled, this episode will give you a framework of what to expect in the coming weeks as you go through the program. If you want to enroll you can go to rockyourbizbabe.com where you’ll find a ton of information. Enrollment is open for just a few more days, so sign up now and get ready to go from frazzled hot mess to master of systems with Rock Your Biz. 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Rock Your Biz is back! Doors are open! And we can’t wait to tell you all about this game-changing opportunity starting September 25th. Rock Your Biz is a five week online course for overwhelmed creatives who want to build productive, sustainable and profitable system inside their businesses. We’re recording this episode in the middle of the Rock Your Biz launch so that you can get a taste for what it’s all about – what’s inside, what you’re going to tackle, as well as what this program can do for you and what it’s done for thousands of creative entrepreneurs around the globe.</p><p>Today, we’ll be discussing the course framework, giving real life examples of how this course has helped others, as well as giving you an outline of the course from week one through to week five. Even if you are already enrolled, this episode will give you a framework of what to expect in the coming weeks as you go through the program. If you want to enroll you can go to rockyourbizbabe.com where you’ll find a ton of information. Enrollment is open for just a few more days, so sign up now and get ready to go from frazzled hot mess to master of systems with Rock Your Biz. </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2294</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cd2f0792b93fc1c24800990c064ce6d3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1431701273.mp3?updated=1661867754" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>111: When Your Spouse is Your Employee with Megan Stone of Sweet Chubby Cheeks</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/when-your-spouse-is-your-employee</link>
      <description>We have a crowd favorite on the podcast today. Megan Stone, owner of Sweet Chubby Cheeks. Megan is a proud Momma to two wonderful kiddos. Her designs are inspired by her daughter, and the need she had to find quality outfits for photo sessions, and headbands for everyday wear. She quickly found that other moms had the same desire and Sweet Chubby Cheeks was born!
Today we’re getting super deep, super real, a little personal, crossing those boundaries of what you should and shouldn’t talk. Yeah, we’re talking all about when your spouse is your employee and how the dynamics of that really works. We’re talking about hiring your husband/wife and Megan has been able to successfully do so. She’s giving us an idea of the work that she took to get there and some of the stumbling steps she took in the beginning. We’re diving into it, so keep listening to hear more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 13 Sep 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>When Your Spouse is Your Employee with Megan Stone of Sweet Chubby Cheeks</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>111</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We have a crowd favorite on the podcast today. Megan Stone, owner of Sweet Chubby Cheeks. Megan is a proud Momma to two wonderful kiddos. Her designs are inspired by her daughter, and the need she had to find quality outfits for photo sessions, and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We have a crowd favorite on the podcast today. Megan Stone, owner of Sweet Chubby Cheeks. Megan is a proud Momma to two wonderful kiddos. Her designs are inspired by her daughter, and the need she had to find quality outfits for photo sessions, and headbands for everyday wear. She quickly found that other moms had the same desire and Sweet Chubby Cheeks was born!
Today we’re getting super deep, super real, a little personal, crossing those boundaries of what you should and shouldn’t talk. Yeah, we’re talking all about when your spouse is your employee and how the dynamics of that really works. We’re talking about hiring your husband/wife and Megan has been able to successfully do so. She’s giving us an idea of the work that she took to get there and some of the stumbling steps she took in the beginning. We’re diving into it, so keep listening to hear more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We have a crowd favorite on the podcast today. Megan Stone, owner of Sweet Chubby Cheeks. Megan is a proud Momma to two wonderful kiddos. Her designs are inspired by her daughter, and the need she had to find quality outfits for photo sessions, and headbands for everyday wear. She quickly found that other moms had the same desire and Sweet Chubby Cheeks was born!</p><p>Today we’re getting super deep, super real, a little personal, crossing those boundaries of what you should and shouldn’t talk. Yeah, we’re talking all about when your spouse is your employee and how the dynamics of that really works. We’re talking about hiring your husband/wife and Megan has been able to successfully do so. She’s giving us an idea of the work that she took to get there and some of the stumbling steps she took in the beginning. We’re diving into it, so keep listening to hear more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3032</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3ca0f093542c0a69a637ce07822a2ff6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8741185391.mp3?updated=1661867783" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>110: A Breakdown of a Monthly Review with Think Creative Collective</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/a-breakdown-of-a-monthly-review-with-think-creative-collective</link>
      <description>Today we are recording a live version of us going through our monthly review sheet. What we’re really going to talk about is the process and we are going through the entire thing step by step, just as we normally do, so you guys can see how long it takes, what we talk about, what we ask ourselves, what are we looking at, what numbers are we pulling and we’re doing it in real time. We’ve pulled up the websites that we usually gather data from but we haven't crunched the numbers yet. We are doing it on air so you guys can see realistically how all this works.
It’s August review and we use our worksheets that we’ve created for some awesome students of ours and our community and those are available in both The Follow Through Method and Rock Your Biz. We are going through our typical review of what we would do at the end of a month and then planning for the following month. This episode might be a bit different to listen to. We are testing it so do let us know if you love it or hate it at the end of it. So keep listening to hear how all this works!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 11 Sep 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>A Breakdown of a Monthly Review with Think Creative Collective</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>110</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are recording a live version of us going through our monthly review sheet. What we’re really going to talk about is the process and we are going through the entire thing step by step, just as we normally do, so you guys can see how long it...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are recording a live version of us going through our monthly review sheet. What we’re really going to talk about is the process and we are going through the entire thing step by step, just as we normally do, so you guys can see how long it takes, what we talk about, what we ask ourselves, what are we looking at, what numbers are we pulling and we’re doing it in real time. We’ve pulled up the websites that we usually gather data from but we haven't crunched the numbers yet. We are doing it on air so you guys can see realistically how all this works.
It’s August review and we use our worksheets that we’ve created for some awesome students of ours and our community and those are available in both The Follow Through Method and Rock Your Biz. We are going through our typical review of what we would do at the end of a month and then planning for the following month. This episode might be a bit different to listen to. We are testing it so do let us know if you love it or hate it at the end of it. So keep listening to hear how all this works!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are recording a live version of us going through our monthly review sheet. What we’re really going to talk about is the process and we are going through the entire thing step by step, just as we normally do, so you guys can see how long it takes, what we talk about, what we ask ourselves, what are we looking at, what numbers are we pulling and we’re doing it in real time. We’ve pulled up the websites that we usually gather data from but we haven't crunched the numbers yet. We are doing it on air so you guys can see realistically how all this works.</p><p>It’s August review and we use our worksheets that we’ve created for some awesome students of ours and our community and those are available in both The Follow Through Method and Rock Your Biz. We are going through our typical review of what we would do at the end of a month and then planning for the following month. This episode might be a bit different to listen to. We are testing it so do let us know if you love it or hate it at the end of it. So keep listening to hear how all this works!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>4225</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ceb525c7812b191ec62b265b3999cf4a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2964655819.mp3?updated=1661867807" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>109: Leveraging a Viral Post with Hope Brookins</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/leveraging-a-viral-post</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we welcome personal branding and publicity strategist, Hope Brookins. After having her family’s personal story of building a house using YouTube tutorials go completely viral, Hope was able to leverage that opportunity into her own business success. Using this experience, Hope helps small business owners do the same thing. She helps them build their own brand story, take their media and take these opportunities so that they are perfectly positioned, polished and prepared to present themselves to the world.
On today’s episode, Hope gives actionable steps to help you craft your own brand story and integrate it into your website and business. She also identifies the key features of a viral post and what you can do to every piece of content to help it have the opportunity to go viral, organically. Many people think “going viral” happens overnight but this is not always the case. It took Hope and her family two years of preparation for their story to go viral and Hope is all about having a carefully planned strategy to get you there. If you are looking for some great tips and actionable steps on how you can tweak your brand story to be more viral-worthy, then this episode is definitely for you. We can’t wait for you to hear her story!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 08 Sep 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Leveraging a Viral Post with Hope Brookins</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>109</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we welcome personal branding and publicity strategist, Hope Brookins. After having her family’s personal story of building a house using YouTube tutorials go completely viral, Hope was able to leverage that opportunity into her...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we welcome personal branding and publicity strategist, Hope Brookins. After having her family’s personal story of building a house using YouTube tutorials go completely viral, Hope was able to leverage that opportunity into her own business success. Using this experience, Hope helps small business owners do the same thing. She helps them build their own brand story, take their media and take these opportunities so that they are perfectly positioned, polished and prepared to present themselves to the world.
On today’s episode, Hope gives actionable steps to help you craft your own brand story and integrate it into your website and business. She also identifies the key features of a viral post and what you can do to every piece of content to help it have the opportunity to go viral, organically. Many people think “going viral” happens overnight but this is not always the case. It took Hope and her family two years of preparation for their story to go viral and Hope is all about having a carefully planned strategy to get you there. If you are looking for some great tips and actionable steps on how you can tweak your brand story to be more viral-worthy, then this episode is definitely for you. We can’t wait for you to hear her story!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we welcome personal branding and publicity strategist, Hope Brookins. After having her family’s personal story of building a house using YouTube tutorials go completely viral, Hope was able to leverage that opportunity into her own business success. Using this experience, Hope helps small business owners do the same thing. She helps them build their own brand story, take their media and take these opportunities so that they are perfectly positioned, polished and prepared to present themselves to the world.</p><p>On today’s episode, Hope gives actionable steps to help you craft your own brand story and integrate it into your website and business. She also identifies the key features of a viral post and what you can do to every piece of content to help it have the opportunity to go viral, organically. Many people think “going viral” happens overnight but this is not always the case. It took Hope and her family two years of preparation for their story to go viral and Hope is all about having a carefully planned strategy to get you there. If you are looking for some great tips and actionable steps on how you can tweak your brand story to be more viral-worthy, then this episode is definitely for you. We can’t wait for you to hear her story!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2921</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[170dd0e8291e52645eba8f773d669b75]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4406535700.mp3?updated=1661867622" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>108: Goal Crusher Create a Foolproof Plan So You Can Conquer Anything</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/goal-crusher-create-a-foolproof-plan-so-you-can-conquer-anything</link>
      <description>Today we are excited to tell you about a workshop coming up next Tuesday, September 12th. We are going to help you create a foolproof plan so you can literally conquer anything. Inside this workshop we are going from step zero to done and everything in between. We are going to show you the steps you need to take before you even think about being more product. On this episode we are going through some of the actual steps inside the challenge so you can start to see results right away and know that the stuff that we share and talk about is legit.
We are also bringing it a step back into the workshop so we can help you create a good framework going forward. Finally, we will also be sharing a couple of saucy hacks that you can implement to make running your business on the go faster, easier, and more polished. Then, we are moving to “to-do list, done”, crossing them off because they are done. So we are going to talk about how other successful business owners look at their goals and their strategies and how they can work specifically for creatives. So how do you get there? Let’s jump in and take a look.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 06 Sep 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Goal Crusher Create a Foolproof Plan So You Can Conquer Anything</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>108</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are excited to tell you about a workshop coming up next Tuesday, September 12th. We are going to help you create a foolproof plan so you can literally conquer anything. Inside this workshop we are going from step zero to done and everything...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are excited to tell you about a workshop coming up next Tuesday, September 12th. We are going to help you create a foolproof plan so you can literally conquer anything. Inside this workshop we are going from step zero to done and everything in between. We are going to show you the steps you need to take before you even think about being more product. On this episode we are going through some of the actual steps inside the challenge so you can start to see results right away and know that the stuff that we share and talk about is legit.
We are also bringing it a step back into the workshop so we can help you create a good framework going forward. Finally, we will also be sharing a couple of saucy hacks that you can implement to make running your business on the go faster, easier, and more polished. Then, we are moving to “to-do list, done”, crossing them off because they are done. So we are going to talk about how other successful business owners look at their goals and their strategies and how they can work specifically for creatives. So how do you get there? Let’s jump in and take a look.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are excited to tell you about a workshop coming up next Tuesday, September 12th. We are going to help you create a foolproof plan so you can literally conquer anything. Inside this workshop we are going from step zero to done and everything in between. We are going to show you the steps you need to take before you even think about being more product. On this episode we are going through some of the actual steps inside the challenge so you can start to see results right away and know that the stuff that we share and talk about is legit.</p><p>We are also bringing it a step back into the workshop so we can help you create a good framework going forward. Finally, we will also be sharing a couple of saucy hacks that you can implement to make running your business on the go faster, easier, and more polished. Then, we are moving to “to-do list, done”, crossing them off because they are done. So we are going to talk about how other successful business owners look at their goals and their strategies and how they can work specifically for creatives. So how do you get there? Let’s jump in and take a look.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>642</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5492a555475c65f29f24cab4d6c73386]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5512698159.mp3?updated=1661865667" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>107: Taking the Work Out of Networking with Renee Dalo of Moxie Bright Events</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/taking-the-work-out-of-networking</link>
      <description>Today we welcome Renee Dalo of Moxie Bright Events. Renee is a southern California wedding planner and she is also the leader of the Los Angeles chapter of the Rising Tide society. Today’s episode is all about that icky word, “networking.” Renee has really used this practice to build her business from the ground up. To this day, over a decade later, almost 99% of her clients came from customer friend referrals. Networking has been vital to the growth of her business and Renee is extremely knowledgeable in this realm that we often don’t really know how to effectively tackle.
In today’s episode, Renee gives us actionable steps that we can take away for avoiding awkward conversations and cultivating better networking practices. We talk about ghosts, being authentic, and why business is ultimately all about people. Whether you are in events planning or not, Renee has a lot of great tips for your business and personal life. So either way, if you just need a good belly-laugh, this episode is right up your alley. Take a listen!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 04 Sep 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Taking the Work Out of Networking with Renee Dalo of Moxie Bright Events</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>107</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we welcome Renee Dalo of Moxie Bright Events. Renee is a southern California wedding planner and she is also the leader of the Los Angeles chapter of the Rising Tide society. Today’s episode is all about that icky word, “networking.” Renee...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we welcome Renee Dalo of Moxie Bright Events. Renee is a southern California wedding planner and she is also the leader of the Los Angeles chapter of the Rising Tide society. Today’s episode is all about that icky word, “networking.” Renee has really used this practice to build her business from the ground up. To this day, over a decade later, almost 99% of her clients came from customer friend referrals. Networking has been vital to the growth of her business and Renee is extremely knowledgeable in this realm that we often don’t really know how to effectively tackle.
In today’s episode, Renee gives us actionable steps that we can take away for avoiding awkward conversations and cultivating better networking practices. We talk about ghosts, being authentic, and why business is ultimately all about people. Whether you are in events planning or not, Renee has a lot of great tips for your business and personal life. So either way, if you just need a good belly-laugh, this episode is right up your alley. Take a listen!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we welcome Renee Dalo of Moxie Bright Events. Renee is a southern California wedding planner and she is also the leader of the Los Angeles chapter of the Rising Tide society. Today’s episode is all about that icky word, “networking.” Renee has really used this practice to build her business from the ground up. To this day, over a decade later, almost 99% of her clients came from customer friend referrals. Networking has been vital to the growth of her business and Renee is extremely knowledgeable in this realm that we often don’t really know how to effectively tackle.</p><p>In today’s episode, Renee gives us actionable steps that we can take away for avoiding awkward conversations and cultivating better networking practices. We talk about ghosts, being authentic, and why business is ultimately all about people. Whether you are in events planning or not, Renee has a lot of great tips for your business and personal life. So either way, if you just need a good belly-laugh, this episode is right up your alley. Take a listen!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2998</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c2e78dfba4020f1110fd2b643f5efa31]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2546151319.mp3?updated=1661867577" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>106: Tackling Your Systems, Working Backwards, and Avoiding Overwhelm</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/tackling-your-systems-working-backwards-and-avoiding-overwhelm</link>
      <description>Today we are talking all things systems. Our main concept is all about working backward to achieve a goal. This may not be a new concept, but it is one of the topics we get the most questions about. So we are going to answer a bunch of the questions we have received about achieving your goals and tackle them head on! Often, identifying an end goal can be confusing, overwhelming and lead to a lot of self-doubts. Especially if your business is new. We are here to tell you why you need to have an end goal in mind, no matter where you are in your business.
If the thought of reaching that goal makes you want to freeze, we want to show you how you can break your goal down into mini-tasks and work your way backwards to achieve it – without getting too dizzy. What if you’re close to a deadline and not even close to reaching your mini-goals? What do you do and how do you tackle it? This is what we’re going to be talking about today. This entrepreneur life is all about baby steps and we want you to know that you can reach your goal. So let us help you and take a listen!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 01 Sep 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Tackling Your Systems, Working Backwards, and Avoiding Overwhelm</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>106</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are talking all things systems. Our main concept is all about working backward to achieve a goal. This may not be a new concept, but it is one of the topics we get the most questions about. So we are going to answer a bunch of the questions...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are talking all things systems. Our main concept is all about working backward to achieve a goal. This may not be a new concept, but it is one of the topics we get the most questions about. So we are going to answer a bunch of the questions we have received about achieving your goals and tackle them head on! Often, identifying an end goal can be confusing, overwhelming and lead to a lot of self-doubts. Especially if your business is new. We are here to tell you why you need to have an end goal in mind, no matter where you are in your business.
If the thought of reaching that goal makes you want to freeze, we want to show you how you can break your goal down into mini-tasks and work your way backwards to achieve it – without getting too dizzy. What if you’re close to a deadline and not even close to reaching your mini-goals? What do you do and how do you tackle it? This is what we’re going to be talking about today. This entrepreneur life is all about baby steps and we want you to know that you can reach your goal. So let us help you and take a listen!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are talking all things systems. Our main concept is all about working backward to achieve a goal. This may not be a new concept, but it is one of the topics we get the most questions about. So we are going to answer a bunch of the questions we have received about achieving your goals and tackle them head on! Often, identifying an end goal can be confusing, overwhelming and lead to a lot of self-doubts. Especially if your business is new. We are here to tell you why you need to have an end goal in mind, no matter where you are in your business.</p><p>If the thought of reaching that goal makes you want to freeze, we want to show you how you can break your goal down into mini-tasks and work your way backwards to achieve it – without getting too dizzy. What if you’re close to a deadline and not even close to reaching your mini-goals? What do you do and how do you tackle it? This is what we’re going to be talking about today. This entrepreneur life is all about baby steps and we want you to know that you can reach your goal. So let us help you and take a listen!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1916</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7903e3888ee3ea0ba4a26d2af6e1a252]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9319312880.mp3?updated=1661867337" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>105: Protecting Yourself When You Collaborate - Christina Scalera</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/protecting-yourself-when-you-collaborate</link>
      <description>Today we have our friend and ultimate boss babe, or should we say, legal babe, Christina Scalera on the show. We are super excited to get into this episode with you guys because today we are going to be chatting about something us creatives (honestly) don’t always think about. Now you’re wondering what that is, right?
Well, Christina helps creative entrepreneurs and wedding professionals make lots of money doing what they love. She is also out to cause a Ruckus™ in the legal world with legal marketing that doesn't suck. Today she is here to help us, creatives, make sure that we are protected and making smart and safe decisions online and especially so in the world of collaboration.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 30 Aug 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Protecting Yourself When You Collaborate - Christina Scalera</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>105</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we have our friend and ultimate boss babe, or should we say, legal babe, Christina Scalera on the show. We are super excited to get into this episode with you guys because today we are going to be chatting about something us creatives (honestly)...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we have our friend and ultimate boss babe, or should we say, legal babe, Christina Scalera on the show. We are super excited to get into this episode with you guys because today we are going to be chatting about something us creatives (honestly) don’t always think about. Now you’re wondering what that is, right?
Well, Christina helps creative entrepreneurs and wedding professionals make lots of money doing what they love. She is also out to cause a Ruckus™ in the legal world with legal marketing that doesn't suck. Today she is here to help us, creatives, make sure that we are protected and making smart and safe decisions online and especially so in the world of collaboration.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we have our friend and ultimate boss babe, or should we say, legal babe, Christina Scalera on the show. We are super excited to get into this episode with you guys because today we are going to be chatting about something us creatives (honestly) don’t always think about. Now you’re wondering what that is, right?</p><p>Well, Christina helps creative entrepreneurs and wedding professionals make lots of money doing what they love. She is also out to cause a Ruckus™ in the legal world with legal marketing that doesn't suck. Today she is here to help us, creatives, make sure that we are protected and making smart and safe decisions online and especially so in the world of collaboration.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2882</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8468d452b0db9b3748d1103fef99b3fd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6475360263.mp3?updated=1661867307" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>104: 4 Days to Sexy Systems: Get Your Shiz Together, Learn How to Prioritize Better and See Results</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/4-days-to-sexy-systems-get-your-shiz-together-learn-how-to-prioritize-better-and-see-results</link>
      <description>Today we are talking about the thing that we have created to help you get more organized, get your hot mess systems in gear and what you need to be thinking about, asking yourself and doing if you truly want to have a productive work day and system to get more done in your business, (yes, that was a mouthful). You might think that we’re going to come in here and talk to you just about Trello for Business, which is incredible. What we’ve noticed is that some of ya’ll that enroll in that amazing program still feel overwhelmed and you don’t know how to get all the shit you have right now into Trello in an organized manner. Well, we are here to help you not get stressed out and overwhelmed in the process.
We made something for you. We could have recorded more content for the course, which we would, BUT we decided to do it a little differently. We put together a challenge for ya’ll to get your booty in gear, get yourself organized, have a plan in place, get your life in order, and plan for profit, plus then a system to keep it going over the long haul. Best yet, it’s FREE! You’re welcome. Our 4 Days To Sexy Systems is coming to you September 5th. Keep listening to find out more.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 28 Aug 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>4 Days to Sexy Systems: Get Your Shiz Together, Learn How to Prioritize Better and See Results</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>104</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are talking about the thing that we have created to help you get more organized, get your hot mess systems in gear and what you need to be thinking about, asking yourself and doing if you truly want to have a productive work day and system to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are talking about the thing that we have created to help you get more organized, get your hot mess systems in gear and what you need to be thinking about, asking yourself and doing if you truly want to have a productive work day and system to get more done in your business, (yes, that was a mouthful). You might think that we’re going to come in here and talk to you just about Trello for Business, which is incredible. What we’ve noticed is that some of ya’ll that enroll in that amazing program still feel overwhelmed and you don’t know how to get all the shit you have right now into Trello in an organized manner. Well, we are here to help you not get stressed out and overwhelmed in the process.
We made something for you. We could have recorded more content for the course, which we would, BUT we decided to do it a little differently. We put together a challenge for ya’ll to get your booty in gear, get yourself organized, have a plan in place, get your life in order, and plan for profit, plus then a system to keep it going over the long haul. Best yet, it’s FREE! You’re welcome. Our 4 Days To Sexy Systems is coming to you September 5th. Keep listening to find out more.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are talking about the thing that we have created to help you get more organized, get your hot mess systems in gear and what you need to be thinking about, asking yourself and doing if you truly want to have a productive work day and system to get more done in your business, (yes, that was a mouthful). You might think that we’re going to come in here and talk to you just about Trello for Business, which is incredible. What we’ve noticed is that some of ya’ll that enroll in that amazing program still feel overwhelmed and you don’t know how to get all the shit you have right now into Trello in an organized manner. Well, we are here to help you not get stressed out and overwhelmed in the process.</p><p>We made something for you. We could have recorded more content for the course, which we would, BUT we decided to do it a little differently. We put together a challenge for ya’ll to get your booty in gear, get yourself organized, have a plan in place, get your life in order, and plan for profit, plus then a system to keep it going over the long haul. Best yet, it’s FREE! You’re welcome. Our 4 Days To Sexy Systems is coming to you September 5th. Keep listening to find out more.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1286</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4b4bb10f0bcec6845bbaa323b2b5ca7c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5587688695.mp3?updated=1661867248" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>103: 15 Ways to Combat Mental Illness and Still Run a Successful Business with Marissa Pane</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/15-ways-to-combat-mental-illness-and-still-run-a-successful-business</link>
      <description>On today’s episode we welcome Marissa Pane. Marissa is a life coach for women with depression and anxiety, who works to heal and inspire others. We have both struggled with mental illness throughout our lives and continue to struggle with mental illness. In this episode we talk through some of our own personal struggles with mental illness and give you some tactical ways to help you get through this, whilst running your own online business at the same time.
We focus on your ‘why’, how to deal with frustrated customers, and how to not have them affect you so emotionally. We also get into journaling, what happiness means, and finding out what is taking away from your joy. Marissa has 15 ways to combat mental illness and today’s episode is about solidarity with women who “get it” and equipping you with the action steps to improve your wellbeing, your business and your life! So grab the tissues (or the wine) and take a listen!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 25 Aug 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>15 Ways to Combat Mental Illness and Still Run a Successful Business with Marissa Pane</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>103</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>On today’s episode we welcome Marissa Pane. Marissa is a life coach for women with depression and anxiety, who works to heal and inspire others. We have both struggled with mental illness throughout our lives and continue to struggle with mental...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s episode we welcome Marissa Pane. Marissa is a life coach for women with depression and anxiety, who works to heal and inspire others. We have both struggled with mental illness throughout our lives and continue to struggle with mental illness. In this episode we talk through some of our own personal struggles with mental illness and give you some tactical ways to help you get through this, whilst running your own online business at the same time.
We focus on your ‘why’, how to deal with frustrated customers, and how to not have them affect you so emotionally. We also get into journaling, what happiness means, and finding out what is taking away from your joy. Marissa has 15 ways to combat mental illness and today’s episode is about solidarity with women who “get it” and equipping you with the action steps to improve your wellbeing, your business and your life! So grab the tissues (or the wine) and take a listen!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s episode we welcome Marissa Pane. Marissa is a life coach for women with depression and anxiety, who works to heal and inspire others. We have both struggled with mental illness throughout our lives and continue to struggle with mental illness. In this episode we talk through some of our own personal struggles with mental illness and give you some tactical ways to help you get through this, whilst running your own online business at the same time.</p><p>We focus on your ‘why’, how to deal with frustrated customers, and how to not have them affect you so emotionally. We also get into journaling, what happiness means, and finding out what is taking away from your joy. Marissa has 15 ways to combat mental illness and today’s episode is about solidarity with women who “get it” and equipping you with the action steps to improve your wellbeing, your business and your life! So grab the tissues (or the wine) and take a listen!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3371</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ea3fa03703b2b675be014dc0c681e3f1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2505034714.mp3?updated=1661867226" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>102: Our 6-Figure Affiliate Launch (When NOT To Promote Someone Else's Content)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/our-6-figure-affiliate-launch</link>
      <description>Boss babes, you are in for a treat today. We are doing what we normally do after a launch. We are giving you all the nitty gritty details you won’t hear anywhere else. You are going to hear about ad spend, what we did, what we didn’t do, how much we made, all of what happened in our most recent launch which happens to be an affiliate launch for someone else’s course (not even our own program), that we just wrapped up in July 2017. If you have no clue what we’re talking about, go back to some of our older podcasts and give them a listen.
After having so much success with FB Everything we thought it beneficial to our audience to hear how we went about doing an affiliate launch. We spent money to market someone else’s program and that’s what we’re going to talk about today so if you’re even a tiny bit curious, keep listening!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 23 Aug 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our 6-Figure Affiliate Launch (When NOT To Promote Someone Else's Content)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>102</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Boss babes, you are in for a treat today. We are doing what we normally do after a launch. We are giving you all the nitty gritty details you won’t hear anywhere else. You are going to hear about ad spend, what we did, what we didn’t do, how much...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Boss babes, you are in for a treat today. We are doing what we normally do after a launch. We are giving you all the nitty gritty details you won’t hear anywhere else. You are going to hear about ad spend, what we did, what we didn’t do, how much we made, all of what happened in our most recent launch which happens to be an affiliate launch for someone else’s course (not even our own program), that we just wrapped up in July 2017. If you have no clue what we’re talking about, go back to some of our older podcasts and give them a listen.
After having so much success with FB Everything we thought it beneficial to our audience to hear how we went about doing an affiliate launch. We spent money to market someone else’s program and that’s what we’re going to talk about today so if you’re even a tiny bit curious, keep listening!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Boss babes, you are in for a treat today. We are doing what we normally do after a launch. We are giving you all the nitty gritty details you won’t hear anywhere else. You are going to hear about ad spend, what we did, what we didn’t do, how much we made, all of what happened in our most recent launch which happens to be an affiliate launch for someone else’s course (not even our own program), that we just wrapped up in July 2017. If you have no clue what we’re talking about, go back to some of our older podcasts and give them a listen.</p><p>After having so much success with FB Everything we thought it beneficial to our audience to hear how we went about doing an affiliate launch. We spent money to market someone else’s program and that’s what we’re going to talk about today so if you’re even a tiny bit curious, keep listening!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2525</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9d7ae1dbc0c2deb9276e1b855be7672c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3264457488.mp3?updated=1661867142" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>101 - Leveraging Your Podcast, Hosting In-Person Workshops and Pivoting with Amanda Boleyn of She Did It Her Way</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/leveraging-your-podcast-hosting-in-person-workshops-and-pivoting</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Amanda Boleyn of She Did It Her Way podcast. Have you heard of her? Well, if you haven’t, she is a rockstar. She Did It Her Way has been named one of the "12 Best Podcasts for Entrepreneurs" and "Top 100 Best Websites for Entrepreneurs" by Forbes, and many more. Her podcast is dedicated to featuring savvy, female business entrepreneurs from across the globe. These female share their insights and journey so others can do it their way too.
In this episode Amanda is sharing about something other than her podcast. We’re diving into how she’s been able to take her podcast journey and leverage it to further grow her business, in fact she’s opening up her first ever in-person summit, the doors are open and we’re talking all about the amazing experience that you can get in on this October. We’re also talking about pivoting and the challenges of growing a business and everything that comes with that.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 21 Aug 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Leveraging Your Podcast, Hosting In-Person Workshops and Pivoting with Amanda Boleyn of She Did It Her Way</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>101</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Amanda Boleyn of She Did It Her Way podcast. Have you heard of her? Well, if you haven’t, she is a rockstar. She Did It Her Way has been named one of the "12 Best Podcasts for Entrepreneurs" and "Top 100 Best Websites...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Amanda Boleyn of She Did It Her Way podcast. Have you heard of her? Well, if you haven’t, she is a rockstar. She Did It Her Way has been named one of the "12 Best Podcasts for Entrepreneurs" and "Top 100 Best Websites for Entrepreneurs" by Forbes, and many more. Her podcast is dedicated to featuring savvy, female business entrepreneurs from across the globe. These female share their insights and journey so others can do it their way too.
In this episode Amanda is sharing about something other than her podcast. We’re diving into how she’s been able to take her podcast journey and leverage it to further grow her business, in fact she’s opening up her first ever in-person summit, the doors are open and we’re talking all about the amazing experience that you can get in on this October. We’re also talking about pivoting and the challenges of growing a business and everything that comes with that.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Amanda Boleyn of She Did It Her Way podcast. Have you heard of her? Well, if you haven’t, she is a rockstar. She Did It Her Way has been named one of the "12 Best Podcasts for Entrepreneurs" and "Top 100 Best Websites for Entrepreneurs" by Forbes, and many more. Her podcast is dedicated to featuring savvy, female business entrepreneurs from across the globe. These female share their insights and journey so others can do it their way too.</p><p>In this episode Amanda is sharing about something other than her podcast. We’re diving into how she’s been able to take her podcast journey and leverage it to further grow her business, in fact she’s opening up her first ever in-person summit, the doors are open and we’re talking all about the amazing experience that you can get in on this October. We’re also talking about pivoting and the challenges of growing a business and everything that comes with that.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2501</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[99b8baf5e0163d0f037194e87bee9a7b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2275104035.mp3?updated=1661867095" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>100: Celebrating 100 Episodes with Nicholette von Reiche</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/celebrating-100-episodes-podcast-updates-growing-your-team-and-more</link>
      <description>Holy moly guacamole! It’s episode 100! On today’s milestone episode, we have one of the most integral behind-the-scenes members on the SHP: Nicolette von Reiche. You might not hear her (or see her) but Nicholette is always buzzing around in the background as our business manager, graphics guru, and tech ninja. Today we’re talking all about growing a team, the state of TCC, what’s coming up for the podcast and all about the future of the biz.
We want to break down the TCC journey and let you know who all has a role in the business. We can lift the curtain a bit to show you that it isn’t just us in here – but that it was just us for a long time! We have laid a lot of foundations over the course of our first business year and if you are currently laying the foundations in your own business, hopefully, this will give you a glimpse into your future. We’re so excited about our first 100 episode and we can’t wait to do a hundred more! Send the champagne people! And let’s get into some strategy…
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 18 Aug 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Celebrating 100 Episodes with Nicholette von Reiche</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>100</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Holy moly guacamole! It’s episode 100! On today’s milestone episode, we have one of the most integral behind-the-scenes members on the SHP: Nicolette von Reiche. You might not hear her (or see her) but Nicholette is always buzzing around in the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Holy moly guacamole! It’s episode 100! On today’s milestone episode, we have one of the most integral behind-the-scenes members on the SHP: Nicolette von Reiche. You might not hear her (or see her) but Nicholette is always buzzing around in the background as our business manager, graphics guru, and tech ninja. Today we’re talking all about growing a team, the state of TCC, what’s coming up for the podcast and all about the future of the biz.
We want to break down the TCC journey and let you know who all has a role in the business. We can lift the curtain a bit to show you that it isn’t just us in here – but that it was just us for a long time! We have laid a lot of foundations over the course of our first business year and if you are currently laying the foundations in your own business, hopefully, this will give you a glimpse into your future. We’re so excited about our first 100 episode and we can’t wait to do a hundred more! Send the champagne people! And let’s get into some strategy…
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Holy moly guacamole! It’s episode 100! On today’s milestone episode, we have one of the most integral behind-the-scenes members on the SHP: Nicolette von Reiche. You might not hear her (or see her) but Nicholette is always buzzing around in the background as our business manager, graphics guru, and tech ninja. Today we’re talking all about growing a team, the state of TCC, what’s coming up for the podcast and all about the future of the biz.</p><p>We want to break down the TCC journey and let you know who all has a role in the business. We can lift the curtain a bit to show you that it isn’t just us in here – but that it was just us for a long time! We have laid a lot of foundations over the course of our first business year and if you are currently laying the foundations in your own business, hopefully, this will give you a glimpse into your future. We’re so excited about our first 100 episode and we can’t wait to do a hundred more! Send the champagne people! And let’s get into some strategy…</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2629</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[56e242e110950640c9077e096dc2cc9b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8238594071.mp3?updated=1661867018" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>099: What to Do Before You Even Think About Getting Press with Ashley Gartland</title>
      <description>Today we are here with the lovely Ashley Gartland. Ashley helps passionate creatives and driven entrepreneurs, like you, who feel like they’re drowning in to-dos and just want someone to tell them where to focus to make their business work. She teaches them how to stop overcomplicating things and instead simplify their approach so they can make more money in their business and experience more freedom in their life.
If you haven’t listened to our episode with Rachel Hofstetter, way back in episode 003, do yourself a favor and listen to it BUT listen to this one first.They are both interlinked in that they talk about your approach to press but Ashley breaks it down to the before. She get’s into all the before’s and after’s of getting press for your business and she’s helping you get ready to get your business featured. Before’s and after’s of getting press for your business and she’s helping you get ready to get your business featured.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 16 Aug 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What to Do Before You Even Think About Getting Press with Ashley Gartland</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>99</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are here with the lovely Ashley Gartland. Ashley helps passionate creatives and driven entrepreneurs, like you, who feel like they’re drowning in to-dos and just want someone to tell them where to focus to make their business work. She...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are here with the lovely Ashley Gartland. Ashley helps passionate creatives and driven entrepreneurs, like you, who feel like they’re drowning in to-dos and just want someone to tell them where to focus to make their business work. She teaches them how to stop overcomplicating things and instead simplify their approach so they can make more money in their business and experience more freedom in their life.
If you haven’t listened to our episode with Rachel Hofstetter, way back in episode 003, do yourself a favor and listen to it BUT listen to this one first.They are both interlinked in that they talk about your approach to press but Ashley breaks it down to the before. She get’s into all the before’s and after’s of getting press for your business and she’s helping you get ready to get your business featured. Before’s and after’s of getting press for your business and she’s helping you get ready to get your business featured.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are here with the lovely Ashley Gartland. Ashley helps passionate creatives and driven entrepreneurs, like you, who feel like they’re drowning in to-dos and just want someone to tell them where to focus to make their business work. She teaches them how to stop overcomplicating things and instead simplify their approach so they can make more money in their business and experience more freedom in their life.</p><p>If you haven’t listened to our episode with Rachel Hofstetter, way back in episode 003, do yourself a favor and listen to it BUT listen to this one first.They are both interlinked in that they talk about your approach to press but Ashley breaks it down to the before. She get’s into all the before’s and after’s of getting press for your business and she’s helping you get ready to get your business featured. Before’s and after’s of getting press for your business and she’s helping you get ready to get your business featured.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2287</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b59527dafa6c91f62508e4d4e07141b1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6465885640.mp3?updated=1661896919" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>098: Know Your Personality Type &amp; Love Language to Be a Better Business Owner</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/knowing-your-personality-type-love-language-to-be-a-better-business-owner</link>
      <description>Ever wondered, “How do we work together?” Well this is a question we get asked a lot on the show and the answer may not be as simple as you think! How do we divide tasks? How do our personalities work well, or not work well, together? How do we deal with stress? Today we are embarking on a journey of self-discovery – digging into personality types, astrology and just a bit of “woo-woo-ness.”
Knowing how your brain, body and personality work can be an empowering tool to strengthen yourself, your team and your business. So we hope that by the end of this episode you might have learned something about your own self; the characteristics of you and how it effects the way you make decisions and interact with others in your business. If you are looking to improve your relationship with yourself, and with others, then this episode is for you! Take a listen.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 14 Aug 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Know Your Personality Type &amp; Love Language to Be a Better Business Owner</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>98</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Ever wondered, “How do we work together?” Well this is a question we get asked a lot on the show and the answer may not be as simple as you think! How do we divide tasks? How do our personalities work well, or not work well, together? How do we...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Ever wondered, “How do we work together?” Well this is a question we get asked a lot on the show and the answer may not be as simple as you think! How do we divide tasks? How do our personalities work well, or not work well, together? How do we deal with stress? Today we are embarking on a journey of self-discovery – digging into personality types, astrology and just a bit of “woo-woo-ness.”
Knowing how your brain, body and personality work can be an empowering tool to strengthen yourself, your team and your business. So we hope that by the end of this episode you might have learned something about your own self; the characteristics of you and how it effects the way you make decisions and interact with others in your business. If you are looking to improve your relationship with yourself, and with others, then this episode is for you! Take a listen.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ever wondered, “How do we work together?” Well this is a question we get asked a lot on the show and the answer may not be as simple as you think! How do we divide tasks? How do our personalities work well, or not work well, together? How do we deal with stress? Today we are embarking on a journey of self-discovery – digging into personality types, astrology and just a bit of “woo-woo-ness.”</p><p>Knowing how your brain, body and personality work can be an empowering tool to strengthen yourself, your team and your business. So we hope that by the end of this episode you might have learned something about your <em>own</em> self; the characteristics of you and how it effects the way you make decisions and interact with others in your business. If you are looking to improve your relationship with yourself, and with others, then this episode is for you! Take a listen.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2378</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7adf10682288cf8895d07d5d30c02211]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6148960813.mp3?updated=1661896779" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>097: Landing Corporate Clients as a Creative Entrepreneur with Becky Mollenkamp</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/landing-corporate-clients-as-a-creative-entrepreneur</link>
      <description>We are super excited for today’s episode with Becky Mollenkamp. Not only is Becky our friend, but she is a business mentor for woman entrepreneurs and she helps them write down all those words that are stuck in their head so they can make some big changes and push forward in their business. Becky is also an absolute rock star at landing corporate clients and today we’re lucky enough to be getting the inside scoop from her.
Ever wonder, “How the heck do I as a creative get into the inboxes of corporate businesses and land those bigger projects?” Well, today Becky is sharing her tips and tricks with us. She’s also telling us how we can utilize a program like LinkedIn to up our connections and up our chances of getting in front of those people and so much more. If you’re interested in finding out more about this, keep listening to the show.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 11 Aug 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Landing Corporate Clients as a Creative Entrepreneur with Becky Mollenkamp</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>97</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are super excited for today’s episode with Becky Mollenkamp. Not only is Becky our friend, but she is a business mentor for woman entrepreneurs and she helps them write down all those words that are stuck in their head so they can make some big...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are super excited for today’s episode with Becky Mollenkamp. Not only is Becky our friend, but she is a business mentor for woman entrepreneurs and she helps them write down all those words that are stuck in their head so they can make some big changes and push forward in their business. Becky is also an absolute rock star at landing corporate clients and today we’re lucky enough to be getting the inside scoop from her.
Ever wonder, “How the heck do I as a creative get into the inboxes of corporate businesses and land those bigger projects?” Well, today Becky is sharing her tips and tricks with us. She’s also telling us how we can utilize a program like LinkedIn to up our connections and up our chances of getting in front of those people and so much more. If you’re interested in finding out more about this, keep listening to the show.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are super excited for today’s episode with Becky Mollenkamp. Not only is Becky our friend, but she is a business mentor for woman entrepreneurs and she helps them write down all those words that are stuck in their head so they can make some big changes and push forward in their business. Becky is also an absolute rock star at landing corporate clients and today we’re lucky enough to be getting the inside scoop from her.</p><p>Ever wonder, “How the heck do I as a creative get into the inboxes of corporate businesses and land those bigger projects?” Well, today Becky is sharing her tips and tricks with us. She’s also telling us how we can utilize a program like LinkedIn to up our connections and up our chances of getting in front of those people and so much more. If you’re interested in finding out more about this, keep listening to the show.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2522</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ee754dc2f9ed311a2cd8b9c97e9a9cd2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7389114441.mp3?updated=1661896822" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>096: The Evolution of Our Courses + Mistakes You Can Avoid</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-evolution-of-our-courses-mistakes-you-can-avoid</link>
      <description>Lately we have gotten some questions from our students, audiences and community about how we have evolved in our course creation journey and so we decided to take you back. Not all the way back, not necessarily to our client days but at least to the beginning stages of creating our first course and all the way through to today. We’ll tell you what has changed and how we have been able to grow and better serve our community.
The purpose behind doing this is to really showcase to you all that you can start small (we did). Nothing has to be perfect, just run with something and run the heck out of it until you add on something else. Dive in if courses is something you want to try and learn from our mistakes. Keep listening so you can take some of our advice and see some bomb-ass results a year into it applying it.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 09 Aug 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Evolution of Our Courses + Mistakes You Can Avoid</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>96</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Lately we have gotten some questions from our students, audiences and community about how we have evolved in our course creation journey and so we decided to take you back. Not all the way back, not necessarily to our client days but at least to the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Lately we have gotten some questions from our students, audiences and community about how we have evolved in our course creation journey and so we decided to take you back. Not all the way back, not necessarily to our client days but at least to the beginning stages of creating our first course and all the way through to today. We’ll tell you what has changed and how we have been able to grow and better serve our community.
The purpose behind doing this is to really showcase to you all that you can start small (we did). Nothing has to be perfect, just run with something and run the heck out of it until you add on something else. Dive in if courses is something you want to try and learn from our mistakes. Keep listening so you can take some of our advice and see some bomb-ass results a year into it applying it.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Lately we have gotten some questions from our students, audiences and community about how we have evolved in our course creation journey and so we decided to take you back. Not all the way back, not necessarily to our client days but at least to the beginning stages of creating our first course and all the way through to today. We’ll tell you what has changed and how we have been able to grow and better serve our community.</p><p>The purpose behind doing this is to really showcase to you all that you can start small (we did). Nothing has to be perfect, just run with something and run the heck out of it until you add on something else. Dive in if courses is something you want to try and learn from our mistakes. Keep listening so you can take some of our advice and see some bomb-ass results a year into it applying it.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2932</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9abff35093d5873fe998da272b7a9ee4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5830431596.mp3?updated=1661896786" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>095: Using One Website to Run Two Businesses with Ashlyn Carter of Ashlyn Writes</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/using-one-website-to-run-two-businesses</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Ashlyn Carter of Ashlyn Writes. Are you multi-passionate? Well, this boss babe is and she has grown her business as both a copywriter and a calligrapher. She took her background as a corporate agency working with corporate clients and transitioned that into a business working with big name clients today. We are so excited for you to hear how she’s been able to keep both her knowledge from her corporate days and add that onto her creative passion with calligraphy.
Do you want to have a business that serves two different people? Today we’re going through how to navigate your homepage if you’re talking to two different people, how to set up your services, products and your offerings if you’re talking to two different people, how to manage your social media and your email list, all of that good stuff if you’re talking to two different people. If that’s you, keep listening to find out more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 07 Aug 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Using One Website to Run Two Businesses with Ashlyn Carter of Ashlyn Writes</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>95</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Ashlyn Carter of Ashlyn Writes. Are you multi-passionate? Well, this boss babe is and she has grown her business as both a copywriter and a calligrapher. She took her background as a corporate agency working with corporate...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Ashlyn Carter of Ashlyn Writes. Are you multi-passionate? Well, this boss babe is and she has grown her business as both a copywriter and a calligrapher. She took her background as a corporate agency working with corporate clients and transitioned that into a business working with big name clients today. We are so excited for you to hear how she’s been able to keep both her knowledge from her corporate days and add that onto her creative passion with calligraphy.
Do you want to have a business that serves two different people? Today we’re going through how to navigate your homepage if you’re talking to two different people, how to set up your services, products and your offerings if you’re talking to two different people, how to manage your social media and your email list, all of that good stuff if you’re talking to two different people. If that’s you, keep listening to find out more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Ashlyn Carter of Ashlyn Writes. Are you multi-passionate? Well, this boss babe is and she has grown her business as both a copywriter and a calligrapher. She took her background as a corporate agency working with corporate clients and transitioned that into a business working with big name clients today. We are so excited for you to hear how she’s been able to keep both her knowledge from her corporate days and add that onto her creative passion with calligraphy.</p><p>Do you want to have a business that serves two different people? Today we’re going through how to navigate your homepage if you’re talking to two different people, how to set up your services, products and your offerings if you’re talking to two different people, how to manage your social media and your email list, all of that good stuff if you’re talking to two different people. If that’s you, keep listening to find out more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2574</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[bdc5895fe54f49d0d048418b13f8a24d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9878111873.mp3?updated=1661896776" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>094: How to Give, Give, Give Without Giving It All Away</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-give-give-give-without-giving-it-all-away</link>
      <description>You all know by now that we have built Think Creative Collective on the “free-free-free marry me” model. We talk about it all the time. It is basically built on a foundation of giving a whole bunch of content, knowledge, and strategy away for free so we can build a community of addicted and raving fans. People often think that if they give so much away it is going to decrease the amount of sales they are ultimately going to get, and we have seen literally the opposite effect. It has only helped us grow our audience and our sales. It has also enabled us to create a community where our audience can be sure to find the answers they need instead of a dead-end, and people really value that. 
So what we want to talk about today is why we decided to use that model and how you can structure your own business to do the same. We also want to go over why it is very important to bust the myths behind giving away content for free. Inside this episode we will focus on answering all of y’awls questions surrounding the topic and give you the inside scoop about the actual effects to our business that this model has created for us so you can be more confident in what you are providing your audience, for free.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 04 Aug 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Give, Give, Give Without Giving It All Away</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>94</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>You all know by now that we have built Think Creative Collective on the “free-free-free marry me” model. We talk about it all the time. It is basically built on a foundation of giving a whole bunch of content, knowledge, and strategy away for free...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You all know by now that we have built Think Creative Collective on the “free-free-free marry me” model. We talk about it all the time. It is basically built on a foundation of giving a whole bunch of content, knowledge, and strategy away for free so we can build a community of addicted and raving fans. People often think that if they give so much away it is going to decrease the amount of sales they are ultimately going to get, and we have seen literally the opposite effect. It has only helped us grow our audience and our sales. It has also enabled us to create a community where our audience can be sure to find the answers they need instead of a dead-end, and people really value that. 
So what we want to talk about today is why we decided to use that model and how you can structure your own business to do the same. We also want to go over why it is very important to bust the myths behind giving away content for free. Inside this episode we will focus on answering all of y’awls questions surrounding the topic and give you the inside scoop about the actual effects to our business that this model has created for us so you can be more confident in what you are providing your audience, for free.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You all know by now that we have built Think Creative Collective on the “free-free-free marry me” model. We talk about it all the time. It is basically built on a foundation of giving a whole bunch of content, knowledge, and strategy away for free so we can build a community of addicted and raving fans. People often think that if they give so much away it is going to decrease the amount of sales they are ultimately going to get, and we have seen literally the opposite effect. It has only helped us grow our audience and our sales. It has also enabled us to create a community where our audience can be sure to find the answers they need instead of a dead-end, and people really value that. </p><p>So what we want to talk about today is why we decided to use that model and how you can structure your own business to do the same. We also want to go over why it is very important to bust the myths behind giving away content for free. Inside this episode we will focus on answering all of y’awls questions surrounding the topic and give you the inside scoop about the actual effects to our business that this model has created for us so you can be more confident in what <em>you</em> are providing your audience, for free.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1697</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[988aa62211bc8bf96d6ee011d29142ab]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1039663253.mp3?updated=1661896739" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>093: How to Automate a 6-Figure Side Hustle with Katie Doherty of La Rousse Shoppe</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-automate-a-6-figure-side-hustle</link>
      <description>Today we’re bringing on Wedding and Portrait Photographer, Katie Doherty of La Rousse Shoppe. She’s a service and a product based business babe. She started out as a teacher, had a passion for photography, saw a hole in the market and filled it with a 200k+ business that is as passive and automated as possible while continuously growing and expanding.
In this episode Katie is sharing with us on how her dream was born, we get a peak into some of the resources and tools she uses to make it all happen and we find out more about what she actually sells. We’re super excited about what she’s spilling in this episode so keep listening.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 Aug 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Automate a 6-Figure Side Hustle with Katie Doherty of La Rousse Shoppe</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>93</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we’re bringing on Wedding and Portrait Photographer, Katie Doherty of La Rousse Shoppe. She’s a service and a product based business babe. She started out as a teacher, had a passion for photography, saw a hole in the market and filled it...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we’re bringing on Wedding and Portrait Photographer, Katie Doherty of La Rousse Shoppe. She’s a service and a product based business babe. She started out as a teacher, had a passion for photography, saw a hole in the market and filled it with a 200k+ business that is as passive and automated as possible while continuously growing and expanding.
In this episode Katie is sharing with us on how her dream was born, we get a peak into some of the resources and tools she uses to make it all happen and we find out more about what she actually sells. We’re super excited about what she’s spilling in this episode so keep listening.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we’re bringing on Wedding and Portrait Photographer, Katie Doherty of La Rousse Shoppe. She’s a service and a product based business babe. She started out as a teacher, had a passion for photography, saw a hole in the market and filled it with a 200k+ business that is as passive and automated as possible while continuously growing and expanding.</p><p>In this episode Katie is sharing with us on how her dream was born, we get a peak into some of the resources and tools she uses to make it all happen and we find out more about what she actually sells. We’re super excited about what she’s spilling in this episode so keep listening.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3023</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ccc16dce057f2e6a7d78b6c5d3654dfe]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5739751758.mp3?updated=1661896766" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>092: Hot Topic: Why We Didn't Close Our 12k+ Facebook Group</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/hot-topic-why-we-didnt-close-our-12k-facebook-group</link>
      <description>We are here for a hot topic today. Today on the podcast we’re talking about why we did not decide to close our private Facebook group which has roughly 12k + people in it. This is a hot topic as there are a lot of Facebook groups run by business owners who are similar to our circle that have been closing their Facebook groups.
Today we want to highlight the fact that we’re not going to speak for the people who did decide to close their groups, we’re literally just talking about why we decided to keep our group open and some changes that we made since that “change” in the Facebook group world. If you want to hear more about how we run our Facebook group and why it works for us, keep listening.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 31 Jul 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Hot Topic: Why We Didn't Close Our 12k+ Facebook Group</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>92</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are here for a hot topic today. Today on the podcast we’re talking about why we did not decide to close our private Facebook group which has roughly 12k + people in it. This is a hot topic as there are a lot of Facebook groups run by business...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are here for a hot topic today. Today on the podcast we’re talking about why we did not decide to close our private Facebook group which has roughly 12k + people in it. This is a hot topic as there are a lot of Facebook groups run by business owners who are similar to our circle that have been closing their Facebook groups.
Today we want to highlight the fact that we’re not going to speak for the people who did decide to close their groups, we’re literally just talking about why we decided to keep our group open and some changes that we made since that “change” in the Facebook group world. If you want to hear more about how we run our Facebook group and why it works for us, keep listening.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are here for a hot topic today. Today on the podcast we’re talking about why we did not decide to close our private Facebook group which has roughly 12k + people in it. This is a hot topic as there are a lot of Facebook groups run by business owners who are similar to our circle that have been closing their Facebook groups.</p><p>Today we want to highlight the fact that we’re not going to speak for the people who did decide to close their groups, we’re literally just talking about why we decided to keep our group open and some changes that we made since that “change” in the Facebook group world. If you want to hear more about how we run our Facebook group and why it works for us, keep listening.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1637</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7588871724bed0370945b260ee3cc867]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3287468008.mp3?updated=1661896580" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>091: Becoming a 6-Figure VA with Tracey Osborne, The Entrepreneur's Secret Weapon</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/becoming-a-6-figure-va-the-entrepreneurs-secret-weapon</link>
      <description>They call her The Entrepreneur’s Secret Weapon and yes, we have her on the show today. Tracey Osborne, CEO of Empowered Fempreneurs, is here! Tracey started her decade long career as a Virtual Assistant and grew her business from $15,000 to 6-figures within only two years. During that time she has authored and co-authored three books, her latest being, Becoming A VA.
Read the show notes at: https://bossproject.com/podcast/becoming-a-6-figure-va-the-entrepreneurs-secret-weapon
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 28 Jul 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Becoming a 6-Figure VA with Tracey Osborne, The Entrepreneur's Secret Weapon</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>91</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>They call her The Entrepreneur’s Secret Weapon and yes, we have her on the show today. Tracey Osborne, CEO of Empowered Fempreneurs, is here! Tracey started her decade long career as a Virtual Assistant and grew her business from $15,000 to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>They call her The Entrepreneur’s Secret Weapon and yes, we have her on the show today. Tracey Osborne, CEO of Empowered Fempreneurs, is here! Tracey started her decade long career as a Virtual Assistant and grew her business from $15,000 to 6-figures within only two years. During that time she has authored and co-authored three books, her latest being, Becoming A VA.
Read the show notes at: https://bossproject.com/podcast/becoming-a-6-figure-va-the-entrepreneurs-secret-weapon
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>They call her The Entrepreneur’s Secret Weapon and yes, we have her on the show today. Tracey Osborne, CEO of Empowered Fempreneurs, is here! Tracey started her decade long career as a Virtual Assistant and grew her business from $15,000 to 6-figures within only two years. During that time she has authored and co-authored three books, her latest being, Becoming A VA.</p><p>Read the show notes at: <a href="https://bossproject.com/podcast/becoming-a-6-figure-va-the-entrepreneurs-secret-weapon">https://bossproject.com/podcast/becoming-a-6-figure-va-the-entrepreneurs-secret-weapon</a></p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2840</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[083a6c55558720039fc777868d452484]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9700912186.mp3?updated=1661896526" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>090: Q &amp; A with Abagail &amp; Emylee: All Things Facebook</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/q-a-with-abagail-emylee-all-things-facebook</link>
      <description>We’re doing Q&amp;A style today, but guess what the theme is? Yeah, you guessed it, Facebook!
We asked in the group for you all to send us your questions about Facebook strategy and being successful on the platform, now that we kinda know a thing or two we feel that we can answer your questions and make sure you guys are on a good solid foundation about Facebook.
We’re jumping right in so keep listening if you would like to know more about Facebook and how to use it as a tool in your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 Jul 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Q &amp; A with Abagail &amp; Emylee: All Things Facebook</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>90</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’re doing Q&amp;A style today, but guess what the theme is? Yeah, you guessed it, Facebook! We asked in the group for you all to send us your questions about Facebook strategy and being successful on the platform, now that we kinda know a thing or...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’re doing Q&amp;A style today, but guess what the theme is? Yeah, you guessed it, Facebook!
We asked in the group for you all to send us your questions about Facebook strategy and being successful on the platform, now that we kinda know a thing or two we feel that we can answer your questions and make sure you guys are on a good solid foundation about Facebook.
We’re jumping right in so keep listening if you would like to know more about Facebook and how to use it as a tool in your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’re doing Q&amp;A style today, but guess what the theme is? Yeah, you guessed it, Facebook!</p><p>We asked in the group for you all to send us your questions about Facebook strategy and being successful on the platform, now that we kinda know a thing or two we feel that we can answer your questions and make sure you guys are on a good solid foundation about Facebook.</p><p>We’re jumping right in so keep listening if you would like to know more about Facebook and how to use it as a tool in your business.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2236</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0c7b0b0af817849f8137ecf4fd0cd72e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9881553426.mp3?updated=1661896322" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>089: How to Go from Blogger to Author with Beth Brombosz</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-go-from-blogger-to-author</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we have Dr. Beth Brombosz. Beth is an author, copy writer, content creator, and is the host of the Blogger to Author Podcast. In 2015 she turned some of her own blog posts into the book titled Yoga for Runners, which is now available on Amazon. Beth’s book has helped her build her platform as an expert in this field and she is passionate about helping fellow bloggers turn their content into a book so they can build authority in their niche, share their passion with the world, and earn passive income.
In this episode, you’re going to hear all about that process. From repurposing your content to creating a book, to self-publishing, pricing, layout, and sales, Beth really breaks it down into an easy step-by-step process. Beth self-published her book in just 30 days! Proving that it’s totally doable, no-experience needed. If you’ve never written a book in your life, but are thinking about it, then today’s podcast is for you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 24 Jul 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Go from Blogger to Author with Beth Brombosz</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>89</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we have Dr. Beth Brombosz. Beth is an author, copy writer, content creator, and is the host of the Blogger to Author Podcast. In 2015 she turned some of her own blog posts into the book titled Yoga for Runners, which is now...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we have Dr. Beth Brombosz. Beth is an author, copy writer, content creator, and is the host of the Blogger to Author Podcast. In 2015 she turned some of her own blog posts into the book titled Yoga for Runners, which is now available on Amazon. Beth’s book has helped her build her platform as an expert in this field and she is passionate about helping fellow bloggers turn their content into a book so they can build authority in their niche, share their passion with the world, and earn passive income.
In this episode, you’re going to hear all about that process. From repurposing your content to creating a book, to self-publishing, pricing, layout, and sales, Beth really breaks it down into an easy step-by-step process. Beth self-published her book in just 30 days! Proving that it’s totally doable, no-experience needed. If you’ve never written a book in your life, but are thinking about it, then today’s podcast is for you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we have Dr. Beth Brombosz. Beth is an author, copy writer, content creator, and is the host of the Blogger to Author Podcast. In 2015 she turned some of her own blog posts into the book titled <em>Yoga for Runners,</em> which is now available on Amazon. Beth’s book has helped her build her platform as an expert in this field and she is passionate about helping fellow bloggers turn their content into a book so they can build authority in their niche, share their passion with the world, and earn passive income.</p><p>In this episode, you’re going to hear all about that process. From repurposing your content to creating a book, to self-publishing, pricing, layout, and sales, Beth really breaks it down into an easy step-by-step process. Beth self-published her book in just 30 days! Proving that it’s totally doable, no-experience needed. If you’ve never written a book in your life, but are thinking about it, then today’s podcast is for you.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2857</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c224bc61a365b30d9771bb8b46cfed66]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8578739267.mp3?updated=1661896361" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>088: Our Journey to Facebook Ads: Part 2</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/our-journey-to-facebook-ads-part-2</link>
      <description>In Part I of Our Journey to Facebook Ads, we talked about video, text, and graphic. Today we are talking about all the nitty-gritty’s and diving into the different types of Facebook ads you’ll find inside the power editor. We will also be looking at the differences between conversion ads, engagement ads, and click through ads. Next, we will be investigating the value of the power editor and helping you to become a smarter booster.
If you are wanting to start running your own video Facebook ads, we are also going to sharing the behind the scenes of our $37,000 and $97,000 launch videos, giving you some action strategy tips for getting professional videos ads on a small budget, and simply using what you’ve got. Still feeling overwhelmed? We’ve got you covered. Stay tuned to find out more about the free online FB Everything course that is sure toe make you kickass at doing these Facebook ads! Take a listen for this, and so much more.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 21 Jul 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our Journey to Facebook Ads: Part 2</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>88</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In Part I of Our Journey to Facebook Ads, we talked about video, text, and graphic. Today we are talking about all the nitty-gritty’s and diving into the different types of Facebook ads you’ll find inside the power editor. We will also be looking...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In Part I of Our Journey to Facebook Ads, we talked about video, text, and graphic. Today we are talking about all the nitty-gritty’s and diving into the different types of Facebook ads you’ll find inside the power editor. We will also be looking at the differences between conversion ads, engagement ads, and click through ads. Next, we will be investigating the value of the power editor and helping you to become a smarter booster.
If you are wanting to start running your own video Facebook ads, we are also going to sharing the behind the scenes of our $37,000 and $97,000 launch videos, giving you some action strategy tips for getting professional videos ads on a small budget, and simply using what you’ve got. Still feeling overwhelmed? We’ve got you covered. Stay tuned to find out more about the free online FB Everything course that is sure toe make you kickass at doing these Facebook ads! Take a listen for this, and so much more.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In Part I of Our Journey to Facebook Ads, we talked about video, text, and graphic. Today we are talking about all the nitty-gritty’s and diving into the different types of Facebook ads you’ll find inside the power editor. We will also be looking at the differences between conversion ads, engagement ads, and click through ads. Next, we will be investigating the value of the power editor and helping you to become a smarter booster.</p><p>If you are wanting to start running your own video Facebook ads, we are also going to sharing the behind the scenes of our $37,000 and $97,000 launch videos, giving you some action strategy tips for getting professional videos ads on a small budget, and simply using what you’ve got. Still feeling overwhelmed? We’ve got you covered. Stay tuned to find out more about the free online FB Everything course that is sure toe make you kickass at doing these Facebook ads! Take a listen for this, and so much more.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2359</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[186100944b649aeab4d796ffe97d59f1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4884210918.mp3?updated=1661896261" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>087: Finding Your Authentic Voice with Tara Bosler of T Bosler Writing</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/finding-your-authentic-voice</link>
      <description>We’re super excited for you to listen to this episode, we are joined with Tara Bosler of T. Bosler Writing. She’s a copywriter you all, for creatives, just like all of you. We’re super excited for you to learn from Tara and we want you to like, have your ears peeled out because there’s a funny noise in this audio that we’re not going to cut out and I want you to try to guess what it is before she says what it is because to me, it doesn’t sound anything like what it actually is. Suspenseful.
Inside this episode, we’re talking about how to be authentic in your writing and how to use your conversations with not only your friends but your clients as Intel to use on the things that you spit out to the world, we’re talking about whether it’s okay or not to be grammatically correct and we get into some details about how to hire a copywriter. I know this sounds simple but Tara breaks it down to make it even better for you inside your business. I can’t wait for you to jump in and start writing some copy.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 19 Jul 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Finding Your Authentic Voice with Tara Bosler of T Bosler Writing</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>87</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’re super excited for you to listen to this episode, we are joined with Tara Bosler of T. Bosler Writing. She’s a copywriter you all, for creatives, just like all of you. We’re super excited for you to learn from Tara and we want you to like,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’re super excited for you to listen to this episode, we are joined with Tara Bosler of T. Bosler Writing. She’s a copywriter you all, for creatives, just like all of you. We’re super excited for you to learn from Tara and we want you to like, have your ears peeled out because there’s a funny noise in this audio that we’re not going to cut out and I want you to try to guess what it is before she says what it is because to me, it doesn’t sound anything like what it actually is. Suspenseful.
Inside this episode, we’re talking about how to be authentic in your writing and how to use your conversations with not only your friends but your clients as Intel to use on the things that you spit out to the world, we’re talking about whether it’s okay or not to be grammatically correct and we get into some details about how to hire a copywriter. I know this sounds simple but Tara breaks it down to make it even better for you inside your business. I can’t wait for you to jump in and start writing some copy.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’re super excited for you to listen to this episode, we are joined with Tara Bosler of T. Bosler Writing. She’s a copywriter you all, for creatives, just like all of you. We’re super excited for you to learn from Tara and we want you to like, have your ears peeled out because there’s a funny noise in this audio that we’re not going to cut out and I want you to try to guess what it is before she says what it is because to me, it doesn’t sound anything like what it actually is. Suspenseful.</p><p>Inside this episode, we’re talking about how to be authentic in your writing and how to use your conversations with not only your friends but your clients as Intel to use on the things that you spit out to the world, we’re talking about whether it’s okay or not to be grammatically correct and we get into some details about how to hire a copywriter. I know this sounds simple but Tara breaks it down to make it even better for you inside your business. I can’t wait for you to jump in and start writing some copy.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2704</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ec604e96fb48b7d230dff4caca82524e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9799035158.mp3?updated=1661896287" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>086: Our Journey to Facebook Ads Part 1</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/our-journey-to-facebook-ads-part-1</link>
      <description>For part one of Our Journey to Facebook Ads, we are diving into all the creative nooks and crannies of Facebook ads. Here we look at specific ads we ran and how they performed to ultimately answer the fundamental question of: Are Facebook ads worth it? Today, we’re looking at what worked specifically for our campaigns; what types of Facebook ads performed better for us (video or graphic), targeting cold audiences versus establishing warm audiences and tons of tricks and tips to maximize your Facebook ad spend.
We went from knowing zilch about Facebook ads to knowing so much that we had to break this episode into two parts. If you are someone who is easily freaked by Facebook ads, don’t be, because, after this episode, you’ll realize it’s way easier than it seems and worth every darn penny! But before you even start running your ads let’s take a look at a few of the things you need to establish first.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 17 Jul 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our Journey to Facebook Ads Part 1</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>86</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>For part one of Our Journey to Facebook Ads, we are diving into all the creative nooks and crannies of Facebook ads. Here we look at specific ads we ran and how they performed to ultimately answer the fundamental question of: Are Facebook ads worth...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>For part one of Our Journey to Facebook Ads, we are diving into all the creative nooks and crannies of Facebook ads. Here we look at specific ads we ran and how they performed to ultimately answer the fundamental question of: Are Facebook ads worth it? Today, we’re looking at what worked specifically for our campaigns; what types of Facebook ads performed better for us (video or graphic), targeting cold audiences versus establishing warm audiences and tons of tricks and tips to maximize your Facebook ad spend.
We went from knowing zilch about Facebook ads to knowing so much that we had to break this episode into two parts. If you are someone who is easily freaked by Facebook ads, don’t be, because, after this episode, you’ll realize it’s way easier than it seems and worth every darn penny! But before you even start running your ads let’s take a look at a few of the things you need to establish first.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For part one of Our Journey to Facebook Ads, we are diving into all the creative nooks and crannies of Facebook ads. Here we look at specific ads we ran and how they performed to ultimately answer the fundamental question of: Are Facebook ads worth it? Today, we’re looking at what worked specifically for our campaigns; what types of Facebook ads performed better for us (video or graphic), targeting cold audiences versus establishing warm audiences and tons of tricks and tips to maximize your Facebook ad spend.</p><p>We went from knowing zilch about Facebook ads to knowing so much that we had to break this episode into two parts. If you are someone who is easily freaked by Facebook ads, don’t be, because, after this episode, you’ll realize it’s way easier than it seems and worth every darn penny! But before you even start running your ads let’s take a look at a few of the things you need to establish first.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2338</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[23954513b093bdf829bbd6172fd8eaa9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2178405674.mp3?updated=1661896093" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>085: Facebook Isn't Dead. Here's How to Leverage It with Courtney Foster-Donahue</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/facebook-isnt-dead-heres-how-to-leverage-it</link>
      <description>Today we’re chatting with our friend, fellow unicorn and amazing red headed beauty Courtney Foster-Donahue. Courtney Foster-Donahue is an Atlanta-based four-time entrepreneur, business strategist who specializes in video content creation and Facebook marketing and advertising. Courtney helps entrepreneurs to win using Facebook through her new programme called Facebook Everything. With over 1.96 billion people around the world on Facebook today, why are so many businesses claiming Facebook is dead, turning away from Facebook Ads or not seeing any benefits in them? From Facebook page optimization, your business Facebook page, Facebook ads, to all the tiny tips to get you maximizing your reach and growing your business; on today’s show we’re busting the Facebook myths that will help you turn your business around!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 14 Jul 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Facebook Isn't Dead. Here's How to Leverage It with Courtney Foster-Donahue</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>85</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we’re chatting with our friend, fellow unicorn and amazing red headed beauty Courtney Foster-Donahue. Courtney Foster-Donahue is an Atlanta-based four-time entrepreneur, business strategist who specializes in video content creation and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we’re chatting with our friend, fellow unicorn and amazing red headed beauty Courtney Foster-Donahue. Courtney Foster-Donahue is an Atlanta-based four-time entrepreneur, business strategist who specializes in video content creation and Facebook marketing and advertising. Courtney helps entrepreneurs to win using Facebook through her new programme called Facebook Everything. With over 1.96 billion people around the world on Facebook today, why are so many businesses claiming Facebook is dead, turning away from Facebook Ads or not seeing any benefits in them? From Facebook page optimization, your business Facebook page, Facebook ads, to all the tiny tips to get you maximizing your reach and growing your business; on today’s show we’re busting the Facebook myths that will help you turn your business around!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we’re chatting with our friend, fellow unicorn and amazing red headed beauty Courtney Foster-Donahue. Courtney Foster-Donahue is an Atlanta-based four-time entrepreneur, business strategist who specializes in video content creation and Facebook marketing and advertising. Courtney helps entrepreneurs to win using Facebook through her new programme called Facebook Everything. With over 1.96 billion people around the world on Facebook today, why are so many businesses claiming Facebook is dead, turning away from Facebook Ads or not seeing any benefits in them? From Facebook page optimization, your business Facebook page, Facebook ads, to all the tiny tips to get you maximizing your reach and growing your business; on today’s show we’re busting the Facebook myths that will help you turn your business around!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3185</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c996442e996d7be87c5916ddc3dad57e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8653323984.mp3?updated=1661896288" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>084: Reaching Your #SquadGoals The Logistics of Hiring</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/reaching-your-squadgoals-the-logistics-of-hiring-your-team</link>
      <description>When people think of hiring they often think that it is a complicated, convoluted, crazy process. But the truth is, it really doesn’t have to be. On today’s show, we break down the logistics of hiring into five basic action steps. First, by recognizing the gap in your business. Secondly, by putting your feelers out into the hiring marker. Then, once you’ve got your list, narrowing it down to a promising employee selection. Next, negotiating pricing and then finally, locking it down with a contract. See, not too complicated, right?
Today we’re going to give you the inside scoop into how we do this in our own business as well as give you the resources to enable you to free up some time, protect yourself and your employees and get everyone on the same page and #winning! Whether you’re an employer looking to hire or an employee looking to be hired, take a listen for some tips toward a more empowering experience.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Jul 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Reaching Your #SquadGoals The Logistics of Hiring</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>84</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>When people think of hiring they often think that it is a complicated, convoluted, crazy process. But the truth is, it really doesn’t have to be. On today’s show, we break down the logistics of hiring into five basic action steps. First, by...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When people think of hiring they often think that it is a complicated, convoluted, crazy process. But the truth is, it really doesn’t have to be. On today’s show, we break down the logistics of hiring into five basic action steps. First, by recognizing the gap in your business. Secondly, by putting your feelers out into the hiring marker. Then, once you’ve got your list, narrowing it down to a promising employee selection. Next, negotiating pricing and then finally, locking it down with a contract. See, not too complicated, right?
Today we’re going to give you the inside scoop into how we do this in our own business as well as give you the resources to enable you to free up some time, protect yourself and your employees and get everyone on the same page and #winning! Whether you’re an employer looking to hire or an employee looking to be hired, take a listen for some tips toward a more empowering experience.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When people think of hiring they often think that it is a complicated, convoluted, crazy process. But the truth is, it really doesn’t have to be. On today’s show, we break down the logistics of hiring into five basic action steps. First, by recognizing the gap in your business. Secondly, by putting your feelers out into the hiring marker. Then, once you’ve got your list, narrowing it down to a promising employee selection. Next, negotiating pricing and then finally, locking it down with a contract. See, not too complicated, right?</p><p>Today we’re going to give you the inside scoop into how we do this in our own business as well as give you the resources to enable you to free up some time, protect yourself and your employees and get everyone on the same page and #winning! Whether you’re an employer looking to hire or an employee looking to be hired, take a listen for some tips toward a more empowering experience.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2446</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[611dbad507716446308a5a2771262ec9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3326085646.mp3?updated=1661896184" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>083: Mastering Youtube For Your Business (Yes, Any Business) with Trena Little</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/mastering-youtube-for-your-business</link>
      <description>Today we have on Trena Little who is YouTube queen. She has grown her YouTube channel, her audience with video content and it’s really impacted the way that she does business and the way that she engages with her people and she is breaking all of that down today.
We are talking through the benefits of having your own YouTube channel. How to get over the overwhelm of creating video content, examples of ways to brainstorm awesome ideas, the exact process you should go through for setting up your YouTube and posting your video content and even some awesome was to get your videos to rank on Google. Trena is a powerhouse of information and we’re looking forward to sharing all of her great advice with you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 10 Jul 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Mastering Youtube For Your Business (Yes, Any Business) with Trena Little</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>83</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we have on Trena Little who is YouTube queen. She has grown her YouTube channel, her audience with video content and it’s really impacted the way that she does business and the way that she engages with her people and she is breaking all of...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we have on Trena Little who is YouTube queen. She has grown her YouTube channel, her audience with video content and it’s really impacted the way that she does business and the way that she engages with her people and she is breaking all of that down today.
We are talking through the benefits of having your own YouTube channel. How to get over the overwhelm of creating video content, examples of ways to brainstorm awesome ideas, the exact process you should go through for setting up your YouTube and posting your video content and even some awesome was to get your videos to rank on Google. Trena is a powerhouse of information and we’re looking forward to sharing all of her great advice with you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we have on Trena Little who is YouTube queen. She has grown her YouTube channel, her audience with video content and it’s really impacted the way that she does business and the way that she engages with her people and she is breaking all of that down today.</p><p>We are talking through the benefits of having your own YouTube channel. How to get over the overwhelm of creating video content, examples of ways to brainstorm awesome ideas, the exact process you should go through for setting up your YouTube and posting your video content and even some awesome was to get your videos to rank on Google. Trena is a powerhouse of information and we’re looking forward to sharing all of her great advice with you.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2686</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[48d0b282a0c717e6b5c743e5f5aa9879]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6939407747.mp3?updated=1661876210" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>082: Behind the Scenes: Our $94,936 Strategy Academy Launch</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/behind-the-scenes-our-94936-strategy-academy-launch-and-the-lessons-we-learned</link>
      <description>On today’s show we literally take you behind the scenes of the biggest launch of our career! After two years of hard work and thinking about what we could offer the world that’s really going to change the landscape for creative entrepreneurs, we launched The Strategy Academy. We don’t think you guys realize the amount of excitement that we have to bring you this episode. Not only are we excited because it means the launch is over and we can finally breathe, but we are also excited because it’s the biggest launch of our career, ever! It also meant a lot of lessons learned, a lot of successful decisions, a few minor tweaks and pivots, and some crazy data and stats that absolutely blew our minds!
A lot of people plateau because they don’t know how to automate and they don’t know how to grow a team. So we took everything a step further in the Strategy Academy and really gave people like a full blown roadmap! The launch took off in June this year and had some unexpected highs, some surprising lows and exciting turns! Today, we are giving you the launch breakdown 101. The data, the results and the digits — because you all know we hold nothing back — of our most recent $94,936 Strategy Academy launch. Hear how we did it and how you can do it to!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 07 Jul 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Behind the Scenes: Our $94,936 Strategy Academy Launch</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>82</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>On today’s show we literally take you behind the scenes of the biggest launch of our career! After two years of hard work and thinking about what we could offer the world that’s really going to change the landscape for creative entrepreneurs, we...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s show we literally take you behind the scenes of the biggest launch of our career! After two years of hard work and thinking about what we could offer the world that’s really going to change the landscape for creative entrepreneurs, we launched The Strategy Academy. We don’t think you guys realize the amount of excitement that we have to bring you this episode. Not only are we excited because it means the launch is over and we can finally breathe, but we are also excited because it’s the biggest launch of our career, ever! It also meant a lot of lessons learned, a lot of successful decisions, a few minor tweaks and pivots, and some crazy data and stats that absolutely blew our minds!
A lot of people plateau because they don’t know how to automate and they don’t know how to grow a team. So we took everything a step further in the Strategy Academy and really gave people like a full blown roadmap! The launch took off in June this year and had some unexpected highs, some surprising lows and exciting turns! Today, we are giving you the launch breakdown 101. The data, the results and the digits — because you all know we hold nothing back — of our most recent $94,936 Strategy Academy launch. Hear how we did it and how you can do it to!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s show we literally take you behind the scenes of the biggest launch of our career! After two years of hard work and thinking about what we could offer the world that’s really going to change the landscape for creative entrepreneurs, we launched The Strategy Academy. We don’t think you guys realize the amount of excitement that we have to bring you this episode. Not only are we excited because it means the launch is over and we can finally breathe, but we are also excited because it’s the biggest launch of our career, ever! It also meant a lot of lessons learned, a lot of successful decisions, a few minor tweaks and pivots, and some crazy data and stats that absolutely blew our minds!</p><p>A lot of people plateau because they don’t know how to automate and they don’t know how to grow a team. So we took everything a step further in the Strategy Academy and really gave people like a full blown roadmap! The launch took off in June this year and had some unexpected highs, some surprising lows and exciting turns! Today, we are giving you the launch breakdown 101. The data, the results and the digits — because you all know we hold nothing back — of our most recent $94,936 Strategy Academy launch. Hear how we did it and how you can do it to!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com.</a></p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3117</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d23b5af2554d67689b7a4858995b5d4c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3807747091.mp3?updated=1661876209" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>081: Being a Premium Coach without Fancy Funnels or a Giant Email List with Jessica Yarbrough, The Mompreneur Coach</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/being-a-premium-coach-without-fancy-funnels-or-a-giant-email-list</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Jessica Yarbrough and she is the Mompreneur coach, she is a successful entrepreneur, marketing strategist and business coach. She actually helps other women create high end coaching programs so they can create their own amazing enterprise.
Today we’re talking about how to kind of shift your mindset to not only own your worth but charge big bucks for your offers. She’s talking about the best practices of whether you should charge hourly or package up your stuff in premium, high end packages. She’s talking about how she was able to build her six figure coaching business without fancy funnels, without a large email list or spending any money on ads. So you grass roots people who think that premium services, offerings or premium business is out of your reach until you like shot a whole bunch of money into it, I really think you’re going to like this one.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 05 Jul 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Being a Premium Coach without Fancy Funnels or a Giant Email List with Jessica Yarbrough, The Mompreneur Coach</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>81</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Jessica Yarbrough and she is the Mompreneur coach, she is a successful entrepreneur, marketing strategist and business coach. She actually helps other women create high end coaching programs so they can create their own...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Jessica Yarbrough and she is the Mompreneur coach, she is a successful entrepreneur, marketing strategist and business coach. She actually helps other women create high end coaching programs so they can create their own amazing enterprise.
Today we’re talking about how to kind of shift your mindset to not only own your worth but charge big bucks for your offers. She’s talking about the best practices of whether you should charge hourly or package up your stuff in premium, high end packages. She’s talking about how she was able to build her six figure coaching business without fancy funnels, without a large email list or spending any money on ads. So you grass roots people who think that premium services, offerings or premium business is out of your reach until you like shot a whole bunch of money into it, I really think you’re going to like this one.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Jessica Yarbrough and she is the Mompreneur coach, she is a successful entrepreneur, marketing strategist and business coach. She actually helps other women create high end coaching programs so they can create their own amazing enterprise.</p><p>Today we’re talking about how to kind of shift your mindset to not only own your worth but charge big bucks for your offers. She’s talking about the best practices of whether you should charge hourly or package up your stuff in premium, high end packages. She’s talking about how she was able to build her six figure coaching business without fancy funnels, without a large email list or spending any money on ads. So you grass roots people who think that premium services, offerings or premium business is out of your reach until you like shot a whole bunch of money into it, I really think you’re going to like this one.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2444</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f7108909cc2c7f119ee729c804393949]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9099471801.mp3?updated=1661876152" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>080: Q&amp;A with Abagail &amp; Emylee - Personal and Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/q-a-with-abagail-emylee-personal-and-business</link>
      <description>We are coming in with a little light episode today. Actually, it might not be light with the questions that have been coming in right now. We get a crap ton of questions from you guys all the time, both personal and business, and usually we have already recorded something about it or we have written something about it. But sometimes we just get this kind of hodgepodge of questions from you guys that just does not quite fit into any particular topic.
So today we decided to tackle them in a Q&amp;A format. This isn’t fancy, it isn’t organized, but it is going to answer those burning questions that y’all have had for us! We are just going to go down the list and answer what you guys want to know, one by one. We are giving the people what they want. As simple as that!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 03 Jul 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Q&amp;A with Abagail &amp; Emylee - Personal and Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>80</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are coming in with a little light episode today. Actually, it might not be light with the questions that have been coming in right now. We get a crap ton of questions from you guys all the time, both personal and business, and usually we have...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are coming in with a little light episode today. Actually, it might not be light with the questions that have been coming in right now. We get a crap ton of questions from you guys all the time, both personal and business, and usually we have already recorded something about it or we have written something about it. But sometimes we just get this kind of hodgepodge of questions from you guys that just does not quite fit into any particular topic.
So today we decided to tackle them in a Q&amp;A format. This isn’t fancy, it isn’t organized, but it is going to answer those burning questions that y’all have had for us! We are just going to go down the list and answer what you guys want to know, one by one. We are giving the people what they want. As simple as that!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are coming in with a little light episode today. Actually, it might not be light with the questions that have been coming in right now. We get a crap ton of questions from you guys all the time, both personal and business, and usually we have already recorded something about it or we have written something about it. But sometimes we just get this kind of hodgepodge of questions from you guys that just does not quite fit into any particular topic.</p><p>So today we decided to tackle them in a Q&amp;A format. This isn’t fancy, it isn’t organized, but it is going to answer those burning questions that y’all have had for us! We are just going to go down the list and answer what you guys want to know, one by one. We are giving the people what they want. As simple as that!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a></p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3149</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d20e2a9eccc8682119fefb3d882a9c1e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2357084979.mp3?updated=1661876103" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>079: Crossing the Rainbow into Online Sales (+ New Ways to Get Your Dreamies on Your List) with Allison Marshall of Wonderlass</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/crossing-the-rainbow-into-online-sales-new-ways-to-get-your-dreamies-on-your-list</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, be prepared to laugh a lot because Allison Marshall is a handful. We had a ton of fun interviewing her, as we go back a while. We met up with her for coffee sometime last year and since then, we have partnered up on a few various creative projects and it has been really fun to see her and her business grow as she’s transitioned from a full-time wedding photographer into teaching other creative entrepreneurs how to grow a profitable online business. She is here to share her story and that process in the steps that she took to make all of that happen so it’s something that you’re wanting to be doing.
Be sure to listen to how Allison transitioned from wedding photography to online sales. We also talk about the things that actually helped her make it happen like getting people on your list and attracting the right kind of people. Her thoughts and processes on being yourself in your brand and things you can create for an opt-in to get people on your list and she just does a quick brainstorm of all the different tactics that she uses and how she is successful at getting people on her list, so you can copy and paste those with some freebies that we’re mentioning today. A lot of giggles, a lot of passionate yelling and it’s a really good time. Can’t wait for you to get into this one.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 30 Jun 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Crossing the Rainbow into Online Sales (+ New Ways to Get Your Dreamies on Your List) with Allison Marshall of Wonderlass</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>79</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, be prepared to laugh a lot because Allison Marshall is a handful. We had a ton of fun interviewing her, as we go back a while. We met up with her for coffee sometime last year and since then, we have partnered up on a few various...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, be prepared to laugh a lot because Allison Marshall is a handful. We had a ton of fun interviewing her, as we go back a while. We met up with her for coffee sometime last year and since then, we have partnered up on a few various creative projects and it has been really fun to see her and her business grow as she’s transitioned from a full-time wedding photographer into teaching other creative entrepreneurs how to grow a profitable online business. She is here to share her story and that process in the steps that she took to make all of that happen so it’s something that you’re wanting to be doing.
Be sure to listen to how Allison transitioned from wedding photography to online sales. We also talk about the things that actually helped her make it happen like getting people on your list and attracting the right kind of people. Her thoughts and processes on being yourself in your brand and things you can create for an opt-in to get people on your list and she just does a quick brainstorm of all the different tactics that she uses and how she is successful at getting people on her list, so you can copy and paste those with some freebies that we’re mentioning today. A lot of giggles, a lot of passionate yelling and it’s a really good time. Can’t wait for you to get into this one.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, be prepared to laugh a lot because Allison Marshall is a handful. We had a ton of fun interviewing her, as we go back a while. We met up with her for coffee sometime last year and since then, we have partnered up on a few various creative projects and it has been really fun to see her and her business grow as she’s transitioned from a full-time wedding photographer into teaching other creative entrepreneurs how to grow a profitable online business. She is here to share her story and that process in the steps that she took to make all of that happen so it’s something that you’re wanting to be doing.</p><p>Be sure to listen to how Allison transitioned from wedding photography to online sales. We also talk about the things that actually helped her make it happen like getting people on your list and attracting the right kind of people. Her thoughts and processes on being yourself in your brand and things you can create for an opt-in to get people on your list and she just does a quick brainstorm of all the different tactics that she uses and how she is successful at getting people on her list, so you can copy and paste those with some freebies that we’re mentioning today. A lot of giggles, a lot of passionate yelling and it’s a really good time. Can’t wait for you to get into this one.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3113</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5ef6637193fd6e709dd3fb7875d6fa88]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8142273491.mp3?updated=1662567038" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>078: Mega Launch Challenge Stats (Copy + Paste this Strategy)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/our-mega-launch-challenge-stats-copy-paste-this-strategy</link>
      <description>As you may or may not know, we had a Five Days to Launch Challenge earlier this June and we ran it literally just for five days, but we did a lot of promotion leading up to it and we wanted to talk to you today about everything that worked, things we would've changed, how our engagement went throughout out and how it's affected our launch so far. When we’re recording this podcast, we’re literally still in the middle of launching, so can't give you final numbers, but we can tell you what we think it did in the beginning. We’re excited to jump in.
We’re going to talk all about challenges and launching and how to use challenges to launch better, faster, stronger, awesomer, smarter. How to build more engagement, be more valuable, get more people on your list and have a damn fun time doing it.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 Jun 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Mega Launch Challenge Stats (Copy + Paste this Strategy)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>78</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>As you may or may not know, we had a Five Days to Launch Challenge earlier this June and we ran it literally just for five days, but we did a lot of promotion leading up to it and we wanted to talk to you today about everything that worked, things we...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>As you may or may not know, we had a Five Days to Launch Challenge earlier this June and we ran it literally just for five days, but we did a lot of promotion leading up to it and we wanted to talk to you today about everything that worked, things we would've changed, how our engagement went throughout out and how it's affected our launch so far. When we’re recording this podcast, we’re literally still in the middle of launching, so can't give you final numbers, but we can tell you what we think it did in the beginning. We’re excited to jump in.
We’re going to talk all about challenges and launching and how to use challenges to launch better, faster, stronger, awesomer, smarter. How to build more engagement, be more valuable, get more people on your list and have a damn fun time doing it.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>As you may or may not know, we had a Five Days to Launch Challenge earlier this June and we ran it literally just for five days, but we did a lot of promotion leading up to it and we wanted to talk to you today about everything that worked, things we would've changed, how our engagement went throughout out and how it's affected our launch so far. When we’re recording this podcast, we’re literally still in the middle of launching, so can't give you final numbers, but we can tell you what we think it did in the beginning. We’re excited to jump in.</p><p>We’re going to talk all about challenges and launching and how to use challenges to launch better, faster, stronger, awesomer, smarter. How to build more engagement, be more valuable, get more people on your list and have a damn fun time doing it.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2407</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[fcd1c6051c60c4e039497a89d4052601]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5658192273.mp3?updated=1662567249" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>077: Letting Go of Mom and Boss Babe Guilt with Dana Malstaff of Boss Mom</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/letting-go-of-mom-and-boss-babe-guilt</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we have Dana Malstaff of Boss Mom, she is a mother, author, business owner, content strategist, coach, podcaster and line spot reducer. Dana is a big deal, we’ve known Dana for a while now but she has been guiding moms all over the internet for a while and helping them nurture their businesses and figure out this whole game of growing an empire while growing a family.
We’re going to cover a lot today that you guys have asked us over and over again but we haven’t quite fully equipped to answer so we brought on Dana to cover the good stuff like how the heck do you handle mom guilt and business guilt? Can you actually build an empire with little ones at home? What’s this whole myth of balance and what can we kind of reframe our mindset around instead in order to make sure that we’re being awesome parents and awesome business owners and awesome people in general? Just some really great tactical items that you guys are going to walk away from to really let go of that guilt, really kind of reframe your focus around what you’re doing in parenthood and business ownership.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 26 Jun 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Letting Go of Mom and Boss Babe Guilt with Dana Malstaff of Boss Mom</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>77</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we have Dana Malstaff of Boss Mom, she is a mother, author, business owner, content strategist, coach, podcaster and line spot reducer. Dana is a big deal, we’ve known Dana for a while now but she has been guiding moms all over...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we have Dana Malstaff of Boss Mom, she is a mother, author, business owner, content strategist, coach, podcaster and line spot reducer. Dana is a big deal, we’ve known Dana for a while now but she has been guiding moms all over the internet for a while and helping them nurture their businesses and figure out this whole game of growing an empire while growing a family.
We’re going to cover a lot today that you guys have asked us over and over again but we haven’t quite fully equipped to answer so we brought on Dana to cover the good stuff like how the heck do you handle mom guilt and business guilt? Can you actually build an empire with little ones at home? What’s this whole myth of balance and what can we kind of reframe our mindset around instead in order to make sure that we’re being awesome parents and awesome business owners and awesome people in general? Just some really great tactical items that you guys are going to walk away from to really let go of that guilt, really kind of reframe your focus around what you’re doing in parenthood and business ownership.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we have Dana Malstaff of Boss Mom, she is a mother, author, business owner, content strategist, coach, podcaster and line spot reducer. Dana is a big deal, we’ve known Dana for a while now but she has been guiding moms all over the internet for a while and helping them nurture their businesses and figure out this whole game of growing an empire while growing a family.</p><p>We’re going to cover a lot today that you guys have asked us over and over again but we haven’t quite fully equipped to answer so we brought on Dana to cover the good stuff like how the heck do you handle mom guilt and business guilt? Can you actually build an empire with little ones at home? What’s this whole myth of balance and what can we kind of reframe our mindset around instead in order to make sure that we’re being awesome parents and awesome business owners and awesome people in general? Just some really great tactical items that you guys are going to walk away from to really let go of that guilt, really kind of reframe your focus around what you’re doing in parenthood and business ownership.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3147</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c5d94e765a247d1d6f7f7c1555888efb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4425763937.mp3?updated=1662567317" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>076: Turning Your Craft into a Thriving Business with the Strategy Academy</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/turning-your-craft-into-a-thriving-business-with-the-strategy-academy</link>
      <description>You guys, today is kind of an incredible day, we are introducing you to our baby, The Strategy Academy. It’s our digital baby, the thing that we have been working on literally from day one. We wanted to create this new movement and program and opportunity for small business owners specifically creative small business owners The reactions have been amazing, the support, the cheer leading, everything around this program has just made our hearts go super warm and fuzzy.
Today, we’re going to introduce you to the Strategy Academy, we’re going to walk you through what’s inside, why it’s amazing and kind of explain more of the choose your own adventure that we have built inside this program. This will help make those decisions a little easier and really give you some guidance as to what you’re even going to get out of the program and why we invested so much time and energy into it.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 23 Jun 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Turning Your Craft into a Thriving Business with the Strategy Academy</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>76</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>You guys, today is kind of an incredible day, we are introducing you to our baby, The Strategy Academy. It’s our digital baby, the thing that we have been working on literally from day one. We wanted to create this new movement and program and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You guys, today is kind of an incredible day, we are introducing you to our baby, The Strategy Academy. It’s our digital baby, the thing that we have been working on literally from day one. We wanted to create this new movement and program and opportunity for small business owners specifically creative small business owners The reactions have been amazing, the support, the cheer leading, everything around this program has just made our hearts go super warm and fuzzy.
Today, we’re going to introduce you to the Strategy Academy, we’re going to walk you through what’s inside, why it’s amazing and kind of explain more of the choose your own adventure that we have built inside this program. This will help make those decisions a little easier and really give you some guidance as to what you’re even going to get out of the program and why we invested so much time and energy into it.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You guys, today is kind of an incredible day, we are introducing you to our baby, The Strategy Academy. It’s our digital baby, the thing that we have been working on literally from day one. We wanted to create this new movement and program and opportunity for small business owners specifically creative small business owners The reactions have been amazing, the support, the cheer leading, everything around this program has just made our hearts go super warm and fuzzy.</p><p>Today, we’re going to introduce you to the Strategy Academy, we’re going to walk you through what’s inside, why it’s amazing and kind of explain more of the choose your own adventure that we have built inside this program. This will help make those decisions a little easier and really give you some guidance as to what you’re even going to get out of the program and why we invested so much time and energy into it.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1744</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[55df89045dea729661542e2b9d2e1152]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5517943138.mp3?updated=1662567383" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>075: How to Launch a Podcast in 7 Days with Sagan Morrow of Candid Conversations</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-launch-a-podcast-in-7-days</link>
      <description>Today we are chatting with Sagan Morrow, who is a small business strategist, published author, and blogger at SaganMorrow.com. With nearly a decade of experience as a freelance writer/editor/social media manager, Sagan now teaches struggling solopreneurs how to create their own customized, actionable strategies for starting and building their own successful, profitable home-based businesses, without the overwhelm. Sagan is an intersectional feminist with a degree in Rhetoric. She recently launched the Candid Conversations small business podcast with her business partner to share the behind-the-scenes real, raw stories of entrepreneurship, in an effort to inspire and guide others through the uncertain landscape that is being a small business owner.
Sagan and her now business partner launched their podcast in seven days and today we’re going through the steps of how they made that happen, how they figured out the tech, how they landed a sponsor. We also go over exactly how they got onto iTunes, what kind of hours they put in, and advice they have for people who are wanting to launch anything in a short amount of time. So if you are ready to get off the fence and get their ideas out into the real world, then you should definitely tune into today’s episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 21 Jun 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Launch a Podcast in 7 Days with Sagan Morrow of Candid Conversations</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>75</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are chatting with Sagan Morrow, who is a small business strategist, published author, and blogger at SaganMorrow.com. With nearly a decade of experience as a freelance writer/editor/social media manager, Sagan now teaches struggling...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are chatting with Sagan Morrow, who is a small business strategist, published author, and blogger at SaganMorrow.com. With nearly a decade of experience as a freelance writer/editor/social media manager, Sagan now teaches struggling solopreneurs how to create their own customized, actionable strategies for starting and building their own successful, profitable home-based businesses, without the overwhelm. Sagan is an intersectional feminist with a degree in Rhetoric. She recently launched the Candid Conversations small business podcast with her business partner to share the behind-the-scenes real, raw stories of entrepreneurship, in an effort to inspire and guide others through the uncertain landscape that is being a small business owner.
Sagan and her now business partner launched their podcast in seven days and today we’re going through the steps of how they made that happen, how they figured out the tech, how they landed a sponsor. We also go over exactly how they got onto iTunes, what kind of hours they put in, and advice they have for people who are wanting to launch anything in a short amount of time. So if you are ready to get off the fence and get their ideas out into the real world, then you should definitely tune into today’s episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are chatting with Sagan Morrow, who is a small business strategist, published author, and blogger at SaganMorrow.com. With nearly a decade of experience as a freelance writer/editor/social media manager, Sagan now teaches struggling solopreneurs how to create their own customized, actionable strategies for starting and building their own successful, profitable home-based businesses, without the overwhelm. Sagan is an intersectional feminist with a degree in Rhetoric. She recently launched the Candid Conversations small business podcast with her business partner to share the behind-the-scenes real, raw stories of entrepreneurship, in an effort to inspire and guide others through the uncertain landscape that is being a small business owner.</p><p>Sagan and her now business partner launched their podcast in seven days and today we’re going through the steps of how they made that happen, how they figured out the tech, how they landed a sponsor. We also go over exactly how they got onto iTunes, what kind of hours they put in, and advice they have for people who are wanting to launch anything in a short amount of time. So if you are ready to get off the fence and get their ideas out into the real world, then you should definitely tune into today’s episode!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2956</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[22754f5a7d2525a6a5c54a452443b878]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4777570200.mp3?updated=1662567386" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>074: How to Launch in 5 Days + the 8 Secret Steps to Success</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-launch-in-five-days-and-the-8-secret-steps-to-success</link>
      <description>We are here today to congratulate all of you who just came through on the other side of the glorious hill after finishing our free Five Days to Launch Challenge. In this episode, we are going to do a quick recap of what the heck you all learned in that challenge and maybe try to give you one more boost of energy to keep trucking forward. Plus, we are going to give you an invitation to another free challenge for you to learn even more awesome, amazing things for your business.
We have been so impressed by the community who was able to take an idea that they had, turn it into a product and get it to market in five days. We are going to briefly go over the steps the participants took, so if you missed the challenge and you want to figure out what the heck they did, definitely stay tuned because you can participate in our next one for sure. We are definitely going to do this again because it was an absolute party and, as you know, we will be here again probably in like a week or so giving you a full recap of the challenge and a behind the scenes look from our end. So if this is something that you guys are wanting to incorporate in your own business, you can just copy and paste what we did because we had a blast!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 19 Jun 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Launch in 5 Days + the 8 Secret Steps to Success</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>74</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are here today to congratulate all of you who just came through on the other side of the glorious hill after finishing our free Five Days to Launch Challenge. In this episode, we are going to do a quick recap of what the heck you all learned in...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are here today to congratulate all of you who just came through on the other side of the glorious hill after finishing our free Five Days to Launch Challenge. In this episode, we are going to do a quick recap of what the heck you all learned in that challenge and maybe try to give you one more boost of energy to keep trucking forward. Plus, we are going to give you an invitation to another free challenge for you to learn even more awesome, amazing things for your business.
We have been so impressed by the community who was able to take an idea that they had, turn it into a product and get it to market in five days. We are going to briefly go over the steps the participants took, so if you missed the challenge and you want to figure out what the heck they did, definitely stay tuned because you can participate in our next one for sure. We are definitely going to do this again because it was an absolute party and, as you know, we will be here again probably in like a week or so giving you a full recap of the challenge and a behind the scenes look from our end. So if this is something that you guys are wanting to incorporate in your own business, you can just copy and paste what we did because we had a blast!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are here today to congratulate all of you who just came through on the other side of the glorious hill after finishing our free Five Days to Launch Challenge. In this episode, we are going to do a quick recap of what the heck you all learned in that challenge and maybe try to give you one more boost of energy to keep trucking forward. Plus, we are going to give you an invitation to another free challenge for you to learn even more awesome, amazing things for your business.</p><p>We have been so impressed by the community who was able to take an idea that they had, turn it into a product and get it to market in five days. We are going to briefly go over the steps the participants took, so if you missed the challenge and you want to figure out what the heck they did, definitely stay tuned because you can participate in our next one for sure. We are definitely going to do this again because it was an absolute party and, as you know, we will be here again probably in like a week or so giving you a full recap of the challenge and a behind the scenes look from our end. So if this is something that you guys are wanting to incorporate in your own business, you can just copy and paste what we did because we had a blast!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1421</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2602c0ff4f7c1e7c38e3138bcc9c66b9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1206690327.mp3?updated=1662567337" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>073: Getting Out of Your Creative Funk and Making White Space with Mary Hyatt</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/getting-out-of-your-creative-funk-and-making-white-space</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, you’re going to hear from Mary Hyatt. Mary is a personal life and business coach who helps people get into the raw side of themselves, fall back in love, and believe in their potential. She believes that every person has the ability to create the life that they love and helps her clients wake up, find their voice and become fully alive. Creative entrepreneurs, seriously, this one was recorded for you.
We talk about how to stay in a place of inspiration so you can keep putting out valuable content, why you are in a creative funk, and how to get that creative white space back. Mary also breaks down the bare methods, and we talk about believing in something so it actually happens. We dive into the mythical balance, how you can blend your life, and really what you need to have at the front and fore center of your mind before you can tackle anything in your business. We are super excited! Seriously, it was such a joy to hear from Mary, and you are going to love this episode.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 16 Jun 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Getting Out of Your Creative Funk and Making White Space with Mary Hyatt</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>73</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, you’re going to hear from Mary Hyatt. Mary is a personal life and business coach who helps people get into the raw side of themselves, fall back in love, and believe in their potential. She believes that every person has the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, you’re going to hear from Mary Hyatt. Mary is a personal life and business coach who helps people get into the raw side of themselves, fall back in love, and believe in their potential. She believes that every person has the ability to create the life that they love and helps her clients wake up, find their voice and become fully alive. Creative entrepreneurs, seriously, this one was recorded for you.
We talk about how to stay in a place of inspiration so you can keep putting out valuable content, why you are in a creative funk, and how to get that creative white space back. Mary also breaks down the bare methods, and we talk about believing in something so it actually happens. We dive into the mythical balance, how you can blend your life, and really what you need to have at the front and fore center of your mind before you can tackle anything in your business. We are super excited! Seriously, it was such a joy to hear from Mary, and you are going to love this episode.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, you’re going to hear from Mary Hyatt. Mary is a personal life and business coach who helps people get into the raw side of themselves, fall back in love, and believe in their potential. She believes that every person has the ability to create the life that they love and helps her clients wake up, find their voice and become fully alive. Creative entrepreneurs, seriously, this one was recorded for you.</p><p>We talk about how to stay in a place of inspiration so you can keep putting out valuable content, why you are in a creative funk, and how to get that creative white space back. Mary also breaks down the bare methods, and we talk about believing in something so it actually happens. We dive into the mythical balance, how you can blend your life, and really what you need to have at the front and fore center of your mind before you can tackle anything in your business. We are super excited! Seriously, it was such a joy to hear from Mary, and you are going to love this episode.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3008</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ea7a84c7dc8878d0febad6301f1d77e0]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6085612797.mp3?updated=1662567382" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>072: Our Business Roadblocks and How You Can Avoid Them</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/our-business-roadblocks-and-how-you-can-avoid-them</link>
      <description>Well, ya’ll know by now that we are pretty much transparent about everything we learn in our business. We immediately take it and we turn around and teach it because we don’t like to hold back. We are over-sharers by nature. You get the good, bad and the ugly with us and that’s what we are doing today; we are oversharing again. Today, we wanted to dive in deeper about the business roadblocks that we have faced.
At the beginning, we dove into a lot of content from people who we knew and who we trusted, and who we saw were doing big things. One of the important pieces that not everyone talks about are the mistakes that they have made in their business and what held them back and prevented them from making more money, faster. So that’s what we’re going to talk about today. We are just human and we make mistakes like everybody else and the thing is, if we could do anything, we want to help you avoid them or at least make them less bumpy, less crazy, less long and drawn out and help you find the solution quickly. So let’s jump in a get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Jun 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our Business Roadblocks and How You Can Avoid Them</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>72</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Well, ya’ll know by now that we are pretty much transparent about everything we learn in our business. We immediately take it and we turn around and teach it because we don’t like to hold back. We are over-sharers by nature. You get the good, bad...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Well, ya’ll know by now that we are pretty much transparent about everything we learn in our business. We immediately take it and we turn around and teach it because we don’t like to hold back. We are over-sharers by nature. You get the good, bad and the ugly with us and that’s what we are doing today; we are oversharing again. Today, we wanted to dive in deeper about the business roadblocks that we have faced.
At the beginning, we dove into a lot of content from people who we knew and who we trusted, and who we saw were doing big things. One of the important pieces that not everyone talks about are the mistakes that they have made in their business and what held them back and prevented them from making more money, faster. So that’s what we’re going to talk about today. We are just human and we make mistakes like everybody else and the thing is, if we could do anything, we want to help you avoid them or at least make them less bumpy, less crazy, less long and drawn out and help you find the solution quickly. So let’s jump in a get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Well, ya’ll know by now that we are pretty much transparent about everything we learn in our business. We immediately take it and we turn around and teach it because we don’t like to hold back. We are over-sharers by nature. You get the good, bad and the ugly with us and that’s what we are doing today; we are oversharing again. Today, we wanted to dive in deeper about the business roadblocks that we have faced.</p><p>At the beginning, we dove into a lot of content from people who we knew and who we trusted, and who we saw were doing big things. One of the important pieces that not everyone talks about are the mistakes that they have made in their business and what held them back and prevented them from making more money, faster. So that’s what we’re going to talk about today. We are just human and we make mistakes like everybody else and the thing is, if we could do anything, we want to help you avoid them or at least make them less bumpy, less crazy, less long and drawn out and help you find the solution quickly. So let’s jump in a get started!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2266</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2fe1a2a5b8253702940a4980a7a5d608]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1694754951.mp3?updated=1662559011" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>071: Part 2: The Secret Parallel Universe of Wholesale with Katie Hunt of Tradeshow Bootcamp</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/part-2-the-secret-parallel-universe-of-wholesale</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we welcome back Katie Hunt of Tradeshow Bootcamp. Katie is our very first second-time guest! We met Katie last summer at the Savvy Experience and have been friends ever since. Katie has this depth of knowledge about an entirely different world of wholesale and the stationary industry that we are just not privy to, and she is not afraid of holding back! In fact, she doesn’t hold back, ever.
She gives so much insight in this episode; we are talking all about saving for tradeshows, how to budget for them so that there are no surprise costs and the pros and cons of going to a national show versus a smaller local show first. We also dive into how to balance retail and wholesale, and how to nurture those relationships after you snag some wholesale clients. We even go into more on how to add value, how to get your customers ordering more, and how to bring them on like they are family and VIPs. There are a lot of ideas in this episode and a lot of action steps, so we can’t wait for you to dive in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 12 Jun 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Part 2: The Secret Parallel Universe of Wholesale with Katie Hunt of Tradeshow Bootcamp</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>71</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we welcome back Katie Hunt of Tradeshow Bootcamp. Katie is our very first second-time guest! We met Katie last summer at the Savvy Experience and have been friends ever since. Katie has this depth of knowledge about an entirely...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we welcome back Katie Hunt of Tradeshow Bootcamp. Katie is our very first second-time guest! We met Katie last summer at the Savvy Experience and have been friends ever since. Katie has this depth of knowledge about an entirely different world of wholesale and the stationary industry that we are just not privy to, and she is not afraid of holding back! In fact, she doesn’t hold back, ever.
She gives so much insight in this episode; we are talking all about saving for tradeshows, how to budget for them so that there are no surprise costs and the pros and cons of going to a national show versus a smaller local show first. We also dive into how to balance retail and wholesale, and how to nurture those relationships after you snag some wholesale clients. We even go into more on how to add value, how to get your customers ordering more, and how to bring them on like they are family and VIPs. There are a lot of ideas in this episode and a lot of action steps, so we can’t wait for you to dive in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we welcome back Katie Hunt of Tradeshow Bootcamp. Katie is our very first second-time guest! We met Katie last summer at the Savvy Experience and have been friends ever since. Katie has this depth of knowledge about an entirely different world of wholesale and the stationary industry that we are just not privy to, and she is not afraid of holding back! In fact, she doesn’t hold back, ever.</p><p>She gives so much insight in this episode; we are talking all about saving for tradeshows, how to budget for them so that there are no surprise costs and the pros and cons of going to a national show versus a smaller local show first. We also dive into how to balance retail and wholesale, and how to nurture those relationships after you snag some wholesale clients. We even go into more on how to add value, how to get your customers ordering more, and how to bring them on like they are family and VIPs. There are a lot of ideas in this episode and a lot of action steps, so we can’t wait for you to dive in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2919</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8f29cc9eae4a7c38873e520e588a7f70]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6171662237.mp3?updated=1662559166" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>070: 14 Launching Mistakes That You're Definitely Making in Your Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/14-launching-mistakes-that-youre-definitely-making-in-your-business</link>
      <description>Today, we are talking about all the frigging mistakes we have ever made and mistakes we see you all are making when it comes to launching. So, we are just going to call them for what they are and give you the flip side of what you could be doing to correct the mistake or prevent the mistake so you can be way more successful than anyone else you have ever met in your life. Does that sound like a plan?
We are excited to talk to you about all these mistakes so that you can really get in the right mindset. Because a lot of it comes down to mindset, more than anything else. Most of the other problems are either technical issues that ya’ll just need to get with someone and figure that all out. However, generally, the mistakes we see people making are often mindset-focused. So get comfy, pull out those notepads, and get ready to pack in some strategy to avoid these pesky mistakes.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 09 Jun 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>14 Launching Mistakes That You're Definitely Making in Your Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>70</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, we are talking about all the frigging mistakes we have ever made and mistakes we see you all are making when it comes to launching. So, we are just going to call them for what they are and give you the flip side of what you could be doing to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we are talking about all the frigging mistakes we have ever made and mistakes we see you all are making when it comes to launching. So, we are just going to call them for what they are and give you the flip side of what you could be doing to correct the mistake or prevent the mistake so you can be way more successful than anyone else you have ever met in your life. Does that sound like a plan?
We are excited to talk to you about all these mistakes so that you can really get in the right mindset. Because a lot of it comes down to mindset, more than anything else. Most of the other problems are either technical issues that ya’ll just need to get with someone and figure that all out. However, generally, the mistakes we see people making are often mindset-focused. So get comfy, pull out those notepads, and get ready to pack in some strategy to avoid these pesky mistakes.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we are talking about all the frigging mistakes we have ever made and mistakes we see you all are making when it comes to launching. So, we are just going to call them for what they are and give you the flip side of what you could be doing to correct the mistake or prevent the mistake so you can be way more successful than anyone else you have ever met in your life. Does that sound like a plan?</p><p>We are excited to talk to you about all these mistakes so that you can really get in the right mindset. Because a lot of it comes down to mindset, more than anything else. Most of the other problems are either technical issues that ya’ll just need to get with someone and figure that all out. However, generally, the mistakes we see people making are often mindset-focused. So get comfy, pull out those notepads, and get ready to pack in some strategy to avoid these pesky mistakes.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2671</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e7dad1a82330f38ffba19915eff9501e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1469871303.mp3?updated=1662559239" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>069: Writing the Perfect Sales Page with Courtney Johnston of the Rule Breakers Club</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/writing-the-perfect-sales-page</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, you are meeting one of my favorite people. Courtney Johnston is here from the Rule Breaker’s Club. We love Courtney because she cuts right to the meat, just like we do, so you can be guaranteed that this is an absolutely no-fluff episode. Courtney is the go-to person for all things sales copy and we are so excited for you to hear all the amazing knowledge she has to share about how to create and sell your signature services.
In this episode, we talk about common mistakes that people make on their sales pages, key areas that every single sales page should have, and how to brag about yourself without kind of bragging about yourself in a weird awkward way. Courtney even has some tips on how you can make a super sexy sales page super convincing to the people you want to be talking to, without worrying about a super lengthy, long, copy. We also dive into how to grab testimonies and what to include in your frequently asked questions, so you can make sure that you are protected and that you are getting the right people buying the stuff that you are selling. This is a meaty one, and we cover each topic in a ton of detail. We also reference even more free valuable content inside this episode, so stay tuned!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 Jun 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Writing the Perfect Sales Page with Courtney Johnston of the Rule Breakers Club</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>69</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, you are meeting one of my favorite people. Courtney Johnston is here from the Rule Breaker’s Club. We love Courtney because she cuts right to the meat, just like we do, so you can be guaranteed that this is an absolutely...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, you are meeting one of my favorite people. Courtney Johnston is here from the Rule Breaker’s Club. We love Courtney because she cuts right to the meat, just like we do, so you can be guaranteed that this is an absolutely no-fluff episode. Courtney is the go-to person for all things sales copy and we are so excited for you to hear all the amazing knowledge she has to share about how to create and sell your signature services.
In this episode, we talk about common mistakes that people make on their sales pages, key areas that every single sales page should have, and how to brag about yourself without kind of bragging about yourself in a weird awkward way. Courtney even has some tips on how you can make a super sexy sales page super convincing to the people you want to be talking to, without worrying about a super lengthy, long, copy. We also dive into how to grab testimonies and what to include in your frequently asked questions, so you can make sure that you are protected and that you are getting the right people buying the stuff that you are selling. This is a meaty one, and we cover each topic in a ton of detail. We also reference even more free valuable content inside this episode, so stay tuned!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, you are meeting one of my favorite people. Courtney Johnston is here from the Rule Breaker’s Club. We love Courtney because she cuts right to the meat, just like we do, so you can be guaranteed that this is an absolutely no-fluff episode. Courtney is the go-to person for all things sales copy and we are so excited for you to hear all the amazing knowledge she has to share about how to create and sell your signature services.</p><p>In this episode, we talk about common mistakes that people make on their sales pages, key areas that every single sales page should have, and how to brag about yourself without kind of bragging about yourself in a weird awkward way. Courtney even has some tips on how you can make a super sexy sales page super convincing to the people you want to be talking to, without worrying about a super lengthy, long, copy. We also dive into how to grab testimonies and what to include in your frequently asked questions, so you can make sure that you are protected and that you are getting the right people buying the stuff that you are selling. This is a meaty one, and we cover each topic in a ton of detail. We also reference even more free valuable content inside this episode, so stay tuned!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2996</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[633d4441ad1413eb20ec71a847915785]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3022119585.mp3?updated=1662580214" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>068: 5 Days to Launch Challenge</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/5daystolaunchchallenge-go-from-idea-to-launch-in-5-days-with-abagail-and-emylee</link>
      <description>Word on the street is, you have some pretty bomb ideas but for whatever reason, you just keep them in your pocket, you sit on them, you hold onto them, and you don’t launch them. What the heck? What are you waiting for, lady? There is a valuable opportunity there that can earn you some real cash dollar bills for your business. So many of you come to us saying that you have this amazing dreamy idea, but you are frozen, you are stuck, and you are on the fence. A lot of you live in Sitting-on-the-fence-ville, right? But the reality of it all is, it is not comfortable or really beneficial for anyone.
We want to help you to get into the launch mindset and so we have created the 5 Days to Launch Challenge to arm you with the strategies and the steps you need to get there. We have determined that launching something and launching it well really just comes down to five steps. That’s it. Five steps. You can do one step a day and at the end of five days, you will have launched a product and made actual money. So get ready to jump into your very own launch by signing up for the challenge today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 05 Jun 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Days to Launch Challenge</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>68</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Word on the street is, you have some pretty bomb ideas but for whatever reason, you just keep them in your pocket, you sit on them, you hold onto them, and you don’t launch them. What the heck? What are you waiting for, lady? There is a valuable...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Word on the street is, you have some pretty bomb ideas but for whatever reason, you just keep them in your pocket, you sit on them, you hold onto them, and you don’t launch them. What the heck? What are you waiting for, lady? There is a valuable opportunity there that can earn you some real cash dollar bills for your business. So many of you come to us saying that you have this amazing dreamy idea, but you are frozen, you are stuck, and you are on the fence. A lot of you live in Sitting-on-the-fence-ville, right? But the reality of it all is, it is not comfortable or really beneficial for anyone.
We want to help you to get into the launch mindset and so we have created the 5 Days to Launch Challenge to arm you with the strategies and the steps you need to get there. We have determined that launching something and launching it well really just comes down to five steps. That’s it. Five steps. You can do one step a day and at the end of five days, you will have launched a product and made actual money. So get ready to jump into your very own launch by signing up for the challenge today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Word on the street is, you have some pretty bomb ideas but for whatever reason, you just keep them in your pocket, you sit on them, you hold onto them, and you don’t launch them. What the heck? What are you waiting for, lady? There is a valuable opportunity there that can earn you some real cash dollar bills for your business. So many of you come to us saying that you have this amazing dreamy idea, but you are frozen, you are stuck, and you are on the fence. A lot of you live in Sitting-on-the-fence-ville, right? But the reality of it all is, it is not comfortable or really beneficial for anyone.</p><p>We want to help you to get into the launch mindset and so we have created the <em>5 Days to Launch Challenge</em> to arm you with the strategies and the steps you need to get there. We have determined that launching something and launching it well really just comes down to five steps. That’s it. Five steps. You can do one step a day and at the end of five days, you will have launched a product and made actual money. So get ready to jump into your very own launch by signing up for the challenge today!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1277</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3ac858f1ab94488d923959197c3ee48a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2046560973.mp3?updated=1662580147" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>067: Behind the Scenes Creating a Client Management System for Creatives with Becca and Jake Berg of Dubsado</title>
      <link>https://strategyhour.libsyn.com/067-behind-the-scenes-creating-a-client-management-system-for-creatives-with-becca-and-jake-berg-of-dubsado</link>
      <description>Today on the show, we have Becca and Jake Berg of Dubsado. We are super excited to have them on. They are a husband and wife team that are the brains, power, and geniuses behind Dubsado, which is a client management system for creatives. They have built one amazing and beautiful platform for all of those things that you have 75 different logins for, including your contracts, how you get paid, and how you respond back to clients after they book with you. All of those pieces are neatly tied up in one amazing software bow.
In today’s episode, you are going to get a peak behind the curtain. We are walking you through the steps they took to build the software company, from idea to launch, and doing all of this amongst building a family and having full-time jobs. They share with us how they have been able to grow and scale their business, and how Becca had to make sure it was her own. They also dive into exactly how they were able to make this awesome idea into an actual product, get it launched, and then how they have been able to scale and grow their team. We are even talking about some inside scoops on how to better perfect your client based business and get paid faster. So we are excited for you to jump in, listen, and learn!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 02 Jun 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Behind the Scenes Creating a Client Management System for Creatives with Becca and Jake Berg of Dubsado</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>67</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the show, we have Becca and Jake Berg of Dubsado. We are super excited to have them on. They are a husband and wife team that are the brains, power, and geniuses behind Dubsado, which is a client management system for creatives. They have...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the show, we have Becca and Jake Berg of Dubsado. We are super excited to have them on. They are a husband and wife team that are the brains, power, and geniuses behind Dubsado, which is a client management system for creatives. They have built one amazing and beautiful platform for all of those things that you have 75 different logins for, including your contracts, how you get paid, and how you respond back to clients after they book with you. All of those pieces are neatly tied up in one amazing software bow.
In today’s episode, you are going to get a peak behind the curtain. We are walking you through the steps they took to build the software company, from idea to launch, and doing all of this amongst building a family and having full-time jobs. They share with us how they have been able to grow and scale their business, and how Becca had to make sure it was her own. They also dive into exactly how they were able to make this awesome idea into an actual product, get it launched, and then how they have been able to scale and grow their team. We are even talking about some inside scoops on how to better perfect your client based business and get paid faster. So we are excited for you to jump in, listen, and learn!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the show, we have Becca and Jake Berg of Dubsado. We are super excited to have them on. They are a husband and wife team that are the brains, power, and geniuses behind Dubsado, which is a client management system for creatives. They have built one amazing and beautiful platform for all of those things that you have 75 different logins for, including your contracts, how you get paid, and how you respond back to clients after they book with you. All of those pieces are neatly tied up in one amazing software bow.</p><p>In today’s episode, you are going to get a peak behind the curtain. We are walking you through the steps they took to build the software company, from idea to launch, and doing all of this amongst building a family and having full-time jobs. They share with us how they have been able to grow and scale their business, and how Becca had to make sure it was her own. They also dive into exactly how they were able to make this awesome idea into an actual product, get it launched, and then how they have been able to scale and grow their team. We are even talking about some inside scoops on how to better perfect your client based business and get paid faster. So we are excited for you to jump in, listen, and learn!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2776</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1fec19d12dfb67cb55eda2bade7e4137]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7219303416.mp3?updated=1662580002" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>066: How to Pivot to Your Passion</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-pivot-to-your-passion-and-why-you-should-focus-on-it</link>
      <description>Today, we are chatting about the good old pivot; the pivoting to your passion, the figuring out what the heck you can work on right now to start getting your feet wet. It is all about testing the waters of this whole creative biz ownership thing, making some actual money, and then transitioning to what is the fire in your soul. We want you to dive into where you are getting paid to do something that you are good at, even if that thing right now is not what your business is going to be in the next year or two.
So in this episode, we are going to dive into starting with your MVP and what that means, and then explain to you kind of how we kept that top of mind in our own creative business journeys. Now, we are not talking about the most valuable player on your baseball team. No, it is your most viable product. What is the thing that you can sell today without having to learn a new skill, without having to go to school or take a class? What can you bring to market right away that you can sell and make money off of? This is exactly the thing that people need to be focusing on instead of other fluff.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 31 May 2017 18:30:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Pivot to Your Passion</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>66</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, we are chatting about the good old pivot; the pivoting to your passion, the figuring out what the heck you can work on right now to start getting your feet wet. It is all about testing the waters of this whole creative biz ownership thing,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we are chatting about the good old pivot; the pivoting to your passion, the figuring out what the heck you can work on right now to start getting your feet wet. It is all about testing the waters of this whole creative biz ownership thing, making some actual money, and then transitioning to what is the fire in your soul. We want you to dive into where you are getting paid to do something that you are good at, even if that thing right now is not what your business is going to be in the next year or two.
So in this episode, we are going to dive into starting with your MVP and what that means, and then explain to you kind of how we kept that top of mind in our own creative business journeys. Now, we are not talking about the most valuable player on your baseball team. No, it is your most viable product. What is the thing that you can sell today without having to learn a new skill, without having to go to school or take a class? What can you bring to market right away that you can sell and make money off of? This is exactly the thing that people need to be focusing on instead of other fluff.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we are chatting about the good old pivot; the pivoting to your passion, the figuring out what the heck you can work on right now to start getting your feet wet. It is all about testing the waters of this whole creative biz ownership thing, making some actual money, and then transitioning to what is the fire in your soul. We want you to dive into where you are getting paid to do something that you are good at, even if that thing right now is not what your business is going to be in the next year or two.</p><p>So in this episode, we are going to dive into starting with your MVP and what that means, and then explain to you kind of how we kept that top of mind in our own creative business journeys. Now, we are not talking about the most valuable player on your baseball team. No, it is your most viable product. What is the thing that you can sell today without having to learn a new skill, without having to go to school or take a class? What can you bring to market right away that you can sell and make money off of? This is exactly the thing that people need to be focusing on instead of other fluff.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2673</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a850fd274840fd337a75e4acac0a5de9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7229465065.mp3?updated=1662579962" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>065: How to Be Your Own CFO with Amy Northard the Accountant for Creatives</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-be-your-own-cfo</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we have Amy Northard CPA, accountant for the creatives. Amy has been a friend of ours for what feels like centuries at this point, and we have known her longer than we have known each other. She is awesome and makes everything sound so simple that you think maybe you could do it yourself, even though you can’t. Amy is so knowledgeable about all things taxes, bookkeeping, making things stress free, and making things easy to understand.
You are going to learn a lot in today’s episode like what type of business should you be and how to even form it. She also shares her favorite apps, tools, and softwares to keep track of all your numbers. We go over the questions you should ask before you are ready to hire a CPA, things that you guys are forgetting to deduct, and stuff that you actually cannot deduct, that you might have thought were deductible. We also talk about the icky quarterly taxes and how to make that process super simple for you moving forward so that you are not scared and stressed out come tax season. So just relax, settle in, and give this one a listen.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 29 May 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Be Your Own CFO with Amy Northard the Accountant for Creatives</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>65</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we have Amy Northard CPA, accountant for the creatives. Amy has been a friend of ours for what feels like centuries at this point, and we have known her longer than we have known each other. She is awesome and makes everything...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we have Amy Northard CPA, accountant for the creatives. Amy has been a friend of ours for what feels like centuries at this point, and we have known her longer than we have known each other. She is awesome and makes everything sound so simple that you think maybe you could do it yourself, even though you can’t. Amy is so knowledgeable about all things taxes, bookkeeping, making things stress free, and making things easy to understand.
You are going to learn a lot in today’s episode like what type of business should you be and how to even form it. She also shares her favorite apps, tools, and softwares to keep track of all your numbers. We go over the questions you should ask before you are ready to hire a CPA, things that you guys are forgetting to deduct, and stuff that you actually cannot deduct, that you might have thought were deductible. We also talk about the icky quarterly taxes and how to make that process super simple for you moving forward so that you are not scared and stressed out come tax season. So just relax, settle in, and give this one a listen.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we have Amy Northard CPA, accountant for the creatives. Amy has been a friend of ours for what feels like centuries at this point, and we have known her longer than we have known each other. She is awesome and makes everything sound so simple that you think maybe you could do it yourself, even though you can’t. Amy is so knowledgeable about all things taxes, bookkeeping, making things stress free, and making things easy to understand.</p><p>You are going to learn a lot in today’s episode like what type of business should you be and how to even form it. She also shares her favorite apps, tools, and softwares to keep track of all your numbers. We go over the questions you should ask before you are ready to hire a CPA, things that you guys are forgetting to deduct, and stuff that you actually cannot deduct, that you might have thought were deductible. We also talk about the icky quarterly taxes and how to make that process super simple for you moving forward so that you are not scared and stressed out come tax season. So just relax, settle in, and give this one a listen.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2080</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[33c06b499af79e275347b29389b89a90]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4261741753.mp3?updated=1662579874" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>064: Tactical Throwbacks Get More Clients and Get Paid Faster with Abagail Pumphrey</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/tactical-throwbacks-get-more-clients-and-get-paid-faster</link>
      <description>All right guys, we are back for another tactical throwback. Today, we are taking it back and now sitting down to interview Abagail about all of the lessons she learned, the mistakes she made, and how the heck she got clients when she was doing one-on-one client work for branding, design, and website business building. So today we are going to give the quick version of what Abbie did before because not everyone knows that she has not been doing Think Creative Collective forever. We will learn a bit more about what she used to do, and dive into the tactics she used to grow her business.
Prior to TCC, Abagail worked in the corporate design world. After completing her fine arts degree, she went straight out of the gate and started working for big and small businesses alike. She worked with business of all shapes and sizes, anywhere from billion dollar, to nonprofit, to education business. She even worked for a startup and then eventually was laid off, which is really where she faced her crossroads and had to make a decision whether to start her own business or simply look for another job. Abbie was definitely ready for a challenge and decided to pursue her dream of having her own business. So get ready, get your socks on, it’s going to be a good one.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 26 May 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Tactical Throwbacks Get More Clients and Get Paid Faster with Abagail Pumphrey</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>64</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>All right guys, we are back for another tactical throwback. Today, we are taking it back and now sitting down to interview Abagail about all of the lessons she learned, the mistakes she made, and how the heck she got clients when she was doing...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>All right guys, we are back for another tactical throwback. Today, we are taking it back and now sitting down to interview Abagail about all of the lessons she learned, the mistakes she made, and how the heck she got clients when she was doing one-on-one client work for branding, design, and website business building. So today we are going to give the quick version of what Abbie did before because not everyone knows that she has not been doing Think Creative Collective forever. We will learn a bit more about what she used to do, and dive into the tactics she used to grow her business.
Prior to TCC, Abagail worked in the corporate design world. After completing her fine arts degree, she went straight out of the gate and started working for big and small businesses alike. She worked with business of all shapes and sizes, anywhere from billion dollar, to nonprofit, to education business. She even worked for a startup and then eventually was laid off, which is really where she faced her crossroads and had to make a decision whether to start her own business or simply look for another job. Abbie was definitely ready for a challenge and decided to pursue her dream of having her own business. So get ready, get your socks on, it’s going to be a good one.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>All right guys, we are back for another tactical throwback. Today, we are taking it back and now sitting down to interview Abagail about all of the lessons she learned, the mistakes she made, and how the heck she got clients when she was doing one-on-one client work for branding, design, and website business building. So today we are going to give the quick version of what Abbie did before because not everyone knows that she has not been doing Think Creative Collective forever. We will learn a bit more about what she used to do, and dive into the tactics she used to grow her business.</p><p>Prior to TCC, Abagail worked in the corporate design world. After completing her fine arts degree, she went straight out of the gate and started working for big and small businesses alike. She worked with business of all shapes and sizes, anywhere from billion dollar, to nonprofit, to education business. She even worked for a startup and then eventually was laid off, which is really where she faced her crossroads and had to make a decision whether to start her own business or simply look for another job. Abbie was definitely ready for a challenge and decided to pursue her dream of having her own business. So get ready, get your socks on, it’s going to be a good one.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2678</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[fa533a493cc1af480e8f37ccd2daf845]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8944294832.mp3?updated=1662579845" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>063: How to Know if You Have a Great Business Idea, The Pros + Cons of a Membership Site and Best Customer Service Practices with Steph Crowder of Fizzle</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-know-if-you-have-a-great-business-idea-the-pros-cons-of-a-membership-site-and-best-customer-service-practices</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we have our good friend Steph Crowder from Courage and Clarity Podcast and Fizzle. If you have not yet seen Fizzle and its amazing membership platform full of incredible courses for small business owners, you guys should definitely check it out. Steph is one of our podcasting buddy friends. We meet with Steph and a couple of other ladies, twice a month and chat all things podcasting, growth tactics, marketing, guest ideas, and all that good stuff in our podcasting mastermind. She is an incredible human being, and we love her to pieces. Steph is super knowledgeable, super kind, and we can’t wait for you to learn from her today.
Inside this episode, Steph is giving you a step by step of all the things you need to do to interview potential customers in order to validate your kick ass business idea. We are also getting a behind the scenes look of a thriving membership site, and Steph is talking all about creating amazing customer service in your business and the step-by-step creation process of creating courses inside of Fizzle. It’s a great episode, we get really in depth especially on that membership piece and the business idea piece, so we are really excited for you to dive in and take away some awesome knowledge bombs from Steph.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 May 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Know if You Have a Great Business Idea, The Pros + Cons of a Membership Site and Best Customer Service Practices with Steph Crowder of Fizzle</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>63</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we have our good friend Steph Crowder from Courage and Clarity Podcast and Fizzle. If you have not yet seen Fizzle and its amazing membership platform full of incredible courses for small business owners, you guys should...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we have our good friend Steph Crowder from Courage and Clarity Podcast and Fizzle. If you have not yet seen Fizzle and its amazing membership platform full of incredible courses for small business owners, you guys should definitely check it out. Steph is one of our podcasting buddy friends. We meet with Steph and a couple of other ladies, twice a month and chat all things podcasting, growth tactics, marketing, guest ideas, and all that good stuff in our podcasting mastermind. She is an incredible human being, and we love her to pieces. Steph is super knowledgeable, super kind, and we can’t wait for you to learn from her today.
Inside this episode, Steph is giving you a step by step of all the things you need to do to interview potential customers in order to validate your kick ass business idea. We are also getting a behind the scenes look of a thriving membership site, and Steph is talking all about creating amazing customer service in your business and the step-by-step creation process of creating courses inside of Fizzle. It’s a great episode, we get really in depth especially on that membership piece and the business idea piece, so we are really excited for you to dive in and take away some awesome knowledge bombs from Steph.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we have our good friend Steph Crowder from Courage and Clarity Podcast and Fizzle. If you have not yet seen Fizzle and its amazing membership platform full of incredible courses for small business owners, you guys should definitely check it out. Steph is one of our podcasting buddy friends. We meet with Steph and a couple of other ladies, twice a month and chat all things podcasting, growth tactics, marketing, guest ideas, and all that good stuff in our podcasting mastermind. She is an incredible human being, and we love her to pieces. Steph is super knowledgeable, super kind, and we can’t wait for you to learn from her today.</p><p>Inside this episode, Steph is giving you a step by step of all the things you need to do to interview potential customers in order to validate your kick ass business idea. We are also getting a behind the scenes look of a thriving membership site, and Steph is talking all about creating amazing customer service in your business and the step-by-step creation process of creating courses inside of Fizzle. It’s a great episode, we get really in depth especially on that membership piece and the business idea piece, so we are really excited for you to dive in and take away some awesome knowledge bombs from Steph.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3000</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d02d413b66856ab3e5abe0059d1b06e9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8272533268.mp3?updated=1662579801" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>062: Tactical Throwbacks Growing a 5-Figure Photography Business with Emylee Williams</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/actical-throwbacks-growing-a-5-figure-photography-business</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we are taking you all back to the days before TCC even existed. It is kind of crazy but believe it or not, we both used to run different businesses. Emylee used to be a photographer and she was pretty darn good at it and so we are doing a little interview style throwback with her today. She left a five figure photography business to form TCC and before that, Emylee graduated with a degree in fine art photography, minors in a whole bunch of other areas and kind of went on her own, always carrying that entrepreneurial spirit.
Emylee started her entrepreneurial journey with her very own cupcake business, which turned out to be a big, fat failure. We are going to talk about what it was like to run a photography business, what it was like to get clients, how to package, how to price, how to just get your business up and running, the gear she used, and so much more.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 22 May 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Tactical Throwbacks Growing a 5-Figure Photography Business with Emylee Williams</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>62</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we are taking you all back to the days before TCC even existed. It is kind of crazy but believe it or not, we both used to run different businesses. Emylee used to be a photographer and she was pretty darn good at it and so we...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we are taking you all back to the days before TCC even existed. It is kind of crazy but believe it or not, we both used to run different businesses. Emylee used to be a photographer and she was pretty darn good at it and so we are doing a little interview style throwback with her today. She left a five figure photography business to form TCC and before that, Emylee graduated with a degree in fine art photography, minors in a whole bunch of other areas and kind of went on her own, always carrying that entrepreneurial spirit.
Emylee started her entrepreneurial journey with her very own cupcake business, which turned out to be a big, fat failure. We are going to talk about what it was like to run a photography business, what it was like to get clients, how to package, how to price, how to just get your business up and running, the gear she used, and so much more.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we are taking you all back to the days before TCC even existed. It is kind of crazy but believe it or not, we both used to run different businesses. Emylee used to be a photographer and she was pretty darn good at it and so we are doing a little interview style throwback with her today. She left a five figure photography business to form TCC and before that, Emylee graduated with a degree in fine art photography, minors in a whole bunch of other areas and kind of went on her own, always carrying that entrepreneurial spirit.</p><p>Emylee started her entrepreneurial journey with her very own cupcake business, which turned out to be a big, fat failure. We are going to talk about what it was like to run a photography business, what it was like to get clients, how to package, how to price, how to just get your business up and running, the gear she used, and so much more.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2636</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[fd5050edc19ef98c489d42d99d4a42d1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5966496345.mp3?updated=1662579775" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>061: How to Create a 1:1 Experience When You Sell Physical Products Online with Jordan Ellis of Jordandene</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-create-a-one-on-one-experience-when-you-sell-physical-products-online</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we have Jordan Ellis of Jordandené. Oh my gosh, this girl! She is so awesome. We have known Jordan for what feels like forever, but really it has only been two years. She was the first student ever for both of us, and since then, Jordan has gone on to grow a giant geek-chic business where she sells goods of all different types. She has shirts and aprons and the cutest little kids clothes ever and it just warms our hearts to see how much she has been able to accomplish in just two years, and she shares so much knowledge with us today, all about growing a product-based business online.
She talks to us about the changes that her business has made since she first started on Etsy way back in the day, how she is now on Squarespace and how that works for her. She also shares the mission behind her business, how she creates an experience for her customers, a unique way for her to have scarcity in a product-based business, how blogging works for her, and all about hiring your first employee. She goes deep and gives some tips for those who are just getting started in the product world as well as those who are wanting to up-level what they already have.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 19 May 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Create a 1:1 Experience When You Sell Physical Products Online with Jordan Ellis of Jordandene</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>61</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we have Jordan Ellis of Jordandené. Oh my gosh, this girl! She is so awesome. We have known Jordan for what feels like forever, but really it has only been two years. She was the first student ever for both of us, and since...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we have Jordan Ellis of Jordandené. Oh my gosh, this girl! She is so awesome. We have known Jordan for what feels like forever, but really it has only been two years. She was the first student ever for both of us, and since then, Jordan has gone on to grow a giant geek-chic business where she sells goods of all different types. She has shirts and aprons and the cutest little kids clothes ever and it just warms our hearts to see how much she has been able to accomplish in just two years, and she shares so much knowledge with us today, all about growing a product-based business online.
She talks to us about the changes that her business has made since she first started on Etsy way back in the day, how she is now on Squarespace and how that works for her. She also shares the mission behind her business, how she creates an experience for her customers, a unique way for her to have scarcity in a product-based business, how blogging works for her, and all about hiring your first employee. She goes deep and gives some tips for those who are just getting started in the product world as well as those who are wanting to up-level what they already have.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we have Jordan Ellis of Jordandené. Oh my gosh, this girl! She is so awesome. We have known Jordan for what feels like forever, but really it has only been two years. She was the first student ever for both of us, and since then, Jordan has gone on to grow a giant geek-chic business where she sells goods of all different types. She has shirts and aprons and the cutest little kids clothes ever and it just warms our hearts to see how much she has been able to accomplish in just two years, and she shares so much knowledge with us today, all about growing a product-based business online.</p><p>She talks to us about the changes that her business has made since she first started on Etsy way back in the day, how she is now on Squarespace and how that works for her. She also shares the mission behind her business, how she creates an experience for her customers, a unique way for her to have scarcity in a product-based business, how blogging works for her, and all about hiring your first employee. She goes deep and gives some tips for those who are just getting started in the product world as well as those who are wanting to up-level what they already have.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2938</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dcfef0961ba587f3eef194c16bca42df]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1759730007.mp3?updated=1662579736" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>060: Our Marketing Game Plan for Our First 100k Downloads on the Strategy Hour Podcast</title>
      <link>https://strategyhour.libsyn.com/ep-060-our-marketing-game-plan-for-our-first-100k-downloads-on-the-strategy-hour-podcast</link>
      <description>Hello little business babes! We are so excited to chat to you about reaching our first 100K downloads on the podcast in just four short months. We absolutely cannot believe how great you guys have been, and we are so thankful for the amazing support that we have been given. Each and every download, share, and review makes a huge difference in the impact that we are able to have on all of you creative biz bosses out there.
For today’s episode, we are going to be talking about how we got to 100,000 downloads, the effects that having a podcast has had on our business, our marketing game plan, and some strategies that we think have helped and made a difference. Keep in mind, there is one major caveat to all of what we are going to be talking about today; With podcasting, there really is no one-size-fits-all formula. It is still such a mysterious medium and people are still trying to understand how it works and how to interact with it, which makes it really hard to measure. So please keep that in mind as we are sharing some of this stuff today, and find out what you can take and apply to your own podcast.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 May 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Our Marketing Game Plan for Our First 100k Downloads on the Strategy Hour Podcast</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>60</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Hello little business babes! We are so excited to chat to you about reaching our first 100K downloads on the podcast in just four short months. We absolutely cannot believe how great you guys have been, and we are so thankful for the amazing support...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hello little business babes! We are so excited to chat to you about reaching our first 100K downloads on the podcast in just four short months. We absolutely cannot believe how great you guys have been, and we are so thankful for the amazing support that we have been given. Each and every download, share, and review makes a huge difference in the impact that we are able to have on all of you creative biz bosses out there.
For today’s episode, we are going to be talking about how we got to 100,000 downloads, the effects that having a podcast has had on our business, our marketing game plan, and some strategies that we think have helped and made a difference. Keep in mind, there is one major caveat to all of what we are going to be talking about today; With podcasting, there really is no one-size-fits-all formula. It is still such a mysterious medium and people are still trying to understand how it works and how to interact with it, which makes it really hard to measure. So please keep that in mind as we are sharing some of this stuff today, and find out what you can take and apply to your own podcast.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hello little business babes! We are so excited to chat to you about reaching our first 100K downloads on the podcast in just four short months. We absolutely cannot believe how great you guys have been, and we are so thankful for the amazing support that we have been given. Each and every download, share, and review makes a huge difference in the impact that we are able to have on all of you creative biz bosses out there.</p><p>For today’s episode, we are going to be talking about how we got to 100,000 downloads, the effects that having a podcast has had on our business, our marketing game plan, and some strategies that we think have helped and made a difference. Keep in mind, there is one major caveat to all of what we are going to be talking about today; With podcasting, there really is no one-size-fits-all formula. It is still such a mysterious medium and people are still trying to understand how it works and how to interact with it, which makes it really hard to measure. So please keep that in mind as we are sharing some of this stuff today, and find out what you can take and apply to your own podcast.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2359</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f5a98614cd1e808b119091dc15eac14e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1031816095.mp3?updated=1662579741" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>059: Killin' It on Etsy with Kelly Parker Smith of Hello World Paper Co.</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/killin-it-on-etsy</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we have Kelly Parker Smith of Hello World Paper Co. For those of you who don’t know, Kelly is a retired third grade teacher who started an Etsy shop and has since started booming ever since. She has over $400,000 in sales on Etsy and even started her own podcast where she talks all about what it’s like to be an Etsy shop owner and run a product-based business. Kelly has been on Etsy for almost a decade, so she has the ins and outs for why the platform is such a total rock star for product-based businesses.
On today’s episode, Kelly shares with us why she chose Etsy to sell on in the first place and how to build an audience when you are first getting started. She even talks about some pros and cons of Etsy and how some of those cons can actually work in your favor. Kelly lets you know how to stand out in the sea of many Etsy shops and some strategies to communicate with your customers outside of Etsy. She also gives some secret tips and tricks to maximize your presence, improve your SEO on Etsy, and get found quicker. So get out your notebook, especially if you are considering hopping over on Etsy because there is a lot of good stuff in this episode.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 15 May 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Killin' It on Etsy with Kelly Parker Smith of Hello World Paper Co.</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>59</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we have Kelly Parker Smith of Hello World Paper Co. For those of you who don’t know, Kelly is a retired third grade teacher who started an Etsy shop and has since started booming ever since. She has over $400,000 in sales on...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we have Kelly Parker Smith of Hello World Paper Co. For those of you who don’t know, Kelly is a retired third grade teacher who started an Etsy shop and has since started booming ever since. She has over $400,000 in sales on Etsy and even started her own podcast where she talks all about what it’s like to be an Etsy shop owner and run a product-based business. Kelly has been on Etsy for almost a decade, so she has the ins and outs for why the platform is such a total rock star for product-based businesses.
On today’s episode, Kelly shares with us why she chose Etsy to sell on in the first place and how to build an audience when you are first getting started. She even talks about some pros and cons of Etsy and how some of those cons can actually work in your favor. Kelly lets you know how to stand out in the sea of many Etsy shops and some strategies to communicate with your customers outside of Etsy. She also gives some secret tips and tricks to maximize your presence, improve your SEO on Etsy, and get found quicker. So get out your notebook, especially if you are considering hopping over on Etsy because there is a lot of good stuff in this episode.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we have Kelly Parker Smith of Hello World Paper Co. For those of you who don’t know, Kelly is a retired third grade teacher who started an Etsy shop and has since started booming ever since. She has over $400,000 in sales on Etsy and even started her own podcast where she talks all about what it’s like to be an Etsy shop owner and run a product-based business. Kelly has been on Etsy for almost a decade, so she has the ins and outs for why the platform is such a total rock star for product-based businesses.</p><p>On today’s episode, Kelly shares with us why she chose Etsy to sell on in the first place and how to build an audience when you are first getting started. She even talks about some pros and cons of Etsy and how some of those cons can actually work in your favor. Kelly lets you know how to stand out in the sea of many Etsy shops and some strategies to communicate with your customers outside of Etsy. She also gives some secret tips and tricks to maximize your presence, improve your SEO on Etsy, and get found quicker. So get out your notebook, especially if you are considering hopping over on Etsy because there is a lot of good stuff in this episode.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2994</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[871f52a65ec77fd3713b245700959180]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3317804062.mp3?updated=1662580842" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>058: When Planning is More Fun Than Doing (and what to do about it)</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/when-planning-is-more-fun-than-doing-and-what-to-do-about-it</link>
      <description>For today’s episode, we are going to have some therapy today. We are going to be real today. So kick up your feet, lay down, get a glass of wine, get some coffee, sit on the sofa, whatever it is that you want to do because today we are talking about that feeling of intense overwhelm. You know, that anxious feeling of looking at what we have to do and avoiding it with all our might. We dive into the different ways that we like to avoid things, like being afraid of the big fat failure, or being afraid of success. You can even go as far as saying that planning is more fun than actually doing.
We have been hearing from a lot of you lately that this is a really big piece in why you just cannot seem to move forward in your business. So we thought we would give our two cents on the matter and let you know how we used to think about these exact same things in our business, plus some of the ways that we avoid these feelings and what we do differently today. Perhaps you just like to get organized as a way of covering up the fact that you are not getting any work done. Often times we tend to love the process of getting everything in a row more than actually doing the work itself. If that sounds like you, then this episode is a must-listen. So sit back, and find out exactly how to get back on the productive track.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 12 May 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>When Planning is More Fun Than Doing (and what to do about it)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>58</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>For today’s episode, we are going to have some therapy today. We are going to be real today. So kick up your feet, lay down, get a glass of wine, get some coffee, sit on the sofa, whatever it is that you want to do because today we are talking about...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>For today’s episode, we are going to have some therapy today. We are going to be real today. So kick up your feet, lay down, get a glass of wine, get some coffee, sit on the sofa, whatever it is that you want to do because today we are talking about that feeling of intense overwhelm. You know, that anxious feeling of looking at what we have to do and avoiding it with all our might. We dive into the different ways that we like to avoid things, like being afraid of the big fat failure, or being afraid of success. You can even go as far as saying that planning is more fun than actually doing.
We have been hearing from a lot of you lately that this is a really big piece in why you just cannot seem to move forward in your business. So we thought we would give our two cents on the matter and let you know how we used to think about these exact same things in our business, plus some of the ways that we avoid these feelings and what we do differently today. Perhaps you just like to get organized as a way of covering up the fact that you are not getting any work done. Often times we tend to love the process of getting everything in a row more than actually doing the work itself. If that sounds like you, then this episode is a must-listen. So sit back, and find out exactly how to get back on the productive track.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For today’s episode, we are going to have some therapy today. We are going to be real today. So kick up your feet, lay down, get a glass of wine, get some coffee, sit on the sofa, whatever it is that you want to do because today we are talking about that feeling of intense overwhelm. You know, that anxious feeling of looking at what we have to do and avoiding it with all our might. We dive into the different ways that we like to avoid things, like being afraid of the big fat failure, or being afraid of success. You can even go as far as saying that planning is more fun than actually doing.</p><p>We have been hearing from a lot of you lately that this is a really big piece in why you just cannot seem to move forward in your business. So we thought we would give our two cents on the matter and let you know how we used to think about these exact same things in our business, plus some of the ways that we avoid these feelings and what we do differently today. Perhaps you just like to get organized as a way of covering up the fact that you are not getting any work done. Often times we tend to love the process of getting everything in a row more than actually doing the work itself. If that sounds like you, then this episode is a must-listen. So sit back, and find out exactly how to get back on the productive track.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2570</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[97cd6487228a47bdec872fcb65d086e0]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4313679512.mp3?updated=1662580818" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>057: Selling on Instagram, Self Publishing a Book and Finding Your Creative Identity with Elise Cripe of Get to Work Book</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/selling-on-instagram-self-publishing-a-book-and-finding-your-creative-identity</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we are super excited to have Elise Cripe of Get to Work Book. For those of you who do not know, Elise lives with her husband and her two young daughters in San Diego California and not only has she launched the Get to Work Book daily planner, but she has been online since 2005 and she has done a lot! Elise has been a blogger, she has shared DIY projects, and she is quite the artist.
In this episode, we dive into more on the Get to Work Book and actual, her physical book that she created from an Instagram challenge. She is going to tell you exactly how she made that happen and cover some cool Instagram strategies, where she finds a lot of her audience for Get to Work Book, and how she built her product-based business from Instagram, why she stopped blogging, and ideas on ya’ll getting creative again. We go over finding your creative identity and how important that is for us to stay inspired and motivated every day. We can’t wait for you to dive in and get re-inspired today, so go ahead and give this one a listen.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 May 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Selling on Instagram, Self Publishing a Book and Finding Your Creative Identity with Elise Cripe of Get to Work Book</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>57</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we are super excited to have Elise Cripe of Get to Work Book. For those of you who do not know, Elise lives with her husband and her two young daughters in San Diego California and not only has she launched the Get to Work Book...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we are super excited to have Elise Cripe of Get to Work Book. For those of you who do not know, Elise lives with her husband and her two young daughters in San Diego California and not only has she launched the Get to Work Book daily planner, but she has been online since 2005 and she has done a lot! Elise has been a blogger, she has shared DIY projects, and she is quite the artist.
In this episode, we dive into more on the Get to Work Book and actual, her physical book that she created from an Instagram challenge. She is going to tell you exactly how she made that happen and cover some cool Instagram strategies, where she finds a lot of her audience for Get to Work Book, and how she built her product-based business from Instagram, why she stopped blogging, and ideas on ya’ll getting creative again. We go over finding your creative identity and how important that is for us to stay inspired and motivated every day. We can’t wait for you to dive in and get re-inspired today, so go ahead and give this one a listen.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we are super excited to have Elise Cripe of Get to Work Book. For those of you who do not know, Elise lives with her husband and her two young daughters in San Diego California and not only has she launched the Get to Work Book daily planner, but she has been online since 2005 and she has done a lot! Elise has been a blogger, she has shared DIY projects, and she is quite the artist.</p><p>In this episode, we dive into more on the Get to Work Book and actual, her physical book that she created from an Instagram challenge. She is going to tell you exactly how she made that happen and cover some cool Instagram strategies, where she finds a lot of her audience for Get to Work Book, and how she built her product-based business from Instagram, why she stopped blogging, and ideas on ya’ll getting creative again. We go over finding your creative identity and how important that is for us to stay inspired and motivated every day. We can’t wait for you to dive in and get re-inspired today, so go ahead and give this one a listen.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2994</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2301e15775339800266bf4022090193d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6748545723.mp3?updated=1662580782" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>056: Inside our $37k Launch: The Good, The Bad, and The Ugly</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/inside-our-37k-launch-the-good-the-bad-and-the-ugly</link>
      <description>Inside today’s episode, we are going to be talking all about launching and specifically, a long tweet just had where we made $37,000 in a matter of a week. We’re going to talk to you all about what changed, what we did differently, some systems we added on to try our new take on Facebook ads, and exactly how we got the results we did. We’re even going to dive into some data and what worked and what didn’t.
We have been waiting to do this episode because we wanted to come back with all the final results and it would be helpful for you guys to know perhaps how we launched before so you can really see the value of the changes that we have made and how we approached it differently this time around. Really, it comes down to two things that we changed, so stay tuned as we dive into the details in this episode.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 08 May 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Inside our $37k Launch: The Good, The Bad, and The Ugly</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>56</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Inside today’s episode, we are going to be talking all about launching and specifically, a long tweet just had where we made $37,000 in a matter of a week. We’re going to talk to you all about what changed, what we did differently, some systems we...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Inside today’s episode, we are going to be talking all about launching and specifically, a long tweet just had where we made $37,000 in a matter of a week. We’re going to talk to you all about what changed, what we did differently, some systems we added on to try our new take on Facebook ads, and exactly how we got the results we did. We’re even going to dive into some data and what worked and what didn’t.
We have been waiting to do this episode because we wanted to come back with all the final results and it would be helpful for you guys to know perhaps how we launched before so you can really see the value of the changes that we have made and how we approached it differently this time around. Really, it comes down to two things that we changed, so stay tuned as we dive into the details in this episode.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Inside today’s episode, we are going to be talking all about launching and specifically, a long tweet just had where we made $37,000 in a matter of a week. We’re going to talk to you all about what changed, what we did differently, some systems we added on to try our new take on Facebook ads, and exactly how we got the results we did. We’re even going to dive into some data and what worked and what didn’t.</p><p>We have been waiting to do this episode because we wanted to come back with all the final results and it would be helpful for you guys to know perhaps how we launched before so you can really see the value of the changes that we have made and how we approached it differently this time around. Really, it comes down to two things that we changed, so stay tuned as we dive into the details in this episode.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2603</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[383f11f4d03de86da17a8f9cdc2387a7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8134244205.mp3?updated=1662580689" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>055: Delegation, Growth, and the Million Dollar Mindset with Stacy Tuschl</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/delegation-growth-and-the-million-dollar-mindset</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we have Stacy Tuschl, who is a high-performance business coach, mentor, bestselling author, speaker, and creator of She’s Building Her Empire Podcast and Community. Stacy helps purpose-driven women entrepreneurs and business owners break through their challenges and operate at their highest potential. She is highly passionate and she loves helping women unapologetically be themselves and create a legacy they are proud of.
Stacy is pretty awesome, and on the podcast she is going to talk about her journey of building a business to over seven freaking figures, all from her parents’ backward. Today, you are hearing about that journey and how she finally felt like she needed to pour her energy somewhere else and build a personal brand on top of that seven-figure business. There is definitely a lot you are going to learn today! We are talking about being a mompreneur, juggling all the things in your life, self-doubt, confidence in your business, and so much more. So dive in, get started, and give this one a listen.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 05 May 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title> Delegation, Growth, and the Million Dollar Mindset with Stacy Tuschl</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>55</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we have Stacy Tuschl, who is a high-performance business coach, mentor, bestselling author, speaker, and creator of She’s Building Her Empire Podcast and Community. Stacy helps purpose-driven women entrepreneurs and business...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we have Stacy Tuschl, who is a high-performance business coach, mentor, bestselling author, speaker, and creator of She’s Building Her Empire Podcast and Community. Stacy helps purpose-driven women entrepreneurs and business owners break through their challenges and operate at their highest potential. She is highly passionate and she loves helping women unapologetically be themselves and create a legacy they are proud of.
Stacy is pretty awesome, and on the podcast she is going to talk about her journey of building a business to over seven freaking figures, all from her parents’ backward. Today, you are hearing about that journey and how she finally felt like she needed to pour her energy somewhere else and build a personal brand on top of that seven-figure business. There is definitely a lot you are going to learn today! We are talking about being a mompreneur, juggling all the things in your life, self-doubt, confidence in your business, and so much more. So dive in, get started, and give this one a listen.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we have Stacy Tuschl, who is a high-performance business coach, mentor, bestselling author, speaker, and creator of She’s Building Her Empire Podcast and Community. Stacy helps purpose-driven women entrepreneurs and business owners break through their challenges and operate at their highest potential. She is highly passionate and she loves helping women unapologetically be themselves and create a legacy they are proud of.</p><p>Stacy is pretty awesome, and on the podcast she is going to talk about her journey of building a business to over seven freaking figures, all from her parents’ backward. Today, you are hearing about that journey and how she finally felt like she needed to pour her energy somewhere else and build a personal brand on top of that seven-figure business. There is definitely a lot you are going to learn today! We are talking about being a mompreneur, juggling all the things in your life, self-doubt, confidence in your business, and so much more. So dive in, get started, and give this one a listen.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2590</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7fb1656233cb62dbc75da184b473f1d7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6613708114.mp3?updated=1662580604" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>054: Why We Stopped Blogging...Again</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-we-stopped-blogging-again</link>
      <description>Blogging may be one of the things on the top of the list in our business. The blog was part of the early stages of our business and exited pre-TCC. We first started blogging before we were even in business together, when it was still just a passion project of Abby’s to educate small business owners on growth strategies. She was blogging five days a week, and literally never skipped a beat. After we met, we then decided to see if we wanted to work together on a longer-term basis. We decided that Emylee would guest blog for what is now the TCC blog, to essentially share the platform, and continued to put out content five days a week.
Together we would brainstorm ideas for the blog, we would browse Pinterest, we would ask our audience, and write about exactly what we had just learned the week before. It definitely was not any of this big picture concept stuff yet because we just weren’t in that place in our business at the time. We kept blogging five days a week for almost a full year, at which point we had significantly grown our website traffic, but we were feeling burnt out. In this episode, we walk through exactly how our blog has transitioned into what it is today and the strategies we used along the way to get there. So tune in to hear all about our ever evolving blogging journey!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 May 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why We Stopped Blogging...Again</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>54</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Blogging may be one of the things on the top of the list in our business. The blog was part of the early stages of our business and exited pre-TCC. We first started blogging before we were even in business together, when it was still just a passion...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Blogging may be one of the things on the top of the list in our business. The blog was part of the early stages of our business and exited pre-TCC. We first started blogging before we were even in business together, when it was still just a passion project of Abby’s to educate small business owners on growth strategies. She was blogging five days a week, and literally never skipped a beat. After we met, we then decided to see if we wanted to work together on a longer-term basis. We decided that Emylee would guest blog for what is now the TCC blog, to essentially share the platform, and continued to put out content five days a week.
Together we would brainstorm ideas for the blog, we would browse Pinterest, we would ask our audience, and write about exactly what we had just learned the week before. It definitely was not any of this big picture concept stuff yet because we just weren’t in that place in our business at the time. We kept blogging five days a week for almost a full year, at which point we had significantly grown our website traffic, but we were feeling burnt out. In this episode, we walk through exactly how our blog has transitioned into what it is today and the strategies we used along the way to get there. So tune in to hear all about our ever evolving blogging journey!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Blogging may be one of the things on the top of the list in our business. The blog was part of the early stages of our business and exited pre-TCC. We first started blogging before we were even in business together, when it was still just a passion project of Abby’s to educate small business owners on growth strategies. She was blogging five days a week, and literally never skipped a beat. After we met, we then decided to see if we wanted to work together on a longer-term basis. We decided that Emylee would guest blog for what is now the TCC blog, to essentially share the platform, and continued to put out content five days a week.</p><p>Together we would brainstorm ideas for the blog, we would browse Pinterest, we would ask our audience, and write about exactly what we had just learned the week before. It definitely was not any of this big picture concept stuff yet because we just weren’t in that place in our business at the time. We kept blogging five days a week for almost a full year, at which point we had significantly grown our website traffic, but we were feeling burnt out. In this episode, we walk through exactly how our blog has transitioned into what it is today and the strategies we used along the way to get there. So tune in to hear all about our ever evolving blogging journey!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2340</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b262e3cd81b75bf22f54e69cfd3f198b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5605786433.mp3?updated=1662580611" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>053: Most Websites Are Missing This (Ours Included) and It Could Mean Trouble For Your Business with Danielle Liss of Hashtag Legal</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/most-websites-are-missing-this-and-it-could-mean-trouble-for-your-business</link>
      <description>We are super excited to bring to you our friend, Danielle Liss. She is a partner over at Hashtag-Legal and she focuses on legal issues for online business owners. Danielle has extensive experience negotiating contracts and interpreting FTC guidelines, and her experience has given her intimate knowledge of the challenges facing influencer networks and social media professionals today.
In this episode we talked all about business formation, contracts, website policies, intellectual property, copyrights, trademarks, and she may have even given us the straight talk about some of the things we have not yet done inside of our own business. So, regardless of where you are in your business, just getting started or perhaps you have your own multiple six figure business, get ready because we promise you, you are going to learn something today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 01 May 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Most Websites Are Missing This (Ours Included) and It Could Mean Trouble For Your Business with Danielle Liss of Hashtag Legal</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>53</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are super excited to bring to you our friend, Danielle Liss. She is a partner over at Hashtag-Legal and she focuses on legal issues for online business owners. Danielle has extensive experience negotiating contracts and interpreting FTC guidelines,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are super excited to bring to you our friend, Danielle Liss. She is a partner over at Hashtag-Legal and she focuses on legal issues for online business owners. Danielle has extensive experience negotiating contracts and interpreting FTC guidelines, and her experience has given her intimate knowledge of the challenges facing influencer networks and social media professionals today.
In this episode we talked all about business formation, contracts, website policies, intellectual property, copyrights, trademarks, and she may have even given us the straight talk about some of the things we have not yet done inside of our own business. So, regardless of where you are in your business, just getting started or perhaps you have your own multiple six figure business, get ready because we promise you, you are going to learn something today!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are super excited to bring to you our friend, Danielle Liss. She is a partner over at Hashtag-Legal and she focuses on legal issues for online business owners. Danielle has extensive experience negotiating contracts and interpreting FTC guidelines, and her experience has given her intimate knowledge of the challenges facing influencer networks and social media professionals today.</p><p>In this episode we talked all about business formation, contracts, website policies, intellectual property, copyrights, trademarks, and she may have even given us the straight talk about some of the things we have not yet done inside of our own business. So, regardless of where you are in your business, just getting started or perhaps you have your own multiple six figure business, get ready because we promise you, you are going to learn something today!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2775</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[29a8a8d880ccdc68739cbe7e5a1875d2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2453543001.mp3?updated=1662580592" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>052: What Comes First - My Website, My Product, My Email List</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/what-comes-first-my-website-my-product-my-email-list</link>
      <description>Today, we are addressing something that we get asked on the regular. We are answering the question about dealing with business overwhelm, especially for those of you who are just starting out, trying to figure out what to focus on first. We are giving you the foundation and showing you where we think you should put your focus first and why, so perhaps you won’t be so overwhelmed. Now this does not mean we are going to give you a copy-paste, one-size-fits-all formula. Instead, we will give you the building blocks to figure out exactly what you need for your unique situation to build your own successful business.
We know how easy it is to fall into those holes of massive overwhelm when you are wanting to add more and grow your business. So if that is you, then listen up! And honestly, it does not matter if you are just starting a business or if you have started one already. The information shared in this episode will truly help you lay those solid business foundations and push through the overwhelm regardless of where you are in your journey.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 28 Apr 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Comes First - My Website, My Product, My Email List</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>52</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, we are addressing something that we get asked on the regular. We are answering the question about dealing with business overwhelm, especially for those of you who are just starting out, trying to figure out what to focus on first. We are giving...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we are addressing something that we get asked on the regular. We are answering the question about dealing with business overwhelm, especially for those of you who are just starting out, trying to figure out what to focus on first. We are giving you the foundation and showing you where we think you should put your focus first and why, so perhaps you won’t be so overwhelmed. Now this does not mean we are going to give you a copy-paste, one-size-fits-all formula. Instead, we will give you the building blocks to figure out exactly what you need for your unique situation to build your own successful business.
We know how easy it is to fall into those holes of massive overwhelm when you are wanting to add more and grow your business. So if that is you, then listen up! And honestly, it does not matter if you are just starting a business or if you have started one already. The information shared in this episode will truly help you lay those solid business foundations and push through the overwhelm regardless of where you are in your journey.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we are addressing something that we get asked on the regular. We are answering the question about dealing with business overwhelm, especially for those of you who are just starting out, trying to figure out what to focus on first. We are giving you the foundation and showing you where we think you should put your focus first and why, so perhaps you won’t be so overwhelmed. Now this does not mean we are going to give you a copy-paste, one-size-fits-all formula. Instead, we will give you the building blocks to figure out exactly what you need for your unique situation to build your own successful business.</p><p>We know how easy it is to fall into those holes of massive overwhelm when you are wanting to add more and grow your business. So if that is you, then listen up! And honestly, it does not matter if you are just starting a business or if you have started one already. The information shared in this episode will truly help you lay those solid business foundations and push through the overwhelm regardless of where you are in your journey.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2535</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d028a0f1cbef91142e102186bba4cc12]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1004273024.mp3?updated=1662580417" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>051: Bookkeeping, P &amp; L's, Accounting and Other Terms that Might Make Your Head Hurt with Parker Stevenson of Evolved Finance</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/bookkeeping-p-ls-accounting-and-other-terms-that-might-make-your-head-hurt</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we have Parker Stevenson of Evolved finance and I am like super pumped for you to hear from him because he’s actually one of our few male team members. Parker and his business partner, Cory, not only do the books for other online entrepreneurs but they also coach businesses along the way. We were super excited to start working together in the new year and we had a lot of things going on at the time so it was a great time to get them on board.
In this episode, you are going to learn a lot! Parker shares his opinion on small businesses DIY’ing their books if you should do that, how you should do that, and what the French toast “your books” even means. We go over trends that he has seen in the online business entrepreneurial world, his best tips for getting your finances organized, and he even goes through and talks to us about what the heck a profit and loss statement is and how that might be the next best thing since sliced bread you could ever have for your business. We know you guys are going to love this episode, so we can’t wait for you to give this one a listen.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 Apr 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Bookkeeping, P &amp; L's, Accounting and Other Terms that Might Make Your Head Hurt with Parker Stevenson of Evolved Finance</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>51</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we have Parker Stevenson of Evolved finance and I am like super pumped for you to hear from him because he’s actually one of our few male team members. Parker and his business partner, Cory, not only do the books for other...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we have Parker Stevenson of Evolved finance and I am like super pumped for you to hear from him because he’s actually one of our few male team members. Parker and his business partner, Cory, not only do the books for other online entrepreneurs but they also coach businesses along the way. We were super excited to start working together in the new year and we had a lot of things going on at the time so it was a great time to get them on board.
In this episode, you are going to learn a lot! Parker shares his opinion on small businesses DIY’ing their books if you should do that, how you should do that, and what the French toast “your books” even means. We go over trends that he has seen in the online business entrepreneurial world, his best tips for getting your finances organized, and he even goes through and talks to us about what the heck a profit and loss statement is and how that might be the next best thing since sliced bread you could ever have for your business. We know you guys are going to love this episode, so we can’t wait for you to give this one a listen.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we have Parker Stevenson of Evolved finance and I am like super pumped for you to hear from him because he’s actually one of our few male team members. Parker and his business partner, Cory, not only do the books for other online entrepreneurs but they also coach businesses along the way. We were super excited to start working together in the new year and we had a lot of things going on at the time so it was a great time to get them on board.</p><p>In this episode, you are going to learn a lot! Parker shares his opinion on small businesses DIY’ing their books if you should do that, how you should do that, and what the French toast “your books” even means. We go over trends that he has seen in the online business entrepreneurial world, his best tips for getting your finances organized, and he even goes through and talks to us about what the heck a profit and loss statement is and how that might be the next best thing since sliced bread you could ever have for your business. We know you guys are going to love this episode, so we can’t wait for you to give this one a listen.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3120</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[179387a13b6006797b8d16d6ee845931]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1648211240.mp3?updated=1662580393" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>050: Baby, Business and Brain Injury</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/baby-business-and-brain-injury</link>
      <description>In today’s episode, it is probably going to get a little personal and a little emotional, but we think it’s important that we tell you a little bit about what happened earlier this year and how we have been able to manage all the changes. In the beginning of 2017, Emylee adopted a baby, which completely changed her whole world. Things were going so well as a new mom, but suddenly she totally hit a wall with work. It wasn’t like she did not want to work anymore or did not want to be a mom; she just struggled to figure out a balanced way to do both at the same time.
Around the same time, Abby was in a car accident and suffered a traumatic brain injury. So it is safe to say we had a bit of a rocky start to 2017 and we spent a good chunk of the beginning of the year mourning and grieving our former selves. So in today’s episode we are jumping into all the details on what happened, how we handled the changing situations, and exactly how we got out on the other side.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 24 Apr 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Baby, Business and Brain Injury</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>50</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In today’s episode, it is probably going to get a little personal and a little emotional, but we think it’s important that we tell you a little bit about what happened earlier this year and how we have been able to manage all the changes. In the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today’s episode, it is probably going to get a little personal and a little emotional, but we think it’s important that we tell you a little bit about what happened earlier this year and how we have been able to manage all the changes. In the beginning of 2017, Emylee adopted a baby, which completely changed her whole world. Things were going so well as a new mom, but suddenly she totally hit a wall with work. It wasn’t like she did not want to work anymore or did not want to be a mom; she just struggled to figure out a balanced way to do both at the same time.
Around the same time, Abby was in a car accident and suffered a traumatic brain injury. So it is safe to say we had a bit of a rocky start to 2017 and we spent a good chunk of the beginning of the year mourning and grieving our former selves. So in today’s episode we are jumping into all the details on what happened, how we handled the changing situations, and exactly how we got out on the other side.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today’s episode, it is probably going to get a little personal and a little emotional, but we think it’s important that we tell you a little bit about what happened earlier this year and how we have been able to manage all the changes. In the beginning of 2017, Emylee adopted a baby, which completely changed her whole world. Things were going so well as a new mom, but suddenly she totally hit a wall with work. It wasn’t like she did not want to work anymore or did not want to be a mom; she just struggled to figure out a balanced way to do both at the same time.</p><p>Around the same time, Abby was in a car accident and suffered a traumatic brain injury. So it is safe to say we had a bit of a rocky start to 2017 and we spent a good chunk of the beginning of the year mourning and grieving our former selves. So in today’s episode we are jumping into all the details on what happened, how we handled the changing situations, and exactly how we got out on the other side.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2527</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9d14acc5f4758eb049e059e441ff8546]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1333575904.mp3?updated=1662580460" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>049: So You Want to Build an App: Here's What You Need to Know with Christy Laurence of Plann</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/so-you-want-to-build-an-app-heres-what-you-need-to-know</link>
      <description>We are super excited to bring you our friend, Christy Laurence, who is the founder of Plann, a visual planner and scheduler app for Instagram. Plann is designed to help you create a follow-worthy feed in advance as a great strategy for Instagram growth. A bunch of you probably already use this app and know and love it, so we are really excited today for her to share some of the ins and outs of her business.
Inside this episode, we are talking about what it is like to build an app, what did it cost, what are the startup expectations of working with a developer, and what kind of person it takes to actually do it. Christy also shares what you need to know before hiring someone, and where you should be putting your app — iOS, android, or both? We dive into how to get traction, how to create a marketing strategy and the whole nine yards. Plus, we even get a little behind-the-scenes story of why Christy started Plann in the first place. You’re going to learn a lot inside this episode, so get excited to dive right in.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 21 Apr 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>So You Want to Build an App: Here's What You Need to Know with Christy Laurence of Plann</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>49</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are super excited to bring you our friend, Christy Laurence, who is the founder of Plann, a visual planner and scheduler app for Instagram. Plann is designed to help you create a follow-worthy feed in advance as a great strategy for Instagram...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are super excited to bring you our friend, Christy Laurence, who is the founder of Plann, a visual planner and scheduler app for Instagram. Plann is designed to help you create a follow-worthy feed in advance as a great strategy for Instagram growth. A bunch of you probably already use this app and know and love it, so we are really excited today for her to share some of the ins and outs of her business.
Inside this episode, we are talking about what it is like to build an app, what did it cost, what are the startup expectations of working with a developer, and what kind of person it takes to actually do it. Christy also shares what you need to know before hiring someone, and where you should be putting your app — iOS, android, or both? We dive into how to get traction, how to create a marketing strategy and the whole nine yards. Plus, we even get a little behind-the-scenes story of why Christy started Plann in the first place. You’re going to learn a lot inside this episode, so get excited to dive right in.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are super excited to bring you our friend, Christy Laurence, who is the founder of Plann, a visual planner and scheduler app for Instagram. Plann is designed to help you create a follow-worthy feed in advance as a great strategy for Instagram growth. A bunch of you probably already use this app and know and love it, so we are really excited today for her to share some of the ins and outs of her business.</p><p>Inside this episode, we are talking about what it is like to build an app, what did it cost, what are the startup expectations of working with a developer, and what kind of person it takes to actually do it. Christy also shares what you need to know before hiring someone, and where you should be putting your app — iOS, android, or both? We dive into how to get traction, how to create a marketing strategy and the whole nine yards. Plus, we even get a little behind-the-scenes story of why Christy started Plann in the first place. You’re going to learn a lot inside this episode, so get excited to dive right in.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2690</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e023e4b63a94da2c0bb58ac0657ac321]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5706067770.mp3?updated=1662589112" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>048: Q&amp;A with Abagail &amp; Emylee</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/q-a-with-abagail-emylee</link>
      <description>We are going to mix it up a little bit today on the podcast, by doing a Q&amp;A session with yours truly. For this Q&amp;A, it will be kind of like you are here because we are going to say some of your names, answer your questions, and give you our best tips and advice in this Q&amp;A session on the podcast. Now, these do not necessarily make sense together, and they are in no particular order. We are simply taking them as they come, and knocking them out of the park for you guys.
Some of the questions were submitted on Instagram, some of them are common questions we see over in the Facebook group, and some of them are just because we decided to throw them in because either someone has asked them at some point or because we just thought ya’ll needed all the answer to them. To add to that, maybe we will just make up some questions as we go along just to keep it super spicy. Tune in to find out. There is no rhyme or reason to today’s episode, so let’s just have fun with it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 19 Apr 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Q&amp;A with Abagail &amp; Emylee</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>48</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are going to mix it up a little bit today on the podcast, by doing a Q&amp;A session with yours truly. For this Q&amp;A, it will be kind of like you are here because we are going to say some of your names, answer your questions, and give you our...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are going to mix it up a little bit today on the podcast, by doing a Q&amp;A session with yours truly. For this Q&amp;A, it will be kind of like you are here because we are going to say some of your names, answer your questions, and give you our best tips and advice in this Q&amp;A session on the podcast. Now, these do not necessarily make sense together, and they are in no particular order. We are simply taking them as they come, and knocking them out of the park for you guys.
Some of the questions were submitted on Instagram, some of them are common questions we see over in the Facebook group, and some of them are just because we decided to throw them in because either someone has asked them at some point or because we just thought ya’ll needed all the answer to them. To add to that, maybe we will just make up some questions as we go along just to keep it super spicy. Tune in to find out. There is no rhyme or reason to today’s episode, so let’s just have fun with it!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are going to mix it up a little bit today on the podcast, by doing a Q&amp;A session with yours truly. For this Q&amp;A, it will be kind of like you are here because we are going to say some of your names, answer your questions, and give you our best tips and advice in this Q&amp;A session on the podcast. Now, these do not necessarily make sense together, and they are in no particular order. We are simply taking them as they come, and knocking them out of the park for you guys.</p><p>Some of the questions were submitted on Instagram, some of them are common questions we see over in the Facebook group, and some of them are just because we decided to throw them in because either someone has asked them at some point or because we just thought ya’ll needed all the answer to them. To add to that, maybe we will just make up some questions as we go along just to keep it super spicy. Tune in to find out. There is no rhyme or reason to today’s episode, so let’s just have fun with it!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3256</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ee5a4e526a5b717730a63625de69de02]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4998765389.mp3?updated=1662589151" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>047: How to Outsource + Scale Your Product Based Business with Johnny and Joanna Galbraith of Letterfolk</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-outsource-and-scale-your-product-based-business</link>
      <description>We are so excited today to have Johnny and Joanna on from Letterfolk Co on the show. They are amazing givers of knowledge and awesome business owners who make adorable felt, wooden, handmade in the United States, letter boards that you can put little quotes on and uniquely capture monthly milestones. We reached out to them on a whim because they have such a beautiful Instagram and such an amazing business that we wanted to pick their brains especially for you guys because they actually sell physical products. Not surprisingly, they have a ton of amazing nuggets of wisdom to share with you guys.
Over the last year and a half, Johnny and Joanna’s business has grown like gangbusters and in this episode we dive into the specifics about when they invested in branding, when they do stock versus custom packaging, what platforms they use, what software they invest in, how they hired their first employee, and more. Plus, we get into all the decisions that went into the making of the company, specifically the mindset piece, which is probably the most important part! They are both so kind, so smart, and you are going to learn so much in this episode.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 17 Apr 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Outsource + Scale Your Product Based Business with Johnny and Joanna Galbraith of Letterfolk</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>47</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are so excited today to have Johnny and Joanna on from Letterfolk Co on the show. They are amazing givers of knowledge and awesome business owners who make adorable felt, wooden, handmade in the United States, letter boards that you can put little...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are so excited today to have Johnny and Joanna on from Letterfolk Co on the show. They are amazing givers of knowledge and awesome business owners who make adorable felt, wooden, handmade in the United States, letter boards that you can put little quotes on and uniquely capture monthly milestones. We reached out to them on a whim because they have such a beautiful Instagram and such an amazing business that we wanted to pick their brains especially for you guys because they actually sell physical products. Not surprisingly, they have a ton of amazing nuggets of wisdom to share with you guys.
Over the last year and a half, Johnny and Joanna’s business has grown like gangbusters and in this episode we dive into the specifics about when they invested in branding, when they do stock versus custom packaging, what platforms they use, what software they invest in, how they hired their first employee, and more. Plus, we get into all the decisions that went into the making of the company, specifically the mindset piece, which is probably the most important part! They are both so kind, so smart, and you are going to learn so much in this episode.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are so excited today to have Johnny and Joanna on from Letterfolk Co on the show. They are amazing givers of knowledge and awesome business owners who make adorable felt, wooden, handmade in the United States, letter boards that you can put little quotes on and uniquely capture monthly milestones. We reached out to them on a whim because they have such a beautiful Instagram and such an amazing business that we wanted to pick their brains especially for you guys because they actually sell physical products. Not surprisingly, they have a ton of amazing nuggets of wisdom to share with you guys.</p><p>Over the last year and a half, Johnny and Joanna’s business has grown like gangbusters and in this episode we dive into the specifics about when they invested in branding, when they do stock versus custom packaging, what platforms they use, what software they invest in, how they hired their first employee, and more. Plus, we get into all the decisions that went into the making of the company, specifically the mindset piece, which is probably the most important part! They are both so kind, so smart, and you are going to learn so much in this episode.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2825</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[178b78045341773bea4db3ea144b247c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8412045515.mp3?updated=1662589191" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>046: Giving Away the Kitchen Sink - Our Free, Free, Free, Marry Me Model</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/giving-away-the-kitchen-sink-our-free-free-free-marry-me-model</link>
      <description>Today we are going to tell you all about how to get your readers, your people just like surfing the internet, surfing the airwaves, surfing Google; people who are just hanging out online, how do they find you and how can you turn them into loyal customers? The “free, free, free, marry me” sales model walks people through awareness, consideration, preference, and purchase, to being super loyal, to then shouting your name from the rooftops and we are going to walk you through all of those steps today and give you some tips and tricks on how you can implement them in your business.
Basically, this model is the try before you buy model, the test drive the car model. That’s what this does for your audience and for your people, it establishes you as an expert and it establishes you as someone to keep coming back to for that thing. No matter what it is, you don’t necessarily have to be teaching for people to come back for your thing. It could be your humor, it could be your stories that you share on Instagram, it could be your beautiful images and the way you walk through people when you talk about your business or your life or your products. It could be the charities that your business supports. Whatever it is, that thing that they come back for, this is what’s reeling them in time and time again.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 14 Apr 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Giving Away the Kitchen Sink - Our Free, Free, Free, Marry Me Model</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>46</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are going to tell you all about how to get your readers, your people just like surfing the internet, surfing the airwaves, surfing Google; people who are just hanging out online, how do they find you and how can you turn them into loyal...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are going to tell you all about how to get your readers, your people just like surfing the internet, surfing the airwaves, surfing Google; people who are just hanging out online, how do they find you and how can you turn them into loyal customers? The “free, free, free, marry me” sales model walks people through awareness, consideration, preference, and purchase, to being super loyal, to then shouting your name from the rooftops and we are going to walk you through all of those steps today and give you some tips and tricks on how you can implement them in your business.
Basically, this model is the try before you buy model, the test drive the car model. That’s what this does for your audience and for your people, it establishes you as an expert and it establishes you as someone to keep coming back to for that thing. No matter what it is, you don’t necessarily have to be teaching for people to come back for your thing. It could be your humor, it could be your stories that you share on Instagram, it could be your beautiful images and the way you walk through people when you talk about your business or your life or your products. It could be the charities that your business supports. Whatever it is, that thing that they come back for, this is what’s reeling them in time and time again.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are going to tell you all about how to get your readers, your people just like surfing the internet, surfing the airwaves, surfing Google; people who are just hanging out online, how do they find you and how can you turn them into loyal customers? The “free, free, free, marry me” sales model walks people through awareness, consideration, preference, and purchase, to being super loyal, to then shouting your name from the rooftops and we are going to walk you through all of those steps today and give you some tips and tricks on how you can implement them in your business.</p><p>Basically, this model is the try before you buy model, the test drive the car model. That’s what this does for your audience and for your people, it establishes you as an expert and it establishes you as someone to keep coming back to for that thing. No matter what it is, you don’t necessarily have to be teaching for people to come back for your thing. It could be your humor, it could be your stories that you share on Instagram, it could be your beautiful images and the way you walk through people when you talk about your business or your life or your products. It could be the charities that your business supports. Whatever it is, that thing that they come back for, this is what’s reeling them in time and time again.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2468</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[33a25457d6c087a53d359430945fef72]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1354039686.mp3?updated=1662589223" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>045: SEO For Newbies: How to Get Ranked with Meg Clarke of Clapping Dog Media</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/seo-for-newbies-how-to-get-ranked</link>
      <description>Guys, you better get ready and put your thinking caps on because today we are hanging out with our good friend Meg Clarke from Clapping Dog Media. She is an SEO expert who works with creative entrepreneurs to help them get their businesses found by google. We know sometimes SEO can be a bit confusing and make you want to run for your life. So don’t let it scare you, and don’t let it intimidate you because Meg is breaking everything down super simply today and she is going to give you some awesome tips on how to move forward.
In today’s episode we are talking about what the heck SEO even is, how you can do it yourself, and diving into some of Meg’s favorite links to get reporting tools and data back on your own website to see your ranking. Then, we talk through when it makes sense to hire an SEO expert, the kind of SEO expert you should be looking for, and when you should run for the hills instead. So stay tuned, bust out your notebooks, and get ready for an epic show.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Apr 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>SEO For Newbies: How to Get Ranked with Meg Clarke of Clapping Dog Media</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>45</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Guys, you better get ready and put your thinking caps on because today we are hanging out with our good friend Meg Clarke from Clapping Dog Media. She is an SEO expert who works with creative entrepreneurs to help them get their businesses found by...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Guys, you better get ready and put your thinking caps on because today we are hanging out with our good friend Meg Clarke from Clapping Dog Media. She is an SEO expert who works with creative entrepreneurs to help them get their businesses found by google. We know sometimes SEO can be a bit confusing and make you want to run for your life. So don’t let it scare you, and don’t let it intimidate you because Meg is breaking everything down super simply today and she is going to give you some awesome tips on how to move forward.
In today’s episode we are talking about what the heck SEO even is, how you can do it yourself, and diving into some of Meg’s favorite links to get reporting tools and data back on your own website to see your ranking. Then, we talk through when it makes sense to hire an SEO expert, the kind of SEO expert you should be looking for, and when you should run for the hills instead. So stay tuned, bust out your notebooks, and get ready for an epic show.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Guys, you better get ready and put your thinking caps on because today we are hanging out with our good friend Meg Clarke from Clapping Dog Media. She is an SEO expert who works with creative entrepreneurs to help them get their businesses found by google. We know sometimes SEO can be a bit confusing and make you want to run for your life. So don’t let it scare you, and don’t let it intimidate you because Meg is breaking everything down super simply today and she is going to give you some awesome tips on how to move forward.</p><p>In today’s episode we are talking about what the heck SEO even is, how you can do it yourself, and diving into some of Meg’s favorite links to get reporting tools and data back on your own website to see your ranking. Then, we talk through when it makes sense to hire an SEO expert, the kind of SEO expert you should be looking for, and when you should run for the hills instead. So stay tuned, bust out your notebooks, and get ready for an epic show.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2471</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1aca853403e5a35864d110d5c5337d90]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7280797042.mp3?updated=1662589367" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>044: Why We Say No to "Opportunities" and How You Can Get Us to Say Yes</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-we-say-no-to-opportunities-and-how-you-can-get-us-to-say-yes</link>
      <description>Today, we are super excited to talk about some stuff that might surprise you guys. We are telling you all the reasons why we say no to “opportunities”. Most opportunities, honestly. Plus, we get into our thought process behind our no’s and how you can now begin to ask yourself different questions when you get thrown various opportunities in your own business. Is it an opportunity that is the right fit for you, if it’s going to pay off, and whether or not it is going to be beneficial for both parties and all of that fun stuff.
Now the things we are saying no to may be either big or small, just because it might not be right for our audience and our business. Perhaps you are on the other side of this fence where you are using other businesses, companies, or brands to promote your own product. We are going to give you some tips on how you can make that process even better by sharing with you some ways that people have pitched us where we have ultimately said yes. So you are going to get some inside scoop today and we are pretty pumped about it, and if you want us to say “yes”, you should definitely listen to this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 10 Apr 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why We Say No to "Opportunities" and How You Can Get Us to Say Yes</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>44</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, we are super excited to talk about some stuff that might surprise you guys. We are telling you all the reasons why we say no to “opportunities”. Most opportunities, honestly. Plus, we get into our thought process behind our no’s and how...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we are super excited to talk about some stuff that might surprise you guys. We are telling you all the reasons why we say no to “opportunities”. Most opportunities, honestly. Plus, we get into our thought process behind our no’s and how you can now begin to ask yourself different questions when you get thrown various opportunities in your own business. Is it an opportunity that is the right fit for you, if it’s going to pay off, and whether or not it is going to be beneficial for both parties and all of that fun stuff.
Now the things we are saying no to may be either big or small, just because it might not be right for our audience and our business. Perhaps you are on the other side of this fence where you are using other businesses, companies, or brands to promote your own product. We are going to give you some tips on how you can make that process even better by sharing with you some ways that people have pitched us where we have ultimately said yes. So you are going to get some inside scoop today and we are pretty pumped about it, and if you want us to say “yes”, you should definitely listen to this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we are super excited to talk about some stuff that might surprise you guys. We are telling you all the reasons why we say no to “opportunities”. Most opportunities, honestly. Plus, we get into our thought process behind our no’s and how you can now begin to ask yourself different questions when you get thrown various opportunities in your own business. Is it an opportunity that is the right fit for you, if it’s going to pay off, and whether or not it is going to be beneficial for both parties and all of that fun stuff.</p><p>Now the things we are saying no to may be either big or small, just because it might not be right for our audience and our business. Perhaps you are on the other side of this fence where you are using other businesses, companies, or brands to promote your own product. We are going to give you some tips on how you can make that process even better by sharing with you some ways that people have pitched us where we have ultimately said yes. So you are going to get some inside scoop today and we are pretty pumped about it, and if you want us to say “yes”, you should definitely listen to this episode!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2735</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5512269bbd997f3fe4a42d66e0ef8ab0]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1633393536.mp3?updated=1662589455" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>043: Become a Sales Super Hero with Terry Dean of My Marketing Coach</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/become-a-sales-superhero</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we have Terry Dean of Mymarketingcoach.com. Terry considers himself one of the grandfathers of internet marketing, and he even referred to himself as a dinosaur. But one thing is for sure, this guy knows his stuff! Terry started out as a pizza delivery driver for Little Caesar’s making $8 an hour and transitioned into online marketing in 1996. This guy generated over $96,000 from one email in front of a live studio audience. Talk about crazy!
In today’s episode Terry shares some great tips on how to get emails opened more frequently, how to sell to your email list even if it is teeny tiny, and how to get people on your list quickly. He has some really cool tricks into turning those subscribers into buyers within 24 hours and two really awesome formulas to help you grow your sales pages, your landing pages, even the format of your email. Terry also goes over what he calls the super hero method. For all you nerds out there, you are going to get a kick out of this one. We can’t wait for you to dive into this episode, so get comfy and let’s get started.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 07 Apr 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Become a Sales Super Hero with Terry Dean of My Marketing Coach</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>43</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we have Terry Dean of Mymarketingcoach.com. Terry considers himself one of the grandfathers of internet marketing, and he even referred to himself as a dinosaur. But one thing is for sure, this guy knows his stuff! Terry started...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we have Terry Dean of Mymarketingcoach.com. Terry considers himself one of the grandfathers of internet marketing, and he even referred to himself as a dinosaur. But one thing is for sure, this guy knows his stuff! Terry started out as a pizza delivery driver for Little Caesar’s making $8 an hour and transitioned into online marketing in 1996. This guy generated over $96,000 from one email in front of a live studio audience. Talk about crazy!
In today’s episode Terry shares some great tips on how to get emails opened more frequently, how to sell to your email list even if it is teeny tiny, and how to get people on your list quickly. He has some really cool tricks into turning those subscribers into buyers within 24 hours and two really awesome formulas to help you grow your sales pages, your landing pages, even the format of your email. Terry also goes over what he calls the super hero method. For all you nerds out there, you are going to get a kick out of this one. We can’t wait for you to dive into this episode, so get comfy and let’s get started.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we have Terry Dean of Mymarketingcoach.com. Terry considers himself one of the grandfathers of internet marketing, and he even referred to himself as a dinosaur. But one thing is for sure, this guy knows his stuff! Terry started out as a pizza delivery driver for Little Caesar’s making $8 an hour and transitioned into online marketing in 1996. This guy generated over $96,000 from one email in front of a live studio audience. Talk about crazy!</p><p>In today’s episode Terry shares some great tips on how to get emails opened more frequently, how to sell to your email list even if it is teeny tiny, and how to get people on your list quickly. He has some really cool tricks into turning those subscribers into buyers within 24 hours and two really awesome formulas to help you grow your sales pages, your landing pages, even the format of your email. Terry also goes over what he calls the super hero method. For all you nerds out there, you are going to get a kick out of this one. We can’t wait for you to dive into this episode, so get comfy and let’s get started.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3009</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8953a41596e0dc05143efe5f554f539c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8024861767.mp3?updated=1662589506" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>042: Why We Share our Income Reports &amp; Why You Should Be Making Your Own P&amp;L</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/why-we-share-our-income-reports-why-you-should-be-making-your-own-pl</link>
      <description>On today’s episode, we are super pumped to talk to you about why we share our income reports. In the interest of being transparent, we have decided to walk through the process and tell you why we just started to share our income reports. So in case, you guys didn’t know, we have two income reports floating around the blogosphere at this time, that show you how much money we make. Now we are not saying you should just be flashing dollar bills around. However, when we saw that in fact, it showcased how we made that money and where it actually comes from, we realized that it could be super a valuable and helpful tool for you guys.
In the first income report, we showed the first eight months of 2016 and how we went from zero to over $103,000. It helped us to really see the breakdown of where the money came from and understand where we should focus our energy to grow the business. A lot of people are just not sure how these online businesses work and there are so many claims running rampant on the internet. So if you are looking for some clarity around income reports, jump straight into this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 05 Apr 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why We Share our Income Reports &amp; Why You Should Be Making Your Own P&amp;L</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>42</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>On today’s episode, we are super pumped to talk to you about why we share our income reports. In the interest of being transparent, we have decided to walk through the process and tell you why we just started to share our income reports. So in case,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s episode, we are super pumped to talk to you about why we share our income reports. In the interest of being transparent, we have decided to walk through the process and tell you why we just started to share our income reports. So in case, you guys didn’t know, we have two income reports floating around the blogosphere at this time, that show you how much money we make. Now we are not saying you should just be flashing dollar bills around. However, when we saw that in fact, it showcased how we made that money and where it actually comes from, we realized that it could be super a valuable and helpful tool for you guys.
In the first income report, we showed the first eight months of 2016 and how we went from zero to over $103,000. It helped us to really see the breakdown of where the money came from and understand where we should focus our energy to grow the business. A lot of people are just not sure how these online businesses work and there are so many claims running rampant on the internet. So if you are looking for some clarity around income reports, jump straight into this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s episode, we are super pumped to talk to you about why we share our income reports. In the interest of being transparent, we have decided to walk through the process and tell you why we just started to share our income reports. So in case, you guys didn’t know, we have two income reports floating around the blogosphere at this time, that show you how much money we make. Now we are not saying you should just be flashing dollar bills around. However, when we saw that in fact, it showcased how we made that money and where it actually comes from, we realized that it could be super a valuable and helpful tool for you guys.</p><p>In the first income report, we showed the first eight months of 2016 and how we went from zero to over $103,000. It helped us to really see the breakdown of where the money came from and understand where we should focus our energy to grow the business. A lot of people are just not sure how these online businesses work and there are so many claims running rampant on the internet. So if you are looking for some clarity around income reports, jump straight into this episode!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2268</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[aef8b64106f05965ee4bc1d30161477e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6943094294.mp3?updated=1662589609" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>041: Money Blocks, Mindsets &amp; Montras with Jessica Eley</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/money-blocks-mindsets-and-mantras</link>
      <description>We are pretty super pumped because we have Jessica Eley on the show today! Jessica is the resident emotion bringer upper of all things regarding icky feelings, money, success, and thinking we’re not good enough. She shows exactly how they affect the growth of our business, our mindset, our relationships with our families and all of that good stuff.
We are diving into some pretty deep shit today and in fact, Emylee got the opportunity to chat with Jessica a few weeks ago to chat about a plateau that she felt like we had hit in our business and Jessica helped her see that she was bringing up some money block issues. So go sit on the couch and get a glass of wine, because this episode is going to be as close to business therapy as possible!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 03 Apr 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Money Blocks, Mindsets &amp; Montras with Jessica Eley</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>41</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are pretty super pumped because we have Jessica Eley on the show today! Jessica is the resident emotion bringer upper of all things regarding icky feelings, money, success, and thinking we’re not good enough. She shows exactly how they affect the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are pretty super pumped because we have Jessica Eley on the show today! Jessica is the resident emotion bringer upper of all things regarding icky feelings, money, success, and thinking we’re not good enough. She shows exactly how they affect the growth of our business, our mindset, our relationships with our families and all of that good stuff.
We are diving into some pretty deep shit today and in fact, Emylee got the opportunity to chat with Jessica a few weeks ago to chat about a plateau that she felt like we had hit in our business and Jessica helped her see that she was bringing up some money block issues. So go sit on the couch and get a glass of wine, because this episode is going to be as close to business therapy as possible!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are pretty super pumped because we have Jessica Eley on the show today! Jessica is the resident emotion bringer upper of all things regarding icky feelings, money, success, and thinking we’re not good enough. She shows exactly how they affect the growth of our business, our mindset, our relationships with our families and all of that good stuff.</p><p>We are diving into some pretty deep shit today and in fact, Emylee got the opportunity to chat with Jessica a few weeks ago to chat about a plateau that she felt like we had hit in our business and Jessica helped her see that she was bringing up some money block issues. So go sit on the couch and get a glass of wine, because this episode is going to be as close to business therapy as possible!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3188</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[216386a158b12f2b34475961b4cf8a52]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3603752419.mp3?updated=1662589805" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>040: Visualizing Your Dream Week &amp; How Our Business Changed</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/visualizing-your-dream-week-and-how-our-business-changed</link>
      <description>Today, we are going to talk about some dream weeks, some not so dream weeks, and how we have transitioned in our business. We chat through our journey of how our life and day of work looks different as our business grows and changes, as our life grows and changes, and the kind of questions we begin to ask ourselves when we want to strive towards a different or better ideal dream week. We go over how to start to work through some of these challenges yourself.
In this episode we are going to walk you through the process of what it looked like when we were scaling a multiple six figure business and then how we kind of hit a brick wall at the beginning of 2017 and we had to learn a whole new world of how to run a business. We dive into how managing life and business was completely different and why always keeping in mind what we wanted along the way was super important to us. Instead of letting the world just slip away from us, we kept our hopes and dreams actively in front of us and we want this for you as well.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 31 Mar 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Visualizing Your Dream Week &amp; How Our Business Changed</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>40</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, we are going to talk about some dream weeks, some not so dream weeks, and how we have transitioned in our business. We chat through our journey of how our life and day of work looks different as our business grows and changes, as our life grows...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we are going to talk about some dream weeks, some not so dream weeks, and how we have transitioned in our business. We chat through our journey of how our life and day of work looks different as our business grows and changes, as our life grows and changes, and the kind of questions we begin to ask ourselves when we want to strive towards a different or better ideal dream week. We go over how to start to work through some of these challenges yourself.
In this episode we are going to walk you through the process of what it looked like when we were scaling a multiple six figure business and then how we kind of hit a brick wall at the beginning of 2017 and we had to learn a whole new world of how to run a business. We dive into how managing life and business was completely different and why always keeping in mind what we wanted along the way was super important to us. Instead of letting the world just slip away from us, we kept our hopes and dreams actively in front of us and we want this for you as well.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we are going to talk about some dream weeks, some not so dream weeks, and how we have transitioned in our business. We chat through our journey of how our life and day of work looks different as our business grows and changes, as our life grows and changes, and the kind of questions we begin to ask ourselves when we want to strive towards a different or better ideal dream week. We go over how to start to work through some of these challenges yourself.</p><p>In this episode we are going to walk you through the process of what it looked like when we were scaling a multiple six figure business and then how we kind of hit a brick wall at the beginning of 2017 and we had to learn a whole new world of how to run a business. We dive into how managing life and business was completely different and why always keeping in mind what we wanted along the way was super important to us. Instead of letting the world just slip away from us, we kept our hopes and dreams actively in front of us and we want this for you as well.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3137</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a5969a84bda7032844bff6209bc1b5ad]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1894479876.mp3?updated=1662589805" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>039: How to Get the Best Organic Referrals and Network Like a Boss with Josey Stafford of Six Pence Events</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-get-the-best-organic-referrals-and-netowrk-like-a-boss</link>
      <description>Guys, we are super excited to have on our friend, Josey Stafford from Six Pence Events today. She is a wedding planner and we know there are a lot of you in the wedding industry listening in today and we know nothing about it other than the fact that we both have gotten married. So, we are super excited to have someone on who actually knows what she’s talking about, in regards to service based industries and wedding industries, and we are kind of getting into some meat and potatoes on all things referrals.
On today’s episode you are going to learn how to ask for a referral without being super creepy, and you are going to figure out the best and organic ways to get clients and vendors to refer you. We are jumping into incentives, giveaways, and prizes and whether or not they work. If you are brand new to business, we get into exactly how you go about finding these people, the right and the wrong way to network. We also how things work for you in your business and even if you are not in the wedding industry, I want you to stay tuned because all of this have super specific takeaways that are applicable to every single one of you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 Mar 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Get the Best Organic Referrals and Network Like a Boss with Josey Stafford of Six Pence Events</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>39</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Guys, we are super excited to have on our friend, Josey Stafford from Six Pence Events today. She is a wedding planner and we know there are a lot of you in the wedding industry listening in today and we know nothing about it other than the fact that...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Guys, we are super excited to have on our friend, Josey Stafford from Six Pence Events today. She is a wedding planner and we know there are a lot of you in the wedding industry listening in today and we know nothing about it other than the fact that we both have gotten married. So, we are super excited to have someone on who actually knows what she’s talking about, in regards to service based industries and wedding industries, and we are kind of getting into some meat and potatoes on all things referrals.
On today’s episode you are going to learn how to ask for a referral without being super creepy, and you are going to figure out the best and organic ways to get clients and vendors to refer you. We are jumping into incentives, giveaways, and prizes and whether or not they work. If you are brand new to business, we get into exactly how you go about finding these people, the right and the wrong way to network. We also how things work for you in your business and even if you are not in the wedding industry, I want you to stay tuned because all of this have super specific takeaways that are applicable to every single one of you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Guys, we are super excited to have on our friend, Josey Stafford from Six Pence Events today. She is a wedding planner and we know there are a lot of you in the wedding industry listening in today and we know nothing about it other than the fact that we both have gotten married. So, we are super excited to have someone on who actually knows what she’s talking about, in regards to service based industries and wedding industries, and we are kind of getting into some meat and potatoes on all things referrals.</p><p>On today’s episode you are going to learn how to ask for a referral without being super creepy, and you are going to figure out the best and organic ways to get clients and vendors to refer you. We are jumping into incentives, giveaways, and prizes and whether or not they work. If you are brand new to business, we get into exactly how you go about finding these people, the right and the wrong way to network. We also how things work for you in your business and even if you are not in the wedding industry, I want you to stay tuned because all of this have super specific takeaways that are applicable to every single one of you.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3353</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e5c5f4f614ad35744716a3fb5011b340]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5340140346.mp3?updated=1662589902" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>038: This Industry Standard Made Us Feel Like Our Products Sucked</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/this-industry-standard-made-us-feel-like-our-products-sucked</link>
      <description>Today, we are getting a little nerdy with you guys. We are geeking out on some numbers and giving you the same slap on the face we got when it came to conversions of your peeps and making money. If all of this numbers stuff kind of freaks you out and makes you want to break out in hives and throw your phone out the window, it’s okay. Take a deep breath. We are not going to turn you into a mathematician over the course of the next 45 minutes, that’s fine. But if you feel like you need some help with that, we’ve got you covered. So don’t you stress about it.
We are going to be talking about the icky feelings about money, about disappointment in sales numbers, and what that really means especially for businesses like ours and yours. We dive into a bit of background on how we transitioned rather quickly from a client based business to a course based business in a matter of months. What that did along the way was teach us a lot of things about what we didn’t know about conversion rates and how many people you actually need on your list in order to make money. So if you find yourself in that same La La Land place right now, put your socks on and get into this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 27 Mar 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>This Industry Standard Made Us Feel Like Our Products Sucked</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>38</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, we are getting a little nerdy with you guys. We are geeking out on some numbers and giving you the same slap on the face we got when it came to conversions of your peeps and making money. If all of this numbers stuff kind of freaks you out and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we are getting a little nerdy with you guys. We are geeking out on some numbers and giving you the same slap on the face we got when it came to conversions of your peeps and making money. If all of this numbers stuff kind of freaks you out and makes you want to break out in hives and throw your phone out the window, it’s okay. Take a deep breath. We are not going to turn you into a mathematician over the course of the next 45 minutes, that’s fine. But if you feel like you need some help with that, we’ve got you covered. So don’t you stress about it.
We are going to be talking about the icky feelings about money, about disappointment in sales numbers, and what that really means especially for businesses like ours and yours. We dive into a bit of background on how we transitioned rather quickly from a client based business to a course based business in a matter of months. What that did along the way was teach us a lot of things about what we didn’t know about conversion rates and how many people you actually need on your list in order to make money. So if you find yourself in that same La La Land place right now, put your socks on and get into this episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we are getting a little nerdy with you guys. We are geeking out on some numbers and giving you the same slap on the face we got when it came to conversions of your peeps and making money. If all of this numbers stuff kind of freaks you out and makes you want to break out in hives and throw your phone out the window, it’s okay. Take a deep breath. We are not going to turn you into a mathematician over the course of the next 45 minutes, that’s fine. But if you feel like you need some help with that, we’ve got you covered. So don’t you stress about it.</p><p>We are going to be talking about the icky feelings about money, about disappointment in sales numbers, and what that really means especially for businesses like ours and yours. We dive into a bit of background on how we transitioned rather quickly from a client based business to a course based business in a matter of months. What that did along the way was teach us a lot of things about what we didn’t know about conversion rates and how many people you actually need on your list in order to make money. So if you find yourself in that same La La Land place right now, put your socks on and get into this episode!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to: <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2321</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8159bb599fd2b2c3d234c9210c3f018f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1825346606.mp3?updated=1662589654" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>037: How to DIY Your Website Copy with Claire Swinarski</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-diy-your-website-copy</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we have Claire Swinarski who is a copywriter and content marketer for creative entrepreneurs. She has been featured in the Washington Post, Seventeen Magazine, Bridal Guide, and many other amazing magazines and publications around the country. Claire is based out of Wisconsin and she pretty much loves burrito bowls, so we like her. She is a girl after our own burrito loving hearts.
In today’s episode, Clair is going to break down a lot of stuff that many of you need help with, like copyrighting. First, we are figuring out how to dive into knowing your ideal client, because you have to start there before you even know what to write in the first place. Next, Claire walks us through the pages that you probably should have on your website and others not to even worry about, as well as how to actually break down what goes on that website itself.
Claire also gives her tips on how to avoid that copy overwhelm, and how to stay true to yourself in your own copy so that you can repel the “wrong kind” of people. Make sure you listen all the way to the very end because she gives some really quick tips on how you can update your copy today and not be so stressed about it anymore. If this is your jam and you need a refresh for your website, then be sure to give this one a listen. Hunker down, put your socks on, we are going to get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 24 Mar 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to DIY Your Website Copy with Claire Swinarski</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>37</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we have Claire Swinarski who is a copywriter and content marketer for creative entrepreneurs. She has been featured in the Washington Post, Seventeen Magazine, Bridal Guide, and many other amazing magazines and publications...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we have Claire Swinarski who is a copywriter and content marketer for creative entrepreneurs. She has been featured in the Washington Post, Seventeen Magazine, Bridal Guide, and many other amazing magazines and publications around the country. Claire is based out of Wisconsin and she pretty much loves burrito bowls, so we like her. She is a girl after our own burrito loving hearts.
In today’s episode, Clair is going to break down a lot of stuff that many of you need help with, like copyrighting. First, we are figuring out how to dive into knowing your ideal client, because you have to start there before you even know what to write in the first place. Next, Claire walks us through the pages that you probably should have on your website and others not to even worry about, as well as how to actually break down what goes on that website itself.
Claire also gives her tips on how to avoid that copy overwhelm, and how to stay true to yourself in your own copy so that you can repel the “wrong kind” of people. Make sure you listen all the way to the very end because she gives some really quick tips on how you can update your copy today and not be so stressed about it anymore. If this is your jam and you need a refresh for your website, then be sure to give this one a listen. Hunker down, put your socks on, we are going to get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we have Claire Swinarski who is a copywriter and content marketer for creative entrepreneurs. She has been featured in the Washington Post, Seventeen Magazine, Bridal Guide, and many other amazing magazines and publications around the country. Claire is based out of Wisconsin and she pretty much loves burrito bowls, so we like her. She is a girl after our own burrito loving hearts.</p><p>In today’s episode, Clair is going to break down a lot of stuff that many of you need help with, like copyrighting. First, we are figuring out how to dive into knowing your ideal client, because you have to start there before you even know what to write in the first place. Next, Claire walks us through the pages that you probably should have on your website and others not to even worry about, as well as how to actually break down what goes on that website itself.</p><p>Claire also gives her tips on how to avoid that copy overwhelm, and how to stay true to yourself in your own copy so that you can repel the “wrong kind” of people. Make sure you listen all the way to the very end because she gives some really quick tips on how you can update your copy today and not be so stressed about it anymore. If this is your jam and you need a refresh for your website, then be sure to give this one a listen. Hunker down, put your socks on, we are going to get started!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2848</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f688d41ca7b84c69f7dd7c9328e987f7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6513738519.mp3?updated=1662589741" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>036: We Love Squarespace: Here's Why We'll Never Leave This Platform</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/we-love-squarespace</link>
      <description>Today, we’re talking about one of our favorite systems, Squarespace, and why it is our favorite web platform, all of our favorite features, and why we have adamantly insisted on staying on Squarespace despite the option to leave multiple times at this point. Now, if you are using another platform, we are not here to shame you and judge you for that, and we are certainly not going to tell you that WordPress is wrong and that it will ruin your life. So if you are happy where you are and you are getting great results then maybe this episode is not for you.
However, if you are frustrated with where you are right now and are thinking about leaving or you haven’t even started your website yet, then this might break down some options for you and let you know where we stand. This will be our judgment free zone and although we are completely biased, we will not shame you. That is our objective. So if you are curious about how we started out on Squarespace and why it might be right for you, then stay tuned!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Mar 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>We Love Squarespace: Here's Why We'll Never Leave This Platform</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>36</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today, we’re talking about one of our favorite systems, Squarespace, and why it is our favorite web platform, all of our favorite features, and why we have adamantly insisted on staying on Squarespace despite the option to leave multiple times at...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today, we’re talking about one of our favorite systems, Squarespace, and why it is our favorite web platform, all of our favorite features, and why we have adamantly insisted on staying on Squarespace despite the option to leave multiple times at this point. Now, if you are using another platform, we are not here to shame you and judge you for that, and we are certainly not going to tell you that WordPress is wrong and that it will ruin your life. So if you are happy where you are and you are getting great results then maybe this episode is not for you.
However, if you are frustrated with where you are right now and are thinking about leaving or you haven’t even started your website yet, then this might break down some options for you and let you know where we stand. This will be our judgment free zone and although we are completely biased, we will not shame you. That is our objective. So if you are curious about how we started out on Squarespace and why it might be right for you, then stay tuned!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today, we’re talking about one of our favorite systems, Squarespace, and why it is our favorite web platform, all of our favorite features, and why we have adamantly insisted on staying on Squarespace despite the option to leave multiple times at this point. Now, if you are using another platform, we are not here to shame you and judge you for that, and we are certainly not going to tell you that WordPress is wrong and that it will ruin your life. So if you are happy where you are and you are getting great results then maybe this episode is not for you.</p><p>However, if you are frustrated with where you are right now and are thinking about leaving or you haven’t even started your website yet, then this might break down some options for you and let you know where we stand. This will be our judgment free zone and although we are completely biased, we will not shame you. That is our objective. So if you are curious about how we started out on Squarespace and why it might be right for you, then stay tuned!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2571</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[87145fb51f76eee4f65de9e3f942004b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5259640359.mp3?updated=1662644582" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>035: Cultivating Community and Growing an In-Person Event with Latasha Haynes of BLINK Conference</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/cultivating-community-and-growing-an-in-person-event</link>
      <description>It’s going to get crazy up in here! Today on the podcast we have Tasha Haynes from BLINK Conference on. She is AMAZING, and we are so excited to have her share all her wisdom with ya’ll. Tash is in the fifth year of running the BLINK Conference so she definitely knows a thing or two about conferences by now. She has great advice to those looking to start their own conferences or perhaps attend a conference for the first time.
With Tash we go through how the BLINK Conference has grown and the format that they find unique for their conference to make it different. We also dive into how they are able to create that really intimate and family aspect at BLINK, which is hands down our key takeaway from our experience there and has led us to have really close relationships to not only Tash but other speakers and attendees that we met at that conference as well. We also chat about landing sponsors, landing key note speakers and all the good stuff in between. Tash has a huge place in our heart and we think she will have a huge place in yours too, if you let her in.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 20 Mar 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Cultivating Community and Growing an In-Person Event with Latasha Haynes of BLINK Conference</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>35</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>It’s going to get crazy up in here! Today on the podcast we have Tasha Haynes from BLINK Conference on. She is AMAZING, and we are so excited to have her share all her wisdom with ya’ll. Tash is in the fifth year of running the BLINK Conference so...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It’s going to get crazy up in here! Today on the podcast we have Tasha Haynes from BLINK Conference on. She is AMAZING, and we are so excited to have her share all her wisdom with ya’ll. Tash is in the fifth year of running the BLINK Conference so she definitely knows a thing or two about conferences by now. She has great advice to those looking to start their own conferences or perhaps attend a conference for the first time.
With Tash we go through how the BLINK Conference has grown and the format that they find unique for their conference to make it different. We also dive into how they are able to create that really intimate and family aspect at BLINK, which is hands down our key takeaway from our experience there and has led us to have really close relationships to not only Tash but other speakers and attendees that we met at that conference as well. We also chat about landing sponsors, landing key note speakers and all the good stuff in between. Tash has a huge place in our heart and we think she will have a huge place in yours too, if you let her in.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It’s going to get crazy up in here! Today on the podcast we have Tasha Haynes from BLINK Conference on. She is AMAZING, and we are so excited to have her share all her wisdom with ya’ll. Tash is in the fifth year of running the BLINK Conference so she definitely knows a thing or two about conferences by now. She has great advice to those looking to start their own conferences or perhaps attend a conference for the first time.</p><p>With Tash we go through how the BLINK Conference has grown and the format that they find unique for their conference to make it different. We also dive into how they are able to create that really intimate and family aspect at BLINK, which is hands down our key takeaway from our experience there and has led us to have really close relationships to not only Tash but other speakers and attendees that we met at that conference as well. We also chat about landing sponsors, landing key note speakers and all the good stuff in between. Tash has a huge place in our heart and we think she will have a huge place in yours too, if you let her in.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2823</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[24e91132fd1c82217bbcabfcbdd1196f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9323662681.mp3?updated=1662644560" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>034: How to Survey Your Audience</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-survey-your-audience</link>
      <description>Today you are going to learn all about how to do a survey, why it’s important, how to actually create the thing, a few of our tips and tricks, as well as some of the questions that you should actually consider asking inside of this bubbly delicious thing that’s going to give you so much information that you will be exploding with ideas by the end of it. So you need to make this sound like the best thing that has ever happened to your business.
Surveys have gotten a bad rap, but they can seriously do so much for you and your business. If you can incentivize and make it seem easy to do, you’ll be surprised how many people will actually give you really valuable feedback. It reminds your readers and your audience that they are literally helping shape the content that you create. Instead of just making up things that you think your audience wants, give them a platform to tell you what they actually need from you. Ready to learn how to create a badass survey? Listen in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 17 Mar 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Survey Your Audience</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>34</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today you are going to learn all about how to do a survey, why it’s important, how to actually create the thing, a few of our tips and tricks, as well as some of the questions that you should actually consider asking inside of this bubbly delicious...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today you are going to learn all about how to do a survey, why it’s important, how to actually create the thing, a few of our tips and tricks, as well as some of the questions that you should actually consider asking inside of this bubbly delicious thing that’s going to give you so much information that you will be exploding with ideas by the end of it. So you need to make this sound like the best thing that has ever happened to your business.
Surveys have gotten a bad rap, but they can seriously do so much for you and your business. If you can incentivize and make it seem easy to do, you’ll be surprised how many people will actually give you really valuable feedback. It reminds your readers and your audience that they are literally helping shape the content that you create. Instead of just making up things that you think your audience wants, give them a platform to tell you what they actually need from you. Ready to learn how to create a badass survey? Listen in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today you are going to learn all about how to do a survey, why it’s important, how to actually create the thing, a few of our tips and tricks, as well as some of the questions that you should actually consider asking inside of this bubbly delicious thing that’s going to give you so much information that you will be exploding with ideas by the end of it. So you need to make this sound like the best thing that has ever happened to your business.</p><p>Surveys have gotten a bad rap, but they can seriously do so much for you and your business. If you can incentivize and make it seem easy to do, you’ll be surprised how many people will actually give you really valuable feedback. It reminds your readers and your audience that they are literally helping shape the content that you create. Instead of just making up things that you think your audience wants, give them a platform to tell you what they actually need from you. Ready to learn how to create a badass survey? Listen in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2481</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e85ce2d8869d9aaf79ffee0535e2a792]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4631294569.mp3?updated=1662644554" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>033: Building Close Client Relationships as a Nomadic Business with Sarah Laurence of Sarah Evelyn Edits</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/building-close-client-relationships-as-a-nomadic-business</link>
      <description>Oh my gosh! We are so excited to have Sarah on the podcast today. Sarah was our first hire here at TCC and has been with us the longest. We still remember her first email to us, asking to be part of the team — it was definitely a heaven sent! Sarah is awesome, we love her, she is amazing, and plays a big role in this team. You may not know this, but we are not the greatest spellers and grammar is for sure not our forte, so thank goodness for Sarah. She is our editor for the blog, who makes everything super wonderful and polished.
Now you might think that when hiring an editor, all you are getting are some spelling fixes and maybe a couple of extra commas. We are here to tell you that you most definitely get a whole lot more than that! What an editor brings to your blog is to polish the content and keep your voice in tact, while also acting as an accountability partner to help you keep on a consistent publishing schedule. Sarah also helps to improve SEO by making sure that not only are links working and things spelled correctly, but that various industry standard SEO steps have been implemented for each post, including older ones. All of this consistency ensures that our readers know exactly what to expect and that the content is delivered as promised.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Mar 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Building Close Client Relationships as a Nomadic Business with Sarah Laurence of Sarah Evelyn Edits</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>33</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Oh my gosh! We are so excited to have Sarah on the podcast today. Sarah was our first hire here at TCC and has been with us the longest. We still remember her first email to us, asking to be part of the team — it was definitely a heaven sent! Sarah...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Oh my gosh! We are so excited to have Sarah on the podcast today. Sarah was our first hire here at TCC and has been with us the longest. We still remember her first email to us, asking to be part of the team — it was definitely a heaven sent! Sarah is awesome, we love her, she is amazing, and plays a big role in this team. You may not know this, but we are not the greatest spellers and grammar is for sure not our forte, so thank goodness for Sarah. She is our editor for the blog, who makes everything super wonderful and polished.
Now you might think that when hiring an editor, all you are getting are some spelling fixes and maybe a couple of extra commas. We are here to tell you that you most definitely get a whole lot more than that! What an editor brings to your blog is to polish the content and keep your voice in tact, while also acting as an accountability partner to help you keep on a consistent publishing schedule. Sarah also helps to improve SEO by making sure that not only are links working and things spelled correctly, but that various industry standard SEO steps have been implemented for each post, including older ones. All of this consistency ensures that our readers know exactly what to expect and that the content is delivered as promised.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Oh my gosh! We are so excited to have Sarah on the podcast today. Sarah was our first hire here at TCC and has been with us the longest. We still remember her first email to us, asking to be part of the team — it was definitely a heaven sent! Sarah is awesome, we love her, she is amazing, and plays a big role in this team. You may not know this, but we are not the greatest spellers and grammar is for sure not our forte, so thank goodness for Sarah. She is our editor for the blog, who makes everything super wonderful and polished.</p><p>Now you might think that when hiring an editor, all you are getting are some spelling fixes and maybe a couple of extra commas. We are here to tell you that you most definitely get a whole lot more than that! What an editor brings to your blog is to polish the content and keep your voice in tact, while also acting as an accountability partner to help you keep on a consistent publishing schedule. Sarah also helps to improve SEO by making sure that not only are links working and things spelled correctly, but that various industry standard SEO steps have been implemented for each post, including older ones. All of this consistency ensures that our readers know exactly what to expect and that the content is delivered as promised.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2871</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d3b5be28295d00a54fbb0dd5257cf9ab]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7766189047.mp3?updated=1662644580" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>032: Resisting Trends &amp; Missing Opportunities</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/resisting-trends-and-missing-opportunities</link>
      <description>Lately, we’ve seen a lot of people rebel, and not in a good way. There is a little bit of anti-trend setting happening, and although we totally fit in with the weirdos and the misfits, we need to give you guys a little bit of a reality check about the difference between marketing tactics that work and trends that you can spin your own style on. We are going to peel back the layers, Shrek style, so you can better understand how to move past the fear of not understanding and learn how to use these tactics for your unique business.
Today is going to be a lot of a this versus that conversation and we are going to give you a peek into a lot of the pushback that we hear from our audience and those in the online creative space. We are going to break down the difference between marketing tactics, style, and branding. So if you are looking to get some ideas on how you can spin these tactics and make them work for you and your own business, then listen in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 13 Mar 2017 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Resisting Trends &amp; Missing Opportunities</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>32</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Lately, we’ve seen a lot of people rebel, and not in a good way. There is a little bit of anti-trend setting happening, and although we totally fit in with the weirdos and the misfits, we need to give you guys a little bit of a reality check about...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Lately, we’ve seen a lot of people rebel, and not in a good way. There is a little bit of anti-trend setting happening, and although we totally fit in with the weirdos and the misfits, we need to give you guys a little bit of a reality check about the difference between marketing tactics that work and trends that you can spin your own style on. We are going to peel back the layers, Shrek style, so you can better understand how to move past the fear of not understanding and learn how to use these tactics for your unique business.
Today is going to be a lot of a this versus that conversation and we are going to give you a peek into a lot of the pushback that we hear from our audience and those in the online creative space. We are going to break down the difference between marketing tactics, style, and branding. So if you are looking to get some ideas on how you can spin these tactics and make them work for you and your own business, then listen in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Lately, we’ve seen a lot of people rebel, and not in a good way. There is a little bit of anti-trend setting happening, and although we totally fit in with the weirdos and the misfits, we need to give you guys a little bit of a reality check about the difference between marketing tactics that work and trends that you can spin your own style on. We are going to peel back the layers, Shrek style, so you can better understand how to move past the fear of not understanding and learn how to use these tactics for your unique business.</p><p>Today is going to be a lot of a this versus that conversation and we are going to give you a peek into a lot of the pushback that we hear from our audience and those in the online creative space. We are going to break down the difference between marketing tactics, style, and branding. So if you are looking to get some ideas on how you can spin these tactics and make them work for you and your own business, then listen in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2449</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[011f88953d43b98667fd5dc91459a326]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6985713796.mp3?updated=1662648601" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>031: The Secret Parallel Universe of Wholesaling with Katie Hunt of Tradeshow Bootcamp</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-secret-parallel-universe-of-wholesaling</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Katie Hunt with us, and it is going to be an absolute showdown — tradeshow showdown! Katie knows all the secret stuff about this whole secret universe that they call “wholesale”. Now although neither of us live in this parallel universe, Katie definitely does and she has a ton of knowledge to share with us. Katie has been wholesaling and dealing with the wholesale world since 2009 and has always had the entrepreneurial bug, even back in the day selling friendship bracelets to all her friends.
Katie shares how she first got started in the wholesaling industry, going from making wedding invitations and cards for all of her friends to a full-blown Etsy shop of her own. She has spent the last 16 years coaching large corporations and entrepreneurs on marketing and business development strategies. Her strengths lie in connecting people and bringing ideas to life – brainstorming, making a plan and executing. Katie has a passion for creating, a mind for business, and a strong desire to help others succeed. So if you want to soak up all her knowledge, then you’d better listen in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 10 Mar 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Secret Parallel Universe of Wholesaling with Katie Hunt of Tradeshow Bootcamp</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>31</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Katie Hunt with us, and it is going to be an absolute showdown — tradeshow showdown! Katie knows all the secret stuff about this whole secret universe that they call “wholesale”. Now although neither of us live in...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Katie Hunt with us, and it is going to be an absolute showdown — tradeshow showdown! Katie knows all the secret stuff about this whole secret universe that they call “wholesale”. Now although neither of us live in this parallel universe, Katie definitely does and she has a ton of knowledge to share with us. Katie has been wholesaling and dealing with the wholesale world since 2009 and has always had the entrepreneurial bug, even back in the day selling friendship bracelets to all her friends.
Katie shares how she first got started in the wholesaling industry, going from making wedding invitations and cards for all of her friends to a full-blown Etsy shop of her own. She has spent the last 16 years coaching large corporations and entrepreneurs on marketing and business development strategies. Her strengths lie in connecting people and bringing ideas to life – brainstorming, making a plan and executing. Katie has a passion for creating, a mind for business, and a strong desire to help others succeed. So if you want to soak up all her knowledge, then you’d better listen in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Katie Hunt with us, and it is going to be an absolute showdown — tradeshow showdown! Katie knows all the secret stuff about this whole secret universe that they call “wholesale”. Now although neither of us live in this parallel universe, Katie definitely does and she has a ton of knowledge to share with us. Katie has been wholesaling and dealing with the wholesale world since 2009 and has always had the entrepreneurial bug, even back in the day selling friendship bracelets to all her friends.</p><p>Katie shares how she first got started in the wholesaling industry, going from making wedding invitations and cards for all of her friends to a full-blown Etsy shop of her own. She has spent the last 16 years coaching large corporations and entrepreneurs on marketing and business development strategies. Her strengths lie in connecting people and bringing ideas to life – brainstorming, making a plan and executing. Katie has a passion for creating, a mind for business, and a strong desire to help others succeed. So if you want to soak up all her knowledge, then you’d better listen in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2689</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1de74dd675996b4b15045a27530e07c2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6862413868.mp3?updated=1662648556" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>030: Women in Business By The Numbers and Why We Serve You</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/women-in-business-by-the-numbers-and-why-we-serve-you</link>
      <description>Alrighty babes, today we are getting super nerdy. We are bringing you some stats and some numbers, all in the hopes of giving you a little peek into why we do what we do. Because of what is going on in the world of small businesses, we hope to give you some motivation, a little bit of fire under your booty to keep doing the work, to keep being boss, to keep running your business, strategizing, and continually doing better at whatever it is that you are taking on.
Uncovering what our mission is and why it is what it is, we know that you will come out with a little bit of clarity on getting to the heart of your business and being able to voice it to other people. We have dug deep and done our research, and the bottom line is that there are not enough women business owners out there who are successful enough to be profitable enough to contribute to society, contribute to their families, and contribute to changing the stats across the United States! We hope that hearing these numbers inspires you to find your own mission, and living out your why.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 Mar 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Women in Business By The Numbers and Why We Serve You</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>30</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Alrighty babes, today we are getting super nerdy. We are bringing you some stats and some numbers, all in the hopes of giving you a little peek into why we do what we do. Because of what is going on in the world of small businesses, we hope to give...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Alrighty babes, today we are getting super nerdy. We are bringing you some stats and some numbers, all in the hopes of giving you a little peek into why we do what we do. Because of what is going on in the world of small businesses, we hope to give you some motivation, a little bit of fire under your booty to keep doing the work, to keep being boss, to keep running your business, strategizing, and continually doing better at whatever it is that you are taking on.
Uncovering what our mission is and why it is what it is, we know that you will come out with a little bit of clarity on getting to the heart of your business and being able to voice it to other people. We have dug deep and done our research, and the bottom line is that there are not enough women business owners out there who are successful enough to be profitable enough to contribute to society, contribute to their families, and contribute to changing the stats across the United States! We hope that hearing these numbers inspires you to find your own mission, and living out your why.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Alrighty babes, today we are getting super nerdy. We are bringing you some stats and some numbers, all in the hopes of giving you a little peek into why we do what we do. Because of what is going on in the world of small businesses, we hope to give you some motivation, a little bit of fire under your booty to keep doing the work, to keep being boss, to keep running your business, strategizing, and continually doing better at whatever it is that you are taking on.</p><p>Uncovering what our mission is and why it is what it is, we know that you will come out with a little bit of clarity on getting to the heart of your business and being able to voice it to other people. We have dug deep and done our research, and the bottom line is that there are not enough women business owners out there who are successful enough to be profitable enough to contribute to society, contribute to their families, and contribute to changing the stats across the United States! We hope that hearing these numbers inspires you to find your own mission, and living out your why.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2589</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[73f3e10e1dc8a9ad116785b60f4c0f34]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6295349564.mp3?updated=1662644589" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>029: Becoming the Face of Your Business Through Brand Photography with Mallika Malhotra of MikiFoto</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/becoming-the-face-of-your-business-through-brand-photography</link>
      <description>Have you been aiming to become the face of your business, but just not sure how exactly to do it? Well, you are in luck! In this episode we have our friend Mallika from MikiFoto with us and that is precisely what she is coming on to share with you guys today. We got to meet Mallika last year at The Savvy Experience and have loved watching as she shifted her business to do more lifestyle branded headshots and photography for small businesses and creative entrepreneurs.
In our chat with Mallika, we jump into the importance of being the face of your business, exactly what you should be doing to find the right photographer for you, how to prepare for your shoot, what to wear, and how to make these photos last longer than three months. We also get into the most important shots you need for your business so that you can take away from this photo session exactly what you need to prosper online. We are super excited for you to listen more, because she’s legit, guys. So get excited!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 06 Mar 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Becoming the Face of Your Business Through Brand Photography with Mallika Malhotra of MikiFoto</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>29</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you been aiming to become the face of your business, but just not sure how exactly to do it? Well, you are in luck! In this episode we have our friend Mallika from MikiFoto with us and that is precisely what she is coming on to share with you...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you been aiming to become the face of your business, but just not sure how exactly to do it? Well, you are in luck! In this episode we have our friend Mallika from MikiFoto with us and that is precisely what she is coming on to share with you guys today. We got to meet Mallika last year at The Savvy Experience and have loved watching as she shifted her business to do more lifestyle branded headshots and photography for small businesses and creative entrepreneurs.
In our chat with Mallika, we jump into the importance of being the face of your business, exactly what you should be doing to find the right photographer for you, how to prepare for your shoot, what to wear, and how to make these photos last longer than three months. We also get into the most important shots you need for your business so that you can take away from this photo session exactly what you need to prosper online. We are super excited for you to listen more, because she’s legit, guys. So get excited!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you been aiming to become the face of your business, but just not sure how exactly to do it? Well, you are in luck! In this episode we have our friend Mallika from MikiFoto with us and that is precisely what she is coming on to share with you guys today. We got to meet Mallika last year at The Savvy Experience and have loved watching as she shifted her business to do more lifestyle branded headshots and photography for small businesses and creative entrepreneurs.</p><p>In our chat with Mallika, we jump into the importance of being the face of your business, exactly what you should be doing to find the right photographer for you, how to prepare for your shoot, what to wear, and how to make these photos last longer than three months. We also get into the most important shots you need for your business so that you can take away from this photo session exactly what you need to prosper online. We are super excited for you to listen more, because she’s legit, guys. So get excited!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3010</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[fcbd20965b14027b9cad6ebd4dc756e3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3925974346.mp3?updated=1663443791" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>028: Using Your Past to Help Shape Your Future: How to Persevere Through Tough Times</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/using-your-past-for-your-future</link>
      <description>For today’s episode, maybe have a glass of wine when while you’re listening to it. Kick back in your PJ’s, just chill, and be with us for a second. We are getting super real today. Not that we are any less real any other day, but we are taking it way back today.
We hear so often that lives on Instagram look fancier than they are, and that Facebook portrays a certain façade. However, we are also really are in tune with being authentic for you guys and portraying our real selves as much as we can. We show our real selves as we are now and I think sometimes we forget where people have come from and what they have gone through in order to get to be where they are today. So that is exactly what we are doing today.
We are going to share all the way back to when we were little wee babies and perhaps you can relate to some of the things that we bring up. Hopefully, you can begin to understand that it’s not just sparkles, unicorns, and Starbucks over here all the time. So grab some tissues, maybe some wine, and just hang out with us. Let’s get to know each other a bit.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 03 Mar 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Using Your Past to Help Shape Your Future: How to Persevere Through Tough Times</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>28</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>For today’s episode, maybe have a glass of wine when while you’re listening to it. Kick back in your PJ’s, just chill, and be with us for a second. We are getting super real today. Not that we are any less real any other day, but we are taking...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>For today’s episode, maybe have a glass of wine when while you’re listening to it. Kick back in your PJ’s, just chill, and be with us for a second. We are getting super real today. Not that we are any less real any other day, but we are taking it way back today.
We hear so often that lives on Instagram look fancier than they are, and that Facebook portrays a certain façade. However, we are also really are in tune with being authentic for you guys and portraying our real selves as much as we can. We show our real selves as we are now and I think sometimes we forget where people have come from and what they have gone through in order to get to be where they are today. So that is exactly what we are doing today.
We are going to share all the way back to when we were little wee babies and perhaps you can relate to some of the things that we bring up. Hopefully, you can begin to understand that it’s not just sparkles, unicorns, and Starbucks over here all the time. So grab some tissues, maybe some wine, and just hang out with us. Let’s get to know each other a bit.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For today’s episode, maybe have a glass of wine when while you’re listening to it. Kick back in your PJ’s, just chill, and be with us for a second. We are getting super real today. Not that we are any less real any other day, but we are taking it way back today.</p><p>We hear so often that lives on Instagram look fancier than they are, and that Facebook portrays a certain façade. However, we are also really are in tune with being authentic for you guys and portraying our real selves as much as we can. We show our real selves as we are now and I think sometimes we forget where people have come from and what they have gone through in order to get to be where they are today. So that is exactly what we are doing today.</p><p>We are going to share all the way back to when we were little wee babies and perhaps you can relate to some of the things that we bring up. Hopefully, you can begin to understand that it’s not just sparkles, unicorns, and Starbucks over here all the time. So grab some tissues, maybe some wine, and just hang out with us. Let’s get to know each other a bit.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to: <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2502</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2a41706501f35a75c3277702f0b665cd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5633668819.mp3?updated=1663442745" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>027: How to Niche Down Your Business and Stand Out Above the Noise with Jessica Stansberry of Oh Hey Jessica</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-niche-down-and-stand-out</link>
      <description>Today we have our little country soul sister, Jessica Stansberry, from Oh Hey Jessica on the show. We are super excited for you to dive into this episode. Pre-warning, grab your sweet tea, grab some lemonade, grab a biscuit, and kick your feet up on a porch because her accent is going to want to make you go all Sweet Home Alabama style.
In today’s episode, we are talking about niching down and what it can do for your business, how exactly Jessica went about doing this, and how it helped her business to grow. We also dive into some of the things she was able to accomplish because of it, what you might be able to do as a newbie, and what you can do if you’ve already started your business. Finally, we find out how you might build and see success and whether or not it is possible to niche down too far. We definitely get a little crazy inside this episode, so get ready to dive right in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 Mar 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Niche Down Your Business and Stand Out Above the Noise with Jessica Stansberry of Oh Hey Jessica</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>27</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we have our little country soul sister, Jessica Stansberry, from Oh Hey Jessica on the show. We are super excited for you to dive into this episode. Pre-warning, grab your sweet tea, grab some lemonade, grab a biscuit, and kick your feet up on a...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we have our little country soul sister, Jessica Stansberry, from Oh Hey Jessica on the show. We are super excited for you to dive into this episode. Pre-warning, grab your sweet tea, grab some lemonade, grab a biscuit, and kick your feet up on a porch because her accent is going to want to make you go all Sweet Home Alabama style.
In today’s episode, we are talking about niching down and what it can do for your business, how exactly Jessica went about doing this, and how it helped her business to grow. We also dive into some of the things she was able to accomplish because of it, what you might be able to do as a newbie, and what you can do if you’ve already started your business. Finally, we find out how you might build and see success and whether or not it is possible to niche down too far. We definitely get a little crazy inside this episode, so get ready to dive right in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we have our little country soul sister, Jessica Stansberry, from Oh Hey Jessica on the show. We are super excited for you to dive into this episode. Pre-warning, grab your sweet tea, grab some lemonade, grab a biscuit, and kick your feet up on a porch because her accent is going to want to make you go all Sweet Home Alabama style.</p><p>In today’s episode, we are talking about niching down and what it can do for your business, how exactly Jessica went about doing this, and how it helped her business to grow. We also dive into some of the things she was able to accomplish because of it, what you might be able to do as a newbie, and what you can do if you’ve already started your business. Finally, we find out how you might build and see success and whether or not it is possible to niche down too far. We definitely get a little crazy inside this episode, so get ready to dive right in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3133</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6b873e8876c33590a0650a9752035047]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM5873222170.mp3?updated=1663442728" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>026: The Truth About Launching a Podcast</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-truth-about-launching-a-podcast</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we are getting into a little inception. We are talking about podcasting whilst podcast, which is going deep, you guys. In today’s episode we are revealing the truth behind podcasting, why we even started, how much all this should cost, and our entire process of how we go from idea to getting it uploaded to iTunes, on the blog, and all of that good stuff.
Whether you are looking for fast growth, or whether you are looking to build a foundation by starting a podcasting, keep in mind, it’s going to cost you an arm and a leg to make it happen. So if this is something that you’ve been mulling around in your head, maybe we can be the voice of reason to tell you everything that is in store and whether or not this is the right move for you and your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
To download the transcript of this episode head to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 27 Feb 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Truth About Launching a Podcast</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>26</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we are getting into a little inception. We are talking about podcasting whilst podcast, which is going deep, you guys. In today’s episode we are revealing the truth behind podcasting, why we even started, how much all this...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we are getting into a little inception. We are talking about podcasting whilst podcast, which is going deep, you guys. In today’s episode we are revealing the truth behind podcasting, why we even started, how much all this should cost, and our entire process of how we go from idea to getting it uploaded to iTunes, on the blog, and all of that good stuff.
Whether you are looking for fast growth, or whether you are looking to build a foundation by starting a podcasting, keep in mind, it’s going to cost you an arm and a leg to make it happen. So if this is something that you’ve been mulling around in your head, maybe we can be the voice of reason to tell you everything that is in store and whether or not this is the right move for you and your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
To download the transcript of this episode head to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we are getting into a little inception. We are talking about podcasting whilst podcast, which is going deep, you guys. In today’s episode we are revealing the truth behind podcasting, why we even started, how much all this should cost, and our entire process of how we go from idea to getting it uploaded to iTunes, on the blog, and all of that good stuff.</p><p>Whether you are looking for fast growth, or whether you are looking to build a foundation by starting a podcasting, keep in mind, it’s going to cost you an arm and a leg to make it happen. So if this is something that you’ve been mulling around in your head, maybe we can be the voice of reason to tell you everything that is in store and whether or not this is the right move for you and your business.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.</p><p>To download the transcript of this episode head to: <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2904</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7c8ec6ee83f86dda04956dd5d3a78f2f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4468777980.mp3?updated=1663442715" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>025: Curating a Profitable Lifestyle Brand with Melissa Johnson of Best Friends for Frosting</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/curating-a-profitable-lifestyle-brand</link>
      <description>I hope you have some pink on because we have Melissa Johnson of Best Friends for Frosting on the podcast today. This woman is bubbly and sparkly, and she loves all things sugar coated and confetti covered. Melissa started her blog after realizing the earning potential of the industry and found herself best-suited in the role of creative director of this lifestyle business. With Melissa, you will get a peek inside a successful lifestyle brand. We’re talking four straight years of making six figures! She doesn’t mess around. She is working on sponsor content, surveying her audience, expanding her team, and we’re talking about all those things inside this episode today.
For those of you who think that a money generating lifestyle blog or brand is out of your reach, we would love for you to sit down and give this one a listen and maybe learn that with some strategy and the right tools, you can actually make that happen.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 24 Feb 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Curating a Profitable Lifestyle Brand with Melissa Johnson of Best Friends for Frosting</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>25</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I hope you have some pink on because we have Melissa Johnson of Best Friends for Frosting on the podcast today. This woman is bubbly and sparkly, and she loves all things sugar coated and confetti covered. Melissa started her blog after realizing...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I hope you have some pink on because we have Melissa Johnson of Best Friends for Frosting on the podcast today. This woman is bubbly and sparkly, and she loves all things sugar coated and confetti covered. Melissa started her blog after realizing the earning potential of the industry and found herself best-suited in the role of creative director of this lifestyle business. With Melissa, you will get a peek inside a successful lifestyle brand. We’re talking four straight years of making six figures! She doesn’t mess around. She is working on sponsor content, surveying her audience, expanding her team, and we’re talking about all those things inside this episode today.
For those of you who think that a money generating lifestyle blog or brand is out of your reach, we would love for you to sit down and give this one a listen and maybe learn that with some strategy and the right tools, you can actually make that happen.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I hope you have some pink on because we have Melissa Johnson of Best Friends for Frosting on the podcast today. This woman is bubbly and sparkly, and she loves all things sugar coated and confetti covered. Melissa started her blog after realizing the earning potential of the industry and found herself best-suited in the role of creative director of this lifestyle business. With Melissa, you will get a peek inside a successful lifestyle brand. We’re talking four straight years of making six figures! She doesn’t mess around. She is working on sponsor content, surveying her audience, expanding her team, and we’re talking about all those things inside this episode today.</p><p>For those of you who think that a money generating lifestyle blog or brand is out of your reach, we would love for you to sit down and give this one a listen and maybe learn that with some strategy and the right tools, you can actually make that happen.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2756</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e6ed12f9333441e9d689409897610ce6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4598729645.mp3?updated=1663442666" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>024: Dealing with Imposter Syndrome Using Affirmations</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/dealing-with-imposter-syndrome-using-affirmations</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast, we are getting a little “woo-woo”. We’re connecting to the universe, checking in with ourselves, and getting right into talking about affirmations today and specifically how affirmations can be integrated as part of your everyday routines. We show you just how simple and easy it is, as well as the impacts that they have had on us personally as business owners in regards to growth, stats, and all the good feelings.
We break down how we use them and how we integrate them into our routines so you can start to do it too. Specifically, we identify how affirmations can start to kind of tap in and shift and change that icky imposter syndrome that a lot of us, especially as creatives, deal with. There are some days you just wake up and you don’t feel like you deserve what you have been given in this world or you feel like you are not as good as the way other people treat you. That’s icky and you don’t deserve to feel that way, ever. So we are going to help do the mindset work that is going to help you to create a daily routine, to help you have a better mindset and a better outlook on your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Feb 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Dealing with Imposter Syndrome Using Affirmations</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>24</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast, we are getting a little “woo-woo”. We’re connecting to the universe, checking in with ourselves, and getting right into talking about affirmations today and specifically how affirmations can be integrated as part of your...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast, we are getting a little “woo-woo”. We’re connecting to the universe, checking in with ourselves, and getting right into talking about affirmations today and specifically how affirmations can be integrated as part of your everyday routines. We show you just how simple and easy it is, as well as the impacts that they have had on us personally as business owners in regards to growth, stats, and all the good feelings.
We break down how we use them and how we integrate them into our routines so you can start to do it too. Specifically, we identify how affirmations can start to kind of tap in and shift and change that icky imposter syndrome that a lot of us, especially as creatives, deal with. There are some days you just wake up and you don’t feel like you deserve what you have been given in this world or you feel like you are not as good as the way other people treat you. That’s icky and you don’t deserve to feel that way, ever. So we are going to help do the mindset work that is going to help you to create a daily routine, to help you have a better mindset and a better outlook on your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast, we are getting a little “woo-woo”. We’re connecting to the universe, checking in with ourselves, and getting right into talking about affirmations today and specifically how affirmations can be integrated as part of your everyday routines. We show you just how simple and easy it is, as well as the impacts that they have had on us personally as business owners in regards to growth, stats, and all the good feelings.</p><p>We break down how we use them and how we integrate them into our routines so you can start to do it too. Specifically, we identify how affirmations can start to kind of tap in and shift and change that icky imposter syndrome that a lot of us, especially as creatives, deal with. There are some days you just wake up and you don’t feel like you deserve what you have been given in this world or you feel like you are not as good as the way other people treat you. That’s icky and you don’t deserve to feel that way, ever. So we are going to help do the mindset work that is going to help you to create a daily routine, to help you have a better mindset and a better outlook on your business.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2862</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f53bfa59c10a49fffe67d0ca60eff518]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4199614335.mp3?updated=1663442611" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>023: Becoming an Instagram Influencer (even with a small following) with Lauren Taylor of Trend Magazine</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/becoming-an-instagram-influencer-with-lauren-taylor</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we get to chat with Lauren Taylor of Trend Magazine and Lauren is such a sweetheart! We have known her for almost a year now and have been following her and all she does with her magazine. We are absolutely thrilled to see her growth and all of the amazing accomplishments she has had in such a short time. We dive into the super sexy topic of becoming an Instagram influencer. We get a ton of questions about this and many people wanting to incorporate being an influencer into their brands.
Lauren shares exactly how she has been able to nail down big brands like Aerie and Campbell’s Soup. She breaks down all the steps that she takes in initiating that conversation, how to build that foundation, how she plans out her content calendar and takes the images, plus all of the tips and tricks that she has been using to grow the influencer side of her brand. She even reveals why she does not actually call herself a “social media influencer” and how that can actually have a better impact on your brand. So get your notebook out because there are a lot of action steps in this episode, seriously!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 20 Feb 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Becoming an Instagram Influencer (even with a small following) with Lauren Taylor of Trend Magazine</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>23</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we get to chat with Lauren Taylor of Trend Magazine and Lauren is such a sweetheart! We have known her for almost a year now and have been following her and all she does with her magazine. We are absolutely thrilled to see her...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we get to chat with Lauren Taylor of Trend Magazine and Lauren is such a sweetheart! We have known her for almost a year now and have been following her and all she does with her magazine. We are absolutely thrilled to see her growth and all of the amazing accomplishments she has had in such a short time. We dive into the super sexy topic of becoming an Instagram influencer. We get a ton of questions about this and many people wanting to incorporate being an influencer into their brands.
Lauren shares exactly how she has been able to nail down big brands like Aerie and Campbell’s Soup. She breaks down all the steps that she takes in initiating that conversation, how to build that foundation, how she plans out her content calendar and takes the images, plus all of the tips and tricks that she has been using to grow the influencer side of her brand. She even reveals why she does not actually call herself a “social media influencer” and how that can actually have a better impact on your brand. So get your notebook out because there are a lot of action steps in this episode, seriously!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we get to chat with Lauren Taylor of Trend Magazine and Lauren is such a sweetheart! We have known her for almost a year now and have been following her and all she does with her magazine. We are absolutely thrilled to see her growth and all of the amazing accomplishments she has had in such a short time. We dive into the super sexy topic of becoming an Instagram influencer. We get a ton of questions about this and many people wanting to incorporate being an influencer into their brands.</p><p>Lauren shares exactly how she has been able to nail down big brands like Aerie and Campbell’s Soup. She breaks down all the steps that she takes in initiating that conversation, how to build that foundation, how she plans out her content calendar and takes the images, plus all of the tips and tricks that she has been using to grow the influencer side of her brand. She even reveals why she does not actually call herself a “social media influencer” and how that can actually have a better impact on your brand. So get your notebook out because there are a lot of action steps in this episode, seriously!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://www.thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2884</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[56814973910e7917403001f8c9bd110c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7914271671.mp3?updated=1663442496" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>022: The Secret to Scaling &amp; Growing Your Team</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/the-secret-to-scaling-and-growing-your-team</link>
      <description>Ever wonder how to go about growing your business and which strategy to pursue? Maybe you feel stuck and you are at the breaking point where something’s got to give. Well, today on the podcast we jump into exactly how to scale and grow your team and the questions you need to be asking yourself before you even realize whether a team is the right move for you. Because some of you, the team might not be the answer; it just might be what you think is the answer.
We dive right into the nitty-gritty details of how much you should be spending on new team members, how much you should be paying them, and of course, what the differences are between employees and contractors. We also tackle some of the fears and mentality shifts of what it means to run a team inside your own business. Specifically, we narrow it down so you can find out for yourself whether you are ready for a team, how to make that actually happen, and the critical questions you should be asking. So hang on tight, and join us as we dive into some killer growth strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 17 Feb 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Secret to Scaling &amp; Growing Your Team</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>22</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Ever wonder how to go about growing your business and which strategy to pursue? Maybe you feel stuck and you are at the breaking point where something’s got to give. Well, today on the podcast we jump into exactly how to scale and grow your team and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Ever wonder how to go about growing your business and which strategy to pursue? Maybe you feel stuck and you are at the breaking point where something’s got to give. Well, today on the podcast we jump into exactly how to scale and grow your team and the questions you need to be asking yourself before you even realize whether a team is the right move for you. Because some of you, the team might not be the answer; it just might be what you think is the answer.
We dive right into the nitty-gritty details of how much you should be spending on new team members, how much you should be paying them, and of course, what the differences are between employees and contractors. We also tackle some of the fears and mentality shifts of what it means to run a team inside your own business. Specifically, we narrow it down so you can find out for yourself whether you are ready for a team, how to make that actually happen, and the critical questions you should be asking. So hang on tight, and join us as we dive into some killer growth strategy!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ever wonder how to go about growing your business and which strategy to pursue? Maybe you feel stuck and you are at the breaking point where something’s got to give. Well, today on the podcast we jump into exactly how to scale and grow your team and the questions you need to be asking yourself before you even realize whether a team is the right move for you. Because some of you, the team might not be the answer; it just might be what you think is the answer.</p><p>We dive right into the nitty-gritty details of how much you should be spending on new team members, how much you should be paying them, and of course, what the differences are between employees and contractors. We also tackle some of the fears and mentality shifts of what it means to run a team inside your own business. Specifically, we narrow it down so you can find out for yourself whether you are ready for a team, how to make that actually happen, and the critical questions you should be asking. So hang on tight, and join us as we dive into some killer growth strategy!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3083</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[14a779f95075374e509be2670d69cb76]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1032988430.mp3?updated=1663442335" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>021: DIY Blogger to Instagram All-Star to Shop Owner with Jeff &amp; Kelly Mindell of Studio DIY</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/diy-blogging-and-instagram-allstars-jeff-and-kelly-mindell-of-studio-diy</link>
      <description>We first discovered Jeff on Instagram. Jeff is a photographer who loves to take a lot of architectural images, and so naturally we fell in love with his work. Not long after, we discovered his wife, Kelly, and we just absolutely had to follow them both! We followed their work for a year and a half before reaching out to them, and it’s been such a fun journey getting know them on a more personal level, getting the inside scoop on how their business actually runs.
If you know of Studio DIY, you know very much that they have hundreds of thousands of followers on Instagram, and that their DIY blog is pretty outstanding. In our talk with them, we discover more about their journey of what the early days of Studio DIY looked like, how they were beginning to build sponsorship and affiliate relationships, and how they decided what to charge. They also share what it was like branching out and creating their own physical product line.
Since then they’ve done a lot of growth and implemented tons of incredible strategies in their business to make it what it is today. So if you are a DIY’er yourself, you absolutely have to give this one and listen!
 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Feb 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>DIY Blogger to Instagram All-Star to Shop Owner with Jeff &amp; Kelly Mindell of Studio DIY</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>21</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We first discovered Jeff on Instagram. Jeff is a photographer who loves to take a lot of architectural images, and so naturally we fell in love with his work. Not long after, we discovered his wife, Kelly, and we just absolutely had to follow them...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We first discovered Jeff on Instagram. Jeff is a photographer who loves to take a lot of architectural images, and so naturally we fell in love with his work. Not long after, we discovered his wife, Kelly, and we just absolutely had to follow them both! We followed their work for a year and a half before reaching out to them, and it’s been such a fun journey getting know them on a more personal level, getting the inside scoop on how their business actually runs.
If you know of Studio DIY, you know very much that they have hundreds of thousands of followers on Instagram, and that their DIY blog is pretty outstanding. In our talk with them, we discover more about their journey of what the early days of Studio DIY looked like, how they were beginning to build sponsorship and affiliate relationships, and how they decided what to charge. They also share what it was like branching out and creating their own physical product line.
Since then they’ve done a lot of growth and implemented tons of incredible strategies in their business to make it what it is today. So if you are a DIY’er yourself, you absolutely have to give this one and listen!
 
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We first discovered Jeff on Instagram. Jeff is a photographer who loves to take a lot of architectural images, and so naturally we fell in love with his work. Not long after, we discovered his wife, Kelly, and we just absolutely had to follow them both! We followed their work for a year and a half before reaching out to them, and it’s been such a fun journey getting know them on a more personal level, getting the inside scoop on how their business actually runs.</p><p>If you know of Studio DIY, you know very much that they have hundreds of thousands of followers on Instagram, and that their DIY blog is pretty outstanding. In our talk with them, we discover more about their journey of what the early days of Studio DIY looked like, how they were beginning to build sponsorship and affiliate relationships, and how they decided what to charge. They also share what it was like branching out and creating their own physical product line.</p><p>Since then they’ve done a lot of growth and implemented tons of incredible strategies in their business to make it what it is today. So if you are a DIY’er yourself, you absolutely have to give this one and listen!</p><p> </p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://www.thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2607</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dc7ee5257d7be84829e7db5aebd5cb2c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8210245559.mp3?updated=1663442383" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>020: How to Go From Collaborating to Business Partners</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/from-collaboration-to-business-partners</link>
      <description>As a two-woman team, we get a lot of questions about how we make a partnership work. We always get asked how we met, how we work as a team inside TCC, and what gave us the idea to make the leap from collaborators to business partners. We know it’s not necessarily super common, but it seems like everyone is always interested in seeing how this works. So we figured we would just share some of the actual tools and mindsets that we went through when we barely knew each other at first and started the business like normal people do of course.
When we first met we were each running our own businesses at the time, yet serving a similar clientele. We quickly learned that we had a lot in common and it was not long before we decided to work together, instead of doing the same things separately. We became really fast friends and we were talking literally every day. We realized that with every sentence that we spoke, it was the exact same dream and hope and goal that the other person had.
So if you want to get a little insight into how this partnership thing got started and how you could make a partnership potentially work inside your own business as well, then definitely stick around to find out more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 13 Feb 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Go From Collaborating to Business Partners</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>20</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>As a two-woman team, we get a lot of questions about how we make a partnership work. We always get asked how we met, how we work as a team inside TCC, and what gave us the idea to make the leap from collaborators to business partners. We know it’s...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>As a two-woman team, we get a lot of questions about how we make a partnership work. We always get asked how we met, how we work as a team inside TCC, and what gave us the idea to make the leap from collaborators to business partners. We know it’s not necessarily super common, but it seems like everyone is always interested in seeing how this works. So we figured we would just share some of the actual tools and mindsets that we went through when we barely knew each other at first and started the business like normal people do of course.
When we first met we were each running our own businesses at the time, yet serving a similar clientele. We quickly learned that we had a lot in common and it was not long before we decided to work together, instead of doing the same things separately. We became really fast friends and we were talking literally every day. We realized that with every sentence that we spoke, it was the exact same dream and hope and goal that the other person had.
So if you want to get a little insight into how this partnership thing got started and how you could make a partnership potentially work inside your own business as well, then definitely stick around to find out more!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>As a two-woman team, we get a lot of questions about how we make a partnership work. We always get asked how we met, how we work as a team inside TCC, and what gave us the idea to make the leap from collaborators to business partners. We know it’s not necessarily super common, but it seems like everyone is always interested in seeing how this works. So we figured we would just share some of the actual tools and mindsets that we went through when we barely knew each other at first and started the business like normal people do of course.</p><p>When we first met we were each running our own businesses at the time, yet serving a similar clientele. We quickly learned that we had a lot in common and it was not long before we decided to work together, instead of doing the same things separately. We became really fast friends and we were talking literally every day. We realized that with every sentence that we spoke, it was the exact same dream and hope and goal that the other person had.</p><p>So if you want to get a little insight into how this partnership thing got started and how you could make a partnership potentially work inside your own business as well, then definitely stick around to find out more!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3144</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5c4009de3b97a8e06ff8eb7b72ca81a3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7583721301.mp3?updated=1663442265" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>019: Working a Full-Time Job and Pursuing Your Creative Passions with Amber Housley</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/working-full-time-and-pursuing-your-creative-passion</link>
      <description>We are super excited to bring on our friend Amber Housley to the podcast today. We had the opportunity to meet Amber last year at the Savvy Experience and it was so wonderful getting to know her, getting to hang out with her, and learning more about what she does. Because if you all didn’t know, she does a lot!
Amber has her hands in a lot of creative businesses. She is rocking it at her own brand and along with that, she also has the Inspired Retreat, the Joyful Garden Planner, and her brand new course, Blooming Business Kits. In addition, she’s also the marketing director for Lara Casey Media, which means she has her hands in Southern Weddings, PowerSheets, everything Lara Casey. She’s a busy mama.
Together we dive into talking about that support role and what it’s like to not always play boss. We discuss the benefits, the challenges, what she’d love to change, and what it is truly like when you are resisting taking on that support role or embracing it completely. We also talk a little bit about balance and what it means to run a lot of creative businesses and have your hands in a lot of different pots. Amber is an amazing example, role model, and a very humble human being, so you definitely have to listen in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 10 Feb 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Working a Full-Time Job and Pursuing Your Creative Passions with Amber Housley</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>19</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are super excited to bring on our friend Amber Housley to the podcast today. We had the opportunity to meet Amber last year at the Savvy Experience and it was so wonderful getting to know her, getting to hang out with her, and learning more about...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are super excited to bring on our friend Amber Housley to the podcast today. We had the opportunity to meet Amber last year at the Savvy Experience and it was so wonderful getting to know her, getting to hang out with her, and learning more about what she does. Because if you all didn’t know, she does a lot!
Amber has her hands in a lot of creative businesses. She is rocking it at her own brand and along with that, she also has the Inspired Retreat, the Joyful Garden Planner, and her brand new course, Blooming Business Kits. In addition, she’s also the marketing director for Lara Casey Media, which means she has her hands in Southern Weddings, PowerSheets, everything Lara Casey. She’s a busy mama.
Together we dive into talking about that support role and what it’s like to not always play boss. We discuss the benefits, the challenges, what she’d love to change, and what it is truly like when you are resisting taking on that support role or embracing it completely. We also talk a little bit about balance and what it means to run a lot of creative businesses and have your hands in a lot of different pots. Amber is an amazing example, role model, and a very humble human being, so you definitely have to listen in!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are super excited to bring on our friend Amber Housley to the podcast today. We had the opportunity to meet Amber last year at the Savvy Experience and it was so wonderful getting to know her, getting to hang out with her, and learning more about what she does. Because if you all didn’t know, she does a lot!</p><p>Amber has her hands in a lot of creative businesses. She is rocking it at her own brand and along with that, she also has the Inspired Retreat, the Joyful Garden Planner, and her brand new course, Blooming Business Kits. In addition, she’s also the marketing director for Lara Casey Media, which means she has her hands in Southern Weddings, PowerSheets, everything Lara Casey. She’s a busy mama.</p><p>Together we dive into talking about that support role and what it’s like to not always play boss. We discuss the benefits, the challenges, what she’d love to change, and what it is truly like when you are resisting taking on that support role or embracing it completely. We also talk a little bit about balance and what it means to run a lot of creative businesses and have your hands in a lot of different pots. Amber is an amazing example, role model, and a very humble human being, so you definitely have to listen in!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://www.thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2603</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c709e3ddccb6e99fa763867d0685ed62]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6456408259.mp3?updated=1663442171" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>018: Life Proof Your Business - How to Keep Your Business Running While on Leave</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/running-your-business-while-on-leave</link>
      <description>Ever wonder how you can keep your business running, but no actually be in it? Today we are lifting the curtain, and getting super real, showing you a behind-the-scenes look at how things can still get done here at TCC and in your own business when life gets in the way. We want to walk you through the systems, the processes, the mindsets, the workflows, and all the good meaty stuff that we were able to put in place and make happen in our business when we had to step away.
So close your eyes for a second, and imagine what would happen if you absolutely had to stop and walk away from your business today? Would you be able to just drop everything if you were forced to? We share the things we did and the mistakes that we made in order for us not to have an on-call business. That is exactly what you want for you too. We want your business to still run even if you cannot be in it right now. So come with us on our journey to see what’s been going on here at TCC and get some insight on some things that might even surprise you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 Feb 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Life Proof Your Business - How to Keep Your Business Running While on Leave</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>18</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Ever wonder how you can keep your business running, but no actually be in it? Today we are lifting the curtain, and getting super real, showing you a behind-the-scenes look at how things can still get done here at TCC and in your own business when...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Ever wonder how you can keep your business running, but no actually be in it? Today we are lifting the curtain, and getting super real, showing you a behind-the-scenes look at how things can still get done here at TCC and in your own business when life gets in the way. We want to walk you through the systems, the processes, the mindsets, the workflows, and all the good meaty stuff that we were able to put in place and make happen in our business when we had to step away.
So close your eyes for a second, and imagine what would happen if you absolutely had to stop and walk away from your business today? Would you be able to just drop everything if you were forced to? We share the things we did and the mistakes that we made in order for us not to have an on-call business. That is exactly what you want for you too. We want your business to still run even if you cannot be in it right now. So come with us on our journey to see what’s been going on here at TCC and get some insight on some things that might even surprise you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ever wonder how you can keep your business running, but no actually be in it? Today we are lifting the curtain, and getting super real, showing you a behind-the-scenes look at how things can still get done here at TCC and in your own business when life gets in the way. We want to walk you through the systems, the processes, the mindsets, the workflows, and all the good meaty stuff that we were able to put in place and make happen in our business when we had to step away.</p><p>So close your eyes for a second, and imagine what would happen if you absolutely had to stop and walk away from your business today? Would you be able to just drop everything if you were forced to? We share the things we did and the mistakes that we made in order for us not to have an on-call business. That is exactly what you want for you too. We want your business to still run even if you cannot be in it right now. So come with us on our journey to see what’s been going on here at TCC and get some insight on some things that might even surprise you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2581</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ea21f727548c715908fd6d46b41e670a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3712237204.mp3?updated=1663442124" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>017: Giving Competition the Middle Finger with Cyndie Spiegel</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/giving-competition-the-middle-finger</link>
      <description>Today on the podcast we have Cyndie Spiegel. She is about to get a little crazy up in here so I’m just warning you. We met Cyndie last year at a conference and she just blew our socks off!
We are talking about some hard stuff today but I think stuff that’s really needed. Cyndie drops some truth bombs and we talk about how we treat women in the online world and as small business owners, how we can take and give criticism better.
Cyndie shares her “don’t, shouldn’t on yourself” philosophy, ideas for some collaborations and how to make those go well. We also dive into how to deal with negative Nancie’s and how to get into the mindset in dealing with bad emails, bad comments, and negative energy that we sometimes receive from putting ourselves and our business out there.
We focus on how to own your own emotions and take control, which helps so tremendously when we work from home and we’re running these businesses by ourselves. Cyndie gives some incredible tips on how to do this and how to get into positive, successful, and actionable mindsets. So if you are ready to face these hard questions, then this episode is right on time for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 06 Feb 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Giving Competition the Middle Finger with Cyndie Spiegel</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>17</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today on the podcast we have Cyndie Spiegel. She is about to get a little crazy up in here so I’m just warning you. We met Cyndie last year at a conference and she just blew our socks off! We are talking about some hard stuff today but I think stuff...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today on the podcast we have Cyndie Spiegel. She is about to get a little crazy up in here so I’m just warning you. We met Cyndie last year at a conference and she just blew our socks off!
We are talking about some hard stuff today but I think stuff that’s really needed. Cyndie drops some truth bombs and we talk about how we treat women in the online world and as small business owners, how we can take and give criticism better.
Cyndie shares her “don’t, shouldn’t on yourself” philosophy, ideas for some collaborations and how to make those go well. We also dive into how to deal with negative Nancie’s and how to get into the mindset in dealing with bad emails, bad comments, and negative energy that we sometimes receive from putting ourselves and our business out there.
We focus on how to own your own emotions and take control, which helps so tremendously when we work from home and we’re running these businesses by ourselves. Cyndie gives some incredible tips on how to do this and how to get into positive, successful, and actionable mindsets. So if you are ready to face these hard questions, then this episode is right on time for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on the podcast we have Cyndie Spiegel. She is about to get a little crazy up in here so I’m just warning you. We met Cyndie last year at a conference and she just blew our socks off!</p><p>We are talking about some hard stuff today but I think stuff that’s really needed. Cyndie drops some truth bombs and we talk about how we treat women in the online world and as small business owners, how we can take and give criticism better.</p><p>Cyndie shares her “don’t, shouldn’t on yourself” philosophy, ideas for some collaborations and how to make those go well. We also dive into how to deal with negative Nancie’s and how to get into the mindset in dealing with bad emails, bad comments, and negative energy that we sometimes receive from putting ourselves and our business out there.</p><p>We focus on how to own your own emotions and take control, which helps so tremendously when we work from home and we’re running these businesses by ourselves. Cyndie gives some incredible tips on how to do this and how to get into positive, successful, and actionable mindsets. So if you are ready to face these hard questions, then this episode is right on time for you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://www.thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2840</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2927eca5d12f7a00969f9840b08db25e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9578464694.mp3?updated=1663442034" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>016: The Art &amp; Science of Charging What You're Worth</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/charging-what-you-are-worth</link>
      <description>Today we are talking all about pricing, numbers, and figuring out what the heck to charge for the services that we offer and the products that we sell. We take on the topic with intense passion, so hold onto your socks because you will hear exactly how we feel as the episode goes on. We get asked so often what to charge and what others would be willing to pay for it.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 03 Feb 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Art &amp; Science of Charging What You're Worth</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>16</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are talking all about pricing, numbers, and figuring out what the heck to charge for the services that we offer and the products that we sell. We take on the topic with intense passion, so hold onto your socks because you will hear exactly...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are talking all about pricing, numbers, and figuring out what the heck to charge for the services that we offer and the products that we sell. We take on the topic with intense passion, so hold onto your socks because you will hear exactly how we feel as the episode goes on. We get asked so often what to charge and what others would be willing to pay for it.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are talking all about pricing, numbers, and figuring out what the heck to charge for the services that we offer and the products that we sell. We take on the topic with intense passion, so hold onto your socks because you will hear exactly how we feel as the episode goes on. We get asked so often what to charge and what others would be willing to pay for it.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2616</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f9394cf12c6ef7a22bbee45c12c4aff1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4025221455.mp3?updated=1663431960" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>015: Making a Global Impact with Jessica Honegger of Noonday Collection</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/making-a-global-impact</link>
      <description>We are so excited today to bring you our chat with Jessica Honegger, the founder of Noon Day Collection. She is an amazing human being! She is a boss who truly understand the frustrations, the struggles, and the concerns that owning a business does to all of us. In today’s episode, we talk about a ton of different things, like ethical business practices, giving back with your business, the difference between that and fair trade. We even jump into some hacks, and Abagail cries.
So you are going to get a lot of great insight into growing and scaling a business. It’s going to get a little emotional, and I’m pretty sure you are going to walk away at the end of it with lots of goosebumps and you’re going to be fired up about making your business have a huge impact. I can’t wait for you to listen. This one’s going to be awesome!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 Feb 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Making a Global Impact with Jessica Honegger of Noonday Collection</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>15</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We are so excited today to bring you our chat with Jessica Honegger, the founder of Noon Day Collection. She is an amazing human being! She is a boss who truly understand the frustrations, the struggles, and the concerns that owning a business does to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We are so excited today to bring you our chat with Jessica Honegger, the founder of Noon Day Collection. She is an amazing human being! She is a boss who truly understand the frustrations, the struggles, and the concerns that owning a business does to all of us. In today’s episode, we talk about a ton of different things, like ethical business practices, giving back with your business, the difference between that and fair trade. We even jump into some hacks, and Abagail cries.
So you are going to get a lot of great insight into growing and scaling a business. It’s going to get a little emotional, and I’m pretty sure you are going to walk away at the end of it with lots of goosebumps and you’re going to be fired up about making your business have a huge impact. I can’t wait for you to listen. This one’s going to be awesome!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We are so excited today to bring you our chat with Jessica Honegger, the founder of Noon Day Collection. She is an amazing human being! She is a boss who truly understand the frustrations, the struggles, and the concerns that owning a business does to all of us. In today’s episode, we talk about a ton of different things, like ethical business practices, giving back with your business, the difference between that and fair trade. We even jump into some hacks, and Abagail cries.</p><p>So you are going to get a lot of great insight into growing and scaling a business. It’s going to get a little emotional, and I’m pretty sure you are going to walk away at the end of it with lots of goosebumps and you’re going to be fired up about making your business have a huge impact. I can’t wait for you to listen. This one’s going to be awesome!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://www.thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2719</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8c55a1b35c2bd72bbb0d6d63be17fa17]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1589552992.mp3?updated=1663431911" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>014: How We Went From 0 to 272K Blog Readers</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/going-from-0-to-272k-blog-readers</link>
      <description>Today we’re getting real with blogging. For a lot of people, blogging is not their favorite thing. Perhaps you don’t like it either. That is A-okay. We are going to talk to you about why it is important, how it has been super incremental to our personal growth, and our business growth and some hints and tips for you to make it a little bit easier on yourself so maybe you can enjoy it a little bit more.
People get caught up on wanting to see quick results. Like anything else, they think blogging is the quick way to see financial gain. However, blogging is not a get rich quick scheme. Blogging does not even look like it used to look even five or 10 years ago. It’s an entirely different strategy with an entirely different marketing game plan, and in order to get paid from your blog, you have to have a different mindset. This mindset is that blogging is 100%, straight up, no joke a long-term game. So if you are looking for some guidance and motivation to grow your blog, then this is the episode for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
To download the transcript of this episode head to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Jan 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How We Went From 0 to 272K Blog Readers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>14</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we’re getting real with blogging. For a lot of people, blogging is not their favorite thing. Perhaps you don’t like it either. That is A-okay. We are going to talk to you about why it is important, how it has been super incremental to our...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we’re getting real with blogging. For a lot of people, blogging is not their favorite thing. Perhaps you don’t like it either. That is A-okay. We are going to talk to you about why it is important, how it has been super incremental to our personal growth, and our business growth and some hints and tips for you to make it a little bit easier on yourself so maybe you can enjoy it a little bit more.
People get caught up on wanting to see quick results. Like anything else, they think blogging is the quick way to see financial gain. However, blogging is not a get rich quick scheme. Blogging does not even look like it used to look even five or 10 years ago. It’s an entirely different strategy with an entirely different marketing game plan, and in order to get paid from your blog, you have to have a different mindset. This mindset is that blogging is 100%, straight up, no joke a long-term game. So if you are looking for some guidance and motivation to grow your blog, then this is the episode for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
To download the transcript of this episode head to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we’re getting real with blogging. For a lot of people, blogging is not their favorite thing. Perhaps you don’t like it either. That is A-okay. We are going to talk to you about why it is important, how it has been super incremental to our personal growth, and our business growth and some hints and tips for you to make it a little bit easier on yourself so maybe you can enjoy it a little bit more.</p><p>People get caught up on wanting to see quick results. Like anything else, they think blogging is the quick way to see financial gain. However, blogging is not a get rich quick scheme. Blogging does not even look like it used to look even five or 10 years ago. It’s an entirely different strategy with an entirely different marketing game plan, and in order to get paid from your blog, you have to have a different mindset. This mindset is that blogging is 100%, straight up, no joke a long-term game. So if you are looking for some guidance and motivation to grow your blog, then this is the episode for you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.</p><p>To download the transcript of this episode head to: <a href="http://www.thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2747</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b216652ab8159eff5e2cc98ca9ff8407]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8127807543.mp3?updated=1663431875" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>013: Busting Email Marketing Myths with Nathan Barry of ConvertKit</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/busting-email-marketing-myths</link>
      <description>Today we are talking a lot about email marketing! Nathan Barry and the team at ConvertKit has definitely been a lifesaver for our business. It has helped us see radical growth since we’ve switched over. ConvertKit is an email marketing service for professional bloggers. Nathan’s background in the blogging world led him to build a tool to help other bloggers and entrepreneurs successfully build their audiences and grow their business. Understanding his own needs as a blogger, he went out and built a tool designed specifically for what he needed in his own life.
So what makes Nathan such an email expert? Well, at ConvertKit they send about 150 million emails every month! That is absolutely bananas, and so you can certainly see where his expertise comes from. So if you want to build an audience and sell products to serve that audience, then this episode is especially just for you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Jan 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Busting Email Marketing Myths with Nathan Barry of ConvertKit</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>13</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today we are talking a lot about email marketing! Nathan Barry and the team at ConvertKit has definitely been a lifesaver for our business. It has helped us see radical growth since we’ve switched over. ConvertKit is an email marketing service for...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today we are talking a lot about email marketing! Nathan Barry and the team at ConvertKit has definitely been a lifesaver for our business. It has helped us see radical growth since we’ve switched over. ConvertKit is an email marketing service for professional bloggers. Nathan’s background in the blogging world led him to build a tool to help other bloggers and entrepreneurs successfully build their audiences and grow their business. Understanding his own needs as a blogger, he went out and built a tool designed specifically for what he needed in his own life.
So what makes Nathan such an email expert? Well, at ConvertKit they send about 150 million emails every month! That is absolutely bananas, and so you can certainly see where his expertise comes from. So if you want to build an audience and sell products to serve that audience, then this episode is especially just for you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today we are talking a lot about email marketing! Nathan Barry and the team at ConvertKit has definitely been a lifesaver for our business. It has helped us see radical growth since we’ve switched over. ConvertKit is an email marketing service for professional bloggers. Nathan’s background in the blogging world led him to build a tool to help other bloggers and entrepreneurs successfully build their audiences and grow their business. Understanding his own needs as a blogger, he went out and built a tool designed specifically for what he needed in his own life.</p><p>So what makes Nathan such an email expert? Well, at ConvertKit they send about 150 million emails every month! That is absolutely bananas, and so you can certainly see where his expertise comes from. So if you want to build an audience and sell products to serve that audience, then this episode is especially just for you.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to: <a href="http://www.thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3020</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2923811dbe7161947efc7ede25e2e77d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8425884784.mp3?updated=1663431862" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>012: Getting Paid to be Creative is a Myth</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/getting-paid-to-be-creative-is-a-myth</link>
      <description>Getting paid to be creative is a myth. Lately, we’ve heard this phrase being tossed around a lot. Heck, we’ve even used this exact phrase to describe our journey ourselves. But the phrase isn’t really accurate. We aren’t getting paid to be creative. We’re getting paid because we are intellectual businesswomen.
We take our business seriously and structure it to pay us. We are constantly strategizing new ways to bring in income and grow our business. We test new ways to market, make new sales processes, and offer new things in new ways. And we do it over and over again. So if you want to hear us bust the myth, then this episode is definitely for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 25 Jan 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Getting Paid to be Creative is a Myth</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>12</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Getting paid to be creative is a myth. Lately, we’ve heard this phrase being tossed around a lot. Heck, we’ve even used this exact phrase to describe our journey ourselves. But the phrase isn’t really accurate. We aren’t getting paid to be...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Getting paid to be creative is a myth. Lately, we’ve heard this phrase being tossed around a lot. Heck, we’ve even used this exact phrase to describe our journey ourselves. But the phrase isn’t really accurate. We aren’t getting paid to be creative. We’re getting paid because we are intellectual businesswomen.
We take our business seriously and structure it to pay us. We are constantly strategizing new ways to bring in income and grow our business. We test new ways to market, make new sales processes, and offer new things in new ways. And we do it over and over again. So if you want to hear us bust the myth, then this episode is definitely for you!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Getting paid to be creative is a myth. Lately, we’ve heard this phrase being tossed around a lot. Heck, we’ve even used this exact phrase to describe our journey ourselves. But the phrase isn’t really accurate. We aren’t getting paid to be creative. We’re getting paid because we are intellectual businesswomen.</p><p>We take our business seriously and structure it to pay us. We are constantly strategizing new ways to bring in income and grow our business. We test new ways to market, make new sales processes, and offer new things in new ways. And we do it over and over again. So if you want to hear us bust the myth, then this episode is definitely for you!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://www.thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2289</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[79b0e079ed3c9879152447e099975650]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM2850173398.mp3?updated=1663431791" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>011: When to Add Products to Your Lineup, When to Say No to Wholesale and When to Say Yes to Going Back to Doing What You Love with Emily Ley of Simplified Planner</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/when-to-add-products-to-your-lineup-when-to-say-no-to-wholesale-and-when-to-say-yes-to-going-back-to-doing-what-you-love-with-emily-ley-of-the-simplified-planner</link>
      <description>Wondering about how to rock it in your product based business? Well, then this is the episode for you. We are so excited to have Emily Ley from The Simplified Planner on the podcast today.
She is here to bring a fresh perspective and to share some incredible nuggets of wisdom that we can’t really bring to the table. But most importantly, to answer all burning questions that you all have had about product based businesses, how they run, and how they work.
You are going to hear about blogging for a product based business, the honest truth about wholesale, cash flow, predicting inventory, and seeking grace, not perfection. So get ready, we’re going to get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes and transcript go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 23 Jan 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>When to Add Products to Your Lineup, When to Say No to Wholesale and When to Say Yes to Going Back to Doing What You Love with Emily Ley of Simplified Planner</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>11</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Wondering about how to rock it in your product based business? Well, then this is the episode for you. We are so excited to have Emily Ley from The Simplified Planner on the podcast today. She is here to bring a fresh perspective and to share some...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Wondering about how to rock it in your product based business? Well, then this is the episode for you. We are so excited to have Emily Ley from The Simplified Planner on the podcast today.
She is here to bring a fresh perspective and to share some incredible nuggets of wisdom that we can’t really bring to the table. But most importantly, to answer all burning questions that you all have had about product based businesses, how they run, and how they work.
You are going to hear about blogging for a product based business, the honest truth about wholesale, cash flow, predicting inventory, and seeking grace, not perfection. So get ready, we’re going to get started!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes and transcript go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Wondering about how to rock it in your product based business? Well, then this is the episode for you. We are so excited to have Emily Ley from The Simplified Planner on the podcast today.</p><p>She is here to bring a fresh perspective and to share some incredible nuggets of wisdom that we can’t really bring to the table. But most importantly, to answer all burning questions that you all have had about product based businesses, how they run, and how they work.</p><p>You are going to hear about blogging for a product based business, the honest truth about wholesale, cash flow, predicting inventory, and seeking grace, not perfection. So get ready, we’re going to get started!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes and transcript go to <a href="http://www.thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2925</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[65af8daf1a47d8a978c9365cb5534c6f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1075340542.mp3?updated=1663431695" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>010: Lazy Proof Your Day with Think Creative Collective</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/lazy-proof-your-day</link>
      <description>We think a lot of people get surprised when they find out exactly how much stuff gets done over here at TCC. We think you might be surprised by some of the hacks and the tricks that we implement in our everyday to stay on top of our goals, to make sure that our list gets done, and to not get distracted by all of the easy things that are out for us when we work from home. We jump into the exact structure we have especially for our mornings that make us get all of the stuff done and how we are able to set up realistic expectations, not only for ourselves but for each other. So If you need some tips on how to lazy proof your day, especially from working from home, this is going to be your episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. To download the transcript of this episode head to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 20 Jan 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Lazy Proof Your Day with Think Creative Collective</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>10</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We think a lot of people get surprised when they find out exactly how much stuff gets done over here at TCC. We think you might be surprised by some of the hacks and the tricks that we implement in our everyday to stay on top of our goals, to make...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We think a lot of people get surprised when they find out exactly how much stuff gets done over here at TCC. We think you might be surprised by some of the hacks and the tricks that we implement in our everyday to stay on top of our goals, to make sure that our list gets done, and to not get distracted by all of the easy things that are out for us when we work from home. We jump into the exact structure we have especially for our mornings that make us get all of the stuff done and how we are able to set up realistic expectations, not only for ourselves but for each other. So If you need some tips on how to lazy proof your day, especially from working from home, this is going to be your episode!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. To download the transcript of this episode head to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We think a lot of people get surprised when they find out exactly how much stuff gets done over here at TCC. We think you might be surprised by some of the hacks and the tricks that we implement in our everyday to stay on top of our goals, to make sure that our list gets done, and to not get distracted by all of the easy things that are out for us when we work from home. We jump into the exact structure we have especially for our mornings that make us get all of the stuff done and how we are able to set up realistic expectations, not only for ourselves but for each other. So If you need some tips on how to lazy proof your day, especially from working from home, this is going to be your episode!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. To download the transcript of this episode head to: <a href="http://www.thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2810</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7c8d00b9ff0c0b506854c59102ddc7aa]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4855687175.mp3?updated=1663431590" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>009: Getting in the Essentialist Mindset; How to Create Whitespace in your Small Business with Jamie Larson and Anna Bartell of the Snap Society</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/getting-in-the-essentialist-mindset-createing-whitespace-in-your-small-business</link>
      <description>We have finally found our soul sisters in the entrepreneur world. The four of us can so relate to a lot of the same things that we go through on a day-to-day basis. Luckily for you, they’re able to really pivot that partnership strategy and help solopreneurs just as much. If you want to walk away with some great insights on how to create white space in not only your life but your business, then this episode is definitely for you.
We discuss all the ins and outs of creating your own retreat so that you can start goal setting and getting in the mindset that you need to rock for 2017. We jump into essentialism and figuring out how to find your strength. So get ready for some awesomeness!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
To download the transcript of this episode head to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 Jan 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Getting in the Essentialist Mindset; How to Create Whitespace in your Small Business with Jamie Larson and Anna Bartell of the Snap Society</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>9</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We have finally found our soul sisters in the entrepreneur world. The four of us can so relate to a lot of the same things that we go through on a day-to-day basis. Luckily for you, they’re able to really pivot that partnership strategy and help...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We have finally found our soul sisters in the entrepreneur world. The four of us can so relate to a lot of the same things that we go through on a day-to-day basis. Luckily for you, they’re able to really pivot that partnership strategy and help solopreneurs just as much. If you want to walk away with some great insights on how to create white space in not only your life but your business, then this episode is definitely for you.
We discuss all the ins and outs of creating your own retreat so that you can start goal setting and getting in the mindset that you need to rock for 2017. We jump into essentialism and figuring out how to find your strength. So get ready for some awesomeness!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
To download the transcript of this episode head to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We have finally found our soul sisters in the entrepreneur world. The four of us can so relate to a lot of the same things that we go through on a day-to-day basis. Luckily for you, they’re able to really pivot that partnership strategy and help solopreneurs just as much. If you want to walk away with some great insights on how to create white space in not only your life but your business, then this episode is definitely for you.</p><p>We discuss all the ins and outs of creating your own retreat so that you can start goal setting and getting in the mindset that you need to rock for 2017. We jump into essentialism and figuring out how to find your strength. So get ready for some awesomeness!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.</p><p>To download the transcript of this episode head to: <a href="http://www.thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2532</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[97fa9fb3d0278ba8c23efd50f637b1de]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9854996561.mp3?updated=1663428058" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>008: Frugal Habits of Successful Entrepreneurs</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/frugal-habits-of-successful-entrepreneurs</link>
      <description>Looking to be successful, but not sure how to bootstrap your business? Today we jump in and talk about some frugal habits of successful entrepreneurs to find out how to hack it until you know it works. We unpack the exact things we purchased and when, and why it makes sense to invest in specific tools and systems at certain times in your business. In today’s entrepreneurial world, people have a tendency to “spy on other people’s paper” to look at what they are doing, because they think that the only way to be successful is to copy them exactly. We are busting that myth right on out! It’s time to stop peeking over their shoulders.
Instead, focus on when it makes sense and why it makes sense for you and your business. Think through whether you really need it in your business, or if you’re are just taking the “monkey-see, monkey-do” approach. Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. To download the transcript of this episode head to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 16 Jan 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Frugal Habits of Successful Entrepreneurs</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>8</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Looking to be successful, but not sure how to bootstrap your business? Today we jump in and talk about some frugal habits of successful entrepreneurs to find out how to hack it until you know it works. We unpack the exact things we purchased and when,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Looking to be successful, but not sure how to bootstrap your business? Today we jump in and talk about some frugal habits of successful entrepreneurs to find out how to hack it until you know it works. We unpack the exact things we purchased and when, and why it makes sense to invest in specific tools and systems at certain times in your business. In today’s entrepreneurial world, people have a tendency to “spy on other people’s paper” to look at what they are doing, because they think that the only way to be successful is to copy them exactly. We are busting that myth right on out! It’s time to stop peeking over their shoulders.
Instead, focus on when it makes sense and why it makes sense for you and your business. Think through whether you really need it in your business, or if you’re are just taking the “monkey-see, monkey-do” approach. Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. To download the transcript of this episode head to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Looking to be successful, but not sure how to bootstrap your business? Today we jump in and talk about some frugal habits of successful entrepreneurs to find out how to hack it until you know it works. We unpack the exact things we purchased and when, and why it makes sense to invest in specific tools and systems at certain times in your business. In today’s entrepreneurial world, people have a tendency to “spy on other people’s paper” to look at what they are doing, because they think that the only way to be successful is to copy them exactly. We are busting that myth right on out! It’s time to stop peeking over their shoulders.</p><p>Instead, focus on when it makes sense and why it makes sense for you and your business. Think through whether you really need it in your business, or if you’re are just taking the “monkey-see, monkey-do” approach. Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. To download the transcript of this episode head to: <a href="http://www.thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2746</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a731e983f9613e15edcbb86d8bffee0d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3416778848.mp3?updated=1663428001" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>007: How to Avoid Decision Paralysis - Gaining Traction &amp; Upleveling Your Business with Ankur Nagpal of Teachable</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-avoid-decision-paralysis-gaining-traction-upleveling-your-business-with-ankur-nagpal-of-teachable</link>
      <description>Teachable has a big place in our hearts and today we sit down with founder, Ankur Nagpal. Teachable is a platform that helps individuals and business create and sell online courses, and for those of you who aren't necessarily interested in building courses, we actually take it back before Teachable was even around. Ankur is open, transparent, and honest about his company and their growth.
He shares with us his biggest mistake in naming his business, tips on hiring, and just what the heck to do with rapid growth and how to take advantage of your traction. So even if you're not into courses, this one is still going to help you out and give you some action steps to implement today. Now, are you ready to up-level your business gain some traction? Thank you for listening!
Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. To download the transcript of this episode head to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 13 Jan 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Avoid Decision Paralysis - Gaining Traction &amp; Upleveling Your Business with Ankur Nagpal of Teachable</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>7</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Teachable has a big place in our hearts and today we sit down with founder, Ankur Nagpal. Teachable is a platform that helps individuals and business create and sell online courses, and for those of you who aren't necessarily interested in building...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Teachable has a big place in our hearts and today we sit down with founder, Ankur Nagpal. Teachable is a platform that helps individuals and business create and sell online courses, and for those of you who aren't necessarily interested in building courses, we actually take it back before Teachable was even around. Ankur is open, transparent, and honest about his company and their growth.
He shares with us his biggest mistake in naming his business, tips on hiring, and just what the heck to do with rapid growth and how to take advantage of your traction. So even if you're not into courses, this one is still going to help you out and give you some action steps to implement today. Now, are you ready to up-level your business gain some traction? Thank you for listening!
Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. To download the transcript of this episode head to: thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Teachable has a big place in our hearts and today we sit down with founder, Ankur Nagpal. Teachable is a platform that helps individuals and business create and sell online courses, and for those of you who aren't necessarily interested in building courses, we actually take it back before Teachable was even around. Ankur is open, transparent, and honest about his company and their growth.</p><p>He shares with us his biggest mistake in naming his business, tips on hiring, and just what the heck to do with rapid growth and how to take advantage of your traction. So even if you're not into courses, this one is still going to help you out and give you some action steps to implement today. Now, are you ready to up-level your business gain some traction? Thank you for listening!</p><p>Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com. To download the transcript of this episode head to: <a href="http://www.thestrategyhour.com">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2616</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ba1878f147bf88c5194560c10b9a4fcf]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM1660186599.mp3?updated=1663427947" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>006: Shiny Object Syndrome - What to Do with TOO Many Ideas</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/shiny-object-syndrome-what-to-do-with-too-many-ideas</link>
      <description>Most creatives seem to be also known as “serial entrepreneurs” because we’re constantly thinking up and wanting to try new ideas. Although this keeps us innovative in business it can also paralyze us and hold us back. In this episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast, we sit down and chat about just what to do when you have way too many ideas.
We’re getting you focused and making you ask the hard questions before you dive into something unknown or add on something new to what you already offer. Let’s get some clarity up in here!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 Jan 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Shiny Object Syndrome - What to Do with TOO Many Ideas</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>6</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Most creatives seem to be also known as “serial entrepreneurs” because we’re constantly thinking up and wanting to try new ideas. Although this keeps us innovative in business it can also paralyze us and hold us back. In this episode of The...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Most creatives seem to be also known as “serial entrepreneurs” because we’re constantly thinking up and wanting to try new ideas. Although this keeps us innovative in business it can also paralyze us and hold us back. In this episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast, we sit down and chat about just what to do when you have way too many ideas.
We’re getting you focused and making you ask the hard questions before you dive into something unknown or add on something new to what you already offer. Let’s get some clarity up in here!
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Most creatives seem to be also known as “serial entrepreneurs” because we’re constantly thinking up and wanting to try new ideas. Although this keeps us innovative in business it can also paralyze us and hold us back. In this episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast, we sit down and chat about just what to do when you have way too many ideas.</p><p>We’re getting you focused and making you ask the hard questions before you dive into something unknown or add on something new to what you already offer. Let’s get some clarity up in here!</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2143</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[35cf4ae4d1b0539a185b505378080e35]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7870707133.mp3?updated=1663427903" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>005: Create Awesome Online Courses with David Siteman Garland</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/create-awesome-online-courses-with-david-siteman-garland</link>
      <description>Selling online courses have been pivotable for our business growth and success. We often get asked by others questions about starting their own online course, but we always refer to the experts. One of them is our friend, David Siteman Garland of Create Awesome Online Courses. His programs were some of the first we ever purchased and they’ve played a huge role in how quickly we were able to shift from 1:1 client work to our 1:many model that has grown into a multi 6-figure business.
Whether you’ve been thinking of offering a course for your audience, have questions about how to launch your course to your audience or simply what your course could be about this episode is for you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.

Key Topics:

Exactly what you need to start creating your first course

The mistakes David made when launching his first programs

The #1 thing that will get people to buy your course

The best type of launch to start promoting and selling your course

Different strategies to grow your list (even while you’re making your course)

The type of person David doesn’t recommend courses for

We Mentioned:

www.xosarah.com

Camtasia

Screenflow

www.createawesomeonlinecourses.com

www.risetothetop.com

http://instagram.com/davidsitemangarland


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 09 Jan 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Create Awesome Online Courses with David Siteman Garland</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>5</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Selling online courses have been pivotable for our business growth and success. We often get asked by others questions about starting their own online course, but we always refer to the experts. One of them is our friend, David Siteman Garland of...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Selling online courses have been pivotable for our business growth and success. We often get asked by others questions about starting their own online course, but we always refer to the experts. One of them is our friend, David Siteman Garland of Create Awesome Online Courses. His programs were some of the first we ever purchased and they’ve played a huge role in how quickly we were able to shift from 1:1 client work to our 1:many model that has grown into a multi 6-figure business.
Whether you’ve been thinking of offering a course for your audience, have questions about how to launch your course to your audience or simply what your course could be about this episode is for you.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.

Key Topics:

Exactly what you need to start creating your first course

The mistakes David made when launching his first programs

The #1 thing that will get people to buy your course

The best type of launch to start promoting and selling your course

Different strategies to grow your list (even while you’re making your course)

The type of person David doesn’t recommend courses for

We Mentioned:

www.xosarah.com

Camtasia

Screenflow

www.createawesomeonlinecourses.com

www.risetothetop.com

http://instagram.com/davidsitemangarland


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Selling online courses have been pivotable for our business growth and success. We often get asked by others questions about starting their own online course, but we always refer to the experts. One of them is our friend, David Siteman Garland of Create Awesome Online Courses. His programs were some of the first we ever purchased and they’ve played a huge role in how quickly we were able to shift from 1:1 client work to our 1:many model that has grown into a multi 6-figure business.</p><p>Whether you’ve been thinking of offering a course for your audience, have questions about how to launch your course to your audience or simply what your course could be about this episode is for you.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Key Topics:</strong></p><ul>
<li>Exactly what you need to start creating your first course</li>
<li>The mistakes David made when launching his first programs</li>
<li>The #1 thing that will get people to buy your course</li>
<li>The best type of launch to start promoting and selling your course</li>
<li>Different strategies to grow your list (even while you’re making your course)</li>
<li>The type of person David doesn’t recommend courses for</li>
</ul><p><strong>We Mentioned:</strong></p><ul>
<li><a href="http://www.xosarah.com/">www.xosarah.com</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.techsmith.com/camtasia.html">Camtasia</a></li>
<li><a href="https://screenflow.en.softonic.com/mac?ex=TOP-544.2">Screenflow</a></li>
<li><a href="http://www.createawesomeonlinecourses.com/">www.createawesomeonlinecourses.com</a></li>
<li><a href="http://www.risetothetop.com/">www.risetothetop.com</a></li>
<li><a href="http://instagram.com/davidsitemangarland">http://instagram.com/davidsitemangarland</a></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3164</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d5fa957071245eb0248c8a839b3ac61a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM4707608668.mp3?updated=1651933644" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>004: Creating a Premium Client Experience and Exactly How to Get Them to Say YES with Emylee Williams</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/creating-a-premium-client-experience-and-exactly-how-to-get-them-to-say-yes-with-emylee-williams</link>
      <description>In order to go from a low-rate creative to a premium creative isn’t skillset or technique. It’s about creating an experience. It’s about the sales process, the hand holding and the results. In this episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast listen as Emylee walks you through how she went from working for free as a photographer to charging $75 for her first paying client to then being able to make $1,500 for her very next client (less than 2 weeks later). Hear how the “all inclusive” made her feel icky and slimy and what she did to change it.
She’ll give you ideas to incorporate in-person sales into your own business (even if you’re not a photographer) so you can start seeing bigger returns on your time and talents. You’re going to walk away with loads of ideas of tiny tweaks you can make to your website, how you communicate with clients and things you could be providing them that will drastically change how much money you make.
Get your notebook out and get ready to make some big impacts in your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Key Topics:

The businesses Emylee ran before founding TCC

How quitting 2 big things in one month led Emylee to get real with her business

Exactly how she revamped her sales process in two weeks to 20x her revenue per client

How other service based industries can copy these same techniques

How to package your goods so they sell psychologically

How my photography business transitioned into what we do now at TCC


﻿We Mentioned:

www.madisonviningblog.com

www.thinkcreativecollective.com/convertkit

www.prodpi.com

www.trelloforbusiness.com


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 06 Jan 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating a Premium Client Experience and Exactly How to Get Them to Say YES with Emylee Williams</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>4</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In order to go from a low-rate creative to a premium creative isn’t skillset or technique. It’s about creating an experience. It’s about the sales process, the hand holding and the results. In this episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast listen as...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In order to go from a low-rate creative to a premium creative isn’t skillset or technique. It’s about creating an experience. It’s about the sales process, the hand holding and the results. In this episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast listen as Emylee walks you through how she went from working for free as a photographer to charging $75 for her first paying client to then being able to make $1,500 for her very next client (less than 2 weeks later). Hear how the “all inclusive” made her feel icky and slimy and what she did to change it.
She’ll give you ideas to incorporate in-person sales into your own business (even if you’re not a photographer) so you can start seeing bigger returns on your time and talents. You’re going to walk away with loads of ideas of tiny tweaks you can make to your website, how you communicate with clients and things you could be providing them that will drastically change how much money you make.
Get your notebook out and get ready to make some big impacts in your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Key Topics:

The businesses Emylee ran before founding TCC

How quitting 2 big things in one month led Emylee to get real with her business

Exactly how she revamped her sales process in two weeks to 20x her revenue per client

How other service based industries can copy these same techniques

How to package your goods so they sell psychologically

How my photography business transitioned into what we do now at TCC


﻿We Mentioned:

www.madisonviningblog.com

www.thinkcreativecollective.com/convertkit

www.prodpi.com

www.trelloforbusiness.com


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In order to go from a low-rate creative to a premium creative isn’t skillset or technique. It’s about creating an experience. It’s about the sales process, the hand holding and the results. In this episode of The Strategy Hour Podcast listen as Emylee walks you through how she went from working for free as a photographer to charging $75 for her first paying client to then being able to make $1,500 for her very next client (less than 2 weeks later). Hear how the “all inclusive” made her feel icky and slimy and what she did to change it.</p><p>She’ll give you ideas to incorporate in-person sales into your own business (even if you’re not a photographer) so you can start seeing bigger returns on your time and talents. You’re going to walk away with loads of ideas of tiny tweaks you can make to your website, how you communicate with clients and things you could be providing them that will drastically change how much money you make.</p><p>Get your notebook out and get ready to make some big impacts in your business.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p><strong>Key Topics:</strong></p><ul>
<li>The businesses Emylee ran before founding TCC</li>
<li>How quitting 2 big things in one month led Emylee to get real with her business</li>
<li>Exactly how she revamped her sales process in two weeks to 20x her revenue per client</li>
<li>How other service based industries can copy these same techniques</li>
<li>How to package your goods so they sell psychologically</li>
<li>How my photography business transitioned into what we do now at TCC</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿We Mentioned:</strong></p><ul>
<li><a href="http://www.madisonviningblog.com/">www.madisonviningblog.com</a></li>
<li><a href="http://www.thinkcreativecollective.com/convertkit">www.thinkcreativecollective.com/convertkit</a></li>
<li><a href="http://www.prodpi.com/">www.prodpi.com</a></li>
<li><a href="http://www.trelloforbusiness.com/">www.trelloforbusiness.com</a></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2470</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ac59c08a47978005c6538eaf97e65d47]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM8613442887.mp3?updated=1651933686" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>003: How to Get Noticed by O Magazine and Why Your Business Needs a PR Plan with Rachel Hofstetter of Chatbooks</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-get-noticed-by-o-magazine-and-why-your-business-needs-a-pr-plan-with-rachel-hofstetter-of-chatbooks</link>
      <description>Ever wonder how to get your business published by “O” Magazine, “Entrepreneur” or “Forbes”? Maybe you’d like to get a spot on your local new station or even The Today Show. It can get overwhelming figuring out who to reach out to, what to say and how to make the perfect pitch. Well, today on The Strategy Hour Podcast, our friend Rachel Hofstetter (a former editor of “O” and CMO of Chatbooks) walks you through the entire process.
She shares her three key factors in perfecting your pitch, what to say in your emails and how to stand out from the crowd. Getting proper PR for your business can have a huge impact in your reach and credibility so making sure your efforts don’t go to waste is key. After this episode, you’ll be geared up to start reaching out to small and big name publications to get your business noticed.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
To download the transcript of this episode head to: thestrategyhour.com
Key Topics:

Using the “give, give, get” model to get publications to say yes

Exactly what to say and how to format your emails when reaching out

How to find who you should be reaching out to

What PR can do for a brand (and what it might not do)

How to stand out from the hundreds of emails editors get every single day

When to start reaching out to get your product featured on Holiday gift guides

The one thing you can do to remind editors to respond to you


﻿We Mentioned:

http://omagonline.com

http://chatbooks.com

http://twitter.com/RachelHoffy

http://instagram.com/RachelHoffy1

http://doprschool.com

www.trelloforbusiness.com

www.Yourbizonautopilot.com


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 Jan 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Get Noticed by O Magazine and Why Your Business Needs a PR Plan with Rachel Hofstetter of Chatbooks</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>3</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Ever wonder how to get your business published by “O” Magazine, “Entrepreneur” or “Forbes”? Maybe you’d like to get a spot on your local new station or even The Today Show. It can get overwhelming figuring out who to reach out to, what...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Ever wonder how to get your business published by “O” Magazine, “Entrepreneur” or “Forbes”? Maybe you’d like to get a spot on your local new station or even The Today Show. It can get overwhelming figuring out who to reach out to, what to say and how to make the perfect pitch. Well, today on The Strategy Hour Podcast, our friend Rachel Hofstetter (a former editor of “O” and CMO of Chatbooks) walks you through the entire process.
She shares her three key factors in perfecting your pitch, what to say in your emails and how to stand out from the crowd. Getting proper PR for your business can have a huge impact in your reach and credibility so making sure your efforts don’t go to waste is key. After this episode, you’ll be geared up to start reaching out to small and big name publications to get your business noticed.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
To download the transcript of this episode head to: thestrategyhour.com
Key Topics:

Using the “give, give, get” model to get publications to say yes

Exactly what to say and how to format your emails when reaching out

How to find who you should be reaching out to

What PR can do for a brand (and what it might not do)

How to stand out from the hundreds of emails editors get every single day

When to start reaching out to get your product featured on Holiday gift guides

The one thing you can do to remind editors to respond to you


﻿We Mentioned:

http://omagonline.com

http://chatbooks.com

http://twitter.com/RachelHoffy

http://instagram.com/RachelHoffy1

http://doprschool.com

www.trelloforbusiness.com

www.Yourbizonautopilot.com


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ever wonder how to get your business published by “O” Magazine, “Entrepreneur” or “Forbes”? Maybe you’d like to get a spot on your local new station or even The Today Show. It can get overwhelming figuring out who to reach out to, what to say and how to make the perfect pitch. Well, today on The Strategy Hour Podcast, our friend Rachel Hofstetter (a former editor of “O” and CMO of Chatbooks) walks you through the entire process.</p><p>She shares her three key factors in perfecting your pitch, what to say in your emails and how to stand out from the crowd. Getting proper PR for your business can have a huge impact in your reach and credibility so making sure your efforts don’t go to waste is key. After this episode, you’ll be geared up to start reaching out to small and big name publications to get your business noticed.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p>To download the transcript of this episode head to: <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a></p><p><strong>Key Topics:</strong></p><ul>
<li>Using the “give, give, get” model to get publications to say yes</li>
<li>Exactly what to say and how to format your emails when reaching out</li>
<li>How to find who you should be reaching out to</li>
<li>What PR can do for a brand (and what it might not do)</li>
<li>How to stand out from the hundreds of emails editors get every single day</li>
<li>When to start reaching out to get your product featured on Holiday gift guides</li>
<li>The one thing you can do to remind editors to respond to you</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿We Mentioned:</strong></p><ul>
<li><a href="http://omagonline.com/">http://omagonline.com</a></li>
<li><a href="http://chatbooks.com/">http://chatbooks.com</a></li>
<li><a href="http://twitter.com/RachelHoffy">http://twitter.com/RachelHoffy</a></li>
<li><a href="http://instagram.com/RachelHoffy1">http://instagram.com/RachelHoffy1</a></li>
<li><a href="http://doprschool.com">http://doprschool.com</a></li>
<li><a href="http://www.trelloforbusiness.com/">www.trelloforbusiness.com</a></li>
<li><a href="http://www.yourbizonautopilot.com/">www.Yourbizonautopilot.com</a></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2994</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[263fab33806274ac6fa6afc4190eefdb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9068306368.mp3?updated=1651933729" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>002: How to Replace Your Income (in 30 Days) After Getting Laid Off with Abagail Pumphrey</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-replace-your-income-in-30-days-after-getting-laid-off-with-abagail-pumphrey</link>
      <description>Have you ever wondered how people bounce back from a layoff? How are others able to take this unfortunate event and create their own path? Well, in today’s episode you’re hearing from one of your hosts, Abagail Pumphrey on just that. Specifically how she was able to also replace her corporate income in 30 days with her side-hustle.
Listen as Abagail covers the exact steps she took to go from not-so-great clients to owning her own design boutique. Figure out where she decided to invest first to get her business off the ground (without spending a ton of money). Steal the strategies she used to get clients in the door when she had no portfolio and little experience. This episode is truly for anyone wanting to get their business off the ground quickly whether you’ve been laid off or just want to try something new.
 Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.

Key Topics:


﻿What Abagail did before “Think Creative Collective”

What life was like before she got “the pink slip”

The things she did immediately that truly opened up doors for her

The platform Abagail chose for her first website

Strategies she used from day 0 to grow her audience

How she got clients without a portfolio

How to make the most of a “coffee date” with a potential client

Why this blog started as a side-hustle

Why Abagail said “yes” to less than ideal clients


We Mentioned:

www.squarespace.com

www.thinkcreativecollective.com

http://bit.ly/EasiestBizPlan

www.thestrategyhour.com/convertkit

www.trelloforbusiness.com


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 02 Jan 2017 09:30:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Replace Your Income (in 30 Days) After Getting Laid Off with Abagail Pumphrey</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>2</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you ever wondered how people bounce back from a layoff? How are others able to take this unfortunate event and create their own path? Well, in today’s episode you’re hearing from one of your hosts, Abagail Pumphrey on just that. Specifically...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you ever wondered how people bounce back from a layoff? How are others able to take this unfortunate event and create their own path? Well, in today’s episode you’re hearing from one of your hosts, Abagail Pumphrey on just that. Specifically how she was able to also replace her corporate income in 30 days with her side-hustle.
Listen as Abagail covers the exact steps she took to go from not-so-great clients to owning her own design boutique. Figure out where she decided to invest first to get her business off the ground (without spending a ton of money). Steal the strategies she used to get clients in the door when she had no portfolio and little experience. This episode is truly for anyone wanting to get their business off the ground quickly whether you’ve been laid off or just want to try something new.
 Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.

Key Topics:


﻿What Abagail did before “Think Creative Collective”

What life was like before she got “the pink slip”

The things she did immediately that truly opened up doors for her

The platform Abagail chose for her first website

Strategies she used from day 0 to grow her audience

How she got clients without a portfolio

How to make the most of a “coffee date” with a potential client

Why this blog started as a side-hustle

Why Abagail said “yes” to less than ideal clients


We Mentioned:

www.squarespace.com

www.thinkcreativecollective.com

http://bit.ly/EasiestBizPlan

www.thestrategyhour.com/convertkit

www.trelloforbusiness.com


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you ever wondered how people bounce back from a layoff? How are others able to take this unfortunate event and create their own path? Well, in today’s episode you’re hearing from one of your hosts, Abagail Pumphrey on just that. Specifically how she was able to also replace her corporate income in 30 days with her side-hustle.</p><p>Listen as Abagail covers the exact steps she took to go from not-so-great clients to owning her own design boutique. Figure out where she decided to invest first to get her business off the ground (without spending a ton of money). Steal the strategies she used to get clients in the door when she had no portfolio and little experience. This episode is truly for anyone wanting to get their business off the ground quickly whether you’ve been laid off or just want to try something new.</p><p> Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Key Topics:</strong></p><ul>
<li>
<strong>﻿</strong>What Abagail did before “Think Creative Collective”</li>
<li>What life was like before she got “the pink slip”</li>
<li>The things she did immediately that truly opened up doors for her</li>
<li>The platform Abagail chose for her first website</li>
<li>Strategies she used from day 0 to grow her audience</li>
<li>How she got clients without a portfolio</li>
<li>How to make the most of a “coffee date” with a potential client</li>
<li>Why this blog started as a side-hustle</li>
<li>Why Abagail said “yes” to less than ideal clients</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p><strong>We Mentioned:</strong></p><ul>
<li><a href="http://www.squarespace.com/">www.squarespace.com</a></li>
<li><a href="http://www.thinkcreativecollective.com/">www.thinkcreativecollective.com</a></li>
<li><a href="http://bit.ly/EasiestBizPlan">http://bit.ly/EasiestBizPlan</a></li>
<li><a href="http://www.thestrategyhour.com/convertkit">www.thestrategyhour.com/convertkit</a></li>
<li><a href="http://www.trelloforbusiness.com/">www.trelloforbusiness.com</a></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2516</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0e1d9d2b39ae990c0e77cc02972d21bf]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM3018874930.mp3?updated=1651933768" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>001: Getting Your Customers to Say Yes - Neuroscience and Business with Natalie Franke of Rising Tide Society</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/getting-your-customers-to-say-yes-neuroscience-and-business-with-natalie-franke-of-rising-tide-society</link>
      <description>Natalie Franke, the founder of Rising Tide Society is joining us today on The Strategy Hour Podcast. Many of you may be surprised to find out that Natalie is a huge neuroscience nerd and uses this background to strategically make decisions in her business. She sharing how you can take cues from neuroscience and psychology to communicate with your clients and customers, form your message on your website and social media, grow your audience and more.
Natalie also shares why Rising Tide Society was built, how quickly it grew and how Natalie even became interested in the nerdy stuff. We’re super excited for you to see an entirely new part of Natalie and take these strategies that she shares to tweak some pieces in your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.

Key Topics:

How to use neuroscience to align your brand with your customer

How Natalie uses neuroscience to grow RTS and communicate with her team

The initial conversation that started RTS back in the day

Why you should have a “what if” attitude about your business

Why Natalie fails every single day

How competition pushes innovation and drives us forward

How helping others (without a reason) comes back to you time and again

Coming back when something goes terribly wrong

We Mentioned:

www.risingtidesociety.com

https://www.instagram.com/nataliefranke/

http://www.nataliefranke.com/

www.trelloforbusiness.com

www.yourbizonautopilot.com


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 02 Jan 2017 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Getting Your Customers to Say Yes - Neuroscience and Business with Natalie Franke of Rising Tide Society</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:episode>1</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Natalie Franke, the founder of Rising Tide Society is joining us today on The Strategy Hour Podcast. Many of you may be surprised to find out that Natalie is a huge neuroscience nerd and uses this background to strategically make decisions in her...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Natalie Franke, the founder of Rising Tide Society is joining us today on The Strategy Hour Podcast. Many of you may be surprised to find out that Natalie is a huge neuroscience nerd and uses this background to strategically make decisions in her business. She sharing how you can take cues from neuroscience and psychology to communicate with your clients and customers, form your message on your website and social media, grow your audience and more.
Natalie also shares why Rising Tide Society was built, how quickly it grew and how Natalie even became interested in the nerdy stuff. We’re super excited for you to see an entirely new part of Natalie and take these strategies that she shares to tweak some pieces in your business.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.

Key Topics:

How to use neuroscience to align your brand with your customer

How Natalie uses neuroscience to grow RTS and communicate with her team

The initial conversation that started RTS back in the day

Why you should have a “what if” attitude about your business

Why Natalie fails every single day

How competition pushes innovation and drives us forward

How helping others (without a reason) comes back to you time and again

Coming back when something goes terribly wrong

We Mentioned:

www.risingtidesociety.com

https://www.instagram.com/nataliefranke/

http://www.nataliefranke.com/

www.trelloforbusiness.com

www.yourbizonautopilot.com


Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Natalie Franke, the founder of Rising Tide Society is joining us today on The Strategy Hour Podcast. Many of you may be surprised to find out that Natalie is a huge neuroscience nerd and uses this background to strategically make decisions in her business. She sharing how you can take cues from neuroscience and psychology to communicate with your clients and customers, form your message on your website and social media, grow your audience and more.</p><p>Natalie also shares why Rising Tide Society was built, how quickly it grew and how Natalie even became interested in the nerdy stuff. We’re super excited for you to see an entirely new part of Natalie and take these strategies that she shares to tweak some pieces in your business.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Key Topics:</strong></p><ul>
<li>How to use neuroscience to align your brand with your customer</li>
<li>How Natalie uses neuroscience to grow RTS and communicate with her team</li>
<li>The initial conversation that started RTS back in the day</li>
<li>Why you should have a “what if” attitude about your business</li>
<li>Why Natalie fails every single day</li>
<li>How competition pushes innovation and drives us forward</li>
<li>How helping others (without a reason) comes back to you time and again</li>
<li>Coming back when something goes terribly wrong</li>
</ul><p><strong>We Mentioned:</strong></p><ul>
<li><a href="http://www.risingtidesociety.com/">www.risingtidesociety.com</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/nataliefranke/">https://www.instagram.com/nataliefranke/</a></li>
<li><a href="http://www.nataliefranke.com/">http://www.nataliefranke.com/</a></li>
<li><a href="http://www.trelloforbusiness.com/">www.trelloforbusiness.com</a></li>
<li><a href="http://www.yourbizonautopilot.com/">www.yourbizonautopilot.com</a></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2718</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d47d52b056e4818823829884fba3e632]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM7227476552.mp3?updated=1651933836" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>000: How to Actually Implement New Strategies Into Your Business</title>
      <link>https://bossproject.com/podcast/how-to-actually-implement-new-strategies-into-your-business</link>
      <description>Welcome to our very first episode of The Strategy Hour a podcast for creative entrepreneurs who are tired of the fluff and ready for on-the-go strategy. In this episode, you’ll not only get a (very) quick introduction of Abagail Pumphrey and Emylee Williams (your hosts), but you’ll also walk away with some action steps. You’ll find very quickly that every episode is going to be full of in-depth strategy that you can walk away with and apply to your business right away.
In this episode, we’re walking you through the things you need to do when you learn a new strategy for your business. How to implement it, how to know if it’s the right fit for you and how to make sure it doesn’t just hang out on that dingy notebook in your bag. You’ll also learn the format of future shows and get a few sneak peeks at upcoming topics.
So get your socks on, settle in and let’s get into some strategy.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 02 Jan 2017 08:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Actually Implement New Strategies Into Your Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome to our very first episode of The Strategy Hour a podcast for creative entrepreneurs who are tired of the fluff and ready for on-the-go strategy. In this episode, you’ll not only get a (very) quick introduction of Abagail Pumphrey and Emylee...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to our very first episode of The Strategy Hour a podcast for creative entrepreneurs who are tired of the fluff and ready for on-the-go strategy. In this episode, you’ll not only get a (very) quick introduction of Abagail Pumphrey and Emylee Williams (your hosts), but you’ll also walk away with some action steps. You’ll find very quickly that every episode is going to be full of in-depth strategy that you can walk away with and apply to your business right away.
In this episode, we’re walking you through the things you need to do when you learn a new strategy for your business. How to implement it, how to know if it’s the right fit for you and how to make sure it doesn’t just hang out on that dingy notebook in your bag. You’ll also learn the format of future shows and get a few sneak peeks at upcoming topics.
So get your socks on, settle in and let’s get into some strategy.
Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to thestrategyhour.com.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to our very first episode of The Strategy Hour a podcast for creative entrepreneurs who are tired of the fluff and ready for on-the-go strategy. In this episode, you’ll not only get a (very) quick introduction of Abagail Pumphrey and Emylee Williams (your hosts), but you’ll also walk away with some action steps. You’ll find very quickly that every episode is going to be full of in-depth strategy that you can walk away with and apply to your business right away.</p><p>In this episode, we’re walking you through the things you need to do when you learn a new strategy for your business. How to implement it, how to know if it’s the right fit for you and how to make sure it doesn’t just hang out on that dingy notebook in your bag. You’ll also learn the format of future shows and get a few sneak peeks at upcoming topics.</p><p>So get your socks on, settle in and let’s get into some strategy.</p><p>Thank you for listening! Please subscribe, rate and review The Strategy Hour Podcast on iTunes. Ratings and reviews are extremely helpful and greatly appreciated. For show notes go to <a href="http://thestrategyhour.com/">thestrategyhour.com</a>.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>967</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>yes</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[46042b2d16750a47fbdd54a5437eda77]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM6286953961.mp3?updated=1653079990" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Mark Your Calendars - The Strategy Hour Podcast is Coming</title>
      <link>https://strategyhour.libsyn.com/mark-your-calendars-the-strategy-hour-podcast-is-coming</link>
      <description>Mark your Calendars - The Strategy Hour Podcast is launching on the 2nd January 2017.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 15 Dec 2016 01:00:08 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:author>Abagail Pumphrey - Business Strategist</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/e65b038c-ae9b-11ec-91b1-b3c2877d09d8/image/Mark_Your_Calendars_-_The_Strategy_Hour_Podcast_is_Coming.jpg?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Mark your Calendars - The Strategy Hour Podcast is launching on the 2nd January 2017.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Mark your Calendars - The Strategy Hour Podcast is launching on the 2nd January 2017.
Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Mark your Calendars - The Strategy Hour Podcast is launching on the 2nd January 2017.</p><p> </p><p>Learn more about your ad choices. Visit <a href="https://megaphone.fm/adchoices">megaphone.fm/adchoices</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>371</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[bdb410b826e4b032bf4b148fcd51276d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/TNM9444958297.mp3?updated=1648475562" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
  </channel>
</rss>
